48
8/9/2019 OME23710B_1_LS4100 http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ome23710b1ls4100 1/48 5'' ECHO SOUNDER LS-4100 Back

OME23710B_1_LS4100

  • Upload
    ender

  • View
    216

  • Download
    0

Embed Size (px)

Citation preview

Page 1: OME23710B_1_LS4100

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 148

5 ECHO SOUNDER

LS-4100

Back

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 248

TABLE OF CONTENTS

FOREWORD iii

SYSTEM OVERVIEW iv

1 OPERATION 1 11 Control Description 1 12 Turning the Power OnOff 1 13 Adjusting Display Contrast

Brilliance2 14 Choosing a Display Frequency 2

15 Menu Operating Procedure 5 16 Automatic Operation5 17 Manual Operation 6 18 Measuring Depth 8 19 Choosing Picture Advanced

Speed 8110 Suppressing Interference 9 111 Suppressing Low Level Noise 9112 Erasing Weak Echoes 10 113 A-scope Display 10 114 Alarms 11 115 Waypoints12 116 Setting Up Nav Data Displays 15117 Other Menu Items 16

2 SYSTEM amp INSTALLATIONMENUS1821 System Menu 18

3 MAINTENANCETROUBLESHOOTING 21

31 Maintenance21 32 Cleaning the Display Unit 21 33 Transducer Maintenance 21 34 Replacing the Fuse 21

35 Battery Voltage Alert 21 36 Troubleshooting22 37 Diagnostics22 38 Test Pattern 23 39 Memory Clear23

4 INSTALLATION 24 41 Display Unit 24 42 Thru-hull Mount Transducer 24 43 Transom Mount Transducer 26 44 Inside-hull Transducer 28 45 Optional Triducer29 46 Optional Water

TemperatureSpeed Sensor34 47 Wiring 34 48 IEC 61162-1 Data Sentences 35 49 Installation Menu 36

SPECIFICATIONS SP-1

OUTLINE DRAWING

INTERCONNECTION DIAGRAM

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 348

i

SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS

Safety Instructions for the Operator

W RNING

Do not open the equipment

There are no uer-serviceable partsinside

Do not disassemble or modify theequipment

Fire electrical shock or serious injurycan result

Immediately turn off the power at theswitchboard if the equipment isemitting smoke or fire

Continued use of the equipment cancause fire or electrical shock Contact aFURUNO agent for service

Do not maneuver the vessel basedon the depth indication alone

Grounding may result

Use the proper fuseFuse rating is shown on the equipmentUse of a wrong fuse can result indamage to the equipment

Do no turn on the equipment with thetransducer out of water

The transducer may be damaged

The picture is not refreshed whenpicture advancement is stopped

Maneuvering the vessel in this conditionmay result in a dangerous situation

Use the proper gain setting

Incorrect gain may produce wrong depth

indication possibly resulting in adangerous situation See Adjusting thegain on page 7 for details

UTION

WARNINGTo avoid electrical shock do notremove cover No user-serviceableparts inside

NameWarning LabelType 02-146-1022Code No 100-306-050

The high quality LCD shows 9999of its pixels The remaining 01 maydrop out or brighten due to the pro-perty of the LCD however this is nota sign of malfunction

A warning label is attached to theequipment Do not remove the labelIf the label is missing or damagedcontact a FURUNO agent or dealer

NOTI E

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 448

ii

Safety Instructions for the Installer

W R NINGTurn off the power at the switchboardbefore beginning the installation

Fire or electrical shock can result if thepower is left on

Be sure no water leaks in at the trans-ducer or sensor mounting location

Water leakage can sink the vessel Alsoconfirm that the transducer and sensorwill not loosen by ships vibration Theinstaller of the equipment is solelyresponsible for the proper installation ofthe equipment FURUNO will assume noresponsibility for any damage associatedwith improper installation

Use the specified power cable

Use of other power cable may result infire

UTIONDo not install the equipment whereair bubbles and noise are present

Performance will be affected

The following are guidelines forhandling of the transducer cable

- Do not locate near oils and fuels- Locate it in a safe place- Do no paint the cable

The sheath of the cable is made ofchloroprene rubber (or polychloridevinyl) For this reason do not paintthe cable

Observe the following compass safedistances to prevent interference to amagnetic compass

Displayunit

Standard Steeringcompass compass

04 m 03 m

Do not turn on the equipment with thetransducer out of water

The transducer may be damaged

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 548

iii

FOREWORD

A Word to LS-4100OwnersCongratulations on your choice of theFURUNO LS-4100 5rdquo Echo SounderWe are confident you will see why theFURUNO name has becomesynonymous with quality and reliability

For over 50 years FURUNO ElectricCompany has enjoyed an enviable

reputation for innovative anddependable marine electronicsequipment This dedication toexcellence is furthered by our extensiveglobal network of agents and dealers

This equipment is designed andconstructed to meet the rigorousdemands of the marine environmentHowever no machine can perform its

intended function unless operated andmaintained properly Please carefullyread and follow the recommendedprocedures for operation andmaintenance

We would appreciate hearing from youthe end-user about whether we areachieving our purposes

Thank you for considering andpurchasing FURUNO equipment

FeaturesThe FURUNO LS-4100 is a dualfrequency (50 kHz and 200 kHz)monochrome LCD echo sounderComprised of a display unit and atransducer the LS-4100 displaysunderwater conditions on a bright 5-inchmonochrome LCD

The main features of the LS-4100 are

bull Bright 5-inch monochrome LCD givesexcellent readability even in broaddaylight

bull Automatic function permitsunattended adjustment of range andgain The range scale and gainautomatically change to display thebottom in the darkest gray tone on thelower half of the screen

bull User-programmable nav data displaysprovide analog and digital nav data

bull Alarms Bottom Fish (bottom-lockand normal) Speed WaterTemperature and Arrival (Speed andarrival alarms require appropriatesensor water temperature alarmrequires water temperature data)

bull White line feature helps discriminate

fish lying near the bottombull Destination waypoint feature provides

range bearing and time-to-go todestination waypoint (up to 12waypoints)

bull Waterproof construction permitsinstallation on open bridge

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 648

iv

SYSTEM OVERVIEW

System configuration

Power supply12 VDC

DISPLAY UNITLS-4100

GPS Navigatoror

Wind Indicator

Transducer

Water temperature Speed sensor

ST-02MSBST-02PSB

520-5PSD520-5MSD520-5PWD 525-5PWD525ST-MSD525ST-PWD

Standard Option User supply

Note Contact yourdealer for connection ofother equipment

POWERBRILL

MARK

GAIN

RANGE

ESCMENUMODE

LS-4100

ECHO SOUNDER

Equipment lists

Standard supply

Name Type Code No Qty RemarksDisplay Unit LS-4100 mdash 1

520-5PSD 000-015-204 Thru-hull mount520-5MSD 000-015-212 Thru-hull mount520-5PWD 000-015-126

Transducer

525-5PWD 000-146-966Transom mount

525ST-MSD 000-015-263 Thru-hull mountTriducer (transducerplus spdtemp sensor) 525ST-PWD 000-015-261

1

Transom mount

Installation Materials(CP02-07401)

bull Tapping screw (4 pcs 5 x 20 SUS304 000-802-081)bull Washer head screw B (4 pcs M4 x 20 SUS304 000-804-742)bull Cable assy (1 pc MJ-A7SPF0005-020 000-139-384 for power and data)

Spare Parts(SP02-04801) Fuse (2 pc FGMB 1A 125V Code No 000-114-805)

Template C22-00301 (000-146-981 for flush mount)C22-00302 (000-146-982 for bulkhead)

Optional equipment

Name Type Code No Qty RemarksConversion Cable 02S4147 000-141-082 1 For spdtemp sensor

ST-02MSB 000-137-986Water Temperature ampSpeed Sensor ST-02PSB 000-137-987

Selectone Thru-hull type

Inner Hull Kit S 22S0191 000-802-598 1

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 748

1

1 OPERATION

11 Control Description

Cursor PadSelects menu itemsshifts VRM

Openscloses menuescapes from current

operation

Selects display mode

Adjusts gain

Selects basic display range

Long press Turns power onoffMomentary press Adjusts display contrast and brilliance

Outputs LL positionto external equipmentregisters selected positionas waypoint

POWER

BRILL

MARK

GAIN

RANGE

ESCMENU

MODE

LS-4100

ECHO SOUNDER

Display unit

How to remove the hard cover

Place your thumbs at the center of thecover and then lift the cover whilepressing it with your thumbs

12 Power OnOffPress the [POWERBRILL] key more

than one second to turn on the powerThe unit beeps the startup screenappears and then the equipmentchecks the ROM and RAM for properoperation and displays program number(If ldquoNGrdquo (No Good) appears try to pressany key except the [POWERBRILL] keyto start operation However theequipment may not work properlyContact your dealer) You may

press any key after the completion ofthe equipment check to start operationsooner

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 848

2

Program version no

ROM OK RAM OK Program No 0252318-01

5 ECHO SOUNDER

FURUNO ELECTRIC CO LTD

Start-up screen

To turn off the power press and holddown the [POWERBRILL] key until thescreen goes blank The time remaining

until power is turned off is counted downon the screen

Note The example screens shown inthis manual may not match the screensyou see on your display The screenyou see depends on your systemconfiguration and equipment settings

13 Adjusting DisplayContrast Brilliance

1 Press the [POWERBRILL] keymomentarily to show thebrilliancecontrast adjustmentwindow

CONTST 4 Min Max

BRILLMin Max

4

Brilliancecontrast adjustment window

2 For contrast press the[POWERBRILL] key to adjustcontrast cyclically (You may also use or on the Cursor Pad to adjustcontrast) (Adjustable range 0 to 9)

3 To adjust brilliance use or $ (Adjustable range 0 to 4)

4 Press the [MENUESC] key to closethe brilliancecontrast adjustmentwindow

Note 1 When the power is reappliedafter turning off the equipment withminimum brilliance minimum brilliancewill be set after the equipment goesthrough its initial start up (The start upscreen appears with the maximumbrilliance) Adjust the brilliance asnecessary

Note 2 Setting windows other thanthose on menus are erased if there isno operation within about sevenseconds

14 Choosing a DisplayFrequency

Seven displays are available singlefrequency (50 or 200 kHz) dualfrequency marker-zoom bottom-zoombottom-lock and nav data (twodisplays)

1 Press the [MODE] key to show themode selection window

MODE

SINGLE FREQDUAL FREQMARKER ZOOMBOTTOM ZOOMBOTTOM LOCKNAV DATA-1NAV DATA-250kHz 200kHz

Mode selection window

2 Press the [MODE] key again withinseven seconds to choose a modeYou may also choose a mode with or $

3 For modes other than DUAL FREQchoose frequency Press for 50kHz or for 200 kHz

4 Press the [MENUESC] key to closethe window

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 948

3

Single frequency display

50 kHz

The sounder uses ultrasonic signals todetect bottom conditions The lower thefrequency of the signal the wider thedetection area Therefore the 50 kHzfrequency is useful for general detectionand judging bottom condition

200 kHz

The higher the frequency of theultrasonic signal the better theresolution For this reason the 200 kHzfrequency is ideal for detailed

observation of fish schools

50 kHz

200 kHz

Frequency and coverage area

466

FishSchool

Bottom

0

20

40

50k 1100

Level Bar

Depth

Frequency

Picture Advance Speed

Range Scale

Mode(AUTO or MANUAL)

407 degF162kt Nav Display

MinuteMarker(Shows time

Each baris 30 sec) TransmissionLine

60

Typical 50 kHz display

Dual frequency display

The 50 kHz picture appears on the leftthe 200 kHz picture on the right Thisdisplay is useful for comparing the samepicture with two different transmitting

frequencies

50 kHz 200 kHzpicture picture

496

0050200 11

0

20

40

60

80

20

40

60

80 Dual frequency display

Marker-zoom display

This mode expands chosen area of thenormal picture to full vertical size of thescreen on the left-half window You mayspecify the portion to expand byoperating the VRM (Variable RangeMarker) which you can shift with or$ The area between the VRM andzoom range marker is expanded

Zoomedfishschool

Single frequency display

Variable rangemarker

This sectionis zoomed

Zoom marker

Marker-zoom display

170

250

0

Fishschool

0

40

10

20

30

0050k 11

21

20

19

18

17

22

Marker-zoom display

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 1048

4

Bottom-zoom display

This mode expands bottom and bottomfish in the range width set with ZOOMRANGE of the SYSTEM menu Thismode is useful for determining bottom

contour When the bottom depthincreases the display shift to keep thebottom echo at the lower part of thescreen

0

Bottom-zoom display

298

Bottom

0

40

10

20

30

32

31

30

29

28

27

Switched withdepth

Singlefrequencydisplay

Zoommarker

0050k 11

Bottom-zoom display

Bottom-lock display

The bottom-lock display provides anormal picture on the right half of thescreen and a 15 feet (5 meter) widelayer in contact with the bottom isexpanded onto the left half of the screenThis mode is useful for detecting bottomfish = Operator selectable

Bottom-lock display

Zoommarker

Zoomedfish

This sectionis zoomed

217

0

Singlefrequencydisplay

Fishschool

0

40

Bottom displayed flat

10

20

30

0

1

2

3

4

550k 11

Bottom-lock display

Nav data displays

The nav data displays appear on the leftof the screen Data other than depthrequires appropriate sensor

You can display between two and fouritems in a nav data display and choosethe item and order to display them Seeparagraph 116 to choose the items todisplay ldquoNAV DATA-1rdquo and ldquoNAVDATA-2rdquo in paragraph 21 to choose thenumber of items to display

Depth

694 m

Trip meter

100 nm

Odometer

56 nm

NAV DATA-1 display

NAV DATA-2 display

Temperature

655 deg F

172

1 05 0 05 1

025 nm

XTE

Speed

kt

20

50

40

60

30

10

0

Sample NAV DATA displays(Default setting)

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 1148

5

15 Menu OperatingProcedure

The LS-4100 has three menus MainSystem and Installation Below is the

basic menu operating procedure1 Press the [MENUESC] key to openthe main menu Page 1 or Page 2 ofthe main menu appears dependingon the page last used

[MENU] Exit

(12)

Note SHIFT and CLUTTER arenot available in the auto mode

AUTO MODE Off SHIFT 0ftPIC ADVANCE 11NOISE LIMIT Off CLUTTER Off SIGNAL LEVEL Off

A-SCOPE Off HUE DayWHITE LINE Off DEEP GAIN Low

Pageno

Main menu page 1

2 Use or $ to select an item Toview page 2 of the main menu press$ until showing the display below

[MENU] Exit

(22)

GOTO WPT Off WAYPOINT LIST

TRIP RESET

GAIN ADJ 200 +0GAIN ADJ 50 +0DRAFT 00ft

ALARM MENUSYSTEM MENU

Main menu page 2

3 Press to show selected itemrsquosoptions window The example shownat the top of the right column is theoptions window for AUTO MODE

Off CruisingFishing

Auto mode options window

4 Use or $ to choose option or setnumeric value

5 Press the [MENUESC] key to closethe menu or press to continuemenu operation

16 Automatic OperationHow automatic operation works

The automatic function automatically

chooses the proper gain range scaleand clutter It works as followsbull The range changes automatically to

display the bottom echo on thescreen

bull The gain is automatically adjusted todisplay the bottom echo in the darkesttone

bull Clutter (on the menu) whichsuppresses low-level noise isautomatically adjusted

Choosing automatic operation

The automatic mode provides twochoices of modes cruising and fishing1 Press the [MENUESC] key to open

the main menu2 Press to choose AUTO MODE

from page 1 of the menu3 Press to open the mode options

window4 Choose Cruising or Fishing as

appropriate

ldquoCruisingrdquo is for tracking the bottomldquoFishingrdquo is for searching fish schoolsSince ldquoCruisingrdquo uses a higher clutterrejection setting than fishing it is notrecommended for fish detection -weak fish echoes may not bedisplayed ldquoFishingrdquo clearly displaysweaker echoes

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 1248

6

5 Press the [MENUESC] key to closethe menu

The auto mode in use is shown as(Auto-Fishing) or

(Auto-Cruising) at the top left corner onthe screen

Note When in the auto mode SHIFTand CLUTTER cannot be adjustedmanually

Range offset

To display the bottom tail in detail in theautomatic mode offset the range as

below1 Press the [+] or [-] key of the

[RANGE] key

+0 ft

AUTO RANGE OFFSET

Auto range offset window

2 Press the [+] or [-] key of the[RANGE] key again to choose offsetdesired (range -100 to +300 ft)Note that if the basic range ischanged the offset is returned to ldquo0rdquo

3 Press the [MENUESC] key to finish

Gain offset

Gain offset lets you override automaticgain adjustment1 Press the [GAIN] key

Min Max 0

AUTO GAIN OFFSET

Auto gain offset window

2 Press or key to offset gain(setting range ndash5 to +5) The gainselected is shown at the top of thescreen asG (Gain) + (or -) XX (offset value)

3 Press the [MENUESC] key to finish

17 Manual OperationChoosing the manual mode

1 Press the [MENUESC] key to openthe main menu

2 Press to choose AUTO MODEfrom page 1 of the menu3 Press to show the window4 Choose Off with 5 Press the [MENUESC] key to close

the menu appears at the topleft corner on the screen

Choosing range

The basic range and range shiftingfunctions used together give you themeans to choose the depth you can seeon the screen The basic range can bethought of as providing a ldquowindowrdquo intothe water column and range shifting asmoving the ldquowindowrdquo to the desireddepth

Choosing basic range

The basic range may be chosen withthe [RANGE] key from the eight rangesshown in the table shown below (ldquoPBrdquoin the table means PassiBraza) Thesetting range can be arranged throughthe SYSTEM menu

Default ranges

Basic RangeUnit1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

meters 5 10 20 40 80 150 200 300

feet 15 30 60 120 200 400 600 1000

fathoms 3 5 10 20 40 80 100 150

hiro 4 8 15 30 50 100 150 200

PB 3 5 10 30 50 100 150 200

Japanese unit of depth measurement1 Press the [+] or [-] key of the

[RANGE] key and the display shouldnow look something like the one onat the top of the next page

2 Press the [+] or [-] key of the[RANGE] key again to choose abasic range

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 1348

7

1000ft 600ft 400ft 200ft 120ft 60ft 30ft 15ft

Basic ranges (default)3 Press the [MENUESC] key to close

the window

Shifting the range

The basic range may be shifted up ordown in the manual mode as follows

Display

Window can beshifted up anddown to selectthe depth

Range and display shift concept

1 Press the [MENUESC] key to openthe main menu

2 Choose SHIFT from page 1 of themenu

3 Press to open the shift optionswindow

0ft

Shift window

4 Use or $ to choose amount ofshift desired

5 Press the [MENUESC] key to closethe window

Note The picture may not be displayedif the amount of shift is greater thanactual depth

Adjusting the gain

The [GAIN] key adjusts the sensitivity ofthe receiver Generally use a highergain setting for greater depths and alower setting for shallower waters

Use the proper gain setting

Incorrect gain may produce wrong depthindication possibly resulting in a dangeroussituation

UTION

Gain too high Gain proper Gain too low Examples of proper and improper gain

1 Press the [GAIN] key and the displayshown below appears

Min Max

50k 3

200k 2

GAIN

Gain adjustment window

2 When using the dual frequencydisplay press or $ to choosefrequency

3 Press the [GAIN] key to set (Youmay also use or ) Adjust so thata slight amount of noise remains onthe screen

4 Press the [MENUESC] key to closethe gain adjustment window

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 1448

8

18 Measuring DepthThe VRM (Variable Range Marker)functions to measure the depth to fishschools etc1 Press or $ to place the VRM

on the object which you wish tomeasure range

2 Read the VRM depth just abovethe VRM

0

20

40

60

80496

398

VRM

VRM depth

50k 11

How to measure depth with the VRM

19 Choosing PictureAdvance Speed

The picture advance speed determineshow quickly the vertical scan lines runacross the screen When choosing apicture advance speed keep in mindthat a fast advance speed will expandthe size of the fish school horizontallyon the screen and a slow advancespeed will contract it Note that thepicture is not refreshed when pictureadvancement is stopped Thereforeuse caution when steering the vesselunder this condition

Fast Slow Picture and picture advancement speed

1 Press the [MENUESC] key to openthe main menu

2 Choose PIC ADVANCE from page 1of the menu

3 Press to show the optionswindow

Stop116 18 14 12 11 21 41

(

)

Fast

Slow

Picture advance options window

4 Use or $ to choose pictureadvance speed desired Thefractions in the options windowdenote the number of scan linesproduced per transmission Forexample 18 means one scan line isproduced every 8 transmissionsldquoStoprdquo freezes the display and it isconvenient for taking a photo

The picture is not refreshed whenpicture advancement is stopped

Maneuvering the vessel in this conditionmay result in a dangerous situation

UTION

5 Press the [MENUESC] key to closethe menu

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 1548

9

110 SuppressingInterference

Interference from other acousticequipment operating nearby or other

electronic equipment on your boat mayshow itself on the display as shown inthe figure belowTo suppress interference do thefollowing1 Press the [MENUESC] key to open

the main menu2 Use or $ to choose NOISE LIMIT

from page 1 of the menu3 Press to show the options

window4 Use or $ to choose the degree ofsuppression desired Off LowMedium or High (highest)

5 Press the [MENUESC] key to closethe menu

Interference fromother sounder

Electrical interference

Forms of interference

Turn the noise limiter off when nointerference exists otherwise weakechoes may be missed

111 Suppressing LowLevel Noise

Low intensity ldquospecklesrdquo may appearover most of screen This is mainly due

to sediment in the water or noise Thesecan be suppressed by adjustingCLUTTER on the menu When theautomatic mode is on clutter isautomatically rejected To suppress lowlevel noise in manual sounder operationdo the following1 Press the [MENUESC] key to open

the main menu2 Use or $ to choose CLUTTER

from page 1 of the menu3 Press to show the optionswindow

4 Use or $ to choose the degree ofsuppression desired 1 2 3 4 5 or6 The higher the number the greaterthe suppression

5 Press the [MENUESC] key to closethe menu

To turn off low-level noisesuppression choose Off at step 4 andthen press the [MENUESC] key

Clutter appearance

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 1648

10

112 Erasing WeakEchoes

Sediment in the water or reflectionsfrom plankton may be painted on the

display in low intensity tones

Weakechoes

Appearance of weak echoes

These weak echoes may be erased asfollows1 Press the [MENUESC] key to open

the main menu2 Use or $ to choose SIGNAL

LEVEL from page 1 of the menu3 Press to show the options

window4 Use or $ to choose the degree of

suppression desired Off Low orHigh (highest)

5 Press the [MENUESC] key to closethe menu

To turn off the signal level function choose Off at step 4 and then pressthe [MENUESC] key

113 A-scope DisplayThis display shows echoes at eachtransmission with amplitudes and toneproportional to their intensities on theright 14 of the screen It is useful forestimating the kind of fish school andbottom composition

Note In the dual frequency display the A-scope display is only available withthe high frequency display

323

10

20

30

40

0

A-scope display

Single frequency display

Strong

reflection(bottom)

Weakreflection(fish or noise)

50k 11

Strongreflection(fish)

A-scope display

1 Press the [MENUESC] key to openthe main menu

2 Press or $ to choose A-SCOPEfrom page 1 of the menu

3 Press to show the optionswindow

4 Press

or$

to choose the A-scope presentation type desiredNormal Display shows echoes ateach transmission with amplitudesand tone proportional to theirintensitiesPeak Peak-hold amplitude picture

5 Press the [MENUESC] key to closethe menu

To turn off the A-scope displaychoose Off at step 4 and then press the[MENUESC] key

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 1748

11

114 AlarmsAlarm description

The LS-4100 has six conditions whichgenerate both audio and visual alarms

bottom alarm normal fish alarm bottomlock fish alarm water temperature alarmarrival alarm and speed alarm (Thewater temperature arrival and speedalarms require appropriate sensors)

Bottom alarm The bottom alarm alertsyou when the bottom is within the alarmrange set To activate the bottom alarmthe depth must be displayed

Fish (normal) alarm The fish (normal)alarm tells you when fish are within thepreset alarm range

Fish (bottom lock) alarm The fish(bottom lock) alarm available with thebottom-lock mode sounds when fishare within a certain distance from thebottom Note that the bottom zoom

display must be turned on to use thisalarm

Water temperature alarm The watertemperature alarm alerts when thewater temperature is within (Insidealarm) the alarm range set orunderover (outside alarm) the rangeset

Speed alarm The speed alarm alertsyou when the speed is within (Insidealarm) or underover (Outside alarm)the preset speed

Arrival alarm The arrival alarm alertswhen you are near a waypoint by thedistance set

Activating an alarm

1 Press the [MENUESC] key2 Press or $ to choose ALARM

MENU from page 2 on the menu3 Press the to show the ALARM

menu

ALARM

(12)

[MENU] Exit

ALARM

(22)

[MENU] Exit

BOTTOM On FROM 5ft

RANGE 10ftFISH(Normal) On

FROM 5ft RANGE 10ftFISH(BL) On

FROM 8ft RANGE 10ftFISH LEVEL Medium

TEMPERATURE Inside FROM 724 deg F RANGE 10 deg F

SPEED Off FROM 00kt

RANGE 10kt

ARRIVAL ALRM Off RANGE 0 01 m

Pageno

Gray characters mean alarm is inactive Alarm menu

4 Use or $ to choose an alarm asappropriate

5 Press to show the options menu

Off On

Off InsideOutside

Temp Speed Alarm Types

Fish ArrivalBottom AlarmOnOff

Alarm options6 Use or $ to choose alarm type

Off Alarm off On Alarm onInside Alarm generated whenspeed (or water temperature) iswithin the range setOutside Alarm generated whenspeed (or water temperature) isoutside the range set

7 Press to close the windowFor ARRIVAL ALARM setting skip tostep 12

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 1848

12

8 Press $ to choose FROM9 Press to show the options menu

0ft

Depth

632 deg F

Temperature

10 kt

Speed Depth temperature speed setting

window10 Use or $ to set starting depth

temperature or speed as appropriateFor FISH (BL) the starting depth isthe range from the bottom

11 Press to close the window12 Press $ to choose RANGE13 Press to show the options menu14 Use or $ to set alarm range15 For the bottom alarm temperature

alarm speed alarm or arrivalalarm press the [MENUESC] key tofinish For a fish alarm press toclose the window and then go tostep 16

16 Press $ to choose FISH LEVEL17 Press to show the options menu

Weak

MediumStrong Fish level options

18 Use or $ to choose the echostrength level which will trigger a fishalarm

Weak Weak echoes (weakest toneon level bar)Medium Medium strength echoes

(middle tone on level bar)Strong Strong echoes (darkest toneon level bar)

19 Press the [MENUESC] key twice toclose the menu

Alarm range marker Bottom alarm Fish alarm (normal) Right Fish alarm (bottomlock) Left

Alarm icon

Alarm rangeStartingpoint

Bottom alarm Fish alarm (normal) Fish alarm (BL)

Temperature alarm (deg

C ordeg

F shown) Speed alarm Arrival alarm

Alarm icon (Appropriate icon appears to showwhich alarm has been violated)

How the alarm works

Note To disable an alarm choose Offat step 5 in the above procedure

Silencing the buzzer

The buzzer sounds and the appropriatealarm icon appears and flashes whenan alarm is violated You can silence thebuzzer by pressing any key Howeverthe buzzer will sound whenever thealarm setting is violated

Note The audio and visual alarms arereleased against the last-violated alarmwhen multiple alarms are active

115 WaypointsWaypoints may be used tobull Record the position of an important

echo as waypoint 12 points may beregistered

bull Output a waypoint position to a plotterto mark position on its screen

bull Find range bearing and time-to-go toa location (waypoint)

Note Requires latitude and longitudeposition from a navigator

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 1948

13

Registering a waypoint on thescreen

1 Press the [MARK] key The cursorappears along with waypoint entryinstructions To enter a waypoint tothe current own shiprsquos position go tostep 3Note If there is no position data themessage ldquoNo position datardquo appearsCheck the navigator

50k

496

1100

20

40

60

80

0

Cursor

WAYPOINT ENTRY

( Move) Cursor [MARK] Enter [MENU] Cancel

50 kHz display

2 Press the cursor pad to set thecursor where desired Pictureadvancement is stopped until step 3is completed and the instructionwindow is integrated into the navdisplay

3 Press the [MARK] key again WhenTLL or FURUNO-TLL is selected atTLL OUTPUT on the System menuthe latitude and longitude position atthe cursor is output to the navigator

A vertical line marks location Furtherthe display shows the waypointname (next sequential number) andposition of the location selected atstep 2

WAYPOINTName FREQLat 34 deg 22796NLon 136 deg 07264E

05

[MENU] Exit

rase

Waypoint data display

Note If you attempt to enter 13thwaypoint the message ldquoMemoryfullrdquo appears In this case erase anunwanted waypoint to enable entry

4 To save the waypoint under thename shown go to step 8 or go tostep 5 to change its name

5 Press to open the waypoint nameentry window

WAYPOINTName FREQLat 34 deg 22796NLon 136 deg 07264E

05

[MENU] Exit

01------ ENT

rase

Waypoint window name entry6 Use or to set character $ or

to shift cursor The name mayconsist of 10 alphanumericcharactersNote Character order is 0 1hellip9 - A BhellipZ _ 0hellip

7 Press to choose ENT 8 Press the [MENUESC] key to

register the waypoint

Registering waypoint by LL

1 Press the [MENUESC] key to openthe main menu

2 Use or to choose WAYPOINTLIST from page 2 of the menu

3 Press

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 2048

14

WAYPOINT LIST

01 0102 0303------------------------------------------------------

[MENU] Exit

Waypoint list4 Press or to choose an empty

waypoint and press Press again

NEW WAYPOINTName FREQLat 34 deg 22796NLon 136 deg 07264E

05

[MENU] Exit

04------ ENT

rase

New waypoint window name entry

5 Use or to set character $ or to shift cursor

6 Press to select ENT 7 Enter latitude and longitude similar

to how you entered waypoint name8 Press the [MENUESC] key to

register the waypoint

Editing waypoints Press the [MENUESC] key to open

the main menu

2 Use or to choose WAYPOINTLIST from page 2 of the menu

3 Press to open the waypoints list4 Use or to choose a waypoint

and press 5 Use or to choose the item to

edit (name latitude or longitude)6 Press to open the data entry

window7 Use or to set character $ or

to choose location8 Press to choose ENT 9 Press the [MENUESC] key

Erasing waypoints Press the [MENUESC] key2 Use or to choose WAYPOINT

LIST from page 2 of the menu3 Press to open the waypoints list

4 Use or to choose the waypointto erase and then press Note You cannot erase a waypointwhich is selected as ldquoGOTO WPTrdquo

5 Press to choose ldquoEraserdquo6 Press to open the options window7 Press to select YES to erase the

waypoint The waypoint list appearswith the erased waypoint blank

8 Press the [MENUESC] key twice toclose the menu

Setting destination waypoint

Set a destination waypoint to find rangebearing and time-to-go to that point Youcan see range and bearing to awaypoint Time-to-go is shown on theTime to Go digital display

Press the [MENUESC] key to openthe main menu

2 Use or to choose GOTO WPTfrom page 2 of the menu

3 Press to open the waypoints list

Off01020304----------------------------------------------------------------

Waypoint list

4 Use or to choose a waypoint5 Press the [MENUESC] key to close

the menu

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 2148

15

116 Setting Up Nav DataDisplays

The user may arrange the nav datadisplays as desired

1 Use the [MODE] key to show theNAV DATA-1 or 2 display whicheveryou want to set up

2 Press the [MENUESC] key to closethe mode selection window

3 Press the cursor pad to display theNAV DATA SETUP window

NAV DATA SETUP

Window Selection Data Selection

[MENU] Exit

NAV DATA SETUP window

4 Use or to choose a datadisplay window desired Adashed-line rectangle circumscribesyour selection

5 Use

or$

to choose item todisplay See the below for adescription of the displays

(9)

(1)

(2)

(3)

(4)(5)

(6)(7)(8)

Two-data

display

Three-data

display

Four-data

displayItems displayable in (1) - (3) depth positioncourse range and bearing trip distanceodometer water temperature headingair pressure time-to-go to destination waypointXTE speed wind speed and directiondestination waypoint data compassItems displayable in (4) - (9) depth positionspeed course range and bearing trip distanceodometer water temperature headingair pressure time-to-go to destination waypointXTE wind speed wind direction

= Graphic display

Nav data window and item displayable6 Press the [MENUESC] key to finish

Note You can choose the number ofitems to show in a nav data display withNAV DATA-1 and NAV DATA-2 on theSystem menu

GRAPHIC DISPLAYS

1 05 0 05 1

Wpt 03Rng 019nm Brg 321 deg XTE 000nm Cse 333 deg

DESTINATION WAYPOINT GRAPHIC

XTEscale

BearingCourseDestinationwaypointdirection

DestinationwaypointdataNameRangeXTE

Wind APP

WIND GRAPHIC

60

120

90

030

150180

120

150

90

60

30

120 deg

Speed 103 ms

COMPASS GRAPHIC

SPEED GRAPHIC

172

Speed

20

50

40

60

30

10

01 05 0 05 1

025 nm

XTE

XTE GRAPHIC

kt

Bearing todestinationwaypoint

Course

Brg30 deg

Cse90 deg

N

E

XTE scale

Speed-ometer

Nav data display-1

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 2248

16

DIGITAL DISPLAYS

Course

123 deg

COURSE

Depth

328 ft

DEPTH

Heading TRUEMAG

318 deg

HEADING

Odometer

56 nm

ODOMETER

Position GPS 3D

30 deg 00065N130 deg 00574E

POSITION

Temperature

698 degF

WATER TEMPERATURE

Trip meter

121 nm

TRIP DISTANCE

Time to Go

00 H30 M

TIME-TO-GO

1018 hpa

AIR PRESSURE

Air Pressure

Speed

193 kt

SPEED

Rng

121 nm

RANGE amp BEARING

Brg

140 deg

Wind Speed APP

80 ms

WIND SPEED

Wind Dir APP

138 deg

WIND DIRECTION

APP or TRUE depending on menu setting TRUE or MAG depending

on menu settingamp To destination waypoint

Note 1 Nav data is updated with somedelay

Note 2 When data is lost 120 sec thedisplay shows - - at the locationwhere data is lost

= GPS receiving status (Displays whenconnecting with GP-310B320B and InOutis selected at the Installation menu)NO FIX Position cannot be foundGPS 2D 2D (dimension) GPS position fixGPS 3D 3D GPS fixGPS W2D 2D WAAS position fixGPS W3D 3D WAAS position fix

NAV data display-2

117 Other Menu ItemsThis section describes the menu itemsnot previously mentioned

Page 1

HUE (Picture Color)

Two picture color arrangements areavailable Day and Night Day showsechoes on a white background Nightshows them on a black background

1 Press the [MENUESC] key todisplay the menu

2 Use or $ to choose HUE frompage 1 of the menu

3 Press to show the optionswindow

4 Use or $ to choose Day or Nightas appropriate

5 Press the [MENUESC] key to closethe menu

WHITE LINE

The white line feature displays theleading edge of the bottom echo in

white This is useful for discriminatingbottom fish near the bottom

1 Press the [MENUESC] key todisplay the main menu

2 Use or $ to choose WHITE LINEfrom page 1 of the menu

3 Press to show the optionswindow

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 2348

17

4 Use or to choose Off Tone orMesh as appropriate ldquoMeshrdquo paintsthe white line in darker tone thanldquoTonerdquo

5 Press the [MENUESC] key to closethe menu

526White Line OFF White Line ON (Mesh)

Fish schoolclearly shown

White line

0

20

40

60

80

050k 11

526

0

20

40

60

80

00 050k 11

How white line works

DEEP GAIN

ldquoDeep Gainrdquo compensates forpropagation attenuation of the ultrasonicwaves It does this by equalizing echopresentation so that fish schools of thesame size appear in the same density inboth shallow and deep waters Inaddition it reduces surface noise

Press the [MENUESC] key to openthe main menu

2 Use or to choose DEEP GAINfrom page of the menu

3 Press $ to show to the optionswindow

4 Choose Low Medium or High asappropriate High provides thegreatest degree of gain reductionagainst short range echoes

5 Press the [MENUESC] key to closethe menu

Page 2

TRIP RESET

This item resets trip distance to ldquo0rdquo

Press the [MENUESC] key to openthe main menu

2 Use or to choose TRIPRESET from page 2 of the menu

3 Press $ 4 Press to reset trip distance

Beeps are generated while the tripdistance is being reset

5 Press the [MENUESC] key to closethe menu

Note To reset the odometer to zeroclear the memory

GAIN ADJ 200 GAIN ADJ 50

If the gain is too high or too low or thegain for the low and high frequenciesappears unbalanced you cancompensate it as follows

Press the [MENUESC] key to openthe main menu

2 Use or to choose GAIN ADJ200 or GAIN ADJ 50 from page 2 ofthe menu

3 Press $ to show to the optionswindow

4 Use or to set the amount Thesetting range is ndash50 to +50

5 Press the [MENUESC] key to close

the menu

DRAFT

The default depth display shows thedistance from the transducer If youwould rather show the distance from thesea surface set your shiprsquos draft asfollows

Press the [MENUESC] key to openthe main menu

2 Use or to choose DRAFT frompage 2 of the menu

3 Press $ and then use or to setdraft The setting range is ndash 50 to+500 (meters feet)

4 Press the [MENUESC] key to closethe menu

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 2448

18

2 SYSTEM MENU

The System menu mainly consists ofitems which once set do not requirefrequent adjustment You may displaythis menu by choosing SYSTEM MENUat page 2 of the main menu andpressing

SYSTEM MENULANGUAGE English

DEPTH UNIT ftSPEED UNIT ktWIND UNIT msTEMP UNIT deg F

TEMP GRAPH OffNAV DATA-1 NAV DATA-2

WATER TYPE SaltKEY BEEP OnBATT VOLTAGE Off (13)

[MENU] Exit

SYSTEM MENU

(23)

NAV DISPLAY TempSpeedNMEA0183 Ver 20TLL OUTPUT OffBEARING TrueWIND SPDDIR ApparentTRIP SOURCE Own

TEMP SOURCE OwnSPEED SOURCE OwnTEMP CALIB +00 deg F ( 40)SPEED CALIB +0 ( 50)

Own speed Own temp 100 kt 162 deg F

[MENU] Exit

SYSTEM MENU

(33)

BASIC RANGE1 15 ft

RANGE2 30RANGE3 60RANGE4 120RANGE5 200RANGE6 400RANGE7 600RANGE8 1000 (7-1500)

ZOOM RANGE 15 ft (7-150)BL RANGE 15 ft (10-30)(Bottom Lock)

ZOOM MARKER On

[MENU] Exit

PAGE 3

PAGE 2

PAGE 1

Page no

System menus

21 System MenuPage 1

LANGUAGE The system language isavailable in English several Europeanlanguages and Japanese To changelanguage select language desired andpress the [MENUESC] key

DEPTH UNIT Choose unit of depthmeasurement from meters feet

fathoms passibraza and hiro(Japanese)

SPEED UNIT Choose unit of speedmeasurement from knots miles perhour and kilometers per hour Requiresspeed data

WIND UNIT Choose unit of wind speedmeasurement from ms kt kmh and

mph Requires wind speed data

TEMP UNIT Choose unit oftemperature measurement Celsius orFahrenheit Requires temperature data

TEMP GRAPH Turns the watertemperature display on or off Thetemperature scale range is 16deg (degF) inldquoNarrowrdquo 40deg (degF) in ldquoWiderdquo Requires

water temperature data

m526

0

20

40

60

80

00 050k 11

40

80

70

50

60

TemperatureScale

TemperatureGraph

638 deg F162kt

Water temperature display (wide degF)

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 2548

19

NAV DATA-1 -2 Choose the number ofnavigation data items to display on thenav data displays from two three orfour items Requires appropriate navdata

WATER TYPE Choose the water typewith which to use the LS-4100 fromSalt or Fresh

KEY BEEP Turn key beep on or off

BATT VOLTAGE Turn the batteryvoltage indication (appears at the topright corner on the screen) on or offWhen on it replaces the picture advancespeed indication

Page 2

NAV DISPLAY Choose the nav data todisplay in the nav data window at thetop left-hand corner You may choosefrom temperaturespeedlatitudelongitude range and bearingcourse over ground trip distance or

wind speed Requires appropriate navdata

407 deg F162kt

Nav window

NMEA0183 Choose NMEA version ofnavigator Ver 15 Ver 20 or Ver 30

TLL OUTPUT Enablesdisables outputof TLL (Target Latitude Longitude)position when the [MARK] key isoperated ldquoTLLrdquo outputs latitude andlongitude position ldquoFURUNO-TLLrdquoavailable with connection of navigatorthat can output FURUNO TLL outputslatitude and longitude watertemperature depth etc

BEARING Shiprsquos course and bearingto a waypoint may be displayed in trueor magnetic bearing Magnetic bearingis true bearing plus (or minus) earthrsquosmagnetic deviation Requires bearingdata

WIND SPDDIR Choose the windspeed and direction reference from trueand apparent Requires wind sensorApparen t The direction (in relation toshiprsquos bow) and speed of the wind as itappears to those on board relative tothe speed and direction of the boatcombination of the true wind and thewind caused by the boats movementTrue The speed and direction (inrelation to shiprsquos bow) of the wind felt ormeasured when stationary

TRIP SOURCE Choose speed sourcefor the trip distance indication Own(transducer with speed sensor orseparate speed sensor) or NMEA

TEMP SOURCE Choose source ofwater temperature input Off Own(transducer with water temperaturesensor or separate temperature sensor)or NMEA

SPEED SOURCE Choose source ofspeed input Off Own (transducer withspeed sensor or separate speedsensor) or NMEA Requires speed

data

TEMP CALIB If the water temperaturesensor-generated water temperatureindication is wrong you can correct ithere when ldquoOwnrdquo is selected astemperature source For example if thewater temperature indication is 2deghigher than actual water temperatureenter -2 The setting range is -40degF to

+40degF

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 2648

20

SPEED CALIB If the speedsensor-generated speed indication iswrong you can correct it here whenldquoOwnrdquo is selected as speed source Forexample if the speed indication is 10lower than actual speed enter +10 Thesetting range is ndash50 to +50

Page 3

BASIC RANGE 1 - BASIC RANGE 8 Set range of each of the eight basicranges (Selectable range 7 to 1500 ft)Note 1 All default basic ranges arerestored whenever the depth unit ischanged Therefore change the depth

unit before changing the basic rangesNote 2 A range may not be lower thanthe range preceding it For example ifbasic range 3 is 60 feet basic range 4must be greater than 60 feet

ZOOM RANGE Choose the range tozoom in the marker-zoom andbottom-zoom modes You may choose arange between 7 and 150 feet (2 and 50

meters)

BL RANGE The expansion width forthe bottom-lock display can be chosenfrom 10 to 30 feet (3 and 10 meters)

ZOOM MARKER The zoom markerappears in the normal bottom markerand bottom zoom displays and marksthe area which is expanded in the

bottom marker and bottom zoompictures You can turn the marker on oroff as desired

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 2748

21

3 MAINTENANCETROUBLESHOOTING

W RNING

ELECTRICAL SHOCK HAZARDDo not open the equipment

Only qualified personnel should workinside the equipment

31 Maintenance

Regular maintenance is essential forgood performance Checking the itemslisted in the table below monthly willhelp keep your equipment in goodshape for years to come

Checking

Item Action

Transducercable

Check cable for damage

Power cabletransducercable plug

Check that they are tightlyfastened Refasten ifnecessary

Display unitground

Check for corrosion Cleanif necessary

Power supplyvoltage

Check voltage If out ofrating correct problem

32 Cleaning the DisplayUnit

Dust or dirt on the display unit can beremoved with a soft cloth If desired awater-moistened cloth may be usedUse special care when cleaning theLCD since it scratches easily Do notuse chemical cleaners to clean thedisplay unit - they can remove paint andmarkings

33 TransducerMaintenance

Marine life on the transducer face willresult in a gradual decrease insensitivity Check the transducer facefor cleanliness each time the boat isdry-docked Carefully remove anymarine life with a piece of wood orfine-grade sandpaper

34 Replacing the FuseThe fuse in the power cable protects thesystem from reverse polarity of thepower supply and equipment fault If thefuse blows find the cause beforereplacing it Use only a 1A fuse (FGMB 1A 125V Code No 000-114-805 ) orequivalent Using the wrong fuse will damage the unit and void the warranty

W RNINGUse the proper fuse

Fuse rating is shown on the equipmentUse of a wrong fuse can result in fire anddamage the equipment

35 Battery Voltage Alert A battery icon appears when the batteryvoltage is too high or too low

Battery icon and meaning

Icon Meaning

Voltage is lower than 10 VDC If thevoltage goes below 9 V the equipmentis automatically turned off

Voltage is higher than 165 VDC If thevoltage goes higher than 175 V theequipment is automatically turned off

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 2848

22

36 TroubleshootingThe table below provides basictroubleshooting procedures which theuser may follow to restore normaloperation

Troubleshooting table

Ifhellip Then check hellipneither echo norfixed range scaleappears

bull battery voltagebull fusebull power cable

no echo appearsbut the fixedrange scaleappears

bull if display advancespeed is set to ldquoStoprdquo

bull transducer plugbull

transducer cableecho appears butno zero line

bull if range shifting is setto ldquo0rdquo

sensitivity is low bull gain settingbull if air bubbles or marine

life is clinging to thetransducer face

bull if sediments arepresent in the water

bull if the bottom is too soft

to return an echothere is extremeinterference ornoise

bull if the transducer is tooclose to the engine

bull if the unit is properlygrounded

bull if other echo soundersof the same frequencyas own are beingoperated nearby

the speedwatertemperaturereadout isunrealistic or notpresent

bull sensor plug

the positionreadout isunrealistic or notpresent

bull the connectionbetween sounder andnavigator

bull navigator

37 DiagnosticsIf you feel your unit is not workingproperly conduct the diagnostic test tofind the problem If you cannot restorenormal operation contact your dealerfor advice

1 Turn on the power while pressing the[MENUESC] key Continue pressingthe [MENUESC] key until theInstallation menu appears

SIMULATION On

TEST LCD PATTERN MEMORY CLEAR

NMEA PORT InOutNMEA MIX Off GPS WAAS Off

SET BOTTOM LEVEL

Installation Menu

= Setting cannot be changed whenNMEA PORT setting is InIn

Installation menu2 Press to choose TEST3 Press to start the test

ROM OKRAM OKNMEA

Temp 682 deg F

Speed 100kmh

Power 124 VBody 39 deg C

Program No 0252318-01Push [MENU] 3 times to exit

Level bar

= Program version no

Water

TemperatureSpeedBattery VoltageTemperatureinside displayunit(Unit fixed atdeg C)

GPS (48502180) OK

Only when GP-310B is connected(For GP-320B 4850238)

Test display

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 2948

23

4 The ROM RAM and NMEA port arechecked with the results shown asOK or NG (No Good) For any NGrequest service (A special connectoris required to test the NMEA portNothing appears if no connector isconnected)

5 The squares at the right side of thetest display are for checking thecontrols Press each key and thearrows on the Cursor Pad one byone A controlrsquos correspondingon-screen square ldquolightsrdquo in black ifthe control is normal

6 To return to the Installation menupress the [MENUESC] key threetimes

7 To restore normal operation turn offthe power and turn it on again

38 Test PatternThis feature tests for proper display oftones

1 On the Installation menu press $ tochoose LCD PATTERN

2 Press to start the test The entirescreen is black

3 Press again and the screen turnswhite

4 Press again and the screenshows a four-toned display

5 Press again to return to theInstallation menu

6 To restore normal operation turn offthe power and then it on again

WHITE FOUR-TONE BLACK

Test patterns

39 Memory ClearThe memory can be cleared to startafresh with default menu settings

1 At the installation menu press $ tochoose MEMORY CLEAR

2 Press to open the optionswindow

YES NO

Clear memory display

3 Press to clear the memory Beepsare generated while the memory isbeing cleared

4 To restore normal operation turn offthe power and then turn it on again

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3048

24

4 INSTALLATION

41 Display UnitMounting considerations

The display unit can be installed on adesktop on the bulkhead or flushmounted in a panel When choosing alocation keep the following in mind

bull Keep the display unit out of directsunlight

bull The temperature and humidity should

be moderate and stablebull Locate the unit away from exhaust

pipes and ventsbull The mounting location should be well

ventilatedbull Mount the unit where shock and

vibration are minimalbull For maintenance and checking

purposes leave sufficient space atthe sides and rear of the unit andleave slack in cables

bull A magnetic compass will be affected ifthe display unit is placed too close toit Observe the following compasssafe distances to prevent disturbanceto the magnetic compassStandard compass 04 metersSteering compass 03 meters

Desktop overhead mounting1 Fix the bracket to a desktop or the

overhead with tapping screws(supplied)

2 Loosely screw knobs into the displayunit

3 Set the display unit to the bracketand then tighten the knobs

Mounting on the bulkhead Flush

mounting in a panelSee the instructions on the bulkhead orflush mounting template (supplied)

42 Thru-hull MountTransducer

Transducer mounting location

The thru-hull mount transducer

(520-5PSD 520-5MSD) provides thebest performance of all since thetransducer protrudes from the hull andthe effect of air bubbles and turbulencenear the hull skin is reduced When theboat has a keel the transducer shouldbe at least 30 cm away from it Typicalthru-hull mountings are shown in thefigure on the next page

The performance of this sounder isdirectly related to the mounting locationof the transducer especially forhigh-speed cruising The installationshould be planned in advance keepingthe standard cable length (8 m) and thefollowing factors in mindbull Air bubbles and turbulence caused by

movement of the boat seriouslydegrade the sounding capability of thetransducer The transducer shouldtherefore be located in a positionwhere water flow is the smoothestNoise from the propellers alsoadversely affects performance andthe transducer should not be mountednearby The lifting strakes arenotorious for creating acoustic noiseand these must be avoided bykeeping the transducer inboard ofthem

bull The transducer must always remain

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3148

25

submerged even when the boat isrolling pitching or up on a plane athigh speed

bull A practical choice would besomewhere between 13 and 12 of

the boatrsquos length from the stern Forplaning hulls a practical location isgenerally rather far astern so that thetransducer is always in waterregardless of the planing attitude

28

22

120

68

30

520-5PSD

24

120

68

87520-5MSD

Unit mm

Thru-hull mount transducer dimensions

Acceptable transducer mounting

locations

Position 12 to 13 of the hull from stern

15 to 30 cm off center line (inside first lifting strakes)

Within the wetted bottom area

Deadrise angle within 15 deg

HIGH SPEED-V HULL

Suitable transducer mounting locations

Typical thru-hull mounttransducer installations

FairingBlock

Flat Washer

Rubber Washer

Hull

Deep-V Hull

Hull

Flat Washer

Rubber Washer

Flat Hull

CorkWasher

Typical thru-hull mounttransducer installations

Procedure for installing thethru-hull mount transducer

1 With the boat hauled out of the watermark the location chosen formounting the transducer on thebottom of the hull

2 If the hull is not level within 15deg inany direction fairing blocks madeout of teak should be used betweenthe transducer and hull both insideand outside to keep the transducerface parallel with the water lineFabricate the fairing block as shownbelow and make the entire surfaceas smooth as possible to provide anundisturbed flow of water around thetransducer The fairing block shouldbe smaller than the transducer itselfto provide a channel to divert

turbulent water around the sides ofthe transducer rather than over itsface

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3248

26

BOWHole for stuffing tube

Upper Half

Lower Half

Saw along slopeof hull Construction of fairing block

3 Drill a hole just large enough to passthe threaded stuffing tube of thetransducer through the hull makingsure it is drilled vertically

4 Apply a sufficient amount of highquality caulking compound to the topsurface of the transducer around thethreads of the stuffing tube andinside the mounting hole (and fairingblocks if used) to ensure watertightmounting

5 Mount the transducer and fairingblocks and tighten the locking nutsBe sure that the transducer is

properly oriented and its workingface is parallel to the waterline

Note Do not over-stress the stuffingtube and locking nuts through excessivetightening since the wood block willswell when the boat is placed in thewater It is suggested that the nut betightened lightly at installation andretightened several days after the boat

has been launched

Transducer preparation

Before putting the boat in water wipethe face of the transducer thoroughlywith a detergent liquid soap This willlessen the time necessary for thetransducer to have good contact withthe water Otherwise the time requiredfor complete ldquosaturationrdquo ill belengthened and performance will bereduced

DO NOT paint the transducerPerformance will be affected

43 Transom MountTransducer

The transom mount transducer is verycommonly employed usually onrelatively small IO or outboard boatsDo not use this method on an inboardmotor boat because turbulence iscreated by the propeller ahead of thetransducer

520-5PWD

There are two methods of installationflush with hull (for flat hulls) andprojecting from hull (for deep V-hulls)

Flat Hull

D

Dgt50 cm

Deep-VHull

520-5PWD mounting locations

Installing the 520-5PWD on a flat hull

A suitable mounting location is at least50 cm away from the engine and wherethe water flow is smooth

1 Drill four pilot holes in the mountinglocation

2 Attach the transducer to the bracketwith 5 x 20 tapping screws(supplied)

3 Adjust the transducer position so thetransducer faces right to the bottom

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3348

27

Note If necessary to improve waterflow and minimize air bubblesstaying on the transducer faceincline the transducer about 5deg at therear This may require a certainamount of experimentation for finetuning at high cruising speeds

4 Fill the gap between the wedge frontof the transducer and transom withepoxy material to eliminate any airspaces

No1 M5 x 14

5 x 20

5 x 20

2 to 5

Tape

Hull

Transom mount transducer

mounting flush with hull

Installing the transom mounttransducer on a deep-V hull

This method is employed on deep-Vhulls and provides good performancebecause the effects of air bubbles areminimal Install the transducer parallelwith water surface not flush with hull Ifthe boat is placed on a trailer care mustbe taken not to damage the transducerwhen the boat is hauled out of the waterand put on the trailer

5 x 20

No 2M5 x 14

5 x 20

Transom mount transducermounted projecting from hull

525-5PWD

Choose the installation methoddepending on the rise angle of the hull

Transom

Transom

Stripe over 10

Parallel with hull

Mount at the stripe

less than 10

525-5PWD mounting location

Installing the 525-5PWD

Referring to ldquoInstalling the 520-5PWDrdquoin the left column for mounting of thebracket and the figure shown on the topof next page install the 525-5PWD tothe transom

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3448

28

2 to 5

Transducer

Bracket

Hull

Epoxy material

525-5PWD mounting

44 Inside-hullTransducer

The thru-hull mount transducer(520-5PSD 520-5MSD) may also beinstalled inside the hull following theprocedure below

Necessary tools

You will need the following toolsbull Sandpaper (100)bull Silicone sealantbull Silicone grease

Remarks on installationbull Turn off the engine and anchor the

boat while installing the equipmentbull Install the transducer in the engine

room

Choosing the mounting locationbull The mounting location should be

where the hull is of single-hullthickness and is void of air or flotationmaterials other than solid fiberglassbetween the transducer face and thewater

bull Do not place the transducer over hullstruts or ribs which run under the hull

bull Avoid a location where the risingangle of the hull exceeds 15deg tominimize the effect of the boatrsquosrolling

bull You will finalize the mounting location

through some trial and error Theprocedure for this is shown later

50 cm

50 cm15 cm15 cm

13

12

Transducer mountinglocation

Centerline

Inside-hull transducer mounting location

Attaching the transducer1 Clean the transducer face to remove

any foreign material Lightly roughenthe transducer face with 100sandpaper Also roughen the insideof the hull where the transducer is tobe mounted

2 Clean the transducer face again3 Warm the silicone sealant to 40degC

before usage to soften it Coat thetransducer face and mountinglocation with silicone sealant

Transducer

SiliconeSealant

Coating transducer facewith silicone sealant

4 Press the transducer firmly down onthe hull and gently twist it back andforth to remove any air which may betrapped in the silicone sealant

Checking the installation

1 Connect the battery to the display

unit2 Turn on the display unit

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3548

29

3 Press the [MODE] key to chooseSINGLE FREQ

4 Choose 50 kHz or 200 kHz and thenpress the [MENUESC] key to closethe mode menu

5 Press the [MENU] to show the mainmenu and then press to select

Auto mode6 Press to choose Off7 Press the [MENUESC] key8 Press the [GAIN] key to set the gain

to ldquo5rdquo and then press the[MENUESC] key

9 Press the [RANGE] key to set therange to 10 meters (feet) and thenpress the [MENUESC] key

10 If the bottom is displayed in darkgray and the depth indicationappears the mounting location issuitable Go to ldquoFinal preparationrdquo

11 If the bottom is not displayed in darkgray tone the mounting location maybe unsuitable Do the followinga) Press the [POWERBRILL] key to

turn off the powerb) Gently dismount the transducer

with a piece of woodc) Reattach the transducer

elsewhere as shown in ldquoAttachingthe transducerrdquo

d) Check the installation again

Final preparation

Support the transducer with a piece ofwood to keep it in place while it is drying

Let the transducer dry 24-72 hours

45 Optional Triducer525ST-MSD

The optional triducer 525ST-MSD isdesigned for thru-hull mounting Forhow to install this transducer seeparagraph 42

φ79 mm

33 mm200-12 UNthreads

φ51 mm

27 mm

7 mm

140 mm Triducer 525ST-MSD

525ST-PWD

The Transom Mount Transducer orTRIDUCER reg Multisensor with IntegralRelease Bracket 525ST-PWD ismanufactured by AIRMAR Co Theseinstructions are also included with the

sensor

Pre-test for speed and temperature

Connect the sensor to the instrumentand spin the paddlewheel Check for aspeed reading and the approximate airtemperature If there is no readingreturn the sensor to your place ofpurchase

Tools and materials needed

ScissorsMasking tapeSafety gogglesDust maskElectric drillDrill bit for

Bracket holes 4mm 23 or 964rdquoFiberglass hull chamfer bit(preferred)6mm or 14rdquo

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3648

30

Transom hole 19mm or 34rdquo(optional)

Cable clamp holes 3mm or 18rdquoScrewdriversStraight edgeMarine sealantPencilZip-tiesWater-based antifouling paint(mandatory in salt water )

Mounting location

To ensure the best performance thesensor must be submerged inaeration-free and turbulence-free water

Mount the sensor close to the centerlineof the boat On slower heavierdisplacement hulls positioning it fartherfrom the centerline is acceptable

Allow adequate space above thebracket for it to release and rotate thesensor upward

Height

Height withoutspeed sensor191mm (7-12)Height withspeed sensor213mm (8-12)

Height required at mounting location

Note 1 Do not mount the sensor in anarea of turbulence or bubbles nearwater intake or discharge openingsbehind strakes struts fittings or hull

irregularities behind eroding paint (anindication of turbulence)Note 2 Avoid mounting the sensorwhere the boat may be supportedduring trailering launching hauling andstorageNote 3 For single drive boat mounton the starboard side at least 75 mm(3rdquo) beyond the swing radius of thepropeller

75 mm(3)

minimum beyondswing radius

Mounting location on single drive boat

Note 4 For twin drive boat mountbetween the drives

Installation of bracket

1 Cut out the installation template

shown on the next page2 At the selected location position thetemplate so the arrow at the bottomis aligned with the bottom edge ofthe transom Being sure the templateis parallel to the waterline tape it inplace

Align template vertically

Deadrise angle

Slope of hullparallel towaterline

Align template arrow withbottom edge of transom

Positioning the template

Warning Always wear safetygoggles and a dust mask

3 Using a 4 mm 23 or 964rdquo bit drillthree holes 22 mm (78rdquo) deepat the locations indicated To preventdrilling too deeply wrap maskingtape around the bit 22 mm (78rdquo)from the pointFiberglass hull Minimize surfacecracking by chamfering the gelcoatIf a chamfer bit or countersink bit is

not available start drilling with a6mm or 14rdquo bit to a depth of 1 mm(116rdquo)

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3748

31

4 If you know your transom angle the

bracket is designed for a standard13deg transom angle11deg-18deg angle No shim is requiredSkip to step 3 in ldquoAdjustingrdquoOther angles The shim is requiredSkip to step 2 of ldquoAdjustingrdquoIf you do not know the transom angletemporarily attach the bracket andsensor to the transom to determine ifthe plastic shim is needed

5 Using the two 10 x 1-14rdquo

self-tapping screws temporarilyscrew the bracket to the hull DONOT tighten the screws completelyat this time Follow the step 1-4 inldquoAttaching the Sensor to the Bracketrdquobefore proceeding with ldquoAdjustingrdquo

Installation templatefor starboard side of boat

Drill at locations labeled Bfor the following transom angles

16 deg through 22 deg

Drill at locations labeled Afor the following transom angles

2 deg through 15 deg

Align arrow with bottom of transom

AA A

BB B

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3848

32

Adjusting

1 Using a straight edge sight theunderside of the sensor relative tothe underside of the hull The sternof the sensor should be 1-3 mm

(116-18rdquo) below the bow of thesensor or parallel to the bottom ofthe hull

11 deg transom angleNO SHIM

12-18 deg transom angleNO SHIM

2 deg -10 deg transom

angle

19 deg -22 deg transom

angleshim withtaper up

shim withtaper down

parallelparallel parallel

slightangle

angletoo steep

anglereversed

YES NONO

YES YESYES

Sensor position and transom angle

Note Do not position the bow of thesensor lower than the stern becauseaeration will occur

2 To adjust the sensorrsquos angle relativeto the hull use the tapered plasticshim provided If the bracket hasbeen temporarily fastened to thetransom remove it Key the shim in

place on the back of the bracket2deg-10deg transom angle (steppedtransom and jet boats) Positionthe shim with the tapered end down19deg-22deg transom angle (smallaluminum and fiberglass boats) Position the shim with the taperedend up

3 If the bracket has been temporarilyfastened to the transom remove it

Apply a marine sealant to thethreads of the two 10 x 1-14rdquo self

tapping screws to prevent waterseeping into the transom Screw thebracket to the hull Do not tighten thescrews completely at this time

4 Repeat step 1 to ensure that theangle of the sensor is correctNote Do not position the sensorfarther into the water than necessaryto avoid increasing drag spray andwater noise and reducing boatspeed

5 Using the vertical adjustment spaceon the bracket slots slide the sensorup or down to provide a projection of3 mm (18rdquo) Tighten the screws

Cable cover

Cableclamp

50 mm (2)

Hull projection 3 mm (18)

Vertical adjustment and cable routing

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3948

33

Attaching the sensor to the bracket

1 If the retaining cover near the top ofthe bracket is closed open it bydepressing the latch and rotating thecover downward

Step 1 Step 2

Latch

Retainingcover

Pivotarm (2)

Slot (2)

Step 4

Step 3

Attaching the sensor to the bracket

2 Insert the sensorrsquos pivot arms intothe slots near the top of the bracket

3 Maintain pressure until the pivotarms click into place

4 Rotate the sensor downward until thebottom snaps into the bracket

5 Close the retaining cover to preventthe accidental release of the sensorwhen the boat is underway

Cable routing

Route the sensor cable over thetransom through a drain hole orthorough a new hole drilled in thetransom above the waterline

Never cut the cable or remote the

connector this will void the warranty Always wear safety goggles and a dustmask

1 If a hole must be drilled choose alocation well above the waterlineCheck for obstructions such as trimtabs pumps or wiring inside the hullMark the location with a pencil Drilla hole through the transom using a19 mm or 34rdquo bit (to accommodatethe connector)

2 Route the cable over or through thetransom

3 On the outside of the hull secure thecable against the transom using thecable clamps Position a cable clamp50 mm(2rdquo) above the bracket andmark the mounting hole with apencil

4 Position the second cable clamphalfway between the first clamp andthe cable hole Mark this mountinghole

5 If a hole has been drilled in thetransom open the appropriate slot inthe transom cable cover Position thecover over the cable where it entersthe hull Mark the two mounting

holes6 At each of the marked locations usea 3 mm or 18rdquo bit to drill a hole 10mm (38rdquo) deep The prevent drillingtoo deeply wrap masking tapearound the bit 10 mm (38rdquo) from thepoint

7 Apply marine sealant to the threadsof the 6 x 12rdquo self-tapping screw toprevent water from seeping into the

transom If you have drilled a holethrough the transom apply marinesealant to the space around thecable where it passes through thetransom

8 Position the two cable clamps andfasten them in place If used pushthe cable cover over the cable andscrew it in place

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4048

34

9 Route the cable to the instrumentbeing careful not to tear the cable

jacket when passing it though thebulkhead(s) and other parts of theboat To reduce electricalinterference separate the sensorcable from other electrical wiring andldquonoiserdquo sources Coil any excesscable and secure it in place withzip-ties to prevent damage

46 Optional WaterTemperatureSpeedSensor

Water temperaturespeed sensorST-02MSB and ST-02PSB which aredesigned for thru-hull mounting areoptionally available Install them asshown below

Mounting considerations

Choose a suitable mounting locationconsidering the followingbull Choose a place free from vibrationbull Choose a mid-boat flat position The

sensor does not have to be installedperfectly perpendicular The sensormust not be damaged in dry-dockingoperation

bull Choose a place apart from equipmentgenerating heat

bull Choose a place in the forwarddirection viewing from the drain holeto allow for circulation of coolingwater

1 Dry-dock the boat2 Make a hole of approx 51 mm

diameter in the mounting location3 Unfasten locknut and remove the

sensor section4 Apply high-grade sealant to the

flange of the sensor5 Pass the sensor casing through thehole

6 Face the notch on the sensor towardboatrsquos bow and tighten the flange

7 Set the sensor section to the sensorcasing and tighten the locknut

8 Launch the boat and check for waterleakage around the sensor

Locknut

Face notchtoward bow

Flange Nut

Coat withsilicone sealant Brim

φ 77

51

123

Water temperaturespeed sensor

ST-02MSB ST-02PSB

47 Wiring

Connect the LS-4100 powerdata cableassy MJ-A7SPF0005-020 (2 msupplied) to the POWER and thetransducer cable to the XDR connectorRefer to the interconnection diagram toconnect cables Leave slack in cables tofacilitate checking and maintenance

Note The fuse holder contains a springwhich fixes the fuse To preventdetachment of the spring which wouldcause loss of power tie the line asshown below

+ line (red)

Fuse holder

Cable tie How to fix fuse holder

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4148

35

Establishing the ground

The ground wire (125 sq or more localsupply) should be as short as possible

The signal line ground is isolated from

the chassis ground however the powerline is not insulated Therefore whenconnecting eternal equipment havingpositive ground do not ground thesignal line to the chassis If excessivenoise shows on the screen the groundmay be inadequate In this case attacha steel plate measuring 20 cm by 30 cmon the outside of the hull to provide aground point Connect the ground wire

there Use a ldquoclosedrdquo type lug ( ) tomake the connection at the display unitDo not use an ldquoopenrdquo type lug ( )

Optional equipment

POWER connector

The power supply port is commonlyused for connection of externalequipment such as a GPS receiver orwind indicator Use the powerdatacable MJ-A7SPF0005-020 (supplied) forconnection referring the figure shown inthe right column

Connector Color Remarks

1 TD-A WHT2 TD-B BLU

IEC-61162-1NMEA0183

3 RD-A YEL

4 RD-B GRN

IEC-61162-1

NMEA01835 + RED

6 - BLKPower input12 VDC

7 FG

Water tempspeed sensor

Connect the optional water tempspeedsensor to the XDR connector with theoptional converter connector (Type02S4147) as shown below

Tape connectors withvulcaninzing tapeand then vinyl tapeto waterproof themBind tape ends withcable ties to preventtape from unraveling

Connect to XDR portat rear of display unit

MJ-A10SPF

MJ-A10SRMDMJ-A6SRMD

Fromtransducer

Fromsensor

Connection of converterconnector 02S4147

48 IEC 61162-1 DataSentences

The tables below show the datasentences which can be input to andoutput from the LS-4100 Thetransmission speed for both input andoutput is 4800 bps Data is output attwo-second intervals

Input data sentences

Sentence Meaning

BWC Bearing and distance towaypoint

GGA Global positioning system(GPS) fix data

GLL Geographic position -latitudelongitude

HDG Heading deviation and variationHDT Heading true

MDA Atmospheric pressure

MTW Water temperature

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4248

36

Input data sentences (conrsquot)

Sentence MeaningMWV Wind speed and

angleRMA Recommended

minimum specificLORAN-C dataRMB Recommended

minimum navigationinformation

RMC Recommendedminimum specificGPSTRANSIT data

VHW Water speed andheading

VTG Course over groundand ground speedXTE Cross track error

Output data sentences

Sentence MeaningDBT (Ver 15) Depth below

transducerDPT (Ver 20 Ver30)

Depth

MTW Water temperatureRMB (Ver 20) Recommended

minimumnavigationinformation

VHW Water speed andheading

TLL Target positionoutput by [MARK]key

= Available with connection of optionalsensorsnavaid

49 Installation MenuThe installation menu mainly containsitems which are set at installation

1 Turn on the power while pressing the[MENUESC] key Continue pressing

the [MENUESC] key until theInstallation menu appears

SIMULATION On

TEST LCD PATTERN MEMORY CLEAR

NMEA PORT InOutNMEA MIX OffGPS WAAS Off

SET BOTTOM LEVEL

Installation Menu

= Setting cannot be changed whenNMEA PORT setting is InIn

Installation menu

SIMULATION The simulation modeprovides without connection of thetransducer simulated operation of theequipment using internally generatedechoes All controls are operative Themessage ldquoSIMrdquo appears at the top rightcorner on the screen when thesimulation mode is active

1 At the installation menu press toopen the simulation mode optionswindow

2 Press to choose ldquoOnrdquo to turn onthe simulation mode

3 Press the [POWERBRILL] keyabout three seconds to turn off thepower

4 Press the [POWERBRILL] key toturn on the power ldquoSIMrdquo appears atthe top right corner of the display

5 To turn off the simulation modeselect Off at step 2

NMEA po r t se tup(NMEA PO RT NMEA M IX)

The POWER port can function as aninput port or inputoutput port Changethe setting to ldquoInInrdquo when connectingGP-310B320B and a wind sensor

When connecting the GP-310B320Band a wind sensor first turn on ldquoGPS

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4348

37

WAASrdquo (in the Installation menu) andthen select ldquoInInrdquo as the NMEA portsetting

1 Turn on the power while pressingand holding down the [MENUESC]key Continue pressing the[MENUESC] key until theInstallation menu appears

2 Choose NMEA PORT and thenpress to display the NMEA portoptions window

3 Use or to choose InOut orInIn as appropriate

InOut Input and Output (default

setting)InIn Input only (Available withconnection of the GP-310B320Band a wind sensor)

4 Press choose NMEA MIX andthen press to display the NMEAMIX options window

5 Use or to choose Off or OnChoose On to output input data

Off Outputs the data sentences ofLS-4100 only

On Outputs the data sentences ofLS-4100 and sentences which areinput from other equipment

6 To restore normal operation turn offthe power and then turn it on again

GPS WAAS Chooses how to use theWAAS signal when connecting with a

WAAS receiver for example GP-320B

Note WAAS is currently in thedevelopmental phase During thedevelopmental phase the reliability andavailability of the WAAS signal cannotbe guaranteed Therefore any positiondata should be verified against othersources to confirm reliability

1 Display the Installation menu2 Choose GPS WAAS and then press

to open the GPS WAAS options

window

Off

WAAS options window3 Press or to choose ldquoWAAS-02rdquo

(test signal) When the systembecomes operational (in 2003) setto ldquo00rdquo (regular WAAS signal)

4 Turn off the power

BOTTOM LEVEL If the depthindication is unstable in automaticoperation or the bottom echo cannot bedisplayed in the darkest gray tone byadjusting the gain controls in manualoperation you may adjust the bottomecho level detection circuit for both 50kHz and 200 kHz to stabilize theindication Generally lower the bottomlevel for inner hull installation where thereceive level is too low If the bottomlevel is too low it may be difficult todiscriminate fish from the bottomresulting in unstable depth indication

And if the bottom level is too high thedepth indication may not appear

1 At the installation menu press tochoose SET BOTTOM LEVEL andthen press Several seconds laterthe following display appears

Bottom level +0 (200k -100 - +100 ) +0 ( 50k -100 - +100 )

Bottom level display

2 While observing the picture use or to set 200 kHz or to set50 kHz Set up for optimum picture

3 To restore normal operation turn offthe power and then it on again

Note The mode must be other thanldquoNAV DATArdquo to show the bottom leveldisplay

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4448

SP - 1 E2371S01C

SPECIFICATIONS OF ECHO SOUNDER LS-4100

1 GENERAL11 TX Frequency 50 kHz or 200 kHz 50200 kHz dual transmitting selectable12 Transmit Method Single or dual transmitting

13 Output Power 300 Wrms14 TX Rate Max 500 pulsemin15 Pulse-length 01 to 08 ms

2 DISPLAY UNIT21 Display system 5-inch monochrome LCD 76 mm (W) x 100 mm (H) 240 x 320 dots22 Display Mode Single frequency (highlow freq) Dual-frequency Zoom Nav data-12

Marker zoom Bottom zoom Bottom-lock23 Display Range

Range SettingRange

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

Display

rangeMeter 5 10 20 40 80 150 200 300 2-500

Feet 15 30 60 120 200 400 600 1000 7-1500

Fathoms 3 5 10 20 40 80 100 150 1-250

PassiBraza 3 5 10 30 50 100 150 200 1-300

24 Range Shift 0-500 m 0-1500 ft 0-250 fa 0-300 pb25 Expansion Range Bottom-lock expansion 3 to 10 m

Sectional expansion 2 to 50 m26 Display Advance Speed 8 steps (LinesTX Freeze 1161814121121 41)

3 INTERFACE31 Input data sentences IEC61162-1NMEA0183 Ver 152030

GGA RMA RMB RMC BWC GLL HDT HDG VTG VHW MTWMWV MDA XTE

32 Output data sentences IEC61162-1NMEA0183 Ver 152030 interval 2 sMTW VHW DBT DPT RMB TLL by key operating External data required

4 POWER SUPPLY41 Display Unit 12 VDC 05 A

5 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITION51 Ambient Temperature Display unit -15degC to +55degC52 Relative Humidity 93 or less at 40degC53 Waterproof IPX5

6 COATING COLOR61 Display Unit N30

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4548

M a r

4

0 3

D-1

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4648

Mar 4 03

Mar 4 03

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4748

M a r

3

0 3

S-1

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4848

FURUNO Authorized DistributorDealer FURUNO Authorized DistributorDealer

9-52 Ashihara-cho9-52 Ashihara-choNishinomiya 662-8580 JAPANNishinomiya 662-8580 JAPAN

Telephone Telephone 0798-65-21110798-65-2111FaxFax 0798-65-42000798-65-4200

FIRST EDITION FIRST EDITION MARMAR 20032003Printed in JapanPrinted in Japan All rights reserved All rights reserved

B1B1 SEPSEP 09 200509 2005

Pub NoPub No OME-23710OME-23710 00014698000000146980000001469800000014698000(( DAMIDAMI )) LS-4100LS-4100

0 0 0 1 4 6 9 8 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 4 6 9 8 0 0 0

Page 2: OME23710B_1_LS4100

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 248

TABLE OF CONTENTS

FOREWORD iii

SYSTEM OVERVIEW iv

1 OPERATION 1 11 Control Description 1 12 Turning the Power OnOff 1 13 Adjusting Display Contrast

Brilliance2 14 Choosing a Display Frequency 2

15 Menu Operating Procedure 5 16 Automatic Operation5 17 Manual Operation 6 18 Measuring Depth 8 19 Choosing Picture Advanced

Speed 8110 Suppressing Interference 9 111 Suppressing Low Level Noise 9112 Erasing Weak Echoes 10 113 A-scope Display 10 114 Alarms 11 115 Waypoints12 116 Setting Up Nav Data Displays 15117 Other Menu Items 16

2 SYSTEM amp INSTALLATIONMENUS1821 System Menu 18

3 MAINTENANCETROUBLESHOOTING 21

31 Maintenance21 32 Cleaning the Display Unit 21 33 Transducer Maintenance 21 34 Replacing the Fuse 21

35 Battery Voltage Alert 21 36 Troubleshooting22 37 Diagnostics22 38 Test Pattern 23 39 Memory Clear23

4 INSTALLATION 24 41 Display Unit 24 42 Thru-hull Mount Transducer 24 43 Transom Mount Transducer 26 44 Inside-hull Transducer 28 45 Optional Triducer29 46 Optional Water

TemperatureSpeed Sensor34 47 Wiring 34 48 IEC 61162-1 Data Sentences 35 49 Installation Menu 36

SPECIFICATIONS SP-1

OUTLINE DRAWING

INTERCONNECTION DIAGRAM

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 348

i

SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS

Safety Instructions for the Operator

W RNING

Do not open the equipment

There are no uer-serviceable partsinside

Do not disassemble or modify theequipment

Fire electrical shock or serious injurycan result

Immediately turn off the power at theswitchboard if the equipment isemitting smoke or fire

Continued use of the equipment cancause fire or electrical shock Contact aFURUNO agent for service

Do not maneuver the vessel basedon the depth indication alone

Grounding may result

Use the proper fuseFuse rating is shown on the equipmentUse of a wrong fuse can result indamage to the equipment

Do no turn on the equipment with thetransducer out of water

The transducer may be damaged

The picture is not refreshed whenpicture advancement is stopped

Maneuvering the vessel in this conditionmay result in a dangerous situation

Use the proper gain setting

Incorrect gain may produce wrong depth

indication possibly resulting in adangerous situation See Adjusting thegain on page 7 for details

UTION

WARNINGTo avoid electrical shock do notremove cover No user-serviceableparts inside

NameWarning LabelType 02-146-1022Code No 100-306-050

The high quality LCD shows 9999of its pixels The remaining 01 maydrop out or brighten due to the pro-perty of the LCD however this is nota sign of malfunction

A warning label is attached to theequipment Do not remove the labelIf the label is missing or damagedcontact a FURUNO agent or dealer

NOTI E

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 448

ii

Safety Instructions for the Installer

W R NINGTurn off the power at the switchboardbefore beginning the installation

Fire or electrical shock can result if thepower is left on

Be sure no water leaks in at the trans-ducer or sensor mounting location

Water leakage can sink the vessel Alsoconfirm that the transducer and sensorwill not loosen by ships vibration Theinstaller of the equipment is solelyresponsible for the proper installation ofthe equipment FURUNO will assume noresponsibility for any damage associatedwith improper installation

Use the specified power cable

Use of other power cable may result infire

UTIONDo not install the equipment whereair bubbles and noise are present

Performance will be affected

The following are guidelines forhandling of the transducer cable

- Do not locate near oils and fuels- Locate it in a safe place- Do no paint the cable

The sheath of the cable is made ofchloroprene rubber (or polychloridevinyl) For this reason do not paintthe cable

Observe the following compass safedistances to prevent interference to amagnetic compass

Displayunit

Standard Steeringcompass compass

04 m 03 m

Do not turn on the equipment with thetransducer out of water

The transducer may be damaged

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 548

iii

FOREWORD

A Word to LS-4100OwnersCongratulations on your choice of theFURUNO LS-4100 5rdquo Echo SounderWe are confident you will see why theFURUNO name has becomesynonymous with quality and reliability

For over 50 years FURUNO ElectricCompany has enjoyed an enviable

reputation for innovative anddependable marine electronicsequipment This dedication toexcellence is furthered by our extensiveglobal network of agents and dealers

This equipment is designed andconstructed to meet the rigorousdemands of the marine environmentHowever no machine can perform its

intended function unless operated andmaintained properly Please carefullyread and follow the recommendedprocedures for operation andmaintenance

We would appreciate hearing from youthe end-user about whether we areachieving our purposes

Thank you for considering andpurchasing FURUNO equipment

FeaturesThe FURUNO LS-4100 is a dualfrequency (50 kHz and 200 kHz)monochrome LCD echo sounderComprised of a display unit and atransducer the LS-4100 displaysunderwater conditions on a bright 5-inchmonochrome LCD

The main features of the LS-4100 are

bull Bright 5-inch monochrome LCD givesexcellent readability even in broaddaylight

bull Automatic function permitsunattended adjustment of range andgain The range scale and gainautomatically change to display thebottom in the darkest gray tone on thelower half of the screen

bull User-programmable nav data displaysprovide analog and digital nav data

bull Alarms Bottom Fish (bottom-lockand normal) Speed WaterTemperature and Arrival (Speed andarrival alarms require appropriatesensor water temperature alarmrequires water temperature data)

bull White line feature helps discriminate

fish lying near the bottombull Destination waypoint feature provides

range bearing and time-to-go todestination waypoint (up to 12waypoints)

bull Waterproof construction permitsinstallation on open bridge

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 648

iv

SYSTEM OVERVIEW

System configuration

Power supply12 VDC

DISPLAY UNITLS-4100

GPS Navigatoror

Wind Indicator

Transducer

Water temperature Speed sensor

ST-02MSBST-02PSB

520-5PSD520-5MSD520-5PWD 525-5PWD525ST-MSD525ST-PWD

Standard Option User supply

Note Contact yourdealer for connection ofother equipment

POWERBRILL

MARK

GAIN

RANGE

ESCMENUMODE

LS-4100

ECHO SOUNDER

Equipment lists

Standard supply

Name Type Code No Qty RemarksDisplay Unit LS-4100 mdash 1

520-5PSD 000-015-204 Thru-hull mount520-5MSD 000-015-212 Thru-hull mount520-5PWD 000-015-126

Transducer

525-5PWD 000-146-966Transom mount

525ST-MSD 000-015-263 Thru-hull mountTriducer (transducerplus spdtemp sensor) 525ST-PWD 000-015-261

1

Transom mount

Installation Materials(CP02-07401)

bull Tapping screw (4 pcs 5 x 20 SUS304 000-802-081)bull Washer head screw B (4 pcs M4 x 20 SUS304 000-804-742)bull Cable assy (1 pc MJ-A7SPF0005-020 000-139-384 for power and data)

Spare Parts(SP02-04801) Fuse (2 pc FGMB 1A 125V Code No 000-114-805)

Template C22-00301 (000-146-981 for flush mount)C22-00302 (000-146-982 for bulkhead)

Optional equipment

Name Type Code No Qty RemarksConversion Cable 02S4147 000-141-082 1 For spdtemp sensor

ST-02MSB 000-137-986Water Temperature ampSpeed Sensor ST-02PSB 000-137-987

Selectone Thru-hull type

Inner Hull Kit S 22S0191 000-802-598 1

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 748

1

1 OPERATION

11 Control Description

Cursor PadSelects menu itemsshifts VRM

Openscloses menuescapes from current

operation

Selects display mode

Adjusts gain

Selects basic display range

Long press Turns power onoffMomentary press Adjusts display contrast and brilliance

Outputs LL positionto external equipmentregisters selected positionas waypoint

POWER

BRILL

MARK

GAIN

RANGE

ESCMENU

MODE

LS-4100

ECHO SOUNDER

Display unit

How to remove the hard cover

Place your thumbs at the center of thecover and then lift the cover whilepressing it with your thumbs

12 Power OnOffPress the [POWERBRILL] key more

than one second to turn on the powerThe unit beeps the startup screenappears and then the equipmentchecks the ROM and RAM for properoperation and displays program number(If ldquoNGrdquo (No Good) appears try to pressany key except the [POWERBRILL] keyto start operation However theequipment may not work properlyContact your dealer) You may

press any key after the completion ofthe equipment check to start operationsooner

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 848

2

Program version no

ROM OK RAM OK Program No 0252318-01

5 ECHO SOUNDER

FURUNO ELECTRIC CO LTD

Start-up screen

To turn off the power press and holddown the [POWERBRILL] key until thescreen goes blank The time remaining

until power is turned off is counted downon the screen

Note The example screens shown inthis manual may not match the screensyou see on your display The screenyou see depends on your systemconfiguration and equipment settings

13 Adjusting DisplayContrast Brilliance

1 Press the [POWERBRILL] keymomentarily to show thebrilliancecontrast adjustmentwindow

CONTST 4 Min Max

BRILLMin Max

4

Brilliancecontrast adjustment window

2 For contrast press the[POWERBRILL] key to adjustcontrast cyclically (You may also use or on the Cursor Pad to adjustcontrast) (Adjustable range 0 to 9)

3 To adjust brilliance use or $ (Adjustable range 0 to 4)

4 Press the [MENUESC] key to closethe brilliancecontrast adjustmentwindow

Note 1 When the power is reappliedafter turning off the equipment withminimum brilliance minimum brilliancewill be set after the equipment goesthrough its initial start up (The start upscreen appears with the maximumbrilliance) Adjust the brilliance asnecessary

Note 2 Setting windows other thanthose on menus are erased if there isno operation within about sevenseconds

14 Choosing a DisplayFrequency

Seven displays are available singlefrequency (50 or 200 kHz) dualfrequency marker-zoom bottom-zoombottom-lock and nav data (twodisplays)

1 Press the [MODE] key to show themode selection window

MODE

SINGLE FREQDUAL FREQMARKER ZOOMBOTTOM ZOOMBOTTOM LOCKNAV DATA-1NAV DATA-250kHz 200kHz

Mode selection window

2 Press the [MODE] key again withinseven seconds to choose a modeYou may also choose a mode with or $

3 For modes other than DUAL FREQchoose frequency Press for 50kHz or for 200 kHz

4 Press the [MENUESC] key to closethe window

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 948

3

Single frequency display

50 kHz

The sounder uses ultrasonic signals todetect bottom conditions The lower thefrequency of the signal the wider thedetection area Therefore the 50 kHzfrequency is useful for general detectionand judging bottom condition

200 kHz

The higher the frequency of theultrasonic signal the better theresolution For this reason the 200 kHzfrequency is ideal for detailed

observation of fish schools

50 kHz

200 kHz

Frequency and coverage area

466

FishSchool

Bottom

0

20

40

50k 1100

Level Bar

Depth

Frequency

Picture Advance Speed

Range Scale

Mode(AUTO or MANUAL)

407 degF162kt Nav Display

MinuteMarker(Shows time

Each baris 30 sec) TransmissionLine

60

Typical 50 kHz display

Dual frequency display

The 50 kHz picture appears on the leftthe 200 kHz picture on the right Thisdisplay is useful for comparing the samepicture with two different transmitting

frequencies

50 kHz 200 kHzpicture picture

496

0050200 11

0

20

40

60

80

20

40

60

80 Dual frequency display

Marker-zoom display

This mode expands chosen area of thenormal picture to full vertical size of thescreen on the left-half window You mayspecify the portion to expand byoperating the VRM (Variable RangeMarker) which you can shift with or$ The area between the VRM andzoom range marker is expanded

Zoomedfishschool

Single frequency display

Variable rangemarker

This sectionis zoomed

Zoom marker

Marker-zoom display

170

250

0

Fishschool

0

40

10

20

30

0050k 11

21

20

19

18

17

22

Marker-zoom display

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 1048

4

Bottom-zoom display

This mode expands bottom and bottomfish in the range width set with ZOOMRANGE of the SYSTEM menu Thismode is useful for determining bottom

contour When the bottom depthincreases the display shift to keep thebottom echo at the lower part of thescreen

0

Bottom-zoom display

298

Bottom

0

40

10

20

30

32

31

30

29

28

27

Switched withdepth

Singlefrequencydisplay

Zoommarker

0050k 11

Bottom-zoom display

Bottom-lock display

The bottom-lock display provides anormal picture on the right half of thescreen and a 15 feet (5 meter) widelayer in contact with the bottom isexpanded onto the left half of the screenThis mode is useful for detecting bottomfish = Operator selectable

Bottom-lock display

Zoommarker

Zoomedfish

This sectionis zoomed

217

0

Singlefrequencydisplay

Fishschool

0

40

Bottom displayed flat

10

20

30

0

1

2

3

4

550k 11

Bottom-lock display

Nav data displays

The nav data displays appear on the leftof the screen Data other than depthrequires appropriate sensor

You can display between two and fouritems in a nav data display and choosethe item and order to display them Seeparagraph 116 to choose the items todisplay ldquoNAV DATA-1rdquo and ldquoNAVDATA-2rdquo in paragraph 21 to choose thenumber of items to display

Depth

694 m

Trip meter

100 nm

Odometer

56 nm

NAV DATA-1 display

NAV DATA-2 display

Temperature

655 deg F

172

1 05 0 05 1

025 nm

XTE

Speed

kt

20

50

40

60

30

10

0

Sample NAV DATA displays(Default setting)

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 1148

5

15 Menu OperatingProcedure

The LS-4100 has three menus MainSystem and Installation Below is the

basic menu operating procedure1 Press the [MENUESC] key to openthe main menu Page 1 or Page 2 ofthe main menu appears dependingon the page last used

[MENU] Exit

(12)

Note SHIFT and CLUTTER arenot available in the auto mode

AUTO MODE Off SHIFT 0ftPIC ADVANCE 11NOISE LIMIT Off CLUTTER Off SIGNAL LEVEL Off

A-SCOPE Off HUE DayWHITE LINE Off DEEP GAIN Low

Pageno

Main menu page 1

2 Use or $ to select an item Toview page 2 of the main menu press$ until showing the display below

[MENU] Exit

(22)

GOTO WPT Off WAYPOINT LIST

TRIP RESET

GAIN ADJ 200 +0GAIN ADJ 50 +0DRAFT 00ft

ALARM MENUSYSTEM MENU

Main menu page 2

3 Press to show selected itemrsquosoptions window The example shownat the top of the right column is theoptions window for AUTO MODE

Off CruisingFishing

Auto mode options window

4 Use or $ to choose option or setnumeric value

5 Press the [MENUESC] key to closethe menu or press to continuemenu operation

16 Automatic OperationHow automatic operation works

The automatic function automatically

chooses the proper gain range scaleand clutter It works as followsbull The range changes automatically to

display the bottom echo on thescreen

bull The gain is automatically adjusted todisplay the bottom echo in the darkesttone

bull Clutter (on the menu) whichsuppresses low-level noise isautomatically adjusted

Choosing automatic operation

The automatic mode provides twochoices of modes cruising and fishing1 Press the [MENUESC] key to open

the main menu2 Press to choose AUTO MODE

from page 1 of the menu3 Press to open the mode options

window4 Choose Cruising or Fishing as

appropriate

ldquoCruisingrdquo is for tracking the bottomldquoFishingrdquo is for searching fish schoolsSince ldquoCruisingrdquo uses a higher clutterrejection setting than fishing it is notrecommended for fish detection -weak fish echoes may not bedisplayed ldquoFishingrdquo clearly displaysweaker echoes

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 1248

6

5 Press the [MENUESC] key to closethe menu

The auto mode in use is shown as(Auto-Fishing) or

(Auto-Cruising) at the top left corner onthe screen

Note When in the auto mode SHIFTand CLUTTER cannot be adjustedmanually

Range offset

To display the bottom tail in detail in theautomatic mode offset the range as

below1 Press the [+] or [-] key of the

[RANGE] key

+0 ft

AUTO RANGE OFFSET

Auto range offset window

2 Press the [+] or [-] key of the[RANGE] key again to choose offsetdesired (range -100 to +300 ft)Note that if the basic range ischanged the offset is returned to ldquo0rdquo

3 Press the [MENUESC] key to finish

Gain offset

Gain offset lets you override automaticgain adjustment1 Press the [GAIN] key

Min Max 0

AUTO GAIN OFFSET

Auto gain offset window

2 Press or key to offset gain(setting range ndash5 to +5) The gainselected is shown at the top of thescreen asG (Gain) + (or -) XX (offset value)

3 Press the [MENUESC] key to finish

17 Manual OperationChoosing the manual mode

1 Press the [MENUESC] key to openthe main menu

2 Press to choose AUTO MODEfrom page 1 of the menu3 Press to show the window4 Choose Off with 5 Press the [MENUESC] key to close

the menu appears at the topleft corner on the screen

Choosing range

The basic range and range shiftingfunctions used together give you themeans to choose the depth you can seeon the screen The basic range can bethought of as providing a ldquowindowrdquo intothe water column and range shifting asmoving the ldquowindowrdquo to the desireddepth

Choosing basic range

The basic range may be chosen withthe [RANGE] key from the eight rangesshown in the table shown below (ldquoPBrdquoin the table means PassiBraza) Thesetting range can be arranged throughthe SYSTEM menu

Default ranges

Basic RangeUnit1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

meters 5 10 20 40 80 150 200 300

feet 15 30 60 120 200 400 600 1000

fathoms 3 5 10 20 40 80 100 150

hiro 4 8 15 30 50 100 150 200

PB 3 5 10 30 50 100 150 200

Japanese unit of depth measurement1 Press the [+] or [-] key of the

[RANGE] key and the display shouldnow look something like the one onat the top of the next page

2 Press the [+] or [-] key of the[RANGE] key again to choose abasic range

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 1348

7

1000ft 600ft 400ft 200ft 120ft 60ft 30ft 15ft

Basic ranges (default)3 Press the [MENUESC] key to close

the window

Shifting the range

The basic range may be shifted up ordown in the manual mode as follows

Display

Window can beshifted up anddown to selectthe depth

Range and display shift concept

1 Press the [MENUESC] key to openthe main menu

2 Choose SHIFT from page 1 of themenu

3 Press to open the shift optionswindow

0ft

Shift window

4 Use or $ to choose amount ofshift desired

5 Press the [MENUESC] key to closethe window

Note The picture may not be displayedif the amount of shift is greater thanactual depth

Adjusting the gain

The [GAIN] key adjusts the sensitivity ofthe receiver Generally use a highergain setting for greater depths and alower setting for shallower waters

Use the proper gain setting

Incorrect gain may produce wrong depthindication possibly resulting in a dangeroussituation

UTION

Gain too high Gain proper Gain too low Examples of proper and improper gain

1 Press the [GAIN] key and the displayshown below appears

Min Max

50k 3

200k 2

GAIN

Gain adjustment window

2 When using the dual frequencydisplay press or $ to choosefrequency

3 Press the [GAIN] key to set (Youmay also use or ) Adjust so thata slight amount of noise remains onthe screen

4 Press the [MENUESC] key to closethe gain adjustment window

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 1448

8

18 Measuring DepthThe VRM (Variable Range Marker)functions to measure the depth to fishschools etc1 Press or $ to place the VRM

on the object which you wish tomeasure range

2 Read the VRM depth just abovethe VRM

0

20

40

60

80496

398

VRM

VRM depth

50k 11

How to measure depth with the VRM

19 Choosing PictureAdvance Speed

The picture advance speed determineshow quickly the vertical scan lines runacross the screen When choosing apicture advance speed keep in mindthat a fast advance speed will expandthe size of the fish school horizontallyon the screen and a slow advancespeed will contract it Note that thepicture is not refreshed when pictureadvancement is stopped Thereforeuse caution when steering the vesselunder this condition

Fast Slow Picture and picture advancement speed

1 Press the [MENUESC] key to openthe main menu

2 Choose PIC ADVANCE from page 1of the menu

3 Press to show the optionswindow

Stop116 18 14 12 11 21 41

(

)

Fast

Slow

Picture advance options window

4 Use or $ to choose pictureadvance speed desired Thefractions in the options windowdenote the number of scan linesproduced per transmission Forexample 18 means one scan line isproduced every 8 transmissionsldquoStoprdquo freezes the display and it isconvenient for taking a photo

The picture is not refreshed whenpicture advancement is stopped

Maneuvering the vessel in this conditionmay result in a dangerous situation

UTION

5 Press the [MENUESC] key to closethe menu

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 1548

9

110 SuppressingInterference

Interference from other acousticequipment operating nearby or other

electronic equipment on your boat mayshow itself on the display as shown inthe figure belowTo suppress interference do thefollowing1 Press the [MENUESC] key to open

the main menu2 Use or $ to choose NOISE LIMIT

from page 1 of the menu3 Press to show the options

window4 Use or $ to choose the degree ofsuppression desired Off LowMedium or High (highest)

5 Press the [MENUESC] key to closethe menu

Interference fromother sounder

Electrical interference

Forms of interference

Turn the noise limiter off when nointerference exists otherwise weakechoes may be missed

111 Suppressing LowLevel Noise

Low intensity ldquospecklesrdquo may appearover most of screen This is mainly due

to sediment in the water or noise Thesecan be suppressed by adjustingCLUTTER on the menu When theautomatic mode is on clutter isautomatically rejected To suppress lowlevel noise in manual sounder operationdo the following1 Press the [MENUESC] key to open

the main menu2 Use or $ to choose CLUTTER

from page 1 of the menu3 Press to show the optionswindow

4 Use or $ to choose the degree ofsuppression desired 1 2 3 4 5 or6 The higher the number the greaterthe suppression

5 Press the [MENUESC] key to closethe menu

To turn off low-level noisesuppression choose Off at step 4 andthen press the [MENUESC] key

Clutter appearance

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 1648

10

112 Erasing WeakEchoes

Sediment in the water or reflectionsfrom plankton may be painted on the

display in low intensity tones

Weakechoes

Appearance of weak echoes

These weak echoes may be erased asfollows1 Press the [MENUESC] key to open

the main menu2 Use or $ to choose SIGNAL

LEVEL from page 1 of the menu3 Press to show the options

window4 Use or $ to choose the degree of

suppression desired Off Low orHigh (highest)

5 Press the [MENUESC] key to closethe menu

To turn off the signal level function choose Off at step 4 and then pressthe [MENUESC] key

113 A-scope DisplayThis display shows echoes at eachtransmission with amplitudes and toneproportional to their intensities on theright 14 of the screen It is useful forestimating the kind of fish school andbottom composition

Note In the dual frequency display the A-scope display is only available withthe high frequency display

323

10

20

30

40

0

A-scope display

Single frequency display

Strong

reflection(bottom)

Weakreflection(fish or noise)

50k 11

Strongreflection(fish)

A-scope display

1 Press the [MENUESC] key to openthe main menu

2 Press or $ to choose A-SCOPEfrom page 1 of the menu

3 Press to show the optionswindow

4 Press

or$

to choose the A-scope presentation type desiredNormal Display shows echoes ateach transmission with amplitudesand tone proportional to theirintensitiesPeak Peak-hold amplitude picture

5 Press the [MENUESC] key to closethe menu

To turn off the A-scope displaychoose Off at step 4 and then press the[MENUESC] key

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 1748

11

114 AlarmsAlarm description

The LS-4100 has six conditions whichgenerate both audio and visual alarms

bottom alarm normal fish alarm bottomlock fish alarm water temperature alarmarrival alarm and speed alarm (Thewater temperature arrival and speedalarms require appropriate sensors)

Bottom alarm The bottom alarm alertsyou when the bottom is within the alarmrange set To activate the bottom alarmthe depth must be displayed

Fish (normal) alarm The fish (normal)alarm tells you when fish are within thepreset alarm range

Fish (bottom lock) alarm The fish(bottom lock) alarm available with thebottom-lock mode sounds when fishare within a certain distance from thebottom Note that the bottom zoom

display must be turned on to use thisalarm

Water temperature alarm The watertemperature alarm alerts when thewater temperature is within (Insidealarm) the alarm range set orunderover (outside alarm) the rangeset

Speed alarm The speed alarm alertsyou when the speed is within (Insidealarm) or underover (Outside alarm)the preset speed

Arrival alarm The arrival alarm alertswhen you are near a waypoint by thedistance set

Activating an alarm

1 Press the [MENUESC] key2 Press or $ to choose ALARM

MENU from page 2 on the menu3 Press the to show the ALARM

menu

ALARM

(12)

[MENU] Exit

ALARM

(22)

[MENU] Exit

BOTTOM On FROM 5ft

RANGE 10ftFISH(Normal) On

FROM 5ft RANGE 10ftFISH(BL) On

FROM 8ft RANGE 10ftFISH LEVEL Medium

TEMPERATURE Inside FROM 724 deg F RANGE 10 deg F

SPEED Off FROM 00kt

RANGE 10kt

ARRIVAL ALRM Off RANGE 0 01 m

Pageno

Gray characters mean alarm is inactive Alarm menu

4 Use or $ to choose an alarm asappropriate

5 Press to show the options menu

Off On

Off InsideOutside

Temp Speed Alarm Types

Fish ArrivalBottom AlarmOnOff

Alarm options6 Use or $ to choose alarm type

Off Alarm off On Alarm onInside Alarm generated whenspeed (or water temperature) iswithin the range setOutside Alarm generated whenspeed (or water temperature) isoutside the range set

7 Press to close the windowFor ARRIVAL ALARM setting skip tostep 12

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 1848

12

8 Press $ to choose FROM9 Press to show the options menu

0ft

Depth

632 deg F

Temperature

10 kt

Speed Depth temperature speed setting

window10 Use or $ to set starting depth

temperature or speed as appropriateFor FISH (BL) the starting depth isthe range from the bottom

11 Press to close the window12 Press $ to choose RANGE13 Press to show the options menu14 Use or $ to set alarm range15 For the bottom alarm temperature

alarm speed alarm or arrivalalarm press the [MENUESC] key tofinish For a fish alarm press toclose the window and then go tostep 16

16 Press $ to choose FISH LEVEL17 Press to show the options menu

Weak

MediumStrong Fish level options

18 Use or $ to choose the echostrength level which will trigger a fishalarm

Weak Weak echoes (weakest toneon level bar)Medium Medium strength echoes

(middle tone on level bar)Strong Strong echoes (darkest toneon level bar)

19 Press the [MENUESC] key twice toclose the menu

Alarm range marker Bottom alarm Fish alarm (normal) Right Fish alarm (bottomlock) Left

Alarm icon

Alarm rangeStartingpoint

Bottom alarm Fish alarm (normal) Fish alarm (BL)

Temperature alarm (deg

C ordeg

F shown) Speed alarm Arrival alarm

Alarm icon (Appropriate icon appears to showwhich alarm has been violated)

How the alarm works

Note To disable an alarm choose Offat step 5 in the above procedure

Silencing the buzzer

The buzzer sounds and the appropriatealarm icon appears and flashes whenan alarm is violated You can silence thebuzzer by pressing any key Howeverthe buzzer will sound whenever thealarm setting is violated

Note The audio and visual alarms arereleased against the last-violated alarmwhen multiple alarms are active

115 WaypointsWaypoints may be used tobull Record the position of an important

echo as waypoint 12 points may beregistered

bull Output a waypoint position to a plotterto mark position on its screen

bull Find range bearing and time-to-go toa location (waypoint)

Note Requires latitude and longitudeposition from a navigator

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 1948

13

Registering a waypoint on thescreen

1 Press the [MARK] key The cursorappears along with waypoint entryinstructions To enter a waypoint tothe current own shiprsquos position go tostep 3Note If there is no position data themessage ldquoNo position datardquo appearsCheck the navigator

50k

496

1100

20

40

60

80

0

Cursor

WAYPOINT ENTRY

( Move) Cursor [MARK] Enter [MENU] Cancel

50 kHz display

2 Press the cursor pad to set thecursor where desired Pictureadvancement is stopped until step 3is completed and the instructionwindow is integrated into the navdisplay

3 Press the [MARK] key again WhenTLL or FURUNO-TLL is selected atTLL OUTPUT on the System menuthe latitude and longitude position atthe cursor is output to the navigator

A vertical line marks location Furtherthe display shows the waypointname (next sequential number) andposition of the location selected atstep 2

WAYPOINTName FREQLat 34 deg 22796NLon 136 deg 07264E

05

[MENU] Exit

rase

Waypoint data display

Note If you attempt to enter 13thwaypoint the message ldquoMemoryfullrdquo appears In this case erase anunwanted waypoint to enable entry

4 To save the waypoint under thename shown go to step 8 or go tostep 5 to change its name

5 Press to open the waypoint nameentry window

WAYPOINTName FREQLat 34 deg 22796NLon 136 deg 07264E

05

[MENU] Exit

01------ ENT

rase

Waypoint window name entry6 Use or to set character $ or

to shift cursor The name mayconsist of 10 alphanumericcharactersNote Character order is 0 1hellip9 - A BhellipZ _ 0hellip

7 Press to choose ENT 8 Press the [MENUESC] key to

register the waypoint

Registering waypoint by LL

1 Press the [MENUESC] key to openthe main menu

2 Use or to choose WAYPOINTLIST from page 2 of the menu

3 Press

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 2048

14

WAYPOINT LIST

01 0102 0303------------------------------------------------------

[MENU] Exit

Waypoint list4 Press or to choose an empty

waypoint and press Press again

NEW WAYPOINTName FREQLat 34 deg 22796NLon 136 deg 07264E

05

[MENU] Exit

04------ ENT

rase

New waypoint window name entry

5 Use or to set character $ or to shift cursor

6 Press to select ENT 7 Enter latitude and longitude similar

to how you entered waypoint name8 Press the [MENUESC] key to

register the waypoint

Editing waypoints Press the [MENUESC] key to open

the main menu

2 Use or to choose WAYPOINTLIST from page 2 of the menu

3 Press to open the waypoints list4 Use or to choose a waypoint

and press 5 Use or to choose the item to

edit (name latitude or longitude)6 Press to open the data entry

window7 Use or to set character $ or

to choose location8 Press to choose ENT 9 Press the [MENUESC] key

Erasing waypoints Press the [MENUESC] key2 Use or to choose WAYPOINT

LIST from page 2 of the menu3 Press to open the waypoints list

4 Use or to choose the waypointto erase and then press Note You cannot erase a waypointwhich is selected as ldquoGOTO WPTrdquo

5 Press to choose ldquoEraserdquo6 Press to open the options window7 Press to select YES to erase the

waypoint The waypoint list appearswith the erased waypoint blank

8 Press the [MENUESC] key twice toclose the menu

Setting destination waypoint

Set a destination waypoint to find rangebearing and time-to-go to that point Youcan see range and bearing to awaypoint Time-to-go is shown on theTime to Go digital display

Press the [MENUESC] key to openthe main menu

2 Use or to choose GOTO WPTfrom page 2 of the menu

3 Press to open the waypoints list

Off01020304----------------------------------------------------------------

Waypoint list

4 Use or to choose a waypoint5 Press the [MENUESC] key to close

the menu

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 2148

15

116 Setting Up Nav DataDisplays

The user may arrange the nav datadisplays as desired

1 Use the [MODE] key to show theNAV DATA-1 or 2 display whicheveryou want to set up

2 Press the [MENUESC] key to closethe mode selection window

3 Press the cursor pad to display theNAV DATA SETUP window

NAV DATA SETUP

Window Selection Data Selection

[MENU] Exit

NAV DATA SETUP window

4 Use or to choose a datadisplay window desired Adashed-line rectangle circumscribesyour selection

5 Use

or$

to choose item todisplay See the below for adescription of the displays

(9)

(1)

(2)

(3)

(4)(5)

(6)(7)(8)

Two-data

display

Three-data

display

Four-data

displayItems displayable in (1) - (3) depth positioncourse range and bearing trip distanceodometer water temperature headingair pressure time-to-go to destination waypointXTE speed wind speed and directiondestination waypoint data compassItems displayable in (4) - (9) depth positionspeed course range and bearing trip distanceodometer water temperature headingair pressure time-to-go to destination waypointXTE wind speed wind direction

= Graphic display

Nav data window and item displayable6 Press the [MENUESC] key to finish

Note You can choose the number ofitems to show in a nav data display withNAV DATA-1 and NAV DATA-2 on theSystem menu

GRAPHIC DISPLAYS

1 05 0 05 1

Wpt 03Rng 019nm Brg 321 deg XTE 000nm Cse 333 deg

DESTINATION WAYPOINT GRAPHIC

XTEscale

BearingCourseDestinationwaypointdirection

DestinationwaypointdataNameRangeXTE

Wind APP

WIND GRAPHIC

60

120

90

030

150180

120

150

90

60

30

120 deg

Speed 103 ms

COMPASS GRAPHIC

SPEED GRAPHIC

172

Speed

20

50

40

60

30

10

01 05 0 05 1

025 nm

XTE

XTE GRAPHIC

kt

Bearing todestinationwaypoint

Course

Brg30 deg

Cse90 deg

N

E

XTE scale

Speed-ometer

Nav data display-1

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 2248

16

DIGITAL DISPLAYS

Course

123 deg

COURSE

Depth

328 ft

DEPTH

Heading TRUEMAG

318 deg

HEADING

Odometer

56 nm

ODOMETER

Position GPS 3D

30 deg 00065N130 deg 00574E

POSITION

Temperature

698 degF

WATER TEMPERATURE

Trip meter

121 nm

TRIP DISTANCE

Time to Go

00 H30 M

TIME-TO-GO

1018 hpa

AIR PRESSURE

Air Pressure

Speed

193 kt

SPEED

Rng

121 nm

RANGE amp BEARING

Brg

140 deg

Wind Speed APP

80 ms

WIND SPEED

Wind Dir APP

138 deg

WIND DIRECTION

APP or TRUE depending on menu setting TRUE or MAG depending

on menu settingamp To destination waypoint

Note 1 Nav data is updated with somedelay

Note 2 When data is lost 120 sec thedisplay shows - - at the locationwhere data is lost

= GPS receiving status (Displays whenconnecting with GP-310B320B and InOutis selected at the Installation menu)NO FIX Position cannot be foundGPS 2D 2D (dimension) GPS position fixGPS 3D 3D GPS fixGPS W2D 2D WAAS position fixGPS W3D 3D WAAS position fix

NAV data display-2

117 Other Menu ItemsThis section describes the menu itemsnot previously mentioned

Page 1

HUE (Picture Color)

Two picture color arrangements areavailable Day and Night Day showsechoes on a white background Nightshows them on a black background

1 Press the [MENUESC] key todisplay the menu

2 Use or $ to choose HUE frompage 1 of the menu

3 Press to show the optionswindow

4 Use or $ to choose Day or Nightas appropriate

5 Press the [MENUESC] key to closethe menu

WHITE LINE

The white line feature displays theleading edge of the bottom echo in

white This is useful for discriminatingbottom fish near the bottom

1 Press the [MENUESC] key todisplay the main menu

2 Use or $ to choose WHITE LINEfrom page 1 of the menu

3 Press to show the optionswindow

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 2348

17

4 Use or to choose Off Tone orMesh as appropriate ldquoMeshrdquo paintsthe white line in darker tone thanldquoTonerdquo

5 Press the [MENUESC] key to closethe menu

526White Line OFF White Line ON (Mesh)

Fish schoolclearly shown

White line

0

20

40

60

80

050k 11

526

0

20

40

60

80

00 050k 11

How white line works

DEEP GAIN

ldquoDeep Gainrdquo compensates forpropagation attenuation of the ultrasonicwaves It does this by equalizing echopresentation so that fish schools of thesame size appear in the same density inboth shallow and deep waters Inaddition it reduces surface noise

Press the [MENUESC] key to openthe main menu

2 Use or to choose DEEP GAINfrom page of the menu

3 Press $ to show to the optionswindow

4 Choose Low Medium or High asappropriate High provides thegreatest degree of gain reductionagainst short range echoes

5 Press the [MENUESC] key to closethe menu

Page 2

TRIP RESET

This item resets trip distance to ldquo0rdquo

Press the [MENUESC] key to openthe main menu

2 Use or to choose TRIPRESET from page 2 of the menu

3 Press $ 4 Press to reset trip distance

Beeps are generated while the tripdistance is being reset

5 Press the [MENUESC] key to closethe menu

Note To reset the odometer to zeroclear the memory

GAIN ADJ 200 GAIN ADJ 50

If the gain is too high or too low or thegain for the low and high frequenciesappears unbalanced you cancompensate it as follows

Press the [MENUESC] key to openthe main menu

2 Use or to choose GAIN ADJ200 or GAIN ADJ 50 from page 2 ofthe menu

3 Press $ to show to the optionswindow

4 Use or to set the amount Thesetting range is ndash50 to +50

5 Press the [MENUESC] key to close

the menu

DRAFT

The default depth display shows thedistance from the transducer If youwould rather show the distance from thesea surface set your shiprsquos draft asfollows

Press the [MENUESC] key to openthe main menu

2 Use or to choose DRAFT frompage 2 of the menu

3 Press $ and then use or to setdraft The setting range is ndash 50 to+500 (meters feet)

4 Press the [MENUESC] key to closethe menu

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 2448

18

2 SYSTEM MENU

The System menu mainly consists ofitems which once set do not requirefrequent adjustment You may displaythis menu by choosing SYSTEM MENUat page 2 of the main menu andpressing

SYSTEM MENULANGUAGE English

DEPTH UNIT ftSPEED UNIT ktWIND UNIT msTEMP UNIT deg F

TEMP GRAPH OffNAV DATA-1 NAV DATA-2

WATER TYPE SaltKEY BEEP OnBATT VOLTAGE Off (13)

[MENU] Exit

SYSTEM MENU

(23)

NAV DISPLAY TempSpeedNMEA0183 Ver 20TLL OUTPUT OffBEARING TrueWIND SPDDIR ApparentTRIP SOURCE Own

TEMP SOURCE OwnSPEED SOURCE OwnTEMP CALIB +00 deg F ( 40)SPEED CALIB +0 ( 50)

Own speed Own temp 100 kt 162 deg F

[MENU] Exit

SYSTEM MENU

(33)

BASIC RANGE1 15 ft

RANGE2 30RANGE3 60RANGE4 120RANGE5 200RANGE6 400RANGE7 600RANGE8 1000 (7-1500)

ZOOM RANGE 15 ft (7-150)BL RANGE 15 ft (10-30)(Bottom Lock)

ZOOM MARKER On

[MENU] Exit

PAGE 3

PAGE 2

PAGE 1

Page no

System menus

21 System MenuPage 1

LANGUAGE The system language isavailable in English several Europeanlanguages and Japanese To changelanguage select language desired andpress the [MENUESC] key

DEPTH UNIT Choose unit of depthmeasurement from meters feet

fathoms passibraza and hiro(Japanese)

SPEED UNIT Choose unit of speedmeasurement from knots miles perhour and kilometers per hour Requiresspeed data

WIND UNIT Choose unit of wind speedmeasurement from ms kt kmh and

mph Requires wind speed data

TEMP UNIT Choose unit oftemperature measurement Celsius orFahrenheit Requires temperature data

TEMP GRAPH Turns the watertemperature display on or off Thetemperature scale range is 16deg (degF) inldquoNarrowrdquo 40deg (degF) in ldquoWiderdquo Requires

water temperature data

m526

0

20

40

60

80

00 050k 11

40

80

70

50

60

TemperatureScale

TemperatureGraph

638 deg F162kt

Water temperature display (wide degF)

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 2548

19

NAV DATA-1 -2 Choose the number ofnavigation data items to display on thenav data displays from two three orfour items Requires appropriate navdata

WATER TYPE Choose the water typewith which to use the LS-4100 fromSalt or Fresh

KEY BEEP Turn key beep on or off

BATT VOLTAGE Turn the batteryvoltage indication (appears at the topright corner on the screen) on or offWhen on it replaces the picture advancespeed indication

Page 2

NAV DISPLAY Choose the nav data todisplay in the nav data window at thetop left-hand corner You may choosefrom temperaturespeedlatitudelongitude range and bearingcourse over ground trip distance or

wind speed Requires appropriate navdata

407 deg F162kt

Nav window

NMEA0183 Choose NMEA version ofnavigator Ver 15 Ver 20 or Ver 30

TLL OUTPUT Enablesdisables outputof TLL (Target Latitude Longitude)position when the [MARK] key isoperated ldquoTLLrdquo outputs latitude andlongitude position ldquoFURUNO-TLLrdquoavailable with connection of navigatorthat can output FURUNO TLL outputslatitude and longitude watertemperature depth etc

BEARING Shiprsquos course and bearingto a waypoint may be displayed in trueor magnetic bearing Magnetic bearingis true bearing plus (or minus) earthrsquosmagnetic deviation Requires bearingdata

WIND SPDDIR Choose the windspeed and direction reference from trueand apparent Requires wind sensorApparen t The direction (in relation toshiprsquos bow) and speed of the wind as itappears to those on board relative tothe speed and direction of the boatcombination of the true wind and thewind caused by the boats movementTrue The speed and direction (inrelation to shiprsquos bow) of the wind felt ormeasured when stationary

TRIP SOURCE Choose speed sourcefor the trip distance indication Own(transducer with speed sensor orseparate speed sensor) or NMEA

TEMP SOURCE Choose source ofwater temperature input Off Own(transducer with water temperaturesensor or separate temperature sensor)or NMEA

SPEED SOURCE Choose source ofspeed input Off Own (transducer withspeed sensor or separate speedsensor) or NMEA Requires speed

data

TEMP CALIB If the water temperaturesensor-generated water temperatureindication is wrong you can correct ithere when ldquoOwnrdquo is selected astemperature source For example if thewater temperature indication is 2deghigher than actual water temperatureenter -2 The setting range is -40degF to

+40degF

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 2648

20

SPEED CALIB If the speedsensor-generated speed indication iswrong you can correct it here whenldquoOwnrdquo is selected as speed source Forexample if the speed indication is 10lower than actual speed enter +10 Thesetting range is ndash50 to +50

Page 3

BASIC RANGE 1 - BASIC RANGE 8 Set range of each of the eight basicranges (Selectable range 7 to 1500 ft)Note 1 All default basic ranges arerestored whenever the depth unit ischanged Therefore change the depth

unit before changing the basic rangesNote 2 A range may not be lower thanthe range preceding it For example ifbasic range 3 is 60 feet basic range 4must be greater than 60 feet

ZOOM RANGE Choose the range tozoom in the marker-zoom andbottom-zoom modes You may choose arange between 7 and 150 feet (2 and 50

meters)

BL RANGE The expansion width forthe bottom-lock display can be chosenfrom 10 to 30 feet (3 and 10 meters)

ZOOM MARKER The zoom markerappears in the normal bottom markerand bottom zoom displays and marksthe area which is expanded in the

bottom marker and bottom zoompictures You can turn the marker on oroff as desired

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 2748

21

3 MAINTENANCETROUBLESHOOTING

W RNING

ELECTRICAL SHOCK HAZARDDo not open the equipment

Only qualified personnel should workinside the equipment

31 Maintenance

Regular maintenance is essential forgood performance Checking the itemslisted in the table below monthly willhelp keep your equipment in goodshape for years to come

Checking

Item Action

Transducercable

Check cable for damage

Power cabletransducercable plug

Check that they are tightlyfastened Refasten ifnecessary

Display unitground

Check for corrosion Cleanif necessary

Power supplyvoltage

Check voltage If out ofrating correct problem

32 Cleaning the DisplayUnit

Dust or dirt on the display unit can beremoved with a soft cloth If desired awater-moistened cloth may be usedUse special care when cleaning theLCD since it scratches easily Do notuse chemical cleaners to clean thedisplay unit - they can remove paint andmarkings

33 TransducerMaintenance

Marine life on the transducer face willresult in a gradual decrease insensitivity Check the transducer facefor cleanliness each time the boat isdry-docked Carefully remove anymarine life with a piece of wood orfine-grade sandpaper

34 Replacing the FuseThe fuse in the power cable protects thesystem from reverse polarity of thepower supply and equipment fault If thefuse blows find the cause beforereplacing it Use only a 1A fuse (FGMB 1A 125V Code No 000-114-805 ) orequivalent Using the wrong fuse will damage the unit and void the warranty

W RNINGUse the proper fuse

Fuse rating is shown on the equipmentUse of a wrong fuse can result in fire anddamage the equipment

35 Battery Voltage Alert A battery icon appears when the batteryvoltage is too high or too low

Battery icon and meaning

Icon Meaning

Voltage is lower than 10 VDC If thevoltage goes below 9 V the equipmentis automatically turned off

Voltage is higher than 165 VDC If thevoltage goes higher than 175 V theequipment is automatically turned off

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 2848

22

36 TroubleshootingThe table below provides basictroubleshooting procedures which theuser may follow to restore normaloperation

Troubleshooting table

Ifhellip Then check hellipneither echo norfixed range scaleappears

bull battery voltagebull fusebull power cable

no echo appearsbut the fixedrange scaleappears

bull if display advancespeed is set to ldquoStoprdquo

bull transducer plugbull

transducer cableecho appears butno zero line

bull if range shifting is setto ldquo0rdquo

sensitivity is low bull gain settingbull if air bubbles or marine

life is clinging to thetransducer face

bull if sediments arepresent in the water

bull if the bottom is too soft

to return an echothere is extremeinterference ornoise

bull if the transducer is tooclose to the engine

bull if the unit is properlygrounded

bull if other echo soundersof the same frequencyas own are beingoperated nearby

the speedwatertemperaturereadout isunrealistic or notpresent

bull sensor plug

the positionreadout isunrealistic or notpresent

bull the connectionbetween sounder andnavigator

bull navigator

37 DiagnosticsIf you feel your unit is not workingproperly conduct the diagnostic test tofind the problem If you cannot restorenormal operation contact your dealerfor advice

1 Turn on the power while pressing the[MENUESC] key Continue pressingthe [MENUESC] key until theInstallation menu appears

SIMULATION On

TEST LCD PATTERN MEMORY CLEAR

NMEA PORT InOutNMEA MIX Off GPS WAAS Off

SET BOTTOM LEVEL

Installation Menu

= Setting cannot be changed whenNMEA PORT setting is InIn

Installation menu2 Press to choose TEST3 Press to start the test

ROM OKRAM OKNMEA

Temp 682 deg F

Speed 100kmh

Power 124 VBody 39 deg C

Program No 0252318-01Push [MENU] 3 times to exit

Level bar

= Program version no

Water

TemperatureSpeedBattery VoltageTemperatureinside displayunit(Unit fixed atdeg C)

GPS (48502180) OK

Only when GP-310B is connected(For GP-320B 4850238)

Test display

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 2948

23

4 The ROM RAM and NMEA port arechecked with the results shown asOK or NG (No Good) For any NGrequest service (A special connectoris required to test the NMEA portNothing appears if no connector isconnected)

5 The squares at the right side of thetest display are for checking thecontrols Press each key and thearrows on the Cursor Pad one byone A controlrsquos correspondingon-screen square ldquolightsrdquo in black ifthe control is normal

6 To return to the Installation menupress the [MENUESC] key threetimes

7 To restore normal operation turn offthe power and turn it on again

38 Test PatternThis feature tests for proper display oftones

1 On the Installation menu press $ tochoose LCD PATTERN

2 Press to start the test The entirescreen is black

3 Press again and the screen turnswhite

4 Press again and the screenshows a four-toned display

5 Press again to return to theInstallation menu

6 To restore normal operation turn offthe power and then it on again

WHITE FOUR-TONE BLACK

Test patterns

39 Memory ClearThe memory can be cleared to startafresh with default menu settings

1 At the installation menu press $ tochoose MEMORY CLEAR

2 Press to open the optionswindow

YES NO

Clear memory display

3 Press to clear the memory Beepsare generated while the memory isbeing cleared

4 To restore normal operation turn offthe power and then turn it on again

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3048

24

4 INSTALLATION

41 Display UnitMounting considerations

The display unit can be installed on adesktop on the bulkhead or flushmounted in a panel When choosing alocation keep the following in mind

bull Keep the display unit out of directsunlight

bull The temperature and humidity should

be moderate and stablebull Locate the unit away from exhaust

pipes and ventsbull The mounting location should be well

ventilatedbull Mount the unit where shock and

vibration are minimalbull For maintenance and checking

purposes leave sufficient space atthe sides and rear of the unit andleave slack in cables

bull A magnetic compass will be affected ifthe display unit is placed too close toit Observe the following compasssafe distances to prevent disturbanceto the magnetic compassStandard compass 04 metersSteering compass 03 meters

Desktop overhead mounting1 Fix the bracket to a desktop or the

overhead with tapping screws(supplied)

2 Loosely screw knobs into the displayunit

3 Set the display unit to the bracketand then tighten the knobs

Mounting on the bulkhead Flush

mounting in a panelSee the instructions on the bulkhead orflush mounting template (supplied)

42 Thru-hull MountTransducer

Transducer mounting location

The thru-hull mount transducer

(520-5PSD 520-5MSD) provides thebest performance of all since thetransducer protrudes from the hull andthe effect of air bubbles and turbulencenear the hull skin is reduced When theboat has a keel the transducer shouldbe at least 30 cm away from it Typicalthru-hull mountings are shown in thefigure on the next page

The performance of this sounder isdirectly related to the mounting locationof the transducer especially forhigh-speed cruising The installationshould be planned in advance keepingthe standard cable length (8 m) and thefollowing factors in mindbull Air bubbles and turbulence caused by

movement of the boat seriouslydegrade the sounding capability of thetransducer The transducer shouldtherefore be located in a positionwhere water flow is the smoothestNoise from the propellers alsoadversely affects performance andthe transducer should not be mountednearby The lifting strakes arenotorious for creating acoustic noiseand these must be avoided bykeeping the transducer inboard ofthem

bull The transducer must always remain

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3148

25

submerged even when the boat isrolling pitching or up on a plane athigh speed

bull A practical choice would besomewhere between 13 and 12 of

the boatrsquos length from the stern Forplaning hulls a practical location isgenerally rather far astern so that thetransducer is always in waterregardless of the planing attitude

28

22

120

68

30

520-5PSD

24

120

68

87520-5MSD

Unit mm

Thru-hull mount transducer dimensions

Acceptable transducer mounting

locations

Position 12 to 13 of the hull from stern

15 to 30 cm off center line (inside first lifting strakes)

Within the wetted bottom area

Deadrise angle within 15 deg

HIGH SPEED-V HULL

Suitable transducer mounting locations

Typical thru-hull mounttransducer installations

FairingBlock

Flat Washer

Rubber Washer

Hull

Deep-V Hull

Hull

Flat Washer

Rubber Washer

Flat Hull

CorkWasher

Typical thru-hull mounttransducer installations

Procedure for installing thethru-hull mount transducer

1 With the boat hauled out of the watermark the location chosen formounting the transducer on thebottom of the hull

2 If the hull is not level within 15deg inany direction fairing blocks madeout of teak should be used betweenthe transducer and hull both insideand outside to keep the transducerface parallel with the water lineFabricate the fairing block as shownbelow and make the entire surfaceas smooth as possible to provide anundisturbed flow of water around thetransducer The fairing block shouldbe smaller than the transducer itselfto provide a channel to divert

turbulent water around the sides ofthe transducer rather than over itsface

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3248

26

BOWHole for stuffing tube

Upper Half

Lower Half

Saw along slopeof hull Construction of fairing block

3 Drill a hole just large enough to passthe threaded stuffing tube of thetransducer through the hull makingsure it is drilled vertically

4 Apply a sufficient amount of highquality caulking compound to the topsurface of the transducer around thethreads of the stuffing tube andinside the mounting hole (and fairingblocks if used) to ensure watertightmounting

5 Mount the transducer and fairingblocks and tighten the locking nutsBe sure that the transducer is

properly oriented and its workingface is parallel to the waterline

Note Do not over-stress the stuffingtube and locking nuts through excessivetightening since the wood block willswell when the boat is placed in thewater It is suggested that the nut betightened lightly at installation andretightened several days after the boat

has been launched

Transducer preparation

Before putting the boat in water wipethe face of the transducer thoroughlywith a detergent liquid soap This willlessen the time necessary for thetransducer to have good contact withthe water Otherwise the time requiredfor complete ldquosaturationrdquo ill belengthened and performance will bereduced

DO NOT paint the transducerPerformance will be affected

43 Transom MountTransducer

The transom mount transducer is verycommonly employed usually onrelatively small IO or outboard boatsDo not use this method on an inboardmotor boat because turbulence iscreated by the propeller ahead of thetransducer

520-5PWD

There are two methods of installationflush with hull (for flat hulls) andprojecting from hull (for deep V-hulls)

Flat Hull

D

Dgt50 cm

Deep-VHull

520-5PWD mounting locations

Installing the 520-5PWD on a flat hull

A suitable mounting location is at least50 cm away from the engine and wherethe water flow is smooth

1 Drill four pilot holes in the mountinglocation

2 Attach the transducer to the bracketwith 5 x 20 tapping screws(supplied)

3 Adjust the transducer position so thetransducer faces right to the bottom

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3348

27

Note If necessary to improve waterflow and minimize air bubblesstaying on the transducer faceincline the transducer about 5deg at therear This may require a certainamount of experimentation for finetuning at high cruising speeds

4 Fill the gap between the wedge frontof the transducer and transom withepoxy material to eliminate any airspaces

No1 M5 x 14

5 x 20

5 x 20

2 to 5

Tape

Hull

Transom mount transducer

mounting flush with hull

Installing the transom mounttransducer on a deep-V hull

This method is employed on deep-Vhulls and provides good performancebecause the effects of air bubbles areminimal Install the transducer parallelwith water surface not flush with hull Ifthe boat is placed on a trailer care mustbe taken not to damage the transducerwhen the boat is hauled out of the waterand put on the trailer

5 x 20

No 2M5 x 14

5 x 20

Transom mount transducermounted projecting from hull

525-5PWD

Choose the installation methoddepending on the rise angle of the hull

Transom

Transom

Stripe over 10

Parallel with hull

Mount at the stripe

less than 10

525-5PWD mounting location

Installing the 525-5PWD

Referring to ldquoInstalling the 520-5PWDrdquoin the left column for mounting of thebracket and the figure shown on the topof next page install the 525-5PWD tothe transom

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3448

28

2 to 5

Transducer

Bracket

Hull

Epoxy material

525-5PWD mounting

44 Inside-hullTransducer

The thru-hull mount transducer(520-5PSD 520-5MSD) may also beinstalled inside the hull following theprocedure below

Necessary tools

You will need the following toolsbull Sandpaper (100)bull Silicone sealantbull Silicone grease

Remarks on installationbull Turn off the engine and anchor the

boat while installing the equipmentbull Install the transducer in the engine

room

Choosing the mounting locationbull The mounting location should be

where the hull is of single-hullthickness and is void of air or flotationmaterials other than solid fiberglassbetween the transducer face and thewater

bull Do not place the transducer over hullstruts or ribs which run under the hull

bull Avoid a location where the risingangle of the hull exceeds 15deg tominimize the effect of the boatrsquosrolling

bull You will finalize the mounting location

through some trial and error Theprocedure for this is shown later

50 cm

50 cm15 cm15 cm

13

12

Transducer mountinglocation

Centerline

Inside-hull transducer mounting location

Attaching the transducer1 Clean the transducer face to remove

any foreign material Lightly roughenthe transducer face with 100sandpaper Also roughen the insideof the hull where the transducer is tobe mounted

2 Clean the transducer face again3 Warm the silicone sealant to 40degC

before usage to soften it Coat thetransducer face and mountinglocation with silicone sealant

Transducer

SiliconeSealant

Coating transducer facewith silicone sealant

4 Press the transducer firmly down onthe hull and gently twist it back andforth to remove any air which may betrapped in the silicone sealant

Checking the installation

1 Connect the battery to the display

unit2 Turn on the display unit

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3548

29

3 Press the [MODE] key to chooseSINGLE FREQ

4 Choose 50 kHz or 200 kHz and thenpress the [MENUESC] key to closethe mode menu

5 Press the [MENU] to show the mainmenu and then press to select

Auto mode6 Press to choose Off7 Press the [MENUESC] key8 Press the [GAIN] key to set the gain

to ldquo5rdquo and then press the[MENUESC] key

9 Press the [RANGE] key to set therange to 10 meters (feet) and thenpress the [MENUESC] key

10 If the bottom is displayed in darkgray and the depth indicationappears the mounting location issuitable Go to ldquoFinal preparationrdquo

11 If the bottom is not displayed in darkgray tone the mounting location maybe unsuitable Do the followinga) Press the [POWERBRILL] key to

turn off the powerb) Gently dismount the transducer

with a piece of woodc) Reattach the transducer

elsewhere as shown in ldquoAttachingthe transducerrdquo

d) Check the installation again

Final preparation

Support the transducer with a piece ofwood to keep it in place while it is drying

Let the transducer dry 24-72 hours

45 Optional Triducer525ST-MSD

The optional triducer 525ST-MSD isdesigned for thru-hull mounting Forhow to install this transducer seeparagraph 42

φ79 mm

33 mm200-12 UNthreads

φ51 mm

27 mm

7 mm

140 mm Triducer 525ST-MSD

525ST-PWD

The Transom Mount Transducer orTRIDUCER reg Multisensor with IntegralRelease Bracket 525ST-PWD ismanufactured by AIRMAR Co Theseinstructions are also included with the

sensor

Pre-test for speed and temperature

Connect the sensor to the instrumentand spin the paddlewheel Check for aspeed reading and the approximate airtemperature If there is no readingreturn the sensor to your place ofpurchase

Tools and materials needed

ScissorsMasking tapeSafety gogglesDust maskElectric drillDrill bit for

Bracket holes 4mm 23 or 964rdquoFiberglass hull chamfer bit(preferred)6mm or 14rdquo

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3648

30

Transom hole 19mm or 34rdquo(optional)

Cable clamp holes 3mm or 18rdquoScrewdriversStraight edgeMarine sealantPencilZip-tiesWater-based antifouling paint(mandatory in salt water )

Mounting location

To ensure the best performance thesensor must be submerged inaeration-free and turbulence-free water

Mount the sensor close to the centerlineof the boat On slower heavierdisplacement hulls positioning it fartherfrom the centerline is acceptable

Allow adequate space above thebracket for it to release and rotate thesensor upward

Height

Height withoutspeed sensor191mm (7-12)Height withspeed sensor213mm (8-12)

Height required at mounting location

Note 1 Do not mount the sensor in anarea of turbulence or bubbles nearwater intake or discharge openingsbehind strakes struts fittings or hull

irregularities behind eroding paint (anindication of turbulence)Note 2 Avoid mounting the sensorwhere the boat may be supportedduring trailering launching hauling andstorageNote 3 For single drive boat mounton the starboard side at least 75 mm(3rdquo) beyond the swing radius of thepropeller

75 mm(3)

minimum beyondswing radius

Mounting location on single drive boat

Note 4 For twin drive boat mountbetween the drives

Installation of bracket

1 Cut out the installation template

shown on the next page2 At the selected location position thetemplate so the arrow at the bottomis aligned with the bottom edge ofthe transom Being sure the templateis parallel to the waterline tape it inplace

Align template vertically

Deadrise angle

Slope of hullparallel towaterline

Align template arrow withbottom edge of transom

Positioning the template

Warning Always wear safetygoggles and a dust mask

3 Using a 4 mm 23 or 964rdquo bit drillthree holes 22 mm (78rdquo) deepat the locations indicated To preventdrilling too deeply wrap maskingtape around the bit 22 mm (78rdquo)from the pointFiberglass hull Minimize surfacecracking by chamfering the gelcoatIf a chamfer bit or countersink bit is

not available start drilling with a6mm or 14rdquo bit to a depth of 1 mm(116rdquo)

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3748

31

4 If you know your transom angle the

bracket is designed for a standard13deg transom angle11deg-18deg angle No shim is requiredSkip to step 3 in ldquoAdjustingrdquoOther angles The shim is requiredSkip to step 2 of ldquoAdjustingrdquoIf you do not know the transom angletemporarily attach the bracket andsensor to the transom to determine ifthe plastic shim is needed

5 Using the two 10 x 1-14rdquo

self-tapping screws temporarilyscrew the bracket to the hull DONOT tighten the screws completelyat this time Follow the step 1-4 inldquoAttaching the Sensor to the Bracketrdquobefore proceeding with ldquoAdjustingrdquo

Installation templatefor starboard side of boat

Drill at locations labeled Bfor the following transom angles

16 deg through 22 deg

Drill at locations labeled Afor the following transom angles

2 deg through 15 deg

Align arrow with bottom of transom

AA A

BB B

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3848

32

Adjusting

1 Using a straight edge sight theunderside of the sensor relative tothe underside of the hull The sternof the sensor should be 1-3 mm

(116-18rdquo) below the bow of thesensor or parallel to the bottom ofthe hull

11 deg transom angleNO SHIM

12-18 deg transom angleNO SHIM

2 deg -10 deg transom

angle

19 deg -22 deg transom

angleshim withtaper up

shim withtaper down

parallelparallel parallel

slightangle

angletoo steep

anglereversed

YES NONO

YES YESYES

Sensor position and transom angle

Note Do not position the bow of thesensor lower than the stern becauseaeration will occur

2 To adjust the sensorrsquos angle relativeto the hull use the tapered plasticshim provided If the bracket hasbeen temporarily fastened to thetransom remove it Key the shim in

place on the back of the bracket2deg-10deg transom angle (steppedtransom and jet boats) Positionthe shim with the tapered end down19deg-22deg transom angle (smallaluminum and fiberglass boats) Position the shim with the taperedend up

3 If the bracket has been temporarilyfastened to the transom remove it

Apply a marine sealant to thethreads of the two 10 x 1-14rdquo self

tapping screws to prevent waterseeping into the transom Screw thebracket to the hull Do not tighten thescrews completely at this time

4 Repeat step 1 to ensure that theangle of the sensor is correctNote Do not position the sensorfarther into the water than necessaryto avoid increasing drag spray andwater noise and reducing boatspeed

5 Using the vertical adjustment spaceon the bracket slots slide the sensorup or down to provide a projection of3 mm (18rdquo) Tighten the screws

Cable cover

Cableclamp

50 mm (2)

Hull projection 3 mm (18)

Vertical adjustment and cable routing

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3948

33

Attaching the sensor to the bracket

1 If the retaining cover near the top ofthe bracket is closed open it bydepressing the latch and rotating thecover downward

Step 1 Step 2

Latch

Retainingcover

Pivotarm (2)

Slot (2)

Step 4

Step 3

Attaching the sensor to the bracket

2 Insert the sensorrsquos pivot arms intothe slots near the top of the bracket

3 Maintain pressure until the pivotarms click into place

4 Rotate the sensor downward until thebottom snaps into the bracket

5 Close the retaining cover to preventthe accidental release of the sensorwhen the boat is underway

Cable routing

Route the sensor cable over thetransom through a drain hole orthorough a new hole drilled in thetransom above the waterline

Never cut the cable or remote the

connector this will void the warranty Always wear safety goggles and a dustmask

1 If a hole must be drilled choose alocation well above the waterlineCheck for obstructions such as trimtabs pumps or wiring inside the hullMark the location with a pencil Drilla hole through the transom using a19 mm or 34rdquo bit (to accommodatethe connector)

2 Route the cable over or through thetransom

3 On the outside of the hull secure thecable against the transom using thecable clamps Position a cable clamp50 mm(2rdquo) above the bracket andmark the mounting hole with apencil

4 Position the second cable clamphalfway between the first clamp andthe cable hole Mark this mountinghole

5 If a hole has been drilled in thetransom open the appropriate slot inthe transom cable cover Position thecover over the cable where it entersthe hull Mark the two mounting

holes6 At each of the marked locations usea 3 mm or 18rdquo bit to drill a hole 10mm (38rdquo) deep The prevent drillingtoo deeply wrap masking tapearound the bit 10 mm (38rdquo) from thepoint

7 Apply marine sealant to the threadsof the 6 x 12rdquo self-tapping screw toprevent water from seeping into the

transom If you have drilled a holethrough the transom apply marinesealant to the space around thecable where it passes through thetransom

8 Position the two cable clamps andfasten them in place If used pushthe cable cover over the cable andscrew it in place

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4048

34

9 Route the cable to the instrumentbeing careful not to tear the cable

jacket when passing it though thebulkhead(s) and other parts of theboat To reduce electricalinterference separate the sensorcable from other electrical wiring andldquonoiserdquo sources Coil any excesscable and secure it in place withzip-ties to prevent damage

46 Optional WaterTemperatureSpeedSensor

Water temperaturespeed sensorST-02MSB and ST-02PSB which aredesigned for thru-hull mounting areoptionally available Install them asshown below

Mounting considerations

Choose a suitable mounting locationconsidering the followingbull Choose a place free from vibrationbull Choose a mid-boat flat position The

sensor does not have to be installedperfectly perpendicular The sensormust not be damaged in dry-dockingoperation

bull Choose a place apart from equipmentgenerating heat

bull Choose a place in the forwarddirection viewing from the drain holeto allow for circulation of coolingwater

1 Dry-dock the boat2 Make a hole of approx 51 mm

diameter in the mounting location3 Unfasten locknut and remove the

sensor section4 Apply high-grade sealant to the

flange of the sensor5 Pass the sensor casing through thehole

6 Face the notch on the sensor towardboatrsquos bow and tighten the flange

7 Set the sensor section to the sensorcasing and tighten the locknut

8 Launch the boat and check for waterleakage around the sensor

Locknut

Face notchtoward bow

Flange Nut

Coat withsilicone sealant Brim

φ 77

51

123

Water temperaturespeed sensor

ST-02MSB ST-02PSB

47 Wiring

Connect the LS-4100 powerdata cableassy MJ-A7SPF0005-020 (2 msupplied) to the POWER and thetransducer cable to the XDR connectorRefer to the interconnection diagram toconnect cables Leave slack in cables tofacilitate checking and maintenance

Note The fuse holder contains a springwhich fixes the fuse To preventdetachment of the spring which wouldcause loss of power tie the line asshown below

+ line (red)

Fuse holder

Cable tie How to fix fuse holder

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4148

35

Establishing the ground

The ground wire (125 sq or more localsupply) should be as short as possible

The signal line ground is isolated from

the chassis ground however the powerline is not insulated Therefore whenconnecting eternal equipment havingpositive ground do not ground thesignal line to the chassis If excessivenoise shows on the screen the groundmay be inadequate In this case attacha steel plate measuring 20 cm by 30 cmon the outside of the hull to provide aground point Connect the ground wire

there Use a ldquoclosedrdquo type lug ( ) tomake the connection at the display unitDo not use an ldquoopenrdquo type lug ( )

Optional equipment

POWER connector

The power supply port is commonlyused for connection of externalequipment such as a GPS receiver orwind indicator Use the powerdatacable MJ-A7SPF0005-020 (supplied) forconnection referring the figure shown inthe right column

Connector Color Remarks

1 TD-A WHT2 TD-B BLU

IEC-61162-1NMEA0183

3 RD-A YEL

4 RD-B GRN

IEC-61162-1

NMEA01835 + RED

6 - BLKPower input12 VDC

7 FG

Water tempspeed sensor

Connect the optional water tempspeedsensor to the XDR connector with theoptional converter connector (Type02S4147) as shown below

Tape connectors withvulcaninzing tapeand then vinyl tapeto waterproof themBind tape ends withcable ties to preventtape from unraveling

Connect to XDR portat rear of display unit

MJ-A10SPF

MJ-A10SRMDMJ-A6SRMD

Fromtransducer

Fromsensor

Connection of converterconnector 02S4147

48 IEC 61162-1 DataSentences

The tables below show the datasentences which can be input to andoutput from the LS-4100 Thetransmission speed for both input andoutput is 4800 bps Data is output attwo-second intervals

Input data sentences

Sentence Meaning

BWC Bearing and distance towaypoint

GGA Global positioning system(GPS) fix data

GLL Geographic position -latitudelongitude

HDG Heading deviation and variationHDT Heading true

MDA Atmospheric pressure

MTW Water temperature

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4248

36

Input data sentences (conrsquot)

Sentence MeaningMWV Wind speed and

angleRMA Recommended

minimum specificLORAN-C dataRMB Recommended

minimum navigationinformation

RMC Recommendedminimum specificGPSTRANSIT data

VHW Water speed andheading

VTG Course over groundand ground speedXTE Cross track error

Output data sentences

Sentence MeaningDBT (Ver 15) Depth below

transducerDPT (Ver 20 Ver30)

Depth

MTW Water temperatureRMB (Ver 20) Recommended

minimumnavigationinformation

VHW Water speed andheading

TLL Target positionoutput by [MARK]key

= Available with connection of optionalsensorsnavaid

49 Installation MenuThe installation menu mainly containsitems which are set at installation

1 Turn on the power while pressing the[MENUESC] key Continue pressing

the [MENUESC] key until theInstallation menu appears

SIMULATION On

TEST LCD PATTERN MEMORY CLEAR

NMEA PORT InOutNMEA MIX OffGPS WAAS Off

SET BOTTOM LEVEL

Installation Menu

= Setting cannot be changed whenNMEA PORT setting is InIn

Installation menu

SIMULATION The simulation modeprovides without connection of thetransducer simulated operation of theequipment using internally generatedechoes All controls are operative Themessage ldquoSIMrdquo appears at the top rightcorner on the screen when thesimulation mode is active

1 At the installation menu press toopen the simulation mode optionswindow

2 Press to choose ldquoOnrdquo to turn onthe simulation mode

3 Press the [POWERBRILL] keyabout three seconds to turn off thepower

4 Press the [POWERBRILL] key toturn on the power ldquoSIMrdquo appears atthe top right corner of the display

5 To turn off the simulation modeselect Off at step 2

NMEA po r t se tup(NMEA PO RT NMEA M IX)

The POWER port can function as aninput port or inputoutput port Changethe setting to ldquoInInrdquo when connectingGP-310B320B and a wind sensor

When connecting the GP-310B320Band a wind sensor first turn on ldquoGPS

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4348

37

WAASrdquo (in the Installation menu) andthen select ldquoInInrdquo as the NMEA portsetting

1 Turn on the power while pressingand holding down the [MENUESC]key Continue pressing the[MENUESC] key until theInstallation menu appears

2 Choose NMEA PORT and thenpress to display the NMEA portoptions window

3 Use or to choose InOut orInIn as appropriate

InOut Input and Output (default

setting)InIn Input only (Available withconnection of the GP-310B320Band a wind sensor)

4 Press choose NMEA MIX andthen press to display the NMEAMIX options window

5 Use or to choose Off or OnChoose On to output input data

Off Outputs the data sentences ofLS-4100 only

On Outputs the data sentences ofLS-4100 and sentences which areinput from other equipment

6 To restore normal operation turn offthe power and then turn it on again

GPS WAAS Chooses how to use theWAAS signal when connecting with a

WAAS receiver for example GP-320B

Note WAAS is currently in thedevelopmental phase During thedevelopmental phase the reliability andavailability of the WAAS signal cannotbe guaranteed Therefore any positiondata should be verified against othersources to confirm reliability

1 Display the Installation menu2 Choose GPS WAAS and then press

to open the GPS WAAS options

window

Off

WAAS options window3 Press or to choose ldquoWAAS-02rdquo

(test signal) When the systembecomes operational (in 2003) setto ldquo00rdquo (regular WAAS signal)

4 Turn off the power

BOTTOM LEVEL If the depthindication is unstable in automaticoperation or the bottom echo cannot bedisplayed in the darkest gray tone byadjusting the gain controls in manualoperation you may adjust the bottomecho level detection circuit for both 50kHz and 200 kHz to stabilize theindication Generally lower the bottomlevel for inner hull installation where thereceive level is too low If the bottomlevel is too low it may be difficult todiscriminate fish from the bottomresulting in unstable depth indication

And if the bottom level is too high thedepth indication may not appear

1 At the installation menu press tochoose SET BOTTOM LEVEL andthen press Several seconds laterthe following display appears

Bottom level +0 (200k -100 - +100 ) +0 ( 50k -100 - +100 )

Bottom level display

2 While observing the picture use or to set 200 kHz or to set50 kHz Set up for optimum picture

3 To restore normal operation turn offthe power and then it on again

Note The mode must be other thanldquoNAV DATArdquo to show the bottom leveldisplay

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4448

SP - 1 E2371S01C

SPECIFICATIONS OF ECHO SOUNDER LS-4100

1 GENERAL11 TX Frequency 50 kHz or 200 kHz 50200 kHz dual transmitting selectable12 Transmit Method Single or dual transmitting

13 Output Power 300 Wrms14 TX Rate Max 500 pulsemin15 Pulse-length 01 to 08 ms

2 DISPLAY UNIT21 Display system 5-inch monochrome LCD 76 mm (W) x 100 mm (H) 240 x 320 dots22 Display Mode Single frequency (highlow freq) Dual-frequency Zoom Nav data-12

Marker zoom Bottom zoom Bottom-lock23 Display Range

Range SettingRange

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

Display

rangeMeter 5 10 20 40 80 150 200 300 2-500

Feet 15 30 60 120 200 400 600 1000 7-1500

Fathoms 3 5 10 20 40 80 100 150 1-250

PassiBraza 3 5 10 30 50 100 150 200 1-300

24 Range Shift 0-500 m 0-1500 ft 0-250 fa 0-300 pb25 Expansion Range Bottom-lock expansion 3 to 10 m

Sectional expansion 2 to 50 m26 Display Advance Speed 8 steps (LinesTX Freeze 1161814121121 41)

3 INTERFACE31 Input data sentences IEC61162-1NMEA0183 Ver 152030

GGA RMA RMB RMC BWC GLL HDT HDG VTG VHW MTWMWV MDA XTE

32 Output data sentences IEC61162-1NMEA0183 Ver 152030 interval 2 sMTW VHW DBT DPT RMB TLL by key operating External data required

4 POWER SUPPLY41 Display Unit 12 VDC 05 A

5 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITION51 Ambient Temperature Display unit -15degC to +55degC52 Relative Humidity 93 or less at 40degC53 Waterproof IPX5

6 COATING COLOR61 Display Unit N30

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4548

M a r

4

0 3

D-1

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4648

Mar 4 03

Mar 4 03

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4748

M a r

3

0 3

S-1

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4848

FURUNO Authorized DistributorDealer FURUNO Authorized DistributorDealer

9-52 Ashihara-cho9-52 Ashihara-choNishinomiya 662-8580 JAPANNishinomiya 662-8580 JAPAN

Telephone Telephone 0798-65-21110798-65-2111FaxFax 0798-65-42000798-65-4200

FIRST EDITION FIRST EDITION MARMAR 20032003Printed in JapanPrinted in Japan All rights reserved All rights reserved

B1B1 SEPSEP 09 200509 2005

Pub NoPub No OME-23710OME-23710 00014698000000146980000001469800000014698000(( DAMIDAMI )) LS-4100LS-4100

0 0 0 1 4 6 9 8 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 4 6 9 8 0 0 0

Page 3: OME23710B_1_LS4100

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 348

i

SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS

Safety Instructions for the Operator

W RNING

Do not open the equipment

There are no uer-serviceable partsinside

Do not disassemble or modify theequipment

Fire electrical shock or serious injurycan result

Immediately turn off the power at theswitchboard if the equipment isemitting smoke or fire

Continued use of the equipment cancause fire or electrical shock Contact aFURUNO agent for service

Do not maneuver the vessel basedon the depth indication alone

Grounding may result

Use the proper fuseFuse rating is shown on the equipmentUse of a wrong fuse can result indamage to the equipment

Do no turn on the equipment with thetransducer out of water

The transducer may be damaged

The picture is not refreshed whenpicture advancement is stopped

Maneuvering the vessel in this conditionmay result in a dangerous situation

Use the proper gain setting

Incorrect gain may produce wrong depth

indication possibly resulting in adangerous situation See Adjusting thegain on page 7 for details

UTION

WARNINGTo avoid electrical shock do notremove cover No user-serviceableparts inside

NameWarning LabelType 02-146-1022Code No 100-306-050

The high quality LCD shows 9999of its pixels The remaining 01 maydrop out or brighten due to the pro-perty of the LCD however this is nota sign of malfunction

A warning label is attached to theequipment Do not remove the labelIf the label is missing or damagedcontact a FURUNO agent or dealer

NOTI E

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 448

ii

Safety Instructions for the Installer

W R NINGTurn off the power at the switchboardbefore beginning the installation

Fire or electrical shock can result if thepower is left on

Be sure no water leaks in at the trans-ducer or sensor mounting location

Water leakage can sink the vessel Alsoconfirm that the transducer and sensorwill not loosen by ships vibration Theinstaller of the equipment is solelyresponsible for the proper installation ofthe equipment FURUNO will assume noresponsibility for any damage associatedwith improper installation

Use the specified power cable

Use of other power cable may result infire

UTIONDo not install the equipment whereair bubbles and noise are present

Performance will be affected

The following are guidelines forhandling of the transducer cable

- Do not locate near oils and fuels- Locate it in a safe place- Do no paint the cable

The sheath of the cable is made ofchloroprene rubber (or polychloridevinyl) For this reason do not paintthe cable

Observe the following compass safedistances to prevent interference to amagnetic compass

Displayunit

Standard Steeringcompass compass

04 m 03 m

Do not turn on the equipment with thetransducer out of water

The transducer may be damaged

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 548

iii

FOREWORD

A Word to LS-4100OwnersCongratulations on your choice of theFURUNO LS-4100 5rdquo Echo SounderWe are confident you will see why theFURUNO name has becomesynonymous with quality and reliability

For over 50 years FURUNO ElectricCompany has enjoyed an enviable

reputation for innovative anddependable marine electronicsequipment This dedication toexcellence is furthered by our extensiveglobal network of agents and dealers

This equipment is designed andconstructed to meet the rigorousdemands of the marine environmentHowever no machine can perform its

intended function unless operated andmaintained properly Please carefullyread and follow the recommendedprocedures for operation andmaintenance

We would appreciate hearing from youthe end-user about whether we areachieving our purposes

Thank you for considering andpurchasing FURUNO equipment

FeaturesThe FURUNO LS-4100 is a dualfrequency (50 kHz and 200 kHz)monochrome LCD echo sounderComprised of a display unit and atransducer the LS-4100 displaysunderwater conditions on a bright 5-inchmonochrome LCD

The main features of the LS-4100 are

bull Bright 5-inch monochrome LCD givesexcellent readability even in broaddaylight

bull Automatic function permitsunattended adjustment of range andgain The range scale and gainautomatically change to display thebottom in the darkest gray tone on thelower half of the screen

bull User-programmable nav data displaysprovide analog and digital nav data

bull Alarms Bottom Fish (bottom-lockand normal) Speed WaterTemperature and Arrival (Speed andarrival alarms require appropriatesensor water temperature alarmrequires water temperature data)

bull White line feature helps discriminate

fish lying near the bottombull Destination waypoint feature provides

range bearing and time-to-go todestination waypoint (up to 12waypoints)

bull Waterproof construction permitsinstallation on open bridge

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 648

iv

SYSTEM OVERVIEW

System configuration

Power supply12 VDC

DISPLAY UNITLS-4100

GPS Navigatoror

Wind Indicator

Transducer

Water temperature Speed sensor

ST-02MSBST-02PSB

520-5PSD520-5MSD520-5PWD 525-5PWD525ST-MSD525ST-PWD

Standard Option User supply

Note Contact yourdealer for connection ofother equipment

POWERBRILL

MARK

GAIN

RANGE

ESCMENUMODE

LS-4100

ECHO SOUNDER

Equipment lists

Standard supply

Name Type Code No Qty RemarksDisplay Unit LS-4100 mdash 1

520-5PSD 000-015-204 Thru-hull mount520-5MSD 000-015-212 Thru-hull mount520-5PWD 000-015-126

Transducer

525-5PWD 000-146-966Transom mount

525ST-MSD 000-015-263 Thru-hull mountTriducer (transducerplus spdtemp sensor) 525ST-PWD 000-015-261

1

Transom mount

Installation Materials(CP02-07401)

bull Tapping screw (4 pcs 5 x 20 SUS304 000-802-081)bull Washer head screw B (4 pcs M4 x 20 SUS304 000-804-742)bull Cable assy (1 pc MJ-A7SPF0005-020 000-139-384 for power and data)

Spare Parts(SP02-04801) Fuse (2 pc FGMB 1A 125V Code No 000-114-805)

Template C22-00301 (000-146-981 for flush mount)C22-00302 (000-146-982 for bulkhead)

Optional equipment

Name Type Code No Qty RemarksConversion Cable 02S4147 000-141-082 1 For spdtemp sensor

ST-02MSB 000-137-986Water Temperature ampSpeed Sensor ST-02PSB 000-137-987

Selectone Thru-hull type

Inner Hull Kit S 22S0191 000-802-598 1

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 748

1

1 OPERATION

11 Control Description

Cursor PadSelects menu itemsshifts VRM

Openscloses menuescapes from current

operation

Selects display mode

Adjusts gain

Selects basic display range

Long press Turns power onoffMomentary press Adjusts display contrast and brilliance

Outputs LL positionto external equipmentregisters selected positionas waypoint

POWER

BRILL

MARK

GAIN

RANGE

ESCMENU

MODE

LS-4100

ECHO SOUNDER

Display unit

How to remove the hard cover

Place your thumbs at the center of thecover and then lift the cover whilepressing it with your thumbs

12 Power OnOffPress the [POWERBRILL] key more

than one second to turn on the powerThe unit beeps the startup screenappears and then the equipmentchecks the ROM and RAM for properoperation and displays program number(If ldquoNGrdquo (No Good) appears try to pressany key except the [POWERBRILL] keyto start operation However theequipment may not work properlyContact your dealer) You may

press any key after the completion ofthe equipment check to start operationsooner

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 848

2

Program version no

ROM OK RAM OK Program No 0252318-01

5 ECHO SOUNDER

FURUNO ELECTRIC CO LTD

Start-up screen

To turn off the power press and holddown the [POWERBRILL] key until thescreen goes blank The time remaining

until power is turned off is counted downon the screen

Note The example screens shown inthis manual may not match the screensyou see on your display The screenyou see depends on your systemconfiguration and equipment settings

13 Adjusting DisplayContrast Brilliance

1 Press the [POWERBRILL] keymomentarily to show thebrilliancecontrast adjustmentwindow

CONTST 4 Min Max

BRILLMin Max

4

Brilliancecontrast adjustment window

2 For contrast press the[POWERBRILL] key to adjustcontrast cyclically (You may also use or on the Cursor Pad to adjustcontrast) (Adjustable range 0 to 9)

3 To adjust brilliance use or $ (Adjustable range 0 to 4)

4 Press the [MENUESC] key to closethe brilliancecontrast adjustmentwindow

Note 1 When the power is reappliedafter turning off the equipment withminimum brilliance minimum brilliancewill be set after the equipment goesthrough its initial start up (The start upscreen appears with the maximumbrilliance) Adjust the brilliance asnecessary

Note 2 Setting windows other thanthose on menus are erased if there isno operation within about sevenseconds

14 Choosing a DisplayFrequency

Seven displays are available singlefrequency (50 or 200 kHz) dualfrequency marker-zoom bottom-zoombottom-lock and nav data (twodisplays)

1 Press the [MODE] key to show themode selection window

MODE

SINGLE FREQDUAL FREQMARKER ZOOMBOTTOM ZOOMBOTTOM LOCKNAV DATA-1NAV DATA-250kHz 200kHz

Mode selection window

2 Press the [MODE] key again withinseven seconds to choose a modeYou may also choose a mode with or $

3 For modes other than DUAL FREQchoose frequency Press for 50kHz or for 200 kHz

4 Press the [MENUESC] key to closethe window

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 948

3

Single frequency display

50 kHz

The sounder uses ultrasonic signals todetect bottom conditions The lower thefrequency of the signal the wider thedetection area Therefore the 50 kHzfrequency is useful for general detectionand judging bottom condition

200 kHz

The higher the frequency of theultrasonic signal the better theresolution For this reason the 200 kHzfrequency is ideal for detailed

observation of fish schools

50 kHz

200 kHz

Frequency and coverage area

466

FishSchool

Bottom

0

20

40

50k 1100

Level Bar

Depth

Frequency

Picture Advance Speed

Range Scale

Mode(AUTO or MANUAL)

407 degF162kt Nav Display

MinuteMarker(Shows time

Each baris 30 sec) TransmissionLine

60

Typical 50 kHz display

Dual frequency display

The 50 kHz picture appears on the leftthe 200 kHz picture on the right Thisdisplay is useful for comparing the samepicture with two different transmitting

frequencies

50 kHz 200 kHzpicture picture

496

0050200 11

0

20

40

60

80

20

40

60

80 Dual frequency display

Marker-zoom display

This mode expands chosen area of thenormal picture to full vertical size of thescreen on the left-half window You mayspecify the portion to expand byoperating the VRM (Variable RangeMarker) which you can shift with or$ The area between the VRM andzoom range marker is expanded

Zoomedfishschool

Single frequency display

Variable rangemarker

This sectionis zoomed

Zoom marker

Marker-zoom display

170

250

0

Fishschool

0

40

10

20

30

0050k 11

21

20

19

18

17

22

Marker-zoom display

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 1048

4

Bottom-zoom display

This mode expands bottom and bottomfish in the range width set with ZOOMRANGE of the SYSTEM menu Thismode is useful for determining bottom

contour When the bottom depthincreases the display shift to keep thebottom echo at the lower part of thescreen

0

Bottom-zoom display

298

Bottom

0

40

10

20

30

32

31

30

29

28

27

Switched withdepth

Singlefrequencydisplay

Zoommarker

0050k 11

Bottom-zoom display

Bottom-lock display

The bottom-lock display provides anormal picture on the right half of thescreen and a 15 feet (5 meter) widelayer in contact with the bottom isexpanded onto the left half of the screenThis mode is useful for detecting bottomfish = Operator selectable

Bottom-lock display

Zoommarker

Zoomedfish

This sectionis zoomed

217

0

Singlefrequencydisplay

Fishschool

0

40

Bottom displayed flat

10

20

30

0

1

2

3

4

550k 11

Bottom-lock display

Nav data displays

The nav data displays appear on the leftof the screen Data other than depthrequires appropriate sensor

You can display between two and fouritems in a nav data display and choosethe item and order to display them Seeparagraph 116 to choose the items todisplay ldquoNAV DATA-1rdquo and ldquoNAVDATA-2rdquo in paragraph 21 to choose thenumber of items to display

Depth

694 m

Trip meter

100 nm

Odometer

56 nm

NAV DATA-1 display

NAV DATA-2 display

Temperature

655 deg F

172

1 05 0 05 1

025 nm

XTE

Speed

kt

20

50

40

60

30

10

0

Sample NAV DATA displays(Default setting)

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 1148

5

15 Menu OperatingProcedure

The LS-4100 has three menus MainSystem and Installation Below is the

basic menu operating procedure1 Press the [MENUESC] key to openthe main menu Page 1 or Page 2 ofthe main menu appears dependingon the page last used

[MENU] Exit

(12)

Note SHIFT and CLUTTER arenot available in the auto mode

AUTO MODE Off SHIFT 0ftPIC ADVANCE 11NOISE LIMIT Off CLUTTER Off SIGNAL LEVEL Off

A-SCOPE Off HUE DayWHITE LINE Off DEEP GAIN Low

Pageno

Main menu page 1

2 Use or $ to select an item Toview page 2 of the main menu press$ until showing the display below

[MENU] Exit

(22)

GOTO WPT Off WAYPOINT LIST

TRIP RESET

GAIN ADJ 200 +0GAIN ADJ 50 +0DRAFT 00ft

ALARM MENUSYSTEM MENU

Main menu page 2

3 Press to show selected itemrsquosoptions window The example shownat the top of the right column is theoptions window for AUTO MODE

Off CruisingFishing

Auto mode options window

4 Use or $ to choose option or setnumeric value

5 Press the [MENUESC] key to closethe menu or press to continuemenu operation

16 Automatic OperationHow automatic operation works

The automatic function automatically

chooses the proper gain range scaleand clutter It works as followsbull The range changes automatically to

display the bottom echo on thescreen

bull The gain is automatically adjusted todisplay the bottom echo in the darkesttone

bull Clutter (on the menu) whichsuppresses low-level noise isautomatically adjusted

Choosing automatic operation

The automatic mode provides twochoices of modes cruising and fishing1 Press the [MENUESC] key to open

the main menu2 Press to choose AUTO MODE

from page 1 of the menu3 Press to open the mode options

window4 Choose Cruising or Fishing as

appropriate

ldquoCruisingrdquo is for tracking the bottomldquoFishingrdquo is for searching fish schoolsSince ldquoCruisingrdquo uses a higher clutterrejection setting than fishing it is notrecommended for fish detection -weak fish echoes may not bedisplayed ldquoFishingrdquo clearly displaysweaker echoes

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 1248

6

5 Press the [MENUESC] key to closethe menu

The auto mode in use is shown as(Auto-Fishing) or

(Auto-Cruising) at the top left corner onthe screen

Note When in the auto mode SHIFTand CLUTTER cannot be adjustedmanually

Range offset

To display the bottom tail in detail in theautomatic mode offset the range as

below1 Press the [+] or [-] key of the

[RANGE] key

+0 ft

AUTO RANGE OFFSET

Auto range offset window

2 Press the [+] or [-] key of the[RANGE] key again to choose offsetdesired (range -100 to +300 ft)Note that if the basic range ischanged the offset is returned to ldquo0rdquo

3 Press the [MENUESC] key to finish

Gain offset

Gain offset lets you override automaticgain adjustment1 Press the [GAIN] key

Min Max 0

AUTO GAIN OFFSET

Auto gain offset window

2 Press or key to offset gain(setting range ndash5 to +5) The gainselected is shown at the top of thescreen asG (Gain) + (or -) XX (offset value)

3 Press the [MENUESC] key to finish

17 Manual OperationChoosing the manual mode

1 Press the [MENUESC] key to openthe main menu

2 Press to choose AUTO MODEfrom page 1 of the menu3 Press to show the window4 Choose Off with 5 Press the [MENUESC] key to close

the menu appears at the topleft corner on the screen

Choosing range

The basic range and range shiftingfunctions used together give you themeans to choose the depth you can seeon the screen The basic range can bethought of as providing a ldquowindowrdquo intothe water column and range shifting asmoving the ldquowindowrdquo to the desireddepth

Choosing basic range

The basic range may be chosen withthe [RANGE] key from the eight rangesshown in the table shown below (ldquoPBrdquoin the table means PassiBraza) Thesetting range can be arranged throughthe SYSTEM menu

Default ranges

Basic RangeUnit1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

meters 5 10 20 40 80 150 200 300

feet 15 30 60 120 200 400 600 1000

fathoms 3 5 10 20 40 80 100 150

hiro 4 8 15 30 50 100 150 200

PB 3 5 10 30 50 100 150 200

Japanese unit of depth measurement1 Press the [+] or [-] key of the

[RANGE] key and the display shouldnow look something like the one onat the top of the next page

2 Press the [+] or [-] key of the[RANGE] key again to choose abasic range

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 1348

7

1000ft 600ft 400ft 200ft 120ft 60ft 30ft 15ft

Basic ranges (default)3 Press the [MENUESC] key to close

the window

Shifting the range

The basic range may be shifted up ordown in the manual mode as follows

Display

Window can beshifted up anddown to selectthe depth

Range and display shift concept

1 Press the [MENUESC] key to openthe main menu

2 Choose SHIFT from page 1 of themenu

3 Press to open the shift optionswindow

0ft

Shift window

4 Use or $ to choose amount ofshift desired

5 Press the [MENUESC] key to closethe window

Note The picture may not be displayedif the amount of shift is greater thanactual depth

Adjusting the gain

The [GAIN] key adjusts the sensitivity ofthe receiver Generally use a highergain setting for greater depths and alower setting for shallower waters

Use the proper gain setting

Incorrect gain may produce wrong depthindication possibly resulting in a dangeroussituation

UTION

Gain too high Gain proper Gain too low Examples of proper and improper gain

1 Press the [GAIN] key and the displayshown below appears

Min Max

50k 3

200k 2

GAIN

Gain adjustment window

2 When using the dual frequencydisplay press or $ to choosefrequency

3 Press the [GAIN] key to set (Youmay also use or ) Adjust so thata slight amount of noise remains onthe screen

4 Press the [MENUESC] key to closethe gain adjustment window

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 1448

8

18 Measuring DepthThe VRM (Variable Range Marker)functions to measure the depth to fishschools etc1 Press or $ to place the VRM

on the object which you wish tomeasure range

2 Read the VRM depth just abovethe VRM

0

20

40

60

80496

398

VRM

VRM depth

50k 11

How to measure depth with the VRM

19 Choosing PictureAdvance Speed

The picture advance speed determineshow quickly the vertical scan lines runacross the screen When choosing apicture advance speed keep in mindthat a fast advance speed will expandthe size of the fish school horizontallyon the screen and a slow advancespeed will contract it Note that thepicture is not refreshed when pictureadvancement is stopped Thereforeuse caution when steering the vesselunder this condition

Fast Slow Picture and picture advancement speed

1 Press the [MENUESC] key to openthe main menu

2 Choose PIC ADVANCE from page 1of the menu

3 Press to show the optionswindow

Stop116 18 14 12 11 21 41

(

)

Fast

Slow

Picture advance options window

4 Use or $ to choose pictureadvance speed desired Thefractions in the options windowdenote the number of scan linesproduced per transmission Forexample 18 means one scan line isproduced every 8 transmissionsldquoStoprdquo freezes the display and it isconvenient for taking a photo

The picture is not refreshed whenpicture advancement is stopped

Maneuvering the vessel in this conditionmay result in a dangerous situation

UTION

5 Press the [MENUESC] key to closethe menu

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 1548

9

110 SuppressingInterference

Interference from other acousticequipment operating nearby or other

electronic equipment on your boat mayshow itself on the display as shown inthe figure belowTo suppress interference do thefollowing1 Press the [MENUESC] key to open

the main menu2 Use or $ to choose NOISE LIMIT

from page 1 of the menu3 Press to show the options

window4 Use or $ to choose the degree ofsuppression desired Off LowMedium or High (highest)

5 Press the [MENUESC] key to closethe menu

Interference fromother sounder

Electrical interference

Forms of interference

Turn the noise limiter off when nointerference exists otherwise weakechoes may be missed

111 Suppressing LowLevel Noise

Low intensity ldquospecklesrdquo may appearover most of screen This is mainly due

to sediment in the water or noise Thesecan be suppressed by adjustingCLUTTER on the menu When theautomatic mode is on clutter isautomatically rejected To suppress lowlevel noise in manual sounder operationdo the following1 Press the [MENUESC] key to open

the main menu2 Use or $ to choose CLUTTER

from page 1 of the menu3 Press to show the optionswindow

4 Use or $ to choose the degree ofsuppression desired 1 2 3 4 5 or6 The higher the number the greaterthe suppression

5 Press the [MENUESC] key to closethe menu

To turn off low-level noisesuppression choose Off at step 4 andthen press the [MENUESC] key

Clutter appearance

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 1648

10

112 Erasing WeakEchoes

Sediment in the water or reflectionsfrom plankton may be painted on the

display in low intensity tones

Weakechoes

Appearance of weak echoes

These weak echoes may be erased asfollows1 Press the [MENUESC] key to open

the main menu2 Use or $ to choose SIGNAL

LEVEL from page 1 of the menu3 Press to show the options

window4 Use or $ to choose the degree of

suppression desired Off Low orHigh (highest)

5 Press the [MENUESC] key to closethe menu

To turn off the signal level function choose Off at step 4 and then pressthe [MENUESC] key

113 A-scope DisplayThis display shows echoes at eachtransmission with amplitudes and toneproportional to their intensities on theright 14 of the screen It is useful forestimating the kind of fish school andbottom composition

Note In the dual frequency display the A-scope display is only available withthe high frequency display

323

10

20

30

40

0

A-scope display

Single frequency display

Strong

reflection(bottom)

Weakreflection(fish or noise)

50k 11

Strongreflection(fish)

A-scope display

1 Press the [MENUESC] key to openthe main menu

2 Press or $ to choose A-SCOPEfrom page 1 of the menu

3 Press to show the optionswindow

4 Press

or$

to choose the A-scope presentation type desiredNormal Display shows echoes ateach transmission with amplitudesand tone proportional to theirintensitiesPeak Peak-hold amplitude picture

5 Press the [MENUESC] key to closethe menu

To turn off the A-scope displaychoose Off at step 4 and then press the[MENUESC] key

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 1748

11

114 AlarmsAlarm description

The LS-4100 has six conditions whichgenerate both audio and visual alarms

bottom alarm normal fish alarm bottomlock fish alarm water temperature alarmarrival alarm and speed alarm (Thewater temperature arrival and speedalarms require appropriate sensors)

Bottom alarm The bottom alarm alertsyou when the bottom is within the alarmrange set To activate the bottom alarmthe depth must be displayed

Fish (normal) alarm The fish (normal)alarm tells you when fish are within thepreset alarm range

Fish (bottom lock) alarm The fish(bottom lock) alarm available with thebottom-lock mode sounds when fishare within a certain distance from thebottom Note that the bottom zoom

display must be turned on to use thisalarm

Water temperature alarm The watertemperature alarm alerts when thewater temperature is within (Insidealarm) the alarm range set orunderover (outside alarm) the rangeset

Speed alarm The speed alarm alertsyou when the speed is within (Insidealarm) or underover (Outside alarm)the preset speed

Arrival alarm The arrival alarm alertswhen you are near a waypoint by thedistance set

Activating an alarm

1 Press the [MENUESC] key2 Press or $ to choose ALARM

MENU from page 2 on the menu3 Press the to show the ALARM

menu

ALARM

(12)

[MENU] Exit

ALARM

(22)

[MENU] Exit

BOTTOM On FROM 5ft

RANGE 10ftFISH(Normal) On

FROM 5ft RANGE 10ftFISH(BL) On

FROM 8ft RANGE 10ftFISH LEVEL Medium

TEMPERATURE Inside FROM 724 deg F RANGE 10 deg F

SPEED Off FROM 00kt

RANGE 10kt

ARRIVAL ALRM Off RANGE 0 01 m

Pageno

Gray characters mean alarm is inactive Alarm menu

4 Use or $ to choose an alarm asappropriate

5 Press to show the options menu

Off On

Off InsideOutside

Temp Speed Alarm Types

Fish ArrivalBottom AlarmOnOff

Alarm options6 Use or $ to choose alarm type

Off Alarm off On Alarm onInside Alarm generated whenspeed (or water temperature) iswithin the range setOutside Alarm generated whenspeed (or water temperature) isoutside the range set

7 Press to close the windowFor ARRIVAL ALARM setting skip tostep 12

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 1848

12

8 Press $ to choose FROM9 Press to show the options menu

0ft

Depth

632 deg F

Temperature

10 kt

Speed Depth temperature speed setting

window10 Use or $ to set starting depth

temperature or speed as appropriateFor FISH (BL) the starting depth isthe range from the bottom

11 Press to close the window12 Press $ to choose RANGE13 Press to show the options menu14 Use or $ to set alarm range15 For the bottom alarm temperature

alarm speed alarm or arrivalalarm press the [MENUESC] key tofinish For a fish alarm press toclose the window and then go tostep 16

16 Press $ to choose FISH LEVEL17 Press to show the options menu

Weak

MediumStrong Fish level options

18 Use or $ to choose the echostrength level which will trigger a fishalarm

Weak Weak echoes (weakest toneon level bar)Medium Medium strength echoes

(middle tone on level bar)Strong Strong echoes (darkest toneon level bar)

19 Press the [MENUESC] key twice toclose the menu

Alarm range marker Bottom alarm Fish alarm (normal) Right Fish alarm (bottomlock) Left

Alarm icon

Alarm rangeStartingpoint

Bottom alarm Fish alarm (normal) Fish alarm (BL)

Temperature alarm (deg

C ordeg

F shown) Speed alarm Arrival alarm

Alarm icon (Appropriate icon appears to showwhich alarm has been violated)

How the alarm works

Note To disable an alarm choose Offat step 5 in the above procedure

Silencing the buzzer

The buzzer sounds and the appropriatealarm icon appears and flashes whenan alarm is violated You can silence thebuzzer by pressing any key Howeverthe buzzer will sound whenever thealarm setting is violated

Note The audio and visual alarms arereleased against the last-violated alarmwhen multiple alarms are active

115 WaypointsWaypoints may be used tobull Record the position of an important

echo as waypoint 12 points may beregistered

bull Output a waypoint position to a plotterto mark position on its screen

bull Find range bearing and time-to-go toa location (waypoint)

Note Requires latitude and longitudeposition from a navigator

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 1948

13

Registering a waypoint on thescreen

1 Press the [MARK] key The cursorappears along with waypoint entryinstructions To enter a waypoint tothe current own shiprsquos position go tostep 3Note If there is no position data themessage ldquoNo position datardquo appearsCheck the navigator

50k

496

1100

20

40

60

80

0

Cursor

WAYPOINT ENTRY

( Move) Cursor [MARK] Enter [MENU] Cancel

50 kHz display

2 Press the cursor pad to set thecursor where desired Pictureadvancement is stopped until step 3is completed and the instructionwindow is integrated into the navdisplay

3 Press the [MARK] key again WhenTLL or FURUNO-TLL is selected atTLL OUTPUT on the System menuthe latitude and longitude position atthe cursor is output to the navigator

A vertical line marks location Furtherthe display shows the waypointname (next sequential number) andposition of the location selected atstep 2

WAYPOINTName FREQLat 34 deg 22796NLon 136 deg 07264E

05

[MENU] Exit

rase

Waypoint data display

Note If you attempt to enter 13thwaypoint the message ldquoMemoryfullrdquo appears In this case erase anunwanted waypoint to enable entry

4 To save the waypoint under thename shown go to step 8 or go tostep 5 to change its name

5 Press to open the waypoint nameentry window

WAYPOINTName FREQLat 34 deg 22796NLon 136 deg 07264E

05

[MENU] Exit

01------ ENT

rase

Waypoint window name entry6 Use or to set character $ or

to shift cursor The name mayconsist of 10 alphanumericcharactersNote Character order is 0 1hellip9 - A BhellipZ _ 0hellip

7 Press to choose ENT 8 Press the [MENUESC] key to

register the waypoint

Registering waypoint by LL

1 Press the [MENUESC] key to openthe main menu

2 Use or to choose WAYPOINTLIST from page 2 of the menu

3 Press

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 2048

14

WAYPOINT LIST

01 0102 0303------------------------------------------------------

[MENU] Exit

Waypoint list4 Press or to choose an empty

waypoint and press Press again

NEW WAYPOINTName FREQLat 34 deg 22796NLon 136 deg 07264E

05

[MENU] Exit

04------ ENT

rase

New waypoint window name entry

5 Use or to set character $ or to shift cursor

6 Press to select ENT 7 Enter latitude and longitude similar

to how you entered waypoint name8 Press the [MENUESC] key to

register the waypoint

Editing waypoints Press the [MENUESC] key to open

the main menu

2 Use or to choose WAYPOINTLIST from page 2 of the menu

3 Press to open the waypoints list4 Use or to choose a waypoint

and press 5 Use or to choose the item to

edit (name latitude or longitude)6 Press to open the data entry

window7 Use or to set character $ or

to choose location8 Press to choose ENT 9 Press the [MENUESC] key

Erasing waypoints Press the [MENUESC] key2 Use or to choose WAYPOINT

LIST from page 2 of the menu3 Press to open the waypoints list

4 Use or to choose the waypointto erase and then press Note You cannot erase a waypointwhich is selected as ldquoGOTO WPTrdquo

5 Press to choose ldquoEraserdquo6 Press to open the options window7 Press to select YES to erase the

waypoint The waypoint list appearswith the erased waypoint blank

8 Press the [MENUESC] key twice toclose the menu

Setting destination waypoint

Set a destination waypoint to find rangebearing and time-to-go to that point Youcan see range and bearing to awaypoint Time-to-go is shown on theTime to Go digital display

Press the [MENUESC] key to openthe main menu

2 Use or to choose GOTO WPTfrom page 2 of the menu

3 Press to open the waypoints list

Off01020304----------------------------------------------------------------

Waypoint list

4 Use or to choose a waypoint5 Press the [MENUESC] key to close

the menu

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 2148

15

116 Setting Up Nav DataDisplays

The user may arrange the nav datadisplays as desired

1 Use the [MODE] key to show theNAV DATA-1 or 2 display whicheveryou want to set up

2 Press the [MENUESC] key to closethe mode selection window

3 Press the cursor pad to display theNAV DATA SETUP window

NAV DATA SETUP

Window Selection Data Selection

[MENU] Exit

NAV DATA SETUP window

4 Use or to choose a datadisplay window desired Adashed-line rectangle circumscribesyour selection

5 Use

or$

to choose item todisplay See the below for adescription of the displays

(9)

(1)

(2)

(3)

(4)(5)

(6)(7)(8)

Two-data

display

Three-data

display

Four-data

displayItems displayable in (1) - (3) depth positioncourse range and bearing trip distanceodometer water temperature headingair pressure time-to-go to destination waypointXTE speed wind speed and directiondestination waypoint data compassItems displayable in (4) - (9) depth positionspeed course range and bearing trip distanceodometer water temperature headingair pressure time-to-go to destination waypointXTE wind speed wind direction

= Graphic display

Nav data window and item displayable6 Press the [MENUESC] key to finish

Note You can choose the number ofitems to show in a nav data display withNAV DATA-1 and NAV DATA-2 on theSystem menu

GRAPHIC DISPLAYS

1 05 0 05 1

Wpt 03Rng 019nm Brg 321 deg XTE 000nm Cse 333 deg

DESTINATION WAYPOINT GRAPHIC

XTEscale

BearingCourseDestinationwaypointdirection

DestinationwaypointdataNameRangeXTE

Wind APP

WIND GRAPHIC

60

120

90

030

150180

120

150

90

60

30

120 deg

Speed 103 ms

COMPASS GRAPHIC

SPEED GRAPHIC

172

Speed

20

50

40

60

30

10

01 05 0 05 1

025 nm

XTE

XTE GRAPHIC

kt

Bearing todestinationwaypoint

Course

Brg30 deg

Cse90 deg

N

E

XTE scale

Speed-ometer

Nav data display-1

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 2248

16

DIGITAL DISPLAYS

Course

123 deg

COURSE

Depth

328 ft

DEPTH

Heading TRUEMAG

318 deg

HEADING

Odometer

56 nm

ODOMETER

Position GPS 3D

30 deg 00065N130 deg 00574E

POSITION

Temperature

698 degF

WATER TEMPERATURE

Trip meter

121 nm

TRIP DISTANCE

Time to Go

00 H30 M

TIME-TO-GO

1018 hpa

AIR PRESSURE

Air Pressure

Speed

193 kt

SPEED

Rng

121 nm

RANGE amp BEARING

Brg

140 deg

Wind Speed APP

80 ms

WIND SPEED

Wind Dir APP

138 deg

WIND DIRECTION

APP or TRUE depending on menu setting TRUE or MAG depending

on menu settingamp To destination waypoint

Note 1 Nav data is updated with somedelay

Note 2 When data is lost 120 sec thedisplay shows - - at the locationwhere data is lost

= GPS receiving status (Displays whenconnecting with GP-310B320B and InOutis selected at the Installation menu)NO FIX Position cannot be foundGPS 2D 2D (dimension) GPS position fixGPS 3D 3D GPS fixGPS W2D 2D WAAS position fixGPS W3D 3D WAAS position fix

NAV data display-2

117 Other Menu ItemsThis section describes the menu itemsnot previously mentioned

Page 1

HUE (Picture Color)

Two picture color arrangements areavailable Day and Night Day showsechoes on a white background Nightshows them on a black background

1 Press the [MENUESC] key todisplay the menu

2 Use or $ to choose HUE frompage 1 of the menu

3 Press to show the optionswindow

4 Use or $ to choose Day or Nightas appropriate

5 Press the [MENUESC] key to closethe menu

WHITE LINE

The white line feature displays theleading edge of the bottom echo in

white This is useful for discriminatingbottom fish near the bottom

1 Press the [MENUESC] key todisplay the main menu

2 Use or $ to choose WHITE LINEfrom page 1 of the menu

3 Press to show the optionswindow

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 2348

17

4 Use or to choose Off Tone orMesh as appropriate ldquoMeshrdquo paintsthe white line in darker tone thanldquoTonerdquo

5 Press the [MENUESC] key to closethe menu

526White Line OFF White Line ON (Mesh)

Fish schoolclearly shown

White line

0

20

40

60

80

050k 11

526

0

20

40

60

80

00 050k 11

How white line works

DEEP GAIN

ldquoDeep Gainrdquo compensates forpropagation attenuation of the ultrasonicwaves It does this by equalizing echopresentation so that fish schools of thesame size appear in the same density inboth shallow and deep waters Inaddition it reduces surface noise

Press the [MENUESC] key to openthe main menu

2 Use or to choose DEEP GAINfrom page of the menu

3 Press $ to show to the optionswindow

4 Choose Low Medium or High asappropriate High provides thegreatest degree of gain reductionagainst short range echoes

5 Press the [MENUESC] key to closethe menu

Page 2

TRIP RESET

This item resets trip distance to ldquo0rdquo

Press the [MENUESC] key to openthe main menu

2 Use or to choose TRIPRESET from page 2 of the menu

3 Press $ 4 Press to reset trip distance

Beeps are generated while the tripdistance is being reset

5 Press the [MENUESC] key to closethe menu

Note To reset the odometer to zeroclear the memory

GAIN ADJ 200 GAIN ADJ 50

If the gain is too high or too low or thegain for the low and high frequenciesappears unbalanced you cancompensate it as follows

Press the [MENUESC] key to openthe main menu

2 Use or to choose GAIN ADJ200 or GAIN ADJ 50 from page 2 ofthe menu

3 Press $ to show to the optionswindow

4 Use or to set the amount Thesetting range is ndash50 to +50

5 Press the [MENUESC] key to close

the menu

DRAFT

The default depth display shows thedistance from the transducer If youwould rather show the distance from thesea surface set your shiprsquos draft asfollows

Press the [MENUESC] key to openthe main menu

2 Use or to choose DRAFT frompage 2 of the menu

3 Press $ and then use or to setdraft The setting range is ndash 50 to+500 (meters feet)

4 Press the [MENUESC] key to closethe menu

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 2448

18

2 SYSTEM MENU

The System menu mainly consists ofitems which once set do not requirefrequent adjustment You may displaythis menu by choosing SYSTEM MENUat page 2 of the main menu andpressing

SYSTEM MENULANGUAGE English

DEPTH UNIT ftSPEED UNIT ktWIND UNIT msTEMP UNIT deg F

TEMP GRAPH OffNAV DATA-1 NAV DATA-2

WATER TYPE SaltKEY BEEP OnBATT VOLTAGE Off (13)

[MENU] Exit

SYSTEM MENU

(23)

NAV DISPLAY TempSpeedNMEA0183 Ver 20TLL OUTPUT OffBEARING TrueWIND SPDDIR ApparentTRIP SOURCE Own

TEMP SOURCE OwnSPEED SOURCE OwnTEMP CALIB +00 deg F ( 40)SPEED CALIB +0 ( 50)

Own speed Own temp 100 kt 162 deg F

[MENU] Exit

SYSTEM MENU

(33)

BASIC RANGE1 15 ft

RANGE2 30RANGE3 60RANGE4 120RANGE5 200RANGE6 400RANGE7 600RANGE8 1000 (7-1500)

ZOOM RANGE 15 ft (7-150)BL RANGE 15 ft (10-30)(Bottom Lock)

ZOOM MARKER On

[MENU] Exit

PAGE 3

PAGE 2

PAGE 1

Page no

System menus

21 System MenuPage 1

LANGUAGE The system language isavailable in English several Europeanlanguages and Japanese To changelanguage select language desired andpress the [MENUESC] key

DEPTH UNIT Choose unit of depthmeasurement from meters feet

fathoms passibraza and hiro(Japanese)

SPEED UNIT Choose unit of speedmeasurement from knots miles perhour and kilometers per hour Requiresspeed data

WIND UNIT Choose unit of wind speedmeasurement from ms kt kmh and

mph Requires wind speed data

TEMP UNIT Choose unit oftemperature measurement Celsius orFahrenheit Requires temperature data

TEMP GRAPH Turns the watertemperature display on or off Thetemperature scale range is 16deg (degF) inldquoNarrowrdquo 40deg (degF) in ldquoWiderdquo Requires

water temperature data

m526

0

20

40

60

80

00 050k 11

40

80

70

50

60

TemperatureScale

TemperatureGraph

638 deg F162kt

Water temperature display (wide degF)

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 2548

19

NAV DATA-1 -2 Choose the number ofnavigation data items to display on thenav data displays from two three orfour items Requires appropriate navdata

WATER TYPE Choose the water typewith which to use the LS-4100 fromSalt or Fresh

KEY BEEP Turn key beep on or off

BATT VOLTAGE Turn the batteryvoltage indication (appears at the topright corner on the screen) on or offWhen on it replaces the picture advancespeed indication

Page 2

NAV DISPLAY Choose the nav data todisplay in the nav data window at thetop left-hand corner You may choosefrom temperaturespeedlatitudelongitude range and bearingcourse over ground trip distance or

wind speed Requires appropriate navdata

407 deg F162kt

Nav window

NMEA0183 Choose NMEA version ofnavigator Ver 15 Ver 20 or Ver 30

TLL OUTPUT Enablesdisables outputof TLL (Target Latitude Longitude)position when the [MARK] key isoperated ldquoTLLrdquo outputs latitude andlongitude position ldquoFURUNO-TLLrdquoavailable with connection of navigatorthat can output FURUNO TLL outputslatitude and longitude watertemperature depth etc

BEARING Shiprsquos course and bearingto a waypoint may be displayed in trueor magnetic bearing Magnetic bearingis true bearing plus (or minus) earthrsquosmagnetic deviation Requires bearingdata

WIND SPDDIR Choose the windspeed and direction reference from trueand apparent Requires wind sensorApparen t The direction (in relation toshiprsquos bow) and speed of the wind as itappears to those on board relative tothe speed and direction of the boatcombination of the true wind and thewind caused by the boats movementTrue The speed and direction (inrelation to shiprsquos bow) of the wind felt ormeasured when stationary

TRIP SOURCE Choose speed sourcefor the trip distance indication Own(transducer with speed sensor orseparate speed sensor) or NMEA

TEMP SOURCE Choose source ofwater temperature input Off Own(transducer with water temperaturesensor or separate temperature sensor)or NMEA

SPEED SOURCE Choose source ofspeed input Off Own (transducer withspeed sensor or separate speedsensor) or NMEA Requires speed

data

TEMP CALIB If the water temperaturesensor-generated water temperatureindication is wrong you can correct ithere when ldquoOwnrdquo is selected astemperature source For example if thewater temperature indication is 2deghigher than actual water temperatureenter -2 The setting range is -40degF to

+40degF

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 2648

20

SPEED CALIB If the speedsensor-generated speed indication iswrong you can correct it here whenldquoOwnrdquo is selected as speed source Forexample if the speed indication is 10lower than actual speed enter +10 Thesetting range is ndash50 to +50

Page 3

BASIC RANGE 1 - BASIC RANGE 8 Set range of each of the eight basicranges (Selectable range 7 to 1500 ft)Note 1 All default basic ranges arerestored whenever the depth unit ischanged Therefore change the depth

unit before changing the basic rangesNote 2 A range may not be lower thanthe range preceding it For example ifbasic range 3 is 60 feet basic range 4must be greater than 60 feet

ZOOM RANGE Choose the range tozoom in the marker-zoom andbottom-zoom modes You may choose arange between 7 and 150 feet (2 and 50

meters)

BL RANGE The expansion width forthe bottom-lock display can be chosenfrom 10 to 30 feet (3 and 10 meters)

ZOOM MARKER The zoom markerappears in the normal bottom markerand bottom zoom displays and marksthe area which is expanded in the

bottom marker and bottom zoompictures You can turn the marker on oroff as desired

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 2748

21

3 MAINTENANCETROUBLESHOOTING

W RNING

ELECTRICAL SHOCK HAZARDDo not open the equipment

Only qualified personnel should workinside the equipment

31 Maintenance

Regular maintenance is essential forgood performance Checking the itemslisted in the table below monthly willhelp keep your equipment in goodshape for years to come

Checking

Item Action

Transducercable

Check cable for damage

Power cabletransducercable plug

Check that they are tightlyfastened Refasten ifnecessary

Display unitground

Check for corrosion Cleanif necessary

Power supplyvoltage

Check voltage If out ofrating correct problem

32 Cleaning the DisplayUnit

Dust or dirt on the display unit can beremoved with a soft cloth If desired awater-moistened cloth may be usedUse special care when cleaning theLCD since it scratches easily Do notuse chemical cleaners to clean thedisplay unit - they can remove paint andmarkings

33 TransducerMaintenance

Marine life on the transducer face willresult in a gradual decrease insensitivity Check the transducer facefor cleanliness each time the boat isdry-docked Carefully remove anymarine life with a piece of wood orfine-grade sandpaper

34 Replacing the FuseThe fuse in the power cable protects thesystem from reverse polarity of thepower supply and equipment fault If thefuse blows find the cause beforereplacing it Use only a 1A fuse (FGMB 1A 125V Code No 000-114-805 ) orequivalent Using the wrong fuse will damage the unit and void the warranty

W RNINGUse the proper fuse

Fuse rating is shown on the equipmentUse of a wrong fuse can result in fire anddamage the equipment

35 Battery Voltage Alert A battery icon appears when the batteryvoltage is too high or too low

Battery icon and meaning

Icon Meaning

Voltage is lower than 10 VDC If thevoltage goes below 9 V the equipmentis automatically turned off

Voltage is higher than 165 VDC If thevoltage goes higher than 175 V theequipment is automatically turned off

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 2848

22

36 TroubleshootingThe table below provides basictroubleshooting procedures which theuser may follow to restore normaloperation

Troubleshooting table

Ifhellip Then check hellipneither echo norfixed range scaleappears

bull battery voltagebull fusebull power cable

no echo appearsbut the fixedrange scaleappears

bull if display advancespeed is set to ldquoStoprdquo

bull transducer plugbull

transducer cableecho appears butno zero line

bull if range shifting is setto ldquo0rdquo

sensitivity is low bull gain settingbull if air bubbles or marine

life is clinging to thetransducer face

bull if sediments arepresent in the water

bull if the bottom is too soft

to return an echothere is extremeinterference ornoise

bull if the transducer is tooclose to the engine

bull if the unit is properlygrounded

bull if other echo soundersof the same frequencyas own are beingoperated nearby

the speedwatertemperaturereadout isunrealistic or notpresent

bull sensor plug

the positionreadout isunrealistic or notpresent

bull the connectionbetween sounder andnavigator

bull navigator

37 DiagnosticsIf you feel your unit is not workingproperly conduct the diagnostic test tofind the problem If you cannot restorenormal operation contact your dealerfor advice

1 Turn on the power while pressing the[MENUESC] key Continue pressingthe [MENUESC] key until theInstallation menu appears

SIMULATION On

TEST LCD PATTERN MEMORY CLEAR

NMEA PORT InOutNMEA MIX Off GPS WAAS Off

SET BOTTOM LEVEL

Installation Menu

= Setting cannot be changed whenNMEA PORT setting is InIn

Installation menu2 Press to choose TEST3 Press to start the test

ROM OKRAM OKNMEA

Temp 682 deg F

Speed 100kmh

Power 124 VBody 39 deg C

Program No 0252318-01Push [MENU] 3 times to exit

Level bar

= Program version no

Water

TemperatureSpeedBattery VoltageTemperatureinside displayunit(Unit fixed atdeg C)

GPS (48502180) OK

Only when GP-310B is connected(For GP-320B 4850238)

Test display

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 2948

23

4 The ROM RAM and NMEA port arechecked with the results shown asOK or NG (No Good) For any NGrequest service (A special connectoris required to test the NMEA portNothing appears if no connector isconnected)

5 The squares at the right side of thetest display are for checking thecontrols Press each key and thearrows on the Cursor Pad one byone A controlrsquos correspondingon-screen square ldquolightsrdquo in black ifthe control is normal

6 To return to the Installation menupress the [MENUESC] key threetimes

7 To restore normal operation turn offthe power and turn it on again

38 Test PatternThis feature tests for proper display oftones

1 On the Installation menu press $ tochoose LCD PATTERN

2 Press to start the test The entirescreen is black

3 Press again and the screen turnswhite

4 Press again and the screenshows a four-toned display

5 Press again to return to theInstallation menu

6 To restore normal operation turn offthe power and then it on again

WHITE FOUR-TONE BLACK

Test patterns

39 Memory ClearThe memory can be cleared to startafresh with default menu settings

1 At the installation menu press $ tochoose MEMORY CLEAR

2 Press to open the optionswindow

YES NO

Clear memory display

3 Press to clear the memory Beepsare generated while the memory isbeing cleared

4 To restore normal operation turn offthe power and then turn it on again

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3048

24

4 INSTALLATION

41 Display UnitMounting considerations

The display unit can be installed on adesktop on the bulkhead or flushmounted in a panel When choosing alocation keep the following in mind

bull Keep the display unit out of directsunlight

bull The temperature and humidity should

be moderate and stablebull Locate the unit away from exhaust

pipes and ventsbull The mounting location should be well

ventilatedbull Mount the unit where shock and

vibration are minimalbull For maintenance and checking

purposes leave sufficient space atthe sides and rear of the unit andleave slack in cables

bull A magnetic compass will be affected ifthe display unit is placed too close toit Observe the following compasssafe distances to prevent disturbanceto the magnetic compassStandard compass 04 metersSteering compass 03 meters

Desktop overhead mounting1 Fix the bracket to a desktop or the

overhead with tapping screws(supplied)

2 Loosely screw knobs into the displayunit

3 Set the display unit to the bracketand then tighten the knobs

Mounting on the bulkhead Flush

mounting in a panelSee the instructions on the bulkhead orflush mounting template (supplied)

42 Thru-hull MountTransducer

Transducer mounting location

The thru-hull mount transducer

(520-5PSD 520-5MSD) provides thebest performance of all since thetransducer protrudes from the hull andthe effect of air bubbles and turbulencenear the hull skin is reduced When theboat has a keel the transducer shouldbe at least 30 cm away from it Typicalthru-hull mountings are shown in thefigure on the next page

The performance of this sounder isdirectly related to the mounting locationof the transducer especially forhigh-speed cruising The installationshould be planned in advance keepingthe standard cable length (8 m) and thefollowing factors in mindbull Air bubbles and turbulence caused by

movement of the boat seriouslydegrade the sounding capability of thetransducer The transducer shouldtherefore be located in a positionwhere water flow is the smoothestNoise from the propellers alsoadversely affects performance andthe transducer should not be mountednearby The lifting strakes arenotorious for creating acoustic noiseand these must be avoided bykeeping the transducer inboard ofthem

bull The transducer must always remain

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3148

25

submerged even when the boat isrolling pitching or up on a plane athigh speed

bull A practical choice would besomewhere between 13 and 12 of

the boatrsquos length from the stern Forplaning hulls a practical location isgenerally rather far astern so that thetransducer is always in waterregardless of the planing attitude

28

22

120

68

30

520-5PSD

24

120

68

87520-5MSD

Unit mm

Thru-hull mount transducer dimensions

Acceptable transducer mounting

locations

Position 12 to 13 of the hull from stern

15 to 30 cm off center line (inside first lifting strakes)

Within the wetted bottom area

Deadrise angle within 15 deg

HIGH SPEED-V HULL

Suitable transducer mounting locations

Typical thru-hull mounttransducer installations

FairingBlock

Flat Washer

Rubber Washer

Hull

Deep-V Hull

Hull

Flat Washer

Rubber Washer

Flat Hull

CorkWasher

Typical thru-hull mounttransducer installations

Procedure for installing thethru-hull mount transducer

1 With the boat hauled out of the watermark the location chosen formounting the transducer on thebottom of the hull

2 If the hull is not level within 15deg inany direction fairing blocks madeout of teak should be used betweenthe transducer and hull both insideand outside to keep the transducerface parallel with the water lineFabricate the fairing block as shownbelow and make the entire surfaceas smooth as possible to provide anundisturbed flow of water around thetransducer The fairing block shouldbe smaller than the transducer itselfto provide a channel to divert

turbulent water around the sides ofthe transducer rather than over itsface

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3248

26

BOWHole for stuffing tube

Upper Half

Lower Half

Saw along slopeof hull Construction of fairing block

3 Drill a hole just large enough to passthe threaded stuffing tube of thetransducer through the hull makingsure it is drilled vertically

4 Apply a sufficient amount of highquality caulking compound to the topsurface of the transducer around thethreads of the stuffing tube andinside the mounting hole (and fairingblocks if used) to ensure watertightmounting

5 Mount the transducer and fairingblocks and tighten the locking nutsBe sure that the transducer is

properly oriented and its workingface is parallel to the waterline

Note Do not over-stress the stuffingtube and locking nuts through excessivetightening since the wood block willswell when the boat is placed in thewater It is suggested that the nut betightened lightly at installation andretightened several days after the boat

has been launched

Transducer preparation

Before putting the boat in water wipethe face of the transducer thoroughlywith a detergent liquid soap This willlessen the time necessary for thetransducer to have good contact withthe water Otherwise the time requiredfor complete ldquosaturationrdquo ill belengthened and performance will bereduced

DO NOT paint the transducerPerformance will be affected

43 Transom MountTransducer

The transom mount transducer is verycommonly employed usually onrelatively small IO or outboard boatsDo not use this method on an inboardmotor boat because turbulence iscreated by the propeller ahead of thetransducer

520-5PWD

There are two methods of installationflush with hull (for flat hulls) andprojecting from hull (for deep V-hulls)

Flat Hull

D

Dgt50 cm

Deep-VHull

520-5PWD mounting locations

Installing the 520-5PWD on a flat hull

A suitable mounting location is at least50 cm away from the engine and wherethe water flow is smooth

1 Drill four pilot holes in the mountinglocation

2 Attach the transducer to the bracketwith 5 x 20 tapping screws(supplied)

3 Adjust the transducer position so thetransducer faces right to the bottom

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3348

27

Note If necessary to improve waterflow and minimize air bubblesstaying on the transducer faceincline the transducer about 5deg at therear This may require a certainamount of experimentation for finetuning at high cruising speeds

4 Fill the gap between the wedge frontof the transducer and transom withepoxy material to eliminate any airspaces

No1 M5 x 14

5 x 20

5 x 20

2 to 5

Tape

Hull

Transom mount transducer

mounting flush with hull

Installing the transom mounttransducer on a deep-V hull

This method is employed on deep-Vhulls and provides good performancebecause the effects of air bubbles areminimal Install the transducer parallelwith water surface not flush with hull Ifthe boat is placed on a trailer care mustbe taken not to damage the transducerwhen the boat is hauled out of the waterand put on the trailer

5 x 20

No 2M5 x 14

5 x 20

Transom mount transducermounted projecting from hull

525-5PWD

Choose the installation methoddepending on the rise angle of the hull

Transom

Transom

Stripe over 10

Parallel with hull

Mount at the stripe

less than 10

525-5PWD mounting location

Installing the 525-5PWD

Referring to ldquoInstalling the 520-5PWDrdquoin the left column for mounting of thebracket and the figure shown on the topof next page install the 525-5PWD tothe transom

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3448

28

2 to 5

Transducer

Bracket

Hull

Epoxy material

525-5PWD mounting

44 Inside-hullTransducer

The thru-hull mount transducer(520-5PSD 520-5MSD) may also beinstalled inside the hull following theprocedure below

Necessary tools

You will need the following toolsbull Sandpaper (100)bull Silicone sealantbull Silicone grease

Remarks on installationbull Turn off the engine and anchor the

boat while installing the equipmentbull Install the transducer in the engine

room

Choosing the mounting locationbull The mounting location should be

where the hull is of single-hullthickness and is void of air or flotationmaterials other than solid fiberglassbetween the transducer face and thewater

bull Do not place the transducer over hullstruts or ribs which run under the hull

bull Avoid a location where the risingangle of the hull exceeds 15deg tominimize the effect of the boatrsquosrolling

bull You will finalize the mounting location

through some trial and error Theprocedure for this is shown later

50 cm

50 cm15 cm15 cm

13

12

Transducer mountinglocation

Centerline

Inside-hull transducer mounting location

Attaching the transducer1 Clean the transducer face to remove

any foreign material Lightly roughenthe transducer face with 100sandpaper Also roughen the insideof the hull where the transducer is tobe mounted

2 Clean the transducer face again3 Warm the silicone sealant to 40degC

before usage to soften it Coat thetransducer face and mountinglocation with silicone sealant

Transducer

SiliconeSealant

Coating transducer facewith silicone sealant

4 Press the transducer firmly down onthe hull and gently twist it back andforth to remove any air which may betrapped in the silicone sealant

Checking the installation

1 Connect the battery to the display

unit2 Turn on the display unit

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3548

29

3 Press the [MODE] key to chooseSINGLE FREQ

4 Choose 50 kHz or 200 kHz and thenpress the [MENUESC] key to closethe mode menu

5 Press the [MENU] to show the mainmenu and then press to select

Auto mode6 Press to choose Off7 Press the [MENUESC] key8 Press the [GAIN] key to set the gain

to ldquo5rdquo and then press the[MENUESC] key

9 Press the [RANGE] key to set therange to 10 meters (feet) and thenpress the [MENUESC] key

10 If the bottom is displayed in darkgray and the depth indicationappears the mounting location issuitable Go to ldquoFinal preparationrdquo

11 If the bottom is not displayed in darkgray tone the mounting location maybe unsuitable Do the followinga) Press the [POWERBRILL] key to

turn off the powerb) Gently dismount the transducer

with a piece of woodc) Reattach the transducer

elsewhere as shown in ldquoAttachingthe transducerrdquo

d) Check the installation again

Final preparation

Support the transducer with a piece ofwood to keep it in place while it is drying

Let the transducer dry 24-72 hours

45 Optional Triducer525ST-MSD

The optional triducer 525ST-MSD isdesigned for thru-hull mounting Forhow to install this transducer seeparagraph 42

φ79 mm

33 mm200-12 UNthreads

φ51 mm

27 mm

7 mm

140 mm Triducer 525ST-MSD

525ST-PWD

The Transom Mount Transducer orTRIDUCER reg Multisensor with IntegralRelease Bracket 525ST-PWD ismanufactured by AIRMAR Co Theseinstructions are also included with the

sensor

Pre-test for speed and temperature

Connect the sensor to the instrumentand spin the paddlewheel Check for aspeed reading and the approximate airtemperature If there is no readingreturn the sensor to your place ofpurchase

Tools and materials needed

ScissorsMasking tapeSafety gogglesDust maskElectric drillDrill bit for

Bracket holes 4mm 23 or 964rdquoFiberglass hull chamfer bit(preferred)6mm or 14rdquo

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3648

30

Transom hole 19mm or 34rdquo(optional)

Cable clamp holes 3mm or 18rdquoScrewdriversStraight edgeMarine sealantPencilZip-tiesWater-based antifouling paint(mandatory in salt water )

Mounting location

To ensure the best performance thesensor must be submerged inaeration-free and turbulence-free water

Mount the sensor close to the centerlineof the boat On slower heavierdisplacement hulls positioning it fartherfrom the centerline is acceptable

Allow adequate space above thebracket for it to release and rotate thesensor upward

Height

Height withoutspeed sensor191mm (7-12)Height withspeed sensor213mm (8-12)

Height required at mounting location

Note 1 Do not mount the sensor in anarea of turbulence or bubbles nearwater intake or discharge openingsbehind strakes struts fittings or hull

irregularities behind eroding paint (anindication of turbulence)Note 2 Avoid mounting the sensorwhere the boat may be supportedduring trailering launching hauling andstorageNote 3 For single drive boat mounton the starboard side at least 75 mm(3rdquo) beyond the swing radius of thepropeller

75 mm(3)

minimum beyondswing radius

Mounting location on single drive boat

Note 4 For twin drive boat mountbetween the drives

Installation of bracket

1 Cut out the installation template

shown on the next page2 At the selected location position thetemplate so the arrow at the bottomis aligned with the bottom edge ofthe transom Being sure the templateis parallel to the waterline tape it inplace

Align template vertically

Deadrise angle

Slope of hullparallel towaterline

Align template arrow withbottom edge of transom

Positioning the template

Warning Always wear safetygoggles and a dust mask

3 Using a 4 mm 23 or 964rdquo bit drillthree holes 22 mm (78rdquo) deepat the locations indicated To preventdrilling too deeply wrap maskingtape around the bit 22 mm (78rdquo)from the pointFiberglass hull Minimize surfacecracking by chamfering the gelcoatIf a chamfer bit or countersink bit is

not available start drilling with a6mm or 14rdquo bit to a depth of 1 mm(116rdquo)

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3748

31

4 If you know your transom angle the

bracket is designed for a standard13deg transom angle11deg-18deg angle No shim is requiredSkip to step 3 in ldquoAdjustingrdquoOther angles The shim is requiredSkip to step 2 of ldquoAdjustingrdquoIf you do not know the transom angletemporarily attach the bracket andsensor to the transom to determine ifthe plastic shim is needed

5 Using the two 10 x 1-14rdquo

self-tapping screws temporarilyscrew the bracket to the hull DONOT tighten the screws completelyat this time Follow the step 1-4 inldquoAttaching the Sensor to the Bracketrdquobefore proceeding with ldquoAdjustingrdquo

Installation templatefor starboard side of boat

Drill at locations labeled Bfor the following transom angles

16 deg through 22 deg

Drill at locations labeled Afor the following transom angles

2 deg through 15 deg

Align arrow with bottom of transom

AA A

BB B

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3848

32

Adjusting

1 Using a straight edge sight theunderside of the sensor relative tothe underside of the hull The sternof the sensor should be 1-3 mm

(116-18rdquo) below the bow of thesensor or parallel to the bottom ofthe hull

11 deg transom angleNO SHIM

12-18 deg transom angleNO SHIM

2 deg -10 deg transom

angle

19 deg -22 deg transom

angleshim withtaper up

shim withtaper down

parallelparallel parallel

slightangle

angletoo steep

anglereversed

YES NONO

YES YESYES

Sensor position and transom angle

Note Do not position the bow of thesensor lower than the stern becauseaeration will occur

2 To adjust the sensorrsquos angle relativeto the hull use the tapered plasticshim provided If the bracket hasbeen temporarily fastened to thetransom remove it Key the shim in

place on the back of the bracket2deg-10deg transom angle (steppedtransom and jet boats) Positionthe shim with the tapered end down19deg-22deg transom angle (smallaluminum and fiberglass boats) Position the shim with the taperedend up

3 If the bracket has been temporarilyfastened to the transom remove it

Apply a marine sealant to thethreads of the two 10 x 1-14rdquo self

tapping screws to prevent waterseeping into the transom Screw thebracket to the hull Do not tighten thescrews completely at this time

4 Repeat step 1 to ensure that theangle of the sensor is correctNote Do not position the sensorfarther into the water than necessaryto avoid increasing drag spray andwater noise and reducing boatspeed

5 Using the vertical adjustment spaceon the bracket slots slide the sensorup or down to provide a projection of3 mm (18rdquo) Tighten the screws

Cable cover

Cableclamp

50 mm (2)

Hull projection 3 mm (18)

Vertical adjustment and cable routing

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3948

33

Attaching the sensor to the bracket

1 If the retaining cover near the top ofthe bracket is closed open it bydepressing the latch and rotating thecover downward

Step 1 Step 2

Latch

Retainingcover

Pivotarm (2)

Slot (2)

Step 4

Step 3

Attaching the sensor to the bracket

2 Insert the sensorrsquos pivot arms intothe slots near the top of the bracket

3 Maintain pressure until the pivotarms click into place

4 Rotate the sensor downward until thebottom snaps into the bracket

5 Close the retaining cover to preventthe accidental release of the sensorwhen the boat is underway

Cable routing

Route the sensor cable over thetransom through a drain hole orthorough a new hole drilled in thetransom above the waterline

Never cut the cable or remote the

connector this will void the warranty Always wear safety goggles and a dustmask

1 If a hole must be drilled choose alocation well above the waterlineCheck for obstructions such as trimtabs pumps or wiring inside the hullMark the location with a pencil Drilla hole through the transom using a19 mm or 34rdquo bit (to accommodatethe connector)

2 Route the cable over or through thetransom

3 On the outside of the hull secure thecable against the transom using thecable clamps Position a cable clamp50 mm(2rdquo) above the bracket andmark the mounting hole with apencil

4 Position the second cable clamphalfway between the first clamp andthe cable hole Mark this mountinghole

5 If a hole has been drilled in thetransom open the appropriate slot inthe transom cable cover Position thecover over the cable where it entersthe hull Mark the two mounting

holes6 At each of the marked locations usea 3 mm or 18rdquo bit to drill a hole 10mm (38rdquo) deep The prevent drillingtoo deeply wrap masking tapearound the bit 10 mm (38rdquo) from thepoint

7 Apply marine sealant to the threadsof the 6 x 12rdquo self-tapping screw toprevent water from seeping into the

transom If you have drilled a holethrough the transom apply marinesealant to the space around thecable where it passes through thetransom

8 Position the two cable clamps andfasten them in place If used pushthe cable cover over the cable andscrew it in place

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4048

34

9 Route the cable to the instrumentbeing careful not to tear the cable

jacket when passing it though thebulkhead(s) and other parts of theboat To reduce electricalinterference separate the sensorcable from other electrical wiring andldquonoiserdquo sources Coil any excesscable and secure it in place withzip-ties to prevent damage

46 Optional WaterTemperatureSpeedSensor

Water temperaturespeed sensorST-02MSB and ST-02PSB which aredesigned for thru-hull mounting areoptionally available Install them asshown below

Mounting considerations

Choose a suitable mounting locationconsidering the followingbull Choose a place free from vibrationbull Choose a mid-boat flat position The

sensor does not have to be installedperfectly perpendicular The sensormust not be damaged in dry-dockingoperation

bull Choose a place apart from equipmentgenerating heat

bull Choose a place in the forwarddirection viewing from the drain holeto allow for circulation of coolingwater

1 Dry-dock the boat2 Make a hole of approx 51 mm

diameter in the mounting location3 Unfasten locknut and remove the

sensor section4 Apply high-grade sealant to the

flange of the sensor5 Pass the sensor casing through thehole

6 Face the notch on the sensor towardboatrsquos bow and tighten the flange

7 Set the sensor section to the sensorcasing and tighten the locknut

8 Launch the boat and check for waterleakage around the sensor

Locknut

Face notchtoward bow

Flange Nut

Coat withsilicone sealant Brim

φ 77

51

123

Water temperaturespeed sensor

ST-02MSB ST-02PSB

47 Wiring

Connect the LS-4100 powerdata cableassy MJ-A7SPF0005-020 (2 msupplied) to the POWER and thetransducer cable to the XDR connectorRefer to the interconnection diagram toconnect cables Leave slack in cables tofacilitate checking and maintenance

Note The fuse holder contains a springwhich fixes the fuse To preventdetachment of the spring which wouldcause loss of power tie the line asshown below

+ line (red)

Fuse holder

Cable tie How to fix fuse holder

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4148

35

Establishing the ground

The ground wire (125 sq or more localsupply) should be as short as possible

The signal line ground is isolated from

the chassis ground however the powerline is not insulated Therefore whenconnecting eternal equipment havingpositive ground do not ground thesignal line to the chassis If excessivenoise shows on the screen the groundmay be inadequate In this case attacha steel plate measuring 20 cm by 30 cmon the outside of the hull to provide aground point Connect the ground wire

there Use a ldquoclosedrdquo type lug ( ) tomake the connection at the display unitDo not use an ldquoopenrdquo type lug ( )

Optional equipment

POWER connector

The power supply port is commonlyused for connection of externalequipment such as a GPS receiver orwind indicator Use the powerdatacable MJ-A7SPF0005-020 (supplied) forconnection referring the figure shown inthe right column

Connector Color Remarks

1 TD-A WHT2 TD-B BLU

IEC-61162-1NMEA0183

3 RD-A YEL

4 RD-B GRN

IEC-61162-1

NMEA01835 + RED

6 - BLKPower input12 VDC

7 FG

Water tempspeed sensor

Connect the optional water tempspeedsensor to the XDR connector with theoptional converter connector (Type02S4147) as shown below

Tape connectors withvulcaninzing tapeand then vinyl tapeto waterproof themBind tape ends withcable ties to preventtape from unraveling

Connect to XDR portat rear of display unit

MJ-A10SPF

MJ-A10SRMDMJ-A6SRMD

Fromtransducer

Fromsensor

Connection of converterconnector 02S4147

48 IEC 61162-1 DataSentences

The tables below show the datasentences which can be input to andoutput from the LS-4100 Thetransmission speed for both input andoutput is 4800 bps Data is output attwo-second intervals

Input data sentences

Sentence Meaning

BWC Bearing and distance towaypoint

GGA Global positioning system(GPS) fix data

GLL Geographic position -latitudelongitude

HDG Heading deviation and variationHDT Heading true

MDA Atmospheric pressure

MTW Water temperature

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4248

36

Input data sentences (conrsquot)

Sentence MeaningMWV Wind speed and

angleRMA Recommended

minimum specificLORAN-C dataRMB Recommended

minimum navigationinformation

RMC Recommendedminimum specificGPSTRANSIT data

VHW Water speed andheading

VTG Course over groundand ground speedXTE Cross track error

Output data sentences

Sentence MeaningDBT (Ver 15) Depth below

transducerDPT (Ver 20 Ver30)

Depth

MTW Water temperatureRMB (Ver 20) Recommended

minimumnavigationinformation

VHW Water speed andheading

TLL Target positionoutput by [MARK]key

= Available with connection of optionalsensorsnavaid

49 Installation MenuThe installation menu mainly containsitems which are set at installation

1 Turn on the power while pressing the[MENUESC] key Continue pressing

the [MENUESC] key until theInstallation menu appears

SIMULATION On

TEST LCD PATTERN MEMORY CLEAR

NMEA PORT InOutNMEA MIX OffGPS WAAS Off

SET BOTTOM LEVEL

Installation Menu

= Setting cannot be changed whenNMEA PORT setting is InIn

Installation menu

SIMULATION The simulation modeprovides without connection of thetransducer simulated operation of theequipment using internally generatedechoes All controls are operative Themessage ldquoSIMrdquo appears at the top rightcorner on the screen when thesimulation mode is active

1 At the installation menu press toopen the simulation mode optionswindow

2 Press to choose ldquoOnrdquo to turn onthe simulation mode

3 Press the [POWERBRILL] keyabout three seconds to turn off thepower

4 Press the [POWERBRILL] key toturn on the power ldquoSIMrdquo appears atthe top right corner of the display

5 To turn off the simulation modeselect Off at step 2

NMEA po r t se tup(NMEA PO RT NMEA M IX)

The POWER port can function as aninput port or inputoutput port Changethe setting to ldquoInInrdquo when connectingGP-310B320B and a wind sensor

When connecting the GP-310B320Band a wind sensor first turn on ldquoGPS

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4348

37

WAASrdquo (in the Installation menu) andthen select ldquoInInrdquo as the NMEA portsetting

1 Turn on the power while pressingand holding down the [MENUESC]key Continue pressing the[MENUESC] key until theInstallation menu appears

2 Choose NMEA PORT and thenpress to display the NMEA portoptions window

3 Use or to choose InOut orInIn as appropriate

InOut Input and Output (default

setting)InIn Input only (Available withconnection of the GP-310B320Band a wind sensor)

4 Press choose NMEA MIX andthen press to display the NMEAMIX options window

5 Use or to choose Off or OnChoose On to output input data

Off Outputs the data sentences ofLS-4100 only

On Outputs the data sentences ofLS-4100 and sentences which areinput from other equipment

6 To restore normal operation turn offthe power and then turn it on again

GPS WAAS Chooses how to use theWAAS signal when connecting with a

WAAS receiver for example GP-320B

Note WAAS is currently in thedevelopmental phase During thedevelopmental phase the reliability andavailability of the WAAS signal cannotbe guaranteed Therefore any positiondata should be verified against othersources to confirm reliability

1 Display the Installation menu2 Choose GPS WAAS and then press

to open the GPS WAAS options

window

Off

WAAS options window3 Press or to choose ldquoWAAS-02rdquo

(test signal) When the systembecomes operational (in 2003) setto ldquo00rdquo (regular WAAS signal)

4 Turn off the power

BOTTOM LEVEL If the depthindication is unstable in automaticoperation or the bottom echo cannot bedisplayed in the darkest gray tone byadjusting the gain controls in manualoperation you may adjust the bottomecho level detection circuit for both 50kHz and 200 kHz to stabilize theindication Generally lower the bottomlevel for inner hull installation where thereceive level is too low If the bottomlevel is too low it may be difficult todiscriminate fish from the bottomresulting in unstable depth indication

And if the bottom level is too high thedepth indication may not appear

1 At the installation menu press tochoose SET BOTTOM LEVEL andthen press Several seconds laterthe following display appears

Bottom level +0 (200k -100 - +100 ) +0 ( 50k -100 - +100 )

Bottom level display

2 While observing the picture use or to set 200 kHz or to set50 kHz Set up for optimum picture

3 To restore normal operation turn offthe power and then it on again

Note The mode must be other thanldquoNAV DATArdquo to show the bottom leveldisplay

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4448

SP - 1 E2371S01C

SPECIFICATIONS OF ECHO SOUNDER LS-4100

1 GENERAL11 TX Frequency 50 kHz or 200 kHz 50200 kHz dual transmitting selectable12 Transmit Method Single or dual transmitting

13 Output Power 300 Wrms14 TX Rate Max 500 pulsemin15 Pulse-length 01 to 08 ms

2 DISPLAY UNIT21 Display system 5-inch monochrome LCD 76 mm (W) x 100 mm (H) 240 x 320 dots22 Display Mode Single frequency (highlow freq) Dual-frequency Zoom Nav data-12

Marker zoom Bottom zoom Bottom-lock23 Display Range

Range SettingRange

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

Display

rangeMeter 5 10 20 40 80 150 200 300 2-500

Feet 15 30 60 120 200 400 600 1000 7-1500

Fathoms 3 5 10 20 40 80 100 150 1-250

PassiBraza 3 5 10 30 50 100 150 200 1-300

24 Range Shift 0-500 m 0-1500 ft 0-250 fa 0-300 pb25 Expansion Range Bottom-lock expansion 3 to 10 m

Sectional expansion 2 to 50 m26 Display Advance Speed 8 steps (LinesTX Freeze 1161814121121 41)

3 INTERFACE31 Input data sentences IEC61162-1NMEA0183 Ver 152030

GGA RMA RMB RMC BWC GLL HDT HDG VTG VHW MTWMWV MDA XTE

32 Output data sentences IEC61162-1NMEA0183 Ver 152030 interval 2 sMTW VHW DBT DPT RMB TLL by key operating External data required

4 POWER SUPPLY41 Display Unit 12 VDC 05 A

5 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITION51 Ambient Temperature Display unit -15degC to +55degC52 Relative Humidity 93 or less at 40degC53 Waterproof IPX5

6 COATING COLOR61 Display Unit N30

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4548

M a r

4

0 3

D-1

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4648

Mar 4 03

Mar 4 03

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4748

M a r

3

0 3

S-1

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4848

FURUNO Authorized DistributorDealer FURUNO Authorized DistributorDealer

9-52 Ashihara-cho9-52 Ashihara-choNishinomiya 662-8580 JAPANNishinomiya 662-8580 JAPAN

Telephone Telephone 0798-65-21110798-65-2111FaxFax 0798-65-42000798-65-4200

FIRST EDITION FIRST EDITION MARMAR 20032003Printed in JapanPrinted in Japan All rights reserved All rights reserved

B1B1 SEPSEP 09 200509 2005

Pub NoPub No OME-23710OME-23710 00014698000000146980000001469800000014698000(( DAMIDAMI )) LS-4100LS-4100

0 0 0 1 4 6 9 8 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 4 6 9 8 0 0 0

Page 4: OME23710B_1_LS4100

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 448

ii

Safety Instructions for the Installer

W R NINGTurn off the power at the switchboardbefore beginning the installation

Fire or electrical shock can result if thepower is left on

Be sure no water leaks in at the trans-ducer or sensor mounting location

Water leakage can sink the vessel Alsoconfirm that the transducer and sensorwill not loosen by ships vibration Theinstaller of the equipment is solelyresponsible for the proper installation ofthe equipment FURUNO will assume noresponsibility for any damage associatedwith improper installation

Use the specified power cable

Use of other power cable may result infire

UTIONDo not install the equipment whereair bubbles and noise are present

Performance will be affected

The following are guidelines forhandling of the transducer cable

- Do not locate near oils and fuels- Locate it in a safe place- Do no paint the cable

The sheath of the cable is made ofchloroprene rubber (or polychloridevinyl) For this reason do not paintthe cable

Observe the following compass safedistances to prevent interference to amagnetic compass

Displayunit

Standard Steeringcompass compass

04 m 03 m

Do not turn on the equipment with thetransducer out of water

The transducer may be damaged

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 548

iii

FOREWORD

A Word to LS-4100OwnersCongratulations on your choice of theFURUNO LS-4100 5rdquo Echo SounderWe are confident you will see why theFURUNO name has becomesynonymous with quality and reliability

For over 50 years FURUNO ElectricCompany has enjoyed an enviable

reputation for innovative anddependable marine electronicsequipment This dedication toexcellence is furthered by our extensiveglobal network of agents and dealers

This equipment is designed andconstructed to meet the rigorousdemands of the marine environmentHowever no machine can perform its

intended function unless operated andmaintained properly Please carefullyread and follow the recommendedprocedures for operation andmaintenance

We would appreciate hearing from youthe end-user about whether we areachieving our purposes

Thank you for considering andpurchasing FURUNO equipment

FeaturesThe FURUNO LS-4100 is a dualfrequency (50 kHz and 200 kHz)monochrome LCD echo sounderComprised of a display unit and atransducer the LS-4100 displaysunderwater conditions on a bright 5-inchmonochrome LCD

The main features of the LS-4100 are

bull Bright 5-inch monochrome LCD givesexcellent readability even in broaddaylight

bull Automatic function permitsunattended adjustment of range andgain The range scale and gainautomatically change to display thebottom in the darkest gray tone on thelower half of the screen

bull User-programmable nav data displaysprovide analog and digital nav data

bull Alarms Bottom Fish (bottom-lockand normal) Speed WaterTemperature and Arrival (Speed andarrival alarms require appropriatesensor water temperature alarmrequires water temperature data)

bull White line feature helps discriminate

fish lying near the bottombull Destination waypoint feature provides

range bearing and time-to-go todestination waypoint (up to 12waypoints)

bull Waterproof construction permitsinstallation on open bridge

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 648

iv

SYSTEM OVERVIEW

System configuration

Power supply12 VDC

DISPLAY UNITLS-4100

GPS Navigatoror

Wind Indicator

Transducer

Water temperature Speed sensor

ST-02MSBST-02PSB

520-5PSD520-5MSD520-5PWD 525-5PWD525ST-MSD525ST-PWD

Standard Option User supply

Note Contact yourdealer for connection ofother equipment

POWERBRILL

MARK

GAIN

RANGE

ESCMENUMODE

LS-4100

ECHO SOUNDER

Equipment lists

Standard supply

Name Type Code No Qty RemarksDisplay Unit LS-4100 mdash 1

520-5PSD 000-015-204 Thru-hull mount520-5MSD 000-015-212 Thru-hull mount520-5PWD 000-015-126

Transducer

525-5PWD 000-146-966Transom mount

525ST-MSD 000-015-263 Thru-hull mountTriducer (transducerplus spdtemp sensor) 525ST-PWD 000-015-261

1

Transom mount

Installation Materials(CP02-07401)

bull Tapping screw (4 pcs 5 x 20 SUS304 000-802-081)bull Washer head screw B (4 pcs M4 x 20 SUS304 000-804-742)bull Cable assy (1 pc MJ-A7SPF0005-020 000-139-384 for power and data)

Spare Parts(SP02-04801) Fuse (2 pc FGMB 1A 125V Code No 000-114-805)

Template C22-00301 (000-146-981 for flush mount)C22-00302 (000-146-982 for bulkhead)

Optional equipment

Name Type Code No Qty RemarksConversion Cable 02S4147 000-141-082 1 For spdtemp sensor

ST-02MSB 000-137-986Water Temperature ampSpeed Sensor ST-02PSB 000-137-987

Selectone Thru-hull type

Inner Hull Kit S 22S0191 000-802-598 1

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 748

1

1 OPERATION

11 Control Description

Cursor PadSelects menu itemsshifts VRM

Openscloses menuescapes from current

operation

Selects display mode

Adjusts gain

Selects basic display range

Long press Turns power onoffMomentary press Adjusts display contrast and brilliance

Outputs LL positionto external equipmentregisters selected positionas waypoint

POWER

BRILL

MARK

GAIN

RANGE

ESCMENU

MODE

LS-4100

ECHO SOUNDER

Display unit

How to remove the hard cover

Place your thumbs at the center of thecover and then lift the cover whilepressing it with your thumbs

12 Power OnOffPress the [POWERBRILL] key more

than one second to turn on the powerThe unit beeps the startup screenappears and then the equipmentchecks the ROM and RAM for properoperation and displays program number(If ldquoNGrdquo (No Good) appears try to pressany key except the [POWERBRILL] keyto start operation However theequipment may not work properlyContact your dealer) You may

press any key after the completion ofthe equipment check to start operationsooner

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 848

2

Program version no

ROM OK RAM OK Program No 0252318-01

5 ECHO SOUNDER

FURUNO ELECTRIC CO LTD

Start-up screen

To turn off the power press and holddown the [POWERBRILL] key until thescreen goes blank The time remaining

until power is turned off is counted downon the screen

Note The example screens shown inthis manual may not match the screensyou see on your display The screenyou see depends on your systemconfiguration and equipment settings

13 Adjusting DisplayContrast Brilliance

1 Press the [POWERBRILL] keymomentarily to show thebrilliancecontrast adjustmentwindow

CONTST 4 Min Max

BRILLMin Max

4

Brilliancecontrast adjustment window

2 For contrast press the[POWERBRILL] key to adjustcontrast cyclically (You may also use or on the Cursor Pad to adjustcontrast) (Adjustable range 0 to 9)

3 To adjust brilliance use or $ (Adjustable range 0 to 4)

4 Press the [MENUESC] key to closethe brilliancecontrast adjustmentwindow

Note 1 When the power is reappliedafter turning off the equipment withminimum brilliance minimum brilliancewill be set after the equipment goesthrough its initial start up (The start upscreen appears with the maximumbrilliance) Adjust the brilliance asnecessary

Note 2 Setting windows other thanthose on menus are erased if there isno operation within about sevenseconds

14 Choosing a DisplayFrequency

Seven displays are available singlefrequency (50 or 200 kHz) dualfrequency marker-zoom bottom-zoombottom-lock and nav data (twodisplays)

1 Press the [MODE] key to show themode selection window

MODE

SINGLE FREQDUAL FREQMARKER ZOOMBOTTOM ZOOMBOTTOM LOCKNAV DATA-1NAV DATA-250kHz 200kHz

Mode selection window

2 Press the [MODE] key again withinseven seconds to choose a modeYou may also choose a mode with or $

3 For modes other than DUAL FREQchoose frequency Press for 50kHz or for 200 kHz

4 Press the [MENUESC] key to closethe window

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 948

3

Single frequency display

50 kHz

The sounder uses ultrasonic signals todetect bottom conditions The lower thefrequency of the signal the wider thedetection area Therefore the 50 kHzfrequency is useful for general detectionand judging bottom condition

200 kHz

The higher the frequency of theultrasonic signal the better theresolution For this reason the 200 kHzfrequency is ideal for detailed

observation of fish schools

50 kHz

200 kHz

Frequency and coverage area

466

FishSchool

Bottom

0

20

40

50k 1100

Level Bar

Depth

Frequency

Picture Advance Speed

Range Scale

Mode(AUTO or MANUAL)

407 degF162kt Nav Display

MinuteMarker(Shows time

Each baris 30 sec) TransmissionLine

60

Typical 50 kHz display

Dual frequency display

The 50 kHz picture appears on the leftthe 200 kHz picture on the right Thisdisplay is useful for comparing the samepicture with two different transmitting

frequencies

50 kHz 200 kHzpicture picture

496

0050200 11

0

20

40

60

80

20

40

60

80 Dual frequency display

Marker-zoom display

This mode expands chosen area of thenormal picture to full vertical size of thescreen on the left-half window You mayspecify the portion to expand byoperating the VRM (Variable RangeMarker) which you can shift with or$ The area between the VRM andzoom range marker is expanded

Zoomedfishschool

Single frequency display

Variable rangemarker

This sectionis zoomed

Zoom marker

Marker-zoom display

170

250

0

Fishschool

0

40

10

20

30

0050k 11

21

20

19

18

17

22

Marker-zoom display

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 1048

4

Bottom-zoom display

This mode expands bottom and bottomfish in the range width set with ZOOMRANGE of the SYSTEM menu Thismode is useful for determining bottom

contour When the bottom depthincreases the display shift to keep thebottom echo at the lower part of thescreen

0

Bottom-zoom display

298

Bottom

0

40

10

20

30

32

31

30

29

28

27

Switched withdepth

Singlefrequencydisplay

Zoommarker

0050k 11

Bottom-zoom display

Bottom-lock display

The bottom-lock display provides anormal picture on the right half of thescreen and a 15 feet (5 meter) widelayer in contact with the bottom isexpanded onto the left half of the screenThis mode is useful for detecting bottomfish = Operator selectable

Bottom-lock display

Zoommarker

Zoomedfish

This sectionis zoomed

217

0

Singlefrequencydisplay

Fishschool

0

40

Bottom displayed flat

10

20

30

0

1

2

3

4

550k 11

Bottom-lock display

Nav data displays

The nav data displays appear on the leftof the screen Data other than depthrequires appropriate sensor

You can display between two and fouritems in a nav data display and choosethe item and order to display them Seeparagraph 116 to choose the items todisplay ldquoNAV DATA-1rdquo and ldquoNAVDATA-2rdquo in paragraph 21 to choose thenumber of items to display

Depth

694 m

Trip meter

100 nm

Odometer

56 nm

NAV DATA-1 display

NAV DATA-2 display

Temperature

655 deg F

172

1 05 0 05 1

025 nm

XTE

Speed

kt

20

50

40

60

30

10

0

Sample NAV DATA displays(Default setting)

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 1148

5

15 Menu OperatingProcedure

The LS-4100 has three menus MainSystem and Installation Below is the

basic menu operating procedure1 Press the [MENUESC] key to openthe main menu Page 1 or Page 2 ofthe main menu appears dependingon the page last used

[MENU] Exit

(12)

Note SHIFT and CLUTTER arenot available in the auto mode

AUTO MODE Off SHIFT 0ftPIC ADVANCE 11NOISE LIMIT Off CLUTTER Off SIGNAL LEVEL Off

A-SCOPE Off HUE DayWHITE LINE Off DEEP GAIN Low

Pageno

Main menu page 1

2 Use or $ to select an item Toview page 2 of the main menu press$ until showing the display below

[MENU] Exit

(22)

GOTO WPT Off WAYPOINT LIST

TRIP RESET

GAIN ADJ 200 +0GAIN ADJ 50 +0DRAFT 00ft

ALARM MENUSYSTEM MENU

Main menu page 2

3 Press to show selected itemrsquosoptions window The example shownat the top of the right column is theoptions window for AUTO MODE

Off CruisingFishing

Auto mode options window

4 Use or $ to choose option or setnumeric value

5 Press the [MENUESC] key to closethe menu or press to continuemenu operation

16 Automatic OperationHow automatic operation works

The automatic function automatically

chooses the proper gain range scaleand clutter It works as followsbull The range changes automatically to

display the bottom echo on thescreen

bull The gain is automatically adjusted todisplay the bottom echo in the darkesttone

bull Clutter (on the menu) whichsuppresses low-level noise isautomatically adjusted

Choosing automatic operation

The automatic mode provides twochoices of modes cruising and fishing1 Press the [MENUESC] key to open

the main menu2 Press to choose AUTO MODE

from page 1 of the menu3 Press to open the mode options

window4 Choose Cruising or Fishing as

appropriate

ldquoCruisingrdquo is for tracking the bottomldquoFishingrdquo is for searching fish schoolsSince ldquoCruisingrdquo uses a higher clutterrejection setting than fishing it is notrecommended for fish detection -weak fish echoes may not bedisplayed ldquoFishingrdquo clearly displaysweaker echoes

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 1248

6

5 Press the [MENUESC] key to closethe menu

The auto mode in use is shown as(Auto-Fishing) or

(Auto-Cruising) at the top left corner onthe screen

Note When in the auto mode SHIFTand CLUTTER cannot be adjustedmanually

Range offset

To display the bottom tail in detail in theautomatic mode offset the range as

below1 Press the [+] or [-] key of the

[RANGE] key

+0 ft

AUTO RANGE OFFSET

Auto range offset window

2 Press the [+] or [-] key of the[RANGE] key again to choose offsetdesired (range -100 to +300 ft)Note that if the basic range ischanged the offset is returned to ldquo0rdquo

3 Press the [MENUESC] key to finish

Gain offset

Gain offset lets you override automaticgain adjustment1 Press the [GAIN] key

Min Max 0

AUTO GAIN OFFSET

Auto gain offset window

2 Press or key to offset gain(setting range ndash5 to +5) The gainselected is shown at the top of thescreen asG (Gain) + (or -) XX (offset value)

3 Press the [MENUESC] key to finish

17 Manual OperationChoosing the manual mode

1 Press the [MENUESC] key to openthe main menu

2 Press to choose AUTO MODEfrom page 1 of the menu3 Press to show the window4 Choose Off with 5 Press the [MENUESC] key to close

the menu appears at the topleft corner on the screen

Choosing range

The basic range and range shiftingfunctions used together give you themeans to choose the depth you can seeon the screen The basic range can bethought of as providing a ldquowindowrdquo intothe water column and range shifting asmoving the ldquowindowrdquo to the desireddepth

Choosing basic range

The basic range may be chosen withthe [RANGE] key from the eight rangesshown in the table shown below (ldquoPBrdquoin the table means PassiBraza) Thesetting range can be arranged throughthe SYSTEM menu

Default ranges

Basic RangeUnit1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

meters 5 10 20 40 80 150 200 300

feet 15 30 60 120 200 400 600 1000

fathoms 3 5 10 20 40 80 100 150

hiro 4 8 15 30 50 100 150 200

PB 3 5 10 30 50 100 150 200

Japanese unit of depth measurement1 Press the [+] or [-] key of the

[RANGE] key and the display shouldnow look something like the one onat the top of the next page

2 Press the [+] or [-] key of the[RANGE] key again to choose abasic range

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 1348

7

1000ft 600ft 400ft 200ft 120ft 60ft 30ft 15ft

Basic ranges (default)3 Press the [MENUESC] key to close

the window

Shifting the range

The basic range may be shifted up ordown in the manual mode as follows

Display

Window can beshifted up anddown to selectthe depth

Range and display shift concept

1 Press the [MENUESC] key to openthe main menu

2 Choose SHIFT from page 1 of themenu

3 Press to open the shift optionswindow

0ft

Shift window

4 Use or $ to choose amount ofshift desired

5 Press the [MENUESC] key to closethe window

Note The picture may not be displayedif the amount of shift is greater thanactual depth

Adjusting the gain

The [GAIN] key adjusts the sensitivity ofthe receiver Generally use a highergain setting for greater depths and alower setting for shallower waters

Use the proper gain setting

Incorrect gain may produce wrong depthindication possibly resulting in a dangeroussituation

UTION

Gain too high Gain proper Gain too low Examples of proper and improper gain

1 Press the [GAIN] key and the displayshown below appears

Min Max

50k 3

200k 2

GAIN

Gain adjustment window

2 When using the dual frequencydisplay press or $ to choosefrequency

3 Press the [GAIN] key to set (Youmay also use or ) Adjust so thata slight amount of noise remains onthe screen

4 Press the [MENUESC] key to closethe gain adjustment window

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 1448

8

18 Measuring DepthThe VRM (Variable Range Marker)functions to measure the depth to fishschools etc1 Press or $ to place the VRM

on the object which you wish tomeasure range

2 Read the VRM depth just abovethe VRM

0

20

40

60

80496

398

VRM

VRM depth

50k 11

How to measure depth with the VRM

19 Choosing PictureAdvance Speed

The picture advance speed determineshow quickly the vertical scan lines runacross the screen When choosing apicture advance speed keep in mindthat a fast advance speed will expandthe size of the fish school horizontallyon the screen and a slow advancespeed will contract it Note that thepicture is not refreshed when pictureadvancement is stopped Thereforeuse caution when steering the vesselunder this condition

Fast Slow Picture and picture advancement speed

1 Press the [MENUESC] key to openthe main menu

2 Choose PIC ADVANCE from page 1of the menu

3 Press to show the optionswindow

Stop116 18 14 12 11 21 41

(

)

Fast

Slow

Picture advance options window

4 Use or $ to choose pictureadvance speed desired Thefractions in the options windowdenote the number of scan linesproduced per transmission Forexample 18 means one scan line isproduced every 8 transmissionsldquoStoprdquo freezes the display and it isconvenient for taking a photo

The picture is not refreshed whenpicture advancement is stopped

Maneuvering the vessel in this conditionmay result in a dangerous situation

UTION

5 Press the [MENUESC] key to closethe menu

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 1548

9

110 SuppressingInterference

Interference from other acousticequipment operating nearby or other

electronic equipment on your boat mayshow itself on the display as shown inthe figure belowTo suppress interference do thefollowing1 Press the [MENUESC] key to open

the main menu2 Use or $ to choose NOISE LIMIT

from page 1 of the menu3 Press to show the options

window4 Use or $ to choose the degree ofsuppression desired Off LowMedium or High (highest)

5 Press the [MENUESC] key to closethe menu

Interference fromother sounder

Electrical interference

Forms of interference

Turn the noise limiter off when nointerference exists otherwise weakechoes may be missed

111 Suppressing LowLevel Noise

Low intensity ldquospecklesrdquo may appearover most of screen This is mainly due

to sediment in the water or noise Thesecan be suppressed by adjustingCLUTTER on the menu When theautomatic mode is on clutter isautomatically rejected To suppress lowlevel noise in manual sounder operationdo the following1 Press the [MENUESC] key to open

the main menu2 Use or $ to choose CLUTTER

from page 1 of the menu3 Press to show the optionswindow

4 Use or $ to choose the degree ofsuppression desired 1 2 3 4 5 or6 The higher the number the greaterthe suppression

5 Press the [MENUESC] key to closethe menu

To turn off low-level noisesuppression choose Off at step 4 andthen press the [MENUESC] key

Clutter appearance

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 1648

10

112 Erasing WeakEchoes

Sediment in the water or reflectionsfrom plankton may be painted on the

display in low intensity tones

Weakechoes

Appearance of weak echoes

These weak echoes may be erased asfollows1 Press the [MENUESC] key to open

the main menu2 Use or $ to choose SIGNAL

LEVEL from page 1 of the menu3 Press to show the options

window4 Use or $ to choose the degree of

suppression desired Off Low orHigh (highest)

5 Press the [MENUESC] key to closethe menu

To turn off the signal level function choose Off at step 4 and then pressthe [MENUESC] key

113 A-scope DisplayThis display shows echoes at eachtransmission with amplitudes and toneproportional to their intensities on theright 14 of the screen It is useful forestimating the kind of fish school andbottom composition

Note In the dual frequency display the A-scope display is only available withthe high frequency display

323

10

20

30

40

0

A-scope display

Single frequency display

Strong

reflection(bottom)

Weakreflection(fish or noise)

50k 11

Strongreflection(fish)

A-scope display

1 Press the [MENUESC] key to openthe main menu

2 Press or $ to choose A-SCOPEfrom page 1 of the menu

3 Press to show the optionswindow

4 Press

or$

to choose the A-scope presentation type desiredNormal Display shows echoes ateach transmission with amplitudesand tone proportional to theirintensitiesPeak Peak-hold amplitude picture

5 Press the [MENUESC] key to closethe menu

To turn off the A-scope displaychoose Off at step 4 and then press the[MENUESC] key

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 1748

11

114 AlarmsAlarm description

The LS-4100 has six conditions whichgenerate both audio and visual alarms

bottom alarm normal fish alarm bottomlock fish alarm water temperature alarmarrival alarm and speed alarm (Thewater temperature arrival and speedalarms require appropriate sensors)

Bottom alarm The bottom alarm alertsyou when the bottom is within the alarmrange set To activate the bottom alarmthe depth must be displayed

Fish (normal) alarm The fish (normal)alarm tells you when fish are within thepreset alarm range

Fish (bottom lock) alarm The fish(bottom lock) alarm available with thebottom-lock mode sounds when fishare within a certain distance from thebottom Note that the bottom zoom

display must be turned on to use thisalarm

Water temperature alarm The watertemperature alarm alerts when thewater temperature is within (Insidealarm) the alarm range set orunderover (outside alarm) the rangeset

Speed alarm The speed alarm alertsyou when the speed is within (Insidealarm) or underover (Outside alarm)the preset speed

Arrival alarm The arrival alarm alertswhen you are near a waypoint by thedistance set

Activating an alarm

1 Press the [MENUESC] key2 Press or $ to choose ALARM

MENU from page 2 on the menu3 Press the to show the ALARM

menu

ALARM

(12)

[MENU] Exit

ALARM

(22)

[MENU] Exit

BOTTOM On FROM 5ft

RANGE 10ftFISH(Normal) On

FROM 5ft RANGE 10ftFISH(BL) On

FROM 8ft RANGE 10ftFISH LEVEL Medium

TEMPERATURE Inside FROM 724 deg F RANGE 10 deg F

SPEED Off FROM 00kt

RANGE 10kt

ARRIVAL ALRM Off RANGE 0 01 m

Pageno

Gray characters mean alarm is inactive Alarm menu

4 Use or $ to choose an alarm asappropriate

5 Press to show the options menu

Off On

Off InsideOutside

Temp Speed Alarm Types

Fish ArrivalBottom AlarmOnOff

Alarm options6 Use or $ to choose alarm type

Off Alarm off On Alarm onInside Alarm generated whenspeed (or water temperature) iswithin the range setOutside Alarm generated whenspeed (or water temperature) isoutside the range set

7 Press to close the windowFor ARRIVAL ALARM setting skip tostep 12

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 1848

12

8 Press $ to choose FROM9 Press to show the options menu

0ft

Depth

632 deg F

Temperature

10 kt

Speed Depth temperature speed setting

window10 Use or $ to set starting depth

temperature or speed as appropriateFor FISH (BL) the starting depth isthe range from the bottom

11 Press to close the window12 Press $ to choose RANGE13 Press to show the options menu14 Use or $ to set alarm range15 For the bottom alarm temperature

alarm speed alarm or arrivalalarm press the [MENUESC] key tofinish For a fish alarm press toclose the window and then go tostep 16

16 Press $ to choose FISH LEVEL17 Press to show the options menu

Weak

MediumStrong Fish level options

18 Use or $ to choose the echostrength level which will trigger a fishalarm

Weak Weak echoes (weakest toneon level bar)Medium Medium strength echoes

(middle tone on level bar)Strong Strong echoes (darkest toneon level bar)

19 Press the [MENUESC] key twice toclose the menu

Alarm range marker Bottom alarm Fish alarm (normal) Right Fish alarm (bottomlock) Left

Alarm icon

Alarm rangeStartingpoint

Bottom alarm Fish alarm (normal) Fish alarm (BL)

Temperature alarm (deg

C ordeg

F shown) Speed alarm Arrival alarm

Alarm icon (Appropriate icon appears to showwhich alarm has been violated)

How the alarm works

Note To disable an alarm choose Offat step 5 in the above procedure

Silencing the buzzer

The buzzer sounds and the appropriatealarm icon appears and flashes whenan alarm is violated You can silence thebuzzer by pressing any key Howeverthe buzzer will sound whenever thealarm setting is violated

Note The audio and visual alarms arereleased against the last-violated alarmwhen multiple alarms are active

115 WaypointsWaypoints may be used tobull Record the position of an important

echo as waypoint 12 points may beregistered

bull Output a waypoint position to a plotterto mark position on its screen

bull Find range bearing and time-to-go toa location (waypoint)

Note Requires latitude and longitudeposition from a navigator

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 1948

13

Registering a waypoint on thescreen

1 Press the [MARK] key The cursorappears along with waypoint entryinstructions To enter a waypoint tothe current own shiprsquos position go tostep 3Note If there is no position data themessage ldquoNo position datardquo appearsCheck the navigator

50k

496

1100

20

40

60

80

0

Cursor

WAYPOINT ENTRY

( Move) Cursor [MARK] Enter [MENU] Cancel

50 kHz display

2 Press the cursor pad to set thecursor where desired Pictureadvancement is stopped until step 3is completed and the instructionwindow is integrated into the navdisplay

3 Press the [MARK] key again WhenTLL or FURUNO-TLL is selected atTLL OUTPUT on the System menuthe latitude and longitude position atthe cursor is output to the navigator

A vertical line marks location Furtherthe display shows the waypointname (next sequential number) andposition of the location selected atstep 2

WAYPOINTName FREQLat 34 deg 22796NLon 136 deg 07264E

05

[MENU] Exit

rase

Waypoint data display

Note If you attempt to enter 13thwaypoint the message ldquoMemoryfullrdquo appears In this case erase anunwanted waypoint to enable entry

4 To save the waypoint under thename shown go to step 8 or go tostep 5 to change its name

5 Press to open the waypoint nameentry window

WAYPOINTName FREQLat 34 deg 22796NLon 136 deg 07264E

05

[MENU] Exit

01------ ENT

rase

Waypoint window name entry6 Use or to set character $ or

to shift cursor The name mayconsist of 10 alphanumericcharactersNote Character order is 0 1hellip9 - A BhellipZ _ 0hellip

7 Press to choose ENT 8 Press the [MENUESC] key to

register the waypoint

Registering waypoint by LL

1 Press the [MENUESC] key to openthe main menu

2 Use or to choose WAYPOINTLIST from page 2 of the menu

3 Press

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 2048

14

WAYPOINT LIST

01 0102 0303------------------------------------------------------

[MENU] Exit

Waypoint list4 Press or to choose an empty

waypoint and press Press again

NEW WAYPOINTName FREQLat 34 deg 22796NLon 136 deg 07264E

05

[MENU] Exit

04------ ENT

rase

New waypoint window name entry

5 Use or to set character $ or to shift cursor

6 Press to select ENT 7 Enter latitude and longitude similar

to how you entered waypoint name8 Press the [MENUESC] key to

register the waypoint

Editing waypoints Press the [MENUESC] key to open

the main menu

2 Use or to choose WAYPOINTLIST from page 2 of the menu

3 Press to open the waypoints list4 Use or to choose a waypoint

and press 5 Use or to choose the item to

edit (name latitude or longitude)6 Press to open the data entry

window7 Use or to set character $ or

to choose location8 Press to choose ENT 9 Press the [MENUESC] key

Erasing waypoints Press the [MENUESC] key2 Use or to choose WAYPOINT

LIST from page 2 of the menu3 Press to open the waypoints list

4 Use or to choose the waypointto erase and then press Note You cannot erase a waypointwhich is selected as ldquoGOTO WPTrdquo

5 Press to choose ldquoEraserdquo6 Press to open the options window7 Press to select YES to erase the

waypoint The waypoint list appearswith the erased waypoint blank

8 Press the [MENUESC] key twice toclose the menu

Setting destination waypoint

Set a destination waypoint to find rangebearing and time-to-go to that point Youcan see range and bearing to awaypoint Time-to-go is shown on theTime to Go digital display

Press the [MENUESC] key to openthe main menu

2 Use or to choose GOTO WPTfrom page 2 of the menu

3 Press to open the waypoints list

Off01020304----------------------------------------------------------------

Waypoint list

4 Use or to choose a waypoint5 Press the [MENUESC] key to close

the menu

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 2148

15

116 Setting Up Nav DataDisplays

The user may arrange the nav datadisplays as desired

1 Use the [MODE] key to show theNAV DATA-1 or 2 display whicheveryou want to set up

2 Press the [MENUESC] key to closethe mode selection window

3 Press the cursor pad to display theNAV DATA SETUP window

NAV DATA SETUP

Window Selection Data Selection

[MENU] Exit

NAV DATA SETUP window

4 Use or to choose a datadisplay window desired Adashed-line rectangle circumscribesyour selection

5 Use

or$

to choose item todisplay See the below for adescription of the displays

(9)

(1)

(2)

(3)

(4)(5)

(6)(7)(8)

Two-data

display

Three-data

display

Four-data

displayItems displayable in (1) - (3) depth positioncourse range and bearing trip distanceodometer water temperature headingair pressure time-to-go to destination waypointXTE speed wind speed and directiondestination waypoint data compassItems displayable in (4) - (9) depth positionspeed course range and bearing trip distanceodometer water temperature headingair pressure time-to-go to destination waypointXTE wind speed wind direction

= Graphic display

Nav data window and item displayable6 Press the [MENUESC] key to finish

Note You can choose the number ofitems to show in a nav data display withNAV DATA-1 and NAV DATA-2 on theSystem menu

GRAPHIC DISPLAYS

1 05 0 05 1

Wpt 03Rng 019nm Brg 321 deg XTE 000nm Cse 333 deg

DESTINATION WAYPOINT GRAPHIC

XTEscale

BearingCourseDestinationwaypointdirection

DestinationwaypointdataNameRangeXTE

Wind APP

WIND GRAPHIC

60

120

90

030

150180

120

150

90

60

30

120 deg

Speed 103 ms

COMPASS GRAPHIC

SPEED GRAPHIC

172

Speed

20

50

40

60

30

10

01 05 0 05 1

025 nm

XTE

XTE GRAPHIC

kt

Bearing todestinationwaypoint

Course

Brg30 deg

Cse90 deg

N

E

XTE scale

Speed-ometer

Nav data display-1

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 2248

16

DIGITAL DISPLAYS

Course

123 deg

COURSE

Depth

328 ft

DEPTH

Heading TRUEMAG

318 deg

HEADING

Odometer

56 nm

ODOMETER

Position GPS 3D

30 deg 00065N130 deg 00574E

POSITION

Temperature

698 degF

WATER TEMPERATURE

Trip meter

121 nm

TRIP DISTANCE

Time to Go

00 H30 M

TIME-TO-GO

1018 hpa

AIR PRESSURE

Air Pressure

Speed

193 kt

SPEED

Rng

121 nm

RANGE amp BEARING

Brg

140 deg

Wind Speed APP

80 ms

WIND SPEED

Wind Dir APP

138 deg

WIND DIRECTION

APP or TRUE depending on menu setting TRUE or MAG depending

on menu settingamp To destination waypoint

Note 1 Nav data is updated with somedelay

Note 2 When data is lost 120 sec thedisplay shows - - at the locationwhere data is lost

= GPS receiving status (Displays whenconnecting with GP-310B320B and InOutis selected at the Installation menu)NO FIX Position cannot be foundGPS 2D 2D (dimension) GPS position fixGPS 3D 3D GPS fixGPS W2D 2D WAAS position fixGPS W3D 3D WAAS position fix

NAV data display-2

117 Other Menu ItemsThis section describes the menu itemsnot previously mentioned

Page 1

HUE (Picture Color)

Two picture color arrangements areavailable Day and Night Day showsechoes on a white background Nightshows them on a black background

1 Press the [MENUESC] key todisplay the menu

2 Use or $ to choose HUE frompage 1 of the menu

3 Press to show the optionswindow

4 Use or $ to choose Day or Nightas appropriate

5 Press the [MENUESC] key to closethe menu

WHITE LINE

The white line feature displays theleading edge of the bottom echo in

white This is useful for discriminatingbottom fish near the bottom

1 Press the [MENUESC] key todisplay the main menu

2 Use or $ to choose WHITE LINEfrom page 1 of the menu

3 Press to show the optionswindow

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 2348

17

4 Use or to choose Off Tone orMesh as appropriate ldquoMeshrdquo paintsthe white line in darker tone thanldquoTonerdquo

5 Press the [MENUESC] key to closethe menu

526White Line OFF White Line ON (Mesh)

Fish schoolclearly shown

White line

0

20

40

60

80

050k 11

526

0

20

40

60

80

00 050k 11

How white line works

DEEP GAIN

ldquoDeep Gainrdquo compensates forpropagation attenuation of the ultrasonicwaves It does this by equalizing echopresentation so that fish schools of thesame size appear in the same density inboth shallow and deep waters Inaddition it reduces surface noise

Press the [MENUESC] key to openthe main menu

2 Use or to choose DEEP GAINfrom page of the menu

3 Press $ to show to the optionswindow

4 Choose Low Medium or High asappropriate High provides thegreatest degree of gain reductionagainst short range echoes

5 Press the [MENUESC] key to closethe menu

Page 2

TRIP RESET

This item resets trip distance to ldquo0rdquo

Press the [MENUESC] key to openthe main menu

2 Use or to choose TRIPRESET from page 2 of the menu

3 Press $ 4 Press to reset trip distance

Beeps are generated while the tripdistance is being reset

5 Press the [MENUESC] key to closethe menu

Note To reset the odometer to zeroclear the memory

GAIN ADJ 200 GAIN ADJ 50

If the gain is too high or too low or thegain for the low and high frequenciesappears unbalanced you cancompensate it as follows

Press the [MENUESC] key to openthe main menu

2 Use or to choose GAIN ADJ200 or GAIN ADJ 50 from page 2 ofthe menu

3 Press $ to show to the optionswindow

4 Use or to set the amount Thesetting range is ndash50 to +50

5 Press the [MENUESC] key to close

the menu

DRAFT

The default depth display shows thedistance from the transducer If youwould rather show the distance from thesea surface set your shiprsquos draft asfollows

Press the [MENUESC] key to openthe main menu

2 Use or to choose DRAFT frompage 2 of the menu

3 Press $ and then use or to setdraft The setting range is ndash 50 to+500 (meters feet)

4 Press the [MENUESC] key to closethe menu

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 2448

18

2 SYSTEM MENU

The System menu mainly consists ofitems which once set do not requirefrequent adjustment You may displaythis menu by choosing SYSTEM MENUat page 2 of the main menu andpressing

SYSTEM MENULANGUAGE English

DEPTH UNIT ftSPEED UNIT ktWIND UNIT msTEMP UNIT deg F

TEMP GRAPH OffNAV DATA-1 NAV DATA-2

WATER TYPE SaltKEY BEEP OnBATT VOLTAGE Off (13)

[MENU] Exit

SYSTEM MENU

(23)

NAV DISPLAY TempSpeedNMEA0183 Ver 20TLL OUTPUT OffBEARING TrueWIND SPDDIR ApparentTRIP SOURCE Own

TEMP SOURCE OwnSPEED SOURCE OwnTEMP CALIB +00 deg F ( 40)SPEED CALIB +0 ( 50)

Own speed Own temp 100 kt 162 deg F

[MENU] Exit

SYSTEM MENU

(33)

BASIC RANGE1 15 ft

RANGE2 30RANGE3 60RANGE4 120RANGE5 200RANGE6 400RANGE7 600RANGE8 1000 (7-1500)

ZOOM RANGE 15 ft (7-150)BL RANGE 15 ft (10-30)(Bottom Lock)

ZOOM MARKER On

[MENU] Exit

PAGE 3

PAGE 2

PAGE 1

Page no

System menus

21 System MenuPage 1

LANGUAGE The system language isavailable in English several Europeanlanguages and Japanese To changelanguage select language desired andpress the [MENUESC] key

DEPTH UNIT Choose unit of depthmeasurement from meters feet

fathoms passibraza and hiro(Japanese)

SPEED UNIT Choose unit of speedmeasurement from knots miles perhour and kilometers per hour Requiresspeed data

WIND UNIT Choose unit of wind speedmeasurement from ms kt kmh and

mph Requires wind speed data

TEMP UNIT Choose unit oftemperature measurement Celsius orFahrenheit Requires temperature data

TEMP GRAPH Turns the watertemperature display on or off Thetemperature scale range is 16deg (degF) inldquoNarrowrdquo 40deg (degF) in ldquoWiderdquo Requires

water temperature data

m526

0

20

40

60

80

00 050k 11

40

80

70

50

60

TemperatureScale

TemperatureGraph

638 deg F162kt

Water temperature display (wide degF)

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 2548

19

NAV DATA-1 -2 Choose the number ofnavigation data items to display on thenav data displays from two three orfour items Requires appropriate navdata

WATER TYPE Choose the water typewith which to use the LS-4100 fromSalt or Fresh

KEY BEEP Turn key beep on or off

BATT VOLTAGE Turn the batteryvoltage indication (appears at the topright corner on the screen) on or offWhen on it replaces the picture advancespeed indication

Page 2

NAV DISPLAY Choose the nav data todisplay in the nav data window at thetop left-hand corner You may choosefrom temperaturespeedlatitudelongitude range and bearingcourse over ground trip distance or

wind speed Requires appropriate navdata

407 deg F162kt

Nav window

NMEA0183 Choose NMEA version ofnavigator Ver 15 Ver 20 or Ver 30

TLL OUTPUT Enablesdisables outputof TLL (Target Latitude Longitude)position when the [MARK] key isoperated ldquoTLLrdquo outputs latitude andlongitude position ldquoFURUNO-TLLrdquoavailable with connection of navigatorthat can output FURUNO TLL outputslatitude and longitude watertemperature depth etc

BEARING Shiprsquos course and bearingto a waypoint may be displayed in trueor magnetic bearing Magnetic bearingis true bearing plus (or minus) earthrsquosmagnetic deviation Requires bearingdata

WIND SPDDIR Choose the windspeed and direction reference from trueand apparent Requires wind sensorApparen t The direction (in relation toshiprsquos bow) and speed of the wind as itappears to those on board relative tothe speed and direction of the boatcombination of the true wind and thewind caused by the boats movementTrue The speed and direction (inrelation to shiprsquos bow) of the wind felt ormeasured when stationary

TRIP SOURCE Choose speed sourcefor the trip distance indication Own(transducer with speed sensor orseparate speed sensor) or NMEA

TEMP SOURCE Choose source ofwater temperature input Off Own(transducer with water temperaturesensor or separate temperature sensor)or NMEA

SPEED SOURCE Choose source ofspeed input Off Own (transducer withspeed sensor or separate speedsensor) or NMEA Requires speed

data

TEMP CALIB If the water temperaturesensor-generated water temperatureindication is wrong you can correct ithere when ldquoOwnrdquo is selected astemperature source For example if thewater temperature indication is 2deghigher than actual water temperatureenter -2 The setting range is -40degF to

+40degF

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 2648

20

SPEED CALIB If the speedsensor-generated speed indication iswrong you can correct it here whenldquoOwnrdquo is selected as speed source Forexample if the speed indication is 10lower than actual speed enter +10 Thesetting range is ndash50 to +50

Page 3

BASIC RANGE 1 - BASIC RANGE 8 Set range of each of the eight basicranges (Selectable range 7 to 1500 ft)Note 1 All default basic ranges arerestored whenever the depth unit ischanged Therefore change the depth

unit before changing the basic rangesNote 2 A range may not be lower thanthe range preceding it For example ifbasic range 3 is 60 feet basic range 4must be greater than 60 feet

ZOOM RANGE Choose the range tozoom in the marker-zoom andbottom-zoom modes You may choose arange between 7 and 150 feet (2 and 50

meters)

BL RANGE The expansion width forthe bottom-lock display can be chosenfrom 10 to 30 feet (3 and 10 meters)

ZOOM MARKER The zoom markerappears in the normal bottom markerand bottom zoom displays and marksthe area which is expanded in the

bottom marker and bottom zoompictures You can turn the marker on oroff as desired

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 2748

21

3 MAINTENANCETROUBLESHOOTING

W RNING

ELECTRICAL SHOCK HAZARDDo not open the equipment

Only qualified personnel should workinside the equipment

31 Maintenance

Regular maintenance is essential forgood performance Checking the itemslisted in the table below monthly willhelp keep your equipment in goodshape for years to come

Checking

Item Action

Transducercable

Check cable for damage

Power cabletransducercable plug

Check that they are tightlyfastened Refasten ifnecessary

Display unitground

Check for corrosion Cleanif necessary

Power supplyvoltage

Check voltage If out ofrating correct problem

32 Cleaning the DisplayUnit

Dust or dirt on the display unit can beremoved with a soft cloth If desired awater-moistened cloth may be usedUse special care when cleaning theLCD since it scratches easily Do notuse chemical cleaners to clean thedisplay unit - they can remove paint andmarkings

33 TransducerMaintenance

Marine life on the transducer face willresult in a gradual decrease insensitivity Check the transducer facefor cleanliness each time the boat isdry-docked Carefully remove anymarine life with a piece of wood orfine-grade sandpaper

34 Replacing the FuseThe fuse in the power cable protects thesystem from reverse polarity of thepower supply and equipment fault If thefuse blows find the cause beforereplacing it Use only a 1A fuse (FGMB 1A 125V Code No 000-114-805 ) orequivalent Using the wrong fuse will damage the unit and void the warranty

W RNINGUse the proper fuse

Fuse rating is shown on the equipmentUse of a wrong fuse can result in fire anddamage the equipment

35 Battery Voltage Alert A battery icon appears when the batteryvoltage is too high or too low

Battery icon and meaning

Icon Meaning

Voltage is lower than 10 VDC If thevoltage goes below 9 V the equipmentis automatically turned off

Voltage is higher than 165 VDC If thevoltage goes higher than 175 V theequipment is automatically turned off

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 2848

22

36 TroubleshootingThe table below provides basictroubleshooting procedures which theuser may follow to restore normaloperation

Troubleshooting table

Ifhellip Then check hellipneither echo norfixed range scaleappears

bull battery voltagebull fusebull power cable

no echo appearsbut the fixedrange scaleappears

bull if display advancespeed is set to ldquoStoprdquo

bull transducer plugbull

transducer cableecho appears butno zero line

bull if range shifting is setto ldquo0rdquo

sensitivity is low bull gain settingbull if air bubbles or marine

life is clinging to thetransducer face

bull if sediments arepresent in the water

bull if the bottom is too soft

to return an echothere is extremeinterference ornoise

bull if the transducer is tooclose to the engine

bull if the unit is properlygrounded

bull if other echo soundersof the same frequencyas own are beingoperated nearby

the speedwatertemperaturereadout isunrealistic or notpresent

bull sensor plug

the positionreadout isunrealistic or notpresent

bull the connectionbetween sounder andnavigator

bull navigator

37 DiagnosticsIf you feel your unit is not workingproperly conduct the diagnostic test tofind the problem If you cannot restorenormal operation contact your dealerfor advice

1 Turn on the power while pressing the[MENUESC] key Continue pressingthe [MENUESC] key until theInstallation menu appears

SIMULATION On

TEST LCD PATTERN MEMORY CLEAR

NMEA PORT InOutNMEA MIX Off GPS WAAS Off

SET BOTTOM LEVEL

Installation Menu

= Setting cannot be changed whenNMEA PORT setting is InIn

Installation menu2 Press to choose TEST3 Press to start the test

ROM OKRAM OKNMEA

Temp 682 deg F

Speed 100kmh

Power 124 VBody 39 deg C

Program No 0252318-01Push [MENU] 3 times to exit

Level bar

= Program version no

Water

TemperatureSpeedBattery VoltageTemperatureinside displayunit(Unit fixed atdeg C)

GPS (48502180) OK

Only when GP-310B is connected(For GP-320B 4850238)

Test display

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 2948

23

4 The ROM RAM and NMEA port arechecked with the results shown asOK or NG (No Good) For any NGrequest service (A special connectoris required to test the NMEA portNothing appears if no connector isconnected)

5 The squares at the right side of thetest display are for checking thecontrols Press each key and thearrows on the Cursor Pad one byone A controlrsquos correspondingon-screen square ldquolightsrdquo in black ifthe control is normal

6 To return to the Installation menupress the [MENUESC] key threetimes

7 To restore normal operation turn offthe power and turn it on again

38 Test PatternThis feature tests for proper display oftones

1 On the Installation menu press $ tochoose LCD PATTERN

2 Press to start the test The entirescreen is black

3 Press again and the screen turnswhite

4 Press again and the screenshows a four-toned display

5 Press again to return to theInstallation menu

6 To restore normal operation turn offthe power and then it on again

WHITE FOUR-TONE BLACK

Test patterns

39 Memory ClearThe memory can be cleared to startafresh with default menu settings

1 At the installation menu press $ tochoose MEMORY CLEAR

2 Press to open the optionswindow

YES NO

Clear memory display

3 Press to clear the memory Beepsare generated while the memory isbeing cleared

4 To restore normal operation turn offthe power and then turn it on again

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3048

24

4 INSTALLATION

41 Display UnitMounting considerations

The display unit can be installed on adesktop on the bulkhead or flushmounted in a panel When choosing alocation keep the following in mind

bull Keep the display unit out of directsunlight

bull The temperature and humidity should

be moderate and stablebull Locate the unit away from exhaust

pipes and ventsbull The mounting location should be well

ventilatedbull Mount the unit where shock and

vibration are minimalbull For maintenance and checking

purposes leave sufficient space atthe sides and rear of the unit andleave slack in cables

bull A magnetic compass will be affected ifthe display unit is placed too close toit Observe the following compasssafe distances to prevent disturbanceto the magnetic compassStandard compass 04 metersSteering compass 03 meters

Desktop overhead mounting1 Fix the bracket to a desktop or the

overhead with tapping screws(supplied)

2 Loosely screw knobs into the displayunit

3 Set the display unit to the bracketand then tighten the knobs

Mounting on the bulkhead Flush

mounting in a panelSee the instructions on the bulkhead orflush mounting template (supplied)

42 Thru-hull MountTransducer

Transducer mounting location

The thru-hull mount transducer

(520-5PSD 520-5MSD) provides thebest performance of all since thetransducer protrudes from the hull andthe effect of air bubbles and turbulencenear the hull skin is reduced When theboat has a keel the transducer shouldbe at least 30 cm away from it Typicalthru-hull mountings are shown in thefigure on the next page

The performance of this sounder isdirectly related to the mounting locationof the transducer especially forhigh-speed cruising The installationshould be planned in advance keepingthe standard cable length (8 m) and thefollowing factors in mindbull Air bubbles and turbulence caused by

movement of the boat seriouslydegrade the sounding capability of thetransducer The transducer shouldtherefore be located in a positionwhere water flow is the smoothestNoise from the propellers alsoadversely affects performance andthe transducer should not be mountednearby The lifting strakes arenotorious for creating acoustic noiseand these must be avoided bykeeping the transducer inboard ofthem

bull The transducer must always remain

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3148

25

submerged even when the boat isrolling pitching or up on a plane athigh speed

bull A practical choice would besomewhere between 13 and 12 of

the boatrsquos length from the stern Forplaning hulls a practical location isgenerally rather far astern so that thetransducer is always in waterregardless of the planing attitude

28

22

120

68

30

520-5PSD

24

120

68

87520-5MSD

Unit mm

Thru-hull mount transducer dimensions

Acceptable transducer mounting

locations

Position 12 to 13 of the hull from stern

15 to 30 cm off center line (inside first lifting strakes)

Within the wetted bottom area

Deadrise angle within 15 deg

HIGH SPEED-V HULL

Suitable transducer mounting locations

Typical thru-hull mounttransducer installations

FairingBlock

Flat Washer

Rubber Washer

Hull

Deep-V Hull

Hull

Flat Washer

Rubber Washer

Flat Hull

CorkWasher

Typical thru-hull mounttransducer installations

Procedure for installing thethru-hull mount transducer

1 With the boat hauled out of the watermark the location chosen formounting the transducer on thebottom of the hull

2 If the hull is not level within 15deg inany direction fairing blocks madeout of teak should be used betweenthe transducer and hull both insideand outside to keep the transducerface parallel with the water lineFabricate the fairing block as shownbelow and make the entire surfaceas smooth as possible to provide anundisturbed flow of water around thetransducer The fairing block shouldbe smaller than the transducer itselfto provide a channel to divert

turbulent water around the sides ofthe transducer rather than over itsface

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3248

26

BOWHole for stuffing tube

Upper Half

Lower Half

Saw along slopeof hull Construction of fairing block

3 Drill a hole just large enough to passthe threaded stuffing tube of thetransducer through the hull makingsure it is drilled vertically

4 Apply a sufficient amount of highquality caulking compound to the topsurface of the transducer around thethreads of the stuffing tube andinside the mounting hole (and fairingblocks if used) to ensure watertightmounting

5 Mount the transducer and fairingblocks and tighten the locking nutsBe sure that the transducer is

properly oriented and its workingface is parallel to the waterline

Note Do not over-stress the stuffingtube and locking nuts through excessivetightening since the wood block willswell when the boat is placed in thewater It is suggested that the nut betightened lightly at installation andretightened several days after the boat

has been launched

Transducer preparation

Before putting the boat in water wipethe face of the transducer thoroughlywith a detergent liquid soap This willlessen the time necessary for thetransducer to have good contact withthe water Otherwise the time requiredfor complete ldquosaturationrdquo ill belengthened and performance will bereduced

DO NOT paint the transducerPerformance will be affected

43 Transom MountTransducer

The transom mount transducer is verycommonly employed usually onrelatively small IO or outboard boatsDo not use this method on an inboardmotor boat because turbulence iscreated by the propeller ahead of thetransducer

520-5PWD

There are two methods of installationflush with hull (for flat hulls) andprojecting from hull (for deep V-hulls)

Flat Hull

D

Dgt50 cm

Deep-VHull

520-5PWD mounting locations

Installing the 520-5PWD on a flat hull

A suitable mounting location is at least50 cm away from the engine and wherethe water flow is smooth

1 Drill four pilot holes in the mountinglocation

2 Attach the transducer to the bracketwith 5 x 20 tapping screws(supplied)

3 Adjust the transducer position so thetransducer faces right to the bottom

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3348

27

Note If necessary to improve waterflow and minimize air bubblesstaying on the transducer faceincline the transducer about 5deg at therear This may require a certainamount of experimentation for finetuning at high cruising speeds

4 Fill the gap between the wedge frontof the transducer and transom withepoxy material to eliminate any airspaces

No1 M5 x 14

5 x 20

5 x 20

2 to 5

Tape

Hull

Transom mount transducer

mounting flush with hull

Installing the transom mounttransducer on a deep-V hull

This method is employed on deep-Vhulls and provides good performancebecause the effects of air bubbles areminimal Install the transducer parallelwith water surface not flush with hull Ifthe boat is placed on a trailer care mustbe taken not to damage the transducerwhen the boat is hauled out of the waterand put on the trailer

5 x 20

No 2M5 x 14

5 x 20

Transom mount transducermounted projecting from hull

525-5PWD

Choose the installation methoddepending on the rise angle of the hull

Transom

Transom

Stripe over 10

Parallel with hull

Mount at the stripe

less than 10

525-5PWD mounting location

Installing the 525-5PWD

Referring to ldquoInstalling the 520-5PWDrdquoin the left column for mounting of thebracket and the figure shown on the topof next page install the 525-5PWD tothe transom

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3448

28

2 to 5

Transducer

Bracket

Hull

Epoxy material

525-5PWD mounting

44 Inside-hullTransducer

The thru-hull mount transducer(520-5PSD 520-5MSD) may also beinstalled inside the hull following theprocedure below

Necessary tools

You will need the following toolsbull Sandpaper (100)bull Silicone sealantbull Silicone grease

Remarks on installationbull Turn off the engine and anchor the

boat while installing the equipmentbull Install the transducer in the engine

room

Choosing the mounting locationbull The mounting location should be

where the hull is of single-hullthickness and is void of air or flotationmaterials other than solid fiberglassbetween the transducer face and thewater

bull Do not place the transducer over hullstruts or ribs which run under the hull

bull Avoid a location where the risingangle of the hull exceeds 15deg tominimize the effect of the boatrsquosrolling

bull You will finalize the mounting location

through some trial and error Theprocedure for this is shown later

50 cm

50 cm15 cm15 cm

13

12

Transducer mountinglocation

Centerline

Inside-hull transducer mounting location

Attaching the transducer1 Clean the transducer face to remove

any foreign material Lightly roughenthe transducer face with 100sandpaper Also roughen the insideof the hull where the transducer is tobe mounted

2 Clean the transducer face again3 Warm the silicone sealant to 40degC

before usage to soften it Coat thetransducer face and mountinglocation with silicone sealant

Transducer

SiliconeSealant

Coating transducer facewith silicone sealant

4 Press the transducer firmly down onthe hull and gently twist it back andforth to remove any air which may betrapped in the silicone sealant

Checking the installation

1 Connect the battery to the display

unit2 Turn on the display unit

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3548

29

3 Press the [MODE] key to chooseSINGLE FREQ

4 Choose 50 kHz or 200 kHz and thenpress the [MENUESC] key to closethe mode menu

5 Press the [MENU] to show the mainmenu and then press to select

Auto mode6 Press to choose Off7 Press the [MENUESC] key8 Press the [GAIN] key to set the gain

to ldquo5rdquo and then press the[MENUESC] key

9 Press the [RANGE] key to set therange to 10 meters (feet) and thenpress the [MENUESC] key

10 If the bottom is displayed in darkgray and the depth indicationappears the mounting location issuitable Go to ldquoFinal preparationrdquo

11 If the bottom is not displayed in darkgray tone the mounting location maybe unsuitable Do the followinga) Press the [POWERBRILL] key to

turn off the powerb) Gently dismount the transducer

with a piece of woodc) Reattach the transducer

elsewhere as shown in ldquoAttachingthe transducerrdquo

d) Check the installation again

Final preparation

Support the transducer with a piece ofwood to keep it in place while it is drying

Let the transducer dry 24-72 hours

45 Optional Triducer525ST-MSD

The optional triducer 525ST-MSD isdesigned for thru-hull mounting Forhow to install this transducer seeparagraph 42

φ79 mm

33 mm200-12 UNthreads

φ51 mm

27 mm

7 mm

140 mm Triducer 525ST-MSD

525ST-PWD

The Transom Mount Transducer orTRIDUCER reg Multisensor with IntegralRelease Bracket 525ST-PWD ismanufactured by AIRMAR Co Theseinstructions are also included with the

sensor

Pre-test for speed and temperature

Connect the sensor to the instrumentand spin the paddlewheel Check for aspeed reading and the approximate airtemperature If there is no readingreturn the sensor to your place ofpurchase

Tools and materials needed

ScissorsMasking tapeSafety gogglesDust maskElectric drillDrill bit for

Bracket holes 4mm 23 or 964rdquoFiberglass hull chamfer bit(preferred)6mm or 14rdquo

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3648

30

Transom hole 19mm or 34rdquo(optional)

Cable clamp holes 3mm or 18rdquoScrewdriversStraight edgeMarine sealantPencilZip-tiesWater-based antifouling paint(mandatory in salt water )

Mounting location

To ensure the best performance thesensor must be submerged inaeration-free and turbulence-free water

Mount the sensor close to the centerlineof the boat On slower heavierdisplacement hulls positioning it fartherfrom the centerline is acceptable

Allow adequate space above thebracket for it to release and rotate thesensor upward

Height

Height withoutspeed sensor191mm (7-12)Height withspeed sensor213mm (8-12)

Height required at mounting location

Note 1 Do not mount the sensor in anarea of turbulence or bubbles nearwater intake or discharge openingsbehind strakes struts fittings or hull

irregularities behind eroding paint (anindication of turbulence)Note 2 Avoid mounting the sensorwhere the boat may be supportedduring trailering launching hauling andstorageNote 3 For single drive boat mounton the starboard side at least 75 mm(3rdquo) beyond the swing radius of thepropeller

75 mm(3)

minimum beyondswing radius

Mounting location on single drive boat

Note 4 For twin drive boat mountbetween the drives

Installation of bracket

1 Cut out the installation template

shown on the next page2 At the selected location position thetemplate so the arrow at the bottomis aligned with the bottom edge ofthe transom Being sure the templateis parallel to the waterline tape it inplace

Align template vertically

Deadrise angle

Slope of hullparallel towaterline

Align template arrow withbottom edge of transom

Positioning the template

Warning Always wear safetygoggles and a dust mask

3 Using a 4 mm 23 or 964rdquo bit drillthree holes 22 mm (78rdquo) deepat the locations indicated To preventdrilling too deeply wrap maskingtape around the bit 22 mm (78rdquo)from the pointFiberglass hull Minimize surfacecracking by chamfering the gelcoatIf a chamfer bit or countersink bit is

not available start drilling with a6mm or 14rdquo bit to a depth of 1 mm(116rdquo)

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3748

31

4 If you know your transom angle the

bracket is designed for a standard13deg transom angle11deg-18deg angle No shim is requiredSkip to step 3 in ldquoAdjustingrdquoOther angles The shim is requiredSkip to step 2 of ldquoAdjustingrdquoIf you do not know the transom angletemporarily attach the bracket andsensor to the transom to determine ifthe plastic shim is needed

5 Using the two 10 x 1-14rdquo

self-tapping screws temporarilyscrew the bracket to the hull DONOT tighten the screws completelyat this time Follow the step 1-4 inldquoAttaching the Sensor to the Bracketrdquobefore proceeding with ldquoAdjustingrdquo

Installation templatefor starboard side of boat

Drill at locations labeled Bfor the following transom angles

16 deg through 22 deg

Drill at locations labeled Afor the following transom angles

2 deg through 15 deg

Align arrow with bottom of transom

AA A

BB B

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3848

32

Adjusting

1 Using a straight edge sight theunderside of the sensor relative tothe underside of the hull The sternof the sensor should be 1-3 mm

(116-18rdquo) below the bow of thesensor or parallel to the bottom ofthe hull

11 deg transom angleNO SHIM

12-18 deg transom angleNO SHIM

2 deg -10 deg transom

angle

19 deg -22 deg transom

angleshim withtaper up

shim withtaper down

parallelparallel parallel

slightangle

angletoo steep

anglereversed

YES NONO

YES YESYES

Sensor position and transom angle

Note Do not position the bow of thesensor lower than the stern becauseaeration will occur

2 To adjust the sensorrsquos angle relativeto the hull use the tapered plasticshim provided If the bracket hasbeen temporarily fastened to thetransom remove it Key the shim in

place on the back of the bracket2deg-10deg transom angle (steppedtransom and jet boats) Positionthe shim with the tapered end down19deg-22deg transom angle (smallaluminum and fiberglass boats) Position the shim with the taperedend up

3 If the bracket has been temporarilyfastened to the transom remove it

Apply a marine sealant to thethreads of the two 10 x 1-14rdquo self

tapping screws to prevent waterseeping into the transom Screw thebracket to the hull Do not tighten thescrews completely at this time

4 Repeat step 1 to ensure that theangle of the sensor is correctNote Do not position the sensorfarther into the water than necessaryto avoid increasing drag spray andwater noise and reducing boatspeed

5 Using the vertical adjustment spaceon the bracket slots slide the sensorup or down to provide a projection of3 mm (18rdquo) Tighten the screws

Cable cover

Cableclamp

50 mm (2)

Hull projection 3 mm (18)

Vertical adjustment and cable routing

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3948

33

Attaching the sensor to the bracket

1 If the retaining cover near the top ofthe bracket is closed open it bydepressing the latch and rotating thecover downward

Step 1 Step 2

Latch

Retainingcover

Pivotarm (2)

Slot (2)

Step 4

Step 3

Attaching the sensor to the bracket

2 Insert the sensorrsquos pivot arms intothe slots near the top of the bracket

3 Maintain pressure until the pivotarms click into place

4 Rotate the sensor downward until thebottom snaps into the bracket

5 Close the retaining cover to preventthe accidental release of the sensorwhen the boat is underway

Cable routing

Route the sensor cable over thetransom through a drain hole orthorough a new hole drilled in thetransom above the waterline

Never cut the cable or remote the

connector this will void the warranty Always wear safety goggles and a dustmask

1 If a hole must be drilled choose alocation well above the waterlineCheck for obstructions such as trimtabs pumps or wiring inside the hullMark the location with a pencil Drilla hole through the transom using a19 mm or 34rdquo bit (to accommodatethe connector)

2 Route the cable over or through thetransom

3 On the outside of the hull secure thecable against the transom using thecable clamps Position a cable clamp50 mm(2rdquo) above the bracket andmark the mounting hole with apencil

4 Position the second cable clamphalfway between the first clamp andthe cable hole Mark this mountinghole

5 If a hole has been drilled in thetransom open the appropriate slot inthe transom cable cover Position thecover over the cable where it entersthe hull Mark the two mounting

holes6 At each of the marked locations usea 3 mm or 18rdquo bit to drill a hole 10mm (38rdquo) deep The prevent drillingtoo deeply wrap masking tapearound the bit 10 mm (38rdquo) from thepoint

7 Apply marine sealant to the threadsof the 6 x 12rdquo self-tapping screw toprevent water from seeping into the

transom If you have drilled a holethrough the transom apply marinesealant to the space around thecable where it passes through thetransom

8 Position the two cable clamps andfasten them in place If used pushthe cable cover over the cable andscrew it in place

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4048

34

9 Route the cable to the instrumentbeing careful not to tear the cable

jacket when passing it though thebulkhead(s) and other parts of theboat To reduce electricalinterference separate the sensorcable from other electrical wiring andldquonoiserdquo sources Coil any excesscable and secure it in place withzip-ties to prevent damage

46 Optional WaterTemperatureSpeedSensor

Water temperaturespeed sensorST-02MSB and ST-02PSB which aredesigned for thru-hull mounting areoptionally available Install them asshown below

Mounting considerations

Choose a suitable mounting locationconsidering the followingbull Choose a place free from vibrationbull Choose a mid-boat flat position The

sensor does not have to be installedperfectly perpendicular The sensormust not be damaged in dry-dockingoperation

bull Choose a place apart from equipmentgenerating heat

bull Choose a place in the forwarddirection viewing from the drain holeto allow for circulation of coolingwater

1 Dry-dock the boat2 Make a hole of approx 51 mm

diameter in the mounting location3 Unfasten locknut and remove the

sensor section4 Apply high-grade sealant to the

flange of the sensor5 Pass the sensor casing through thehole

6 Face the notch on the sensor towardboatrsquos bow and tighten the flange

7 Set the sensor section to the sensorcasing and tighten the locknut

8 Launch the boat and check for waterleakage around the sensor

Locknut

Face notchtoward bow

Flange Nut

Coat withsilicone sealant Brim

φ 77

51

123

Water temperaturespeed sensor

ST-02MSB ST-02PSB

47 Wiring

Connect the LS-4100 powerdata cableassy MJ-A7SPF0005-020 (2 msupplied) to the POWER and thetransducer cable to the XDR connectorRefer to the interconnection diagram toconnect cables Leave slack in cables tofacilitate checking and maintenance

Note The fuse holder contains a springwhich fixes the fuse To preventdetachment of the spring which wouldcause loss of power tie the line asshown below

+ line (red)

Fuse holder

Cable tie How to fix fuse holder

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4148

35

Establishing the ground

The ground wire (125 sq or more localsupply) should be as short as possible

The signal line ground is isolated from

the chassis ground however the powerline is not insulated Therefore whenconnecting eternal equipment havingpositive ground do not ground thesignal line to the chassis If excessivenoise shows on the screen the groundmay be inadequate In this case attacha steel plate measuring 20 cm by 30 cmon the outside of the hull to provide aground point Connect the ground wire

there Use a ldquoclosedrdquo type lug ( ) tomake the connection at the display unitDo not use an ldquoopenrdquo type lug ( )

Optional equipment

POWER connector

The power supply port is commonlyused for connection of externalequipment such as a GPS receiver orwind indicator Use the powerdatacable MJ-A7SPF0005-020 (supplied) forconnection referring the figure shown inthe right column

Connector Color Remarks

1 TD-A WHT2 TD-B BLU

IEC-61162-1NMEA0183

3 RD-A YEL

4 RD-B GRN

IEC-61162-1

NMEA01835 + RED

6 - BLKPower input12 VDC

7 FG

Water tempspeed sensor

Connect the optional water tempspeedsensor to the XDR connector with theoptional converter connector (Type02S4147) as shown below

Tape connectors withvulcaninzing tapeand then vinyl tapeto waterproof themBind tape ends withcable ties to preventtape from unraveling

Connect to XDR portat rear of display unit

MJ-A10SPF

MJ-A10SRMDMJ-A6SRMD

Fromtransducer

Fromsensor

Connection of converterconnector 02S4147

48 IEC 61162-1 DataSentences

The tables below show the datasentences which can be input to andoutput from the LS-4100 Thetransmission speed for both input andoutput is 4800 bps Data is output attwo-second intervals

Input data sentences

Sentence Meaning

BWC Bearing and distance towaypoint

GGA Global positioning system(GPS) fix data

GLL Geographic position -latitudelongitude

HDG Heading deviation and variationHDT Heading true

MDA Atmospheric pressure

MTW Water temperature

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4248

36

Input data sentences (conrsquot)

Sentence MeaningMWV Wind speed and

angleRMA Recommended

minimum specificLORAN-C dataRMB Recommended

minimum navigationinformation

RMC Recommendedminimum specificGPSTRANSIT data

VHW Water speed andheading

VTG Course over groundand ground speedXTE Cross track error

Output data sentences

Sentence MeaningDBT (Ver 15) Depth below

transducerDPT (Ver 20 Ver30)

Depth

MTW Water temperatureRMB (Ver 20) Recommended

minimumnavigationinformation

VHW Water speed andheading

TLL Target positionoutput by [MARK]key

= Available with connection of optionalsensorsnavaid

49 Installation MenuThe installation menu mainly containsitems which are set at installation

1 Turn on the power while pressing the[MENUESC] key Continue pressing

the [MENUESC] key until theInstallation menu appears

SIMULATION On

TEST LCD PATTERN MEMORY CLEAR

NMEA PORT InOutNMEA MIX OffGPS WAAS Off

SET BOTTOM LEVEL

Installation Menu

= Setting cannot be changed whenNMEA PORT setting is InIn

Installation menu

SIMULATION The simulation modeprovides without connection of thetransducer simulated operation of theequipment using internally generatedechoes All controls are operative Themessage ldquoSIMrdquo appears at the top rightcorner on the screen when thesimulation mode is active

1 At the installation menu press toopen the simulation mode optionswindow

2 Press to choose ldquoOnrdquo to turn onthe simulation mode

3 Press the [POWERBRILL] keyabout three seconds to turn off thepower

4 Press the [POWERBRILL] key toturn on the power ldquoSIMrdquo appears atthe top right corner of the display

5 To turn off the simulation modeselect Off at step 2

NMEA po r t se tup(NMEA PO RT NMEA M IX)

The POWER port can function as aninput port or inputoutput port Changethe setting to ldquoInInrdquo when connectingGP-310B320B and a wind sensor

When connecting the GP-310B320Band a wind sensor first turn on ldquoGPS

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4348

37

WAASrdquo (in the Installation menu) andthen select ldquoInInrdquo as the NMEA portsetting

1 Turn on the power while pressingand holding down the [MENUESC]key Continue pressing the[MENUESC] key until theInstallation menu appears

2 Choose NMEA PORT and thenpress to display the NMEA portoptions window

3 Use or to choose InOut orInIn as appropriate

InOut Input and Output (default

setting)InIn Input only (Available withconnection of the GP-310B320Band a wind sensor)

4 Press choose NMEA MIX andthen press to display the NMEAMIX options window

5 Use or to choose Off or OnChoose On to output input data

Off Outputs the data sentences ofLS-4100 only

On Outputs the data sentences ofLS-4100 and sentences which areinput from other equipment

6 To restore normal operation turn offthe power and then turn it on again

GPS WAAS Chooses how to use theWAAS signal when connecting with a

WAAS receiver for example GP-320B

Note WAAS is currently in thedevelopmental phase During thedevelopmental phase the reliability andavailability of the WAAS signal cannotbe guaranteed Therefore any positiondata should be verified against othersources to confirm reliability

1 Display the Installation menu2 Choose GPS WAAS and then press

to open the GPS WAAS options

window

Off

WAAS options window3 Press or to choose ldquoWAAS-02rdquo

(test signal) When the systembecomes operational (in 2003) setto ldquo00rdquo (regular WAAS signal)

4 Turn off the power

BOTTOM LEVEL If the depthindication is unstable in automaticoperation or the bottom echo cannot bedisplayed in the darkest gray tone byadjusting the gain controls in manualoperation you may adjust the bottomecho level detection circuit for both 50kHz and 200 kHz to stabilize theindication Generally lower the bottomlevel for inner hull installation where thereceive level is too low If the bottomlevel is too low it may be difficult todiscriminate fish from the bottomresulting in unstable depth indication

And if the bottom level is too high thedepth indication may not appear

1 At the installation menu press tochoose SET BOTTOM LEVEL andthen press Several seconds laterthe following display appears

Bottom level +0 (200k -100 - +100 ) +0 ( 50k -100 - +100 )

Bottom level display

2 While observing the picture use or to set 200 kHz or to set50 kHz Set up for optimum picture

3 To restore normal operation turn offthe power and then it on again

Note The mode must be other thanldquoNAV DATArdquo to show the bottom leveldisplay

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4448

SP - 1 E2371S01C

SPECIFICATIONS OF ECHO SOUNDER LS-4100

1 GENERAL11 TX Frequency 50 kHz or 200 kHz 50200 kHz dual transmitting selectable12 Transmit Method Single or dual transmitting

13 Output Power 300 Wrms14 TX Rate Max 500 pulsemin15 Pulse-length 01 to 08 ms

2 DISPLAY UNIT21 Display system 5-inch monochrome LCD 76 mm (W) x 100 mm (H) 240 x 320 dots22 Display Mode Single frequency (highlow freq) Dual-frequency Zoom Nav data-12

Marker zoom Bottom zoom Bottom-lock23 Display Range

Range SettingRange

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

Display

rangeMeter 5 10 20 40 80 150 200 300 2-500

Feet 15 30 60 120 200 400 600 1000 7-1500

Fathoms 3 5 10 20 40 80 100 150 1-250

PassiBraza 3 5 10 30 50 100 150 200 1-300

24 Range Shift 0-500 m 0-1500 ft 0-250 fa 0-300 pb25 Expansion Range Bottom-lock expansion 3 to 10 m

Sectional expansion 2 to 50 m26 Display Advance Speed 8 steps (LinesTX Freeze 1161814121121 41)

3 INTERFACE31 Input data sentences IEC61162-1NMEA0183 Ver 152030

GGA RMA RMB RMC BWC GLL HDT HDG VTG VHW MTWMWV MDA XTE

32 Output data sentences IEC61162-1NMEA0183 Ver 152030 interval 2 sMTW VHW DBT DPT RMB TLL by key operating External data required

4 POWER SUPPLY41 Display Unit 12 VDC 05 A

5 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITION51 Ambient Temperature Display unit -15degC to +55degC52 Relative Humidity 93 or less at 40degC53 Waterproof IPX5

6 COATING COLOR61 Display Unit N30

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4548

M a r

4

0 3

D-1

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4648

Mar 4 03

Mar 4 03

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4748

M a r

3

0 3

S-1

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4848

FURUNO Authorized DistributorDealer FURUNO Authorized DistributorDealer

9-52 Ashihara-cho9-52 Ashihara-choNishinomiya 662-8580 JAPANNishinomiya 662-8580 JAPAN

Telephone Telephone 0798-65-21110798-65-2111FaxFax 0798-65-42000798-65-4200

FIRST EDITION FIRST EDITION MARMAR 20032003Printed in JapanPrinted in Japan All rights reserved All rights reserved

B1B1 SEPSEP 09 200509 2005

Pub NoPub No OME-23710OME-23710 00014698000000146980000001469800000014698000(( DAMIDAMI )) LS-4100LS-4100

0 0 0 1 4 6 9 8 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 4 6 9 8 0 0 0

Page 5: OME23710B_1_LS4100

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 548

iii

FOREWORD

A Word to LS-4100OwnersCongratulations on your choice of theFURUNO LS-4100 5rdquo Echo SounderWe are confident you will see why theFURUNO name has becomesynonymous with quality and reliability

For over 50 years FURUNO ElectricCompany has enjoyed an enviable

reputation for innovative anddependable marine electronicsequipment This dedication toexcellence is furthered by our extensiveglobal network of agents and dealers

This equipment is designed andconstructed to meet the rigorousdemands of the marine environmentHowever no machine can perform its

intended function unless operated andmaintained properly Please carefullyread and follow the recommendedprocedures for operation andmaintenance

We would appreciate hearing from youthe end-user about whether we areachieving our purposes

Thank you for considering andpurchasing FURUNO equipment

FeaturesThe FURUNO LS-4100 is a dualfrequency (50 kHz and 200 kHz)monochrome LCD echo sounderComprised of a display unit and atransducer the LS-4100 displaysunderwater conditions on a bright 5-inchmonochrome LCD

The main features of the LS-4100 are

bull Bright 5-inch monochrome LCD givesexcellent readability even in broaddaylight

bull Automatic function permitsunattended adjustment of range andgain The range scale and gainautomatically change to display thebottom in the darkest gray tone on thelower half of the screen

bull User-programmable nav data displaysprovide analog and digital nav data

bull Alarms Bottom Fish (bottom-lockand normal) Speed WaterTemperature and Arrival (Speed andarrival alarms require appropriatesensor water temperature alarmrequires water temperature data)

bull White line feature helps discriminate

fish lying near the bottombull Destination waypoint feature provides

range bearing and time-to-go todestination waypoint (up to 12waypoints)

bull Waterproof construction permitsinstallation on open bridge

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 648

iv

SYSTEM OVERVIEW

System configuration

Power supply12 VDC

DISPLAY UNITLS-4100

GPS Navigatoror

Wind Indicator

Transducer

Water temperature Speed sensor

ST-02MSBST-02PSB

520-5PSD520-5MSD520-5PWD 525-5PWD525ST-MSD525ST-PWD

Standard Option User supply

Note Contact yourdealer for connection ofother equipment

POWERBRILL

MARK

GAIN

RANGE

ESCMENUMODE

LS-4100

ECHO SOUNDER

Equipment lists

Standard supply

Name Type Code No Qty RemarksDisplay Unit LS-4100 mdash 1

520-5PSD 000-015-204 Thru-hull mount520-5MSD 000-015-212 Thru-hull mount520-5PWD 000-015-126

Transducer

525-5PWD 000-146-966Transom mount

525ST-MSD 000-015-263 Thru-hull mountTriducer (transducerplus spdtemp sensor) 525ST-PWD 000-015-261

1

Transom mount

Installation Materials(CP02-07401)

bull Tapping screw (4 pcs 5 x 20 SUS304 000-802-081)bull Washer head screw B (4 pcs M4 x 20 SUS304 000-804-742)bull Cable assy (1 pc MJ-A7SPF0005-020 000-139-384 for power and data)

Spare Parts(SP02-04801) Fuse (2 pc FGMB 1A 125V Code No 000-114-805)

Template C22-00301 (000-146-981 for flush mount)C22-00302 (000-146-982 for bulkhead)

Optional equipment

Name Type Code No Qty RemarksConversion Cable 02S4147 000-141-082 1 For spdtemp sensor

ST-02MSB 000-137-986Water Temperature ampSpeed Sensor ST-02PSB 000-137-987

Selectone Thru-hull type

Inner Hull Kit S 22S0191 000-802-598 1

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 748

1

1 OPERATION

11 Control Description

Cursor PadSelects menu itemsshifts VRM

Openscloses menuescapes from current

operation

Selects display mode

Adjusts gain

Selects basic display range

Long press Turns power onoffMomentary press Adjusts display contrast and brilliance

Outputs LL positionto external equipmentregisters selected positionas waypoint

POWER

BRILL

MARK

GAIN

RANGE

ESCMENU

MODE

LS-4100

ECHO SOUNDER

Display unit

How to remove the hard cover

Place your thumbs at the center of thecover and then lift the cover whilepressing it with your thumbs

12 Power OnOffPress the [POWERBRILL] key more

than one second to turn on the powerThe unit beeps the startup screenappears and then the equipmentchecks the ROM and RAM for properoperation and displays program number(If ldquoNGrdquo (No Good) appears try to pressany key except the [POWERBRILL] keyto start operation However theequipment may not work properlyContact your dealer) You may

press any key after the completion ofthe equipment check to start operationsooner

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 848

2

Program version no

ROM OK RAM OK Program No 0252318-01

5 ECHO SOUNDER

FURUNO ELECTRIC CO LTD

Start-up screen

To turn off the power press and holddown the [POWERBRILL] key until thescreen goes blank The time remaining

until power is turned off is counted downon the screen

Note The example screens shown inthis manual may not match the screensyou see on your display The screenyou see depends on your systemconfiguration and equipment settings

13 Adjusting DisplayContrast Brilliance

1 Press the [POWERBRILL] keymomentarily to show thebrilliancecontrast adjustmentwindow

CONTST 4 Min Max

BRILLMin Max

4

Brilliancecontrast adjustment window

2 For contrast press the[POWERBRILL] key to adjustcontrast cyclically (You may also use or on the Cursor Pad to adjustcontrast) (Adjustable range 0 to 9)

3 To adjust brilliance use or $ (Adjustable range 0 to 4)

4 Press the [MENUESC] key to closethe brilliancecontrast adjustmentwindow

Note 1 When the power is reappliedafter turning off the equipment withminimum brilliance minimum brilliancewill be set after the equipment goesthrough its initial start up (The start upscreen appears with the maximumbrilliance) Adjust the brilliance asnecessary

Note 2 Setting windows other thanthose on menus are erased if there isno operation within about sevenseconds

14 Choosing a DisplayFrequency

Seven displays are available singlefrequency (50 or 200 kHz) dualfrequency marker-zoom bottom-zoombottom-lock and nav data (twodisplays)

1 Press the [MODE] key to show themode selection window

MODE

SINGLE FREQDUAL FREQMARKER ZOOMBOTTOM ZOOMBOTTOM LOCKNAV DATA-1NAV DATA-250kHz 200kHz

Mode selection window

2 Press the [MODE] key again withinseven seconds to choose a modeYou may also choose a mode with or $

3 For modes other than DUAL FREQchoose frequency Press for 50kHz or for 200 kHz

4 Press the [MENUESC] key to closethe window

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 948

3

Single frequency display

50 kHz

The sounder uses ultrasonic signals todetect bottom conditions The lower thefrequency of the signal the wider thedetection area Therefore the 50 kHzfrequency is useful for general detectionand judging bottom condition

200 kHz

The higher the frequency of theultrasonic signal the better theresolution For this reason the 200 kHzfrequency is ideal for detailed

observation of fish schools

50 kHz

200 kHz

Frequency and coverage area

466

FishSchool

Bottom

0

20

40

50k 1100

Level Bar

Depth

Frequency

Picture Advance Speed

Range Scale

Mode(AUTO or MANUAL)

407 degF162kt Nav Display

MinuteMarker(Shows time

Each baris 30 sec) TransmissionLine

60

Typical 50 kHz display

Dual frequency display

The 50 kHz picture appears on the leftthe 200 kHz picture on the right Thisdisplay is useful for comparing the samepicture with two different transmitting

frequencies

50 kHz 200 kHzpicture picture

496

0050200 11

0

20

40

60

80

20

40

60

80 Dual frequency display

Marker-zoom display

This mode expands chosen area of thenormal picture to full vertical size of thescreen on the left-half window You mayspecify the portion to expand byoperating the VRM (Variable RangeMarker) which you can shift with or$ The area between the VRM andzoom range marker is expanded

Zoomedfishschool

Single frequency display

Variable rangemarker

This sectionis zoomed

Zoom marker

Marker-zoom display

170

250

0

Fishschool

0

40

10

20

30

0050k 11

21

20

19

18

17

22

Marker-zoom display

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 1048

4

Bottom-zoom display

This mode expands bottom and bottomfish in the range width set with ZOOMRANGE of the SYSTEM menu Thismode is useful for determining bottom

contour When the bottom depthincreases the display shift to keep thebottom echo at the lower part of thescreen

0

Bottom-zoom display

298

Bottom

0

40

10

20

30

32

31

30

29

28

27

Switched withdepth

Singlefrequencydisplay

Zoommarker

0050k 11

Bottom-zoom display

Bottom-lock display

The bottom-lock display provides anormal picture on the right half of thescreen and a 15 feet (5 meter) widelayer in contact with the bottom isexpanded onto the left half of the screenThis mode is useful for detecting bottomfish = Operator selectable

Bottom-lock display

Zoommarker

Zoomedfish

This sectionis zoomed

217

0

Singlefrequencydisplay

Fishschool

0

40

Bottom displayed flat

10

20

30

0

1

2

3

4

550k 11

Bottom-lock display

Nav data displays

The nav data displays appear on the leftof the screen Data other than depthrequires appropriate sensor

You can display between two and fouritems in a nav data display and choosethe item and order to display them Seeparagraph 116 to choose the items todisplay ldquoNAV DATA-1rdquo and ldquoNAVDATA-2rdquo in paragraph 21 to choose thenumber of items to display

Depth

694 m

Trip meter

100 nm

Odometer

56 nm

NAV DATA-1 display

NAV DATA-2 display

Temperature

655 deg F

172

1 05 0 05 1

025 nm

XTE

Speed

kt

20

50

40

60

30

10

0

Sample NAV DATA displays(Default setting)

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 1148

5

15 Menu OperatingProcedure

The LS-4100 has three menus MainSystem and Installation Below is the

basic menu operating procedure1 Press the [MENUESC] key to openthe main menu Page 1 or Page 2 ofthe main menu appears dependingon the page last used

[MENU] Exit

(12)

Note SHIFT and CLUTTER arenot available in the auto mode

AUTO MODE Off SHIFT 0ftPIC ADVANCE 11NOISE LIMIT Off CLUTTER Off SIGNAL LEVEL Off

A-SCOPE Off HUE DayWHITE LINE Off DEEP GAIN Low

Pageno

Main menu page 1

2 Use or $ to select an item Toview page 2 of the main menu press$ until showing the display below

[MENU] Exit

(22)

GOTO WPT Off WAYPOINT LIST

TRIP RESET

GAIN ADJ 200 +0GAIN ADJ 50 +0DRAFT 00ft

ALARM MENUSYSTEM MENU

Main menu page 2

3 Press to show selected itemrsquosoptions window The example shownat the top of the right column is theoptions window for AUTO MODE

Off CruisingFishing

Auto mode options window

4 Use or $ to choose option or setnumeric value

5 Press the [MENUESC] key to closethe menu or press to continuemenu operation

16 Automatic OperationHow automatic operation works

The automatic function automatically

chooses the proper gain range scaleand clutter It works as followsbull The range changes automatically to

display the bottom echo on thescreen

bull The gain is automatically adjusted todisplay the bottom echo in the darkesttone

bull Clutter (on the menu) whichsuppresses low-level noise isautomatically adjusted

Choosing automatic operation

The automatic mode provides twochoices of modes cruising and fishing1 Press the [MENUESC] key to open

the main menu2 Press to choose AUTO MODE

from page 1 of the menu3 Press to open the mode options

window4 Choose Cruising or Fishing as

appropriate

ldquoCruisingrdquo is for tracking the bottomldquoFishingrdquo is for searching fish schoolsSince ldquoCruisingrdquo uses a higher clutterrejection setting than fishing it is notrecommended for fish detection -weak fish echoes may not bedisplayed ldquoFishingrdquo clearly displaysweaker echoes

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 1248

6

5 Press the [MENUESC] key to closethe menu

The auto mode in use is shown as(Auto-Fishing) or

(Auto-Cruising) at the top left corner onthe screen

Note When in the auto mode SHIFTand CLUTTER cannot be adjustedmanually

Range offset

To display the bottom tail in detail in theautomatic mode offset the range as

below1 Press the [+] or [-] key of the

[RANGE] key

+0 ft

AUTO RANGE OFFSET

Auto range offset window

2 Press the [+] or [-] key of the[RANGE] key again to choose offsetdesired (range -100 to +300 ft)Note that if the basic range ischanged the offset is returned to ldquo0rdquo

3 Press the [MENUESC] key to finish

Gain offset

Gain offset lets you override automaticgain adjustment1 Press the [GAIN] key

Min Max 0

AUTO GAIN OFFSET

Auto gain offset window

2 Press or key to offset gain(setting range ndash5 to +5) The gainselected is shown at the top of thescreen asG (Gain) + (or -) XX (offset value)

3 Press the [MENUESC] key to finish

17 Manual OperationChoosing the manual mode

1 Press the [MENUESC] key to openthe main menu

2 Press to choose AUTO MODEfrom page 1 of the menu3 Press to show the window4 Choose Off with 5 Press the [MENUESC] key to close

the menu appears at the topleft corner on the screen

Choosing range

The basic range and range shiftingfunctions used together give you themeans to choose the depth you can seeon the screen The basic range can bethought of as providing a ldquowindowrdquo intothe water column and range shifting asmoving the ldquowindowrdquo to the desireddepth

Choosing basic range

The basic range may be chosen withthe [RANGE] key from the eight rangesshown in the table shown below (ldquoPBrdquoin the table means PassiBraza) Thesetting range can be arranged throughthe SYSTEM menu

Default ranges

Basic RangeUnit1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

meters 5 10 20 40 80 150 200 300

feet 15 30 60 120 200 400 600 1000

fathoms 3 5 10 20 40 80 100 150

hiro 4 8 15 30 50 100 150 200

PB 3 5 10 30 50 100 150 200

Japanese unit of depth measurement1 Press the [+] or [-] key of the

[RANGE] key and the display shouldnow look something like the one onat the top of the next page

2 Press the [+] or [-] key of the[RANGE] key again to choose abasic range

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 1348

7

1000ft 600ft 400ft 200ft 120ft 60ft 30ft 15ft

Basic ranges (default)3 Press the [MENUESC] key to close

the window

Shifting the range

The basic range may be shifted up ordown in the manual mode as follows

Display

Window can beshifted up anddown to selectthe depth

Range and display shift concept

1 Press the [MENUESC] key to openthe main menu

2 Choose SHIFT from page 1 of themenu

3 Press to open the shift optionswindow

0ft

Shift window

4 Use or $ to choose amount ofshift desired

5 Press the [MENUESC] key to closethe window

Note The picture may not be displayedif the amount of shift is greater thanactual depth

Adjusting the gain

The [GAIN] key adjusts the sensitivity ofthe receiver Generally use a highergain setting for greater depths and alower setting for shallower waters

Use the proper gain setting

Incorrect gain may produce wrong depthindication possibly resulting in a dangeroussituation

UTION

Gain too high Gain proper Gain too low Examples of proper and improper gain

1 Press the [GAIN] key and the displayshown below appears

Min Max

50k 3

200k 2

GAIN

Gain adjustment window

2 When using the dual frequencydisplay press or $ to choosefrequency

3 Press the [GAIN] key to set (Youmay also use or ) Adjust so thata slight amount of noise remains onthe screen

4 Press the [MENUESC] key to closethe gain adjustment window

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 1448

8

18 Measuring DepthThe VRM (Variable Range Marker)functions to measure the depth to fishschools etc1 Press or $ to place the VRM

on the object which you wish tomeasure range

2 Read the VRM depth just abovethe VRM

0

20

40

60

80496

398

VRM

VRM depth

50k 11

How to measure depth with the VRM

19 Choosing PictureAdvance Speed

The picture advance speed determineshow quickly the vertical scan lines runacross the screen When choosing apicture advance speed keep in mindthat a fast advance speed will expandthe size of the fish school horizontallyon the screen and a slow advancespeed will contract it Note that thepicture is not refreshed when pictureadvancement is stopped Thereforeuse caution when steering the vesselunder this condition

Fast Slow Picture and picture advancement speed

1 Press the [MENUESC] key to openthe main menu

2 Choose PIC ADVANCE from page 1of the menu

3 Press to show the optionswindow

Stop116 18 14 12 11 21 41

(

)

Fast

Slow

Picture advance options window

4 Use or $ to choose pictureadvance speed desired Thefractions in the options windowdenote the number of scan linesproduced per transmission Forexample 18 means one scan line isproduced every 8 transmissionsldquoStoprdquo freezes the display and it isconvenient for taking a photo

The picture is not refreshed whenpicture advancement is stopped

Maneuvering the vessel in this conditionmay result in a dangerous situation

UTION

5 Press the [MENUESC] key to closethe menu

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 1548

9

110 SuppressingInterference

Interference from other acousticequipment operating nearby or other

electronic equipment on your boat mayshow itself on the display as shown inthe figure belowTo suppress interference do thefollowing1 Press the [MENUESC] key to open

the main menu2 Use or $ to choose NOISE LIMIT

from page 1 of the menu3 Press to show the options

window4 Use or $ to choose the degree ofsuppression desired Off LowMedium or High (highest)

5 Press the [MENUESC] key to closethe menu

Interference fromother sounder

Electrical interference

Forms of interference

Turn the noise limiter off when nointerference exists otherwise weakechoes may be missed

111 Suppressing LowLevel Noise

Low intensity ldquospecklesrdquo may appearover most of screen This is mainly due

to sediment in the water or noise Thesecan be suppressed by adjustingCLUTTER on the menu When theautomatic mode is on clutter isautomatically rejected To suppress lowlevel noise in manual sounder operationdo the following1 Press the [MENUESC] key to open

the main menu2 Use or $ to choose CLUTTER

from page 1 of the menu3 Press to show the optionswindow

4 Use or $ to choose the degree ofsuppression desired 1 2 3 4 5 or6 The higher the number the greaterthe suppression

5 Press the [MENUESC] key to closethe menu

To turn off low-level noisesuppression choose Off at step 4 andthen press the [MENUESC] key

Clutter appearance

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 1648

10

112 Erasing WeakEchoes

Sediment in the water or reflectionsfrom plankton may be painted on the

display in low intensity tones

Weakechoes

Appearance of weak echoes

These weak echoes may be erased asfollows1 Press the [MENUESC] key to open

the main menu2 Use or $ to choose SIGNAL

LEVEL from page 1 of the menu3 Press to show the options

window4 Use or $ to choose the degree of

suppression desired Off Low orHigh (highest)

5 Press the [MENUESC] key to closethe menu

To turn off the signal level function choose Off at step 4 and then pressthe [MENUESC] key

113 A-scope DisplayThis display shows echoes at eachtransmission with amplitudes and toneproportional to their intensities on theright 14 of the screen It is useful forestimating the kind of fish school andbottom composition

Note In the dual frequency display the A-scope display is only available withthe high frequency display

323

10

20

30

40

0

A-scope display

Single frequency display

Strong

reflection(bottom)

Weakreflection(fish or noise)

50k 11

Strongreflection(fish)

A-scope display

1 Press the [MENUESC] key to openthe main menu

2 Press or $ to choose A-SCOPEfrom page 1 of the menu

3 Press to show the optionswindow

4 Press

or$

to choose the A-scope presentation type desiredNormal Display shows echoes ateach transmission with amplitudesand tone proportional to theirintensitiesPeak Peak-hold amplitude picture

5 Press the [MENUESC] key to closethe menu

To turn off the A-scope displaychoose Off at step 4 and then press the[MENUESC] key

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 1748

11

114 AlarmsAlarm description

The LS-4100 has six conditions whichgenerate both audio and visual alarms

bottom alarm normal fish alarm bottomlock fish alarm water temperature alarmarrival alarm and speed alarm (Thewater temperature arrival and speedalarms require appropriate sensors)

Bottom alarm The bottom alarm alertsyou when the bottom is within the alarmrange set To activate the bottom alarmthe depth must be displayed

Fish (normal) alarm The fish (normal)alarm tells you when fish are within thepreset alarm range

Fish (bottom lock) alarm The fish(bottom lock) alarm available with thebottom-lock mode sounds when fishare within a certain distance from thebottom Note that the bottom zoom

display must be turned on to use thisalarm

Water temperature alarm The watertemperature alarm alerts when thewater temperature is within (Insidealarm) the alarm range set orunderover (outside alarm) the rangeset

Speed alarm The speed alarm alertsyou when the speed is within (Insidealarm) or underover (Outside alarm)the preset speed

Arrival alarm The arrival alarm alertswhen you are near a waypoint by thedistance set

Activating an alarm

1 Press the [MENUESC] key2 Press or $ to choose ALARM

MENU from page 2 on the menu3 Press the to show the ALARM

menu

ALARM

(12)

[MENU] Exit

ALARM

(22)

[MENU] Exit

BOTTOM On FROM 5ft

RANGE 10ftFISH(Normal) On

FROM 5ft RANGE 10ftFISH(BL) On

FROM 8ft RANGE 10ftFISH LEVEL Medium

TEMPERATURE Inside FROM 724 deg F RANGE 10 deg F

SPEED Off FROM 00kt

RANGE 10kt

ARRIVAL ALRM Off RANGE 0 01 m

Pageno

Gray characters mean alarm is inactive Alarm menu

4 Use or $ to choose an alarm asappropriate

5 Press to show the options menu

Off On

Off InsideOutside

Temp Speed Alarm Types

Fish ArrivalBottom AlarmOnOff

Alarm options6 Use or $ to choose alarm type

Off Alarm off On Alarm onInside Alarm generated whenspeed (or water temperature) iswithin the range setOutside Alarm generated whenspeed (or water temperature) isoutside the range set

7 Press to close the windowFor ARRIVAL ALARM setting skip tostep 12

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 1848

12

8 Press $ to choose FROM9 Press to show the options menu

0ft

Depth

632 deg F

Temperature

10 kt

Speed Depth temperature speed setting

window10 Use or $ to set starting depth

temperature or speed as appropriateFor FISH (BL) the starting depth isthe range from the bottom

11 Press to close the window12 Press $ to choose RANGE13 Press to show the options menu14 Use or $ to set alarm range15 For the bottom alarm temperature

alarm speed alarm or arrivalalarm press the [MENUESC] key tofinish For a fish alarm press toclose the window and then go tostep 16

16 Press $ to choose FISH LEVEL17 Press to show the options menu

Weak

MediumStrong Fish level options

18 Use or $ to choose the echostrength level which will trigger a fishalarm

Weak Weak echoes (weakest toneon level bar)Medium Medium strength echoes

(middle tone on level bar)Strong Strong echoes (darkest toneon level bar)

19 Press the [MENUESC] key twice toclose the menu

Alarm range marker Bottom alarm Fish alarm (normal) Right Fish alarm (bottomlock) Left

Alarm icon

Alarm rangeStartingpoint

Bottom alarm Fish alarm (normal) Fish alarm (BL)

Temperature alarm (deg

C ordeg

F shown) Speed alarm Arrival alarm

Alarm icon (Appropriate icon appears to showwhich alarm has been violated)

How the alarm works

Note To disable an alarm choose Offat step 5 in the above procedure

Silencing the buzzer

The buzzer sounds and the appropriatealarm icon appears and flashes whenan alarm is violated You can silence thebuzzer by pressing any key Howeverthe buzzer will sound whenever thealarm setting is violated

Note The audio and visual alarms arereleased against the last-violated alarmwhen multiple alarms are active

115 WaypointsWaypoints may be used tobull Record the position of an important

echo as waypoint 12 points may beregistered

bull Output a waypoint position to a plotterto mark position on its screen

bull Find range bearing and time-to-go toa location (waypoint)

Note Requires latitude and longitudeposition from a navigator

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 1948

13

Registering a waypoint on thescreen

1 Press the [MARK] key The cursorappears along with waypoint entryinstructions To enter a waypoint tothe current own shiprsquos position go tostep 3Note If there is no position data themessage ldquoNo position datardquo appearsCheck the navigator

50k

496

1100

20

40

60

80

0

Cursor

WAYPOINT ENTRY

( Move) Cursor [MARK] Enter [MENU] Cancel

50 kHz display

2 Press the cursor pad to set thecursor where desired Pictureadvancement is stopped until step 3is completed and the instructionwindow is integrated into the navdisplay

3 Press the [MARK] key again WhenTLL or FURUNO-TLL is selected atTLL OUTPUT on the System menuthe latitude and longitude position atthe cursor is output to the navigator

A vertical line marks location Furtherthe display shows the waypointname (next sequential number) andposition of the location selected atstep 2

WAYPOINTName FREQLat 34 deg 22796NLon 136 deg 07264E

05

[MENU] Exit

rase

Waypoint data display

Note If you attempt to enter 13thwaypoint the message ldquoMemoryfullrdquo appears In this case erase anunwanted waypoint to enable entry

4 To save the waypoint under thename shown go to step 8 or go tostep 5 to change its name

5 Press to open the waypoint nameentry window

WAYPOINTName FREQLat 34 deg 22796NLon 136 deg 07264E

05

[MENU] Exit

01------ ENT

rase

Waypoint window name entry6 Use or to set character $ or

to shift cursor The name mayconsist of 10 alphanumericcharactersNote Character order is 0 1hellip9 - A BhellipZ _ 0hellip

7 Press to choose ENT 8 Press the [MENUESC] key to

register the waypoint

Registering waypoint by LL

1 Press the [MENUESC] key to openthe main menu

2 Use or to choose WAYPOINTLIST from page 2 of the menu

3 Press

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 2048

14

WAYPOINT LIST

01 0102 0303------------------------------------------------------

[MENU] Exit

Waypoint list4 Press or to choose an empty

waypoint and press Press again

NEW WAYPOINTName FREQLat 34 deg 22796NLon 136 deg 07264E

05

[MENU] Exit

04------ ENT

rase

New waypoint window name entry

5 Use or to set character $ or to shift cursor

6 Press to select ENT 7 Enter latitude and longitude similar

to how you entered waypoint name8 Press the [MENUESC] key to

register the waypoint

Editing waypoints Press the [MENUESC] key to open

the main menu

2 Use or to choose WAYPOINTLIST from page 2 of the menu

3 Press to open the waypoints list4 Use or to choose a waypoint

and press 5 Use or to choose the item to

edit (name latitude or longitude)6 Press to open the data entry

window7 Use or to set character $ or

to choose location8 Press to choose ENT 9 Press the [MENUESC] key

Erasing waypoints Press the [MENUESC] key2 Use or to choose WAYPOINT

LIST from page 2 of the menu3 Press to open the waypoints list

4 Use or to choose the waypointto erase and then press Note You cannot erase a waypointwhich is selected as ldquoGOTO WPTrdquo

5 Press to choose ldquoEraserdquo6 Press to open the options window7 Press to select YES to erase the

waypoint The waypoint list appearswith the erased waypoint blank

8 Press the [MENUESC] key twice toclose the menu

Setting destination waypoint

Set a destination waypoint to find rangebearing and time-to-go to that point Youcan see range and bearing to awaypoint Time-to-go is shown on theTime to Go digital display

Press the [MENUESC] key to openthe main menu

2 Use or to choose GOTO WPTfrom page 2 of the menu

3 Press to open the waypoints list

Off01020304----------------------------------------------------------------

Waypoint list

4 Use or to choose a waypoint5 Press the [MENUESC] key to close

the menu

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 2148

15

116 Setting Up Nav DataDisplays

The user may arrange the nav datadisplays as desired

1 Use the [MODE] key to show theNAV DATA-1 or 2 display whicheveryou want to set up

2 Press the [MENUESC] key to closethe mode selection window

3 Press the cursor pad to display theNAV DATA SETUP window

NAV DATA SETUP

Window Selection Data Selection

[MENU] Exit

NAV DATA SETUP window

4 Use or to choose a datadisplay window desired Adashed-line rectangle circumscribesyour selection

5 Use

or$

to choose item todisplay See the below for adescription of the displays

(9)

(1)

(2)

(3)

(4)(5)

(6)(7)(8)

Two-data

display

Three-data

display

Four-data

displayItems displayable in (1) - (3) depth positioncourse range and bearing trip distanceodometer water temperature headingair pressure time-to-go to destination waypointXTE speed wind speed and directiondestination waypoint data compassItems displayable in (4) - (9) depth positionspeed course range and bearing trip distanceodometer water temperature headingair pressure time-to-go to destination waypointXTE wind speed wind direction

= Graphic display

Nav data window and item displayable6 Press the [MENUESC] key to finish

Note You can choose the number ofitems to show in a nav data display withNAV DATA-1 and NAV DATA-2 on theSystem menu

GRAPHIC DISPLAYS

1 05 0 05 1

Wpt 03Rng 019nm Brg 321 deg XTE 000nm Cse 333 deg

DESTINATION WAYPOINT GRAPHIC

XTEscale

BearingCourseDestinationwaypointdirection

DestinationwaypointdataNameRangeXTE

Wind APP

WIND GRAPHIC

60

120

90

030

150180

120

150

90

60

30

120 deg

Speed 103 ms

COMPASS GRAPHIC

SPEED GRAPHIC

172

Speed

20

50

40

60

30

10

01 05 0 05 1

025 nm

XTE

XTE GRAPHIC

kt

Bearing todestinationwaypoint

Course

Brg30 deg

Cse90 deg

N

E

XTE scale

Speed-ometer

Nav data display-1

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 2248

16

DIGITAL DISPLAYS

Course

123 deg

COURSE

Depth

328 ft

DEPTH

Heading TRUEMAG

318 deg

HEADING

Odometer

56 nm

ODOMETER

Position GPS 3D

30 deg 00065N130 deg 00574E

POSITION

Temperature

698 degF

WATER TEMPERATURE

Trip meter

121 nm

TRIP DISTANCE

Time to Go

00 H30 M

TIME-TO-GO

1018 hpa

AIR PRESSURE

Air Pressure

Speed

193 kt

SPEED

Rng

121 nm

RANGE amp BEARING

Brg

140 deg

Wind Speed APP

80 ms

WIND SPEED

Wind Dir APP

138 deg

WIND DIRECTION

APP or TRUE depending on menu setting TRUE or MAG depending

on menu settingamp To destination waypoint

Note 1 Nav data is updated with somedelay

Note 2 When data is lost 120 sec thedisplay shows - - at the locationwhere data is lost

= GPS receiving status (Displays whenconnecting with GP-310B320B and InOutis selected at the Installation menu)NO FIX Position cannot be foundGPS 2D 2D (dimension) GPS position fixGPS 3D 3D GPS fixGPS W2D 2D WAAS position fixGPS W3D 3D WAAS position fix

NAV data display-2

117 Other Menu ItemsThis section describes the menu itemsnot previously mentioned

Page 1

HUE (Picture Color)

Two picture color arrangements areavailable Day and Night Day showsechoes on a white background Nightshows them on a black background

1 Press the [MENUESC] key todisplay the menu

2 Use or $ to choose HUE frompage 1 of the menu

3 Press to show the optionswindow

4 Use or $ to choose Day or Nightas appropriate

5 Press the [MENUESC] key to closethe menu

WHITE LINE

The white line feature displays theleading edge of the bottom echo in

white This is useful for discriminatingbottom fish near the bottom

1 Press the [MENUESC] key todisplay the main menu

2 Use or $ to choose WHITE LINEfrom page 1 of the menu

3 Press to show the optionswindow

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 2348

17

4 Use or to choose Off Tone orMesh as appropriate ldquoMeshrdquo paintsthe white line in darker tone thanldquoTonerdquo

5 Press the [MENUESC] key to closethe menu

526White Line OFF White Line ON (Mesh)

Fish schoolclearly shown

White line

0

20

40

60

80

050k 11

526

0

20

40

60

80

00 050k 11

How white line works

DEEP GAIN

ldquoDeep Gainrdquo compensates forpropagation attenuation of the ultrasonicwaves It does this by equalizing echopresentation so that fish schools of thesame size appear in the same density inboth shallow and deep waters Inaddition it reduces surface noise

Press the [MENUESC] key to openthe main menu

2 Use or to choose DEEP GAINfrom page of the menu

3 Press $ to show to the optionswindow

4 Choose Low Medium or High asappropriate High provides thegreatest degree of gain reductionagainst short range echoes

5 Press the [MENUESC] key to closethe menu

Page 2

TRIP RESET

This item resets trip distance to ldquo0rdquo

Press the [MENUESC] key to openthe main menu

2 Use or to choose TRIPRESET from page 2 of the menu

3 Press $ 4 Press to reset trip distance

Beeps are generated while the tripdistance is being reset

5 Press the [MENUESC] key to closethe menu

Note To reset the odometer to zeroclear the memory

GAIN ADJ 200 GAIN ADJ 50

If the gain is too high or too low or thegain for the low and high frequenciesappears unbalanced you cancompensate it as follows

Press the [MENUESC] key to openthe main menu

2 Use or to choose GAIN ADJ200 or GAIN ADJ 50 from page 2 ofthe menu

3 Press $ to show to the optionswindow

4 Use or to set the amount Thesetting range is ndash50 to +50

5 Press the [MENUESC] key to close

the menu

DRAFT

The default depth display shows thedistance from the transducer If youwould rather show the distance from thesea surface set your shiprsquos draft asfollows

Press the [MENUESC] key to openthe main menu

2 Use or to choose DRAFT frompage 2 of the menu

3 Press $ and then use or to setdraft The setting range is ndash 50 to+500 (meters feet)

4 Press the [MENUESC] key to closethe menu

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 2448

18

2 SYSTEM MENU

The System menu mainly consists ofitems which once set do not requirefrequent adjustment You may displaythis menu by choosing SYSTEM MENUat page 2 of the main menu andpressing

SYSTEM MENULANGUAGE English

DEPTH UNIT ftSPEED UNIT ktWIND UNIT msTEMP UNIT deg F

TEMP GRAPH OffNAV DATA-1 NAV DATA-2

WATER TYPE SaltKEY BEEP OnBATT VOLTAGE Off (13)

[MENU] Exit

SYSTEM MENU

(23)

NAV DISPLAY TempSpeedNMEA0183 Ver 20TLL OUTPUT OffBEARING TrueWIND SPDDIR ApparentTRIP SOURCE Own

TEMP SOURCE OwnSPEED SOURCE OwnTEMP CALIB +00 deg F ( 40)SPEED CALIB +0 ( 50)

Own speed Own temp 100 kt 162 deg F

[MENU] Exit

SYSTEM MENU

(33)

BASIC RANGE1 15 ft

RANGE2 30RANGE3 60RANGE4 120RANGE5 200RANGE6 400RANGE7 600RANGE8 1000 (7-1500)

ZOOM RANGE 15 ft (7-150)BL RANGE 15 ft (10-30)(Bottom Lock)

ZOOM MARKER On

[MENU] Exit

PAGE 3

PAGE 2

PAGE 1

Page no

System menus

21 System MenuPage 1

LANGUAGE The system language isavailable in English several Europeanlanguages and Japanese To changelanguage select language desired andpress the [MENUESC] key

DEPTH UNIT Choose unit of depthmeasurement from meters feet

fathoms passibraza and hiro(Japanese)

SPEED UNIT Choose unit of speedmeasurement from knots miles perhour and kilometers per hour Requiresspeed data

WIND UNIT Choose unit of wind speedmeasurement from ms kt kmh and

mph Requires wind speed data

TEMP UNIT Choose unit oftemperature measurement Celsius orFahrenheit Requires temperature data

TEMP GRAPH Turns the watertemperature display on or off Thetemperature scale range is 16deg (degF) inldquoNarrowrdquo 40deg (degF) in ldquoWiderdquo Requires

water temperature data

m526

0

20

40

60

80

00 050k 11

40

80

70

50

60

TemperatureScale

TemperatureGraph

638 deg F162kt

Water temperature display (wide degF)

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 2548

19

NAV DATA-1 -2 Choose the number ofnavigation data items to display on thenav data displays from two three orfour items Requires appropriate navdata

WATER TYPE Choose the water typewith which to use the LS-4100 fromSalt or Fresh

KEY BEEP Turn key beep on or off

BATT VOLTAGE Turn the batteryvoltage indication (appears at the topright corner on the screen) on or offWhen on it replaces the picture advancespeed indication

Page 2

NAV DISPLAY Choose the nav data todisplay in the nav data window at thetop left-hand corner You may choosefrom temperaturespeedlatitudelongitude range and bearingcourse over ground trip distance or

wind speed Requires appropriate navdata

407 deg F162kt

Nav window

NMEA0183 Choose NMEA version ofnavigator Ver 15 Ver 20 or Ver 30

TLL OUTPUT Enablesdisables outputof TLL (Target Latitude Longitude)position when the [MARK] key isoperated ldquoTLLrdquo outputs latitude andlongitude position ldquoFURUNO-TLLrdquoavailable with connection of navigatorthat can output FURUNO TLL outputslatitude and longitude watertemperature depth etc

BEARING Shiprsquos course and bearingto a waypoint may be displayed in trueor magnetic bearing Magnetic bearingis true bearing plus (or minus) earthrsquosmagnetic deviation Requires bearingdata

WIND SPDDIR Choose the windspeed and direction reference from trueand apparent Requires wind sensorApparen t The direction (in relation toshiprsquos bow) and speed of the wind as itappears to those on board relative tothe speed and direction of the boatcombination of the true wind and thewind caused by the boats movementTrue The speed and direction (inrelation to shiprsquos bow) of the wind felt ormeasured when stationary

TRIP SOURCE Choose speed sourcefor the trip distance indication Own(transducer with speed sensor orseparate speed sensor) or NMEA

TEMP SOURCE Choose source ofwater temperature input Off Own(transducer with water temperaturesensor or separate temperature sensor)or NMEA

SPEED SOURCE Choose source ofspeed input Off Own (transducer withspeed sensor or separate speedsensor) or NMEA Requires speed

data

TEMP CALIB If the water temperaturesensor-generated water temperatureindication is wrong you can correct ithere when ldquoOwnrdquo is selected astemperature source For example if thewater temperature indication is 2deghigher than actual water temperatureenter -2 The setting range is -40degF to

+40degF

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 2648

20

SPEED CALIB If the speedsensor-generated speed indication iswrong you can correct it here whenldquoOwnrdquo is selected as speed source Forexample if the speed indication is 10lower than actual speed enter +10 Thesetting range is ndash50 to +50

Page 3

BASIC RANGE 1 - BASIC RANGE 8 Set range of each of the eight basicranges (Selectable range 7 to 1500 ft)Note 1 All default basic ranges arerestored whenever the depth unit ischanged Therefore change the depth

unit before changing the basic rangesNote 2 A range may not be lower thanthe range preceding it For example ifbasic range 3 is 60 feet basic range 4must be greater than 60 feet

ZOOM RANGE Choose the range tozoom in the marker-zoom andbottom-zoom modes You may choose arange between 7 and 150 feet (2 and 50

meters)

BL RANGE The expansion width forthe bottom-lock display can be chosenfrom 10 to 30 feet (3 and 10 meters)

ZOOM MARKER The zoom markerappears in the normal bottom markerand bottom zoom displays and marksthe area which is expanded in the

bottom marker and bottom zoompictures You can turn the marker on oroff as desired

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 2748

21

3 MAINTENANCETROUBLESHOOTING

W RNING

ELECTRICAL SHOCK HAZARDDo not open the equipment

Only qualified personnel should workinside the equipment

31 Maintenance

Regular maintenance is essential forgood performance Checking the itemslisted in the table below monthly willhelp keep your equipment in goodshape for years to come

Checking

Item Action

Transducercable

Check cable for damage

Power cabletransducercable plug

Check that they are tightlyfastened Refasten ifnecessary

Display unitground

Check for corrosion Cleanif necessary

Power supplyvoltage

Check voltage If out ofrating correct problem

32 Cleaning the DisplayUnit

Dust or dirt on the display unit can beremoved with a soft cloth If desired awater-moistened cloth may be usedUse special care when cleaning theLCD since it scratches easily Do notuse chemical cleaners to clean thedisplay unit - they can remove paint andmarkings

33 TransducerMaintenance

Marine life on the transducer face willresult in a gradual decrease insensitivity Check the transducer facefor cleanliness each time the boat isdry-docked Carefully remove anymarine life with a piece of wood orfine-grade sandpaper

34 Replacing the FuseThe fuse in the power cable protects thesystem from reverse polarity of thepower supply and equipment fault If thefuse blows find the cause beforereplacing it Use only a 1A fuse (FGMB 1A 125V Code No 000-114-805 ) orequivalent Using the wrong fuse will damage the unit and void the warranty

W RNINGUse the proper fuse

Fuse rating is shown on the equipmentUse of a wrong fuse can result in fire anddamage the equipment

35 Battery Voltage Alert A battery icon appears when the batteryvoltage is too high or too low

Battery icon and meaning

Icon Meaning

Voltage is lower than 10 VDC If thevoltage goes below 9 V the equipmentis automatically turned off

Voltage is higher than 165 VDC If thevoltage goes higher than 175 V theequipment is automatically turned off

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 2848

22

36 TroubleshootingThe table below provides basictroubleshooting procedures which theuser may follow to restore normaloperation

Troubleshooting table

Ifhellip Then check hellipneither echo norfixed range scaleappears

bull battery voltagebull fusebull power cable

no echo appearsbut the fixedrange scaleappears

bull if display advancespeed is set to ldquoStoprdquo

bull transducer plugbull

transducer cableecho appears butno zero line

bull if range shifting is setto ldquo0rdquo

sensitivity is low bull gain settingbull if air bubbles or marine

life is clinging to thetransducer face

bull if sediments arepresent in the water

bull if the bottom is too soft

to return an echothere is extremeinterference ornoise

bull if the transducer is tooclose to the engine

bull if the unit is properlygrounded

bull if other echo soundersof the same frequencyas own are beingoperated nearby

the speedwatertemperaturereadout isunrealistic or notpresent

bull sensor plug

the positionreadout isunrealistic or notpresent

bull the connectionbetween sounder andnavigator

bull navigator

37 DiagnosticsIf you feel your unit is not workingproperly conduct the diagnostic test tofind the problem If you cannot restorenormal operation contact your dealerfor advice

1 Turn on the power while pressing the[MENUESC] key Continue pressingthe [MENUESC] key until theInstallation menu appears

SIMULATION On

TEST LCD PATTERN MEMORY CLEAR

NMEA PORT InOutNMEA MIX Off GPS WAAS Off

SET BOTTOM LEVEL

Installation Menu

= Setting cannot be changed whenNMEA PORT setting is InIn

Installation menu2 Press to choose TEST3 Press to start the test

ROM OKRAM OKNMEA

Temp 682 deg F

Speed 100kmh

Power 124 VBody 39 deg C

Program No 0252318-01Push [MENU] 3 times to exit

Level bar

= Program version no

Water

TemperatureSpeedBattery VoltageTemperatureinside displayunit(Unit fixed atdeg C)

GPS (48502180) OK

Only when GP-310B is connected(For GP-320B 4850238)

Test display

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 2948

23

4 The ROM RAM and NMEA port arechecked with the results shown asOK or NG (No Good) For any NGrequest service (A special connectoris required to test the NMEA portNothing appears if no connector isconnected)

5 The squares at the right side of thetest display are for checking thecontrols Press each key and thearrows on the Cursor Pad one byone A controlrsquos correspondingon-screen square ldquolightsrdquo in black ifthe control is normal

6 To return to the Installation menupress the [MENUESC] key threetimes

7 To restore normal operation turn offthe power and turn it on again

38 Test PatternThis feature tests for proper display oftones

1 On the Installation menu press $ tochoose LCD PATTERN

2 Press to start the test The entirescreen is black

3 Press again and the screen turnswhite

4 Press again and the screenshows a four-toned display

5 Press again to return to theInstallation menu

6 To restore normal operation turn offthe power and then it on again

WHITE FOUR-TONE BLACK

Test patterns

39 Memory ClearThe memory can be cleared to startafresh with default menu settings

1 At the installation menu press $ tochoose MEMORY CLEAR

2 Press to open the optionswindow

YES NO

Clear memory display

3 Press to clear the memory Beepsare generated while the memory isbeing cleared

4 To restore normal operation turn offthe power and then turn it on again

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3048

24

4 INSTALLATION

41 Display UnitMounting considerations

The display unit can be installed on adesktop on the bulkhead or flushmounted in a panel When choosing alocation keep the following in mind

bull Keep the display unit out of directsunlight

bull The temperature and humidity should

be moderate and stablebull Locate the unit away from exhaust

pipes and ventsbull The mounting location should be well

ventilatedbull Mount the unit where shock and

vibration are minimalbull For maintenance and checking

purposes leave sufficient space atthe sides and rear of the unit andleave slack in cables

bull A magnetic compass will be affected ifthe display unit is placed too close toit Observe the following compasssafe distances to prevent disturbanceto the magnetic compassStandard compass 04 metersSteering compass 03 meters

Desktop overhead mounting1 Fix the bracket to a desktop or the

overhead with tapping screws(supplied)

2 Loosely screw knobs into the displayunit

3 Set the display unit to the bracketand then tighten the knobs

Mounting on the bulkhead Flush

mounting in a panelSee the instructions on the bulkhead orflush mounting template (supplied)

42 Thru-hull MountTransducer

Transducer mounting location

The thru-hull mount transducer

(520-5PSD 520-5MSD) provides thebest performance of all since thetransducer protrudes from the hull andthe effect of air bubbles and turbulencenear the hull skin is reduced When theboat has a keel the transducer shouldbe at least 30 cm away from it Typicalthru-hull mountings are shown in thefigure on the next page

The performance of this sounder isdirectly related to the mounting locationof the transducer especially forhigh-speed cruising The installationshould be planned in advance keepingthe standard cable length (8 m) and thefollowing factors in mindbull Air bubbles and turbulence caused by

movement of the boat seriouslydegrade the sounding capability of thetransducer The transducer shouldtherefore be located in a positionwhere water flow is the smoothestNoise from the propellers alsoadversely affects performance andthe transducer should not be mountednearby The lifting strakes arenotorious for creating acoustic noiseand these must be avoided bykeeping the transducer inboard ofthem

bull The transducer must always remain

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3148

25

submerged even when the boat isrolling pitching or up on a plane athigh speed

bull A practical choice would besomewhere between 13 and 12 of

the boatrsquos length from the stern Forplaning hulls a practical location isgenerally rather far astern so that thetransducer is always in waterregardless of the planing attitude

28

22

120

68

30

520-5PSD

24

120

68

87520-5MSD

Unit mm

Thru-hull mount transducer dimensions

Acceptable transducer mounting

locations

Position 12 to 13 of the hull from stern

15 to 30 cm off center line (inside first lifting strakes)

Within the wetted bottom area

Deadrise angle within 15 deg

HIGH SPEED-V HULL

Suitable transducer mounting locations

Typical thru-hull mounttransducer installations

FairingBlock

Flat Washer

Rubber Washer

Hull

Deep-V Hull

Hull

Flat Washer

Rubber Washer

Flat Hull

CorkWasher

Typical thru-hull mounttransducer installations

Procedure for installing thethru-hull mount transducer

1 With the boat hauled out of the watermark the location chosen formounting the transducer on thebottom of the hull

2 If the hull is not level within 15deg inany direction fairing blocks madeout of teak should be used betweenthe transducer and hull both insideand outside to keep the transducerface parallel with the water lineFabricate the fairing block as shownbelow and make the entire surfaceas smooth as possible to provide anundisturbed flow of water around thetransducer The fairing block shouldbe smaller than the transducer itselfto provide a channel to divert

turbulent water around the sides ofthe transducer rather than over itsface

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3248

26

BOWHole for stuffing tube

Upper Half

Lower Half

Saw along slopeof hull Construction of fairing block

3 Drill a hole just large enough to passthe threaded stuffing tube of thetransducer through the hull makingsure it is drilled vertically

4 Apply a sufficient amount of highquality caulking compound to the topsurface of the transducer around thethreads of the stuffing tube andinside the mounting hole (and fairingblocks if used) to ensure watertightmounting

5 Mount the transducer and fairingblocks and tighten the locking nutsBe sure that the transducer is

properly oriented and its workingface is parallel to the waterline

Note Do not over-stress the stuffingtube and locking nuts through excessivetightening since the wood block willswell when the boat is placed in thewater It is suggested that the nut betightened lightly at installation andretightened several days after the boat

has been launched

Transducer preparation

Before putting the boat in water wipethe face of the transducer thoroughlywith a detergent liquid soap This willlessen the time necessary for thetransducer to have good contact withthe water Otherwise the time requiredfor complete ldquosaturationrdquo ill belengthened and performance will bereduced

DO NOT paint the transducerPerformance will be affected

43 Transom MountTransducer

The transom mount transducer is verycommonly employed usually onrelatively small IO or outboard boatsDo not use this method on an inboardmotor boat because turbulence iscreated by the propeller ahead of thetransducer

520-5PWD

There are two methods of installationflush with hull (for flat hulls) andprojecting from hull (for deep V-hulls)

Flat Hull

D

Dgt50 cm

Deep-VHull

520-5PWD mounting locations

Installing the 520-5PWD on a flat hull

A suitable mounting location is at least50 cm away from the engine and wherethe water flow is smooth

1 Drill four pilot holes in the mountinglocation

2 Attach the transducer to the bracketwith 5 x 20 tapping screws(supplied)

3 Adjust the transducer position so thetransducer faces right to the bottom

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3348

27

Note If necessary to improve waterflow and minimize air bubblesstaying on the transducer faceincline the transducer about 5deg at therear This may require a certainamount of experimentation for finetuning at high cruising speeds

4 Fill the gap between the wedge frontof the transducer and transom withepoxy material to eliminate any airspaces

No1 M5 x 14

5 x 20

5 x 20

2 to 5

Tape

Hull

Transom mount transducer

mounting flush with hull

Installing the transom mounttransducer on a deep-V hull

This method is employed on deep-Vhulls and provides good performancebecause the effects of air bubbles areminimal Install the transducer parallelwith water surface not flush with hull Ifthe boat is placed on a trailer care mustbe taken not to damage the transducerwhen the boat is hauled out of the waterand put on the trailer

5 x 20

No 2M5 x 14

5 x 20

Transom mount transducermounted projecting from hull

525-5PWD

Choose the installation methoddepending on the rise angle of the hull

Transom

Transom

Stripe over 10

Parallel with hull

Mount at the stripe

less than 10

525-5PWD mounting location

Installing the 525-5PWD

Referring to ldquoInstalling the 520-5PWDrdquoin the left column for mounting of thebracket and the figure shown on the topof next page install the 525-5PWD tothe transom

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3448

28

2 to 5

Transducer

Bracket

Hull

Epoxy material

525-5PWD mounting

44 Inside-hullTransducer

The thru-hull mount transducer(520-5PSD 520-5MSD) may also beinstalled inside the hull following theprocedure below

Necessary tools

You will need the following toolsbull Sandpaper (100)bull Silicone sealantbull Silicone grease

Remarks on installationbull Turn off the engine and anchor the

boat while installing the equipmentbull Install the transducer in the engine

room

Choosing the mounting locationbull The mounting location should be

where the hull is of single-hullthickness and is void of air or flotationmaterials other than solid fiberglassbetween the transducer face and thewater

bull Do not place the transducer over hullstruts or ribs which run under the hull

bull Avoid a location where the risingangle of the hull exceeds 15deg tominimize the effect of the boatrsquosrolling

bull You will finalize the mounting location

through some trial and error Theprocedure for this is shown later

50 cm

50 cm15 cm15 cm

13

12

Transducer mountinglocation

Centerline

Inside-hull transducer mounting location

Attaching the transducer1 Clean the transducer face to remove

any foreign material Lightly roughenthe transducer face with 100sandpaper Also roughen the insideof the hull where the transducer is tobe mounted

2 Clean the transducer face again3 Warm the silicone sealant to 40degC

before usage to soften it Coat thetransducer face and mountinglocation with silicone sealant

Transducer

SiliconeSealant

Coating transducer facewith silicone sealant

4 Press the transducer firmly down onthe hull and gently twist it back andforth to remove any air which may betrapped in the silicone sealant

Checking the installation

1 Connect the battery to the display

unit2 Turn on the display unit

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3548

29

3 Press the [MODE] key to chooseSINGLE FREQ

4 Choose 50 kHz or 200 kHz and thenpress the [MENUESC] key to closethe mode menu

5 Press the [MENU] to show the mainmenu and then press to select

Auto mode6 Press to choose Off7 Press the [MENUESC] key8 Press the [GAIN] key to set the gain

to ldquo5rdquo and then press the[MENUESC] key

9 Press the [RANGE] key to set therange to 10 meters (feet) and thenpress the [MENUESC] key

10 If the bottom is displayed in darkgray and the depth indicationappears the mounting location issuitable Go to ldquoFinal preparationrdquo

11 If the bottom is not displayed in darkgray tone the mounting location maybe unsuitable Do the followinga) Press the [POWERBRILL] key to

turn off the powerb) Gently dismount the transducer

with a piece of woodc) Reattach the transducer

elsewhere as shown in ldquoAttachingthe transducerrdquo

d) Check the installation again

Final preparation

Support the transducer with a piece ofwood to keep it in place while it is drying

Let the transducer dry 24-72 hours

45 Optional Triducer525ST-MSD

The optional triducer 525ST-MSD isdesigned for thru-hull mounting Forhow to install this transducer seeparagraph 42

φ79 mm

33 mm200-12 UNthreads

φ51 mm

27 mm

7 mm

140 mm Triducer 525ST-MSD

525ST-PWD

The Transom Mount Transducer orTRIDUCER reg Multisensor with IntegralRelease Bracket 525ST-PWD ismanufactured by AIRMAR Co Theseinstructions are also included with the

sensor

Pre-test for speed and temperature

Connect the sensor to the instrumentand spin the paddlewheel Check for aspeed reading and the approximate airtemperature If there is no readingreturn the sensor to your place ofpurchase

Tools and materials needed

ScissorsMasking tapeSafety gogglesDust maskElectric drillDrill bit for

Bracket holes 4mm 23 or 964rdquoFiberglass hull chamfer bit(preferred)6mm or 14rdquo

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3648

30

Transom hole 19mm or 34rdquo(optional)

Cable clamp holes 3mm or 18rdquoScrewdriversStraight edgeMarine sealantPencilZip-tiesWater-based antifouling paint(mandatory in salt water )

Mounting location

To ensure the best performance thesensor must be submerged inaeration-free and turbulence-free water

Mount the sensor close to the centerlineof the boat On slower heavierdisplacement hulls positioning it fartherfrom the centerline is acceptable

Allow adequate space above thebracket for it to release and rotate thesensor upward

Height

Height withoutspeed sensor191mm (7-12)Height withspeed sensor213mm (8-12)

Height required at mounting location

Note 1 Do not mount the sensor in anarea of turbulence or bubbles nearwater intake or discharge openingsbehind strakes struts fittings or hull

irregularities behind eroding paint (anindication of turbulence)Note 2 Avoid mounting the sensorwhere the boat may be supportedduring trailering launching hauling andstorageNote 3 For single drive boat mounton the starboard side at least 75 mm(3rdquo) beyond the swing radius of thepropeller

75 mm(3)

minimum beyondswing radius

Mounting location on single drive boat

Note 4 For twin drive boat mountbetween the drives

Installation of bracket

1 Cut out the installation template

shown on the next page2 At the selected location position thetemplate so the arrow at the bottomis aligned with the bottom edge ofthe transom Being sure the templateis parallel to the waterline tape it inplace

Align template vertically

Deadrise angle

Slope of hullparallel towaterline

Align template arrow withbottom edge of transom

Positioning the template

Warning Always wear safetygoggles and a dust mask

3 Using a 4 mm 23 or 964rdquo bit drillthree holes 22 mm (78rdquo) deepat the locations indicated To preventdrilling too deeply wrap maskingtape around the bit 22 mm (78rdquo)from the pointFiberglass hull Minimize surfacecracking by chamfering the gelcoatIf a chamfer bit or countersink bit is

not available start drilling with a6mm or 14rdquo bit to a depth of 1 mm(116rdquo)

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3748

31

4 If you know your transom angle the

bracket is designed for a standard13deg transom angle11deg-18deg angle No shim is requiredSkip to step 3 in ldquoAdjustingrdquoOther angles The shim is requiredSkip to step 2 of ldquoAdjustingrdquoIf you do not know the transom angletemporarily attach the bracket andsensor to the transom to determine ifthe plastic shim is needed

5 Using the two 10 x 1-14rdquo

self-tapping screws temporarilyscrew the bracket to the hull DONOT tighten the screws completelyat this time Follow the step 1-4 inldquoAttaching the Sensor to the Bracketrdquobefore proceeding with ldquoAdjustingrdquo

Installation templatefor starboard side of boat

Drill at locations labeled Bfor the following transom angles

16 deg through 22 deg

Drill at locations labeled Afor the following transom angles

2 deg through 15 deg

Align arrow with bottom of transom

AA A

BB B

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3848

32

Adjusting

1 Using a straight edge sight theunderside of the sensor relative tothe underside of the hull The sternof the sensor should be 1-3 mm

(116-18rdquo) below the bow of thesensor or parallel to the bottom ofthe hull

11 deg transom angleNO SHIM

12-18 deg transom angleNO SHIM

2 deg -10 deg transom

angle

19 deg -22 deg transom

angleshim withtaper up

shim withtaper down

parallelparallel parallel

slightangle

angletoo steep

anglereversed

YES NONO

YES YESYES

Sensor position and transom angle

Note Do not position the bow of thesensor lower than the stern becauseaeration will occur

2 To adjust the sensorrsquos angle relativeto the hull use the tapered plasticshim provided If the bracket hasbeen temporarily fastened to thetransom remove it Key the shim in

place on the back of the bracket2deg-10deg transom angle (steppedtransom and jet boats) Positionthe shim with the tapered end down19deg-22deg transom angle (smallaluminum and fiberglass boats) Position the shim with the taperedend up

3 If the bracket has been temporarilyfastened to the transom remove it

Apply a marine sealant to thethreads of the two 10 x 1-14rdquo self

tapping screws to prevent waterseeping into the transom Screw thebracket to the hull Do not tighten thescrews completely at this time

4 Repeat step 1 to ensure that theangle of the sensor is correctNote Do not position the sensorfarther into the water than necessaryto avoid increasing drag spray andwater noise and reducing boatspeed

5 Using the vertical adjustment spaceon the bracket slots slide the sensorup or down to provide a projection of3 mm (18rdquo) Tighten the screws

Cable cover

Cableclamp

50 mm (2)

Hull projection 3 mm (18)

Vertical adjustment and cable routing

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3948

33

Attaching the sensor to the bracket

1 If the retaining cover near the top ofthe bracket is closed open it bydepressing the latch and rotating thecover downward

Step 1 Step 2

Latch

Retainingcover

Pivotarm (2)

Slot (2)

Step 4

Step 3

Attaching the sensor to the bracket

2 Insert the sensorrsquos pivot arms intothe slots near the top of the bracket

3 Maintain pressure until the pivotarms click into place

4 Rotate the sensor downward until thebottom snaps into the bracket

5 Close the retaining cover to preventthe accidental release of the sensorwhen the boat is underway

Cable routing

Route the sensor cable over thetransom through a drain hole orthorough a new hole drilled in thetransom above the waterline

Never cut the cable or remote the

connector this will void the warranty Always wear safety goggles and a dustmask

1 If a hole must be drilled choose alocation well above the waterlineCheck for obstructions such as trimtabs pumps or wiring inside the hullMark the location with a pencil Drilla hole through the transom using a19 mm or 34rdquo bit (to accommodatethe connector)

2 Route the cable over or through thetransom

3 On the outside of the hull secure thecable against the transom using thecable clamps Position a cable clamp50 mm(2rdquo) above the bracket andmark the mounting hole with apencil

4 Position the second cable clamphalfway between the first clamp andthe cable hole Mark this mountinghole

5 If a hole has been drilled in thetransom open the appropriate slot inthe transom cable cover Position thecover over the cable where it entersthe hull Mark the two mounting

holes6 At each of the marked locations usea 3 mm or 18rdquo bit to drill a hole 10mm (38rdquo) deep The prevent drillingtoo deeply wrap masking tapearound the bit 10 mm (38rdquo) from thepoint

7 Apply marine sealant to the threadsof the 6 x 12rdquo self-tapping screw toprevent water from seeping into the

transom If you have drilled a holethrough the transom apply marinesealant to the space around thecable where it passes through thetransom

8 Position the two cable clamps andfasten them in place If used pushthe cable cover over the cable andscrew it in place

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4048

34

9 Route the cable to the instrumentbeing careful not to tear the cable

jacket when passing it though thebulkhead(s) and other parts of theboat To reduce electricalinterference separate the sensorcable from other electrical wiring andldquonoiserdquo sources Coil any excesscable and secure it in place withzip-ties to prevent damage

46 Optional WaterTemperatureSpeedSensor

Water temperaturespeed sensorST-02MSB and ST-02PSB which aredesigned for thru-hull mounting areoptionally available Install them asshown below

Mounting considerations

Choose a suitable mounting locationconsidering the followingbull Choose a place free from vibrationbull Choose a mid-boat flat position The

sensor does not have to be installedperfectly perpendicular The sensormust not be damaged in dry-dockingoperation

bull Choose a place apart from equipmentgenerating heat

bull Choose a place in the forwarddirection viewing from the drain holeto allow for circulation of coolingwater

1 Dry-dock the boat2 Make a hole of approx 51 mm

diameter in the mounting location3 Unfasten locknut and remove the

sensor section4 Apply high-grade sealant to the

flange of the sensor5 Pass the sensor casing through thehole

6 Face the notch on the sensor towardboatrsquos bow and tighten the flange

7 Set the sensor section to the sensorcasing and tighten the locknut

8 Launch the boat and check for waterleakage around the sensor

Locknut

Face notchtoward bow

Flange Nut

Coat withsilicone sealant Brim

φ 77

51

123

Water temperaturespeed sensor

ST-02MSB ST-02PSB

47 Wiring

Connect the LS-4100 powerdata cableassy MJ-A7SPF0005-020 (2 msupplied) to the POWER and thetransducer cable to the XDR connectorRefer to the interconnection diagram toconnect cables Leave slack in cables tofacilitate checking and maintenance

Note The fuse holder contains a springwhich fixes the fuse To preventdetachment of the spring which wouldcause loss of power tie the line asshown below

+ line (red)

Fuse holder

Cable tie How to fix fuse holder

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4148

35

Establishing the ground

The ground wire (125 sq or more localsupply) should be as short as possible

The signal line ground is isolated from

the chassis ground however the powerline is not insulated Therefore whenconnecting eternal equipment havingpositive ground do not ground thesignal line to the chassis If excessivenoise shows on the screen the groundmay be inadequate In this case attacha steel plate measuring 20 cm by 30 cmon the outside of the hull to provide aground point Connect the ground wire

there Use a ldquoclosedrdquo type lug ( ) tomake the connection at the display unitDo not use an ldquoopenrdquo type lug ( )

Optional equipment

POWER connector

The power supply port is commonlyused for connection of externalequipment such as a GPS receiver orwind indicator Use the powerdatacable MJ-A7SPF0005-020 (supplied) forconnection referring the figure shown inthe right column

Connector Color Remarks

1 TD-A WHT2 TD-B BLU

IEC-61162-1NMEA0183

3 RD-A YEL

4 RD-B GRN

IEC-61162-1

NMEA01835 + RED

6 - BLKPower input12 VDC

7 FG

Water tempspeed sensor

Connect the optional water tempspeedsensor to the XDR connector with theoptional converter connector (Type02S4147) as shown below

Tape connectors withvulcaninzing tapeand then vinyl tapeto waterproof themBind tape ends withcable ties to preventtape from unraveling

Connect to XDR portat rear of display unit

MJ-A10SPF

MJ-A10SRMDMJ-A6SRMD

Fromtransducer

Fromsensor

Connection of converterconnector 02S4147

48 IEC 61162-1 DataSentences

The tables below show the datasentences which can be input to andoutput from the LS-4100 Thetransmission speed for both input andoutput is 4800 bps Data is output attwo-second intervals

Input data sentences

Sentence Meaning

BWC Bearing and distance towaypoint

GGA Global positioning system(GPS) fix data

GLL Geographic position -latitudelongitude

HDG Heading deviation and variationHDT Heading true

MDA Atmospheric pressure

MTW Water temperature

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4248

36

Input data sentences (conrsquot)

Sentence MeaningMWV Wind speed and

angleRMA Recommended

minimum specificLORAN-C dataRMB Recommended

minimum navigationinformation

RMC Recommendedminimum specificGPSTRANSIT data

VHW Water speed andheading

VTG Course over groundand ground speedXTE Cross track error

Output data sentences

Sentence MeaningDBT (Ver 15) Depth below

transducerDPT (Ver 20 Ver30)

Depth

MTW Water temperatureRMB (Ver 20) Recommended

minimumnavigationinformation

VHW Water speed andheading

TLL Target positionoutput by [MARK]key

= Available with connection of optionalsensorsnavaid

49 Installation MenuThe installation menu mainly containsitems which are set at installation

1 Turn on the power while pressing the[MENUESC] key Continue pressing

the [MENUESC] key until theInstallation menu appears

SIMULATION On

TEST LCD PATTERN MEMORY CLEAR

NMEA PORT InOutNMEA MIX OffGPS WAAS Off

SET BOTTOM LEVEL

Installation Menu

= Setting cannot be changed whenNMEA PORT setting is InIn

Installation menu

SIMULATION The simulation modeprovides without connection of thetransducer simulated operation of theequipment using internally generatedechoes All controls are operative Themessage ldquoSIMrdquo appears at the top rightcorner on the screen when thesimulation mode is active

1 At the installation menu press toopen the simulation mode optionswindow

2 Press to choose ldquoOnrdquo to turn onthe simulation mode

3 Press the [POWERBRILL] keyabout three seconds to turn off thepower

4 Press the [POWERBRILL] key toturn on the power ldquoSIMrdquo appears atthe top right corner of the display

5 To turn off the simulation modeselect Off at step 2

NMEA po r t se tup(NMEA PO RT NMEA M IX)

The POWER port can function as aninput port or inputoutput port Changethe setting to ldquoInInrdquo when connectingGP-310B320B and a wind sensor

When connecting the GP-310B320Band a wind sensor first turn on ldquoGPS

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4348

37

WAASrdquo (in the Installation menu) andthen select ldquoInInrdquo as the NMEA portsetting

1 Turn on the power while pressingand holding down the [MENUESC]key Continue pressing the[MENUESC] key until theInstallation menu appears

2 Choose NMEA PORT and thenpress to display the NMEA portoptions window

3 Use or to choose InOut orInIn as appropriate

InOut Input and Output (default

setting)InIn Input only (Available withconnection of the GP-310B320Band a wind sensor)

4 Press choose NMEA MIX andthen press to display the NMEAMIX options window

5 Use or to choose Off or OnChoose On to output input data

Off Outputs the data sentences ofLS-4100 only

On Outputs the data sentences ofLS-4100 and sentences which areinput from other equipment

6 To restore normal operation turn offthe power and then turn it on again

GPS WAAS Chooses how to use theWAAS signal when connecting with a

WAAS receiver for example GP-320B

Note WAAS is currently in thedevelopmental phase During thedevelopmental phase the reliability andavailability of the WAAS signal cannotbe guaranteed Therefore any positiondata should be verified against othersources to confirm reliability

1 Display the Installation menu2 Choose GPS WAAS and then press

to open the GPS WAAS options

window

Off

WAAS options window3 Press or to choose ldquoWAAS-02rdquo

(test signal) When the systembecomes operational (in 2003) setto ldquo00rdquo (regular WAAS signal)

4 Turn off the power

BOTTOM LEVEL If the depthindication is unstable in automaticoperation or the bottom echo cannot bedisplayed in the darkest gray tone byadjusting the gain controls in manualoperation you may adjust the bottomecho level detection circuit for both 50kHz and 200 kHz to stabilize theindication Generally lower the bottomlevel for inner hull installation where thereceive level is too low If the bottomlevel is too low it may be difficult todiscriminate fish from the bottomresulting in unstable depth indication

And if the bottom level is too high thedepth indication may not appear

1 At the installation menu press tochoose SET BOTTOM LEVEL andthen press Several seconds laterthe following display appears

Bottom level +0 (200k -100 - +100 ) +0 ( 50k -100 - +100 )

Bottom level display

2 While observing the picture use or to set 200 kHz or to set50 kHz Set up for optimum picture

3 To restore normal operation turn offthe power and then it on again

Note The mode must be other thanldquoNAV DATArdquo to show the bottom leveldisplay

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4448

SP - 1 E2371S01C

SPECIFICATIONS OF ECHO SOUNDER LS-4100

1 GENERAL11 TX Frequency 50 kHz or 200 kHz 50200 kHz dual transmitting selectable12 Transmit Method Single or dual transmitting

13 Output Power 300 Wrms14 TX Rate Max 500 pulsemin15 Pulse-length 01 to 08 ms

2 DISPLAY UNIT21 Display system 5-inch monochrome LCD 76 mm (W) x 100 mm (H) 240 x 320 dots22 Display Mode Single frequency (highlow freq) Dual-frequency Zoom Nav data-12

Marker zoom Bottom zoom Bottom-lock23 Display Range

Range SettingRange

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

Display

rangeMeter 5 10 20 40 80 150 200 300 2-500

Feet 15 30 60 120 200 400 600 1000 7-1500

Fathoms 3 5 10 20 40 80 100 150 1-250

PassiBraza 3 5 10 30 50 100 150 200 1-300

24 Range Shift 0-500 m 0-1500 ft 0-250 fa 0-300 pb25 Expansion Range Bottom-lock expansion 3 to 10 m

Sectional expansion 2 to 50 m26 Display Advance Speed 8 steps (LinesTX Freeze 1161814121121 41)

3 INTERFACE31 Input data sentences IEC61162-1NMEA0183 Ver 152030

GGA RMA RMB RMC BWC GLL HDT HDG VTG VHW MTWMWV MDA XTE

32 Output data sentences IEC61162-1NMEA0183 Ver 152030 interval 2 sMTW VHW DBT DPT RMB TLL by key operating External data required

4 POWER SUPPLY41 Display Unit 12 VDC 05 A

5 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITION51 Ambient Temperature Display unit -15degC to +55degC52 Relative Humidity 93 or less at 40degC53 Waterproof IPX5

6 COATING COLOR61 Display Unit N30

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4548

M a r

4

0 3

D-1

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4648

Mar 4 03

Mar 4 03

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4748

M a r

3

0 3

S-1

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4848

FURUNO Authorized DistributorDealer FURUNO Authorized DistributorDealer

9-52 Ashihara-cho9-52 Ashihara-choNishinomiya 662-8580 JAPANNishinomiya 662-8580 JAPAN

Telephone Telephone 0798-65-21110798-65-2111FaxFax 0798-65-42000798-65-4200

FIRST EDITION FIRST EDITION MARMAR 20032003Printed in JapanPrinted in Japan All rights reserved All rights reserved

B1B1 SEPSEP 09 200509 2005

Pub NoPub No OME-23710OME-23710 00014698000000146980000001469800000014698000(( DAMIDAMI )) LS-4100LS-4100

0 0 0 1 4 6 9 8 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 4 6 9 8 0 0 0

Page 6: OME23710B_1_LS4100

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 648

iv

SYSTEM OVERVIEW

System configuration

Power supply12 VDC

DISPLAY UNITLS-4100

GPS Navigatoror

Wind Indicator

Transducer

Water temperature Speed sensor

ST-02MSBST-02PSB

520-5PSD520-5MSD520-5PWD 525-5PWD525ST-MSD525ST-PWD

Standard Option User supply

Note Contact yourdealer for connection ofother equipment

POWERBRILL

MARK

GAIN

RANGE

ESCMENUMODE

LS-4100

ECHO SOUNDER

Equipment lists

Standard supply

Name Type Code No Qty RemarksDisplay Unit LS-4100 mdash 1

520-5PSD 000-015-204 Thru-hull mount520-5MSD 000-015-212 Thru-hull mount520-5PWD 000-015-126

Transducer

525-5PWD 000-146-966Transom mount

525ST-MSD 000-015-263 Thru-hull mountTriducer (transducerplus spdtemp sensor) 525ST-PWD 000-015-261

1

Transom mount

Installation Materials(CP02-07401)

bull Tapping screw (4 pcs 5 x 20 SUS304 000-802-081)bull Washer head screw B (4 pcs M4 x 20 SUS304 000-804-742)bull Cable assy (1 pc MJ-A7SPF0005-020 000-139-384 for power and data)

Spare Parts(SP02-04801) Fuse (2 pc FGMB 1A 125V Code No 000-114-805)

Template C22-00301 (000-146-981 for flush mount)C22-00302 (000-146-982 for bulkhead)

Optional equipment

Name Type Code No Qty RemarksConversion Cable 02S4147 000-141-082 1 For spdtemp sensor

ST-02MSB 000-137-986Water Temperature ampSpeed Sensor ST-02PSB 000-137-987

Selectone Thru-hull type

Inner Hull Kit S 22S0191 000-802-598 1

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 748

1

1 OPERATION

11 Control Description

Cursor PadSelects menu itemsshifts VRM

Openscloses menuescapes from current

operation

Selects display mode

Adjusts gain

Selects basic display range

Long press Turns power onoffMomentary press Adjusts display contrast and brilliance

Outputs LL positionto external equipmentregisters selected positionas waypoint

POWER

BRILL

MARK

GAIN

RANGE

ESCMENU

MODE

LS-4100

ECHO SOUNDER

Display unit

How to remove the hard cover

Place your thumbs at the center of thecover and then lift the cover whilepressing it with your thumbs

12 Power OnOffPress the [POWERBRILL] key more

than one second to turn on the powerThe unit beeps the startup screenappears and then the equipmentchecks the ROM and RAM for properoperation and displays program number(If ldquoNGrdquo (No Good) appears try to pressany key except the [POWERBRILL] keyto start operation However theequipment may not work properlyContact your dealer) You may

press any key after the completion ofthe equipment check to start operationsooner

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 848

2

Program version no

ROM OK RAM OK Program No 0252318-01

5 ECHO SOUNDER

FURUNO ELECTRIC CO LTD

Start-up screen

To turn off the power press and holddown the [POWERBRILL] key until thescreen goes blank The time remaining

until power is turned off is counted downon the screen

Note The example screens shown inthis manual may not match the screensyou see on your display The screenyou see depends on your systemconfiguration and equipment settings

13 Adjusting DisplayContrast Brilliance

1 Press the [POWERBRILL] keymomentarily to show thebrilliancecontrast adjustmentwindow

CONTST 4 Min Max

BRILLMin Max

4

Brilliancecontrast adjustment window

2 For contrast press the[POWERBRILL] key to adjustcontrast cyclically (You may also use or on the Cursor Pad to adjustcontrast) (Adjustable range 0 to 9)

3 To adjust brilliance use or $ (Adjustable range 0 to 4)

4 Press the [MENUESC] key to closethe brilliancecontrast adjustmentwindow

Note 1 When the power is reappliedafter turning off the equipment withminimum brilliance minimum brilliancewill be set after the equipment goesthrough its initial start up (The start upscreen appears with the maximumbrilliance) Adjust the brilliance asnecessary

Note 2 Setting windows other thanthose on menus are erased if there isno operation within about sevenseconds

14 Choosing a DisplayFrequency

Seven displays are available singlefrequency (50 or 200 kHz) dualfrequency marker-zoom bottom-zoombottom-lock and nav data (twodisplays)

1 Press the [MODE] key to show themode selection window

MODE

SINGLE FREQDUAL FREQMARKER ZOOMBOTTOM ZOOMBOTTOM LOCKNAV DATA-1NAV DATA-250kHz 200kHz

Mode selection window

2 Press the [MODE] key again withinseven seconds to choose a modeYou may also choose a mode with or $

3 For modes other than DUAL FREQchoose frequency Press for 50kHz or for 200 kHz

4 Press the [MENUESC] key to closethe window

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 948

3

Single frequency display

50 kHz

The sounder uses ultrasonic signals todetect bottom conditions The lower thefrequency of the signal the wider thedetection area Therefore the 50 kHzfrequency is useful for general detectionand judging bottom condition

200 kHz

The higher the frequency of theultrasonic signal the better theresolution For this reason the 200 kHzfrequency is ideal for detailed

observation of fish schools

50 kHz

200 kHz

Frequency and coverage area

466

FishSchool

Bottom

0

20

40

50k 1100

Level Bar

Depth

Frequency

Picture Advance Speed

Range Scale

Mode(AUTO or MANUAL)

407 degF162kt Nav Display

MinuteMarker(Shows time

Each baris 30 sec) TransmissionLine

60

Typical 50 kHz display

Dual frequency display

The 50 kHz picture appears on the leftthe 200 kHz picture on the right Thisdisplay is useful for comparing the samepicture with two different transmitting

frequencies

50 kHz 200 kHzpicture picture

496

0050200 11

0

20

40

60

80

20

40

60

80 Dual frequency display

Marker-zoom display

This mode expands chosen area of thenormal picture to full vertical size of thescreen on the left-half window You mayspecify the portion to expand byoperating the VRM (Variable RangeMarker) which you can shift with or$ The area between the VRM andzoom range marker is expanded

Zoomedfishschool

Single frequency display

Variable rangemarker

This sectionis zoomed

Zoom marker

Marker-zoom display

170

250

0

Fishschool

0

40

10

20

30

0050k 11

21

20

19

18

17

22

Marker-zoom display

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 1048

4

Bottom-zoom display

This mode expands bottom and bottomfish in the range width set with ZOOMRANGE of the SYSTEM menu Thismode is useful for determining bottom

contour When the bottom depthincreases the display shift to keep thebottom echo at the lower part of thescreen

0

Bottom-zoom display

298

Bottom

0

40

10

20

30

32

31

30

29

28

27

Switched withdepth

Singlefrequencydisplay

Zoommarker

0050k 11

Bottom-zoom display

Bottom-lock display

The bottom-lock display provides anormal picture on the right half of thescreen and a 15 feet (5 meter) widelayer in contact with the bottom isexpanded onto the left half of the screenThis mode is useful for detecting bottomfish = Operator selectable

Bottom-lock display

Zoommarker

Zoomedfish

This sectionis zoomed

217

0

Singlefrequencydisplay

Fishschool

0

40

Bottom displayed flat

10

20

30

0

1

2

3

4

550k 11

Bottom-lock display

Nav data displays

The nav data displays appear on the leftof the screen Data other than depthrequires appropriate sensor

You can display between two and fouritems in a nav data display and choosethe item and order to display them Seeparagraph 116 to choose the items todisplay ldquoNAV DATA-1rdquo and ldquoNAVDATA-2rdquo in paragraph 21 to choose thenumber of items to display

Depth

694 m

Trip meter

100 nm

Odometer

56 nm

NAV DATA-1 display

NAV DATA-2 display

Temperature

655 deg F

172

1 05 0 05 1

025 nm

XTE

Speed

kt

20

50

40

60

30

10

0

Sample NAV DATA displays(Default setting)

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 1148

5

15 Menu OperatingProcedure

The LS-4100 has three menus MainSystem and Installation Below is the

basic menu operating procedure1 Press the [MENUESC] key to openthe main menu Page 1 or Page 2 ofthe main menu appears dependingon the page last used

[MENU] Exit

(12)

Note SHIFT and CLUTTER arenot available in the auto mode

AUTO MODE Off SHIFT 0ftPIC ADVANCE 11NOISE LIMIT Off CLUTTER Off SIGNAL LEVEL Off

A-SCOPE Off HUE DayWHITE LINE Off DEEP GAIN Low

Pageno

Main menu page 1

2 Use or $ to select an item Toview page 2 of the main menu press$ until showing the display below

[MENU] Exit

(22)

GOTO WPT Off WAYPOINT LIST

TRIP RESET

GAIN ADJ 200 +0GAIN ADJ 50 +0DRAFT 00ft

ALARM MENUSYSTEM MENU

Main menu page 2

3 Press to show selected itemrsquosoptions window The example shownat the top of the right column is theoptions window for AUTO MODE

Off CruisingFishing

Auto mode options window

4 Use or $ to choose option or setnumeric value

5 Press the [MENUESC] key to closethe menu or press to continuemenu operation

16 Automatic OperationHow automatic operation works

The automatic function automatically

chooses the proper gain range scaleand clutter It works as followsbull The range changes automatically to

display the bottom echo on thescreen

bull The gain is automatically adjusted todisplay the bottom echo in the darkesttone

bull Clutter (on the menu) whichsuppresses low-level noise isautomatically adjusted

Choosing automatic operation

The automatic mode provides twochoices of modes cruising and fishing1 Press the [MENUESC] key to open

the main menu2 Press to choose AUTO MODE

from page 1 of the menu3 Press to open the mode options

window4 Choose Cruising or Fishing as

appropriate

ldquoCruisingrdquo is for tracking the bottomldquoFishingrdquo is for searching fish schoolsSince ldquoCruisingrdquo uses a higher clutterrejection setting than fishing it is notrecommended for fish detection -weak fish echoes may not bedisplayed ldquoFishingrdquo clearly displaysweaker echoes

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 1248

6

5 Press the [MENUESC] key to closethe menu

The auto mode in use is shown as(Auto-Fishing) or

(Auto-Cruising) at the top left corner onthe screen

Note When in the auto mode SHIFTand CLUTTER cannot be adjustedmanually

Range offset

To display the bottom tail in detail in theautomatic mode offset the range as

below1 Press the [+] or [-] key of the

[RANGE] key

+0 ft

AUTO RANGE OFFSET

Auto range offset window

2 Press the [+] or [-] key of the[RANGE] key again to choose offsetdesired (range -100 to +300 ft)Note that if the basic range ischanged the offset is returned to ldquo0rdquo

3 Press the [MENUESC] key to finish

Gain offset

Gain offset lets you override automaticgain adjustment1 Press the [GAIN] key

Min Max 0

AUTO GAIN OFFSET

Auto gain offset window

2 Press or key to offset gain(setting range ndash5 to +5) The gainselected is shown at the top of thescreen asG (Gain) + (or -) XX (offset value)

3 Press the [MENUESC] key to finish

17 Manual OperationChoosing the manual mode

1 Press the [MENUESC] key to openthe main menu

2 Press to choose AUTO MODEfrom page 1 of the menu3 Press to show the window4 Choose Off with 5 Press the [MENUESC] key to close

the menu appears at the topleft corner on the screen

Choosing range

The basic range and range shiftingfunctions used together give you themeans to choose the depth you can seeon the screen The basic range can bethought of as providing a ldquowindowrdquo intothe water column and range shifting asmoving the ldquowindowrdquo to the desireddepth

Choosing basic range

The basic range may be chosen withthe [RANGE] key from the eight rangesshown in the table shown below (ldquoPBrdquoin the table means PassiBraza) Thesetting range can be arranged throughthe SYSTEM menu

Default ranges

Basic RangeUnit1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

meters 5 10 20 40 80 150 200 300

feet 15 30 60 120 200 400 600 1000

fathoms 3 5 10 20 40 80 100 150

hiro 4 8 15 30 50 100 150 200

PB 3 5 10 30 50 100 150 200

Japanese unit of depth measurement1 Press the [+] or [-] key of the

[RANGE] key and the display shouldnow look something like the one onat the top of the next page

2 Press the [+] or [-] key of the[RANGE] key again to choose abasic range

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 1348

7

1000ft 600ft 400ft 200ft 120ft 60ft 30ft 15ft

Basic ranges (default)3 Press the [MENUESC] key to close

the window

Shifting the range

The basic range may be shifted up ordown in the manual mode as follows

Display

Window can beshifted up anddown to selectthe depth

Range and display shift concept

1 Press the [MENUESC] key to openthe main menu

2 Choose SHIFT from page 1 of themenu

3 Press to open the shift optionswindow

0ft

Shift window

4 Use or $ to choose amount ofshift desired

5 Press the [MENUESC] key to closethe window

Note The picture may not be displayedif the amount of shift is greater thanactual depth

Adjusting the gain

The [GAIN] key adjusts the sensitivity ofthe receiver Generally use a highergain setting for greater depths and alower setting for shallower waters

Use the proper gain setting

Incorrect gain may produce wrong depthindication possibly resulting in a dangeroussituation

UTION

Gain too high Gain proper Gain too low Examples of proper and improper gain

1 Press the [GAIN] key and the displayshown below appears

Min Max

50k 3

200k 2

GAIN

Gain adjustment window

2 When using the dual frequencydisplay press or $ to choosefrequency

3 Press the [GAIN] key to set (Youmay also use or ) Adjust so thata slight amount of noise remains onthe screen

4 Press the [MENUESC] key to closethe gain adjustment window

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 1448

8

18 Measuring DepthThe VRM (Variable Range Marker)functions to measure the depth to fishschools etc1 Press or $ to place the VRM

on the object which you wish tomeasure range

2 Read the VRM depth just abovethe VRM

0

20

40

60

80496

398

VRM

VRM depth

50k 11

How to measure depth with the VRM

19 Choosing PictureAdvance Speed

The picture advance speed determineshow quickly the vertical scan lines runacross the screen When choosing apicture advance speed keep in mindthat a fast advance speed will expandthe size of the fish school horizontallyon the screen and a slow advancespeed will contract it Note that thepicture is not refreshed when pictureadvancement is stopped Thereforeuse caution when steering the vesselunder this condition

Fast Slow Picture and picture advancement speed

1 Press the [MENUESC] key to openthe main menu

2 Choose PIC ADVANCE from page 1of the menu

3 Press to show the optionswindow

Stop116 18 14 12 11 21 41

(

)

Fast

Slow

Picture advance options window

4 Use or $ to choose pictureadvance speed desired Thefractions in the options windowdenote the number of scan linesproduced per transmission Forexample 18 means one scan line isproduced every 8 transmissionsldquoStoprdquo freezes the display and it isconvenient for taking a photo

The picture is not refreshed whenpicture advancement is stopped

Maneuvering the vessel in this conditionmay result in a dangerous situation

UTION

5 Press the [MENUESC] key to closethe menu

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 1548

9

110 SuppressingInterference

Interference from other acousticequipment operating nearby or other

electronic equipment on your boat mayshow itself on the display as shown inthe figure belowTo suppress interference do thefollowing1 Press the [MENUESC] key to open

the main menu2 Use or $ to choose NOISE LIMIT

from page 1 of the menu3 Press to show the options

window4 Use or $ to choose the degree ofsuppression desired Off LowMedium or High (highest)

5 Press the [MENUESC] key to closethe menu

Interference fromother sounder

Electrical interference

Forms of interference

Turn the noise limiter off when nointerference exists otherwise weakechoes may be missed

111 Suppressing LowLevel Noise

Low intensity ldquospecklesrdquo may appearover most of screen This is mainly due

to sediment in the water or noise Thesecan be suppressed by adjustingCLUTTER on the menu When theautomatic mode is on clutter isautomatically rejected To suppress lowlevel noise in manual sounder operationdo the following1 Press the [MENUESC] key to open

the main menu2 Use or $ to choose CLUTTER

from page 1 of the menu3 Press to show the optionswindow

4 Use or $ to choose the degree ofsuppression desired 1 2 3 4 5 or6 The higher the number the greaterthe suppression

5 Press the [MENUESC] key to closethe menu

To turn off low-level noisesuppression choose Off at step 4 andthen press the [MENUESC] key

Clutter appearance

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 1648

10

112 Erasing WeakEchoes

Sediment in the water or reflectionsfrom plankton may be painted on the

display in low intensity tones

Weakechoes

Appearance of weak echoes

These weak echoes may be erased asfollows1 Press the [MENUESC] key to open

the main menu2 Use or $ to choose SIGNAL

LEVEL from page 1 of the menu3 Press to show the options

window4 Use or $ to choose the degree of

suppression desired Off Low orHigh (highest)

5 Press the [MENUESC] key to closethe menu

To turn off the signal level function choose Off at step 4 and then pressthe [MENUESC] key

113 A-scope DisplayThis display shows echoes at eachtransmission with amplitudes and toneproportional to their intensities on theright 14 of the screen It is useful forestimating the kind of fish school andbottom composition

Note In the dual frequency display the A-scope display is only available withthe high frequency display

323

10

20

30

40

0

A-scope display

Single frequency display

Strong

reflection(bottom)

Weakreflection(fish or noise)

50k 11

Strongreflection(fish)

A-scope display

1 Press the [MENUESC] key to openthe main menu

2 Press or $ to choose A-SCOPEfrom page 1 of the menu

3 Press to show the optionswindow

4 Press

or$

to choose the A-scope presentation type desiredNormal Display shows echoes ateach transmission with amplitudesand tone proportional to theirintensitiesPeak Peak-hold amplitude picture

5 Press the [MENUESC] key to closethe menu

To turn off the A-scope displaychoose Off at step 4 and then press the[MENUESC] key

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 1748

11

114 AlarmsAlarm description

The LS-4100 has six conditions whichgenerate both audio and visual alarms

bottom alarm normal fish alarm bottomlock fish alarm water temperature alarmarrival alarm and speed alarm (Thewater temperature arrival and speedalarms require appropriate sensors)

Bottom alarm The bottom alarm alertsyou when the bottom is within the alarmrange set To activate the bottom alarmthe depth must be displayed

Fish (normal) alarm The fish (normal)alarm tells you when fish are within thepreset alarm range

Fish (bottom lock) alarm The fish(bottom lock) alarm available with thebottom-lock mode sounds when fishare within a certain distance from thebottom Note that the bottom zoom

display must be turned on to use thisalarm

Water temperature alarm The watertemperature alarm alerts when thewater temperature is within (Insidealarm) the alarm range set orunderover (outside alarm) the rangeset

Speed alarm The speed alarm alertsyou when the speed is within (Insidealarm) or underover (Outside alarm)the preset speed

Arrival alarm The arrival alarm alertswhen you are near a waypoint by thedistance set

Activating an alarm

1 Press the [MENUESC] key2 Press or $ to choose ALARM

MENU from page 2 on the menu3 Press the to show the ALARM

menu

ALARM

(12)

[MENU] Exit

ALARM

(22)

[MENU] Exit

BOTTOM On FROM 5ft

RANGE 10ftFISH(Normal) On

FROM 5ft RANGE 10ftFISH(BL) On

FROM 8ft RANGE 10ftFISH LEVEL Medium

TEMPERATURE Inside FROM 724 deg F RANGE 10 deg F

SPEED Off FROM 00kt

RANGE 10kt

ARRIVAL ALRM Off RANGE 0 01 m

Pageno

Gray characters mean alarm is inactive Alarm menu

4 Use or $ to choose an alarm asappropriate

5 Press to show the options menu

Off On

Off InsideOutside

Temp Speed Alarm Types

Fish ArrivalBottom AlarmOnOff

Alarm options6 Use or $ to choose alarm type

Off Alarm off On Alarm onInside Alarm generated whenspeed (or water temperature) iswithin the range setOutside Alarm generated whenspeed (or water temperature) isoutside the range set

7 Press to close the windowFor ARRIVAL ALARM setting skip tostep 12

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 1848

12

8 Press $ to choose FROM9 Press to show the options menu

0ft

Depth

632 deg F

Temperature

10 kt

Speed Depth temperature speed setting

window10 Use or $ to set starting depth

temperature or speed as appropriateFor FISH (BL) the starting depth isthe range from the bottom

11 Press to close the window12 Press $ to choose RANGE13 Press to show the options menu14 Use or $ to set alarm range15 For the bottom alarm temperature

alarm speed alarm or arrivalalarm press the [MENUESC] key tofinish For a fish alarm press toclose the window and then go tostep 16

16 Press $ to choose FISH LEVEL17 Press to show the options menu

Weak

MediumStrong Fish level options

18 Use or $ to choose the echostrength level which will trigger a fishalarm

Weak Weak echoes (weakest toneon level bar)Medium Medium strength echoes

(middle tone on level bar)Strong Strong echoes (darkest toneon level bar)

19 Press the [MENUESC] key twice toclose the menu

Alarm range marker Bottom alarm Fish alarm (normal) Right Fish alarm (bottomlock) Left

Alarm icon

Alarm rangeStartingpoint

Bottom alarm Fish alarm (normal) Fish alarm (BL)

Temperature alarm (deg

C ordeg

F shown) Speed alarm Arrival alarm

Alarm icon (Appropriate icon appears to showwhich alarm has been violated)

How the alarm works

Note To disable an alarm choose Offat step 5 in the above procedure

Silencing the buzzer

The buzzer sounds and the appropriatealarm icon appears and flashes whenan alarm is violated You can silence thebuzzer by pressing any key Howeverthe buzzer will sound whenever thealarm setting is violated

Note The audio and visual alarms arereleased against the last-violated alarmwhen multiple alarms are active

115 WaypointsWaypoints may be used tobull Record the position of an important

echo as waypoint 12 points may beregistered

bull Output a waypoint position to a plotterto mark position on its screen

bull Find range bearing and time-to-go toa location (waypoint)

Note Requires latitude and longitudeposition from a navigator

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 1948

13

Registering a waypoint on thescreen

1 Press the [MARK] key The cursorappears along with waypoint entryinstructions To enter a waypoint tothe current own shiprsquos position go tostep 3Note If there is no position data themessage ldquoNo position datardquo appearsCheck the navigator

50k

496

1100

20

40

60

80

0

Cursor

WAYPOINT ENTRY

( Move) Cursor [MARK] Enter [MENU] Cancel

50 kHz display

2 Press the cursor pad to set thecursor where desired Pictureadvancement is stopped until step 3is completed and the instructionwindow is integrated into the navdisplay

3 Press the [MARK] key again WhenTLL or FURUNO-TLL is selected atTLL OUTPUT on the System menuthe latitude and longitude position atthe cursor is output to the navigator

A vertical line marks location Furtherthe display shows the waypointname (next sequential number) andposition of the location selected atstep 2

WAYPOINTName FREQLat 34 deg 22796NLon 136 deg 07264E

05

[MENU] Exit

rase

Waypoint data display

Note If you attempt to enter 13thwaypoint the message ldquoMemoryfullrdquo appears In this case erase anunwanted waypoint to enable entry

4 To save the waypoint under thename shown go to step 8 or go tostep 5 to change its name

5 Press to open the waypoint nameentry window

WAYPOINTName FREQLat 34 deg 22796NLon 136 deg 07264E

05

[MENU] Exit

01------ ENT

rase

Waypoint window name entry6 Use or to set character $ or

to shift cursor The name mayconsist of 10 alphanumericcharactersNote Character order is 0 1hellip9 - A BhellipZ _ 0hellip

7 Press to choose ENT 8 Press the [MENUESC] key to

register the waypoint

Registering waypoint by LL

1 Press the [MENUESC] key to openthe main menu

2 Use or to choose WAYPOINTLIST from page 2 of the menu

3 Press

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 2048

14

WAYPOINT LIST

01 0102 0303------------------------------------------------------

[MENU] Exit

Waypoint list4 Press or to choose an empty

waypoint and press Press again

NEW WAYPOINTName FREQLat 34 deg 22796NLon 136 deg 07264E

05

[MENU] Exit

04------ ENT

rase

New waypoint window name entry

5 Use or to set character $ or to shift cursor

6 Press to select ENT 7 Enter latitude and longitude similar

to how you entered waypoint name8 Press the [MENUESC] key to

register the waypoint

Editing waypoints Press the [MENUESC] key to open

the main menu

2 Use or to choose WAYPOINTLIST from page 2 of the menu

3 Press to open the waypoints list4 Use or to choose a waypoint

and press 5 Use or to choose the item to

edit (name latitude or longitude)6 Press to open the data entry

window7 Use or to set character $ or

to choose location8 Press to choose ENT 9 Press the [MENUESC] key

Erasing waypoints Press the [MENUESC] key2 Use or to choose WAYPOINT

LIST from page 2 of the menu3 Press to open the waypoints list

4 Use or to choose the waypointto erase and then press Note You cannot erase a waypointwhich is selected as ldquoGOTO WPTrdquo

5 Press to choose ldquoEraserdquo6 Press to open the options window7 Press to select YES to erase the

waypoint The waypoint list appearswith the erased waypoint blank

8 Press the [MENUESC] key twice toclose the menu

Setting destination waypoint

Set a destination waypoint to find rangebearing and time-to-go to that point Youcan see range and bearing to awaypoint Time-to-go is shown on theTime to Go digital display

Press the [MENUESC] key to openthe main menu

2 Use or to choose GOTO WPTfrom page 2 of the menu

3 Press to open the waypoints list

Off01020304----------------------------------------------------------------

Waypoint list

4 Use or to choose a waypoint5 Press the [MENUESC] key to close

the menu

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 2148

15

116 Setting Up Nav DataDisplays

The user may arrange the nav datadisplays as desired

1 Use the [MODE] key to show theNAV DATA-1 or 2 display whicheveryou want to set up

2 Press the [MENUESC] key to closethe mode selection window

3 Press the cursor pad to display theNAV DATA SETUP window

NAV DATA SETUP

Window Selection Data Selection

[MENU] Exit

NAV DATA SETUP window

4 Use or to choose a datadisplay window desired Adashed-line rectangle circumscribesyour selection

5 Use

or$

to choose item todisplay See the below for adescription of the displays

(9)

(1)

(2)

(3)

(4)(5)

(6)(7)(8)

Two-data

display

Three-data

display

Four-data

displayItems displayable in (1) - (3) depth positioncourse range and bearing trip distanceodometer water temperature headingair pressure time-to-go to destination waypointXTE speed wind speed and directiondestination waypoint data compassItems displayable in (4) - (9) depth positionspeed course range and bearing trip distanceodometer water temperature headingair pressure time-to-go to destination waypointXTE wind speed wind direction

= Graphic display

Nav data window and item displayable6 Press the [MENUESC] key to finish

Note You can choose the number ofitems to show in a nav data display withNAV DATA-1 and NAV DATA-2 on theSystem menu

GRAPHIC DISPLAYS

1 05 0 05 1

Wpt 03Rng 019nm Brg 321 deg XTE 000nm Cse 333 deg

DESTINATION WAYPOINT GRAPHIC

XTEscale

BearingCourseDestinationwaypointdirection

DestinationwaypointdataNameRangeXTE

Wind APP

WIND GRAPHIC

60

120

90

030

150180

120

150

90

60

30

120 deg

Speed 103 ms

COMPASS GRAPHIC

SPEED GRAPHIC

172

Speed

20

50

40

60

30

10

01 05 0 05 1

025 nm

XTE

XTE GRAPHIC

kt

Bearing todestinationwaypoint

Course

Brg30 deg

Cse90 deg

N

E

XTE scale

Speed-ometer

Nav data display-1

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 2248

16

DIGITAL DISPLAYS

Course

123 deg

COURSE

Depth

328 ft

DEPTH

Heading TRUEMAG

318 deg

HEADING

Odometer

56 nm

ODOMETER

Position GPS 3D

30 deg 00065N130 deg 00574E

POSITION

Temperature

698 degF

WATER TEMPERATURE

Trip meter

121 nm

TRIP DISTANCE

Time to Go

00 H30 M

TIME-TO-GO

1018 hpa

AIR PRESSURE

Air Pressure

Speed

193 kt

SPEED

Rng

121 nm

RANGE amp BEARING

Brg

140 deg

Wind Speed APP

80 ms

WIND SPEED

Wind Dir APP

138 deg

WIND DIRECTION

APP or TRUE depending on menu setting TRUE or MAG depending

on menu settingamp To destination waypoint

Note 1 Nav data is updated with somedelay

Note 2 When data is lost 120 sec thedisplay shows - - at the locationwhere data is lost

= GPS receiving status (Displays whenconnecting with GP-310B320B and InOutis selected at the Installation menu)NO FIX Position cannot be foundGPS 2D 2D (dimension) GPS position fixGPS 3D 3D GPS fixGPS W2D 2D WAAS position fixGPS W3D 3D WAAS position fix

NAV data display-2

117 Other Menu ItemsThis section describes the menu itemsnot previously mentioned

Page 1

HUE (Picture Color)

Two picture color arrangements areavailable Day and Night Day showsechoes on a white background Nightshows them on a black background

1 Press the [MENUESC] key todisplay the menu

2 Use or $ to choose HUE frompage 1 of the menu

3 Press to show the optionswindow

4 Use or $ to choose Day or Nightas appropriate

5 Press the [MENUESC] key to closethe menu

WHITE LINE

The white line feature displays theleading edge of the bottom echo in

white This is useful for discriminatingbottom fish near the bottom

1 Press the [MENUESC] key todisplay the main menu

2 Use or $ to choose WHITE LINEfrom page 1 of the menu

3 Press to show the optionswindow

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 2348

17

4 Use or to choose Off Tone orMesh as appropriate ldquoMeshrdquo paintsthe white line in darker tone thanldquoTonerdquo

5 Press the [MENUESC] key to closethe menu

526White Line OFF White Line ON (Mesh)

Fish schoolclearly shown

White line

0

20

40

60

80

050k 11

526

0

20

40

60

80

00 050k 11

How white line works

DEEP GAIN

ldquoDeep Gainrdquo compensates forpropagation attenuation of the ultrasonicwaves It does this by equalizing echopresentation so that fish schools of thesame size appear in the same density inboth shallow and deep waters Inaddition it reduces surface noise

Press the [MENUESC] key to openthe main menu

2 Use or to choose DEEP GAINfrom page of the menu

3 Press $ to show to the optionswindow

4 Choose Low Medium or High asappropriate High provides thegreatest degree of gain reductionagainst short range echoes

5 Press the [MENUESC] key to closethe menu

Page 2

TRIP RESET

This item resets trip distance to ldquo0rdquo

Press the [MENUESC] key to openthe main menu

2 Use or to choose TRIPRESET from page 2 of the menu

3 Press $ 4 Press to reset trip distance

Beeps are generated while the tripdistance is being reset

5 Press the [MENUESC] key to closethe menu

Note To reset the odometer to zeroclear the memory

GAIN ADJ 200 GAIN ADJ 50

If the gain is too high or too low or thegain for the low and high frequenciesappears unbalanced you cancompensate it as follows

Press the [MENUESC] key to openthe main menu

2 Use or to choose GAIN ADJ200 or GAIN ADJ 50 from page 2 ofthe menu

3 Press $ to show to the optionswindow

4 Use or to set the amount Thesetting range is ndash50 to +50

5 Press the [MENUESC] key to close

the menu

DRAFT

The default depth display shows thedistance from the transducer If youwould rather show the distance from thesea surface set your shiprsquos draft asfollows

Press the [MENUESC] key to openthe main menu

2 Use or to choose DRAFT frompage 2 of the menu

3 Press $ and then use or to setdraft The setting range is ndash 50 to+500 (meters feet)

4 Press the [MENUESC] key to closethe menu

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 2448

18

2 SYSTEM MENU

The System menu mainly consists ofitems which once set do not requirefrequent adjustment You may displaythis menu by choosing SYSTEM MENUat page 2 of the main menu andpressing

SYSTEM MENULANGUAGE English

DEPTH UNIT ftSPEED UNIT ktWIND UNIT msTEMP UNIT deg F

TEMP GRAPH OffNAV DATA-1 NAV DATA-2

WATER TYPE SaltKEY BEEP OnBATT VOLTAGE Off (13)

[MENU] Exit

SYSTEM MENU

(23)

NAV DISPLAY TempSpeedNMEA0183 Ver 20TLL OUTPUT OffBEARING TrueWIND SPDDIR ApparentTRIP SOURCE Own

TEMP SOURCE OwnSPEED SOURCE OwnTEMP CALIB +00 deg F ( 40)SPEED CALIB +0 ( 50)

Own speed Own temp 100 kt 162 deg F

[MENU] Exit

SYSTEM MENU

(33)

BASIC RANGE1 15 ft

RANGE2 30RANGE3 60RANGE4 120RANGE5 200RANGE6 400RANGE7 600RANGE8 1000 (7-1500)

ZOOM RANGE 15 ft (7-150)BL RANGE 15 ft (10-30)(Bottom Lock)

ZOOM MARKER On

[MENU] Exit

PAGE 3

PAGE 2

PAGE 1

Page no

System menus

21 System MenuPage 1

LANGUAGE The system language isavailable in English several Europeanlanguages and Japanese To changelanguage select language desired andpress the [MENUESC] key

DEPTH UNIT Choose unit of depthmeasurement from meters feet

fathoms passibraza and hiro(Japanese)

SPEED UNIT Choose unit of speedmeasurement from knots miles perhour and kilometers per hour Requiresspeed data

WIND UNIT Choose unit of wind speedmeasurement from ms kt kmh and

mph Requires wind speed data

TEMP UNIT Choose unit oftemperature measurement Celsius orFahrenheit Requires temperature data

TEMP GRAPH Turns the watertemperature display on or off Thetemperature scale range is 16deg (degF) inldquoNarrowrdquo 40deg (degF) in ldquoWiderdquo Requires

water temperature data

m526

0

20

40

60

80

00 050k 11

40

80

70

50

60

TemperatureScale

TemperatureGraph

638 deg F162kt

Water temperature display (wide degF)

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 2548

19

NAV DATA-1 -2 Choose the number ofnavigation data items to display on thenav data displays from two three orfour items Requires appropriate navdata

WATER TYPE Choose the water typewith which to use the LS-4100 fromSalt or Fresh

KEY BEEP Turn key beep on or off

BATT VOLTAGE Turn the batteryvoltage indication (appears at the topright corner on the screen) on or offWhen on it replaces the picture advancespeed indication

Page 2

NAV DISPLAY Choose the nav data todisplay in the nav data window at thetop left-hand corner You may choosefrom temperaturespeedlatitudelongitude range and bearingcourse over ground trip distance or

wind speed Requires appropriate navdata

407 deg F162kt

Nav window

NMEA0183 Choose NMEA version ofnavigator Ver 15 Ver 20 or Ver 30

TLL OUTPUT Enablesdisables outputof TLL (Target Latitude Longitude)position when the [MARK] key isoperated ldquoTLLrdquo outputs latitude andlongitude position ldquoFURUNO-TLLrdquoavailable with connection of navigatorthat can output FURUNO TLL outputslatitude and longitude watertemperature depth etc

BEARING Shiprsquos course and bearingto a waypoint may be displayed in trueor magnetic bearing Magnetic bearingis true bearing plus (or minus) earthrsquosmagnetic deviation Requires bearingdata

WIND SPDDIR Choose the windspeed and direction reference from trueand apparent Requires wind sensorApparen t The direction (in relation toshiprsquos bow) and speed of the wind as itappears to those on board relative tothe speed and direction of the boatcombination of the true wind and thewind caused by the boats movementTrue The speed and direction (inrelation to shiprsquos bow) of the wind felt ormeasured when stationary

TRIP SOURCE Choose speed sourcefor the trip distance indication Own(transducer with speed sensor orseparate speed sensor) or NMEA

TEMP SOURCE Choose source ofwater temperature input Off Own(transducer with water temperaturesensor or separate temperature sensor)or NMEA

SPEED SOURCE Choose source ofspeed input Off Own (transducer withspeed sensor or separate speedsensor) or NMEA Requires speed

data

TEMP CALIB If the water temperaturesensor-generated water temperatureindication is wrong you can correct ithere when ldquoOwnrdquo is selected astemperature source For example if thewater temperature indication is 2deghigher than actual water temperatureenter -2 The setting range is -40degF to

+40degF

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 2648

20

SPEED CALIB If the speedsensor-generated speed indication iswrong you can correct it here whenldquoOwnrdquo is selected as speed source Forexample if the speed indication is 10lower than actual speed enter +10 Thesetting range is ndash50 to +50

Page 3

BASIC RANGE 1 - BASIC RANGE 8 Set range of each of the eight basicranges (Selectable range 7 to 1500 ft)Note 1 All default basic ranges arerestored whenever the depth unit ischanged Therefore change the depth

unit before changing the basic rangesNote 2 A range may not be lower thanthe range preceding it For example ifbasic range 3 is 60 feet basic range 4must be greater than 60 feet

ZOOM RANGE Choose the range tozoom in the marker-zoom andbottom-zoom modes You may choose arange between 7 and 150 feet (2 and 50

meters)

BL RANGE The expansion width forthe bottom-lock display can be chosenfrom 10 to 30 feet (3 and 10 meters)

ZOOM MARKER The zoom markerappears in the normal bottom markerand bottom zoom displays and marksthe area which is expanded in the

bottom marker and bottom zoompictures You can turn the marker on oroff as desired

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 2748

21

3 MAINTENANCETROUBLESHOOTING

W RNING

ELECTRICAL SHOCK HAZARDDo not open the equipment

Only qualified personnel should workinside the equipment

31 Maintenance

Regular maintenance is essential forgood performance Checking the itemslisted in the table below monthly willhelp keep your equipment in goodshape for years to come

Checking

Item Action

Transducercable

Check cable for damage

Power cabletransducercable plug

Check that they are tightlyfastened Refasten ifnecessary

Display unitground

Check for corrosion Cleanif necessary

Power supplyvoltage

Check voltage If out ofrating correct problem

32 Cleaning the DisplayUnit

Dust or dirt on the display unit can beremoved with a soft cloth If desired awater-moistened cloth may be usedUse special care when cleaning theLCD since it scratches easily Do notuse chemical cleaners to clean thedisplay unit - they can remove paint andmarkings

33 TransducerMaintenance

Marine life on the transducer face willresult in a gradual decrease insensitivity Check the transducer facefor cleanliness each time the boat isdry-docked Carefully remove anymarine life with a piece of wood orfine-grade sandpaper

34 Replacing the FuseThe fuse in the power cable protects thesystem from reverse polarity of thepower supply and equipment fault If thefuse blows find the cause beforereplacing it Use only a 1A fuse (FGMB 1A 125V Code No 000-114-805 ) orequivalent Using the wrong fuse will damage the unit and void the warranty

W RNINGUse the proper fuse

Fuse rating is shown on the equipmentUse of a wrong fuse can result in fire anddamage the equipment

35 Battery Voltage Alert A battery icon appears when the batteryvoltage is too high or too low

Battery icon and meaning

Icon Meaning

Voltage is lower than 10 VDC If thevoltage goes below 9 V the equipmentis automatically turned off

Voltage is higher than 165 VDC If thevoltage goes higher than 175 V theequipment is automatically turned off

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 2848

22

36 TroubleshootingThe table below provides basictroubleshooting procedures which theuser may follow to restore normaloperation

Troubleshooting table

Ifhellip Then check hellipneither echo norfixed range scaleappears

bull battery voltagebull fusebull power cable

no echo appearsbut the fixedrange scaleappears

bull if display advancespeed is set to ldquoStoprdquo

bull transducer plugbull

transducer cableecho appears butno zero line

bull if range shifting is setto ldquo0rdquo

sensitivity is low bull gain settingbull if air bubbles or marine

life is clinging to thetransducer face

bull if sediments arepresent in the water

bull if the bottom is too soft

to return an echothere is extremeinterference ornoise

bull if the transducer is tooclose to the engine

bull if the unit is properlygrounded

bull if other echo soundersof the same frequencyas own are beingoperated nearby

the speedwatertemperaturereadout isunrealistic or notpresent

bull sensor plug

the positionreadout isunrealistic or notpresent

bull the connectionbetween sounder andnavigator

bull navigator

37 DiagnosticsIf you feel your unit is not workingproperly conduct the diagnostic test tofind the problem If you cannot restorenormal operation contact your dealerfor advice

1 Turn on the power while pressing the[MENUESC] key Continue pressingthe [MENUESC] key until theInstallation menu appears

SIMULATION On

TEST LCD PATTERN MEMORY CLEAR

NMEA PORT InOutNMEA MIX Off GPS WAAS Off

SET BOTTOM LEVEL

Installation Menu

= Setting cannot be changed whenNMEA PORT setting is InIn

Installation menu2 Press to choose TEST3 Press to start the test

ROM OKRAM OKNMEA

Temp 682 deg F

Speed 100kmh

Power 124 VBody 39 deg C

Program No 0252318-01Push [MENU] 3 times to exit

Level bar

= Program version no

Water

TemperatureSpeedBattery VoltageTemperatureinside displayunit(Unit fixed atdeg C)

GPS (48502180) OK

Only when GP-310B is connected(For GP-320B 4850238)

Test display

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 2948

23

4 The ROM RAM and NMEA port arechecked with the results shown asOK or NG (No Good) For any NGrequest service (A special connectoris required to test the NMEA portNothing appears if no connector isconnected)

5 The squares at the right side of thetest display are for checking thecontrols Press each key and thearrows on the Cursor Pad one byone A controlrsquos correspondingon-screen square ldquolightsrdquo in black ifthe control is normal

6 To return to the Installation menupress the [MENUESC] key threetimes

7 To restore normal operation turn offthe power and turn it on again

38 Test PatternThis feature tests for proper display oftones

1 On the Installation menu press $ tochoose LCD PATTERN

2 Press to start the test The entirescreen is black

3 Press again and the screen turnswhite

4 Press again and the screenshows a four-toned display

5 Press again to return to theInstallation menu

6 To restore normal operation turn offthe power and then it on again

WHITE FOUR-TONE BLACK

Test patterns

39 Memory ClearThe memory can be cleared to startafresh with default menu settings

1 At the installation menu press $ tochoose MEMORY CLEAR

2 Press to open the optionswindow

YES NO

Clear memory display

3 Press to clear the memory Beepsare generated while the memory isbeing cleared

4 To restore normal operation turn offthe power and then turn it on again

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3048

24

4 INSTALLATION

41 Display UnitMounting considerations

The display unit can be installed on adesktop on the bulkhead or flushmounted in a panel When choosing alocation keep the following in mind

bull Keep the display unit out of directsunlight

bull The temperature and humidity should

be moderate and stablebull Locate the unit away from exhaust

pipes and ventsbull The mounting location should be well

ventilatedbull Mount the unit where shock and

vibration are minimalbull For maintenance and checking

purposes leave sufficient space atthe sides and rear of the unit andleave slack in cables

bull A magnetic compass will be affected ifthe display unit is placed too close toit Observe the following compasssafe distances to prevent disturbanceto the magnetic compassStandard compass 04 metersSteering compass 03 meters

Desktop overhead mounting1 Fix the bracket to a desktop or the

overhead with tapping screws(supplied)

2 Loosely screw knobs into the displayunit

3 Set the display unit to the bracketand then tighten the knobs

Mounting on the bulkhead Flush

mounting in a panelSee the instructions on the bulkhead orflush mounting template (supplied)

42 Thru-hull MountTransducer

Transducer mounting location

The thru-hull mount transducer

(520-5PSD 520-5MSD) provides thebest performance of all since thetransducer protrudes from the hull andthe effect of air bubbles and turbulencenear the hull skin is reduced When theboat has a keel the transducer shouldbe at least 30 cm away from it Typicalthru-hull mountings are shown in thefigure on the next page

The performance of this sounder isdirectly related to the mounting locationof the transducer especially forhigh-speed cruising The installationshould be planned in advance keepingthe standard cable length (8 m) and thefollowing factors in mindbull Air bubbles and turbulence caused by

movement of the boat seriouslydegrade the sounding capability of thetransducer The transducer shouldtherefore be located in a positionwhere water flow is the smoothestNoise from the propellers alsoadversely affects performance andthe transducer should not be mountednearby The lifting strakes arenotorious for creating acoustic noiseand these must be avoided bykeeping the transducer inboard ofthem

bull The transducer must always remain

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3148

25

submerged even when the boat isrolling pitching or up on a plane athigh speed

bull A practical choice would besomewhere between 13 and 12 of

the boatrsquos length from the stern Forplaning hulls a practical location isgenerally rather far astern so that thetransducer is always in waterregardless of the planing attitude

28

22

120

68

30

520-5PSD

24

120

68

87520-5MSD

Unit mm

Thru-hull mount transducer dimensions

Acceptable transducer mounting

locations

Position 12 to 13 of the hull from stern

15 to 30 cm off center line (inside first lifting strakes)

Within the wetted bottom area

Deadrise angle within 15 deg

HIGH SPEED-V HULL

Suitable transducer mounting locations

Typical thru-hull mounttransducer installations

FairingBlock

Flat Washer

Rubber Washer

Hull

Deep-V Hull

Hull

Flat Washer

Rubber Washer

Flat Hull

CorkWasher

Typical thru-hull mounttransducer installations

Procedure for installing thethru-hull mount transducer

1 With the boat hauled out of the watermark the location chosen formounting the transducer on thebottom of the hull

2 If the hull is not level within 15deg inany direction fairing blocks madeout of teak should be used betweenthe transducer and hull both insideand outside to keep the transducerface parallel with the water lineFabricate the fairing block as shownbelow and make the entire surfaceas smooth as possible to provide anundisturbed flow of water around thetransducer The fairing block shouldbe smaller than the transducer itselfto provide a channel to divert

turbulent water around the sides ofthe transducer rather than over itsface

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3248

26

BOWHole for stuffing tube

Upper Half

Lower Half

Saw along slopeof hull Construction of fairing block

3 Drill a hole just large enough to passthe threaded stuffing tube of thetransducer through the hull makingsure it is drilled vertically

4 Apply a sufficient amount of highquality caulking compound to the topsurface of the transducer around thethreads of the stuffing tube andinside the mounting hole (and fairingblocks if used) to ensure watertightmounting

5 Mount the transducer and fairingblocks and tighten the locking nutsBe sure that the transducer is

properly oriented and its workingface is parallel to the waterline

Note Do not over-stress the stuffingtube and locking nuts through excessivetightening since the wood block willswell when the boat is placed in thewater It is suggested that the nut betightened lightly at installation andretightened several days after the boat

has been launched

Transducer preparation

Before putting the boat in water wipethe face of the transducer thoroughlywith a detergent liquid soap This willlessen the time necessary for thetransducer to have good contact withthe water Otherwise the time requiredfor complete ldquosaturationrdquo ill belengthened and performance will bereduced

DO NOT paint the transducerPerformance will be affected

43 Transom MountTransducer

The transom mount transducer is verycommonly employed usually onrelatively small IO or outboard boatsDo not use this method on an inboardmotor boat because turbulence iscreated by the propeller ahead of thetransducer

520-5PWD

There are two methods of installationflush with hull (for flat hulls) andprojecting from hull (for deep V-hulls)

Flat Hull

D

Dgt50 cm

Deep-VHull

520-5PWD mounting locations

Installing the 520-5PWD on a flat hull

A suitable mounting location is at least50 cm away from the engine and wherethe water flow is smooth

1 Drill four pilot holes in the mountinglocation

2 Attach the transducer to the bracketwith 5 x 20 tapping screws(supplied)

3 Adjust the transducer position so thetransducer faces right to the bottom

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3348

27

Note If necessary to improve waterflow and minimize air bubblesstaying on the transducer faceincline the transducer about 5deg at therear This may require a certainamount of experimentation for finetuning at high cruising speeds

4 Fill the gap between the wedge frontof the transducer and transom withepoxy material to eliminate any airspaces

No1 M5 x 14

5 x 20

5 x 20

2 to 5

Tape

Hull

Transom mount transducer

mounting flush with hull

Installing the transom mounttransducer on a deep-V hull

This method is employed on deep-Vhulls and provides good performancebecause the effects of air bubbles areminimal Install the transducer parallelwith water surface not flush with hull Ifthe boat is placed on a trailer care mustbe taken not to damage the transducerwhen the boat is hauled out of the waterand put on the trailer

5 x 20

No 2M5 x 14

5 x 20

Transom mount transducermounted projecting from hull

525-5PWD

Choose the installation methoddepending on the rise angle of the hull

Transom

Transom

Stripe over 10

Parallel with hull

Mount at the stripe

less than 10

525-5PWD mounting location

Installing the 525-5PWD

Referring to ldquoInstalling the 520-5PWDrdquoin the left column for mounting of thebracket and the figure shown on the topof next page install the 525-5PWD tothe transom

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3448

28

2 to 5

Transducer

Bracket

Hull

Epoxy material

525-5PWD mounting

44 Inside-hullTransducer

The thru-hull mount transducer(520-5PSD 520-5MSD) may also beinstalled inside the hull following theprocedure below

Necessary tools

You will need the following toolsbull Sandpaper (100)bull Silicone sealantbull Silicone grease

Remarks on installationbull Turn off the engine and anchor the

boat while installing the equipmentbull Install the transducer in the engine

room

Choosing the mounting locationbull The mounting location should be

where the hull is of single-hullthickness and is void of air or flotationmaterials other than solid fiberglassbetween the transducer face and thewater

bull Do not place the transducer over hullstruts or ribs which run under the hull

bull Avoid a location where the risingangle of the hull exceeds 15deg tominimize the effect of the boatrsquosrolling

bull You will finalize the mounting location

through some trial and error Theprocedure for this is shown later

50 cm

50 cm15 cm15 cm

13

12

Transducer mountinglocation

Centerline

Inside-hull transducer mounting location

Attaching the transducer1 Clean the transducer face to remove

any foreign material Lightly roughenthe transducer face with 100sandpaper Also roughen the insideof the hull where the transducer is tobe mounted

2 Clean the transducer face again3 Warm the silicone sealant to 40degC

before usage to soften it Coat thetransducer face and mountinglocation with silicone sealant

Transducer

SiliconeSealant

Coating transducer facewith silicone sealant

4 Press the transducer firmly down onthe hull and gently twist it back andforth to remove any air which may betrapped in the silicone sealant

Checking the installation

1 Connect the battery to the display

unit2 Turn on the display unit

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3548

29

3 Press the [MODE] key to chooseSINGLE FREQ

4 Choose 50 kHz or 200 kHz and thenpress the [MENUESC] key to closethe mode menu

5 Press the [MENU] to show the mainmenu and then press to select

Auto mode6 Press to choose Off7 Press the [MENUESC] key8 Press the [GAIN] key to set the gain

to ldquo5rdquo and then press the[MENUESC] key

9 Press the [RANGE] key to set therange to 10 meters (feet) and thenpress the [MENUESC] key

10 If the bottom is displayed in darkgray and the depth indicationappears the mounting location issuitable Go to ldquoFinal preparationrdquo

11 If the bottom is not displayed in darkgray tone the mounting location maybe unsuitable Do the followinga) Press the [POWERBRILL] key to

turn off the powerb) Gently dismount the transducer

with a piece of woodc) Reattach the transducer

elsewhere as shown in ldquoAttachingthe transducerrdquo

d) Check the installation again

Final preparation

Support the transducer with a piece ofwood to keep it in place while it is drying

Let the transducer dry 24-72 hours

45 Optional Triducer525ST-MSD

The optional triducer 525ST-MSD isdesigned for thru-hull mounting Forhow to install this transducer seeparagraph 42

φ79 mm

33 mm200-12 UNthreads

φ51 mm

27 mm

7 mm

140 mm Triducer 525ST-MSD

525ST-PWD

The Transom Mount Transducer orTRIDUCER reg Multisensor with IntegralRelease Bracket 525ST-PWD ismanufactured by AIRMAR Co Theseinstructions are also included with the

sensor

Pre-test for speed and temperature

Connect the sensor to the instrumentand spin the paddlewheel Check for aspeed reading and the approximate airtemperature If there is no readingreturn the sensor to your place ofpurchase

Tools and materials needed

ScissorsMasking tapeSafety gogglesDust maskElectric drillDrill bit for

Bracket holes 4mm 23 or 964rdquoFiberglass hull chamfer bit(preferred)6mm or 14rdquo

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3648

30

Transom hole 19mm or 34rdquo(optional)

Cable clamp holes 3mm or 18rdquoScrewdriversStraight edgeMarine sealantPencilZip-tiesWater-based antifouling paint(mandatory in salt water )

Mounting location

To ensure the best performance thesensor must be submerged inaeration-free and turbulence-free water

Mount the sensor close to the centerlineof the boat On slower heavierdisplacement hulls positioning it fartherfrom the centerline is acceptable

Allow adequate space above thebracket for it to release and rotate thesensor upward

Height

Height withoutspeed sensor191mm (7-12)Height withspeed sensor213mm (8-12)

Height required at mounting location

Note 1 Do not mount the sensor in anarea of turbulence or bubbles nearwater intake or discharge openingsbehind strakes struts fittings or hull

irregularities behind eroding paint (anindication of turbulence)Note 2 Avoid mounting the sensorwhere the boat may be supportedduring trailering launching hauling andstorageNote 3 For single drive boat mounton the starboard side at least 75 mm(3rdquo) beyond the swing radius of thepropeller

75 mm(3)

minimum beyondswing radius

Mounting location on single drive boat

Note 4 For twin drive boat mountbetween the drives

Installation of bracket

1 Cut out the installation template

shown on the next page2 At the selected location position thetemplate so the arrow at the bottomis aligned with the bottom edge ofthe transom Being sure the templateis parallel to the waterline tape it inplace

Align template vertically

Deadrise angle

Slope of hullparallel towaterline

Align template arrow withbottom edge of transom

Positioning the template

Warning Always wear safetygoggles and a dust mask

3 Using a 4 mm 23 or 964rdquo bit drillthree holes 22 mm (78rdquo) deepat the locations indicated To preventdrilling too deeply wrap maskingtape around the bit 22 mm (78rdquo)from the pointFiberglass hull Minimize surfacecracking by chamfering the gelcoatIf a chamfer bit or countersink bit is

not available start drilling with a6mm or 14rdquo bit to a depth of 1 mm(116rdquo)

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3748

31

4 If you know your transom angle the

bracket is designed for a standard13deg transom angle11deg-18deg angle No shim is requiredSkip to step 3 in ldquoAdjustingrdquoOther angles The shim is requiredSkip to step 2 of ldquoAdjustingrdquoIf you do not know the transom angletemporarily attach the bracket andsensor to the transom to determine ifthe plastic shim is needed

5 Using the two 10 x 1-14rdquo

self-tapping screws temporarilyscrew the bracket to the hull DONOT tighten the screws completelyat this time Follow the step 1-4 inldquoAttaching the Sensor to the Bracketrdquobefore proceeding with ldquoAdjustingrdquo

Installation templatefor starboard side of boat

Drill at locations labeled Bfor the following transom angles

16 deg through 22 deg

Drill at locations labeled Afor the following transom angles

2 deg through 15 deg

Align arrow with bottom of transom

AA A

BB B

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3848

32

Adjusting

1 Using a straight edge sight theunderside of the sensor relative tothe underside of the hull The sternof the sensor should be 1-3 mm

(116-18rdquo) below the bow of thesensor or parallel to the bottom ofthe hull

11 deg transom angleNO SHIM

12-18 deg transom angleNO SHIM

2 deg -10 deg transom

angle

19 deg -22 deg transom

angleshim withtaper up

shim withtaper down

parallelparallel parallel

slightangle

angletoo steep

anglereversed

YES NONO

YES YESYES

Sensor position and transom angle

Note Do not position the bow of thesensor lower than the stern becauseaeration will occur

2 To adjust the sensorrsquos angle relativeto the hull use the tapered plasticshim provided If the bracket hasbeen temporarily fastened to thetransom remove it Key the shim in

place on the back of the bracket2deg-10deg transom angle (steppedtransom and jet boats) Positionthe shim with the tapered end down19deg-22deg transom angle (smallaluminum and fiberglass boats) Position the shim with the taperedend up

3 If the bracket has been temporarilyfastened to the transom remove it

Apply a marine sealant to thethreads of the two 10 x 1-14rdquo self

tapping screws to prevent waterseeping into the transom Screw thebracket to the hull Do not tighten thescrews completely at this time

4 Repeat step 1 to ensure that theangle of the sensor is correctNote Do not position the sensorfarther into the water than necessaryto avoid increasing drag spray andwater noise and reducing boatspeed

5 Using the vertical adjustment spaceon the bracket slots slide the sensorup or down to provide a projection of3 mm (18rdquo) Tighten the screws

Cable cover

Cableclamp

50 mm (2)

Hull projection 3 mm (18)

Vertical adjustment and cable routing

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3948

33

Attaching the sensor to the bracket

1 If the retaining cover near the top ofthe bracket is closed open it bydepressing the latch and rotating thecover downward

Step 1 Step 2

Latch

Retainingcover

Pivotarm (2)

Slot (2)

Step 4

Step 3

Attaching the sensor to the bracket

2 Insert the sensorrsquos pivot arms intothe slots near the top of the bracket

3 Maintain pressure until the pivotarms click into place

4 Rotate the sensor downward until thebottom snaps into the bracket

5 Close the retaining cover to preventthe accidental release of the sensorwhen the boat is underway

Cable routing

Route the sensor cable over thetransom through a drain hole orthorough a new hole drilled in thetransom above the waterline

Never cut the cable or remote the

connector this will void the warranty Always wear safety goggles and a dustmask

1 If a hole must be drilled choose alocation well above the waterlineCheck for obstructions such as trimtabs pumps or wiring inside the hullMark the location with a pencil Drilla hole through the transom using a19 mm or 34rdquo bit (to accommodatethe connector)

2 Route the cable over or through thetransom

3 On the outside of the hull secure thecable against the transom using thecable clamps Position a cable clamp50 mm(2rdquo) above the bracket andmark the mounting hole with apencil

4 Position the second cable clamphalfway between the first clamp andthe cable hole Mark this mountinghole

5 If a hole has been drilled in thetransom open the appropriate slot inthe transom cable cover Position thecover over the cable where it entersthe hull Mark the two mounting

holes6 At each of the marked locations usea 3 mm or 18rdquo bit to drill a hole 10mm (38rdquo) deep The prevent drillingtoo deeply wrap masking tapearound the bit 10 mm (38rdquo) from thepoint

7 Apply marine sealant to the threadsof the 6 x 12rdquo self-tapping screw toprevent water from seeping into the

transom If you have drilled a holethrough the transom apply marinesealant to the space around thecable where it passes through thetransom

8 Position the two cable clamps andfasten them in place If used pushthe cable cover over the cable andscrew it in place

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4048

34

9 Route the cable to the instrumentbeing careful not to tear the cable

jacket when passing it though thebulkhead(s) and other parts of theboat To reduce electricalinterference separate the sensorcable from other electrical wiring andldquonoiserdquo sources Coil any excesscable and secure it in place withzip-ties to prevent damage

46 Optional WaterTemperatureSpeedSensor

Water temperaturespeed sensorST-02MSB and ST-02PSB which aredesigned for thru-hull mounting areoptionally available Install them asshown below

Mounting considerations

Choose a suitable mounting locationconsidering the followingbull Choose a place free from vibrationbull Choose a mid-boat flat position The

sensor does not have to be installedperfectly perpendicular The sensormust not be damaged in dry-dockingoperation

bull Choose a place apart from equipmentgenerating heat

bull Choose a place in the forwarddirection viewing from the drain holeto allow for circulation of coolingwater

1 Dry-dock the boat2 Make a hole of approx 51 mm

diameter in the mounting location3 Unfasten locknut and remove the

sensor section4 Apply high-grade sealant to the

flange of the sensor5 Pass the sensor casing through thehole

6 Face the notch on the sensor towardboatrsquos bow and tighten the flange

7 Set the sensor section to the sensorcasing and tighten the locknut

8 Launch the boat and check for waterleakage around the sensor

Locknut

Face notchtoward bow

Flange Nut

Coat withsilicone sealant Brim

φ 77

51

123

Water temperaturespeed sensor

ST-02MSB ST-02PSB

47 Wiring

Connect the LS-4100 powerdata cableassy MJ-A7SPF0005-020 (2 msupplied) to the POWER and thetransducer cable to the XDR connectorRefer to the interconnection diagram toconnect cables Leave slack in cables tofacilitate checking and maintenance

Note The fuse holder contains a springwhich fixes the fuse To preventdetachment of the spring which wouldcause loss of power tie the line asshown below

+ line (red)

Fuse holder

Cable tie How to fix fuse holder

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4148

35

Establishing the ground

The ground wire (125 sq or more localsupply) should be as short as possible

The signal line ground is isolated from

the chassis ground however the powerline is not insulated Therefore whenconnecting eternal equipment havingpositive ground do not ground thesignal line to the chassis If excessivenoise shows on the screen the groundmay be inadequate In this case attacha steel plate measuring 20 cm by 30 cmon the outside of the hull to provide aground point Connect the ground wire

there Use a ldquoclosedrdquo type lug ( ) tomake the connection at the display unitDo not use an ldquoopenrdquo type lug ( )

Optional equipment

POWER connector

The power supply port is commonlyused for connection of externalequipment such as a GPS receiver orwind indicator Use the powerdatacable MJ-A7SPF0005-020 (supplied) forconnection referring the figure shown inthe right column

Connector Color Remarks

1 TD-A WHT2 TD-B BLU

IEC-61162-1NMEA0183

3 RD-A YEL

4 RD-B GRN

IEC-61162-1

NMEA01835 + RED

6 - BLKPower input12 VDC

7 FG

Water tempspeed sensor

Connect the optional water tempspeedsensor to the XDR connector with theoptional converter connector (Type02S4147) as shown below

Tape connectors withvulcaninzing tapeand then vinyl tapeto waterproof themBind tape ends withcable ties to preventtape from unraveling

Connect to XDR portat rear of display unit

MJ-A10SPF

MJ-A10SRMDMJ-A6SRMD

Fromtransducer

Fromsensor

Connection of converterconnector 02S4147

48 IEC 61162-1 DataSentences

The tables below show the datasentences which can be input to andoutput from the LS-4100 Thetransmission speed for both input andoutput is 4800 bps Data is output attwo-second intervals

Input data sentences

Sentence Meaning

BWC Bearing and distance towaypoint

GGA Global positioning system(GPS) fix data

GLL Geographic position -latitudelongitude

HDG Heading deviation and variationHDT Heading true

MDA Atmospheric pressure

MTW Water temperature

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4248

36

Input data sentences (conrsquot)

Sentence MeaningMWV Wind speed and

angleRMA Recommended

minimum specificLORAN-C dataRMB Recommended

minimum navigationinformation

RMC Recommendedminimum specificGPSTRANSIT data

VHW Water speed andheading

VTG Course over groundand ground speedXTE Cross track error

Output data sentences

Sentence MeaningDBT (Ver 15) Depth below

transducerDPT (Ver 20 Ver30)

Depth

MTW Water temperatureRMB (Ver 20) Recommended

minimumnavigationinformation

VHW Water speed andheading

TLL Target positionoutput by [MARK]key

= Available with connection of optionalsensorsnavaid

49 Installation MenuThe installation menu mainly containsitems which are set at installation

1 Turn on the power while pressing the[MENUESC] key Continue pressing

the [MENUESC] key until theInstallation menu appears

SIMULATION On

TEST LCD PATTERN MEMORY CLEAR

NMEA PORT InOutNMEA MIX OffGPS WAAS Off

SET BOTTOM LEVEL

Installation Menu

= Setting cannot be changed whenNMEA PORT setting is InIn

Installation menu

SIMULATION The simulation modeprovides without connection of thetransducer simulated operation of theequipment using internally generatedechoes All controls are operative Themessage ldquoSIMrdquo appears at the top rightcorner on the screen when thesimulation mode is active

1 At the installation menu press toopen the simulation mode optionswindow

2 Press to choose ldquoOnrdquo to turn onthe simulation mode

3 Press the [POWERBRILL] keyabout three seconds to turn off thepower

4 Press the [POWERBRILL] key toturn on the power ldquoSIMrdquo appears atthe top right corner of the display

5 To turn off the simulation modeselect Off at step 2

NMEA po r t se tup(NMEA PO RT NMEA M IX)

The POWER port can function as aninput port or inputoutput port Changethe setting to ldquoInInrdquo when connectingGP-310B320B and a wind sensor

When connecting the GP-310B320Band a wind sensor first turn on ldquoGPS

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4348

37

WAASrdquo (in the Installation menu) andthen select ldquoInInrdquo as the NMEA portsetting

1 Turn on the power while pressingand holding down the [MENUESC]key Continue pressing the[MENUESC] key until theInstallation menu appears

2 Choose NMEA PORT and thenpress to display the NMEA portoptions window

3 Use or to choose InOut orInIn as appropriate

InOut Input and Output (default

setting)InIn Input only (Available withconnection of the GP-310B320Band a wind sensor)

4 Press choose NMEA MIX andthen press to display the NMEAMIX options window

5 Use or to choose Off or OnChoose On to output input data

Off Outputs the data sentences ofLS-4100 only

On Outputs the data sentences ofLS-4100 and sentences which areinput from other equipment

6 To restore normal operation turn offthe power and then turn it on again

GPS WAAS Chooses how to use theWAAS signal when connecting with a

WAAS receiver for example GP-320B

Note WAAS is currently in thedevelopmental phase During thedevelopmental phase the reliability andavailability of the WAAS signal cannotbe guaranteed Therefore any positiondata should be verified against othersources to confirm reliability

1 Display the Installation menu2 Choose GPS WAAS and then press

to open the GPS WAAS options

window

Off

WAAS options window3 Press or to choose ldquoWAAS-02rdquo

(test signal) When the systembecomes operational (in 2003) setto ldquo00rdquo (regular WAAS signal)

4 Turn off the power

BOTTOM LEVEL If the depthindication is unstable in automaticoperation or the bottom echo cannot bedisplayed in the darkest gray tone byadjusting the gain controls in manualoperation you may adjust the bottomecho level detection circuit for both 50kHz and 200 kHz to stabilize theindication Generally lower the bottomlevel for inner hull installation where thereceive level is too low If the bottomlevel is too low it may be difficult todiscriminate fish from the bottomresulting in unstable depth indication

And if the bottom level is too high thedepth indication may not appear

1 At the installation menu press tochoose SET BOTTOM LEVEL andthen press Several seconds laterthe following display appears

Bottom level +0 (200k -100 - +100 ) +0 ( 50k -100 - +100 )

Bottom level display

2 While observing the picture use or to set 200 kHz or to set50 kHz Set up for optimum picture

3 To restore normal operation turn offthe power and then it on again

Note The mode must be other thanldquoNAV DATArdquo to show the bottom leveldisplay

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4448

SP - 1 E2371S01C

SPECIFICATIONS OF ECHO SOUNDER LS-4100

1 GENERAL11 TX Frequency 50 kHz or 200 kHz 50200 kHz dual transmitting selectable12 Transmit Method Single or dual transmitting

13 Output Power 300 Wrms14 TX Rate Max 500 pulsemin15 Pulse-length 01 to 08 ms

2 DISPLAY UNIT21 Display system 5-inch monochrome LCD 76 mm (W) x 100 mm (H) 240 x 320 dots22 Display Mode Single frequency (highlow freq) Dual-frequency Zoom Nav data-12

Marker zoom Bottom zoom Bottom-lock23 Display Range

Range SettingRange

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

Display

rangeMeter 5 10 20 40 80 150 200 300 2-500

Feet 15 30 60 120 200 400 600 1000 7-1500

Fathoms 3 5 10 20 40 80 100 150 1-250

PassiBraza 3 5 10 30 50 100 150 200 1-300

24 Range Shift 0-500 m 0-1500 ft 0-250 fa 0-300 pb25 Expansion Range Bottom-lock expansion 3 to 10 m

Sectional expansion 2 to 50 m26 Display Advance Speed 8 steps (LinesTX Freeze 1161814121121 41)

3 INTERFACE31 Input data sentences IEC61162-1NMEA0183 Ver 152030

GGA RMA RMB RMC BWC GLL HDT HDG VTG VHW MTWMWV MDA XTE

32 Output data sentences IEC61162-1NMEA0183 Ver 152030 interval 2 sMTW VHW DBT DPT RMB TLL by key operating External data required

4 POWER SUPPLY41 Display Unit 12 VDC 05 A

5 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITION51 Ambient Temperature Display unit -15degC to +55degC52 Relative Humidity 93 or less at 40degC53 Waterproof IPX5

6 COATING COLOR61 Display Unit N30

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4548

M a r

4

0 3

D-1

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4648

Mar 4 03

Mar 4 03

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4748

M a r

3

0 3

S-1

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4848

FURUNO Authorized DistributorDealer FURUNO Authorized DistributorDealer

9-52 Ashihara-cho9-52 Ashihara-choNishinomiya 662-8580 JAPANNishinomiya 662-8580 JAPAN

Telephone Telephone 0798-65-21110798-65-2111FaxFax 0798-65-42000798-65-4200

FIRST EDITION FIRST EDITION MARMAR 20032003Printed in JapanPrinted in Japan All rights reserved All rights reserved

B1B1 SEPSEP 09 200509 2005

Pub NoPub No OME-23710OME-23710 00014698000000146980000001469800000014698000(( DAMIDAMI )) LS-4100LS-4100

0 0 0 1 4 6 9 8 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 4 6 9 8 0 0 0

Page 7: OME23710B_1_LS4100

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 748

1

1 OPERATION

11 Control Description

Cursor PadSelects menu itemsshifts VRM

Openscloses menuescapes from current

operation

Selects display mode

Adjusts gain

Selects basic display range

Long press Turns power onoffMomentary press Adjusts display contrast and brilliance

Outputs LL positionto external equipmentregisters selected positionas waypoint

POWER

BRILL

MARK

GAIN

RANGE

ESCMENU

MODE

LS-4100

ECHO SOUNDER

Display unit

How to remove the hard cover

Place your thumbs at the center of thecover and then lift the cover whilepressing it with your thumbs

12 Power OnOffPress the [POWERBRILL] key more

than one second to turn on the powerThe unit beeps the startup screenappears and then the equipmentchecks the ROM and RAM for properoperation and displays program number(If ldquoNGrdquo (No Good) appears try to pressany key except the [POWERBRILL] keyto start operation However theequipment may not work properlyContact your dealer) You may

press any key after the completion ofthe equipment check to start operationsooner

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 848

2

Program version no

ROM OK RAM OK Program No 0252318-01

5 ECHO SOUNDER

FURUNO ELECTRIC CO LTD

Start-up screen

To turn off the power press and holddown the [POWERBRILL] key until thescreen goes blank The time remaining

until power is turned off is counted downon the screen

Note The example screens shown inthis manual may not match the screensyou see on your display The screenyou see depends on your systemconfiguration and equipment settings

13 Adjusting DisplayContrast Brilliance

1 Press the [POWERBRILL] keymomentarily to show thebrilliancecontrast adjustmentwindow

CONTST 4 Min Max

BRILLMin Max

4

Brilliancecontrast adjustment window

2 For contrast press the[POWERBRILL] key to adjustcontrast cyclically (You may also use or on the Cursor Pad to adjustcontrast) (Adjustable range 0 to 9)

3 To adjust brilliance use or $ (Adjustable range 0 to 4)

4 Press the [MENUESC] key to closethe brilliancecontrast adjustmentwindow

Note 1 When the power is reappliedafter turning off the equipment withminimum brilliance minimum brilliancewill be set after the equipment goesthrough its initial start up (The start upscreen appears with the maximumbrilliance) Adjust the brilliance asnecessary

Note 2 Setting windows other thanthose on menus are erased if there isno operation within about sevenseconds

14 Choosing a DisplayFrequency

Seven displays are available singlefrequency (50 or 200 kHz) dualfrequency marker-zoom bottom-zoombottom-lock and nav data (twodisplays)

1 Press the [MODE] key to show themode selection window

MODE

SINGLE FREQDUAL FREQMARKER ZOOMBOTTOM ZOOMBOTTOM LOCKNAV DATA-1NAV DATA-250kHz 200kHz

Mode selection window

2 Press the [MODE] key again withinseven seconds to choose a modeYou may also choose a mode with or $

3 For modes other than DUAL FREQchoose frequency Press for 50kHz or for 200 kHz

4 Press the [MENUESC] key to closethe window

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 948

3

Single frequency display

50 kHz

The sounder uses ultrasonic signals todetect bottom conditions The lower thefrequency of the signal the wider thedetection area Therefore the 50 kHzfrequency is useful for general detectionand judging bottom condition

200 kHz

The higher the frequency of theultrasonic signal the better theresolution For this reason the 200 kHzfrequency is ideal for detailed

observation of fish schools

50 kHz

200 kHz

Frequency and coverage area

466

FishSchool

Bottom

0

20

40

50k 1100

Level Bar

Depth

Frequency

Picture Advance Speed

Range Scale

Mode(AUTO or MANUAL)

407 degF162kt Nav Display

MinuteMarker(Shows time

Each baris 30 sec) TransmissionLine

60

Typical 50 kHz display

Dual frequency display

The 50 kHz picture appears on the leftthe 200 kHz picture on the right Thisdisplay is useful for comparing the samepicture with two different transmitting

frequencies

50 kHz 200 kHzpicture picture

496

0050200 11

0

20

40

60

80

20

40

60

80 Dual frequency display

Marker-zoom display

This mode expands chosen area of thenormal picture to full vertical size of thescreen on the left-half window You mayspecify the portion to expand byoperating the VRM (Variable RangeMarker) which you can shift with or$ The area between the VRM andzoom range marker is expanded

Zoomedfishschool

Single frequency display

Variable rangemarker

This sectionis zoomed

Zoom marker

Marker-zoom display

170

250

0

Fishschool

0

40

10

20

30

0050k 11

21

20

19

18

17

22

Marker-zoom display

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 1048

4

Bottom-zoom display

This mode expands bottom and bottomfish in the range width set with ZOOMRANGE of the SYSTEM menu Thismode is useful for determining bottom

contour When the bottom depthincreases the display shift to keep thebottom echo at the lower part of thescreen

0

Bottom-zoom display

298

Bottom

0

40

10

20

30

32

31

30

29

28

27

Switched withdepth

Singlefrequencydisplay

Zoommarker

0050k 11

Bottom-zoom display

Bottom-lock display

The bottom-lock display provides anormal picture on the right half of thescreen and a 15 feet (5 meter) widelayer in contact with the bottom isexpanded onto the left half of the screenThis mode is useful for detecting bottomfish = Operator selectable

Bottom-lock display

Zoommarker

Zoomedfish

This sectionis zoomed

217

0

Singlefrequencydisplay

Fishschool

0

40

Bottom displayed flat

10

20

30

0

1

2

3

4

550k 11

Bottom-lock display

Nav data displays

The nav data displays appear on the leftof the screen Data other than depthrequires appropriate sensor

You can display between two and fouritems in a nav data display and choosethe item and order to display them Seeparagraph 116 to choose the items todisplay ldquoNAV DATA-1rdquo and ldquoNAVDATA-2rdquo in paragraph 21 to choose thenumber of items to display

Depth

694 m

Trip meter

100 nm

Odometer

56 nm

NAV DATA-1 display

NAV DATA-2 display

Temperature

655 deg F

172

1 05 0 05 1

025 nm

XTE

Speed

kt

20

50

40

60

30

10

0

Sample NAV DATA displays(Default setting)

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 1148

5

15 Menu OperatingProcedure

The LS-4100 has three menus MainSystem and Installation Below is the

basic menu operating procedure1 Press the [MENUESC] key to openthe main menu Page 1 or Page 2 ofthe main menu appears dependingon the page last used

[MENU] Exit

(12)

Note SHIFT and CLUTTER arenot available in the auto mode

AUTO MODE Off SHIFT 0ftPIC ADVANCE 11NOISE LIMIT Off CLUTTER Off SIGNAL LEVEL Off

A-SCOPE Off HUE DayWHITE LINE Off DEEP GAIN Low

Pageno

Main menu page 1

2 Use or $ to select an item Toview page 2 of the main menu press$ until showing the display below

[MENU] Exit

(22)

GOTO WPT Off WAYPOINT LIST

TRIP RESET

GAIN ADJ 200 +0GAIN ADJ 50 +0DRAFT 00ft

ALARM MENUSYSTEM MENU

Main menu page 2

3 Press to show selected itemrsquosoptions window The example shownat the top of the right column is theoptions window for AUTO MODE

Off CruisingFishing

Auto mode options window

4 Use or $ to choose option or setnumeric value

5 Press the [MENUESC] key to closethe menu or press to continuemenu operation

16 Automatic OperationHow automatic operation works

The automatic function automatically

chooses the proper gain range scaleand clutter It works as followsbull The range changes automatically to

display the bottom echo on thescreen

bull The gain is automatically adjusted todisplay the bottom echo in the darkesttone

bull Clutter (on the menu) whichsuppresses low-level noise isautomatically adjusted

Choosing automatic operation

The automatic mode provides twochoices of modes cruising and fishing1 Press the [MENUESC] key to open

the main menu2 Press to choose AUTO MODE

from page 1 of the menu3 Press to open the mode options

window4 Choose Cruising or Fishing as

appropriate

ldquoCruisingrdquo is for tracking the bottomldquoFishingrdquo is for searching fish schoolsSince ldquoCruisingrdquo uses a higher clutterrejection setting than fishing it is notrecommended for fish detection -weak fish echoes may not bedisplayed ldquoFishingrdquo clearly displaysweaker echoes

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 1248

6

5 Press the [MENUESC] key to closethe menu

The auto mode in use is shown as(Auto-Fishing) or

(Auto-Cruising) at the top left corner onthe screen

Note When in the auto mode SHIFTand CLUTTER cannot be adjustedmanually

Range offset

To display the bottom tail in detail in theautomatic mode offset the range as

below1 Press the [+] or [-] key of the

[RANGE] key

+0 ft

AUTO RANGE OFFSET

Auto range offset window

2 Press the [+] or [-] key of the[RANGE] key again to choose offsetdesired (range -100 to +300 ft)Note that if the basic range ischanged the offset is returned to ldquo0rdquo

3 Press the [MENUESC] key to finish

Gain offset

Gain offset lets you override automaticgain adjustment1 Press the [GAIN] key

Min Max 0

AUTO GAIN OFFSET

Auto gain offset window

2 Press or key to offset gain(setting range ndash5 to +5) The gainselected is shown at the top of thescreen asG (Gain) + (or -) XX (offset value)

3 Press the [MENUESC] key to finish

17 Manual OperationChoosing the manual mode

1 Press the [MENUESC] key to openthe main menu

2 Press to choose AUTO MODEfrom page 1 of the menu3 Press to show the window4 Choose Off with 5 Press the [MENUESC] key to close

the menu appears at the topleft corner on the screen

Choosing range

The basic range and range shiftingfunctions used together give you themeans to choose the depth you can seeon the screen The basic range can bethought of as providing a ldquowindowrdquo intothe water column and range shifting asmoving the ldquowindowrdquo to the desireddepth

Choosing basic range

The basic range may be chosen withthe [RANGE] key from the eight rangesshown in the table shown below (ldquoPBrdquoin the table means PassiBraza) Thesetting range can be arranged throughthe SYSTEM menu

Default ranges

Basic RangeUnit1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

meters 5 10 20 40 80 150 200 300

feet 15 30 60 120 200 400 600 1000

fathoms 3 5 10 20 40 80 100 150

hiro 4 8 15 30 50 100 150 200

PB 3 5 10 30 50 100 150 200

Japanese unit of depth measurement1 Press the [+] or [-] key of the

[RANGE] key and the display shouldnow look something like the one onat the top of the next page

2 Press the [+] or [-] key of the[RANGE] key again to choose abasic range

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 1348

7

1000ft 600ft 400ft 200ft 120ft 60ft 30ft 15ft

Basic ranges (default)3 Press the [MENUESC] key to close

the window

Shifting the range

The basic range may be shifted up ordown in the manual mode as follows

Display

Window can beshifted up anddown to selectthe depth

Range and display shift concept

1 Press the [MENUESC] key to openthe main menu

2 Choose SHIFT from page 1 of themenu

3 Press to open the shift optionswindow

0ft

Shift window

4 Use or $ to choose amount ofshift desired

5 Press the [MENUESC] key to closethe window

Note The picture may not be displayedif the amount of shift is greater thanactual depth

Adjusting the gain

The [GAIN] key adjusts the sensitivity ofthe receiver Generally use a highergain setting for greater depths and alower setting for shallower waters

Use the proper gain setting

Incorrect gain may produce wrong depthindication possibly resulting in a dangeroussituation

UTION

Gain too high Gain proper Gain too low Examples of proper and improper gain

1 Press the [GAIN] key and the displayshown below appears

Min Max

50k 3

200k 2

GAIN

Gain adjustment window

2 When using the dual frequencydisplay press or $ to choosefrequency

3 Press the [GAIN] key to set (Youmay also use or ) Adjust so thata slight amount of noise remains onthe screen

4 Press the [MENUESC] key to closethe gain adjustment window

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 1448

8

18 Measuring DepthThe VRM (Variable Range Marker)functions to measure the depth to fishschools etc1 Press or $ to place the VRM

on the object which you wish tomeasure range

2 Read the VRM depth just abovethe VRM

0

20

40

60

80496

398

VRM

VRM depth

50k 11

How to measure depth with the VRM

19 Choosing PictureAdvance Speed

The picture advance speed determineshow quickly the vertical scan lines runacross the screen When choosing apicture advance speed keep in mindthat a fast advance speed will expandthe size of the fish school horizontallyon the screen and a slow advancespeed will contract it Note that thepicture is not refreshed when pictureadvancement is stopped Thereforeuse caution when steering the vesselunder this condition

Fast Slow Picture and picture advancement speed

1 Press the [MENUESC] key to openthe main menu

2 Choose PIC ADVANCE from page 1of the menu

3 Press to show the optionswindow

Stop116 18 14 12 11 21 41

(

)

Fast

Slow

Picture advance options window

4 Use or $ to choose pictureadvance speed desired Thefractions in the options windowdenote the number of scan linesproduced per transmission Forexample 18 means one scan line isproduced every 8 transmissionsldquoStoprdquo freezes the display and it isconvenient for taking a photo

The picture is not refreshed whenpicture advancement is stopped

Maneuvering the vessel in this conditionmay result in a dangerous situation

UTION

5 Press the [MENUESC] key to closethe menu

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 1548

9

110 SuppressingInterference

Interference from other acousticequipment operating nearby or other

electronic equipment on your boat mayshow itself on the display as shown inthe figure belowTo suppress interference do thefollowing1 Press the [MENUESC] key to open

the main menu2 Use or $ to choose NOISE LIMIT

from page 1 of the menu3 Press to show the options

window4 Use or $ to choose the degree ofsuppression desired Off LowMedium or High (highest)

5 Press the [MENUESC] key to closethe menu

Interference fromother sounder

Electrical interference

Forms of interference

Turn the noise limiter off when nointerference exists otherwise weakechoes may be missed

111 Suppressing LowLevel Noise

Low intensity ldquospecklesrdquo may appearover most of screen This is mainly due

to sediment in the water or noise Thesecan be suppressed by adjustingCLUTTER on the menu When theautomatic mode is on clutter isautomatically rejected To suppress lowlevel noise in manual sounder operationdo the following1 Press the [MENUESC] key to open

the main menu2 Use or $ to choose CLUTTER

from page 1 of the menu3 Press to show the optionswindow

4 Use or $ to choose the degree ofsuppression desired 1 2 3 4 5 or6 The higher the number the greaterthe suppression

5 Press the [MENUESC] key to closethe menu

To turn off low-level noisesuppression choose Off at step 4 andthen press the [MENUESC] key

Clutter appearance

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 1648

10

112 Erasing WeakEchoes

Sediment in the water or reflectionsfrom plankton may be painted on the

display in low intensity tones

Weakechoes

Appearance of weak echoes

These weak echoes may be erased asfollows1 Press the [MENUESC] key to open

the main menu2 Use or $ to choose SIGNAL

LEVEL from page 1 of the menu3 Press to show the options

window4 Use or $ to choose the degree of

suppression desired Off Low orHigh (highest)

5 Press the [MENUESC] key to closethe menu

To turn off the signal level function choose Off at step 4 and then pressthe [MENUESC] key

113 A-scope DisplayThis display shows echoes at eachtransmission with amplitudes and toneproportional to their intensities on theright 14 of the screen It is useful forestimating the kind of fish school andbottom composition

Note In the dual frequency display the A-scope display is only available withthe high frequency display

323

10

20

30

40

0

A-scope display

Single frequency display

Strong

reflection(bottom)

Weakreflection(fish or noise)

50k 11

Strongreflection(fish)

A-scope display

1 Press the [MENUESC] key to openthe main menu

2 Press or $ to choose A-SCOPEfrom page 1 of the menu

3 Press to show the optionswindow

4 Press

or$

to choose the A-scope presentation type desiredNormal Display shows echoes ateach transmission with amplitudesand tone proportional to theirintensitiesPeak Peak-hold amplitude picture

5 Press the [MENUESC] key to closethe menu

To turn off the A-scope displaychoose Off at step 4 and then press the[MENUESC] key

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 1748

11

114 AlarmsAlarm description

The LS-4100 has six conditions whichgenerate both audio and visual alarms

bottom alarm normal fish alarm bottomlock fish alarm water temperature alarmarrival alarm and speed alarm (Thewater temperature arrival and speedalarms require appropriate sensors)

Bottom alarm The bottom alarm alertsyou when the bottom is within the alarmrange set To activate the bottom alarmthe depth must be displayed

Fish (normal) alarm The fish (normal)alarm tells you when fish are within thepreset alarm range

Fish (bottom lock) alarm The fish(bottom lock) alarm available with thebottom-lock mode sounds when fishare within a certain distance from thebottom Note that the bottom zoom

display must be turned on to use thisalarm

Water temperature alarm The watertemperature alarm alerts when thewater temperature is within (Insidealarm) the alarm range set orunderover (outside alarm) the rangeset

Speed alarm The speed alarm alertsyou when the speed is within (Insidealarm) or underover (Outside alarm)the preset speed

Arrival alarm The arrival alarm alertswhen you are near a waypoint by thedistance set

Activating an alarm

1 Press the [MENUESC] key2 Press or $ to choose ALARM

MENU from page 2 on the menu3 Press the to show the ALARM

menu

ALARM

(12)

[MENU] Exit

ALARM

(22)

[MENU] Exit

BOTTOM On FROM 5ft

RANGE 10ftFISH(Normal) On

FROM 5ft RANGE 10ftFISH(BL) On

FROM 8ft RANGE 10ftFISH LEVEL Medium

TEMPERATURE Inside FROM 724 deg F RANGE 10 deg F

SPEED Off FROM 00kt

RANGE 10kt

ARRIVAL ALRM Off RANGE 0 01 m

Pageno

Gray characters mean alarm is inactive Alarm menu

4 Use or $ to choose an alarm asappropriate

5 Press to show the options menu

Off On

Off InsideOutside

Temp Speed Alarm Types

Fish ArrivalBottom AlarmOnOff

Alarm options6 Use or $ to choose alarm type

Off Alarm off On Alarm onInside Alarm generated whenspeed (or water temperature) iswithin the range setOutside Alarm generated whenspeed (or water temperature) isoutside the range set

7 Press to close the windowFor ARRIVAL ALARM setting skip tostep 12

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 1848

12

8 Press $ to choose FROM9 Press to show the options menu

0ft

Depth

632 deg F

Temperature

10 kt

Speed Depth temperature speed setting

window10 Use or $ to set starting depth

temperature or speed as appropriateFor FISH (BL) the starting depth isthe range from the bottom

11 Press to close the window12 Press $ to choose RANGE13 Press to show the options menu14 Use or $ to set alarm range15 For the bottom alarm temperature

alarm speed alarm or arrivalalarm press the [MENUESC] key tofinish For a fish alarm press toclose the window and then go tostep 16

16 Press $ to choose FISH LEVEL17 Press to show the options menu

Weak

MediumStrong Fish level options

18 Use or $ to choose the echostrength level which will trigger a fishalarm

Weak Weak echoes (weakest toneon level bar)Medium Medium strength echoes

(middle tone on level bar)Strong Strong echoes (darkest toneon level bar)

19 Press the [MENUESC] key twice toclose the menu

Alarm range marker Bottom alarm Fish alarm (normal) Right Fish alarm (bottomlock) Left

Alarm icon

Alarm rangeStartingpoint

Bottom alarm Fish alarm (normal) Fish alarm (BL)

Temperature alarm (deg

C ordeg

F shown) Speed alarm Arrival alarm

Alarm icon (Appropriate icon appears to showwhich alarm has been violated)

How the alarm works

Note To disable an alarm choose Offat step 5 in the above procedure

Silencing the buzzer

The buzzer sounds and the appropriatealarm icon appears and flashes whenan alarm is violated You can silence thebuzzer by pressing any key Howeverthe buzzer will sound whenever thealarm setting is violated

Note The audio and visual alarms arereleased against the last-violated alarmwhen multiple alarms are active

115 WaypointsWaypoints may be used tobull Record the position of an important

echo as waypoint 12 points may beregistered

bull Output a waypoint position to a plotterto mark position on its screen

bull Find range bearing and time-to-go toa location (waypoint)

Note Requires latitude and longitudeposition from a navigator

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 1948

13

Registering a waypoint on thescreen

1 Press the [MARK] key The cursorappears along with waypoint entryinstructions To enter a waypoint tothe current own shiprsquos position go tostep 3Note If there is no position data themessage ldquoNo position datardquo appearsCheck the navigator

50k

496

1100

20

40

60

80

0

Cursor

WAYPOINT ENTRY

( Move) Cursor [MARK] Enter [MENU] Cancel

50 kHz display

2 Press the cursor pad to set thecursor where desired Pictureadvancement is stopped until step 3is completed and the instructionwindow is integrated into the navdisplay

3 Press the [MARK] key again WhenTLL or FURUNO-TLL is selected atTLL OUTPUT on the System menuthe latitude and longitude position atthe cursor is output to the navigator

A vertical line marks location Furtherthe display shows the waypointname (next sequential number) andposition of the location selected atstep 2

WAYPOINTName FREQLat 34 deg 22796NLon 136 deg 07264E

05

[MENU] Exit

rase

Waypoint data display

Note If you attempt to enter 13thwaypoint the message ldquoMemoryfullrdquo appears In this case erase anunwanted waypoint to enable entry

4 To save the waypoint under thename shown go to step 8 or go tostep 5 to change its name

5 Press to open the waypoint nameentry window

WAYPOINTName FREQLat 34 deg 22796NLon 136 deg 07264E

05

[MENU] Exit

01------ ENT

rase

Waypoint window name entry6 Use or to set character $ or

to shift cursor The name mayconsist of 10 alphanumericcharactersNote Character order is 0 1hellip9 - A BhellipZ _ 0hellip

7 Press to choose ENT 8 Press the [MENUESC] key to

register the waypoint

Registering waypoint by LL

1 Press the [MENUESC] key to openthe main menu

2 Use or to choose WAYPOINTLIST from page 2 of the menu

3 Press

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 2048

14

WAYPOINT LIST

01 0102 0303------------------------------------------------------

[MENU] Exit

Waypoint list4 Press or to choose an empty

waypoint and press Press again

NEW WAYPOINTName FREQLat 34 deg 22796NLon 136 deg 07264E

05

[MENU] Exit

04------ ENT

rase

New waypoint window name entry

5 Use or to set character $ or to shift cursor

6 Press to select ENT 7 Enter latitude and longitude similar

to how you entered waypoint name8 Press the [MENUESC] key to

register the waypoint

Editing waypoints Press the [MENUESC] key to open

the main menu

2 Use or to choose WAYPOINTLIST from page 2 of the menu

3 Press to open the waypoints list4 Use or to choose a waypoint

and press 5 Use or to choose the item to

edit (name latitude or longitude)6 Press to open the data entry

window7 Use or to set character $ or

to choose location8 Press to choose ENT 9 Press the [MENUESC] key

Erasing waypoints Press the [MENUESC] key2 Use or to choose WAYPOINT

LIST from page 2 of the menu3 Press to open the waypoints list

4 Use or to choose the waypointto erase and then press Note You cannot erase a waypointwhich is selected as ldquoGOTO WPTrdquo

5 Press to choose ldquoEraserdquo6 Press to open the options window7 Press to select YES to erase the

waypoint The waypoint list appearswith the erased waypoint blank

8 Press the [MENUESC] key twice toclose the menu

Setting destination waypoint

Set a destination waypoint to find rangebearing and time-to-go to that point Youcan see range and bearing to awaypoint Time-to-go is shown on theTime to Go digital display

Press the [MENUESC] key to openthe main menu

2 Use or to choose GOTO WPTfrom page 2 of the menu

3 Press to open the waypoints list

Off01020304----------------------------------------------------------------

Waypoint list

4 Use or to choose a waypoint5 Press the [MENUESC] key to close

the menu

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 2148

15

116 Setting Up Nav DataDisplays

The user may arrange the nav datadisplays as desired

1 Use the [MODE] key to show theNAV DATA-1 or 2 display whicheveryou want to set up

2 Press the [MENUESC] key to closethe mode selection window

3 Press the cursor pad to display theNAV DATA SETUP window

NAV DATA SETUP

Window Selection Data Selection

[MENU] Exit

NAV DATA SETUP window

4 Use or to choose a datadisplay window desired Adashed-line rectangle circumscribesyour selection

5 Use

or$

to choose item todisplay See the below for adescription of the displays

(9)

(1)

(2)

(3)

(4)(5)

(6)(7)(8)

Two-data

display

Three-data

display

Four-data

displayItems displayable in (1) - (3) depth positioncourse range and bearing trip distanceodometer water temperature headingair pressure time-to-go to destination waypointXTE speed wind speed and directiondestination waypoint data compassItems displayable in (4) - (9) depth positionspeed course range and bearing trip distanceodometer water temperature headingair pressure time-to-go to destination waypointXTE wind speed wind direction

= Graphic display

Nav data window and item displayable6 Press the [MENUESC] key to finish

Note You can choose the number ofitems to show in a nav data display withNAV DATA-1 and NAV DATA-2 on theSystem menu

GRAPHIC DISPLAYS

1 05 0 05 1

Wpt 03Rng 019nm Brg 321 deg XTE 000nm Cse 333 deg

DESTINATION WAYPOINT GRAPHIC

XTEscale

BearingCourseDestinationwaypointdirection

DestinationwaypointdataNameRangeXTE

Wind APP

WIND GRAPHIC

60

120

90

030

150180

120

150

90

60

30

120 deg

Speed 103 ms

COMPASS GRAPHIC

SPEED GRAPHIC

172

Speed

20

50

40

60

30

10

01 05 0 05 1

025 nm

XTE

XTE GRAPHIC

kt

Bearing todestinationwaypoint

Course

Brg30 deg

Cse90 deg

N

E

XTE scale

Speed-ometer

Nav data display-1

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 2248

16

DIGITAL DISPLAYS

Course

123 deg

COURSE

Depth

328 ft

DEPTH

Heading TRUEMAG

318 deg

HEADING

Odometer

56 nm

ODOMETER

Position GPS 3D

30 deg 00065N130 deg 00574E

POSITION

Temperature

698 degF

WATER TEMPERATURE

Trip meter

121 nm

TRIP DISTANCE

Time to Go

00 H30 M

TIME-TO-GO

1018 hpa

AIR PRESSURE

Air Pressure

Speed

193 kt

SPEED

Rng

121 nm

RANGE amp BEARING

Brg

140 deg

Wind Speed APP

80 ms

WIND SPEED

Wind Dir APP

138 deg

WIND DIRECTION

APP or TRUE depending on menu setting TRUE or MAG depending

on menu settingamp To destination waypoint

Note 1 Nav data is updated with somedelay

Note 2 When data is lost 120 sec thedisplay shows - - at the locationwhere data is lost

= GPS receiving status (Displays whenconnecting with GP-310B320B and InOutis selected at the Installation menu)NO FIX Position cannot be foundGPS 2D 2D (dimension) GPS position fixGPS 3D 3D GPS fixGPS W2D 2D WAAS position fixGPS W3D 3D WAAS position fix

NAV data display-2

117 Other Menu ItemsThis section describes the menu itemsnot previously mentioned

Page 1

HUE (Picture Color)

Two picture color arrangements areavailable Day and Night Day showsechoes on a white background Nightshows them on a black background

1 Press the [MENUESC] key todisplay the menu

2 Use or $ to choose HUE frompage 1 of the menu

3 Press to show the optionswindow

4 Use or $ to choose Day or Nightas appropriate

5 Press the [MENUESC] key to closethe menu

WHITE LINE

The white line feature displays theleading edge of the bottom echo in

white This is useful for discriminatingbottom fish near the bottom

1 Press the [MENUESC] key todisplay the main menu

2 Use or $ to choose WHITE LINEfrom page 1 of the menu

3 Press to show the optionswindow

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 2348

17

4 Use or to choose Off Tone orMesh as appropriate ldquoMeshrdquo paintsthe white line in darker tone thanldquoTonerdquo

5 Press the [MENUESC] key to closethe menu

526White Line OFF White Line ON (Mesh)

Fish schoolclearly shown

White line

0

20

40

60

80

050k 11

526

0

20

40

60

80

00 050k 11

How white line works

DEEP GAIN

ldquoDeep Gainrdquo compensates forpropagation attenuation of the ultrasonicwaves It does this by equalizing echopresentation so that fish schools of thesame size appear in the same density inboth shallow and deep waters Inaddition it reduces surface noise

Press the [MENUESC] key to openthe main menu

2 Use or to choose DEEP GAINfrom page of the menu

3 Press $ to show to the optionswindow

4 Choose Low Medium or High asappropriate High provides thegreatest degree of gain reductionagainst short range echoes

5 Press the [MENUESC] key to closethe menu

Page 2

TRIP RESET

This item resets trip distance to ldquo0rdquo

Press the [MENUESC] key to openthe main menu

2 Use or to choose TRIPRESET from page 2 of the menu

3 Press $ 4 Press to reset trip distance

Beeps are generated while the tripdistance is being reset

5 Press the [MENUESC] key to closethe menu

Note To reset the odometer to zeroclear the memory

GAIN ADJ 200 GAIN ADJ 50

If the gain is too high or too low or thegain for the low and high frequenciesappears unbalanced you cancompensate it as follows

Press the [MENUESC] key to openthe main menu

2 Use or to choose GAIN ADJ200 or GAIN ADJ 50 from page 2 ofthe menu

3 Press $ to show to the optionswindow

4 Use or to set the amount Thesetting range is ndash50 to +50

5 Press the [MENUESC] key to close

the menu

DRAFT

The default depth display shows thedistance from the transducer If youwould rather show the distance from thesea surface set your shiprsquos draft asfollows

Press the [MENUESC] key to openthe main menu

2 Use or to choose DRAFT frompage 2 of the menu

3 Press $ and then use or to setdraft The setting range is ndash 50 to+500 (meters feet)

4 Press the [MENUESC] key to closethe menu

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 2448

18

2 SYSTEM MENU

The System menu mainly consists ofitems which once set do not requirefrequent adjustment You may displaythis menu by choosing SYSTEM MENUat page 2 of the main menu andpressing

SYSTEM MENULANGUAGE English

DEPTH UNIT ftSPEED UNIT ktWIND UNIT msTEMP UNIT deg F

TEMP GRAPH OffNAV DATA-1 NAV DATA-2

WATER TYPE SaltKEY BEEP OnBATT VOLTAGE Off (13)

[MENU] Exit

SYSTEM MENU

(23)

NAV DISPLAY TempSpeedNMEA0183 Ver 20TLL OUTPUT OffBEARING TrueWIND SPDDIR ApparentTRIP SOURCE Own

TEMP SOURCE OwnSPEED SOURCE OwnTEMP CALIB +00 deg F ( 40)SPEED CALIB +0 ( 50)

Own speed Own temp 100 kt 162 deg F

[MENU] Exit

SYSTEM MENU

(33)

BASIC RANGE1 15 ft

RANGE2 30RANGE3 60RANGE4 120RANGE5 200RANGE6 400RANGE7 600RANGE8 1000 (7-1500)

ZOOM RANGE 15 ft (7-150)BL RANGE 15 ft (10-30)(Bottom Lock)

ZOOM MARKER On

[MENU] Exit

PAGE 3

PAGE 2

PAGE 1

Page no

System menus

21 System MenuPage 1

LANGUAGE The system language isavailable in English several Europeanlanguages and Japanese To changelanguage select language desired andpress the [MENUESC] key

DEPTH UNIT Choose unit of depthmeasurement from meters feet

fathoms passibraza and hiro(Japanese)

SPEED UNIT Choose unit of speedmeasurement from knots miles perhour and kilometers per hour Requiresspeed data

WIND UNIT Choose unit of wind speedmeasurement from ms kt kmh and

mph Requires wind speed data

TEMP UNIT Choose unit oftemperature measurement Celsius orFahrenheit Requires temperature data

TEMP GRAPH Turns the watertemperature display on or off Thetemperature scale range is 16deg (degF) inldquoNarrowrdquo 40deg (degF) in ldquoWiderdquo Requires

water temperature data

m526

0

20

40

60

80

00 050k 11

40

80

70

50

60

TemperatureScale

TemperatureGraph

638 deg F162kt

Water temperature display (wide degF)

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 2548

19

NAV DATA-1 -2 Choose the number ofnavigation data items to display on thenav data displays from two three orfour items Requires appropriate navdata

WATER TYPE Choose the water typewith which to use the LS-4100 fromSalt or Fresh

KEY BEEP Turn key beep on or off

BATT VOLTAGE Turn the batteryvoltage indication (appears at the topright corner on the screen) on or offWhen on it replaces the picture advancespeed indication

Page 2

NAV DISPLAY Choose the nav data todisplay in the nav data window at thetop left-hand corner You may choosefrom temperaturespeedlatitudelongitude range and bearingcourse over ground trip distance or

wind speed Requires appropriate navdata

407 deg F162kt

Nav window

NMEA0183 Choose NMEA version ofnavigator Ver 15 Ver 20 or Ver 30

TLL OUTPUT Enablesdisables outputof TLL (Target Latitude Longitude)position when the [MARK] key isoperated ldquoTLLrdquo outputs latitude andlongitude position ldquoFURUNO-TLLrdquoavailable with connection of navigatorthat can output FURUNO TLL outputslatitude and longitude watertemperature depth etc

BEARING Shiprsquos course and bearingto a waypoint may be displayed in trueor magnetic bearing Magnetic bearingis true bearing plus (or minus) earthrsquosmagnetic deviation Requires bearingdata

WIND SPDDIR Choose the windspeed and direction reference from trueand apparent Requires wind sensorApparen t The direction (in relation toshiprsquos bow) and speed of the wind as itappears to those on board relative tothe speed and direction of the boatcombination of the true wind and thewind caused by the boats movementTrue The speed and direction (inrelation to shiprsquos bow) of the wind felt ormeasured when stationary

TRIP SOURCE Choose speed sourcefor the trip distance indication Own(transducer with speed sensor orseparate speed sensor) or NMEA

TEMP SOURCE Choose source ofwater temperature input Off Own(transducer with water temperaturesensor or separate temperature sensor)or NMEA

SPEED SOURCE Choose source ofspeed input Off Own (transducer withspeed sensor or separate speedsensor) or NMEA Requires speed

data

TEMP CALIB If the water temperaturesensor-generated water temperatureindication is wrong you can correct ithere when ldquoOwnrdquo is selected astemperature source For example if thewater temperature indication is 2deghigher than actual water temperatureenter -2 The setting range is -40degF to

+40degF

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 2648

20

SPEED CALIB If the speedsensor-generated speed indication iswrong you can correct it here whenldquoOwnrdquo is selected as speed source Forexample if the speed indication is 10lower than actual speed enter +10 Thesetting range is ndash50 to +50

Page 3

BASIC RANGE 1 - BASIC RANGE 8 Set range of each of the eight basicranges (Selectable range 7 to 1500 ft)Note 1 All default basic ranges arerestored whenever the depth unit ischanged Therefore change the depth

unit before changing the basic rangesNote 2 A range may not be lower thanthe range preceding it For example ifbasic range 3 is 60 feet basic range 4must be greater than 60 feet

ZOOM RANGE Choose the range tozoom in the marker-zoom andbottom-zoom modes You may choose arange between 7 and 150 feet (2 and 50

meters)

BL RANGE The expansion width forthe bottom-lock display can be chosenfrom 10 to 30 feet (3 and 10 meters)

ZOOM MARKER The zoom markerappears in the normal bottom markerand bottom zoom displays and marksthe area which is expanded in the

bottom marker and bottom zoompictures You can turn the marker on oroff as desired

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 2748

21

3 MAINTENANCETROUBLESHOOTING

W RNING

ELECTRICAL SHOCK HAZARDDo not open the equipment

Only qualified personnel should workinside the equipment

31 Maintenance

Regular maintenance is essential forgood performance Checking the itemslisted in the table below monthly willhelp keep your equipment in goodshape for years to come

Checking

Item Action

Transducercable

Check cable for damage

Power cabletransducercable plug

Check that they are tightlyfastened Refasten ifnecessary

Display unitground

Check for corrosion Cleanif necessary

Power supplyvoltage

Check voltage If out ofrating correct problem

32 Cleaning the DisplayUnit

Dust or dirt on the display unit can beremoved with a soft cloth If desired awater-moistened cloth may be usedUse special care when cleaning theLCD since it scratches easily Do notuse chemical cleaners to clean thedisplay unit - they can remove paint andmarkings

33 TransducerMaintenance

Marine life on the transducer face willresult in a gradual decrease insensitivity Check the transducer facefor cleanliness each time the boat isdry-docked Carefully remove anymarine life with a piece of wood orfine-grade sandpaper

34 Replacing the FuseThe fuse in the power cable protects thesystem from reverse polarity of thepower supply and equipment fault If thefuse blows find the cause beforereplacing it Use only a 1A fuse (FGMB 1A 125V Code No 000-114-805 ) orequivalent Using the wrong fuse will damage the unit and void the warranty

W RNINGUse the proper fuse

Fuse rating is shown on the equipmentUse of a wrong fuse can result in fire anddamage the equipment

35 Battery Voltage Alert A battery icon appears when the batteryvoltage is too high or too low

Battery icon and meaning

Icon Meaning

Voltage is lower than 10 VDC If thevoltage goes below 9 V the equipmentis automatically turned off

Voltage is higher than 165 VDC If thevoltage goes higher than 175 V theequipment is automatically turned off

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 2848

22

36 TroubleshootingThe table below provides basictroubleshooting procedures which theuser may follow to restore normaloperation

Troubleshooting table

Ifhellip Then check hellipneither echo norfixed range scaleappears

bull battery voltagebull fusebull power cable

no echo appearsbut the fixedrange scaleappears

bull if display advancespeed is set to ldquoStoprdquo

bull transducer plugbull

transducer cableecho appears butno zero line

bull if range shifting is setto ldquo0rdquo

sensitivity is low bull gain settingbull if air bubbles or marine

life is clinging to thetransducer face

bull if sediments arepresent in the water

bull if the bottom is too soft

to return an echothere is extremeinterference ornoise

bull if the transducer is tooclose to the engine

bull if the unit is properlygrounded

bull if other echo soundersof the same frequencyas own are beingoperated nearby

the speedwatertemperaturereadout isunrealistic or notpresent

bull sensor plug

the positionreadout isunrealistic or notpresent

bull the connectionbetween sounder andnavigator

bull navigator

37 DiagnosticsIf you feel your unit is not workingproperly conduct the diagnostic test tofind the problem If you cannot restorenormal operation contact your dealerfor advice

1 Turn on the power while pressing the[MENUESC] key Continue pressingthe [MENUESC] key until theInstallation menu appears

SIMULATION On

TEST LCD PATTERN MEMORY CLEAR

NMEA PORT InOutNMEA MIX Off GPS WAAS Off

SET BOTTOM LEVEL

Installation Menu

= Setting cannot be changed whenNMEA PORT setting is InIn

Installation menu2 Press to choose TEST3 Press to start the test

ROM OKRAM OKNMEA

Temp 682 deg F

Speed 100kmh

Power 124 VBody 39 deg C

Program No 0252318-01Push [MENU] 3 times to exit

Level bar

= Program version no

Water

TemperatureSpeedBattery VoltageTemperatureinside displayunit(Unit fixed atdeg C)

GPS (48502180) OK

Only when GP-310B is connected(For GP-320B 4850238)

Test display

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 2948

23

4 The ROM RAM and NMEA port arechecked with the results shown asOK or NG (No Good) For any NGrequest service (A special connectoris required to test the NMEA portNothing appears if no connector isconnected)

5 The squares at the right side of thetest display are for checking thecontrols Press each key and thearrows on the Cursor Pad one byone A controlrsquos correspondingon-screen square ldquolightsrdquo in black ifthe control is normal

6 To return to the Installation menupress the [MENUESC] key threetimes

7 To restore normal operation turn offthe power and turn it on again

38 Test PatternThis feature tests for proper display oftones

1 On the Installation menu press $ tochoose LCD PATTERN

2 Press to start the test The entirescreen is black

3 Press again and the screen turnswhite

4 Press again and the screenshows a four-toned display

5 Press again to return to theInstallation menu

6 To restore normal operation turn offthe power and then it on again

WHITE FOUR-TONE BLACK

Test patterns

39 Memory ClearThe memory can be cleared to startafresh with default menu settings

1 At the installation menu press $ tochoose MEMORY CLEAR

2 Press to open the optionswindow

YES NO

Clear memory display

3 Press to clear the memory Beepsare generated while the memory isbeing cleared

4 To restore normal operation turn offthe power and then turn it on again

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3048

24

4 INSTALLATION

41 Display UnitMounting considerations

The display unit can be installed on adesktop on the bulkhead or flushmounted in a panel When choosing alocation keep the following in mind

bull Keep the display unit out of directsunlight

bull The temperature and humidity should

be moderate and stablebull Locate the unit away from exhaust

pipes and ventsbull The mounting location should be well

ventilatedbull Mount the unit where shock and

vibration are minimalbull For maintenance and checking

purposes leave sufficient space atthe sides and rear of the unit andleave slack in cables

bull A magnetic compass will be affected ifthe display unit is placed too close toit Observe the following compasssafe distances to prevent disturbanceto the magnetic compassStandard compass 04 metersSteering compass 03 meters

Desktop overhead mounting1 Fix the bracket to a desktop or the

overhead with tapping screws(supplied)

2 Loosely screw knobs into the displayunit

3 Set the display unit to the bracketand then tighten the knobs

Mounting on the bulkhead Flush

mounting in a panelSee the instructions on the bulkhead orflush mounting template (supplied)

42 Thru-hull MountTransducer

Transducer mounting location

The thru-hull mount transducer

(520-5PSD 520-5MSD) provides thebest performance of all since thetransducer protrudes from the hull andthe effect of air bubbles and turbulencenear the hull skin is reduced When theboat has a keel the transducer shouldbe at least 30 cm away from it Typicalthru-hull mountings are shown in thefigure on the next page

The performance of this sounder isdirectly related to the mounting locationof the transducer especially forhigh-speed cruising The installationshould be planned in advance keepingthe standard cable length (8 m) and thefollowing factors in mindbull Air bubbles and turbulence caused by

movement of the boat seriouslydegrade the sounding capability of thetransducer The transducer shouldtherefore be located in a positionwhere water flow is the smoothestNoise from the propellers alsoadversely affects performance andthe transducer should not be mountednearby The lifting strakes arenotorious for creating acoustic noiseand these must be avoided bykeeping the transducer inboard ofthem

bull The transducer must always remain

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3148

25

submerged even when the boat isrolling pitching or up on a plane athigh speed

bull A practical choice would besomewhere between 13 and 12 of

the boatrsquos length from the stern Forplaning hulls a practical location isgenerally rather far astern so that thetransducer is always in waterregardless of the planing attitude

28

22

120

68

30

520-5PSD

24

120

68

87520-5MSD

Unit mm

Thru-hull mount transducer dimensions

Acceptable transducer mounting

locations

Position 12 to 13 of the hull from stern

15 to 30 cm off center line (inside first lifting strakes)

Within the wetted bottom area

Deadrise angle within 15 deg

HIGH SPEED-V HULL

Suitable transducer mounting locations

Typical thru-hull mounttransducer installations

FairingBlock

Flat Washer

Rubber Washer

Hull

Deep-V Hull

Hull

Flat Washer

Rubber Washer

Flat Hull

CorkWasher

Typical thru-hull mounttransducer installations

Procedure for installing thethru-hull mount transducer

1 With the boat hauled out of the watermark the location chosen formounting the transducer on thebottom of the hull

2 If the hull is not level within 15deg inany direction fairing blocks madeout of teak should be used betweenthe transducer and hull both insideand outside to keep the transducerface parallel with the water lineFabricate the fairing block as shownbelow and make the entire surfaceas smooth as possible to provide anundisturbed flow of water around thetransducer The fairing block shouldbe smaller than the transducer itselfto provide a channel to divert

turbulent water around the sides ofthe transducer rather than over itsface

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3248

26

BOWHole for stuffing tube

Upper Half

Lower Half

Saw along slopeof hull Construction of fairing block

3 Drill a hole just large enough to passthe threaded stuffing tube of thetransducer through the hull makingsure it is drilled vertically

4 Apply a sufficient amount of highquality caulking compound to the topsurface of the transducer around thethreads of the stuffing tube andinside the mounting hole (and fairingblocks if used) to ensure watertightmounting

5 Mount the transducer and fairingblocks and tighten the locking nutsBe sure that the transducer is

properly oriented and its workingface is parallel to the waterline

Note Do not over-stress the stuffingtube and locking nuts through excessivetightening since the wood block willswell when the boat is placed in thewater It is suggested that the nut betightened lightly at installation andretightened several days after the boat

has been launched

Transducer preparation

Before putting the boat in water wipethe face of the transducer thoroughlywith a detergent liquid soap This willlessen the time necessary for thetransducer to have good contact withthe water Otherwise the time requiredfor complete ldquosaturationrdquo ill belengthened and performance will bereduced

DO NOT paint the transducerPerformance will be affected

43 Transom MountTransducer

The transom mount transducer is verycommonly employed usually onrelatively small IO or outboard boatsDo not use this method on an inboardmotor boat because turbulence iscreated by the propeller ahead of thetransducer

520-5PWD

There are two methods of installationflush with hull (for flat hulls) andprojecting from hull (for deep V-hulls)

Flat Hull

D

Dgt50 cm

Deep-VHull

520-5PWD mounting locations

Installing the 520-5PWD on a flat hull

A suitable mounting location is at least50 cm away from the engine and wherethe water flow is smooth

1 Drill four pilot holes in the mountinglocation

2 Attach the transducer to the bracketwith 5 x 20 tapping screws(supplied)

3 Adjust the transducer position so thetransducer faces right to the bottom

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3348

27

Note If necessary to improve waterflow and minimize air bubblesstaying on the transducer faceincline the transducer about 5deg at therear This may require a certainamount of experimentation for finetuning at high cruising speeds

4 Fill the gap between the wedge frontof the transducer and transom withepoxy material to eliminate any airspaces

No1 M5 x 14

5 x 20

5 x 20

2 to 5

Tape

Hull

Transom mount transducer

mounting flush with hull

Installing the transom mounttransducer on a deep-V hull

This method is employed on deep-Vhulls and provides good performancebecause the effects of air bubbles areminimal Install the transducer parallelwith water surface not flush with hull Ifthe boat is placed on a trailer care mustbe taken not to damage the transducerwhen the boat is hauled out of the waterand put on the trailer

5 x 20

No 2M5 x 14

5 x 20

Transom mount transducermounted projecting from hull

525-5PWD

Choose the installation methoddepending on the rise angle of the hull

Transom

Transom

Stripe over 10

Parallel with hull

Mount at the stripe

less than 10

525-5PWD mounting location

Installing the 525-5PWD

Referring to ldquoInstalling the 520-5PWDrdquoin the left column for mounting of thebracket and the figure shown on the topof next page install the 525-5PWD tothe transom

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3448

28

2 to 5

Transducer

Bracket

Hull

Epoxy material

525-5PWD mounting

44 Inside-hullTransducer

The thru-hull mount transducer(520-5PSD 520-5MSD) may also beinstalled inside the hull following theprocedure below

Necessary tools

You will need the following toolsbull Sandpaper (100)bull Silicone sealantbull Silicone grease

Remarks on installationbull Turn off the engine and anchor the

boat while installing the equipmentbull Install the transducer in the engine

room

Choosing the mounting locationbull The mounting location should be

where the hull is of single-hullthickness and is void of air or flotationmaterials other than solid fiberglassbetween the transducer face and thewater

bull Do not place the transducer over hullstruts or ribs which run under the hull

bull Avoid a location where the risingangle of the hull exceeds 15deg tominimize the effect of the boatrsquosrolling

bull You will finalize the mounting location

through some trial and error Theprocedure for this is shown later

50 cm

50 cm15 cm15 cm

13

12

Transducer mountinglocation

Centerline

Inside-hull transducer mounting location

Attaching the transducer1 Clean the transducer face to remove

any foreign material Lightly roughenthe transducer face with 100sandpaper Also roughen the insideof the hull where the transducer is tobe mounted

2 Clean the transducer face again3 Warm the silicone sealant to 40degC

before usage to soften it Coat thetransducer face and mountinglocation with silicone sealant

Transducer

SiliconeSealant

Coating transducer facewith silicone sealant

4 Press the transducer firmly down onthe hull and gently twist it back andforth to remove any air which may betrapped in the silicone sealant

Checking the installation

1 Connect the battery to the display

unit2 Turn on the display unit

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3548

29

3 Press the [MODE] key to chooseSINGLE FREQ

4 Choose 50 kHz or 200 kHz and thenpress the [MENUESC] key to closethe mode menu

5 Press the [MENU] to show the mainmenu and then press to select

Auto mode6 Press to choose Off7 Press the [MENUESC] key8 Press the [GAIN] key to set the gain

to ldquo5rdquo and then press the[MENUESC] key

9 Press the [RANGE] key to set therange to 10 meters (feet) and thenpress the [MENUESC] key

10 If the bottom is displayed in darkgray and the depth indicationappears the mounting location issuitable Go to ldquoFinal preparationrdquo

11 If the bottom is not displayed in darkgray tone the mounting location maybe unsuitable Do the followinga) Press the [POWERBRILL] key to

turn off the powerb) Gently dismount the transducer

with a piece of woodc) Reattach the transducer

elsewhere as shown in ldquoAttachingthe transducerrdquo

d) Check the installation again

Final preparation

Support the transducer with a piece ofwood to keep it in place while it is drying

Let the transducer dry 24-72 hours

45 Optional Triducer525ST-MSD

The optional triducer 525ST-MSD isdesigned for thru-hull mounting Forhow to install this transducer seeparagraph 42

φ79 mm

33 mm200-12 UNthreads

φ51 mm

27 mm

7 mm

140 mm Triducer 525ST-MSD

525ST-PWD

The Transom Mount Transducer orTRIDUCER reg Multisensor with IntegralRelease Bracket 525ST-PWD ismanufactured by AIRMAR Co Theseinstructions are also included with the

sensor

Pre-test for speed and temperature

Connect the sensor to the instrumentand spin the paddlewheel Check for aspeed reading and the approximate airtemperature If there is no readingreturn the sensor to your place ofpurchase

Tools and materials needed

ScissorsMasking tapeSafety gogglesDust maskElectric drillDrill bit for

Bracket holes 4mm 23 or 964rdquoFiberglass hull chamfer bit(preferred)6mm or 14rdquo

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3648

30

Transom hole 19mm or 34rdquo(optional)

Cable clamp holes 3mm or 18rdquoScrewdriversStraight edgeMarine sealantPencilZip-tiesWater-based antifouling paint(mandatory in salt water )

Mounting location

To ensure the best performance thesensor must be submerged inaeration-free and turbulence-free water

Mount the sensor close to the centerlineof the boat On slower heavierdisplacement hulls positioning it fartherfrom the centerline is acceptable

Allow adequate space above thebracket for it to release and rotate thesensor upward

Height

Height withoutspeed sensor191mm (7-12)Height withspeed sensor213mm (8-12)

Height required at mounting location

Note 1 Do not mount the sensor in anarea of turbulence or bubbles nearwater intake or discharge openingsbehind strakes struts fittings or hull

irregularities behind eroding paint (anindication of turbulence)Note 2 Avoid mounting the sensorwhere the boat may be supportedduring trailering launching hauling andstorageNote 3 For single drive boat mounton the starboard side at least 75 mm(3rdquo) beyond the swing radius of thepropeller

75 mm(3)

minimum beyondswing radius

Mounting location on single drive boat

Note 4 For twin drive boat mountbetween the drives

Installation of bracket

1 Cut out the installation template

shown on the next page2 At the selected location position thetemplate so the arrow at the bottomis aligned with the bottom edge ofthe transom Being sure the templateis parallel to the waterline tape it inplace

Align template vertically

Deadrise angle

Slope of hullparallel towaterline

Align template arrow withbottom edge of transom

Positioning the template

Warning Always wear safetygoggles and a dust mask

3 Using a 4 mm 23 or 964rdquo bit drillthree holes 22 mm (78rdquo) deepat the locations indicated To preventdrilling too deeply wrap maskingtape around the bit 22 mm (78rdquo)from the pointFiberglass hull Minimize surfacecracking by chamfering the gelcoatIf a chamfer bit or countersink bit is

not available start drilling with a6mm or 14rdquo bit to a depth of 1 mm(116rdquo)

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3748

31

4 If you know your transom angle the

bracket is designed for a standard13deg transom angle11deg-18deg angle No shim is requiredSkip to step 3 in ldquoAdjustingrdquoOther angles The shim is requiredSkip to step 2 of ldquoAdjustingrdquoIf you do not know the transom angletemporarily attach the bracket andsensor to the transom to determine ifthe plastic shim is needed

5 Using the two 10 x 1-14rdquo

self-tapping screws temporarilyscrew the bracket to the hull DONOT tighten the screws completelyat this time Follow the step 1-4 inldquoAttaching the Sensor to the Bracketrdquobefore proceeding with ldquoAdjustingrdquo

Installation templatefor starboard side of boat

Drill at locations labeled Bfor the following transom angles

16 deg through 22 deg

Drill at locations labeled Afor the following transom angles

2 deg through 15 deg

Align arrow with bottom of transom

AA A

BB B

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3848

32

Adjusting

1 Using a straight edge sight theunderside of the sensor relative tothe underside of the hull The sternof the sensor should be 1-3 mm

(116-18rdquo) below the bow of thesensor or parallel to the bottom ofthe hull

11 deg transom angleNO SHIM

12-18 deg transom angleNO SHIM

2 deg -10 deg transom

angle

19 deg -22 deg transom

angleshim withtaper up

shim withtaper down

parallelparallel parallel

slightangle

angletoo steep

anglereversed

YES NONO

YES YESYES

Sensor position and transom angle

Note Do not position the bow of thesensor lower than the stern becauseaeration will occur

2 To adjust the sensorrsquos angle relativeto the hull use the tapered plasticshim provided If the bracket hasbeen temporarily fastened to thetransom remove it Key the shim in

place on the back of the bracket2deg-10deg transom angle (steppedtransom and jet boats) Positionthe shim with the tapered end down19deg-22deg transom angle (smallaluminum and fiberglass boats) Position the shim with the taperedend up

3 If the bracket has been temporarilyfastened to the transom remove it

Apply a marine sealant to thethreads of the two 10 x 1-14rdquo self

tapping screws to prevent waterseeping into the transom Screw thebracket to the hull Do not tighten thescrews completely at this time

4 Repeat step 1 to ensure that theangle of the sensor is correctNote Do not position the sensorfarther into the water than necessaryto avoid increasing drag spray andwater noise and reducing boatspeed

5 Using the vertical adjustment spaceon the bracket slots slide the sensorup or down to provide a projection of3 mm (18rdquo) Tighten the screws

Cable cover

Cableclamp

50 mm (2)

Hull projection 3 mm (18)

Vertical adjustment and cable routing

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3948

33

Attaching the sensor to the bracket

1 If the retaining cover near the top ofthe bracket is closed open it bydepressing the latch and rotating thecover downward

Step 1 Step 2

Latch

Retainingcover

Pivotarm (2)

Slot (2)

Step 4

Step 3

Attaching the sensor to the bracket

2 Insert the sensorrsquos pivot arms intothe slots near the top of the bracket

3 Maintain pressure until the pivotarms click into place

4 Rotate the sensor downward until thebottom snaps into the bracket

5 Close the retaining cover to preventthe accidental release of the sensorwhen the boat is underway

Cable routing

Route the sensor cable over thetransom through a drain hole orthorough a new hole drilled in thetransom above the waterline

Never cut the cable or remote the

connector this will void the warranty Always wear safety goggles and a dustmask

1 If a hole must be drilled choose alocation well above the waterlineCheck for obstructions such as trimtabs pumps or wiring inside the hullMark the location with a pencil Drilla hole through the transom using a19 mm or 34rdquo bit (to accommodatethe connector)

2 Route the cable over or through thetransom

3 On the outside of the hull secure thecable against the transom using thecable clamps Position a cable clamp50 mm(2rdquo) above the bracket andmark the mounting hole with apencil

4 Position the second cable clamphalfway between the first clamp andthe cable hole Mark this mountinghole

5 If a hole has been drilled in thetransom open the appropriate slot inthe transom cable cover Position thecover over the cable where it entersthe hull Mark the two mounting

holes6 At each of the marked locations usea 3 mm or 18rdquo bit to drill a hole 10mm (38rdquo) deep The prevent drillingtoo deeply wrap masking tapearound the bit 10 mm (38rdquo) from thepoint

7 Apply marine sealant to the threadsof the 6 x 12rdquo self-tapping screw toprevent water from seeping into the

transom If you have drilled a holethrough the transom apply marinesealant to the space around thecable where it passes through thetransom

8 Position the two cable clamps andfasten them in place If used pushthe cable cover over the cable andscrew it in place

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4048

34

9 Route the cable to the instrumentbeing careful not to tear the cable

jacket when passing it though thebulkhead(s) and other parts of theboat To reduce electricalinterference separate the sensorcable from other electrical wiring andldquonoiserdquo sources Coil any excesscable and secure it in place withzip-ties to prevent damage

46 Optional WaterTemperatureSpeedSensor

Water temperaturespeed sensorST-02MSB and ST-02PSB which aredesigned for thru-hull mounting areoptionally available Install them asshown below

Mounting considerations

Choose a suitable mounting locationconsidering the followingbull Choose a place free from vibrationbull Choose a mid-boat flat position The

sensor does not have to be installedperfectly perpendicular The sensormust not be damaged in dry-dockingoperation

bull Choose a place apart from equipmentgenerating heat

bull Choose a place in the forwarddirection viewing from the drain holeto allow for circulation of coolingwater

1 Dry-dock the boat2 Make a hole of approx 51 mm

diameter in the mounting location3 Unfasten locknut and remove the

sensor section4 Apply high-grade sealant to the

flange of the sensor5 Pass the sensor casing through thehole

6 Face the notch on the sensor towardboatrsquos bow and tighten the flange

7 Set the sensor section to the sensorcasing and tighten the locknut

8 Launch the boat and check for waterleakage around the sensor

Locknut

Face notchtoward bow

Flange Nut

Coat withsilicone sealant Brim

φ 77

51

123

Water temperaturespeed sensor

ST-02MSB ST-02PSB

47 Wiring

Connect the LS-4100 powerdata cableassy MJ-A7SPF0005-020 (2 msupplied) to the POWER and thetransducer cable to the XDR connectorRefer to the interconnection diagram toconnect cables Leave slack in cables tofacilitate checking and maintenance

Note The fuse holder contains a springwhich fixes the fuse To preventdetachment of the spring which wouldcause loss of power tie the line asshown below

+ line (red)

Fuse holder

Cable tie How to fix fuse holder

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4148

35

Establishing the ground

The ground wire (125 sq or more localsupply) should be as short as possible

The signal line ground is isolated from

the chassis ground however the powerline is not insulated Therefore whenconnecting eternal equipment havingpositive ground do not ground thesignal line to the chassis If excessivenoise shows on the screen the groundmay be inadequate In this case attacha steel plate measuring 20 cm by 30 cmon the outside of the hull to provide aground point Connect the ground wire

there Use a ldquoclosedrdquo type lug ( ) tomake the connection at the display unitDo not use an ldquoopenrdquo type lug ( )

Optional equipment

POWER connector

The power supply port is commonlyused for connection of externalequipment such as a GPS receiver orwind indicator Use the powerdatacable MJ-A7SPF0005-020 (supplied) forconnection referring the figure shown inthe right column

Connector Color Remarks

1 TD-A WHT2 TD-B BLU

IEC-61162-1NMEA0183

3 RD-A YEL

4 RD-B GRN

IEC-61162-1

NMEA01835 + RED

6 - BLKPower input12 VDC

7 FG

Water tempspeed sensor

Connect the optional water tempspeedsensor to the XDR connector with theoptional converter connector (Type02S4147) as shown below

Tape connectors withvulcaninzing tapeand then vinyl tapeto waterproof themBind tape ends withcable ties to preventtape from unraveling

Connect to XDR portat rear of display unit

MJ-A10SPF

MJ-A10SRMDMJ-A6SRMD

Fromtransducer

Fromsensor

Connection of converterconnector 02S4147

48 IEC 61162-1 DataSentences

The tables below show the datasentences which can be input to andoutput from the LS-4100 Thetransmission speed for both input andoutput is 4800 bps Data is output attwo-second intervals

Input data sentences

Sentence Meaning

BWC Bearing and distance towaypoint

GGA Global positioning system(GPS) fix data

GLL Geographic position -latitudelongitude

HDG Heading deviation and variationHDT Heading true

MDA Atmospheric pressure

MTW Water temperature

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4248

36

Input data sentences (conrsquot)

Sentence MeaningMWV Wind speed and

angleRMA Recommended

minimum specificLORAN-C dataRMB Recommended

minimum navigationinformation

RMC Recommendedminimum specificGPSTRANSIT data

VHW Water speed andheading

VTG Course over groundand ground speedXTE Cross track error

Output data sentences

Sentence MeaningDBT (Ver 15) Depth below

transducerDPT (Ver 20 Ver30)

Depth

MTW Water temperatureRMB (Ver 20) Recommended

minimumnavigationinformation

VHW Water speed andheading

TLL Target positionoutput by [MARK]key

= Available with connection of optionalsensorsnavaid

49 Installation MenuThe installation menu mainly containsitems which are set at installation

1 Turn on the power while pressing the[MENUESC] key Continue pressing

the [MENUESC] key until theInstallation menu appears

SIMULATION On

TEST LCD PATTERN MEMORY CLEAR

NMEA PORT InOutNMEA MIX OffGPS WAAS Off

SET BOTTOM LEVEL

Installation Menu

= Setting cannot be changed whenNMEA PORT setting is InIn

Installation menu

SIMULATION The simulation modeprovides without connection of thetransducer simulated operation of theequipment using internally generatedechoes All controls are operative Themessage ldquoSIMrdquo appears at the top rightcorner on the screen when thesimulation mode is active

1 At the installation menu press toopen the simulation mode optionswindow

2 Press to choose ldquoOnrdquo to turn onthe simulation mode

3 Press the [POWERBRILL] keyabout three seconds to turn off thepower

4 Press the [POWERBRILL] key toturn on the power ldquoSIMrdquo appears atthe top right corner of the display

5 To turn off the simulation modeselect Off at step 2

NMEA po r t se tup(NMEA PO RT NMEA M IX)

The POWER port can function as aninput port or inputoutput port Changethe setting to ldquoInInrdquo when connectingGP-310B320B and a wind sensor

When connecting the GP-310B320Band a wind sensor first turn on ldquoGPS

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4348

37

WAASrdquo (in the Installation menu) andthen select ldquoInInrdquo as the NMEA portsetting

1 Turn on the power while pressingand holding down the [MENUESC]key Continue pressing the[MENUESC] key until theInstallation menu appears

2 Choose NMEA PORT and thenpress to display the NMEA portoptions window

3 Use or to choose InOut orInIn as appropriate

InOut Input and Output (default

setting)InIn Input only (Available withconnection of the GP-310B320Band a wind sensor)

4 Press choose NMEA MIX andthen press to display the NMEAMIX options window

5 Use or to choose Off or OnChoose On to output input data

Off Outputs the data sentences ofLS-4100 only

On Outputs the data sentences ofLS-4100 and sentences which areinput from other equipment

6 To restore normal operation turn offthe power and then turn it on again

GPS WAAS Chooses how to use theWAAS signal when connecting with a

WAAS receiver for example GP-320B

Note WAAS is currently in thedevelopmental phase During thedevelopmental phase the reliability andavailability of the WAAS signal cannotbe guaranteed Therefore any positiondata should be verified against othersources to confirm reliability

1 Display the Installation menu2 Choose GPS WAAS and then press

to open the GPS WAAS options

window

Off

WAAS options window3 Press or to choose ldquoWAAS-02rdquo

(test signal) When the systembecomes operational (in 2003) setto ldquo00rdquo (regular WAAS signal)

4 Turn off the power

BOTTOM LEVEL If the depthindication is unstable in automaticoperation or the bottom echo cannot bedisplayed in the darkest gray tone byadjusting the gain controls in manualoperation you may adjust the bottomecho level detection circuit for both 50kHz and 200 kHz to stabilize theindication Generally lower the bottomlevel for inner hull installation where thereceive level is too low If the bottomlevel is too low it may be difficult todiscriminate fish from the bottomresulting in unstable depth indication

And if the bottom level is too high thedepth indication may not appear

1 At the installation menu press tochoose SET BOTTOM LEVEL andthen press Several seconds laterthe following display appears

Bottom level +0 (200k -100 - +100 ) +0 ( 50k -100 - +100 )

Bottom level display

2 While observing the picture use or to set 200 kHz or to set50 kHz Set up for optimum picture

3 To restore normal operation turn offthe power and then it on again

Note The mode must be other thanldquoNAV DATArdquo to show the bottom leveldisplay

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4448

SP - 1 E2371S01C

SPECIFICATIONS OF ECHO SOUNDER LS-4100

1 GENERAL11 TX Frequency 50 kHz or 200 kHz 50200 kHz dual transmitting selectable12 Transmit Method Single or dual transmitting

13 Output Power 300 Wrms14 TX Rate Max 500 pulsemin15 Pulse-length 01 to 08 ms

2 DISPLAY UNIT21 Display system 5-inch monochrome LCD 76 mm (W) x 100 mm (H) 240 x 320 dots22 Display Mode Single frequency (highlow freq) Dual-frequency Zoom Nav data-12

Marker zoom Bottom zoom Bottom-lock23 Display Range

Range SettingRange

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

Display

rangeMeter 5 10 20 40 80 150 200 300 2-500

Feet 15 30 60 120 200 400 600 1000 7-1500

Fathoms 3 5 10 20 40 80 100 150 1-250

PassiBraza 3 5 10 30 50 100 150 200 1-300

24 Range Shift 0-500 m 0-1500 ft 0-250 fa 0-300 pb25 Expansion Range Bottom-lock expansion 3 to 10 m

Sectional expansion 2 to 50 m26 Display Advance Speed 8 steps (LinesTX Freeze 1161814121121 41)

3 INTERFACE31 Input data sentences IEC61162-1NMEA0183 Ver 152030

GGA RMA RMB RMC BWC GLL HDT HDG VTG VHW MTWMWV MDA XTE

32 Output data sentences IEC61162-1NMEA0183 Ver 152030 interval 2 sMTW VHW DBT DPT RMB TLL by key operating External data required

4 POWER SUPPLY41 Display Unit 12 VDC 05 A

5 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITION51 Ambient Temperature Display unit -15degC to +55degC52 Relative Humidity 93 or less at 40degC53 Waterproof IPX5

6 COATING COLOR61 Display Unit N30

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4548

M a r

4

0 3

D-1

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4648

Mar 4 03

Mar 4 03

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4748

M a r

3

0 3

S-1

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4848

FURUNO Authorized DistributorDealer FURUNO Authorized DistributorDealer

9-52 Ashihara-cho9-52 Ashihara-choNishinomiya 662-8580 JAPANNishinomiya 662-8580 JAPAN

Telephone Telephone 0798-65-21110798-65-2111FaxFax 0798-65-42000798-65-4200

FIRST EDITION FIRST EDITION MARMAR 20032003Printed in JapanPrinted in Japan All rights reserved All rights reserved

B1B1 SEPSEP 09 200509 2005

Pub NoPub No OME-23710OME-23710 00014698000000146980000001469800000014698000(( DAMIDAMI )) LS-4100LS-4100

0 0 0 1 4 6 9 8 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 4 6 9 8 0 0 0

Page 8: OME23710B_1_LS4100

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 848

2

Program version no

ROM OK RAM OK Program No 0252318-01

5 ECHO SOUNDER

FURUNO ELECTRIC CO LTD

Start-up screen

To turn off the power press and holddown the [POWERBRILL] key until thescreen goes blank The time remaining

until power is turned off is counted downon the screen

Note The example screens shown inthis manual may not match the screensyou see on your display The screenyou see depends on your systemconfiguration and equipment settings

13 Adjusting DisplayContrast Brilliance

1 Press the [POWERBRILL] keymomentarily to show thebrilliancecontrast adjustmentwindow

CONTST 4 Min Max

BRILLMin Max

4

Brilliancecontrast adjustment window

2 For contrast press the[POWERBRILL] key to adjustcontrast cyclically (You may also use or on the Cursor Pad to adjustcontrast) (Adjustable range 0 to 9)

3 To adjust brilliance use or $ (Adjustable range 0 to 4)

4 Press the [MENUESC] key to closethe brilliancecontrast adjustmentwindow

Note 1 When the power is reappliedafter turning off the equipment withminimum brilliance minimum brilliancewill be set after the equipment goesthrough its initial start up (The start upscreen appears with the maximumbrilliance) Adjust the brilliance asnecessary

Note 2 Setting windows other thanthose on menus are erased if there isno operation within about sevenseconds

14 Choosing a DisplayFrequency

Seven displays are available singlefrequency (50 or 200 kHz) dualfrequency marker-zoom bottom-zoombottom-lock and nav data (twodisplays)

1 Press the [MODE] key to show themode selection window

MODE

SINGLE FREQDUAL FREQMARKER ZOOMBOTTOM ZOOMBOTTOM LOCKNAV DATA-1NAV DATA-250kHz 200kHz

Mode selection window

2 Press the [MODE] key again withinseven seconds to choose a modeYou may also choose a mode with or $

3 For modes other than DUAL FREQchoose frequency Press for 50kHz or for 200 kHz

4 Press the [MENUESC] key to closethe window

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 948

3

Single frequency display

50 kHz

The sounder uses ultrasonic signals todetect bottom conditions The lower thefrequency of the signal the wider thedetection area Therefore the 50 kHzfrequency is useful for general detectionand judging bottom condition

200 kHz

The higher the frequency of theultrasonic signal the better theresolution For this reason the 200 kHzfrequency is ideal for detailed

observation of fish schools

50 kHz

200 kHz

Frequency and coverage area

466

FishSchool

Bottom

0

20

40

50k 1100

Level Bar

Depth

Frequency

Picture Advance Speed

Range Scale

Mode(AUTO or MANUAL)

407 degF162kt Nav Display

MinuteMarker(Shows time

Each baris 30 sec) TransmissionLine

60

Typical 50 kHz display

Dual frequency display

The 50 kHz picture appears on the leftthe 200 kHz picture on the right Thisdisplay is useful for comparing the samepicture with two different transmitting

frequencies

50 kHz 200 kHzpicture picture

496

0050200 11

0

20

40

60

80

20

40

60

80 Dual frequency display

Marker-zoom display

This mode expands chosen area of thenormal picture to full vertical size of thescreen on the left-half window You mayspecify the portion to expand byoperating the VRM (Variable RangeMarker) which you can shift with or$ The area between the VRM andzoom range marker is expanded

Zoomedfishschool

Single frequency display

Variable rangemarker

This sectionis zoomed

Zoom marker

Marker-zoom display

170

250

0

Fishschool

0

40

10

20

30

0050k 11

21

20

19

18

17

22

Marker-zoom display

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 1048

4

Bottom-zoom display

This mode expands bottom and bottomfish in the range width set with ZOOMRANGE of the SYSTEM menu Thismode is useful for determining bottom

contour When the bottom depthincreases the display shift to keep thebottom echo at the lower part of thescreen

0

Bottom-zoom display

298

Bottom

0

40

10

20

30

32

31

30

29

28

27

Switched withdepth

Singlefrequencydisplay

Zoommarker

0050k 11

Bottom-zoom display

Bottom-lock display

The bottom-lock display provides anormal picture on the right half of thescreen and a 15 feet (5 meter) widelayer in contact with the bottom isexpanded onto the left half of the screenThis mode is useful for detecting bottomfish = Operator selectable

Bottom-lock display

Zoommarker

Zoomedfish

This sectionis zoomed

217

0

Singlefrequencydisplay

Fishschool

0

40

Bottom displayed flat

10

20

30

0

1

2

3

4

550k 11

Bottom-lock display

Nav data displays

The nav data displays appear on the leftof the screen Data other than depthrequires appropriate sensor

You can display between two and fouritems in a nav data display and choosethe item and order to display them Seeparagraph 116 to choose the items todisplay ldquoNAV DATA-1rdquo and ldquoNAVDATA-2rdquo in paragraph 21 to choose thenumber of items to display

Depth

694 m

Trip meter

100 nm

Odometer

56 nm

NAV DATA-1 display

NAV DATA-2 display

Temperature

655 deg F

172

1 05 0 05 1

025 nm

XTE

Speed

kt

20

50

40

60

30

10

0

Sample NAV DATA displays(Default setting)

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 1148

5

15 Menu OperatingProcedure

The LS-4100 has three menus MainSystem and Installation Below is the

basic menu operating procedure1 Press the [MENUESC] key to openthe main menu Page 1 or Page 2 ofthe main menu appears dependingon the page last used

[MENU] Exit

(12)

Note SHIFT and CLUTTER arenot available in the auto mode

AUTO MODE Off SHIFT 0ftPIC ADVANCE 11NOISE LIMIT Off CLUTTER Off SIGNAL LEVEL Off

A-SCOPE Off HUE DayWHITE LINE Off DEEP GAIN Low

Pageno

Main menu page 1

2 Use or $ to select an item Toview page 2 of the main menu press$ until showing the display below

[MENU] Exit

(22)

GOTO WPT Off WAYPOINT LIST

TRIP RESET

GAIN ADJ 200 +0GAIN ADJ 50 +0DRAFT 00ft

ALARM MENUSYSTEM MENU

Main menu page 2

3 Press to show selected itemrsquosoptions window The example shownat the top of the right column is theoptions window for AUTO MODE

Off CruisingFishing

Auto mode options window

4 Use or $ to choose option or setnumeric value

5 Press the [MENUESC] key to closethe menu or press to continuemenu operation

16 Automatic OperationHow automatic operation works

The automatic function automatically

chooses the proper gain range scaleand clutter It works as followsbull The range changes automatically to

display the bottom echo on thescreen

bull The gain is automatically adjusted todisplay the bottom echo in the darkesttone

bull Clutter (on the menu) whichsuppresses low-level noise isautomatically adjusted

Choosing automatic operation

The automatic mode provides twochoices of modes cruising and fishing1 Press the [MENUESC] key to open

the main menu2 Press to choose AUTO MODE

from page 1 of the menu3 Press to open the mode options

window4 Choose Cruising or Fishing as

appropriate

ldquoCruisingrdquo is for tracking the bottomldquoFishingrdquo is for searching fish schoolsSince ldquoCruisingrdquo uses a higher clutterrejection setting than fishing it is notrecommended for fish detection -weak fish echoes may not bedisplayed ldquoFishingrdquo clearly displaysweaker echoes

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 1248

6

5 Press the [MENUESC] key to closethe menu

The auto mode in use is shown as(Auto-Fishing) or

(Auto-Cruising) at the top left corner onthe screen

Note When in the auto mode SHIFTand CLUTTER cannot be adjustedmanually

Range offset

To display the bottom tail in detail in theautomatic mode offset the range as

below1 Press the [+] or [-] key of the

[RANGE] key

+0 ft

AUTO RANGE OFFSET

Auto range offset window

2 Press the [+] or [-] key of the[RANGE] key again to choose offsetdesired (range -100 to +300 ft)Note that if the basic range ischanged the offset is returned to ldquo0rdquo

3 Press the [MENUESC] key to finish

Gain offset

Gain offset lets you override automaticgain adjustment1 Press the [GAIN] key

Min Max 0

AUTO GAIN OFFSET

Auto gain offset window

2 Press or key to offset gain(setting range ndash5 to +5) The gainselected is shown at the top of thescreen asG (Gain) + (or -) XX (offset value)

3 Press the [MENUESC] key to finish

17 Manual OperationChoosing the manual mode

1 Press the [MENUESC] key to openthe main menu

2 Press to choose AUTO MODEfrom page 1 of the menu3 Press to show the window4 Choose Off with 5 Press the [MENUESC] key to close

the menu appears at the topleft corner on the screen

Choosing range

The basic range and range shiftingfunctions used together give you themeans to choose the depth you can seeon the screen The basic range can bethought of as providing a ldquowindowrdquo intothe water column and range shifting asmoving the ldquowindowrdquo to the desireddepth

Choosing basic range

The basic range may be chosen withthe [RANGE] key from the eight rangesshown in the table shown below (ldquoPBrdquoin the table means PassiBraza) Thesetting range can be arranged throughthe SYSTEM menu

Default ranges

Basic RangeUnit1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

meters 5 10 20 40 80 150 200 300

feet 15 30 60 120 200 400 600 1000

fathoms 3 5 10 20 40 80 100 150

hiro 4 8 15 30 50 100 150 200

PB 3 5 10 30 50 100 150 200

Japanese unit of depth measurement1 Press the [+] or [-] key of the

[RANGE] key and the display shouldnow look something like the one onat the top of the next page

2 Press the [+] or [-] key of the[RANGE] key again to choose abasic range

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 1348

7

1000ft 600ft 400ft 200ft 120ft 60ft 30ft 15ft

Basic ranges (default)3 Press the [MENUESC] key to close

the window

Shifting the range

The basic range may be shifted up ordown in the manual mode as follows

Display

Window can beshifted up anddown to selectthe depth

Range and display shift concept

1 Press the [MENUESC] key to openthe main menu

2 Choose SHIFT from page 1 of themenu

3 Press to open the shift optionswindow

0ft

Shift window

4 Use or $ to choose amount ofshift desired

5 Press the [MENUESC] key to closethe window

Note The picture may not be displayedif the amount of shift is greater thanactual depth

Adjusting the gain

The [GAIN] key adjusts the sensitivity ofthe receiver Generally use a highergain setting for greater depths and alower setting for shallower waters

Use the proper gain setting

Incorrect gain may produce wrong depthindication possibly resulting in a dangeroussituation

UTION

Gain too high Gain proper Gain too low Examples of proper and improper gain

1 Press the [GAIN] key and the displayshown below appears

Min Max

50k 3

200k 2

GAIN

Gain adjustment window

2 When using the dual frequencydisplay press or $ to choosefrequency

3 Press the [GAIN] key to set (Youmay also use or ) Adjust so thata slight amount of noise remains onthe screen

4 Press the [MENUESC] key to closethe gain adjustment window

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 1448

8

18 Measuring DepthThe VRM (Variable Range Marker)functions to measure the depth to fishschools etc1 Press or $ to place the VRM

on the object which you wish tomeasure range

2 Read the VRM depth just abovethe VRM

0

20

40

60

80496

398

VRM

VRM depth

50k 11

How to measure depth with the VRM

19 Choosing PictureAdvance Speed

The picture advance speed determineshow quickly the vertical scan lines runacross the screen When choosing apicture advance speed keep in mindthat a fast advance speed will expandthe size of the fish school horizontallyon the screen and a slow advancespeed will contract it Note that thepicture is not refreshed when pictureadvancement is stopped Thereforeuse caution when steering the vesselunder this condition

Fast Slow Picture and picture advancement speed

1 Press the [MENUESC] key to openthe main menu

2 Choose PIC ADVANCE from page 1of the menu

3 Press to show the optionswindow

Stop116 18 14 12 11 21 41

(

)

Fast

Slow

Picture advance options window

4 Use or $ to choose pictureadvance speed desired Thefractions in the options windowdenote the number of scan linesproduced per transmission Forexample 18 means one scan line isproduced every 8 transmissionsldquoStoprdquo freezes the display and it isconvenient for taking a photo

The picture is not refreshed whenpicture advancement is stopped

Maneuvering the vessel in this conditionmay result in a dangerous situation

UTION

5 Press the [MENUESC] key to closethe menu

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 1548

9

110 SuppressingInterference

Interference from other acousticequipment operating nearby or other

electronic equipment on your boat mayshow itself on the display as shown inthe figure belowTo suppress interference do thefollowing1 Press the [MENUESC] key to open

the main menu2 Use or $ to choose NOISE LIMIT

from page 1 of the menu3 Press to show the options

window4 Use or $ to choose the degree ofsuppression desired Off LowMedium or High (highest)

5 Press the [MENUESC] key to closethe menu

Interference fromother sounder

Electrical interference

Forms of interference

Turn the noise limiter off when nointerference exists otherwise weakechoes may be missed

111 Suppressing LowLevel Noise

Low intensity ldquospecklesrdquo may appearover most of screen This is mainly due

to sediment in the water or noise Thesecan be suppressed by adjustingCLUTTER on the menu When theautomatic mode is on clutter isautomatically rejected To suppress lowlevel noise in manual sounder operationdo the following1 Press the [MENUESC] key to open

the main menu2 Use or $ to choose CLUTTER

from page 1 of the menu3 Press to show the optionswindow

4 Use or $ to choose the degree ofsuppression desired 1 2 3 4 5 or6 The higher the number the greaterthe suppression

5 Press the [MENUESC] key to closethe menu

To turn off low-level noisesuppression choose Off at step 4 andthen press the [MENUESC] key

Clutter appearance

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 1648

10

112 Erasing WeakEchoes

Sediment in the water or reflectionsfrom plankton may be painted on the

display in low intensity tones

Weakechoes

Appearance of weak echoes

These weak echoes may be erased asfollows1 Press the [MENUESC] key to open

the main menu2 Use or $ to choose SIGNAL

LEVEL from page 1 of the menu3 Press to show the options

window4 Use or $ to choose the degree of

suppression desired Off Low orHigh (highest)

5 Press the [MENUESC] key to closethe menu

To turn off the signal level function choose Off at step 4 and then pressthe [MENUESC] key

113 A-scope DisplayThis display shows echoes at eachtransmission with amplitudes and toneproportional to their intensities on theright 14 of the screen It is useful forestimating the kind of fish school andbottom composition

Note In the dual frequency display the A-scope display is only available withthe high frequency display

323

10

20

30

40

0

A-scope display

Single frequency display

Strong

reflection(bottom)

Weakreflection(fish or noise)

50k 11

Strongreflection(fish)

A-scope display

1 Press the [MENUESC] key to openthe main menu

2 Press or $ to choose A-SCOPEfrom page 1 of the menu

3 Press to show the optionswindow

4 Press

or$

to choose the A-scope presentation type desiredNormal Display shows echoes ateach transmission with amplitudesand tone proportional to theirintensitiesPeak Peak-hold amplitude picture

5 Press the [MENUESC] key to closethe menu

To turn off the A-scope displaychoose Off at step 4 and then press the[MENUESC] key

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 1748

11

114 AlarmsAlarm description

The LS-4100 has six conditions whichgenerate both audio and visual alarms

bottom alarm normal fish alarm bottomlock fish alarm water temperature alarmarrival alarm and speed alarm (Thewater temperature arrival and speedalarms require appropriate sensors)

Bottom alarm The bottom alarm alertsyou when the bottom is within the alarmrange set To activate the bottom alarmthe depth must be displayed

Fish (normal) alarm The fish (normal)alarm tells you when fish are within thepreset alarm range

Fish (bottom lock) alarm The fish(bottom lock) alarm available with thebottom-lock mode sounds when fishare within a certain distance from thebottom Note that the bottom zoom

display must be turned on to use thisalarm

Water temperature alarm The watertemperature alarm alerts when thewater temperature is within (Insidealarm) the alarm range set orunderover (outside alarm) the rangeset

Speed alarm The speed alarm alertsyou when the speed is within (Insidealarm) or underover (Outside alarm)the preset speed

Arrival alarm The arrival alarm alertswhen you are near a waypoint by thedistance set

Activating an alarm

1 Press the [MENUESC] key2 Press or $ to choose ALARM

MENU from page 2 on the menu3 Press the to show the ALARM

menu

ALARM

(12)

[MENU] Exit

ALARM

(22)

[MENU] Exit

BOTTOM On FROM 5ft

RANGE 10ftFISH(Normal) On

FROM 5ft RANGE 10ftFISH(BL) On

FROM 8ft RANGE 10ftFISH LEVEL Medium

TEMPERATURE Inside FROM 724 deg F RANGE 10 deg F

SPEED Off FROM 00kt

RANGE 10kt

ARRIVAL ALRM Off RANGE 0 01 m

Pageno

Gray characters mean alarm is inactive Alarm menu

4 Use or $ to choose an alarm asappropriate

5 Press to show the options menu

Off On

Off InsideOutside

Temp Speed Alarm Types

Fish ArrivalBottom AlarmOnOff

Alarm options6 Use or $ to choose alarm type

Off Alarm off On Alarm onInside Alarm generated whenspeed (or water temperature) iswithin the range setOutside Alarm generated whenspeed (or water temperature) isoutside the range set

7 Press to close the windowFor ARRIVAL ALARM setting skip tostep 12

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 1848

12

8 Press $ to choose FROM9 Press to show the options menu

0ft

Depth

632 deg F

Temperature

10 kt

Speed Depth temperature speed setting

window10 Use or $ to set starting depth

temperature or speed as appropriateFor FISH (BL) the starting depth isthe range from the bottom

11 Press to close the window12 Press $ to choose RANGE13 Press to show the options menu14 Use or $ to set alarm range15 For the bottom alarm temperature

alarm speed alarm or arrivalalarm press the [MENUESC] key tofinish For a fish alarm press toclose the window and then go tostep 16

16 Press $ to choose FISH LEVEL17 Press to show the options menu

Weak

MediumStrong Fish level options

18 Use or $ to choose the echostrength level which will trigger a fishalarm

Weak Weak echoes (weakest toneon level bar)Medium Medium strength echoes

(middle tone on level bar)Strong Strong echoes (darkest toneon level bar)

19 Press the [MENUESC] key twice toclose the menu

Alarm range marker Bottom alarm Fish alarm (normal) Right Fish alarm (bottomlock) Left

Alarm icon

Alarm rangeStartingpoint

Bottom alarm Fish alarm (normal) Fish alarm (BL)

Temperature alarm (deg

C ordeg

F shown) Speed alarm Arrival alarm

Alarm icon (Appropriate icon appears to showwhich alarm has been violated)

How the alarm works

Note To disable an alarm choose Offat step 5 in the above procedure

Silencing the buzzer

The buzzer sounds and the appropriatealarm icon appears and flashes whenan alarm is violated You can silence thebuzzer by pressing any key Howeverthe buzzer will sound whenever thealarm setting is violated

Note The audio and visual alarms arereleased against the last-violated alarmwhen multiple alarms are active

115 WaypointsWaypoints may be used tobull Record the position of an important

echo as waypoint 12 points may beregistered

bull Output a waypoint position to a plotterto mark position on its screen

bull Find range bearing and time-to-go toa location (waypoint)

Note Requires latitude and longitudeposition from a navigator

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 1948

13

Registering a waypoint on thescreen

1 Press the [MARK] key The cursorappears along with waypoint entryinstructions To enter a waypoint tothe current own shiprsquos position go tostep 3Note If there is no position data themessage ldquoNo position datardquo appearsCheck the navigator

50k

496

1100

20

40

60

80

0

Cursor

WAYPOINT ENTRY

( Move) Cursor [MARK] Enter [MENU] Cancel

50 kHz display

2 Press the cursor pad to set thecursor where desired Pictureadvancement is stopped until step 3is completed and the instructionwindow is integrated into the navdisplay

3 Press the [MARK] key again WhenTLL or FURUNO-TLL is selected atTLL OUTPUT on the System menuthe latitude and longitude position atthe cursor is output to the navigator

A vertical line marks location Furtherthe display shows the waypointname (next sequential number) andposition of the location selected atstep 2

WAYPOINTName FREQLat 34 deg 22796NLon 136 deg 07264E

05

[MENU] Exit

rase

Waypoint data display

Note If you attempt to enter 13thwaypoint the message ldquoMemoryfullrdquo appears In this case erase anunwanted waypoint to enable entry

4 To save the waypoint under thename shown go to step 8 or go tostep 5 to change its name

5 Press to open the waypoint nameentry window

WAYPOINTName FREQLat 34 deg 22796NLon 136 deg 07264E

05

[MENU] Exit

01------ ENT

rase

Waypoint window name entry6 Use or to set character $ or

to shift cursor The name mayconsist of 10 alphanumericcharactersNote Character order is 0 1hellip9 - A BhellipZ _ 0hellip

7 Press to choose ENT 8 Press the [MENUESC] key to

register the waypoint

Registering waypoint by LL

1 Press the [MENUESC] key to openthe main menu

2 Use or to choose WAYPOINTLIST from page 2 of the menu

3 Press

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 2048

14

WAYPOINT LIST

01 0102 0303------------------------------------------------------

[MENU] Exit

Waypoint list4 Press or to choose an empty

waypoint and press Press again

NEW WAYPOINTName FREQLat 34 deg 22796NLon 136 deg 07264E

05

[MENU] Exit

04------ ENT

rase

New waypoint window name entry

5 Use or to set character $ or to shift cursor

6 Press to select ENT 7 Enter latitude and longitude similar

to how you entered waypoint name8 Press the [MENUESC] key to

register the waypoint

Editing waypoints Press the [MENUESC] key to open

the main menu

2 Use or to choose WAYPOINTLIST from page 2 of the menu

3 Press to open the waypoints list4 Use or to choose a waypoint

and press 5 Use or to choose the item to

edit (name latitude or longitude)6 Press to open the data entry

window7 Use or to set character $ or

to choose location8 Press to choose ENT 9 Press the [MENUESC] key

Erasing waypoints Press the [MENUESC] key2 Use or to choose WAYPOINT

LIST from page 2 of the menu3 Press to open the waypoints list

4 Use or to choose the waypointto erase and then press Note You cannot erase a waypointwhich is selected as ldquoGOTO WPTrdquo

5 Press to choose ldquoEraserdquo6 Press to open the options window7 Press to select YES to erase the

waypoint The waypoint list appearswith the erased waypoint blank

8 Press the [MENUESC] key twice toclose the menu

Setting destination waypoint

Set a destination waypoint to find rangebearing and time-to-go to that point Youcan see range and bearing to awaypoint Time-to-go is shown on theTime to Go digital display

Press the [MENUESC] key to openthe main menu

2 Use or to choose GOTO WPTfrom page 2 of the menu

3 Press to open the waypoints list

Off01020304----------------------------------------------------------------

Waypoint list

4 Use or to choose a waypoint5 Press the [MENUESC] key to close

the menu

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 2148

15

116 Setting Up Nav DataDisplays

The user may arrange the nav datadisplays as desired

1 Use the [MODE] key to show theNAV DATA-1 or 2 display whicheveryou want to set up

2 Press the [MENUESC] key to closethe mode selection window

3 Press the cursor pad to display theNAV DATA SETUP window

NAV DATA SETUP

Window Selection Data Selection

[MENU] Exit

NAV DATA SETUP window

4 Use or to choose a datadisplay window desired Adashed-line rectangle circumscribesyour selection

5 Use

or$

to choose item todisplay See the below for adescription of the displays

(9)

(1)

(2)

(3)

(4)(5)

(6)(7)(8)

Two-data

display

Three-data

display

Four-data

displayItems displayable in (1) - (3) depth positioncourse range and bearing trip distanceodometer water temperature headingair pressure time-to-go to destination waypointXTE speed wind speed and directiondestination waypoint data compassItems displayable in (4) - (9) depth positionspeed course range and bearing trip distanceodometer water temperature headingair pressure time-to-go to destination waypointXTE wind speed wind direction

= Graphic display

Nav data window and item displayable6 Press the [MENUESC] key to finish

Note You can choose the number ofitems to show in a nav data display withNAV DATA-1 and NAV DATA-2 on theSystem menu

GRAPHIC DISPLAYS

1 05 0 05 1

Wpt 03Rng 019nm Brg 321 deg XTE 000nm Cse 333 deg

DESTINATION WAYPOINT GRAPHIC

XTEscale

BearingCourseDestinationwaypointdirection

DestinationwaypointdataNameRangeXTE

Wind APP

WIND GRAPHIC

60

120

90

030

150180

120

150

90

60

30

120 deg

Speed 103 ms

COMPASS GRAPHIC

SPEED GRAPHIC

172

Speed

20

50

40

60

30

10

01 05 0 05 1

025 nm

XTE

XTE GRAPHIC

kt

Bearing todestinationwaypoint

Course

Brg30 deg

Cse90 deg

N

E

XTE scale

Speed-ometer

Nav data display-1

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 2248

16

DIGITAL DISPLAYS

Course

123 deg

COURSE

Depth

328 ft

DEPTH

Heading TRUEMAG

318 deg

HEADING

Odometer

56 nm

ODOMETER

Position GPS 3D

30 deg 00065N130 deg 00574E

POSITION

Temperature

698 degF

WATER TEMPERATURE

Trip meter

121 nm

TRIP DISTANCE

Time to Go

00 H30 M

TIME-TO-GO

1018 hpa

AIR PRESSURE

Air Pressure

Speed

193 kt

SPEED

Rng

121 nm

RANGE amp BEARING

Brg

140 deg

Wind Speed APP

80 ms

WIND SPEED

Wind Dir APP

138 deg

WIND DIRECTION

APP or TRUE depending on menu setting TRUE or MAG depending

on menu settingamp To destination waypoint

Note 1 Nav data is updated with somedelay

Note 2 When data is lost 120 sec thedisplay shows - - at the locationwhere data is lost

= GPS receiving status (Displays whenconnecting with GP-310B320B and InOutis selected at the Installation menu)NO FIX Position cannot be foundGPS 2D 2D (dimension) GPS position fixGPS 3D 3D GPS fixGPS W2D 2D WAAS position fixGPS W3D 3D WAAS position fix

NAV data display-2

117 Other Menu ItemsThis section describes the menu itemsnot previously mentioned

Page 1

HUE (Picture Color)

Two picture color arrangements areavailable Day and Night Day showsechoes on a white background Nightshows them on a black background

1 Press the [MENUESC] key todisplay the menu

2 Use or $ to choose HUE frompage 1 of the menu

3 Press to show the optionswindow

4 Use or $ to choose Day or Nightas appropriate

5 Press the [MENUESC] key to closethe menu

WHITE LINE

The white line feature displays theleading edge of the bottom echo in

white This is useful for discriminatingbottom fish near the bottom

1 Press the [MENUESC] key todisplay the main menu

2 Use or $ to choose WHITE LINEfrom page 1 of the menu

3 Press to show the optionswindow

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 2348

17

4 Use or to choose Off Tone orMesh as appropriate ldquoMeshrdquo paintsthe white line in darker tone thanldquoTonerdquo

5 Press the [MENUESC] key to closethe menu

526White Line OFF White Line ON (Mesh)

Fish schoolclearly shown

White line

0

20

40

60

80

050k 11

526

0

20

40

60

80

00 050k 11

How white line works

DEEP GAIN

ldquoDeep Gainrdquo compensates forpropagation attenuation of the ultrasonicwaves It does this by equalizing echopresentation so that fish schools of thesame size appear in the same density inboth shallow and deep waters Inaddition it reduces surface noise

Press the [MENUESC] key to openthe main menu

2 Use or to choose DEEP GAINfrom page of the menu

3 Press $ to show to the optionswindow

4 Choose Low Medium or High asappropriate High provides thegreatest degree of gain reductionagainst short range echoes

5 Press the [MENUESC] key to closethe menu

Page 2

TRIP RESET

This item resets trip distance to ldquo0rdquo

Press the [MENUESC] key to openthe main menu

2 Use or to choose TRIPRESET from page 2 of the menu

3 Press $ 4 Press to reset trip distance

Beeps are generated while the tripdistance is being reset

5 Press the [MENUESC] key to closethe menu

Note To reset the odometer to zeroclear the memory

GAIN ADJ 200 GAIN ADJ 50

If the gain is too high or too low or thegain for the low and high frequenciesappears unbalanced you cancompensate it as follows

Press the [MENUESC] key to openthe main menu

2 Use or to choose GAIN ADJ200 or GAIN ADJ 50 from page 2 ofthe menu

3 Press $ to show to the optionswindow

4 Use or to set the amount Thesetting range is ndash50 to +50

5 Press the [MENUESC] key to close

the menu

DRAFT

The default depth display shows thedistance from the transducer If youwould rather show the distance from thesea surface set your shiprsquos draft asfollows

Press the [MENUESC] key to openthe main menu

2 Use or to choose DRAFT frompage 2 of the menu

3 Press $ and then use or to setdraft The setting range is ndash 50 to+500 (meters feet)

4 Press the [MENUESC] key to closethe menu

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 2448

18

2 SYSTEM MENU

The System menu mainly consists ofitems which once set do not requirefrequent adjustment You may displaythis menu by choosing SYSTEM MENUat page 2 of the main menu andpressing

SYSTEM MENULANGUAGE English

DEPTH UNIT ftSPEED UNIT ktWIND UNIT msTEMP UNIT deg F

TEMP GRAPH OffNAV DATA-1 NAV DATA-2

WATER TYPE SaltKEY BEEP OnBATT VOLTAGE Off (13)

[MENU] Exit

SYSTEM MENU

(23)

NAV DISPLAY TempSpeedNMEA0183 Ver 20TLL OUTPUT OffBEARING TrueWIND SPDDIR ApparentTRIP SOURCE Own

TEMP SOURCE OwnSPEED SOURCE OwnTEMP CALIB +00 deg F ( 40)SPEED CALIB +0 ( 50)

Own speed Own temp 100 kt 162 deg F

[MENU] Exit

SYSTEM MENU

(33)

BASIC RANGE1 15 ft

RANGE2 30RANGE3 60RANGE4 120RANGE5 200RANGE6 400RANGE7 600RANGE8 1000 (7-1500)

ZOOM RANGE 15 ft (7-150)BL RANGE 15 ft (10-30)(Bottom Lock)

ZOOM MARKER On

[MENU] Exit

PAGE 3

PAGE 2

PAGE 1

Page no

System menus

21 System MenuPage 1

LANGUAGE The system language isavailable in English several Europeanlanguages and Japanese To changelanguage select language desired andpress the [MENUESC] key

DEPTH UNIT Choose unit of depthmeasurement from meters feet

fathoms passibraza and hiro(Japanese)

SPEED UNIT Choose unit of speedmeasurement from knots miles perhour and kilometers per hour Requiresspeed data

WIND UNIT Choose unit of wind speedmeasurement from ms kt kmh and

mph Requires wind speed data

TEMP UNIT Choose unit oftemperature measurement Celsius orFahrenheit Requires temperature data

TEMP GRAPH Turns the watertemperature display on or off Thetemperature scale range is 16deg (degF) inldquoNarrowrdquo 40deg (degF) in ldquoWiderdquo Requires

water temperature data

m526

0

20

40

60

80

00 050k 11

40

80

70

50

60

TemperatureScale

TemperatureGraph

638 deg F162kt

Water temperature display (wide degF)

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 2548

19

NAV DATA-1 -2 Choose the number ofnavigation data items to display on thenav data displays from two three orfour items Requires appropriate navdata

WATER TYPE Choose the water typewith which to use the LS-4100 fromSalt or Fresh

KEY BEEP Turn key beep on or off

BATT VOLTAGE Turn the batteryvoltage indication (appears at the topright corner on the screen) on or offWhen on it replaces the picture advancespeed indication

Page 2

NAV DISPLAY Choose the nav data todisplay in the nav data window at thetop left-hand corner You may choosefrom temperaturespeedlatitudelongitude range and bearingcourse over ground trip distance or

wind speed Requires appropriate navdata

407 deg F162kt

Nav window

NMEA0183 Choose NMEA version ofnavigator Ver 15 Ver 20 or Ver 30

TLL OUTPUT Enablesdisables outputof TLL (Target Latitude Longitude)position when the [MARK] key isoperated ldquoTLLrdquo outputs latitude andlongitude position ldquoFURUNO-TLLrdquoavailable with connection of navigatorthat can output FURUNO TLL outputslatitude and longitude watertemperature depth etc

BEARING Shiprsquos course and bearingto a waypoint may be displayed in trueor magnetic bearing Magnetic bearingis true bearing plus (or minus) earthrsquosmagnetic deviation Requires bearingdata

WIND SPDDIR Choose the windspeed and direction reference from trueand apparent Requires wind sensorApparen t The direction (in relation toshiprsquos bow) and speed of the wind as itappears to those on board relative tothe speed and direction of the boatcombination of the true wind and thewind caused by the boats movementTrue The speed and direction (inrelation to shiprsquos bow) of the wind felt ormeasured when stationary

TRIP SOURCE Choose speed sourcefor the trip distance indication Own(transducer with speed sensor orseparate speed sensor) or NMEA

TEMP SOURCE Choose source ofwater temperature input Off Own(transducer with water temperaturesensor or separate temperature sensor)or NMEA

SPEED SOURCE Choose source ofspeed input Off Own (transducer withspeed sensor or separate speedsensor) or NMEA Requires speed

data

TEMP CALIB If the water temperaturesensor-generated water temperatureindication is wrong you can correct ithere when ldquoOwnrdquo is selected astemperature source For example if thewater temperature indication is 2deghigher than actual water temperatureenter -2 The setting range is -40degF to

+40degF

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 2648

20

SPEED CALIB If the speedsensor-generated speed indication iswrong you can correct it here whenldquoOwnrdquo is selected as speed source Forexample if the speed indication is 10lower than actual speed enter +10 Thesetting range is ndash50 to +50

Page 3

BASIC RANGE 1 - BASIC RANGE 8 Set range of each of the eight basicranges (Selectable range 7 to 1500 ft)Note 1 All default basic ranges arerestored whenever the depth unit ischanged Therefore change the depth

unit before changing the basic rangesNote 2 A range may not be lower thanthe range preceding it For example ifbasic range 3 is 60 feet basic range 4must be greater than 60 feet

ZOOM RANGE Choose the range tozoom in the marker-zoom andbottom-zoom modes You may choose arange between 7 and 150 feet (2 and 50

meters)

BL RANGE The expansion width forthe bottom-lock display can be chosenfrom 10 to 30 feet (3 and 10 meters)

ZOOM MARKER The zoom markerappears in the normal bottom markerand bottom zoom displays and marksthe area which is expanded in the

bottom marker and bottom zoompictures You can turn the marker on oroff as desired

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 2748

21

3 MAINTENANCETROUBLESHOOTING

W RNING

ELECTRICAL SHOCK HAZARDDo not open the equipment

Only qualified personnel should workinside the equipment

31 Maintenance

Regular maintenance is essential forgood performance Checking the itemslisted in the table below monthly willhelp keep your equipment in goodshape for years to come

Checking

Item Action

Transducercable

Check cable for damage

Power cabletransducercable plug

Check that they are tightlyfastened Refasten ifnecessary

Display unitground

Check for corrosion Cleanif necessary

Power supplyvoltage

Check voltage If out ofrating correct problem

32 Cleaning the DisplayUnit

Dust or dirt on the display unit can beremoved with a soft cloth If desired awater-moistened cloth may be usedUse special care when cleaning theLCD since it scratches easily Do notuse chemical cleaners to clean thedisplay unit - they can remove paint andmarkings

33 TransducerMaintenance

Marine life on the transducer face willresult in a gradual decrease insensitivity Check the transducer facefor cleanliness each time the boat isdry-docked Carefully remove anymarine life with a piece of wood orfine-grade sandpaper

34 Replacing the FuseThe fuse in the power cable protects thesystem from reverse polarity of thepower supply and equipment fault If thefuse blows find the cause beforereplacing it Use only a 1A fuse (FGMB 1A 125V Code No 000-114-805 ) orequivalent Using the wrong fuse will damage the unit and void the warranty

W RNINGUse the proper fuse

Fuse rating is shown on the equipmentUse of a wrong fuse can result in fire anddamage the equipment

35 Battery Voltage Alert A battery icon appears when the batteryvoltage is too high or too low

Battery icon and meaning

Icon Meaning

Voltage is lower than 10 VDC If thevoltage goes below 9 V the equipmentis automatically turned off

Voltage is higher than 165 VDC If thevoltage goes higher than 175 V theequipment is automatically turned off

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 2848

22

36 TroubleshootingThe table below provides basictroubleshooting procedures which theuser may follow to restore normaloperation

Troubleshooting table

Ifhellip Then check hellipneither echo norfixed range scaleappears

bull battery voltagebull fusebull power cable

no echo appearsbut the fixedrange scaleappears

bull if display advancespeed is set to ldquoStoprdquo

bull transducer plugbull

transducer cableecho appears butno zero line

bull if range shifting is setto ldquo0rdquo

sensitivity is low bull gain settingbull if air bubbles or marine

life is clinging to thetransducer face

bull if sediments arepresent in the water

bull if the bottom is too soft

to return an echothere is extremeinterference ornoise

bull if the transducer is tooclose to the engine

bull if the unit is properlygrounded

bull if other echo soundersof the same frequencyas own are beingoperated nearby

the speedwatertemperaturereadout isunrealistic or notpresent

bull sensor plug

the positionreadout isunrealistic or notpresent

bull the connectionbetween sounder andnavigator

bull navigator

37 DiagnosticsIf you feel your unit is not workingproperly conduct the diagnostic test tofind the problem If you cannot restorenormal operation contact your dealerfor advice

1 Turn on the power while pressing the[MENUESC] key Continue pressingthe [MENUESC] key until theInstallation menu appears

SIMULATION On

TEST LCD PATTERN MEMORY CLEAR

NMEA PORT InOutNMEA MIX Off GPS WAAS Off

SET BOTTOM LEVEL

Installation Menu

= Setting cannot be changed whenNMEA PORT setting is InIn

Installation menu2 Press to choose TEST3 Press to start the test

ROM OKRAM OKNMEA

Temp 682 deg F

Speed 100kmh

Power 124 VBody 39 deg C

Program No 0252318-01Push [MENU] 3 times to exit

Level bar

= Program version no

Water

TemperatureSpeedBattery VoltageTemperatureinside displayunit(Unit fixed atdeg C)

GPS (48502180) OK

Only when GP-310B is connected(For GP-320B 4850238)

Test display

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 2948

23

4 The ROM RAM and NMEA port arechecked with the results shown asOK or NG (No Good) For any NGrequest service (A special connectoris required to test the NMEA portNothing appears if no connector isconnected)

5 The squares at the right side of thetest display are for checking thecontrols Press each key and thearrows on the Cursor Pad one byone A controlrsquos correspondingon-screen square ldquolightsrdquo in black ifthe control is normal

6 To return to the Installation menupress the [MENUESC] key threetimes

7 To restore normal operation turn offthe power and turn it on again

38 Test PatternThis feature tests for proper display oftones

1 On the Installation menu press $ tochoose LCD PATTERN

2 Press to start the test The entirescreen is black

3 Press again and the screen turnswhite

4 Press again and the screenshows a four-toned display

5 Press again to return to theInstallation menu

6 To restore normal operation turn offthe power and then it on again

WHITE FOUR-TONE BLACK

Test patterns

39 Memory ClearThe memory can be cleared to startafresh with default menu settings

1 At the installation menu press $ tochoose MEMORY CLEAR

2 Press to open the optionswindow

YES NO

Clear memory display

3 Press to clear the memory Beepsare generated while the memory isbeing cleared

4 To restore normal operation turn offthe power and then turn it on again

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3048

24

4 INSTALLATION

41 Display UnitMounting considerations

The display unit can be installed on adesktop on the bulkhead or flushmounted in a panel When choosing alocation keep the following in mind

bull Keep the display unit out of directsunlight

bull The temperature and humidity should

be moderate and stablebull Locate the unit away from exhaust

pipes and ventsbull The mounting location should be well

ventilatedbull Mount the unit where shock and

vibration are minimalbull For maintenance and checking

purposes leave sufficient space atthe sides and rear of the unit andleave slack in cables

bull A magnetic compass will be affected ifthe display unit is placed too close toit Observe the following compasssafe distances to prevent disturbanceto the magnetic compassStandard compass 04 metersSteering compass 03 meters

Desktop overhead mounting1 Fix the bracket to a desktop or the

overhead with tapping screws(supplied)

2 Loosely screw knobs into the displayunit

3 Set the display unit to the bracketand then tighten the knobs

Mounting on the bulkhead Flush

mounting in a panelSee the instructions on the bulkhead orflush mounting template (supplied)

42 Thru-hull MountTransducer

Transducer mounting location

The thru-hull mount transducer

(520-5PSD 520-5MSD) provides thebest performance of all since thetransducer protrudes from the hull andthe effect of air bubbles and turbulencenear the hull skin is reduced When theboat has a keel the transducer shouldbe at least 30 cm away from it Typicalthru-hull mountings are shown in thefigure on the next page

The performance of this sounder isdirectly related to the mounting locationof the transducer especially forhigh-speed cruising The installationshould be planned in advance keepingthe standard cable length (8 m) and thefollowing factors in mindbull Air bubbles and turbulence caused by

movement of the boat seriouslydegrade the sounding capability of thetransducer The transducer shouldtherefore be located in a positionwhere water flow is the smoothestNoise from the propellers alsoadversely affects performance andthe transducer should not be mountednearby The lifting strakes arenotorious for creating acoustic noiseand these must be avoided bykeeping the transducer inboard ofthem

bull The transducer must always remain

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3148

25

submerged even when the boat isrolling pitching or up on a plane athigh speed

bull A practical choice would besomewhere between 13 and 12 of

the boatrsquos length from the stern Forplaning hulls a practical location isgenerally rather far astern so that thetransducer is always in waterregardless of the planing attitude

28

22

120

68

30

520-5PSD

24

120

68

87520-5MSD

Unit mm

Thru-hull mount transducer dimensions

Acceptable transducer mounting

locations

Position 12 to 13 of the hull from stern

15 to 30 cm off center line (inside first lifting strakes)

Within the wetted bottom area

Deadrise angle within 15 deg

HIGH SPEED-V HULL

Suitable transducer mounting locations

Typical thru-hull mounttransducer installations

FairingBlock

Flat Washer

Rubber Washer

Hull

Deep-V Hull

Hull

Flat Washer

Rubber Washer

Flat Hull

CorkWasher

Typical thru-hull mounttransducer installations

Procedure for installing thethru-hull mount transducer

1 With the boat hauled out of the watermark the location chosen formounting the transducer on thebottom of the hull

2 If the hull is not level within 15deg inany direction fairing blocks madeout of teak should be used betweenthe transducer and hull both insideand outside to keep the transducerface parallel with the water lineFabricate the fairing block as shownbelow and make the entire surfaceas smooth as possible to provide anundisturbed flow of water around thetransducer The fairing block shouldbe smaller than the transducer itselfto provide a channel to divert

turbulent water around the sides ofthe transducer rather than over itsface

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3248

26

BOWHole for stuffing tube

Upper Half

Lower Half

Saw along slopeof hull Construction of fairing block

3 Drill a hole just large enough to passthe threaded stuffing tube of thetransducer through the hull makingsure it is drilled vertically

4 Apply a sufficient amount of highquality caulking compound to the topsurface of the transducer around thethreads of the stuffing tube andinside the mounting hole (and fairingblocks if used) to ensure watertightmounting

5 Mount the transducer and fairingblocks and tighten the locking nutsBe sure that the transducer is

properly oriented and its workingface is parallel to the waterline

Note Do not over-stress the stuffingtube and locking nuts through excessivetightening since the wood block willswell when the boat is placed in thewater It is suggested that the nut betightened lightly at installation andretightened several days after the boat

has been launched

Transducer preparation

Before putting the boat in water wipethe face of the transducer thoroughlywith a detergent liquid soap This willlessen the time necessary for thetransducer to have good contact withthe water Otherwise the time requiredfor complete ldquosaturationrdquo ill belengthened and performance will bereduced

DO NOT paint the transducerPerformance will be affected

43 Transom MountTransducer

The transom mount transducer is verycommonly employed usually onrelatively small IO or outboard boatsDo not use this method on an inboardmotor boat because turbulence iscreated by the propeller ahead of thetransducer

520-5PWD

There are two methods of installationflush with hull (for flat hulls) andprojecting from hull (for deep V-hulls)

Flat Hull

D

Dgt50 cm

Deep-VHull

520-5PWD mounting locations

Installing the 520-5PWD on a flat hull

A suitable mounting location is at least50 cm away from the engine and wherethe water flow is smooth

1 Drill four pilot holes in the mountinglocation

2 Attach the transducer to the bracketwith 5 x 20 tapping screws(supplied)

3 Adjust the transducer position so thetransducer faces right to the bottom

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3348

27

Note If necessary to improve waterflow and minimize air bubblesstaying on the transducer faceincline the transducer about 5deg at therear This may require a certainamount of experimentation for finetuning at high cruising speeds

4 Fill the gap between the wedge frontof the transducer and transom withepoxy material to eliminate any airspaces

No1 M5 x 14

5 x 20

5 x 20

2 to 5

Tape

Hull

Transom mount transducer

mounting flush with hull

Installing the transom mounttransducer on a deep-V hull

This method is employed on deep-Vhulls and provides good performancebecause the effects of air bubbles areminimal Install the transducer parallelwith water surface not flush with hull Ifthe boat is placed on a trailer care mustbe taken not to damage the transducerwhen the boat is hauled out of the waterand put on the trailer

5 x 20

No 2M5 x 14

5 x 20

Transom mount transducermounted projecting from hull

525-5PWD

Choose the installation methoddepending on the rise angle of the hull

Transom

Transom

Stripe over 10

Parallel with hull

Mount at the stripe

less than 10

525-5PWD mounting location

Installing the 525-5PWD

Referring to ldquoInstalling the 520-5PWDrdquoin the left column for mounting of thebracket and the figure shown on the topof next page install the 525-5PWD tothe transom

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3448

28

2 to 5

Transducer

Bracket

Hull

Epoxy material

525-5PWD mounting

44 Inside-hullTransducer

The thru-hull mount transducer(520-5PSD 520-5MSD) may also beinstalled inside the hull following theprocedure below

Necessary tools

You will need the following toolsbull Sandpaper (100)bull Silicone sealantbull Silicone grease

Remarks on installationbull Turn off the engine and anchor the

boat while installing the equipmentbull Install the transducer in the engine

room

Choosing the mounting locationbull The mounting location should be

where the hull is of single-hullthickness and is void of air or flotationmaterials other than solid fiberglassbetween the transducer face and thewater

bull Do not place the transducer over hullstruts or ribs which run under the hull

bull Avoid a location where the risingangle of the hull exceeds 15deg tominimize the effect of the boatrsquosrolling

bull You will finalize the mounting location

through some trial and error Theprocedure for this is shown later

50 cm

50 cm15 cm15 cm

13

12

Transducer mountinglocation

Centerline

Inside-hull transducer mounting location

Attaching the transducer1 Clean the transducer face to remove

any foreign material Lightly roughenthe transducer face with 100sandpaper Also roughen the insideof the hull where the transducer is tobe mounted

2 Clean the transducer face again3 Warm the silicone sealant to 40degC

before usage to soften it Coat thetransducer face and mountinglocation with silicone sealant

Transducer

SiliconeSealant

Coating transducer facewith silicone sealant

4 Press the transducer firmly down onthe hull and gently twist it back andforth to remove any air which may betrapped in the silicone sealant

Checking the installation

1 Connect the battery to the display

unit2 Turn on the display unit

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3548

29

3 Press the [MODE] key to chooseSINGLE FREQ

4 Choose 50 kHz or 200 kHz and thenpress the [MENUESC] key to closethe mode menu

5 Press the [MENU] to show the mainmenu and then press to select

Auto mode6 Press to choose Off7 Press the [MENUESC] key8 Press the [GAIN] key to set the gain

to ldquo5rdquo and then press the[MENUESC] key

9 Press the [RANGE] key to set therange to 10 meters (feet) and thenpress the [MENUESC] key

10 If the bottom is displayed in darkgray and the depth indicationappears the mounting location issuitable Go to ldquoFinal preparationrdquo

11 If the bottom is not displayed in darkgray tone the mounting location maybe unsuitable Do the followinga) Press the [POWERBRILL] key to

turn off the powerb) Gently dismount the transducer

with a piece of woodc) Reattach the transducer

elsewhere as shown in ldquoAttachingthe transducerrdquo

d) Check the installation again

Final preparation

Support the transducer with a piece ofwood to keep it in place while it is drying

Let the transducer dry 24-72 hours

45 Optional Triducer525ST-MSD

The optional triducer 525ST-MSD isdesigned for thru-hull mounting Forhow to install this transducer seeparagraph 42

φ79 mm

33 mm200-12 UNthreads

φ51 mm

27 mm

7 mm

140 mm Triducer 525ST-MSD

525ST-PWD

The Transom Mount Transducer orTRIDUCER reg Multisensor with IntegralRelease Bracket 525ST-PWD ismanufactured by AIRMAR Co Theseinstructions are also included with the

sensor

Pre-test for speed and temperature

Connect the sensor to the instrumentand spin the paddlewheel Check for aspeed reading and the approximate airtemperature If there is no readingreturn the sensor to your place ofpurchase

Tools and materials needed

ScissorsMasking tapeSafety gogglesDust maskElectric drillDrill bit for

Bracket holes 4mm 23 or 964rdquoFiberglass hull chamfer bit(preferred)6mm or 14rdquo

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3648

30

Transom hole 19mm or 34rdquo(optional)

Cable clamp holes 3mm or 18rdquoScrewdriversStraight edgeMarine sealantPencilZip-tiesWater-based antifouling paint(mandatory in salt water )

Mounting location

To ensure the best performance thesensor must be submerged inaeration-free and turbulence-free water

Mount the sensor close to the centerlineof the boat On slower heavierdisplacement hulls positioning it fartherfrom the centerline is acceptable

Allow adequate space above thebracket for it to release and rotate thesensor upward

Height

Height withoutspeed sensor191mm (7-12)Height withspeed sensor213mm (8-12)

Height required at mounting location

Note 1 Do not mount the sensor in anarea of turbulence or bubbles nearwater intake or discharge openingsbehind strakes struts fittings or hull

irregularities behind eroding paint (anindication of turbulence)Note 2 Avoid mounting the sensorwhere the boat may be supportedduring trailering launching hauling andstorageNote 3 For single drive boat mounton the starboard side at least 75 mm(3rdquo) beyond the swing radius of thepropeller

75 mm(3)

minimum beyondswing radius

Mounting location on single drive boat

Note 4 For twin drive boat mountbetween the drives

Installation of bracket

1 Cut out the installation template

shown on the next page2 At the selected location position thetemplate so the arrow at the bottomis aligned with the bottom edge ofthe transom Being sure the templateis parallel to the waterline tape it inplace

Align template vertically

Deadrise angle

Slope of hullparallel towaterline

Align template arrow withbottom edge of transom

Positioning the template

Warning Always wear safetygoggles and a dust mask

3 Using a 4 mm 23 or 964rdquo bit drillthree holes 22 mm (78rdquo) deepat the locations indicated To preventdrilling too deeply wrap maskingtape around the bit 22 mm (78rdquo)from the pointFiberglass hull Minimize surfacecracking by chamfering the gelcoatIf a chamfer bit or countersink bit is

not available start drilling with a6mm or 14rdquo bit to a depth of 1 mm(116rdquo)

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3748

31

4 If you know your transom angle the

bracket is designed for a standard13deg transom angle11deg-18deg angle No shim is requiredSkip to step 3 in ldquoAdjustingrdquoOther angles The shim is requiredSkip to step 2 of ldquoAdjustingrdquoIf you do not know the transom angletemporarily attach the bracket andsensor to the transom to determine ifthe plastic shim is needed

5 Using the two 10 x 1-14rdquo

self-tapping screws temporarilyscrew the bracket to the hull DONOT tighten the screws completelyat this time Follow the step 1-4 inldquoAttaching the Sensor to the Bracketrdquobefore proceeding with ldquoAdjustingrdquo

Installation templatefor starboard side of boat

Drill at locations labeled Bfor the following transom angles

16 deg through 22 deg

Drill at locations labeled Afor the following transom angles

2 deg through 15 deg

Align arrow with bottom of transom

AA A

BB B

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3848

32

Adjusting

1 Using a straight edge sight theunderside of the sensor relative tothe underside of the hull The sternof the sensor should be 1-3 mm

(116-18rdquo) below the bow of thesensor or parallel to the bottom ofthe hull

11 deg transom angleNO SHIM

12-18 deg transom angleNO SHIM

2 deg -10 deg transom

angle

19 deg -22 deg transom

angleshim withtaper up

shim withtaper down

parallelparallel parallel

slightangle

angletoo steep

anglereversed

YES NONO

YES YESYES

Sensor position and transom angle

Note Do not position the bow of thesensor lower than the stern becauseaeration will occur

2 To adjust the sensorrsquos angle relativeto the hull use the tapered plasticshim provided If the bracket hasbeen temporarily fastened to thetransom remove it Key the shim in

place on the back of the bracket2deg-10deg transom angle (steppedtransom and jet boats) Positionthe shim with the tapered end down19deg-22deg transom angle (smallaluminum and fiberglass boats) Position the shim with the taperedend up

3 If the bracket has been temporarilyfastened to the transom remove it

Apply a marine sealant to thethreads of the two 10 x 1-14rdquo self

tapping screws to prevent waterseeping into the transom Screw thebracket to the hull Do not tighten thescrews completely at this time

4 Repeat step 1 to ensure that theangle of the sensor is correctNote Do not position the sensorfarther into the water than necessaryto avoid increasing drag spray andwater noise and reducing boatspeed

5 Using the vertical adjustment spaceon the bracket slots slide the sensorup or down to provide a projection of3 mm (18rdquo) Tighten the screws

Cable cover

Cableclamp

50 mm (2)

Hull projection 3 mm (18)

Vertical adjustment and cable routing

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3948

33

Attaching the sensor to the bracket

1 If the retaining cover near the top ofthe bracket is closed open it bydepressing the latch and rotating thecover downward

Step 1 Step 2

Latch

Retainingcover

Pivotarm (2)

Slot (2)

Step 4

Step 3

Attaching the sensor to the bracket

2 Insert the sensorrsquos pivot arms intothe slots near the top of the bracket

3 Maintain pressure until the pivotarms click into place

4 Rotate the sensor downward until thebottom snaps into the bracket

5 Close the retaining cover to preventthe accidental release of the sensorwhen the boat is underway

Cable routing

Route the sensor cable over thetransom through a drain hole orthorough a new hole drilled in thetransom above the waterline

Never cut the cable or remote the

connector this will void the warranty Always wear safety goggles and a dustmask

1 If a hole must be drilled choose alocation well above the waterlineCheck for obstructions such as trimtabs pumps or wiring inside the hullMark the location with a pencil Drilla hole through the transom using a19 mm or 34rdquo bit (to accommodatethe connector)

2 Route the cable over or through thetransom

3 On the outside of the hull secure thecable against the transom using thecable clamps Position a cable clamp50 mm(2rdquo) above the bracket andmark the mounting hole with apencil

4 Position the second cable clamphalfway between the first clamp andthe cable hole Mark this mountinghole

5 If a hole has been drilled in thetransom open the appropriate slot inthe transom cable cover Position thecover over the cable where it entersthe hull Mark the two mounting

holes6 At each of the marked locations usea 3 mm or 18rdquo bit to drill a hole 10mm (38rdquo) deep The prevent drillingtoo deeply wrap masking tapearound the bit 10 mm (38rdquo) from thepoint

7 Apply marine sealant to the threadsof the 6 x 12rdquo self-tapping screw toprevent water from seeping into the

transom If you have drilled a holethrough the transom apply marinesealant to the space around thecable where it passes through thetransom

8 Position the two cable clamps andfasten them in place If used pushthe cable cover over the cable andscrew it in place

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4048

34

9 Route the cable to the instrumentbeing careful not to tear the cable

jacket when passing it though thebulkhead(s) and other parts of theboat To reduce electricalinterference separate the sensorcable from other electrical wiring andldquonoiserdquo sources Coil any excesscable and secure it in place withzip-ties to prevent damage

46 Optional WaterTemperatureSpeedSensor

Water temperaturespeed sensorST-02MSB and ST-02PSB which aredesigned for thru-hull mounting areoptionally available Install them asshown below

Mounting considerations

Choose a suitable mounting locationconsidering the followingbull Choose a place free from vibrationbull Choose a mid-boat flat position The

sensor does not have to be installedperfectly perpendicular The sensormust not be damaged in dry-dockingoperation

bull Choose a place apart from equipmentgenerating heat

bull Choose a place in the forwarddirection viewing from the drain holeto allow for circulation of coolingwater

1 Dry-dock the boat2 Make a hole of approx 51 mm

diameter in the mounting location3 Unfasten locknut and remove the

sensor section4 Apply high-grade sealant to the

flange of the sensor5 Pass the sensor casing through thehole

6 Face the notch on the sensor towardboatrsquos bow and tighten the flange

7 Set the sensor section to the sensorcasing and tighten the locknut

8 Launch the boat and check for waterleakage around the sensor

Locknut

Face notchtoward bow

Flange Nut

Coat withsilicone sealant Brim

φ 77

51

123

Water temperaturespeed sensor

ST-02MSB ST-02PSB

47 Wiring

Connect the LS-4100 powerdata cableassy MJ-A7SPF0005-020 (2 msupplied) to the POWER and thetransducer cable to the XDR connectorRefer to the interconnection diagram toconnect cables Leave slack in cables tofacilitate checking and maintenance

Note The fuse holder contains a springwhich fixes the fuse To preventdetachment of the spring which wouldcause loss of power tie the line asshown below

+ line (red)

Fuse holder

Cable tie How to fix fuse holder

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4148

35

Establishing the ground

The ground wire (125 sq or more localsupply) should be as short as possible

The signal line ground is isolated from

the chassis ground however the powerline is not insulated Therefore whenconnecting eternal equipment havingpositive ground do not ground thesignal line to the chassis If excessivenoise shows on the screen the groundmay be inadequate In this case attacha steel plate measuring 20 cm by 30 cmon the outside of the hull to provide aground point Connect the ground wire

there Use a ldquoclosedrdquo type lug ( ) tomake the connection at the display unitDo not use an ldquoopenrdquo type lug ( )

Optional equipment

POWER connector

The power supply port is commonlyused for connection of externalequipment such as a GPS receiver orwind indicator Use the powerdatacable MJ-A7SPF0005-020 (supplied) forconnection referring the figure shown inthe right column

Connector Color Remarks

1 TD-A WHT2 TD-B BLU

IEC-61162-1NMEA0183

3 RD-A YEL

4 RD-B GRN

IEC-61162-1

NMEA01835 + RED

6 - BLKPower input12 VDC

7 FG

Water tempspeed sensor

Connect the optional water tempspeedsensor to the XDR connector with theoptional converter connector (Type02S4147) as shown below

Tape connectors withvulcaninzing tapeand then vinyl tapeto waterproof themBind tape ends withcable ties to preventtape from unraveling

Connect to XDR portat rear of display unit

MJ-A10SPF

MJ-A10SRMDMJ-A6SRMD

Fromtransducer

Fromsensor

Connection of converterconnector 02S4147

48 IEC 61162-1 DataSentences

The tables below show the datasentences which can be input to andoutput from the LS-4100 Thetransmission speed for both input andoutput is 4800 bps Data is output attwo-second intervals

Input data sentences

Sentence Meaning

BWC Bearing and distance towaypoint

GGA Global positioning system(GPS) fix data

GLL Geographic position -latitudelongitude

HDG Heading deviation and variationHDT Heading true

MDA Atmospheric pressure

MTW Water temperature

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4248

36

Input data sentences (conrsquot)

Sentence MeaningMWV Wind speed and

angleRMA Recommended

minimum specificLORAN-C dataRMB Recommended

minimum navigationinformation

RMC Recommendedminimum specificGPSTRANSIT data

VHW Water speed andheading

VTG Course over groundand ground speedXTE Cross track error

Output data sentences

Sentence MeaningDBT (Ver 15) Depth below

transducerDPT (Ver 20 Ver30)

Depth

MTW Water temperatureRMB (Ver 20) Recommended

minimumnavigationinformation

VHW Water speed andheading

TLL Target positionoutput by [MARK]key

= Available with connection of optionalsensorsnavaid

49 Installation MenuThe installation menu mainly containsitems which are set at installation

1 Turn on the power while pressing the[MENUESC] key Continue pressing

the [MENUESC] key until theInstallation menu appears

SIMULATION On

TEST LCD PATTERN MEMORY CLEAR

NMEA PORT InOutNMEA MIX OffGPS WAAS Off

SET BOTTOM LEVEL

Installation Menu

= Setting cannot be changed whenNMEA PORT setting is InIn

Installation menu

SIMULATION The simulation modeprovides without connection of thetransducer simulated operation of theequipment using internally generatedechoes All controls are operative Themessage ldquoSIMrdquo appears at the top rightcorner on the screen when thesimulation mode is active

1 At the installation menu press toopen the simulation mode optionswindow

2 Press to choose ldquoOnrdquo to turn onthe simulation mode

3 Press the [POWERBRILL] keyabout three seconds to turn off thepower

4 Press the [POWERBRILL] key toturn on the power ldquoSIMrdquo appears atthe top right corner of the display

5 To turn off the simulation modeselect Off at step 2

NMEA po r t se tup(NMEA PO RT NMEA M IX)

The POWER port can function as aninput port or inputoutput port Changethe setting to ldquoInInrdquo when connectingGP-310B320B and a wind sensor

When connecting the GP-310B320Band a wind sensor first turn on ldquoGPS

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4348

37

WAASrdquo (in the Installation menu) andthen select ldquoInInrdquo as the NMEA portsetting

1 Turn on the power while pressingand holding down the [MENUESC]key Continue pressing the[MENUESC] key until theInstallation menu appears

2 Choose NMEA PORT and thenpress to display the NMEA portoptions window

3 Use or to choose InOut orInIn as appropriate

InOut Input and Output (default

setting)InIn Input only (Available withconnection of the GP-310B320Band a wind sensor)

4 Press choose NMEA MIX andthen press to display the NMEAMIX options window

5 Use or to choose Off or OnChoose On to output input data

Off Outputs the data sentences ofLS-4100 only

On Outputs the data sentences ofLS-4100 and sentences which areinput from other equipment

6 To restore normal operation turn offthe power and then turn it on again

GPS WAAS Chooses how to use theWAAS signal when connecting with a

WAAS receiver for example GP-320B

Note WAAS is currently in thedevelopmental phase During thedevelopmental phase the reliability andavailability of the WAAS signal cannotbe guaranteed Therefore any positiondata should be verified against othersources to confirm reliability

1 Display the Installation menu2 Choose GPS WAAS and then press

to open the GPS WAAS options

window

Off

WAAS options window3 Press or to choose ldquoWAAS-02rdquo

(test signal) When the systembecomes operational (in 2003) setto ldquo00rdquo (regular WAAS signal)

4 Turn off the power

BOTTOM LEVEL If the depthindication is unstable in automaticoperation or the bottom echo cannot bedisplayed in the darkest gray tone byadjusting the gain controls in manualoperation you may adjust the bottomecho level detection circuit for both 50kHz and 200 kHz to stabilize theindication Generally lower the bottomlevel for inner hull installation where thereceive level is too low If the bottomlevel is too low it may be difficult todiscriminate fish from the bottomresulting in unstable depth indication

And if the bottom level is too high thedepth indication may not appear

1 At the installation menu press tochoose SET BOTTOM LEVEL andthen press Several seconds laterthe following display appears

Bottom level +0 (200k -100 - +100 ) +0 ( 50k -100 - +100 )

Bottom level display

2 While observing the picture use or to set 200 kHz or to set50 kHz Set up for optimum picture

3 To restore normal operation turn offthe power and then it on again

Note The mode must be other thanldquoNAV DATArdquo to show the bottom leveldisplay

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4448

SP - 1 E2371S01C

SPECIFICATIONS OF ECHO SOUNDER LS-4100

1 GENERAL11 TX Frequency 50 kHz or 200 kHz 50200 kHz dual transmitting selectable12 Transmit Method Single or dual transmitting

13 Output Power 300 Wrms14 TX Rate Max 500 pulsemin15 Pulse-length 01 to 08 ms

2 DISPLAY UNIT21 Display system 5-inch monochrome LCD 76 mm (W) x 100 mm (H) 240 x 320 dots22 Display Mode Single frequency (highlow freq) Dual-frequency Zoom Nav data-12

Marker zoom Bottom zoom Bottom-lock23 Display Range

Range SettingRange

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

Display

rangeMeter 5 10 20 40 80 150 200 300 2-500

Feet 15 30 60 120 200 400 600 1000 7-1500

Fathoms 3 5 10 20 40 80 100 150 1-250

PassiBraza 3 5 10 30 50 100 150 200 1-300

24 Range Shift 0-500 m 0-1500 ft 0-250 fa 0-300 pb25 Expansion Range Bottom-lock expansion 3 to 10 m

Sectional expansion 2 to 50 m26 Display Advance Speed 8 steps (LinesTX Freeze 1161814121121 41)

3 INTERFACE31 Input data sentences IEC61162-1NMEA0183 Ver 152030

GGA RMA RMB RMC BWC GLL HDT HDG VTG VHW MTWMWV MDA XTE

32 Output data sentences IEC61162-1NMEA0183 Ver 152030 interval 2 sMTW VHW DBT DPT RMB TLL by key operating External data required

4 POWER SUPPLY41 Display Unit 12 VDC 05 A

5 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITION51 Ambient Temperature Display unit -15degC to +55degC52 Relative Humidity 93 or less at 40degC53 Waterproof IPX5

6 COATING COLOR61 Display Unit N30

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4548

M a r

4

0 3

D-1

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4648

Mar 4 03

Mar 4 03

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4748

M a r

3

0 3

S-1

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4848

FURUNO Authorized DistributorDealer FURUNO Authorized DistributorDealer

9-52 Ashihara-cho9-52 Ashihara-choNishinomiya 662-8580 JAPANNishinomiya 662-8580 JAPAN

Telephone Telephone 0798-65-21110798-65-2111FaxFax 0798-65-42000798-65-4200

FIRST EDITION FIRST EDITION MARMAR 20032003Printed in JapanPrinted in Japan All rights reserved All rights reserved

B1B1 SEPSEP 09 200509 2005

Pub NoPub No OME-23710OME-23710 00014698000000146980000001469800000014698000(( DAMIDAMI )) LS-4100LS-4100

0 0 0 1 4 6 9 8 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 4 6 9 8 0 0 0

Page 9: OME23710B_1_LS4100

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 948

3

Single frequency display

50 kHz

The sounder uses ultrasonic signals todetect bottom conditions The lower thefrequency of the signal the wider thedetection area Therefore the 50 kHzfrequency is useful for general detectionand judging bottom condition

200 kHz

The higher the frequency of theultrasonic signal the better theresolution For this reason the 200 kHzfrequency is ideal for detailed

observation of fish schools

50 kHz

200 kHz

Frequency and coverage area

466

FishSchool

Bottom

0

20

40

50k 1100

Level Bar

Depth

Frequency

Picture Advance Speed

Range Scale

Mode(AUTO or MANUAL)

407 degF162kt Nav Display

MinuteMarker(Shows time

Each baris 30 sec) TransmissionLine

60

Typical 50 kHz display

Dual frequency display

The 50 kHz picture appears on the leftthe 200 kHz picture on the right Thisdisplay is useful for comparing the samepicture with two different transmitting

frequencies

50 kHz 200 kHzpicture picture

496

0050200 11

0

20

40

60

80

20

40

60

80 Dual frequency display

Marker-zoom display

This mode expands chosen area of thenormal picture to full vertical size of thescreen on the left-half window You mayspecify the portion to expand byoperating the VRM (Variable RangeMarker) which you can shift with or$ The area between the VRM andzoom range marker is expanded

Zoomedfishschool

Single frequency display

Variable rangemarker

This sectionis zoomed

Zoom marker

Marker-zoom display

170

250

0

Fishschool

0

40

10

20

30

0050k 11

21

20

19

18

17

22

Marker-zoom display

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 1048

4

Bottom-zoom display

This mode expands bottom and bottomfish in the range width set with ZOOMRANGE of the SYSTEM menu Thismode is useful for determining bottom

contour When the bottom depthincreases the display shift to keep thebottom echo at the lower part of thescreen

0

Bottom-zoom display

298

Bottom

0

40

10

20

30

32

31

30

29

28

27

Switched withdepth

Singlefrequencydisplay

Zoommarker

0050k 11

Bottom-zoom display

Bottom-lock display

The bottom-lock display provides anormal picture on the right half of thescreen and a 15 feet (5 meter) widelayer in contact with the bottom isexpanded onto the left half of the screenThis mode is useful for detecting bottomfish = Operator selectable

Bottom-lock display

Zoommarker

Zoomedfish

This sectionis zoomed

217

0

Singlefrequencydisplay

Fishschool

0

40

Bottom displayed flat

10

20

30

0

1

2

3

4

550k 11

Bottom-lock display

Nav data displays

The nav data displays appear on the leftof the screen Data other than depthrequires appropriate sensor

You can display between two and fouritems in a nav data display and choosethe item and order to display them Seeparagraph 116 to choose the items todisplay ldquoNAV DATA-1rdquo and ldquoNAVDATA-2rdquo in paragraph 21 to choose thenumber of items to display

Depth

694 m

Trip meter

100 nm

Odometer

56 nm

NAV DATA-1 display

NAV DATA-2 display

Temperature

655 deg F

172

1 05 0 05 1

025 nm

XTE

Speed

kt

20

50

40

60

30

10

0

Sample NAV DATA displays(Default setting)

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 1148

5

15 Menu OperatingProcedure

The LS-4100 has three menus MainSystem and Installation Below is the

basic menu operating procedure1 Press the [MENUESC] key to openthe main menu Page 1 or Page 2 ofthe main menu appears dependingon the page last used

[MENU] Exit

(12)

Note SHIFT and CLUTTER arenot available in the auto mode

AUTO MODE Off SHIFT 0ftPIC ADVANCE 11NOISE LIMIT Off CLUTTER Off SIGNAL LEVEL Off

A-SCOPE Off HUE DayWHITE LINE Off DEEP GAIN Low

Pageno

Main menu page 1

2 Use or $ to select an item Toview page 2 of the main menu press$ until showing the display below

[MENU] Exit

(22)

GOTO WPT Off WAYPOINT LIST

TRIP RESET

GAIN ADJ 200 +0GAIN ADJ 50 +0DRAFT 00ft

ALARM MENUSYSTEM MENU

Main menu page 2

3 Press to show selected itemrsquosoptions window The example shownat the top of the right column is theoptions window for AUTO MODE

Off CruisingFishing

Auto mode options window

4 Use or $ to choose option or setnumeric value

5 Press the [MENUESC] key to closethe menu or press to continuemenu operation

16 Automatic OperationHow automatic operation works

The automatic function automatically

chooses the proper gain range scaleand clutter It works as followsbull The range changes automatically to

display the bottom echo on thescreen

bull The gain is automatically adjusted todisplay the bottom echo in the darkesttone

bull Clutter (on the menu) whichsuppresses low-level noise isautomatically adjusted

Choosing automatic operation

The automatic mode provides twochoices of modes cruising and fishing1 Press the [MENUESC] key to open

the main menu2 Press to choose AUTO MODE

from page 1 of the menu3 Press to open the mode options

window4 Choose Cruising or Fishing as

appropriate

ldquoCruisingrdquo is for tracking the bottomldquoFishingrdquo is for searching fish schoolsSince ldquoCruisingrdquo uses a higher clutterrejection setting than fishing it is notrecommended for fish detection -weak fish echoes may not bedisplayed ldquoFishingrdquo clearly displaysweaker echoes

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 1248

6

5 Press the [MENUESC] key to closethe menu

The auto mode in use is shown as(Auto-Fishing) or

(Auto-Cruising) at the top left corner onthe screen

Note When in the auto mode SHIFTand CLUTTER cannot be adjustedmanually

Range offset

To display the bottom tail in detail in theautomatic mode offset the range as

below1 Press the [+] or [-] key of the

[RANGE] key

+0 ft

AUTO RANGE OFFSET

Auto range offset window

2 Press the [+] or [-] key of the[RANGE] key again to choose offsetdesired (range -100 to +300 ft)Note that if the basic range ischanged the offset is returned to ldquo0rdquo

3 Press the [MENUESC] key to finish

Gain offset

Gain offset lets you override automaticgain adjustment1 Press the [GAIN] key

Min Max 0

AUTO GAIN OFFSET

Auto gain offset window

2 Press or key to offset gain(setting range ndash5 to +5) The gainselected is shown at the top of thescreen asG (Gain) + (or -) XX (offset value)

3 Press the [MENUESC] key to finish

17 Manual OperationChoosing the manual mode

1 Press the [MENUESC] key to openthe main menu

2 Press to choose AUTO MODEfrom page 1 of the menu3 Press to show the window4 Choose Off with 5 Press the [MENUESC] key to close

the menu appears at the topleft corner on the screen

Choosing range

The basic range and range shiftingfunctions used together give you themeans to choose the depth you can seeon the screen The basic range can bethought of as providing a ldquowindowrdquo intothe water column and range shifting asmoving the ldquowindowrdquo to the desireddepth

Choosing basic range

The basic range may be chosen withthe [RANGE] key from the eight rangesshown in the table shown below (ldquoPBrdquoin the table means PassiBraza) Thesetting range can be arranged throughthe SYSTEM menu

Default ranges

Basic RangeUnit1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

meters 5 10 20 40 80 150 200 300

feet 15 30 60 120 200 400 600 1000

fathoms 3 5 10 20 40 80 100 150

hiro 4 8 15 30 50 100 150 200

PB 3 5 10 30 50 100 150 200

Japanese unit of depth measurement1 Press the [+] or [-] key of the

[RANGE] key and the display shouldnow look something like the one onat the top of the next page

2 Press the [+] or [-] key of the[RANGE] key again to choose abasic range

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 1348

7

1000ft 600ft 400ft 200ft 120ft 60ft 30ft 15ft

Basic ranges (default)3 Press the [MENUESC] key to close

the window

Shifting the range

The basic range may be shifted up ordown in the manual mode as follows

Display

Window can beshifted up anddown to selectthe depth

Range and display shift concept

1 Press the [MENUESC] key to openthe main menu

2 Choose SHIFT from page 1 of themenu

3 Press to open the shift optionswindow

0ft

Shift window

4 Use or $ to choose amount ofshift desired

5 Press the [MENUESC] key to closethe window

Note The picture may not be displayedif the amount of shift is greater thanactual depth

Adjusting the gain

The [GAIN] key adjusts the sensitivity ofthe receiver Generally use a highergain setting for greater depths and alower setting for shallower waters

Use the proper gain setting

Incorrect gain may produce wrong depthindication possibly resulting in a dangeroussituation

UTION

Gain too high Gain proper Gain too low Examples of proper and improper gain

1 Press the [GAIN] key and the displayshown below appears

Min Max

50k 3

200k 2

GAIN

Gain adjustment window

2 When using the dual frequencydisplay press or $ to choosefrequency

3 Press the [GAIN] key to set (Youmay also use or ) Adjust so thata slight amount of noise remains onthe screen

4 Press the [MENUESC] key to closethe gain adjustment window

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 1448

8

18 Measuring DepthThe VRM (Variable Range Marker)functions to measure the depth to fishschools etc1 Press or $ to place the VRM

on the object which you wish tomeasure range

2 Read the VRM depth just abovethe VRM

0

20

40

60

80496

398

VRM

VRM depth

50k 11

How to measure depth with the VRM

19 Choosing PictureAdvance Speed

The picture advance speed determineshow quickly the vertical scan lines runacross the screen When choosing apicture advance speed keep in mindthat a fast advance speed will expandthe size of the fish school horizontallyon the screen and a slow advancespeed will contract it Note that thepicture is not refreshed when pictureadvancement is stopped Thereforeuse caution when steering the vesselunder this condition

Fast Slow Picture and picture advancement speed

1 Press the [MENUESC] key to openthe main menu

2 Choose PIC ADVANCE from page 1of the menu

3 Press to show the optionswindow

Stop116 18 14 12 11 21 41

(

)

Fast

Slow

Picture advance options window

4 Use or $ to choose pictureadvance speed desired Thefractions in the options windowdenote the number of scan linesproduced per transmission Forexample 18 means one scan line isproduced every 8 transmissionsldquoStoprdquo freezes the display and it isconvenient for taking a photo

The picture is not refreshed whenpicture advancement is stopped

Maneuvering the vessel in this conditionmay result in a dangerous situation

UTION

5 Press the [MENUESC] key to closethe menu

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 1548

9

110 SuppressingInterference

Interference from other acousticequipment operating nearby or other

electronic equipment on your boat mayshow itself on the display as shown inthe figure belowTo suppress interference do thefollowing1 Press the [MENUESC] key to open

the main menu2 Use or $ to choose NOISE LIMIT

from page 1 of the menu3 Press to show the options

window4 Use or $ to choose the degree ofsuppression desired Off LowMedium or High (highest)

5 Press the [MENUESC] key to closethe menu

Interference fromother sounder

Electrical interference

Forms of interference

Turn the noise limiter off when nointerference exists otherwise weakechoes may be missed

111 Suppressing LowLevel Noise

Low intensity ldquospecklesrdquo may appearover most of screen This is mainly due

to sediment in the water or noise Thesecan be suppressed by adjustingCLUTTER on the menu When theautomatic mode is on clutter isautomatically rejected To suppress lowlevel noise in manual sounder operationdo the following1 Press the [MENUESC] key to open

the main menu2 Use or $ to choose CLUTTER

from page 1 of the menu3 Press to show the optionswindow

4 Use or $ to choose the degree ofsuppression desired 1 2 3 4 5 or6 The higher the number the greaterthe suppression

5 Press the [MENUESC] key to closethe menu

To turn off low-level noisesuppression choose Off at step 4 andthen press the [MENUESC] key

Clutter appearance

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 1648

10

112 Erasing WeakEchoes

Sediment in the water or reflectionsfrom plankton may be painted on the

display in low intensity tones

Weakechoes

Appearance of weak echoes

These weak echoes may be erased asfollows1 Press the [MENUESC] key to open

the main menu2 Use or $ to choose SIGNAL

LEVEL from page 1 of the menu3 Press to show the options

window4 Use or $ to choose the degree of

suppression desired Off Low orHigh (highest)

5 Press the [MENUESC] key to closethe menu

To turn off the signal level function choose Off at step 4 and then pressthe [MENUESC] key

113 A-scope DisplayThis display shows echoes at eachtransmission with amplitudes and toneproportional to their intensities on theright 14 of the screen It is useful forestimating the kind of fish school andbottom composition

Note In the dual frequency display the A-scope display is only available withthe high frequency display

323

10

20

30

40

0

A-scope display

Single frequency display

Strong

reflection(bottom)

Weakreflection(fish or noise)

50k 11

Strongreflection(fish)

A-scope display

1 Press the [MENUESC] key to openthe main menu

2 Press or $ to choose A-SCOPEfrom page 1 of the menu

3 Press to show the optionswindow

4 Press

or$

to choose the A-scope presentation type desiredNormal Display shows echoes ateach transmission with amplitudesand tone proportional to theirintensitiesPeak Peak-hold amplitude picture

5 Press the [MENUESC] key to closethe menu

To turn off the A-scope displaychoose Off at step 4 and then press the[MENUESC] key

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 1748

11

114 AlarmsAlarm description

The LS-4100 has six conditions whichgenerate both audio and visual alarms

bottom alarm normal fish alarm bottomlock fish alarm water temperature alarmarrival alarm and speed alarm (Thewater temperature arrival and speedalarms require appropriate sensors)

Bottom alarm The bottom alarm alertsyou when the bottom is within the alarmrange set To activate the bottom alarmthe depth must be displayed

Fish (normal) alarm The fish (normal)alarm tells you when fish are within thepreset alarm range

Fish (bottom lock) alarm The fish(bottom lock) alarm available with thebottom-lock mode sounds when fishare within a certain distance from thebottom Note that the bottom zoom

display must be turned on to use thisalarm

Water temperature alarm The watertemperature alarm alerts when thewater temperature is within (Insidealarm) the alarm range set orunderover (outside alarm) the rangeset

Speed alarm The speed alarm alertsyou when the speed is within (Insidealarm) or underover (Outside alarm)the preset speed

Arrival alarm The arrival alarm alertswhen you are near a waypoint by thedistance set

Activating an alarm

1 Press the [MENUESC] key2 Press or $ to choose ALARM

MENU from page 2 on the menu3 Press the to show the ALARM

menu

ALARM

(12)

[MENU] Exit

ALARM

(22)

[MENU] Exit

BOTTOM On FROM 5ft

RANGE 10ftFISH(Normal) On

FROM 5ft RANGE 10ftFISH(BL) On

FROM 8ft RANGE 10ftFISH LEVEL Medium

TEMPERATURE Inside FROM 724 deg F RANGE 10 deg F

SPEED Off FROM 00kt

RANGE 10kt

ARRIVAL ALRM Off RANGE 0 01 m

Pageno

Gray characters mean alarm is inactive Alarm menu

4 Use or $ to choose an alarm asappropriate

5 Press to show the options menu

Off On

Off InsideOutside

Temp Speed Alarm Types

Fish ArrivalBottom AlarmOnOff

Alarm options6 Use or $ to choose alarm type

Off Alarm off On Alarm onInside Alarm generated whenspeed (or water temperature) iswithin the range setOutside Alarm generated whenspeed (or water temperature) isoutside the range set

7 Press to close the windowFor ARRIVAL ALARM setting skip tostep 12

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 1848

12

8 Press $ to choose FROM9 Press to show the options menu

0ft

Depth

632 deg F

Temperature

10 kt

Speed Depth temperature speed setting

window10 Use or $ to set starting depth

temperature or speed as appropriateFor FISH (BL) the starting depth isthe range from the bottom

11 Press to close the window12 Press $ to choose RANGE13 Press to show the options menu14 Use or $ to set alarm range15 For the bottom alarm temperature

alarm speed alarm or arrivalalarm press the [MENUESC] key tofinish For a fish alarm press toclose the window and then go tostep 16

16 Press $ to choose FISH LEVEL17 Press to show the options menu

Weak

MediumStrong Fish level options

18 Use or $ to choose the echostrength level which will trigger a fishalarm

Weak Weak echoes (weakest toneon level bar)Medium Medium strength echoes

(middle tone on level bar)Strong Strong echoes (darkest toneon level bar)

19 Press the [MENUESC] key twice toclose the menu

Alarm range marker Bottom alarm Fish alarm (normal) Right Fish alarm (bottomlock) Left

Alarm icon

Alarm rangeStartingpoint

Bottom alarm Fish alarm (normal) Fish alarm (BL)

Temperature alarm (deg

C ordeg

F shown) Speed alarm Arrival alarm

Alarm icon (Appropriate icon appears to showwhich alarm has been violated)

How the alarm works

Note To disable an alarm choose Offat step 5 in the above procedure

Silencing the buzzer

The buzzer sounds and the appropriatealarm icon appears and flashes whenan alarm is violated You can silence thebuzzer by pressing any key Howeverthe buzzer will sound whenever thealarm setting is violated

Note The audio and visual alarms arereleased against the last-violated alarmwhen multiple alarms are active

115 WaypointsWaypoints may be used tobull Record the position of an important

echo as waypoint 12 points may beregistered

bull Output a waypoint position to a plotterto mark position on its screen

bull Find range bearing and time-to-go toa location (waypoint)

Note Requires latitude and longitudeposition from a navigator

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 1948

13

Registering a waypoint on thescreen

1 Press the [MARK] key The cursorappears along with waypoint entryinstructions To enter a waypoint tothe current own shiprsquos position go tostep 3Note If there is no position data themessage ldquoNo position datardquo appearsCheck the navigator

50k

496

1100

20

40

60

80

0

Cursor

WAYPOINT ENTRY

( Move) Cursor [MARK] Enter [MENU] Cancel

50 kHz display

2 Press the cursor pad to set thecursor where desired Pictureadvancement is stopped until step 3is completed and the instructionwindow is integrated into the navdisplay

3 Press the [MARK] key again WhenTLL or FURUNO-TLL is selected atTLL OUTPUT on the System menuthe latitude and longitude position atthe cursor is output to the navigator

A vertical line marks location Furtherthe display shows the waypointname (next sequential number) andposition of the location selected atstep 2

WAYPOINTName FREQLat 34 deg 22796NLon 136 deg 07264E

05

[MENU] Exit

rase

Waypoint data display

Note If you attempt to enter 13thwaypoint the message ldquoMemoryfullrdquo appears In this case erase anunwanted waypoint to enable entry

4 To save the waypoint under thename shown go to step 8 or go tostep 5 to change its name

5 Press to open the waypoint nameentry window

WAYPOINTName FREQLat 34 deg 22796NLon 136 deg 07264E

05

[MENU] Exit

01------ ENT

rase

Waypoint window name entry6 Use or to set character $ or

to shift cursor The name mayconsist of 10 alphanumericcharactersNote Character order is 0 1hellip9 - A BhellipZ _ 0hellip

7 Press to choose ENT 8 Press the [MENUESC] key to

register the waypoint

Registering waypoint by LL

1 Press the [MENUESC] key to openthe main menu

2 Use or to choose WAYPOINTLIST from page 2 of the menu

3 Press

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 2048

14

WAYPOINT LIST

01 0102 0303------------------------------------------------------

[MENU] Exit

Waypoint list4 Press or to choose an empty

waypoint and press Press again

NEW WAYPOINTName FREQLat 34 deg 22796NLon 136 deg 07264E

05

[MENU] Exit

04------ ENT

rase

New waypoint window name entry

5 Use or to set character $ or to shift cursor

6 Press to select ENT 7 Enter latitude and longitude similar

to how you entered waypoint name8 Press the [MENUESC] key to

register the waypoint

Editing waypoints Press the [MENUESC] key to open

the main menu

2 Use or to choose WAYPOINTLIST from page 2 of the menu

3 Press to open the waypoints list4 Use or to choose a waypoint

and press 5 Use or to choose the item to

edit (name latitude or longitude)6 Press to open the data entry

window7 Use or to set character $ or

to choose location8 Press to choose ENT 9 Press the [MENUESC] key

Erasing waypoints Press the [MENUESC] key2 Use or to choose WAYPOINT

LIST from page 2 of the menu3 Press to open the waypoints list

4 Use or to choose the waypointto erase and then press Note You cannot erase a waypointwhich is selected as ldquoGOTO WPTrdquo

5 Press to choose ldquoEraserdquo6 Press to open the options window7 Press to select YES to erase the

waypoint The waypoint list appearswith the erased waypoint blank

8 Press the [MENUESC] key twice toclose the menu

Setting destination waypoint

Set a destination waypoint to find rangebearing and time-to-go to that point Youcan see range and bearing to awaypoint Time-to-go is shown on theTime to Go digital display

Press the [MENUESC] key to openthe main menu

2 Use or to choose GOTO WPTfrom page 2 of the menu

3 Press to open the waypoints list

Off01020304----------------------------------------------------------------

Waypoint list

4 Use or to choose a waypoint5 Press the [MENUESC] key to close

the menu

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 2148

15

116 Setting Up Nav DataDisplays

The user may arrange the nav datadisplays as desired

1 Use the [MODE] key to show theNAV DATA-1 or 2 display whicheveryou want to set up

2 Press the [MENUESC] key to closethe mode selection window

3 Press the cursor pad to display theNAV DATA SETUP window

NAV DATA SETUP

Window Selection Data Selection

[MENU] Exit

NAV DATA SETUP window

4 Use or to choose a datadisplay window desired Adashed-line rectangle circumscribesyour selection

5 Use

or$

to choose item todisplay See the below for adescription of the displays

(9)

(1)

(2)

(3)

(4)(5)

(6)(7)(8)

Two-data

display

Three-data

display

Four-data

displayItems displayable in (1) - (3) depth positioncourse range and bearing trip distanceodometer water temperature headingair pressure time-to-go to destination waypointXTE speed wind speed and directiondestination waypoint data compassItems displayable in (4) - (9) depth positionspeed course range and bearing trip distanceodometer water temperature headingair pressure time-to-go to destination waypointXTE wind speed wind direction

= Graphic display

Nav data window and item displayable6 Press the [MENUESC] key to finish

Note You can choose the number ofitems to show in a nav data display withNAV DATA-1 and NAV DATA-2 on theSystem menu

GRAPHIC DISPLAYS

1 05 0 05 1

Wpt 03Rng 019nm Brg 321 deg XTE 000nm Cse 333 deg

DESTINATION WAYPOINT GRAPHIC

XTEscale

BearingCourseDestinationwaypointdirection

DestinationwaypointdataNameRangeXTE

Wind APP

WIND GRAPHIC

60

120

90

030

150180

120

150

90

60

30

120 deg

Speed 103 ms

COMPASS GRAPHIC

SPEED GRAPHIC

172

Speed

20

50

40

60

30

10

01 05 0 05 1

025 nm

XTE

XTE GRAPHIC

kt

Bearing todestinationwaypoint

Course

Brg30 deg

Cse90 deg

N

E

XTE scale

Speed-ometer

Nav data display-1

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 2248

16

DIGITAL DISPLAYS

Course

123 deg

COURSE

Depth

328 ft

DEPTH

Heading TRUEMAG

318 deg

HEADING

Odometer

56 nm

ODOMETER

Position GPS 3D

30 deg 00065N130 deg 00574E

POSITION

Temperature

698 degF

WATER TEMPERATURE

Trip meter

121 nm

TRIP DISTANCE

Time to Go

00 H30 M

TIME-TO-GO

1018 hpa

AIR PRESSURE

Air Pressure

Speed

193 kt

SPEED

Rng

121 nm

RANGE amp BEARING

Brg

140 deg

Wind Speed APP

80 ms

WIND SPEED

Wind Dir APP

138 deg

WIND DIRECTION

APP or TRUE depending on menu setting TRUE or MAG depending

on menu settingamp To destination waypoint

Note 1 Nav data is updated with somedelay

Note 2 When data is lost 120 sec thedisplay shows - - at the locationwhere data is lost

= GPS receiving status (Displays whenconnecting with GP-310B320B and InOutis selected at the Installation menu)NO FIX Position cannot be foundGPS 2D 2D (dimension) GPS position fixGPS 3D 3D GPS fixGPS W2D 2D WAAS position fixGPS W3D 3D WAAS position fix

NAV data display-2

117 Other Menu ItemsThis section describes the menu itemsnot previously mentioned

Page 1

HUE (Picture Color)

Two picture color arrangements areavailable Day and Night Day showsechoes on a white background Nightshows them on a black background

1 Press the [MENUESC] key todisplay the menu

2 Use or $ to choose HUE frompage 1 of the menu

3 Press to show the optionswindow

4 Use or $ to choose Day or Nightas appropriate

5 Press the [MENUESC] key to closethe menu

WHITE LINE

The white line feature displays theleading edge of the bottom echo in

white This is useful for discriminatingbottom fish near the bottom

1 Press the [MENUESC] key todisplay the main menu

2 Use or $ to choose WHITE LINEfrom page 1 of the menu

3 Press to show the optionswindow

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 2348

17

4 Use or to choose Off Tone orMesh as appropriate ldquoMeshrdquo paintsthe white line in darker tone thanldquoTonerdquo

5 Press the [MENUESC] key to closethe menu

526White Line OFF White Line ON (Mesh)

Fish schoolclearly shown

White line

0

20

40

60

80

050k 11

526

0

20

40

60

80

00 050k 11

How white line works

DEEP GAIN

ldquoDeep Gainrdquo compensates forpropagation attenuation of the ultrasonicwaves It does this by equalizing echopresentation so that fish schools of thesame size appear in the same density inboth shallow and deep waters Inaddition it reduces surface noise

Press the [MENUESC] key to openthe main menu

2 Use or to choose DEEP GAINfrom page of the menu

3 Press $ to show to the optionswindow

4 Choose Low Medium or High asappropriate High provides thegreatest degree of gain reductionagainst short range echoes

5 Press the [MENUESC] key to closethe menu

Page 2

TRIP RESET

This item resets trip distance to ldquo0rdquo

Press the [MENUESC] key to openthe main menu

2 Use or to choose TRIPRESET from page 2 of the menu

3 Press $ 4 Press to reset trip distance

Beeps are generated while the tripdistance is being reset

5 Press the [MENUESC] key to closethe menu

Note To reset the odometer to zeroclear the memory

GAIN ADJ 200 GAIN ADJ 50

If the gain is too high or too low or thegain for the low and high frequenciesappears unbalanced you cancompensate it as follows

Press the [MENUESC] key to openthe main menu

2 Use or to choose GAIN ADJ200 or GAIN ADJ 50 from page 2 ofthe menu

3 Press $ to show to the optionswindow

4 Use or to set the amount Thesetting range is ndash50 to +50

5 Press the [MENUESC] key to close

the menu

DRAFT

The default depth display shows thedistance from the transducer If youwould rather show the distance from thesea surface set your shiprsquos draft asfollows

Press the [MENUESC] key to openthe main menu

2 Use or to choose DRAFT frompage 2 of the menu

3 Press $ and then use or to setdraft The setting range is ndash 50 to+500 (meters feet)

4 Press the [MENUESC] key to closethe menu

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 2448

18

2 SYSTEM MENU

The System menu mainly consists ofitems which once set do not requirefrequent adjustment You may displaythis menu by choosing SYSTEM MENUat page 2 of the main menu andpressing

SYSTEM MENULANGUAGE English

DEPTH UNIT ftSPEED UNIT ktWIND UNIT msTEMP UNIT deg F

TEMP GRAPH OffNAV DATA-1 NAV DATA-2

WATER TYPE SaltKEY BEEP OnBATT VOLTAGE Off (13)

[MENU] Exit

SYSTEM MENU

(23)

NAV DISPLAY TempSpeedNMEA0183 Ver 20TLL OUTPUT OffBEARING TrueWIND SPDDIR ApparentTRIP SOURCE Own

TEMP SOURCE OwnSPEED SOURCE OwnTEMP CALIB +00 deg F ( 40)SPEED CALIB +0 ( 50)

Own speed Own temp 100 kt 162 deg F

[MENU] Exit

SYSTEM MENU

(33)

BASIC RANGE1 15 ft

RANGE2 30RANGE3 60RANGE4 120RANGE5 200RANGE6 400RANGE7 600RANGE8 1000 (7-1500)

ZOOM RANGE 15 ft (7-150)BL RANGE 15 ft (10-30)(Bottom Lock)

ZOOM MARKER On

[MENU] Exit

PAGE 3

PAGE 2

PAGE 1

Page no

System menus

21 System MenuPage 1

LANGUAGE The system language isavailable in English several Europeanlanguages and Japanese To changelanguage select language desired andpress the [MENUESC] key

DEPTH UNIT Choose unit of depthmeasurement from meters feet

fathoms passibraza and hiro(Japanese)

SPEED UNIT Choose unit of speedmeasurement from knots miles perhour and kilometers per hour Requiresspeed data

WIND UNIT Choose unit of wind speedmeasurement from ms kt kmh and

mph Requires wind speed data

TEMP UNIT Choose unit oftemperature measurement Celsius orFahrenheit Requires temperature data

TEMP GRAPH Turns the watertemperature display on or off Thetemperature scale range is 16deg (degF) inldquoNarrowrdquo 40deg (degF) in ldquoWiderdquo Requires

water temperature data

m526

0

20

40

60

80

00 050k 11

40

80

70

50

60

TemperatureScale

TemperatureGraph

638 deg F162kt

Water temperature display (wide degF)

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 2548

19

NAV DATA-1 -2 Choose the number ofnavigation data items to display on thenav data displays from two three orfour items Requires appropriate navdata

WATER TYPE Choose the water typewith which to use the LS-4100 fromSalt or Fresh

KEY BEEP Turn key beep on or off

BATT VOLTAGE Turn the batteryvoltage indication (appears at the topright corner on the screen) on or offWhen on it replaces the picture advancespeed indication

Page 2

NAV DISPLAY Choose the nav data todisplay in the nav data window at thetop left-hand corner You may choosefrom temperaturespeedlatitudelongitude range and bearingcourse over ground trip distance or

wind speed Requires appropriate navdata

407 deg F162kt

Nav window

NMEA0183 Choose NMEA version ofnavigator Ver 15 Ver 20 or Ver 30

TLL OUTPUT Enablesdisables outputof TLL (Target Latitude Longitude)position when the [MARK] key isoperated ldquoTLLrdquo outputs latitude andlongitude position ldquoFURUNO-TLLrdquoavailable with connection of navigatorthat can output FURUNO TLL outputslatitude and longitude watertemperature depth etc

BEARING Shiprsquos course and bearingto a waypoint may be displayed in trueor magnetic bearing Magnetic bearingis true bearing plus (or minus) earthrsquosmagnetic deviation Requires bearingdata

WIND SPDDIR Choose the windspeed and direction reference from trueand apparent Requires wind sensorApparen t The direction (in relation toshiprsquos bow) and speed of the wind as itappears to those on board relative tothe speed and direction of the boatcombination of the true wind and thewind caused by the boats movementTrue The speed and direction (inrelation to shiprsquos bow) of the wind felt ormeasured when stationary

TRIP SOURCE Choose speed sourcefor the trip distance indication Own(transducer with speed sensor orseparate speed sensor) or NMEA

TEMP SOURCE Choose source ofwater temperature input Off Own(transducer with water temperaturesensor or separate temperature sensor)or NMEA

SPEED SOURCE Choose source ofspeed input Off Own (transducer withspeed sensor or separate speedsensor) or NMEA Requires speed

data

TEMP CALIB If the water temperaturesensor-generated water temperatureindication is wrong you can correct ithere when ldquoOwnrdquo is selected astemperature source For example if thewater temperature indication is 2deghigher than actual water temperatureenter -2 The setting range is -40degF to

+40degF

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 2648

20

SPEED CALIB If the speedsensor-generated speed indication iswrong you can correct it here whenldquoOwnrdquo is selected as speed source Forexample if the speed indication is 10lower than actual speed enter +10 Thesetting range is ndash50 to +50

Page 3

BASIC RANGE 1 - BASIC RANGE 8 Set range of each of the eight basicranges (Selectable range 7 to 1500 ft)Note 1 All default basic ranges arerestored whenever the depth unit ischanged Therefore change the depth

unit before changing the basic rangesNote 2 A range may not be lower thanthe range preceding it For example ifbasic range 3 is 60 feet basic range 4must be greater than 60 feet

ZOOM RANGE Choose the range tozoom in the marker-zoom andbottom-zoom modes You may choose arange between 7 and 150 feet (2 and 50

meters)

BL RANGE The expansion width forthe bottom-lock display can be chosenfrom 10 to 30 feet (3 and 10 meters)

ZOOM MARKER The zoom markerappears in the normal bottom markerand bottom zoom displays and marksthe area which is expanded in the

bottom marker and bottom zoompictures You can turn the marker on oroff as desired

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 2748

21

3 MAINTENANCETROUBLESHOOTING

W RNING

ELECTRICAL SHOCK HAZARDDo not open the equipment

Only qualified personnel should workinside the equipment

31 Maintenance

Regular maintenance is essential forgood performance Checking the itemslisted in the table below monthly willhelp keep your equipment in goodshape for years to come

Checking

Item Action

Transducercable

Check cable for damage

Power cabletransducercable plug

Check that they are tightlyfastened Refasten ifnecessary

Display unitground

Check for corrosion Cleanif necessary

Power supplyvoltage

Check voltage If out ofrating correct problem

32 Cleaning the DisplayUnit

Dust or dirt on the display unit can beremoved with a soft cloth If desired awater-moistened cloth may be usedUse special care when cleaning theLCD since it scratches easily Do notuse chemical cleaners to clean thedisplay unit - they can remove paint andmarkings

33 TransducerMaintenance

Marine life on the transducer face willresult in a gradual decrease insensitivity Check the transducer facefor cleanliness each time the boat isdry-docked Carefully remove anymarine life with a piece of wood orfine-grade sandpaper

34 Replacing the FuseThe fuse in the power cable protects thesystem from reverse polarity of thepower supply and equipment fault If thefuse blows find the cause beforereplacing it Use only a 1A fuse (FGMB 1A 125V Code No 000-114-805 ) orequivalent Using the wrong fuse will damage the unit and void the warranty

W RNINGUse the proper fuse

Fuse rating is shown on the equipmentUse of a wrong fuse can result in fire anddamage the equipment

35 Battery Voltage Alert A battery icon appears when the batteryvoltage is too high or too low

Battery icon and meaning

Icon Meaning

Voltage is lower than 10 VDC If thevoltage goes below 9 V the equipmentis automatically turned off

Voltage is higher than 165 VDC If thevoltage goes higher than 175 V theequipment is automatically turned off

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 2848

22

36 TroubleshootingThe table below provides basictroubleshooting procedures which theuser may follow to restore normaloperation

Troubleshooting table

Ifhellip Then check hellipneither echo norfixed range scaleappears

bull battery voltagebull fusebull power cable

no echo appearsbut the fixedrange scaleappears

bull if display advancespeed is set to ldquoStoprdquo

bull transducer plugbull

transducer cableecho appears butno zero line

bull if range shifting is setto ldquo0rdquo

sensitivity is low bull gain settingbull if air bubbles or marine

life is clinging to thetransducer face

bull if sediments arepresent in the water

bull if the bottom is too soft

to return an echothere is extremeinterference ornoise

bull if the transducer is tooclose to the engine

bull if the unit is properlygrounded

bull if other echo soundersof the same frequencyas own are beingoperated nearby

the speedwatertemperaturereadout isunrealistic or notpresent

bull sensor plug

the positionreadout isunrealistic or notpresent

bull the connectionbetween sounder andnavigator

bull navigator

37 DiagnosticsIf you feel your unit is not workingproperly conduct the diagnostic test tofind the problem If you cannot restorenormal operation contact your dealerfor advice

1 Turn on the power while pressing the[MENUESC] key Continue pressingthe [MENUESC] key until theInstallation menu appears

SIMULATION On

TEST LCD PATTERN MEMORY CLEAR

NMEA PORT InOutNMEA MIX Off GPS WAAS Off

SET BOTTOM LEVEL

Installation Menu

= Setting cannot be changed whenNMEA PORT setting is InIn

Installation menu2 Press to choose TEST3 Press to start the test

ROM OKRAM OKNMEA

Temp 682 deg F

Speed 100kmh

Power 124 VBody 39 deg C

Program No 0252318-01Push [MENU] 3 times to exit

Level bar

= Program version no

Water

TemperatureSpeedBattery VoltageTemperatureinside displayunit(Unit fixed atdeg C)

GPS (48502180) OK

Only when GP-310B is connected(For GP-320B 4850238)

Test display

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 2948

23

4 The ROM RAM and NMEA port arechecked with the results shown asOK or NG (No Good) For any NGrequest service (A special connectoris required to test the NMEA portNothing appears if no connector isconnected)

5 The squares at the right side of thetest display are for checking thecontrols Press each key and thearrows on the Cursor Pad one byone A controlrsquos correspondingon-screen square ldquolightsrdquo in black ifthe control is normal

6 To return to the Installation menupress the [MENUESC] key threetimes

7 To restore normal operation turn offthe power and turn it on again

38 Test PatternThis feature tests for proper display oftones

1 On the Installation menu press $ tochoose LCD PATTERN

2 Press to start the test The entirescreen is black

3 Press again and the screen turnswhite

4 Press again and the screenshows a four-toned display

5 Press again to return to theInstallation menu

6 To restore normal operation turn offthe power and then it on again

WHITE FOUR-TONE BLACK

Test patterns

39 Memory ClearThe memory can be cleared to startafresh with default menu settings

1 At the installation menu press $ tochoose MEMORY CLEAR

2 Press to open the optionswindow

YES NO

Clear memory display

3 Press to clear the memory Beepsare generated while the memory isbeing cleared

4 To restore normal operation turn offthe power and then turn it on again

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3048

24

4 INSTALLATION

41 Display UnitMounting considerations

The display unit can be installed on adesktop on the bulkhead or flushmounted in a panel When choosing alocation keep the following in mind

bull Keep the display unit out of directsunlight

bull The temperature and humidity should

be moderate and stablebull Locate the unit away from exhaust

pipes and ventsbull The mounting location should be well

ventilatedbull Mount the unit where shock and

vibration are minimalbull For maintenance and checking

purposes leave sufficient space atthe sides and rear of the unit andleave slack in cables

bull A magnetic compass will be affected ifthe display unit is placed too close toit Observe the following compasssafe distances to prevent disturbanceto the magnetic compassStandard compass 04 metersSteering compass 03 meters

Desktop overhead mounting1 Fix the bracket to a desktop or the

overhead with tapping screws(supplied)

2 Loosely screw knobs into the displayunit

3 Set the display unit to the bracketand then tighten the knobs

Mounting on the bulkhead Flush

mounting in a panelSee the instructions on the bulkhead orflush mounting template (supplied)

42 Thru-hull MountTransducer

Transducer mounting location

The thru-hull mount transducer

(520-5PSD 520-5MSD) provides thebest performance of all since thetransducer protrudes from the hull andthe effect of air bubbles and turbulencenear the hull skin is reduced When theboat has a keel the transducer shouldbe at least 30 cm away from it Typicalthru-hull mountings are shown in thefigure on the next page

The performance of this sounder isdirectly related to the mounting locationof the transducer especially forhigh-speed cruising The installationshould be planned in advance keepingthe standard cable length (8 m) and thefollowing factors in mindbull Air bubbles and turbulence caused by

movement of the boat seriouslydegrade the sounding capability of thetransducer The transducer shouldtherefore be located in a positionwhere water flow is the smoothestNoise from the propellers alsoadversely affects performance andthe transducer should not be mountednearby The lifting strakes arenotorious for creating acoustic noiseand these must be avoided bykeeping the transducer inboard ofthem

bull The transducer must always remain

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3148

25

submerged even when the boat isrolling pitching or up on a plane athigh speed

bull A practical choice would besomewhere between 13 and 12 of

the boatrsquos length from the stern Forplaning hulls a practical location isgenerally rather far astern so that thetransducer is always in waterregardless of the planing attitude

28

22

120

68

30

520-5PSD

24

120

68

87520-5MSD

Unit mm

Thru-hull mount transducer dimensions

Acceptable transducer mounting

locations

Position 12 to 13 of the hull from stern

15 to 30 cm off center line (inside first lifting strakes)

Within the wetted bottom area

Deadrise angle within 15 deg

HIGH SPEED-V HULL

Suitable transducer mounting locations

Typical thru-hull mounttransducer installations

FairingBlock

Flat Washer

Rubber Washer

Hull

Deep-V Hull

Hull

Flat Washer

Rubber Washer

Flat Hull

CorkWasher

Typical thru-hull mounttransducer installations

Procedure for installing thethru-hull mount transducer

1 With the boat hauled out of the watermark the location chosen formounting the transducer on thebottom of the hull

2 If the hull is not level within 15deg inany direction fairing blocks madeout of teak should be used betweenthe transducer and hull both insideand outside to keep the transducerface parallel with the water lineFabricate the fairing block as shownbelow and make the entire surfaceas smooth as possible to provide anundisturbed flow of water around thetransducer The fairing block shouldbe smaller than the transducer itselfto provide a channel to divert

turbulent water around the sides ofthe transducer rather than over itsface

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3248

26

BOWHole for stuffing tube

Upper Half

Lower Half

Saw along slopeof hull Construction of fairing block

3 Drill a hole just large enough to passthe threaded stuffing tube of thetransducer through the hull makingsure it is drilled vertically

4 Apply a sufficient amount of highquality caulking compound to the topsurface of the transducer around thethreads of the stuffing tube andinside the mounting hole (and fairingblocks if used) to ensure watertightmounting

5 Mount the transducer and fairingblocks and tighten the locking nutsBe sure that the transducer is

properly oriented and its workingface is parallel to the waterline

Note Do not over-stress the stuffingtube and locking nuts through excessivetightening since the wood block willswell when the boat is placed in thewater It is suggested that the nut betightened lightly at installation andretightened several days after the boat

has been launched

Transducer preparation

Before putting the boat in water wipethe face of the transducer thoroughlywith a detergent liquid soap This willlessen the time necessary for thetransducer to have good contact withthe water Otherwise the time requiredfor complete ldquosaturationrdquo ill belengthened and performance will bereduced

DO NOT paint the transducerPerformance will be affected

43 Transom MountTransducer

The transom mount transducer is verycommonly employed usually onrelatively small IO or outboard boatsDo not use this method on an inboardmotor boat because turbulence iscreated by the propeller ahead of thetransducer

520-5PWD

There are two methods of installationflush with hull (for flat hulls) andprojecting from hull (for deep V-hulls)

Flat Hull

D

Dgt50 cm

Deep-VHull

520-5PWD mounting locations

Installing the 520-5PWD on a flat hull

A suitable mounting location is at least50 cm away from the engine and wherethe water flow is smooth

1 Drill four pilot holes in the mountinglocation

2 Attach the transducer to the bracketwith 5 x 20 tapping screws(supplied)

3 Adjust the transducer position so thetransducer faces right to the bottom

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3348

27

Note If necessary to improve waterflow and minimize air bubblesstaying on the transducer faceincline the transducer about 5deg at therear This may require a certainamount of experimentation for finetuning at high cruising speeds

4 Fill the gap between the wedge frontof the transducer and transom withepoxy material to eliminate any airspaces

No1 M5 x 14

5 x 20

5 x 20

2 to 5

Tape

Hull

Transom mount transducer

mounting flush with hull

Installing the transom mounttransducer on a deep-V hull

This method is employed on deep-Vhulls and provides good performancebecause the effects of air bubbles areminimal Install the transducer parallelwith water surface not flush with hull Ifthe boat is placed on a trailer care mustbe taken not to damage the transducerwhen the boat is hauled out of the waterand put on the trailer

5 x 20

No 2M5 x 14

5 x 20

Transom mount transducermounted projecting from hull

525-5PWD

Choose the installation methoddepending on the rise angle of the hull

Transom

Transom

Stripe over 10

Parallel with hull

Mount at the stripe

less than 10

525-5PWD mounting location

Installing the 525-5PWD

Referring to ldquoInstalling the 520-5PWDrdquoin the left column for mounting of thebracket and the figure shown on the topof next page install the 525-5PWD tothe transom

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3448

28

2 to 5

Transducer

Bracket

Hull

Epoxy material

525-5PWD mounting

44 Inside-hullTransducer

The thru-hull mount transducer(520-5PSD 520-5MSD) may also beinstalled inside the hull following theprocedure below

Necessary tools

You will need the following toolsbull Sandpaper (100)bull Silicone sealantbull Silicone grease

Remarks on installationbull Turn off the engine and anchor the

boat while installing the equipmentbull Install the transducer in the engine

room

Choosing the mounting locationbull The mounting location should be

where the hull is of single-hullthickness and is void of air or flotationmaterials other than solid fiberglassbetween the transducer face and thewater

bull Do not place the transducer over hullstruts or ribs which run under the hull

bull Avoid a location where the risingangle of the hull exceeds 15deg tominimize the effect of the boatrsquosrolling

bull You will finalize the mounting location

through some trial and error Theprocedure for this is shown later

50 cm

50 cm15 cm15 cm

13

12

Transducer mountinglocation

Centerline

Inside-hull transducer mounting location

Attaching the transducer1 Clean the transducer face to remove

any foreign material Lightly roughenthe transducer face with 100sandpaper Also roughen the insideof the hull where the transducer is tobe mounted

2 Clean the transducer face again3 Warm the silicone sealant to 40degC

before usage to soften it Coat thetransducer face and mountinglocation with silicone sealant

Transducer

SiliconeSealant

Coating transducer facewith silicone sealant

4 Press the transducer firmly down onthe hull and gently twist it back andforth to remove any air which may betrapped in the silicone sealant

Checking the installation

1 Connect the battery to the display

unit2 Turn on the display unit

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3548

29

3 Press the [MODE] key to chooseSINGLE FREQ

4 Choose 50 kHz or 200 kHz and thenpress the [MENUESC] key to closethe mode menu

5 Press the [MENU] to show the mainmenu and then press to select

Auto mode6 Press to choose Off7 Press the [MENUESC] key8 Press the [GAIN] key to set the gain

to ldquo5rdquo and then press the[MENUESC] key

9 Press the [RANGE] key to set therange to 10 meters (feet) and thenpress the [MENUESC] key

10 If the bottom is displayed in darkgray and the depth indicationappears the mounting location issuitable Go to ldquoFinal preparationrdquo

11 If the bottom is not displayed in darkgray tone the mounting location maybe unsuitable Do the followinga) Press the [POWERBRILL] key to

turn off the powerb) Gently dismount the transducer

with a piece of woodc) Reattach the transducer

elsewhere as shown in ldquoAttachingthe transducerrdquo

d) Check the installation again

Final preparation

Support the transducer with a piece ofwood to keep it in place while it is drying

Let the transducer dry 24-72 hours

45 Optional Triducer525ST-MSD

The optional triducer 525ST-MSD isdesigned for thru-hull mounting Forhow to install this transducer seeparagraph 42

φ79 mm

33 mm200-12 UNthreads

φ51 mm

27 mm

7 mm

140 mm Triducer 525ST-MSD

525ST-PWD

The Transom Mount Transducer orTRIDUCER reg Multisensor with IntegralRelease Bracket 525ST-PWD ismanufactured by AIRMAR Co Theseinstructions are also included with the

sensor

Pre-test for speed and temperature

Connect the sensor to the instrumentand spin the paddlewheel Check for aspeed reading and the approximate airtemperature If there is no readingreturn the sensor to your place ofpurchase

Tools and materials needed

ScissorsMasking tapeSafety gogglesDust maskElectric drillDrill bit for

Bracket holes 4mm 23 or 964rdquoFiberglass hull chamfer bit(preferred)6mm or 14rdquo

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3648

30

Transom hole 19mm or 34rdquo(optional)

Cable clamp holes 3mm or 18rdquoScrewdriversStraight edgeMarine sealantPencilZip-tiesWater-based antifouling paint(mandatory in salt water )

Mounting location

To ensure the best performance thesensor must be submerged inaeration-free and turbulence-free water

Mount the sensor close to the centerlineof the boat On slower heavierdisplacement hulls positioning it fartherfrom the centerline is acceptable

Allow adequate space above thebracket for it to release and rotate thesensor upward

Height

Height withoutspeed sensor191mm (7-12)Height withspeed sensor213mm (8-12)

Height required at mounting location

Note 1 Do not mount the sensor in anarea of turbulence or bubbles nearwater intake or discharge openingsbehind strakes struts fittings or hull

irregularities behind eroding paint (anindication of turbulence)Note 2 Avoid mounting the sensorwhere the boat may be supportedduring trailering launching hauling andstorageNote 3 For single drive boat mounton the starboard side at least 75 mm(3rdquo) beyond the swing radius of thepropeller

75 mm(3)

minimum beyondswing radius

Mounting location on single drive boat

Note 4 For twin drive boat mountbetween the drives

Installation of bracket

1 Cut out the installation template

shown on the next page2 At the selected location position thetemplate so the arrow at the bottomis aligned with the bottom edge ofthe transom Being sure the templateis parallel to the waterline tape it inplace

Align template vertically

Deadrise angle

Slope of hullparallel towaterline

Align template arrow withbottom edge of transom

Positioning the template

Warning Always wear safetygoggles and a dust mask

3 Using a 4 mm 23 or 964rdquo bit drillthree holes 22 mm (78rdquo) deepat the locations indicated To preventdrilling too deeply wrap maskingtape around the bit 22 mm (78rdquo)from the pointFiberglass hull Minimize surfacecracking by chamfering the gelcoatIf a chamfer bit or countersink bit is

not available start drilling with a6mm or 14rdquo bit to a depth of 1 mm(116rdquo)

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3748

31

4 If you know your transom angle the

bracket is designed for a standard13deg transom angle11deg-18deg angle No shim is requiredSkip to step 3 in ldquoAdjustingrdquoOther angles The shim is requiredSkip to step 2 of ldquoAdjustingrdquoIf you do not know the transom angletemporarily attach the bracket andsensor to the transom to determine ifthe plastic shim is needed

5 Using the two 10 x 1-14rdquo

self-tapping screws temporarilyscrew the bracket to the hull DONOT tighten the screws completelyat this time Follow the step 1-4 inldquoAttaching the Sensor to the Bracketrdquobefore proceeding with ldquoAdjustingrdquo

Installation templatefor starboard side of boat

Drill at locations labeled Bfor the following transom angles

16 deg through 22 deg

Drill at locations labeled Afor the following transom angles

2 deg through 15 deg

Align arrow with bottom of transom

AA A

BB B

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3848

32

Adjusting

1 Using a straight edge sight theunderside of the sensor relative tothe underside of the hull The sternof the sensor should be 1-3 mm

(116-18rdquo) below the bow of thesensor or parallel to the bottom ofthe hull

11 deg transom angleNO SHIM

12-18 deg transom angleNO SHIM

2 deg -10 deg transom

angle

19 deg -22 deg transom

angleshim withtaper up

shim withtaper down

parallelparallel parallel

slightangle

angletoo steep

anglereversed

YES NONO

YES YESYES

Sensor position and transom angle

Note Do not position the bow of thesensor lower than the stern becauseaeration will occur

2 To adjust the sensorrsquos angle relativeto the hull use the tapered plasticshim provided If the bracket hasbeen temporarily fastened to thetransom remove it Key the shim in

place on the back of the bracket2deg-10deg transom angle (steppedtransom and jet boats) Positionthe shim with the tapered end down19deg-22deg transom angle (smallaluminum and fiberglass boats) Position the shim with the taperedend up

3 If the bracket has been temporarilyfastened to the transom remove it

Apply a marine sealant to thethreads of the two 10 x 1-14rdquo self

tapping screws to prevent waterseeping into the transom Screw thebracket to the hull Do not tighten thescrews completely at this time

4 Repeat step 1 to ensure that theangle of the sensor is correctNote Do not position the sensorfarther into the water than necessaryto avoid increasing drag spray andwater noise and reducing boatspeed

5 Using the vertical adjustment spaceon the bracket slots slide the sensorup or down to provide a projection of3 mm (18rdquo) Tighten the screws

Cable cover

Cableclamp

50 mm (2)

Hull projection 3 mm (18)

Vertical adjustment and cable routing

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3948

33

Attaching the sensor to the bracket

1 If the retaining cover near the top ofthe bracket is closed open it bydepressing the latch and rotating thecover downward

Step 1 Step 2

Latch

Retainingcover

Pivotarm (2)

Slot (2)

Step 4

Step 3

Attaching the sensor to the bracket

2 Insert the sensorrsquos pivot arms intothe slots near the top of the bracket

3 Maintain pressure until the pivotarms click into place

4 Rotate the sensor downward until thebottom snaps into the bracket

5 Close the retaining cover to preventthe accidental release of the sensorwhen the boat is underway

Cable routing

Route the sensor cable over thetransom through a drain hole orthorough a new hole drilled in thetransom above the waterline

Never cut the cable or remote the

connector this will void the warranty Always wear safety goggles and a dustmask

1 If a hole must be drilled choose alocation well above the waterlineCheck for obstructions such as trimtabs pumps or wiring inside the hullMark the location with a pencil Drilla hole through the transom using a19 mm or 34rdquo bit (to accommodatethe connector)

2 Route the cable over or through thetransom

3 On the outside of the hull secure thecable against the transom using thecable clamps Position a cable clamp50 mm(2rdquo) above the bracket andmark the mounting hole with apencil

4 Position the second cable clamphalfway between the first clamp andthe cable hole Mark this mountinghole

5 If a hole has been drilled in thetransom open the appropriate slot inthe transom cable cover Position thecover over the cable where it entersthe hull Mark the two mounting

holes6 At each of the marked locations usea 3 mm or 18rdquo bit to drill a hole 10mm (38rdquo) deep The prevent drillingtoo deeply wrap masking tapearound the bit 10 mm (38rdquo) from thepoint

7 Apply marine sealant to the threadsof the 6 x 12rdquo self-tapping screw toprevent water from seeping into the

transom If you have drilled a holethrough the transom apply marinesealant to the space around thecable where it passes through thetransom

8 Position the two cable clamps andfasten them in place If used pushthe cable cover over the cable andscrew it in place

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4048

34

9 Route the cable to the instrumentbeing careful not to tear the cable

jacket when passing it though thebulkhead(s) and other parts of theboat To reduce electricalinterference separate the sensorcable from other electrical wiring andldquonoiserdquo sources Coil any excesscable and secure it in place withzip-ties to prevent damage

46 Optional WaterTemperatureSpeedSensor

Water temperaturespeed sensorST-02MSB and ST-02PSB which aredesigned for thru-hull mounting areoptionally available Install them asshown below

Mounting considerations

Choose a suitable mounting locationconsidering the followingbull Choose a place free from vibrationbull Choose a mid-boat flat position The

sensor does not have to be installedperfectly perpendicular The sensormust not be damaged in dry-dockingoperation

bull Choose a place apart from equipmentgenerating heat

bull Choose a place in the forwarddirection viewing from the drain holeto allow for circulation of coolingwater

1 Dry-dock the boat2 Make a hole of approx 51 mm

diameter in the mounting location3 Unfasten locknut and remove the

sensor section4 Apply high-grade sealant to the

flange of the sensor5 Pass the sensor casing through thehole

6 Face the notch on the sensor towardboatrsquos bow and tighten the flange

7 Set the sensor section to the sensorcasing and tighten the locknut

8 Launch the boat and check for waterleakage around the sensor

Locknut

Face notchtoward bow

Flange Nut

Coat withsilicone sealant Brim

φ 77

51

123

Water temperaturespeed sensor

ST-02MSB ST-02PSB

47 Wiring

Connect the LS-4100 powerdata cableassy MJ-A7SPF0005-020 (2 msupplied) to the POWER and thetransducer cable to the XDR connectorRefer to the interconnection diagram toconnect cables Leave slack in cables tofacilitate checking and maintenance

Note The fuse holder contains a springwhich fixes the fuse To preventdetachment of the spring which wouldcause loss of power tie the line asshown below

+ line (red)

Fuse holder

Cable tie How to fix fuse holder

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4148

35

Establishing the ground

The ground wire (125 sq or more localsupply) should be as short as possible

The signal line ground is isolated from

the chassis ground however the powerline is not insulated Therefore whenconnecting eternal equipment havingpositive ground do not ground thesignal line to the chassis If excessivenoise shows on the screen the groundmay be inadequate In this case attacha steel plate measuring 20 cm by 30 cmon the outside of the hull to provide aground point Connect the ground wire

there Use a ldquoclosedrdquo type lug ( ) tomake the connection at the display unitDo not use an ldquoopenrdquo type lug ( )

Optional equipment

POWER connector

The power supply port is commonlyused for connection of externalequipment such as a GPS receiver orwind indicator Use the powerdatacable MJ-A7SPF0005-020 (supplied) forconnection referring the figure shown inthe right column

Connector Color Remarks

1 TD-A WHT2 TD-B BLU

IEC-61162-1NMEA0183

3 RD-A YEL

4 RD-B GRN

IEC-61162-1

NMEA01835 + RED

6 - BLKPower input12 VDC

7 FG

Water tempspeed sensor

Connect the optional water tempspeedsensor to the XDR connector with theoptional converter connector (Type02S4147) as shown below

Tape connectors withvulcaninzing tapeand then vinyl tapeto waterproof themBind tape ends withcable ties to preventtape from unraveling

Connect to XDR portat rear of display unit

MJ-A10SPF

MJ-A10SRMDMJ-A6SRMD

Fromtransducer

Fromsensor

Connection of converterconnector 02S4147

48 IEC 61162-1 DataSentences

The tables below show the datasentences which can be input to andoutput from the LS-4100 Thetransmission speed for both input andoutput is 4800 bps Data is output attwo-second intervals

Input data sentences

Sentence Meaning

BWC Bearing and distance towaypoint

GGA Global positioning system(GPS) fix data

GLL Geographic position -latitudelongitude

HDG Heading deviation and variationHDT Heading true

MDA Atmospheric pressure

MTW Water temperature

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4248

36

Input data sentences (conrsquot)

Sentence MeaningMWV Wind speed and

angleRMA Recommended

minimum specificLORAN-C dataRMB Recommended

minimum navigationinformation

RMC Recommendedminimum specificGPSTRANSIT data

VHW Water speed andheading

VTG Course over groundand ground speedXTE Cross track error

Output data sentences

Sentence MeaningDBT (Ver 15) Depth below

transducerDPT (Ver 20 Ver30)

Depth

MTW Water temperatureRMB (Ver 20) Recommended

minimumnavigationinformation

VHW Water speed andheading

TLL Target positionoutput by [MARK]key

= Available with connection of optionalsensorsnavaid

49 Installation MenuThe installation menu mainly containsitems which are set at installation

1 Turn on the power while pressing the[MENUESC] key Continue pressing

the [MENUESC] key until theInstallation menu appears

SIMULATION On

TEST LCD PATTERN MEMORY CLEAR

NMEA PORT InOutNMEA MIX OffGPS WAAS Off

SET BOTTOM LEVEL

Installation Menu

= Setting cannot be changed whenNMEA PORT setting is InIn

Installation menu

SIMULATION The simulation modeprovides without connection of thetransducer simulated operation of theequipment using internally generatedechoes All controls are operative Themessage ldquoSIMrdquo appears at the top rightcorner on the screen when thesimulation mode is active

1 At the installation menu press toopen the simulation mode optionswindow

2 Press to choose ldquoOnrdquo to turn onthe simulation mode

3 Press the [POWERBRILL] keyabout three seconds to turn off thepower

4 Press the [POWERBRILL] key toturn on the power ldquoSIMrdquo appears atthe top right corner of the display

5 To turn off the simulation modeselect Off at step 2

NMEA po r t se tup(NMEA PO RT NMEA M IX)

The POWER port can function as aninput port or inputoutput port Changethe setting to ldquoInInrdquo when connectingGP-310B320B and a wind sensor

When connecting the GP-310B320Band a wind sensor first turn on ldquoGPS

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4348

37

WAASrdquo (in the Installation menu) andthen select ldquoInInrdquo as the NMEA portsetting

1 Turn on the power while pressingand holding down the [MENUESC]key Continue pressing the[MENUESC] key until theInstallation menu appears

2 Choose NMEA PORT and thenpress to display the NMEA portoptions window

3 Use or to choose InOut orInIn as appropriate

InOut Input and Output (default

setting)InIn Input only (Available withconnection of the GP-310B320Band a wind sensor)

4 Press choose NMEA MIX andthen press to display the NMEAMIX options window

5 Use or to choose Off or OnChoose On to output input data

Off Outputs the data sentences ofLS-4100 only

On Outputs the data sentences ofLS-4100 and sentences which areinput from other equipment

6 To restore normal operation turn offthe power and then turn it on again

GPS WAAS Chooses how to use theWAAS signal when connecting with a

WAAS receiver for example GP-320B

Note WAAS is currently in thedevelopmental phase During thedevelopmental phase the reliability andavailability of the WAAS signal cannotbe guaranteed Therefore any positiondata should be verified against othersources to confirm reliability

1 Display the Installation menu2 Choose GPS WAAS and then press

to open the GPS WAAS options

window

Off

WAAS options window3 Press or to choose ldquoWAAS-02rdquo

(test signal) When the systembecomes operational (in 2003) setto ldquo00rdquo (regular WAAS signal)

4 Turn off the power

BOTTOM LEVEL If the depthindication is unstable in automaticoperation or the bottom echo cannot bedisplayed in the darkest gray tone byadjusting the gain controls in manualoperation you may adjust the bottomecho level detection circuit for both 50kHz and 200 kHz to stabilize theindication Generally lower the bottomlevel for inner hull installation where thereceive level is too low If the bottomlevel is too low it may be difficult todiscriminate fish from the bottomresulting in unstable depth indication

And if the bottom level is too high thedepth indication may not appear

1 At the installation menu press tochoose SET BOTTOM LEVEL andthen press Several seconds laterthe following display appears

Bottom level +0 (200k -100 - +100 ) +0 ( 50k -100 - +100 )

Bottom level display

2 While observing the picture use or to set 200 kHz or to set50 kHz Set up for optimum picture

3 To restore normal operation turn offthe power and then it on again

Note The mode must be other thanldquoNAV DATArdquo to show the bottom leveldisplay

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4448

SP - 1 E2371S01C

SPECIFICATIONS OF ECHO SOUNDER LS-4100

1 GENERAL11 TX Frequency 50 kHz or 200 kHz 50200 kHz dual transmitting selectable12 Transmit Method Single or dual transmitting

13 Output Power 300 Wrms14 TX Rate Max 500 pulsemin15 Pulse-length 01 to 08 ms

2 DISPLAY UNIT21 Display system 5-inch monochrome LCD 76 mm (W) x 100 mm (H) 240 x 320 dots22 Display Mode Single frequency (highlow freq) Dual-frequency Zoom Nav data-12

Marker zoom Bottom zoom Bottom-lock23 Display Range

Range SettingRange

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

Display

rangeMeter 5 10 20 40 80 150 200 300 2-500

Feet 15 30 60 120 200 400 600 1000 7-1500

Fathoms 3 5 10 20 40 80 100 150 1-250

PassiBraza 3 5 10 30 50 100 150 200 1-300

24 Range Shift 0-500 m 0-1500 ft 0-250 fa 0-300 pb25 Expansion Range Bottom-lock expansion 3 to 10 m

Sectional expansion 2 to 50 m26 Display Advance Speed 8 steps (LinesTX Freeze 1161814121121 41)

3 INTERFACE31 Input data sentences IEC61162-1NMEA0183 Ver 152030

GGA RMA RMB RMC BWC GLL HDT HDG VTG VHW MTWMWV MDA XTE

32 Output data sentences IEC61162-1NMEA0183 Ver 152030 interval 2 sMTW VHW DBT DPT RMB TLL by key operating External data required

4 POWER SUPPLY41 Display Unit 12 VDC 05 A

5 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITION51 Ambient Temperature Display unit -15degC to +55degC52 Relative Humidity 93 or less at 40degC53 Waterproof IPX5

6 COATING COLOR61 Display Unit N30

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4548

M a r

4

0 3

D-1

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4648

Mar 4 03

Mar 4 03

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4748

M a r

3

0 3

S-1

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4848

FURUNO Authorized DistributorDealer FURUNO Authorized DistributorDealer

9-52 Ashihara-cho9-52 Ashihara-choNishinomiya 662-8580 JAPANNishinomiya 662-8580 JAPAN

Telephone Telephone 0798-65-21110798-65-2111FaxFax 0798-65-42000798-65-4200

FIRST EDITION FIRST EDITION MARMAR 20032003Printed in JapanPrinted in Japan All rights reserved All rights reserved

B1B1 SEPSEP 09 200509 2005

Pub NoPub No OME-23710OME-23710 00014698000000146980000001469800000014698000(( DAMIDAMI )) LS-4100LS-4100

0 0 0 1 4 6 9 8 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 4 6 9 8 0 0 0

Page 10: OME23710B_1_LS4100

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 1048

4

Bottom-zoom display

This mode expands bottom and bottomfish in the range width set with ZOOMRANGE of the SYSTEM menu Thismode is useful for determining bottom

contour When the bottom depthincreases the display shift to keep thebottom echo at the lower part of thescreen

0

Bottom-zoom display

298

Bottom

0

40

10

20

30

32

31

30

29

28

27

Switched withdepth

Singlefrequencydisplay

Zoommarker

0050k 11

Bottom-zoom display

Bottom-lock display

The bottom-lock display provides anormal picture on the right half of thescreen and a 15 feet (5 meter) widelayer in contact with the bottom isexpanded onto the left half of the screenThis mode is useful for detecting bottomfish = Operator selectable

Bottom-lock display

Zoommarker

Zoomedfish

This sectionis zoomed

217

0

Singlefrequencydisplay

Fishschool

0

40

Bottom displayed flat

10

20

30

0

1

2

3

4

550k 11

Bottom-lock display

Nav data displays

The nav data displays appear on the leftof the screen Data other than depthrequires appropriate sensor

You can display between two and fouritems in a nav data display and choosethe item and order to display them Seeparagraph 116 to choose the items todisplay ldquoNAV DATA-1rdquo and ldquoNAVDATA-2rdquo in paragraph 21 to choose thenumber of items to display

Depth

694 m

Trip meter

100 nm

Odometer

56 nm

NAV DATA-1 display

NAV DATA-2 display

Temperature

655 deg F

172

1 05 0 05 1

025 nm

XTE

Speed

kt

20

50

40

60

30

10

0

Sample NAV DATA displays(Default setting)

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 1148

5

15 Menu OperatingProcedure

The LS-4100 has three menus MainSystem and Installation Below is the

basic menu operating procedure1 Press the [MENUESC] key to openthe main menu Page 1 or Page 2 ofthe main menu appears dependingon the page last used

[MENU] Exit

(12)

Note SHIFT and CLUTTER arenot available in the auto mode

AUTO MODE Off SHIFT 0ftPIC ADVANCE 11NOISE LIMIT Off CLUTTER Off SIGNAL LEVEL Off

A-SCOPE Off HUE DayWHITE LINE Off DEEP GAIN Low

Pageno

Main menu page 1

2 Use or $ to select an item Toview page 2 of the main menu press$ until showing the display below

[MENU] Exit

(22)

GOTO WPT Off WAYPOINT LIST

TRIP RESET

GAIN ADJ 200 +0GAIN ADJ 50 +0DRAFT 00ft

ALARM MENUSYSTEM MENU

Main menu page 2

3 Press to show selected itemrsquosoptions window The example shownat the top of the right column is theoptions window for AUTO MODE

Off CruisingFishing

Auto mode options window

4 Use or $ to choose option or setnumeric value

5 Press the [MENUESC] key to closethe menu or press to continuemenu operation

16 Automatic OperationHow automatic operation works

The automatic function automatically

chooses the proper gain range scaleand clutter It works as followsbull The range changes automatically to

display the bottom echo on thescreen

bull The gain is automatically adjusted todisplay the bottom echo in the darkesttone

bull Clutter (on the menu) whichsuppresses low-level noise isautomatically adjusted

Choosing automatic operation

The automatic mode provides twochoices of modes cruising and fishing1 Press the [MENUESC] key to open

the main menu2 Press to choose AUTO MODE

from page 1 of the menu3 Press to open the mode options

window4 Choose Cruising or Fishing as

appropriate

ldquoCruisingrdquo is for tracking the bottomldquoFishingrdquo is for searching fish schoolsSince ldquoCruisingrdquo uses a higher clutterrejection setting than fishing it is notrecommended for fish detection -weak fish echoes may not bedisplayed ldquoFishingrdquo clearly displaysweaker echoes

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 1248

6

5 Press the [MENUESC] key to closethe menu

The auto mode in use is shown as(Auto-Fishing) or

(Auto-Cruising) at the top left corner onthe screen

Note When in the auto mode SHIFTand CLUTTER cannot be adjustedmanually

Range offset

To display the bottom tail in detail in theautomatic mode offset the range as

below1 Press the [+] or [-] key of the

[RANGE] key

+0 ft

AUTO RANGE OFFSET

Auto range offset window

2 Press the [+] or [-] key of the[RANGE] key again to choose offsetdesired (range -100 to +300 ft)Note that if the basic range ischanged the offset is returned to ldquo0rdquo

3 Press the [MENUESC] key to finish

Gain offset

Gain offset lets you override automaticgain adjustment1 Press the [GAIN] key

Min Max 0

AUTO GAIN OFFSET

Auto gain offset window

2 Press or key to offset gain(setting range ndash5 to +5) The gainselected is shown at the top of thescreen asG (Gain) + (or -) XX (offset value)

3 Press the [MENUESC] key to finish

17 Manual OperationChoosing the manual mode

1 Press the [MENUESC] key to openthe main menu

2 Press to choose AUTO MODEfrom page 1 of the menu3 Press to show the window4 Choose Off with 5 Press the [MENUESC] key to close

the menu appears at the topleft corner on the screen

Choosing range

The basic range and range shiftingfunctions used together give you themeans to choose the depth you can seeon the screen The basic range can bethought of as providing a ldquowindowrdquo intothe water column and range shifting asmoving the ldquowindowrdquo to the desireddepth

Choosing basic range

The basic range may be chosen withthe [RANGE] key from the eight rangesshown in the table shown below (ldquoPBrdquoin the table means PassiBraza) Thesetting range can be arranged throughthe SYSTEM menu

Default ranges

Basic RangeUnit1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

meters 5 10 20 40 80 150 200 300

feet 15 30 60 120 200 400 600 1000

fathoms 3 5 10 20 40 80 100 150

hiro 4 8 15 30 50 100 150 200

PB 3 5 10 30 50 100 150 200

Japanese unit of depth measurement1 Press the [+] or [-] key of the

[RANGE] key and the display shouldnow look something like the one onat the top of the next page

2 Press the [+] or [-] key of the[RANGE] key again to choose abasic range

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 1348

7

1000ft 600ft 400ft 200ft 120ft 60ft 30ft 15ft

Basic ranges (default)3 Press the [MENUESC] key to close

the window

Shifting the range

The basic range may be shifted up ordown in the manual mode as follows

Display

Window can beshifted up anddown to selectthe depth

Range and display shift concept

1 Press the [MENUESC] key to openthe main menu

2 Choose SHIFT from page 1 of themenu

3 Press to open the shift optionswindow

0ft

Shift window

4 Use or $ to choose amount ofshift desired

5 Press the [MENUESC] key to closethe window

Note The picture may not be displayedif the amount of shift is greater thanactual depth

Adjusting the gain

The [GAIN] key adjusts the sensitivity ofthe receiver Generally use a highergain setting for greater depths and alower setting for shallower waters

Use the proper gain setting

Incorrect gain may produce wrong depthindication possibly resulting in a dangeroussituation

UTION

Gain too high Gain proper Gain too low Examples of proper and improper gain

1 Press the [GAIN] key and the displayshown below appears

Min Max

50k 3

200k 2

GAIN

Gain adjustment window

2 When using the dual frequencydisplay press or $ to choosefrequency

3 Press the [GAIN] key to set (Youmay also use or ) Adjust so thata slight amount of noise remains onthe screen

4 Press the [MENUESC] key to closethe gain adjustment window

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 1448

8

18 Measuring DepthThe VRM (Variable Range Marker)functions to measure the depth to fishschools etc1 Press or $ to place the VRM

on the object which you wish tomeasure range

2 Read the VRM depth just abovethe VRM

0

20

40

60

80496

398

VRM

VRM depth

50k 11

How to measure depth with the VRM

19 Choosing PictureAdvance Speed

The picture advance speed determineshow quickly the vertical scan lines runacross the screen When choosing apicture advance speed keep in mindthat a fast advance speed will expandthe size of the fish school horizontallyon the screen and a slow advancespeed will contract it Note that thepicture is not refreshed when pictureadvancement is stopped Thereforeuse caution when steering the vesselunder this condition

Fast Slow Picture and picture advancement speed

1 Press the [MENUESC] key to openthe main menu

2 Choose PIC ADVANCE from page 1of the menu

3 Press to show the optionswindow

Stop116 18 14 12 11 21 41

(

)

Fast

Slow

Picture advance options window

4 Use or $ to choose pictureadvance speed desired Thefractions in the options windowdenote the number of scan linesproduced per transmission Forexample 18 means one scan line isproduced every 8 transmissionsldquoStoprdquo freezes the display and it isconvenient for taking a photo

The picture is not refreshed whenpicture advancement is stopped

Maneuvering the vessel in this conditionmay result in a dangerous situation

UTION

5 Press the [MENUESC] key to closethe menu

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 1548

9

110 SuppressingInterference

Interference from other acousticequipment operating nearby or other

electronic equipment on your boat mayshow itself on the display as shown inthe figure belowTo suppress interference do thefollowing1 Press the [MENUESC] key to open

the main menu2 Use or $ to choose NOISE LIMIT

from page 1 of the menu3 Press to show the options

window4 Use or $ to choose the degree ofsuppression desired Off LowMedium or High (highest)

5 Press the [MENUESC] key to closethe menu

Interference fromother sounder

Electrical interference

Forms of interference

Turn the noise limiter off when nointerference exists otherwise weakechoes may be missed

111 Suppressing LowLevel Noise

Low intensity ldquospecklesrdquo may appearover most of screen This is mainly due

to sediment in the water or noise Thesecan be suppressed by adjustingCLUTTER on the menu When theautomatic mode is on clutter isautomatically rejected To suppress lowlevel noise in manual sounder operationdo the following1 Press the [MENUESC] key to open

the main menu2 Use or $ to choose CLUTTER

from page 1 of the menu3 Press to show the optionswindow

4 Use or $ to choose the degree ofsuppression desired 1 2 3 4 5 or6 The higher the number the greaterthe suppression

5 Press the [MENUESC] key to closethe menu

To turn off low-level noisesuppression choose Off at step 4 andthen press the [MENUESC] key

Clutter appearance

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 1648

10

112 Erasing WeakEchoes

Sediment in the water or reflectionsfrom plankton may be painted on the

display in low intensity tones

Weakechoes

Appearance of weak echoes

These weak echoes may be erased asfollows1 Press the [MENUESC] key to open

the main menu2 Use or $ to choose SIGNAL

LEVEL from page 1 of the menu3 Press to show the options

window4 Use or $ to choose the degree of

suppression desired Off Low orHigh (highest)

5 Press the [MENUESC] key to closethe menu

To turn off the signal level function choose Off at step 4 and then pressthe [MENUESC] key

113 A-scope DisplayThis display shows echoes at eachtransmission with amplitudes and toneproportional to their intensities on theright 14 of the screen It is useful forestimating the kind of fish school andbottom composition

Note In the dual frequency display the A-scope display is only available withthe high frequency display

323

10

20

30

40

0

A-scope display

Single frequency display

Strong

reflection(bottom)

Weakreflection(fish or noise)

50k 11

Strongreflection(fish)

A-scope display

1 Press the [MENUESC] key to openthe main menu

2 Press or $ to choose A-SCOPEfrom page 1 of the menu

3 Press to show the optionswindow

4 Press

or$

to choose the A-scope presentation type desiredNormal Display shows echoes ateach transmission with amplitudesand tone proportional to theirintensitiesPeak Peak-hold amplitude picture

5 Press the [MENUESC] key to closethe menu

To turn off the A-scope displaychoose Off at step 4 and then press the[MENUESC] key

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 1748

11

114 AlarmsAlarm description

The LS-4100 has six conditions whichgenerate both audio and visual alarms

bottom alarm normal fish alarm bottomlock fish alarm water temperature alarmarrival alarm and speed alarm (Thewater temperature arrival and speedalarms require appropriate sensors)

Bottom alarm The bottom alarm alertsyou when the bottom is within the alarmrange set To activate the bottom alarmthe depth must be displayed

Fish (normal) alarm The fish (normal)alarm tells you when fish are within thepreset alarm range

Fish (bottom lock) alarm The fish(bottom lock) alarm available with thebottom-lock mode sounds when fishare within a certain distance from thebottom Note that the bottom zoom

display must be turned on to use thisalarm

Water temperature alarm The watertemperature alarm alerts when thewater temperature is within (Insidealarm) the alarm range set orunderover (outside alarm) the rangeset

Speed alarm The speed alarm alertsyou when the speed is within (Insidealarm) or underover (Outside alarm)the preset speed

Arrival alarm The arrival alarm alertswhen you are near a waypoint by thedistance set

Activating an alarm

1 Press the [MENUESC] key2 Press or $ to choose ALARM

MENU from page 2 on the menu3 Press the to show the ALARM

menu

ALARM

(12)

[MENU] Exit

ALARM

(22)

[MENU] Exit

BOTTOM On FROM 5ft

RANGE 10ftFISH(Normal) On

FROM 5ft RANGE 10ftFISH(BL) On

FROM 8ft RANGE 10ftFISH LEVEL Medium

TEMPERATURE Inside FROM 724 deg F RANGE 10 deg F

SPEED Off FROM 00kt

RANGE 10kt

ARRIVAL ALRM Off RANGE 0 01 m

Pageno

Gray characters mean alarm is inactive Alarm menu

4 Use or $ to choose an alarm asappropriate

5 Press to show the options menu

Off On

Off InsideOutside

Temp Speed Alarm Types

Fish ArrivalBottom AlarmOnOff

Alarm options6 Use or $ to choose alarm type

Off Alarm off On Alarm onInside Alarm generated whenspeed (or water temperature) iswithin the range setOutside Alarm generated whenspeed (or water temperature) isoutside the range set

7 Press to close the windowFor ARRIVAL ALARM setting skip tostep 12

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 1848

12

8 Press $ to choose FROM9 Press to show the options menu

0ft

Depth

632 deg F

Temperature

10 kt

Speed Depth temperature speed setting

window10 Use or $ to set starting depth

temperature or speed as appropriateFor FISH (BL) the starting depth isthe range from the bottom

11 Press to close the window12 Press $ to choose RANGE13 Press to show the options menu14 Use or $ to set alarm range15 For the bottom alarm temperature

alarm speed alarm or arrivalalarm press the [MENUESC] key tofinish For a fish alarm press toclose the window and then go tostep 16

16 Press $ to choose FISH LEVEL17 Press to show the options menu

Weak

MediumStrong Fish level options

18 Use or $ to choose the echostrength level which will trigger a fishalarm

Weak Weak echoes (weakest toneon level bar)Medium Medium strength echoes

(middle tone on level bar)Strong Strong echoes (darkest toneon level bar)

19 Press the [MENUESC] key twice toclose the menu

Alarm range marker Bottom alarm Fish alarm (normal) Right Fish alarm (bottomlock) Left

Alarm icon

Alarm rangeStartingpoint

Bottom alarm Fish alarm (normal) Fish alarm (BL)

Temperature alarm (deg

C ordeg

F shown) Speed alarm Arrival alarm

Alarm icon (Appropriate icon appears to showwhich alarm has been violated)

How the alarm works

Note To disable an alarm choose Offat step 5 in the above procedure

Silencing the buzzer

The buzzer sounds and the appropriatealarm icon appears and flashes whenan alarm is violated You can silence thebuzzer by pressing any key Howeverthe buzzer will sound whenever thealarm setting is violated

Note The audio and visual alarms arereleased against the last-violated alarmwhen multiple alarms are active

115 WaypointsWaypoints may be used tobull Record the position of an important

echo as waypoint 12 points may beregistered

bull Output a waypoint position to a plotterto mark position on its screen

bull Find range bearing and time-to-go toa location (waypoint)

Note Requires latitude and longitudeposition from a navigator

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 1948

13

Registering a waypoint on thescreen

1 Press the [MARK] key The cursorappears along with waypoint entryinstructions To enter a waypoint tothe current own shiprsquos position go tostep 3Note If there is no position data themessage ldquoNo position datardquo appearsCheck the navigator

50k

496

1100

20

40

60

80

0

Cursor

WAYPOINT ENTRY

( Move) Cursor [MARK] Enter [MENU] Cancel

50 kHz display

2 Press the cursor pad to set thecursor where desired Pictureadvancement is stopped until step 3is completed and the instructionwindow is integrated into the navdisplay

3 Press the [MARK] key again WhenTLL or FURUNO-TLL is selected atTLL OUTPUT on the System menuthe latitude and longitude position atthe cursor is output to the navigator

A vertical line marks location Furtherthe display shows the waypointname (next sequential number) andposition of the location selected atstep 2

WAYPOINTName FREQLat 34 deg 22796NLon 136 deg 07264E

05

[MENU] Exit

rase

Waypoint data display

Note If you attempt to enter 13thwaypoint the message ldquoMemoryfullrdquo appears In this case erase anunwanted waypoint to enable entry

4 To save the waypoint under thename shown go to step 8 or go tostep 5 to change its name

5 Press to open the waypoint nameentry window

WAYPOINTName FREQLat 34 deg 22796NLon 136 deg 07264E

05

[MENU] Exit

01------ ENT

rase

Waypoint window name entry6 Use or to set character $ or

to shift cursor The name mayconsist of 10 alphanumericcharactersNote Character order is 0 1hellip9 - A BhellipZ _ 0hellip

7 Press to choose ENT 8 Press the [MENUESC] key to

register the waypoint

Registering waypoint by LL

1 Press the [MENUESC] key to openthe main menu

2 Use or to choose WAYPOINTLIST from page 2 of the menu

3 Press

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 2048

14

WAYPOINT LIST

01 0102 0303------------------------------------------------------

[MENU] Exit

Waypoint list4 Press or to choose an empty

waypoint and press Press again

NEW WAYPOINTName FREQLat 34 deg 22796NLon 136 deg 07264E

05

[MENU] Exit

04------ ENT

rase

New waypoint window name entry

5 Use or to set character $ or to shift cursor

6 Press to select ENT 7 Enter latitude and longitude similar

to how you entered waypoint name8 Press the [MENUESC] key to

register the waypoint

Editing waypoints Press the [MENUESC] key to open

the main menu

2 Use or to choose WAYPOINTLIST from page 2 of the menu

3 Press to open the waypoints list4 Use or to choose a waypoint

and press 5 Use or to choose the item to

edit (name latitude or longitude)6 Press to open the data entry

window7 Use or to set character $ or

to choose location8 Press to choose ENT 9 Press the [MENUESC] key

Erasing waypoints Press the [MENUESC] key2 Use or to choose WAYPOINT

LIST from page 2 of the menu3 Press to open the waypoints list

4 Use or to choose the waypointto erase and then press Note You cannot erase a waypointwhich is selected as ldquoGOTO WPTrdquo

5 Press to choose ldquoEraserdquo6 Press to open the options window7 Press to select YES to erase the

waypoint The waypoint list appearswith the erased waypoint blank

8 Press the [MENUESC] key twice toclose the menu

Setting destination waypoint

Set a destination waypoint to find rangebearing and time-to-go to that point Youcan see range and bearing to awaypoint Time-to-go is shown on theTime to Go digital display

Press the [MENUESC] key to openthe main menu

2 Use or to choose GOTO WPTfrom page 2 of the menu

3 Press to open the waypoints list

Off01020304----------------------------------------------------------------

Waypoint list

4 Use or to choose a waypoint5 Press the [MENUESC] key to close

the menu

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 2148

15

116 Setting Up Nav DataDisplays

The user may arrange the nav datadisplays as desired

1 Use the [MODE] key to show theNAV DATA-1 or 2 display whicheveryou want to set up

2 Press the [MENUESC] key to closethe mode selection window

3 Press the cursor pad to display theNAV DATA SETUP window

NAV DATA SETUP

Window Selection Data Selection

[MENU] Exit

NAV DATA SETUP window

4 Use or to choose a datadisplay window desired Adashed-line rectangle circumscribesyour selection

5 Use

or$

to choose item todisplay See the below for adescription of the displays

(9)

(1)

(2)

(3)

(4)(5)

(6)(7)(8)

Two-data

display

Three-data

display

Four-data

displayItems displayable in (1) - (3) depth positioncourse range and bearing trip distanceodometer water temperature headingair pressure time-to-go to destination waypointXTE speed wind speed and directiondestination waypoint data compassItems displayable in (4) - (9) depth positionspeed course range and bearing trip distanceodometer water temperature headingair pressure time-to-go to destination waypointXTE wind speed wind direction

= Graphic display

Nav data window and item displayable6 Press the [MENUESC] key to finish

Note You can choose the number ofitems to show in a nav data display withNAV DATA-1 and NAV DATA-2 on theSystem menu

GRAPHIC DISPLAYS

1 05 0 05 1

Wpt 03Rng 019nm Brg 321 deg XTE 000nm Cse 333 deg

DESTINATION WAYPOINT GRAPHIC

XTEscale

BearingCourseDestinationwaypointdirection

DestinationwaypointdataNameRangeXTE

Wind APP

WIND GRAPHIC

60

120

90

030

150180

120

150

90

60

30

120 deg

Speed 103 ms

COMPASS GRAPHIC

SPEED GRAPHIC

172

Speed

20

50

40

60

30

10

01 05 0 05 1

025 nm

XTE

XTE GRAPHIC

kt

Bearing todestinationwaypoint

Course

Brg30 deg

Cse90 deg

N

E

XTE scale

Speed-ometer

Nav data display-1

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 2248

16

DIGITAL DISPLAYS

Course

123 deg

COURSE

Depth

328 ft

DEPTH

Heading TRUEMAG

318 deg

HEADING

Odometer

56 nm

ODOMETER

Position GPS 3D

30 deg 00065N130 deg 00574E

POSITION

Temperature

698 degF

WATER TEMPERATURE

Trip meter

121 nm

TRIP DISTANCE

Time to Go

00 H30 M

TIME-TO-GO

1018 hpa

AIR PRESSURE

Air Pressure

Speed

193 kt

SPEED

Rng

121 nm

RANGE amp BEARING

Brg

140 deg

Wind Speed APP

80 ms

WIND SPEED

Wind Dir APP

138 deg

WIND DIRECTION

APP or TRUE depending on menu setting TRUE or MAG depending

on menu settingamp To destination waypoint

Note 1 Nav data is updated with somedelay

Note 2 When data is lost 120 sec thedisplay shows - - at the locationwhere data is lost

= GPS receiving status (Displays whenconnecting with GP-310B320B and InOutis selected at the Installation menu)NO FIX Position cannot be foundGPS 2D 2D (dimension) GPS position fixGPS 3D 3D GPS fixGPS W2D 2D WAAS position fixGPS W3D 3D WAAS position fix

NAV data display-2

117 Other Menu ItemsThis section describes the menu itemsnot previously mentioned

Page 1

HUE (Picture Color)

Two picture color arrangements areavailable Day and Night Day showsechoes on a white background Nightshows them on a black background

1 Press the [MENUESC] key todisplay the menu

2 Use or $ to choose HUE frompage 1 of the menu

3 Press to show the optionswindow

4 Use or $ to choose Day or Nightas appropriate

5 Press the [MENUESC] key to closethe menu

WHITE LINE

The white line feature displays theleading edge of the bottom echo in

white This is useful for discriminatingbottom fish near the bottom

1 Press the [MENUESC] key todisplay the main menu

2 Use or $ to choose WHITE LINEfrom page 1 of the menu

3 Press to show the optionswindow

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 2348

17

4 Use or to choose Off Tone orMesh as appropriate ldquoMeshrdquo paintsthe white line in darker tone thanldquoTonerdquo

5 Press the [MENUESC] key to closethe menu

526White Line OFF White Line ON (Mesh)

Fish schoolclearly shown

White line

0

20

40

60

80

050k 11

526

0

20

40

60

80

00 050k 11

How white line works

DEEP GAIN

ldquoDeep Gainrdquo compensates forpropagation attenuation of the ultrasonicwaves It does this by equalizing echopresentation so that fish schools of thesame size appear in the same density inboth shallow and deep waters Inaddition it reduces surface noise

Press the [MENUESC] key to openthe main menu

2 Use or to choose DEEP GAINfrom page of the menu

3 Press $ to show to the optionswindow

4 Choose Low Medium or High asappropriate High provides thegreatest degree of gain reductionagainst short range echoes

5 Press the [MENUESC] key to closethe menu

Page 2

TRIP RESET

This item resets trip distance to ldquo0rdquo

Press the [MENUESC] key to openthe main menu

2 Use or to choose TRIPRESET from page 2 of the menu

3 Press $ 4 Press to reset trip distance

Beeps are generated while the tripdistance is being reset

5 Press the [MENUESC] key to closethe menu

Note To reset the odometer to zeroclear the memory

GAIN ADJ 200 GAIN ADJ 50

If the gain is too high or too low or thegain for the low and high frequenciesappears unbalanced you cancompensate it as follows

Press the [MENUESC] key to openthe main menu

2 Use or to choose GAIN ADJ200 or GAIN ADJ 50 from page 2 ofthe menu

3 Press $ to show to the optionswindow

4 Use or to set the amount Thesetting range is ndash50 to +50

5 Press the [MENUESC] key to close

the menu

DRAFT

The default depth display shows thedistance from the transducer If youwould rather show the distance from thesea surface set your shiprsquos draft asfollows

Press the [MENUESC] key to openthe main menu

2 Use or to choose DRAFT frompage 2 of the menu

3 Press $ and then use or to setdraft The setting range is ndash 50 to+500 (meters feet)

4 Press the [MENUESC] key to closethe menu

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 2448

18

2 SYSTEM MENU

The System menu mainly consists ofitems which once set do not requirefrequent adjustment You may displaythis menu by choosing SYSTEM MENUat page 2 of the main menu andpressing

SYSTEM MENULANGUAGE English

DEPTH UNIT ftSPEED UNIT ktWIND UNIT msTEMP UNIT deg F

TEMP GRAPH OffNAV DATA-1 NAV DATA-2

WATER TYPE SaltKEY BEEP OnBATT VOLTAGE Off (13)

[MENU] Exit

SYSTEM MENU

(23)

NAV DISPLAY TempSpeedNMEA0183 Ver 20TLL OUTPUT OffBEARING TrueWIND SPDDIR ApparentTRIP SOURCE Own

TEMP SOURCE OwnSPEED SOURCE OwnTEMP CALIB +00 deg F ( 40)SPEED CALIB +0 ( 50)

Own speed Own temp 100 kt 162 deg F

[MENU] Exit

SYSTEM MENU

(33)

BASIC RANGE1 15 ft

RANGE2 30RANGE3 60RANGE4 120RANGE5 200RANGE6 400RANGE7 600RANGE8 1000 (7-1500)

ZOOM RANGE 15 ft (7-150)BL RANGE 15 ft (10-30)(Bottom Lock)

ZOOM MARKER On

[MENU] Exit

PAGE 3

PAGE 2

PAGE 1

Page no

System menus

21 System MenuPage 1

LANGUAGE The system language isavailable in English several Europeanlanguages and Japanese To changelanguage select language desired andpress the [MENUESC] key

DEPTH UNIT Choose unit of depthmeasurement from meters feet

fathoms passibraza and hiro(Japanese)

SPEED UNIT Choose unit of speedmeasurement from knots miles perhour and kilometers per hour Requiresspeed data

WIND UNIT Choose unit of wind speedmeasurement from ms kt kmh and

mph Requires wind speed data

TEMP UNIT Choose unit oftemperature measurement Celsius orFahrenheit Requires temperature data

TEMP GRAPH Turns the watertemperature display on or off Thetemperature scale range is 16deg (degF) inldquoNarrowrdquo 40deg (degF) in ldquoWiderdquo Requires

water temperature data

m526

0

20

40

60

80

00 050k 11

40

80

70

50

60

TemperatureScale

TemperatureGraph

638 deg F162kt

Water temperature display (wide degF)

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 2548

19

NAV DATA-1 -2 Choose the number ofnavigation data items to display on thenav data displays from two three orfour items Requires appropriate navdata

WATER TYPE Choose the water typewith which to use the LS-4100 fromSalt or Fresh

KEY BEEP Turn key beep on or off

BATT VOLTAGE Turn the batteryvoltage indication (appears at the topright corner on the screen) on or offWhen on it replaces the picture advancespeed indication

Page 2

NAV DISPLAY Choose the nav data todisplay in the nav data window at thetop left-hand corner You may choosefrom temperaturespeedlatitudelongitude range and bearingcourse over ground trip distance or

wind speed Requires appropriate navdata

407 deg F162kt

Nav window

NMEA0183 Choose NMEA version ofnavigator Ver 15 Ver 20 or Ver 30

TLL OUTPUT Enablesdisables outputof TLL (Target Latitude Longitude)position when the [MARK] key isoperated ldquoTLLrdquo outputs latitude andlongitude position ldquoFURUNO-TLLrdquoavailable with connection of navigatorthat can output FURUNO TLL outputslatitude and longitude watertemperature depth etc

BEARING Shiprsquos course and bearingto a waypoint may be displayed in trueor magnetic bearing Magnetic bearingis true bearing plus (or minus) earthrsquosmagnetic deviation Requires bearingdata

WIND SPDDIR Choose the windspeed and direction reference from trueand apparent Requires wind sensorApparen t The direction (in relation toshiprsquos bow) and speed of the wind as itappears to those on board relative tothe speed and direction of the boatcombination of the true wind and thewind caused by the boats movementTrue The speed and direction (inrelation to shiprsquos bow) of the wind felt ormeasured when stationary

TRIP SOURCE Choose speed sourcefor the trip distance indication Own(transducer with speed sensor orseparate speed sensor) or NMEA

TEMP SOURCE Choose source ofwater temperature input Off Own(transducer with water temperaturesensor or separate temperature sensor)or NMEA

SPEED SOURCE Choose source ofspeed input Off Own (transducer withspeed sensor or separate speedsensor) or NMEA Requires speed

data

TEMP CALIB If the water temperaturesensor-generated water temperatureindication is wrong you can correct ithere when ldquoOwnrdquo is selected astemperature source For example if thewater temperature indication is 2deghigher than actual water temperatureenter -2 The setting range is -40degF to

+40degF

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 2648

20

SPEED CALIB If the speedsensor-generated speed indication iswrong you can correct it here whenldquoOwnrdquo is selected as speed source Forexample if the speed indication is 10lower than actual speed enter +10 Thesetting range is ndash50 to +50

Page 3

BASIC RANGE 1 - BASIC RANGE 8 Set range of each of the eight basicranges (Selectable range 7 to 1500 ft)Note 1 All default basic ranges arerestored whenever the depth unit ischanged Therefore change the depth

unit before changing the basic rangesNote 2 A range may not be lower thanthe range preceding it For example ifbasic range 3 is 60 feet basic range 4must be greater than 60 feet

ZOOM RANGE Choose the range tozoom in the marker-zoom andbottom-zoom modes You may choose arange between 7 and 150 feet (2 and 50

meters)

BL RANGE The expansion width forthe bottom-lock display can be chosenfrom 10 to 30 feet (3 and 10 meters)

ZOOM MARKER The zoom markerappears in the normal bottom markerand bottom zoom displays and marksthe area which is expanded in the

bottom marker and bottom zoompictures You can turn the marker on oroff as desired

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 2748

21

3 MAINTENANCETROUBLESHOOTING

W RNING

ELECTRICAL SHOCK HAZARDDo not open the equipment

Only qualified personnel should workinside the equipment

31 Maintenance

Regular maintenance is essential forgood performance Checking the itemslisted in the table below monthly willhelp keep your equipment in goodshape for years to come

Checking

Item Action

Transducercable

Check cable for damage

Power cabletransducercable plug

Check that they are tightlyfastened Refasten ifnecessary

Display unitground

Check for corrosion Cleanif necessary

Power supplyvoltage

Check voltage If out ofrating correct problem

32 Cleaning the DisplayUnit

Dust or dirt on the display unit can beremoved with a soft cloth If desired awater-moistened cloth may be usedUse special care when cleaning theLCD since it scratches easily Do notuse chemical cleaners to clean thedisplay unit - they can remove paint andmarkings

33 TransducerMaintenance

Marine life on the transducer face willresult in a gradual decrease insensitivity Check the transducer facefor cleanliness each time the boat isdry-docked Carefully remove anymarine life with a piece of wood orfine-grade sandpaper

34 Replacing the FuseThe fuse in the power cable protects thesystem from reverse polarity of thepower supply and equipment fault If thefuse blows find the cause beforereplacing it Use only a 1A fuse (FGMB 1A 125V Code No 000-114-805 ) orequivalent Using the wrong fuse will damage the unit and void the warranty

W RNINGUse the proper fuse

Fuse rating is shown on the equipmentUse of a wrong fuse can result in fire anddamage the equipment

35 Battery Voltage Alert A battery icon appears when the batteryvoltage is too high or too low

Battery icon and meaning

Icon Meaning

Voltage is lower than 10 VDC If thevoltage goes below 9 V the equipmentis automatically turned off

Voltage is higher than 165 VDC If thevoltage goes higher than 175 V theequipment is automatically turned off

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 2848

22

36 TroubleshootingThe table below provides basictroubleshooting procedures which theuser may follow to restore normaloperation

Troubleshooting table

Ifhellip Then check hellipneither echo norfixed range scaleappears

bull battery voltagebull fusebull power cable

no echo appearsbut the fixedrange scaleappears

bull if display advancespeed is set to ldquoStoprdquo

bull transducer plugbull

transducer cableecho appears butno zero line

bull if range shifting is setto ldquo0rdquo

sensitivity is low bull gain settingbull if air bubbles or marine

life is clinging to thetransducer face

bull if sediments arepresent in the water

bull if the bottom is too soft

to return an echothere is extremeinterference ornoise

bull if the transducer is tooclose to the engine

bull if the unit is properlygrounded

bull if other echo soundersof the same frequencyas own are beingoperated nearby

the speedwatertemperaturereadout isunrealistic or notpresent

bull sensor plug

the positionreadout isunrealistic or notpresent

bull the connectionbetween sounder andnavigator

bull navigator

37 DiagnosticsIf you feel your unit is not workingproperly conduct the diagnostic test tofind the problem If you cannot restorenormal operation contact your dealerfor advice

1 Turn on the power while pressing the[MENUESC] key Continue pressingthe [MENUESC] key until theInstallation menu appears

SIMULATION On

TEST LCD PATTERN MEMORY CLEAR

NMEA PORT InOutNMEA MIX Off GPS WAAS Off

SET BOTTOM LEVEL

Installation Menu

= Setting cannot be changed whenNMEA PORT setting is InIn

Installation menu2 Press to choose TEST3 Press to start the test

ROM OKRAM OKNMEA

Temp 682 deg F

Speed 100kmh

Power 124 VBody 39 deg C

Program No 0252318-01Push [MENU] 3 times to exit

Level bar

= Program version no

Water

TemperatureSpeedBattery VoltageTemperatureinside displayunit(Unit fixed atdeg C)

GPS (48502180) OK

Only when GP-310B is connected(For GP-320B 4850238)

Test display

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 2948

23

4 The ROM RAM and NMEA port arechecked with the results shown asOK or NG (No Good) For any NGrequest service (A special connectoris required to test the NMEA portNothing appears if no connector isconnected)

5 The squares at the right side of thetest display are for checking thecontrols Press each key and thearrows on the Cursor Pad one byone A controlrsquos correspondingon-screen square ldquolightsrdquo in black ifthe control is normal

6 To return to the Installation menupress the [MENUESC] key threetimes

7 To restore normal operation turn offthe power and turn it on again

38 Test PatternThis feature tests for proper display oftones

1 On the Installation menu press $ tochoose LCD PATTERN

2 Press to start the test The entirescreen is black

3 Press again and the screen turnswhite

4 Press again and the screenshows a four-toned display

5 Press again to return to theInstallation menu

6 To restore normal operation turn offthe power and then it on again

WHITE FOUR-TONE BLACK

Test patterns

39 Memory ClearThe memory can be cleared to startafresh with default menu settings

1 At the installation menu press $ tochoose MEMORY CLEAR

2 Press to open the optionswindow

YES NO

Clear memory display

3 Press to clear the memory Beepsare generated while the memory isbeing cleared

4 To restore normal operation turn offthe power and then turn it on again

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3048

24

4 INSTALLATION

41 Display UnitMounting considerations

The display unit can be installed on adesktop on the bulkhead or flushmounted in a panel When choosing alocation keep the following in mind

bull Keep the display unit out of directsunlight

bull The temperature and humidity should

be moderate and stablebull Locate the unit away from exhaust

pipes and ventsbull The mounting location should be well

ventilatedbull Mount the unit where shock and

vibration are minimalbull For maintenance and checking

purposes leave sufficient space atthe sides and rear of the unit andleave slack in cables

bull A magnetic compass will be affected ifthe display unit is placed too close toit Observe the following compasssafe distances to prevent disturbanceto the magnetic compassStandard compass 04 metersSteering compass 03 meters

Desktop overhead mounting1 Fix the bracket to a desktop or the

overhead with tapping screws(supplied)

2 Loosely screw knobs into the displayunit

3 Set the display unit to the bracketand then tighten the knobs

Mounting on the bulkhead Flush

mounting in a panelSee the instructions on the bulkhead orflush mounting template (supplied)

42 Thru-hull MountTransducer

Transducer mounting location

The thru-hull mount transducer

(520-5PSD 520-5MSD) provides thebest performance of all since thetransducer protrudes from the hull andthe effect of air bubbles and turbulencenear the hull skin is reduced When theboat has a keel the transducer shouldbe at least 30 cm away from it Typicalthru-hull mountings are shown in thefigure on the next page

The performance of this sounder isdirectly related to the mounting locationof the transducer especially forhigh-speed cruising The installationshould be planned in advance keepingthe standard cable length (8 m) and thefollowing factors in mindbull Air bubbles and turbulence caused by

movement of the boat seriouslydegrade the sounding capability of thetransducer The transducer shouldtherefore be located in a positionwhere water flow is the smoothestNoise from the propellers alsoadversely affects performance andthe transducer should not be mountednearby The lifting strakes arenotorious for creating acoustic noiseand these must be avoided bykeeping the transducer inboard ofthem

bull The transducer must always remain

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3148

25

submerged even when the boat isrolling pitching or up on a plane athigh speed

bull A practical choice would besomewhere between 13 and 12 of

the boatrsquos length from the stern Forplaning hulls a practical location isgenerally rather far astern so that thetransducer is always in waterregardless of the planing attitude

28

22

120

68

30

520-5PSD

24

120

68

87520-5MSD

Unit mm

Thru-hull mount transducer dimensions

Acceptable transducer mounting

locations

Position 12 to 13 of the hull from stern

15 to 30 cm off center line (inside first lifting strakes)

Within the wetted bottom area

Deadrise angle within 15 deg

HIGH SPEED-V HULL

Suitable transducer mounting locations

Typical thru-hull mounttransducer installations

FairingBlock

Flat Washer

Rubber Washer

Hull

Deep-V Hull

Hull

Flat Washer

Rubber Washer

Flat Hull

CorkWasher

Typical thru-hull mounttransducer installations

Procedure for installing thethru-hull mount transducer

1 With the boat hauled out of the watermark the location chosen formounting the transducer on thebottom of the hull

2 If the hull is not level within 15deg inany direction fairing blocks madeout of teak should be used betweenthe transducer and hull both insideand outside to keep the transducerface parallel with the water lineFabricate the fairing block as shownbelow and make the entire surfaceas smooth as possible to provide anundisturbed flow of water around thetransducer The fairing block shouldbe smaller than the transducer itselfto provide a channel to divert

turbulent water around the sides ofthe transducer rather than over itsface

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3248

26

BOWHole for stuffing tube

Upper Half

Lower Half

Saw along slopeof hull Construction of fairing block

3 Drill a hole just large enough to passthe threaded stuffing tube of thetransducer through the hull makingsure it is drilled vertically

4 Apply a sufficient amount of highquality caulking compound to the topsurface of the transducer around thethreads of the stuffing tube andinside the mounting hole (and fairingblocks if used) to ensure watertightmounting

5 Mount the transducer and fairingblocks and tighten the locking nutsBe sure that the transducer is

properly oriented and its workingface is parallel to the waterline

Note Do not over-stress the stuffingtube and locking nuts through excessivetightening since the wood block willswell when the boat is placed in thewater It is suggested that the nut betightened lightly at installation andretightened several days after the boat

has been launched

Transducer preparation

Before putting the boat in water wipethe face of the transducer thoroughlywith a detergent liquid soap This willlessen the time necessary for thetransducer to have good contact withthe water Otherwise the time requiredfor complete ldquosaturationrdquo ill belengthened and performance will bereduced

DO NOT paint the transducerPerformance will be affected

43 Transom MountTransducer

The transom mount transducer is verycommonly employed usually onrelatively small IO or outboard boatsDo not use this method on an inboardmotor boat because turbulence iscreated by the propeller ahead of thetransducer

520-5PWD

There are two methods of installationflush with hull (for flat hulls) andprojecting from hull (for deep V-hulls)

Flat Hull

D

Dgt50 cm

Deep-VHull

520-5PWD mounting locations

Installing the 520-5PWD on a flat hull

A suitable mounting location is at least50 cm away from the engine and wherethe water flow is smooth

1 Drill four pilot holes in the mountinglocation

2 Attach the transducer to the bracketwith 5 x 20 tapping screws(supplied)

3 Adjust the transducer position so thetransducer faces right to the bottom

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3348

27

Note If necessary to improve waterflow and minimize air bubblesstaying on the transducer faceincline the transducer about 5deg at therear This may require a certainamount of experimentation for finetuning at high cruising speeds

4 Fill the gap between the wedge frontof the transducer and transom withepoxy material to eliminate any airspaces

No1 M5 x 14

5 x 20

5 x 20

2 to 5

Tape

Hull

Transom mount transducer

mounting flush with hull

Installing the transom mounttransducer on a deep-V hull

This method is employed on deep-Vhulls and provides good performancebecause the effects of air bubbles areminimal Install the transducer parallelwith water surface not flush with hull Ifthe boat is placed on a trailer care mustbe taken not to damage the transducerwhen the boat is hauled out of the waterand put on the trailer

5 x 20

No 2M5 x 14

5 x 20

Transom mount transducermounted projecting from hull

525-5PWD

Choose the installation methoddepending on the rise angle of the hull

Transom

Transom

Stripe over 10

Parallel with hull

Mount at the stripe

less than 10

525-5PWD mounting location

Installing the 525-5PWD

Referring to ldquoInstalling the 520-5PWDrdquoin the left column for mounting of thebracket and the figure shown on the topof next page install the 525-5PWD tothe transom

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3448

28

2 to 5

Transducer

Bracket

Hull

Epoxy material

525-5PWD mounting

44 Inside-hullTransducer

The thru-hull mount transducer(520-5PSD 520-5MSD) may also beinstalled inside the hull following theprocedure below

Necessary tools

You will need the following toolsbull Sandpaper (100)bull Silicone sealantbull Silicone grease

Remarks on installationbull Turn off the engine and anchor the

boat while installing the equipmentbull Install the transducer in the engine

room

Choosing the mounting locationbull The mounting location should be

where the hull is of single-hullthickness and is void of air or flotationmaterials other than solid fiberglassbetween the transducer face and thewater

bull Do not place the transducer over hullstruts or ribs which run under the hull

bull Avoid a location where the risingangle of the hull exceeds 15deg tominimize the effect of the boatrsquosrolling

bull You will finalize the mounting location

through some trial and error Theprocedure for this is shown later

50 cm

50 cm15 cm15 cm

13

12

Transducer mountinglocation

Centerline

Inside-hull transducer mounting location

Attaching the transducer1 Clean the transducer face to remove

any foreign material Lightly roughenthe transducer face with 100sandpaper Also roughen the insideof the hull where the transducer is tobe mounted

2 Clean the transducer face again3 Warm the silicone sealant to 40degC

before usage to soften it Coat thetransducer face and mountinglocation with silicone sealant

Transducer

SiliconeSealant

Coating transducer facewith silicone sealant

4 Press the transducer firmly down onthe hull and gently twist it back andforth to remove any air which may betrapped in the silicone sealant

Checking the installation

1 Connect the battery to the display

unit2 Turn on the display unit

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3548

29

3 Press the [MODE] key to chooseSINGLE FREQ

4 Choose 50 kHz or 200 kHz and thenpress the [MENUESC] key to closethe mode menu

5 Press the [MENU] to show the mainmenu and then press to select

Auto mode6 Press to choose Off7 Press the [MENUESC] key8 Press the [GAIN] key to set the gain

to ldquo5rdquo and then press the[MENUESC] key

9 Press the [RANGE] key to set therange to 10 meters (feet) and thenpress the [MENUESC] key

10 If the bottom is displayed in darkgray and the depth indicationappears the mounting location issuitable Go to ldquoFinal preparationrdquo

11 If the bottom is not displayed in darkgray tone the mounting location maybe unsuitable Do the followinga) Press the [POWERBRILL] key to

turn off the powerb) Gently dismount the transducer

with a piece of woodc) Reattach the transducer

elsewhere as shown in ldquoAttachingthe transducerrdquo

d) Check the installation again

Final preparation

Support the transducer with a piece ofwood to keep it in place while it is drying

Let the transducer dry 24-72 hours

45 Optional Triducer525ST-MSD

The optional triducer 525ST-MSD isdesigned for thru-hull mounting Forhow to install this transducer seeparagraph 42

φ79 mm

33 mm200-12 UNthreads

φ51 mm

27 mm

7 mm

140 mm Triducer 525ST-MSD

525ST-PWD

The Transom Mount Transducer orTRIDUCER reg Multisensor with IntegralRelease Bracket 525ST-PWD ismanufactured by AIRMAR Co Theseinstructions are also included with the

sensor

Pre-test for speed and temperature

Connect the sensor to the instrumentand spin the paddlewheel Check for aspeed reading and the approximate airtemperature If there is no readingreturn the sensor to your place ofpurchase

Tools and materials needed

ScissorsMasking tapeSafety gogglesDust maskElectric drillDrill bit for

Bracket holes 4mm 23 or 964rdquoFiberglass hull chamfer bit(preferred)6mm or 14rdquo

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3648

30

Transom hole 19mm or 34rdquo(optional)

Cable clamp holes 3mm or 18rdquoScrewdriversStraight edgeMarine sealantPencilZip-tiesWater-based antifouling paint(mandatory in salt water )

Mounting location

To ensure the best performance thesensor must be submerged inaeration-free and turbulence-free water

Mount the sensor close to the centerlineof the boat On slower heavierdisplacement hulls positioning it fartherfrom the centerline is acceptable

Allow adequate space above thebracket for it to release and rotate thesensor upward

Height

Height withoutspeed sensor191mm (7-12)Height withspeed sensor213mm (8-12)

Height required at mounting location

Note 1 Do not mount the sensor in anarea of turbulence or bubbles nearwater intake or discharge openingsbehind strakes struts fittings or hull

irregularities behind eroding paint (anindication of turbulence)Note 2 Avoid mounting the sensorwhere the boat may be supportedduring trailering launching hauling andstorageNote 3 For single drive boat mounton the starboard side at least 75 mm(3rdquo) beyond the swing radius of thepropeller

75 mm(3)

minimum beyondswing radius

Mounting location on single drive boat

Note 4 For twin drive boat mountbetween the drives

Installation of bracket

1 Cut out the installation template

shown on the next page2 At the selected location position thetemplate so the arrow at the bottomis aligned with the bottom edge ofthe transom Being sure the templateis parallel to the waterline tape it inplace

Align template vertically

Deadrise angle

Slope of hullparallel towaterline

Align template arrow withbottom edge of transom

Positioning the template

Warning Always wear safetygoggles and a dust mask

3 Using a 4 mm 23 or 964rdquo bit drillthree holes 22 mm (78rdquo) deepat the locations indicated To preventdrilling too deeply wrap maskingtape around the bit 22 mm (78rdquo)from the pointFiberglass hull Minimize surfacecracking by chamfering the gelcoatIf a chamfer bit or countersink bit is

not available start drilling with a6mm or 14rdquo bit to a depth of 1 mm(116rdquo)

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3748

31

4 If you know your transom angle the

bracket is designed for a standard13deg transom angle11deg-18deg angle No shim is requiredSkip to step 3 in ldquoAdjustingrdquoOther angles The shim is requiredSkip to step 2 of ldquoAdjustingrdquoIf you do not know the transom angletemporarily attach the bracket andsensor to the transom to determine ifthe plastic shim is needed

5 Using the two 10 x 1-14rdquo

self-tapping screws temporarilyscrew the bracket to the hull DONOT tighten the screws completelyat this time Follow the step 1-4 inldquoAttaching the Sensor to the Bracketrdquobefore proceeding with ldquoAdjustingrdquo

Installation templatefor starboard side of boat

Drill at locations labeled Bfor the following transom angles

16 deg through 22 deg

Drill at locations labeled Afor the following transom angles

2 deg through 15 deg

Align arrow with bottom of transom

AA A

BB B

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3848

32

Adjusting

1 Using a straight edge sight theunderside of the sensor relative tothe underside of the hull The sternof the sensor should be 1-3 mm

(116-18rdquo) below the bow of thesensor or parallel to the bottom ofthe hull

11 deg transom angleNO SHIM

12-18 deg transom angleNO SHIM

2 deg -10 deg transom

angle

19 deg -22 deg transom

angleshim withtaper up

shim withtaper down

parallelparallel parallel

slightangle

angletoo steep

anglereversed

YES NONO

YES YESYES

Sensor position and transom angle

Note Do not position the bow of thesensor lower than the stern becauseaeration will occur

2 To adjust the sensorrsquos angle relativeto the hull use the tapered plasticshim provided If the bracket hasbeen temporarily fastened to thetransom remove it Key the shim in

place on the back of the bracket2deg-10deg transom angle (steppedtransom and jet boats) Positionthe shim with the tapered end down19deg-22deg transom angle (smallaluminum and fiberglass boats) Position the shim with the taperedend up

3 If the bracket has been temporarilyfastened to the transom remove it

Apply a marine sealant to thethreads of the two 10 x 1-14rdquo self

tapping screws to prevent waterseeping into the transom Screw thebracket to the hull Do not tighten thescrews completely at this time

4 Repeat step 1 to ensure that theangle of the sensor is correctNote Do not position the sensorfarther into the water than necessaryto avoid increasing drag spray andwater noise and reducing boatspeed

5 Using the vertical adjustment spaceon the bracket slots slide the sensorup or down to provide a projection of3 mm (18rdquo) Tighten the screws

Cable cover

Cableclamp

50 mm (2)

Hull projection 3 mm (18)

Vertical adjustment and cable routing

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3948

33

Attaching the sensor to the bracket

1 If the retaining cover near the top ofthe bracket is closed open it bydepressing the latch and rotating thecover downward

Step 1 Step 2

Latch

Retainingcover

Pivotarm (2)

Slot (2)

Step 4

Step 3

Attaching the sensor to the bracket

2 Insert the sensorrsquos pivot arms intothe slots near the top of the bracket

3 Maintain pressure until the pivotarms click into place

4 Rotate the sensor downward until thebottom snaps into the bracket

5 Close the retaining cover to preventthe accidental release of the sensorwhen the boat is underway

Cable routing

Route the sensor cable over thetransom through a drain hole orthorough a new hole drilled in thetransom above the waterline

Never cut the cable or remote the

connector this will void the warranty Always wear safety goggles and a dustmask

1 If a hole must be drilled choose alocation well above the waterlineCheck for obstructions such as trimtabs pumps or wiring inside the hullMark the location with a pencil Drilla hole through the transom using a19 mm or 34rdquo bit (to accommodatethe connector)

2 Route the cable over or through thetransom

3 On the outside of the hull secure thecable against the transom using thecable clamps Position a cable clamp50 mm(2rdquo) above the bracket andmark the mounting hole with apencil

4 Position the second cable clamphalfway between the first clamp andthe cable hole Mark this mountinghole

5 If a hole has been drilled in thetransom open the appropriate slot inthe transom cable cover Position thecover over the cable where it entersthe hull Mark the two mounting

holes6 At each of the marked locations usea 3 mm or 18rdquo bit to drill a hole 10mm (38rdquo) deep The prevent drillingtoo deeply wrap masking tapearound the bit 10 mm (38rdquo) from thepoint

7 Apply marine sealant to the threadsof the 6 x 12rdquo self-tapping screw toprevent water from seeping into the

transom If you have drilled a holethrough the transom apply marinesealant to the space around thecable where it passes through thetransom

8 Position the two cable clamps andfasten them in place If used pushthe cable cover over the cable andscrew it in place

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4048

34

9 Route the cable to the instrumentbeing careful not to tear the cable

jacket when passing it though thebulkhead(s) and other parts of theboat To reduce electricalinterference separate the sensorcable from other electrical wiring andldquonoiserdquo sources Coil any excesscable and secure it in place withzip-ties to prevent damage

46 Optional WaterTemperatureSpeedSensor

Water temperaturespeed sensorST-02MSB and ST-02PSB which aredesigned for thru-hull mounting areoptionally available Install them asshown below

Mounting considerations

Choose a suitable mounting locationconsidering the followingbull Choose a place free from vibrationbull Choose a mid-boat flat position The

sensor does not have to be installedperfectly perpendicular The sensormust not be damaged in dry-dockingoperation

bull Choose a place apart from equipmentgenerating heat

bull Choose a place in the forwarddirection viewing from the drain holeto allow for circulation of coolingwater

1 Dry-dock the boat2 Make a hole of approx 51 mm

diameter in the mounting location3 Unfasten locknut and remove the

sensor section4 Apply high-grade sealant to the

flange of the sensor5 Pass the sensor casing through thehole

6 Face the notch on the sensor towardboatrsquos bow and tighten the flange

7 Set the sensor section to the sensorcasing and tighten the locknut

8 Launch the boat and check for waterleakage around the sensor

Locknut

Face notchtoward bow

Flange Nut

Coat withsilicone sealant Brim

φ 77

51

123

Water temperaturespeed sensor

ST-02MSB ST-02PSB

47 Wiring

Connect the LS-4100 powerdata cableassy MJ-A7SPF0005-020 (2 msupplied) to the POWER and thetransducer cable to the XDR connectorRefer to the interconnection diagram toconnect cables Leave slack in cables tofacilitate checking and maintenance

Note The fuse holder contains a springwhich fixes the fuse To preventdetachment of the spring which wouldcause loss of power tie the line asshown below

+ line (red)

Fuse holder

Cable tie How to fix fuse holder

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4148

35

Establishing the ground

The ground wire (125 sq or more localsupply) should be as short as possible

The signal line ground is isolated from

the chassis ground however the powerline is not insulated Therefore whenconnecting eternal equipment havingpositive ground do not ground thesignal line to the chassis If excessivenoise shows on the screen the groundmay be inadequate In this case attacha steel plate measuring 20 cm by 30 cmon the outside of the hull to provide aground point Connect the ground wire

there Use a ldquoclosedrdquo type lug ( ) tomake the connection at the display unitDo not use an ldquoopenrdquo type lug ( )

Optional equipment

POWER connector

The power supply port is commonlyused for connection of externalequipment such as a GPS receiver orwind indicator Use the powerdatacable MJ-A7SPF0005-020 (supplied) forconnection referring the figure shown inthe right column

Connector Color Remarks

1 TD-A WHT2 TD-B BLU

IEC-61162-1NMEA0183

3 RD-A YEL

4 RD-B GRN

IEC-61162-1

NMEA01835 + RED

6 - BLKPower input12 VDC

7 FG

Water tempspeed sensor

Connect the optional water tempspeedsensor to the XDR connector with theoptional converter connector (Type02S4147) as shown below

Tape connectors withvulcaninzing tapeand then vinyl tapeto waterproof themBind tape ends withcable ties to preventtape from unraveling

Connect to XDR portat rear of display unit

MJ-A10SPF

MJ-A10SRMDMJ-A6SRMD

Fromtransducer

Fromsensor

Connection of converterconnector 02S4147

48 IEC 61162-1 DataSentences

The tables below show the datasentences which can be input to andoutput from the LS-4100 Thetransmission speed for both input andoutput is 4800 bps Data is output attwo-second intervals

Input data sentences

Sentence Meaning

BWC Bearing and distance towaypoint

GGA Global positioning system(GPS) fix data

GLL Geographic position -latitudelongitude

HDG Heading deviation and variationHDT Heading true

MDA Atmospheric pressure

MTW Water temperature

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4248

36

Input data sentences (conrsquot)

Sentence MeaningMWV Wind speed and

angleRMA Recommended

minimum specificLORAN-C dataRMB Recommended

minimum navigationinformation

RMC Recommendedminimum specificGPSTRANSIT data

VHW Water speed andheading

VTG Course over groundand ground speedXTE Cross track error

Output data sentences

Sentence MeaningDBT (Ver 15) Depth below

transducerDPT (Ver 20 Ver30)

Depth

MTW Water temperatureRMB (Ver 20) Recommended

minimumnavigationinformation

VHW Water speed andheading

TLL Target positionoutput by [MARK]key

= Available with connection of optionalsensorsnavaid

49 Installation MenuThe installation menu mainly containsitems which are set at installation

1 Turn on the power while pressing the[MENUESC] key Continue pressing

the [MENUESC] key until theInstallation menu appears

SIMULATION On

TEST LCD PATTERN MEMORY CLEAR

NMEA PORT InOutNMEA MIX OffGPS WAAS Off

SET BOTTOM LEVEL

Installation Menu

= Setting cannot be changed whenNMEA PORT setting is InIn

Installation menu

SIMULATION The simulation modeprovides without connection of thetransducer simulated operation of theequipment using internally generatedechoes All controls are operative Themessage ldquoSIMrdquo appears at the top rightcorner on the screen when thesimulation mode is active

1 At the installation menu press toopen the simulation mode optionswindow

2 Press to choose ldquoOnrdquo to turn onthe simulation mode

3 Press the [POWERBRILL] keyabout three seconds to turn off thepower

4 Press the [POWERBRILL] key toturn on the power ldquoSIMrdquo appears atthe top right corner of the display

5 To turn off the simulation modeselect Off at step 2

NMEA po r t se tup(NMEA PO RT NMEA M IX)

The POWER port can function as aninput port or inputoutput port Changethe setting to ldquoInInrdquo when connectingGP-310B320B and a wind sensor

When connecting the GP-310B320Band a wind sensor first turn on ldquoGPS

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4348

37

WAASrdquo (in the Installation menu) andthen select ldquoInInrdquo as the NMEA portsetting

1 Turn on the power while pressingand holding down the [MENUESC]key Continue pressing the[MENUESC] key until theInstallation menu appears

2 Choose NMEA PORT and thenpress to display the NMEA portoptions window

3 Use or to choose InOut orInIn as appropriate

InOut Input and Output (default

setting)InIn Input only (Available withconnection of the GP-310B320Band a wind sensor)

4 Press choose NMEA MIX andthen press to display the NMEAMIX options window

5 Use or to choose Off or OnChoose On to output input data

Off Outputs the data sentences ofLS-4100 only

On Outputs the data sentences ofLS-4100 and sentences which areinput from other equipment

6 To restore normal operation turn offthe power and then turn it on again

GPS WAAS Chooses how to use theWAAS signal when connecting with a

WAAS receiver for example GP-320B

Note WAAS is currently in thedevelopmental phase During thedevelopmental phase the reliability andavailability of the WAAS signal cannotbe guaranteed Therefore any positiondata should be verified against othersources to confirm reliability

1 Display the Installation menu2 Choose GPS WAAS and then press

to open the GPS WAAS options

window

Off

WAAS options window3 Press or to choose ldquoWAAS-02rdquo

(test signal) When the systembecomes operational (in 2003) setto ldquo00rdquo (regular WAAS signal)

4 Turn off the power

BOTTOM LEVEL If the depthindication is unstable in automaticoperation or the bottom echo cannot bedisplayed in the darkest gray tone byadjusting the gain controls in manualoperation you may adjust the bottomecho level detection circuit for both 50kHz and 200 kHz to stabilize theindication Generally lower the bottomlevel for inner hull installation where thereceive level is too low If the bottomlevel is too low it may be difficult todiscriminate fish from the bottomresulting in unstable depth indication

And if the bottom level is too high thedepth indication may not appear

1 At the installation menu press tochoose SET BOTTOM LEVEL andthen press Several seconds laterthe following display appears

Bottom level +0 (200k -100 - +100 ) +0 ( 50k -100 - +100 )

Bottom level display

2 While observing the picture use or to set 200 kHz or to set50 kHz Set up for optimum picture

3 To restore normal operation turn offthe power and then it on again

Note The mode must be other thanldquoNAV DATArdquo to show the bottom leveldisplay

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4448

SP - 1 E2371S01C

SPECIFICATIONS OF ECHO SOUNDER LS-4100

1 GENERAL11 TX Frequency 50 kHz or 200 kHz 50200 kHz dual transmitting selectable12 Transmit Method Single or dual transmitting

13 Output Power 300 Wrms14 TX Rate Max 500 pulsemin15 Pulse-length 01 to 08 ms

2 DISPLAY UNIT21 Display system 5-inch monochrome LCD 76 mm (W) x 100 mm (H) 240 x 320 dots22 Display Mode Single frequency (highlow freq) Dual-frequency Zoom Nav data-12

Marker zoom Bottom zoom Bottom-lock23 Display Range

Range SettingRange

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

Display

rangeMeter 5 10 20 40 80 150 200 300 2-500

Feet 15 30 60 120 200 400 600 1000 7-1500

Fathoms 3 5 10 20 40 80 100 150 1-250

PassiBraza 3 5 10 30 50 100 150 200 1-300

24 Range Shift 0-500 m 0-1500 ft 0-250 fa 0-300 pb25 Expansion Range Bottom-lock expansion 3 to 10 m

Sectional expansion 2 to 50 m26 Display Advance Speed 8 steps (LinesTX Freeze 1161814121121 41)

3 INTERFACE31 Input data sentences IEC61162-1NMEA0183 Ver 152030

GGA RMA RMB RMC BWC GLL HDT HDG VTG VHW MTWMWV MDA XTE

32 Output data sentences IEC61162-1NMEA0183 Ver 152030 interval 2 sMTW VHW DBT DPT RMB TLL by key operating External data required

4 POWER SUPPLY41 Display Unit 12 VDC 05 A

5 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITION51 Ambient Temperature Display unit -15degC to +55degC52 Relative Humidity 93 or less at 40degC53 Waterproof IPX5

6 COATING COLOR61 Display Unit N30

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4548

M a r

4

0 3

D-1

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4648

Mar 4 03

Mar 4 03

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4748

M a r

3

0 3

S-1

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4848

FURUNO Authorized DistributorDealer FURUNO Authorized DistributorDealer

9-52 Ashihara-cho9-52 Ashihara-choNishinomiya 662-8580 JAPANNishinomiya 662-8580 JAPAN

Telephone Telephone 0798-65-21110798-65-2111FaxFax 0798-65-42000798-65-4200

FIRST EDITION FIRST EDITION MARMAR 20032003Printed in JapanPrinted in Japan All rights reserved All rights reserved

B1B1 SEPSEP 09 200509 2005

Pub NoPub No OME-23710OME-23710 00014698000000146980000001469800000014698000(( DAMIDAMI )) LS-4100LS-4100

0 0 0 1 4 6 9 8 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 4 6 9 8 0 0 0

Page 11: OME23710B_1_LS4100

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 1148

5

15 Menu OperatingProcedure

The LS-4100 has three menus MainSystem and Installation Below is the

basic menu operating procedure1 Press the [MENUESC] key to openthe main menu Page 1 or Page 2 ofthe main menu appears dependingon the page last used

[MENU] Exit

(12)

Note SHIFT and CLUTTER arenot available in the auto mode

AUTO MODE Off SHIFT 0ftPIC ADVANCE 11NOISE LIMIT Off CLUTTER Off SIGNAL LEVEL Off

A-SCOPE Off HUE DayWHITE LINE Off DEEP GAIN Low

Pageno

Main menu page 1

2 Use or $ to select an item Toview page 2 of the main menu press$ until showing the display below

[MENU] Exit

(22)

GOTO WPT Off WAYPOINT LIST

TRIP RESET

GAIN ADJ 200 +0GAIN ADJ 50 +0DRAFT 00ft

ALARM MENUSYSTEM MENU

Main menu page 2

3 Press to show selected itemrsquosoptions window The example shownat the top of the right column is theoptions window for AUTO MODE

Off CruisingFishing

Auto mode options window

4 Use or $ to choose option or setnumeric value

5 Press the [MENUESC] key to closethe menu or press to continuemenu operation

16 Automatic OperationHow automatic operation works

The automatic function automatically

chooses the proper gain range scaleand clutter It works as followsbull The range changes automatically to

display the bottom echo on thescreen

bull The gain is automatically adjusted todisplay the bottom echo in the darkesttone

bull Clutter (on the menu) whichsuppresses low-level noise isautomatically adjusted

Choosing automatic operation

The automatic mode provides twochoices of modes cruising and fishing1 Press the [MENUESC] key to open

the main menu2 Press to choose AUTO MODE

from page 1 of the menu3 Press to open the mode options

window4 Choose Cruising or Fishing as

appropriate

ldquoCruisingrdquo is for tracking the bottomldquoFishingrdquo is for searching fish schoolsSince ldquoCruisingrdquo uses a higher clutterrejection setting than fishing it is notrecommended for fish detection -weak fish echoes may not bedisplayed ldquoFishingrdquo clearly displaysweaker echoes

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 1248

6

5 Press the [MENUESC] key to closethe menu

The auto mode in use is shown as(Auto-Fishing) or

(Auto-Cruising) at the top left corner onthe screen

Note When in the auto mode SHIFTand CLUTTER cannot be adjustedmanually

Range offset

To display the bottom tail in detail in theautomatic mode offset the range as

below1 Press the [+] or [-] key of the

[RANGE] key

+0 ft

AUTO RANGE OFFSET

Auto range offset window

2 Press the [+] or [-] key of the[RANGE] key again to choose offsetdesired (range -100 to +300 ft)Note that if the basic range ischanged the offset is returned to ldquo0rdquo

3 Press the [MENUESC] key to finish

Gain offset

Gain offset lets you override automaticgain adjustment1 Press the [GAIN] key

Min Max 0

AUTO GAIN OFFSET

Auto gain offset window

2 Press or key to offset gain(setting range ndash5 to +5) The gainselected is shown at the top of thescreen asG (Gain) + (or -) XX (offset value)

3 Press the [MENUESC] key to finish

17 Manual OperationChoosing the manual mode

1 Press the [MENUESC] key to openthe main menu

2 Press to choose AUTO MODEfrom page 1 of the menu3 Press to show the window4 Choose Off with 5 Press the [MENUESC] key to close

the menu appears at the topleft corner on the screen

Choosing range

The basic range and range shiftingfunctions used together give you themeans to choose the depth you can seeon the screen The basic range can bethought of as providing a ldquowindowrdquo intothe water column and range shifting asmoving the ldquowindowrdquo to the desireddepth

Choosing basic range

The basic range may be chosen withthe [RANGE] key from the eight rangesshown in the table shown below (ldquoPBrdquoin the table means PassiBraza) Thesetting range can be arranged throughthe SYSTEM menu

Default ranges

Basic RangeUnit1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

meters 5 10 20 40 80 150 200 300

feet 15 30 60 120 200 400 600 1000

fathoms 3 5 10 20 40 80 100 150

hiro 4 8 15 30 50 100 150 200

PB 3 5 10 30 50 100 150 200

Japanese unit of depth measurement1 Press the [+] or [-] key of the

[RANGE] key and the display shouldnow look something like the one onat the top of the next page

2 Press the [+] or [-] key of the[RANGE] key again to choose abasic range

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 1348

7

1000ft 600ft 400ft 200ft 120ft 60ft 30ft 15ft

Basic ranges (default)3 Press the [MENUESC] key to close

the window

Shifting the range

The basic range may be shifted up ordown in the manual mode as follows

Display

Window can beshifted up anddown to selectthe depth

Range and display shift concept

1 Press the [MENUESC] key to openthe main menu

2 Choose SHIFT from page 1 of themenu

3 Press to open the shift optionswindow

0ft

Shift window

4 Use or $ to choose amount ofshift desired

5 Press the [MENUESC] key to closethe window

Note The picture may not be displayedif the amount of shift is greater thanactual depth

Adjusting the gain

The [GAIN] key adjusts the sensitivity ofthe receiver Generally use a highergain setting for greater depths and alower setting for shallower waters

Use the proper gain setting

Incorrect gain may produce wrong depthindication possibly resulting in a dangeroussituation

UTION

Gain too high Gain proper Gain too low Examples of proper and improper gain

1 Press the [GAIN] key and the displayshown below appears

Min Max

50k 3

200k 2

GAIN

Gain adjustment window

2 When using the dual frequencydisplay press or $ to choosefrequency

3 Press the [GAIN] key to set (Youmay also use or ) Adjust so thata slight amount of noise remains onthe screen

4 Press the [MENUESC] key to closethe gain adjustment window

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 1448

8

18 Measuring DepthThe VRM (Variable Range Marker)functions to measure the depth to fishschools etc1 Press or $ to place the VRM

on the object which you wish tomeasure range

2 Read the VRM depth just abovethe VRM

0

20

40

60

80496

398

VRM

VRM depth

50k 11

How to measure depth with the VRM

19 Choosing PictureAdvance Speed

The picture advance speed determineshow quickly the vertical scan lines runacross the screen When choosing apicture advance speed keep in mindthat a fast advance speed will expandthe size of the fish school horizontallyon the screen and a slow advancespeed will contract it Note that thepicture is not refreshed when pictureadvancement is stopped Thereforeuse caution when steering the vesselunder this condition

Fast Slow Picture and picture advancement speed

1 Press the [MENUESC] key to openthe main menu

2 Choose PIC ADVANCE from page 1of the menu

3 Press to show the optionswindow

Stop116 18 14 12 11 21 41

(

)

Fast

Slow

Picture advance options window

4 Use or $ to choose pictureadvance speed desired Thefractions in the options windowdenote the number of scan linesproduced per transmission Forexample 18 means one scan line isproduced every 8 transmissionsldquoStoprdquo freezes the display and it isconvenient for taking a photo

The picture is not refreshed whenpicture advancement is stopped

Maneuvering the vessel in this conditionmay result in a dangerous situation

UTION

5 Press the [MENUESC] key to closethe menu

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 1548

9

110 SuppressingInterference

Interference from other acousticequipment operating nearby or other

electronic equipment on your boat mayshow itself on the display as shown inthe figure belowTo suppress interference do thefollowing1 Press the [MENUESC] key to open

the main menu2 Use or $ to choose NOISE LIMIT

from page 1 of the menu3 Press to show the options

window4 Use or $ to choose the degree ofsuppression desired Off LowMedium or High (highest)

5 Press the [MENUESC] key to closethe menu

Interference fromother sounder

Electrical interference

Forms of interference

Turn the noise limiter off when nointerference exists otherwise weakechoes may be missed

111 Suppressing LowLevel Noise

Low intensity ldquospecklesrdquo may appearover most of screen This is mainly due

to sediment in the water or noise Thesecan be suppressed by adjustingCLUTTER on the menu When theautomatic mode is on clutter isautomatically rejected To suppress lowlevel noise in manual sounder operationdo the following1 Press the [MENUESC] key to open

the main menu2 Use or $ to choose CLUTTER

from page 1 of the menu3 Press to show the optionswindow

4 Use or $ to choose the degree ofsuppression desired 1 2 3 4 5 or6 The higher the number the greaterthe suppression

5 Press the [MENUESC] key to closethe menu

To turn off low-level noisesuppression choose Off at step 4 andthen press the [MENUESC] key

Clutter appearance

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 1648

10

112 Erasing WeakEchoes

Sediment in the water or reflectionsfrom plankton may be painted on the

display in low intensity tones

Weakechoes

Appearance of weak echoes

These weak echoes may be erased asfollows1 Press the [MENUESC] key to open

the main menu2 Use or $ to choose SIGNAL

LEVEL from page 1 of the menu3 Press to show the options

window4 Use or $ to choose the degree of

suppression desired Off Low orHigh (highest)

5 Press the [MENUESC] key to closethe menu

To turn off the signal level function choose Off at step 4 and then pressthe [MENUESC] key

113 A-scope DisplayThis display shows echoes at eachtransmission with amplitudes and toneproportional to their intensities on theright 14 of the screen It is useful forestimating the kind of fish school andbottom composition

Note In the dual frequency display the A-scope display is only available withthe high frequency display

323

10

20

30

40

0

A-scope display

Single frequency display

Strong

reflection(bottom)

Weakreflection(fish or noise)

50k 11

Strongreflection(fish)

A-scope display

1 Press the [MENUESC] key to openthe main menu

2 Press or $ to choose A-SCOPEfrom page 1 of the menu

3 Press to show the optionswindow

4 Press

or$

to choose the A-scope presentation type desiredNormal Display shows echoes ateach transmission with amplitudesand tone proportional to theirintensitiesPeak Peak-hold amplitude picture

5 Press the [MENUESC] key to closethe menu

To turn off the A-scope displaychoose Off at step 4 and then press the[MENUESC] key

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 1748

11

114 AlarmsAlarm description

The LS-4100 has six conditions whichgenerate both audio and visual alarms

bottom alarm normal fish alarm bottomlock fish alarm water temperature alarmarrival alarm and speed alarm (Thewater temperature arrival and speedalarms require appropriate sensors)

Bottom alarm The bottom alarm alertsyou when the bottom is within the alarmrange set To activate the bottom alarmthe depth must be displayed

Fish (normal) alarm The fish (normal)alarm tells you when fish are within thepreset alarm range

Fish (bottom lock) alarm The fish(bottom lock) alarm available with thebottom-lock mode sounds when fishare within a certain distance from thebottom Note that the bottom zoom

display must be turned on to use thisalarm

Water temperature alarm The watertemperature alarm alerts when thewater temperature is within (Insidealarm) the alarm range set orunderover (outside alarm) the rangeset

Speed alarm The speed alarm alertsyou when the speed is within (Insidealarm) or underover (Outside alarm)the preset speed

Arrival alarm The arrival alarm alertswhen you are near a waypoint by thedistance set

Activating an alarm

1 Press the [MENUESC] key2 Press or $ to choose ALARM

MENU from page 2 on the menu3 Press the to show the ALARM

menu

ALARM

(12)

[MENU] Exit

ALARM

(22)

[MENU] Exit

BOTTOM On FROM 5ft

RANGE 10ftFISH(Normal) On

FROM 5ft RANGE 10ftFISH(BL) On

FROM 8ft RANGE 10ftFISH LEVEL Medium

TEMPERATURE Inside FROM 724 deg F RANGE 10 deg F

SPEED Off FROM 00kt

RANGE 10kt

ARRIVAL ALRM Off RANGE 0 01 m

Pageno

Gray characters mean alarm is inactive Alarm menu

4 Use or $ to choose an alarm asappropriate

5 Press to show the options menu

Off On

Off InsideOutside

Temp Speed Alarm Types

Fish ArrivalBottom AlarmOnOff

Alarm options6 Use or $ to choose alarm type

Off Alarm off On Alarm onInside Alarm generated whenspeed (or water temperature) iswithin the range setOutside Alarm generated whenspeed (or water temperature) isoutside the range set

7 Press to close the windowFor ARRIVAL ALARM setting skip tostep 12

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 1848

12

8 Press $ to choose FROM9 Press to show the options menu

0ft

Depth

632 deg F

Temperature

10 kt

Speed Depth temperature speed setting

window10 Use or $ to set starting depth

temperature or speed as appropriateFor FISH (BL) the starting depth isthe range from the bottom

11 Press to close the window12 Press $ to choose RANGE13 Press to show the options menu14 Use or $ to set alarm range15 For the bottom alarm temperature

alarm speed alarm or arrivalalarm press the [MENUESC] key tofinish For a fish alarm press toclose the window and then go tostep 16

16 Press $ to choose FISH LEVEL17 Press to show the options menu

Weak

MediumStrong Fish level options

18 Use or $ to choose the echostrength level which will trigger a fishalarm

Weak Weak echoes (weakest toneon level bar)Medium Medium strength echoes

(middle tone on level bar)Strong Strong echoes (darkest toneon level bar)

19 Press the [MENUESC] key twice toclose the menu

Alarm range marker Bottom alarm Fish alarm (normal) Right Fish alarm (bottomlock) Left

Alarm icon

Alarm rangeStartingpoint

Bottom alarm Fish alarm (normal) Fish alarm (BL)

Temperature alarm (deg

C ordeg

F shown) Speed alarm Arrival alarm

Alarm icon (Appropriate icon appears to showwhich alarm has been violated)

How the alarm works

Note To disable an alarm choose Offat step 5 in the above procedure

Silencing the buzzer

The buzzer sounds and the appropriatealarm icon appears and flashes whenan alarm is violated You can silence thebuzzer by pressing any key Howeverthe buzzer will sound whenever thealarm setting is violated

Note The audio and visual alarms arereleased against the last-violated alarmwhen multiple alarms are active

115 WaypointsWaypoints may be used tobull Record the position of an important

echo as waypoint 12 points may beregistered

bull Output a waypoint position to a plotterto mark position on its screen

bull Find range bearing and time-to-go toa location (waypoint)

Note Requires latitude and longitudeposition from a navigator

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 1948

13

Registering a waypoint on thescreen

1 Press the [MARK] key The cursorappears along with waypoint entryinstructions To enter a waypoint tothe current own shiprsquos position go tostep 3Note If there is no position data themessage ldquoNo position datardquo appearsCheck the navigator

50k

496

1100

20

40

60

80

0

Cursor

WAYPOINT ENTRY

( Move) Cursor [MARK] Enter [MENU] Cancel

50 kHz display

2 Press the cursor pad to set thecursor where desired Pictureadvancement is stopped until step 3is completed and the instructionwindow is integrated into the navdisplay

3 Press the [MARK] key again WhenTLL or FURUNO-TLL is selected atTLL OUTPUT on the System menuthe latitude and longitude position atthe cursor is output to the navigator

A vertical line marks location Furtherthe display shows the waypointname (next sequential number) andposition of the location selected atstep 2

WAYPOINTName FREQLat 34 deg 22796NLon 136 deg 07264E

05

[MENU] Exit

rase

Waypoint data display

Note If you attempt to enter 13thwaypoint the message ldquoMemoryfullrdquo appears In this case erase anunwanted waypoint to enable entry

4 To save the waypoint under thename shown go to step 8 or go tostep 5 to change its name

5 Press to open the waypoint nameentry window

WAYPOINTName FREQLat 34 deg 22796NLon 136 deg 07264E

05

[MENU] Exit

01------ ENT

rase

Waypoint window name entry6 Use or to set character $ or

to shift cursor The name mayconsist of 10 alphanumericcharactersNote Character order is 0 1hellip9 - A BhellipZ _ 0hellip

7 Press to choose ENT 8 Press the [MENUESC] key to

register the waypoint

Registering waypoint by LL

1 Press the [MENUESC] key to openthe main menu

2 Use or to choose WAYPOINTLIST from page 2 of the menu

3 Press

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 2048

14

WAYPOINT LIST

01 0102 0303------------------------------------------------------

[MENU] Exit

Waypoint list4 Press or to choose an empty

waypoint and press Press again

NEW WAYPOINTName FREQLat 34 deg 22796NLon 136 deg 07264E

05

[MENU] Exit

04------ ENT

rase

New waypoint window name entry

5 Use or to set character $ or to shift cursor

6 Press to select ENT 7 Enter latitude and longitude similar

to how you entered waypoint name8 Press the [MENUESC] key to

register the waypoint

Editing waypoints Press the [MENUESC] key to open

the main menu

2 Use or to choose WAYPOINTLIST from page 2 of the menu

3 Press to open the waypoints list4 Use or to choose a waypoint

and press 5 Use or to choose the item to

edit (name latitude or longitude)6 Press to open the data entry

window7 Use or to set character $ or

to choose location8 Press to choose ENT 9 Press the [MENUESC] key

Erasing waypoints Press the [MENUESC] key2 Use or to choose WAYPOINT

LIST from page 2 of the menu3 Press to open the waypoints list

4 Use or to choose the waypointto erase and then press Note You cannot erase a waypointwhich is selected as ldquoGOTO WPTrdquo

5 Press to choose ldquoEraserdquo6 Press to open the options window7 Press to select YES to erase the

waypoint The waypoint list appearswith the erased waypoint blank

8 Press the [MENUESC] key twice toclose the menu

Setting destination waypoint

Set a destination waypoint to find rangebearing and time-to-go to that point Youcan see range and bearing to awaypoint Time-to-go is shown on theTime to Go digital display

Press the [MENUESC] key to openthe main menu

2 Use or to choose GOTO WPTfrom page 2 of the menu

3 Press to open the waypoints list

Off01020304----------------------------------------------------------------

Waypoint list

4 Use or to choose a waypoint5 Press the [MENUESC] key to close

the menu

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 2148

15

116 Setting Up Nav DataDisplays

The user may arrange the nav datadisplays as desired

1 Use the [MODE] key to show theNAV DATA-1 or 2 display whicheveryou want to set up

2 Press the [MENUESC] key to closethe mode selection window

3 Press the cursor pad to display theNAV DATA SETUP window

NAV DATA SETUP

Window Selection Data Selection

[MENU] Exit

NAV DATA SETUP window

4 Use or to choose a datadisplay window desired Adashed-line rectangle circumscribesyour selection

5 Use

or$

to choose item todisplay See the below for adescription of the displays

(9)

(1)

(2)

(3)

(4)(5)

(6)(7)(8)

Two-data

display

Three-data

display

Four-data

displayItems displayable in (1) - (3) depth positioncourse range and bearing trip distanceodometer water temperature headingair pressure time-to-go to destination waypointXTE speed wind speed and directiondestination waypoint data compassItems displayable in (4) - (9) depth positionspeed course range and bearing trip distanceodometer water temperature headingair pressure time-to-go to destination waypointXTE wind speed wind direction

= Graphic display

Nav data window and item displayable6 Press the [MENUESC] key to finish

Note You can choose the number ofitems to show in a nav data display withNAV DATA-1 and NAV DATA-2 on theSystem menu

GRAPHIC DISPLAYS

1 05 0 05 1

Wpt 03Rng 019nm Brg 321 deg XTE 000nm Cse 333 deg

DESTINATION WAYPOINT GRAPHIC

XTEscale

BearingCourseDestinationwaypointdirection

DestinationwaypointdataNameRangeXTE

Wind APP

WIND GRAPHIC

60

120

90

030

150180

120

150

90

60

30

120 deg

Speed 103 ms

COMPASS GRAPHIC

SPEED GRAPHIC

172

Speed

20

50

40

60

30

10

01 05 0 05 1

025 nm

XTE

XTE GRAPHIC

kt

Bearing todestinationwaypoint

Course

Brg30 deg

Cse90 deg

N

E

XTE scale

Speed-ometer

Nav data display-1

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 2248

16

DIGITAL DISPLAYS

Course

123 deg

COURSE

Depth

328 ft

DEPTH

Heading TRUEMAG

318 deg

HEADING

Odometer

56 nm

ODOMETER

Position GPS 3D

30 deg 00065N130 deg 00574E

POSITION

Temperature

698 degF

WATER TEMPERATURE

Trip meter

121 nm

TRIP DISTANCE

Time to Go

00 H30 M

TIME-TO-GO

1018 hpa

AIR PRESSURE

Air Pressure

Speed

193 kt

SPEED

Rng

121 nm

RANGE amp BEARING

Brg

140 deg

Wind Speed APP

80 ms

WIND SPEED

Wind Dir APP

138 deg

WIND DIRECTION

APP or TRUE depending on menu setting TRUE or MAG depending

on menu settingamp To destination waypoint

Note 1 Nav data is updated with somedelay

Note 2 When data is lost 120 sec thedisplay shows - - at the locationwhere data is lost

= GPS receiving status (Displays whenconnecting with GP-310B320B and InOutis selected at the Installation menu)NO FIX Position cannot be foundGPS 2D 2D (dimension) GPS position fixGPS 3D 3D GPS fixGPS W2D 2D WAAS position fixGPS W3D 3D WAAS position fix

NAV data display-2

117 Other Menu ItemsThis section describes the menu itemsnot previously mentioned

Page 1

HUE (Picture Color)

Two picture color arrangements areavailable Day and Night Day showsechoes on a white background Nightshows them on a black background

1 Press the [MENUESC] key todisplay the menu

2 Use or $ to choose HUE frompage 1 of the menu

3 Press to show the optionswindow

4 Use or $ to choose Day or Nightas appropriate

5 Press the [MENUESC] key to closethe menu

WHITE LINE

The white line feature displays theleading edge of the bottom echo in

white This is useful for discriminatingbottom fish near the bottom

1 Press the [MENUESC] key todisplay the main menu

2 Use or $ to choose WHITE LINEfrom page 1 of the menu

3 Press to show the optionswindow

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 2348

17

4 Use or to choose Off Tone orMesh as appropriate ldquoMeshrdquo paintsthe white line in darker tone thanldquoTonerdquo

5 Press the [MENUESC] key to closethe menu

526White Line OFF White Line ON (Mesh)

Fish schoolclearly shown

White line

0

20

40

60

80

050k 11

526

0

20

40

60

80

00 050k 11

How white line works

DEEP GAIN

ldquoDeep Gainrdquo compensates forpropagation attenuation of the ultrasonicwaves It does this by equalizing echopresentation so that fish schools of thesame size appear in the same density inboth shallow and deep waters Inaddition it reduces surface noise

Press the [MENUESC] key to openthe main menu

2 Use or to choose DEEP GAINfrom page of the menu

3 Press $ to show to the optionswindow

4 Choose Low Medium or High asappropriate High provides thegreatest degree of gain reductionagainst short range echoes

5 Press the [MENUESC] key to closethe menu

Page 2

TRIP RESET

This item resets trip distance to ldquo0rdquo

Press the [MENUESC] key to openthe main menu

2 Use or to choose TRIPRESET from page 2 of the menu

3 Press $ 4 Press to reset trip distance

Beeps are generated while the tripdistance is being reset

5 Press the [MENUESC] key to closethe menu

Note To reset the odometer to zeroclear the memory

GAIN ADJ 200 GAIN ADJ 50

If the gain is too high or too low or thegain for the low and high frequenciesappears unbalanced you cancompensate it as follows

Press the [MENUESC] key to openthe main menu

2 Use or to choose GAIN ADJ200 or GAIN ADJ 50 from page 2 ofthe menu

3 Press $ to show to the optionswindow

4 Use or to set the amount Thesetting range is ndash50 to +50

5 Press the [MENUESC] key to close

the menu

DRAFT

The default depth display shows thedistance from the transducer If youwould rather show the distance from thesea surface set your shiprsquos draft asfollows

Press the [MENUESC] key to openthe main menu

2 Use or to choose DRAFT frompage 2 of the menu

3 Press $ and then use or to setdraft The setting range is ndash 50 to+500 (meters feet)

4 Press the [MENUESC] key to closethe menu

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 2448

18

2 SYSTEM MENU

The System menu mainly consists ofitems which once set do not requirefrequent adjustment You may displaythis menu by choosing SYSTEM MENUat page 2 of the main menu andpressing

SYSTEM MENULANGUAGE English

DEPTH UNIT ftSPEED UNIT ktWIND UNIT msTEMP UNIT deg F

TEMP GRAPH OffNAV DATA-1 NAV DATA-2

WATER TYPE SaltKEY BEEP OnBATT VOLTAGE Off (13)

[MENU] Exit

SYSTEM MENU

(23)

NAV DISPLAY TempSpeedNMEA0183 Ver 20TLL OUTPUT OffBEARING TrueWIND SPDDIR ApparentTRIP SOURCE Own

TEMP SOURCE OwnSPEED SOURCE OwnTEMP CALIB +00 deg F ( 40)SPEED CALIB +0 ( 50)

Own speed Own temp 100 kt 162 deg F

[MENU] Exit

SYSTEM MENU

(33)

BASIC RANGE1 15 ft

RANGE2 30RANGE3 60RANGE4 120RANGE5 200RANGE6 400RANGE7 600RANGE8 1000 (7-1500)

ZOOM RANGE 15 ft (7-150)BL RANGE 15 ft (10-30)(Bottom Lock)

ZOOM MARKER On

[MENU] Exit

PAGE 3

PAGE 2

PAGE 1

Page no

System menus

21 System MenuPage 1

LANGUAGE The system language isavailable in English several Europeanlanguages and Japanese To changelanguage select language desired andpress the [MENUESC] key

DEPTH UNIT Choose unit of depthmeasurement from meters feet

fathoms passibraza and hiro(Japanese)

SPEED UNIT Choose unit of speedmeasurement from knots miles perhour and kilometers per hour Requiresspeed data

WIND UNIT Choose unit of wind speedmeasurement from ms kt kmh and

mph Requires wind speed data

TEMP UNIT Choose unit oftemperature measurement Celsius orFahrenheit Requires temperature data

TEMP GRAPH Turns the watertemperature display on or off Thetemperature scale range is 16deg (degF) inldquoNarrowrdquo 40deg (degF) in ldquoWiderdquo Requires

water temperature data

m526

0

20

40

60

80

00 050k 11

40

80

70

50

60

TemperatureScale

TemperatureGraph

638 deg F162kt

Water temperature display (wide degF)

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 2548

19

NAV DATA-1 -2 Choose the number ofnavigation data items to display on thenav data displays from two three orfour items Requires appropriate navdata

WATER TYPE Choose the water typewith which to use the LS-4100 fromSalt or Fresh

KEY BEEP Turn key beep on or off

BATT VOLTAGE Turn the batteryvoltage indication (appears at the topright corner on the screen) on or offWhen on it replaces the picture advancespeed indication

Page 2

NAV DISPLAY Choose the nav data todisplay in the nav data window at thetop left-hand corner You may choosefrom temperaturespeedlatitudelongitude range and bearingcourse over ground trip distance or

wind speed Requires appropriate navdata

407 deg F162kt

Nav window

NMEA0183 Choose NMEA version ofnavigator Ver 15 Ver 20 or Ver 30

TLL OUTPUT Enablesdisables outputof TLL (Target Latitude Longitude)position when the [MARK] key isoperated ldquoTLLrdquo outputs latitude andlongitude position ldquoFURUNO-TLLrdquoavailable with connection of navigatorthat can output FURUNO TLL outputslatitude and longitude watertemperature depth etc

BEARING Shiprsquos course and bearingto a waypoint may be displayed in trueor magnetic bearing Magnetic bearingis true bearing plus (or minus) earthrsquosmagnetic deviation Requires bearingdata

WIND SPDDIR Choose the windspeed and direction reference from trueand apparent Requires wind sensorApparen t The direction (in relation toshiprsquos bow) and speed of the wind as itappears to those on board relative tothe speed and direction of the boatcombination of the true wind and thewind caused by the boats movementTrue The speed and direction (inrelation to shiprsquos bow) of the wind felt ormeasured when stationary

TRIP SOURCE Choose speed sourcefor the trip distance indication Own(transducer with speed sensor orseparate speed sensor) or NMEA

TEMP SOURCE Choose source ofwater temperature input Off Own(transducer with water temperaturesensor or separate temperature sensor)or NMEA

SPEED SOURCE Choose source ofspeed input Off Own (transducer withspeed sensor or separate speedsensor) or NMEA Requires speed

data

TEMP CALIB If the water temperaturesensor-generated water temperatureindication is wrong you can correct ithere when ldquoOwnrdquo is selected astemperature source For example if thewater temperature indication is 2deghigher than actual water temperatureenter -2 The setting range is -40degF to

+40degF

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 2648

20

SPEED CALIB If the speedsensor-generated speed indication iswrong you can correct it here whenldquoOwnrdquo is selected as speed source Forexample if the speed indication is 10lower than actual speed enter +10 Thesetting range is ndash50 to +50

Page 3

BASIC RANGE 1 - BASIC RANGE 8 Set range of each of the eight basicranges (Selectable range 7 to 1500 ft)Note 1 All default basic ranges arerestored whenever the depth unit ischanged Therefore change the depth

unit before changing the basic rangesNote 2 A range may not be lower thanthe range preceding it For example ifbasic range 3 is 60 feet basic range 4must be greater than 60 feet

ZOOM RANGE Choose the range tozoom in the marker-zoom andbottom-zoom modes You may choose arange between 7 and 150 feet (2 and 50

meters)

BL RANGE The expansion width forthe bottom-lock display can be chosenfrom 10 to 30 feet (3 and 10 meters)

ZOOM MARKER The zoom markerappears in the normal bottom markerand bottom zoom displays and marksthe area which is expanded in the

bottom marker and bottom zoompictures You can turn the marker on oroff as desired

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 2748

21

3 MAINTENANCETROUBLESHOOTING

W RNING

ELECTRICAL SHOCK HAZARDDo not open the equipment

Only qualified personnel should workinside the equipment

31 Maintenance

Regular maintenance is essential forgood performance Checking the itemslisted in the table below monthly willhelp keep your equipment in goodshape for years to come

Checking

Item Action

Transducercable

Check cable for damage

Power cabletransducercable plug

Check that they are tightlyfastened Refasten ifnecessary

Display unitground

Check for corrosion Cleanif necessary

Power supplyvoltage

Check voltage If out ofrating correct problem

32 Cleaning the DisplayUnit

Dust or dirt on the display unit can beremoved with a soft cloth If desired awater-moistened cloth may be usedUse special care when cleaning theLCD since it scratches easily Do notuse chemical cleaners to clean thedisplay unit - they can remove paint andmarkings

33 TransducerMaintenance

Marine life on the transducer face willresult in a gradual decrease insensitivity Check the transducer facefor cleanliness each time the boat isdry-docked Carefully remove anymarine life with a piece of wood orfine-grade sandpaper

34 Replacing the FuseThe fuse in the power cable protects thesystem from reverse polarity of thepower supply and equipment fault If thefuse blows find the cause beforereplacing it Use only a 1A fuse (FGMB 1A 125V Code No 000-114-805 ) orequivalent Using the wrong fuse will damage the unit and void the warranty

W RNINGUse the proper fuse

Fuse rating is shown on the equipmentUse of a wrong fuse can result in fire anddamage the equipment

35 Battery Voltage Alert A battery icon appears when the batteryvoltage is too high or too low

Battery icon and meaning

Icon Meaning

Voltage is lower than 10 VDC If thevoltage goes below 9 V the equipmentis automatically turned off

Voltage is higher than 165 VDC If thevoltage goes higher than 175 V theequipment is automatically turned off

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 2848

22

36 TroubleshootingThe table below provides basictroubleshooting procedures which theuser may follow to restore normaloperation

Troubleshooting table

Ifhellip Then check hellipneither echo norfixed range scaleappears

bull battery voltagebull fusebull power cable

no echo appearsbut the fixedrange scaleappears

bull if display advancespeed is set to ldquoStoprdquo

bull transducer plugbull

transducer cableecho appears butno zero line

bull if range shifting is setto ldquo0rdquo

sensitivity is low bull gain settingbull if air bubbles or marine

life is clinging to thetransducer face

bull if sediments arepresent in the water

bull if the bottom is too soft

to return an echothere is extremeinterference ornoise

bull if the transducer is tooclose to the engine

bull if the unit is properlygrounded

bull if other echo soundersof the same frequencyas own are beingoperated nearby

the speedwatertemperaturereadout isunrealistic or notpresent

bull sensor plug

the positionreadout isunrealistic or notpresent

bull the connectionbetween sounder andnavigator

bull navigator

37 DiagnosticsIf you feel your unit is not workingproperly conduct the diagnostic test tofind the problem If you cannot restorenormal operation contact your dealerfor advice

1 Turn on the power while pressing the[MENUESC] key Continue pressingthe [MENUESC] key until theInstallation menu appears

SIMULATION On

TEST LCD PATTERN MEMORY CLEAR

NMEA PORT InOutNMEA MIX Off GPS WAAS Off

SET BOTTOM LEVEL

Installation Menu

= Setting cannot be changed whenNMEA PORT setting is InIn

Installation menu2 Press to choose TEST3 Press to start the test

ROM OKRAM OKNMEA

Temp 682 deg F

Speed 100kmh

Power 124 VBody 39 deg C

Program No 0252318-01Push [MENU] 3 times to exit

Level bar

= Program version no

Water

TemperatureSpeedBattery VoltageTemperatureinside displayunit(Unit fixed atdeg C)

GPS (48502180) OK

Only when GP-310B is connected(For GP-320B 4850238)

Test display

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 2948

23

4 The ROM RAM and NMEA port arechecked with the results shown asOK or NG (No Good) For any NGrequest service (A special connectoris required to test the NMEA portNothing appears if no connector isconnected)

5 The squares at the right side of thetest display are for checking thecontrols Press each key and thearrows on the Cursor Pad one byone A controlrsquos correspondingon-screen square ldquolightsrdquo in black ifthe control is normal

6 To return to the Installation menupress the [MENUESC] key threetimes

7 To restore normal operation turn offthe power and turn it on again

38 Test PatternThis feature tests for proper display oftones

1 On the Installation menu press $ tochoose LCD PATTERN

2 Press to start the test The entirescreen is black

3 Press again and the screen turnswhite

4 Press again and the screenshows a four-toned display

5 Press again to return to theInstallation menu

6 To restore normal operation turn offthe power and then it on again

WHITE FOUR-TONE BLACK

Test patterns

39 Memory ClearThe memory can be cleared to startafresh with default menu settings

1 At the installation menu press $ tochoose MEMORY CLEAR

2 Press to open the optionswindow

YES NO

Clear memory display

3 Press to clear the memory Beepsare generated while the memory isbeing cleared

4 To restore normal operation turn offthe power and then turn it on again

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3048

24

4 INSTALLATION

41 Display UnitMounting considerations

The display unit can be installed on adesktop on the bulkhead or flushmounted in a panel When choosing alocation keep the following in mind

bull Keep the display unit out of directsunlight

bull The temperature and humidity should

be moderate and stablebull Locate the unit away from exhaust

pipes and ventsbull The mounting location should be well

ventilatedbull Mount the unit where shock and

vibration are minimalbull For maintenance and checking

purposes leave sufficient space atthe sides and rear of the unit andleave slack in cables

bull A magnetic compass will be affected ifthe display unit is placed too close toit Observe the following compasssafe distances to prevent disturbanceto the magnetic compassStandard compass 04 metersSteering compass 03 meters

Desktop overhead mounting1 Fix the bracket to a desktop or the

overhead with tapping screws(supplied)

2 Loosely screw knobs into the displayunit

3 Set the display unit to the bracketand then tighten the knobs

Mounting on the bulkhead Flush

mounting in a panelSee the instructions on the bulkhead orflush mounting template (supplied)

42 Thru-hull MountTransducer

Transducer mounting location

The thru-hull mount transducer

(520-5PSD 520-5MSD) provides thebest performance of all since thetransducer protrudes from the hull andthe effect of air bubbles and turbulencenear the hull skin is reduced When theboat has a keel the transducer shouldbe at least 30 cm away from it Typicalthru-hull mountings are shown in thefigure on the next page

The performance of this sounder isdirectly related to the mounting locationof the transducer especially forhigh-speed cruising The installationshould be planned in advance keepingthe standard cable length (8 m) and thefollowing factors in mindbull Air bubbles and turbulence caused by

movement of the boat seriouslydegrade the sounding capability of thetransducer The transducer shouldtherefore be located in a positionwhere water flow is the smoothestNoise from the propellers alsoadversely affects performance andthe transducer should not be mountednearby The lifting strakes arenotorious for creating acoustic noiseand these must be avoided bykeeping the transducer inboard ofthem

bull The transducer must always remain

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3148

25

submerged even when the boat isrolling pitching or up on a plane athigh speed

bull A practical choice would besomewhere between 13 and 12 of

the boatrsquos length from the stern Forplaning hulls a practical location isgenerally rather far astern so that thetransducer is always in waterregardless of the planing attitude

28

22

120

68

30

520-5PSD

24

120

68

87520-5MSD

Unit mm

Thru-hull mount transducer dimensions

Acceptable transducer mounting

locations

Position 12 to 13 of the hull from stern

15 to 30 cm off center line (inside first lifting strakes)

Within the wetted bottom area

Deadrise angle within 15 deg

HIGH SPEED-V HULL

Suitable transducer mounting locations

Typical thru-hull mounttransducer installations

FairingBlock

Flat Washer

Rubber Washer

Hull

Deep-V Hull

Hull

Flat Washer

Rubber Washer

Flat Hull

CorkWasher

Typical thru-hull mounttransducer installations

Procedure for installing thethru-hull mount transducer

1 With the boat hauled out of the watermark the location chosen formounting the transducer on thebottom of the hull

2 If the hull is not level within 15deg inany direction fairing blocks madeout of teak should be used betweenthe transducer and hull both insideand outside to keep the transducerface parallel with the water lineFabricate the fairing block as shownbelow and make the entire surfaceas smooth as possible to provide anundisturbed flow of water around thetransducer The fairing block shouldbe smaller than the transducer itselfto provide a channel to divert

turbulent water around the sides ofthe transducer rather than over itsface

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3248

26

BOWHole for stuffing tube

Upper Half

Lower Half

Saw along slopeof hull Construction of fairing block

3 Drill a hole just large enough to passthe threaded stuffing tube of thetransducer through the hull makingsure it is drilled vertically

4 Apply a sufficient amount of highquality caulking compound to the topsurface of the transducer around thethreads of the stuffing tube andinside the mounting hole (and fairingblocks if used) to ensure watertightmounting

5 Mount the transducer and fairingblocks and tighten the locking nutsBe sure that the transducer is

properly oriented and its workingface is parallel to the waterline

Note Do not over-stress the stuffingtube and locking nuts through excessivetightening since the wood block willswell when the boat is placed in thewater It is suggested that the nut betightened lightly at installation andretightened several days after the boat

has been launched

Transducer preparation

Before putting the boat in water wipethe face of the transducer thoroughlywith a detergent liquid soap This willlessen the time necessary for thetransducer to have good contact withthe water Otherwise the time requiredfor complete ldquosaturationrdquo ill belengthened and performance will bereduced

DO NOT paint the transducerPerformance will be affected

43 Transom MountTransducer

The transom mount transducer is verycommonly employed usually onrelatively small IO or outboard boatsDo not use this method on an inboardmotor boat because turbulence iscreated by the propeller ahead of thetransducer

520-5PWD

There are two methods of installationflush with hull (for flat hulls) andprojecting from hull (for deep V-hulls)

Flat Hull

D

Dgt50 cm

Deep-VHull

520-5PWD mounting locations

Installing the 520-5PWD on a flat hull

A suitable mounting location is at least50 cm away from the engine and wherethe water flow is smooth

1 Drill four pilot holes in the mountinglocation

2 Attach the transducer to the bracketwith 5 x 20 tapping screws(supplied)

3 Adjust the transducer position so thetransducer faces right to the bottom

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3348

27

Note If necessary to improve waterflow and minimize air bubblesstaying on the transducer faceincline the transducer about 5deg at therear This may require a certainamount of experimentation for finetuning at high cruising speeds

4 Fill the gap between the wedge frontof the transducer and transom withepoxy material to eliminate any airspaces

No1 M5 x 14

5 x 20

5 x 20

2 to 5

Tape

Hull

Transom mount transducer

mounting flush with hull

Installing the transom mounttransducer on a deep-V hull

This method is employed on deep-Vhulls and provides good performancebecause the effects of air bubbles areminimal Install the transducer parallelwith water surface not flush with hull Ifthe boat is placed on a trailer care mustbe taken not to damage the transducerwhen the boat is hauled out of the waterand put on the trailer

5 x 20

No 2M5 x 14

5 x 20

Transom mount transducermounted projecting from hull

525-5PWD

Choose the installation methoddepending on the rise angle of the hull

Transom

Transom

Stripe over 10

Parallel with hull

Mount at the stripe

less than 10

525-5PWD mounting location

Installing the 525-5PWD

Referring to ldquoInstalling the 520-5PWDrdquoin the left column for mounting of thebracket and the figure shown on the topof next page install the 525-5PWD tothe transom

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3448

28

2 to 5

Transducer

Bracket

Hull

Epoxy material

525-5PWD mounting

44 Inside-hullTransducer

The thru-hull mount transducer(520-5PSD 520-5MSD) may also beinstalled inside the hull following theprocedure below

Necessary tools

You will need the following toolsbull Sandpaper (100)bull Silicone sealantbull Silicone grease

Remarks on installationbull Turn off the engine and anchor the

boat while installing the equipmentbull Install the transducer in the engine

room

Choosing the mounting locationbull The mounting location should be

where the hull is of single-hullthickness and is void of air or flotationmaterials other than solid fiberglassbetween the transducer face and thewater

bull Do not place the transducer over hullstruts or ribs which run under the hull

bull Avoid a location where the risingangle of the hull exceeds 15deg tominimize the effect of the boatrsquosrolling

bull You will finalize the mounting location

through some trial and error Theprocedure for this is shown later

50 cm

50 cm15 cm15 cm

13

12

Transducer mountinglocation

Centerline

Inside-hull transducer mounting location

Attaching the transducer1 Clean the transducer face to remove

any foreign material Lightly roughenthe transducer face with 100sandpaper Also roughen the insideof the hull where the transducer is tobe mounted

2 Clean the transducer face again3 Warm the silicone sealant to 40degC

before usage to soften it Coat thetransducer face and mountinglocation with silicone sealant

Transducer

SiliconeSealant

Coating transducer facewith silicone sealant

4 Press the transducer firmly down onthe hull and gently twist it back andforth to remove any air which may betrapped in the silicone sealant

Checking the installation

1 Connect the battery to the display

unit2 Turn on the display unit

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3548

29

3 Press the [MODE] key to chooseSINGLE FREQ

4 Choose 50 kHz or 200 kHz and thenpress the [MENUESC] key to closethe mode menu

5 Press the [MENU] to show the mainmenu and then press to select

Auto mode6 Press to choose Off7 Press the [MENUESC] key8 Press the [GAIN] key to set the gain

to ldquo5rdquo and then press the[MENUESC] key

9 Press the [RANGE] key to set therange to 10 meters (feet) and thenpress the [MENUESC] key

10 If the bottom is displayed in darkgray and the depth indicationappears the mounting location issuitable Go to ldquoFinal preparationrdquo

11 If the bottom is not displayed in darkgray tone the mounting location maybe unsuitable Do the followinga) Press the [POWERBRILL] key to

turn off the powerb) Gently dismount the transducer

with a piece of woodc) Reattach the transducer

elsewhere as shown in ldquoAttachingthe transducerrdquo

d) Check the installation again

Final preparation

Support the transducer with a piece ofwood to keep it in place while it is drying

Let the transducer dry 24-72 hours

45 Optional Triducer525ST-MSD

The optional triducer 525ST-MSD isdesigned for thru-hull mounting Forhow to install this transducer seeparagraph 42

φ79 mm

33 mm200-12 UNthreads

φ51 mm

27 mm

7 mm

140 mm Triducer 525ST-MSD

525ST-PWD

The Transom Mount Transducer orTRIDUCER reg Multisensor with IntegralRelease Bracket 525ST-PWD ismanufactured by AIRMAR Co Theseinstructions are also included with the

sensor

Pre-test for speed and temperature

Connect the sensor to the instrumentand spin the paddlewheel Check for aspeed reading and the approximate airtemperature If there is no readingreturn the sensor to your place ofpurchase

Tools and materials needed

ScissorsMasking tapeSafety gogglesDust maskElectric drillDrill bit for

Bracket holes 4mm 23 or 964rdquoFiberglass hull chamfer bit(preferred)6mm or 14rdquo

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3648

30

Transom hole 19mm or 34rdquo(optional)

Cable clamp holes 3mm or 18rdquoScrewdriversStraight edgeMarine sealantPencilZip-tiesWater-based antifouling paint(mandatory in salt water )

Mounting location

To ensure the best performance thesensor must be submerged inaeration-free and turbulence-free water

Mount the sensor close to the centerlineof the boat On slower heavierdisplacement hulls positioning it fartherfrom the centerline is acceptable

Allow adequate space above thebracket for it to release and rotate thesensor upward

Height

Height withoutspeed sensor191mm (7-12)Height withspeed sensor213mm (8-12)

Height required at mounting location

Note 1 Do not mount the sensor in anarea of turbulence or bubbles nearwater intake or discharge openingsbehind strakes struts fittings or hull

irregularities behind eroding paint (anindication of turbulence)Note 2 Avoid mounting the sensorwhere the boat may be supportedduring trailering launching hauling andstorageNote 3 For single drive boat mounton the starboard side at least 75 mm(3rdquo) beyond the swing radius of thepropeller

75 mm(3)

minimum beyondswing radius

Mounting location on single drive boat

Note 4 For twin drive boat mountbetween the drives

Installation of bracket

1 Cut out the installation template

shown on the next page2 At the selected location position thetemplate so the arrow at the bottomis aligned with the bottom edge ofthe transom Being sure the templateis parallel to the waterline tape it inplace

Align template vertically

Deadrise angle

Slope of hullparallel towaterline

Align template arrow withbottom edge of transom

Positioning the template

Warning Always wear safetygoggles and a dust mask

3 Using a 4 mm 23 or 964rdquo bit drillthree holes 22 mm (78rdquo) deepat the locations indicated To preventdrilling too deeply wrap maskingtape around the bit 22 mm (78rdquo)from the pointFiberglass hull Minimize surfacecracking by chamfering the gelcoatIf a chamfer bit or countersink bit is

not available start drilling with a6mm or 14rdquo bit to a depth of 1 mm(116rdquo)

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3748

31

4 If you know your transom angle the

bracket is designed for a standard13deg transom angle11deg-18deg angle No shim is requiredSkip to step 3 in ldquoAdjustingrdquoOther angles The shim is requiredSkip to step 2 of ldquoAdjustingrdquoIf you do not know the transom angletemporarily attach the bracket andsensor to the transom to determine ifthe plastic shim is needed

5 Using the two 10 x 1-14rdquo

self-tapping screws temporarilyscrew the bracket to the hull DONOT tighten the screws completelyat this time Follow the step 1-4 inldquoAttaching the Sensor to the Bracketrdquobefore proceeding with ldquoAdjustingrdquo

Installation templatefor starboard side of boat

Drill at locations labeled Bfor the following transom angles

16 deg through 22 deg

Drill at locations labeled Afor the following transom angles

2 deg through 15 deg

Align arrow with bottom of transom

AA A

BB B

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3848

32

Adjusting

1 Using a straight edge sight theunderside of the sensor relative tothe underside of the hull The sternof the sensor should be 1-3 mm

(116-18rdquo) below the bow of thesensor or parallel to the bottom ofthe hull

11 deg transom angleNO SHIM

12-18 deg transom angleNO SHIM

2 deg -10 deg transom

angle

19 deg -22 deg transom

angleshim withtaper up

shim withtaper down

parallelparallel parallel

slightangle

angletoo steep

anglereversed

YES NONO

YES YESYES

Sensor position and transom angle

Note Do not position the bow of thesensor lower than the stern becauseaeration will occur

2 To adjust the sensorrsquos angle relativeto the hull use the tapered plasticshim provided If the bracket hasbeen temporarily fastened to thetransom remove it Key the shim in

place on the back of the bracket2deg-10deg transom angle (steppedtransom and jet boats) Positionthe shim with the tapered end down19deg-22deg transom angle (smallaluminum and fiberglass boats) Position the shim with the taperedend up

3 If the bracket has been temporarilyfastened to the transom remove it

Apply a marine sealant to thethreads of the two 10 x 1-14rdquo self

tapping screws to prevent waterseeping into the transom Screw thebracket to the hull Do not tighten thescrews completely at this time

4 Repeat step 1 to ensure that theangle of the sensor is correctNote Do not position the sensorfarther into the water than necessaryto avoid increasing drag spray andwater noise and reducing boatspeed

5 Using the vertical adjustment spaceon the bracket slots slide the sensorup or down to provide a projection of3 mm (18rdquo) Tighten the screws

Cable cover

Cableclamp

50 mm (2)

Hull projection 3 mm (18)

Vertical adjustment and cable routing

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3948

33

Attaching the sensor to the bracket

1 If the retaining cover near the top ofthe bracket is closed open it bydepressing the latch and rotating thecover downward

Step 1 Step 2

Latch

Retainingcover

Pivotarm (2)

Slot (2)

Step 4

Step 3

Attaching the sensor to the bracket

2 Insert the sensorrsquos pivot arms intothe slots near the top of the bracket

3 Maintain pressure until the pivotarms click into place

4 Rotate the sensor downward until thebottom snaps into the bracket

5 Close the retaining cover to preventthe accidental release of the sensorwhen the boat is underway

Cable routing

Route the sensor cable over thetransom through a drain hole orthorough a new hole drilled in thetransom above the waterline

Never cut the cable or remote the

connector this will void the warranty Always wear safety goggles and a dustmask

1 If a hole must be drilled choose alocation well above the waterlineCheck for obstructions such as trimtabs pumps or wiring inside the hullMark the location with a pencil Drilla hole through the transom using a19 mm or 34rdquo bit (to accommodatethe connector)

2 Route the cable over or through thetransom

3 On the outside of the hull secure thecable against the transom using thecable clamps Position a cable clamp50 mm(2rdquo) above the bracket andmark the mounting hole with apencil

4 Position the second cable clamphalfway between the first clamp andthe cable hole Mark this mountinghole

5 If a hole has been drilled in thetransom open the appropriate slot inthe transom cable cover Position thecover over the cable where it entersthe hull Mark the two mounting

holes6 At each of the marked locations usea 3 mm or 18rdquo bit to drill a hole 10mm (38rdquo) deep The prevent drillingtoo deeply wrap masking tapearound the bit 10 mm (38rdquo) from thepoint

7 Apply marine sealant to the threadsof the 6 x 12rdquo self-tapping screw toprevent water from seeping into the

transom If you have drilled a holethrough the transom apply marinesealant to the space around thecable where it passes through thetransom

8 Position the two cable clamps andfasten them in place If used pushthe cable cover over the cable andscrew it in place

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4048

34

9 Route the cable to the instrumentbeing careful not to tear the cable

jacket when passing it though thebulkhead(s) and other parts of theboat To reduce electricalinterference separate the sensorcable from other electrical wiring andldquonoiserdquo sources Coil any excesscable and secure it in place withzip-ties to prevent damage

46 Optional WaterTemperatureSpeedSensor

Water temperaturespeed sensorST-02MSB and ST-02PSB which aredesigned for thru-hull mounting areoptionally available Install them asshown below

Mounting considerations

Choose a suitable mounting locationconsidering the followingbull Choose a place free from vibrationbull Choose a mid-boat flat position The

sensor does not have to be installedperfectly perpendicular The sensormust not be damaged in dry-dockingoperation

bull Choose a place apart from equipmentgenerating heat

bull Choose a place in the forwarddirection viewing from the drain holeto allow for circulation of coolingwater

1 Dry-dock the boat2 Make a hole of approx 51 mm

diameter in the mounting location3 Unfasten locknut and remove the

sensor section4 Apply high-grade sealant to the

flange of the sensor5 Pass the sensor casing through thehole

6 Face the notch on the sensor towardboatrsquos bow and tighten the flange

7 Set the sensor section to the sensorcasing and tighten the locknut

8 Launch the boat and check for waterleakage around the sensor

Locknut

Face notchtoward bow

Flange Nut

Coat withsilicone sealant Brim

φ 77

51

123

Water temperaturespeed sensor

ST-02MSB ST-02PSB

47 Wiring

Connect the LS-4100 powerdata cableassy MJ-A7SPF0005-020 (2 msupplied) to the POWER and thetransducer cable to the XDR connectorRefer to the interconnection diagram toconnect cables Leave slack in cables tofacilitate checking and maintenance

Note The fuse holder contains a springwhich fixes the fuse To preventdetachment of the spring which wouldcause loss of power tie the line asshown below

+ line (red)

Fuse holder

Cable tie How to fix fuse holder

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4148

35

Establishing the ground

The ground wire (125 sq or more localsupply) should be as short as possible

The signal line ground is isolated from

the chassis ground however the powerline is not insulated Therefore whenconnecting eternal equipment havingpositive ground do not ground thesignal line to the chassis If excessivenoise shows on the screen the groundmay be inadequate In this case attacha steel plate measuring 20 cm by 30 cmon the outside of the hull to provide aground point Connect the ground wire

there Use a ldquoclosedrdquo type lug ( ) tomake the connection at the display unitDo not use an ldquoopenrdquo type lug ( )

Optional equipment

POWER connector

The power supply port is commonlyused for connection of externalequipment such as a GPS receiver orwind indicator Use the powerdatacable MJ-A7SPF0005-020 (supplied) forconnection referring the figure shown inthe right column

Connector Color Remarks

1 TD-A WHT2 TD-B BLU

IEC-61162-1NMEA0183

3 RD-A YEL

4 RD-B GRN

IEC-61162-1

NMEA01835 + RED

6 - BLKPower input12 VDC

7 FG

Water tempspeed sensor

Connect the optional water tempspeedsensor to the XDR connector with theoptional converter connector (Type02S4147) as shown below

Tape connectors withvulcaninzing tapeand then vinyl tapeto waterproof themBind tape ends withcable ties to preventtape from unraveling

Connect to XDR portat rear of display unit

MJ-A10SPF

MJ-A10SRMDMJ-A6SRMD

Fromtransducer

Fromsensor

Connection of converterconnector 02S4147

48 IEC 61162-1 DataSentences

The tables below show the datasentences which can be input to andoutput from the LS-4100 Thetransmission speed for both input andoutput is 4800 bps Data is output attwo-second intervals

Input data sentences

Sentence Meaning

BWC Bearing and distance towaypoint

GGA Global positioning system(GPS) fix data

GLL Geographic position -latitudelongitude

HDG Heading deviation and variationHDT Heading true

MDA Atmospheric pressure

MTW Water temperature

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4248

36

Input data sentences (conrsquot)

Sentence MeaningMWV Wind speed and

angleRMA Recommended

minimum specificLORAN-C dataRMB Recommended

minimum navigationinformation

RMC Recommendedminimum specificGPSTRANSIT data

VHW Water speed andheading

VTG Course over groundand ground speedXTE Cross track error

Output data sentences

Sentence MeaningDBT (Ver 15) Depth below

transducerDPT (Ver 20 Ver30)

Depth

MTW Water temperatureRMB (Ver 20) Recommended

minimumnavigationinformation

VHW Water speed andheading

TLL Target positionoutput by [MARK]key

= Available with connection of optionalsensorsnavaid

49 Installation MenuThe installation menu mainly containsitems which are set at installation

1 Turn on the power while pressing the[MENUESC] key Continue pressing

the [MENUESC] key until theInstallation menu appears

SIMULATION On

TEST LCD PATTERN MEMORY CLEAR

NMEA PORT InOutNMEA MIX OffGPS WAAS Off

SET BOTTOM LEVEL

Installation Menu

= Setting cannot be changed whenNMEA PORT setting is InIn

Installation menu

SIMULATION The simulation modeprovides without connection of thetransducer simulated operation of theequipment using internally generatedechoes All controls are operative Themessage ldquoSIMrdquo appears at the top rightcorner on the screen when thesimulation mode is active

1 At the installation menu press toopen the simulation mode optionswindow

2 Press to choose ldquoOnrdquo to turn onthe simulation mode

3 Press the [POWERBRILL] keyabout three seconds to turn off thepower

4 Press the [POWERBRILL] key toturn on the power ldquoSIMrdquo appears atthe top right corner of the display

5 To turn off the simulation modeselect Off at step 2

NMEA po r t se tup(NMEA PO RT NMEA M IX)

The POWER port can function as aninput port or inputoutput port Changethe setting to ldquoInInrdquo when connectingGP-310B320B and a wind sensor

When connecting the GP-310B320Band a wind sensor first turn on ldquoGPS

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4348

37

WAASrdquo (in the Installation menu) andthen select ldquoInInrdquo as the NMEA portsetting

1 Turn on the power while pressingand holding down the [MENUESC]key Continue pressing the[MENUESC] key until theInstallation menu appears

2 Choose NMEA PORT and thenpress to display the NMEA portoptions window

3 Use or to choose InOut orInIn as appropriate

InOut Input and Output (default

setting)InIn Input only (Available withconnection of the GP-310B320Band a wind sensor)

4 Press choose NMEA MIX andthen press to display the NMEAMIX options window

5 Use or to choose Off or OnChoose On to output input data

Off Outputs the data sentences ofLS-4100 only

On Outputs the data sentences ofLS-4100 and sentences which areinput from other equipment

6 To restore normal operation turn offthe power and then turn it on again

GPS WAAS Chooses how to use theWAAS signal when connecting with a

WAAS receiver for example GP-320B

Note WAAS is currently in thedevelopmental phase During thedevelopmental phase the reliability andavailability of the WAAS signal cannotbe guaranteed Therefore any positiondata should be verified against othersources to confirm reliability

1 Display the Installation menu2 Choose GPS WAAS and then press

to open the GPS WAAS options

window

Off

WAAS options window3 Press or to choose ldquoWAAS-02rdquo

(test signal) When the systembecomes operational (in 2003) setto ldquo00rdquo (regular WAAS signal)

4 Turn off the power

BOTTOM LEVEL If the depthindication is unstable in automaticoperation or the bottom echo cannot bedisplayed in the darkest gray tone byadjusting the gain controls in manualoperation you may adjust the bottomecho level detection circuit for both 50kHz and 200 kHz to stabilize theindication Generally lower the bottomlevel for inner hull installation where thereceive level is too low If the bottomlevel is too low it may be difficult todiscriminate fish from the bottomresulting in unstable depth indication

And if the bottom level is too high thedepth indication may not appear

1 At the installation menu press tochoose SET BOTTOM LEVEL andthen press Several seconds laterthe following display appears

Bottom level +0 (200k -100 - +100 ) +0 ( 50k -100 - +100 )

Bottom level display

2 While observing the picture use or to set 200 kHz or to set50 kHz Set up for optimum picture

3 To restore normal operation turn offthe power and then it on again

Note The mode must be other thanldquoNAV DATArdquo to show the bottom leveldisplay

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4448

SP - 1 E2371S01C

SPECIFICATIONS OF ECHO SOUNDER LS-4100

1 GENERAL11 TX Frequency 50 kHz or 200 kHz 50200 kHz dual transmitting selectable12 Transmit Method Single or dual transmitting

13 Output Power 300 Wrms14 TX Rate Max 500 pulsemin15 Pulse-length 01 to 08 ms

2 DISPLAY UNIT21 Display system 5-inch monochrome LCD 76 mm (W) x 100 mm (H) 240 x 320 dots22 Display Mode Single frequency (highlow freq) Dual-frequency Zoom Nav data-12

Marker zoom Bottom zoom Bottom-lock23 Display Range

Range SettingRange

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

Display

rangeMeter 5 10 20 40 80 150 200 300 2-500

Feet 15 30 60 120 200 400 600 1000 7-1500

Fathoms 3 5 10 20 40 80 100 150 1-250

PassiBraza 3 5 10 30 50 100 150 200 1-300

24 Range Shift 0-500 m 0-1500 ft 0-250 fa 0-300 pb25 Expansion Range Bottom-lock expansion 3 to 10 m

Sectional expansion 2 to 50 m26 Display Advance Speed 8 steps (LinesTX Freeze 1161814121121 41)

3 INTERFACE31 Input data sentences IEC61162-1NMEA0183 Ver 152030

GGA RMA RMB RMC BWC GLL HDT HDG VTG VHW MTWMWV MDA XTE

32 Output data sentences IEC61162-1NMEA0183 Ver 152030 interval 2 sMTW VHW DBT DPT RMB TLL by key operating External data required

4 POWER SUPPLY41 Display Unit 12 VDC 05 A

5 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITION51 Ambient Temperature Display unit -15degC to +55degC52 Relative Humidity 93 or less at 40degC53 Waterproof IPX5

6 COATING COLOR61 Display Unit N30

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4548

M a r

4

0 3

D-1

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4648

Mar 4 03

Mar 4 03

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4748

M a r

3

0 3

S-1

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4848

FURUNO Authorized DistributorDealer FURUNO Authorized DistributorDealer

9-52 Ashihara-cho9-52 Ashihara-choNishinomiya 662-8580 JAPANNishinomiya 662-8580 JAPAN

Telephone Telephone 0798-65-21110798-65-2111FaxFax 0798-65-42000798-65-4200

FIRST EDITION FIRST EDITION MARMAR 20032003Printed in JapanPrinted in Japan All rights reserved All rights reserved

B1B1 SEPSEP 09 200509 2005

Pub NoPub No OME-23710OME-23710 00014698000000146980000001469800000014698000(( DAMIDAMI )) LS-4100LS-4100

0 0 0 1 4 6 9 8 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 4 6 9 8 0 0 0

Page 12: OME23710B_1_LS4100

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 1248

6

5 Press the [MENUESC] key to closethe menu

The auto mode in use is shown as(Auto-Fishing) or

(Auto-Cruising) at the top left corner onthe screen

Note When in the auto mode SHIFTand CLUTTER cannot be adjustedmanually

Range offset

To display the bottom tail in detail in theautomatic mode offset the range as

below1 Press the [+] or [-] key of the

[RANGE] key

+0 ft

AUTO RANGE OFFSET

Auto range offset window

2 Press the [+] or [-] key of the[RANGE] key again to choose offsetdesired (range -100 to +300 ft)Note that if the basic range ischanged the offset is returned to ldquo0rdquo

3 Press the [MENUESC] key to finish

Gain offset

Gain offset lets you override automaticgain adjustment1 Press the [GAIN] key

Min Max 0

AUTO GAIN OFFSET

Auto gain offset window

2 Press or key to offset gain(setting range ndash5 to +5) The gainselected is shown at the top of thescreen asG (Gain) + (or -) XX (offset value)

3 Press the [MENUESC] key to finish

17 Manual OperationChoosing the manual mode

1 Press the [MENUESC] key to openthe main menu

2 Press to choose AUTO MODEfrom page 1 of the menu3 Press to show the window4 Choose Off with 5 Press the [MENUESC] key to close

the menu appears at the topleft corner on the screen

Choosing range

The basic range and range shiftingfunctions used together give you themeans to choose the depth you can seeon the screen The basic range can bethought of as providing a ldquowindowrdquo intothe water column and range shifting asmoving the ldquowindowrdquo to the desireddepth

Choosing basic range

The basic range may be chosen withthe [RANGE] key from the eight rangesshown in the table shown below (ldquoPBrdquoin the table means PassiBraza) Thesetting range can be arranged throughthe SYSTEM menu

Default ranges

Basic RangeUnit1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

meters 5 10 20 40 80 150 200 300

feet 15 30 60 120 200 400 600 1000

fathoms 3 5 10 20 40 80 100 150

hiro 4 8 15 30 50 100 150 200

PB 3 5 10 30 50 100 150 200

Japanese unit of depth measurement1 Press the [+] or [-] key of the

[RANGE] key and the display shouldnow look something like the one onat the top of the next page

2 Press the [+] or [-] key of the[RANGE] key again to choose abasic range

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 1348

7

1000ft 600ft 400ft 200ft 120ft 60ft 30ft 15ft

Basic ranges (default)3 Press the [MENUESC] key to close

the window

Shifting the range

The basic range may be shifted up ordown in the manual mode as follows

Display

Window can beshifted up anddown to selectthe depth

Range and display shift concept

1 Press the [MENUESC] key to openthe main menu

2 Choose SHIFT from page 1 of themenu

3 Press to open the shift optionswindow

0ft

Shift window

4 Use or $ to choose amount ofshift desired

5 Press the [MENUESC] key to closethe window

Note The picture may not be displayedif the amount of shift is greater thanactual depth

Adjusting the gain

The [GAIN] key adjusts the sensitivity ofthe receiver Generally use a highergain setting for greater depths and alower setting for shallower waters

Use the proper gain setting

Incorrect gain may produce wrong depthindication possibly resulting in a dangeroussituation

UTION

Gain too high Gain proper Gain too low Examples of proper and improper gain

1 Press the [GAIN] key and the displayshown below appears

Min Max

50k 3

200k 2

GAIN

Gain adjustment window

2 When using the dual frequencydisplay press or $ to choosefrequency

3 Press the [GAIN] key to set (Youmay also use or ) Adjust so thata slight amount of noise remains onthe screen

4 Press the [MENUESC] key to closethe gain adjustment window

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 1448

8

18 Measuring DepthThe VRM (Variable Range Marker)functions to measure the depth to fishschools etc1 Press or $ to place the VRM

on the object which you wish tomeasure range

2 Read the VRM depth just abovethe VRM

0

20

40

60

80496

398

VRM

VRM depth

50k 11

How to measure depth with the VRM

19 Choosing PictureAdvance Speed

The picture advance speed determineshow quickly the vertical scan lines runacross the screen When choosing apicture advance speed keep in mindthat a fast advance speed will expandthe size of the fish school horizontallyon the screen and a slow advancespeed will contract it Note that thepicture is not refreshed when pictureadvancement is stopped Thereforeuse caution when steering the vesselunder this condition

Fast Slow Picture and picture advancement speed

1 Press the [MENUESC] key to openthe main menu

2 Choose PIC ADVANCE from page 1of the menu

3 Press to show the optionswindow

Stop116 18 14 12 11 21 41

(

)

Fast

Slow

Picture advance options window

4 Use or $ to choose pictureadvance speed desired Thefractions in the options windowdenote the number of scan linesproduced per transmission Forexample 18 means one scan line isproduced every 8 transmissionsldquoStoprdquo freezes the display and it isconvenient for taking a photo

The picture is not refreshed whenpicture advancement is stopped

Maneuvering the vessel in this conditionmay result in a dangerous situation

UTION

5 Press the [MENUESC] key to closethe menu

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 1548

9

110 SuppressingInterference

Interference from other acousticequipment operating nearby or other

electronic equipment on your boat mayshow itself on the display as shown inthe figure belowTo suppress interference do thefollowing1 Press the [MENUESC] key to open

the main menu2 Use or $ to choose NOISE LIMIT

from page 1 of the menu3 Press to show the options

window4 Use or $ to choose the degree ofsuppression desired Off LowMedium or High (highest)

5 Press the [MENUESC] key to closethe menu

Interference fromother sounder

Electrical interference

Forms of interference

Turn the noise limiter off when nointerference exists otherwise weakechoes may be missed

111 Suppressing LowLevel Noise

Low intensity ldquospecklesrdquo may appearover most of screen This is mainly due

to sediment in the water or noise Thesecan be suppressed by adjustingCLUTTER on the menu When theautomatic mode is on clutter isautomatically rejected To suppress lowlevel noise in manual sounder operationdo the following1 Press the [MENUESC] key to open

the main menu2 Use or $ to choose CLUTTER

from page 1 of the menu3 Press to show the optionswindow

4 Use or $ to choose the degree ofsuppression desired 1 2 3 4 5 or6 The higher the number the greaterthe suppression

5 Press the [MENUESC] key to closethe menu

To turn off low-level noisesuppression choose Off at step 4 andthen press the [MENUESC] key

Clutter appearance

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 1648

10

112 Erasing WeakEchoes

Sediment in the water or reflectionsfrom plankton may be painted on the

display in low intensity tones

Weakechoes

Appearance of weak echoes

These weak echoes may be erased asfollows1 Press the [MENUESC] key to open

the main menu2 Use or $ to choose SIGNAL

LEVEL from page 1 of the menu3 Press to show the options

window4 Use or $ to choose the degree of

suppression desired Off Low orHigh (highest)

5 Press the [MENUESC] key to closethe menu

To turn off the signal level function choose Off at step 4 and then pressthe [MENUESC] key

113 A-scope DisplayThis display shows echoes at eachtransmission with amplitudes and toneproportional to their intensities on theright 14 of the screen It is useful forestimating the kind of fish school andbottom composition

Note In the dual frequency display the A-scope display is only available withthe high frequency display

323

10

20

30

40

0

A-scope display

Single frequency display

Strong

reflection(bottom)

Weakreflection(fish or noise)

50k 11

Strongreflection(fish)

A-scope display

1 Press the [MENUESC] key to openthe main menu

2 Press or $ to choose A-SCOPEfrom page 1 of the menu

3 Press to show the optionswindow

4 Press

or$

to choose the A-scope presentation type desiredNormal Display shows echoes ateach transmission with amplitudesand tone proportional to theirintensitiesPeak Peak-hold amplitude picture

5 Press the [MENUESC] key to closethe menu

To turn off the A-scope displaychoose Off at step 4 and then press the[MENUESC] key

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 1748

11

114 AlarmsAlarm description

The LS-4100 has six conditions whichgenerate both audio and visual alarms

bottom alarm normal fish alarm bottomlock fish alarm water temperature alarmarrival alarm and speed alarm (Thewater temperature arrival and speedalarms require appropriate sensors)

Bottom alarm The bottom alarm alertsyou when the bottom is within the alarmrange set To activate the bottom alarmthe depth must be displayed

Fish (normal) alarm The fish (normal)alarm tells you when fish are within thepreset alarm range

Fish (bottom lock) alarm The fish(bottom lock) alarm available with thebottom-lock mode sounds when fishare within a certain distance from thebottom Note that the bottom zoom

display must be turned on to use thisalarm

Water temperature alarm The watertemperature alarm alerts when thewater temperature is within (Insidealarm) the alarm range set orunderover (outside alarm) the rangeset

Speed alarm The speed alarm alertsyou when the speed is within (Insidealarm) or underover (Outside alarm)the preset speed

Arrival alarm The arrival alarm alertswhen you are near a waypoint by thedistance set

Activating an alarm

1 Press the [MENUESC] key2 Press or $ to choose ALARM

MENU from page 2 on the menu3 Press the to show the ALARM

menu

ALARM

(12)

[MENU] Exit

ALARM

(22)

[MENU] Exit

BOTTOM On FROM 5ft

RANGE 10ftFISH(Normal) On

FROM 5ft RANGE 10ftFISH(BL) On

FROM 8ft RANGE 10ftFISH LEVEL Medium

TEMPERATURE Inside FROM 724 deg F RANGE 10 deg F

SPEED Off FROM 00kt

RANGE 10kt

ARRIVAL ALRM Off RANGE 0 01 m

Pageno

Gray characters mean alarm is inactive Alarm menu

4 Use or $ to choose an alarm asappropriate

5 Press to show the options menu

Off On

Off InsideOutside

Temp Speed Alarm Types

Fish ArrivalBottom AlarmOnOff

Alarm options6 Use or $ to choose alarm type

Off Alarm off On Alarm onInside Alarm generated whenspeed (or water temperature) iswithin the range setOutside Alarm generated whenspeed (or water temperature) isoutside the range set

7 Press to close the windowFor ARRIVAL ALARM setting skip tostep 12

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 1848

12

8 Press $ to choose FROM9 Press to show the options menu

0ft

Depth

632 deg F

Temperature

10 kt

Speed Depth temperature speed setting

window10 Use or $ to set starting depth

temperature or speed as appropriateFor FISH (BL) the starting depth isthe range from the bottom

11 Press to close the window12 Press $ to choose RANGE13 Press to show the options menu14 Use or $ to set alarm range15 For the bottom alarm temperature

alarm speed alarm or arrivalalarm press the [MENUESC] key tofinish For a fish alarm press toclose the window and then go tostep 16

16 Press $ to choose FISH LEVEL17 Press to show the options menu

Weak

MediumStrong Fish level options

18 Use or $ to choose the echostrength level which will trigger a fishalarm

Weak Weak echoes (weakest toneon level bar)Medium Medium strength echoes

(middle tone on level bar)Strong Strong echoes (darkest toneon level bar)

19 Press the [MENUESC] key twice toclose the menu

Alarm range marker Bottom alarm Fish alarm (normal) Right Fish alarm (bottomlock) Left

Alarm icon

Alarm rangeStartingpoint

Bottom alarm Fish alarm (normal) Fish alarm (BL)

Temperature alarm (deg

C ordeg

F shown) Speed alarm Arrival alarm

Alarm icon (Appropriate icon appears to showwhich alarm has been violated)

How the alarm works

Note To disable an alarm choose Offat step 5 in the above procedure

Silencing the buzzer

The buzzer sounds and the appropriatealarm icon appears and flashes whenan alarm is violated You can silence thebuzzer by pressing any key Howeverthe buzzer will sound whenever thealarm setting is violated

Note The audio and visual alarms arereleased against the last-violated alarmwhen multiple alarms are active

115 WaypointsWaypoints may be used tobull Record the position of an important

echo as waypoint 12 points may beregistered

bull Output a waypoint position to a plotterto mark position on its screen

bull Find range bearing and time-to-go toa location (waypoint)

Note Requires latitude and longitudeposition from a navigator

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 1948

13

Registering a waypoint on thescreen

1 Press the [MARK] key The cursorappears along with waypoint entryinstructions To enter a waypoint tothe current own shiprsquos position go tostep 3Note If there is no position data themessage ldquoNo position datardquo appearsCheck the navigator

50k

496

1100

20

40

60

80

0

Cursor

WAYPOINT ENTRY

( Move) Cursor [MARK] Enter [MENU] Cancel

50 kHz display

2 Press the cursor pad to set thecursor where desired Pictureadvancement is stopped until step 3is completed and the instructionwindow is integrated into the navdisplay

3 Press the [MARK] key again WhenTLL or FURUNO-TLL is selected atTLL OUTPUT on the System menuthe latitude and longitude position atthe cursor is output to the navigator

A vertical line marks location Furtherthe display shows the waypointname (next sequential number) andposition of the location selected atstep 2

WAYPOINTName FREQLat 34 deg 22796NLon 136 deg 07264E

05

[MENU] Exit

rase

Waypoint data display

Note If you attempt to enter 13thwaypoint the message ldquoMemoryfullrdquo appears In this case erase anunwanted waypoint to enable entry

4 To save the waypoint under thename shown go to step 8 or go tostep 5 to change its name

5 Press to open the waypoint nameentry window

WAYPOINTName FREQLat 34 deg 22796NLon 136 deg 07264E

05

[MENU] Exit

01------ ENT

rase

Waypoint window name entry6 Use or to set character $ or

to shift cursor The name mayconsist of 10 alphanumericcharactersNote Character order is 0 1hellip9 - A BhellipZ _ 0hellip

7 Press to choose ENT 8 Press the [MENUESC] key to

register the waypoint

Registering waypoint by LL

1 Press the [MENUESC] key to openthe main menu

2 Use or to choose WAYPOINTLIST from page 2 of the menu

3 Press

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 2048

14

WAYPOINT LIST

01 0102 0303------------------------------------------------------

[MENU] Exit

Waypoint list4 Press or to choose an empty

waypoint and press Press again

NEW WAYPOINTName FREQLat 34 deg 22796NLon 136 deg 07264E

05

[MENU] Exit

04------ ENT

rase

New waypoint window name entry

5 Use or to set character $ or to shift cursor

6 Press to select ENT 7 Enter latitude and longitude similar

to how you entered waypoint name8 Press the [MENUESC] key to

register the waypoint

Editing waypoints Press the [MENUESC] key to open

the main menu

2 Use or to choose WAYPOINTLIST from page 2 of the menu

3 Press to open the waypoints list4 Use or to choose a waypoint

and press 5 Use or to choose the item to

edit (name latitude or longitude)6 Press to open the data entry

window7 Use or to set character $ or

to choose location8 Press to choose ENT 9 Press the [MENUESC] key

Erasing waypoints Press the [MENUESC] key2 Use or to choose WAYPOINT

LIST from page 2 of the menu3 Press to open the waypoints list

4 Use or to choose the waypointto erase and then press Note You cannot erase a waypointwhich is selected as ldquoGOTO WPTrdquo

5 Press to choose ldquoEraserdquo6 Press to open the options window7 Press to select YES to erase the

waypoint The waypoint list appearswith the erased waypoint blank

8 Press the [MENUESC] key twice toclose the menu

Setting destination waypoint

Set a destination waypoint to find rangebearing and time-to-go to that point Youcan see range and bearing to awaypoint Time-to-go is shown on theTime to Go digital display

Press the [MENUESC] key to openthe main menu

2 Use or to choose GOTO WPTfrom page 2 of the menu

3 Press to open the waypoints list

Off01020304----------------------------------------------------------------

Waypoint list

4 Use or to choose a waypoint5 Press the [MENUESC] key to close

the menu

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 2148

15

116 Setting Up Nav DataDisplays

The user may arrange the nav datadisplays as desired

1 Use the [MODE] key to show theNAV DATA-1 or 2 display whicheveryou want to set up

2 Press the [MENUESC] key to closethe mode selection window

3 Press the cursor pad to display theNAV DATA SETUP window

NAV DATA SETUP

Window Selection Data Selection

[MENU] Exit

NAV DATA SETUP window

4 Use or to choose a datadisplay window desired Adashed-line rectangle circumscribesyour selection

5 Use

or$

to choose item todisplay See the below for adescription of the displays

(9)

(1)

(2)

(3)

(4)(5)

(6)(7)(8)

Two-data

display

Three-data

display

Four-data

displayItems displayable in (1) - (3) depth positioncourse range and bearing trip distanceodometer water temperature headingair pressure time-to-go to destination waypointXTE speed wind speed and directiondestination waypoint data compassItems displayable in (4) - (9) depth positionspeed course range and bearing trip distanceodometer water temperature headingair pressure time-to-go to destination waypointXTE wind speed wind direction

= Graphic display

Nav data window and item displayable6 Press the [MENUESC] key to finish

Note You can choose the number ofitems to show in a nav data display withNAV DATA-1 and NAV DATA-2 on theSystem menu

GRAPHIC DISPLAYS

1 05 0 05 1

Wpt 03Rng 019nm Brg 321 deg XTE 000nm Cse 333 deg

DESTINATION WAYPOINT GRAPHIC

XTEscale

BearingCourseDestinationwaypointdirection

DestinationwaypointdataNameRangeXTE

Wind APP

WIND GRAPHIC

60

120

90

030

150180

120

150

90

60

30

120 deg

Speed 103 ms

COMPASS GRAPHIC

SPEED GRAPHIC

172

Speed

20

50

40

60

30

10

01 05 0 05 1

025 nm

XTE

XTE GRAPHIC

kt

Bearing todestinationwaypoint

Course

Brg30 deg

Cse90 deg

N

E

XTE scale

Speed-ometer

Nav data display-1

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 2248

16

DIGITAL DISPLAYS

Course

123 deg

COURSE

Depth

328 ft

DEPTH

Heading TRUEMAG

318 deg

HEADING

Odometer

56 nm

ODOMETER

Position GPS 3D

30 deg 00065N130 deg 00574E

POSITION

Temperature

698 degF

WATER TEMPERATURE

Trip meter

121 nm

TRIP DISTANCE

Time to Go

00 H30 M

TIME-TO-GO

1018 hpa

AIR PRESSURE

Air Pressure

Speed

193 kt

SPEED

Rng

121 nm

RANGE amp BEARING

Brg

140 deg

Wind Speed APP

80 ms

WIND SPEED

Wind Dir APP

138 deg

WIND DIRECTION

APP or TRUE depending on menu setting TRUE or MAG depending

on menu settingamp To destination waypoint

Note 1 Nav data is updated with somedelay

Note 2 When data is lost 120 sec thedisplay shows - - at the locationwhere data is lost

= GPS receiving status (Displays whenconnecting with GP-310B320B and InOutis selected at the Installation menu)NO FIX Position cannot be foundGPS 2D 2D (dimension) GPS position fixGPS 3D 3D GPS fixGPS W2D 2D WAAS position fixGPS W3D 3D WAAS position fix

NAV data display-2

117 Other Menu ItemsThis section describes the menu itemsnot previously mentioned

Page 1

HUE (Picture Color)

Two picture color arrangements areavailable Day and Night Day showsechoes on a white background Nightshows them on a black background

1 Press the [MENUESC] key todisplay the menu

2 Use or $ to choose HUE frompage 1 of the menu

3 Press to show the optionswindow

4 Use or $ to choose Day or Nightas appropriate

5 Press the [MENUESC] key to closethe menu

WHITE LINE

The white line feature displays theleading edge of the bottom echo in

white This is useful for discriminatingbottom fish near the bottom

1 Press the [MENUESC] key todisplay the main menu

2 Use or $ to choose WHITE LINEfrom page 1 of the menu

3 Press to show the optionswindow

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 2348

17

4 Use or to choose Off Tone orMesh as appropriate ldquoMeshrdquo paintsthe white line in darker tone thanldquoTonerdquo

5 Press the [MENUESC] key to closethe menu

526White Line OFF White Line ON (Mesh)

Fish schoolclearly shown

White line

0

20

40

60

80

050k 11

526

0

20

40

60

80

00 050k 11

How white line works

DEEP GAIN

ldquoDeep Gainrdquo compensates forpropagation attenuation of the ultrasonicwaves It does this by equalizing echopresentation so that fish schools of thesame size appear in the same density inboth shallow and deep waters Inaddition it reduces surface noise

Press the [MENUESC] key to openthe main menu

2 Use or to choose DEEP GAINfrom page of the menu

3 Press $ to show to the optionswindow

4 Choose Low Medium or High asappropriate High provides thegreatest degree of gain reductionagainst short range echoes

5 Press the [MENUESC] key to closethe menu

Page 2

TRIP RESET

This item resets trip distance to ldquo0rdquo

Press the [MENUESC] key to openthe main menu

2 Use or to choose TRIPRESET from page 2 of the menu

3 Press $ 4 Press to reset trip distance

Beeps are generated while the tripdistance is being reset

5 Press the [MENUESC] key to closethe menu

Note To reset the odometer to zeroclear the memory

GAIN ADJ 200 GAIN ADJ 50

If the gain is too high or too low or thegain for the low and high frequenciesappears unbalanced you cancompensate it as follows

Press the [MENUESC] key to openthe main menu

2 Use or to choose GAIN ADJ200 or GAIN ADJ 50 from page 2 ofthe menu

3 Press $ to show to the optionswindow

4 Use or to set the amount Thesetting range is ndash50 to +50

5 Press the [MENUESC] key to close

the menu

DRAFT

The default depth display shows thedistance from the transducer If youwould rather show the distance from thesea surface set your shiprsquos draft asfollows

Press the [MENUESC] key to openthe main menu

2 Use or to choose DRAFT frompage 2 of the menu

3 Press $ and then use or to setdraft The setting range is ndash 50 to+500 (meters feet)

4 Press the [MENUESC] key to closethe menu

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 2448

18

2 SYSTEM MENU

The System menu mainly consists ofitems which once set do not requirefrequent adjustment You may displaythis menu by choosing SYSTEM MENUat page 2 of the main menu andpressing

SYSTEM MENULANGUAGE English

DEPTH UNIT ftSPEED UNIT ktWIND UNIT msTEMP UNIT deg F

TEMP GRAPH OffNAV DATA-1 NAV DATA-2

WATER TYPE SaltKEY BEEP OnBATT VOLTAGE Off (13)

[MENU] Exit

SYSTEM MENU

(23)

NAV DISPLAY TempSpeedNMEA0183 Ver 20TLL OUTPUT OffBEARING TrueWIND SPDDIR ApparentTRIP SOURCE Own

TEMP SOURCE OwnSPEED SOURCE OwnTEMP CALIB +00 deg F ( 40)SPEED CALIB +0 ( 50)

Own speed Own temp 100 kt 162 deg F

[MENU] Exit

SYSTEM MENU

(33)

BASIC RANGE1 15 ft

RANGE2 30RANGE3 60RANGE4 120RANGE5 200RANGE6 400RANGE7 600RANGE8 1000 (7-1500)

ZOOM RANGE 15 ft (7-150)BL RANGE 15 ft (10-30)(Bottom Lock)

ZOOM MARKER On

[MENU] Exit

PAGE 3

PAGE 2

PAGE 1

Page no

System menus

21 System MenuPage 1

LANGUAGE The system language isavailable in English several Europeanlanguages and Japanese To changelanguage select language desired andpress the [MENUESC] key

DEPTH UNIT Choose unit of depthmeasurement from meters feet

fathoms passibraza and hiro(Japanese)

SPEED UNIT Choose unit of speedmeasurement from knots miles perhour and kilometers per hour Requiresspeed data

WIND UNIT Choose unit of wind speedmeasurement from ms kt kmh and

mph Requires wind speed data

TEMP UNIT Choose unit oftemperature measurement Celsius orFahrenheit Requires temperature data

TEMP GRAPH Turns the watertemperature display on or off Thetemperature scale range is 16deg (degF) inldquoNarrowrdquo 40deg (degF) in ldquoWiderdquo Requires

water temperature data

m526

0

20

40

60

80

00 050k 11

40

80

70

50

60

TemperatureScale

TemperatureGraph

638 deg F162kt

Water temperature display (wide degF)

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 2548

19

NAV DATA-1 -2 Choose the number ofnavigation data items to display on thenav data displays from two three orfour items Requires appropriate navdata

WATER TYPE Choose the water typewith which to use the LS-4100 fromSalt or Fresh

KEY BEEP Turn key beep on or off

BATT VOLTAGE Turn the batteryvoltage indication (appears at the topright corner on the screen) on or offWhen on it replaces the picture advancespeed indication

Page 2

NAV DISPLAY Choose the nav data todisplay in the nav data window at thetop left-hand corner You may choosefrom temperaturespeedlatitudelongitude range and bearingcourse over ground trip distance or

wind speed Requires appropriate navdata

407 deg F162kt

Nav window

NMEA0183 Choose NMEA version ofnavigator Ver 15 Ver 20 or Ver 30

TLL OUTPUT Enablesdisables outputof TLL (Target Latitude Longitude)position when the [MARK] key isoperated ldquoTLLrdquo outputs latitude andlongitude position ldquoFURUNO-TLLrdquoavailable with connection of navigatorthat can output FURUNO TLL outputslatitude and longitude watertemperature depth etc

BEARING Shiprsquos course and bearingto a waypoint may be displayed in trueor magnetic bearing Magnetic bearingis true bearing plus (or minus) earthrsquosmagnetic deviation Requires bearingdata

WIND SPDDIR Choose the windspeed and direction reference from trueand apparent Requires wind sensorApparen t The direction (in relation toshiprsquos bow) and speed of the wind as itappears to those on board relative tothe speed and direction of the boatcombination of the true wind and thewind caused by the boats movementTrue The speed and direction (inrelation to shiprsquos bow) of the wind felt ormeasured when stationary

TRIP SOURCE Choose speed sourcefor the trip distance indication Own(transducer with speed sensor orseparate speed sensor) or NMEA

TEMP SOURCE Choose source ofwater temperature input Off Own(transducer with water temperaturesensor or separate temperature sensor)or NMEA

SPEED SOURCE Choose source ofspeed input Off Own (transducer withspeed sensor or separate speedsensor) or NMEA Requires speed

data

TEMP CALIB If the water temperaturesensor-generated water temperatureindication is wrong you can correct ithere when ldquoOwnrdquo is selected astemperature source For example if thewater temperature indication is 2deghigher than actual water temperatureenter -2 The setting range is -40degF to

+40degF

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 2648

20

SPEED CALIB If the speedsensor-generated speed indication iswrong you can correct it here whenldquoOwnrdquo is selected as speed source Forexample if the speed indication is 10lower than actual speed enter +10 Thesetting range is ndash50 to +50

Page 3

BASIC RANGE 1 - BASIC RANGE 8 Set range of each of the eight basicranges (Selectable range 7 to 1500 ft)Note 1 All default basic ranges arerestored whenever the depth unit ischanged Therefore change the depth

unit before changing the basic rangesNote 2 A range may not be lower thanthe range preceding it For example ifbasic range 3 is 60 feet basic range 4must be greater than 60 feet

ZOOM RANGE Choose the range tozoom in the marker-zoom andbottom-zoom modes You may choose arange between 7 and 150 feet (2 and 50

meters)

BL RANGE The expansion width forthe bottom-lock display can be chosenfrom 10 to 30 feet (3 and 10 meters)

ZOOM MARKER The zoom markerappears in the normal bottom markerand bottom zoom displays and marksthe area which is expanded in the

bottom marker and bottom zoompictures You can turn the marker on oroff as desired

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 2748

21

3 MAINTENANCETROUBLESHOOTING

W RNING

ELECTRICAL SHOCK HAZARDDo not open the equipment

Only qualified personnel should workinside the equipment

31 Maintenance

Regular maintenance is essential forgood performance Checking the itemslisted in the table below monthly willhelp keep your equipment in goodshape for years to come

Checking

Item Action

Transducercable

Check cable for damage

Power cabletransducercable plug

Check that they are tightlyfastened Refasten ifnecessary

Display unitground

Check for corrosion Cleanif necessary

Power supplyvoltage

Check voltage If out ofrating correct problem

32 Cleaning the DisplayUnit

Dust or dirt on the display unit can beremoved with a soft cloth If desired awater-moistened cloth may be usedUse special care when cleaning theLCD since it scratches easily Do notuse chemical cleaners to clean thedisplay unit - they can remove paint andmarkings

33 TransducerMaintenance

Marine life on the transducer face willresult in a gradual decrease insensitivity Check the transducer facefor cleanliness each time the boat isdry-docked Carefully remove anymarine life with a piece of wood orfine-grade sandpaper

34 Replacing the FuseThe fuse in the power cable protects thesystem from reverse polarity of thepower supply and equipment fault If thefuse blows find the cause beforereplacing it Use only a 1A fuse (FGMB 1A 125V Code No 000-114-805 ) orequivalent Using the wrong fuse will damage the unit and void the warranty

W RNINGUse the proper fuse

Fuse rating is shown on the equipmentUse of a wrong fuse can result in fire anddamage the equipment

35 Battery Voltage Alert A battery icon appears when the batteryvoltage is too high or too low

Battery icon and meaning

Icon Meaning

Voltage is lower than 10 VDC If thevoltage goes below 9 V the equipmentis automatically turned off

Voltage is higher than 165 VDC If thevoltage goes higher than 175 V theequipment is automatically turned off

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 2848

22

36 TroubleshootingThe table below provides basictroubleshooting procedures which theuser may follow to restore normaloperation

Troubleshooting table

Ifhellip Then check hellipneither echo norfixed range scaleappears

bull battery voltagebull fusebull power cable

no echo appearsbut the fixedrange scaleappears

bull if display advancespeed is set to ldquoStoprdquo

bull transducer plugbull

transducer cableecho appears butno zero line

bull if range shifting is setto ldquo0rdquo

sensitivity is low bull gain settingbull if air bubbles or marine

life is clinging to thetransducer face

bull if sediments arepresent in the water

bull if the bottom is too soft

to return an echothere is extremeinterference ornoise

bull if the transducer is tooclose to the engine

bull if the unit is properlygrounded

bull if other echo soundersof the same frequencyas own are beingoperated nearby

the speedwatertemperaturereadout isunrealistic or notpresent

bull sensor plug

the positionreadout isunrealistic or notpresent

bull the connectionbetween sounder andnavigator

bull navigator

37 DiagnosticsIf you feel your unit is not workingproperly conduct the diagnostic test tofind the problem If you cannot restorenormal operation contact your dealerfor advice

1 Turn on the power while pressing the[MENUESC] key Continue pressingthe [MENUESC] key until theInstallation menu appears

SIMULATION On

TEST LCD PATTERN MEMORY CLEAR

NMEA PORT InOutNMEA MIX Off GPS WAAS Off

SET BOTTOM LEVEL

Installation Menu

= Setting cannot be changed whenNMEA PORT setting is InIn

Installation menu2 Press to choose TEST3 Press to start the test

ROM OKRAM OKNMEA

Temp 682 deg F

Speed 100kmh

Power 124 VBody 39 deg C

Program No 0252318-01Push [MENU] 3 times to exit

Level bar

= Program version no

Water

TemperatureSpeedBattery VoltageTemperatureinside displayunit(Unit fixed atdeg C)

GPS (48502180) OK

Only when GP-310B is connected(For GP-320B 4850238)

Test display

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 2948

23

4 The ROM RAM and NMEA port arechecked with the results shown asOK or NG (No Good) For any NGrequest service (A special connectoris required to test the NMEA portNothing appears if no connector isconnected)

5 The squares at the right side of thetest display are for checking thecontrols Press each key and thearrows on the Cursor Pad one byone A controlrsquos correspondingon-screen square ldquolightsrdquo in black ifthe control is normal

6 To return to the Installation menupress the [MENUESC] key threetimes

7 To restore normal operation turn offthe power and turn it on again

38 Test PatternThis feature tests for proper display oftones

1 On the Installation menu press $ tochoose LCD PATTERN

2 Press to start the test The entirescreen is black

3 Press again and the screen turnswhite

4 Press again and the screenshows a four-toned display

5 Press again to return to theInstallation menu

6 To restore normal operation turn offthe power and then it on again

WHITE FOUR-TONE BLACK

Test patterns

39 Memory ClearThe memory can be cleared to startafresh with default menu settings

1 At the installation menu press $ tochoose MEMORY CLEAR

2 Press to open the optionswindow

YES NO

Clear memory display

3 Press to clear the memory Beepsare generated while the memory isbeing cleared

4 To restore normal operation turn offthe power and then turn it on again

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3048

24

4 INSTALLATION

41 Display UnitMounting considerations

The display unit can be installed on adesktop on the bulkhead or flushmounted in a panel When choosing alocation keep the following in mind

bull Keep the display unit out of directsunlight

bull The temperature and humidity should

be moderate and stablebull Locate the unit away from exhaust

pipes and ventsbull The mounting location should be well

ventilatedbull Mount the unit where shock and

vibration are minimalbull For maintenance and checking

purposes leave sufficient space atthe sides and rear of the unit andleave slack in cables

bull A magnetic compass will be affected ifthe display unit is placed too close toit Observe the following compasssafe distances to prevent disturbanceto the magnetic compassStandard compass 04 metersSteering compass 03 meters

Desktop overhead mounting1 Fix the bracket to a desktop or the

overhead with tapping screws(supplied)

2 Loosely screw knobs into the displayunit

3 Set the display unit to the bracketand then tighten the knobs

Mounting on the bulkhead Flush

mounting in a panelSee the instructions on the bulkhead orflush mounting template (supplied)

42 Thru-hull MountTransducer

Transducer mounting location

The thru-hull mount transducer

(520-5PSD 520-5MSD) provides thebest performance of all since thetransducer protrudes from the hull andthe effect of air bubbles and turbulencenear the hull skin is reduced When theboat has a keel the transducer shouldbe at least 30 cm away from it Typicalthru-hull mountings are shown in thefigure on the next page

The performance of this sounder isdirectly related to the mounting locationof the transducer especially forhigh-speed cruising The installationshould be planned in advance keepingthe standard cable length (8 m) and thefollowing factors in mindbull Air bubbles and turbulence caused by

movement of the boat seriouslydegrade the sounding capability of thetransducer The transducer shouldtherefore be located in a positionwhere water flow is the smoothestNoise from the propellers alsoadversely affects performance andthe transducer should not be mountednearby The lifting strakes arenotorious for creating acoustic noiseand these must be avoided bykeeping the transducer inboard ofthem

bull The transducer must always remain

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3148

25

submerged even when the boat isrolling pitching or up on a plane athigh speed

bull A practical choice would besomewhere between 13 and 12 of

the boatrsquos length from the stern Forplaning hulls a practical location isgenerally rather far astern so that thetransducer is always in waterregardless of the planing attitude

28

22

120

68

30

520-5PSD

24

120

68

87520-5MSD

Unit mm

Thru-hull mount transducer dimensions

Acceptable transducer mounting

locations

Position 12 to 13 of the hull from stern

15 to 30 cm off center line (inside first lifting strakes)

Within the wetted bottom area

Deadrise angle within 15 deg

HIGH SPEED-V HULL

Suitable transducer mounting locations

Typical thru-hull mounttransducer installations

FairingBlock

Flat Washer

Rubber Washer

Hull

Deep-V Hull

Hull

Flat Washer

Rubber Washer

Flat Hull

CorkWasher

Typical thru-hull mounttransducer installations

Procedure for installing thethru-hull mount transducer

1 With the boat hauled out of the watermark the location chosen formounting the transducer on thebottom of the hull

2 If the hull is not level within 15deg inany direction fairing blocks madeout of teak should be used betweenthe transducer and hull both insideand outside to keep the transducerface parallel with the water lineFabricate the fairing block as shownbelow and make the entire surfaceas smooth as possible to provide anundisturbed flow of water around thetransducer The fairing block shouldbe smaller than the transducer itselfto provide a channel to divert

turbulent water around the sides ofthe transducer rather than over itsface

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3248

26

BOWHole for stuffing tube

Upper Half

Lower Half

Saw along slopeof hull Construction of fairing block

3 Drill a hole just large enough to passthe threaded stuffing tube of thetransducer through the hull makingsure it is drilled vertically

4 Apply a sufficient amount of highquality caulking compound to the topsurface of the transducer around thethreads of the stuffing tube andinside the mounting hole (and fairingblocks if used) to ensure watertightmounting

5 Mount the transducer and fairingblocks and tighten the locking nutsBe sure that the transducer is

properly oriented and its workingface is parallel to the waterline

Note Do not over-stress the stuffingtube and locking nuts through excessivetightening since the wood block willswell when the boat is placed in thewater It is suggested that the nut betightened lightly at installation andretightened several days after the boat

has been launched

Transducer preparation

Before putting the boat in water wipethe face of the transducer thoroughlywith a detergent liquid soap This willlessen the time necessary for thetransducer to have good contact withthe water Otherwise the time requiredfor complete ldquosaturationrdquo ill belengthened and performance will bereduced

DO NOT paint the transducerPerformance will be affected

43 Transom MountTransducer

The transom mount transducer is verycommonly employed usually onrelatively small IO or outboard boatsDo not use this method on an inboardmotor boat because turbulence iscreated by the propeller ahead of thetransducer

520-5PWD

There are two methods of installationflush with hull (for flat hulls) andprojecting from hull (for deep V-hulls)

Flat Hull

D

Dgt50 cm

Deep-VHull

520-5PWD mounting locations

Installing the 520-5PWD on a flat hull

A suitable mounting location is at least50 cm away from the engine and wherethe water flow is smooth

1 Drill four pilot holes in the mountinglocation

2 Attach the transducer to the bracketwith 5 x 20 tapping screws(supplied)

3 Adjust the transducer position so thetransducer faces right to the bottom

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3348

27

Note If necessary to improve waterflow and minimize air bubblesstaying on the transducer faceincline the transducer about 5deg at therear This may require a certainamount of experimentation for finetuning at high cruising speeds

4 Fill the gap between the wedge frontof the transducer and transom withepoxy material to eliminate any airspaces

No1 M5 x 14

5 x 20

5 x 20

2 to 5

Tape

Hull

Transom mount transducer

mounting flush with hull

Installing the transom mounttransducer on a deep-V hull

This method is employed on deep-Vhulls and provides good performancebecause the effects of air bubbles areminimal Install the transducer parallelwith water surface not flush with hull Ifthe boat is placed on a trailer care mustbe taken not to damage the transducerwhen the boat is hauled out of the waterand put on the trailer

5 x 20

No 2M5 x 14

5 x 20

Transom mount transducermounted projecting from hull

525-5PWD

Choose the installation methoddepending on the rise angle of the hull

Transom

Transom

Stripe over 10

Parallel with hull

Mount at the stripe

less than 10

525-5PWD mounting location

Installing the 525-5PWD

Referring to ldquoInstalling the 520-5PWDrdquoin the left column for mounting of thebracket and the figure shown on the topof next page install the 525-5PWD tothe transom

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3448

28

2 to 5

Transducer

Bracket

Hull

Epoxy material

525-5PWD mounting

44 Inside-hullTransducer

The thru-hull mount transducer(520-5PSD 520-5MSD) may also beinstalled inside the hull following theprocedure below

Necessary tools

You will need the following toolsbull Sandpaper (100)bull Silicone sealantbull Silicone grease

Remarks on installationbull Turn off the engine and anchor the

boat while installing the equipmentbull Install the transducer in the engine

room

Choosing the mounting locationbull The mounting location should be

where the hull is of single-hullthickness and is void of air or flotationmaterials other than solid fiberglassbetween the transducer face and thewater

bull Do not place the transducer over hullstruts or ribs which run under the hull

bull Avoid a location where the risingangle of the hull exceeds 15deg tominimize the effect of the boatrsquosrolling

bull You will finalize the mounting location

through some trial and error Theprocedure for this is shown later

50 cm

50 cm15 cm15 cm

13

12

Transducer mountinglocation

Centerline

Inside-hull transducer mounting location

Attaching the transducer1 Clean the transducer face to remove

any foreign material Lightly roughenthe transducer face with 100sandpaper Also roughen the insideof the hull where the transducer is tobe mounted

2 Clean the transducer face again3 Warm the silicone sealant to 40degC

before usage to soften it Coat thetransducer face and mountinglocation with silicone sealant

Transducer

SiliconeSealant

Coating transducer facewith silicone sealant

4 Press the transducer firmly down onthe hull and gently twist it back andforth to remove any air which may betrapped in the silicone sealant

Checking the installation

1 Connect the battery to the display

unit2 Turn on the display unit

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3548

29

3 Press the [MODE] key to chooseSINGLE FREQ

4 Choose 50 kHz or 200 kHz and thenpress the [MENUESC] key to closethe mode menu

5 Press the [MENU] to show the mainmenu and then press to select

Auto mode6 Press to choose Off7 Press the [MENUESC] key8 Press the [GAIN] key to set the gain

to ldquo5rdquo and then press the[MENUESC] key

9 Press the [RANGE] key to set therange to 10 meters (feet) and thenpress the [MENUESC] key

10 If the bottom is displayed in darkgray and the depth indicationappears the mounting location issuitable Go to ldquoFinal preparationrdquo

11 If the bottom is not displayed in darkgray tone the mounting location maybe unsuitable Do the followinga) Press the [POWERBRILL] key to

turn off the powerb) Gently dismount the transducer

with a piece of woodc) Reattach the transducer

elsewhere as shown in ldquoAttachingthe transducerrdquo

d) Check the installation again

Final preparation

Support the transducer with a piece ofwood to keep it in place while it is drying

Let the transducer dry 24-72 hours

45 Optional Triducer525ST-MSD

The optional triducer 525ST-MSD isdesigned for thru-hull mounting Forhow to install this transducer seeparagraph 42

φ79 mm

33 mm200-12 UNthreads

φ51 mm

27 mm

7 mm

140 mm Triducer 525ST-MSD

525ST-PWD

The Transom Mount Transducer orTRIDUCER reg Multisensor with IntegralRelease Bracket 525ST-PWD ismanufactured by AIRMAR Co Theseinstructions are also included with the

sensor

Pre-test for speed and temperature

Connect the sensor to the instrumentand spin the paddlewheel Check for aspeed reading and the approximate airtemperature If there is no readingreturn the sensor to your place ofpurchase

Tools and materials needed

ScissorsMasking tapeSafety gogglesDust maskElectric drillDrill bit for

Bracket holes 4mm 23 or 964rdquoFiberglass hull chamfer bit(preferred)6mm or 14rdquo

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3648

30

Transom hole 19mm or 34rdquo(optional)

Cable clamp holes 3mm or 18rdquoScrewdriversStraight edgeMarine sealantPencilZip-tiesWater-based antifouling paint(mandatory in salt water )

Mounting location

To ensure the best performance thesensor must be submerged inaeration-free and turbulence-free water

Mount the sensor close to the centerlineof the boat On slower heavierdisplacement hulls positioning it fartherfrom the centerline is acceptable

Allow adequate space above thebracket for it to release and rotate thesensor upward

Height

Height withoutspeed sensor191mm (7-12)Height withspeed sensor213mm (8-12)

Height required at mounting location

Note 1 Do not mount the sensor in anarea of turbulence or bubbles nearwater intake or discharge openingsbehind strakes struts fittings or hull

irregularities behind eroding paint (anindication of turbulence)Note 2 Avoid mounting the sensorwhere the boat may be supportedduring trailering launching hauling andstorageNote 3 For single drive boat mounton the starboard side at least 75 mm(3rdquo) beyond the swing radius of thepropeller

75 mm(3)

minimum beyondswing radius

Mounting location on single drive boat

Note 4 For twin drive boat mountbetween the drives

Installation of bracket

1 Cut out the installation template

shown on the next page2 At the selected location position thetemplate so the arrow at the bottomis aligned with the bottom edge ofthe transom Being sure the templateis parallel to the waterline tape it inplace

Align template vertically

Deadrise angle

Slope of hullparallel towaterline

Align template arrow withbottom edge of transom

Positioning the template

Warning Always wear safetygoggles and a dust mask

3 Using a 4 mm 23 or 964rdquo bit drillthree holes 22 mm (78rdquo) deepat the locations indicated To preventdrilling too deeply wrap maskingtape around the bit 22 mm (78rdquo)from the pointFiberglass hull Minimize surfacecracking by chamfering the gelcoatIf a chamfer bit or countersink bit is

not available start drilling with a6mm or 14rdquo bit to a depth of 1 mm(116rdquo)

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3748

31

4 If you know your transom angle the

bracket is designed for a standard13deg transom angle11deg-18deg angle No shim is requiredSkip to step 3 in ldquoAdjustingrdquoOther angles The shim is requiredSkip to step 2 of ldquoAdjustingrdquoIf you do not know the transom angletemporarily attach the bracket andsensor to the transom to determine ifthe plastic shim is needed

5 Using the two 10 x 1-14rdquo

self-tapping screws temporarilyscrew the bracket to the hull DONOT tighten the screws completelyat this time Follow the step 1-4 inldquoAttaching the Sensor to the Bracketrdquobefore proceeding with ldquoAdjustingrdquo

Installation templatefor starboard side of boat

Drill at locations labeled Bfor the following transom angles

16 deg through 22 deg

Drill at locations labeled Afor the following transom angles

2 deg through 15 deg

Align arrow with bottom of transom

AA A

BB B

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3848

32

Adjusting

1 Using a straight edge sight theunderside of the sensor relative tothe underside of the hull The sternof the sensor should be 1-3 mm

(116-18rdquo) below the bow of thesensor or parallel to the bottom ofthe hull

11 deg transom angleNO SHIM

12-18 deg transom angleNO SHIM

2 deg -10 deg transom

angle

19 deg -22 deg transom

angleshim withtaper up

shim withtaper down

parallelparallel parallel

slightangle

angletoo steep

anglereversed

YES NONO

YES YESYES

Sensor position and transom angle

Note Do not position the bow of thesensor lower than the stern becauseaeration will occur

2 To adjust the sensorrsquos angle relativeto the hull use the tapered plasticshim provided If the bracket hasbeen temporarily fastened to thetransom remove it Key the shim in

place on the back of the bracket2deg-10deg transom angle (steppedtransom and jet boats) Positionthe shim with the tapered end down19deg-22deg transom angle (smallaluminum and fiberglass boats) Position the shim with the taperedend up

3 If the bracket has been temporarilyfastened to the transom remove it

Apply a marine sealant to thethreads of the two 10 x 1-14rdquo self

tapping screws to prevent waterseeping into the transom Screw thebracket to the hull Do not tighten thescrews completely at this time

4 Repeat step 1 to ensure that theangle of the sensor is correctNote Do not position the sensorfarther into the water than necessaryto avoid increasing drag spray andwater noise and reducing boatspeed

5 Using the vertical adjustment spaceon the bracket slots slide the sensorup or down to provide a projection of3 mm (18rdquo) Tighten the screws

Cable cover

Cableclamp

50 mm (2)

Hull projection 3 mm (18)

Vertical adjustment and cable routing

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3948

33

Attaching the sensor to the bracket

1 If the retaining cover near the top ofthe bracket is closed open it bydepressing the latch and rotating thecover downward

Step 1 Step 2

Latch

Retainingcover

Pivotarm (2)

Slot (2)

Step 4

Step 3

Attaching the sensor to the bracket

2 Insert the sensorrsquos pivot arms intothe slots near the top of the bracket

3 Maintain pressure until the pivotarms click into place

4 Rotate the sensor downward until thebottom snaps into the bracket

5 Close the retaining cover to preventthe accidental release of the sensorwhen the boat is underway

Cable routing

Route the sensor cable over thetransom through a drain hole orthorough a new hole drilled in thetransom above the waterline

Never cut the cable or remote the

connector this will void the warranty Always wear safety goggles and a dustmask

1 If a hole must be drilled choose alocation well above the waterlineCheck for obstructions such as trimtabs pumps or wiring inside the hullMark the location with a pencil Drilla hole through the transom using a19 mm or 34rdquo bit (to accommodatethe connector)

2 Route the cable over or through thetransom

3 On the outside of the hull secure thecable against the transom using thecable clamps Position a cable clamp50 mm(2rdquo) above the bracket andmark the mounting hole with apencil

4 Position the second cable clamphalfway between the first clamp andthe cable hole Mark this mountinghole

5 If a hole has been drilled in thetransom open the appropriate slot inthe transom cable cover Position thecover over the cable where it entersthe hull Mark the two mounting

holes6 At each of the marked locations usea 3 mm or 18rdquo bit to drill a hole 10mm (38rdquo) deep The prevent drillingtoo deeply wrap masking tapearound the bit 10 mm (38rdquo) from thepoint

7 Apply marine sealant to the threadsof the 6 x 12rdquo self-tapping screw toprevent water from seeping into the

transom If you have drilled a holethrough the transom apply marinesealant to the space around thecable where it passes through thetransom

8 Position the two cable clamps andfasten them in place If used pushthe cable cover over the cable andscrew it in place

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4048

34

9 Route the cable to the instrumentbeing careful not to tear the cable

jacket when passing it though thebulkhead(s) and other parts of theboat To reduce electricalinterference separate the sensorcable from other electrical wiring andldquonoiserdquo sources Coil any excesscable and secure it in place withzip-ties to prevent damage

46 Optional WaterTemperatureSpeedSensor

Water temperaturespeed sensorST-02MSB and ST-02PSB which aredesigned for thru-hull mounting areoptionally available Install them asshown below

Mounting considerations

Choose a suitable mounting locationconsidering the followingbull Choose a place free from vibrationbull Choose a mid-boat flat position The

sensor does not have to be installedperfectly perpendicular The sensormust not be damaged in dry-dockingoperation

bull Choose a place apart from equipmentgenerating heat

bull Choose a place in the forwarddirection viewing from the drain holeto allow for circulation of coolingwater

1 Dry-dock the boat2 Make a hole of approx 51 mm

diameter in the mounting location3 Unfasten locknut and remove the

sensor section4 Apply high-grade sealant to the

flange of the sensor5 Pass the sensor casing through thehole

6 Face the notch on the sensor towardboatrsquos bow and tighten the flange

7 Set the sensor section to the sensorcasing and tighten the locknut

8 Launch the boat and check for waterleakage around the sensor

Locknut

Face notchtoward bow

Flange Nut

Coat withsilicone sealant Brim

φ 77

51

123

Water temperaturespeed sensor

ST-02MSB ST-02PSB

47 Wiring

Connect the LS-4100 powerdata cableassy MJ-A7SPF0005-020 (2 msupplied) to the POWER and thetransducer cable to the XDR connectorRefer to the interconnection diagram toconnect cables Leave slack in cables tofacilitate checking and maintenance

Note The fuse holder contains a springwhich fixes the fuse To preventdetachment of the spring which wouldcause loss of power tie the line asshown below

+ line (red)

Fuse holder

Cable tie How to fix fuse holder

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4148

35

Establishing the ground

The ground wire (125 sq or more localsupply) should be as short as possible

The signal line ground is isolated from

the chassis ground however the powerline is not insulated Therefore whenconnecting eternal equipment havingpositive ground do not ground thesignal line to the chassis If excessivenoise shows on the screen the groundmay be inadequate In this case attacha steel plate measuring 20 cm by 30 cmon the outside of the hull to provide aground point Connect the ground wire

there Use a ldquoclosedrdquo type lug ( ) tomake the connection at the display unitDo not use an ldquoopenrdquo type lug ( )

Optional equipment

POWER connector

The power supply port is commonlyused for connection of externalequipment such as a GPS receiver orwind indicator Use the powerdatacable MJ-A7SPF0005-020 (supplied) forconnection referring the figure shown inthe right column

Connector Color Remarks

1 TD-A WHT2 TD-B BLU

IEC-61162-1NMEA0183

3 RD-A YEL

4 RD-B GRN

IEC-61162-1

NMEA01835 + RED

6 - BLKPower input12 VDC

7 FG

Water tempspeed sensor

Connect the optional water tempspeedsensor to the XDR connector with theoptional converter connector (Type02S4147) as shown below

Tape connectors withvulcaninzing tapeand then vinyl tapeto waterproof themBind tape ends withcable ties to preventtape from unraveling

Connect to XDR portat rear of display unit

MJ-A10SPF

MJ-A10SRMDMJ-A6SRMD

Fromtransducer

Fromsensor

Connection of converterconnector 02S4147

48 IEC 61162-1 DataSentences

The tables below show the datasentences which can be input to andoutput from the LS-4100 Thetransmission speed for both input andoutput is 4800 bps Data is output attwo-second intervals

Input data sentences

Sentence Meaning

BWC Bearing and distance towaypoint

GGA Global positioning system(GPS) fix data

GLL Geographic position -latitudelongitude

HDG Heading deviation and variationHDT Heading true

MDA Atmospheric pressure

MTW Water temperature

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4248

36

Input data sentences (conrsquot)

Sentence MeaningMWV Wind speed and

angleRMA Recommended

minimum specificLORAN-C dataRMB Recommended

minimum navigationinformation

RMC Recommendedminimum specificGPSTRANSIT data

VHW Water speed andheading

VTG Course over groundand ground speedXTE Cross track error

Output data sentences

Sentence MeaningDBT (Ver 15) Depth below

transducerDPT (Ver 20 Ver30)

Depth

MTW Water temperatureRMB (Ver 20) Recommended

minimumnavigationinformation

VHW Water speed andheading

TLL Target positionoutput by [MARK]key

= Available with connection of optionalsensorsnavaid

49 Installation MenuThe installation menu mainly containsitems which are set at installation

1 Turn on the power while pressing the[MENUESC] key Continue pressing

the [MENUESC] key until theInstallation menu appears

SIMULATION On

TEST LCD PATTERN MEMORY CLEAR

NMEA PORT InOutNMEA MIX OffGPS WAAS Off

SET BOTTOM LEVEL

Installation Menu

= Setting cannot be changed whenNMEA PORT setting is InIn

Installation menu

SIMULATION The simulation modeprovides without connection of thetransducer simulated operation of theequipment using internally generatedechoes All controls are operative Themessage ldquoSIMrdquo appears at the top rightcorner on the screen when thesimulation mode is active

1 At the installation menu press toopen the simulation mode optionswindow

2 Press to choose ldquoOnrdquo to turn onthe simulation mode

3 Press the [POWERBRILL] keyabout three seconds to turn off thepower

4 Press the [POWERBRILL] key toturn on the power ldquoSIMrdquo appears atthe top right corner of the display

5 To turn off the simulation modeselect Off at step 2

NMEA po r t se tup(NMEA PO RT NMEA M IX)

The POWER port can function as aninput port or inputoutput port Changethe setting to ldquoInInrdquo when connectingGP-310B320B and a wind sensor

When connecting the GP-310B320Band a wind sensor first turn on ldquoGPS

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4348

37

WAASrdquo (in the Installation menu) andthen select ldquoInInrdquo as the NMEA portsetting

1 Turn on the power while pressingand holding down the [MENUESC]key Continue pressing the[MENUESC] key until theInstallation menu appears

2 Choose NMEA PORT and thenpress to display the NMEA portoptions window

3 Use or to choose InOut orInIn as appropriate

InOut Input and Output (default

setting)InIn Input only (Available withconnection of the GP-310B320Band a wind sensor)

4 Press choose NMEA MIX andthen press to display the NMEAMIX options window

5 Use or to choose Off or OnChoose On to output input data

Off Outputs the data sentences ofLS-4100 only

On Outputs the data sentences ofLS-4100 and sentences which areinput from other equipment

6 To restore normal operation turn offthe power and then turn it on again

GPS WAAS Chooses how to use theWAAS signal when connecting with a

WAAS receiver for example GP-320B

Note WAAS is currently in thedevelopmental phase During thedevelopmental phase the reliability andavailability of the WAAS signal cannotbe guaranteed Therefore any positiondata should be verified against othersources to confirm reliability

1 Display the Installation menu2 Choose GPS WAAS and then press

to open the GPS WAAS options

window

Off

WAAS options window3 Press or to choose ldquoWAAS-02rdquo

(test signal) When the systembecomes operational (in 2003) setto ldquo00rdquo (regular WAAS signal)

4 Turn off the power

BOTTOM LEVEL If the depthindication is unstable in automaticoperation or the bottom echo cannot bedisplayed in the darkest gray tone byadjusting the gain controls in manualoperation you may adjust the bottomecho level detection circuit for both 50kHz and 200 kHz to stabilize theindication Generally lower the bottomlevel for inner hull installation where thereceive level is too low If the bottomlevel is too low it may be difficult todiscriminate fish from the bottomresulting in unstable depth indication

And if the bottom level is too high thedepth indication may not appear

1 At the installation menu press tochoose SET BOTTOM LEVEL andthen press Several seconds laterthe following display appears

Bottom level +0 (200k -100 - +100 ) +0 ( 50k -100 - +100 )

Bottom level display

2 While observing the picture use or to set 200 kHz or to set50 kHz Set up for optimum picture

3 To restore normal operation turn offthe power and then it on again

Note The mode must be other thanldquoNAV DATArdquo to show the bottom leveldisplay

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4448

SP - 1 E2371S01C

SPECIFICATIONS OF ECHO SOUNDER LS-4100

1 GENERAL11 TX Frequency 50 kHz or 200 kHz 50200 kHz dual transmitting selectable12 Transmit Method Single or dual transmitting

13 Output Power 300 Wrms14 TX Rate Max 500 pulsemin15 Pulse-length 01 to 08 ms

2 DISPLAY UNIT21 Display system 5-inch monochrome LCD 76 mm (W) x 100 mm (H) 240 x 320 dots22 Display Mode Single frequency (highlow freq) Dual-frequency Zoom Nav data-12

Marker zoom Bottom zoom Bottom-lock23 Display Range

Range SettingRange

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

Display

rangeMeter 5 10 20 40 80 150 200 300 2-500

Feet 15 30 60 120 200 400 600 1000 7-1500

Fathoms 3 5 10 20 40 80 100 150 1-250

PassiBraza 3 5 10 30 50 100 150 200 1-300

24 Range Shift 0-500 m 0-1500 ft 0-250 fa 0-300 pb25 Expansion Range Bottom-lock expansion 3 to 10 m

Sectional expansion 2 to 50 m26 Display Advance Speed 8 steps (LinesTX Freeze 1161814121121 41)

3 INTERFACE31 Input data sentences IEC61162-1NMEA0183 Ver 152030

GGA RMA RMB RMC BWC GLL HDT HDG VTG VHW MTWMWV MDA XTE

32 Output data sentences IEC61162-1NMEA0183 Ver 152030 interval 2 sMTW VHW DBT DPT RMB TLL by key operating External data required

4 POWER SUPPLY41 Display Unit 12 VDC 05 A

5 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITION51 Ambient Temperature Display unit -15degC to +55degC52 Relative Humidity 93 or less at 40degC53 Waterproof IPX5

6 COATING COLOR61 Display Unit N30

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4548

M a r

4

0 3

D-1

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4648

Mar 4 03

Mar 4 03

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4748

M a r

3

0 3

S-1

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4848

FURUNO Authorized DistributorDealer FURUNO Authorized DistributorDealer

9-52 Ashihara-cho9-52 Ashihara-choNishinomiya 662-8580 JAPANNishinomiya 662-8580 JAPAN

Telephone Telephone 0798-65-21110798-65-2111FaxFax 0798-65-42000798-65-4200

FIRST EDITION FIRST EDITION MARMAR 20032003Printed in JapanPrinted in Japan All rights reserved All rights reserved

B1B1 SEPSEP 09 200509 2005

Pub NoPub No OME-23710OME-23710 00014698000000146980000001469800000014698000(( DAMIDAMI )) LS-4100LS-4100

0 0 0 1 4 6 9 8 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 4 6 9 8 0 0 0

Page 13: OME23710B_1_LS4100

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 1348

7

1000ft 600ft 400ft 200ft 120ft 60ft 30ft 15ft

Basic ranges (default)3 Press the [MENUESC] key to close

the window

Shifting the range

The basic range may be shifted up ordown in the manual mode as follows

Display

Window can beshifted up anddown to selectthe depth

Range and display shift concept

1 Press the [MENUESC] key to openthe main menu

2 Choose SHIFT from page 1 of themenu

3 Press to open the shift optionswindow

0ft

Shift window

4 Use or $ to choose amount ofshift desired

5 Press the [MENUESC] key to closethe window

Note The picture may not be displayedif the amount of shift is greater thanactual depth

Adjusting the gain

The [GAIN] key adjusts the sensitivity ofthe receiver Generally use a highergain setting for greater depths and alower setting for shallower waters

Use the proper gain setting

Incorrect gain may produce wrong depthindication possibly resulting in a dangeroussituation

UTION

Gain too high Gain proper Gain too low Examples of proper and improper gain

1 Press the [GAIN] key and the displayshown below appears

Min Max

50k 3

200k 2

GAIN

Gain adjustment window

2 When using the dual frequencydisplay press or $ to choosefrequency

3 Press the [GAIN] key to set (Youmay also use or ) Adjust so thata slight amount of noise remains onthe screen

4 Press the [MENUESC] key to closethe gain adjustment window

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 1448

8

18 Measuring DepthThe VRM (Variable Range Marker)functions to measure the depth to fishschools etc1 Press or $ to place the VRM

on the object which you wish tomeasure range

2 Read the VRM depth just abovethe VRM

0

20

40

60

80496

398

VRM

VRM depth

50k 11

How to measure depth with the VRM

19 Choosing PictureAdvance Speed

The picture advance speed determineshow quickly the vertical scan lines runacross the screen When choosing apicture advance speed keep in mindthat a fast advance speed will expandthe size of the fish school horizontallyon the screen and a slow advancespeed will contract it Note that thepicture is not refreshed when pictureadvancement is stopped Thereforeuse caution when steering the vesselunder this condition

Fast Slow Picture and picture advancement speed

1 Press the [MENUESC] key to openthe main menu

2 Choose PIC ADVANCE from page 1of the menu

3 Press to show the optionswindow

Stop116 18 14 12 11 21 41

(

)

Fast

Slow

Picture advance options window

4 Use or $ to choose pictureadvance speed desired Thefractions in the options windowdenote the number of scan linesproduced per transmission Forexample 18 means one scan line isproduced every 8 transmissionsldquoStoprdquo freezes the display and it isconvenient for taking a photo

The picture is not refreshed whenpicture advancement is stopped

Maneuvering the vessel in this conditionmay result in a dangerous situation

UTION

5 Press the [MENUESC] key to closethe menu

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 1548

9

110 SuppressingInterference

Interference from other acousticequipment operating nearby or other

electronic equipment on your boat mayshow itself on the display as shown inthe figure belowTo suppress interference do thefollowing1 Press the [MENUESC] key to open

the main menu2 Use or $ to choose NOISE LIMIT

from page 1 of the menu3 Press to show the options

window4 Use or $ to choose the degree ofsuppression desired Off LowMedium or High (highest)

5 Press the [MENUESC] key to closethe menu

Interference fromother sounder

Electrical interference

Forms of interference

Turn the noise limiter off when nointerference exists otherwise weakechoes may be missed

111 Suppressing LowLevel Noise

Low intensity ldquospecklesrdquo may appearover most of screen This is mainly due

to sediment in the water or noise Thesecan be suppressed by adjustingCLUTTER on the menu When theautomatic mode is on clutter isautomatically rejected To suppress lowlevel noise in manual sounder operationdo the following1 Press the [MENUESC] key to open

the main menu2 Use or $ to choose CLUTTER

from page 1 of the menu3 Press to show the optionswindow

4 Use or $ to choose the degree ofsuppression desired 1 2 3 4 5 or6 The higher the number the greaterthe suppression

5 Press the [MENUESC] key to closethe menu

To turn off low-level noisesuppression choose Off at step 4 andthen press the [MENUESC] key

Clutter appearance

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 1648

10

112 Erasing WeakEchoes

Sediment in the water or reflectionsfrom plankton may be painted on the

display in low intensity tones

Weakechoes

Appearance of weak echoes

These weak echoes may be erased asfollows1 Press the [MENUESC] key to open

the main menu2 Use or $ to choose SIGNAL

LEVEL from page 1 of the menu3 Press to show the options

window4 Use or $ to choose the degree of

suppression desired Off Low orHigh (highest)

5 Press the [MENUESC] key to closethe menu

To turn off the signal level function choose Off at step 4 and then pressthe [MENUESC] key

113 A-scope DisplayThis display shows echoes at eachtransmission with amplitudes and toneproportional to their intensities on theright 14 of the screen It is useful forestimating the kind of fish school andbottom composition

Note In the dual frequency display the A-scope display is only available withthe high frequency display

323

10

20

30

40

0

A-scope display

Single frequency display

Strong

reflection(bottom)

Weakreflection(fish or noise)

50k 11

Strongreflection(fish)

A-scope display

1 Press the [MENUESC] key to openthe main menu

2 Press or $ to choose A-SCOPEfrom page 1 of the menu

3 Press to show the optionswindow

4 Press

or$

to choose the A-scope presentation type desiredNormal Display shows echoes ateach transmission with amplitudesand tone proportional to theirintensitiesPeak Peak-hold amplitude picture

5 Press the [MENUESC] key to closethe menu

To turn off the A-scope displaychoose Off at step 4 and then press the[MENUESC] key

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 1748

11

114 AlarmsAlarm description

The LS-4100 has six conditions whichgenerate both audio and visual alarms

bottom alarm normal fish alarm bottomlock fish alarm water temperature alarmarrival alarm and speed alarm (Thewater temperature arrival and speedalarms require appropriate sensors)

Bottom alarm The bottom alarm alertsyou when the bottom is within the alarmrange set To activate the bottom alarmthe depth must be displayed

Fish (normal) alarm The fish (normal)alarm tells you when fish are within thepreset alarm range

Fish (bottom lock) alarm The fish(bottom lock) alarm available with thebottom-lock mode sounds when fishare within a certain distance from thebottom Note that the bottom zoom

display must be turned on to use thisalarm

Water temperature alarm The watertemperature alarm alerts when thewater temperature is within (Insidealarm) the alarm range set orunderover (outside alarm) the rangeset

Speed alarm The speed alarm alertsyou when the speed is within (Insidealarm) or underover (Outside alarm)the preset speed

Arrival alarm The arrival alarm alertswhen you are near a waypoint by thedistance set

Activating an alarm

1 Press the [MENUESC] key2 Press or $ to choose ALARM

MENU from page 2 on the menu3 Press the to show the ALARM

menu

ALARM

(12)

[MENU] Exit

ALARM

(22)

[MENU] Exit

BOTTOM On FROM 5ft

RANGE 10ftFISH(Normal) On

FROM 5ft RANGE 10ftFISH(BL) On

FROM 8ft RANGE 10ftFISH LEVEL Medium

TEMPERATURE Inside FROM 724 deg F RANGE 10 deg F

SPEED Off FROM 00kt

RANGE 10kt

ARRIVAL ALRM Off RANGE 0 01 m

Pageno

Gray characters mean alarm is inactive Alarm menu

4 Use or $ to choose an alarm asappropriate

5 Press to show the options menu

Off On

Off InsideOutside

Temp Speed Alarm Types

Fish ArrivalBottom AlarmOnOff

Alarm options6 Use or $ to choose alarm type

Off Alarm off On Alarm onInside Alarm generated whenspeed (or water temperature) iswithin the range setOutside Alarm generated whenspeed (or water temperature) isoutside the range set

7 Press to close the windowFor ARRIVAL ALARM setting skip tostep 12

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 1848

12

8 Press $ to choose FROM9 Press to show the options menu

0ft

Depth

632 deg F

Temperature

10 kt

Speed Depth temperature speed setting

window10 Use or $ to set starting depth

temperature or speed as appropriateFor FISH (BL) the starting depth isthe range from the bottom

11 Press to close the window12 Press $ to choose RANGE13 Press to show the options menu14 Use or $ to set alarm range15 For the bottom alarm temperature

alarm speed alarm or arrivalalarm press the [MENUESC] key tofinish For a fish alarm press toclose the window and then go tostep 16

16 Press $ to choose FISH LEVEL17 Press to show the options menu

Weak

MediumStrong Fish level options

18 Use or $ to choose the echostrength level which will trigger a fishalarm

Weak Weak echoes (weakest toneon level bar)Medium Medium strength echoes

(middle tone on level bar)Strong Strong echoes (darkest toneon level bar)

19 Press the [MENUESC] key twice toclose the menu

Alarm range marker Bottom alarm Fish alarm (normal) Right Fish alarm (bottomlock) Left

Alarm icon

Alarm rangeStartingpoint

Bottom alarm Fish alarm (normal) Fish alarm (BL)

Temperature alarm (deg

C ordeg

F shown) Speed alarm Arrival alarm

Alarm icon (Appropriate icon appears to showwhich alarm has been violated)

How the alarm works

Note To disable an alarm choose Offat step 5 in the above procedure

Silencing the buzzer

The buzzer sounds and the appropriatealarm icon appears and flashes whenan alarm is violated You can silence thebuzzer by pressing any key Howeverthe buzzer will sound whenever thealarm setting is violated

Note The audio and visual alarms arereleased against the last-violated alarmwhen multiple alarms are active

115 WaypointsWaypoints may be used tobull Record the position of an important

echo as waypoint 12 points may beregistered

bull Output a waypoint position to a plotterto mark position on its screen

bull Find range bearing and time-to-go toa location (waypoint)

Note Requires latitude and longitudeposition from a navigator

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 1948

13

Registering a waypoint on thescreen

1 Press the [MARK] key The cursorappears along with waypoint entryinstructions To enter a waypoint tothe current own shiprsquos position go tostep 3Note If there is no position data themessage ldquoNo position datardquo appearsCheck the navigator

50k

496

1100

20

40

60

80

0

Cursor

WAYPOINT ENTRY

( Move) Cursor [MARK] Enter [MENU] Cancel

50 kHz display

2 Press the cursor pad to set thecursor where desired Pictureadvancement is stopped until step 3is completed and the instructionwindow is integrated into the navdisplay

3 Press the [MARK] key again WhenTLL or FURUNO-TLL is selected atTLL OUTPUT on the System menuthe latitude and longitude position atthe cursor is output to the navigator

A vertical line marks location Furtherthe display shows the waypointname (next sequential number) andposition of the location selected atstep 2

WAYPOINTName FREQLat 34 deg 22796NLon 136 deg 07264E

05

[MENU] Exit

rase

Waypoint data display

Note If you attempt to enter 13thwaypoint the message ldquoMemoryfullrdquo appears In this case erase anunwanted waypoint to enable entry

4 To save the waypoint under thename shown go to step 8 or go tostep 5 to change its name

5 Press to open the waypoint nameentry window

WAYPOINTName FREQLat 34 deg 22796NLon 136 deg 07264E

05

[MENU] Exit

01------ ENT

rase

Waypoint window name entry6 Use or to set character $ or

to shift cursor The name mayconsist of 10 alphanumericcharactersNote Character order is 0 1hellip9 - A BhellipZ _ 0hellip

7 Press to choose ENT 8 Press the [MENUESC] key to

register the waypoint

Registering waypoint by LL

1 Press the [MENUESC] key to openthe main menu

2 Use or to choose WAYPOINTLIST from page 2 of the menu

3 Press

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 2048

14

WAYPOINT LIST

01 0102 0303------------------------------------------------------

[MENU] Exit

Waypoint list4 Press or to choose an empty

waypoint and press Press again

NEW WAYPOINTName FREQLat 34 deg 22796NLon 136 deg 07264E

05

[MENU] Exit

04------ ENT

rase

New waypoint window name entry

5 Use or to set character $ or to shift cursor

6 Press to select ENT 7 Enter latitude and longitude similar

to how you entered waypoint name8 Press the [MENUESC] key to

register the waypoint

Editing waypoints Press the [MENUESC] key to open

the main menu

2 Use or to choose WAYPOINTLIST from page 2 of the menu

3 Press to open the waypoints list4 Use or to choose a waypoint

and press 5 Use or to choose the item to

edit (name latitude or longitude)6 Press to open the data entry

window7 Use or to set character $ or

to choose location8 Press to choose ENT 9 Press the [MENUESC] key

Erasing waypoints Press the [MENUESC] key2 Use or to choose WAYPOINT

LIST from page 2 of the menu3 Press to open the waypoints list

4 Use or to choose the waypointto erase and then press Note You cannot erase a waypointwhich is selected as ldquoGOTO WPTrdquo

5 Press to choose ldquoEraserdquo6 Press to open the options window7 Press to select YES to erase the

waypoint The waypoint list appearswith the erased waypoint blank

8 Press the [MENUESC] key twice toclose the menu

Setting destination waypoint

Set a destination waypoint to find rangebearing and time-to-go to that point Youcan see range and bearing to awaypoint Time-to-go is shown on theTime to Go digital display

Press the [MENUESC] key to openthe main menu

2 Use or to choose GOTO WPTfrom page 2 of the menu

3 Press to open the waypoints list

Off01020304----------------------------------------------------------------

Waypoint list

4 Use or to choose a waypoint5 Press the [MENUESC] key to close

the menu

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 2148

15

116 Setting Up Nav DataDisplays

The user may arrange the nav datadisplays as desired

1 Use the [MODE] key to show theNAV DATA-1 or 2 display whicheveryou want to set up

2 Press the [MENUESC] key to closethe mode selection window

3 Press the cursor pad to display theNAV DATA SETUP window

NAV DATA SETUP

Window Selection Data Selection

[MENU] Exit

NAV DATA SETUP window

4 Use or to choose a datadisplay window desired Adashed-line rectangle circumscribesyour selection

5 Use

or$

to choose item todisplay See the below for adescription of the displays

(9)

(1)

(2)

(3)

(4)(5)

(6)(7)(8)

Two-data

display

Three-data

display

Four-data

displayItems displayable in (1) - (3) depth positioncourse range and bearing trip distanceodometer water temperature headingair pressure time-to-go to destination waypointXTE speed wind speed and directiondestination waypoint data compassItems displayable in (4) - (9) depth positionspeed course range and bearing trip distanceodometer water temperature headingair pressure time-to-go to destination waypointXTE wind speed wind direction

= Graphic display

Nav data window and item displayable6 Press the [MENUESC] key to finish

Note You can choose the number ofitems to show in a nav data display withNAV DATA-1 and NAV DATA-2 on theSystem menu

GRAPHIC DISPLAYS

1 05 0 05 1

Wpt 03Rng 019nm Brg 321 deg XTE 000nm Cse 333 deg

DESTINATION WAYPOINT GRAPHIC

XTEscale

BearingCourseDestinationwaypointdirection

DestinationwaypointdataNameRangeXTE

Wind APP

WIND GRAPHIC

60

120

90

030

150180

120

150

90

60

30

120 deg

Speed 103 ms

COMPASS GRAPHIC

SPEED GRAPHIC

172

Speed

20

50

40

60

30

10

01 05 0 05 1

025 nm

XTE

XTE GRAPHIC

kt

Bearing todestinationwaypoint

Course

Brg30 deg

Cse90 deg

N

E

XTE scale

Speed-ometer

Nav data display-1

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 2248

16

DIGITAL DISPLAYS

Course

123 deg

COURSE

Depth

328 ft

DEPTH

Heading TRUEMAG

318 deg

HEADING

Odometer

56 nm

ODOMETER

Position GPS 3D

30 deg 00065N130 deg 00574E

POSITION

Temperature

698 degF

WATER TEMPERATURE

Trip meter

121 nm

TRIP DISTANCE

Time to Go

00 H30 M

TIME-TO-GO

1018 hpa

AIR PRESSURE

Air Pressure

Speed

193 kt

SPEED

Rng

121 nm

RANGE amp BEARING

Brg

140 deg

Wind Speed APP

80 ms

WIND SPEED

Wind Dir APP

138 deg

WIND DIRECTION

APP or TRUE depending on menu setting TRUE or MAG depending

on menu settingamp To destination waypoint

Note 1 Nav data is updated with somedelay

Note 2 When data is lost 120 sec thedisplay shows - - at the locationwhere data is lost

= GPS receiving status (Displays whenconnecting with GP-310B320B and InOutis selected at the Installation menu)NO FIX Position cannot be foundGPS 2D 2D (dimension) GPS position fixGPS 3D 3D GPS fixGPS W2D 2D WAAS position fixGPS W3D 3D WAAS position fix

NAV data display-2

117 Other Menu ItemsThis section describes the menu itemsnot previously mentioned

Page 1

HUE (Picture Color)

Two picture color arrangements areavailable Day and Night Day showsechoes on a white background Nightshows them on a black background

1 Press the [MENUESC] key todisplay the menu

2 Use or $ to choose HUE frompage 1 of the menu

3 Press to show the optionswindow

4 Use or $ to choose Day or Nightas appropriate

5 Press the [MENUESC] key to closethe menu

WHITE LINE

The white line feature displays theleading edge of the bottom echo in

white This is useful for discriminatingbottom fish near the bottom

1 Press the [MENUESC] key todisplay the main menu

2 Use or $ to choose WHITE LINEfrom page 1 of the menu

3 Press to show the optionswindow

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 2348

17

4 Use or to choose Off Tone orMesh as appropriate ldquoMeshrdquo paintsthe white line in darker tone thanldquoTonerdquo

5 Press the [MENUESC] key to closethe menu

526White Line OFF White Line ON (Mesh)

Fish schoolclearly shown

White line

0

20

40

60

80

050k 11

526

0

20

40

60

80

00 050k 11

How white line works

DEEP GAIN

ldquoDeep Gainrdquo compensates forpropagation attenuation of the ultrasonicwaves It does this by equalizing echopresentation so that fish schools of thesame size appear in the same density inboth shallow and deep waters Inaddition it reduces surface noise

Press the [MENUESC] key to openthe main menu

2 Use or to choose DEEP GAINfrom page of the menu

3 Press $ to show to the optionswindow

4 Choose Low Medium or High asappropriate High provides thegreatest degree of gain reductionagainst short range echoes

5 Press the [MENUESC] key to closethe menu

Page 2

TRIP RESET

This item resets trip distance to ldquo0rdquo

Press the [MENUESC] key to openthe main menu

2 Use or to choose TRIPRESET from page 2 of the menu

3 Press $ 4 Press to reset trip distance

Beeps are generated while the tripdistance is being reset

5 Press the [MENUESC] key to closethe menu

Note To reset the odometer to zeroclear the memory

GAIN ADJ 200 GAIN ADJ 50

If the gain is too high or too low or thegain for the low and high frequenciesappears unbalanced you cancompensate it as follows

Press the [MENUESC] key to openthe main menu

2 Use or to choose GAIN ADJ200 or GAIN ADJ 50 from page 2 ofthe menu

3 Press $ to show to the optionswindow

4 Use or to set the amount Thesetting range is ndash50 to +50

5 Press the [MENUESC] key to close

the menu

DRAFT

The default depth display shows thedistance from the transducer If youwould rather show the distance from thesea surface set your shiprsquos draft asfollows

Press the [MENUESC] key to openthe main menu

2 Use or to choose DRAFT frompage 2 of the menu

3 Press $ and then use or to setdraft The setting range is ndash 50 to+500 (meters feet)

4 Press the [MENUESC] key to closethe menu

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 2448

18

2 SYSTEM MENU

The System menu mainly consists ofitems which once set do not requirefrequent adjustment You may displaythis menu by choosing SYSTEM MENUat page 2 of the main menu andpressing

SYSTEM MENULANGUAGE English

DEPTH UNIT ftSPEED UNIT ktWIND UNIT msTEMP UNIT deg F

TEMP GRAPH OffNAV DATA-1 NAV DATA-2

WATER TYPE SaltKEY BEEP OnBATT VOLTAGE Off (13)

[MENU] Exit

SYSTEM MENU

(23)

NAV DISPLAY TempSpeedNMEA0183 Ver 20TLL OUTPUT OffBEARING TrueWIND SPDDIR ApparentTRIP SOURCE Own

TEMP SOURCE OwnSPEED SOURCE OwnTEMP CALIB +00 deg F ( 40)SPEED CALIB +0 ( 50)

Own speed Own temp 100 kt 162 deg F

[MENU] Exit

SYSTEM MENU

(33)

BASIC RANGE1 15 ft

RANGE2 30RANGE3 60RANGE4 120RANGE5 200RANGE6 400RANGE7 600RANGE8 1000 (7-1500)

ZOOM RANGE 15 ft (7-150)BL RANGE 15 ft (10-30)(Bottom Lock)

ZOOM MARKER On

[MENU] Exit

PAGE 3

PAGE 2

PAGE 1

Page no

System menus

21 System MenuPage 1

LANGUAGE The system language isavailable in English several Europeanlanguages and Japanese To changelanguage select language desired andpress the [MENUESC] key

DEPTH UNIT Choose unit of depthmeasurement from meters feet

fathoms passibraza and hiro(Japanese)

SPEED UNIT Choose unit of speedmeasurement from knots miles perhour and kilometers per hour Requiresspeed data

WIND UNIT Choose unit of wind speedmeasurement from ms kt kmh and

mph Requires wind speed data

TEMP UNIT Choose unit oftemperature measurement Celsius orFahrenheit Requires temperature data

TEMP GRAPH Turns the watertemperature display on or off Thetemperature scale range is 16deg (degF) inldquoNarrowrdquo 40deg (degF) in ldquoWiderdquo Requires

water temperature data

m526

0

20

40

60

80

00 050k 11

40

80

70

50

60

TemperatureScale

TemperatureGraph

638 deg F162kt

Water temperature display (wide degF)

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 2548

19

NAV DATA-1 -2 Choose the number ofnavigation data items to display on thenav data displays from two three orfour items Requires appropriate navdata

WATER TYPE Choose the water typewith which to use the LS-4100 fromSalt or Fresh

KEY BEEP Turn key beep on or off

BATT VOLTAGE Turn the batteryvoltage indication (appears at the topright corner on the screen) on or offWhen on it replaces the picture advancespeed indication

Page 2

NAV DISPLAY Choose the nav data todisplay in the nav data window at thetop left-hand corner You may choosefrom temperaturespeedlatitudelongitude range and bearingcourse over ground trip distance or

wind speed Requires appropriate navdata

407 deg F162kt

Nav window

NMEA0183 Choose NMEA version ofnavigator Ver 15 Ver 20 or Ver 30

TLL OUTPUT Enablesdisables outputof TLL (Target Latitude Longitude)position when the [MARK] key isoperated ldquoTLLrdquo outputs latitude andlongitude position ldquoFURUNO-TLLrdquoavailable with connection of navigatorthat can output FURUNO TLL outputslatitude and longitude watertemperature depth etc

BEARING Shiprsquos course and bearingto a waypoint may be displayed in trueor magnetic bearing Magnetic bearingis true bearing plus (or minus) earthrsquosmagnetic deviation Requires bearingdata

WIND SPDDIR Choose the windspeed and direction reference from trueand apparent Requires wind sensorApparen t The direction (in relation toshiprsquos bow) and speed of the wind as itappears to those on board relative tothe speed and direction of the boatcombination of the true wind and thewind caused by the boats movementTrue The speed and direction (inrelation to shiprsquos bow) of the wind felt ormeasured when stationary

TRIP SOURCE Choose speed sourcefor the trip distance indication Own(transducer with speed sensor orseparate speed sensor) or NMEA

TEMP SOURCE Choose source ofwater temperature input Off Own(transducer with water temperaturesensor or separate temperature sensor)or NMEA

SPEED SOURCE Choose source ofspeed input Off Own (transducer withspeed sensor or separate speedsensor) or NMEA Requires speed

data

TEMP CALIB If the water temperaturesensor-generated water temperatureindication is wrong you can correct ithere when ldquoOwnrdquo is selected astemperature source For example if thewater temperature indication is 2deghigher than actual water temperatureenter -2 The setting range is -40degF to

+40degF

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 2648

20

SPEED CALIB If the speedsensor-generated speed indication iswrong you can correct it here whenldquoOwnrdquo is selected as speed source Forexample if the speed indication is 10lower than actual speed enter +10 Thesetting range is ndash50 to +50

Page 3

BASIC RANGE 1 - BASIC RANGE 8 Set range of each of the eight basicranges (Selectable range 7 to 1500 ft)Note 1 All default basic ranges arerestored whenever the depth unit ischanged Therefore change the depth

unit before changing the basic rangesNote 2 A range may not be lower thanthe range preceding it For example ifbasic range 3 is 60 feet basic range 4must be greater than 60 feet

ZOOM RANGE Choose the range tozoom in the marker-zoom andbottom-zoom modes You may choose arange between 7 and 150 feet (2 and 50

meters)

BL RANGE The expansion width forthe bottom-lock display can be chosenfrom 10 to 30 feet (3 and 10 meters)

ZOOM MARKER The zoom markerappears in the normal bottom markerand bottom zoom displays and marksthe area which is expanded in the

bottom marker and bottom zoompictures You can turn the marker on oroff as desired

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 2748

21

3 MAINTENANCETROUBLESHOOTING

W RNING

ELECTRICAL SHOCK HAZARDDo not open the equipment

Only qualified personnel should workinside the equipment

31 Maintenance

Regular maintenance is essential forgood performance Checking the itemslisted in the table below monthly willhelp keep your equipment in goodshape for years to come

Checking

Item Action

Transducercable

Check cable for damage

Power cabletransducercable plug

Check that they are tightlyfastened Refasten ifnecessary

Display unitground

Check for corrosion Cleanif necessary

Power supplyvoltage

Check voltage If out ofrating correct problem

32 Cleaning the DisplayUnit

Dust or dirt on the display unit can beremoved with a soft cloth If desired awater-moistened cloth may be usedUse special care when cleaning theLCD since it scratches easily Do notuse chemical cleaners to clean thedisplay unit - they can remove paint andmarkings

33 TransducerMaintenance

Marine life on the transducer face willresult in a gradual decrease insensitivity Check the transducer facefor cleanliness each time the boat isdry-docked Carefully remove anymarine life with a piece of wood orfine-grade sandpaper

34 Replacing the FuseThe fuse in the power cable protects thesystem from reverse polarity of thepower supply and equipment fault If thefuse blows find the cause beforereplacing it Use only a 1A fuse (FGMB 1A 125V Code No 000-114-805 ) orequivalent Using the wrong fuse will damage the unit and void the warranty

W RNINGUse the proper fuse

Fuse rating is shown on the equipmentUse of a wrong fuse can result in fire anddamage the equipment

35 Battery Voltage Alert A battery icon appears when the batteryvoltage is too high or too low

Battery icon and meaning

Icon Meaning

Voltage is lower than 10 VDC If thevoltage goes below 9 V the equipmentis automatically turned off

Voltage is higher than 165 VDC If thevoltage goes higher than 175 V theequipment is automatically turned off

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 2848

22

36 TroubleshootingThe table below provides basictroubleshooting procedures which theuser may follow to restore normaloperation

Troubleshooting table

Ifhellip Then check hellipneither echo norfixed range scaleappears

bull battery voltagebull fusebull power cable

no echo appearsbut the fixedrange scaleappears

bull if display advancespeed is set to ldquoStoprdquo

bull transducer plugbull

transducer cableecho appears butno zero line

bull if range shifting is setto ldquo0rdquo

sensitivity is low bull gain settingbull if air bubbles or marine

life is clinging to thetransducer face

bull if sediments arepresent in the water

bull if the bottom is too soft

to return an echothere is extremeinterference ornoise

bull if the transducer is tooclose to the engine

bull if the unit is properlygrounded

bull if other echo soundersof the same frequencyas own are beingoperated nearby

the speedwatertemperaturereadout isunrealistic or notpresent

bull sensor plug

the positionreadout isunrealistic or notpresent

bull the connectionbetween sounder andnavigator

bull navigator

37 DiagnosticsIf you feel your unit is not workingproperly conduct the diagnostic test tofind the problem If you cannot restorenormal operation contact your dealerfor advice

1 Turn on the power while pressing the[MENUESC] key Continue pressingthe [MENUESC] key until theInstallation menu appears

SIMULATION On

TEST LCD PATTERN MEMORY CLEAR

NMEA PORT InOutNMEA MIX Off GPS WAAS Off

SET BOTTOM LEVEL

Installation Menu

= Setting cannot be changed whenNMEA PORT setting is InIn

Installation menu2 Press to choose TEST3 Press to start the test

ROM OKRAM OKNMEA

Temp 682 deg F

Speed 100kmh

Power 124 VBody 39 deg C

Program No 0252318-01Push [MENU] 3 times to exit

Level bar

= Program version no

Water

TemperatureSpeedBattery VoltageTemperatureinside displayunit(Unit fixed atdeg C)

GPS (48502180) OK

Only when GP-310B is connected(For GP-320B 4850238)

Test display

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 2948

23

4 The ROM RAM and NMEA port arechecked with the results shown asOK or NG (No Good) For any NGrequest service (A special connectoris required to test the NMEA portNothing appears if no connector isconnected)

5 The squares at the right side of thetest display are for checking thecontrols Press each key and thearrows on the Cursor Pad one byone A controlrsquos correspondingon-screen square ldquolightsrdquo in black ifthe control is normal

6 To return to the Installation menupress the [MENUESC] key threetimes

7 To restore normal operation turn offthe power and turn it on again

38 Test PatternThis feature tests for proper display oftones

1 On the Installation menu press $ tochoose LCD PATTERN

2 Press to start the test The entirescreen is black

3 Press again and the screen turnswhite

4 Press again and the screenshows a four-toned display

5 Press again to return to theInstallation menu

6 To restore normal operation turn offthe power and then it on again

WHITE FOUR-TONE BLACK

Test patterns

39 Memory ClearThe memory can be cleared to startafresh with default menu settings

1 At the installation menu press $ tochoose MEMORY CLEAR

2 Press to open the optionswindow

YES NO

Clear memory display

3 Press to clear the memory Beepsare generated while the memory isbeing cleared

4 To restore normal operation turn offthe power and then turn it on again

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3048

24

4 INSTALLATION

41 Display UnitMounting considerations

The display unit can be installed on adesktop on the bulkhead or flushmounted in a panel When choosing alocation keep the following in mind

bull Keep the display unit out of directsunlight

bull The temperature and humidity should

be moderate and stablebull Locate the unit away from exhaust

pipes and ventsbull The mounting location should be well

ventilatedbull Mount the unit where shock and

vibration are minimalbull For maintenance and checking

purposes leave sufficient space atthe sides and rear of the unit andleave slack in cables

bull A magnetic compass will be affected ifthe display unit is placed too close toit Observe the following compasssafe distances to prevent disturbanceto the magnetic compassStandard compass 04 metersSteering compass 03 meters

Desktop overhead mounting1 Fix the bracket to a desktop or the

overhead with tapping screws(supplied)

2 Loosely screw knobs into the displayunit

3 Set the display unit to the bracketand then tighten the knobs

Mounting on the bulkhead Flush

mounting in a panelSee the instructions on the bulkhead orflush mounting template (supplied)

42 Thru-hull MountTransducer

Transducer mounting location

The thru-hull mount transducer

(520-5PSD 520-5MSD) provides thebest performance of all since thetransducer protrudes from the hull andthe effect of air bubbles and turbulencenear the hull skin is reduced When theboat has a keel the transducer shouldbe at least 30 cm away from it Typicalthru-hull mountings are shown in thefigure on the next page

The performance of this sounder isdirectly related to the mounting locationof the transducer especially forhigh-speed cruising The installationshould be planned in advance keepingthe standard cable length (8 m) and thefollowing factors in mindbull Air bubbles and turbulence caused by

movement of the boat seriouslydegrade the sounding capability of thetransducer The transducer shouldtherefore be located in a positionwhere water flow is the smoothestNoise from the propellers alsoadversely affects performance andthe transducer should not be mountednearby The lifting strakes arenotorious for creating acoustic noiseand these must be avoided bykeeping the transducer inboard ofthem

bull The transducer must always remain

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3148

25

submerged even when the boat isrolling pitching or up on a plane athigh speed

bull A practical choice would besomewhere between 13 and 12 of

the boatrsquos length from the stern Forplaning hulls a practical location isgenerally rather far astern so that thetransducer is always in waterregardless of the planing attitude

28

22

120

68

30

520-5PSD

24

120

68

87520-5MSD

Unit mm

Thru-hull mount transducer dimensions

Acceptable transducer mounting

locations

Position 12 to 13 of the hull from stern

15 to 30 cm off center line (inside first lifting strakes)

Within the wetted bottom area

Deadrise angle within 15 deg

HIGH SPEED-V HULL

Suitable transducer mounting locations

Typical thru-hull mounttransducer installations

FairingBlock

Flat Washer

Rubber Washer

Hull

Deep-V Hull

Hull

Flat Washer

Rubber Washer

Flat Hull

CorkWasher

Typical thru-hull mounttransducer installations

Procedure for installing thethru-hull mount transducer

1 With the boat hauled out of the watermark the location chosen formounting the transducer on thebottom of the hull

2 If the hull is not level within 15deg inany direction fairing blocks madeout of teak should be used betweenthe transducer and hull both insideand outside to keep the transducerface parallel with the water lineFabricate the fairing block as shownbelow and make the entire surfaceas smooth as possible to provide anundisturbed flow of water around thetransducer The fairing block shouldbe smaller than the transducer itselfto provide a channel to divert

turbulent water around the sides ofthe transducer rather than over itsface

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3248

26

BOWHole for stuffing tube

Upper Half

Lower Half

Saw along slopeof hull Construction of fairing block

3 Drill a hole just large enough to passthe threaded stuffing tube of thetransducer through the hull makingsure it is drilled vertically

4 Apply a sufficient amount of highquality caulking compound to the topsurface of the transducer around thethreads of the stuffing tube andinside the mounting hole (and fairingblocks if used) to ensure watertightmounting

5 Mount the transducer and fairingblocks and tighten the locking nutsBe sure that the transducer is

properly oriented and its workingface is parallel to the waterline

Note Do not over-stress the stuffingtube and locking nuts through excessivetightening since the wood block willswell when the boat is placed in thewater It is suggested that the nut betightened lightly at installation andretightened several days after the boat

has been launched

Transducer preparation

Before putting the boat in water wipethe face of the transducer thoroughlywith a detergent liquid soap This willlessen the time necessary for thetransducer to have good contact withthe water Otherwise the time requiredfor complete ldquosaturationrdquo ill belengthened and performance will bereduced

DO NOT paint the transducerPerformance will be affected

43 Transom MountTransducer

The transom mount transducer is verycommonly employed usually onrelatively small IO or outboard boatsDo not use this method on an inboardmotor boat because turbulence iscreated by the propeller ahead of thetransducer

520-5PWD

There are two methods of installationflush with hull (for flat hulls) andprojecting from hull (for deep V-hulls)

Flat Hull

D

Dgt50 cm

Deep-VHull

520-5PWD mounting locations

Installing the 520-5PWD on a flat hull

A suitable mounting location is at least50 cm away from the engine and wherethe water flow is smooth

1 Drill four pilot holes in the mountinglocation

2 Attach the transducer to the bracketwith 5 x 20 tapping screws(supplied)

3 Adjust the transducer position so thetransducer faces right to the bottom

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3348

27

Note If necessary to improve waterflow and minimize air bubblesstaying on the transducer faceincline the transducer about 5deg at therear This may require a certainamount of experimentation for finetuning at high cruising speeds

4 Fill the gap between the wedge frontof the transducer and transom withepoxy material to eliminate any airspaces

No1 M5 x 14

5 x 20

5 x 20

2 to 5

Tape

Hull

Transom mount transducer

mounting flush with hull

Installing the transom mounttransducer on a deep-V hull

This method is employed on deep-Vhulls and provides good performancebecause the effects of air bubbles areminimal Install the transducer parallelwith water surface not flush with hull Ifthe boat is placed on a trailer care mustbe taken not to damage the transducerwhen the boat is hauled out of the waterand put on the trailer

5 x 20

No 2M5 x 14

5 x 20

Transom mount transducermounted projecting from hull

525-5PWD

Choose the installation methoddepending on the rise angle of the hull

Transom

Transom

Stripe over 10

Parallel with hull

Mount at the stripe

less than 10

525-5PWD mounting location

Installing the 525-5PWD

Referring to ldquoInstalling the 520-5PWDrdquoin the left column for mounting of thebracket and the figure shown on the topof next page install the 525-5PWD tothe transom

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3448

28

2 to 5

Transducer

Bracket

Hull

Epoxy material

525-5PWD mounting

44 Inside-hullTransducer

The thru-hull mount transducer(520-5PSD 520-5MSD) may also beinstalled inside the hull following theprocedure below

Necessary tools

You will need the following toolsbull Sandpaper (100)bull Silicone sealantbull Silicone grease

Remarks on installationbull Turn off the engine and anchor the

boat while installing the equipmentbull Install the transducer in the engine

room

Choosing the mounting locationbull The mounting location should be

where the hull is of single-hullthickness and is void of air or flotationmaterials other than solid fiberglassbetween the transducer face and thewater

bull Do not place the transducer over hullstruts or ribs which run under the hull

bull Avoid a location where the risingangle of the hull exceeds 15deg tominimize the effect of the boatrsquosrolling

bull You will finalize the mounting location

through some trial and error Theprocedure for this is shown later

50 cm

50 cm15 cm15 cm

13

12

Transducer mountinglocation

Centerline

Inside-hull transducer mounting location

Attaching the transducer1 Clean the transducer face to remove

any foreign material Lightly roughenthe transducer face with 100sandpaper Also roughen the insideof the hull where the transducer is tobe mounted

2 Clean the transducer face again3 Warm the silicone sealant to 40degC

before usage to soften it Coat thetransducer face and mountinglocation with silicone sealant

Transducer

SiliconeSealant

Coating transducer facewith silicone sealant

4 Press the transducer firmly down onthe hull and gently twist it back andforth to remove any air which may betrapped in the silicone sealant

Checking the installation

1 Connect the battery to the display

unit2 Turn on the display unit

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3548

29

3 Press the [MODE] key to chooseSINGLE FREQ

4 Choose 50 kHz or 200 kHz and thenpress the [MENUESC] key to closethe mode menu

5 Press the [MENU] to show the mainmenu and then press to select

Auto mode6 Press to choose Off7 Press the [MENUESC] key8 Press the [GAIN] key to set the gain

to ldquo5rdquo and then press the[MENUESC] key

9 Press the [RANGE] key to set therange to 10 meters (feet) and thenpress the [MENUESC] key

10 If the bottom is displayed in darkgray and the depth indicationappears the mounting location issuitable Go to ldquoFinal preparationrdquo

11 If the bottom is not displayed in darkgray tone the mounting location maybe unsuitable Do the followinga) Press the [POWERBRILL] key to

turn off the powerb) Gently dismount the transducer

with a piece of woodc) Reattach the transducer

elsewhere as shown in ldquoAttachingthe transducerrdquo

d) Check the installation again

Final preparation

Support the transducer with a piece ofwood to keep it in place while it is drying

Let the transducer dry 24-72 hours

45 Optional Triducer525ST-MSD

The optional triducer 525ST-MSD isdesigned for thru-hull mounting Forhow to install this transducer seeparagraph 42

φ79 mm

33 mm200-12 UNthreads

φ51 mm

27 mm

7 mm

140 mm Triducer 525ST-MSD

525ST-PWD

The Transom Mount Transducer orTRIDUCER reg Multisensor with IntegralRelease Bracket 525ST-PWD ismanufactured by AIRMAR Co Theseinstructions are also included with the

sensor

Pre-test for speed and temperature

Connect the sensor to the instrumentand spin the paddlewheel Check for aspeed reading and the approximate airtemperature If there is no readingreturn the sensor to your place ofpurchase

Tools and materials needed

ScissorsMasking tapeSafety gogglesDust maskElectric drillDrill bit for

Bracket holes 4mm 23 or 964rdquoFiberglass hull chamfer bit(preferred)6mm or 14rdquo

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3648

30

Transom hole 19mm or 34rdquo(optional)

Cable clamp holes 3mm or 18rdquoScrewdriversStraight edgeMarine sealantPencilZip-tiesWater-based antifouling paint(mandatory in salt water )

Mounting location

To ensure the best performance thesensor must be submerged inaeration-free and turbulence-free water

Mount the sensor close to the centerlineof the boat On slower heavierdisplacement hulls positioning it fartherfrom the centerline is acceptable

Allow adequate space above thebracket for it to release and rotate thesensor upward

Height

Height withoutspeed sensor191mm (7-12)Height withspeed sensor213mm (8-12)

Height required at mounting location

Note 1 Do not mount the sensor in anarea of turbulence or bubbles nearwater intake or discharge openingsbehind strakes struts fittings or hull

irregularities behind eroding paint (anindication of turbulence)Note 2 Avoid mounting the sensorwhere the boat may be supportedduring trailering launching hauling andstorageNote 3 For single drive boat mounton the starboard side at least 75 mm(3rdquo) beyond the swing radius of thepropeller

75 mm(3)

minimum beyondswing radius

Mounting location on single drive boat

Note 4 For twin drive boat mountbetween the drives

Installation of bracket

1 Cut out the installation template

shown on the next page2 At the selected location position thetemplate so the arrow at the bottomis aligned with the bottom edge ofthe transom Being sure the templateis parallel to the waterline tape it inplace

Align template vertically

Deadrise angle

Slope of hullparallel towaterline

Align template arrow withbottom edge of transom

Positioning the template

Warning Always wear safetygoggles and a dust mask

3 Using a 4 mm 23 or 964rdquo bit drillthree holes 22 mm (78rdquo) deepat the locations indicated To preventdrilling too deeply wrap maskingtape around the bit 22 mm (78rdquo)from the pointFiberglass hull Minimize surfacecracking by chamfering the gelcoatIf a chamfer bit or countersink bit is

not available start drilling with a6mm or 14rdquo bit to a depth of 1 mm(116rdquo)

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3748

31

4 If you know your transom angle the

bracket is designed for a standard13deg transom angle11deg-18deg angle No shim is requiredSkip to step 3 in ldquoAdjustingrdquoOther angles The shim is requiredSkip to step 2 of ldquoAdjustingrdquoIf you do not know the transom angletemporarily attach the bracket andsensor to the transom to determine ifthe plastic shim is needed

5 Using the two 10 x 1-14rdquo

self-tapping screws temporarilyscrew the bracket to the hull DONOT tighten the screws completelyat this time Follow the step 1-4 inldquoAttaching the Sensor to the Bracketrdquobefore proceeding with ldquoAdjustingrdquo

Installation templatefor starboard side of boat

Drill at locations labeled Bfor the following transom angles

16 deg through 22 deg

Drill at locations labeled Afor the following transom angles

2 deg through 15 deg

Align arrow with bottom of transom

AA A

BB B

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3848

32

Adjusting

1 Using a straight edge sight theunderside of the sensor relative tothe underside of the hull The sternof the sensor should be 1-3 mm

(116-18rdquo) below the bow of thesensor or parallel to the bottom ofthe hull

11 deg transom angleNO SHIM

12-18 deg transom angleNO SHIM

2 deg -10 deg transom

angle

19 deg -22 deg transom

angleshim withtaper up

shim withtaper down

parallelparallel parallel

slightangle

angletoo steep

anglereversed

YES NONO

YES YESYES

Sensor position and transom angle

Note Do not position the bow of thesensor lower than the stern becauseaeration will occur

2 To adjust the sensorrsquos angle relativeto the hull use the tapered plasticshim provided If the bracket hasbeen temporarily fastened to thetransom remove it Key the shim in

place on the back of the bracket2deg-10deg transom angle (steppedtransom and jet boats) Positionthe shim with the tapered end down19deg-22deg transom angle (smallaluminum and fiberglass boats) Position the shim with the taperedend up

3 If the bracket has been temporarilyfastened to the transom remove it

Apply a marine sealant to thethreads of the two 10 x 1-14rdquo self

tapping screws to prevent waterseeping into the transom Screw thebracket to the hull Do not tighten thescrews completely at this time

4 Repeat step 1 to ensure that theangle of the sensor is correctNote Do not position the sensorfarther into the water than necessaryto avoid increasing drag spray andwater noise and reducing boatspeed

5 Using the vertical adjustment spaceon the bracket slots slide the sensorup or down to provide a projection of3 mm (18rdquo) Tighten the screws

Cable cover

Cableclamp

50 mm (2)

Hull projection 3 mm (18)

Vertical adjustment and cable routing

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3948

33

Attaching the sensor to the bracket

1 If the retaining cover near the top ofthe bracket is closed open it bydepressing the latch and rotating thecover downward

Step 1 Step 2

Latch

Retainingcover

Pivotarm (2)

Slot (2)

Step 4

Step 3

Attaching the sensor to the bracket

2 Insert the sensorrsquos pivot arms intothe slots near the top of the bracket

3 Maintain pressure until the pivotarms click into place

4 Rotate the sensor downward until thebottom snaps into the bracket

5 Close the retaining cover to preventthe accidental release of the sensorwhen the boat is underway

Cable routing

Route the sensor cable over thetransom through a drain hole orthorough a new hole drilled in thetransom above the waterline

Never cut the cable or remote the

connector this will void the warranty Always wear safety goggles and a dustmask

1 If a hole must be drilled choose alocation well above the waterlineCheck for obstructions such as trimtabs pumps or wiring inside the hullMark the location with a pencil Drilla hole through the transom using a19 mm or 34rdquo bit (to accommodatethe connector)

2 Route the cable over or through thetransom

3 On the outside of the hull secure thecable against the transom using thecable clamps Position a cable clamp50 mm(2rdquo) above the bracket andmark the mounting hole with apencil

4 Position the second cable clamphalfway between the first clamp andthe cable hole Mark this mountinghole

5 If a hole has been drilled in thetransom open the appropriate slot inthe transom cable cover Position thecover over the cable where it entersthe hull Mark the two mounting

holes6 At each of the marked locations usea 3 mm or 18rdquo bit to drill a hole 10mm (38rdquo) deep The prevent drillingtoo deeply wrap masking tapearound the bit 10 mm (38rdquo) from thepoint

7 Apply marine sealant to the threadsof the 6 x 12rdquo self-tapping screw toprevent water from seeping into the

transom If you have drilled a holethrough the transom apply marinesealant to the space around thecable where it passes through thetransom

8 Position the two cable clamps andfasten them in place If used pushthe cable cover over the cable andscrew it in place

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4048

34

9 Route the cable to the instrumentbeing careful not to tear the cable

jacket when passing it though thebulkhead(s) and other parts of theboat To reduce electricalinterference separate the sensorcable from other electrical wiring andldquonoiserdquo sources Coil any excesscable and secure it in place withzip-ties to prevent damage

46 Optional WaterTemperatureSpeedSensor

Water temperaturespeed sensorST-02MSB and ST-02PSB which aredesigned for thru-hull mounting areoptionally available Install them asshown below

Mounting considerations

Choose a suitable mounting locationconsidering the followingbull Choose a place free from vibrationbull Choose a mid-boat flat position The

sensor does not have to be installedperfectly perpendicular The sensormust not be damaged in dry-dockingoperation

bull Choose a place apart from equipmentgenerating heat

bull Choose a place in the forwarddirection viewing from the drain holeto allow for circulation of coolingwater

1 Dry-dock the boat2 Make a hole of approx 51 mm

diameter in the mounting location3 Unfasten locknut and remove the

sensor section4 Apply high-grade sealant to the

flange of the sensor5 Pass the sensor casing through thehole

6 Face the notch on the sensor towardboatrsquos bow and tighten the flange

7 Set the sensor section to the sensorcasing and tighten the locknut

8 Launch the boat and check for waterleakage around the sensor

Locknut

Face notchtoward bow

Flange Nut

Coat withsilicone sealant Brim

φ 77

51

123

Water temperaturespeed sensor

ST-02MSB ST-02PSB

47 Wiring

Connect the LS-4100 powerdata cableassy MJ-A7SPF0005-020 (2 msupplied) to the POWER and thetransducer cable to the XDR connectorRefer to the interconnection diagram toconnect cables Leave slack in cables tofacilitate checking and maintenance

Note The fuse holder contains a springwhich fixes the fuse To preventdetachment of the spring which wouldcause loss of power tie the line asshown below

+ line (red)

Fuse holder

Cable tie How to fix fuse holder

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4148

35

Establishing the ground

The ground wire (125 sq or more localsupply) should be as short as possible

The signal line ground is isolated from

the chassis ground however the powerline is not insulated Therefore whenconnecting eternal equipment havingpositive ground do not ground thesignal line to the chassis If excessivenoise shows on the screen the groundmay be inadequate In this case attacha steel plate measuring 20 cm by 30 cmon the outside of the hull to provide aground point Connect the ground wire

there Use a ldquoclosedrdquo type lug ( ) tomake the connection at the display unitDo not use an ldquoopenrdquo type lug ( )

Optional equipment

POWER connector

The power supply port is commonlyused for connection of externalequipment such as a GPS receiver orwind indicator Use the powerdatacable MJ-A7SPF0005-020 (supplied) forconnection referring the figure shown inthe right column

Connector Color Remarks

1 TD-A WHT2 TD-B BLU

IEC-61162-1NMEA0183

3 RD-A YEL

4 RD-B GRN

IEC-61162-1

NMEA01835 + RED

6 - BLKPower input12 VDC

7 FG

Water tempspeed sensor

Connect the optional water tempspeedsensor to the XDR connector with theoptional converter connector (Type02S4147) as shown below

Tape connectors withvulcaninzing tapeand then vinyl tapeto waterproof themBind tape ends withcable ties to preventtape from unraveling

Connect to XDR portat rear of display unit

MJ-A10SPF

MJ-A10SRMDMJ-A6SRMD

Fromtransducer

Fromsensor

Connection of converterconnector 02S4147

48 IEC 61162-1 DataSentences

The tables below show the datasentences which can be input to andoutput from the LS-4100 Thetransmission speed for both input andoutput is 4800 bps Data is output attwo-second intervals

Input data sentences

Sentence Meaning

BWC Bearing and distance towaypoint

GGA Global positioning system(GPS) fix data

GLL Geographic position -latitudelongitude

HDG Heading deviation and variationHDT Heading true

MDA Atmospheric pressure

MTW Water temperature

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4248

36

Input data sentences (conrsquot)

Sentence MeaningMWV Wind speed and

angleRMA Recommended

minimum specificLORAN-C dataRMB Recommended

minimum navigationinformation

RMC Recommendedminimum specificGPSTRANSIT data

VHW Water speed andheading

VTG Course over groundand ground speedXTE Cross track error

Output data sentences

Sentence MeaningDBT (Ver 15) Depth below

transducerDPT (Ver 20 Ver30)

Depth

MTW Water temperatureRMB (Ver 20) Recommended

minimumnavigationinformation

VHW Water speed andheading

TLL Target positionoutput by [MARK]key

= Available with connection of optionalsensorsnavaid

49 Installation MenuThe installation menu mainly containsitems which are set at installation

1 Turn on the power while pressing the[MENUESC] key Continue pressing

the [MENUESC] key until theInstallation menu appears

SIMULATION On

TEST LCD PATTERN MEMORY CLEAR

NMEA PORT InOutNMEA MIX OffGPS WAAS Off

SET BOTTOM LEVEL

Installation Menu

= Setting cannot be changed whenNMEA PORT setting is InIn

Installation menu

SIMULATION The simulation modeprovides without connection of thetransducer simulated operation of theequipment using internally generatedechoes All controls are operative Themessage ldquoSIMrdquo appears at the top rightcorner on the screen when thesimulation mode is active

1 At the installation menu press toopen the simulation mode optionswindow

2 Press to choose ldquoOnrdquo to turn onthe simulation mode

3 Press the [POWERBRILL] keyabout three seconds to turn off thepower

4 Press the [POWERBRILL] key toturn on the power ldquoSIMrdquo appears atthe top right corner of the display

5 To turn off the simulation modeselect Off at step 2

NMEA po r t se tup(NMEA PO RT NMEA M IX)

The POWER port can function as aninput port or inputoutput port Changethe setting to ldquoInInrdquo when connectingGP-310B320B and a wind sensor

When connecting the GP-310B320Band a wind sensor first turn on ldquoGPS

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4348

37

WAASrdquo (in the Installation menu) andthen select ldquoInInrdquo as the NMEA portsetting

1 Turn on the power while pressingand holding down the [MENUESC]key Continue pressing the[MENUESC] key until theInstallation menu appears

2 Choose NMEA PORT and thenpress to display the NMEA portoptions window

3 Use or to choose InOut orInIn as appropriate

InOut Input and Output (default

setting)InIn Input only (Available withconnection of the GP-310B320Band a wind sensor)

4 Press choose NMEA MIX andthen press to display the NMEAMIX options window

5 Use or to choose Off or OnChoose On to output input data

Off Outputs the data sentences ofLS-4100 only

On Outputs the data sentences ofLS-4100 and sentences which areinput from other equipment

6 To restore normal operation turn offthe power and then turn it on again

GPS WAAS Chooses how to use theWAAS signal when connecting with a

WAAS receiver for example GP-320B

Note WAAS is currently in thedevelopmental phase During thedevelopmental phase the reliability andavailability of the WAAS signal cannotbe guaranteed Therefore any positiondata should be verified against othersources to confirm reliability

1 Display the Installation menu2 Choose GPS WAAS and then press

to open the GPS WAAS options

window

Off

WAAS options window3 Press or to choose ldquoWAAS-02rdquo

(test signal) When the systembecomes operational (in 2003) setto ldquo00rdquo (regular WAAS signal)

4 Turn off the power

BOTTOM LEVEL If the depthindication is unstable in automaticoperation or the bottom echo cannot bedisplayed in the darkest gray tone byadjusting the gain controls in manualoperation you may adjust the bottomecho level detection circuit for both 50kHz and 200 kHz to stabilize theindication Generally lower the bottomlevel for inner hull installation where thereceive level is too low If the bottomlevel is too low it may be difficult todiscriminate fish from the bottomresulting in unstable depth indication

And if the bottom level is too high thedepth indication may not appear

1 At the installation menu press tochoose SET BOTTOM LEVEL andthen press Several seconds laterthe following display appears

Bottom level +0 (200k -100 - +100 ) +0 ( 50k -100 - +100 )

Bottom level display

2 While observing the picture use or to set 200 kHz or to set50 kHz Set up for optimum picture

3 To restore normal operation turn offthe power and then it on again

Note The mode must be other thanldquoNAV DATArdquo to show the bottom leveldisplay

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4448

SP - 1 E2371S01C

SPECIFICATIONS OF ECHO SOUNDER LS-4100

1 GENERAL11 TX Frequency 50 kHz or 200 kHz 50200 kHz dual transmitting selectable12 Transmit Method Single or dual transmitting

13 Output Power 300 Wrms14 TX Rate Max 500 pulsemin15 Pulse-length 01 to 08 ms

2 DISPLAY UNIT21 Display system 5-inch monochrome LCD 76 mm (W) x 100 mm (H) 240 x 320 dots22 Display Mode Single frequency (highlow freq) Dual-frequency Zoom Nav data-12

Marker zoom Bottom zoom Bottom-lock23 Display Range

Range SettingRange

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

Display

rangeMeter 5 10 20 40 80 150 200 300 2-500

Feet 15 30 60 120 200 400 600 1000 7-1500

Fathoms 3 5 10 20 40 80 100 150 1-250

PassiBraza 3 5 10 30 50 100 150 200 1-300

24 Range Shift 0-500 m 0-1500 ft 0-250 fa 0-300 pb25 Expansion Range Bottom-lock expansion 3 to 10 m

Sectional expansion 2 to 50 m26 Display Advance Speed 8 steps (LinesTX Freeze 1161814121121 41)

3 INTERFACE31 Input data sentences IEC61162-1NMEA0183 Ver 152030

GGA RMA RMB RMC BWC GLL HDT HDG VTG VHW MTWMWV MDA XTE

32 Output data sentences IEC61162-1NMEA0183 Ver 152030 interval 2 sMTW VHW DBT DPT RMB TLL by key operating External data required

4 POWER SUPPLY41 Display Unit 12 VDC 05 A

5 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITION51 Ambient Temperature Display unit -15degC to +55degC52 Relative Humidity 93 or less at 40degC53 Waterproof IPX5

6 COATING COLOR61 Display Unit N30

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4548

M a r

4

0 3

D-1

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4648

Mar 4 03

Mar 4 03

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4748

M a r

3

0 3

S-1

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4848

FURUNO Authorized DistributorDealer FURUNO Authorized DistributorDealer

9-52 Ashihara-cho9-52 Ashihara-choNishinomiya 662-8580 JAPANNishinomiya 662-8580 JAPAN

Telephone Telephone 0798-65-21110798-65-2111FaxFax 0798-65-42000798-65-4200

FIRST EDITION FIRST EDITION MARMAR 20032003Printed in JapanPrinted in Japan All rights reserved All rights reserved

B1B1 SEPSEP 09 200509 2005

Pub NoPub No OME-23710OME-23710 00014698000000146980000001469800000014698000(( DAMIDAMI )) LS-4100LS-4100

0 0 0 1 4 6 9 8 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 4 6 9 8 0 0 0

Page 14: OME23710B_1_LS4100

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 1448

8

18 Measuring DepthThe VRM (Variable Range Marker)functions to measure the depth to fishschools etc1 Press or $ to place the VRM

on the object which you wish tomeasure range

2 Read the VRM depth just abovethe VRM

0

20

40

60

80496

398

VRM

VRM depth

50k 11

How to measure depth with the VRM

19 Choosing PictureAdvance Speed

The picture advance speed determineshow quickly the vertical scan lines runacross the screen When choosing apicture advance speed keep in mindthat a fast advance speed will expandthe size of the fish school horizontallyon the screen and a slow advancespeed will contract it Note that thepicture is not refreshed when pictureadvancement is stopped Thereforeuse caution when steering the vesselunder this condition

Fast Slow Picture and picture advancement speed

1 Press the [MENUESC] key to openthe main menu

2 Choose PIC ADVANCE from page 1of the menu

3 Press to show the optionswindow

Stop116 18 14 12 11 21 41

(

)

Fast

Slow

Picture advance options window

4 Use or $ to choose pictureadvance speed desired Thefractions in the options windowdenote the number of scan linesproduced per transmission Forexample 18 means one scan line isproduced every 8 transmissionsldquoStoprdquo freezes the display and it isconvenient for taking a photo

The picture is not refreshed whenpicture advancement is stopped

Maneuvering the vessel in this conditionmay result in a dangerous situation

UTION

5 Press the [MENUESC] key to closethe menu

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 1548

9

110 SuppressingInterference

Interference from other acousticequipment operating nearby or other

electronic equipment on your boat mayshow itself on the display as shown inthe figure belowTo suppress interference do thefollowing1 Press the [MENUESC] key to open

the main menu2 Use or $ to choose NOISE LIMIT

from page 1 of the menu3 Press to show the options

window4 Use or $ to choose the degree ofsuppression desired Off LowMedium or High (highest)

5 Press the [MENUESC] key to closethe menu

Interference fromother sounder

Electrical interference

Forms of interference

Turn the noise limiter off when nointerference exists otherwise weakechoes may be missed

111 Suppressing LowLevel Noise

Low intensity ldquospecklesrdquo may appearover most of screen This is mainly due

to sediment in the water or noise Thesecan be suppressed by adjustingCLUTTER on the menu When theautomatic mode is on clutter isautomatically rejected To suppress lowlevel noise in manual sounder operationdo the following1 Press the [MENUESC] key to open

the main menu2 Use or $ to choose CLUTTER

from page 1 of the menu3 Press to show the optionswindow

4 Use or $ to choose the degree ofsuppression desired 1 2 3 4 5 or6 The higher the number the greaterthe suppression

5 Press the [MENUESC] key to closethe menu

To turn off low-level noisesuppression choose Off at step 4 andthen press the [MENUESC] key

Clutter appearance

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 1648

10

112 Erasing WeakEchoes

Sediment in the water or reflectionsfrom plankton may be painted on the

display in low intensity tones

Weakechoes

Appearance of weak echoes

These weak echoes may be erased asfollows1 Press the [MENUESC] key to open

the main menu2 Use or $ to choose SIGNAL

LEVEL from page 1 of the menu3 Press to show the options

window4 Use or $ to choose the degree of

suppression desired Off Low orHigh (highest)

5 Press the [MENUESC] key to closethe menu

To turn off the signal level function choose Off at step 4 and then pressthe [MENUESC] key

113 A-scope DisplayThis display shows echoes at eachtransmission with amplitudes and toneproportional to their intensities on theright 14 of the screen It is useful forestimating the kind of fish school andbottom composition

Note In the dual frequency display the A-scope display is only available withthe high frequency display

323

10

20

30

40

0

A-scope display

Single frequency display

Strong

reflection(bottom)

Weakreflection(fish or noise)

50k 11

Strongreflection(fish)

A-scope display

1 Press the [MENUESC] key to openthe main menu

2 Press or $ to choose A-SCOPEfrom page 1 of the menu

3 Press to show the optionswindow

4 Press

or$

to choose the A-scope presentation type desiredNormal Display shows echoes ateach transmission with amplitudesand tone proportional to theirintensitiesPeak Peak-hold amplitude picture

5 Press the [MENUESC] key to closethe menu

To turn off the A-scope displaychoose Off at step 4 and then press the[MENUESC] key

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 1748

11

114 AlarmsAlarm description

The LS-4100 has six conditions whichgenerate both audio and visual alarms

bottom alarm normal fish alarm bottomlock fish alarm water temperature alarmarrival alarm and speed alarm (Thewater temperature arrival and speedalarms require appropriate sensors)

Bottom alarm The bottom alarm alertsyou when the bottom is within the alarmrange set To activate the bottom alarmthe depth must be displayed

Fish (normal) alarm The fish (normal)alarm tells you when fish are within thepreset alarm range

Fish (bottom lock) alarm The fish(bottom lock) alarm available with thebottom-lock mode sounds when fishare within a certain distance from thebottom Note that the bottom zoom

display must be turned on to use thisalarm

Water temperature alarm The watertemperature alarm alerts when thewater temperature is within (Insidealarm) the alarm range set orunderover (outside alarm) the rangeset

Speed alarm The speed alarm alertsyou when the speed is within (Insidealarm) or underover (Outside alarm)the preset speed

Arrival alarm The arrival alarm alertswhen you are near a waypoint by thedistance set

Activating an alarm

1 Press the [MENUESC] key2 Press or $ to choose ALARM

MENU from page 2 on the menu3 Press the to show the ALARM

menu

ALARM

(12)

[MENU] Exit

ALARM

(22)

[MENU] Exit

BOTTOM On FROM 5ft

RANGE 10ftFISH(Normal) On

FROM 5ft RANGE 10ftFISH(BL) On

FROM 8ft RANGE 10ftFISH LEVEL Medium

TEMPERATURE Inside FROM 724 deg F RANGE 10 deg F

SPEED Off FROM 00kt

RANGE 10kt

ARRIVAL ALRM Off RANGE 0 01 m

Pageno

Gray characters mean alarm is inactive Alarm menu

4 Use or $ to choose an alarm asappropriate

5 Press to show the options menu

Off On

Off InsideOutside

Temp Speed Alarm Types

Fish ArrivalBottom AlarmOnOff

Alarm options6 Use or $ to choose alarm type

Off Alarm off On Alarm onInside Alarm generated whenspeed (or water temperature) iswithin the range setOutside Alarm generated whenspeed (or water temperature) isoutside the range set

7 Press to close the windowFor ARRIVAL ALARM setting skip tostep 12

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 1848

12

8 Press $ to choose FROM9 Press to show the options menu

0ft

Depth

632 deg F

Temperature

10 kt

Speed Depth temperature speed setting

window10 Use or $ to set starting depth

temperature or speed as appropriateFor FISH (BL) the starting depth isthe range from the bottom

11 Press to close the window12 Press $ to choose RANGE13 Press to show the options menu14 Use or $ to set alarm range15 For the bottom alarm temperature

alarm speed alarm or arrivalalarm press the [MENUESC] key tofinish For a fish alarm press toclose the window and then go tostep 16

16 Press $ to choose FISH LEVEL17 Press to show the options menu

Weak

MediumStrong Fish level options

18 Use or $ to choose the echostrength level which will trigger a fishalarm

Weak Weak echoes (weakest toneon level bar)Medium Medium strength echoes

(middle tone on level bar)Strong Strong echoes (darkest toneon level bar)

19 Press the [MENUESC] key twice toclose the menu

Alarm range marker Bottom alarm Fish alarm (normal) Right Fish alarm (bottomlock) Left

Alarm icon

Alarm rangeStartingpoint

Bottom alarm Fish alarm (normal) Fish alarm (BL)

Temperature alarm (deg

C ordeg

F shown) Speed alarm Arrival alarm

Alarm icon (Appropriate icon appears to showwhich alarm has been violated)

How the alarm works

Note To disable an alarm choose Offat step 5 in the above procedure

Silencing the buzzer

The buzzer sounds and the appropriatealarm icon appears and flashes whenan alarm is violated You can silence thebuzzer by pressing any key Howeverthe buzzer will sound whenever thealarm setting is violated

Note The audio and visual alarms arereleased against the last-violated alarmwhen multiple alarms are active

115 WaypointsWaypoints may be used tobull Record the position of an important

echo as waypoint 12 points may beregistered

bull Output a waypoint position to a plotterto mark position on its screen

bull Find range bearing and time-to-go toa location (waypoint)

Note Requires latitude and longitudeposition from a navigator

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 1948

13

Registering a waypoint on thescreen

1 Press the [MARK] key The cursorappears along with waypoint entryinstructions To enter a waypoint tothe current own shiprsquos position go tostep 3Note If there is no position data themessage ldquoNo position datardquo appearsCheck the navigator

50k

496

1100

20

40

60

80

0

Cursor

WAYPOINT ENTRY

( Move) Cursor [MARK] Enter [MENU] Cancel

50 kHz display

2 Press the cursor pad to set thecursor where desired Pictureadvancement is stopped until step 3is completed and the instructionwindow is integrated into the navdisplay

3 Press the [MARK] key again WhenTLL or FURUNO-TLL is selected atTLL OUTPUT on the System menuthe latitude and longitude position atthe cursor is output to the navigator

A vertical line marks location Furtherthe display shows the waypointname (next sequential number) andposition of the location selected atstep 2

WAYPOINTName FREQLat 34 deg 22796NLon 136 deg 07264E

05

[MENU] Exit

rase

Waypoint data display

Note If you attempt to enter 13thwaypoint the message ldquoMemoryfullrdquo appears In this case erase anunwanted waypoint to enable entry

4 To save the waypoint under thename shown go to step 8 or go tostep 5 to change its name

5 Press to open the waypoint nameentry window

WAYPOINTName FREQLat 34 deg 22796NLon 136 deg 07264E

05

[MENU] Exit

01------ ENT

rase

Waypoint window name entry6 Use or to set character $ or

to shift cursor The name mayconsist of 10 alphanumericcharactersNote Character order is 0 1hellip9 - A BhellipZ _ 0hellip

7 Press to choose ENT 8 Press the [MENUESC] key to

register the waypoint

Registering waypoint by LL

1 Press the [MENUESC] key to openthe main menu

2 Use or to choose WAYPOINTLIST from page 2 of the menu

3 Press

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 2048

14

WAYPOINT LIST

01 0102 0303------------------------------------------------------

[MENU] Exit

Waypoint list4 Press or to choose an empty

waypoint and press Press again

NEW WAYPOINTName FREQLat 34 deg 22796NLon 136 deg 07264E

05

[MENU] Exit

04------ ENT

rase

New waypoint window name entry

5 Use or to set character $ or to shift cursor

6 Press to select ENT 7 Enter latitude and longitude similar

to how you entered waypoint name8 Press the [MENUESC] key to

register the waypoint

Editing waypoints Press the [MENUESC] key to open

the main menu

2 Use or to choose WAYPOINTLIST from page 2 of the menu

3 Press to open the waypoints list4 Use or to choose a waypoint

and press 5 Use or to choose the item to

edit (name latitude or longitude)6 Press to open the data entry

window7 Use or to set character $ or

to choose location8 Press to choose ENT 9 Press the [MENUESC] key

Erasing waypoints Press the [MENUESC] key2 Use or to choose WAYPOINT

LIST from page 2 of the menu3 Press to open the waypoints list

4 Use or to choose the waypointto erase and then press Note You cannot erase a waypointwhich is selected as ldquoGOTO WPTrdquo

5 Press to choose ldquoEraserdquo6 Press to open the options window7 Press to select YES to erase the

waypoint The waypoint list appearswith the erased waypoint blank

8 Press the [MENUESC] key twice toclose the menu

Setting destination waypoint

Set a destination waypoint to find rangebearing and time-to-go to that point Youcan see range and bearing to awaypoint Time-to-go is shown on theTime to Go digital display

Press the [MENUESC] key to openthe main menu

2 Use or to choose GOTO WPTfrom page 2 of the menu

3 Press to open the waypoints list

Off01020304----------------------------------------------------------------

Waypoint list

4 Use or to choose a waypoint5 Press the [MENUESC] key to close

the menu

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 2148

15

116 Setting Up Nav DataDisplays

The user may arrange the nav datadisplays as desired

1 Use the [MODE] key to show theNAV DATA-1 or 2 display whicheveryou want to set up

2 Press the [MENUESC] key to closethe mode selection window

3 Press the cursor pad to display theNAV DATA SETUP window

NAV DATA SETUP

Window Selection Data Selection

[MENU] Exit

NAV DATA SETUP window

4 Use or to choose a datadisplay window desired Adashed-line rectangle circumscribesyour selection

5 Use

or$

to choose item todisplay See the below for adescription of the displays

(9)

(1)

(2)

(3)

(4)(5)

(6)(7)(8)

Two-data

display

Three-data

display

Four-data

displayItems displayable in (1) - (3) depth positioncourse range and bearing trip distanceodometer water temperature headingair pressure time-to-go to destination waypointXTE speed wind speed and directiondestination waypoint data compassItems displayable in (4) - (9) depth positionspeed course range and bearing trip distanceodometer water temperature headingair pressure time-to-go to destination waypointXTE wind speed wind direction

= Graphic display

Nav data window and item displayable6 Press the [MENUESC] key to finish

Note You can choose the number ofitems to show in a nav data display withNAV DATA-1 and NAV DATA-2 on theSystem menu

GRAPHIC DISPLAYS

1 05 0 05 1

Wpt 03Rng 019nm Brg 321 deg XTE 000nm Cse 333 deg

DESTINATION WAYPOINT GRAPHIC

XTEscale

BearingCourseDestinationwaypointdirection

DestinationwaypointdataNameRangeXTE

Wind APP

WIND GRAPHIC

60

120

90

030

150180

120

150

90

60

30

120 deg

Speed 103 ms

COMPASS GRAPHIC

SPEED GRAPHIC

172

Speed

20

50

40

60

30

10

01 05 0 05 1

025 nm

XTE

XTE GRAPHIC

kt

Bearing todestinationwaypoint

Course

Brg30 deg

Cse90 deg

N

E

XTE scale

Speed-ometer

Nav data display-1

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 2248

16

DIGITAL DISPLAYS

Course

123 deg

COURSE

Depth

328 ft

DEPTH

Heading TRUEMAG

318 deg

HEADING

Odometer

56 nm

ODOMETER

Position GPS 3D

30 deg 00065N130 deg 00574E

POSITION

Temperature

698 degF

WATER TEMPERATURE

Trip meter

121 nm

TRIP DISTANCE

Time to Go

00 H30 M

TIME-TO-GO

1018 hpa

AIR PRESSURE

Air Pressure

Speed

193 kt

SPEED

Rng

121 nm

RANGE amp BEARING

Brg

140 deg

Wind Speed APP

80 ms

WIND SPEED

Wind Dir APP

138 deg

WIND DIRECTION

APP or TRUE depending on menu setting TRUE or MAG depending

on menu settingamp To destination waypoint

Note 1 Nav data is updated with somedelay

Note 2 When data is lost 120 sec thedisplay shows - - at the locationwhere data is lost

= GPS receiving status (Displays whenconnecting with GP-310B320B and InOutis selected at the Installation menu)NO FIX Position cannot be foundGPS 2D 2D (dimension) GPS position fixGPS 3D 3D GPS fixGPS W2D 2D WAAS position fixGPS W3D 3D WAAS position fix

NAV data display-2

117 Other Menu ItemsThis section describes the menu itemsnot previously mentioned

Page 1

HUE (Picture Color)

Two picture color arrangements areavailable Day and Night Day showsechoes on a white background Nightshows them on a black background

1 Press the [MENUESC] key todisplay the menu

2 Use or $ to choose HUE frompage 1 of the menu

3 Press to show the optionswindow

4 Use or $ to choose Day or Nightas appropriate

5 Press the [MENUESC] key to closethe menu

WHITE LINE

The white line feature displays theleading edge of the bottom echo in

white This is useful for discriminatingbottom fish near the bottom

1 Press the [MENUESC] key todisplay the main menu

2 Use or $ to choose WHITE LINEfrom page 1 of the menu

3 Press to show the optionswindow

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 2348

17

4 Use or to choose Off Tone orMesh as appropriate ldquoMeshrdquo paintsthe white line in darker tone thanldquoTonerdquo

5 Press the [MENUESC] key to closethe menu

526White Line OFF White Line ON (Mesh)

Fish schoolclearly shown

White line

0

20

40

60

80

050k 11

526

0

20

40

60

80

00 050k 11

How white line works

DEEP GAIN

ldquoDeep Gainrdquo compensates forpropagation attenuation of the ultrasonicwaves It does this by equalizing echopresentation so that fish schools of thesame size appear in the same density inboth shallow and deep waters Inaddition it reduces surface noise

Press the [MENUESC] key to openthe main menu

2 Use or to choose DEEP GAINfrom page of the menu

3 Press $ to show to the optionswindow

4 Choose Low Medium or High asappropriate High provides thegreatest degree of gain reductionagainst short range echoes

5 Press the [MENUESC] key to closethe menu

Page 2

TRIP RESET

This item resets trip distance to ldquo0rdquo

Press the [MENUESC] key to openthe main menu

2 Use or to choose TRIPRESET from page 2 of the menu

3 Press $ 4 Press to reset trip distance

Beeps are generated while the tripdistance is being reset

5 Press the [MENUESC] key to closethe menu

Note To reset the odometer to zeroclear the memory

GAIN ADJ 200 GAIN ADJ 50

If the gain is too high or too low or thegain for the low and high frequenciesappears unbalanced you cancompensate it as follows

Press the [MENUESC] key to openthe main menu

2 Use or to choose GAIN ADJ200 or GAIN ADJ 50 from page 2 ofthe menu

3 Press $ to show to the optionswindow

4 Use or to set the amount Thesetting range is ndash50 to +50

5 Press the [MENUESC] key to close

the menu

DRAFT

The default depth display shows thedistance from the transducer If youwould rather show the distance from thesea surface set your shiprsquos draft asfollows

Press the [MENUESC] key to openthe main menu

2 Use or to choose DRAFT frompage 2 of the menu

3 Press $ and then use or to setdraft The setting range is ndash 50 to+500 (meters feet)

4 Press the [MENUESC] key to closethe menu

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 2448

18

2 SYSTEM MENU

The System menu mainly consists ofitems which once set do not requirefrequent adjustment You may displaythis menu by choosing SYSTEM MENUat page 2 of the main menu andpressing

SYSTEM MENULANGUAGE English

DEPTH UNIT ftSPEED UNIT ktWIND UNIT msTEMP UNIT deg F

TEMP GRAPH OffNAV DATA-1 NAV DATA-2

WATER TYPE SaltKEY BEEP OnBATT VOLTAGE Off (13)

[MENU] Exit

SYSTEM MENU

(23)

NAV DISPLAY TempSpeedNMEA0183 Ver 20TLL OUTPUT OffBEARING TrueWIND SPDDIR ApparentTRIP SOURCE Own

TEMP SOURCE OwnSPEED SOURCE OwnTEMP CALIB +00 deg F ( 40)SPEED CALIB +0 ( 50)

Own speed Own temp 100 kt 162 deg F

[MENU] Exit

SYSTEM MENU

(33)

BASIC RANGE1 15 ft

RANGE2 30RANGE3 60RANGE4 120RANGE5 200RANGE6 400RANGE7 600RANGE8 1000 (7-1500)

ZOOM RANGE 15 ft (7-150)BL RANGE 15 ft (10-30)(Bottom Lock)

ZOOM MARKER On

[MENU] Exit

PAGE 3

PAGE 2

PAGE 1

Page no

System menus

21 System MenuPage 1

LANGUAGE The system language isavailable in English several Europeanlanguages and Japanese To changelanguage select language desired andpress the [MENUESC] key

DEPTH UNIT Choose unit of depthmeasurement from meters feet

fathoms passibraza and hiro(Japanese)

SPEED UNIT Choose unit of speedmeasurement from knots miles perhour and kilometers per hour Requiresspeed data

WIND UNIT Choose unit of wind speedmeasurement from ms kt kmh and

mph Requires wind speed data

TEMP UNIT Choose unit oftemperature measurement Celsius orFahrenheit Requires temperature data

TEMP GRAPH Turns the watertemperature display on or off Thetemperature scale range is 16deg (degF) inldquoNarrowrdquo 40deg (degF) in ldquoWiderdquo Requires

water temperature data

m526

0

20

40

60

80

00 050k 11

40

80

70

50

60

TemperatureScale

TemperatureGraph

638 deg F162kt

Water temperature display (wide degF)

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 2548

19

NAV DATA-1 -2 Choose the number ofnavigation data items to display on thenav data displays from two three orfour items Requires appropriate navdata

WATER TYPE Choose the water typewith which to use the LS-4100 fromSalt or Fresh

KEY BEEP Turn key beep on or off

BATT VOLTAGE Turn the batteryvoltage indication (appears at the topright corner on the screen) on or offWhen on it replaces the picture advancespeed indication

Page 2

NAV DISPLAY Choose the nav data todisplay in the nav data window at thetop left-hand corner You may choosefrom temperaturespeedlatitudelongitude range and bearingcourse over ground trip distance or

wind speed Requires appropriate navdata

407 deg F162kt

Nav window

NMEA0183 Choose NMEA version ofnavigator Ver 15 Ver 20 or Ver 30

TLL OUTPUT Enablesdisables outputof TLL (Target Latitude Longitude)position when the [MARK] key isoperated ldquoTLLrdquo outputs latitude andlongitude position ldquoFURUNO-TLLrdquoavailable with connection of navigatorthat can output FURUNO TLL outputslatitude and longitude watertemperature depth etc

BEARING Shiprsquos course and bearingto a waypoint may be displayed in trueor magnetic bearing Magnetic bearingis true bearing plus (or minus) earthrsquosmagnetic deviation Requires bearingdata

WIND SPDDIR Choose the windspeed and direction reference from trueand apparent Requires wind sensorApparen t The direction (in relation toshiprsquos bow) and speed of the wind as itappears to those on board relative tothe speed and direction of the boatcombination of the true wind and thewind caused by the boats movementTrue The speed and direction (inrelation to shiprsquos bow) of the wind felt ormeasured when stationary

TRIP SOURCE Choose speed sourcefor the trip distance indication Own(transducer with speed sensor orseparate speed sensor) or NMEA

TEMP SOURCE Choose source ofwater temperature input Off Own(transducer with water temperaturesensor or separate temperature sensor)or NMEA

SPEED SOURCE Choose source ofspeed input Off Own (transducer withspeed sensor or separate speedsensor) or NMEA Requires speed

data

TEMP CALIB If the water temperaturesensor-generated water temperatureindication is wrong you can correct ithere when ldquoOwnrdquo is selected astemperature source For example if thewater temperature indication is 2deghigher than actual water temperatureenter -2 The setting range is -40degF to

+40degF

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 2648

20

SPEED CALIB If the speedsensor-generated speed indication iswrong you can correct it here whenldquoOwnrdquo is selected as speed source Forexample if the speed indication is 10lower than actual speed enter +10 Thesetting range is ndash50 to +50

Page 3

BASIC RANGE 1 - BASIC RANGE 8 Set range of each of the eight basicranges (Selectable range 7 to 1500 ft)Note 1 All default basic ranges arerestored whenever the depth unit ischanged Therefore change the depth

unit before changing the basic rangesNote 2 A range may not be lower thanthe range preceding it For example ifbasic range 3 is 60 feet basic range 4must be greater than 60 feet

ZOOM RANGE Choose the range tozoom in the marker-zoom andbottom-zoom modes You may choose arange between 7 and 150 feet (2 and 50

meters)

BL RANGE The expansion width forthe bottom-lock display can be chosenfrom 10 to 30 feet (3 and 10 meters)

ZOOM MARKER The zoom markerappears in the normal bottom markerand bottom zoom displays and marksthe area which is expanded in the

bottom marker and bottom zoompictures You can turn the marker on oroff as desired

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 2748

21

3 MAINTENANCETROUBLESHOOTING

W RNING

ELECTRICAL SHOCK HAZARDDo not open the equipment

Only qualified personnel should workinside the equipment

31 Maintenance

Regular maintenance is essential forgood performance Checking the itemslisted in the table below monthly willhelp keep your equipment in goodshape for years to come

Checking

Item Action

Transducercable

Check cable for damage

Power cabletransducercable plug

Check that they are tightlyfastened Refasten ifnecessary

Display unitground

Check for corrosion Cleanif necessary

Power supplyvoltage

Check voltage If out ofrating correct problem

32 Cleaning the DisplayUnit

Dust or dirt on the display unit can beremoved with a soft cloth If desired awater-moistened cloth may be usedUse special care when cleaning theLCD since it scratches easily Do notuse chemical cleaners to clean thedisplay unit - they can remove paint andmarkings

33 TransducerMaintenance

Marine life on the transducer face willresult in a gradual decrease insensitivity Check the transducer facefor cleanliness each time the boat isdry-docked Carefully remove anymarine life with a piece of wood orfine-grade sandpaper

34 Replacing the FuseThe fuse in the power cable protects thesystem from reverse polarity of thepower supply and equipment fault If thefuse blows find the cause beforereplacing it Use only a 1A fuse (FGMB 1A 125V Code No 000-114-805 ) orequivalent Using the wrong fuse will damage the unit and void the warranty

W RNINGUse the proper fuse

Fuse rating is shown on the equipmentUse of a wrong fuse can result in fire anddamage the equipment

35 Battery Voltage Alert A battery icon appears when the batteryvoltage is too high or too low

Battery icon and meaning

Icon Meaning

Voltage is lower than 10 VDC If thevoltage goes below 9 V the equipmentis automatically turned off

Voltage is higher than 165 VDC If thevoltage goes higher than 175 V theequipment is automatically turned off

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 2848

22

36 TroubleshootingThe table below provides basictroubleshooting procedures which theuser may follow to restore normaloperation

Troubleshooting table

Ifhellip Then check hellipneither echo norfixed range scaleappears

bull battery voltagebull fusebull power cable

no echo appearsbut the fixedrange scaleappears

bull if display advancespeed is set to ldquoStoprdquo

bull transducer plugbull

transducer cableecho appears butno zero line

bull if range shifting is setto ldquo0rdquo

sensitivity is low bull gain settingbull if air bubbles or marine

life is clinging to thetransducer face

bull if sediments arepresent in the water

bull if the bottom is too soft

to return an echothere is extremeinterference ornoise

bull if the transducer is tooclose to the engine

bull if the unit is properlygrounded

bull if other echo soundersof the same frequencyas own are beingoperated nearby

the speedwatertemperaturereadout isunrealistic or notpresent

bull sensor plug

the positionreadout isunrealistic or notpresent

bull the connectionbetween sounder andnavigator

bull navigator

37 DiagnosticsIf you feel your unit is not workingproperly conduct the diagnostic test tofind the problem If you cannot restorenormal operation contact your dealerfor advice

1 Turn on the power while pressing the[MENUESC] key Continue pressingthe [MENUESC] key until theInstallation menu appears

SIMULATION On

TEST LCD PATTERN MEMORY CLEAR

NMEA PORT InOutNMEA MIX Off GPS WAAS Off

SET BOTTOM LEVEL

Installation Menu

= Setting cannot be changed whenNMEA PORT setting is InIn

Installation menu2 Press to choose TEST3 Press to start the test

ROM OKRAM OKNMEA

Temp 682 deg F

Speed 100kmh

Power 124 VBody 39 deg C

Program No 0252318-01Push [MENU] 3 times to exit

Level bar

= Program version no

Water

TemperatureSpeedBattery VoltageTemperatureinside displayunit(Unit fixed atdeg C)

GPS (48502180) OK

Only when GP-310B is connected(For GP-320B 4850238)

Test display

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 2948

23

4 The ROM RAM and NMEA port arechecked with the results shown asOK or NG (No Good) For any NGrequest service (A special connectoris required to test the NMEA portNothing appears if no connector isconnected)

5 The squares at the right side of thetest display are for checking thecontrols Press each key and thearrows on the Cursor Pad one byone A controlrsquos correspondingon-screen square ldquolightsrdquo in black ifthe control is normal

6 To return to the Installation menupress the [MENUESC] key threetimes

7 To restore normal operation turn offthe power and turn it on again

38 Test PatternThis feature tests for proper display oftones

1 On the Installation menu press $ tochoose LCD PATTERN

2 Press to start the test The entirescreen is black

3 Press again and the screen turnswhite

4 Press again and the screenshows a four-toned display

5 Press again to return to theInstallation menu

6 To restore normal operation turn offthe power and then it on again

WHITE FOUR-TONE BLACK

Test patterns

39 Memory ClearThe memory can be cleared to startafresh with default menu settings

1 At the installation menu press $ tochoose MEMORY CLEAR

2 Press to open the optionswindow

YES NO

Clear memory display

3 Press to clear the memory Beepsare generated while the memory isbeing cleared

4 To restore normal operation turn offthe power and then turn it on again

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3048

24

4 INSTALLATION

41 Display UnitMounting considerations

The display unit can be installed on adesktop on the bulkhead or flushmounted in a panel When choosing alocation keep the following in mind

bull Keep the display unit out of directsunlight

bull The temperature and humidity should

be moderate and stablebull Locate the unit away from exhaust

pipes and ventsbull The mounting location should be well

ventilatedbull Mount the unit where shock and

vibration are minimalbull For maintenance and checking

purposes leave sufficient space atthe sides and rear of the unit andleave slack in cables

bull A magnetic compass will be affected ifthe display unit is placed too close toit Observe the following compasssafe distances to prevent disturbanceto the magnetic compassStandard compass 04 metersSteering compass 03 meters

Desktop overhead mounting1 Fix the bracket to a desktop or the

overhead with tapping screws(supplied)

2 Loosely screw knobs into the displayunit

3 Set the display unit to the bracketand then tighten the knobs

Mounting on the bulkhead Flush

mounting in a panelSee the instructions on the bulkhead orflush mounting template (supplied)

42 Thru-hull MountTransducer

Transducer mounting location

The thru-hull mount transducer

(520-5PSD 520-5MSD) provides thebest performance of all since thetransducer protrudes from the hull andthe effect of air bubbles and turbulencenear the hull skin is reduced When theboat has a keel the transducer shouldbe at least 30 cm away from it Typicalthru-hull mountings are shown in thefigure on the next page

The performance of this sounder isdirectly related to the mounting locationof the transducer especially forhigh-speed cruising The installationshould be planned in advance keepingthe standard cable length (8 m) and thefollowing factors in mindbull Air bubbles and turbulence caused by

movement of the boat seriouslydegrade the sounding capability of thetransducer The transducer shouldtherefore be located in a positionwhere water flow is the smoothestNoise from the propellers alsoadversely affects performance andthe transducer should not be mountednearby The lifting strakes arenotorious for creating acoustic noiseand these must be avoided bykeeping the transducer inboard ofthem

bull The transducer must always remain

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3148

25

submerged even when the boat isrolling pitching or up on a plane athigh speed

bull A practical choice would besomewhere between 13 and 12 of

the boatrsquos length from the stern Forplaning hulls a practical location isgenerally rather far astern so that thetransducer is always in waterregardless of the planing attitude

28

22

120

68

30

520-5PSD

24

120

68

87520-5MSD

Unit mm

Thru-hull mount transducer dimensions

Acceptable transducer mounting

locations

Position 12 to 13 of the hull from stern

15 to 30 cm off center line (inside first lifting strakes)

Within the wetted bottom area

Deadrise angle within 15 deg

HIGH SPEED-V HULL

Suitable transducer mounting locations

Typical thru-hull mounttransducer installations

FairingBlock

Flat Washer

Rubber Washer

Hull

Deep-V Hull

Hull

Flat Washer

Rubber Washer

Flat Hull

CorkWasher

Typical thru-hull mounttransducer installations

Procedure for installing thethru-hull mount transducer

1 With the boat hauled out of the watermark the location chosen formounting the transducer on thebottom of the hull

2 If the hull is not level within 15deg inany direction fairing blocks madeout of teak should be used betweenthe transducer and hull both insideand outside to keep the transducerface parallel with the water lineFabricate the fairing block as shownbelow and make the entire surfaceas smooth as possible to provide anundisturbed flow of water around thetransducer The fairing block shouldbe smaller than the transducer itselfto provide a channel to divert

turbulent water around the sides ofthe transducer rather than over itsface

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3248

26

BOWHole for stuffing tube

Upper Half

Lower Half

Saw along slopeof hull Construction of fairing block

3 Drill a hole just large enough to passthe threaded stuffing tube of thetransducer through the hull makingsure it is drilled vertically

4 Apply a sufficient amount of highquality caulking compound to the topsurface of the transducer around thethreads of the stuffing tube andinside the mounting hole (and fairingblocks if used) to ensure watertightmounting

5 Mount the transducer and fairingblocks and tighten the locking nutsBe sure that the transducer is

properly oriented and its workingface is parallel to the waterline

Note Do not over-stress the stuffingtube and locking nuts through excessivetightening since the wood block willswell when the boat is placed in thewater It is suggested that the nut betightened lightly at installation andretightened several days after the boat

has been launched

Transducer preparation

Before putting the boat in water wipethe face of the transducer thoroughlywith a detergent liquid soap This willlessen the time necessary for thetransducer to have good contact withthe water Otherwise the time requiredfor complete ldquosaturationrdquo ill belengthened and performance will bereduced

DO NOT paint the transducerPerformance will be affected

43 Transom MountTransducer

The transom mount transducer is verycommonly employed usually onrelatively small IO or outboard boatsDo not use this method on an inboardmotor boat because turbulence iscreated by the propeller ahead of thetransducer

520-5PWD

There are two methods of installationflush with hull (for flat hulls) andprojecting from hull (for deep V-hulls)

Flat Hull

D

Dgt50 cm

Deep-VHull

520-5PWD mounting locations

Installing the 520-5PWD on a flat hull

A suitable mounting location is at least50 cm away from the engine and wherethe water flow is smooth

1 Drill four pilot holes in the mountinglocation

2 Attach the transducer to the bracketwith 5 x 20 tapping screws(supplied)

3 Adjust the transducer position so thetransducer faces right to the bottom

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3348

27

Note If necessary to improve waterflow and minimize air bubblesstaying on the transducer faceincline the transducer about 5deg at therear This may require a certainamount of experimentation for finetuning at high cruising speeds

4 Fill the gap between the wedge frontof the transducer and transom withepoxy material to eliminate any airspaces

No1 M5 x 14

5 x 20

5 x 20

2 to 5

Tape

Hull

Transom mount transducer

mounting flush with hull

Installing the transom mounttransducer on a deep-V hull

This method is employed on deep-Vhulls and provides good performancebecause the effects of air bubbles areminimal Install the transducer parallelwith water surface not flush with hull Ifthe boat is placed on a trailer care mustbe taken not to damage the transducerwhen the boat is hauled out of the waterand put on the trailer

5 x 20

No 2M5 x 14

5 x 20

Transom mount transducermounted projecting from hull

525-5PWD

Choose the installation methoddepending on the rise angle of the hull

Transom

Transom

Stripe over 10

Parallel with hull

Mount at the stripe

less than 10

525-5PWD mounting location

Installing the 525-5PWD

Referring to ldquoInstalling the 520-5PWDrdquoin the left column for mounting of thebracket and the figure shown on the topof next page install the 525-5PWD tothe transom

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3448

28

2 to 5

Transducer

Bracket

Hull

Epoxy material

525-5PWD mounting

44 Inside-hullTransducer

The thru-hull mount transducer(520-5PSD 520-5MSD) may also beinstalled inside the hull following theprocedure below

Necessary tools

You will need the following toolsbull Sandpaper (100)bull Silicone sealantbull Silicone grease

Remarks on installationbull Turn off the engine and anchor the

boat while installing the equipmentbull Install the transducer in the engine

room

Choosing the mounting locationbull The mounting location should be

where the hull is of single-hullthickness and is void of air or flotationmaterials other than solid fiberglassbetween the transducer face and thewater

bull Do not place the transducer over hullstruts or ribs which run under the hull

bull Avoid a location where the risingangle of the hull exceeds 15deg tominimize the effect of the boatrsquosrolling

bull You will finalize the mounting location

through some trial and error Theprocedure for this is shown later

50 cm

50 cm15 cm15 cm

13

12

Transducer mountinglocation

Centerline

Inside-hull transducer mounting location

Attaching the transducer1 Clean the transducer face to remove

any foreign material Lightly roughenthe transducer face with 100sandpaper Also roughen the insideof the hull where the transducer is tobe mounted

2 Clean the transducer face again3 Warm the silicone sealant to 40degC

before usage to soften it Coat thetransducer face and mountinglocation with silicone sealant

Transducer

SiliconeSealant

Coating transducer facewith silicone sealant

4 Press the transducer firmly down onthe hull and gently twist it back andforth to remove any air which may betrapped in the silicone sealant

Checking the installation

1 Connect the battery to the display

unit2 Turn on the display unit

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3548

29

3 Press the [MODE] key to chooseSINGLE FREQ

4 Choose 50 kHz or 200 kHz and thenpress the [MENUESC] key to closethe mode menu

5 Press the [MENU] to show the mainmenu and then press to select

Auto mode6 Press to choose Off7 Press the [MENUESC] key8 Press the [GAIN] key to set the gain

to ldquo5rdquo and then press the[MENUESC] key

9 Press the [RANGE] key to set therange to 10 meters (feet) and thenpress the [MENUESC] key

10 If the bottom is displayed in darkgray and the depth indicationappears the mounting location issuitable Go to ldquoFinal preparationrdquo

11 If the bottom is not displayed in darkgray tone the mounting location maybe unsuitable Do the followinga) Press the [POWERBRILL] key to

turn off the powerb) Gently dismount the transducer

with a piece of woodc) Reattach the transducer

elsewhere as shown in ldquoAttachingthe transducerrdquo

d) Check the installation again

Final preparation

Support the transducer with a piece ofwood to keep it in place while it is drying

Let the transducer dry 24-72 hours

45 Optional Triducer525ST-MSD

The optional triducer 525ST-MSD isdesigned for thru-hull mounting Forhow to install this transducer seeparagraph 42

φ79 mm

33 mm200-12 UNthreads

φ51 mm

27 mm

7 mm

140 mm Triducer 525ST-MSD

525ST-PWD

The Transom Mount Transducer orTRIDUCER reg Multisensor with IntegralRelease Bracket 525ST-PWD ismanufactured by AIRMAR Co Theseinstructions are also included with the

sensor

Pre-test for speed and temperature

Connect the sensor to the instrumentand spin the paddlewheel Check for aspeed reading and the approximate airtemperature If there is no readingreturn the sensor to your place ofpurchase

Tools and materials needed

ScissorsMasking tapeSafety gogglesDust maskElectric drillDrill bit for

Bracket holes 4mm 23 or 964rdquoFiberglass hull chamfer bit(preferred)6mm or 14rdquo

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3648

30

Transom hole 19mm or 34rdquo(optional)

Cable clamp holes 3mm or 18rdquoScrewdriversStraight edgeMarine sealantPencilZip-tiesWater-based antifouling paint(mandatory in salt water )

Mounting location

To ensure the best performance thesensor must be submerged inaeration-free and turbulence-free water

Mount the sensor close to the centerlineof the boat On slower heavierdisplacement hulls positioning it fartherfrom the centerline is acceptable

Allow adequate space above thebracket for it to release and rotate thesensor upward

Height

Height withoutspeed sensor191mm (7-12)Height withspeed sensor213mm (8-12)

Height required at mounting location

Note 1 Do not mount the sensor in anarea of turbulence or bubbles nearwater intake or discharge openingsbehind strakes struts fittings or hull

irregularities behind eroding paint (anindication of turbulence)Note 2 Avoid mounting the sensorwhere the boat may be supportedduring trailering launching hauling andstorageNote 3 For single drive boat mounton the starboard side at least 75 mm(3rdquo) beyond the swing radius of thepropeller

75 mm(3)

minimum beyondswing radius

Mounting location on single drive boat

Note 4 For twin drive boat mountbetween the drives

Installation of bracket

1 Cut out the installation template

shown on the next page2 At the selected location position thetemplate so the arrow at the bottomis aligned with the bottom edge ofthe transom Being sure the templateis parallel to the waterline tape it inplace

Align template vertically

Deadrise angle

Slope of hullparallel towaterline

Align template arrow withbottom edge of transom

Positioning the template

Warning Always wear safetygoggles and a dust mask

3 Using a 4 mm 23 or 964rdquo bit drillthree holes 22 mm (78rdquo) deepat the locations indicated To preventdrilling too deeply wrap maskingtape around the bit 22 mm (78rdquo)from the pointFiberglass hull Minimize surfacecracking by chamfering the gelcoatIf a chamfer bit or countersink bit is

not available start drilling with a6mm or 14rdquo bit to a depth of 1 mm(116rdquo)

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3748

31

4 If you know your transom angle the

bracket is designed for a standard13deg transom angle11deg-18deg angle No shim is requiredSkip to step 3 in ldquoAdjustingrdquoOther angles The shim is requiredSkip to step 2 of ldquoAdjustingrdquoIf you do not know the transom angletemporarily attach the bracket andsensor to the transom to determine ifthe plastic shim is needed

5 Using the two 10 x 1-14rdquo

self-tapping screws temporarilyscrew the bracket to the hull DONOT tighten the screws completelyat this time Follow the step 1-4 inldquoAttaching the Sensor to the Bracketrdquobefore proceeding with ldquoAdjustingrdquo

Installation templatefor starboard side of boat

Drill at locations labeled Bfor the following transom angles

16 deg through 22 deg

Drill at locations labeled Afor the following transom angles

2 deg through 15 deg

Align arrow with bottom of transom

AA A

BB B

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3848

32

Adjusting

1 Using a straight edge sight theunderside of the sensor relative tothe underside of the hull The sternof the sensor should be 1-3 mm

(116-18rdquo) below the bow of thesensor or parallel to the bottom ofthe hull

11 deg transom angleNO SHIM

12-18 deg transom angleNO SHIM

2 deg -10 deg transom

angle

19 deg -22 deg transom

angleshim withtaper up

shim withtaper down

parallelparallel parallel

slightangle

angletoo steep

anglereversed

YES NONO

YES YESYES

Sensor position and transom angle

Note Do not position the bow of thesensor lower than the stern becauseaeration will occur

2 To adjust the sensorrsquos angle relativeto the hull use the tapered plasticshim provided If the bracket hasbeen temporarily fastened to thetransom remove it Key the shim in

place on the back of the bracket2deg-10deg transom angle (steppedtransom and jet boats) Positionthe shim with the tapered end down19deg-22deg transom angle (smallaluminum and fiberglass boats) Position the shim with the taperedend up

3 If the bracket has been temporarilyfastened to the transom remove it

Apply a marine sealant to thethreads of the two 10 x 1-14rdquo self

tapping screws to prevent waterseeping into the transom Screw thebracket to the hull Do not tighten thescrews completely at this time

4 Repeat step 1 to ensure that theangle of the sensor is correctNote Do not position the sensorfarther into the water than necessaryto avoid increasing drag spray andwater noise and reducing boatspeed

5 Using the vertical adjustment spaceon the bracket slots slide the sensorup or down to provide a projection of3 mm (18rdquo) Tighten the screws

Cable cover

Cableclamp

50 mm (2)

Hull projection 3 mm (18)

Vertical adjustment and cable routing

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3948

33

Attaching the sensor to the bracket

1 If the retaining cover near the top ofthe bracket is closed open it bydepressing the latch and rotating thecover downward

Step 1 Step 2

Latch

Retainingcover

Pivotarm (2)

Slot (2)

Step 4

Step 3

Attaching the sensor to the bracket

2 Insert the sensorrsquos pivot arms intothe slots near the top of the bracket

3 Maintain pressure until the pivotarms click into place

4 Rotate the sensor downward until thebottom snaps into the bracket

5 Close the retaining cover to preventthe accidental release of the sensorwhen the boat is underway

Cable routing

Route the sensor cable over thetransom through a drain hole orthorough a new hole drilled in thetransom above the waterline

Never cut the cable or remote the

connector this will void the warranty Always wear safety goggles and a dustmask

1 If a hole must be drilled choose alocation well above the waterlineCheck for obstructions such as trimtabs pumps or wiring inside the hullMark the location with a pencil Drilla hole through the transom using a19 mm or 34rdquo bit (to accommodatethe connector)

2 Route the cable over or through thetransom

3 On the outside of the hull secure thecable against the transom using thecable clamps Position a cable clamp50 mm(2rdquo) above the bracket andmark the mounting hole with apencil

4 Position the second cable clamphalfway between the first clamp andthe cable hole Mark this mountinghole

5 If a hole has been drilled in thetransom open the appropriate slot inthe transom cable cover Position thecover over the cable where it entersthe hull Mark the two mounting

holes6 At each of the marked locations usea 3 mm or 18rdquo bit to drill a hole 10mm (38rdquo) deep The prevent drillingtoo deeply wrap masking tapearound the bit 10 mm (38rdquo) from thepoint

7 Apply marine sealant to the threadsof the 6 x 12rdquo self-tapping screw toprevent water from seeping into the

transom If you have drilled a holethrough the transom apply marinesealant to the space around thecable where it passes through thetransom

8 Position the two cable clamps andfasten them in place If used pushthe cable cover over the cable andscrew it in place

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4048

34

9 Route the cable to the instrumentbeing careful not to tear the cable

jacket when passing it though thebulkhead(s) and other parts of theboat To reduce electricalinterference separate the sensorcable from other electrical wiring andldquonoiserdquo sources Coil any excesscable and secure it in place withzip-ties to prevent damage

46 Optional WaterTemperatureSpeedSensor

Water temperaturespeed sensorST-02MSB and ST-02PSB which aredesigned for thru-hull mounting areoptionally available Install them asshown below

Mounting considerations

Choose a suitable mounting locationconsidering the followingbull Choose a place free from vibrationbull Choose a mid-boat flat position The

sensor does not have to be installedperfectly perpendicular The sensormust not be damaged in dry-dockingoperation

bull Choose a place apart from equipmentgenerating heat

bull Choose a place in the forwarddirection viewing from the drain holeto allow for circulation of coolingwater

1 Dry-dock the boat2 Make a hole of approx 51 mm

diameter in the mounting location3 Unfasten locknut and remove the

sensor section4 Apply high-grade sealant to the

flange of the sensor5 Pass the sensor casing through thehole

6 Face the notch on the sensor towardboatrsquos bow and tighten the flange

7 Set the sensor section to the sensorcasing and tighten the locknut

8 Launch the boat and check for waterleakage around the sensor

Locknut

Face notchtoward bow

Flange Nut

Coat withsilicone sealant Brim

φ 77

51

123

Water temperaturespeed sensor

ST-02MSB ST-02PSB

47 Wiring

Connect the LS-4100 powerdata cableassy MJ-A7SPF0005-020 (2 msupplied) to the POWER and thetransducer cable to the XDR connectorRefer to the interconnection diagram toconnect cables Leave slack in cables tofacilitate checking and maintenance

Note The fuse holder contains a springwhich fixes the fuse To preventdetachment of the spring which wouldcause loss of power tie the line asshown below

+ line (red)

Fuse holder

Cable tie How to fix fuse holder

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4148

35

Establishing the ground

The ground wire (125 sq or more localsupply) should be as short as possible

The signal line ground is isolated from

the chassis ground however the powerline is not insulated Therefore whenconnecting eternal equipment havingpositive ground do not ground thesignal line to the chassis If excessivenoise shows on the screen the groundmay be inadequate In this case attacha steel plate measuring 20 cm by 30 cmon the outside of the hull to provide aground point Connect the ground wire

there Use a ldquoclosedrdquo type lug ( ) tomake the connection at the display unitDo not use an ldquoopenrdquo type lug ( )

Optional equipment

POWER connector

The power supply port is commonlyused for connection of externalequipment such as a GPS receiver orwind indicator Use the powerdatacable MJ-A7SPF0005-020 (supplied) forconnection referring the figure shown inthe right column

Connector Color Remarks

1 TD-A WHT2 TD-B BLU

IEC-61162-1NMEA0183

3 RD-A YEL

4 RD-B GRN

IEC-61162-1

NMEA01835 + RED

6 - BLKPower input12 VDC

7 FG

Water tempspeed sensor

Connect the optional water tempspeedsensor to the XDR connector with theoptional converter connector (Type02S4147) as shown below

Tape connectors withvulcaninzing tapeand then vinyl tapeto waterproof themBind tape ends withcable ties to preventtape from unraveling

Connect to XDR portat rear of display unit

MJ-A10SPF

MJ-A10SRMDMJ-A6SRMD

Fromtransducer

Fromsensor

Connection of converterconnector 02S4147

48 IEC 61162-1 DataSentences

The tables below show the datasentences which can be input to andoutput from the LS-4100 Thetransmission speed for both input andoutput is 4800 bps Data is output attwo-second intervals

Input data sentences

Sentence Meaning

BWC Bearing and distance towaypoint

GGA Global positioning system(GPS) fix data

GLL Geographic position -latitudelongitude

HDG Heading deviation and variationHDT Heading true

MDA Atmospheric pressure

MTW Water temperature

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4248

36

Input data sentences (conrsquot)

Sentence MeaningMWV Wind speed and

angleRMA Recommended

minimum specificLORAN-C dataRMB Recommended

minimum navigationinformation

RMC Recommendedminimum specificGPSTRANSIT data

VHW Water speed andheading

VTG Course over groundand ground speedXTE Cross track error

Output data sentences

Sentence MeaningDBT (Ver 15) Depth below

transducerDPT (Ver 20 Ver30)

Depth

MTW Water temperatureRMB (Ver 20) Recommended

minimumnavigationinformation

VHW Water speed andheading

TLL Target positionoutput by [MARK]key

= Available with connection of optionalsensorsnavaid

49 Installation MenuThe installation menu mainly containsitems which are set at installation

1 Turn on the power while pressing the[MENUESC] key Continue pressing

the [MENUESC] key until theInstallation menu appears

SIMULATION On

TEST LCD PATTERN MEMORY CLEAR

NMEA PORT InOutNMEA MIX OffGPS WAAS Off

SET BOTTOM LEVEL

Installation Menu

= Setting cannot be changed whenNMEA PORT setting is InIn

Installation menu

SIMULATION The simulation modeprovides without connection of thetransducer simulated operation of theequipment using internally generatedechoes All controls are operative Themessage ldquoSIMrdquo appears at the top rightcorner on the screen when thesimulation mode is active

1 At the installation menu press toopen the simulation mode optionswindow

2 Press to choose ldquoOnrdquo to turn onthe simulation mode

3 Press the [POWERBRILL] keyabout three seconds to turn off thepower

4 Press the [POWERBRILL] key toturn on the power ldquoSIMrdquo appears atthe top right corner of the display

5 To turn off the simulation modeselect Off at step 2

NMEA po r t se tup(NMEA PO RT NMEA M IX)

The POWER port can function as aninput port or inputoutput port Changethe setting to ldquoInInrdquo when connectingGP-310B320B and a wind sensor

When connecting the GP-310B320Band a wind sensor first turn on ldquoGPS

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4348

37

WAASrdquo (in the Installation menu) andthen select ldquoInInrdquo as the NMEA portsetting

1 Turn on the power while pressingand holding down the [MENUESC]key Continue pressing the[MENUESC] key until theInstallation menu appears

2 Choose NMEA PORT and thenpress to display the NMEA portoptions window

3 Use or to choose InOut orInIn as appropriate

InOut Input and Output (default

setting)InIn Input only (Available withconnection of the GP-310B320Band a wind sensor)

4 Press choose NMEA MIX andthen press to display the NMEAMIX options window

5 Use or to choose Off or OnChoose On to output input data

Off Outputs the data sentences ofLS-4100 only

On Outputs the data sentences ofLS-4100 and sentences which areinput from other equipment

6 To restore normal operation turn offthe power and then turn it on again

GPS WAAS Chooses how to use theWAAS signal when connecting with a

WAAS receiver for example GP-320B

Note WAAS is currently in thedevelopmental phase During thedevelopmental phase the reliability andavailability of the WAAS signal cannotbe guaranteed Therefore any positiondata should be verified against othersources to confirm reliability

1 Display the Installation menu2 Choose GPS WAAS and then press

to open the GPS WAAS options

window

Off

WAAS options window3 Press or to choose ldquoWAAS-02rdquo

(test signal) When the systembecomes operational (in 2003) setto ldquo00rdquo (regular WAAS signal)

4 Turn off the power

BOTTOM LEVEL If the depthindication is unstable in automaticoperation or the bottom echo cannot bedisplayed in the darkest gray tone byadjusting the gain controls in manualoperation you may adjust the bottomecho level detection circuit for both 50kHz and 200 kHz to stabilize theindication Generally lower the bottomlevel for inner hull installation where thereceive level is too low If the bottomlevel is too low it may be difficult todiscriminate fish from the bottomresulting in unstable depth indication

And if the bottom level is too high thedepth indication may not appear

1 At the installation menu press tochoose SET BOTTOM LEVEL andthen press Several seconds laterthe following display appears

Bottom level +0 (200k -100 - +100 ) +0 ( 50k -100 - +100 )

Bottom level display

2 While observing the picture use or to set 200 kHz or to set50 kHz Set up for optimum picture

3 To restore normal operation turn offthe power and then it on again

Note The mode must be other thanldquoNAV DATArdquo to show the bottom leveldisplay

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4448

SP - 1 E2371S01C

SPECIFICATIONS OF ECHO SOUNDER LS-4100

1 GENERAL11 TX Frequency 50 kHz or 200 kHz 50200 kHz dual transmitting selectable12 Transmit Method Single or dual transmitting

13 Output Power 300 Wrms14 TX Rate Max 500 pulsemin15 Pulse-length 01 to 08 ms

2 DISPLAY UNIT21 Display system 5-inch monochrome LCD 76 mm (W) x 100 mm (H) 240 x 320 dots22 Display Mode Single frequency (highlow freq) Dual-frequency Zoom Nav data-12

Marker zoom Bottom zoom Bottom-lock23 Display Range

Range SettingRange

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

Display

rangeMeter 5 10 20 40 80 150 200 300 2-500

Feet 15 30 60 120 200 400 600 1000 7-1500

Fathoms 3 5 10 20 40 80 100 150 1-250

PassiBraza 3 5 10 30 50 100 150 200 1-300

24 Range Shift 0-500 m 0-1500 ft 0-250 fa 0-300 pb25 Expansion Range Bottom-lock expansion 3 to 10 m

Sectional expansion 2 to 50 m26 Display Advance Speed 8 steps (LinesTX Freeze 1161814121121 41)

3 INTERFACE31 Input data sentences IEC61162-1NMEA0183 Ver 152030

GGA RMA RMB RMC BWC GLL HDT HDG VTG VHW MTWMWV MDA XTE

32 Output data sentences IEC61162-1NMEA0183 Ver 152030 interval 2 sMTW VHW DBT DPT RMB TLL by key operating External data required

4 POWER SUPPLY41 Display Unit 12 VDC 05 A

5 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITION51 Ambient Temperature Display unit -15degC to +55degC52 Relative Humidity 93 or less at 40degC53 Waterproof IPX5

6 COATING COLOR61 Display Unit N30

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4548

M a r

4

0 3

D-1

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4648

Mar 4 03

Mar 4 03

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4748

M a r

3

0 3

S-1

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4848

FURUNO Authorized DistributorDealer FURUNO Authorized DistributorDealer

9-52 Ashihara-cho9-52 Ashihara-choNishinomiya 662-8580 JAPANNishinomiya 662-8580 JAPAN

Telephone Telephone 0798-65-21110798-65-2111FaxFax 0798-65-42000798-65-4200

FIRST EDITION FIRST EDITION MARMAR 20032003Printed in JapanPrinted in Japan All rights reserved All rights reserved

B1B1 SEPSEP 09 200509 2005

Pub NoPub No OME-23710OME-23710 00014698000000146980000001469800000014698000(( DAMIDAMI )) LS-4100LS-4100

0 0 0 1 4 6 9 8 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 4 6 9 8 0 0 0

Page 15: OME23710B_1_LS4100

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 1548

9

110 SuppressingInterference

Interference from other acousticequipment operating nearby or other

electronic equipment on your boat mayshow itself on the display as shown inthe figure belowTo suppress interference do thefollowing1 Press the [MENUESC] key to open

the main menu2 Use or $ to choose NOISE LIMIT

from page 1 of the menu3 Press to show the options

window4 Use or $ to choose the degree ofsuppression desired Off LowMedium or High (highest)

5 Press the [MENUESC] key to closethe menu

Interference fromother sounder

Electrical interference

Forms of interference

Turn the noise limiter off when nointerference exists otherwise weakechoes may be missed

111 Suppressing LowLevel Noise

Low intensity ldquospecklesrdquo may appearover most of screen This is mainly due

to sediment in the water or noise Thesecan be suppressed by adjustingCLUTTER on the menu When theautomatic mode is on clutter isautomatically rejected To suppress lowlevel noise in manual sounder operationdo the following1 Press the [MENUESC] key to open

the main menu2 Use or $ to choose CLUTTER

from page 1 of the menu3 Press to show the optionswindow

4 Use or $ to choose the degree ofsuppression desired 1 2 3 4 5 or6 The higher the number the greaterthe suppression

5 Press the [MENUESC] key to closethe menu

To turn off low-level noisesuppression choose Off at step 4 andthen press the [MENUESC] key

Clutter appearance

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 1648

10

112 Erasing WeakEchoes

Sediment in the water or reflectionsfrom plankton may be painted on the

display in low intensity tones

Weakechoes

Appearance of weak echoes

These weak echoes may be erased asfollows1 Press the [MENUESC] key to open

the main menu2 Use or $ to choose SIGNAL

LEVEL from page 1 of the menu3 Press to show the options

window4 Use or $ to choose the degree of

suppression desired Off Low orHigh (highest)

5 Press the [MENUESC] key to closethe menu

To turn off the signal level function choose Off at step 4 and then pressthe [MENUESC] key

113 A-scope DisplayThis display shows echoes at eachtransmission with amplitudes and toneproportional to their intensities on theright 14 of the screen It is useful forestimating the kind of fish school andbottom composition

Note In the dual frequency display the A-scope display is only available withthe high frequency display

323

10

20

30

40

0

A-scope display

Single frequency display

Strong

reflection(bottom)

Weakreflection(fish or noise)

50k 11

Strongreflection(fish)

A-scope display

1 Press the [MENUESC] key to openthe main menu

2 Press or $ to choose A-SCOPEfrom page 1 of the menu

3 Press to show the optionswindow

4 Press

or$

to choose the A-scope presentation type desiredNormal Display shows echoes ateach transmission with amplitudesand tone proportional to theirintensitiesPeak Peak-hold amplitude picture

5 Press the [MENUESC] key to closethe menu

To turn off the A-scope displaychoose Off at step 4 and then press the[MENUESC] key

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 1748

11

114 AlarmsAlarm description

The LS-4100 has six conditions whichgenerate both audio and visual alarms

bottom alarm normal fish alarm bottomlock fish alarm water temperature alarmarrival alarm and speed alarm (Thewater temperature arrival and speedalarms require appropriate sensors)

Bottom alarm The bottom alarm alertsyou when the bottom is within the alarmrange set To activate the bottom alarmthe depth must be displayed

Fish (normal) alarm The fish (normal)alarm tells you when fish are within thepreset alarm range

Fish (bottom lock) alarm The fish(bottom lock) alarm available with thebottom-lock mode sounds when fishare within a certain distance from thebottom Note that the bottom zoom

display must be turned on to use thisalarm

Water temperature alarm The watertemperature alarm alerts when thewater temperature is within (Insidealarm) the alarm range set orunderover (outside alarm) the rangeset

Speed alarm The speed alarm alertsyou when the speed is within (Insidealarm) or underover (Outside alarm)the preset speed

Arrival alarm The arrival alarm alertswhen you are near a waypoint by thedistance set

Activating an alarm

1 Press the [MENUESC] key2 Press or $ to choose ALARM

MENU from page 2 on the menu3 Press the to show the ALARM

menu

ALARM

(12)

[MENU] Exit

ALARM

(22)

[MENU] Exit

BOTTOM On FROM 5ft

RANGE 10ftFISH(Normal) On

FROM 5ft RANGE 10ftFISH(BL) On

FROM 8ft RANGE 10ftFISH LEVEL Medium

TEMPERATURE Inside FROM 724 deg F RANGE 10 deg F

SPEED Off FROM 00kt

RANGE 10kt

ARRIVAL ALRM Off RANGE 0 01 m

Pageno

Gray characters mean alarm is inactive Alarm menu

4 Use or $ to choose an alarm asappropriate

5 Press to show the options menu

Off On

Off InsideOutside

Temp Speed Alarm Types

Fish ArrivalBottom AlarmOnOff

Alarm options6 Use or $ to choose alarm type

Off Alarm off On Alarm onInside Alarm generated whenspeed (or water temperature) iswithin the range setOutside Alarm generated whenspeed (or water temperature) isoutside the range set

7 Press to close the windowFor ARRIVAL ALARM setting skip tostep 12

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 1848

12

8 Press $ to choose FROM9 Press to show the options menu

0ft

Depth

632 deg F

Temperature

10 kt

Speed Depth temperature speed setting

window10 Use or $ to set starting depth

temperature or speed as appropriateFor FISH (BL) the starting depth isthe range from the bottom

11 Press to close the window12 Press $ to choose RANGE13 Press to show the options menu14 Use or $ to set alarm range15 For the bottom alarm temperature

alarm speed alarm or arrivalalarm press the [MENUESC] key tofinish For a fish alarm press toclose the window and then go tostep 16

16 Press $ to choose FISH LEVEL17 Press to show the options menu

Weak

MediumStrong Fish level options

18 Use or $ to choose the echostrength level which will trigger a fishalarm

Weak Weak echoes (weakest toneon level bar)Medium Medium strength echoes

(middle tone on level bar)Strong Strong echoes (darkest toneon level bar)

19 Press the [MENUESC] key twice toclose the menu

Alarm range marker Bottom alarm Fish alarm (normal) Right Fish alarm (bottomlock) Left

Alarm icon

Alarm rangeStartingpoint

Bottom alarm Fish alarm (normal) Fish alarm (BL)

Temperature alarm (deg

C ordeg

F shown) Speed alarm Arrival alarm

Alarm icon (Appropriate icon appears to showwhich alarm has been violated)

How the alarm works

Note To disable an alarm choose Offat step 5 in the above procedure

Silencing the buzzer

The buzzer sounds and the appropriatealarm icon appears and flashes whenan alarm is violated You can silence thebuzzer by pressing any key Howeverthe buzzer will sound whenever thealarm setting is violated

Note The audio and visual alarms arereleased against the last-violated alarmwhen multiple alarms are active

115 WaypointsWaypoints may be used tobull Record the position of an important

echo as waypoint 12 points may beregistered

bull Output a waypoint position to a plotterto mark position on its screen

bull Find range bearing and time-to-go toa location (waypoint)

Note Requires latitude and longitudeposition from a navigator

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 1948

13

Registering a waypoint on thescreen

1 Press the [MARK] key The cursorappears along with waypoint entryinstructions To enter a waypoint tothe current own shiprsquos position go tostep 3Note If there is no position data themessage ldquoNo position datardquo appearsCheck the navigator

50k

496

1100

20

40

60

80

0

Cursor

WAYPOINT ENTRY

( Move) Cursor [MARK] Enter [MENU] Cancel

50 kHz display

2 Press the cursor pad to set thecursor where desired Pictureadvancement is stopped until step 3is completed and the instructionwindow is integrated into the navdisplay

3 Press the [MARK] key again WhenTLL or FURUNO-TLL is selected atTLL OUTPUT on the System menuthe latitude and longitude position atthe cursor is output to the navigator

A vertical line marks location Furtherthe display shows the waypointname (next sequential number) andposition of the location selected atstep 2

WAYPOINTName FREQLat 34 deg 22796NLon 136 deg 07264E

05

[MENU] Exit

rase

Waypoint data display

Note If you attempt to enter 13thwaypoint the message ldquoMemoryfullrdquo appears In this case erase anunwanted waypoint to enable entry

4 To save the waypoint under thename shown go to step 8 or go tostep 5 to change its name

5 Press to open the waypoint nameentry window

WAYPOINTName FREQLat 34 deg 22796NLon 136 deg 07264E

05

[MENU] Exit

01------ ENT

rase

Waypoint window name entry6 Use or to set character $ or

to shift cursor The name mayconsist of 10 alphanumericcharactersNote Character order is 0 1hellip9 - A BhellipZ _ 0hellip

7 Press to choose ENT 8 Press the [MENUESC] key to

register the waypoint

Registering waypoint by LL

1 Press the [MENUESC] key to openthe main menu

2 Use or to choose WAYPOINTLIST from page 2 of the menu

3 Press

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 2048

14

WAYPOINT LIST

01 0102 0303------------------------------------------------------

[MENU] Exit

Waypoint list4 Press or to choose an empty

waypoint and press Press again

NEW WAYPOINTName FREQLat 34 deg 22796NLon 136 deg 07264E

05

[MENU] Exit

04------ ENT

rase

New waypoint window name entry

5 Use or to set character $ or to shift cursor

6 Press to select ENT 7 Enter latitude and longitude similar

to how you entered waypoint name8 Press the [MENUESC] key to

register the waypoint

Editing waypoints Press the [MENUESC] key to open

the main menu

2 Use or to choose WAYPOINTLIST from page 2 of the menu

3 Press to open the waypoints list4 Use or to choose a waypoint

and press 5 Use or to choose the item to

edit (name latitude or longitude)6 Press to open the data entry

window7 Use or to set character $ or

to choose location8 Press to choose ENT 9 Press the [MENUESC] key

Erasing waypoints Press the [MENUESC] key2 Use or to choose WAYPOINT

LIST from page 2 of the menu3 Press to open the waypoints list

4 Use or to choose the waypointto erase and then press Note You cannot erase a waypointwhich is selected as ldquoGOTO WPTrdquo

5 Press to choose ldquoEraserdquo6 Press to open the options window7 Press to select YES to erase the

waypoint The waypoint list appearswith the erased waypoint blank

8 Press the [MENUESC] key twice toclose the menu

Setting destination waypoint

Set a destination waypoint to find rangebearing and time-to-go to that point Youcan see range and bearing to awaypoint Time-to-go is shown on theTime to Go digital display

Press the [MENUESC] key to openthe main menu

2 Use or to choose GOTO WPTfrom page 2 of the menu

3 Press to open the waypoints list

Off01020304----------------------------------------------------------------

Waypoint list

4 Use or to choose a waypoint5 Press the [MENUESC] key to close

the menu

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 2148

15

116 Setting Up Nav DataDisplays

The user may arrange the nav datadisplays as desired

1 Use the [MODE] key to show theNAV DATA-1 or 2 display whicheveryou want to set up

2 Press the [MENUESC] key to closethe mode selection window

3 Press the cursor pad to display theNAV DATA SETUP window

NAV DATA SETUP

Window Selection Data Selection

[MENU] Exit

NAV DATA SETUP window

4 Use or to choose a datadisplay window desired Adashed-line rectangle circumscribesyour selection

5 Use

or$

to choose item todisplay See the below for adescription of the displays

(9)

(1)

(2)

(3)

(4)(5)

(6)(7)(8)

Two-data

display

Three-data

display

Four-data

displayItems displayable in (1) - (3) depth positioncourse range and bearing trip distanceodometer water temperature headingair pressure time-to-go to destination waypointXTE speed wind speed and directiondestination waypoint data compassItems displayable in (4) - (9) depth positionspeed course range and bearing trip distanceodometer water temperature headingair pressure time-to-go to destination waypointXTE wind speed wind direction

= Graphic display

Nav data window and item displayable6 Press the [MENUESC] key to finish

Note You can choose the number ofitems to show in a nav data display withNAV DATA-1 and NAV DATA-2 on theSystem menu

GRAPHIC DISPLAYS

1 05 0 05 1

Wpt 03Rng 019nm Brg 321 deg XTE 000nm Cse 333 deg

DESTINATION WAYPOINT GRAPHIC

XTEscale

BearingCourseDestinationwaypointdirection

DestinationwaypointdataNameRangeXTE

Wind APP

WIND GRAPHIC

60

120

90

030

150180

120

150

90

60

30

120 deg

Speed 103 ms

COMPASS GRAPHIC

SPEED GRAPHIC

172

Speed

20

50

40

60

30

10

01 05 0 05 1

025 nm

XTE

XTE GRAPHIC

kt

Bearing todestinationwaypoint

Course

Brg30 deg

Cse90 deg

N

E

XTE scale

Speed-ometer

Nav data display-1

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 2248

16

DIGITAL DISPLAYS

Course

123 deg

COURSE

Depth

328 ft

DEPTH

Heading TRUEMAG

318 deg

HEADING

Odometer

56 nm

ODOMETER

Position GPS 3D

30 deg 00065N130 deg 00574E

POSITION

Temperature

698 degF

WATER TEMPERATURE

Trip meter

121 nm

TRIP DISTANCE

Time to Go

00 H30 M

TIME-TO-GO

1018 hpa

AIR PRESSURE

Air Pressure

Speed

193 kt

SPEED

Rng

121 nm

RANGE amp BEARING

Brg

140 deg

Wind Speed APP

80 ms

WIND SPEED

Wind Dir APP

138 deg

WIND DIRECTION

APP or TRUE depending on menu setting TRUE or MAG depending

on menu settingamp To destination waypoint

Note 1 Nav data is updated with somedelay

Note 2 When data is lost 120 sec thedisplay shows - - at the locationwhere data is lost

= GPS receiving status (Displays whenconnecting with GP-310B320B and InOutis selected at the Installation menu)NO FIX Position cannot be foundGPS 2D 2D (dimension) GPS position fixGPS 3D 3D GPS fixGPS W2D 2D WAAS position fixGPS W3D 3D WAAS position fix

NAV data display-2

117 Other Menu ItemsThis section describes the menu itemsnot previously mentioned

Page 1

HUE (Picture Color)

Two picture color arrangements areavailable Day and Night Day showsechoes on a white background Nightshows them on a black background

1 Press the [MENUESC] key todisplay the menu

2 Use or $ to choose HUE frompage 1 of the menu

3 Press to show the optionswindow

4 Use or $ to choose Day or Nightas appropriate

5 Press the [MENUESC] key to closethe menu

WHITE LINE

The white line feature displays theleading edge of the bottom echo in

white This is useful for discriminatingbottom fish near the bottom

1 Press the [MENUESC] key todisplay the main menu

2 Use or $ to choose WHITE LINEfrom page 1 of the menu

3 Press to show the optionswindow

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 2348

17

4 Use or to choose Off Tone orMesh as appropriate ldquoMeshrdquo paintsthe white line in darker tone thanldquoTonerdquo

5 Press the [MENUESC] key to closethe menu

526White Line OFF White Line ON (Mesh)

Fish schoolclearly shown

White line

0

20

40

60

80

050k 11

526

0

20

40

60

80

00 050k 11

How white line works

DEEP GAIN

ldquoDeep Gainrdquo compensates forpropagation attenuation of the ultrasonicwaves It does this by equalizing echopresentation so that fish schools of thesame size appear in the same density inboth shallow and deep waters Inaddition it reduces surface noise

Press the [MENUESC] key to openthe main menu

2 Use or to choose DEEP GAINfrom page of the menu

3 Press $ to show to the optionswindow

4 Choose Low Medium or High asappropriate High provides thegreatest degree of gain reductionagainst short range echoes

5 Press the [MENUESC] key to closethe menu

Page 2

TRIP RESET

This item resets trip distance to ldquo0rdquo

Press the [MENUESC] key to openthe main menu

2 Use or to choose TRIPRESET from page 2 of the menu

3 Press $ 4 Press to reset trip distance

Beeps are generated while the tripdistance is being reset

5 Press the [MENUESC] key to closethe menu

Note To reset the odometer to zeroclear the memory

GAIN ADJ 200 GAIN ADJ 50

If the gain is too high or too low or thegain for the low and high frequenciesappears unbalanced you cancompensate it as follows

Press the [MENUESC] key to openthe main menu

2 Use or to choose GAIN ADJ200 or GAIN ADJ 50 from page 2 ofthe menu

3 Press $ to show to the optionswindow

4 Use or to set the amount Thesetting range is ndash50 to +50

5 Press the [MENUESC] key to close

the menu

DRAFT

The default depth display shows thedistance from the transducer If youwould rather show the distance from thesea surface set your shiprsquos draft asfollows

Press the [MENUESC] key to openthe main menu

2 Use or to choose DRAFT frompage 2 of the menu

3 Press $ and then use or to setdraft The setting range is ndash 50 to+500 (meters feet)

4 Press the [MENUESC] key to closethe menu

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 2448

18

2 SYSTEM MENU

The System menu mainly consists ofitems which once set do not requirefrequent adjustment You may displaythis menu by choosing SYSTEM MENUat page 2 of the main menu andpressing

SYSTEM MENULANGUAGE English

DEPTH UNIT ftSPEED UNIT ktWIND UNIT msTEMP UNIT deg F

TEMP GRAPH OffNAV DATA-1 NAV DATA-2

WATER TYPE SaltKEY BEEP OnBATT VOLTAGE Off (13)

[MENU] Exit

SYSTEM MENU

(23)

NAV DISPLAY TempSpeedNMEA0183 Ver 20TLL OUTPUT OffBEARING TrueWIND SPDDIR ApparentTRIP SOURCE Own

TEMP SOURCE OwnSPEED SOURCE OwnTEMP CALIB +00 deg F ( 40)SPEED CALIB +0 ( 50)

Own speed Own temp 100 kt 162 deg F

[MENU] Exit

SYSTEM MENU

(33)

BASIC RANGE1 15 ft

RANGE2 30RANGE3 60RANGE4 120RANGE5 200RANGE6 400RANGE7 600RANGE8 1000 (7-1500)

ZOOM RANGE 15 ft (7-150)BL RANGE 15 ft (10-30)(Bottom Lock)

ZOOM MARKER On

[MENU] Exit

PAGE 3

PAGE 2

PAGE 1

Page no

System menus

21 System MenuPage 1

LANGUAGE The system language isavailable in English several Europeanlanguages and Japanese To changelanguage select language desired andpress the [MENUESC] key

DEPTH UNIT Choose unit of depthmeasurement from meters feet

fathoms passibraza and hiro(Japanese)

SPEED UNIT Choose unit of speedmeasurement from knots miles perhour and kilometers per hour Requiresspeed data

WIND UNIT Choose unit of wind speedmeasurement from ms kt kmh and

mph Requires wind speed data

TEMP UNIT Choose unit oftemperature measurement Celsius orFahrenheit Requires temperature data

TEMP GRAPH Turns the watertemperature display on or off Thetemperature scale range is 16deg (degF) inldquoNarrowrdquo 40deg (degF) in ldquoWiderdquo Requires

water temperature data

m526

0

20

40

60

80

00 050k 11

40

80

70

50

60

TemperatureScale

TemperatureGraph

638 deg F162kt

Water temperature display (wide degF)

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 2548

19

NAV DATA-1 -2 Choose the number ofnavigation data items to display on thenav data displays from two three orfour items Requires appropriate navdata

WATER TYPE Choose the water typewith which to use the LS-4100 fromSalt or Fresh

KEY BEEP Turn key beep on or off

BATT VOLTAGE Turn the batteryvoltage indication (appears at the topright corner on the screen) on or offWhen on it replaces the picture advancespeed indication

Page 2

NAV DISPLAY Choose the nav data todisplay in the nav data window at thetop left-hand corner You may choosefrom temperaturespeedlatitudelongitude range and bearingcourse over ground trip distance or

wind speed Requires appropriate navdata

407 deg F162kt

Nav window

NMEA0183 Choose NMEA version ofnavigator Ver 15 Ver 20 or Ver 30

TLL OUTPUT Enablesdisables outputof TLL (Target Latitude Longitude)position when the [MARK] key isoperated ldquoTLLrdquo outputs latitude andlongitude position ldquoFURUNO-TLLrdquoavailable with connection of navigatorthat can output FURUNO TLL outputslatitude and longitude watertemperature depth etc

BEARING Shiprsquos course and bearingto a waypoint may be displayed in trueor magnetic bearing Magnetic bearingis true bearing plus (or minus) earthrsquosmagnetic deviation Requires bearingdata

WIND SPDDIR Choose the windspeed and direction reference from trueand apparent Requires wind sensorApparen t The direction (in relation toshiprsquos bow) and speed of the wind as itappears to those on board relative tothe speed and direction of the boatcombination of the true wind and thewind caused by the boats movementTrue The speed and direction (inrelation to shiprsquos bow) of the wind felt ormeasured when stationary

TRIP SOURCE Choose speed sourcefor the trip distance indication Own(transducer with speed sensor orseparate speed sensor) or NMEA

TEMP SOURCE Choose source ofwater temperature input Off Own(transducer with water temperaturesensor or separate temperature sensor)or NMEA

SPEED SOURCE Choose source ofspeed input Off Own (transducer withspeed sensor or separate speedsensor) or NMEA Requires speed

data

TEMP CALIB If the water temperaturesensor-generated water temperatureindication is wrong you can correct ithere when ldquoOwnrdquo is selected astemperature source For example if thewater temperature indication is 2deghigher than actual water temperatureenter -2 The setting range is -40degF to

+40degF

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 2648

20

SPEED CALIB If the speedsensor-generated speed indication iswrong you can correct it here whenldquoOwnrdquo is selected as speed source Forexample if the speed indication is 10lower than actual speed enter +10 Thesetting range is ndash50 to +50

Page 3

BASIC RANGE 1 - BASIC RANGE 8 Set range of each of the eight basicranges (Selectable range 7 to 1500 ft)Note 1 All default basic ranges arerestored whenever the depth unit ischanged Therefore change the depth

unit before changing the basic rangesNote 2 A range may not be lower thanthe range preceding it For example ifbasic range 3 is 60 feet basic range 4must be greater than 60 feet

ZOOM RANGE Choose the range tozoom in the marker-zoom andbottom-zoom modes You may choose arange between 7 and 150 feet (2 and 50

meters)

BL RANGE The expansion width forthe bottom-lock display can be chosenfrom 10 to 30 feet (3 and 10 meters)

ZOOM MARKER The zoom markerappears in the normal bottom markerand bottom zoom displays and marksthe area which is expanded in the

bottom marker and bottom zoompictures You can turn the marker on oroff as desired

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 2748

21

3 MAINTENANCETROUBLESHOOTING

W RNING

ELECTRICAL SHOCK HAZARDDo not open the equipment

Only qualified personnel should workinside the equipment

31 Maintenance

Regular maintenance is essential forgood performance Checking the itemslisted in the table below monthly willhelp keep your equipment in goodshape for years to come

Checking

Item Action

Transducercable

Check cable for damage

Power cabletransducercable plug

Check that they are tightlyfastened Refasten ifnecessary

Display unitground

Check for corrosion Cleanif necessary

Power supplyvoltage

Check voltage If out ofrating correct problem

32 Cleaning the DisplayUnit

Dust or dirt on the display unit can beremoved with a soft cloth If desired awater-moistened cloth may be usedUse special care when cleaning theLCD since it scratches easily Do notuse chemical cleaners to clean thedisplay unit - they can remove paint andmarkings

33 TransducerMaintenance

Marine life on the transducer face willresult in a gradual decrease insensitivity Check the transducer facefor cleanliness each time the boat isdry-docked Carefully remove anymarine life with a piece of wood orfine-grade sandpaper

34 Replacing the FuseThe fuse in the power cable protects thesystem from reverse polarity of thepower supply and equipment fault If thefuse blows find the cause beforereplacing it Use only a 1A fuse (FGMB 1A 125V Code No 000-114-805 ) orequivalent Using the wrong fuse will damage the unit and void the warranty

W RNINGUse the proper fuse

Fuse rating is shown on the equipmentUse of a wrong fuse can result in fire anddamage the equipment

35 Battery Voltage Alert A battery icon appears when the batteryvoltage is too high or too low

Battery icon and meaning

Icon Meaning

Voltage is lower than 10 VDC If thevoltage goes below 9 V the equipmentis automatically turned off

Voltage is higher than 165 VDC If thevoltage goes higher than 175 V theequipment is automatically turned off

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 2848

22

36 TroubleshootingThe table below provides basictroubleshooting procedures which theuser may follow to restore normaloperation

Troubleshooting table

Ifhellip Then check hellipneither echo norfixed range scaleappears

bull battery voltagebull fusebull power cable

no echo appearsbut the fixedrange scaleappears

bull if display advancespeed is set to ldquoStoprdquo

bull transducer plugbull

transducer cableecho appears butno zero line

bull if range shifting is setto ldquo0rdquo

sensitivity is low bull gain settingbull if air bubbles or marine

life is clinging to thetransducer face

bull if sediments arepresent in the water

bull if the bottom is too soft

to return an echothere is extremeinterference ornoise

bull if the transducer is tooclose to the engine

bull if the unit is properlygrounded

bull if other echo soundersof the same frequencyas own are beingoperated nearby

the speedwatertemperaturereadout isunrealistic or notpresent

bull sensor plug

the positionreadout isunrealistic or notpresent

bull the connectionbetween sounder andnavigator

bull navigator

37 DiagnosticsIf you feel your unit is not workingproperly conduct the diagnostic test tofind the problem If you cannot restorenormal operation contact your dealerfor advice

1 Turn on the power while pressing the[MENUESC] key Continue pressingthe [MENUESC] key until theInstallation menu appears

SIMULATION On

TEST LCD PATTERN MEMORY CLEAR

NMEA PORT InOutNMEA MIX Off GPS WAAS Off

SET BOTTOM LEVEL

Installation Menu

= Setting cannot be changed whenNMEA PORT setting is InIn

Installation menu2 Press to choose TEST3 Press to start the test

ROM OKRAM OKNMEA

Temp 682 deg F

Speed 100kmh

Power 124 VBody 39 deg C

Program No 0252318-01Push [MENU] 3 times to exit

Level bar

= Program version no

Water

TemperatureSpeedBattery VoltageTemperatureinside displayunit(Unit fixed atdeg C)

GPS (48502180) OK

Only when GP-310B is connected(For GP-320B 4850238)

Test display

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 2948

23

4 The ROM RAM and NMEA port arechecked with the results shown asOK or NG (No Good) For any NGrequest service (A special connectoris required to test the NMEA portNothing appears if no connector isconnected)

5 The squares at the right side of thetest display are for checking thecontrols Press each key and thearrows on the Cursor Pad one byone A controlrsquos correspondingon-screen square ldquolightsrdquo in black ifthe control is normal

6 To return to the Installation menupress the [MENUESC] key threetimes

7 To restore normal operation turn offthe power and turn it on again

38 Test PatternThis feature tests for proper display oftones

1 On the Installation menu press $ tochoose LCD PATTERN

2 Press to start the test The entirescreen is black

3 Press again and the screen turnswhite

4 Press again and the screenshows a four-toned display

5 Press again to return to theInstallation menu

6 To restore normal operation turn offthe power and then it on again

WHITE FOUR-TONE BLACK

Test patterns

39 Memory ClearThe memory can be cleared to startafresh with default menu settings

1 At the installation menu press $ tochoose MEMORY CLEAR

2 Press to open the optionswindow

YES NO

Clear memory display

3 Press to clear the memory Beepsare generated while the memory isbeing cleared

4 To restore normal operation turn offthe power and then turn it on again

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3048

24

4 INSTALLATION

41 Display UnitMounting considerations

The display unit can be installed on adesktop on the bulkhead or flushmounted in a panel When choosing alocation keep the following in mind

bull Keep the display unit out of directsunlight

bull The temperature and humidity should

be moderate and stablebull Locate the unit away from exhaust

pipes and ventsbull The mounting location should be well

ventilatedbull Mount the unit where shock and

vibration are minimalbull For maintenance and checking

purposes leave sufficient space atthe sides and rear of the unit andleave slack in cables

bull A magnetic compass will be affected ifthe display unit is placed too close toit Observe the following compasssafe distances to prevent disturbanceto the magnetic compassStandard compass 04 metersSteering compass 03 meters

Desktop overhead mounting1 Fix the bracket to a desktop or the

overhead with tapping screws(supplied)

2 Loosely screw knobs into the displayunit

3 Set the display unit to the bracketand then tighten the knobs

Mounting on the bulkhead Flush

mounting in a panelSee the instructions on the bulkhead orflush mounting template (supplied)

42 Thru-hull MountTransducer

Transducer mounting location

The thru-hull mount transducer

(520-5PSD 520-5MSD) provides thebest performance of all since thetransducer protrudes from the hull andthe effect of air bubbles and turbulencenear the hull skin is reduced When theboat has a keel the transducer shouldbe at least 30 cm away from it Typicalthru-hull mountings are shown in thefigure on the next page

The performance of this sounder isdirectly related to the mounting locationof the transducer especially forhigh-speed cruising The installationshould be planned in advance keepingthe standard cable length (8 m) and thefollowing factors in mindbull Air bubbles and turbulence caused by

movement of the boat seriouslydegrade the sounding capability of thetransducer The transducer shouldtherefore be located in a positionwhere water flow is the smoothestNoise from the propellers alsoadversely affects performance andthe transducer should not be mountednearby The lifting strakes arenotorious for creating acoustic noiseand these must be avoided bykeeping the transducer inboard ofthem

bull The transducer must always remain

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3148

25

submerged even when the boat isrolling pitching or up on a plane athigh speed

bull A practical choice would besomewhere between 13 and 12 of

the boatrsquos length from the stern Forplaning hulls a practical location isgenerally rather far astern so that thetransducer is always in waterregardless of the planing attitude

28

22

120

68

30

520-5PSD

24

120

68

87520-5MSD

Unit mm

Thru-hull mount transducer dimensions

Acceptable transducer mounting

locations

Position 12 to 13 of the hull from stern

15 to 30 cm off center line (inside first lifting strakes)

Within the wetted bottom area

Deadrise angle within 15 deg

HIGH SPEED-V HULL

Suitable transducer mounting locations

Typical thru-hull mounttransducer installations

FairingBlock

Flat Washer

Rubber Washer

Hull

Deep-V Hull

Hull

Flat Washer

Rubber Washer

Flat Hull

CorkWasher

Typical thru-hull mounttransducer installations

Procedure for installing thethru-hull mount transducer

1 With the boat hauled out of the watermark the location chosen formounting the transducer on thebottom of the hull

2 If the hull is not level within 15deg inany direction fairing blocks madeout of teak should be used betweenthe transducer and hull both insideand outside to keep the transducerface parallel with the water lineFabricate the fairing block as shownbelow and make the entire surfaceas smooth as possible to provide anundisturbed flow of water around thetransducer The fairing block shouldbe smaller than the transducer itselfto provide a channel to divert

turbulent water around the sides ofthe transducer rather than over itsface

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3248

26

BOWHole for stuffing tube

Upper Half

Lower Half

Saw along slopeof hull Construction of fairing block

3 Drill a hole just large enough to passthe threaded stuffing tube of thetransducer through the hull makingsure it is drilled vertically

4 Apply a sufficient amount of highquality caulking compound to the topsurface of the transducer around thethreads of the stuffing tube andinside the mounting hole (and fairingblocks if used) to ensure watertightmounting

5 Mount the transducer and fairingblocks and tighten the locking nutsBe sure that the transducer is

properly oriented and its workingface is parallel to the waterline

Note Do not over-stress the stuffingtube and locking nuts through excessivetightening since the wood block willswell when the boat is placed in thewater It is suggested that the nut betightened lightly at installation andretightened several days after the boat

has been launched

Transducer preparation

Before putting the boat in water wipethe face of the transducer thoroughlywith a detergent liquid soap This willlessen the time necessary for thetransducer to have good contact withthe water Otherwise the time requiredfor complete ldquosaturationrdquo ill belengthened and performance will bereduced

DO NOT paint the transducerPerformance will be affected

43 Transom MountTransducer

The transom mount transducer is verycommonly employed usually onrelatively small IO or outboard boatsDo not use this method on an inboardmotor boat because turbulence iscreated by the propeller ahead of thetransducer

520-5PWD

There are two methods of installationflush with hull (for flat hulls) andprojecting from hull (for deep V-hulls)

Flat Hull

D

Dgt50 cm

Deep-VHull

520-5PWD mounting locations

Installing the 520-5PWD on a flat hull

A suitable mounting location is at least50 cm away from the engine and wherethe water flow is smooth

1 Drill four pilot holes in the mountinglocation

2 Attach the transducer to the bracketwith 5 x 20 tapping screws(supplied)

3 Adjust the transducer position so thetransducer faces right to the bottom

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3348

27

Note If necessary to improve waterflow and minimize air bubblesstaying on the transducer faceincline the transducer about 5deg at therear This may require a certainamount of experimentation for finetuning at high cruising speeds

4 Fill the gap between the wedge frontof the transducer and transom withepoxy material to eliminate any airspaces

No1 M5 x 14

5 x 20

5 x 20

2 to 5

Tape

Hull

Transom mount transducer

mounting flush with hull

Installing the transom mounttransducer on a deep-V hull

This method is employed on deep-Vhulls and provides good performancebecause the effects of air bubbles areminimal Install the transducer parallelwith water surface not flush with hull Ifthe boat is placed on a trailer care mustbe taken not to damage the transducerwhen the boat is hauled out of the waterand put on the trailer

5 x 20

No 2M5 x 14

5 x 20

Transom mount transducermounted projecting from hull

525-5PWD

Choose the installation methoddepending on the rise angle of the hull

Transom

Transom

Stripe over 10

Parallel with hull

Mount at the stripe

less than 10

525-5PWD mounting location

Installing the 525-5PWD

Referring to ldquoInstalling the 520-5PWDrdquoin the left column for mounting of thebracket and the figure shown on the topof next page install the 525-5PWD tothe transom

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3448

28

2 to 5

Transducer

Bracket

Hull

Epoxy material

525-5PWD mounting

44 Inside-hullTransducer

The thru-hull mount transducer(520-5PSD 520-5MSD) may also beinstalled inside the hull following theprocedure below

Necessary tools

You will need the following toolsbull Sandpaper (100)bull Silicone sealantbull Silicone grease

Remarks on installationbull Turn off the engine and anchor the

boat while installing the equipmentbull Install the transducer in the engine

room

Choosing the mounting locationbull The mounting location should be

where the hull is of single-hullthickness and is void of air or flotationmaterials other than solid fiberglassbetween the transducer face and thewater

bull Do not place the transducer over hullstruts or ribs which run under the hull

bull Avoid a location where the risingangle of the hull exceeds 15deg tominimize the effect of the boatrsquosrolling

bull You will finalize the mounting location

through some trial and error Theprocedure for this is shown later

50 cm

50 cm15 cm15 cm

13

12

Transducer mountinglocation

Centerline

Inside-hull transducer mounting location

Attaching the transducer1 Clean the transducer face to remove

any foreign material Lightly roughenthe transducer face with 100sandpaper Also roughen the insideof the hull where the transducer is tobe mounted

2 Clean the transducer face again3 Warm the silicone sealant to 40degC

before usage to soften it Coat thetransducer face and mountinglocation with silicone sealant

Transducer

SiliconeSealant

Coating transducer facewith silicone sealant

4 Press the transducer firmly down onthe hull and gently twist it back andforth to remove any air which may betrapped in the silicone sealant

Checking the installation

1 Connect the battery to the display

unit2 Turn on the display unit

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3548

29

3 Press the [MODE] key to chooseSINGLE FREQ

4 Choose 50 kHz or 200 kHz and thenpress the [MENUESC] key to closethe mode menu

5 Press the [MENU] to show the mainmenu and then press to select

Auto mode6 Press to choose Off7 Press the [MENUESC] key8 Press the [GAIN] key to set the gain

to ldquo5rdquo and then press the[MENUESC] key

9 Press the [RANGE] key to set therange to 10 meters (feet) and thenpress the [MENUESC] key

10 If the bottom is displayed in darkgray and the depth indicationappears the mounting location issuitable Go to ldquoFinal preparationrdquo

11 If the bottom is not displayed in darkgray tone the mounting location maybe unsuitable Do the followinga) Press the [POWERBRILL] key to

turn off the powerb) Gently dismount the transducer

with a piece of woodc) Reattach the transducer

elsewhere as shown in ldquoAttachingthe transducerrdquo

d) Check the installation again

Final preparation

Support the transducer with a piece ofwood to keep it in place while it is drying

Let the transducer dry 24-72 hours

45 Optional Triducer525ST-MSD

The optional triducer 525ST-MSD isdesigned for thru-hull mounting Forhow to install this transducer seeparagraph 42

φ79 mm

33 mm200-12 UNthreads

φ51 mm

27 mm

7 mm

140 mm Triducer 525ST-MSD

525ST-PWD

The Transom Mount Transducer orTRIDUCER reg Multisensor with IntegralRelease Bracket 525ST-PWD ismanufactured by AIRMAR Co Theseinstructions are also included with the

sensor

Pre-test for speed and temperature

Connect the sensor to the instrumentand spin the paddlewheel Check for aspeed reading and the approximate airtemperature If there is no readingreturn the sensor to your place ofpurchase

Tools and materials needed

ScissorsMasking tapeSafety gogglesDust maskElectric drillDrill bit for

Bracket holes 4mm 23 or 964rdquoFiberglass hull chamfer bit(preferred)6mm or 14rdquo

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3648

30

Transom hole 19mm or 34rdquo(optional)

Cable clamp holes 3mm or 18rdquoScrewdriversStraight edgeMarine sealantPencilZip-tiesWater-based antifouling paint(mandatory in salt water )

Mounting location

To ensure the best performance thesensor must be submerged inaeration-free and turbulence-free water

Mount the sensor close to the centerlineof the boat On slower heavierdisplacement hulls positioning it fartherfrom the centerline is acceptable

Allow adequate space above thebracket for it to release and rotate thesensor upward

Height

Height withoutspeed sensor191mm (7-12)Height withspeed sensor213mm (8-12)

Height required at mounting location

Note 1 Do not mount the sensor in anarea of turbulence or bubbles nearwater intake or discharge openingsbehind strakes struts fittings or hull

irregularities behind eroding paint (anindication of turbulence)Note 2 Avoid mounting the sensorwhere the boat may be supportedduring trailering launching hauling andstorageNote 3 For single drive boat mounton the starboard side at least 75 mm(3rdquo) beyond the swing radius of thepropeller

75 mm(3)

minimum beyondswing radius

Mounting location on single drive boat

Note 4 For twin drive boat mountbetween the drives

Installation of bracket

1 Cut out the installation template

shown on the next page2 At the selected location position thetemplate so the arrow at the bottomis aligned with the bottom edge ofthe transom Being sure the templateis parallel to the waterline tape it inplace

Align template vertically

Deadrise angle

Slope of hullparallel towaterline

Align template arrow withbottom edge of transom

Positioning the template

Warning Always wear safetygoggles and a dust mask

3 Using a 4 mm 23 or 964rdquo bit drillthree holes 22 mm (78rdquo) deepat the locations indicated To preventdrilling too deeply wrap maskingtape around the bit 22 mm (78rdquo)from the pointFiberglass hull Minimize surfacecracking by chamfering the gelcoatIf a chamfer bit or countersink bit is

not available start drilling with a6mm or 14rdquo bit to a depth of 1 mm(116rdquo)

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3748

31

4 If you know your transom angle the

bracket is designed for a standard13deg transom angle11deg-18deg angle No shim is requiredSkip to step 3 in ldquoAdjustingrdquoOther angles The shim is requiredSkip to step 2 of ldquoAdjustingrdquoIf you do not know the transom angletemporarily attach the bracket andsensor to the transom to determine ifthe plastic shim is needed

5 Using the two 10 x 1-14rdquo

self-tapping screws temporarilyscrew the bracket to the hull DONOT tighten the screws completelyat this time Follow the step 1-4 inldquoAttaching the Sensor to the Bracketrdquobefore proceeding with ldquoAdjustingrdquo

Installation templatefor starboard side of boat

Drill at locations labeled Bfor the following transom angles

16 deg through 22 deg

Drill at locations labeled Afor the following transom angles

2 deg through 15 deg

Align arrow with bottom of transom

AA A

BB B

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3848

32

Adjusting

1 Using a straight edge sight theunderside of the sensor relative tothe underside of the hull The sternof the sensor should be 1-3 mm

(116-18rdquo) below the bow of thesensor or parallel to the bottom ofthe hull

11 deg transom angleNO SHIM

12-18 deg transom angleNO SHIM

2 deg -10 deg transom

angle

19 deg -22 deg transom

angleshim withtaper up

shim withtaper down

parallelparallel parallel

slightangle

angletoo steep

anglereversed

YES NONO

YES YESYES

Sensor position and transom angle

Note Do not position the bow of thesensor lower than the stern becauseaeration will occur

2 To adjust the sensorrsquos angle relativeto the hull use the tapered plasticshim provided If the bracket hasbeen temporarily fastened to thetransom remove it Key the shim in

place on the back of the bracket2deg-10deg transom angle (steppedtransom and jet boats) Positionthe shim with the tapered end down19deg-22deg transom angle (smallaluminum and fiberglass boats) Position the shim with the taperedend up

3 If the bracket has been temporarilyfastened to the transom remove it

Apply a marine sealant to thethreads of the two 10 x 1-14rdquo self

tapping screws to prevent waterseeping into the transom Screw thebracket to the hull Do not tighten thescrews completely at this time

4 Repeat step 1 to ensure that theangle of the sensor is correctNote Do not position the sensorfarther into the water than necessaryto avoid increasing drag spray andwater noise and reducing boatspeed

5 Using the vertical adjustment spaceon the bracket slots slide the sensorup or down to provide a projection of3 mm (18rdquo) Tighten the screws

Cable cover

Cableclamp

50 mm (2)

Hull projection 3 mm (18)

Vertical adjustment and cable routing

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3948

33

Attaching the sensor to the bracket

1 If the retaining cover near the top ofthe bracket is closed open it bydepressing the latch and rotating thecover downward

Step 1 Step 2

Latch

Retainingcover

Pivotarm (2)

Slot (2)

Step 4

Step 3

Attaching the sensor to the bracket

2 Insert the sensorrsquos pivot arms intothe slots near the top of the bracket

3 Maintain pressure until the pivotarms click into place

4 Rotate the sensor downward until thebottom snaps into the bracket

5 Close the retaining cover to preventthe accidental release of the sensorwhen the boat is underway

Cable routing

Route the sensor cable over thetransom through a drain hole orthorough a new hole drilled in thetransom above the waterline

Never cut the cable or remote the

connector this will void the warranty Always wear safety goggles and a dustmask

1 If a hole must be drilled choose alocation well above the waterlineCheck for obstructions such as trimtabs pumps or wiring inside the hullMark the location with a pencil Drilla hole through the transom using a19 mm or 34rdquo bit (to accommodatethe connector)

2 Route the cable over or through thetransom

3 On the outside of the hull secure thecable against the transom using thecable clamps Position a cable clamp50 mm(2rdquo) above the bracket andmark the mounting hole with apencil

4 Position the second cable clamphalfway between the first clamp andthe cable hole Mark this mountinghole

5 If a hole has been drilled in thetransom open the appropriate slot inthe transom cable cover Position thecover over the cable where it entersthe hull Mark the two mounting

holes6 At each of the marked locations usea 3 mm or 18rdquo bit to drill a hole 10mm (38rdquo) deep The prevent drillingtoo deeply wrap masking tapearound the bit 10 mm (38rdquo) from thepoint

7 Apply marine sealant to the threadsof the 6 x 12rdquo self-tapping screw toprevent water from seeping into the

transom If you have drilled a holethrough the transom apply marinesealant to the space around thecable where it passes through thetransom

8 Position the two cable clamps andfasten them in place If used pushthe cable cover over the cable andscrew it in place

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4048

34

9 Route the cable to the instrumentbeing careful not to tear the cable

jacket when passing it though thebulkhead(s) and other parts of theboat To reduce electricalinterference separate the sensorcable from other electrical wiring andldquonoiserdquo sources Coil any excesscable and secure it in place withzip-ties to prevent damage

46 Optional WaterTemperatureSpeedSensor

Water temperaturespeed sensorST-02MSB and ST-02PSB which aredesigned for thru-hull mounting areoptionally available Install them asshown below

Mounting considerations

Choose a suitable mounting locationconsidering the followingbull Choose a place free from vibrationbull Choose a mid-boat flat position The

sensor does not have to be installedperfectly perpendicular The sensormust not be damaged in dry-dockingoperation

bull Choose a place apart from equipmentgenerating heat

bull Choose a place in the forwarddirection viewing from the drain holeto allow for circulation of coolingwater

1 Dry-dock the boat2 Make a hole of approx 51 mm

diameter in the mounting location3 Unfasten locknut and remove the

sensor section4 Apply high-grade sealant to the

flange of the sensor5 Pass the sensor casing through thehole

6 Face the notch on the sensor towardboatrsquos bow and tighten the flange

7 Set the sensor section to the sensorcasing and tighten the locknut

8 Launch the boat and check for waterleakage around the sensor

Locknut

Face notchtoward bow

Flange Nut

Coat withsilicone sealant Brim

φ 77

51

123

Water temperaturespeed sensor

ST-02MSB ST-02PSB

47 Wiring

Connect the LS-4100 powerdata cableassy MJ-A7SPF0005-020 (2 msupplied) to the POWER and thetransducer cable to the XDR connectorRefer to the interconnection diagram toconnect cables Leave slack in cables tofacilitate checking and maintenance

Note The fuse holder contains a springwhich fixes the fuse To preventdetachment of the spring which wouldcause loss of power tie the line asshown below

+ line (red)

Fuse holder

Cable tie How to fix fuse holder

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4148

35

Establishing the ground

The ground wire (125 sq or more localsupply) should be as short as possible

The signal line ground is isolated from

the chassis ground however the powerline is not insulated Therefore whenconnecting eternal equipment havingpositive ground do not ground thesignal line to the chassis If excessivenoise shows on the screen the groundmay be inadequate In this case attacha steel plate measuring 20 cm by 30 cmon the outside of the hull to provide aground point Connect the ground wire

there Use a ldquoclosedrdquo type lug ( ) tomake the connection at the display unitDo not use an ldquoopenrdquo type lug ( )

Optional equipment

POWER connector

The power supply port is commonlyused for connection of externalequipment such as a GPS receiver orwind indicator Use the powerdatacable MJ-A7SPF0005-020 (supplied) forconnection referring the figure shown inthe right column

Connector Color Remarks

1 TD-A WHT2 TD-B BLU

IEC-61162-1NMEA0183

3 RD-A YEL

4 RD-B GRN

IEC-61162-1

NMEA01835 + RED

6 - BLKPower input12 VDC

7 FG

Water tempspeed sensor

Connect the optional water tempspeedsensor to the XDR connector with theoptional converter connector (Type02S4147) as shown below

Tape connectors withvulcaninzing tapeand then vinyl tapeto waterproof themBind tape ends withcable ties to preventtape from unraveling

Connect to XDR portat rear of display unit

MJ-A10SPF

MJ-A10SRMDMJ-A6SRMD

Fromtransducer

Fromsensor

Connection of converterconnector 02S4147

48 IEC 61162-1 DataSentences

The tables below show the datasentences which can be input to andoutput from the LS-4100 Thetransmission speed for both input andoutput is 4800 bps Data is output attwo-second intervals

Input data sentences

Sentence Meaning

BWC Bearing and distance towaypoint

GGA Global positioning system(GPS) fix data

GLL Geographic position -latitudelongitude

HDG Heading deviation and variationHDT Heading true

MDA Atmospheric pressure

MTW Water temperature

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4248

36

Input data sentences (conrsquot)

Sentence MeaningMWV Wind speed and

angleRMA Recommended

minimum specificLORAN-C dataRMB Recommended

minimum navigationinformation

RMC Recommendedminimum specificGPSTRANSIT data

VHW Water speed andheading

VTG Course over groundand ground speedXTE Cross track error

Output data sentences

Sentence MeaningDBT (Ver 15) Depth below

transducerDPT (Ver 20 Ver30)

Depth

MTW Water temperatureRMB (Ver 20) Recommended

minimumnavigationinformation

VHW Water speed andheading

TLL Target positionoutput by [MARK]key

= Available with connection of optionalsensorsnavaid

49 Installation MenuThe installation menu mainly containsitems which are set at installation

1 Turn on the power while pressing the[MENUESC] key Continue pressing

the [MENUESC] key until theInstallation menu appears

SIMULATION On

TEST LCD PATTERN MEMORY CLEAR

NMEA PORT InOutNMEA MIX OffGPS WAAS Off

SET BOTTOM LEVEL

Installation Menu

= Setting cannot be changed whenNMEA PORT setting is InIn

Installation menu

SIMULATION The simulation modeprovides without connection of thetransducer simulated operation of theequipment using internally generatedechoes All controls are operative Themessage ldquoSIMrdquo appears at the top rightcorner on the screen when thesimulation mode is active

1 At the installation menu press toopen the simulation mode optionswindow

2 Press to choose ldquoOnrdquo to turn onthe simulation mode

3 Press the [POWERBRILL] keyabout three seconds to turn off thepower

4 Press the [POWERBRILL] key toturn on the power ldquoSIMrdquo appears atthe top right corner of the display

5 To turn off the simulation modeselect Off at step 2

NMEA po r t se tup(NMEA PO RT NMEA M IX)

The POWER port can function as aninput port or inputoutput port Changethe setting to ldquoInInrdquo when connectingGP-310B320B and a wind sensor

When connecting the GP-310B320Band a wind sensor first turn on ldquoGPS

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4348

37

WAASrdquo (in the Installation menu) andthen select ldquoInInrdquo as the NMEA portsetting

1 Turn on the power while pressingand holding down the [MENUESC]key Continue pressing the[MENUESC] key until theInstallation menu appears

2 Choose NMEA PORT and thenpress to display the NMEA portoptions window

3 Use or to choose InOut orInIn as appropriate

InOut Input and Output (default

setting)InIn Input only (Available withconnection of the GP-310B320Band a wind sensor)

4 Press choose NMEA MIX andthen press to display the NMEAMIX options window

5 Use or to choose Off or OnChoose On to output input data

Off Outputs the data sentences ofLS-4100 only

On Outputs the data sentences ofLS-4100 and sentences which areinput from other equipment

6 To restore normal operation turn offthe power and then turn it on again

GPS WAAS Chooses how to use theWAAS signal when connecting with a

WAAS receiver for example GP-320B

Note WAAS is currently in thedevelopmental phase During thedevelopmental phase the reliability andavailability of the WAAS signal cannotbe guaranteed Therefore any positiondata should be verified against othersources to confirm reliability

1 Display the Installation menu2 Choose GPS WAAS and then press

to open the GPS WAAS options

window

Off

WAAS options window3 Press or to choose ldquoWAAS-02rdquo

(test signal) When the systembecomes operational (in 2003) setto ldquo00rdquo (regular WAAS signal)

4 Turn off the power

BOTTOM LEVEL If the depthindication is unstable in automaticoperation or the bottom echo cannot bedisplayed in the darkest gray tone byadjusting the gain controls in manualoperation you may adjust the bottomecho level detection circuit for both 50kHz and 200 kHz to stabilize theindication Generally lower the bottomlevel for inner hull installation where thereceive level is too low If the bottomlevel is too low it may be difficult todiscriminate fish from the bottomresulting in unstable depth indication

And if the bottom level is too high thedepth indication may not appear

1 At the installation menu press tochoose SET BOTTOM LEVEL andthen press Several seconds laterthe following display appears

Bottom level +0 (200k -100 - +100 ) +0 ( 50k -100 - +100 )

Bottom level display

2 While observing the picture use or to set 200 kHz or to set50 kHz Set up for optimum picture

3 To restore normal operation turn offthe power and then it on again

Note The mode must be other thanldquoNAV DATArdquo to show the bottom leveldisplay

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4448

SP - 1 E2371S01C

SPECIFICATIONS OF ECHO SOUNDER LS-4100

1 GENERAL11 TX Frequency 50 kHz or 200 kHz 50200 kHz dual transmitting selectable12 Transmit Method Single or dual transmitting

13 Output Power 300 Wrms14 TX Rate Max 500 pulsemin15 Pulse-length 01 to 08 ms

2 DISPLAY UNIT21 Display system 5-inch monochrome LCD 76 mm (W) x 100 mm (H) 240 x 320 dots22 Display Mode Single frequency (highlow freq) Dual-frequency Zoom Nav data-12

Marker zoom Bottom zoom Bottom-lock23 Display Range

Range SettingRange

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

Display

rangeMeter 5 10 20 40 80 150 200 300 2-500

Feet 15 30 60 120 200 400 600 1000 7-1500

Fathoms 3 5 10 20 40 80 100 150 1-250

PassiBraza 3 5 10 30 50 100 150 200 1-300

24 Range Shift 0-500 m 0-1500 ft 0-250 fa 0-300 pb25 Expansion Range Bottom-lock expansion 3 to 10 m

Sectional expansion 2 to 50 m26 Display Advance Speed 8 steps (LinesTX Freeze 1161814121121 41)

3 INTERFACE31 Input data sentences IEC61162-1NMEA0183 Ver 152030

GGA RMA RMB RMC BWC GLL HDT HDG VTG VHW MTWMWV MDA XTE

32 Output data sentences IEC61162-1NMEA0183 Ver 152030 interval 2 sMTW VHW DBT DPT RMB TLL by key operating External data required

4 POWER SUPPLY41 Display Unit 12 VDC 05 A

5 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITION51 Ambient Temperature Display unit -15degC to +55degC52 Relative Humidity 93 or less at 40degC53 Waterproof IPX5

6 COATING COLOR61 Display Unit N30

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4548

M a r

4

0 3

D-1

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4648

Mar 4 03

Mar 4 03

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4748

M a r

3

0 3

S-1

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4848

FURUNO Authorized DistributorDealer FURUNO Authorized DistributorDealer

9-52 Ashihara-cho9-52 Ashihara-choNishinomiya 662-8580 JAPANNishinomiya 662-8580 JAPAN

Telephone Telephone 0798-65-21110798-65-2111FaxFax 0798-65-42000798-65-4200

FIRST EDITION FIRST EDITION MARMAR 20032003Printed in JapanPrinted in Japan All rights reserved All rights reserved

B1B1 SEPSEP 09 200509 2005

Pub NoPub No OME-23710OME-23710 00014698000000146980000001469800000014698000(( DAMIDAMI )) LS-4100LS-4100

0 0 0 1 4 6 9 8 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 4 6 9 8 0 0 0

Page 16: OME23710B_1_LS4100

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 1648

10

112 Erasing WeakEchoes

Sediment in the water or reflectionsfrom plankton may be painted on the

display in low intensity tones

Weakechoes

Appearance of weak echoes

These weak echoes may be erased asfollows1 Press the [MENUESC] key to open

the main menu2 Use or $ to choose SIGNAL

LEVEL from page 1 of the menu3 Press to show the options

window4 Use or $ to choose the degree of

suppression desired Off Low orHigh (highest)

5 Press the [MENUESC] key to closethe menu

To turn off the signal level function choose Off at step 4 and then pressthe [MENUESC] key

113 A-scope DisplayThis display shows echoes at eachtransmission with amplitudes and toneproportional to their intensities on theright 14 of the screen It is useful forestimating the kind of fish school andbottom composition

Note In the dual frequency display the A-scope display is only available withthe high frequency display

323

10

20

30

40

0

A-scope display

Single frequency display

Strong

reflection(bottom)

Weakreflection(fish or noise)

50k 11

Strongreflection(fish)

A-scope display

1 Press the [MENUESC] key to openthe main menu

2 Press or $ to choose A-SCOPEfrom page 1 of the menu

3 Press to show the optionswindow

4 Press

or$

to choose the A-scope presentation type desiredNormal Display shows echoes ateach transmission with amplitudesand tone proportional to theirintensitiesPeak Peak-hold amplitude picture

5 Press the [MENUESC] key to closethe menu

To turn off the A-scope displaychoose Off at step 4 and then press the[MENUESC] key

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 1748

11

114 AlarmsAlarm description

The LS-4100 has six conditions whichgenerate both audio and visual alarms

bottom alarm normal fish alarm bottomlock fish alarm water temperature alarmarrival alarm and speed alarm (Thewater temperature arrival and speedalarms require appropriate sensors)

Bottom alarm The bottom alarm alertsyou when the bottom is within the alarmrange set To activate the bottom alarmthe depth must be displayed

Fish (normal) alarm The fish (normal)alarm tells you when fish are within thepreset alarm range

Fish (bottom lock) alarm The fish(bottom lock) alarm available with thebottom-lock mode sounds when fishare within a certain distance from thebottom Note that the bottom zoom

display must be turned on to use thisalarm

Water temperature alarm The watertemperature alarm alerts when thewater temperature is within (Insidealarm) the alarm range set orunderover (outside alarm) the rangeset

Speed alarm The speed alarm alertsyou when the speed is within (Insidealarm) or underover (Outside alarm)the preset speed

Arrival alarm The arrival alarm alertswhen you are near a waypoint by thedistance set

Activating an alarm

1 Press the [MENUESC] key2 Press or $ to choose ALARM

MENU from page 2 on the menu3 Press the to show the ALARM

menu

ALARM

(12)

[MENU] Exit

ALARM

(22)

[MENU] Exit

BOTTOM On FROM 5ft

RANGE 10ftFISH(Normal) On

FROM 5ft RANGE 10ftFISH(BL) On

FROM 8ft RANGE 10ftFISH LEVEL Medium

TEMPERATURE Inside FROM 724 deg F RANGE 10 deg F

SPEED Off FROM 00kt

RANGE 10kt

ARRIVAL ALRM Off RANGE 0 01 m

Pageno

Gray characters mean alarm is inactive Alarm menu

4 Use or $ to choose an alarm asappropriate

5 Press to show the options menu

Off On

Off InsideOutside

Temp Speed Alarm Types

Fish ArrivalBottom AlarmOnOff

Alarm options6 Use or $ to choose alarm type

Off Alarm off On Alarm onInside Alarm generated whenspeed (or water temperature) iswithin the range setOutside Alarm generated whenspeed (or water temperature) isoutside the range set

7 Press to close the windowFor ARRIVAL ALARM setting skip tostep 12

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 1848

12

8 Press $ to choose FROM9 Press to show the options menu

0ft

Depth

632 deg F

Temperature

10 kt

Speed Depth temperature speed setting

window10 Use or $ to set starting depth

temperature or speed as appropriateFor FISH (BL) the starting depth isthe range from the bottom

11 Press to close the window12 Press $ to choose RANGE13 Press to show the options menu14 Use or $ to set alarm range15 For the bottom alarm temperature

alarm speed alarm or arrivalalarm press the [MENUESC] key tofinish For a fish alarm press toclose the window and then go tostep 16

16 Press $ to choose FISH LEVEL17 Press to show the options menu

Weak

MediumStrong Fish level options

18 Use or $ to choose the echostrength level which will trigger a fishalarm

Weak Weak echoes (weakest toneon level bar)Medium Medium strength echoes

(middle tone on level bar)Strong Strong echoes (darkest toneon level bar)

19 Press the [MENUESC] key twice toclose the menu

Alarm range marker Bottom alarm Fish alarm (normal) Right Fish alarm (bottomlock) Left

Alarm icon

Alarm rangeStartingpoint

Bottom alarm Fish alarm (normal) Fish alarm (BL)

Temperature alarm (deg

C ordeg

F shown) Speed alarm Arrival alarm

Alarm icon (Appropriate icon appears to showwhich alarm has been violated)

How the alarm works

Note To disable an alarm choose Offat step 5 in the above procedure

Silencing the buzzer

The buzzer sounds and the appropriatealarm icon appears and flashes whenan alarm is violated You can silence thebuzzer by pressing any key Howeverthe buzzer will sound whenever thealarm setting is violated

Note The audio and visual alarms arereleased against the last-violated alarmwhen multiple alarms are active

115 WaypointsWaypoints may be used tobull Record the position of an important

echo as waypoint 12 points may beregistered

bull Output a waypoint position to a plotterto mark position on its screen

bull Find range bearing and time-to-go toa location (waypoint)

Note Requires latitude and longitudeposition from a navigator

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 1948

13

Registering a waypoint on thescreen

1 Press the [MARK] key The cursorappears along with waypoint entryinstructions To enter a waypoint tothe current own shiprsquos position go tostep 3Note If there is no position data themessage ldquoNo position datardquo appearsCheck the navigator

50k

496

1100

20

40

60

80

0

Cursor

WAYPOINT ENTRY

( Move) Cursor [MARK] Enter [MENU] Cancel

50 kHz display

2 Press the cursor pad to set thecursor where desired Pictureadvancement is stopped until step 3is completed and the instructionwindow is integrated into the navdisplay

3 Press the [MARK] key again WhenTLL or FURUNO-TLL is selected atTLL OUTPUT on the System menuthe latitude and longitude position atthe cursor is output to the navigator

A vertical line marks location Furtherthe display shows the waypointname (next sequential number) andposition of the location selected atstep 2

WAYPOINTName FREQLat 34 deg 22796NLon 136 deg 07264E

05

[MENU] Exit

rase

Waypoint data display

Note If you attempt to enter 13thwaypoint the message ldquoMemoryfullrdquo appears In this case erase anunwanted waypoint to enable entry

4 To save the waypoint under thename shown go to step 8 or go tostep 5 to change its name

5 Press to open the waypoint nameentry window

WAYPOINTName FREQLat 34 deg 22796NLon 136 deg 07264E

05

[MENU] Exit

01------ ENT

rase

Waypoint window name entry6 Use or to set character $ or

to shift cursor The name mayconsist of 10 alphanumericcharactersNote Character order is 0 1hellip9 - A BhellipZ _ 0hellip

7 Press to choose ENT 8 Press the [MENUESC] key to

register the waypoint

Registering waypoint by LL

1 Press the [MENUESC] key to openthe main menu

2 Use or to choose WAYPOINTLIST from page 2 of the menu

3 Press

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 2048

14

WAYPOINT LIST

01 0102 0303------------------------------------------------------

[MENU] Exit

Waypoint list4 Press or to choose an empty

waypoint and press Press again

NEW WAYPOINTName FREQLat 34 deg 22796NLon 136 deg 07264E

05

[MENU] Exit

04------ ENT

rase

New waypoint window name entry

5 Use or to set character $ or to shift cursor

6 Press to select ENT 7 Enter latitude and longitude similar

to how you entered waypoint name8 Press the [MENUESC] key to

register the waypoint

Editing waypoints Press the [MENUESC] key to open

the main menu

2 Use or to choose WAYPOINTLIST from page 2 of the menu

3 Press to open the waypoints list4 Use or to choose a waypoint

and press 5 Use or to choose the item to

edit (name latitude or longitude)6 Press to open the data entry

window7 Use or to set character $ or

to choose location8 Press to choose ENT 9 Press the [MENUESC] key

Erasing waypoints Press the [MENUESC] key2 Use or to choose WAYPOINT

LIST from page 2 of the menu3 Press to open the waypoints list

4 Use or to choose the waypointto erase and then press Note You cannot erase a waypointwhich is selected as ldquoGOTO WPTrdquo

5 Press to choose ldquoEraserdquo6 Press to open the options window7 Press to select YES to erase the

waypoint The waypoint list appearswith the erased waypoint blank

8 Press the [MENUESC] key twice toclose the menu

Setting destination waypoint

Set a destination waypoint to find rangebearing and time-to-go to that point Youcan see range and bearing to awaypoint Time-to-go is shown on theTime to Go digital display

Press the [MENUESC] key to openthe main menu

2 Use or to choose GOTO WPTfrom page 2 of the menu

3 Press to open the waypoints list

Off01020304----------------------------------------------------------------

Waypoint list

4 Use or to choose a waypoint5 Press the [MENUESC] key to close

the menu

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 2148

15

116 Setting Up Nav DataDisplays

The user may arrange the nav datadisplays as desired

1 Use the [MODE] key to show theNAV DATA-1 or 2 display whicheveryou want to set up

2 Press the [MENUESC] key to closethe mode selection window

3 Press the cursor pad to display theNAV DATA SETUP window

NAV DATA SETUP

Window Selection Data Selection

[MENU] Exit

NAV DATA SETUP window

4 Use or to choose a datadisplay window desired Adashed-line rectangle circumscribesyour selection

5 Use

or$

to choose item todisplay See the below for adescription of the displays

(9)

(1)

(2)

(3)

(4)(5)

(6)(7)(8)

Two-data

display

Three-data

display

Four-data

displayItems displayable in (1) - (3) depth positioncourse range and bearing trip distanceodometer water temperature headingair pressure time-to-go to destination waypointXTE speed wind speed and directiondestination waypoint data compassItems displayable in (4) - (9) depth positionspeed course range and bearing trip distanceodometer water temperature headingair pressure time-to-go to destination waypointXTE wind speed wind direction

= Graphic display

Nav data window and item displayable6 Press the [MENUESC] key to finish

Note You can choose the number ofitems to show in a nav data display withNAV DATA-1 and NAV DATA-2 on theSystem menu

GRAPHIC DISPLAYS

1 05 0 05 1

Wpt 03Rng 019nm Brg 321 deg XTE 000nm Cse 333 deg

DESTINATION WAYPOINT GRAPHIC

XTEscale

BearingCourseDestinationwaypointdirection

DestinationwaypointdataNameRangeXTE

Wind APP

WIND GRAPHIC

60

120

90

030

150180

120

150

90

60

30

120 deg

Speed 103 ms

COMPASS GRAPHIC

SPEED GRAPHIC

172

Speed

20

50

40

60

30

10

01 05 0 05 1

025 nm

XTE

XTE GRAPHIC

kt

Bearing todestinationwaypoint

Course

Brg30 deg

Cse90 deg

N

E

XTE scale

Speed-ometer

Nav data display-1

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 2248

16

DIGITAL DISPLAYS

Course

123 deg

COURSE

Depth

328 ft

DEPTH

Heading TRUEMAG

318 deg

HEADING

Odometer

56 nm

ODOMETER

Position GPS 3D

30 deg 00065N130 deg 00574E

POSITION

Temperature

698 degF

WATER TEMPERATURE

Trip meter

121 nm

TRIP DISTANCE

Time to Go

00 H30 M

TIME-TO-GO

1018 hpa

AIR PRESSURE

Air Pressure

Speed

193 kt

SPEED

Rng

121 nm

RANGE amp BEARING

Brg

140 deg

Wind Speed APP

80 ms

WIND SPEED

Wind Dir APP

138 deg

WIND DIRECTION

APP or TRUE depending on menu setting TRUE or MAG depending

on menu settingamp To destination waypoint

Note 1 Nav data is updated with somedelay

Note 2 When data is lost 120 sec thedisplay shows - - at the locationwhere data is lost

= GPS receiving status (Displays whenconnecting with GP-310B320B and InOutis selected at the Installation menu)NO FIX Position cannot be foundGPS 2D 2D (dimension) GPS position fixGPS 3D 3D GPS fixGPS W2D 2D WAAS position fixGPS W3D 3D WAAS position fix

NAV data display-2

117 Other Menu ItemsThis section describes the menu itemsnot previously mentioned

Page 1

HUE (Picture Color)

Two picture color arrangements areavailable Day and Night Day showsechoes on a white background Nightshows them on a black background

1 Press the [MENUESC] key todisplay the menu

2 Use or $ to choose HUE frompage 1 of the menu

3 Press to show the optionswindow

4 Use or $ to choose Day or Nightas appropriate

5 Press the [MENUESC] key to closethe menu

WHITE LINE

The white line feature displays theleading edge of the bottom echo in

white This is useful for discriminatingbottom fish near the bottom

1 Press the [MENUESC] key todisplay the main menu

2 Use or $ to choose WHITE LINEfrom page 1 of the menu

3 Press to show the optionswindow

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 2348

17

4 Use or to choose Off Tone orMesh as appropriate ldquoMeshrdquo paintsthe white line in darker tone thanldquoTonerdquo

5 Press the [MENUESC] key to closethe menu

526White Line OFF White Line ON (Mesh)

Fish schoolclearly shown

White line

0

20

40

60

80

050k 11

526

0

20

40

60

80

00 050k 11

How white line works

DEEP GAIN

ldquoDeep Gainrdquo compensates forpropagation attenuation of the ultrasonicwaves It does this by equalizing echopresentation so that fish schools of thesame size appear in the same density inboth shallow and deep waters Inaddition it reduces surface noise

Press the [MENUESC] key to openthe main menu

2 Use or to choose DEEP GAINfrom page of the menu

3 Press $ to show to the optionswindow

4 Choose Low Medium or High asappropriate High provides thegreatest degree of gain reductionagainst short range echoes

5 Press the [MENUESC] key to closethe menu

Page 2

TRIP RESET

This item resets trip distance to ldquo0rdquo

Press the [MENUESC] key to openthe main menu

2 Use or to choose TRIPRESET from page 2 of the menu

3 Press $ 4 Press to reset trip distance

Beeps are generated while the tripdistance is being reset

5 Press the [MENUESC] key to closethe menu

Note To reset the odometer to zeroclear the memory

GAIN ADJ 200 GAIN ADJ 50

If the gain is too high or too low or thegain for the low and high frequenciesappears unbalanced you cancompensate it as follows

Press the [MENUESC] key to openthe main menu

2 Use or to choose GAIN ADJ200 or GAIN ADJ 50 from page 2 ofthe menu

3 Press $ to show to the optionswindow

4 Use or to set the amount Thesetting range is ndash50 to +50

5 Press the [MENUESC] key to close

the menu

DRAFT

The default depth display shows thedistance from the transducer If youwould rather show the distance from thesea surface set your shiprsquos draft asfollows

Press the [MENUESC] key to openthe main menu

2 Use or to choose DRAFT frompage 2 of the menu

3 Press $ and then use or to setdraft The setting range is ndash 50 to+500 (meters feet)

4 Press the [MENUESC] key to closethe menu

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 2448

18

2 SYSTEM MENU

The System menu mainly consists ofitems which once set do not requirefrequent adjustment You may displaythis menu by choosing SYSTEM MENUat page 2 of the main menu andpressing

SYSTEM MENULANGUAGE English

DEPTH UNIT ftSPEED UNIT ktWIND UNIT msTEMP UNIT deg F

TEMP GRAPH OffNAV DATA-1 NAV DATA-2

WATER TYPE SaltKEY BEEP OnBATT VOLTAGE Off (13)

[MENU] Exit

SYSTEM MENU

(23)

NAV DISPLAY TempSpeedNMEA0183 Ver 20TLL OUTPUT OffBEARING TrueWIND SPDDIR ApparentTRIP SOURCE Own

TEMP SOURCE OwnSPEED SOURCE OwnTEMP CALIB +00 deg F ( 40)SPEED CALIB +0 ( 50)

Own speed Own temp 100 kt 162 deg F

[MENU] Exit

SYSTEM MENU

(33)

BASIC RANGE1 15 ft

RANGE2 30RANGE3 60RANGE4 120RANGE5 200RANGE6 400RANGE7 600RANGE8 1000 (7-1500)

ZOOM RANGE 15 ft (7-150)BL RANGE 15 ft (10-30)(Bottom Lock)

ZOOM MARKER On

[MENU] Exit

PAGE 3

PAGE 2

PAGE 1

Page no

System menus

21 System MenuPage 1

LANGUAGE The system language isavailable in English several Europeanlanguages and Japanese To changelanguage select language desired andpress the [MENUESC] key

DEPTH UNIT Choose unit of depthmeasurement from meters feet

fathoms passibraza and hiro(Japanese)

SPEED UNIT Choose unit of speedmeasurement from knots miles perhour and kilometers per hour Requiresspeed data

WIND UNIT Choose unit of wind speedmeasurement from ms kt kmh and

mph Requires wind speed data

TEMP UNIT Choose unit oftemperature measurement Celsius orFahrenheit Requires temperature data

TEMP GRAPH Turns the watertemperature display on or off Thetemperature scale range is 16deg (degF) inldquoNarrowrdquo 40deg (degF) in ldquoWiderdquo Requires

water temperature data

m526

0

20

40

60

80

00 050k 11

40

80

70

50

60

TemperatureScale

TemperatureGraph

638 deg F162kt

Water temperature display (wide degF)

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 2548

19

NAV DATA-1 -2 Choose the number ofnavigation data items to display on thenav data displays from two three orfour items Requires appropriate navdata

WATER TYPE Choose the water typewith which to use the LS-4100 fromSalt or Fresh

KEY BEEP Turn key beep on or off

BATT VOLTAGE Turn the batteryvoltage indication (appears at the topright corner on the screen) on or offWhen on it replaces the picture advancespeed indication

Page 2

NAV DISPLAY Choose the nav data todisplay in the nav data window at thetop left-hand corner You may choosefrom temperaturespeedlatitudelongitude range and bearingcourse over ground trip distance or

wind speed Requires appropriate navdata

407 deg F162kt

Nav window

NMEA0183 Choose NMEA version ofnavigator Ver 15 Ver 20 or Ver 30

TLL OUTPUT Enablesdisables outputof TLL (Target Latitude Longitude)position when the [MARK] key isoperated ldquoTLLrdquo outputs latitude andlongitude position ldquoFURUNO-TLLrdquoavailable with connection of navigatorthat can output FURUNO TLL outputslatitude and longitude watertemperature depth etc

BEARING Shiprsquos course and bearingto a waypoint may be displayed in trueor magnetic bearing Magnetic bearingis true bearing plus (or minus) earthrsquosmagnetic deviation Requires bearingdata

WIND SPDDIR Choose the windspeed and direction reference from trueand apparent Requires wind sensorApparen t The direction (in relation toshiprsquos bow) and speed of the wind as itappears to those on board relative tothe speed and direction of the boatcombination of the true wind and thewind caused by the boats movementTrue The speed and direction (inrelation to shiprsquos bow) of the wind felt ormeasured when stationary

TRIP SOURCE Choose speed sourcefor the trip distance indication Own(transducer with speed sensor orseparate speed sensor) or NMEA

TEMP SOURCE Choose source ofwater temperature input Off Own(transducer with water temperaturesensor or separate temperature sensor)or NMEA

SPEED SOURCE Choose source ofspeed input Off Own (transducer withspeed sensor or separate speedsensor) or NMEA Requires speed

data

TEMP CALIB If the water temperaturesensor-generated water temperatureindication is wrong you can correct ithere when ldquoOwnrdquo is selected astemperature source For example if thewater temperature indication is 2deghigher than actual water temperatureenter -2 The setting range is -40degF to

+40degF

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 2648

20

SPEED CALIB If the speedsensor-generated speed indication iswrong you can correct it here whenldquoOwnrdquo is selected as speed source Forexample if the speed indication is 10lower than actual speed enter +10 Thesetting range is ndash50 to +50

Page 3

BASIC RANGE 1 - BASIC RANGE 8 Set range of each of the eight basicranges (Selectable range 7 to 1500 ft)Note 1 All default basic ranges arerestored whenever the depth unit ischanged Therefore change the depth

unit before changing the basic rangesNote 2 A range may not be lower thanthe range preceding it For example ifbasic range 3 is 60 feet basic range 4must be greater than 60 feet

ZOOM RANGE Choose the range tozoom in the marker-zoom andbottom-zoom modes You may choose arange between 7 and 150 feet (2 and 50

meters)

BL RANGE The expansion width forthe bottom-lock display can be chosenfrom 10 to 30 feet (3 and 10 meters)

ZOOM MARKER The zoom markerappears in the normal bottom markerand bottom zoom displays and marksthe area which is expanded in the

bottom marker and bottom zoompictures You can turn the marker on oroff as desired

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 2748

21

3 MAINTENANCETROUBLESHOOTING

W RNING

ELECTRICAL SHOCK HAZARDDo not open the equipment

Only qualified personnel should workinside the equipment

31 Maintenance

Regular maintenance is essential forgood performance Checking the itemslisted in the table below monthly willhelp keep your equipment in goodshape for years to come

Checking

Item Action

Transducercable

Check cable for damage

Power cabletransducercable plug

Check that they are tightlyfastened Refasten ifnecessary

Display unitground

Check for corrosion Cleanif necessary

Power supplyvoltage

Check voltage If out ofrating correct problem

32 Cleaning the DisplayUnit

Dust or dirt on the display unit can beremoved with a soft cloth If desired awater-moistened cloth may be usedUse special care when cleaning theLCD since it scratches easily Do notuse chemical cleaners to clean thedisplay unit - they can remove paint andmarkings

33 TransducerMaintenance

Marine life on the transducer face willresult in a gradual decrease insensitivity Check the transducer facefor cleanliness each time the boat isdry-docked Carefully remove anymarine life with a piece of wood orfine-grade sandpaper

34 Replacing the FuseThe fuse in the power cable protects thesystem from reverse polarity of thepower supply and equipment fault If thefuse blows find the cause beforereplacing it Use only a 1A fuse (FGMB 1A 125V Code No 000-114-805 ) orequivalent Using the wrong fuse will damage the unit and void the warranty

W RNINGUse the proper fuse

Fuse rating is shown on the equipmentUse of a wrong fuse can result in fire anddamage the equipment

35 Battery Voltage Alert A battery icon appears when the batteryvoltage is too high or too low

Battery icon and meaning

Icon Meaning

Voltage is lower than 10 VDC If thevoltage goes below 9 V the equipmentis automatically turned off

Voltage is higher than 165 VDC If thevoltage goes higher than 175 V theequipment is automatically turned off

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 2848

22

36 TroubleshootingThe table below provides basictroubleshooting procedures which theuser may follow to restore normaloperation

Troubleshooting table

Ifhellip Then check hellipneither echo norfixed range scaleappears

bull battery voltagebull fusebull power cable

no echo appearsbut the fixedrange scaleappears

bull if display advancespeed is set to ldquoStoprdquo

bull transducer plugbull

transducer cableecho appears butno zero line

bull if range shifting is setto ldquo0rdquo

sensitivity is low bull gain settingbull if air bubbles or marine

life is clinging to thetransducer face

bull if sediments arepresent in the water

bull if the bottom is too soft

to return an echothere is extremeinterference ornoise

bull if the transducer is tooclose to the engine

bull if the unit is properlygrounded

bull if other echo soundersof the same frequencyas own are beingoperated nearby

the speedwatertemperaturereadout isunrealistic or notpresent

bull sensor plug

the positionreadout isunrealistic or notpresent

bull the connectionbetween sounder andnavigator

bull navigator

37 DiagnosticsIf you feel your unit is not workingproperly conduct the diagnostic test tofind the problem If you cannot restorenormal operation contact your dealerfor advice

1 Turn on the power while pressing the[MENUESC] key Continue pressingthe [MENUESC] key until theInstallation menu appears

SIMULATION On

TEST LCD PATTERN MEMORY CLEAR

NMEA PORT InOutNMEA MIX Off GPS WAAS Off

SET BOTTOM LEVEL

Installation Menu

= Setting cannot be changed whenNMEA PORT setting is InIn

Installation menu2 Press to choose TEST3 Press to start the test

ROM OKRAM OKNMEA

Temp 682 deg F

Speed 100kmh

Power 124 VBody 39 deg C

Program No 0252318-01Push [MENU] 3 times to exit

Level bar

= Program version no

Water

TemperatureSpeedBattery VoltageTemperatureinside displayunit(Unit fixed atdeg C)

GPS (48502180) OK

Only when GP-310B is connected(For GP-320B 4850238)

Test display

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 2948

23

4 The ROM RAM and NMEA port arechecked with the results shown asOK or NG (No Good) For any NGrequest service (A special connectoris required to test the NMEA portNothing appears if no connector isconnected)

5 The squares at the right side of thetest display are for checking thecontrols Press each key and thearrows on the Cursor Pad one byone A controlrsquos correspondingon-screen square ldquolightsrdquo in black ifthe control is normal

6 To return to the Installation menupress the [MENUESC] key threetimes

7 To restore normal operation turn offthe power and turn it on again

38 Test PatternThis feature tests for proper display oftones

1 On the Installation menu press $ tochoose LCD PATTERN

2 Press to start the test The entirescreen is black

3 Press again and the screen turnswhite

4 Press again and the screenshows a four-toned display

5 Press again to return to theInstallation menu

6 To restore normal operation turn offthe power and then it on again

WHITE FOUR-TONE BLACK

Test patterns

39 Memory ClearThe memory can be cleared to startafresh with default menu settings

1 At the installation menu press $ tochoose MEMORY CLEAR

2 Press to open the optionswindow

YES NO

Clear memory display

3 Press to clear the memory Beepsare generated while the memory isbeing cleared

4 To restore normal operation turn offthe power and then turn it on again

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3048

24

4 INSTALLATION

41 Display UnitMounting considerations

The display unit can be installed on adesktop on the bulkhead or flushmounted in a panel When choosing alocation keep the following in mind

bull Keep the display unit out of directsunlight

bull The temperature and humidity should

be moderate and stablebull Locate the unit away from exhaust

pipes and ventsbull The mounting location should be well

ventilatedbull Mount the unit where shock and

vibration are minimalbull For maintenance and checking

purposes leave sufficient space atthe sides and rear of the unit andleave slack in cables

bull A magnetic compass will be affected ifthe display unit is placed too close toit Observe the following compasssafe distances to prevent disturbanceto the magnetic compassStandard compass 04 metersSteering compass 03 meters

Desktop overhead mounting1 Fix the bracket to a desktop or the

overhead with tapping screws(supplied)

2 Loosely screw knobs into the displayunit

3 Set the display unit to the bracketand then tighten the knobs

Mounting on the bulkhead Flush

mounting in a panelSee the instructions on the bulkhead orflush mounting template (supplied)

42 Thru-hull MountTransducer

Transducer mounting location

The thru-hull mount transducer

(520-5PSD 520-5MSD) provides thebest performance of all since thetransducer protrudes from the hull andthe effect of air bubbles and turbulencenear the hull skin is reduced When theboat has a keel the transducer shouldbe at least 30 cm away from it Typicalthru-hull mountings are shown in thefigure on the next page

The performance of this sounder isdirectly related to the mounting locationof the transducer especially forhigh-speed cruising The installationshould be planned in advance keepingthe standard cable length (8 m) and thefollowing factors in mindbull Air bubbles and turbulence caused by

movement of the boat seriouslydegrade the sounding capability of thetransducer The transducer shouldtherefore be located in a positionwhere water flow is the smoothestNoise from the propellers alsoadversely affects performance andthe transducer should not be mountednearby The lifting strakes arenotorious for creating acoustic noiseand these must be avoided bykeeping the transducer inboard ofthem

bull The transducer must always remain

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3148

25

submerged even when the boat isrolling pitching or up on a plane athigh speed

bull A practical choice would besomewhere between 13 and 12 of

the boatrsquos length from the stern Forplaning hulls a practical location isgenerally rather far astern so that thetransducer is always in waterregardless of the planing attitude

28

22

120

68

30

520-5PSD

24

120

68

87520-5MSD

Unit mm

Thru-hull mount transducer dimensions

Acceptable transducer mounting

locations

Position 12 to 13 of the hull from stern

15 to 30 cm off center line (inside first lifting strakes)

Within the wetted bottom area

Deadrise angle within 15 deg

HIGH SPEED-V HULL

Suitable transducer mounting locations

Typical thru-hull mounttransducer installations

FairingBlock

Flat Washer

Rubber Washer

Hull

Deep-V Hull

Hull

Flat Washer

Rubber Washer

Flat Hull

CorkWasher

Typical thru-hull mounttransducer installations

Procedure for installing thethru-hull mount transducer

1 With the boat hauled out of the watermark the location chosen formounting the transducer on thebottom of the hull

2 If the hull is not level within 15deg inany direction fairing blocks madeout of teak should be used betweenthe transducer and hull both insideand outside to keep the transducerface parallel with the water lineFabricate the fairing block as shownbelow and make the entire surfaceas smooth as possible to provide anundisturbed flow of water around thetransducer The fairing block shouldbe smaller than the transducer itselfto provide a channel to divert

turbulent water around the sides ofthe transducer rather than over itsface

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3248

26

BOWHole for stuffing tube

Upper Half

Lower Half

Saw along slopeof hull Construction of fairing block

3 Drill a hole just large enough to passthe threaded stuffing tube of thetransducer through the hull makingsure it is drilled vertically

4 Apply a sufficient amount of highquality caulking compound to the topsurface of the transducer around thethreads of the stuffing tube andinside the mounting hole (and fairingblocks if used) to ensure watertightmounting

5 Mount the transducer and fairingblocks and tighten the locking nutsBe sure that the transducer is

properly oriented and its workingface is parallel to the waterline

Note Do not over-stress the stuffingtube and locking nuts through excessivetightening since the wood block willswell when the boat is placed in thewater It is suggested that the nut betightened lightly at installation andretightened several days after the boat

has been launched

Transducer preparation

Before putting the boat in water wipethe face of the transducer thoroughlywith a detergent liquid soap This willlessen the time necessary for thetransducer to have good contact withthe water Otherwise the time requiredfor complete ldquosaturationrdquo ill belengthened and performance will bereduced

DO NOT paint the transducerPerformance will be affected

43 Transom MountTransducer

The transom mount transducer is verycommonly employed usually onrelatively small IO or outboard boatsDo not use this method on an inboardmotor boat because turbulence iscreated by the propeller ahead of thetransducer

520-5PWD

There are two methods of installationflush with hull (for flat hulls) andprojecting from hull (for deep V-hulls)

Flat Hull

D

Dgt50 cm

Deep-VHull

520-5PWD mounting locations

Installing the 520-5PWD on a flat hull

A suitable mounting location is at least50 cm away from the engine and wherethe water flow is smooth

1 Drill four pilot holes in the mountinglocation

2 Attach the transducer to the bracketwith 5 x 20 tapping screws(supplied)

3 Adjust the transducer position so thetransducer faces right to the bottom

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3348

27

Note If necessary to improve waterflow and minimize air bubblesstaying on the transducer faceincline the transducer about 5deg at therear This may require a certainamount of experimentation for finetuning at high cruising speeds

4 Fill the gap between the wedge frontof the transducer and transom withepoxy material to eliminate any airspaces

No1 M5 x 14

5 x 20

5 x 20

2 to 5

Tape

Hull

Transom mount transducer

mounting flush with hull

Installing the transom mounttransducer on a deep-V hull

This method is employed on deep-Vhulls and provides good performancebecause the effects of air bubbles areminimal Install the transducer parallelwith water surface not flush with hull Ifthe boat is placed on a trailer care mustbe taken not to damage the transducerwhen the boat is hauled out of the waterand put on the trailer

5 x 20

No 2M5 x 14

5 x 20

Transom mount transducermounted projecting from hull

525-5PWD

Choose the installation methoddepending on the rise angle of the hull

Transom

Transom

Stripe over 10

Parallel with hull

Mount at the stripe

less than 10

525-5PWD mounting location

Installing the 525-5PWD

Referring to ldquoInstalling the 520-5PWDrdquoin the left column for mounting of thebracket and the figure shown on the topof next page install the 525-5PWD tothe transom

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3448

28

2 to 5

Transducer

Bracket

Hull

Epoxy material

525-5PWD mounting

44 Inside-hullTransducer

The thru-hull mount transducer(520-5PSD 520-5MSD) may also beinstalled inside the hull following theprocedure below

Necessary tools

You will need the following toolsbull Sandpaper (100)bull Silicone sealantbull Silicone grease

Remarks on installationbull Turn off the engine and anchor the

boat while installing the equipmentbull Install the transducer in the engine

room

Choosing the mounting locationbull The mounting location should be

where the hull is of single-hullthickness and is void of air or flotationmaterials other than solid fiberglassbetween the transducer face and thewater

bull Do not place the transducer over hullstruts or ribs which run under the hull

bull Avoid a location where the risingangle of the hull exceeds 15deg tominimize the effect of the boatrsquosrolling

bull You will finalize the mounting location

through some trial and error Theprocedure for this is shown later

50 cm

50 cm15 cm15 cm

13

12

Transducer mountinglocation

Centerline

Inside-hull transducer mounting location

Attaching the transducer1 Clean the transducer face to remove

any foreign material Lightly roughenthe transducer face with 100sandpaper Also roughen the insideof the hull where the transducer is tobe mounted

2 Clean the transducer face again3 Warm the silicone sealant to 40degC

before usage to soften it Coat thetransducer face and mountinglocation with silicone sealant

Transducer

SiliconeSealant

Coating transducer facewith silicone sealant

4 Press the transducer firmly down onthe hull and gently twist it back andforth to remove any air which may betrapped in the silicone sealant

Checking the installation

1 Connect the battery to the display

unit2 Turn on the display unit

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3548

29

3 Press the [MODE] key to chooseSINGLE FREQ

4 Choose 50 kHz or 200 kHz and thenpress the [MENUESC] key to closethe mode menu

5 Press the [MENU] to show the mainmenu and then press to select

Auto mode6 Press to choose Off7 Press the [MENUESC] key8 Press the [GAIN] key to set the gain

to ldquo5rdquo and then press the[MENUESC] key

9 Press the [RANGE] key to set therange to 10 meters (feet) and thenpress the [MENUESC] key

10 If the bottom is displayed in darkgray and the depth indicationappears the mounting location issuitable Go to ldquoFinal preparationrdquo

11 If the bottom is not displayed in darkgray tone the mounting location maybe unsuitable Do the followinga) Press the [POWERBRILL] key to

turn off the powerb) Gently dismount the transducer

with a piece of woodc) Reattach the transducer

elsewhere as shown in ldquoAttachingthe transducerrdquo

d) Check the installation again

Final preparation

Support the transducer with a piece ofwood to keep it in place while it is drying

Let the transducer dry 24-72 hours

45 Optional Triducer525ST-MSD

The optional triducer 525ST-MSD isdesigned for thru-hull mounting Forhow to install this transducer seeparagraph 42

φ79 mm

33 mm200-12 UNthreads

φ51 mm

27 mm

7 mm

140 mm Triducer 525ST-MSD

525ST-PWD

The Transom Mount Transducer orTRIDUCER reg Multisensor with IntegralRelease Bracket 525ST-PWD ismanufactured by AIRMAR Co Theseinstructions are also included with the

sensor

Pre-test for speed and temperature

Connect the sensor to the instrumentand spin the paddlewheel Check for aspeed reading and the approximate airtemperature If there is no readingreturn the sensor to your place ofpurchase

Tools and materials needed

ScissorsMasking tapeSafety gogglesDust maskElectric drillDrill bit for

Bracket holes 4mm 23 or 964rdquoFiberglass hull chamfer bit(preferred)6mm or 14rdquo

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3648

30

Transom hole 19mm or 34rdquo(optional)

Cable clamp holes 3mm or 18rdquoScrewdriversStraight edgeMarine sealantPencilZip-tiesWater-based antifouling paint(mandatory in salt water )

Mounting location

To ensure the best performance thesensor must be submerged inaeration-free and turbulence-free water

Mount the sensor close to the centerlineof the boat On slower heavierdisplacement hulls positioning it fartherfrom the centerline is acceptable

Allow adequate space above thebracket for it to release and rotate thesensor upward

Height

Height withoutspeed sensor191mm (7-12)Height withspeed sensor213mm (8-12)

Height required at mounting location

Note 1 Do not mount the sensor in anarea of turbulence or bubbles nearwater intake or discharge openingsbehind strakes struts fittings or hull

irregularities behind eroding paint (anindication of turbulence)Note 2 Avoid mounting the sensorwhere the boat may be supportedduring trailering launching hauling andstorageNote 3 For single drive boat mounton the starboard side at least 75 mm(3rdquo) beyond the swing radius of thepropeller

75 mm(3)

minimum beyondswing radius

Mounting location on single drive boat

Note 4 For twin drive boat mountbetween the drives

Installation of bracket

1 Cut out the installation template

shown on the next page2 At the selected location position thetemplate so the arrow at the bottomis aligned with the bottom edge ofthe transom Being sure the templateis parallel to the waterline tape it inplace

Align template vertically

Deadrise angle

Slope of hullparallel towaterline

Align template arrow withbottom edge of transom

Positioning the template

Warning Always wear safetygoggles and a dust mask

3 Using a 4 mm 23 or 964rdquo bit drillthree holes 22 mm (78rdquo) deepat the locations indicated To preventdrilling too deeply wrap maskingtape around the bit 22 mm (78rdquo)from the pointFiberglass hull Minimize surfacecracking by chamfering the gelcoatIf a chamfer bit or countersink bit is

not available start drilling with a6mm or 14rdquo bit to a depth of 1 mm(116rdquo)

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3748

31

4 If you know your transom angle the

bracket is designed for a standard13deg transom angle11deg-18deg angle No shim is requiredSkip to step 3 in ldquoAdjustingrdquoOther angles The shim is requiredSkip to step 2 of ldquoAdjustingrdquoIf you do not know the transom angletemporarily attach the bracket andsensor to the transom to determine ifthe plastic shim is needed

5 Using the two 10 x 1-14rdquo

self-tapping screws temporarilyscrew the bracket to the hull DONOT tighten the screws completelyat this time Follow the step 1-4 inldquoAttaching the Sensor to the Bracketrdquobefore proceeding with ldquoAdjustingrdquo

Installation templatefor starboard side of boat

Drill at locations labeled Bfor the following transom angles

16 deg through 22 deg

Drill at locations labeled Afor the following transom angles

2 deg through 15 deg

Align arrow with bottom of transom

AA A

BB B

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3848

32

Adjusting

1 Using a straight edge sight theunderside of the sensor relative tothe underside of the hull The sternof the sensor should be 1-3 mm

(116-18rdquo) below the bow of thesensor or parallel to the bottom ofthe hull

11 deg transom angleNO SHIM

12-18 deg transom angleNO SHIM

2 deg -10 deg transom

angle

19 deg -22 deg transom

angleshim withtaper up

shim withtaper down

parallelparallel parallel

slightangle

angletoo steep

anglereversed

YES NONO

YES YESYES

Sensor position and transom angle

Note Do not position the bow of thesensor lower than the stern becauseaeration will occur

2 To adjust the sensorrsquos angle relativeto the hull use the tapered plasticshim provided If the bracket hasbeen temporarily fastened to thetransom remove it Key the shim in

place on the back of the bracket2deg-10deg transom angle (steppedtransom and jet boats) Positionthe shim with the tapered end down19deg-22deg transom angle (smallaluminum and fiberglass boats) Position the shim with the taperedend up

3 If the bracket has been temporarilyfastened to the transom remove it

Apply a marine sealant to thethreads of the two 10 x 1-14rdquo self

tapping screws to prevent waterseeping into the transom Screw thebracket to the hull Do not tighten thescrews completely at this time

4 Repeat step 1 to ensure that theangle of the sensor is correctNote Do not position the sensorfarther into the water than necessaryto avoid increasing drag spray andwater noise and reducing boatspeed

5 Using the vertical adjustment spaceon the bracket slots slide the sensorup or down to provide a projection of3 mm (18rdquo) Tighten the screws

Cable cover

Cableclamp

50 mm (2)

Hull projection 3 mm (18)

Vertical adjustment and cable routing

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3948

33

Attaching the sensor to the bracket

1 If the retaining cover near the top ofthe bracket is closed open it bydepressing the latch and rotating thecover downward

Step 1 Step 2

Latch

Retainingcover

Pivotarm (2)

Slot (2)

Step 4

Step 3

Attaching the sensor to the bracket

2 Insert the sensorrsquos pivot arms intothe slots near the top of the bracket

3 Maintain pressure until the pivotarms click into place

4 Rotate the sensor downward until thebottom snaps into the bracket

5 Close the retaining cover to preventthe accidental release of the sensorwhen the boat is underway

Cable routing

Route the sensor cable over thetransom through a drain hole orthorough a new hole drilled in thetransom above the waterline

Never cut the cable or remote the

connector this will void the warranty Always wear safety goggles and a dustmask

1 If a hole must be drilled choose alocation well above the waterlineCheck for obstructions such as trimtabs pumps or wiring inside the hullMark the location with a pencil Drilla hole through the transom using a19 mm or 34rdquo bit (to accommodatethe connector)

2 Route the cable over or through thetransom

3 On the outside of the hull secure thecable against the transom using thecable clamps Position a cable clamp50 mm(2rdquo) above the bracket andmark the mounting hole with apencil

4 Position the second cable clamphalfway between the first clamp andthe cable hole Mark this mountinghole

5 If a hole has been drilled in thetransom open the appropriate slot inthe transom cable cover Position thecover over the cable where it entersthe hull Mark the two mounting

holes6 At each of the marked locations usea 3 mm or 18rdquo bit to drill a hole 10mm (38rdquo) deep The prevent drillingtoo deeply wrap masking tapearound the bit 10 mm (38rdquo) from thepoint

7 Apply marine sealant to the threadsof the 6 x 12rdquo self-tapping screw toprevent water from seeping into the

transom If you have drilled a holethrough the transom apply marinesealant to the space around thecable where it passes through thetransom

8 Position the two cable clamps andfasten them in place If used pushthe cable cover over the cable andscrew it in place

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4048

34

9 Route the cable to the instrumentbeing careful not to tear the cable

jacket when passing it though thebulkhead(s) and other parts of theboat To reduce electricalinterference separate the sensorcable from other electrical wiring andldquonoiserdquo sources Coil any excesscable and secure it in place withzip-ties to prevent damage

46 Optional WaterTemperatureSpeedSensor

Water temperaturespeed sensorST-02MSB and ST-02PSB which aredesigned for thru-hull mounting areoptionally available Install them asshown below

Mounting considerations

Choose a suitable mounting locationconsidering the followingbull Choose a place free from vibrationbull Choose a mid-boat flat position The

sensor does not have to be installedperfectly perpendicular The sensormust not be damaged in dry-dockingoperation

bull Choose a place apart from equipmentgenerating heat

bull Choose a place in the forwarddirection viewing from the drain holeto allow for circulation of coolingwater

1 Dry-dock the boat2 Make a hole of approx 51 mm

diameter in the mounting location3 Unfasten locknut and remove the

sensor section4 Apply high-grade sealant to the

flange of the sensor5 Pass the sensor casing through thehole

6 Face the notch on the sensor towardboatrsquos bow and tighten the flange

7 Set the sensor section to the sensorcasing and tighten the locknut

8 Launch the boat and check for waterleakage around the sensor

Locknut

Face notchtoward bow

Flange Nut

Coat withsilicone sealant Brim

φ 77

51

123

Water temperaturespeed sensor

ST-02MSB ST-02PSB

47 Wiring

Connect the LS-4100 powerdata cableassy MJ-A7SPF0005-020 (2 msupplied) to the POWER and thetransducer cable to the XDR connectorRefer to the interconnection diagram toconnect cables Leave slack in cables tofacilitate checking and maintenance

Note The fuse holder contains a springwhich fixes the fuse To preventdetachment of the spring which wouldcause loss of power tie the line asshown below

+ line (red)

Fuse holder

Cable tie How to fix fuse holder

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4148

35

Establishing the ground

The ground wire (125 sq or more localsupply) should be as short as possible

The signal line ground is isolated from

the chassis ground however the powerline is not insulated Therefore whenconnecting eternal equipment havingpositive ground do not ground thesignal line to the chassis If excessivenoise shows on the screen the groundmay be inadequate In this case attacha steel plate measuring 20 cm by 30 cmon the outside of the hull to provide aground point Connect the ground wire

there Use a ldquoclosedrdquo type lug ( ) tomake the connection at the display unitDo not use an ldquoopenrdquo type lug ( )

Optional equipment

POWER connector

The power supply port is commonlyused for connection of externalequipment such as a GPS receiver orwind indicator Use the powerdatacable MJ-A7SPF0005-020 (supplied) forconnection referring the figure shown inthe right column

Connector Color Remarks

1 TD-A WHT2 TD-B BLU

IEC-61162-1NMEA0183

3 RD-A YEL

4 RD-B GRN

IEC-61162-1

NMEA01835 + RED

6 - BLKPower input12 VDC

7 FG

Water tempspeed sensor

Connect the optional water tempspeedsensor to the XDR connector with theoptional converter connector (Type02S4147) as shown below

Tape connectors withvulcaninzing tapeand then vinyl tapeto waterproof themBind tape ends withcable ties to preventtape from unraveling

Connect to XDR portat rear of display unit

MJ-A10SPF

MJ-A10SRMDMJ-A6SRMD

Fromtransducer

Fromsensor

Connection of converterconnector 02S4147

48 IEC 61162-1 DataSentences

The tables below show the datasentences which can be input to andoutput from the LS-4100 Thetransmission speed for both input andoutput is 4800 bps Data is output attwo-second intervals

Input data sentences

Sentence Meaning

BWC Bearing and distance towaypoint

GGA Global positioning system(GPS) fix data

GLL Geographic position -latitudelongitude

HDG Heading deviation and variationHDT Heading true

MDA Atmospheric pressure

MTW Water temperature

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4248

36

Input data sentences (conrsquot)

Sentence MeaningMWV Wind speed and

angleRMA Recommended

minimum specificLORAN-C dataRMB Recommended

minimum navigationinformation

RMC Recommendedminimum specificGPSTRANSIT data

VHW Water speed andheading

VTG Course over groundand ground speedXTE Cross track error

Output data sentences

Sentence MeaningDBT (Ver 15) Depth below

transducerDPT (Ver 20 Ver30)

Depth

MTW Water temperatureRMB (Ver 20) Recommended

minimumnavigationinformation

VHW Water speed andheading

TLL Target positionoutput by [MARK]key

= Available with connection of optionalsensorsnavaid

49 Installation MenuThe installation menu mainly containsitems which are set at installation

1 Turn on the power while pressing the[MENUESC] key Continue pressing

the [MENUESC] key until theInstallation menu appears

SIMULATION On

TEST LCD PATTERN MEMORY CLEAR

NMEA PORT InOutNMEA MIX OffGPS WAAS Off

SET BOTTOM LEVEL

Installation Menu

= Setting cannot be changed whenNMEA PORT setting is InIn

Installation menu

SIMULATION The simulation modeprovides without connection of thetransducer simulated operation of theequipment using internally generatedechoes All controls are operative Themessage ldquoSIMrdquo appears at the top rightcorner on the screen when thesimulation mode is active

1 At the installation menu press toopen the simulation mode optionswindow

2 Press to choose ldquoOnrdquo to turn onthe simulation mode

3 Press the [POWERBRILL] keyabout three seconds to turn off thepower

4 Press the [POWERBRILL] key toturn on the power ldquoSIMrdquo appears atthe top right corner of the display

5 To turn off the simulation modeselect Off at step 2

NMEA po r t se tup(NMEA PO RT NMEA M IX)

The POWER port can function as aninput port or inputoutput port Changethe setting to ldquoInInrdquo when connectingGP-310B320B and a wind sensor

When connecting the GP-310B320Band a wind sensor first turn on ldquoGPS

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4348

37

WAASrdquo (in the Installation menu) andthen select ldquoInInrdquo as the NMEA portsetting

1 Turn on the power while pressingand holding down the [MENUESC]key Continue pressing the[MENUESC] key until theInstallation menu appears

2 Choose NMEA PORT and thenpress to display the NMEA portoptions window

3 Use or to choose InOut orInIn as appropriate

InOut Input and Output (default

setting)InIn Input only (Available withconnection of the GP-310B320Band a wind sensor)

4 Press choose NMEA MIX andthen press to display the NMEAMIX options window

5 Use or to choose Off or OnChoose On to output input data

Off Outputs the data sentences ofLS-4100 only

On Outputs the data sentences ofLS-4100 and sentences which areinput from other equipment

6 To restore normal operation turn offthe power and then turn it on again

GPS WAAS Chooses how to use theWAAS signal when connecting with a

WAAS receiver for example GP-320B

Note WAAS is currently in thedevelopmental phase During thedevelopmental phase the reliability andavailability of the WAAS signal cannotbe guaranteed Therefore any positiondata should be verified against othersources to confirm reliability

1 Display the Installation menu2 Choose GPS WAAS and then press

to open the GPS WAAS options

window

Off

WAAS options window3 Press or to choose ldquoWAAS-02rdquo

(test signal) When the systembecomes operational (in 2003) setto ldquo00rdquo (regular WAAS signal)

4 Turn off the power

BOTTOM LEVEL If the depthindication is unstable in automaticoperation or the bottom echo cannot bedisplayed in the darkest gray tone byadjusting the gain controls in manualoperation you may adjust the bottomecho level detection circuit for both 50kHz and 200 kHz to stabilize theindication Generally lower the bottomlevel for inner hull installation where thereceive level is too low If the bottomlevel is too low it may be difficult todiscriminate fish from the bottomresulting in unstable depth indication

And if the bottom level is too high thedepth indication may not appear

1 At the installation menu press tochoose SET BOTTOM LEVEL andthen press Several seconds laterthe following display appears

Bottom level +0 (200k -100 - +100 ) +0 ( 50k -100 - +100 )

Bottom level display

2 While observing the picture use or to set 200 kHz or to set50 kHz Set up for optimum picture

3 To restore normal operation turn offthe power and then it on again

Note The mode must be other thanldquoNAV DATArdquo to show the bottom leveldisplay

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4448

SP - 1 E2371S01C

SPECIFICATIONS OF ECHO SOUNDER LS-4100

1 GENERAL11 TX Frequency 50 kHz or 200 kHz 50200 kHz dual transmitting selectable12 Transmit Method Single or dual transmitting

13 Output Power 300 Wrms14 TX Rate Max 500 pulsemin15 Pulse-length 01 to 08 ms

2 DISPLAY UNIT21 Display system 5-inch monochrome LCD 76 mm (W) x 100 mm (H) 240 x 320 dots22 Display Mode Single frequency (highlow freq) Dual-frequency Zoom Nav data-12

Marker zoom Bottom zoom Bottom-lock23 Display Range

Range SettingRange

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

Display

rangeMeter 5 10 20 40 80 150 200 300 2-500

Feet 15 30 60 120 200 400 600 1000 7-1500

Fathoms 3 5 10 20 40 80 100 150 1-250

PassiBraza 3 5 10 30 50 100 150 200 1-300

24 Range Shift 0-500 m 0-1500 ft 0-250 fa 0-300 pb25 Expansion Range Bottom-lock expansion 3 to 10 m

Sectional expansion 2 to 50 m26 Display Advance Speed 8 steps (LinesTX Freeze 1161814121121 41)

3 INTERFACE31 Input data sentences IEC61162-1NMEA0183 Ver 152030

GGA RMA RMB RMC BWC GLL HDT HDG VTG VHW MTWMWV MDA XTE

32 Output data sentences IEC61162-1NMEA0183 Ver 152030 interval 2 sMTW VHW DBT DPT RMB TLL by key operating External data required

4 POWER SUPPLY41 Display Unit 12 VDC 05 A

5 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITION51 Ambient Temperature Display unit -15degC to +55degC52 Relative Humidity 93 or less at 40degC53 Waterproof IPX5

6 COATING COLOR61 Display Unit N30

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4548

M a r

4

0 3

D-1

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4648

Mar 4 03

Mar 4 03

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4748

M a r

3

0 3

S-1

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4848

FURUNO Authorized DistributorDealer FURUNO Authorized DistributorDealer

9-52 Ashihara-cho9-52 Ashihara-choNishinomiya 662-8580 JAPANNishinomiya 662-8580 JAPAN

Telephone Telephone 0798-65-21110798-65-2111FaxFax 0798-65-42000798-65-4200

FIRST EDITION FIRST EDITION MARMAR 20032003Printed in JapanPrinted in Japan All rights reserved All rights reserved

B1B1 SEPSEP 09 200509 2005

Pub NoPub No OME-23710OME-23710 00014698000000146980000001469800000014698000(( DAMIDAMI )) LS-4100LS-4100

0 0 0 1 4 6 9 8 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 4 6 9 8 0 0 0

Page 17: OME23710B_1_LS4100

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 1748

11

114 AlarmsAlarm description

The LS-4100 has six conditions whichgenerate both audio and visual alarms

bottom alarm normal fish alarm bottomlock fish alarm water temperature alarmarrival alarm and speed alarm (Thewater temperature arrival and speedalarms require appropriate sensors)

Bottom alarm The bottom alarm alertsyou when the bottom is within the alarmrange set To activate the bottom alarmthe depth must be displayed

Fish (normal) alarm The fish (normal)alarm tells you when fish are within thepreset alarm range

Fish (bottom lock) alarm The fish(bottom lock) alarm available with thebottom-lock mode sounds when fishare within a certain distance from thebottom Note that the bottom zoom

display must be turned on to use thisalarm

Water temperature alarm The watertemperature alarm alerts when thewater temperature is within (Insidealarm) the alarm range set orunderover (outside alarm) the rangeset

Speed alarm The speed alarm alertsyou when the speed is within (Insidealarm) or underover (Outside alarm)the preset speed

Arrival alarm The arrival alarm alertswhen you are near a waypoint by thedistance set

Activating an alarm

1 Press the [MENUESC] key2 Press or $ to choose ALARM

MENU from page 2 on the menu3 Press the to show the ALARM

menu

ALARM

(12)

[MENU] Exit

ALARM

(22)

[MENU] Exit

BOTTOM On FROM 5ft

RANGE 10ftFISH(Normal) On

FROM 5ft RANGE 10ftFISH(BL) On

FROM 8ft RANGE 10ftFISH LEVEL Medium

TEMPERATURE Inside FROM 724 deg F RANGE 10 deg F

SPEED Off FROM 00kt

RANGE 10kt

ARRIVAL ALRM Off RANGE 0 01 m

Pageno

Gray characters mean alarm is inactive Alarm menu

4 Use or $ to choose an alarm asappropriate

5 Press to show the options menu

Off On

Off InsideOutside

Temp Speed Alarm Types

Fish ArrivalBottom AlarmOnOff

Alarm options6 Use or $ to choose alarm type

Off Alarm off On Alarm onInside Alarm generated whenspeed (or water temperature) iswithin the range setOutside Alarm generated whenspeed (or water temperature) isoutside the range set

7 Press to close the windowFor ARRIVAL ALARM setting skip tostep 12

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 1848

12

8 Press $ to choose FROM9 Press to show the options menu

0ft

Depth

632 deg F

Temperature

10 kt

Speed Depth temperature speed setting

window10 Use or $ to set starting depth

temperature or speed as appropriateFor FISH (BL) the starting depth isthe range from the bottom

11 Press to close the window12 Press $ to choose RANGE13 Press to show the options menu14 Use or $ to set alarm range15 For the bottom alarm temperature

alarm speed alarm or arrivalalarm press the [MENUESC] key tofinish For a fish alarm press toclose the window and then go tostep 16

16 Press $ to choose FISH LEVEL17 Press to show the options menu

Weak

MediumStrong Fish level options

18 Use or $ to choose the echostrength level which will trigger a fishalarm

Weak Weak echoes (weakest toneon level bar)Medium Medium strength echoes

(middle tone on level bar)Strong Strong echoes (darkest toneon level bar)

19 Press the [MENUESC] key twice toclose the menu

Alarm range marker Bottom alarm Fish alarm (normal) Right Fish alarm (bottomlock) Left

Alarm icon

Alarm rangeStartingpoint

Bottom alarm Fish alarm (normal) Fish alarm (BL)

Temperature alarm (deg

C ordeg

F shown) Speed alarm Arrival alarm

Alarm icon (Appropriate icon appears to showwhich alarm has been violated)

How the alarm works

Note To disable an alarm choose Offat step 5 in the above procedure

Silencing the buzzer

The buzzer sounds and the appropriatealarm icon appears and flashes whenan alarm is violated You can silence thebuzzer by pressing any key Howeverthe buzzer will sound whenever thealarm setting is violated

Note The audio and visual alarms arereleased against the last-violated alarmwhen multiple alarms are active

115 WaypointsWaypoints may be used tobull Record the position of an important

echo as waypoint 12 points may beregistered

bull Output a waypoint position to a plotterto mark position on its screen

bull Find range bearing and time-to-go toa location (waypoint)

Note Requires latitude and longitudeposition from a navigator

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 1948

13

Registering a waypoint on thescreen

1 Press the [MARK] key The cursorappears along with waypoint entryinstructions To enter a waypoint tothe current own shiprsquos position go tostep 3Note If there is no position data themessage ldquoNo position datardquo appearsCheck the navigator

50k

496

1100

20

40

60

80

0

Cursor

WAYPOINT ENTRY

( Move) Cursor [MARK] Enter [MENU] Cancel

50 kHz display

2 Press the cursor pad to set thecursor where desired Pictureadvancement is stopped until step 3is completed and the instructionwindow is integrated into the navdisplay

3 Press the [MARK] key again WhenTLL or FURUNO-TLL is selected atTLL OUTPUT on the System menuthe latitude and longitude position atthe cursor is output to the navigator

A vertical line marks location Furtherthe display shows the waypointname (next sequential number) andposition of the location selected atstep 2

WAYPOINTName FREQLat 34 deg 22796NLon 136 deg 07264E

05

[MENU] Exit

rase

Waypoint data display

Note If you attempt to enter 13thwaypoint the message ldquoMemoryfullrdquo appears In this case erase anunwanted waypoint to enable entry

4 To save the waypoint under thename shown go to step 8 or go tostep 5 to change its name

5 Press to open the waypoint nameentry window

WAYPOINTName FREQLat 34 deg 22796NLon 136 deg 07264E

05

[MENU] Exit

01------ ENT

rase

Waypoint window name entry6 Use or to set character $ or

to shift cursor The name mayconsist of 10 alphanumericcharactersNote Character order is 0 1hellip9 - A BhellipZ _ 0hellip

7 Press to choose ENT 8 Press the [MENUESC] key to

register the waypoint

Registering waypoint by LL

1 Press the [MENUESC] key to openthe main menu

2 Use or to choose WAYPOINTLIST from page 2 of the menu

3 Press

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 2048

14

WAYPOINT LIST

01 0102 0303------------------------------------------------------

[MENU] Exit

Waypoint list4 Press or to choose an empty

waypoint and press Press again

NEW WAYPOINTName FREQLat 34 deg 22796NLon 136 deg 07264E

05

[MENU] Exit

04------ ENT

rase

New waypoint window name entry

5 Use or to set character $ or to shift cursor

6 Press to select ENT 7 Enter latitude and longitude similar

to how you entered waypoint name8 Press the [MENUESC] key to

register the waypoint

Editing waypoints Press the [MENUESC] key to open

the main menu

2 Use or to choose WAYPOINTLIST from page 2 of the menu

3 Press to open the waypoints list4 Use or to choose a waypoint

and press 5 Use or to choose the item to

edit (name latitude or longitude)6 Press to open the data entry

window7 Use or to set character $ or

to choose location8 Press to choose ENT 9 Press the [MENUESC] key

Erasing waypoints Press the [MENUESC] key2 Use or to choose WAYPOINT

LIST from page 2 of the menu3 Press to open the waypoints list

4 Use or to choose the waypointto erase and then press Note You cannot erase a waypointwhich is selected as ldquoGOTO WPTrdquo

5 Press to choose ldquoEraserdquo6 Press to open the options window7 Press to select YES to erase the

waypoint The waypoint list appearswith the erased waypoint blank

8 Press the [MENUESC] key twice toclose the menu

Setting destination waypoint

Set a destination waypoint to find rangebearing and time-to-go to that point Youcan see range and bearing to awaypoint Time-to-go is shown on theTime to Go digital display

Press the [MENUESC] key to openthe main menu

2 Use or to choose GOTO WPTfrom page 2 of the menu

3 Press to open the waypoints list

Off01020304----------------------------------------------------------------

Waypoint list

4 Use or to choose a waypoint5 Press the [MENUESC] key to close

the menu

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 2148

15

116 Setting Up Nav DataDisplays

The user may arrange the nav datadisplays as desired

1 Use the [MODE] key to show theNAV DATA-1 or 2 display whicheveryou want to set up

2 Press the [MENUESC] key to closethe mode selection window

3 Press the cursor pad to display theNAV DATA SETUP window

NAV DATA SETUP

Window Selection Data Selection

[MENU] Exit

NAV DATA SETUP window

4 Use or to choose a datadisplay window desired Adashed-line rectangle circumscribesyour selection

5 Use

or$

to choose item todisplay See the below for adescription of the displays

(9)

(1)

(2)

(3)

(4)(5)

(6)(7)(8)

Two-data

display

Three-data

display

Four-data

displayItems displayable in (1) - (3) depth positioncourse range and bearing trip distanceodometer water temperature headingair pressure time-to-go to destination waypointXTE speed wind speed and directiondestination waypoint data compassItems displayable in (4) - (9) depth positionspeed course range and bearing trip distanceodometer water temperature headingair pressure time-to-go to destination waypointXTE wind speed wind direction

= Graphic display

Nav data window and item displayable6 Press the [MENUESC] key to finish

Note You can choose the number ofitems to show in a nav data display withNAV DATA-1 and NAV DATA-2 on theSystem menu

GRAPHIC DISPLAYS

1 05 0 05 1

Wpt 03Rng 019nm Brg 321 deg XTE 000nm Cse 333 deg

DESTINATION WAYPOINT GRAPHIC

XTEscale

BearingCourseDestinationwaypointdirection

DestinationwaypointdataNameRangeXTE

Wind APP

WIND GRAPHIC

60

120

90

030

150180

120

150

90

60

30

120 deg

Speed 103 ms

COMPASS GRAPHIC

SPEED GRAPHIC

172

Speed

20

50

40

60

30

10

01 05 0 05 1

025 nm

XTE

XTE GRAPHIC

kt

Bearing todestinationwaypoint

Course

Brg30 deg

Cse90 deg

N

E

XTE scale

Speed-ometer

Nav data display-1

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 2248

16

DIGITAL DISPLAYS

Course

123 deg

COURSE

Depth

328 ft

DEPTH

Heading TRUEMAG

318 deg

HEADING

Odometer

56 nm

ODOMETER

Position GPS 3D

30 deg 00065N130 deg 00574E

POSITION

Temperature

698 degF

WATER TEMPERATURE

Trip meter

121 nm

TRIP DISTANCE

Time to Go

00 H30 M

TIME-TO-GO

1018 hpa

AIR PRESSURE

Air Pressure

Speed

193 kt

SPEED

Rng

121 nm

RANGE amp BEARING

Brg

140 deg

Wind Speed APP

80 ms

WIND SPEED

Wind Dir APP

138 deg

WIND DIRECTION

APP or TRUE depending on menu setting TRUE or MAG depending

on menu settingamp To destination waypoint

Note 1 Nav data is updated with somedelay

Note 2 When data is lost 120 sec thedisplay shows - - at the locationwhere data is lost

= GPS receiving status (Displays whenconnecting with GP-310B320B and InOutis selected at the Installation menu)NO FIX Position cannot be foundGPS 2D 2D (dimension) GPS position fixGPS 3D 3D GPS fixGPS W2D 2D WAAS position fixGPS W3D 3D WAAS position fix

NAV data display-2

117 Other Menu ItemsThis section describes the menu itemsnot previously mentioned

Page 1

HUE (Picture Color)

Two picture color arrangements areavailable Day and Night Day showsechoes on a white background Nightshows them on a black background

1 Press the [MENUESC] key todisplay the menu

2 Use or $ to choose HUE frompage 1 of the menu

3 Press to show the optionswindow

4 Use or $ to choose Day or Nightas appropriate

5 Press the [MENUESC] key to closethe menu

WHITE LINE

The white line feature displays theleading edge of the bottom echo in

white This is useful for discriminatingbottom fish near the bottom

1 Press the [MENUESC] key todisplay the main menu

2 Use or $ to choose WHITE LINEfrom page 1 of the menu

3 Press to show the optionswindow

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 2348

17

4 Use or to choose Off Tone orMesh as appropriate ldquoMeshrdquo paintsthe white line in darker tone thanldquoTonerdquo

5 Press the [MENUESC] key to closethe menu

526White Line OFF White Line ON (Mesh)

Fish schoolclearly shown

White line

0

20

40

60

80

050k 11

526

0

20

40

60

80

00 050k 11

How white line works

DEEP GAIN

ldquoDeep Gainrdquo compensates forpropagation attenuation of the ultrasonicwaves It does this by equalizing echopresentation so that fish schools of thesame size appear in the same density inboth shallow and deep waters Inaddition it reduces surface noise

Press the [MENUESC] key to openthe main menu

2 Use or to choose DEEP GAINfrom page of the menu

3 Press $ to show to the optionswindow

4 Choose Low Medium or High asappropriate High provides thegreatest degree of gain reductionagainst short range echoes

5 Press the [MENUESC] key to closethe menu

Page 2

TRIP RESET

This item resets trip distance to ldquo0rdquo

Press the [MENUESC] key to openthe main menu

2 Use or to choose TRIPRESET from page 2 of the menu

3 Press $ 4 Press to reset trip distance

Beeps are generated while the tripdistance is being reset

5 Press the [MENUESC] key to closethe menu

Note To reset the odometer to zeroclear the memory

GAIN ADJ 200 GAIN ADJ 50

If the gain is too high or too low or thegain for the low and high frequenciesappears unbalanced you cancompensate it as follows

Press the [MENUESC] key to openthe main menu

2 Use or to choose GAIN ADJ200 or GAIN ADJ 50 from page 2 ofthe menu

3 Press $ to show to the optionswindow

4 Use or to set the amount Thesetting range is ndash50 to +50

5 Press the [MENUESC] key to close

the menu

DRAFT

The default depth display shows thedistance from the transducer If youwould rather show the distance from thesea surface set your shiprsquos draft asfollows

Press the [MENUESC] key to openthe main menu

2 Use or to choose DRAFT frompage 2 of the menu

3 Press $ and then use or to setdraft The setting range is ndash 50 to+500 (meters feet)

4 Press the [MENUESC] key to closethe menu

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 2448

18

2 SYSTEM MENU

The System menu mainly consists ofitems which once set do not requirefrequent adjustment You may displaythis menu by choosing SYSTEM MENUat page 2 of the main menu andpressing

SYSTEM MENULANGUAGE English

DEPTH UNIT ftSPEED UNIT ktWIND UNIT msTEMP UNIT deg F

TEMP GRAPH OffNAV DATA-1 NAV DATA-2

WATER TYPE SaltKEY BEEP OnBATT VOLTAGE Off (13)

[MENU] Exit

SYSTEM MENU

(23)

NAV DISPLAY TempSpeedNMEA0183 Ver 20TLL OUTPUT OffBEARING TrueWIND SPDDIR ApparentTRIP SOURCE Own

TEMP SOURCE OwnSPEED SOURCE OwnTEMP CALIB +00 deg F ( 40)SPEED CALIB +0 ( 50)

Own speed Own temp 100 kt 162 deg F

[MENU] Exit

SYSTEM MENU

(33)

BASIC RANGE1 15 ft

RANGE2 30RANGE3 60RANGE4 120RANGE5 200RANGE6 400RANGE7 600RANGE8 1000 (7-1500)

ZOOM RANGE 15 ft (7-150)BL RANGE 15 ft (10-30)(Bottom Lock)

ZOOM MARKER On

[MENU] Exit

PAGE 3

PAGE 2

PAGE 1

Page no

System menus

21 System MenuPage 1

LANGUAGE The system language isavailable in English several Europeanlanguages and Japanese To changelanguage select language desired andpress the [MENUESC] key

DEPTH UNIT Choose unit of depthmeasurement from meters feet

fathoms passibraza and hiro(Japanese)

SPEED UNIT Choose unit of speedmeasurement from knots miles perhour and kilometers per hour Requiresspeed data

WIND UNIT Choose unit of wind speedmeasurement from ms kt kmh and

mph Requires wind speed data

TEMP UNIT Choose unit oftemperature measurement Celsius orFahrenheit Requires temperature data

TEMP GRAPH Turns the watertemperature display on or off Thetemperature scale range is 16deg (degF) inldquoNarrowrdquo 40deg (degF) in ldquoWiderdquo Requires

water temperature data

m526

0

20

40

60

80

00 050k 11

40

80

70

50

60

TemperatureScale

TemperatureGraph

638 deg F162kt

Water temperature display (wide degF)

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 2548

19

NAV DATA-1 -2 Choose the number ofnavigation data items to display on thenav data displays from two three orfour items Requires appropriate navdata

WATER TYPE Choose the water typewith which to use the LS-4100 fromSalt or Fresh

KEY BEEP Turn key beep on or off

BATT VOLTAGE Turn the batteryvoltage indication (appears at the topright corner on the screen) on or offWhen on it replaces the picture advancespeed indication

Page 2

NAV DISPLAY Choose the nav data todisplay in the nav data window at thetop left-hand corner You may choosefrom temperaturespeedlatitudelongitude range and bearingcourse over ground trip distance or

wind speed Requires appropriate navdata

407 deg F162kt

Nav window

NMEA0183 Choose NMEA version ofnavigator Ver 15 Ver 20 or Ver 30

TLL OUTPUT Enablesdisables outputof TLL (Target Latitude Longitude)position when the [MARK] key isoperated ldquoTLLrdquo outputs latitude andlongitude position ldquoFURUNO-TLLrdquoavailable with connection of navigatorthat can output FURUNO TLL outputslatitude and longitude watertemperature depth etc

BEARING Shiprsquos course and bearingto a waypoint may be displayed in trueor magnetic bearing Magnetic bearingis true bearing plus (or minus) earthrsquosmagnetic deviation Requires bearingdata

WIND SPDDIR Choose the windspeed and direction reference from trueand apparent Requires wind sensorApparen t The direction (in relation toshiprsquos bow) and speed of the wind as itappears to those on board relative tothe speed and direction of the boatcombination of the true wind and thewind caused by the boats movementTrue The speed and direction (inrelation to shiprsquos bow) of the wind felt ormeasured when stationary

TRIP SOURCE Choose speed sourcefor the trip distance indication Own(transducer with speed sensor orseparate speed sensor) or NMEA

TEMP SOURCE Choose source ofwater temperature input Off Own(transducer with water temperaturesensor or separate temperature sensor)or NMEA

SPEED SOURCE Choose source ofspeed input Off Own (transducer withspeed sensor or separate speedsensor) or NMEA Requires speed

data

TEMP CALIB If the water temperaturesensor-generated water temperatureindication is wrong you can correct ithere when ldquoOwnrdquo is selected astemperature source For example if thewater temperature indication is 2deghigher than actual water temperatureenter -2 The setting range is -40degF to

+40degF

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 2648

20

SPEED CALIB If the speedsensor-generated speed indication iswrong you can correct it here whenldquoOwnrdquo is selected as speed source Forexample if the speed indication is 10lower than actual speed enter +10 Thesetting range is ndash50 to +50

Page 3

BASIC RANGE 1 - BASIC RANGE 8 Set range of each of the eight basicranges (Selectable range 7 to 1500 ft)Note 1 All default basic ranges arerestored whenever the depth unit ischanged Therefore change the depth

unit before changing the basic rangesNote 2 A range may not be lower thanthe range preceding it For example ifbasic range 3 is 60 feet basic range 4must be greater than 60 feet

ZOOM RANGE Choose the range tozoom in the marker-zoom andbottom-zoom modes You may choose arange between 7 and 150 feet (2 and 50

meters)

BL RANGE The expansion width forthe bottom-lock display can be chosenfrom 10 to 30 feet (3 and 10 meters)

ZOOM MARKER The zoom markerappears in the normal bottom markerand bottom zoom displays and marksthe area which is expanded in the

bottom marker and bottom zoompictures You can turn the marker on oroff as desired

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 2748

21

3 MAINTENANCETROUBLESHOOTING

W RNING

ELECTRICAL SHOCK HAZARDDo not open the equipment

Only qualified personnel should workinside the equipment

31 Maintenance

Regular maintenance is essential forgood performance Checking the itemslisted in the table below monthly willhelp keep your equipment in goodshape for years to come

Checking

Item Action

Transducercable

Check cable for damage

Power cabletransducercable plug

Check that they are tightlyfastened Refasten ifnecessary

Display unitground

Check for corrosion Cleanif necessary

Power supplyvoltage

Check voltage If out ofrating correct problem

32 Cleaning the DisplayUnit

Dust or dirt on the display unit can beremoved with a soft cloth If desired awater-moistened cloth may be usedUse special care when cleaning theLCD since it scratches easily Do notuse chemical cleaners to clean thedisplay unit - they can remove paint andmarkings

33 TransducerMaintenance

Marine life on the transducer face willresult in a gradual decrease insensitivity Check the transducer facefor cleanliness each time the boat isdry-docked Carefully remove anymarine life with a piece of wood orfine-grade sandpaper

34 Replacing the FuseThe fuse in the power cable protects thesystem from reverse polarity of thepower supply and equipment fault If thefuse blows find the cause beforereplacing it Use only a 1A fuse (FGMB 1A 125V Code No 000-114-805 ) orequivalent Using the wrong fuse will damage the unit and void the warranty

W RNINGUse the proper fuse

Fuse rating is shown on the equipmentUse of a wrong fuse can result in fire anddamage the equipment

35 Battery Voltage Alert A battery icon appears when the batteryvoltage is too high or too low

Battery icon and meaning

Icon Meaning

Voltage is lower than 10 VDC If thevoltage goes below 9 V the equipmentis automatically turned off

Voltage is higher than 165 VDC If thevoltage goes higher than 175 V theequipment is automatically turned off

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 2848

22

36 TroubleshootingThe table below provides basictroubleshooting procedures which theuser may follow to restore normaloperation

Troubleshooting table

Ifhellip Then check hellipneither echo norfixed range scaleappears

bull battery voltagebull fusebull power cable

no echo appearsbut the fixedrange scaleappears

bull if display advancespeed is set to ldquoStoprdquo

bull transducer plugbull

transducer cableecho appears butno zero line

bull if range shifting is setto ldquo0rdquo

sensitivity is low bull gain settingbull if air bubbles or marine

life is clinging to thetransducer face

bull if sediments arepresent in the water

bull if the bottom is too soft

to return an echothere is extremeinterference ornoise

bull if the transducer is tooclose to the engine

bull if the unit is properlygrounded

bull if other echo soundersof the same frequencyas own are beingoperated nearby

the speedwatertemperaturereadout isunrealistic or notpresent

bull sensor plug

the positionreadout isunrealistic or notpresent

bull the connectionbetween sounder andnavigator

bull navigator

37 DiagnosticsIf you feel your unit is not workingproperly conduct the diagnostic test tofind the problem If you cannot restorenormal operation contact your dealerfor advice

1 Turn on the power while pressing the[MENUESC] key Continue pressingthe [MENUESC] key until theInstallation menu appears

SIMULATION On

TEST LCD PATTERN MEMORY CLEAR

NMEA PORT InOutNMEA MIX Off GPS WAAS Off

SET BOTTOM LEVEL

Installation Menu

= Setting cannot be changed whenNMEA PORT setting is InIn

Installation menu2 Press to choose TEST3 Press to start the test

ROM OKRAM OKNMEA

Temp 682 deg F

Speed 100kmh

Power 124 VBody 39 deg C

Program No 0252318-01Push [MENU] 3 times to exit

Level bar

= Program version no

Water

TemperatureSpeedBattery VoltageTemperatureinside displayunit(Unit fixed atdeg C)

GPS (48502180) OK

Only when GP-310B is connected(For GP-320B 4850238)

Test display

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 2948

23

4 The ROM RAM and NMEA port arechecked with the results shown asOK or NG (No Good) For any NGrequest service (A special connectoris required to test the NMEA portNothing appears if no connector isconnected)

5 The squares at the right side of thetest display are for checking thecontrols Press each key and thearrows on the Cursor Pad one byone A controlrsquos correspondingon-screen square ldquolightsrdquo in black ifthe control is normal

6 To return to the Installation menupress the [MENUESC] key threetimes

7 To restore normal operation turn offthe power and turn it on again

38 Test PatternThis feature tests for proper display oftones

1 On the Installation menu press $ tochoose LCD PATTERN

2 Press to start the test The entirescreen is black

3 Press again and the screen turnswhite

4 Press again and the screenshows a four-toned display

5 Press again to return to theInstallation menu

6 To restore normal operation turn offthe power and then it on again

WHITE FOUR-TONE BLACK

Test patterns

39 Memory ClearThe memory can be cleared to startafresh with default menu settings

1 At the installation menu press $ tochoose MEMORY CLEAR

2 Press to open the optionswindow

YES NO

Clear memory display

3 Press to clear the memory Beepsare generated while the memory isbeing cleared

4 To restore normal operation turn offthe power and then turn it on again

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3048

24

4 INSTALLATION

41 Display UnitMounting considerations

The display unit can be installed on adesktop on the bulkhead or flushmounted in a panel When choosing alocation keep the following in mind

bull Keep the display unit out of directsunlight

bull The temperature and humidity should

be moderate and stablebull Locate the unit away from exhaust

pipes and ventsbull The mounting location should be well

ventilatedbull Mount the unit where shock and

vibration are minimalbull For maintenance and checking

purposes leave sufficient space atthe sides and rear of the unit andleave slack in cables

bull A magnetic compass will be affected ifthe display unit is placed too close toit Observe the following compasssafe distances to prevent disturbanceto the magnetic compassStandard compass 04 metersSteering compass 03 meters

Desktop overhead mounting1 Fix the bracket to a desktop or the

overhead with tapping screws(supplied)

2 Loosely screw knobs into the displayunit

3 Set the display unit to the bracketand then tighten the knobs

Mounting on the bulkhead Flush

mounting in a panelSee the instructions on the bulkhead orflush mounting template (supplied)

42 Thru-hull MountTransducer

Transducer mounting location

The thru-hull mount transducer

(520-5PSD 520-5MSD) provides thebest performance of all since thetransducer protrudes from the hull andthe effect of air bubbles and turbulencenear the hull skin is reduced When theboat has a keel the transducer shouldbe at least 30 cm away from it Typicalthru-hull mountings are shown in thefigure on the next page

The performance of this sounder isdirectly related to the mounting locationof the transducer especially forhigh-speed cruising The installationshould be planned in advance keepingthe standard cable length (8 m) and thefollowing factors in mindbull Air bubbles and turbulence caused by

movement of the boat seriouslydegrade the sounding capability of thetransducer The transducer shouldtherefore be located in a positionwhere water flow is the smoothestNoise from the propellers alsoadversely affects performance andthe transducer should not be mountednearby The lifting strakes arenotorious for creating acoustic noiseand these must be avoided bykeeping the transducer inboard ofthem

bull The transducer must always remain

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3148

25

submerged even when the boat isrolling pitching or up on a plane athigh speed

bull A practical choice would besomewhere between 13 and 12 of

the boatrsquos length from the stern Forplaning hulls a practical location isgenerally rather far astern so that thetransducer is always in waterregardless of the planing attitude

28

22

120

68

30

520-5PSD

24

120

68

87520-5MSD

Unit mm

Thru-hull mount transducer dimensions

Acceptable transducer mounting

locations

Position 12 to 13 of the hull from stern

15 to 30 cm off center line (inside first lifting strakes)

Within the wetted bottom area

Deadrise angle within 15 deg

HIGH SPEED-V HULL

Suitable transducer mounting locations

Typical thru-hull mounttransducer installations

FairingBlock

Flat Washer

Rubber Washer

Hull

Deep-V Hull

Hull

Flat Washer

Rubber Washer

Flat Hull

CorkWasher

Typical thru-hull mounttransducer installations

Procedure for installing thethru-hull mount transducer

1 With the boat hauled out of the watermark the location chosen formounting the transducer on thebottom of the hull

2 If the hull is not level within 15deg inany direction fairing blocks madeout of teak should be used betweenthe transducer and hull both insideand outside to keep the transducerface parallel with the water lineFabricate the fairing block as shownbelow and make the entire surfaceas smooth as possible to provide anundisturbed flow of water around thetransducer The fairing block shouldbe smaller than the transducer itselfto provide a channel to divert

turbulent water around the sides ofthe transducer rather than over itsface

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3248

26

BOWHole for stuffing tube

Upper Half

Lower Half

Saw along slopeof hull Construction of fairing block

3 Drill a hole just large enough to passthe threaded stuffing tube of thetransducer through the hull makingsure it is drilled vertically

4 Apply a sufficient amount of highquality caulking compound to the topsurface of the transducer around thethreads of the stuffing tube andinside the mounting hole (and fairingblocks if used) to ensure watertightmounting

5 Mount the transducer and fairingblocks and tighten the locking nutsBe sure that the transducer is

properly oriented and its workingface is parallel to the waterline

Note Do not over-stress the stuffingtube and locking nuts through excessivetightening since the wood block willswell when the boat is placed in thewater It is suggested that the nut betightened lightly at installation andretightened several days after the boat

has been launched

Transducer preparation

Before putting the boat in water wipethe face of the transducer thoroughlywith a detergent liquid soap This willlessen the time necessary for thetransducer to have good contact withthe water Otherwise the time requiredfor complete ldquosaturationrdquo ill belengthened and performance will bereduced

DO NOT paint the transducerPerformance will be affected

43 Transom MountTransducer

The transom mount transducer is verycommonly employed usually onrelatively small IO or outboard boatsDo not use this method on an inboardmotor boat because turbulence iscreated by the propeller ahead of thetransducer

520-5PWD

There are two methods of installationflush with hull (for flat hulls) andprojecting from hull (for deep V-hulls)

Flat Hull

D

Dgt50 cm

Deep-VHull

520-5PWD mounting locations

Installing the 520-5PWD on a flat hull

A suitable mounting location is at least50 cm away from the engine and wherethe water flow is smooth

1 Drill four pilot holes in the mountinglocation

2 Attach the transducer to the bracketwith 5 x 20 tapping screws(supplied)

3 Adjust the transducer position so thetransducer faces right to the bottom

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3348

27

Note If necessary to improve waterflow and minimize air bubblesstaying on the transducer faceincline the transducer about 5deg at therear This may require a certainamount of experimentation for finetuning at high cruising speeds

4 Fill the gap between the wedge frontof the transducer and transom withepoxy material to eliminate any airspaces

No1 M5 x 14

5 x 20

5 x 20

2 to 5

Tape

Hull

Transom mount transducer

mounting flush with hull

Installing the transom mounttransducer on a deep-V hull

This method is employed on deep-Vhulls and provides good performancebecause the effects of air bubbles areminimal Install the transducer parallelwith water surface not flush with hull Ifthe boat is placed on a trailer care mustbe taken not to damage the transducerwhen the boat is hauled out of the waterand put on the trailer

5 x 20

No 2M5 x 14

5 x 20

Transom mount transducermounted projecting from hull

525-5PWD

Choose the installation methoddepending on the rise angle of the hull

Transom

Transom

Stripe over 10

Parallel with hull

Mount at the stripe

less than 10

525-5PWD mounting location

Installing the 525-5PWD

Referring to ldquoInstalling the 520-5PWDrdquoin the left column for mounting of thebracket and the figure shown on the topof next page install the 525-5PWD tothe transom

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3448

28

2 to 5

Transducer

Bracket

Hull

Epoxy material

525-5PWD mounting

44 Inside-hullTransducer

The thru-hull mount transducer(520-5PSD 520-5MSD) may also beinstalled inside the hull following theprocedure below

Necessary tools

You will need the following toolsbull Sandpaper (100)bull Silicone sealantbull Silicone grease

Remarks on installationbull Turn off the engine and anchor the

boat while installing the equipmentbull Install the transducer in the engine

room

Choosing the mounting locationbull The mounting location should be

where the hull is of single-hullthickness and is void of air or flotationmaterials other than solid fiberglassbetween the transducer face and thewater

bull Do not place the transducer over hullstruts or ribs which run under the hull

bull Avoid a location where the risingangle of the hull exceeds 15deg tominimize the effect of the boatrsquosrolling

bull You will finalize the mounting location

through some trial and error Theprocedure for this is shown later

50 cm

50 cm15 cm15 cm

13

12

Transducer mountinglocation

Centerline

Inside-hull transducer mounting location

Attaching the transducer1 Clean the transducer face to remove

any foreign material Lightly roughenthe transducer face with 100sandpaper Also roughen the insideof the hull where the transducer is tobe mounted

2 Clean the transducer face again3 Warm the silicone sealant to 40degC

before usage to soften it Coat thetransducer face and mountinglocation with silicone sealant

Transducer

SiliconeSealant

Coating transducer facewith silicone sealant

4 Press the transducer firmly down onthe hull and gently twist it back andforth to remove any air which may betrapped in the silicone sealant

Checking the installation

1 Connect the battery to the display

unit2 Turn on the display unit

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3548

29

3 Press the [MODE] key to chooseSINGLE FREQ

4 Choose 50 kHz or 200 kHz and thenpress the [MENUESC] key to closethe mode menu

5 Press the [MENU] to show the mainmenu and then press to select

Auto mode6 Press to choose Off7 Press the [MENUESC] key8 Press the [GAIN] key to set the gain

to ldquo5rdquo and then press the[MENUESC] key

9 Press the [RANGE] key to set therange to 10 meters (feet) and thenpress the [MENUESC] key

10 If the bottom is displayed in darkgray and the depth indicationappears the mounting location issuitable Go to ldquoFinal preparationrdquo

11 If the bottom is not displayed in darkgray tone the mounting location maybe unsuitable Do the followinga) Press the [POWERBRILL] key to

turn off the powerb) Gently dismount the transducer

with a piece of woodc) Reattach the transducer

elsewhere as shown in ldquoAttachingthe transducerrdquo

d) Check the installation again

Final preparation

Support the transducer with a piece ofwood to keep it in place while it is drying

Let the transducer dry 24-72 hours

45 Optional Triducer525ST-MSD

The optional triducer 525ST-MSD isdesigned for thru-hull mounting Forhow to install this transducer seeparagraph 42

φ79 mm

33 mm200-12 UNthreads

φ51 mm

27 mm

7 mm

140 mm Triducer 525ST-MSD

525ST-PWD

The Transom Mount Transducer orTRIDUCER reg Multisensor with IntegralRelease Bracket 525ST-PWD ismanufactured by AIRMAR Co Theseinstructions are also included with the

sensor

Pre-test for speed and temperature

Connect the sensor to the instrumentand spin the paddlewheel Check for aspeed reading and the approximate airtemperature If there is no readingreturn the sensor to your place ofpurchase

Tools and materials needed

ScissorsMasking tapeSafety gogglesDust maskElectric drillDrill bit for

Bracket holes 4mm 23 or 964rdquoFiberglass hull chamfer bit(preferred)6mm or 14rdquo

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3648

30

Transom hole 19mm or 34rdquo(optional)

Cable clamp holes 3mm or 18rdquoScrewdriversStraight edgeMarine sealantPencilZip-tiesWater-based antifouling paint(mandatory in salt water )

Mounting location

To ensure the best performance thesensor must be submerged inaeration-free and turbulence-free water

Mount the sensor close to the centerlineof the boat On slower heavierdisplacement hulls positioning it fartherfrom the centerline is acceptable

Allow adequate space above thebracket for it to release and rotate thesensor upward

Height

Height withoutspeed sensor191mm (7-12)Height withspeed sensor213mm (8-12)

Height required at mounting location

Note 1 Do not mount the sensor in anarea of turbulence or bubbles nearwater intake or discharge openingsbehind strakes struts fittings or hull

irregularities behind eroding paint (anindication of turbulence)Note 2 Avoid mounting the sensorwhere the boat may be supportedduring trailering launching hauling andstorageNote 3 For single drive boat mounton the starboard side at least 75 mm(3rdquo) beyond the swing radius of thepropeller

75 mm(3)

minimum beyondswing radius

Mounting location on single drive boat

Note 4 For twin drive boat mountbetween the drives

Installation of bracket

1 Cut out the installation template

shown on the next page2 At the selected location position thetemplate so the arrow at the bottomis aligned with the bottom edge ofthe transom Being sure the templateis parallel to the waterline tape it inplace

Align template vertically

Deadrise angle

Slope of hullparallel towaterline

Align template arrow withbottom edge of transom

Positioning the template

Warning Always wear safetygoggles and a dust mask

3 Using a 4 mm 23 or 964rdquo bit drillthree holes 22 mm (78rdquo) deepat the locations indicated To preventdrilling too deeply wrap maskingtape around the bit 22 mm (78rdquo)from the pointFiberglass hull Minimize surfacecracking by chamfering the gelcoatIf a chamfer bit or countersink bit is

not available start drilling with a6mm or 14rdquo bit to a depth of 1 mm(116rdquo)

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3748

31

4 If you know your transom angle the

bracket is designed for a standard13deg transom angle11deg-18deg angle No shim is requiredSkip to step 3 in ldquoAdjustingrdquoOther angles The shim is requiredSkip to step 2 of ldquoAdjustingrdquoIf you do not know the transom angletemporarily attach the bracket andsensor to the transom to determine ifthe plastic shim is needed

5 Using the two 10 x 1-14rdquo

self-tapping screws temporarilyscrew the bracket to the hull DONOT tighten the screws completelyat this time Follow the step 1-4 inldquoAttaching the Sensor to the Bracketrdquobefore proceeding with ldquoAdjustingrdquo

Installation templatefor starboard side of boat

Drill at locations labeled Bfor the following transom angles

16 deg through 22 deg

Drill at locations labeled Afor the following transom angles

2 deg through 15 deg

Align arrow with bottom of transom

AA A

BB B

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3848

32

Adjusting

1 Using a straight edge sight theunderside of the sensor relative tothe underside of the hull The sternof the sensor should be 1-3 mm

(116-18rdquo) below the bow of thesensor or parallel to the bottom ofthe hull

11 deg transom angleNO SHIM

12-18 deg transom angleNO SHIM

2 deg -10 deg transom

angle

19 deg -22 deg transom

angleshim withtaper up

shim withtaper down

parallelparallel parallel

slightangle

angletoo steep

anglereversed

YES NONO

YES YESYES

Sensor position and transom angle

Note Do not position the bow of thesensor lower than the stern becauseaeration will occur

2 To adjust the sensorrsquos angle relativeto the hull use the tapered plasticshim provided If the bracket hasbeen temporarily fastened to thetransom remove it Key the shim in

place on the back of the bracket2deg-10deg transom angle (steppedtransom and jet boats) Positionthe shim with the tapered end down19deg-22deg transom angle (smallaluminum and fiberglass boats) Position the shim with the taperedend up

3 If the bracket has been temporarilyfastened to the transom remove it

Apply a marine sealant to thethreads of the two 10 x 1-14rdquo self

tapping screws to prevent waterseeping into the transom Screw thebracket to the hull Do not tighten thescrews completely at this time

4 Repeat step 1 to ensure that theangle of the sensor is correctNote Do not position the sensorfarther into the water than necessaryto avoid increasing drag spray andwater noise and reducing boatspeed

5 Using the vertical adjustment spaceon the bracket slots slide the sensorup or down to provide a projection of3 mm (18rdquo) Tighten the screws

Cable cover

Cableclamp

50 mm (2)

Hull projection 3 mm (18)

Vertical adjustment and cable routing

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3948

33

Attaching the sensor to the bracket

1 If the retaining cover near the top ofthe bracket is closed open it bydepressing the latch and rotating thecover downward

Step 1 Step 2

Latch

Retainingcover

Pivotarm (2)

Slot (2)

Step 4

Step 3

Attaching the sensor to the bracket

2 Insert the sensorrsquos pivot arms intothe slots near the top of the bracket

3 Maintain pressure until the pivotarms click into place

4 Rotate the sensor downward until thebottom snaps into the bracket

5 Close the retaining cover to preventthe accidental release of the sensorwhen the boat is underway

Cable routing

Route the sensor cable over thetransom through a drain hole orthorough a new hole drilled in thetransom above the waterline

Never cut the cable or remote the

connector this will void the warranty Always wear safety goggles and a dustmask

1 If a hole must be drilled choose alocation well above the waterlineCheck for obstructions such as trimtabs pumps or wiring inside the hullMark the location with a pencil Drilla hole through the transom using a19 mm or 34rdquo bit (to accommodatethe connector)

2 Route the cable over or through thetransom

3 On the outside of the hull secure thecable against the transom using thecable clamps Position a cable clamp50 mm(2rdquo) above the bracket andmark the mounting hole with apencil

4 Position the second cable clamphalfway between the first clamp andthe cable hole Mark this mountinghole

5 If a hole has been drilled in thetransom open the appropriate slot inthe transom cable cover Position thecover over the cable where it entersthe hull Mark the two mounting

holes6 At each of the marked locations usea 3 mm or 18rdquo bit to drill a hole 10mm (38rdquo) deep The prevent drillingtoo deeply wrap masking tapearound the bit 10 mm (38rdquo) from thepoint

7 Apply marine sealant to the threadsof the 6 x 12rdquo self-tapping screw toprevent water from seeping into the

transom If you have drilled a holethrough the transom apply marinesealant to the space around thecable where it passes through thetransom

8 Position the two cable clamps andfasten them in place If used pushthe cable cover over the cable andscrew it in place

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4048

34

9 Route the cable to the instrumentbeing careful not to tear the cable

jacket when passing it though thebulkhead(s) and other parts of theboat To reduce electricalinterference separate the sensorcable from other electrical wiring andldquonoiserdquo sources Coil any excesscable and secure it in place withzip-ties to prevent damage

46 Optional WaterTemperatureSpeedSensor

Water temperaturespeed sensorST-02MSB and ST-02PSB which aredesigned for thru-hull mounting areoptionally available Install them asshown below

Mounting considerations

Choose a suitable mounting locationconsidering the followingbull Choose a place free from vibrationbull Choose a mid-boat flat position The

sensor does not have to be installedperfectly perpendicular The sensormust not be damaged in dry-dockingoperation

bull Choose a place apart from equipmentgenerating heat

bull Choose a place in the forwarddirection viewing from the drain holeto allow for circulation of coolingwater

1 Dry-dock the boat2 Make a hole of approx 51 mm

diameter in the mounting location3 Unfasten locknut and remove the

sensor section4 Apply high-grade sealant to the

flange of the sensor5 Pass the sensor casing through thehole

6 Face the notch on the sensor towardboatrsquos bow and tighten the flange

7 Set the sensor section to the sensorcasing and tighten the locknut

8 Launch the boat and check for waterleakage around the sensor

Locknut

Face notchtoward bow

Flange Nut

Coat withsilicone sealant Brim

φ 77

51

123

Water temperaturespeed sensor

ST-02MSB ST-02PSB

47 Wiring

Connect the LS-4100 powerdata cableassy MJ-A7SPF0005-020 (2 msupplied) to the POWER and thetransducer cable to the XDR connectorRefer to the interconnection diagram toconnect cables Leave slack in cables tofacilitate checking and maintenance

Note The fuse holder contains a springwhich fixes the fuse To preventdetachment of the spring which wouldcause loss of power tie the line asshown below

+ line (red)

Fuse holder

Cable tie How to fix fuse holder

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4148

35

Establishing the ground

The ground wire (125 sq or more localsupply) should be as short as possible

The signal line ground is isolated from

the chassis ground however the powerline is not insulated Therefore whenconnecting eternal equipment havingpositive ground do not ground thesignal line to the chassis If excessivenoise shows on the screen the groundmay be inadequate In this case attacha steel plate measuring 20 cm by 30 cmon the outside of the hull to provide aground point Connect the ground wire

there Use a ldquoclosedrdquo type lug ( ) tomake the connection at the display unitDo not use an ldquoopenrdquo type lug ( )

Optional equipment

POWER connector

The power supply port is commonlyused for connection of externalequipment such as a GPS receiver orwind indicator Use the powerdatacable MJ-A7SPF0005-020 (supplied) forconnection referring the figure shown inthe right column

Connector Color Remarks

1 TD-A WHT2 TD-B BLU

IEC-61162-1NMEA0183

3 RD-A YEL

4 RD-B GRN

IEC-61162-1

NMEA01835 + RED

6 - BLKPower input12 VDC

7 FG

Water tempspeed sensor

Connect the optional water tempspeedsensor to the XDR connector with theoptional converter connector (Type02S4147) as shown below

Tape connectors withvulcaninzing tapeand then vinyl tapeto waterproof themBind tape ends withcable ties to preventtape from unraveling

Connect to XDR portat rear of display unit

MJ-A10SPF

MJ-A10SRMDMJ-A6SRMD

Fromtransducer

Fromsensor

Connection of converterconnector 02S4147

48 IEC 61162-1 DataSentences

The tables below show the datasentences which can be input to andoutput from the LS-4100 Thetransmission speed for both input andoutput is 4800 bps Data is output attwo-second intervals

Input data sentences

Sentence Meaning

BWC Bearing and distance towaypoint

GGA Global positioning system(GPS) fix data

GLL Geographic position -latitudelongitude

HDG Heading deviation and variationHDT Heading true

MDA Atmospheric pressure

MTW Water temperature

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4248

36

Input data sentences (conrsquot)

Sentence MeaningMWV Wind speed and

angleRMA Recommended

minimum specificLORAN-C dataRMB Recommended

minimum navigationinformation

RMC Recommendedminimum specificGPSTRANSIT data

VHW Water speed andheading

VTG Course over groundand ground speedXTE Cross track error

Output data sentences

Sentence MeaningDBT (Ver 15) Depth below

transducerDPT (Ver 20 Ver30)

Depth

MTW Water temperatureRMB (Ver 20) Recommended

minimumnavigationinformation

VHW Water speed andheading

TLL Target positionoutput by [MARK]key

= Available with connection of optionalsensorsnavaid

49 Installation MenuThe installation menu mainly containsitems which are set at installation

1 Turn on the power while pressing the[MENUESC] key Continue pressing

the [MENUESC] key until theInstallation menu appears

SIMULATION On

TEST LCD PATTERN MEMORY CLEAR

NMEA PORT InOutNMEA MIX OffGPS WAAS Off

SET BOTTOM LEVEL

Installation Menu

= Setting cannot be changed whenNMEA PORT setting is InIn

Installation menu

SIMULATION The simulation modeprovides without connection of thetransducer simulated operation of theequipment using internally generatedechoes All controls are operative Themessage ldquoSIMrdquo appears at the top rightcorner on the screen when thesimulation mode is active

1 At the installation menu press toopen the simulation mode optionswindow

2 Press to choose ldquoOnrdquo to turn onthe simulation mode

3 Press the [POWERBRILL] keyabout three seconds to turn off thepower

4 Press the [POWERBRILL] key toturn on the power ldquoSIMrdquo appears atthe top right corner of the display

5 To turn off the simulation modeselect Off at step 2

NMEA po r t se tup(NMEA PO RT NMEA M IX)

The POWER port can function as aninput port or inputoutput port Changethe setting to ldquoInInrdquo when connectingGP-310B320B and a wind sensor

When connecting the GP-310B320Band a wind sensor first turn on ldquoGPS

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4348

37

WAASrdquo (in the Installation menu) andthen select ldquoInInrdquo as the NMEA portsetting

1 Turn on the power while pressingand holding down the [MENUESC]key Continue pressing the[MENUESC] key until theInstallation menu appears

2 Choose NMEA PORT and thenpress to display the NMEA portoptions window

3 Use or to choose InOut orInIn as appropriate

InOut Input and Output (default

setting)InIn Input only (Available withconnection of the GP-310B320Band a wind sensor)

4 Press choose NMEA MIX andthen press to display the NMEAMIX options window

5 Use or to choose Off or OnChoose On to output input data

Off Outputs the data sentences ofLS-4100 only

On Outputs the data sentences ofLS-4100 and sentences which areinput from other equipment

6 To restore normal operation turn offthe power and then turn it on again

GPS WAAS Chooses how to use theWAAS signal when connecting with a

WAAS receiver for example GP-320B

Note WAAS is currently in thedevelopmental phase During thedevelopmental phase the reliability andavailability of the WAAS signal cannotbe guaranteed Therefore any positiondata should be verified against othersources to confirm reliability

1 Display the Installation menu2 Choose GPS WAAS and then press

to open the GPS WAAS options

window

Off

WAAS options window3 Press or to choose ldquoWAAS-02rdquo

(test signal) When the systembecomes operational (in 2003) setto ldquo00rdquo (regular WAAS signal)

4 Turn off the power

BOTTOM LEVEL If the depthindication is unstable in automaticoperation or the bottom echo cannot bedisplayed in the darkest gray tone byadjusting the gain controls in manualoperation you may adjust the bottomecho level detection circuit for both 50kHz and 200 kHz to stabilize theindication Generally lower the bottomlevel for inner hull installation where thereceive level is too low If the bottomlevel is too low it may be difficult todiscriminate fish from the bottomresulting in unstable depth indication

And if the bottom level is too high thedepth indication may not appear

1 At the installation menu press tochoose SET BOTTOM LEVEL andthen press Several seconds laterthe following display appears

Bottom level +0 (200k -100 - +100 ) +0 ( 50k -100 - +100 )

Bottom level display

2 While observing the picture use or to set 200 kHz or to set50 kHz Set up for optimum picture

3 To restore normal operation turn offthe power and then it on again

Note The mode must be other thanldquoNAV DATArdquo to show the bottom leveldisplay

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4448

SP - 1 E2371S01C

SPECIFICATIONS OF ECHO SOUNDER LS-4100

1 GENERAL11 TX Frequency 50 kHz or 200 kHz 50200 kHz dual transmitting selectable12 Transmit Method Single or dual transmitting

13 Output Power 300 Wrms14 TX Rate Max 500 pulsemin15 Pulse-length 01 to 08 ms

2 DISPLAY UNIT21 Display system 5-inch monochrome LCD 76 mm (W) x 100 mm (H) 240 x 320 dots22 Display Mode Single frequency (highlow freq) Dual-frequency Zoom Nav data-12

Marker zoom Bottom zoom Bottom-lock23 Display Range

Range SettingRange

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

Display

rangeMeter 5 10 20 40 80 150 200 300 2-500

Feet 15 30 60 120 200 400 600 1000 7-1500

Fathoms 3 5 10 20 40 80 100 150 1-250

PassiBraza 3 5 10 30 50 100 150 200 1-300

24 Range Shift 0-500 m 0-1500 ft 0-250 fa 0-300 pb25 Expansion Range Bottom-lock expansion 3 to 10 m

Sectional expansion 2 to 50 m26 Display Advance Speed 8 steps (LinesTX Freeze 1161814121121 41)

3 INTERFACE31 Input data sentences IEC61162-1NMEA0183 Ver 152030

GGA RMA RMB RMC BWC GLL HDT HDG VTG VHW MTWMWV MDA XTE

32 Output data sentences IEC61162-1NMEA0183 Ver 152030 interval 2 sMTW VHW DBT DPT RMB TLL by key operating External data required

4 POWER SUPPLY41 Display Unit 12 VDC 05 A

5 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITION51 Ambient Temperature Display unit -15degC to +55degC52 Relative Humidity 93 or less at 40degC53 Waterproof IPX5

6 COATING COLOR61 Display Unit N30

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4548

M a r

4

0 3

D-1

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4648

Mar 4 03

Mar 4 03

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4748

M a r

3

0 3

S-1

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4848

FURUNO Authorized DistributorDealer FURUNO Authorized DistributorDealer

9-52 Ashihara-cho9-52 Ashihara-choNishinomiya 662-8580 JAPANNishinomiya 662-8580 JAPAN

Telephone Telephone 0798-65-21110798-65-2111FaxFax 0798-65-42000798-65-4200

FIRST EDITION FIRST EDITION MARMAR 20032003Printed in JapanPrinted in Japan All rights reserved All rights reserved

B1B1 SEPSEP 09 200509 2005

Pub NoPub No OME-23710OME-23710 00014698000000146980000001469800000014698000(( DAMIDAMI )) LS-4100LS-4100

0 0 0 1 4 6 9 8 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 4 6 9 8 0 0 0

Page 18: OME23710B_1_LS4100

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 1848

12

8 Press $ to choose FROM9 Press to show the options menu

0ft

Depth

632 deg F

Temperature

10 kt

Speed Depth temperature speed setting

window10 Use or $ to set starting depth

temperature or speed as appropriateFor FISH (BL) the starting depth isthe range from the bottom

11 Press to close the window12 Press $ to choose RANGE13 Press to show the options menu14 Use or $ to set alarm range15 For the bottom alarm temperature

alarm speed alarm or arrivalalarm press the [MENUESC] key tofinish For a fish alarm press toclose the window and then go tostep 16

16 Press $ to choose FISH LEVEL17 Press to show the options menu

Weak

MediumStrong Fish level options

18 Use or $ to choose the echostrength level which will trigger a fishalarm

Weak Weak echoes (weakest toneon level bar)Medium Medium strength echoes

(middle tone on level bar)Strong Strong echoes (darkest toneon level bar)

19 Press the [MENUESC] key twice toclose the menu

Alarm range marker Bottom alarm Fish alarm (normal) Right Fish alarm (bottomlock) Left

Alarm icon

Alarm rangeStartingpoint

Bottom alarm Fish alarm (normal) Fish alarm (BL)

Temperature alarm (deg

C ordeg

F shown) Speed alarm Arrival alarm

Alarm icon (Appropriate icon appears to showwhich alarm has been violated)

How the alarm works

Note To disable an alarm choose Offat step 5 in the above procedure

Silencing the buzzer

The buzzer sounds and the appropriatealarm icon appears and flashes whenan alarm is violated You can silence thebuzzer by pressing any key Howeverthe buzzer will sound whenever thealarm setting is violated

Note The audio and visual alarms arereleased against the last-violated alarmwhen multiple alarms are active

115 WaypointsWaypoints may be used tobull Record the position of an important

echo as waypoint 12 points may beregistered

bull Output a waypoint position to a plotterto mark position on its screen

bull Find range bearing and time-to-go toa location (waypoint)

Note Requires latitude and longitudeposition from a navigator

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 1948

13

Registering a waypoint on thescreen

1 Press the [MARK] key The cursorappears along with waypoint entryinstructions To enter a waypoint tothe current own shiprsquos position go tostep 3Note If there is no position data themessage ldquoNo position datardquo appearsCheck the navigator

50k

496

1100

20

40

60

80

0

Cursor

WAYPOINT ENTRY

( Move) Cursor [MARK] Enter [MENU] Cancel

50 kHz display

2 Press the cursor pad to set thecursor where desired Pictureadvancement is stopped until step 3is completed and the instructionwindow is integrated into the navdisplay

3 Press the [MARK] key again WhenTLL or FURUNO-TLL is selected atTLL OUTPUT on the System menuthe latitude and longitude position atthe cursor is output to the navigator

A vertical line marks location Furtherthe display shows the waypointname (next sequential number) andposition of the location selected atstep 2

WAYPOINTName FREQLat 34 deg 22796NLon 136 deg 07264E

05

[MENU] Exit

rase

Waypoint data display

Note If you attempt to enter 13thwaypoint the message ldquoMemoryfullrdquo appears In this case erase anunwanted waypoint to enable entry

4 To save the waypoint under thename shown go to step 8 or go tostep 5 to change its name

5 Press to open the waypoint nameentry window

WAYPOINTName FREQLat 34 deg 22796NLon 136 deg 07264E

05

[MENU] Exit

01------ ENT

rase

Waypoint window name entry6 Use or to set character $ or

to shift cursor The name mayconsist of 10 alphanumericcharactersNote Character order is 0 1hellip9 - A BhellipZ _ 0hellip

7 Press to choose ENT 8 Press the [MENUESC] key to

register the waypoint

Registering waypoint by LL

1 Press the [MENUESC] key to openthe main menu

2 Use or to choose WAYPOINTLIST from page 2 of the menu

3 Press

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 2048

14

WAYPOINT LIST

01 0102 0303------------------------------------------------------

[MENU] Exit

Waypoint list4 Press or to choose an empty

waypoint and press Press again

NEW WAYPOINTName FREQLat 34 deg 22796NLon 136 deg 07264E

05

[MENU] Exit

04------ ENT

rase

New waypoint window name entry

5 Use or to set character $ or to shift cursor

6 Press to select ENT 7 Enter latitude and longitude similar

to how you entered waypoint name8 Press the [MENUESC] key to

register the waypoint

Editing waypoints Press the [MENUESC] key to open

the main menu

2 Use or to choose WAYPOINTLIST from page 2 of the menu

3 Press to open the waypoints list4 Use or to choose a waypoint

and press 5 Use or to choose the item to

edit (name latitude or longitude)6 Press to open the data entry

window7 Use or to set character $ or

to choose location8 Press to choose ENT 9 Press the [MENUESC] key

Erasing waypoints Press the [MENUESC] key2 Use or to choose WAYPOINT

LIST from page 2 of the menu3 Press to open the waypoints list

4 Use or to choose the waypointto erase and then press Note You cannot erase a waypointwhich is selected as ldquoGOTO WPTrdquo

5 Press to choose ldquoEraserdquo6 Press to open the options window7 Press to select YES to erase the

waypoint The waypoint list appearswith the erased waypoint blank

8 Press the [MENUESC] key twice toclose the menu

Setting destination waypoint

Set a destination waypoint to find rangebearing and time-to-go to that point Youcan see range and bearing to awaypoint Time-to-go is shown on theTime to Go digital display

Press the [MENUESC] key to openthe main menu

2 Use or to choose GOTO WPTfrom page 2 of the menu

3 Press to open the waypoints list

Off01020304----------------------------------------------------------------

Waypoint list

4 Use or to choose a waypoint5 Press the [MENUESC] key to close

the menu

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 2148

15

116 Setting Up Nav DataDisplays

The user may arrange the nav datadisplays as desired

1 Use the [MODE] key to show theNAV DATA-1 or 2 display whicheveryou want to set up

2 Press the [MENUESC] key to closethe mode selection window

3 Press the cursor pad to display theNAV DATA SETUP window

NAV DATA SETUP

Window Selection Data Selection

[MENU] Exit

NAV DATA SETUP window

4 Use or to choose a datadisplay window desired Adashed-line rectangle circumscribesyour selection

5 Use

or$

to choose item todisplay See the below for adescription of the displays

(9)

(1)

(2)

(3)

(4)(5)

(6)(7)(8)

Two-data

display

Three-data

display

Four-data

displayItems displayable in (1) - (3) depth positioncourse range and bearing trip distanceodometer water temperature headingair pressure time-to-go to destination waypointXTE speed wind speed and directiondestination waypoint data compassItems displayable in (4) - (9) depth positionspeed course range and bearing trip distanceodometer water temperature headingair pressure time-to-go to destination waypointXTE wind speed wind direction

= Graphic display

Nav data window and item displayable6 Press the [MENUESC] key to finish

Note You can choose the number ofitems to show in a nav data display withNAV DATA-1 and NAV DATA-2 on theSystem menu

GRAPHIC DISPLAYS

1 05 0 05 1

Wpt 03Rng 019nm Brg 321 deg XTE 000nm Cse 333 deg

DESTINATION WAYPOINT GRAPHIC

XTEscale

BearingCourseDestinationwaypointdirection

DestinationwaypointdataNameRangeXTE

Wind APP

WIND GRAPHIC

60

120

90

030

150180

120

150

90

60

30

120 deg

Speed 103 ms

COMPASS GRAPHIC

SPEED GRAPHIC

172

Speed

20

50

40

60

30

10

01 05 0 05 1

025 nm

XTE

XTE GRAPHIC

kt

Bearing todestinationwaypoint

Course

Brg30 deg

Cse90 deg

N

E

XTE scale

Speed-ometer

Nav data display-1

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 2248

16

DIGITAL DISPLAYS

Course

123 deg

COURSE

Depth

328 ft

DEPTH

Heading TRUEMAG

318 deg

HEADING

Odometer

56 nm

ODOMETER

Position GPS 3D

30 deg 00065N130 deg 00574E

POSITION

Temperature

698 degF

WATER TEMPERATURE

Trip meter

121 nm

TRIP DISTANCE

Time to Go

00 H30 M

TIME-TO-GO

1018 hpa

AIR PRESSURE

Air Pressure

Speed

193 kt

SPEED

Rng

121 nm

RANGE amp BEARING

Brg

140 deg

Wind Speed APP

80 ms

WIND SPEED

Wind Dir APP

138 deg

WIND DIRECTION

APP or TRUE depending on menu setting TRUE or MAG depending

on menu settingamp To destination waypoint

Note 1 Nav data is updated with somedelay

Note 2 When data is lost 120 sec thedisplay shows - - at the locationwhere data is lost

= GPS receiving status (Displays whenconnecting with GP-310B320B and InOutis selected at the Installation menu)NO FIX Position cannot be foundGPS 2D 2D (dimension) GPS position fixGPS 3D 3D GPS fixGPS W2D 2D WAAS position fixGPS W3D 3D WAAS position fix

NAV data display-2

117 Other Menu ItemsThis section describes the menu itemsnot previously mentioned

Page 1

HUE (Picture Color)

Two picture color arrangements areavailable Day and Night Day showsechoes on a white background Nightshows them on a black background

1 Press the [MENUESC] key todisplay the menu

2 Use or $ to choose HUE frompage 1 of the menu

3 Press to show the optionswindow

4 Use or $ to choose Day or Nightas appropriate

5 Press the [MENUESC] key to closethe menu

WHITE LINE

The white line feature displays theleading edge of the bottom echo in

white This is useful for discriminatingbottom fish near the bottom

1 Press the [MENUESC] key todisplay the main menu

2 Use or $ to choose WHITE LINEfrom page 1 of the menu

3 Press to show the optionswindow

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 2348

17

4 Use or to choose Off Tone orMesh as appropriate ldquoMeshrdquo paintsthe white line in darker tone thanldquoTonerdquo

5 Press the [MENUESC] key to closethe menu

526White Line OFF White Line ON (Mesh)

Fish schoolclearly shown

White line

0

20

40

60

80

050k 11

526

0

20

40

60

80

00 050k 11

How white line works

DEEP GAIN

ldquoDeep Gainrdquo compensates forpropagation attenuation of the ultrasonicwaves It does this by equalizing echopresentation so that fish schools of thesame size appear in the same density inboth shallow and deep waters Inaddition it reduces surface noise

Press the [MENUESC] key to openthe main menu

2 Use or to choose DEEP GAINfrom page of the menu

3 Press $ to show to the optionswindow

4 Choose Low Medium or High asappropriate High provides thegreatest degree of gain reductionagainst short range echoes

5 Press the [MENUESC] key to closethe menu

Page 2

TRIP RESET

This item resets trip distance to ldquo0rdquo

Press the [MENUESC] key to openthe main menu

2 Use or to choose TRIPRESET from page 2 of the menu

3 Press $ 4 Press to reset trip distance

Beeps are generated while the tripdistance is being reset

5 Press the [MENUESC] key to closethe menu

Note To reset the odometer to zeroclear the memory

GAIN ADJ 200 GAIN ADJ 50

If the gain is too high or too low or thegain for the low and high frequenciesappears unbalanced you cancompensate it as follows

Press the [MENUESC] key to openthe main menu

2 Use or to choose GAIN ADJ200 or GAIN ADJ 50 from page 2 ofthe menu

3 Press $ to show to the optionswindow

4 Use or to set the amount Thesetting range is ndash50 to +50

5 Press the [MENUESC] key to close

the menu

DRAFT

The default depth display shows thedistance from the transducer If youwould rather show the distance from thesea surface set your shiprsquos draft asfollows

Press the [MENUESC] key to openthe main menu

2 Use or to choose DRAFT frompage 2 of the menu

3 Press $ and then use or to setdraft The setting range is ndash 50 to+500 (meters feet)

4 Press the [MENUESC] key to closethe menu

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 2448

18

2 SYSTEM MENU

The System menu mainly consists ofitems which once set do not requirefrequent adjustment You may displaythis menu by choosing SYSTEM MENUat page 2 of the main menu andpressing

SYSTEM MENULANGUAGE English

DEPTH UNIT ftSPEED UNIT ktWIND UNIT msTEMP UNIT deg F

TEMP GRAPH OffNAV DATA-1 NAV DATA-2

WATER TYPE SaltKEY BEEP OnBATT VOLTAGE Off (13)

[MENU] Exit

SYSTEM MENU

(23)

NAV DISPLAY TempSpeedNMEA0183 Ver 20TLL OUTPUT OffBEARING TrueWIND SPDDIR ApparentTRIP SOURCE Own

TEMP SOURCE OwnSPEED SOURCE OwnTEMP CALIB +00 deg F ( 40)SPEED CALIB +0 ( 50)

Own speed Own temp 100 kt 162 deg F

[MENU] Exit

SYSTEM MENU

(33)

BASIC RANGE1 15 ft

RANGE2 30RANGE3 60RANGE4 120RANGE5 200RANGE6 400RANGE7 600RANGE8 1000 (7-1500)

ZOOM RANGE 15 ft (7-150)BL RANGE 15 ft (10-30)(Bottom Lock)

ZOOM MARKER On

[MENU] Exit

PAGE 3

PAGE 2

PAGE 1

Page no

System menus

21 System MenuPage 1

LANGUAGE The system language isavailable in English several Europeanlanguages and Japanese To changelanguage select language desired andpress the [MENUESC] key

DEPTH UNIT Choose unit of depthmeasurement from meters feet

fathoms passibraza and hiro(Japanese)

SPEED UNIT Choose unit of speedmeasurement from knots miles perhour and kilometers per hour Requiresspeed data

WIND UNIT Choose unit of wind speedmeasurement from ms kt kmh and

mph Requires wind speed data

TEMP UNIT Choose unit oftemperature measurement Celsius orFahrenheit Requires temperature data

TEMP GRAPH Turns the watertemperature display on or off Thetemperature scale range is 16deg (degF) inldquoNarrowrdquo 40deg (degF) in ldquoWiderdquo Requires

water temperature data

m526

0

20

40

60

80

00 050k 11

40

80

70

50

60

TemperatureScale

TemperatureGraph

638 deg F162kt

Water temperature display (wide degF)

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 2548

19

NAV DATA-1 -2 Choose the number ofnavigation data items to display on thenav data displays from two three orfour items Requires appropriate navdata

WATER TYPE Choose the water typewith which to use the LS-4100 fromSalt or Fresh

KEY BEEP Turn key beep on or off

BATT VOLTAGE Turn the batteryvoltage indication (appears at the topright corner on the screen) on or offWhen on it replaces the picture advancespeed indication

Page 2

NAV DISPLAY Choose the nav data todisplay in the nav data window at thetop left-hand corner You may choosefrom temperaturespeedlatitudelongitude range and bearingcourse over ground trip distance or

wind speed Requires appropriate navdata

407 deg F162kt

Nav window

NMEA0183 Choose NMEA version ofnavigator Ver 15 Ver 20 or Ver 30

TLL OUTPUT Enablesdisables outputof TLL (Target Latitude Longitude)position when the [MARK] key isoperated ldquoTLLrdquo outputs latitude andlongitude position ldquoFURUNO-TLLrdquoavailable with connection of navigatorthat can output FURUNO TLL outputslatitude and longitude watertemperature depth etc

BEARING Shiprsquos course and bearingto a waypoint may be displayed in trueor magnetic bearing Magnetic bearingis true bearing plus (or minus) earthrsquosmagnetic deviation Requires bearingdata

WIND SPDDIR Choose the windspeed and direction reference from trueand apparent Requires wind sensorApparen t The direction (in relation toshiprsquos bow) and speed of the wind as itappears to those on board relative tothe speed and direction of the boatcombination of the true wind and thewind caused by the boats movementTrue The speed and direction (inrelation to shiprsquos bow) of the wind felt ormeasured when stationary

TRIP SOURCE Choose speed sourcefor the trip distance indication Own(transducer with speed sensor orseparate speed sensor) or NMEA

TEMP SOURCE Choose source ofwater temperature input Off Own(transducer with water temperaturesensor or separate temperature sensor)or NMEA

SPEED SOURCE Choose source ofspeed input Off Own (transducer withspeed sensor or separate speedsensor) or NMEA Requires speed

data

TEMP CALIB If the water temperaturesensor-generated water temperatureindication is wrong you can correct ithere when ldquoOwnrdquo is selected astemperature source For example if thewater temperature indication is 2deghigher than actual water temperatureenter -2 The setting range is -40degF to

+40degF

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 2648

20

SPEED CALIB If the speedsensor-generated speed indication iswrong you can correct it here whenldquoOwnrdquo is selected as speed source Forexample if the speed indication is 10lower than actual speed enter +10 Thesetting range is ndash50 to +50

Page 3

BASIC RANGE 1 - BASIC RANGE 8 Set range of each of the eight basicranges (Selectable range 7 to 1500 ft)Note 1 All default basic ranges arerestored whenever the depth unit ischanged Therefore change the depth

unit before changing the basic rangesNote 2 A range may not be lower thanthe range preceding it For example ifbasic range 3 is 60 feet basic range 4must be greater than 60 feet

ZOOM RANGE Choose the range tozoom in the marker-zoom andbottom-zoom modes You may choose arange between 7 and 150 feet (2 and 50

meters)

BL RANGE The expansion width forthe bottom-lock display can be chosenfrom 10 to 30 feet (3 and 10 meters)

ZOOM MARKER The zoom markerappears in the normal bottom markerand bottom zoom displays and marksthe area which is expanded in the

bottom marker and bottom zoompictures You can turn the marker on oroff as desired

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 2748

21

3 MAINTENANCETROUBLESHOOTING

W RNING

ELECTRICAL SHOCK HAZARDDo not open the equipment

Only qualified personnel should workinside the equipment

31 Maintenance

Regular maintenance is essential forgood performance Checking the itemslisted in the table below monthly willhelp keep your equipment in goodshape for years to come

Checking

Item Action

Transducercable

Check cable for damage

Power cabletransducercable plug

Check that they are tightlyfastened Refasten ifnecessary

Display unitground

Check for corrosion Cleanif necessary

Power supplyvoltage

Check voltage If out ofrating correct problem

32 Cleaning the DisplayUnit

Dust or dirt on the display unit can beremoved with a soft cloth If desired awater-moistened cloth may be usedUse special care when cleaning theLCD since it scratches easily Do notuse chemical cleaners to clean thedisplay unit - they can remove paint andmarkings

33 TransducerMaintenance

Marine life on the transducer face willresult in a gradual decrease insensitivity Check the transducer facefor cleanliness each time the boat isdry-docked Carefully remove anymarine life with a piece of wood orfine-grade sandpaper

34 Replacing the FuseThe fuse in the power cable protects thesystem from reverse polarity of thepower supply and equipment fault If thefuse blows find the cause beforereplacing it Use only a 1A fuse (FGMB 1A 125V Code No 000-114-805 ) orequivalent Using the wrong fuse will damage the unit and void the warranty

W RNINGUse the proper fuse

Fuse rating is shown on the equipmentUse of a wrong fuse can result in fire anddamage the equipment

35 Battery Voltage Alert A battery icon appears when the batteryvoltage is too high or too low

Battery icon and meaning

Icon Meaning

Voltage is lower than 10 VDC If thevoltage goes below 9 V the equipmentis automatically turned off

Voltage is higher than 165 VDC If thevoltage goes higher than 175 V theequipment is automatically turned off

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 2848

22

36 TroubleshootingThe table below provides basictroubleshooting procedures which theuser may follow to restore normaloperation

Troubleshooting table

Ifhellip Then check hellipneither echo norfixed range scaleappears

bull battery voltagebull fusebull power cable

no echo appearsbut the fixedrange scaleappears

bull if display advancespeed is set to ldquoStoprdquo

bull transducer plugbull

transducer cableecho appears butno zero line

bull if range shifting is setto ldquo0rdquo

sensitivity is low bull gain settingbull if air bubbles or marine

life is clinging to thetransducer face

bull if sediments arepresent in the water

bull if the bottom is too soft

to return an echothere is extremeinterference ornoise

bull if the transducer is tooclose to the engine

bull if the unit is properlygrounded

bull if other echo soundersof the same frequencyas own are beingoperated nearby

the speedwatertemperaturereadout isunrealistic or notpresent

bull sensor plug

the positionreadout isunrealistic or notpresent

bull the connectionbetween sounder andnavigator

bull navigator

37 DiagnosticsIf you feel your unit is not workingproperly conduct the diagnostic test tofind the problem If you cannot restorenormal operation contact your dealerfor advice

1 Turn on the power while pressing the[MENUESC] key Continue pressingthe [MENUESC] key until theInstallation menu appears

SIMULATION On

TEST LCD PATTERN MEMORY CLEAR

NMEA PORT InOutNMEA MIX Off GPS WAAS Off

SET BOTTOM LEVEL

Installation Menu

= Setting cannot be changed whenNMEA PORT setting is InIn

Installation menu2 Press to choose TEST3 Press to start the test

ROM OKRAM OKNMEA

Temp 682 deg F

Speed 100kmh

Power 124 VBody 39 deg C

Program No 0252318-01Push [MENU] 3 times to exit

Level bar

= Program version no

Water

TemperatureSpeedBattery VoltageTemperatureinside displayunit(Unit fixed atdeg C)

GPS (48502180) OK

Only when GP-310B is connected(For GP-320B 4850238)

Test display

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 2948

23

4 The ROM RAM and NMEA port arechecked with the results shown asOK or NG (No Good) For any NGrequest service (A special connectoris required to test the NMEA portNothing appears if no connector isconnected)

5 The squares at the right side of thetest display are for checking thecontrols Press each key and thearrows on the Cursor Pad one byone A controlrsquos correspondingon-screen square ldquolightsrdquo in black ifthe control is normal

6 To return to the Installation menupress the [MENUESC] key threetimes

7 To restore normal operation turn offthe power and turn it on again

38 Test PatternThis feature tests for proper display oftones

1 On the Installation menu press $ tochoose LCD PATTERN

2 Press to start the test The entirescreen is black

3 Press again and the screen turnswhite

4 Press again and the screenshows a four-toned display

5 Press again to return to theInstallation menu

6 To restore normal operation turn offthe power and then it on again

WHITE FOUR-TONE BLACK

Test patterns

39 Memory ClearThe memory can be cleared to startafresh with default menu settings

1 At the installation menu press $ tochoose MEMORY CLEAR

2 Press to open the optionswindow

YES NO

Clear memory display

3 Press to clear the memory Beepsare generated while the memory isbeing cleared

4 To restore normal operation turn offthe power and then turn it on again

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3048

24

4 INSTALLATION

41 Display UnitMounting considerations

The display unit can be installed on adesktop on the bulkhead or flushmounted in a panel When choosing alocation keep the following in mind

bull Keep the display unit out of directsunlight

bull The temperature and humidity should

be moderate and stablebull Locate the unit away from exhaust

pipes and ventsbull The mounting location should be well

ventilatedbull Mount the unit where shock and

vibration are minimalbull For maintenance and checking

purposes leave sufficient space atthe sides and rear of the unit andleave slack in cables

bull A magnetic compass will be affected ifthe display unit is placed too close toit Observe the following compasssafe distances to prevent disturbanceto the magnetic compassStandard compass 04 metersSteering compass 03 meters

Desktop overhead mounting1 Fix the bracket to a desktop or the

overhead with tapping screws(supplied)

2 Loosely screw knobs into the displayunit

3 Set the display unit to the bracketand then tighten the knobs

Mounting on the bulkhead Flush

mounting in a panelSee the instructions on the bulkhead orflush mounting template (supplied)

42 Thru-hull MountTransducer

Transducer mounting location

The thru-hull mount transducer

(520-5PSD 520-5MSD) provides thebest performance of all since thetransducer protrudes from the hull andthe effect of air bubbles and turbulencenear the hull skin is reduced When theboat has a keel the transducer shouldbe at least 30 cm away from it Typicalthru-hull mountings are shown in thefigure on the next page

The performance of this sounder isdirectly related to the mounting locationof the transducer especially forhigh-speed cruising The installationshould be planned in advance keepingthe standard cable length (8 m) and thefollowing factors in mindbull Air bubbles and turbulence caused by

movement of the boat seriouslydegrade the sounding capability of thetransducer The transducer shouldtherefore be located in a positionwhere water flow is the smoothestNoise from the propellers alsoadversely affects performance andthe transducer should not be mountednearby The lifting strakes arenotorious for creating acoustic noiseand these must be avoided bykeeping the transducer inboard ofthem

bull The transducer must always remain

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3148

25

submerged even when the boat isrolling pitching or up on a plane athigh speed

bull A practical choice would besomewhere between 13 and 12 of

the boatrsquos length from the stern Forplaning hulls a practical location isgenerally rather far astern so that thetransducer is always in waterregardless of the planing attitude

28

22

120

68

30

520-5PSD

24

120

68

87520-5MSD

Unit mm

Thru-hull mount transducer dimensions

Acceptable transducer mounting

locations

Position 12 to 13 of the hull from stern

15 to 30 cm off center line (inside first lifting strakes)

Within the wetted bottom area

Deadrise angle within 15 deg

HIGH SPEED-V HULL

Suitable transducer mounting locations

Typical thru-hull mounttransducer installations

FairingBlock

Flat Washer

Rubber Washer

Hull

Deep-V Hull

Hull

Flat Washer

Rubber Washer

Flat Hull

CorkWasher

Typical thru-hull mounttransducer installations

Procedure for installing thethru-hull mount transducer

1 With the boat hauled out of the watermark the location chosen formounting the transducer on thebottom of the hull

2 If the hull is not level within 15deg inany direction fairing blocks madeout of teak should be used betweenthe transducer and hull both insideand outside to keep the transducerface parallel with the water lineFabricate the fairing block as shownbelow and make the entire surfaceas smooth as possible to provide anundisturbed flow of water around thetransducer The fairing block shouldbe smaller than the transducer itselfto provide a channel to divert

turbulent water around the sides ofthe transducer rather than over itsface

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3248

26

BOWHole for stuffing tube

Upper Half

Lower Half

Saw along slopeof hull Construction of fairing block

3 Drill a hole just large enough to passthe threaded stuffing tube of thetransducer through the hull makingsure it is drilled vertically

4 Apply a sufficient amount of highquality caulking compound to the topsurface of the transducer around thethreads of the stuffing tube andinside the mounting hole (and fairingblocks if used) to ensure watertightmounting

5 Mount the transducer and fairingblocks and tighten the locking nutsBe sure that the transducer is

properly oriented and its workingface is parallel to the waterline

Note Do not over-stress the stuffingtube and locking nuts through excessivetightening since the wood block willswell when the boat is placed in thewater It is suggested that the nut betightened lightly at installation andretightened several days after the boat

has been launched

Transducer preparation

Before putting the boat in water wipethe face of the transducer thoroughlywith a detergent liquid soap This willlessen the time necessary for thetransducer to have good contact withthe water Otherwise the time requiredfor complete ldquosaturationrdquo ill belengthened and performance will bereduced

DO NOT paint the transducerPerformance will be affected

43 Transom MountTransducer

The transom mount transducer is verycommonly employed usually onrelatively small IO or outboard boatsDo not use this method on an inboardmotor boat because turbulence iscreated by the propeller ahead of thetransducer

520-5PWD

There are two methods of installationflush with hull (for flat hulls) andprojecting from hull (for deep V-hulls)

Flat Hull

D

Dgt50 cm

Deep-VHull

520-5PWD mounting locations

Installing the 520-5PWD on a flat hull

A suitable mounting location is at least50 cm away from the engine and wherethe water flow is smooth

1 Drill four pilot holes in the mountinglocation

2 Attach the transducer to the bracketwith 5 x 20 tapping screws(supplied)

3 Adjust the transducer position so thetransducer faces right to the bottom

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3348

27

Note If necessary to improve waterflow and minimize air bubblesstaying on the transducer faceincline the transducer about 5deg at therear This may require a certainamount of experimentation for finetuning at high cruising speeds

4 Fill the gap between the wedge frontof the transducer and transom withepoxy material to eliminate any airspaces

No1 M5 x 14

5 x 20

5 x 20

2 to 5

Tape

Hull

Transom mount transducer

mounting flush with hull

Installing the transom mounttransducer on a deep-V hull

This method is employed on deep-Vhulls and provides good performancebecause the effects of air bubbles areminimal Install the transducer parallelwith water surface not flush with hull Ifthe boat is placed on a trailer care mustbe taken not to damage the transducerwhen the boat is hauled out of the waterand put on the trailer

5 x 20

No 2M5 x 14

5 x 20

Transom mount transducermounted projecting from hull

525-5PWD

Choose the installation methoddepending on the rise angle of the hull

Transom

Transom

Stripe over 10

Parallel with hull

Mount at the stripe

less than 10

525-5PWD mounting location

Installing the 525-5PWD

Referring to ldquoInstalling the 520-5PWDrdquoin the left column for mounting of thebracket and the figure shown on the topof next page install the 525-5PWD tothe transom

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3448

28

2 to 5

Transducer

Bracket

Hull

Epoxy material

525-5PWD mounting

44 Inside-hullTransducer

The thru-hull mount transducer(520-5PSD 520-5MSD) may also beinstalled inside the hull following theprocedure below

Necessary tools

You will need the following toolsbull Sandpaper (100)bull Silicone sealantbull Silicone grease

Remarks on installationbull Turn off the engine and anchor the

boat while installing the equipmentbull Install the transducer in the engine

room

Choosing the mounting locationbull The mounting location should be

where the hull is of single-hullthickness and is void of air or flotationmaterials other than solid fiberglassbetween the transducer face and thewater

bull Do not place the transducer over hullstruts or ribs which run under the hull

bull Avoid a location where the risingangle of the hull exceeds 15deg tominimize the effect of the boatrsquosrolling

bull You will finalize the mounting location

through some trial and error Theprocedure for this is shown later

50 cm

50 cm15 cm15 cm

13

12

Transducer mountinglocation

Centerline

Inside-hull transducer mounting location

Attaching the transducer1 Clean the transducer face to remove

any foreign material Lightly roughenthe transducer face with 100sandpaper Also roughen the insideof the hull where the transducer is tobe mounted

2 Clean the transducer face again3 Warm the silicone sealant to 40degC

before usage to soften it Coat thetransducer face and mountinglocation with silicone sealant

Transducer

SiliconeSealant

Coating transducer facewith silicone sealant

4 Press the transducer firmly down onthe hull and gently twist it back andforth to remove any air which may betrapped in the silicone sealant

Checking the installation

1 Connect the battery to the display

unit2 Turn on the display unit

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3548

29

3 Press the [MODE] key to chooseSINGLE FREQ

4 Choose 50 kHz or 200 kHz and thenpress the [MENUESC] key to closethe mode menu

5 Press the [MENU] to show the mainmenu and then press to select

Auto mode6 Press to choose Off7 Press the [MENUESC] key8 Press the [GAIN] key to set the gain

to ldquo5rdquo and then press the[MENUESC] key

9 Press the [RANGE] key to set therange to 10 meters (feet) and thenpress the [MENUESC] key

10 If the bottom is displayed in darkgray and the depth indicationappears the mounting location issuitable Go to ldquoFinal preparationrdquo

11 If the bottom is not displayed in darkgray tone the mounting location maybe unsuitable Do the followinga) Press the [POWERBRILL] key to

turn off the powerb) Gently dismount the transducer

with a piece of woodc) Reattach the transducer

elsewhere as shown in ldquoAttachingthe transducerrdquo

d) Check the installation again

Final preparation

Support the transducer with a piece ofwood to keep it in place while it is drying

Let the transducer dry 24-72 hours

45 Optional Triducer525ST-MSD

The optional triducer 525ST-MSD isdesigned for thru-hull mounting Forhow to install this transducer seeparagraph 42

φ79 mm

33 mm200-12 UNthreads

φ51 mm

27 mm

7 mm

140 mm Triducer 525ST-MSD

525ST-PWD

The Transom Mount Transducer orTRIDUCER reg Multisensor with IntegralRelease Bracket 525ST-PWD ismanufactured by AIRMAR Co Theseinstructions are also included with the

sensor

Pre-test for speed and temperature

Connect the sensor to the instrumentand spin the paddlewheel Check for aspeed reading and the approximate airtemperature If there is no readingreturn the sensor to your place ofpurchase

Tools and materials needed

ScissorsMasking tapeSafety gogglesDust maskElectric drillDrill bit for

Bracket holes 4mm 23 or 964rdquoFiberglass hull chamfer bit(preferred)6mm or 14rdquo

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3648

30

Transom hole 19mm or 34rdquo(optional)

Cable clamp holes 3mm or 18rdquoScrewdriversStraight edgeMarine sealantPencilZip-tiesWater-based antifouling paint(mandatory in salt water )

Mounting location

To ensure the best performance thesensor must be submerged inaeration-free and turbulence-free water

Mount the sensor close to the centerlineof the boat On slower heavierdisplacement hulls positioning it fartherfrom the centerline is acceptable

Allow adequate space above thebracket for it to release and rotate thesensor upward

Height

Height withoutspeed sensor191mm (7-12)Height withspeed sensor213mm (8-12)

Height required at mounting location

Note 1 Do not mount the sensor in anarea of turbulence or bubbles nearwater intake or discharge openingsbehind strakes struts fittings or hull

irregularities behind eroding paint (anindication of turbulence)Note 2 Avoid mounting the sensorwhere the boat may be supportedduring trailering launching hauling andstorageNote 3 For single drive boat mounton the starboard side at least 75 mm(3rdquo) beyond the swing radius of thepropeller

75 mm(3)

minimum beyondswing radius

Mounting location on single drive boat

Note 4 For twin drive boat mountbetween the drives

Installation of bracket

1 Cut out the installation template

shown on the next page2 At the selected location position thetemplate so the arrow at the bottomis aligned with the bottom edge ofthe transom Being sure the templateis parallel to the waterline tape it inplace

Align template vertically

Deadrise angle

Slope of hullparallel towaterline

Align template arrow withbottom edge of transom

Positioning the template

Warning Always wear safetygoggles and a dust mask

3 Using a 4 mm 23 or 964rdquo bit drillthree holes 22 mm (78rdquo) deepat the locations indicated To preventdrilling too deeply wrap maskingtape around the bit 22 mm (78rdquo)from the pointFiberglass hull Minimize surfacecracking by chamfering the gelcoatIf a chamfer bit or countersink bit is

not available start drilling with a6mm or 14rdquo bit to a depth of 1 mm(116rdquo)

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3748

31

4 If you know your transom angle the

bracket is designed for a standard13deg transom angle11deg-18deg angle No shim is requiredSkip to step 3 in ldquoAdjustingrdquoOther angles The shim is requiredSkip to step 2 of ldquoAdjustingrdquoIf you do not know the transom angletemporarily attach the bracket andsensor to the transom to determine ifthe plastic shim is needed

5 Using the two 10 x 1-14rdquo

self-tapping screws temporarilyscrew the bracket to the hull DONOT tighten the screws completelyat this time Follow the step 1-4 inldquoAttaching the Sensor to the Bracketrdquobefore proceeding with ldquoAdjustingrdquo

Installation templatefor starboard side of boat

Drill at locations labeled Bfor the following transom angles

16 deg through 22 deg

Drill at locations labeled Afor the following transom angles

2 deg through 15 deg

Align arrow with bottom of transom

AA A

BB B

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3848

32

Adjusting

1 Using a straight edge sight theunderside of the sensor relative tothe underside of the hull The sternof the sensor should be 1-3 mm

(116-18rdquo) below the bow of thesensor or parallel to the bottom ofthe hull

11 deg transom angleNO SHIM

12-18 deg transom angleNO SHIM

2 deg -10 deg transom

angle

19 deg -22 deg transom

angleshim withtaper up

shim withtaper down

parallelparallel parallel

slightangle

angletoo steep

anglereversed

YES NONO

YES YESYES

Sensor position and transom angle

Note Do not position the bow of thesensor lower than the stern becauseaeration will occur

2 To adjust the sensorrsquos angle relativeto the hull use the tapered plasticshim provided If the bracket hasbeen temporarily fastened to thetransom remove it Key the shim in

place on the back of the bracket2deg-10deg transom angle (steppedtransom and jet boats) Positionthe shim with the tapered end down19deg-22deg transom angle (smallaluminum and fiberglass boats) Position the shim with the taperedend up

3 If the bracket has been temporarilyfastened to the transom remove it

Apply a marine sealant to thethreads of the two 10 x 1-14rdquo self

tapping screws to prevent waterseeping into the transom Screw thebracket to the hull Do not tighten thescrews completely at this time

4 Repeat step 1 to ensure that theangle of the sensor is correctNote Do not position the sensorfarther into the water than necessaryto avoid increasing drag spray andwater noise and reducing boatspeed

5 Using the vertical adjustment spaceon the bracket slots slide the sensorup or down to provide a projection of3 mm (18rdquo) Tighten the screws

Cable cover

Cableclamp

50 mm (2)

Hull projection 3 mm (18)

Vertical adjustment and cable routing

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3948

33

Attaching the sensor to the bracket

1 If the retaining cover near the top ofthe bracket is closed open it bydepressing the latch and rotating thecover downward

Step 1 Step 2

Latch

Retainingcover

Pivotarm (2)

Slot (2)

Step 4

Step 3

Attaching the sensor to the bracket

2 Insert the sensorrsquos pivot arms intothe slots near the top of the bracket

3 Maintain pressure until the pivotarms click into place

4 Rotate the sensor downward until thebottom snaps into the bracket

5 Close the retaining cover to preventthe accidental release of the sensorwhen the boat is underway

Cable routing

Route the sensor cable over thetransom through a drain hole orthorough a new hole drilled in thetransom above the waterline

Never cut the cable or remote the

connector this will void the warranty Always wear safety goggles and a dustmask

1 If a hole must be drilled choose alocation well above the waterlineCheck for obstructions such as trimtabs pumps or wiring inside the hullMark the location with a pencil Drilla hole through the transom using a19 mm or 34rdquo bit (to accommodatethe connector)

2 Route the cable over or through thetransom

3 On the outside of the hull secure thecable against the transom using thecable clamps Position a cable clamp50 mm(2rdquo) above the bracket andmark the mounting hole with apencil

4 Position the second cable clamphalfway between the first clamp andthe cable hole Mark this mountinghole

5 If a hole has been drilled in thetransom open the appropriate slot inthe transom cable cover Position thecover over the cable where it entersthe hull Mark the two mounting

holes6 At each of the marked locations usea 3 mm or 18rdquo bit to drill a hole 10mm (38rdquo) deep The prevent drillingtoo deeply wrap masking tapearound the bit 10 mm (38rdquo) from thepoint

7 Apply marine sealant to the threadsof the 6 x 12rdquo self-tapping screw toprevent water from seeping into the

transom If you have drilled a holethrough the transom apply marinesealant to the space around thecable where it passes through thetransom

8 Position the two cable clamps andfasten them in place If used pushthe cable cover over the cable andscrew it in place

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4048

34

9 Route the cable to the instrumentbeing careful not to tear the cable

jacket when passing it though thebulkhead(s) and other parts of theboat To reduce electricalinterference separate the sensorcable from other electrical wiring andldquonoiserdquo sources Coil any excesscable and secure it in place withzip-ties to prevent damage

46 Optional WaterTemperatureSpeedSensor

Water temperaturespeed sensorST-02MSB and ST-02PSB which aredesigned for thru-hull mounting areoptionally available Install them asshown below

Mounting considerations

Choose a suitable mounting locationconsidering the followingbull Choose a place free from vibrationbull Choose a mid-boat flat position The

sensor does not have to be installedperfectly perpendicular The sensormust not be damaged in dry-dockingoperation

bull Choose a place apart from equipmentgenerating heat

bull Choose a place in the forwarddirection viewing from the drain holeto allow for circulation of coolingwater

1 Dry-dock the boat2 Make a hole of approx 51 mm

diameter in the mounting location3 Unfasten locknut and remove the

sensor section4 Apply high-grade sealant to the

flange of the sensor5 Pass the sensor casing through thehole

6 Face the notch on the sensor towardboatrsquos bow and tighten the flange

7 Set the sensor section to the sensorcasing and tighten the locknut

8 Launch the boat and check for waterleakage around the sensor

Locknut

Face notchtoward bow

Flange Nut

Coat withsilicone sealant Brim

φ 77

51

123

Water temperaturespeed sensor

ST-02MSB ST-02PSB

47 Wiring

Connect the LS-4100 powerdata cableassy MJ-A7SPF0005-020 (2 msupplied) to the POWER and thetransducer cable to the XDR connectorRefer to the interconnection diagram toconnect cables Leave slack in cables tofacilitate checking and maintenance

Note The fuse holder contains a springwhich fixes the fuse To preventdetachment of the spring which wouldcause loss of power tie the line asshown below

+ line (red)

Fuse holder

Cable tie How to fix fuse holder

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4148

35

Establishing the ground

The ground wire (125 sq or more localsupply) should be as short as possible

The signal line ground is isolated from

the chassis ground however the powerline is not insulated Therefore whenconnecting eternal equipment havingpositive ground do not ground thesignal line to the chassis If excessivenoise shows on the screen the groundmay be inadequate In this case attacha steel plate measuring 20 cm by 30 cmon the outside of the hull to provide aground point Connect the ground wire

there Use a ldquoclosedrdquo type lug ( ) tomake the connection at the display unitDo not use an ldquoopenrdquo type lug ( )

Optional equipment

POWER connector

The power supply port is commonlyused for connection of externalequipment such as a GPS receiver orwind indicator Use the powerdatacable MJ-A7SPF0005-020 (supplied) forconnection referring the figure shown inthe right column

Connector Color Remarks

1 TD-A WHT2 TD-B BLU

IEC-61162-1NMEA0183

3 RD-A YEL

4 RD-B GRN

IEC-61162-1

NMEA01835 + RED

6 - BLKPower input12 VDC

7 FG

Water tempspeed sensor

Connect the optional water tempspeedsensor to the XDR connector with theoptional converter connector (Type02S4147) as shown below

Tape connectors withvulcaninzing tapeand then vinyl tapeto waterproof themBind tape ends withcable ties to preventtape from unraveling

Connect to XDR portat rear of display unit

MJ-A10SPF

MJ-A10SRMDMJ-A6SRMD

Fromtransducer

Fromsensor

Connection of converterconnector 02S4147

48 IEC 61162-1 DataSentences

The tables below show the datasentences which can be input to andoutput from the LS-4100 Thetransmission speed for both input andoutput is 4800 bps Data is output attwo-second intervals

Input data sentences

Sentence Meaning

BWC Bearing and distance towaypoint

GGA Global positioning system(GPS) fix data

GLL Geographic position -latitudelongitude

HDG Heading deviation and variationHDT Heading true

MDA Atmospheric pressure

MTW Water temperature

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4248

36

Input data sentences (conrsquot)

Sentence MeaningMWV Wind speed and

angleRMA Recommended

minimum specificLORAN-C dataRMB Recommended

minimum navigationinformation

RMC Recommendedminimum specificGPSTRANSIT data

VHW Water speed andheading

VTG Course over groundand ground speedXTE Cross track error

Output data sentences

Sentence MeaningDBT (Ver 15) Depth below

transducerDPT (Ver 20 Ver30)

Depth

MTW Water temperatureRMB (Ver 20) Recommended

minimumnavigationinformation

VHW Water speed andheading

TLL Target positionoutput by [MARK]key

= Available with connection of optionalsensorsnavaid

49 Installation MenuThe installation menu mainly containsitems which are set at installation

1 Turn on the power while pressing the[MENUESC] key Continue pressing

the [MENUESC] key until theInstallation menu appears

SIMULATION On

TEST LCD PATTERN MEMORY CLEAR

NMEA PORT InOutNMEA MIX OffGPS WAAS Off

SET BOTTOM LEVEL

Installation Menu

= Setting cannot be changed whenNMEA PORT setting is InIn

Installation menu

SIMULATION The simulation modeprovides without connection of thetransducer simulated operation of theequipment using internally generatedechoes All controls are operative Themessage ldquoSIMrdquo appears at the top rightcorner on the screen when thesimulation mode is active

1 At the installation menu press toopen the simulation mode optionswindow

2 Press to choose ldquoOnrdquo to turn onthe simulation mode

3 Press the [POWERBRILL] keyabout three seconds to turn off thepower

4 Press the [POWERBRILL] key toturn on the power ldquoSIMrdquo appears atthe top right corner of the display

5 To turn off the simulation modeselect Off at step 2

NMEA po r t se tup(NMEA PO RT NMEA M IX)

The POWER port can function as aninput port or inputoutput port Changethe setting to ldquoInInrdquo when connectingGP-310B320B and a wind sensor

When connecting the GP-310B320Band a wind sensor first turn on ldquoGPS

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4348

37

WAASrdquo (in the Installation menu) andthen select ldquoInInrdquo as the NMEA portsetting

1 Turn on the power while pressingand holding down the [MENUESC]key Continue pressing the[MENUESC] key until theInstallation menu appears

2 Choose NMEA PORT and thenpress to display the NMEA portoptions window

3 Use or to choose InOut orInIn as appropriate

InOut Input and Output (default

setting)InIn Input only (Available withconnection of the GP-310B320Band a wind sensor)

4 Press choose NMEA MIX andthen press to display the NMEAMIX options window

5 Use or to choose Off or OnChoose On to output input data

Off Outputs the data sentences ofLS-4100 only

On Outputs the data sentences ofLS-4100 and sentences which areinput from other equipment

6 To restore normal operation turn offthe power and then turn it on again

GPS WAAS Chooses how to use theWAAS signal when connecting with a

WAAS receiver for example GP-320B

Note WAAS is currently in thedevelopmental phase During thedevelopmental phase the reliability andavailability of the WAAS signal cannotbe guaranteed Therefore any positiondata should be verified against othersources to confirm reliability

1 Display the Installation menu2 Choose GPS WAAS and then press

to open the GPS WAAS options

window

Off

WAAS options window3 Press or to choose ldquoWAAS-02rdquo

(test signal) When the systembecomes operational (in 2003) setto ldquo00rdquo (regular WAAS signal)

4 Turn off the power

BOTTOM LEVEL If the depthindication is unstable in automaticoperation or the bottom echo cannot bedisplayed in the darkest gray tone byadjusting the gain controls in manualoperation you may adjust the bottomecho level detection circuit for both 50kHz and 200 kHz to stabilize theindication Generally lower the bottomlevel for inner hull installation where thereceive level is too low If the bottomlevel is too low it may be difficult todiscriminate fish from the bottomresulting in unstable depth indication

And if the bottom level is too high thedepth indication may not appear

1 At the installation menu press tochoose SET BOTTOM LEVEL andthen press Several seconds laterthe following display appears

Bottom level +0 (200k -100 - +100 ) +0 ( 50k -100 - +100 )

Bottom level display

2 While observing the picture use or to set 200 kHz or to set50 kHz Set up for optimum picture

3 To restore normal operation turn offthe power and then it on again

Note The mode must be other thanldquoNAV DATArdquo to show the bottom leveldisplay

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4448

SP - 1 E2371S01C

SPECIFICATIONS OF ECHO SOUNDER LS-4100

1 GENERAL11 TX Frequency 50 kHz or 200 kHz 50200 kHz dual transmitting selectable12 Transmit Method Single or dual transmitting

13 Output Power 300 Wrms14 TX Rate Max 500 pulsemin15 Pulse-length 01 to 08 ms

2 DISPLAY UNIT21 Display system 5-inch monochrome LCD 76 mm (W) x 100 mm (H) 240 x 320 dots22 Display Mode Single frequency (highlow freq) Dual-frequency Zoom Nav data-12

Marker zoom Bottom zoom Bottom-lock23 Display Range

Range SettingRange

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

Display

rangeMeter 5 10 20 40 80 150 200 300 2-500

Feet 15 30 60 120 200 400 600 1000 7-1500

Fathoms 3 5 10 20 40 80 100 150 1-250

PassiBraza 3 5 10 30 50 100 150 200 1-300

24 Range Shift 0-500 m 0-1500 ft 0-250 fa 0-300 pb25 Expansion Range Bottom-lock expansion 3 to 10 m

Sectional expansion 2 to 50 m26 Display Advance Speed 8 steps (LinesTX Freeze 1161814121121 41)

3 INTERFACE31 Input data sentences IEC61162-1NMEA0183 Ver 152030

GGA RMA RMB RMC BWC GLL HDT HDG VTG VHW MTWMWV MDA XTE

32 Output data sentences IEC61162-1NMEA0183 Ver 152030 interval 2 sMTW VHW DBT DPT RMB TLL by key operating External data required

4 POWER SUPPLY41 Display Unit 12 VDC 05 A

5 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITION51 Ambient Temperature Display unit -15degC to +55degC52 Relative Humidity 93 or less at 40degC53 Waterproof IPX5

6 COATING COLOR61 Display Unit N30

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4548

M a r

4

0 3

D-1

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4648

Mar 4 03

Mar 4 03

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4748

M a r

3

0 3

S-1

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4848

FURUNO Authorized DistributorDealer FURUNO Authorized DistributorDealer

9-52 Ashihara-cho9-52 Ashihara-choNishinomiya 662-8580 JAPANNishinomiya 662-8580 JAPAN

Telephone Telephone 0798-65-21110798-65-2111FaxFax 0798-65-42000798-65-4200

FIRST EDITION FIRST EDITION MARMAR 20032003Printed in JapanPrinted in Japan All rights reserved All rights reserved

B1B1 SEPSEP 09 200509 2005

Pub NoPub No OME-23710OME-23710 00014698000000146980000001469800000014698000(( DAMIDAMI )) LS-4100LS-4100

0 0 0 1 4 6 9 8 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 4 6 9 8 0 0 0

Page 19: OME23710B_1_LS4100

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 1948

13

Registering a waypoint on thescreen

1 Press the [MARK] key The cursorappears along with waypoint entryinstructions To enter a waypoint tothe current own shiprsquos position go tostep 3Note If there is no position data themessage ldquoNo position datardquo appearsCheck the navigator

50k

496

1100

20

40

60

80

0

Cursor

WAYPOINT ENTRY

( Move) Cursor [MARK] Enter [MENU] Cancel

50 kHz display

2 Press the cursor pad to set thecursor where desired Pictureadvancement is stopped until step 3is completed and the instructionwindow is integrated into the navdisplay

3 Press the [MARK] key again WhenTLL or FURUNO-TLL is selected atTLL OUTPUT on the System menuthe latitude and longitude position atthe cursor is output to the navigator

A vertical line marks location Furtherthe display shows the waypointname (next sequential number) andposition of the location selected atstep 2

WAYPOINTName FREQLat 34 deg 22796NLon 136 deg 07264E

05

[MENU] Exit

rase

Waypoint data display

Note If you attempt to enter 13thwaypoint the message ldquoMemoryfullrdquo appears In this case erase anunwanted waypoint to enable entry

4 To save the waypoint under thename shown go to step 8 or go tostep 5 to change its name

5 Press to open the waypoint nameentry window

WAYPOINTName FREQLat 34 deg 22796NLon 136 deg 07264E

05

[MENU] Exit

01------ ENT

rase

Waypoint window name entry6 Use or to set character $ or

to shift cursor The name mayconsist of 10 alphanumericcharactersNote Character order is 0 1hellip9 - A BhellipZ _ 0hellip

7 Press to choose ENT 8 Press the [MENUESC] key to

register the waypoint

Registering waypoint by LL

1 Press the [MENUESC] key to openthe main menu

2 Use or to choose WAYPOINTLIST from page 2 of the menu

3 Press

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 2048

14

WAYPOINT LIST

01 0102 0303------------------------------------------------------

[MENU] Exit

Waypoint list4 Press or to choose an empty

waypoint and press Press again

NEW WAYPOINTName FREQLat 34 deg 22796NLon 136 deg 07264E

05

[MENU] Exit

04------ ENT

rase

New waypoint window name entry

5 Use or to set character $ or to shift cursor

6 Press to select ENT 7 Enter latitude and longitude similar

to how you entered waypoint name8 Press the [MENUESC] key to

register the waypoint

Editing waypoints Press the [MENUESC] key to open

the main menu

2 Use or to choose WAYPOINTLIST from page 2 of the menu

3 Press to open the waypoints list4 Use or to choose a waypoint

and press 5 Use or to choose the item to

edit (name latitude or longitude)6 Press to open the data entry

window7 Use or to set character $ or

to choose location8 Press to choose ENT 9 Press the [MENUESC] key

Erasing waypoints Press the [MENUESC] key2 Use or to choose WAYPOINT

LIST from page 2 of the menu3 Press to open the waypoints list

4 Use or to choose the waypointto erase and then press Note You cannot erase a waypointwhich is selected as ldquoGOTO WPTrdquo

5 Press to choose ldquoEraserdquo6 Press to open the options window7 Press to select YES to erase the

waypoint The waypoint list appearswith the erased waypoint blank

8 Press the [MENUESC] key twice toclose the menu

Setting destination waypoint

Set a destination waypoint to find rangebearing and time-to-go to that point Youcan see range and bearing to awaypoint Time-to-go is shown on theTime to Go digital display

Press the [MENUESC] key to openthe main menu

2 Use or to choose GOTO WPTfrom page 2 of the menu

3 Press to open the waypoints list

Off01020304----------------------------------------------------------------

Waypoint list

4 Use or to choose a waypoint5 Press the [MENUESC] key to close

the menu

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 2148

15

116 Setting Up Nav DataDisplays

The user may arrange the nav datadisplays as desired

1 Use the [MODE] key to show theNAV DATA-1 or 2 display whicheveryou want to set up

2 Press the [MENUESC] key to closethe mode selection window

3 Press the cursor pad to display theNAV DATA SETUP window

NAV DATA SETUP

Window Selection Data Selection

[MENU] Exit

NAV DATA SETUP window

4 Use or to choose a datadisplay window desired Adashed-line rectangle circumscribesyour selection

5 Use

or$

to choose item todisplay See the below for adescription of the displays

(9)

(1)

(2)

(3)

(4)(5)

(6)(7)(8)

Two-data

display

Three-data

display

Four-data

displayItems displayable in (1) - (3) depth positioncourse range and bearing trip distanceodometer water temperature headingair pressure time-to-go to destination waypointXTE speed wind speed and directiondestination waypoint data compassItems displayable in (4) - (9) depth positionspeed course range and bearing trip distanceodometer water temperature headingair pressure time-to-go to destination waypointXTE wind speed wind direction

= Graphic display

Nav data window and item displayable6 Press the [MENUESC] key to finish

Note You can choose the number ofitems to show in a nav data display withNAV DATA-1 and NAV DATA-2 on theSystem menu

GRAPHIC DISPLAYS

1 05 0 05 1

Wpt 03Rng 019nm Brg 321 deg XTE 000nm Cse 333 deg

DESTINATION WAYPOINT GRAPHIC

XTEscale

BearingCourseDestinationwaypointdirection

DestinationwaypointdataNameRangeXTE

Wind APP

WIND GRAPHIC

60

120

90

030

150180

120

150

90

60

30

120 deg

Speed 103 ms

COMPASS GRAPHIC

SPEED GRAPHIC

172

Speed

20

50

40

60

30

10

01 05 0 05 1

025 nm

XTE

XTE GRAPHIC

kt

Bearing todestinationwaypoint

Course

Brg30 deg

Cse90 deg

N

E

XTE scale

Speed-ometer

Nav data display-1

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 2248

16

DIGITAL DISPLAYS

Course

123 deg

COURSE

Depth

328 ft

DEPTH

Heading TRUEMAG

318 deg

HEADING

Odometer

56 nm

ODOMETER

Position GPS 3D

30 deg 00065N130 deg 00574E

POSITION

Temperature

698 degF

WATER TEMPERATURE

Trip meter

121 nm

TRIP DISTANCE

Time to Go

00 H30 M

TIME-TO-GO

1018 hpa

AIR PRESSURE

Air Pressure

Speed

193 kt

SPEED

Rng

121 nm

RANGE amp BEARING

Brg

140 deg

Wind Speed APP

80 ms

WIND SPEED

Wind Dir APP

138 deg

WIND DIRECTION

APP or TRUE depending on menu setting TRUE or MAG depending

on menu settingamp To destination waypoint

Note 1 Nav data is updated with somedelay

Note 2 When data is lost 120 sec thedisplay shows - - at the locationwhere data is lost

= GPS receiving status (Displays whenconnecting with GP-310B320B and InOutis selected at the Installation menu)NO FIX Position cannot be foundGPS 2D 2D (dimension) GPS position fixGPS 3D 3D GPS fixGPS W2D 2D WAAS position fixGPS W3D 3D WAAS position fix

NAV data display-2

117 Other Menu ItemsThis section describes the menu itemsnot previously mentioned

Page 1

HUE (Picture Color)

Two picture color arrangements areavailable Day and Night Day showsechoes on a white background Nightshows them on a black background

1 Press the [MENUESC] key todisplay the menu

2 Use or $ to choose HUE frompage 1 of the menu

3 Press to show the optionswindow

4 Use or $ to choose Day or Nightas appropriate

5 Press the [MENUESC] key to closethe menu

WHITE LINE

The white line feature displays theleading edge of the bottom echo in

white This is useful for discriminatingbottom fish near the bottom

1 Press the [MENUESC] key todisplay the main menu

2 Use or $ to choose WHITE LINEfrom page 1 of the menu

3 Press to show the optionswindow

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 2348

17

4 Use or to choose Off Tone orMesh as appropriate ldquoMeshrdquo paintsthe white line in darker tone thanldquoTonerdquo

5 Press the [MENUESC] key to closethe menu

526White Line OFF White Line ON (Mesh)

Fish schoolclearly shown

White line

0

20

40

60

80

050k 11

526

0

20

40

60

80

00 050k 11

How white line works

DEEP GAIN

ldquoDeep Gainrdquo compensates forpropagation attenuation of the ultrasonicwaves It does this by equalizing echopresentation so that fish schools of thesame size appear in the same density inboth shallow and deep waters Inaddition it reduces surface noise

Press the [MENUESC] key to openthe main menu

2 Use or to choose DEEP GAINfrom page of the menu

3 Press $ to show to the optionswindow

4 Choose Low Medium or High asappropriate High provides thegreatest degree of gain reductionagainst short range echoes

5 Press the [MENUESC] key to closethe menu

Page 2

TRIP RESET

This item resets trip distance to ldquo0rdquo

Press the [MENUESC] key to openthe main menu

2 Use or to choose TRIPRESET from page 2 of the menu

3 Press $ 4 Press to reset trip distance

Beeps are generated while the tripdistance is being reset

5 Press the [MENUESC] key to closethe menu

Note To reset the odometer to zeroclear the memory

GAIN ADJ 200 GAIN ADJ 50

If the gain is too high or too low or thegain for the low and high frequenciesappears unbalanced you cancompensate it as follows

Press the [MENUESC] key to openthe main menu

2 Use or to choose GAIN ADJ200 or GAIN ADJ 50 from page 2 ofthe menu

3 Press $ to show to the optionswindow

4 Use or to set the amount Thesetting range is ndash50 to +50

5 Press the [MENUESC] key to close

the menu

DRAFT

The default depth display shows thedistance from the transducer If youwould rather show the distance from thesea surface set your shiprsquos draft asfollows

Press the [MENUESC] key to openthe main menu

2 Use or to choose DRAFT frompage 2 of the menu

3 Press $ and then use or to setdraft The setting range is ndash 50 to+500 (meters feet)

4 Press the [MENUESC] key to closethe menu

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 2448

18

2 SYSTEM MENU

The System menu mainly consists ofitems which once set do not requirefrequent adjustment You may displaythis menu by choosing SYSTEM MENUat page 2 of the main menu andpressing

SYSTEM MENULANGUAGE English

DEPTH UNIT ftSPEED UNIT ktWIND UNIT msTEMP UNIT deg F

TEMP GRAPH OffNAV DATA-1 NAV DATA-2

WATER TYPE SaltKEY BEEP OnBATT VOLTAGE Off (13)

[MENU] Exit

SYSTEM MENU

(23)

NAV DISPLAY TempSpeedNMEA0183 Ver 20TLL OUTPUT OffBEARING TrueWIND SPDDIR ApparentTRIP SOURCE Own

TEMP SOURCE OwnSPEED SOURCE OwnTEMP CALIB +00 deg F ( 40)SPEED CALIB +0 ( 50)

Own speed Own temp 100 kt 162 deg F

[MENU] Exit

SYSTEM MENU

(33)

BASIC RANGE1 15 ft

RANGE2 30RANGE3 60RANGE4 120RANGE5 200RANGE6 400RANGE7 600RANGE8 1000 (7-1500)

ZOOM RANGE 15 ft (7-150)BL RANGE 15 ft (10-30)(Bottom Lock)

ZOOM MARKER On

[MENU] Exit

PAGE 3

PAGE 2

PAGE 1

Page no

System menus

21 System MenuPage 1

LANGUAGE The system language isavailable in English several Europeanlanguages and Japanese To changelanguage select language desired andpress the [MENUESC] key

DEPTH UNIT Choose unit of depthmeasurement from meters feet

fathoms passibraza and hiro(Japanese)

SPEED UNIT Choose unit of speedmeasurement from knots miles perhour and kilometers per hour Requiresspeed data

WIND UNIT Choose unit of wind speedmeasurement from ms kt kmh and

mph Requires wind speed data

TEMP UNIT Choose unit oftemperature measurement Celsius orFahrenheit Requires temperature data

TEMP GRAPH Turns the watertemperature display on or off Thetemperature scale range is 16deg (degF) inldquoNarrowrdquo 40deg (degF) in ldquoWiderdquo Requires

water temperature data

m526

0

20

40

60

80

00 050k 11

40

80

70

50

60

TemperatureScale

TemperatureGraph

638 deg F162kt

Water temperature display (wide degF)

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 2548

19

NAV DATA-1 -2 Choose the number ofnavigation data items to display on thenav data displays from two three orfour items Requires appropriate navdata

WATER TYPE Choose the water typewith which to use the LS-4100 fromSalt or Fresh

KEY BEEP Turn key beep on or off

BATT VOLTAGE Turn the batteryvoltage indication (appears at the topright corner on the screen) on or offWhen on it replaces the picture advancespeed indication

Page 2

NAV DISPLAY Choose the nav data todisplay in the nav data window at thetop left-hand corner You may choosefrom temperaturespeedlatitudelongitude range and bearingcourse over ground trip distance or

wind speed Requires appropriate navdata

407 deg F162kt

Nav window

NMEA0183 Choose NMEA version ofnavigator Ver 15 Ver 20 or Ver 30

TLL OUTPUT Enablesdisables outputof TLL (Target Latitude Longitude)position when the [MARK] key isoperated ldquoTLLrdquo outputs latitude andlongitude position ldquoFURUNO-TLLrdquoavailable with connection of navigatorthat can output FURUNO TLL outputslatitude and longitude watertemperature depth etc

BEARING Shiprsquos course and bearingto a waypoint may be displayed in trueor magnetic bearing Magnetic bearingis true bearing plus (or minus) earthrsquosmagnetic deviation Requires bearingdata

WIND SPDDIR Choose the windspeed and direction reference from trueand apparent Requires wind sensorApparen t The direction (in relation toshiprsquos bow) and speed of the wind as itappears to those on board relative tothe speed and direction of the boatcombination of the true wind and thewind caused by the boats movementTrue The speed and direction (inrelation to shiprsquos bow) of the wind felt ormeasured when stationary

TRIP SOURCE Choose speed sourcefor the trip distance indication Own(transducer with speed sensor orseparate speed sensor) or NMEA

TEMP SOURCE Choose source ofwater temperature input Off Own(transducer with water temperaturesensor or separate temperature sensor)or NMEA

SPEED SOURCE Choose source ofspeed input Off Own (transducer withspeed sensor or separate speedsensor) or NMEA Requires speed

data

TEMP CALIB If the water temperaturesensor-generated water temperatureindication is wrong you can correct ithere when ldquoOwnrdquo is selected astemperature source For example if thewater temperature indication is 2deghigher than actual water temperatureenter -2 The setting range is -40degF to

+40degF

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 2648

20

SPEED CALIB If the speedsensor-generated speed indication iswrong you can correct it here whenldquoOwnrdquo is selected as speed source Forexample if the speed indication is 10lower than actual speed enter +10 Thesetting range is ndash50 to +50

Page 3

BASIC RANGE 1 - BASIC RANGE 8 Set range of each of the eight basicranges (Selectable range 7 to 1500 ft)Note 1 All default basic ranges arerestored whenever the depth unit ischanged Therefore change the depth

unit before changing the basic rangesNote 2 A range may not be lower thanthe range preceding it For example ifbasic range 3 is 60 feet basic range 4must be greater than 60 feet

ZOOM RANGE Choose the range tozoom in the marker-zoom andbottom-zoom modes You may choose arange between 7 and 150 feet (2 and 50

meters)

BL RANGE The expansion width forthe bottom-lock display can be chosenfrom 10 to 30 feet (3 and 10 meters)

ZOOM MARKER The zoom markerappears in the normal bottom markerand bottom zoom displays and marksthe area which is expanded in the

bottom marker and bottom zoompictures You can turn the marker on oroff as desired

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 2748

21

3 MAINTENANCETROUBLESHOOTING

W RNING

ELECTRICAL SHOCK HAZARDDo not open the equipment

Only qualified personnel should workinside the equipment

31 Maintenance

Regular maintenance is essential forgood performance Checking the itemslisted in the table below monthly willhelp keep your equipment in goodshape for years to come

Checking

Item Action

Transducercable

Check cable for damage

Power cabletransducercable plug

Check that they are tightlyfastened Refasten ifnecessary

Display unitground

Check for corrosion Cleanif necessary

Power supplyvoltage

Check voltage If out ofrating correct problem

32 Cleaning the DisplayUnit

Dust or dirt on the display unit can beremoved with a soft cloth If desired awater-moistened cloth may be usedUse special care when cleaning theLCD since it scratches easily Do notuse chemical cleaners to clean thedisplay unit - they can remove paint andmarkings

33 TransducerMaintenance

Marine life on the transducer face willresult in a gradual decrease insensitivity Check the transducer facefor cleanliness each time the boat isdry-docked Carefully remove anymarine life with a piece of wood orfine-grade sandpaper

34 Replacing the FuseThe fuse in the power cable protects thesystem from reverse polarity of thepower supply and equipment fault If thefuse blows find the cause beforereplacing it Use only a 1A fuse (FGMB 1A 125V Code No 000-114-805 ) orequivalent Using the wrong fuse will damage the unit and void the warranty

W RNINGUse the proper fuse

Fuse rating is shown on the equipmentUse of a wrong fuse can result in fire anddamage the equipment

35 Battery Voltage Alert A battery icon appears when the batteryvoltage is too high or too low

Battery icon and meaning

Icon Meaning

Voltage is lower than 10 VDC If thevoltage goes below 9 V the equipmentis automatically turned off

Voltage is higher than 165 VDC If thevoltage goes higher than 175 V theequipment is automatically turned off

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 2848

22

36 TroubleshootingThe table below provides basictroubleshooting procedures which theuser may follow to restore normaloperation

Troubleshooting table

Ifhellip Then check hellipneither echo norfixed range scaleappears

bull battery voltagebull fusebull power cable

no echo appearsbut the fixedrange scaleappears

bull if display advancespeed is set to ldquoStoprdquo

bull transducer plugbull

transducer cableecho appears butno zero line

bull if range shifting is setto ldquo0rdquo

sensitivity is low bull gain settingbull if air bubbles or marine

life is clinging to thetransducer face

bull if sediments arepresent in the water

bull if the bottom is too soft

to return an echothere is extremeinterference ornoise

bull if the transducer is tooclose to the engine

bull if the unit is properlygrounded

bull if other echo soundersof the same frequencyas own are beingoperated nearby

the speedwatertemperaturereadout isunrealistic or notpresent

bull sensor plug

the positionreadout isunrealistic or notpresent

bull the connectionbetween sounder andnavigator

bull navigator

37 DiagnosticsIf you feel your unit is not workingproperly conduct the diagnostic test tofind the problem If you cannot restorenormal operation contact your dealerfor advice

1 Turn on the power while pressing the[MENUESC] key Continue pressingthe [MENUESC] key until theInstallation menu appears

SIMULATION On

TEST LCD PATTERN MEMORY CLEAR

NMEA PORT InOutNMEA MIX Off GPS WAAS Off

SET BOTTOM LEVEL

Installation Menu

= Setting cannot be changed whenNMEA PORT setting is InIn

Installation menu2 Press to choose TEST3 Press to start the test

ROM OKRAM OKNMEA

Temp 682 deg F

Speed 100kmh

Power 124 VBody 39 deg C

Program No 0252318-01Push [MENU] 3 times to exit

Level bar

= Program version no

Water

TemperatureSpeedBattery VoltageTemperatureinside displayunit(Unit fixed atdeg C)

GPS (48502180) OK

Only when GP-310B is connected(For GP-320B 4850238)

Test display

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 2948

23

4 The ROM RAM and NMEA port arechecked with the results shown asOK or NG (No Good) For any NGrequest service (A special connectoris required to test the NMEA portNothing appears if no connector isconnected)

5 The squares at the right side of thetest display are for checking thecontrols Press each key and thearrows on the Cursor Pad one byone A controlrsquos correspondingon-screen square ldquolightsrdquo in black ifthe control is normal

6 To return to the Installation menupress the [MENUESC] key threetimes

7 To restore normal operation turn offthe power and turn it on again

38 Test PatternThis feature tests for proper display oftones

1 On the Installation menu press $ tochoose LCD PATTERN

2 Press to start the test The entirescreen is black

3 Press again and the screen turnswhite

4 Press again and the screenshows a four-toned display

5 Press again to return to theInstallation menu

6 To restore normal operation turn offthe power and then it on again

WHITE FOUR-TONE BLACK

Test patterns

39 Memory ClearThe memory can be cleared to startafresh with default menu settings

1 At the installation menu press $ tochoose MEMORY CLEAR

2 Press to open the optionswindow

YES NO

Clear memory display

3 Press to clear the memory Beepsare generated while the memory isbeing cleared

4 To restore normal operation turn offthe power and then turn it on again

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3048

24

4 INSTALLATION

41 Display UnitMounting considerations

The display unit can be installed on adesktop on the bulkhead or flushmounted in a panel When choosing alocation keep the following in mind

bull Keep the display unit out of directsunlight

bull The temperature and humidity should

be moderate and stablebull Locate the unit away from exhaust

pipes and ventsbull The mounting location should be well

ventilatedbull Mount the unit where shock and

vibration are minimalbull For maintenance and checking

purposes leave sufficient space atthe sides and rear of the unit andleave slack in cables

bull A magnetic compass will be affected ifthe display unit is placed too close toit Observe the following compasssafe distances to prevent disturbanceto the magnetic compassStandard compass 04 metersSteering compass 03 meters

Desktop overhead mounting1 Fix the bracket to a desktop or the

overhead with tapping screws(supplied)

2 Loosely screw knobs into the displayunit

3 Set the display unit to the bracketand then tighten the knobs

Mounting on the bulkhead Flush

mounting in a panelSee the instructions on the bulkhead orflush mounting template (supplied)

42 Thru-hull MountTransducer

Transducer mounting location

The thru-hull mount transducer

(520-5PSD 520-5MSD) provides thebest performance of all since thetransducer protrudes from the hull andthe effect of air bubbles and turbulencenear the hull skin is reduced When theboat has a keel the transducer shouldbe at least 30 cm away from it Typicalthru-hull mountings are shown in thefigure on the next page

The performance of this sounder isdirectly related to the mounting locationof the transducer especially forhigh-speed cruising The installationshould be planned in advance keepingthe standard cable length (8 m) and thefollowing factors in mindbull Air bubbles and turbulence caused by

movement of the boat seriouslydegrade the sounding capability of thetransducer The transducer shouldtherefore be located in a positionwhere water flow is the smoothestNoise from the propellers alsoadversely affects performance andthe transducer should not be mountednearby The lifting strakes arenotorious for creating acoustic noiseand these must be avoided bykeeping the transducer inboard ofthem

bull The transducer must always remain

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3148

25

submerged even when the boat isrolling pitching or up on a plane athigh speed

bull A practical choice would besomewhere between 13 and 12 of

the boatrsquos length from the stern Forplaning hulls a practical location isgenerally rather far astern so that thetransducer is always in waterregardless of the planing attitude

28

22

120

68

30

520-5PSD

24

120

68

87520-5MSD

Unit mm

Thru-hull mount transducer dimensions

Acceptable transducer mounting

locations

Position 12 to 13 of the hull from stern

15 to 30 cm off center line (inside first lifting strakes)

Within the wetted bottom area

Deadrise angle within 15 deg

HIGH SPEED-V HULL

Suitable transducer mounting locations

Typical thru-hull mounttransducer installations

FairingBlock

Flat Washer

Rubber Washer

Hull

Deep-V Hull

Hull

Flat Washer

Rubber Washer

Flat Hull

CorkWasher

Typical thru-hull mounttransducer installations

Procedure for installing thethru-hull mount transducer

1 With the boat hauled out of the watermark the location chosen formounting the transducer on thebottom of the hull

2 If the hull is not level within 15deg inany direction fairing blocks madeout of teak should be used betweenthe transducer and hull both insideand outside to keep the transducerface parallel with the water lineFabricate the fairing block as shownbelow and make the entire surfaceas smooth as possible to provide anundisturbed flow of water around thetransducer The fairing block shouldbe smaller than the transducer itselfto provide a channel to divert

turbulent water around the sides ofthe transducer rather than over itsface

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3248

26

BOWHole for stuffing tube

Upper Half

Lower Half

Saw along slopeof hull Construction of fairing block

3 Drill a hole just large enough to passthe threaded stuffing tube of thetransducer through the hull makingsure it is drilled vertically

4 Apply a sufficient amount of highquality caulking compound to the topsurface of the transducer around thethreads of the stuffing tube andinside the mounting hole (and fairingblocks if used) to ensure watertightmounting

5 Mount the transducer and fairingblocks and tighten the locking nutsBe sure that the transducer is

properly oriented and its workingface is parallel to the waterline

Note Do not over-stress the stuffingtube and locking nuts through excessivetightening since the wood block willswell when the boat is placed in thewater It is suggested that the nut betightened lightly at installation andretightened several days after the boat

has been launched

Transducer preparation

Before putting the boat in water wipethe face of the transducer thoroughlywith a detergent liquid soap This willlessen the time necessary for thetransducer to have good contact withthe water Otherwise the time requiredfor complete ldquosaturationrdquo ill belengthened and performance will bereduced

DO NOT paint the transducerPerformance will be affected

43 Transom MountTransducer

The transom mount transducer is verycommonly employed usually onrelatively small IO or outboard boatsDo not use this method on an inboardmotor boat because turbulence iscreated by the propeller ahead of thetransducer

520-5PWD

There are two methods of installationflush with hull (for flat hulls) andprojecting from hull (for deep V-hulls)

Flat Hull

D

Dgt50 cm

Deep-VHull

520-5PWD mounting locations

Installing the 520-5PWD on a flat hull

A suitable mounting location is at least50 cm away from the engine and wherethe water flow is smooth

1 Drill four pilot holes in the mountinglocation

2 Attach the transducer to the bracketwith 5 x 20 tapping screws(supplied)

3 Adjust the transducer position so thetransducer faces right to the bottom

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3348

27

Note If necessary to improve waterflow and minimize air bubblesstaying on the transducer faceincline the transducer about 5deg at therear This may require a certainamount of experimentation for finetuning at high cruising speeds

4 Fill the gap between the wedge frontof the transducer and transom withepoxy material to eliminate any airspaces

No1 M5 x 14

5 x 20

5 x 20

2 to 5

Tape

Hull

Transom mount transducer

mounting flush with hull

Installing the transom mounttransducer on a deep-V hull

This method is employed on deep-Vhulls and provides good performancebecause the effects of air bubbles areminimal Install the transducer parallelwith water surface not flush with hull Ifthe boat is placed on a trailer care mustbe taken not to damage the transducerwhen the boat is hauled out of the waterand put on the trailer

5 x 20

No 2M5 x 14

5 x 20

Transom mount transducermounted projecting from hull

525-5PWD

Choose the installation methoddepending on the rise angle of the hull

Transom

Transom

Stripe over 10

Parallel with hull

Mount at the stripe

less than 10

525-5PWD mounting location

Installing the 525-5PWD

Referring to ldquoInstalling the 520-5PWDrdquoin the left column for mounting of thebracket and the figure shown on the topof next page install the 525-5PWD tothe transom

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3448

28

2 to 5

Transducer

Bracket

Hull

Epoxy material

525-5PWD mounting

44 Inside-hullTransducer

The thru-hull mount transducer(520-5PSD 520-5MSD) may also beinstalled inside the hull following theprocedure below

Necessary tools

You will need the following toolsbull Sandpaper (100)bull Silicone sealantbull Silicone grease

Remarks on installationbull Turn off the engine and anchor the

boat while installing the equipmentbull Install the transducer in the engine

room

Choosing the mounting locationbull The mounting location should be

where the hull is of single-hullthickness and is void of air or flotationmaterials other than solid fiberglassbetween the transducer face and thewater

bull Do not place the transducer over hullstruts or ribs which run under the hull

bull Avoid a location where the risingangle of the hull exceeds 15deg tominimize the effect of the boatrsquosrolling

bull You will finalize the mounting location

through some trial and error Theprocedure for this is shown later

50 cm

50 cm15 cm15 cm

13

12

Transducer mountinglocation

Centerline

Inside-hull transducer mounting location

Attaching the transducer1 Clean the transducer face to remove

any foreign material Lightly roughenthe transducer face with 100sandpaper Also roughen the insideof the hull where the transducer is tobe mounted

2 Clean the transducer face again3 Warm the silicone sealant to 40degC

before usage to soften it Coat thetransducer face and mountinglocation with silicone sealant

Transducer

SiliconeSealant

Coating transducer facewith silicone sealant

4 Press the transducer firmly down onthe hull and gently twist it back andforth to remove any air which may betrapped in the silicone sealant

Checking the installation

1 Connect the battery to the display

unit2 Turn on the display unit

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3548

29

3 Press the [MODE] key to chooseSINGLE FREQ

4 Choose 50 kHz or 200 kHz and thenpress the [MENUESC] key to closethe mode menu

5 Press the [MENU] to show the mainmenu and then press to select

Auto mode6 Press to choose Off7 Press the [MENUESC] key8 Press the [GAIN] key to set the gain

to ldquo5rdquo and then press the[MENUESC] key

9 Press the [RANGE] key to set therange to 10 meters (feet) and thenpress the [MENUESC] key

10 If the bottom is displayed in darkgray and the depth indicationappears the mounting location issuitable Go to ldquoFinal preparationrdquo

11 If the bottom is not displayed in darkgray tone the mounting location maybe unsuitable Do the followinga) Press the [POWERBRILL] key to

turn off the powerb) Gently dismount the transducer

with a piece of woodc) Reattach the transducer

elsewhere as shown in ldquoAttachingthe transducerrdquo

d) Check the installation again

Final preparation

Support the transducer with a piece ofwood to keep it in place while it is drying

Let the transducer dry 24-72 hours

45 Optional Triducer525ST-MSD

The optional triducer 525ST-MSD isdesigned for thru-hull mounting Forhow to install this transducer seeparagraph 42

φ79 mm

33 mm200-12 UNthreads

φ51 mm

27 mm

7 mm

140 mm Triducer 525ST-MSD

525ST-PWD

The Transom Mount Transducer orTRIDUCER reg Multisensor with IntegralRelease Bracket 525ST-PWD ismanufactured by AIRMAR Co Theseinstructions are also included with the

sensor

Pre-test for speed and temperature

Connect the sensor to the instrumentand spin the paddlewheel Check for aspeed reading and the approximate airtemperature If there is no readingreturn the sensor to your place ofpurchase

Tools and materials needed

ScissorsMasking tapeSafety gogglesDust maskElectric drillDrill bit for

Bracket holes 4mm 23 or 964rdquoFiberglass hull chamfer bit(preferred)6mm or 14rdquo

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3648

30

Transom hole 19mm or 34rdquo(optional)

Cable clamp holes 3mm or 18rdquoScrewdriversStraight edgeMarine sealantPencilZip-tiesWater-based antifouling paint(mandatory in salt water )

Mounting location

To ensure the best performance thesensor must be submerged inaeration-free and turbulence-free water

Mount the sensor close to the centerlineof the boat On slower heavierdisplacement hulls positioning it fartherfrom the centerline is acceptable

Allow adequate space above thebracket for it to release and rotate thesensor upward

Height

Height withoutspeed sensor191mm (7-12)Height withspeed sensor213mm (8-12)

Height required at mounting location

Note 1 Do not mount the sensor in anarea of turbulence or bubbles nearwater intake or discharge openingsbehind strakes struts fittings or hull

irregularities behind eroding paint (anindication of turbulence)Note 2 Avoid mounting the sensorwhere the boat may be supportedduring trailering launching hauling andstorageNote 3 For single drive boat mounton the starboard side at least 75 mm(3rdquo) beyond the swing radius of thepropeller

75 mm(3)

minimum beyondswing radius

Mounting location on single drive boat

Note 4 For twin drive boat mountbetween the drives

Installation of bracket

1 Cut out the installation template

shown on the next page2 At the selected location position thetemplate so the arrow at the bottomis aligned with the bottom edge ofthe transom Being sure the templateis parallel to the waterline tape it inplace

Align template vertically

Deadrise angle

Slope of hullparallel towaterline

Align template arrow withbottom edge of transom

Positioning the template

Warning Always wear safetygoggles and a dust mask

3 Using a 4 mm 23 or 964rdquo bit drillthree holes 22 mm (78rdquo) deepat the locations indicated To preventdrilling too deeply wrap maskingtape around the bit 22 mm (78rdquo)from the pointFiberglass hull Minimize surfacecracking by chamfering the gelcoatIf a chamfer bit or countersink bit is

not available start drilling with a6mm or 14rdquo bit to a depth of 1 mm(116rdquo)

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3748

31

4 If you know your transom angle the

bracket is designed for a standard13deg transom angle11deg-18deg angle No shim is requiredSkip to step 3 in ldquoAdjustingrdquoOther angles The shim is requiredSkip to step 2 of ldquoAdjustingrdquoIf you do not know the transom angletemporarily attach the bracket andsensor to the transom to determine ifthe plastic shim is needed

5 Using the two 10 x 1-14rdquo

self-tapping screws temporarilyscrew the bracket to the hull DONOT tighten the screws completelyat this time Follow the step 1-4 inldquoAttaching the Sensor to the Bracketrdquobefore proceeding with ldquoAdjustingrdquo

Installation templatefor starboard side of boat

Drill at locations labeled Bfor the following transom angles

16 deg through 22 deg

Drill at locations labeled Afor the following transom angles

2 deg through 15 deg

Align arrow with bottom of transom

AA A

BB B

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3848

32

Adjusting

1 Using a straight edge sight theunderside of the sensor relative tothe underside of the hull The sternof the sensor should be 1-3 mm

(116-18rdquo) below the bow of thesensor or parallel to the bottom ofthe hull

11 deg transom angleNO SHIM

12-18 deg transom angleNO SHIM

2 deg -10 deg transom

angle

19 deg -22 deg transom

angleshim withtaper up

shim withtaper down

parallelparallel parallel

slightangle

angletoo steep

anglereversed

YES NONO

YES YESYES

Sensor position and transom angle

Note Do not position the bow of thesensor lower than the stern becauseaeration will occur

2 To adjust the sensorrsquos angle relativeto the hull use the tapered plasticshim provided If the bracket hasbeen temporarily fastened to thetransom remove it Key the shim in

place on the back of the bracket2deg-10deg transom angle (steppedtransom and jet boats) Positionthe shim with the tapered end down19deg-22deg transom angle (smallaluminum and fiberglass boats) Position the shim with the taperedend up

3 If the bracket has been temporarilyfastened to the transom remove it

Apply a marine sealant to thethreads of the two 10 x 1-14rdquo self

tapping screws to prevent waterseeping into the transom Screw thebracket to the hull Do not tighten thescrews completely at this time

4 Repeat step 1 to ensure that theangle of the sensor is correctNote Do not position the sensorfarther into the water than necessaryto avoid increasing drag spray andwater noise and reducing boatspeed

5 Using the vertical adjustment spaceon the bracket slots slide the sensorup or down to provide a projection of3 mm (18rdquo) Tighten the screws

Cable cover

Cableclamp

50 mm (2)

Hull projection 3 mm (18)

Vertical adjustment and cable routing

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3948

33

Attaching the sensor to the bracket

1 If the retaining cover near the top ofthe bracket is closed open it bydepressing the latch and rotating thecover downward

Step 1 Step 2

Latch

Retainingcover

Pivotarm (2)

Slot (2)

Step 4

Step 3

Attaching the sensor to the bracket

2 Insert the sensorrsquos pivot arms intothe slots near the top of the bracket

3 Maintain pressure until the pivotarms click into place

4 Rotate the sensor downward until thebottom snaps into the bracket

5 Close the retaining cover to preventthe accidental release of the sensorwhen the boat is underway

Cable routing

Route the sensor cable over thetransom through a drain hole orthorough a new hole drilled in thetransom above the waterline

Never cut the cable or remote the

connector this will void the warranty Always wear safety goggles and a dustmask

1 If a hole must be drilled choose alocation well above the waterlineCheck for obstructions such as trimtabs pumps or wiring inside the hullMark the location with a pencil Drilla hole through the transom using a19 mm or 34rdquo bit (to accommodatethe connector)

2 Route the cable over or through thetransom

3 On the outside of the hull secure thecable against the transom using thecable clamps Position a cable clamp50 mm(2rdquo) above the bracket andmark the mounting hole with apencil

4 Position the second cable clamphalfway between the first clamp andthe cable hole Mark this mountinghole

5 If a hole has been drilled in thetransom open the appropriate slot inthe transom cable cover Position thecover over the cable where it entersthe hull Mark the two mounting

holes6 At each of the marked locations usea 3 mm or 18rdquo bit to drill a hole 10mm (38rdquo) deep The prevent drillingtoo deeply wrap masking tapearound the bit 10 mm (38rdquo) from thepoint

7 Apply marine sealant to the threadsof the 6 x 12rdquo self-tapping screw toprevent water from seeping into the

transom If you have drilled a holethrough the transom apply marinesealant to the space around thecable where it passes through thetransom

8 Position the two cable clamps andfasten them in place If used pushthe cable cover over the cable andscrew it in place

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4048

34

9 Route the cable to the instrumentbeing careful not to tear the cable

jacket when passing it though thebulkhead(s) and other parts of theboat To reduce electricalinterference separate the sensorcable from other electrical wiring andldquonoiserdquo sources Coil any excesscable and secure it in place withzip-ties to prevent damage

46 Optional WaterTemperatureSpeedSensor

Water temperaturespeed sensorST-02MSB and ST-02PSB which aredesigned for thru-hull mounting areoptionally available Install them asshown below

Mounting considerations

Choose a suitable mounting locationconsidering the followingbull Choose a place free from vibrationbull Choose a mid-boat flat position The

sensor does not have to be installedperfectly perpendicular The sensormust not be damaged in dry-dockingoperation

bull Choose a place apart from equipmentgenerating heat

bull Choose a place in the forwarddirection viewing from the drain holeto allow for circulation of coolingwater

1 Dry-dock the boat2 Make a hole of approx 51 mm

diameter in the mounting location3 Unfasten locknut and remove the

sensor section4 Apply high-grade sealant to the

flange of the sensor5 Pass the sensor casing through thehole

6 Face the notch on the sensor towardboatrsquos bow and tighten the flange

7 Set the sensor section to the sensorcasing and tighten the locknut

8 Launch the boat and check for waterleakage around the sensor

Locknut

Face notchtoward bow

Flange Nut

Coat withsilicone sealant Brim

φ 77

51

123

Water temperaturespeed sensor

ST-02MSB ST-02PSB

47 Wiring

Connect the LS-4100 powerdata cableassy MJ-A7SPF0005-020 (2 msupplied) to the POWER and thetransducer cable to the XDR connectorRefer to the interconnection diagram toconnect cables Leave slack in cables tofacilitate checking and maintenance

Note The fuse holder contains a springwhich fixes the fuse To preventdetachment of the spring which wouldcause loss of power tie the line asshown below

+ line (red)

Fuse holder

Cable tie How to fix fuse holder

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4148

35

Establishing the ground

The ground wire (125 sq or more localsupply) should be as short as possible

The signal line ground is isolated from

the chassis ground however the powerline is not insulated Therefore whenconnecting eternal equipment havingpositive ground do not ground thesignal line to the chassis If excessivenoise shows on the screen the groundmay be inadequate In this case attacha steel plate measuring 20 cm by 30 cmon the outside of the hull to provide aground point Connect the ground wire

there Use a ldquoclosedrdquo type lug ( ) tomake the connection at the display unitDo not use an ldquoopenrdquo type lug ( )

Optional equipment

POWER connector

The power supply port is commonlyused for connection of externalequipment such as a GPS receiver orwind indicator Use the powerdatacable MJ-A7SPF0005-020 (supplied) forconnection referring the figure shown inthe right column

Connector Color Remarks

1 TD-A WHT2 TD-B BLU

IEC-61162-1NMEA0183

3 RD-A YEL

4 RD-B GRN

IEC-61162-1

NMEA01835 + RED

6 - BLKPower input12 VDC

7 FG

Water tempspeed sensor

Connect the optional water tempspeedsensor to the XDR connector with theoptional converter connector (Type02S4147) as shown below

Tape connectors withvulcaninzing tapeand then vinyl tapeto waterproof themBind tape ends withcable ties to preventtape from unraveling

Connect to XDR portat rear of display unit

MJ-A10SPF

MJ-A10SRMDMJ-A6SRMD

Fromtransducer

Fromsensor

Connection of converterconnector 02S4147

48 IEC 61162-1 DataSentences

The tables below show the datasentences which can be input to andoutput from the LS-4100 Thetransmission speed for both input andoutput is 4800 bps Data is output attwo-second intervals

Input data sentences

Sentence Meaning

BWC Bearing and distance towaypoint

GGA Global positioning system(GPS) fix data

GLL Geographic position -latitudelongitude

HDG Heading deviation and variationHDT Heading true

MDA Atmospheric pressure

MTW Water temperature

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4248

36

Input data sentences (conrsquot)

Sentence MeaningMWV Wind speed and

angleRMA Recommended

minimum specificLORAN-C dataRMB Recommended

minimum navigationinformation

RMC Recommendedminimum specificGPSTRANSIT data

VHW Water speed andheading

VTG Course over groundand ground speedXTE Cross track error

Output data sentences

Sentence MeaningDBT (Ver 15) Depth below

transducerDPT (Ver 20 Ver30)

Depth

MTW Water temperatureRMB (Ver 20) Recommended

minimumnavigationinformation

VHW Water speed andheading

TLL Target positionoutput by [MARK]key

= Available with connection of optionalsensorsnavaid

49 Installation MenuThe installation menu mainly containsitems which are set at installation

1 Turn on the power while pressing the[MENUESC] key Continue pressing

the [MENUESC] key until theInstallation menu appears

SIMULATION On

TEST LCD PATTERN MEMORY CLEAR

NMEA PORT InOutNMEA MIX OffGPS WAAS Off

SET BOTTOM LEVEL

Installation Menu

= Setting cannot be changed whenNMEA PORT setting is InIn

Installation menu

SIMULATION The simulation modeprovides without connection of thetransducer simulated operation of theequipment using internally generatedechoes All controls are operative Themessage ldquoSIMrdquo appears at the top rightcorner on the screen when thesimulation mode is active

1 At the installation menu press toopen the simulation mode optionswindow

2 Press to choose ldquoOnrdquo to turn onthe simulation mode

3 Press the [POWERBRILL] keyabout three seconds to turn off thepower

4 Press the [POWERBRILL] key toturn on the power ldquoSIMrdquo appears atthe top right corner of the display

5 To turn off the simulation modeselect Off at step 2

NMEA po r t se tup(NMEA PO RT NMEA M IX)

The POWER port can function as aninput port or inputoutput port Changethe setting to ldquoInInrdquo when connectingGP-310B320B and a wind sensor

When connecting the GP-310B320Band a wind sensor first turn on ldquoGPS

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4348

37

WAASrdquo (in the Installation menu) andthen select ldquoInInrdquo as the NMEA portsetting

1 Turn on the power while pressingand holding down the [MENUESC]key Continue pressing the[MENUESC] key until theInstallation menu appears

2 Choose NMEA PORT and thenpress to display the NMEA portoptions window

3 Use or to choose InOut orInIn as appropriate

InOut Input and Output (default

setting)InIn Input only (Available withconnection of the GP-310B320Band a wind sensor)

4 Press choose NMEA MIX andthen press to display the NMEAMIX options window

5 Use or to choose Off or OnChoose On to output input data

Off Outputs the data sentences ofLS-4100 only

On Outputs the data sentences ofLS-4100 and sentences which areinput from other equipment

6 To restore normal operation turn offthe power and then turn it on again

GPS WAAS Chooses how to use theWAAS signal when connecting with a

WAAS receiver for example GP-320B

Note WAAS is currently in thedevelopmental phase During thedevelopmental phase the reliability andavailability of the WAAS signal cannotbe guaranteed Therefore any positiondata should be verified against othersources to confirm reliability

1 Display the Installation menu2 Choose GPS WAAS and then press

to open the GPS WAAS options

window

Off

WAAS options window3 Press or to choose ldquoWAAS-02rdquo

(test signal) When the systembecomes operational (in 2003) setto ldquo00rdquo (regular WAAS signal)

4 Turn off the power

BOTTOM LEVEL If the depthindication is unstable in automaticoperation or the bottom echo cannot bedisplayed in the darkest gray tone byadjusting the gain controls in manualoperation you may adjust the bottomecho level detection circuit for both 50kHz and 200 kHz to stabilize theindication Generally lower the bottomlevel for inner hull installation where thereceive level is too low If the bottomlevel is too low it may be difficult todiscriminate fish from the bottomresulting in unstable depth indication

And if the bottom level is too high thedepth indication may not appear

1 At the installation menu press tochoose SET BOTTOM LEVEL andthen press Several seconds laterthe following display appears

Bottom level +0 (200k -100 - +100 ) +0 ( 50k -100 - +100 )

Bottom level display

2 While observing the picture use or to set 200 kHz or to set50 kHz Set up for optimum picture

3 To restore normal operation turn offthe power and then it on again

Note The mode must be other thanldquoNAV DATArdquo to show the bottom leveldisplay

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4448

SP - 1 E2371S01C

SPECIFICATIONS OF ECHO SOUNDER LS-4100

1 GENERAL11 TX Frequency 50 kHz or 200 kHz 50200 kHz dual transmitting selectable12 Transmit Method Single or dual transmitting

13 Output Power 300 Wrms14 TX Rate Max 500 pulsemin15 Pulse-length 01 to 08 ms

2 DISPLAY UNIT21 Display system 5-inch monochrome LCD 76 mm (W) x 100 mm (H) 240 x 320 dots22 Display Mode Single frequency (highlow freq) Dual-frequency Zoom Nav data-12

Marker zoom Bottom zoom Bottom-lock23 Display Range

Range SettingRange

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

Display

rangeMeter 5 10 20 40 80 150 200 300 2-500

Feet 15 30 60 120 200 400 600 1000 7-1500

Fathoms 3 5 10 20 40 80 100 150 1-250

PassiBraza 3 5 10 30 50 100 150 200 1-300

24 Range Shift 0-500 m 0-1500 ft 0-250 fa 0-300 pb25 Expansion Range Bottom-lock expansion 3 to 10 m

Sectional expansion 2 to 50 m26 Display Advance Speed 8 steps (LinesTX Freeze 1161814121121 41)

3 INTERFACE31 Input data sentences IEC61162-1NMEA0183 Ver 152030

GGA RMA RMB RMC BWC GLL HDT HDG VTG VHW MTWMWV MDA XTE

32 Output data sentences IEC61162-1NMEA0183 Ver 152030 interval 2 sMTW VHW DBT DPT RMB TLL by key operating External data required

4 POWER SUPPLY41 Display Unit 12 VDC 05 A

5 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITION51 Ambient Temperature Display unit -15degC to +55degC52 Relative Humidity 93 or less at 40degC53 Waterproof IPX5

6 COATING COLOR61 Display Unit N30

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4548

M a r

4

0 3

D-1

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4648

Mar 4 03

Mar 4 03

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4748

M a r

3

0 3

S-1

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4848

FURUNO Authorized DistributorDealer FURUNO Authorized DistributorDealer

9-52 Ashihara-cho9-52 Ashihara-choNishinomiya 662-8580 JAPANNishinomiya 662-8580 JAPAN

Telephone Telephone 0798-65-21110798-65-2111FaxFax 0798-65-42000798-65-4200

FIRST EDITION FIRST EDITION MARMAR 20032003Printed in JapanPrinted in Japan All rights reserved All rights reserved

B1B1 SEPSEP 09 200509 2005

Pub NoPub No OME-23710OME-23710 00014698000000146980000001469800000014698000(( DAMIDAMI )) LS-4100LS-4100

0 0 0 1 4 6 9 8 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 4 6 9 8 0 0 0

Page 20: OME23710B_1_LS4100

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 2048

14

WAYPOINT LIST

01 0102 0303------------------------------------------------------

[MENU] Exit

Waypoint list4 Press or to choose an empty

waypoint and press Press again

NEW WAYPOINTName FREQLat 34 deg 22796NLon 136 deg 07264E

05

[MENU] Exit

04------ ENT

rase

New waypoint window name entry

5 Use or to set character $ or to shift cursor

6 Press to select ENT 7 Enter latitude and longitude similar

to how you entered waypoint name8 Press the [MENUESC] key to

register the waypoint

Editing waypoints Press the [MENUESC] key to open

the main menu

2 Use or to choose WAYPOINTLIST from page 2 of the menu

3 Press to open the waypoints list4 Use or to choose a waypoint

and press 5 Use or to choose the item to

edit (name latitude or longitude)6 Press to open the data entry

window7 Use or to set character $ or

to choose location8 Press to choose ENT 9 Press the [MENUESC] key

Erasing waypoints Press the [MENUESC] key2 Use or to choose WAYPOINT

LIST from page 2 of the menu3 Press to open the waypoints list

4 Use or to choose the waypointto erase and then press Note You cannot erase a waypointwhich is selected as ldquoGOTO WPTrdquo

5 Press to choose ldquoEraserdquo6 Press to open the options window7 Press to select YES to erase the

waypoint The waypoint list appearswith the erased waypoint blank

8 Press the [MENUESC] key twice toclose the menu

Setting destination waypoint

Set a destination waypoint to find rangebearing and time-to-go to that point Youcan see range and bearing to awaypoint Time-to-go is shown on theTime to Go digital display

Press the [MENUESC] key to openthe main menu

2 Use or to choose GOTO WPTfrom page 2 of the menu

3 Press to open the waypoints list

Off01020304----------------------------------------------------------------

Waypoint list

4 Use or to choose a waypoint5 Press the [MENUESC] key to close

the menu

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 2148

15

116 Setting Up Nav DataDisplays

The user may arrange the nav datadisplays as desired

1 Use the [MODE] key to show theNAV DATA-1 or 2 display whicheveryou want to set up

2 Press the [MENUESC] key to closethe mode selection window

3 Press the cursor pad to display theNAV DATA SETUP window

NAV DATA SETUP

Window Selection Data Selection

[MENU] Exit

NAV DATA SETUP window

4 Use or to choose a datadisplay window desired Adashed-line rectangle circumscribesyour selection

5 Use

or$

to choose item todisplay See the below for adescription of the displays

(9)

(1)

(2)

(3)

(4)(5)

(6)(7)(8)

Two-data

display

Three-data

display

Four-data

displayItems displayable in (1) - (3) depth positioncourse range and bearing trip distanceodometer water temperature headingair pressure time-to-go to destination waypointXTE speed wind speed and directiondestination waypoint data compassItems displayable in (4) - (9) depth positionspeed course range and bearing trip distanceodometer water temperature headingair pressure time-to-go to destination waypointXTE wind speed wind direction

= Graphic display

Nav data window and item displayable6 Press the [MENUESC] key to finish

Note You can choose the number ofitems to show in a nav data display withNAV DATA-1 and NAV DATA-2 on theSystem menu

GRAPHIC DISPLAYS

1 05 0 05 1

Wpt 03Rng 019nm Brg 321 deg XTE 000nm Cse 333 deg

DESTINATION WAYPOINT GRAPHIC

XTEscale

BearingCourseDestinationwaypointdirection

DestinationwaypointdataNameRangeXTE

Wind APP

WIND GRAPHIC

60

120

90

030

150180

120

150

90

60

30

120 deg

Speed 103 ms

COMPASS GRAPHIC

SPEED GRAPHIC

172

Speed

20

50

40

60

30

10

01 05 0 05 1

025 nm

XTE

XTE GRAPHIC

kt

Bearing todestinationwaypoint

Course

Brg30 deg

Cse90 deg

N

E

XTE scale

Speed-ometer

Nav data display-1

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 2248

16

DIGITAL DISPLAYS

Course

123 deg

COURSE

Depth

328 ft

DEPTH

Heading TRUEMAG

318 deg

HEADING

Odometer

56 nm

ODOMETER

Position GPS 3D

30 deg 00065N130 deg 00574E

POSITION

Temperature

698 degF

WATER TEMPERATURE

Trip meter

121 nm

TRIP DISTANCE

Time to Go

00 H30 M

TIME-TO-GO

1018 hpa

AIR PRESSURE

Air Pressure

Speed

193 kt

SPEED

Rng

121 nm

RANGE amp BEARING

Brg

140 deg

Wind Speed APP

80 ms

WIND SPEED

Wind Dir APP

138 deg

WIND DIRECTION

APP or TRUE depending on menu setting TRUE or MAG depending

on menu settingamp To destination waypoint

Note 1 Nav data is updated with somedelay

Note 2 When data is lost 120 sec thedisplay shows - - at the locationwhere data is lost

= GPS receiving status (Displays whenconnecting with GP-310B320B and InOutis selected at the Installation menu)NO FIX Position cannot be foundGPS 2D 2D (dimension) GPS position fixGPS 3D 3D GPS fixGPS W2D 2D WAAS position fixGPS W3D 3D WAAS position fix

NAV data display-2

117 Other Menu ItemsThis section describes the menu itemsnot previously mentioned

Page 1

HUE (Picture Color)

Two picture color arrangements areavailable Day and Night Day showsechoes on a white background Nightshows them on a black background

1 Press the [MENUESC] key todisplay the menu

2 Use or $ to choose HUE frompage 1 of the menu

3 Press to show the optionswindow

4 Use or $ to choose Day or Nightas appropriate

5 Press the [MENUESC] key to closethe menu

WHITE LINE

The white line feature displays theleading edge of the bottom echo in

white This is useful for discriminatingbottom fish near the bottom

1 Press the [MENUESC] key todisplay the main menu

2 Use or $ to choose WHITE LINEfrom page 1 of the menu

3 Press to show the optionswindow

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 2348

17

4 Use or to choose Off Tone orMesh as appropriate ldquoMeshrdquo paintsthe white line in darker tone thanldquoTonerdquo

5 Press the [MENUESC] key to closethe menu

526White Line OFF White Line ON (Mesh)

Fish schoolclearly shown

White line

0

20

40

60

80

050k 11

526

0

20

40

60

80

00 050k 11

How white line works

DEEP GAIN

ldquoDeep Gainrdquo compensates forpropagation attenuation of the ultrasonicwaves It does this by equalizing echopresentation so that fish schools of thesame size appear in the same density inboth shallow and deep waters Inaddition it reduces surface noise

Press the [MENUESC] key to openthe main menu

2 Use or to choose DEEP GAINfrom page of the menu

3 Press $ to show to the optionswindow

4 Choose Low Medium or High asappropriate High provides thegreatest degree of gain reductionagainst short range echoes

5 Press the [MENUESC] key to closethe menu

Page 2

TRIP RESET

This item resets trip distance to ldquo0rdquo

Press the [MENUESC] key to openthe main menu

2 Use or to choose TRIPRESET from page 2 of the menu

3 Press $ 4 Press to reset trip distance

Beeps are generated while the tripdistance is being reset

5 Press the [MENUESC] key to closethe menu

Note To reset the odometer to zeroclear the memory

GAIN ADJ 200 GAIN ADJ 50

If the gain is too high or too low or thegain for the low and high frequenciesappears unbalanced you cancompensate it as follows

Press the [MENUESC] key to openthe main menu

2 Use or to choose GAIN ADJ200 or GAIN ADJ 50 from page 2 ofthe menu

3 Press $ to show to the optionswindow

4 Use or to set the amount Thesetting range is ndash50 to +50

5 Press the [MENUESC] key to close

the menu

DRAFT

The default depth display shows thedistance from the transducer If youwould rather show the distance from thesea surface set your shiprsquos draft asfollows

Press the [MENUESC] key to openthe main menu

2 Use or to choose DRAFT frompage 2 of the menu

3 Press $ and then use or to setdraft The setting range is ndash 50 to+500 (meters feet)

4 Press the [MENUESC] key to closethe menu

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 2448

18

2 SYSTEM MENU

The System menu mainly consists ofitems which once set do not requirefrequent adjustment You may displaythis menu by choosing SYSTEM MENUat page 2 of the main menu andpressing

SYSTEM MENULANGUAGE English

DEPTH UNIT ftSPEED UNIT ktWIND UNIT msTEMP UNIT deg F

TEMP GRAPH OffNAV DATA-1 NAV DATA-2

WATER TYPE SaltKEY BEEP OnBATT VOLTAGE Off (13)

[MENU] Exit

SYSTEM MENU

(23)

NAV DISPLAY TempSpeedNMEA0183 Ver 20TLL OUTPUT OffBEARING TrueWIND SPDDIR ApparentTRIP SOURCE Own

TEMP SOURCE OwnSPEED SOURCE OwnTEMP CALIB +00 deg F ( 40)SPEED CALIB +0 ( 50)

Own speed Own temp 100 kt 162 deg F

[MENU] Exit

SYSTEM MENU

(33)

BASIC RANGE1 15 ft

RANGE2 30RANGE3 60RANGE4 120RANGE5 200RANGE6 400RANGE7 600RANGE8 1000 (7-1500)

ZOOM RANGE 15 ft (7-150)BL RANGE 15 ft (10-30)(Bottom Lock)

ZOOM MARKER On

[MENU] Exit

PAGE 3

PAGE 2

PAGE 1

Page no

System menus

21 System MenuPage 1

LANGUAGE The system language isavailable in English several Europeanlanguages and Japanese To changelanguage select language desired andpress the [MENUESC] key

DEPTH UNIT Choose unit of depthmeasurement from meters feet

fathoms passibraza and hiro(Japanese)

SPEED UNIT Choose unit of speedmeasurement from knots miles perhour and kilometers per hour Requiresspeed data

WIND UNIT Choose unit of wind speedmeasurement from ms kt kmh and

mph Requires wind speed data

TEMP UNIT Choose unit oftemperature measurement Celsius orFahrenheit Requires temperature data

TEMP GRAPH Turns the watertemperature display on or off Thetemperature scale range is 16deg (degF) inldquoNarrowrdquo 40deg (degF) in ldquoWiderdquo Requires

water temperature data

m526

0

20

40

60

80

00 050k 11

40

80

70

50

60

TemperatureScale

TemperatureGraph

638 deg F162kt

Water temperature display (wide degF)

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 2548

19

NAV DATA-1 -2 Choose the number ofnavigation data items to display on thenav data displays from two three orfour items Requires appropriate navdata

WATER TYPE Choose the water typewith which to use the LS-4100 fromSalt or Fresh

KEY BEEP Turn key beep on or off

BATT VOLTAGE Turn the batteryvoltage indication (appears at the topright corner on the screen) on or offWhen on it replaces the picture advancespeed indication

Page 2

NAV DISPLAY Choose the nav data todisplay in the nav data window at thetop left-hand corner You may choosefrom temperaturespeedlatitudelongitude range and bearingcourse over ground trip distance or

wind speed Requires appropriate navdata

407 deg F162kt

Nav window

NMEA0183 Choose NMEA version ofnavigator Ver 15 Ver 20 or Ver 30

TLL OUTPUT Enablesdisables outputof TLL (Target Latitude Longitude)position when the [MARK] key isoperated ldquoTLLrdquo outputs latitude andlongitude position ldquoFURUNO-TLLrdquoavailable with connection of navigatorthat can output FURUNO TLL outputslatitude and longitude watertemperature depth etc

BEARING Shiprsquos course and bearingto a waypoint may be displayed in trueor magnetic bearing Magnetic bearingis true bearing plus (or minus) earthrsquosmagnetic deviation Requires bearingdata

WIND SPDDIR Choose the windspeed and direction reference from trueand apparent Requires wind sensorApparen t The direction (in relation toshiprsquos bow) and speed of the wind as itappears to those on board relative tothe speed and direction of the boatcombination of the true wind and thewind caused by the boats movementTrue The speed and direction (inrelation to shiprsquos bow) of the wind felt ormeasured when stationary

TRIP SOURCE Choose speed sourcefor the trip distance indication Own(transducer with speed sensor orseparate speed sensor) or NMEA

TEMP SOURCE Choose source ofwater temperature input Off Own(transducer with water temperaturesensor or separate temperature sensor)or NMEA

SPEED SOURCE Choose source ofspeed input Off Own (transducer withspeed sensor or separate speedsensor) or NMEA Requires speed

data

TEMP CALIB If the water temperaturesensor-generated water temperatureindication is wrong you can correct ithere when ldquoOwnrdquo is selected astemperature source For example if thewater temperature indication is 2deghigher than actual water temperatureenter -2 The setting range is -40degF to

+40degF

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 2648

20

SPEED CALIB If the speedsensor-generated speed indication iswrong you can correct it here whenldquoOwnrdquo is selected as speed source Forexample if the speed indication is 10lower than actual speed enter +10 Thesetting range is ndash50 to +50

Page 3

BASIC RANGE 1 - BASIC RANGE 8 Set range of each of the eight basicranges (Selectable range 7 to 1500 ft)Note 1 All default basic ranges arerestored whenever the depth unit ischanged Therefore change the depth

unit before changing the basic rangesNote 2 A range may not be lower thanthe range preceding it For example ifbasic range 3 is 60 feet basic range 4must be greater than 60 feet

ZOOM RANGE Choose the range tozoom in the marker-zoom andbottom-zoom modes You may choose arange between 7 and 150 feet (2 and 50

meters)

BL RANGE The expansion width forthe bottom-lock display can be chosenfrom 10 to 30 feet (3 and 10 meters)

ZOOM MARKER The zoom markerappears in the normal bottom markerand bottom zoom displays and marksthe area which is expanded in the

bottom marker and bottom zoompictures You can turn the marker on oroff as desired

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 2748

21

3 MAINTENANCETROUBLESHOOTING

W RNING

ELECTRICAL SHOCK HAZARDDo not open the equipment

Only qualified personnel should workinside the equipment

31 Maintenance

Regular maintenance is essential forgood performance Checking the itemslisted in the table below monthly willhelp keep your equipment in goodshape for years to come

Checking

Item Action

Transducercable

Check cable for damage

Power cabletransducercable plug

Check that they are tightlyfastened Refasten ifnecessary

Display unitground

Check for corrosion Cleanif necessary

Power supplyvoltage

Check voltage If out ofrating correct problem

32 Cleaning the DisplayUnit

Dust or dirt on the display unit can beremoved with a soft cloth If desired awater-moistened cloth may be usedUse special care when cleaning theLCD since it scratches easily Do notuse chemical cleaners to clean thedisplay unit - they can remove paint andmarkings

33 TransducerMaintenance

Marine life on the transducer face willresult in a gradual decrease insensitivity Check the transducer facefor cleanliness each time the boat isdry-docked Carefully remove anymarine life with a piece of wood orfine-grade sandpaper

34 Replacing the FuseThe fuse in the power cable protects thesystem from reverse polarity of thepower supply and equipment fault If thefuse blows find the cause beforereplacing it Use only a 1A fuse (FGMB 1A 125V Code No 000-114-805 ) orequivalent Using the wrong fuse will damage the unit and void the warranty

W RNINGUse the proper fuse

Fuse rating is shown on the equipmentUse of a wrong fuse can result in fire anddamage the equipment

35 Battery Voltage Alert A battery icon appears when the batteryvoltage is too high or too low

Battery icon and meaning

Icon Meaning

Voltage is lower than 10 VDC If thevoltage goes below 9 V the equipmentis automatically turned off

Voltage is higher than 165 VDC If thevoltage goes higher than 175 V theequipment is automatically turned off

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 2848

22

36 TroubleshootingThe table below provides basictroubleshooting procedures which theuser may follow to restore normaloperation

Troubleshooting table

Ifhellip Then check hellipneither echo norfixed range scaleappears

bull battery voltagebull fusebull power cable

no echo appearsbut the fixedrange scaleappears

bull if display advancespeed is set to ldquoStoprdquo

bull transducer plugbull

transducer cableecho appears butno zero line

bull if range shifting is setto ldquo0rdquo

sensitivity is low bull gain settingbull if air bubbles or marine

life is clinging to thetransducer face

bull if sediments arepresent in the water

bull if the bottom is too soft

to return an echothere is extremeinterference ornoise

bull if the transducer is tooclose to the engine

bull if the unit is properlygrounded

bull if other echo soundersof the same frequencyas own are beingoperated nearby

the speedwatertemperaturereadout isunrealistic or notpresent

bull sensor plug

the positionreadout isunrealistic or notpresent

bull the connectionbetween sounder andnavigator

bull navigator

37 DiagnosticsIf you feel your unit is not workingproperly conduct the diagnostic test tofind the problem If you cannot restorenormal operation contact your dealerfor advice

1 Turn on the power while pressing the[MENUESC] key Continue pressingthe [MENUESC] key until theInstallation menu appears

SIMULATION On

TEST LCD PATTERN MEMORY CLEAR

NMEA PORT InOutNMEA MIX Off GPS WAAS Off

SET BOTTOM LEVEL

Installation Menu

= Setting cannot be changed whenNMEA PORT setting is InIn

Installation menu2 Press to choose TEST3 Press to start the test

ROM OKRAM OKNMEA

Temp 682 deg F

Speed 100kmh

Power 124 VBody 39 deg C

Program No 0252318-01Push [MENU] 3 times to exit

Level bar

= Program version no

Water

TemperatureSpeedBattery VoltageTemperatureinside displayunit(Unit fixed atdeg C)

GPS (48502180) OK

Only when GP-310B is connected(For GP-320B 4850238)

Test display

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 2948

23

4 The ROM RAM and NMEA port arechecked with the results shown asOK or NG (No Good) For any NGrequest service (A special connectoris required to test the NMEA portNothing appears if no connector isconnected)

5 The squares at the right side of thetest display are for checking thecontrols Press each key and thearrows on the Cursor Pad one byone A controlrsquos correspondingon-screen square ldquolightsrdquo in black ifthe control is normal

6 To return to the Installation menupress the [MENUESC] key threetimes

7 To restore normal operation turn offthe power and turn it on again

38 Test PatternThis feature tests for proper display oftones

1 On the Installation menu press $ tochoose LCD PATTERN

2 Press to start the test The entirescreen is black

3 Press again and the screen turnswhite

4 Press again and the screenshows a four-toned display

5 Press again to return to theInstallation menu

6 To restore normal operation turn offthe power and then it on again

WHITE FOUR-TONE BLACK

Test patterns

39 Memory ClearThe memory can be cleared to startafresh with default menu settings

1 At the installation menu press $ tochoose MEMORY CLEAR

2 Press to open the optionswindow

YES NO

Clear memory display

3 Press to clear the memory Beepsare generated while the memory isbeing cleared

4 To restore normal operation turn offthe power and then turn it on again

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3048

24

4 INSTALLATION

41 Display UnitMounting considerations

The display unit can be installed on adesktop on the bulkhead or flushmounted in a panel When choosing alocation keep the following in mind

bull Keep the display unit out of directsunlight

bull The temperature and humidity should

be moderate and stablebull Locate the unit away from exhaust

pipes and ventsbull The mounting location should be well

ventilatedbull Mount the unit where shock and

vibration are minimalbull For maintenance and checking

purposes leave sufficient space atthe sides and rear of the unit andleave slack in cables

bull A magnetic compass will be affected ifthe display unit is placed too close toit Observe the following compasssafe distances to prevent disturbanceto the magnetic compassStandard compass 04 metersSteering compass 03 meters

Desktop overhead mounting1 Fix the bracket to a desktop or the

overhead with tapping screws(supplied)

2 Loosely screw knobs into the displayunit

3 Set the display unit to the bracketand then tighten the knobs

Mounting on the bulkhead Flush

mounting in a panelSee the instructions on the bulkhead orflush mounting template (supplied)

42 Thru-hull MountTransducer

Transducer mounting location

The thru-hull mount transducer

(520-5PSD 520-5MSD) provides thebest performance of all since thetransducer protrudes from the hull andthe effect of air bubbles and turbulencenear the hull skin is reduced When theboat has a keel the transducer shouldbe at least 30 cm away from it Typicalthru-hull mountings are shown in thefigure on the next page

The performance of this sounder isdirectly related to the mounting locationof the transducer especially forhigh-speed cruising The installationshould be planned in advance keepingthe standard cable length (8 m) and thefollowing factors in mindbull Air bubbles and turbulence caused by

movement of the boat seriouslydegrade the sounding capability of thetransducer The transducer shouldtherefore be located in a positionwhere water flow is the smoothestNoise from the propellers alsoadversely affects performance andthe transducer should not be mountednearby The lifting strakes arenotorious for creating acoustic noiseand these must be avoided bykeeping the transducer inboard ofthem

bull The transducer must always remain

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3148

25

submerged even when the boat isrolling pitching or up on a plane athigh speed

bull A practical choice would besomewhere between 13 and 12 of

the boatrsquos length from the stern Forplaning hulls a practical location isgenerally rather far astern so that thetransducer is always in waterregardless of the planing attitude

28

22

120

68

30

520-5PSD

24

120

68

87520-5MSD

Unit mm

Thru-hull mount transducer dimensions

Acceptable transducer mounting

locations

Position 12 to 13 of the hull from stern

15 to 30 cm off center line (inside first lifting strakes)

Within the wetted bottom area

Deadrise angle within 15 deg

HIGH SPEED-V HULL

Suitable transducer mounting locations

Typical thru-hull mounttransducer installations

FairingBlock

Flat Washer

Rubber Washer

Hull

Deep-V Hull

Hull

Flat Washer

Rubber Washer

Flat Hull

CorkWasher

Typical thru-hull mounttransducer installations

Procedure for installing thethru-hull mount transducer

1 With the boat hauled out of the watermark the location chosen formounting the transducer on thebottom of the hull

2 If the hull is not level within 15deg inany direction fairing blocks madeout of teak should be used betweenthe transducer and hull both insideand outside to keep the transducerface parallel with the water lineFabricate the fairing block as shownbelow and make the entire surfaceas smooth as possible to provide anundisturbed flow of water around thetransducer The fairing block shouldbe smaller than the transducer itselfto provide a channel to divert

turbulent water around the sides ofthe transducer rather than over itsface

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3248

26

BOWHole for stuffing tube

Upper Half

Lower Half

Saw along slopeof hull Construction of fairing block

3 Drill a hole just large enough to passthe threaded stuffing tube of thetransducer through the hull makingsure it is drilled vertically

4 Apply a sufficient amount of highquality caulking compound to the topsurface of the transducer around thethreads of the stuffing tube andinside the mounting hole (and fairingblocks if used) to ensure watertightmounting

5 Mount the transducer and fairingblocks and tighten the locking nutsBe sure that the transducer is

properly oriented and its workingface is parallel to the waterline

Note Do not over-stress the stuffingtube and locking nuts through excessivetightening since the wood block willswell when the boat is placed in thewater It is suggested that the nut betightened lightly at installation andretightened several days after the boat

has been launched

Transducer preparation

Before putting the boat in water wipethe face of the transducer thoroughlywith a detergent liquid soap This willlessen the time necessary for thetransducer to have good contact withthe water Otherwise the time requiredfor complete ldquosaturationrdquo ill belengthened and performance will bereduced

DO NOT paint the transducerPerformance will be affected

43 Transom MountTransducer

The transom mount transducer is verycommonly employed usually onrelatively small IO or outboard boatsDo not use this method on an inboardmotor boat because turbulence iscreated by the propeller ahead of thetransducer

520-5PWD

There are two methods of installationflush with hull (for flat hulls) andprojecting from hull (for deep V-hulls)

Flat Hull

D

Dgt50 cm

Deep-VHull

520-5PWD mounting locations

Installing the 520-5PWD on a flat hull

A suitable mounting location is at least50 cm away from the engine and wherethe water flow is smooth

1 Drill four pilot holes in the mountinglocation

2 Attach the transducer to the bracketwith 5 x 20 tapping screws(supplied)

3 Adjust the transducer position so thetransducer faces right to the bottom

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3348

27

Note If necessary to improve waterflow and minimize air bubblesstaying on the transducer faceincline the transducer about 5deg at therear This may require a certainamount of experimentation for finetuning at high cruising speeds

4 Fill the gap between the wedge frontof the transducer and transom withepoxy material to eliminate any airspaces

No1 M5 x 14

5 x 20

5 x 20

2 to 5

Tape

Hull

Transom mount transducer

mounting flush with hull

Installing the transom mounttransducer on a deep-V hull

This method is employed on deep-Vhulls and provides good performancebecause the effects of air bubbles areminimal Install the transducer parallelwith water surface not flush with hull Ifthe boat is placed on a trailer care mustbe taken not to damage the transducerwhen the boat is hauled out of the waterand put on the trailer

5 x 20

No 2M5 x 14

5 x 20

Transom mount transducermounted projecting from hull

525-5PWD

Choose the installation methoddepending on the rise angle of the hull

Transom

Transom

Stripe over 10

Parallel with hull

Mount at the stripe

less than 10

525-5PWD mounting location

Installing the 525-5PWD

Referring to ldquoInstalling the 520-5PWDrdquoin the left column for mounting of thebracket and the figure shown on the topof next page install the 525-5PWD tothe transom

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3448

28

2 to 5

Transducer

Bracket

Hull

Epoxy material

525-5PWD mounting

44 Inside-hullTransducer

The thru-hull mount transducer(520-5PSD 520-5MSD) may also beinstalled inside the hull following theprocedure below

Necessary tools

You will need the following toolsbull Sandpaper (100)bull Silicone sealantbull Silicone grease

Remarks on installationbull Turn off the engine and anchor the

boat while installing the equipmentbull Install the transducer in the engine

room

Choosing the mounting locationbull The mounting location should be

where the hull is of single-hullthickness and is void of air or flotationmaterials other than solid fiberglassbetween the transducer face and thewater

bull Do not place the transducer over hullstruts or ribs which run under the hull

bull Avoid a location where the risingangle of the hull exceeds 15deg tominimize the effect of the boatrsquosrolling

bull You will finalize the mounting location

through some trial and error Theprocedure for this is shown later

50 cm

50 cm15 cm15 cm

13

12

Transducer mountinglocation

Centerline

Inside-hull transducer mounting location

Attaching the transducer1 Clean the transducer face to remove

any foreign material Lightly roughenthe transducer face with 100sandpaper Also roughen the insideof the hull where the transducer is tobe mounted

2 Clean the transducer face again3 Warm the silicone sealant to 40degC

before usage to soften it Coat thetransducer face and mountinglocation with silicone sealant

Transducer

SiliconeSealant

Coating transducer facewith silicone sealant

4 Press the transducer firmly down onthe hull and gently twist it back andforth to remove any air which may betrapped in the silicone sealant

Checking the installation

1 Connect the battery to the display

unit2 Turn on the display unit

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3548

29

3 Press the [MODE] key to chooseSINGLE FREQ

4 Choose 50 kHz or 200 kHz and thenpress the [MENUESC] key to closethe mode menu

5 Press the [MENU] to show the mainmenu and then press to select

Auto mode6 Press to choose Off7 Press the [MENUESC] key8 Press the [GAIN] key to set the gain

to ldquo5rdquo and then press the[MENUESC] key

9 Press the [RANGE] key to set therange to 10 meters (feet) and thenpress the [MENUESC] key

10 If the bottom is displayed in darkgray and the depth indicationappears the mounting location issuitable Go to ldquoFinal preparationrdquo

11 If the bottom is not displayed in darkgray tone the mounting location maybe unsuitable Do the followinga) Press the [POWERBRILL] key to

turn off the powerb) Gently dismount the transducer

with a piece of woodc) Reattach the transducer

elsewhere as shown in ldquoAttachingthe transducerrdquo

d) Check the installation again

Final preparation

Support the transducer with a piece ofwood to keep it in place while it is drying

Let the transducer dry 24-72 hours

45 Optional Triducer525ST-MSD

The optional triducer 525ST-MSD isdesigned for thru-hull mounting Forhow to install this transducer seeparagraph 42

φ79 mm

33 mm200-12 UNthreads

φ51 mm

27 mm

7 mm

140 mm Triducer 525ST-MSD

525ST-PWD

The Transom Mount Transducer orTRIDUCER reg Multisensor with IntegralRelease Bracket 525ST-PWD ismanufactured by AIRMAR Co Theseinstructions are also included with the

sensor

Pre-test for speed and temperature

Connect the sensor to the instrumentand spin the paddlewheel Check for aspeed reading and the approximate airtemperature If there is no readingreturn the sensor to your place ofpurchase

Tools and materials needed

ScissorsMasking tapeSafety gogglesDust maskElectric drillDrill bit for

Bracket holes 4mm 23 or 964rdquoFiberglass hull chamfer bit(preferred)6mm or 14rdquo

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3648

30

Transom hole 19mm or 34rdquo(optional)

Cable clamp holes 3mm or 18rdquoScrewdriversStraight edgeMarine sealantPencilZip-tiesWater-based antifouling paint(mandatory in salt water )

Mounting location

To ensure the best performance thesensor must be submerged inaeration-free and turbulence-free water

Mount the sensor close to the centerlineof the boat On slower heavierdisplacement hulls positioning it fartherfrom the centerline is acceptable

Allow adequate space above thebracket for it to release and rotate thesensor upward

Height

Height withoutspeed sensor191mm (7-12)Height withspeed sensor213mm (8-12)

Height required at mounting location

Note 1 Do not mount the sensor in anarea of turbulence or bubbles nearwater intake or discharge openingsbehind strakes struts fittings or hull

irregularities behind eroding paint (anindication of turbulence)Note 2 Avoid mounting the sensorwhere the boat may be supportedduring trailering launching hauling andstorageNote 3 For single drive boat mounton the starboard side at least 75 mm(3rdquo) beyond the swing radius of thepropeller

75 mm(3)

minimum beyondswing radius

Mounting location on single drive boat

Note 4 For twin drive boat mountbetween the drives

Installation of bracket

1 Cut out the installation template

shown on the next page2 At the selected location position thetemplate so the arrow at the bottomis aligned with the bottom edge ofthe transom Being sure the templateis parallel to the waterline tape it inplace

Align template vertically

Deadrise angle

Slope of hullparallel towaterline

Align template arrow withbottom edge of transom

Positioning the template

Warning Always wear safetygoggles and a dust mask

3 Using a 4 mm 23 or 964rdquo bit drillthree holes 22 mm (78rdquo) deepat the locations indicated To preventdrilling too deeply wrap maskingtape around the bit 22 mm (78rdquo)from the pointFiberglass hull Minimize surfacecracking by chamfering the gelcoatIf a chamfer bit or countersink bit is

not available start drilling with a6mm or 14rdquo bit to a depth of 1 mm(116rdquo)

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3748

31

4 If you know your transom angle the

bracket is designed for a standard13deg transom angle11deg-18deg angle No shim is requiredSkip to step 3 in ldquoAdjustingrdquoOther angles The shim is requiredSkip to step 2 of ldquoAdjustingrdquoIf you do not know the transom angletemporarily attach the bracket andsensor to the transom to determine ifthe plastic shim is needed

5 Using the two 10 x 1-14rdquo

self-tapping screws temporarilyscrew the bracket to the hull DONOT tighten the screws completelyat this time Follow the step 1-4 inldquoAttaching the Sensor to the Bracketrdquobefore proceeding with ldquoAdjustingrdquo

Installation templatefor starboard side of boat

Drill at locations labeled Bfor the following transom angles

16 deg through 22 deg

Drill at locations labeled Afor the following transom angles

2 deg through 15 deg

Align arrow with bottom of transom

AA A

BB B

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3848

32

Adjusting

1 Using a straight edge sight theunderside of the sensor relative tothe underside of the hull The sternof the sensor should be 1-3 mm

(116-18rdquo) below the bow of thesensor or parallel to the bottom ofthe hull

11 deg transom angleNO SHIM

12-18 deg transom angleNO SHIM

2 deg -10 deg transom

angle

19 deg -22 deg transom

angleshim withtaper up

shim withtaper down

parallelparallel parallel

slightangle

angletoo steep

anglereversed

YES NONO

YES YESYES

Sensor position and transom angle

Note Do not position the bow of thesensor lower than the stern becauseaeration will occur

2 To adjust the sensorrsquos angle relativeto the hull use the tapered plasticshim provided If the bracket hasbeen temporarily fastened to thetransom remove it Key the shim in

place on the back of the bracket2deg-10deg transom angle (steppedtransom and jet boats) Positionthe shim with the tapered end down19deg-22deg transom angle (smallaluminum and fiberglass boats) Position the shim with the taperedend up

3 If the bracket has been temporarilyfastened to the transom remove it

Apply a marine sealant to thethreads of the two 10 x 1-14rdquo self

tapping screws to prevent waterseeping into the transom Screw thebracket to the hull Do not tighten thescrews completely at this time

4 Repeat step 1 to ensure that theangle of the sensor is correctNote Do not position the sensorfarther into the water than necessaryto avoid increasing drag spray andwater noise and reducing boatspeed

5 Using the vertical adjustment spaceon the bracket slots slide the sensorup or down to provide a projection of3 mm (18rdquo) Tighten the screws

Cable cover

Cableclamp

50 mm (2)

Hull projection 3 mm (18)

Vertical adjustment and cable routing

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3948

33

Attaching the sensor to the bracket

1 If the retaining cover near the top ofthe bracket is closed open it bydepressing the latch and rotating thecover downward

Step 1 Step 2

Latch

Retainingcover

Pivotarm (2)

Slot (2)

Step 4

Step 3

Attaching the sensor to the bracket

2 Insert the sensorrsquos pivot arms intothe slots near the top of the bracket

3 Maintain pressure until the pivotarms click into place

4 Rotate the sensor downward until thebottom snaps into the bracket

5 Close the retaining cover to preventthe accidental release of the sensorwhen the boat is underway

Cable routing

Route the sensor cable over thetransom through a drain hole orthorough a new hole drilled in thetransom above the waterline

Never cut the cable or remote the

connector this will void the warranty Always wear safety goggles and a dustmask

1 If a hole must be drilled choose alocation well above the waterlineCheck for obstructions such as trimtabs pumps or wiring inside the hullMark the location with a pencil Drilla hole through the transom using a19 mm or 34rdquo bit (to accommodatethe connector)

2 Route the cable over or through thetransom

3 On the outside of the hull secure thecable against the transom using thecable clamps Position a cable clamp50 mm(2rdquo) above the bracket andmark the mounting hole with apencil

4 Position the second cable clamphalfway between the first clamp andthe cable hole Mark this mountinghole

5 If a hole has been drilled in thetransom open the appropriate slot inthe transom cable cover Position thecover over the cable where it entersthe hull Mark the two mounting

holes6 At each of the marked locations usea 3 mm or 18rdquo bit to drill a hole 10mm (38rdquo) deep The prevent drillingtoo deeply wrap masking tapearound the bit 10 mm (38rdquo) from thepoint

7 Apply marine sealant to the threadsof the 6 x 12rdquo self-tapping screw toprevent water from seeping into the

transom If you have drilled a holethrough the transom apply marinesealant to the space around thecable where it passes through thetransom

8 Position the two cable clamps andfasten them in place If used pushthe cable cover over the cable andscrew it in place

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4048

34

9 Route the cable to the instrumentbeing careful not to tear the cable

jacket when passing it though thebulkhead(s) and other parts of theboat To reduce electricalinterference separate the sensorcable from other electrical wiring andldquonoiserdquo sources Coil any excesscable and secure it in place withzip-ties to prevent damage

46 Optional WaterTemperatureSpeedSensor

Water temperaturespeed sensorST-02MSB and ST-02PSB which aredesigned for thru-hull mounting areoptionally available Install them asshown below

Mounting considerations

Choose a suitable mounting locationconsidering the followingbull Choose a place free from vibrationbull Choose a mid-boat flat position The

sensor does not have to be installedperfectly perpendicular The sensormust not be damaged in dry-dockingoperation

bull Choose a place apart from equipmentgenerating heat

bull Choose a place in the forwarddirection viewing from the drain holeto allow for circulation of coolingwater

1 Dry-dock the boat2 Make a hole of approx 51 mm

diameter in the mounting location3 Unfasten locknut and remove the

sensor section4 Apply high-grade sealant to the

flange of the sensor5 Pass the sensor casing through thehole

6 Face the notch on the sensor towardboatrsquos bow and tighten the flange

7 Set the sensor section to the sensorcasing and tighten the locknut

8 Launch the boat and check for waterleakage around the sensor

Locknut

Face notchtoward bow

Flange Nut

Coat withsilicone sealant Brim

φ 77

51

123

Water temperaturespeed sensor

ST-02MSB ST-02PSB

47 Wiring

Connect the LS-4100 powerdata cableassy MJ-A7SPF0005-020 (2 msupplied) to the POWER and thetransducer cable to the XDR connectorRefer to the interconnection diagram toconnect cables Leave slack in cables tofacilitate checking and maintenance

Note The fuse holder contains a springwhich fixes the fuse To preventdetachment of the spring which wouldcause loss of power tie the line asshown below

+ line (red)

Fuse holder

Cable tie How to fix fuse holder

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4148

35

Establishing the ground

The ground wire (125 sq or more localsupply) should be as short as possible

The signal line ground is isolated from

the chassis ground however the powerline is not insulated Therefore whenconnecting eternal equipment havingpositive ground do not ground thesignal line to the chassis If excessivenoise shows on the screen the groundmay be inadequate In this case attacha steel plate measuring 20 cm by 30 cmon the outside of the hull to provide aground point Connect the ground wire

there Use a ldquoclosedrdquo type lug ( ) tomake the connection at the display unitDo not use an ldquoopenrdquo type lug ( )

Optional equipment

POWER connector

The power supply port is commonlyused for connection of externalequipment such as a GPS receiver orwind indicator Use the powerdatacable MJ-A7SPF0005-020 (supplied) forconnection referring the figure shown inthe right column

Connector Color Remarks

1 TD-A WHT2 TD-B BLU

IEC-61162-1NMEA0183

3 RD-A YEL

4 RD-B GRN

IEC-61162-1

NMEA01835 + RED

6 - BLKPower input12 VDC

7 FG

Water tempspeed sensor

Connect the optional water tempspeedsensor to the XDR connector with theoptional converter connector (Type02S4147) as shown below

Tape connectors withvulcaninzing tapeand then vinyl tapeto waterproof themBind tape ends withcable ties to preventtape from unraveling

Connect to XDR portat rear of display unit

MJ-A10SPF

MJ-A10SRMDMJ-A6SRMD

Fromtransducer

Fromsensor

Connection of converterconnector 02S4147

48 IEC 61162-1 DataSentences

The tables below show the datasentences which can be input to andoutput from the LS-4100 Thetransmission speed for both input andoutput is 4800 bps Data is output attwo-second intervals

Input data sentences

Sentence Meaning

BWC Bearing and distance towaypoint

GGA Global positioning system(GPS) fix data

GLL Geographic position -latitudelongitude

HDG Heading deviation and variationHDT Heading true

MDA Atmospheric pressure

MTW Water temperature

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4248

36

Input data sentences (conrsquot)

Sentence MeaningMWV Wind speed and

angleRMA Recommended

minimum specificLORAN-C dataRMB Recommended

minimum navigationinformation

RMC Recommendedminimum specificGPSTRANSIT data

VHW Water speed andheading

VTG Course over groundand ground speedXTE Cross track error

Output data sentences

Sentence MeaningDBT (Ver 15) Depth below

transducerDPT (Ver 20 Ver30)

Depth

MTW Water temperatureRMB (Ver 20) Recommended

minimumnavigationinformation

VHW Water speed andheading

TLL Target positionoutput by [MARK]key

= Available with connection of optionalsensorsnavaid

49 Installation MenuThe installation menu mainly containsitems which are set at installation

1 Turn on the power while pressing the[MENUESC] key Continue pressing

the [MENUESC] key until theInstallation menu appears

SIMULATION On

TEST LCD PATTERN MEMORY CLEAR

NMEA PORT InOutNMEA MIX OffGPS WAAS Off

SET BOTTOM LEVEL

Installation Menu

= Setting cannot be changed whenNMEA PORT setting is InIn

Installation menu

SIMULATION The simulation modeprovides without connection of thetransducer simulated operation of theequipment using internally generatedechoes All controls are operative Themessage ldquoSIMrdquo appears at the top rightcorner on the screen when thesimulation mode is active

1 At the installation menu press toopen the simulation mode optionswindow

2 Press to choose ldquoOnrdquo to turn onthe simulation mode

3 Press the [POWERBRILL] keyabout three seconds to turn off thepower

4 Press the [POWERBRILL] key toturn on the power ldquoSIMrdquo appears atthe top right corner of the display

5 To turn off the simulation modeselect Off at step 2

NMEA po r t se tup(NMEA PO RT NMEA M IX)

The POWER port can function as aninput port or inputoutput port Changethe setting to ldquoInInrdquo when connectingGP-310B320B and a wind sensor

When connecting the GP-310B320Band a wind sensor first turn on ldquoGPS

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4348

37

WAASrdquo (in the Installation menu) andthen select ldquoInInrdquo as the NMEA portsetting

1 Turn on the power while pressingand holding down the [MENUESC]key Continue pressing the[MENUESC] key until theInstallation menu appears

2 Choose NMEA PORT and thenpress to display the NMEA portoptions window

3 Use or to choose InOut orInIn as appropriate

InOut Input and Output (default

setting)InIn Input only (Available withconnection of the GP-310B320Band a wind sensor)

4 Press choose NMEA MIX andthen press to display the NMEAMIX options window

5 Use or to choose Off or OnChoose On to output input data

Off Outputs the data sentences ofLS-4100 only

On Outputs the data sentences ofLS-4100 and sentences which areinput from other equipment

6 To restore normal operation turn offthe power and then turn it on again

GPS WAAS Chooses how to use theWAAS signal when connecting with a

WAAS receiver for example GP-320B

Note WAAS is currently in thedevelopmental phase During thedevelopmental phase the reliability andavailability of the WAAS signal cannotbe guaranteed Therefore any positiondata should be verified against othersources to confirm reliability

1 Display the Installation menu2 Choose GPS WAAS and then press

to open the GPS WAAS options

window

Off

WAAS options window3 Press or to choose ldquoWAAS-02rdquo

(test signal) When the systembecomes operational (in 2003) setto ldquo00rdquo (regular WAAS signal)

4 Turn off the power

BOTTOM LEVEL If the depthindication is unstable in automaticoperation or the bottom echo cannot bedisplayed in the darkest gray tone byadjusting the gain controls in manualoperation you may adjust the bottomecho level detection circuit for both 50kHz and 200 kHz to stabilize theindication Generally lower the bottomlevel for inner hull installation where thereceive level is too low If the bottomlevel is too low it may be difficult todiscriminate fish from the bottomresulting in unstable depth indication

And if the bottom level is too high thedepth indication may not appear

1 At the installation menu press tochoose SET BOTTOM LEVEL andthen press Several seconds laterthe following display appears

Bottom level +0 (200k -100 - +100 ) +0 ( 50k -100 - +100 )

Bottom level display

2 While observing the picture use or to set 200 kHz or to set50 kHz Set up for optimum picture

3 To restore normal operation turn offthe power and then it on again

Note The mode must be other thanldquoNAV DATArdquo to show the bottom leveldisplay

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4448

SP - 1 E2371S01C

SPECIFICATIONS OF ECHO SOUNDER LS-4100

1 GENERAL11 TX Frequency 50 kHz or 200 kHz 50200 kHz dual transmitting selectable12 Transmit Method Single or dual transmitting

13 Output Power 300 Wrms14 TX Rate Max 500 pulsemin15 Pulse-length 01 to 08 ms

2 DISPLAY UNIT21 Display system 5-inch monochrome LCD 76 mm (W) x 100 mm (H) 240 x 320 dots22 Display Mode Single frequency (highlow freq) Dual-frequency Zoom Nav data-12

Marker zoom Bottom zoom Bottom-lock23 Display Range

Range SettingRange

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

Display

rangeMeter 5 10 20 40 80 150 200 300 2-500

Feet 15 30 60 120 200 400 600 1000 7-1500

Fathoms 3 5 10 20 40 80 100 150 1-250

PassiBraza 3 5 10 30 50 100 150 200 1-300

24 Range Shift 0-500 m 0-1500 ft 0-250 fa 0-300 pb25 Expansion Range Bottom-lock expansion 3 to 10 m

Sectional expansion 2 to 50 m26 Display Advance Speed 8 steps (LinesTX Freeze 1161814121121 41)

3 INTERFACE31 Input data sentences IEC61162-1NMEA0183 Ver 152030

GGA RMA RMB RMC BWC GLL HDT HDG VTG VHW MTWMWV MDA XTE

32 Output data sentences IEC61162-1NMEA0183 Ver 152030 interval 2 sMTW VHW DBT DPT RMB TLL by key operating External data required

4 POWER SUPPLY41 Display Unit 12 VDC 05 A

5 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITION51 Ambient Temperature Display unit -15degC to +55degC52 Relative Humidity 93 or less at 40degC53 Waterproof IPX5

6 COATING COLOR61 Display Unit N30

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4548

M a r

4

0 3

D-1

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4648

Mar 4 03

Mar 4 03

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4748

M a r

3

0 3

S-1

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4848

FURUNO Authorized DistributorDealer FURUNO Authorized DistributorDealer

9-52 Ashihara-cho9-52 Ashihara-choNishinomiya 662-8580 JAPANNishinomiya 662-8580 JAPAN

Telephone Telephone 0798-65-21110798-65-2111FaxFax 0798-65-42000798-65-4200

FIRST EDITION FIRST EDITION MARMAR 20032003Printed in JapanPrinted in Japan All rights reserved All rights reserved

B1B1 SEPSEP 09 200509 2005

Pub NoPub No OME-23710OME-23710 00014698000000146980000001469800000014698000(( DAMIDAMI )) LS-4100LS-4100

0 0 0 1 4 6 9 8 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 4 6 9 8 0 0 0

Page 21: OME23710B_1_LS4100

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 2148

15

116 Setting Up Nav DataDisplays

The user may arrange the nav datadisplays as desired

1 Use the [MODE] key to show theNAV DATA-1 or 2 display whicheveryou want to set up

2 Press the [MENUESC] key to closethe mode selection window

3 Press the cursor pad to display theNAV DATA SETUP window

NAV DATA SETUP

Window Selection Data Selection

[MENU] Exit

NAV DATA SETUP window

4 Use or to choose a datadisplay window desired Adashed-line rectangle circumscribesyour selection

5 Use

or$

to choose item todisplay See the below for adescription of the displays

(9)

(1)

(2)

(3)

(4)(5)

(6)(7)(8)

Two-data

display

Three-data

display

Four-data

displayItems displayable in (1) - (3) depth positioncourse range and bearing trip distanceodometer water temperature headingair pressure time-to-go to destination waypointXTE speed wind speed and directiondestination waypoint data compassItems displayable in (4) - (9) depth positionspeed course range and bearing trip distanceodometer water temperature headingair pressure time-to-go to destination waypointXTE wind speed wind direction

= Graphic display

Nav data window and item displayable6 Press the [MENUESC] key to finish

Note You can choose the number ofitems to show in a nav data display withNAV DATA-1 and NAV DATA-2 on theSystem menu

GRAPHIC DISPLAYS

1 05 0 05 1

Wpt 03Rng 019nm Brg 321 deg XTE 000nm Cse 333 deg

DESTINATION WAYPOINT GRAPHIC

XTEscale

BearingCourseDestinationwaypointdirection

DestinationwaypointdataNameRangeXTE

Wind APP

WIND GRAPHIC

60

120

90

030

150180

120

150

90

60

30

120 deg

Speed 103 ms

COMPASS GRAPHIC

SPEED GRAPHIC

172

Speed

20

50

40

60

30

10

01 05 0 05 1

025 nm

XTE

XTE GRAPHIC

kt

Bearing todestinationwaypoint

Course

Brg30 deg

Cse90 deg

N

E

XTE scale

Speed-ometer

Nav data display-1

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 2248

16

DIGITAL DISPLAYS

Course

123 deg

COURSE

Depth

328 ft

DEPTH

Heading TRUEMAG

318 deg

HEADING

Odometer

56 nm

ODOMETER

Position GPS 3D

30 deg 00065N130 deg 00574E

POSITION

Temperature

698 degF

WATER TEMPERATURE

Trip meter

121 nm

TRIP DISTANCE

Time to Go

00 H30 M

TIME-TO-GO

1018 hpa

AIR PRESSURE

Air Pressure

Speed

193 kt

SPEED

Rng

121 nm

RANGE amp BEARING

Brg

140 deg

Wind Speed APP

80 ms

WIND SPEED

Wind Dir APP

138 deg

WIND DIRECTION

APP or TRUE depending on menu setting TRUE or MAG depending

on menu settingamp To destination waypoint

Note 1 Nav data is updated with somedelay

Note 2 When data is lost 120 sec thedisplay shows - - at the locationwhere data is lost

= GPS receiving status (Displays whenconnecting with GP-310B320B and InOutis selected at the Installation menu)NO FIX Position cannot be foundGPS 2D 2D (dimension) GPS position fixGPS 3D 3D GPS fixGPS W2D 2D WAAS position fixGPS W3D 3D WAAS position fix

NAV data display-2

117 Other Menu ItemsThis section describes the menu itemsnot previously mentioned

Page 1

HUE (Picture Color)

Two picture color arrangements areavailable Day and Night Day showsechoes on a white background Nightshows them on a black background

1 Press the [MENUESC] key todisplay the menu

2 Use or $ to choose HUE frompage 1 of the menu

3 Press to show the optionswindow

4 Use or $ to choose Day or Nightas appropriate

5 Press the [MENUESC] key to closethe menu

WHITE LINE

The white line feature displays theleading edge of the bottom echo in

white This is useful for discriminatingbottom fish near the bottom

1 Press the [MENUESC] key todisplay the main menu

2 Use or $ to choose WHITE LINEfrom page 1 of the menu

3 Press to show the optionswindow

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 2348

17

4 Use or to choose Off Tone orMesh as appropriate ldquoMeshrdquo paintsthe white line in darker tone thanldquoTonerdquo

5 Press the [MENUESC] key to closethe menu

526White Line OFF White Line ON (Mesh)

Fish schoolclearly shown

White line

0

20

40

60

80

050k 11

526

0

20

40

60

80

00 050k 11

How white line works

DEEP GAIN

ldquoDeep Gainrdquo compensates forpropagation attenuation of the ultrasonicwaves It does this by equalizing echopresentation so that fish schools of thesame size appear in the same density inboth shallow and deep waters Inaddition it reduces surface noise

Press the [MENUESC] key to openthe main menu

2 Use or to choose DEEP GAINfrom page of the menu

3 Press $ to show to the optionswindow

4 Choose Low Medium or High asappropriate High provides thegreatest degree of gain reductionagainst short range echoes

5 Press the [MENUESC] key to closethe menu

Page 2

TRIP RESET

This item resets trip distance to ldquo0rdquo

Press the [MENUESC] key to openthe main menu

2 Use or to choose TRIPRESET from page 2 of the menu

3 Press $ 4 Press to reset trip distance

Beeps are generated while the tripdistance is being reset

5 Press the [MENUESC] key to closethe menu

Note To reset the odometer to zeroclear the memory

GAIN ADJ 200 GAIN ADJ 50

If the gain is too high or too low or thegain for the low and high frequenciesappears unbalanced you cancompensate it as follows

Press the [MENUESC] key to openthe main menu

2 Use or to choose GAIN ADJ200 or GAIN ADJ 50 from page 2 ofthe menu

3 Press $ to show to the optionswindow

4 Use or to set the amount Thesetting range is ndash50 to +50

5 Press the [MENUESC] key to close

the menu

DRAFT

The default depth display shows thedistance from the transducer If youwould rather show the distance from thesea surface set your shiprsquos draft asfollows

Press the [MENUESC] key to openthe main menu

2 Use or to choose DRAFT frompage 2 of the menu

3 Press $ and then use or to setdraft The setting range is ndash 50 to+500 (meters feet)

4 Press the [MENUESC] key to closethe menu

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 2448

18

2 SYSTEM MENU

The System menu mainly consists ofitems which once set do not requirefrequent adjustment You may displaythis menu by choosing SYSTEM MENUat page 2 of the main menu andpressing

SYSTEM MENULANGUAGE English

DEPTH UNIT ftSPEED UNIT ktWIND UNIT msTEMP UNIT deg F

TEMP GRAPH OffNAV DATA-1 NAV DATA-2

WATER TYPE SaltKEY BEEP OnBATT VOLTAGE Off (13)

[MENU] Exit

SYSTEM MENU

(23)

NAV DISPLAY TempSpeedNMEA0183 Ver 20TLL OUTPUT OffBEARING TrueWIND SPDDIR ApparentTRIP SOURCE Own

TEMP SOURCE OwnSPEED SOURCE OwnTEMP CALIB +00 deg F ( 40)SPEED CALIB +0 ( 50)

Own speed Own temp 100 kt 162 deg F

[MENU] Exit

SYSTEM MENU

(33)

BASIC RANGE1 15 ft

RANGE2 30RANGE3 60RANGE4 120RANGE5 200RANGE6 400RANGE7 600RANGE8 1000 (7-1500)

ZOOM RANGE 15 ft (7-150)BL RANGE 15 ft (10-30)(Bottom Lock)

ZOOM MARKER On

[MENU] Exit

PAGE 3

PAGE 2

PAGE 1

Page no

System menus

21 System MenuPage 1

LANGUAGE The system language isavailable in English several Europeanlanguages and Japanese To changelanguage select language desired andpress the [MENUESC] key

DEPTH UNIT Choose unit of depthmeasurement from meters feet

fathoms passibraza and hiro(Japanese)

SPEED UNIT Choose unit of speedmeasurement from knots miles perhour and kilometers per hour Requiresspeed data

WIND UNIT Choose unit of wind speedmeasurement from ms kt kmh and

mph Requires wind speed data

TEMP UNIT Choose unit oftemperature measurement Celsius orFahrenheit Requires temperature data

TEMP GRAPH Turns the watertemperature display on or off Thetemperature scale range is 16deg (degF) inldquoNarrowrdquo 40deg (degF) in ldquoWiderdquo Requires

water temperature data

m526

0

20

40

60

80

00 050k 11

40

80

70

50

60

TemperatureScale

TemperatureGraph

638 deg F162kt

Water temperature display (wide degF)

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 2548

19

NAV DATA-1 -2 Choose the number ofnavigation data items to display on thenav data displays from two three orfour items Requires appropriate navdata

WATER TYPE Choose the water typewith which to use the LS-4100 fromSalt or Fresh

KEY BEEP Turn key beep on or off

BATT VOLTAGE Turn the batteryvoltage indication (appears at the topright corner on the screen) on or offWhen on it replaces the picture advancespeed indication

Page 2

NAV DISPLAY Choose the nav data todisplay in the nav data window at thetop left-hand corner You may choosefrom temperaturespeedlatitudelongitude range and bearingcourse over ground trip distance or

wind speed Requires appropriate navdata

407 deg F162kt

Nav window

NMEA0183 Choose NMEA version ofnavigator Ver 15 Ver 20 or Ver 30

TLL OUTPUT Enablesdisables outputof TLL (Target Latitude Longitude)position when the [MARK] key isoperated ldquoTLLrdquo outputs latitude andlongitude position ldquoFURUNO-TLLrdquoavailable with connection of navigatorthat can output FURUNO TLL outputslatitude and longitude watertemperature depth etc

BEARING Shiprsquos course and bearingto a waypoint may be displayed in trueor magnetic bearing Magnetic bearingis true bearing plus (or minus) earthrsquosmagnetic deviation Requires bearingdata

WIND SPDDIR Choose the windspeed and direction reference from trueand apparent Requires wind sensorApparen t The direction (in relation toshiprsquos bow) and speed of the wind as itappears to those on board relative tothe speed and direction of the boatcombination of the true wind and thewind caused by the boats movementTrue The speed and direction (inrelation to shiprsquos bow) of the wind felt ormeasured when stationary

TRIP SOURCE Choose speed sourcefor the trip distance indication Own(transducer with speed sensor orseparate speed sensor) or NMEA

TEMP SOURCE Choose source ofwater temperature input Off Own(transducer with water temperaturesensor or separate temperature sensor)or NMEA

SPEED SOURCE Choose source ofspeed input Off Own (transducer withspeed sensor or separate speedsensor) or NMEA Requires speed

data

TEMP CALIB If the water temperaturesensor-generated water temperatureindication is wrong you can correct ithere when ldquoOwnrdquo is selected astemperature source For example if thewater temperature indication is 2deghigher than actual water temperatureenter -2 The setting range is -40degF to

+40degF

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 2648

20

SPEED CALIB If the speedsensor-generated speed indication iswrong you can correct it here whenldquoOwnrdquo is selected as speed source Forexample if the speed indication is 10lower than actual speed enter +10 Thesetting range is ndash50 to +50

Page 3

BASIC RANGE 1 - BASIC RANGE 8 Set range of each of the eight basicranges (Selectable range 7 to 1500 ft)Note 1 All default basic ranges arerestored whenever the depth unit ischanged Therefore change the depth

unit before changing the basic rangesNote 2 A range may not be lower thanthe range preceding it For example ifbasic range 3 is 60 feet basic range 4must be greater than 60 feet

ZOOM RANGE Choose the range tozoom in the marker-zoom andbottom-zoom modes You may choose arange between 7 and 150 feet (2 and 50

meters)

BL RANGE The expansion width forthe bottom-lock display can be chosenfrom 10 to 30 feet (3 and 10 meters)

ZOOM MARKER The zoom markerappears in the normal bottom markerand bottom zoom displays and marksthe area which is expanded in the

bottom marker and bottom zoompictures You can turn the marker on oroff as desired

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 2748

21

3 MAINTENANCETROUBLESHOOTING

W RNING

ELECTRICAL SHOCK HAZARDDo not open the equipment

Only qualified personnel should workinside the equipment

31 Maintenance

Regular maintenance is essential forgood performance Checking the itemslisted in the table below monthly willhelp keep your equipment in goodshape for years to come

Checking

Item Action

Transducercable

Check cable for damage

Power cabletransducercable plug

Check that they are tightlyfastened Refasten ifnecessary

Display unitground

Check for corrosion Cleanif necessary

Power supplyvoltage

Check voltage If out ofrating correct problem

32 Cleaning the DisplayUnit

Dust or dirt on the display unit can beremoved with a soft cloth If desired awater-moistened cloth may be usedUse special care when cleaning theLCD since it scratches easily Do notuse chemical cleaners to clean thedisplay unit - they can remove paint andmarkings

33 TransducerMaintenance

Marine life on the transducer face willresult in a gradual decrease insensitivity Check the transducer facefor cleanliness each time the boat isdry-docked Carefully remove anymarine life with a piece of wood orfine-grade sandpaper

34 Replacing the FuseThe fuse in the power cable protects thesystem from reverse polarity of thepower supply and equipment fault If thefuse blows find the cause beforereplacing it Use only a 1A fuse (FGMB 1A 125V Code No 000-114-805 ) orequivalent Using the wrong fuse will damage the unit and void the warranty

W RNINGUse the proper fuse

Fuse rating is shown on the equipmentUse of a wrong fuse can result in fire anddamage the equipment

35 Battery Voltage Alert A battery icon appears when the batteryvoltage is too high or too low

Battery icon and meaning

Icon Meaning

Voltage is lower than 10 VDC If thevoltage goes below 9 V the equipmentis automatically turned off

Voltage is higher than 165 VDC If thevoltage goes higher than 175 V theequipment is automatically turned off

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 2848

22

36 TroubleshootingThe table below provides basictroubleshooting procedures which theuser may follow to restore normaloperation

Troubleshooting table

Ifhellip Then check hellipneither echo norfixed range scaleappears

bull battery voltagebull fusebull power cable

no echo appearsbut the fixedrange scaleappears

bull if display advancespeed is set to ldquoStoprdquo

bull transducer plugbull

transducer cableecho appears butno zero line

bull if range shifting is setto ldquo0rdquo

sensitivity is low bull gain settingbull if air bubbles or marine

life is clinging to thetransducer face

bull if sediments arepresent in the water

bull if the bottom is too soft

to return an echothere is extremeinterference ornoise

bull if the transducer is tooclose to the engine

bull if the unit is properlygrounded

bull if other echo soundersof the same frequencyas own are beingoperated nearby

the speedwatertemperaturereadout isunrealistic or notpresent

bull sensor plug

the positionreadout isunrealistic or notpresent

bull the connectionbetween sounder andnavigator

bull navigator

37 DiagnosticsIf you feel your unit is not workingproperly conduct the diagnostic test tofind the problem If you cannot restorenormal operation contact your dealerfor advice

1 Turn on the power while pressing the[MENUESC] key Continue pressingthe [MENUESC] key until theInstallation menu appears

SIMULATION On

TEST LCD PATTERN MEMORY CLEAR

NMEA PORT InOutNMEA MIX Off GPS WAAS Off

SET BOTTOM LEVEL

Installation Menu

= Setting cannot be changed whenNMEA PORT setting is InIn

Installation menu2 Press to choose TEST3 Press to start the test

ROM OKRAM OKNMEA

Temp 682 deg F

Speed 100kmh

Power 124 VBody 39 deg C

Program No 0252318-01Push [MENU] 3 times to exit

Level bar

= Program version no

Water

TemperatureSpeedBattery VoltageTemperatureinside displayunit(Unit fixed atdeg C)

GPS (48502180) OK

Only when GP-310B is connected(For GP-320B 4850238)

Test display

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 2948

23

4 The ROM RAM and NMEA port arechecked with the results shown asOK or NG (No Good) For any NGrequest service (A special connectoris required to test the NMEA portNothing appears if no connector isconnected)

5 The squares at the right side of thetest display are for checking thecontrols Press each key and thearrows on the Cursor Pad one byone A controlrsquos correspondingon-screen square ldquolightsrdquo in black ifthe control is normal

6 To return to the Installation menupress the [MENUESC] key threetimes

7 To restore normal operation turn offthe power and turn it on again

38 Test PatternThis feature tests for proper display oftones

1 On the Installation menu press $ tochoose LCD PATTERN

2 Press to start the test The entirescreen is black

3 Press again and the screen turnswhite

4 Press again and the screenshows a four-toned display

5 Press again to return to theInstallation menu

6 To restore normal operation turn offthe power and then it on again

WHITE FOUR-TONE BLACK

Test patterns

39 Memory ClearThe memory can be cleared to startafresh with default menu settings

1 At the installation menu press $ tochoose MEMORY CLEAR

2 Press to open the optionswindow

YES NO

Clear memory display

3 Press to clear the memory Beepsare generated while the memory isbeing cleared

4 To restore normal operation turn offthe power and then turn it on again

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3048

24

4 INSTALLATION

41 Display UnitMounting considerations

The display unit can be installed on adesktop on the bulkhead or flushmounted in a panel When choosing alocation keep the following in mind

bull Keep the display unit out of directsunlight

bull The temperature and humidity should

be moderate and stablebull Locate the unit away from exhaust

pipes and ventsbull The mounting location should be well

ventilatedbull Mount the unit where shock and

vibration are minimalbull For maintenance and checking

purposes leave sufficient space atthe sides and rear of the unit andleave slack in cables

bull A magnetic compass will be affected ifthe display unit is placed too close toit Observe the following compasssafe distances to prevent disturbanceto the magnetic compassStandard compass 04 metersSteering compass 03 meters

Desktop overhead mounting1 Fix the bracket to a desktop or the

overhead with tapping screws(supplied)

2 Loosely screw knobs into the displayunit

3 Set the display unit to the bracketand then tighten the knobs

Mounting on the bulkhead Flush

mounting in a panelSee the instructions on the bulkhead orflush mounting template (supplied)

42 Thru-hull MountTransducer

Transducer mounting location

The thru-hull mount transducer

(520-5PSD 520-5MSD) provides thebest performance of all since thetransducer protrudes from the hull andthe effect of air bubbles and turbulencenear the hull skin is reduced When theboat has a keel the transducer shouldbe at least 30 cm away from it Typicalthru-hull mountings are shown in thefigure on the next page

The performance of this sounder isdirectly related to the mounting locationof the transducer especially forhigh-speed cruising The installationshould be planned in advance keepingthe standard cable length (8 m) and thefollowing factors in mindbull Air bubbles and turbulence caused by

movement of the boat seriouslydegrade the sounding capability of thetransducer The transducer shouldtherefore be located in a positionwhere water flow is the smoothestNoise from the propellers alsoadversely affects performance andthe transducer should not be mountednearby The lifting strakes arenotorious for creating acoustic noiseand these must be avoided bykeeping the transducer inboard ofthem

bull The transducer must always remain

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3148

25

submerged even when the boat isrolling pitching or up on a plane athigh speed

bull A practical choice would besomewhere between 13 and 12 of

the boatrsquos length from the stern Forplaning hulls a practical location isgenerally rather far astern so that thetransducer is always in waterregardless of the planing attitude

28

22

120

68

30

520-5PSD

24

120

68

87520-5MSD

Unit mm

Thru-hull mount transducer dimensions

Acceptable transducer mounting

locations

Position 12 to 13 of the hull from stern

15 to 30 cm off center line (inside first lifting strakes)

Within the wetted bottom area

Deadrise angle within 15 deg

HIGH SPEED-V HULL

Suitable transducer mounting locations

Typical thru-hull mounttransducer installations

FairingBlock

Flat Washer

Rubber Washer

Hull

Deep-V Hull

Hull

Flat Washer

Rubber Washer

Flat Hull

CorkWasher

Typical thru-hull mounttransducer installations

Procedure for installing thethru-hull mount transducer

1 With the boat hauled out of the watermark the location chosen formounting the transducer on thebottom of the hull

2 If the hull is not level within 15deg inany direction fairing blocks madeout of teak should be used betweenthe transducer and hull both insideand outside to keep the transducerface parallel with the water lineFabricate the fairing block as shownbelow and make the entire surfaceas smooth as possible to provide anundisturbed flow of water around thetransducer The fairing block shouldbe smaller than the transducer itselfto provide a channel to divert

turbulent water around the sides ofthe transducer rather than over itsface

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3248

26

BOWHole for stuffing tube

Upper Half

Lower Half

Saw along slopeof hull Construction of fairing block

3 Drill a hole just large enough to passthe threaded stuffing tube of thetransducer through the hull makingsure it is drilled vertically

4 Apply a sufficient amount of highquality caulking compound to the topsurface of the transducer around thethreads of the stuffing tube andinside the mounting hole (and fairingblocks if used) to ensure watertightmounting

5 Mount the transducer and fairingblocks and tighten the locking nutsBe sure that the transducer is

properly oriented and its workingface is parallel to the waterline

Note Do not over-stress the stuffingtube and locking nuts through excessivetightening since the wood block willswell when the boat is placed in thewater It is suggested that the nut betightened lightly at installation andretightened several days after the boat

has been launched

Transducer preparation

Before putting the boat in water wipethe face of the transducer thoroughlywith a detergent liquid soap This willlessen the time necessary for thetransducer to have good contact withthe water Otherwise the time requiredfor complete ldquosaturationrdquo ill belengthened and performance will bereduced

DO NOT paint the transducerPerformance will be affected

43 Transom MountTransducer

The transom mount transducer is verycommonly employed usually onrelatively small IO or outboard boatsDo not use this method on an inboardmotor boat because turbulence iscreated by the propeller ahead of thetransducer

520-5PWD

There are two methods of installationflush with hull (for flat hulls) andprojecting from hull (for deep V-hulls)

Flat Hull

D

Dgt50 cm

Deep-VHull

520-5PWD mounting locations

Installing the 520-5PWD on a flat hull

A suitable mounting location is at least50 cm away from the engine and wherethe water flow is smooth

1 Drill four pilot holes in the mountinglocation

2 Attach the transducer to the bracketwith 5 x 20 tapping screws(supplied)

3 Adjust the transducer position so thetransducer faces right to the bottom

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3348

27

Note If necessary to improve waterflow and minimize air bubblesstaying on the transducer faceincline the transducer about 5deg at therear This may require a certainamount of experimentation for finetuning at high cruising speeds

4 Fill the gap between the wedge frontof the transducer and transom withepoxy material to eliminate any airspaces

No1 M5 x 14

5 x 20

5 x 20

2 to 5

Tape

Hull

Transom mount transducer

mounting flush with hull

Installing the transom mounttransducer on a deep-V hull

This method is employed on deep-Vhulls and provides good performancebecause the effects of air bubbles areminimal Install the transducer parallelwith water surface not flush with hull Ifthe boat is placed on a trailer care mustbe taken not to damage the transducerwhen the boat is hauled out of the waterand put on the trailer

5 x 20

No 2M5 x 14

5 x 20

Transom mount transducermounted projecting from hull

525-5PWD

Choose the installation methoddepending on the rise angle of the hull

Transom

Transom

Stripe over 10

Parallel with hull

Mount at the stripe

less than 10

525-5PWD mounting location

Installing the 525-5PWD

Referring to ldquoInstalling the 520-5PWDrdquoin the left column for mounting of thebracket and the figure shown on the topof next page install the 525-5PWD tothe transom

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3448

28

2 to 5

Transducer

Bracket

Hull

Epoxy material

525-5PWD mounting

44 Inside-hullTransducer

The thru-hull mount transducer(520-5PSD 520-5MSD) may also beinstalled inside the hull following theprocedure below

Necessary tools

You will need the following toolsbull Sandpaper (100)bull Silicone sealantbull Silicone grease

Remarks on installationbull Turn off the engine and anchor the

boat while installing the equipmentbull Install the transducer in the engine

room

Choosing the mounting locationbull The mounting location should be

where the hull is of single-hullthickness and is void of air or flotationmaterials other than solid fiberglassbetween the transducer face and thewater

bull Do not place the transducer over hullstruts or ribs which run under the hull

bull Avoid a location where the risingangle of the hull exceeds 15deg tominimize the effect of the boatrsquosrolling

bull You will finalize the mounting location

through some trial and error Theprocedure for this is shown later

50 cm

50 cm15 cm15 cm

13

12

Transducer mountinglocation

Centerline

Inside-hull transducer mounting location

Attaching the transducer1 Clean the transducer face to remove

any foreign material Lightly roughenthe transducer face with 100sandpaper Also roughen the insideof the hull where the transducer is tobe mounted

2 Clean the transducer face again3 Warm the silicone sealant to 40degC

before usage to soften it Coat thetransducer face and mountinglocation with silicone sealant

Transducer

SiliconeSealant

Coating transducer facewith silicone sealant

4 Press the transducer firmly down onthe hull and gently twist it back andforth to remove any air which may betrapped in the silicone sealant

Checking the installation

1 Connect the battery to the display

unit2 Turn on the display unit

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3548

29

3 Press the [MODE] key to chooseSINGLE FREQ

4 Choose 50 kHz or 200 kHz and thenpress the [MENUESC] key to closethe mode menu

5 Press the [MENU] to show the mainmenu and then press to select

Auto mode6 Press to choose Off7 Press the [MENUESC] key8 Press the [GAIN] key to set the gain

to ldquo5rdquo and then press the[MENUESC] key

9 Press the [RANGE] key to set therange to 10 meters (feet) and thenpress the [MENUESC] key

10 If the bottom is displayed in darkgray and the depth indicationappears the mounting location issuitable Go to ldquoFinal preparationrdquo

11 If the bottom is not displayed in darkgray tone the mounting location maybe unsuitable Do the followinga) Press the [POWERBRILL] key to

turn off the powerb) Gently dismount the transducer

with a piece of woodc) Reattach the transducer

elsewhere as shown in ldquoAttachingthe transducerrdquo

d) Check the installation again

Final preparation

Support the transducer with a piece ofwood to keep it in place while it is drying

Let the transducer dry 24-72 hours

45 Optional Triducer525ST-MSD

The optional triducer 525ST-MSD isdesigned for thru-hull mounting Forhow to install this transducer seeparagraph 42

φ79 mm

33 mm200-12 UNthreads

φ51 mm

27 mm

7 mm

140 mm Triducer 525ST-MSD

525ST-PWD

The Transom Mount Transducer orTRIDUCER reg Multisensor with IntegralRelease Bracket 525ST-PWD ismanufactured by AIRMAR Co Theseinstructions are also included with the

sensor

Pre-test for speed and temperature

Connect the sensor to the instrumentand spin the paddlewheel Check for aspeed reading and the approximate airtemperature If there is no readingreturn the sensor to your place ofpurchase

Tools and materials needed

ScissorsMasking tapeSafety gogglesDust maskElectric drillDrill bit for

Bracket holes 4mm 23 or 964rdquoFiberglass hull chamfer bit(preferred)6mm or 14rdquo

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3648

30

Transom hole 19mm or 34rdquo(optional)

Cable clamp holes 3mm or 18rdquoScrewdriversStraight edgeMarine sealantPencilZip-tiesWater-based antifouling paint(mandatory in salt water )

Mounting location

To ensure the best performance thesensor must be submerged inaeration-free and turbulence-free water

Mount the sensor close to the centerlineof the boat On slower heavierdisplacement hulls positioning it fartherfrom the centerline is acceptable

Allow adequate space above thebracket for it to release and rotate thesensor upward

Height

Height withoutspeed sensor191mm (7-12)Height withspeed sensor213mm (8-12)

Height required at mounting location

Note 1 Do not mount the sensor in anarea of turbulence or bubbles nearwater intake or discharge openingsbehind strakes struts fittings or hull

irregularities behind eroding paint (anindication of turbulence)Note 2 Avoid mounting the sensorwhere the boat may be supportedduring trailering launching hauling andstorageNote 3 For single drive boat mounton the starboard side at least 75 mm(3rdquo) beyond the swing radius of thepropeller

75 mm(3)

minimum beyondswing radius

Mounting location on single drive boat

Note 4 For twin drive boat mountbetween the drives

Installation of bracket

1 Cut out the installation template

shown on the next page2 At the selected location position thetemplate so the arrow at the bottomis aligned with the bottom edge ofthe transom Being sure the templateis parallel to the waterline tape it inplace

Align template vertically

Deadrise angle

Slope of hullparallel towaterline

Align template arrow withbottom edge of transom

Positioning the template

Warning Always wear safetygoggles and a dust mask

3 Using a 4 mm 23 or 964rdquo bit drillthree holes 22 mm (78rdquo) deepat the locations indicated To preventdrilling too deeply wrap maskingtape around the bit 22 mm (78rdquo)from the pointFiberglass hull Minimize surfacecracking by chamfering the gelcoatIf a chamfer bit or countersink bit is

not available start drilling with a6mm or 14rdquo bit to a depth of 1 mm(116rdquo)

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3748

31

4 If you know your transom angle the

bracket is designed for a standard13deg transom angle11deg-18deg angle No shim is requiredSkip to step 3 in ldquoAdjustingrdquoOther angles The shim is requiredSkip to step 2 of ldquoAdjustingrdquoIf you do not know the transom angletemporarily attach the bracket andsensor to the transom to determine ifthe plastic shim is needed

5 Using the two 10 x 1-14rdquo

self-tapping screws temporarilyscrew the bracket to the hull DONOT tighten the screws completelyat this time Follow the step 1-4 inldquoAttaching the Sensor to the Bracketrdquobefore proceeding with ldquoAdjustingrdquo

Installation templatefor starboard side of boat

Drill at locations labeled Bfor the following transom angles

16 deg through 22 deg

Drill at locations labeled Afor the following transom angles

2 deg through 15 deg

Align arrow with bottom of transom

AA A

BB B

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3848

32

Adjusting

1 Using a straight edge sight theunderside of the sensor relative tothe underside of the hull The sternof the sensor should be 1-3 mm

(116-18rdquo) below the bow of thesensor or parallel to the bottom ofthe hull

11 deg transom angleNO SHIM

12-18 deg transom angleNO SHIM

2 deg -10 deg transom

angle

19 deg -22 deg transom

angleshim withtaper up

shim withtaper down

parallelparallel parallel

slightangle

angletoo steep

anglereversed

YES NONO

YES YESYES

Sensor position and transom angle

Note Do not position the bow of thesensor lower than the stern becauseaeration will occur

2 To adjust the sensorrsquos angle relativeto the hull use the tapered plasticshim provided If the bracket hasbeen temporarily fastened to thetransom remove it Key the shim in

place on the back of the bracket2deg-10deg transom angle (steppedtransom and jet boats) Positionthe shim with the tapered end down19deg-22deg transom angle (smallaluminum and fiberglass boats) Position the shim with the taperedend up

3 If the bracket has been temporarilyfastened to the transom remove it

Apply a marine sealant to thethreads of the two 10 x 1-14rdquo self

tapping screws to prevent waterseeping into the transom Screw thebracket to the hull Do not tighten thescrews completely at this time

4 Repeat step 1 to ensure that theangle of the sensor is correctNote Do not position the sensorfarther into the water than necessaryto avoid increasing drag spray andwater noise and reducing boatspeed

5 Using the vertical adjustment spaceon the bracket slots slide the sensorup or down to provide a projection of3 mm (18rdquo) Tighten the screws

Cable cover

Cableclamp

50 mm (2)

Hull projection 3 mm (18)

Vertical adjustment and cable routing

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3948

33

Attaching the sensor to the bracket

1 If the retaining cover near the top ofthe bracket is closed open it bydepressing the latch and rotating thecover downward

Step 1 Step 2

Latch

Retainingcover

Pivotarm (2)

Slot (2)

Step 4

Step 3

Attaching the sensor to the bracket

2 Insert the sensorrsquos pivot arms intothe slots near the top of the bracket

3 Maintain pressure until the pivotarms click into place

4 Rotate the sensor downward until thebottom snaps into the bracket

5 Close the retaining cover to preventthe accidental release of the sensorwhen the boat is underway

Cable routing

Route the sensor cable over thetransom through a drain hole orthorough a new hole drilled in thetransom above the waterline

Never cut the cable or remote the

connector this will void the warranty Always wear safety goggles and a dustmask

1 If a hole must be drilled choose alocation well above the waterlineCheck for obstructions such as trimtabs pumps or wiring inside the hullMark the location with a pencil Drilla hole through the transom using a19 mm or 34rdquo bit (to accommodatethe connector)

2 Route the cable over or through thetransom

3 On the outside of the hull secure thecable against the transom using thecable clamps Position a cable clamp50 mm(2rdquo) above the bracket andmark the mounting hole with apencil

4 Position the second cable clamphalfway between the first clamp andthe cable hole Mark this mountinghole

5 If a hole has been drilled in thetransom open the appropriate slot inthe transom cable cover Position thecover over the cable where it entersthe hull Mark the two mounting

holes6 At each of the marked locations usea 3 mm or 18rdquo bit to drill a hole 10mm (38rdquo) deep The prevent drillingtoo deeply wrap masking tapearound the bit 10 mm (38rdquo) from thepoint

7 Apply marine sealant to the threadsof the 6 x 12rdquo self-tapping screw toprevent water from seeping into the

transom If you have drilled a holethrough the transom apply marinesealant to the space around thecable where it passes through thetransom

8 Position the two cable clamps andfasten them in place If used pushthe cable cover over the cable andscrew it in place

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4048

34

9 Route the cable to the instrumentbeing careful not to tear the cable

jacket when passing it though thebulkhead(s) and other parts of theboat To reduce electricalinterference separate the sensorcable from other electrical wiring andldquonoiserdquo sources Coil any excesscable and secure it in place withzip-ties to prevent damage

46 Optional WaterTemperatureSpeedSensor

Water temperaturespeed sensorST-02MSB and ST-02PSB which aredesigned for thru-hull mounting areoptionally available Install them asshown below

Mounting considerations

Choose a suitable mounting locationconsidering the followingbull Choose a place free from vibrationbull Choose a mid-boat flat position The

sensor does not have to be installedperfectly perpendicular The sensormust not be damaged in dry-dockingoperation

bull Choose a place apart from equipmentgenerating heat

bull Choose a place in the forwarddirection viewing from the drain holeto allow for circulation of coolingwater

1 Dry-dock the boat2 Make a hole of approx 51 mm

diameter in the mounting location3 Unfasten locknut and remove the

sensor section4 Apply high-grade sealant to the

flange of the sensor5 Pass the sensor casing through thehole

6 Face the notch on the sensor towardboatrsquos bow and tighten the flange

7 Set the sensor section to the sensorcasing and tighten the locknut

8 Launch the boat and check for waterleakage around the sensor

Locknut

Face notchtoward bow

Flange Nut

Coat withsilicone sealant Brim

φ 77

51

123

Water temperaturespeed sensor

ST-02MSB ST-02PSB

47 Wiring

Connect the LS-4100 powerdata cableassy MJ-A7SPF0005-020 (2 msupplied) to the POWER and thetransducer cable to the XDR connectorRefer to the interconnection diagram toconnect cables Leave slack in cables tofacilitate checking and maintenance

Note The fuse holder contains a springwhich fixes the fuse To preventdetachment of the spring which wouldcause loss of power tie the line asshown below

+ line (red)

Fuse holder

Cable tie How to fix fuse holder

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4148

35

Establishing the ground

The ground wire (125 sq or more localsupply) should be as short as possible

The signal line ground is isolated from

the chassis ground however the powerline is not insulated Therefore whenconnecting eternal equipment havingpositive ground do not ground thesignal line to the chassis If excessivenoise shows on the screen the groundmay be inadequate In this case attacha steel plate measuring 20 cm by 30 cmon the outside of the hull to provide aground point Connect the ground wire

there Use a ldquoclosedrdquo type lug ( ) tomake the connection at the display unitDo not use an ldquoopenrdquo type lug ( )

Optional equipment

POWER connector

The power supply port is commonlyused for connection of externalequipment such as a GPS receiver orwind indicator Use the powerdatacable MJ-A7SPF0005-020 (supplied) forconnection referring the figure shown inthe right column

Connector Color Remarks

1 TD-A WHT2 TD-B BLU

IEC-61162-1NMEA0183

3 RD-A YEL

4 RD-B GRN

IEC-61162-1

NMEA01835 + RED

6 - BLKPower input12 VDC

7 FG

Water tempspeed sensor

Connect the optional water tempspeedsensor to the XDR connector with theoptional converter connector (Type02S4147) as shown below

Tape connectors withvulcaninzing tapeand then vinyl tapeto waterproof themBind tape ends withcable ties to preventtape from unraveling

Connect to XDR portat rear of display unit

MJ-A10SPF

MJ-A10SRMDMJ-A6SRMD

Fromtransducer

Fromsensor

Connection of converterconnector 02S4147

48 IEC 61162-1 DataSentences

The tables below show the datasentences which can be input to andoutput from the LS-4100 Thetransmission speed for both input andoutput is 4800 bps Data is output attwo-second intervals

Input data sentences

Sentence Meaning

BWC Bearing and distance towaypoint

GGA Global positioning system(GPS) fix data

GLL Geographic position -latitudelongitude

HDG Heading deviation and variationHDT Heading true

MDA Atmospheric pressure

MTW Water temperature

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4248

36

Input data sentences (conrsquot)

Sentence MeaningMWV Wind speed and

angleRMA Recommended

minimum specificLORAN-C dataRMB Recommended

minimum navigationinformation

RMC Recommendedminimum specificGPSTRANSIT data

VHW Water speed andheading

VTG Course over groundand ground speedXTE Cross track error

Output data sentences

Sentence MeaningDBT (Ver 15) Depth below

transducerDPT (Ver 20 Ver30)

Depth

MTW Water temperatureRMB (Ver 20) Recommended

minimumnavigationinformation

VHW Water speed andheading

TLL Target positionoutput by [MARK]key

= Available with connection of optionalsensorsnavaid

49 Installation MenuThe installation menu mainly containsitems which are set at installation

1 Turn on the power while pressing the[MENUESC] key Continue pressing

the [MENUESC] key until theInstallation menu appears

SIMULATION On

TEST LCD PATTERN MEMORY CLEAR

NMEA PORT InOutNMEA MIX OffGPS WAAS Off

SET BOTTOM LEVEL

Installation Menu

= Setting cannot be changed whenNMEA PORT setting is InIn

Installation menu

SIMULATION The simulation modeprovides without connection of thetransducer simulated operation of theequipment using internally generatedechoes All controls are operative Themessage ldquoSIMrdquo appears at the top rightcorner on the screen when thesimulation mode is active

1 At the installation menu press toopen the simulation mode optionswindow

2 Press to choose ldquoOnrdquo to turn onthe simulation mode

3 Press the [POWERBRILL] keyabout three seconds to turn off thepower

4 Press the [POWERBRILL] key toturn on the power ldquoSIMrdquo appears atthe top right corner of the display

5 To turn off the simulation modeselect Off at step 2

NMEA po r t se tup(NMEA PO RT NMEA M IX)

The POWER port can function as aninput port or inputoutput port Changethe setting to ldquoInInrdquo when connectingGP-310B320B and a wind sensor

When connecting the GP-310B320Band a wind sensor first turn on ldquoGPS

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4348

37

WAASrdquo (in the Installation menu) andthen select ldquoInInrdquo as the NMEA portsetting

1 Turn on the power while pressingand holding down the [MENUESC]key Continue pressing the[MENUESC] key until theInstallation menu appears

2 Choose NMEA PORT and thenpress to display the NMEA portoptions window

3 Use or to choose InOut orInIn as appropriate

InOut Input and Output (default

setting)InIn Input only (Available withconnection of the GP-310B320Band a wind sensor)

4 Press choose NMEA MIX andthen press to display the NMEAMIX options window

5 Use or to choose Off or OnChoose On to output input data

Off Outputs the data sentences ofLS-4100 only

On Outputs the data sentences ofLS-4100 and sentences which areinput from other equipment

6 To restore normal operation turn offthe power and then turn it on again

GPS WAAS Chooses how to use theWAAS signal when connecting with a

WAAS receiver for example GP-320B

Note WAAS is currently in thedevelopmental phase During thedevelopmental phase the reliability andavailability of the WAAS signal cannotbe guaranteed Therefore any positiondata should be verified against othersources to confirm reliability

1 Display the Installation menu2 Choose GPS WAAS and then press

to open the GPS WAAS options

window

Off

WAAS options window3 Press or to choose ldquoWAAS-02rdquo

(test signal) When the systembecomes operational (in 2003) setto ldquo00rdquo (regular WAAS signal)

4 Turn off the power

BOTTOM LEVEL If the depthindication is unstable in automaticoperation or the bottom echo cannot bedisplayed in the darkest gray tone byadjusting the gain controls in manualoperation you may adjust the bottomecho level detection circuit for both 50kHz and 200 kHz to stabilize theindication Generally lower the bottomlevel for inner hull installation where thereceive level is too low If the bottomlevel is too low it may be difficult todiscriminate fish from the bottomresulting in unstable depth indication

And if the bottom level is too high thedepth indication may not appear

1 At the installation menu press tochoose SET BOTTOM LEVEL andthen press Several seconds laterthe following display appears

Bottom level +0 (200k -100 - +100 ) +0 ( 50k -100 - +100 )

Bottom level display

2 While observing the picture use or to set 200 kHz or to set50 kHz Set up for optimum picture

3 To restore normal operation turn offthe power and then it on again

Note The mode must be other thanldquoNAV DATArdquo to show the bottom leveldisplay

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4448

SP - 1 E2371S01C

SPECIFICATIONS OF ECHO SOUNDER LS-4100

1 GENERAL11 TX Frequency 50 kHz or 200 kHz 50200 kHz dual transmitting selectable12 Transmit Method Single or dual transmitting

13 Output Power 300 Wrms14 TX Rate Max 500 pulsemin15 Pulse-length 01 to 08 ms

2 DISPLAY UNIT21 Display system 5-inch monochrome LCD 76 mm (W) x 100 mm (H) 240 x 320 dots22 Display Mode Single frequency (highlow freq) Dual-frequency Zoom Nav data-12

Marker zoom Bottom zoom Bottom-lock23 Display Range

Range SettingRange

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

Display

rangeMeter 5 10 20 40 80 150 200 300 2-500

Feet 15 30 60 120 200 400 600 1000 7-1500

Fathoms 3 5 10 20 40 80 100 150 1-250

PassiBraza 3 5 10 30 50 100 150 200 1-300

24 Range Shift 0-500 m 0-1500 ft 0-250 fa 0-300 pb25 Expansion Range Bottom-lock expansion 3 to 10 m

Sectional expansion 2 to 50 m26 Display Advance Speed 8 steps (LinesTX Freeze 1161814121121 41)

3 INTERFACE31 Input data sentences IEC61162-1NMEA0183 Ver 152030

GGA RMA RMB RMC BWC GLL HDT HDG VTG VHW MTWMWV MDA XTE

32 Output data sentences IEC61162-1NMEA0183 Ver 152030 interval 2 sMTW VHW DBT DPT RMB TLL by key operating External data required

4 POWER SUPPLY41 Display Unit 12 VDC 05 A

5 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITION51 Ambient Temperature Display unit -15degC to +55degC52 Relative Humidity 93 or less at 40degC53 Waterproof IPX5

6 COATING COLOR61 Display Unit N30

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4548

M a r

4

0 3

D-1

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4648

Mar 4 03

Mar 4 03

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4748

M a r

3

0 3

S-1

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4848

FURUNO Authorized DistributorDealer FURUNO Authorized DistributorDealer

9-52 Ashihara-cho9-52 Ashihara-choNishinomiya 662-8580 JAPANNishinomiya 662-8580 JAPAN

Telephone Telephone 0798-65-21110798-65-2111FaxFax 0798-65-42000798-65-4200

FIRST EDITION FIRST EDITION MARMAR 20032003Printed in JapanPrinted in Japan All rights reserved All rights reserved

B1B1 SEPSEP 09 200509 2005

Pub NoPub No OME-23710OME-23710 00014698000000146980000001469800000014698000(( DAMIDAMI )) LS-4100LS-4100

0 0 0 1 4 6 9 8 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 4 6 9 8 0 0 0

Page 22: OME23710B_1_LS4100

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 2248

16

DIGITAL DISPLAYS

Course

123 deg

COURSE

Depth

328 ft

DEPTH

Heading TRUEMAG

318 deg

HEADING

Odometer

56 nm

ODOMETER

Position GPS 3D

30 deg 00065N130 deg 00574E

POSITION

Temperature

698 degF

WATER TEMPERATURE

Trip meter

121 nm

TRIP DISTANCE

Time to Go

00 H30 M

TIME-TO-GO

1018 hpa

AIR PRESSURE

Air Pressure

Speed

193 kt

SPEED

Rng

121 nm

RANGE amp BEARING

Brg

140 deg

Wind Speed APP

80 ms

WIND SPEED

Wind Dir APP

138 deg

WIND DIRECTION

APP or TRUE depending on menu setting TRUE or MAG depending

on menu settingamp To destination waypoint

Note 1 Nav data is updated with somedelay

Note 2 When data is lost 120 sec thedisplay shows - - at the locationwhere data is lost

= GPS receiving status (Displays whenconnecting with GP-310B320B and InOutis selected at the Installation menu)NO FIX Position cannot be foundGPS 2D 2D (dimension) GPS position fixGPS 3D 3D GPS fixGPS W2D 2D WAAS position fixGPS W3D 3D WAAS position fix

NAV data display-2

117 Other Menu ItemsThis section describes the menu itemsnot previously mentioned

Page 1

HUE (Picture Color)

Two picture color arrangements areavailable Day and Night Day showsechoes on a white background Nightshows them on a black background

1 Press the [MENUESC] key todisplay the menu

2 Use or $ to choose HUE frompage 1 of the menu

3 Press to show the optionswindow

4 Use or $ to choose Day or Nightas appropriate

5 Press the [MENUESC] key to closethe menu

WHITE LINE

The white line feature displays theleading edge of the bottom echo in

white This is useful for discriminatingbottom fish near the bottom

1 Press the [MENUESC] key todisplay the main menu

2 Use or $ to choose WHITE LINEfrom page 1 of the menu

3 Press to show the optionswindow

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 2348

17

4 Use or to choose Off Tone orMesh as appropriate ldquoMeshrdquo paintsthe white line in darker tone thanldquoTonerdquo

5 Press the [MENUESC] key to closethe menu

526White Line OFF White Line ON (Mesh)

Fish schoolclearly shown

White line

0

20

40

60

80

050k 11

526

0

20

40

60

80

00 050k 11

How white line works

DEEP GAIN

ldquoDeep Gainrdquo compensates forpropagation attenuation of the ultrasonicwaves It does this by equalizing echopresentation so that fish schools of thesame size appear in the same density inboth shallow and deep waters Inaddition it reduces surface noise

Press the [MENUESC] key to openthe main menu

2 Use or to choose DEEP GAINfrom page of the menu

3 Press $ to show to the optionswindow

4 Choose Low Medium or High asappropriate High provides thegreatest degree of gain reductionagainst short range echoes

5 Press the [MENUESC] key to closethe menu

Page 2

TRIP RESET

This item resets trip distance to ldquo0rdquo

Press the [MENUESC] key to openthe main menu

2 Use or to choose TRIPRESET from page 2 of the menu

3 Press $ 4 Press to reset trip distance

Beeps are generated while the tripdistance is being reset

5 Press the [MENUESC] key to closethe menu

Note To reset the odometer to zeroclear the memory

GAIN ADJ 200 GAIN ADJ 50

If the gain is too high or too low or thegain for the low and high frequenciesappears unbalanced you cancompensate it as follows

Press the [MENUESC] key to openthe main menu

2 Use or to choose GAIN ADJ200 or GAIN ADJ 50 from page 2 ofthe menu

3 Press $ to show to the optionswindow

4 Use or to set the amount Thesetting range is ndash50 to +50

5 Press the [MENUESC] key to close

the menu

DRAFT

The default depth display shows thedistance from the transducer If youwould rather show the distance from thesea surface set your shiprsquos draft asfollows

Press the [MENUESC] key to openthe main menu

2 Use or to choose DRAFT frompage 2 of the menu

3 Press $ and then use or to setdraft The setting range is ndash 50 to+500 (meters feet)

4 Press the [MENUESC] key to closethe menu

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 2448

18

2 SYSTEM MENU

The System menu mainly consists ofitems which once set do not requirefrequent adjustment You may displaythis menu by choosing SYSTEM MENUat page 2 of the main menu andpressing

SYSTEM MENULANGUAGE English

DEPTH UNIT ftSPEED UNIT ktWIND UNIT msTEMP UNIT deg F

TEMP GRAPH OffNAV DATA-1 NAV DATA-2

WATER TYPE SaltKEY BEEP OnBATT VOLTAGE Off (13)

[MENU] Exit

SYSTEM MENU

(23)

NAV DISPLAY TempSpeedNMEA0183 Ver 20TLL OUTPUT OffBEARING TrueWIND SPDDIR ApparentTRIP SOURCE Own

TEMP SOURCE OwnSPEED SOURCE OwnTEMP CALIB +00 deg F ( 40)SPEED CALIB +0 ( 50)

Own speed Own temp 100 kt 162 deg F

[MENU] Exit

SYSTEM MENU

(33)

BASIC RANGE1 15 ft

RANGE2 30RANGE3 60RANGE4 120RANGE5 200RANGE6 400RANGE7 600RANGE8 1000 (7-1500)

ZOOM RANGE 15 ft (7-150)BL RANGE 15 ft (10-30)(Bottom Lock)

ZOOM MARKER On

[MENU] Exit

PAGE 3

PAGE 2

PAGE 1

Page no

System menus

21 System MenuPage 1

LANGUAGE The system language isavailable in English several Europeanlanguages and Japanese To changelanguage select language desired andpress the [MENUESC] key

DEPTH UNIT Choose unit of depthmeasurement from meters feet

fathoms passibraza and hiro(Japanese)

SPEED UNIT Choose unit of speedmeasurement from knots miles perhour and kilometers per hour Requiresspeed data

WIND UNIT Choose unit of wind speedmeasurement from ms kt kmh and

mph Requires wind speed data

TEMP UNIT Choose unit oftemperature measurement Celsius orFahrenheit Requires temperature data

TEMP GRAPH Turns the watertemperature display on or off Thetemperature scale range is 16deg (degF) inldquoNarrowrdquo 40deg (degF) in ldquoWiderdquo Requires

water temperature data

m526

0

20

40

60

80

00 050k 11

40

80

70

50

60

TemperatureScale

TemperatureGraph

638 deg F162kt

Water temperature display (wide degF)

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 2548

19

NAV DATA-1 -2 Choose the number ofnavigation data items to display on thenav data displays from two three orfour items Requires appropriate navdata

WATER TYPE Choose the water typewith which to use the LS-4100 fromSalt or Fresh

KEY BEEP Turn key beep on or off

BATT VOLTAGE Turn the batteryvoltage indication (appears at the topright corner on the screen) on or offWhen on it replaces the picture advancespeed indication

Page 2

NAV DISPLAY Choose the nav data todisplay in the nav data window at thetop left-hand corner You may choosefrom temperaturespeedlatitudelongitude range and bearingcourse over ground trip distance or

wind speed Requires appropriate navdata

407 deg F162kt

Nav window

NMEA0183 Choose NMEA version ofnavigator Ver 15 Ver 20 or Ver 30

TLL OUTPUT Enablesdisables outputof TLL (Target Latitude Longitude)position when the [MARK] key isoperated ldquoTLLrdquo outputs latitude andlongitude position ldquoFURUNO-TLLrdquoavailable with connection of navigatorthat can output FURUNO TLL outputslatitude and longitude watertemperature depth etc

BEARING Shiprsquos course and bearingto a waypoint may be displayed in trueor magnetic bearing Magnetic bearingis true bearing plus (or minus) earthrsquosmagnetic deviation Requires bearingdata

WIND SPDDIR Choose the windspeed and direction reference from trueand apparent Requires wind sensorApparen t The direction (in relation toshiprsquos bow) and speed of the wind as itappears to those on board relative tothe speed and direction of the boatcombination of the true wind and thewind caused by the boats movementTrue The speed and direction (inrelation to shiprsquos bow) of the wind felt ormeasured when stationary

TRIP SOURCE Choose speed sourcefor the trip distance indication Own(transducer with speed sensor orseparate speed sensor) or NMEA

TEMP SOURCE Choose source ofwater temperature input Off Own(transducer with water temperaturesensor or separate temperature sensor)or NMEA

SPEED SOURCE Choose source ofspeed input Off Own (transducer withspeed sensor or separate speedsensor) or NMEA Requires speed

data

TEMP CALIB If the water temperaturesensor-generated water temperatureindication is wrong you can correct ithere when ldquoOwnrdquo is selected astemperature source For example if thewater temperature indication is 2deghigher than actual water temperatureenter -2 The setting range is -40degF to

+40degF

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 2648

20

SPEED CALIB If the speedsensor-generated speed indication iswrong you can correct it here whenldquoOwnrdquo is selected as speed source Forexample if the speed indication is 10lower than actual speed enter +10 Thesetting range is ndash50 to +50

Page 3

BASIC RANGE 1 - BASIC RANGE 8 Set range of each of the eight basicranges (Selectable range 7 to 1500 ft)Note 1 All default basic ranges arerestored whenever the depth unit ischanged Therefore change the depth

unit before changing the basic rangesNote 2 A range may not be lower thanthe range preceding it For example ifbasic range 3 is 60 feet basic range 4must be greater than 60 feet

ZOOM RANGE Choose the range tozoom in the marker-zoom andbottom-zoom modes You may choose arange between 7 and 150 feet (2 and 50

meters)

BL RANGE The expansion width forthe bottom-lock display can be chosenfrom 10 to 30 feet (3 and 10 meters)

ZOOM MARKER The zoom markerappears in the normal bottom markerand bottom zoom displays and marksthe area which is expanded in the

bottom marker and bottom zoompictures You can turn the marker on oroff as desired

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 2748

21

3 MAINTENANCETROUBLESHOOTING

W RNING

ELECTRICAL SHOCK HAZARDDo not open the equipment

Only qualified personnel should workinside the equipment

31 Maintenance

Regular maintenance is essential forgood performance Checking the itemslisted in the table below monthly willhelp keep your equipment in goodshape for years to come

Checking

Item Action

Transducercable

Check cable for damage

Power cabletransducercable plug

Check that they are tightlyfastened Refasten ifnecessary

Display unitground

Check for corrosion Cleanif necessary

Power supplyvoltage

Check voltage If out ofrating correct problem

32 Cleaning the DisplayUnit

Dust or dirt on the display unit can beremoved with a soft cloth If desired awater-moistened cloth may be usedUse special care when cleaning theLCD since it scratches easily Do notuse chemical cleaners to clean thedisplay unit - they can remove paint andmarkings

33 TransducerMaintenance

Marine life on the transducer face willresult in a gradual decrease insensitivity Check the transducer facefor cleanliness each time the boat isdry-docked Carefully remove anymarine life with a piece of wood orfine-grade sandpaper

34 Replacing the FuseThe fuse in the power cable protects thesystem from reverse polarity of thepower supply and equipment fault If thefuse blows find the cause beforereplacing it Use only a 1A fuse (FGMB 1A 125V Code No 000-114-805 ) orequivalent Using the wrong fuse will damage the unit and void the warranty

W RNINGUse the proper fuse

Fuse rating is shown on the equipmentUse of a wrong fuse can result in fire anddamage the equipment

35 Battery Voltage Alert A battery icon appears when the batteryvoltage is too high or too low

Battery icon and meaning

Icon Meaning

Voltage is lower than 10 VDC If thevoltage goes below 9 V the equipmentis automatically turned off

Voltage is higher than 165 VDC If thevoltage goes higher than 175 V theequipment is automatically turned off

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 2848

22

36 TroubleshootingThe table below provides basictroubleshooting procedures which theuser may follow to restore normaloperation

Troubleshooting table

Ifhellip Then check hellipneither echo norfixed range scaleappears

bull battery voltagebull fusebull power cable

no echo appearsbut the fixedrange scaleappears

bull if display advancespeed is set to ldquoStoprdquo

bull transducer plugbull

transducer cableecho appears butno zero line

bull if range shifting is setto ldquo0rdquo

sensitivity is low bull gain settingbull if air bubbles or marine

life is clinging to thetransducer face

bull if sediments arepresent in the water

bull if the bottom is too soft

to return an echothere is extremeinterference ornoise

bull if the transducer is tooclose to the engine

bull if the unit is properlygrounded

bull if other echo soundersof the same frequencyas own are beingoperated nearby

the speedwatertemperaturereadout isunrealistic or notpresent

bull sensor plug

the positionreadout isunrealistic or notpresent

bull the connectionbetween sounder andnavigator

bull navigator

37 DiagnosticsIf you feel your unit is not workingproperly conduct the diagnostic test tofind the problem If you cannot restorenormal operation contact your dealerfor advice

1 Turn on the power while pressing the[MENUESC] key Continue pressingthe [MENUESC] key until theInstallation menu appears

SIMULATION On

TEST LCD PATTERN MEMORY CLEAR

NMEA PORT InOutNMEA MIX Off GPS WAAS Off

SET BOTTOM LEVEL

Installation Menu

= Setting cannot be changed whenNMEA PORT setting is InIn

Installation menu2 Press to choose TEST3 Press to start the test

ROM OKRAM OKNMEA

Temp 682 deg F

Speed 100kmh

Power 124 VBody 39 deg C

Program No 0252318-01Push [MENU] 3 times to exit

Level bar

= Program version no

Water

TemperatureSpeedBattery VoltageTemperatureinside displayunit(Unit fixed atdeg C)

GPS (48502180) OK

Only when GP-310B is connected(For GP-320B 4850238)

Test display

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 2948

23

4 The ROM RAM and NMEA port arechecked with the results shown asOK or NG (No Good) For any NGrequest service (A special connectoris required to test the NMEA portNothing appears if no connector isconnected)

5 The squares at the right side of thetest display are for checking thecontrols Press each key and thearrows on the Cursor Pad one byone A controlrsquos correspondingon-screen square ldquolightsrdquo in black ifthe control is normal

6 To return to the Installation menupress the [MENUESC] key threetimes

7 To restore normal operation turn offthe power and turn it on again

38 Test PatternThis feature tests for proper display oftones

1 On the Installation menu press $ tochoose LCD PATTERN

2 Press to start the test The entirescreen is black

3 Press again and the screen turnswhite

4 Press again and the screenshows a four-toned display

5 Press again to return to theInstallation menu

6 To restore normal operation turn offthe power and then it on again

WHITE FOUR-TONE BLACK

Test patterns

39 Memory ClearThe memory can be cleared to startafresh with default menu settings

1 At the installation menu press $ tochoose MEMORY CLEAR

2 Press to open the optionswindow

YES NO

Clear memory display

3 Press to clear the memory Beepsare generated while the memory isbeing cleared

4 To restore normal operation turn offthe power and then turn it on again

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3048

24

4 INSTALLATION

41 Display UnitMounting considerations

The display unit can be installed on adesktop on the bulkhead or flushmounted in a panel When choosing alocation keep the following in mind

bull Keep the display unit out of directsunlight

bull The temperature and humidity should

be moderate and stablebull Locate the unit away from exhaust

pipes and ventsbull The mounting location should be well

ventilatedbull Mount the unit where shock and

vibration are minimalbull For maintenance and checking

purposes leave sufficient space atthe sides and rear of the unit andleave slack in cables

bull A magnetic compass will be affected ifthe display unit is placed too close toit Observe the following compasssafe distances to prevent disturbanceto the magnetic compassStandard compass 04 metersSteering compass 03 meters

Desktop overhead mounting1 Fix the bracket to a desktop or the

overhead with tapping screws(supplied)

2 Loosely screw knobs into the displayunit

3 Set the display unit to the bracketand then tighten the knobs

Mounting on the bulkhead Flush

mounting in a panelSee the instructions on the bulkhead orflush mounting template (supplied)

42 Thru-hull MountTransducer

Transducer mounting location

The thru-hull mount transducer

(520-5PSD 520-5MSD) provides thebest performance of all since thetransducer protrudes from the hull andthe effect of air bubbles and turbulencenear the hull skin is reduced When theboat has a keel the transducer shouldbe at least 30 cm away from it Typicalthru-hull mountings are shown in thefigure on the next page

The performance of this sounder isdirectly related to the mounting locationof the transducer especially forhigh-speed cruising The installationshould be planned in advance keepingthe standard cable length (8 m) and thefollowing factors in mindbull Air bubbles and turbulence caused by

movement of the boat seriouslydegrade the sounding capability of thetransducer The transducer shouldtherefore be located in a positionwhere water flow is the smoothestNoise from the propellers alsoadversely affects performance andthe transducer should not be mountednearby The lifting strakes arenotorious for creating acoustic noiseand these must be avoided bykeeping the transducer inboard ofthem

bull The transducer must always remain

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3148

25

submerged even when the boat isrolling pitching or up on a plane athigh speed

bull A practical choice would besomewhere between 13 and 12 of

the boatrsquos length from the stern Forplaning hulls a practical location isgenerally rather far astern so that thetransducer is always in waterregardless of the planing attitude

28

22

120

68

30

520-5PSD

24

120

68

87520-5MSD

Unit mm

Thru-hull mount transducer dimensions

Acceptable transducer mounting

locations

Position 12 to 13 of the hull from stern

15 to 30 cm off center line (inside first lifting strakes)

Within the wetted bottom area

Deadrise angle within 15 deg

HIGH SPEED-V HULL

Suitable transducer mounting locations

Typical thru-hull mounttransducer installations

FairingBlock

Flat Washer

Rubber Washer

Hull

Deep-V Hull

Hull

Flat Washer

Rubber Washer

Flat Hull

CorkWasher

Typical thru-hull mounttransducer installations

Procedure for installing thethru-hull mount transducer

1 With the boat hauled out of the watermark the location chosen formounting the transducer on thebottom of the hull

2 If the hull is not level within 15deg inany direction fairing blocks madeout of teak should be used betweenthe transducer and hull both insideand outside to keep the transducerface parallel with the water lineFabricate the fairing block as shownbelow and make the entire surfaceas smooth as possible to provide anundisturbed flow of water around thetransducer The fairing block shouldbe smaller than the transducer itselfto provide a channel to divert

turbulent water around the sides ofthe transducer rather than over itsface

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3248

26

BOWHole for stuffing tube

Upper Half

Lower Half

Saw along slopeof hull Construction of fairing block

3 Drill a hole just large enough to passthe threaded stuffing tube of thetransducer through the hull makingsure it is drilled vertically

4 Apply a sufficient amount of highquality caulking compound to the topsurface of the transducer around thethreads of the stuffing tube andinside the mounting hole (and fairingblocks if used) to ensure watertightmounting

5 Mount the transducer and fairingblocks and tighten the locking nutsBe sure that the transducer is

properly oriented and its workingface is parallel to the waterline

Note Do not over-stress the stuffingtube and locking nuts through excessivetightening since the wood block willswell when the boat is placed in thewater It is suggested that the nut betightened lightly at installation andretightened several days after the boat

has been launched

Transducer preparation

Before putting the boat in water wipethe face of the transducer thoroughlywith a detergent liquid soap This willlessen the time necessary for thetransducer to have good contact withthe water Otherwise the time requiredfor complete ldquosaturationrdquo ill belengthened and performance will bereduced

DO NOT paint the transducerPerformance will be affected

43 Transom MountTransducer

The transom mount transducer is verycommonly employed usually onrelatively small IO or outboard boatsDo not use this method on an inboardmotor boat because turbulence iscreated by the propeller ahead of thetransducer

520-5PWD

There are two methods of installationflush with hull (for flat hulls) andprojecting from hull (for deep V-hulls)

Flat Hull

D

Dgt50 cm

Deep-VHull

520-5PWD mounting locations

Installing the 520-5PWD on a flat hull

A suitable mounting location is at least50 cm away from the engine and wherethe water flow is smooth

1 Drill four pilot holes in the mountinglocation

2 Attach the transducer to the bracketwith 5 x 20 tapping screws(supplied)

3 Adjust the transducer position so thetransducer faces right to the bottom

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3348

27

Note If necessary to improve waterflow and minimize air bubblesstaying on the transducer faceincline the transducer about 5deg at therear This may require a certainamount of experimentation for finetuning at high cruising speeds

4 Fill the gap between the wedge frontof the transducer and transom withepoxy material to eliminate any airspaces

No1 M5 x 14

5 x 20

5 x 20

2 to 5

Tape

Hull

Transom mount transducer

mounting flush with hull

Installing the transom mounttransducer on a deep-V hull

This method is employed on deep-Vhulls and provides good performancebecause the effects of air bubbles areminimal Install the transducer parallelwith water surface not flush with hull Ifthe boat is placed on a trailer care mustbe taken not to damage the transducerwhen the boat is hauled out of the waterand put on the trailer

5 x 20

No 2M5 x 14

5 x 20

Transom mount transducermounted projecting from hull

525-5PWD

Choose the installation methoddepending on the rise angle of the hull

Transom

Transom

Stripe over 10

Parallel with hull

Mount at the stripe

less than 10

525-5PWD mounting location

Installing the 525-5PWD

Referring to ldquoInstalling the 520-5PWDrdquoin the left column for mounting of thebracket and the figure shown on the topof next page install the 525-5PWD tothe transom

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3448

28

2 to 5

Transducer

Bracket

Hull

Epoxy material

525-5PWD mounting

44 Inside-hullTransducer

The thru-hull mount transducer(520-5PSD 520-5MSD) may also beinstalled inside the hull following theprocedure below

Necessary tools

You will need the following toolsbull Sandpaper (100)bull Silicone sealantbull Silicone grease

Remarks on installationbull Turn off the engine and anchor the

boat while installing the equipmentbull Install the transducer in the engine

room

Choosing the mounting locationbull The mounting location should be

where the hull is of single-hullthickness and is void of air or flotationmaterials other than solid fiberglassbetween the transducer face and thewater

bull Do not place the transducer over hullstruts or ribs which run under the hull

bull Avoid a location where the risingangle of the hull exceeds 15deg tominimize the effect of the boatrsquosrolling

bull You will finalize the mounting location

through some trial and error Theprocedure for this is shown later

50 cm

50 cm15 cm15 cm

13

12

Transducer mountinglocation

Centerline

Inside-hull transducer mounting location

Attaching the transducer1 Clean the transducer face to remove

any foreign material Lightly roughenthe transducer face with 100sandpaper Also roughen the insideof the hull where the transducer is tobe mounted

2 Clean the transducer face again3 Warm the silicone sealant to 40degC

before usage to soften it Coat thetransducer face and mountinglocation with silicone sealant

Transducer

SiliconeSealant

Coating transducer facewith silicone sealant

4 Press the transducer firmly down onthe hull and gently twist it back andforth to remove any air which may betrapped in the silicone sealant

Checking the installation

1 Connect the battery to the display

unit2 Turn on the display unit

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3548

29

3 Press the [MODE] key to chooseSINGLE FREQ

4 Choose 50 kHz or 200 kHz and thenpress the [MENUESC] key to closethe mode menu

5 Press the [MENU] to show the mainmenu and then press to select

Auto mode6 Press to choose Off7 Press the [MENUESC] key8 Press the [GAIN] key to set the gain

to ldquo5rdquo and then press the[MENUESC] key

9 Press the [RANGE] key to set therange to 10 meters (feet) and thenpress the [MENUESC] key

10 If the bottom is displayed in darkgray and the depth indicationappears the mounting location issuitable Go to ldquoFinal preparationrdquo

11 If the bottom is not displayed in darkgray tone the mounting location maybe unsuitable Do the followinga) Press the [POWERBRILL] key to

turn off the powerb) Gently dismount the transducer

with a piece of woodc) Reattach the transducer

elsewhere as shown in ldquoAttachingthe transducerrdquo

d) Check the installation again

Final preparation

Support the transducer with a piece ofwood to keep it in place while it is drying

Let the transducer dry 24-72 hours

45 Optional Triducer525ST-MSD

The optional triducer 525ST-MSD isdesigned for thru-hull mounting Forhow to install this transducer seeparagraph 42

φ79 mm

33 mm200-12 UNthreads

φ51 mm

27 mm

7 mm

140 mm Triducer 525ST-MSD

525ST-PWD

The Transom Mount Transducer orTRIDUCER reg Multisensor with IntegralRelease Bracket 525ST-PWD ismanufactured by AIRMAR Co Theseinstructions are also included with the

sensor

Pre-test for speed and temperature

Connect the sensor to the instrumentand spin the paddlewheel Check for aspeed reading and the approximate airtemperature If there is no readingreturn the sensor to your place ofpurchase

Tools and materials needed

ScissorsMasking tapeSafety gogglesDust maskElectric drillDrill bit for

Bracket holes 4mm 23 or 964rdquoFiberglass hull chamfer bit(preferred)6mm or 14rdquo

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3648

30

Transom hole 19mm or 34rdquo(optional)

Cable clamp holes 3mm or 18rdquoScrewdriversStraight edgeMarine sealantPencilZip-tiesWater-based antifouling paint(mandatory in salt water )

Mounting location

To ensure the best performance thesensor must be submerged inaeration-free and turbulence-free water

Mount the sensor close to the centerlineof the boat On slower heavierdisplacement hulls positioning it fartherfrom the centerline is acceptable

Allow adequate space above thebracket for it to release and rotate thesensor upward

Height

Height withoutspeed sensor191mm (7-12)Height withspeed sensor213mm (8-12)

Height required at mounting location

Note 1 Do not mount the sensor in anarea of turbulence or bubbles nearwater intake or discharge openingsbehind strakes struts fittings or hull

irregularities behind eroding paint (anindication of turbulence)Note 2 Avoid mounting the sensorwhere the boat may be supportedduring trailering launching hauling andstorageNote 3 For single drive boat mounton the starboard side at least 75 mm(3rdquo) beyond the swing radius of thepropeller

75 mm(3)

minimum beyondswing radius

Mounting location on single drive boat

Note 4 For twin drive boat mountbetween the drives

Installation of bracket

1 Cut out the installation template

shown on the next page2 At the selected location position thetemplate so the arrow at the bottomis aligned with the bottom edge ofthe transom Being sure the templateis parallel to the waterline tape it inplace

Align template vertically

Deadrise angle

Slope of hullparallel towaterline

Align template arrow withbottom edge of transom

Positioning the template

Warning Always wear safetygoggles and a dust mask

3 Using a 4 mm 23 or 964rdquo bit drillthree holes 22 mm (78rdquo) deepat the locations indicated To preventdrilling too deeply wrap maskingtape around the bit 22 mm (78rdquo)from the pointFiberglass hull Minimize surfacecracking by chamfering the gelcoatIf a chamfer bit or countersink bit is

not available start drilling with a6mm or 14rdquo bit to a depth of 1 mm(116rdquo)

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3748

31

4 If you know your transom angle the

bracket is designed for a standard13deg transom angle11deg-18deg angle No shim is requiredSkip to step 3 in ldquoAdjustingrdquoOther angles The shim is requiredSkip to step 2 of ldquoAdjustingrdquoIf you do not know the transom angletemporarily attach the bracket andsensor to the transom to determine ifthe plastic shim is needed

5 Using the two 10 x 1-14rdquo

self-tapping screws temporarilyscrew the bracket to the hull DONOT tighten the screws completelyat this time Follow the step 1-4 inldquoAttaching the Sensor to the Bracketrdquobefore proceeding with ldquoAdjustingrdquo

Installation templatefor starboard side of boat

Drill at locations labeled Bfor the following transom angles

16 deg through 22 deg

Drill at locations labeled Afor the following transom angles

2 deg through 15 deg

Align arrow with bottom of transom

AA A

BB B

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3848

32

Adjusting

1 Using a straight edge sight theunderside of the sensor relative tothe underside of the hull The sternof the sensor should be 1-3 mm

(116-18rdquo) below the bow of thesensor or parallel to the bottom ofthe hull

11 deg transom angleNO SHIM

12-18 deg transom angleNO SHIM

2 deg -10 deg transom

angle

19 deg -22 deg transom

angleshim withtaper up

shim withtaper down

parallelparallel parallel

slightangle

angletoo steep

anglereversed

YES NONO

YES YESYES

Sensor position and transom angle

Note Do not position the bow of thesensor lower than the stern becauseaeration will occur

2 To adjust the sensorrsquos angle relativeto the hull use the tapered plasticshim provided If the bracket hasbeen temporarily fastened to thetransom remove it Key the shim in

place on the back of the bracket2deg-10deg transom angle (steppedtransom and jet boats) Positionthe shim with the tapered end down19deg-22deg transom angle (smallaluminum and fiberglass boats) Position the shim with the taperedend up

3 If the bracket has been temporarilyfastened to the transom remove it

Apply a marine sealant to thethreads of the two 10 x 1-14rdquo self

tapping screws to prevent waterseeping into the transom Screw thebracket to the hull Do not tighten thescrews completely at this time

4 Repeat step 1 to ensure that theangle of the sensor is correctNote Do not position the sensorfarther into the water than necessaryto avoid increasing drag spray andwater noise and reducing boatspeed

5 Using the vertical adjustment spaceon the bracket slots slide the sensorup or down to provide a projection of3 mm (18rdquo) Tighten the screws

Cable cover

Cableclamp

50 mm (2)

Hull projection 3 mm (18)

Vertical adjustment and cable routing

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3948

33

Attaching the sensor to the bracket

1 If the retaining cover near the top ofthe bracket is closed open it bydepressing the latch and rotating thecover downward

Step 1 Step 2

Latch

Retainingcover

Pivotarm (2)

Slot (2)

Step 4

Step 3

Attaching the sensor to the bracket

2 Insert the sensorrsquos pivot arms intothe slots near the top of the bracket

3 Maintain pressure until the pivotarms click into place

4 Rotate the sensor downward until thebottom snaps into the bracket

5 Close the retaining cover to preventthe accidental release of the sensorwhen the boat is underway

Cable routing

Route the sensor cable over thetransom through a drain hole orthorough a new hole drilled in thetransom above the waterline

Never cut the cable or remote the

connector this will void the warranty Always wear safety goggles and a dustmask

1 If a hole must be drilled choose alocation well above the waterlineCheck for obstructions such as trimtabs pumps or wiring inside the hullMark the location with a pencil Drilla hole through the transom using a19 mm or 34rdquo bit (to accommodatethe connector)

2 Route the cable over or through thetransom

3 On the outside of the hull secure thecable against the transom using thecable clamps Position a cable clamp50 mm(2rdquo) above the bracket andmark the mounting hole with apencil

4 Position the second cable clamphalfway between the first clamp andthe cable hole Mark this mountinghole

5 If a hole has been drilled in thetransom open the appropriate slot inthe transom cable cover Position thecover over the cable where it entersthe hull Mark the two mounting

holes6 At each of the marked locations usea 3 mm or 18rdquo bit to drill a hole 10mm (38rdquo) deep The prevent drillingtoo deeply wrap masking tapearound the bit 10 mm (38rdquo) from thepoint

7 Apply marine sealant to the threadsof the 6 x 12rdquo self-tapping screw toprevent water from seeping into the

transom If you have drilled a holethrough the transom apply marinesealant to the space around thecable where it passes through thetransom

8 Position the two cable clamps andfasten them in place If used pushthe cable cover over the cable andscrew it in place

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4048

34

9 Route the cable to the instrumentbeing careful not to tear the cable

jacket when passing it though thebulkhead(s) and other parts of theboat To reduce electricalinterference separate the sensorcable from other electrical wiring andldquonoiserdquo sources Coil any excesscable and secure it in place withzip-ties to prevent damage

46 Optional WaterTemperatureSpeedSensor

Water temperaturespeed sensorST-02MSB and ST-02PSB which aredesigned for thru-hull mounting areoptionally available Install them asshown below

Mounting considerations

Choose a suitable mounting locationconsidering the followingbull Choose a place free from vibrationbull Choose a mid-boat flat position The

sensor does not have to be installedperfectly perpendicular The sensormust not be damaged in dry-dockingoperation

bull Choose a place apart from equipmentgenerating heat

bull Choose a place in the forwarddirection viewing from the drain holeto allow for circulation of coolingwater

1 Dry-dock the boat2 Make a hole of approx 51 mm

diameter in the mounting location3 Unfasten locknut and remove the

sensor section4 Apply high-grade sealant to the

flange of the sensor5 Pass the sensor casing through thehole

6 Face the notch on the sensor towardboatrsquos bow and tighten the flange

7 Set the sensor section to the sensorcasing and tighten the locknut

8 Launch the boat and check for waterleakage around the sensor

Locknut

Face notchtoward bow

Flange Nut

Coat withsilicone sealant Brim

φ 77

51

123

Water temperaturespeed sensor

ST-02MSB ST-02PSB

47 Wiring

Connect the LS-4100 powerdata cableassy MJ-A7SPF0005-020 (2 msupplied) to the POWER and thetransducer cable to the XDR connectorRefer to the interconnection diagram toconnect cables Leave slack in cables tofacilitate checking and maintenance

Note The fuse holder contains a springwhich fixes the fuse To preventdetachment of the spring which wouldcause loss of power tie the line asshown below

+ line (red)

Fuse holder

Cable tie How to fix fuse holder

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4148

35

Establishing the ground

The ground wire (125 sq or more localsupply) should be as short as possible

The signal line ground is isolated from

the chassis ground however the powerline is not insulated Therefore whenconnecting eternal equipment havingpositive ground do not ground thesignal line to the chassis If excessivenoise shows on the screen the groundmay be inadequate In this case attacha steel plate measuring 20 cm by 30 cmon the outside of the hull to provide aground point Connect the ground wire

there Use a ldquoclosedrdquo type lug ( ) tomake the connection at the display unitDo not use an ldquoopenrdquo type lug ( )

Optional equipment

POWER connector

The power supply port is commonlyused for connection of externalequipment such as a GPS receiver orwind indicator Use the powerdatacable MJ-A7SPF0005-020 (supplied) forconnection referring the figure shown inthe right column

Connector Color Remarks

1 TD-A WHT2 TD-B BLU

IEC-61162-1NMEA0183

3 RD-A YEL

4 RD-B GRN

IEC-61162-1

NMEA01835 + RED

6 - BLKPower input12 VDC

7 FG

Water tempspeed sensor

Connect the optional water tempspeedsensor to the XDR connector with theoptional converter connector (Type02S4147) as shown below

Tape connectors withvulcaninzing tapeand then vinyl tapeto waterproof themBind tape ends withcable ties to preventtape from unraveling

Connect to XDR portat rear of display unit

MJ-A10SPF

MJ-A10SRMDMJ-A6SRMD

Fromtransducer

Fromsensor

Connection of converterconnector 02S4147

48 IEC 61162-1 DataSentences

The tables below show the datasentences which can be input to andoutput from the LS-4100 Thetransmission speed for both input andoutput is 4800 bps Data is output attwo-second intervals

Input data sentences

Sentence Meaning

BWC Bearing and distance towaypoint

GGA Global positioning system(GPS) fix data

GLL Geographic position -latitudelongitude

HDG Heading deviation and variationHDT Heading true

MDA Atmospheric pressure

MTW Water temperature

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4248

36

Input data sentences (conrsquot)

Sentence MeaningMWV Wind speed and

angleRMA Recommended

minimum specificLORAN-C dataRMB Recommended

minimum navigationinformation

RMC Recommendedminimum specificGPSTRANSIT data

VHW Water speed andheading

VTG Course over groundand ground speedXTE Cross track error

Output data sentences

Sentence MeaningDBT (Ver 15) Depth below

transducerDPT (Ver 20 Ver30)

Depth

MTW Water temperatureRMB (Ver 20) Recommended

minimumnavigationinformation

VHW Water speed andheading

TLL Target positionoutput by [MARK]key

= Available with connection of optionalsensorsnavaid

49 Installation MenuThe installation menu mainly containsitems which are set at installation

1 Turn on the power while pressing the[MENUESC] key Continue pressing

the [MENUESC] key until theInstallation menu appears

SIMULATION On

TEST LCD PATTERN MEMORY CLEAR

NMEA PORT InOutNMEA MIX OffGPS WAAS Off

SET BOTTOM LEVEL

Installation Menu

= Setting cannot be changed whenNMEA PORT setting is InIn

Installation menu

SIMULATION The simulation modeprovides without connection of thetransducer simulated operation of theequipment using internally generatedechoes All controls are operative Themessage ldquoSIMrdquo appears at the top rightcorner on the screen when thesimulation mode is active

1 At the installation menu press toopen the simulation mode optionswindow

2 Press to choose ldquoOnrdquo to turn onthe simulation mode

3 Press the [POWERBRILL] keyabout three seconds to turn off thepower

4 Press the [POWERBRILL] key toturn on the power ldquoSIMrdquo appears atthe top right corner of the display

5 To turn off the simulation modeselect Off at step 2

NMEA po r t se tup(NMEA PO RT NMEA M IX)

The POWER port can function as aninput port or inputoutput port Changethe setting to ldquoInInrdquo when connectingGP-310B320B and a wind sensor

When connecting the GP-310B320Band a wind sensor first turn on ldquoGPS

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4348

37

WAASrdquo (in the Installation menu) andthen select ldquoInInrdquo as the NMEA portsetting

1 Turn on the power while pressingand holding down the [MENUESC]key Continue pressing the[MENUESC] key until theInstallation menu appears

2 Choose NMEA PORT and thenpress to display the NMEA portoptions window

3 Use or to choose InOut orInIn as appropriate

InOut Input and Output (default

setting)InIn Input only (Available withconnection of the GP-310B320Band a wind sensor)

4 Press choose NMEA MIX andthen press to display the NMEAMIX options window

5 Use or to choose Off or OnChoose On to output input data

Off Outputs the data sentences ofLS-4100 only

On Outputs the data sentences ofLS-4100 and sentences which areinput from other equipment

6 To restore normal operation turn offthe power and then turn it on again

GPS WAAS Chooses how to use theWAAS signal when connecting with a

WAAS receiver for example GP-320B

Note WAAS is currently in thedevelopmental phase During thedevelopmental phase the reliability andavailability of the WAAS signal cannotbe guaranteed Therefore any positiondata should be verified against othersources to confirm reliability

1 Display the Installation menu2 Choose GPS WAAS and then press

to open the GPS WAAS options

window

Off

WAAS options window3 Press or to choose ldquoWAAS-02rdquo

(test signal) When the systembecomes operational (in 2003) setto ldquo00rdquo (regular WAAS signal)

4 Turn off the power

BOTTOM LEVEL If the depthindication is unstable in automaticoperation or the bottom echo cannot bedisplayed in the darkest gray tone byadjusting the gain controls in manualoperation you may adjust the bottomecho level detection circuit for both 50kHz and 200 kHz to stabilize theindication Generally lower the bottomlevel for inner hull installation where thereceive level is too low If the bottomlevel is too low it may be difficult todiscriminate fish from the bottomresulting in unstable depth indication

And if the bottom level is too high thedepth indication may not appear

1 At the installation menu press tochoose SET BOTTOM LEVEL andthen press Several seconds laterthe following display appears

Bottom level +0 (200k -100 - +100 ) +0 ( 50k -100 - +100 )

Bottom level display

2 While observing the picture use or to set 200 kHz or to set50 kHz Set up for optimum picture

3 To restore normal operation turn offthe power and then it on again

Note The mode must be other thanldquoNAV DATArdquo to show the bottom leveldisplay

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4448

SP - 1 E2371S01C

SPECIFICATIONS OF ECHO SOUNDER LS-4100

1 GENERAL11 TX Frequency 50 kHz or 200 kHz 50200 kHz dual transmitting selectable12 Transmit Method Single or dual transmitting

13 Output Power 300 Wrms14 TX Rate Max 500 pulsemin15 Pulse-length 01 to 08 ms

2 DISPLAY UNIT21 Display system 5-inch monochrome LCD 76 mm (W) x 100 mm (H) 240 x 320 dots22 Display Mode Single frequency (highlow freq) Dual-frequency Zoom Nav data-12

Marker zoom Bottom zoom Bottom-lock23 Display Range

Range SettingRange

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

Display

rangeMeter 5 10 20 40 80 150 200 300 2-500

Feet 15 30 60 120 200 400 600 1000 7-1500

Fathoms 3 5 10 20 40 80 100 150 1-250

PassiBraza 3 5 10 30 50 100 150 200 1-300

24 Range Shift 0-500 m 0-1500 ft 0-250 fa 0-300 pb25 Expansion Range Bottom-lock expansion 3 to 10 m

Sectional expansion 2 to 50 m26 Display Advance Speed 8 steps (LinesTX Freeze 1161814121121 41)

3 INTERFACE31 Input data sentences IEC61162-1NMEA0183 Ver 152030

GGA RMA RMB RMC BWC GLL HDT HDG VTG VHW MTWMWV MDA XTE

32 Output data sentences IEC61162-1NMEA0183 Ver 152030 interval 2 sMTW VHW DBT DPT RMB TLL by key operating External data required

4 POWER SUPPLY41 Display Unit 12 VDC 05 A

5 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITION51 Ambient Temperature Display unit -15degC to +55degC52 Relative Humidity 93 or less at 40degC53 Waterproof IPX5

6 COATING COLOR61 Display Unit N30

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4548

M a r

4

0 3

D-1

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4648

Mar 4 03

Mar 4 03

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4748

M a r

3

0 3

S-1

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4848

FURUNO Authorized DistributorDealer FURUNO Authorized DistributorDealer

9-52 Ashihara-cho9-52 Ashihara-choNishinomiya 662-8580 JAPANNishinomiya 662-8580 JAPAN

Telephone Telephone 0798-65-21110798-65-2111FaxFax 0798-65-42000798-65-4200

FIRST EDITION FIRST EDITION MARMAR 20032003Printed in JapanPrinted in Japan All rights reserved All rights reserved

B1B1 SEPSEP 09 200509 2005

Pub NoPub No OME-23710OME-23710 00014698000000146980000001469800000014698000(( DAMIDAMI )) LS-4100LS-4100

0 0 0 1 4 6 9 8 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 4 6 9 8 0 0 0

Page 23: OME23710B_1_LS4100

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 2348

17

4 Use or to choose Off Tone orMesh as appropriate ldquoMeshrdquo paintsthe white line in darker tone thanldquoTonerdquo

5 Press the [MENUESC] key to closethe menu

526White Line OFF White Line ON (Mesh)

Fish schoolclearly shown

White line

0

20

40

60

80

050k 11

526

0

20

40

60

80

00 050k 11

How white line works

DEEP GAIN

ldquoDeep Gainrdquo compensates forpropagation attenuation of the ultrasonicwaves It does this by equalizing echopresentation so that fish schools of thesame size appear in the same density inboth shallow and deep waters Inaddition it reduces surface noise

Press the [MENUESC] key to openthe main menu

2 Use or to choose DEEP GAINfrom page of the menu

3 Press $ to show to the optionswindow

4 Choose Low Medium or High asappropriate High provides thegreatest degree of gain reductionagainst short range echoes

5 Press the [MENUESC] key to closethe menu

Page 2

TRIP RESET

This item resets trip distance to ldquo0rdquo

Press the [MENUESC] key to openthe main menu

2 Use or to choose TRIPRESET from page 2 of the menu

3 Press $ 4 Press to reset trip distance

Beeps are generated while the tripdistance is being reset

5 Press the [MENUESC] key to closethe menu

Note To reset the odometer to zeroclear the memory

GAIN ADJ 200 GAIN ADJ 50

If the gain is too high or too low or thegain for the low and high frequenciesappears unbalanced you cancompensate it as follows

Press the [MENUESC] key to openthe main menu

2 Use or to choose GAIN ADJ200 or GAIN ADJ 50 from page 2 ofthe menu

3 Press $ to show to the optionswindow

4 Use or to set the amount Thesetting range is ndash50 to +50

5 Press the [MENUESC] key to close

the menu

DRAFT

The default depth display shows thedistance from the transducer If youwould rather show the distance from thesea surface set your shiprsquos draft asfollows

Press the [MENUESC] key to openthe main menu

2 Use or to choose DRAFT frompage 2 of the menu

3 Press $ and then use or to setdraft The setting range is ndash 50 to+500 (meters feet)

4 Press the [MENUESC] key to closethe menu

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 2448

18

2 SYSTEM MENU

The System menu mainly consists ofitems which once set do not requirefrequent adjustment You may displaythis menu by choosing SYSTEM MENUat page 2 of the main menu andpressing

SYSTEM MENULANGUAGE English

DEPTH UNIT ftSPEED UNIT ktWIND UNIT msTEMP UNIT deg F

TEMP GRAPH OffNAV DATA-1 NAV DATA-2

WATER TYPE SaltKEY BEEP OnBATT VOLTAGE Off (13)

[MENU] Exit

SYSTEM MENU

(23)

NAV DISPLAY TempSpeedNMEA0183 Ver 20TLL OUTPUT OffBEARING TrueWIND SPDDIR ApparentTRIP SOURCE Own

TEMP SOURCE OwnSPEED SOURCE OwnTEMP CALIB +00 deg F ( 40)SPEED CALIB +0 ( 50)

Own speed Own temp 100 kt 162 deg F

[MENU] Exit

SYSTEM MENU

(33)

BASIC RANGE1 15 ft

RANGE2 30RANGE3 60RANGE4 120RANGE5 200RANGE6 400RANGE7 600RANGE8 1000 (7-1500)

ZOOM RANGE 15 ft (7-150)BL RANGE 15 ft (10-30)(Bottom Lock)

ZOOM MARKER On

[MENU] Exit

PAGE 3

PAGE 2

PAGE 1

Page no

System menus

21 System MenuPage 1

LANGUAGE The system language isavailable in English several Europeanlanguages and Japanese To changelanguage select language desired andpress the [MENUESC] key

DEPTH UNIT Choose unit of depthmeasurement from meters feet

fathoms passibraza and hiro(Japanese)

SPEED UNIT Choose unit of speedmeasurement from knots miles perhour and kilometers per hour Requiresspeed data

WIND UNIT Choose unit of wind speedmeasurement from ms kt kmh and

mph Requires wind speed data

TEMP UNIT Choose unit oftemperature measurement Celsius orFahrenheit Requires temperature data

TEMP GRAPH Turns the watertemperature display on or off Thetemperature scale range is 16deg (degF) inldquoNarrowrdquo 40deg (degF) in ldquoWiderdquo Requires

water temperature data

m526

0

20

40

60

80

00 050k 11

40

80

70

50

60

TemperatureScale

TemperatureGraph

638 deg F162kt

Water temperature display (wide degF)

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 2548

19

NAV DATA-1 -2 Choose the number ofnavigation data items to display on thenav data displays from two three orfour items Requires appropriate navdata

WATER TYPE Choose the water typewith which to use the LS-4100 fromSalt or Fresh

KEY BEEP Turn key beep on or off

BATT VOLTAGE Turn the batteryvoltage indication (appears at the topright corner on the screen) on or offWhen on it replaces the picture advancespeed indication

Page 2

NAV DISPLAY Choose the nav data todisplay in the nav data window at thetop left-hand corner You may choosefrom temperaturespeedlatitudelongitude range and bearingcourse over ground trip distance or

wind speed Requires appropriate navdata

407 deg F162kt

Nav window

NMEA0183 Choose NMEA version ofnavigator Ver 15 Ver 20 or Ver 30

TLL OUTPUT Enablesdisables outputof TLL (Target Latitude Longitude)position when the [MARK] key isoperated ldquoTLLrdquo outputs latitude andlongitude position ldquoFURUNO-TLLrdquoavailable with connection of navigatorthat can output FURUNO TLL outputslatitude and longitude watertemperature depth etc

BEARING Shiprsquos course and bearingto a waypoint may be displayed in trueor magnetic bearing Magnetic bearingis true bearing plus (or minus) earthrsquosmagnetic deviation Requires bearingdata

WIND SPDDIR Choose the windspeed and direction reference from trueand apparent Requires wind sensorApparen t The direction (in relation toshiprsquos bow) and speed of the wind as itappears to those on board relative tothe speed and direction of the boatcombination of the true wind and thewind caused by the boats movementTrue The speed and direction (inrelation to shiprsquos bow) of the wind felt ormeasured when stationary

TRIP SOURCE Choose speed sourcefor the trip distance indication Own(transducer with speed sensor orseparate speed sensor) or NMEA

TEMP SOURCE Choose source ofwater temperature input Off Own(transducer with water temperaturesensor or separate temperature sensor)or NMEA

SPEED SOURCE Choose source ofspeed input Off Own (transducer withspeed sensor or separate speedsensor) or NMEA Requires speed

data

TEMP CALIB If the water temperaturesensor-generated water temperatureindication is wrong you can correct ithere when ldquoOwnrdquo is selected astemperature source For example if thewater temperature indication is 2deghigher than actual water temperatureenter -2 The setting range is -40degF to

+40degF

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 2648

20

SPEED CALIB If the speedsensor-generated speed indication iswrong you can correct it here whenldquoOwnrdquo is selected as speed source Forexample if the speed indication is 10lower than actual speed enter +10 Thesetting range is ndash50 to +50

Page 3

BASIC RANGE 1 - BASIC RANGE 8 Set range of each of the eight basicranges (Selectable range 7 to 1500 ft)Note 1 All default basic ranges arerestored whenever the depth unit ischanged Therefore change the depth

unit before changing the basic rangesNote 2 A range may not be lower thanthe range preceding it For example ifbasic range 3 is 60 feet basic range 4must be greater than 60 feet

ZOOM RANGE Choose the range tozoom in the marker-zoom andbottom-zoom modes You may choose arange between 7 and 150 feet (2 and 50

meters)

BL RANGE The expansion width forthe bottom-lock display can be chosenfrom 10 to 30 feet (3 and 10 meters)

ZOOM MARKER The zoom markerappears in the normal bottom markerand bottom zoom displays and marksthe area which is expanded in the

bottom marker and bottom zoompictures You can turn the marker on oroff as desired

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 2748

21

3 MAINTENANCETROUBLESHOOTING

W RNING

ELECTRICAL SHOCK HAZARDDo not open the equipment

Only qualified personnel should workinside the equipment

31 Maintenance

Regular maintenance is essential forgood performance Checking the itemslisted in the table below monthly willhelp keep your equipment in goodshape for years to come

Checking

Item Action

Transducercable

Check cable for damage

Power cabletransducercable plug

Check that they are tightlyfastened Refasten ifnecessary

Display unitground

Check for corrosion Cleanif necessary

Power supplyvoltage

Check voltage If out ofrating correct problem

32 Cleaning the DisplayUnit

Dust or dirt on the display unit can beremoved with a soft cloth If desired awater-moistened cloth may be usedUse special care when cleaning theLCD since it scratches easily Do notuse chemical cleaners to clean thedisplay unit - they can remove paint andmarkings

33 TransducerMaintenance

Marine life on the transducer face willresult in a gradual decrease insensitivity Check the transducer facefor cleanliness each time the boat isdry-docked Carefully remove anymarine life with a piece of wood orfine-grade sandpaper

34 Replacing the FuseThe fuse in the power cable protects thesystem from reverse polarity of thepower supply and equipment fault If thefuse blows find the cause beforereplacing it Use only a 1A fuse (FGMB 1A 125V Code No 000-114-805 ) orequivalent Using the wrong fuse will damage the unit and void the warranty

W RNINGUse the proper fuse

Fuse rating is shown on the equipmentUse of a wrong fuse can result in fire anddamage the equipment

35 Battery Voltage Alert A battery icon appears when the batteryvoltage is too high or too low

Battery icon and meaning

Icon Meaning

Voltage is lower than 10 VDC If thevoltage goes below 9 V the equipmentis automatically turned off

Voltage is higher than 165 VDC If thevoltage goes higher than 175 V theequipment is automatically turned off

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 2848

22

36 TroubleshootingThe table below provides basictroubleshooting procedures which theuser may follow to restore normaloperation

Troubleshooting table

Ifhellip Then check hellipneither echo norfixed range scaleappears

bull battery voltagebull fusebull power cable

no echo appearsbut the fixedrange scaleappears

bull if display advancespeed is set to ldquoStoprdquo

bull transducer plugbull

transducer cableecho appears butno zero line

bull if range shifting is setto ldquo0rdquo

sensitivity is low bull gain settingbull if air bubbles or marine

life is clinging to thetransducer face

bull if sediments arepresent in the water

bull if the bottom is too soft

to return an echothere is extremeinterference ornoise

bull if the transducer is tooclose to the engine

bull if the unit is properlygrounded

bull if other echo soundersof the same frequencyas own are beingoperated nearby

the speedwatertemperaturereadout isunrealistic or notpresent

bull sensor plug

the positionreadout isunrealistic or notpresent

bull the connectionbetween sounder andnavigator

bull navigator

37 DiagnosticsIf you feel your unit is not workingproperly conduct the diagnostic test tofind the problem If you cannot restorenormal operation contact your dealerfor advice

1 Turn on the power while pressing the[MENUESC] key Continue pressingthe [MENUESC] key until theInstallation menu appears

SIMULATION On

TEST LCD PATTERN MEMORY CLEAR

NMEA PORT InOutNMEA MIX Off GPS WAAS Off

SET BOTTOM LEVEL

Installation Menu

= Setting cannot be changed whenNMEA PORT setting is InIn

Installation menu2 Press to choose TEST3 Press to start the test

ROM OKRAM OKNMEA

Temp 682 deg F

Speed 100kmh

Power 124 VBody 39 deg C

Program No 0252318-01Push [MENU] 3 times to exit

Level bar

= Program version no

Water

TemperatureSpeedBattery VoltageTemperatureinside displayunit(Unit fixed atdeg C)

GPS (48502180) OK

Only when GP-310B is connected(For GP-320B 4850238)

Test display

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 2948

23

4 The ROM RAM and NMEA port arechecked with the results shown asOK or NG (No Good) For any NGrequest service (A special connectoris required to test the NMEA portNothing appears if no connector isconnected)

5 The squares at the right side of thetest display are for checking thecontrols Press each key and thearrows on the Cursor Pad one byone A controlrsquos correspondingon-screen square ldquolightsrdquo in black ifthe control is normal

6 To return to the Installation menupress the [MENUESC] key threetimes

7 To restore normal operation turn offthe power and turn it on again

38 Test PatternThis feature tests for proper display oftones

1 On the Installation menu press $ tochoose LCD PATTERN

2 Press to start the test The entirescreen is black

3 Press again and the screen turnswhite

4 Press again and the screenshows a four-toned display

5 Press again to return to theInstallation menu

6 To restore normal operation turn offthe power and then it on again

WHITE FOUR-TONE BLACK

Test patterns

39 Memory ClearThe memory can be cleared to startafresh with default menu settings

1 At the installation menu press $ tochoose MEMORY CLEAR

2 Press to open the optionswindow

YES NO

Clear memory display

3 Press to clear the memory Beepsare generated while the memory isbeing cleared

4 To restore normal operation turn offthe power and then turn it on again

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3048

24

4 INSTALLATION

41 Display UnitMounting considerations

The display unit can be installed on adesktop on the bulkhead or flushmounted in a panel When choosing alocation keep the following in mind

bull Keep the display unit out of directsunlight

bull The temperature and humidity should

be moderate and stablebull Locate the unit away from exhaust

pipes and ventsbull The mounting location should be well

ventilatedbull Mount the unit where shock and

vibration are minimalbull For maintenance and checking

purposes leave sufficient space atthe sides and rear of the unit andleave slack in cables

bull A magnetic compass will be affected ifthe display unit is placed too close toit Observe the following compasssafe distances to prevent disturbanceto the magnetic compassStandard compass 04 metersSteering compass 03 meters

Desktop overhead mounting1 Fix the bracket to a desktop or the

overhead with tapping screws(supplied)

2 Loosely screw knobs into the displayunit

3 Set the display unit to the bracketand then tighten the knobs

Mounting on the bulkhead Flush

mounting in a panelSee the instructions on the bulkhead orflush mounting template (supplied)

42 Thru-hull MountTransducer

Transducer mounting location

The thru-hull mount transducer

(520-5PSD 520-5MSD) provides thebest performance of all since thetransducer protrudes from the hull andthe effect of air bubbles and turbulencenear the hull skin is reduced When theboat has a keel the transducer shouldbe at least 30 cm away from it Typicalthru-hull mountings are shown in thefigure on the next page

The performance of this sounder isdirectly related to the mounting locationof the transducer especially forhigh-speed cruising The installationshould be planned in advance keepingthe standard cable length (8 m) and thefollowing factors in mindbull Air bubbles and turbulence caused by

movement of the boat seriouslydegrade the sounding capability of thetransducer The transducer shouldtherefore be located in a positionwhere water flow is the smoothestNoise from the propellers alsoadversely affects performance andthe transducer should not be mountednearby The lifting strakes arenotorious for creating acoustic noiseand these must be avoided bykeeping the transducer inboard ofthem

bull The transducer must always remain

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3148

25

submerged even when the boat isrolling pitching or up on a plane athigh speed

bull A practical choice would besomewhere between 13 and 12 of

the boatrsquos length from the stern Forplaning hulls a practical location isgenerally rather far astern so that thetransducer is always in waterregardless of the planing attitude

28

22

120

68

30

520-5PSD

24

120

68

87520-5MSD

Unit mm

Thru-hull mount transducer dimensions

Acceptable transducer mounting

locations

Position 12 to 13 of the hull from stern

15 to 30 cm off center line (inside first lifting strakes)

Within the wetted bottom area

Deadrise angle within 15 deg

HIGH SPEED-V HULL

Suitable transducer mounting locations

Typical thru-hull mounttransducer installations

FairingBlock

Flat Washer

Rubber Washer

Hull

Deep-V Hull

Hull

Flat Washer

Rubber Washer

Flat Hull

CorkWasher

Typical thru-hull mounttransducer installations

Procedure for installing thethru-hull mount transducer

1 With the boat hauled out of the watermark the location chosen formounting the transducer on thebottom of the hull

2 If the hull is not level within 15deg inany direction fairing blocks madeout of teak should be used betweenthe transducer and hull both insideand outside to keep the transducerface parallel with the water lineFabricate the fairing block as shownbelow and make the entire surfaceas smooth as possible to provide anundisturbed flow of water around thetransducer The fairing block shouldbe smaller than the transducer itselfto provide a channel to divert

turbulent water around the sides ofthe transducer rather than over itsface

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3248

26

BOWHole for stuffing tube

Upper Half

Lower Half

Saw along slopeof hull Construction of fairing block

3 Drill a hole just large enough to passthe threaded stuffing tube of thetransducer through the hull makingsure it is drilled vertically

4 Apply a sufficient amount of highquality caulking compound to the topsurface of the transducer around thethreads of the stuffing tube andinside the mounting hole (and fairingblocks if used) to ensure watertightmounting

5 Mount the transducer and fairingblocks and tighten the locking nutsBe sure that the transducer is

properly oriented and its workingface is parallel to the waterline

Note Do not over-stress the stuffingtube and locking nuts through excessivetightening since the wood block willswell when the boat is placed in thewater It is suggested that the nut betightened lightly at installation andretightened several days after the boat

has been launched

Transducer preparation

Before putting the boat in water wipethe face of the transducer thoroughlywith a detergent liquid soap This willlessen the time necessary for thetransducer to have good contact withthe water Otherwise the time requiredfor complete ldquosaturationrdquo ill belengthened and performance will bereduced

DO NOT paint the transducerPerformance will be affected

43 Transom MountTransducer

The transom mount transducer is verycommonly employed usually onrelatively small IO or outboard boatsDo not use this method on an inboardmotor boat because turbulence iscreated by the propeller ahead of thetransducer

520-5PWD

There are two methods of installationflush with hull (for flat hulls) andprojecting from hull (for deep V-hulls)

Flat Hull

D

Dgt50 cm

Deep-VHull

520-5PWD mounting locations

Installing the 520-5PWD on a flat hull

A suitable mounting location is at least50 cm away from the engine and wherethe water flow is smooth

1 Drill four pilot holes in the mountinglocation

2 Attach the transducer to the bracketwith 5 x 20 tapping screws(supplied)

3 Adjust the transducer position so thetransducer faces right to the bottom

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3348

27

Note If necessary to improve waterflow and minimize air bubblesstaying on the transducer faceincline the transducer about 5deg at therear This may require a certainamount of experimentation for finetuning at high cruising speeds

4 Fill the gap between the wedge frontof the transducer and transom withepoxy material to eliminate any airspaces

No1 M5 x 14

5 x 20

5 x 20

2 to 5

Tape

Hull

Transom mount transducer

mounting flush with hull

Installing the transom mounttransducer on a deep-V hull

This method is employed on deep-Vhulls and provides good performancebecause the effects of air bubbles areminimal Install the transducer parallelwith water surface not flush with hull Ifthe boat is placed on a trailer care mustbe taken not to damage the transducerwhen the boat is hauled out of the waterand put on the trailer

5 x 20

No 2M5 x 14

5 x 20

Transom mount transducermounted projecting from hull

525-5PWD

Choose the installation methoddepending on the rise angle of the hull

Transom

Transom

Stripe over 10

Parallel with hull

Mount at the stripe

less than 10

525-5PWD mounting location

Installing the 525-5PWD

Referring to ldquoInstalling the 520-5PWDrdquoin the left column for mounting of thebracket and the figure shown on the topof next page install the 525-5PWD tothe transom

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3448

28

2 to 5

Transducer

Bracket

Hull

Epoxy material

525-5PWD mounting

44 Inside-hullTransducer

The thru-hull mount transducer(520-5PSD 520-5MSD) may also beinstalled inside the hull following theprocedure below

Necessary tools

You will need the following toolsbull Sandpaper (100)bull Silicone sealantbull Silicone grease

Remarks on installationbull Turn off the engine and anchor the

boat while installing the equipmentbull Install the transducer in the engine

room

Choosing the mounting locationbull The mounting location should be

where the hull is of single-hullthickness and is void of air or flotationmaterials other than solid fiberglassbetween the transducer face and thewater

bull Do not place the transducer over hullstruts or ribs which run under the hull

bull Avoid a location where the risingangle of the hull exceeds 15deg tominimize the effect of the boatrsquosrolling

bull You will finalize the mounting location

through some trial and error Theprocedure for this is shown later

50 cm

50 cm15 cm15 cm

13

12

Transducer mountinglocation

Centerline

Inside-hull transducer mounting location

Attaching the transducer1 Clean the transducer face to remove

any foreign material Lightly roughenthe transducer face with 100sandpaper Also roughen the insideof the hull where the transducer is tobe mounted

2 Clean the transducer face again3 Warm the silicone sealant to 40degC

before usage to soften it Coat thetransducer face and mountinglocation with silicone sealant

Transducer

SiliconeSealant

Coating transducer facewith silicone sealant

4 Press the transducer firmly down onthe hull and gently twist it back andforth to remove any air which may betrapped in the silicone sealant

Checking the installation

1 Connect the battery to the display

unit2 Turn on the display unit

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3548

29

3 Press the [MODE] key to chooseSINGLE FREQ

4 Choose 50 kHz or 200 kHz and thenpress the [MENUESC] key to closethe mode menu

5 Press the [MENU] to show the mainmenu and then press to select

Auto mode6 Press to choose Off7 Press the [MENUESC] key8 Press the [GAIN] key to set the gain

to ldquo5rdquo and then press the[MENUESC] key

9 Press the [RANGE] key to set therange to 10 meters (feet) and thenpress the [MENUESC] key

10 If the bottom is displayed in darkgray and the depth indicationappears the mounting location issuitable Go to ldquoFinal preparationrdquo

11 If the bottom is not displayed in darkgray tone the mounting location maybe unsuitable Do the followinga) Press the [POWERBRILL] key to

turn off the powerb) Gently dismount the transducer

with a piece of woodc) Reattach the transducer

elsewhere as shown in ldquoAttachingthe transducerrdquo

d) Check the installation again

Final preparation

Support the transducer with a piece ofwood to keep it in place while it is drying

Let the transducer dry 24-72 hours

45 Optional Triducer525ST-MSD

The optional triducer 525ST-MSD isdesigned for thru-hull mounting Forhow to install this transducer seeparagraph 42

φ79 mm

33 mm200-12 UNthreads

φ51 mm

27 mm

7 mm

140 mm Triducer 525ST-MSD

525ST-PWD

The Transom Mount Transducer orTRIDUCER reg Multisensor with IntegralRelease Bracket 525ST-PWD ismanufactured by AIRMAR Co Theseinstructions are also included with the

sensor

Pre-test for speed and temperature

Connect the sensor to the instrumentand spin the paddlewheel Check for aspeed reading and the approximate airtemperature If there is no readingreturn the sensor to your place ofpurchase

Tools and materials needed

ScissorsMasking tapeSafety gogglesDust maskElectric drillDrill bit for

Bracket holes 4mm 23 or 964rdquoFiberglass hull chamfer bit(preferred)6mm or 14rdquo

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3648

30

Transom hole 19mm or 34rdquo(optional)

Cable clamp holes 3mm or 18rdquoScrewdriversStraight edgeMarine sealantPencilZip-tiesWater-based antifouling paint(mandatory in salt water )

Mounting location

To ensure the best performance thesensor must be submerged inaeration-free and turbulence-free water

Mount the sensor close to the centerlineof the boat On slower heavierdisplacement hulls positioning it fartherfrom the centerline is acceptable

Allow adequate space above thebracket for it to release and rotate thesensor upward

Height

Height withoutspeed sensor191mm (7-12)Height withspeed sensor213mm (8-12)

Height required at mounting location

Note 1 Do not mount the sensor in anarea of turbulence or bubbles nearwater intake or discharge openingsbehind strakes struts fittings or hull

irregularities behind eroding paint (anindication of turbulence)Note 2 Avoid mounting the sensorwhere the boat may be supportedduring trailering launching hauling andstorageNote 3 For single drive boat mounton the starboard side at least 75 mm(3rdquo) beyond the swing radius of thepropeller

75 mm(3)

minimum beyondswing radius

Mounting location on single drive boat

Note 4 For twin drive boat mountbetween the drives

Installation of bracket

1 Cut out the installation template

shown on the next page2 At the selected location position thetemplate so the arrow at the bottomis aligned with the bottom edge ofthe transom Being sure the templateis parallel to the waterline tape it inplace

Align template vertically

Deadrise angle

Slope of hullparallel towaterline

Align template arrow withbottom edge of transom

Positioning the template

Warning Always wear safetygoggles and a dust mask

3 Using a 4 mm 23 or 964rdquo bit drillthree holes 22 mm (78rdquo) deepat the locations indicated To preventdrilling too deeply wrap maskingtape around the bit 22 mm (78rdquo)from the pointFiberglass hull Minimize surfacecracking by chamfering the gelcoatIf a chamfer bit or countersink bit is

not available start drilling with a6mm or 14rdquo bit to a depth of 1 mm(116rdquo)

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3748

31

4 If you know your transom angle the

bracket is designed for a standard13deg transom angle11deg-18deg angle No shim is requiredSkip to step 3 in ldquoAdjustingrdquoOther angles The shim is requiredSkip to step 2 of ldquoAdjustingrdquoIf you do not know the transom angletemporarily attach the bracket andsensor to the transom to determine ifthe plastic shim is needed

5 Using the two 10 x 1-14rdquo

self-tapping screws temporarilyscrew the bracket to the hull DONOT tighten the screws completelyat this time Follow the step 1-4 inldquoAttaching the Sensor to the Bracketrdquobefore proceeding with ldquoAdjustingrdquo

Installation templatefor starboard side of boat

Drill at locations labeled Bfor the following transom angles

16 deg through 22 deg

Drill at locations labeled Afor the following transom angles

2 deg through 15 deg

Align arrow with bottom of transom

AA A

BB B

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3848

32

Adjusting

1 Using a straight edge sight theunderside of the sensor relative tothe underside of the hull The sternof the sensor should be 1-3 mm

(116-18rdquo) below the bow of thesensor or parallel to the bottom ofthe hull

11 deg transom angleNO SHIM

12-18 deg transom angleNO SHIM

2 deg -10 deg transom

angle

19 deg -22 deg transom

angleshim withtaper up

shim withtaper down

parallelparallel parallel

slightangle

angletoo steep

anglereversed

YES NONO

YES YESYES

Sensor position and transom angle

Note Do not position the bow of thesensor lower than the stern becauseaeration will occur

2 To adjust the sensorrsquos angle relativeto the hull use the tapered plasticshim provided If the bracket hasbeen temporarily fastened to thetransom remove it Key the shim in

place on the back of the bracket2deg-10deg transom angle (steppedtransom and jet boats) Positionthe shim with the tapered end down19deg-22deg transom angle (smallaluminum and fiberglass boats) Position the shim with the taperedend up

3 If the bracket has been temporarilyfastened to the transom remove it

Apply a marine sealant to thethreads of the two 10 x 1-14rdquo self

tapping screws to prevent waterseeping into the transom Screw thebracket to the hull Do not tighten thescrews completely at this time

4 Repeat step 1 to ensure that theangle of the sensor is correctNote Do not position the sensorfarther into the water than necessaryto avoid increasing drag spray andwater noise and reducing boatspeed

5 Using the vertical adjustment spaceon the bracket slots slide the sensorup or down to provide a projection of3 mm (18rdquo) Tighten the screws

Cable cover

Cableclamp

50 mm (2)

Hull projection 3 mm (18)

Vertical adjustment and cable routing

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3948

33

Attaching the sensor to the bracket

1 If the retaining cover near the top ofthe bracket is closed open it bydepressing the latch and rotating thecover downward

Step 1 Step 2

Latch

Retainingcover

Pivotarm (2)

Slot (2)

Step 4

Step 3

Attaching the sensor to the bracket

2 Insert the sensorrsquos pivot arms intothe slots near the top of the bracket

3 Maintain pressure until the pivotarms click into place

4 Rotate the sensor downward until thebottom snaps into the bracket

5 Close the retaining cover to preventthe accidental release of the sensorwhen the boat is underway

Cable routing

Route the sensor cable over thetransom through a drain hole orthorough a new hole drilled in thetransom above the waterline

Never cut the cable or remote the

connector this will void the warranty Always wear safety goggles and a dustmask

1 If a hole must be drilled choose alocation well above the waterlineCheck for obstructions such as trimtabs pumps or wiring inside the hullMark the location with a pencil Drilla hole through the transom using a19 mm or 34rdquo bit (to accommodatethe connector)

2 Route the cable over or through thetransom

3 On the outside of the hull secure thecable against the transom using thecable clamps Position a cable clamp50 mm(2rdquo) above the bracket andmark the mounting hole with apencil

4 Position the second cable clamphalfway between the first clamp andthe cable hole Mark this mountinghole

5 If a hole has been drilled in thetransom open the appropriate slot inthe transom cable cover Position thecover over the cable where it entersthe hull Mark the two mounting

holes6 At each of the marked locations usea 3 mm or 18rdquo bit to drill a hole 10mm (38rdquo) deep The prevent drillingtoo deeply wrap masking tapearound the bit 10 mm (38rdquo) from thepoint

7 Apply marine sealant to the threadsof the 6 x 12rdquo self-tapping screw toprevent water from seeping into the

transom If you have drilled a holethrough the transom apply marinesealant to the space around thecable where it passes through thetransom

8 Position the two cable clamps andfasten them in place If used pushthe cable cover over the cable andscrew it in place

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4048

34

9 Route the cable to the instrumentbeing careful not to tear the cable

jacket when passing it though thebulkhead(s) and other parts of theboat To reduce electricalinterference separate the sensorcable from other electrical wiring andldquonoiserdquo sources Coil any excesscable and secure it in place withzip-ties to prevent damage

46 Optional WaterTemperatureSpeedSensor

Water temperaturespeed sensorST-02MSB and ST-02PSB which aredesigned for thru-hull mounting areoptionally available Install them asshown below

Mounting considerations

Choose a suitable mounting locationconsidering the followingbull Choose a place free from vibrationbull Choose a mid-boat flat position The

sensor does not have to be installedperfectly perpendicular The sensormust not be damaged in dry-dockingoperation

bull Choose a place apart from equipmentgenerating heat

bull Choose a place in the forwarddirection viewing from the drain holeto allow for circulation of coolingwater

1 Dry-dock the boat2 Make a hole of approx 51 mm

diameter in the mounting location3 Unfasten locknut and remove the

sensor section4 Apply high-grade sealant to the

flange of the sensor5 Pass the sensor casing through thehole

6 Face the notch on the sensor towardboatrsquos bow and tighten the flange

7 Set the sensor section to the sensorcasing and tighten the locknut

8 Launch the boat and check for waterleakage around the sensor

Locknut

Face notchtoward bow

Flange Nut

Coat withsilicone sealant Brim

φ 77

51

123

Water temperaturespeed sensor

ST-02MSB ST-02PSB

47 Wiring

Connect the LS-4100 powerdata cableassy MJ-A7SPF0005-020 (2 msupplied) to the POWER and thetransducer cable to the XDR connectorRefer to the interconnection diagram toconnect cables Leave slack in cables tofacilitate checking and maintenance

Note The fuse holder contains a springwhich fixes the fuse To preventdetachment of the spring which wouldcause loss of power tie the line asshown below

+ line (red)

Fuse holder

Cable tie How to fix fuse holder

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4148

35

Establishing the ground

The ground wire (125 sq or more localsupply) should be as short as possible

The signal line ground is isolated from

the chassis ground however the powerline is not insulated Therefore whenconnecting eternal equipment havingpositive ground do not ground thesignal line to the chassis If excessivenoise shows on the screen the groundmay be inadequate In this case attacha steel plate measuring 20 cm by 30 cmon the outside of the hull to provide aground point Connect the ground wire

there Use a ldquoclosedrdquo type lug ( ) tomake the connection at the display unitDo not use an ldquoopenrdquo type lug ( )

Optional equipment

POWER connector

The power supply port is commonlyused for connection of externalequipment such as a GPS receiver orwind indicator Use the powerdatacable MJ-A7SPF0005-020 (supplied) forconnection referring the figure shown inthe right column

Connector Color Remarks

1 TD-A WHT2 TD-B BLU

IEC-61162-1NMEA0183

3 RD-A YEL

4 RD-B GRN

IEC-61162-1

NMEA01835 + RED

6 - BLKPower input12 VDC

7 FG

Water tempspeed sensor

Connect the optional water tempspeedsensor to the XDR connector with theoptional converter connector (Type02S4147) as shown below

Tape connectors withvulcaninzing tapeand then vinyl tapeto waterproof themBind tape ends withcable ties to preventtape from unraveling

Connect to XDR portat rear of display unit

MJ-A10SPF

MJ-A10SRMDMJ-A6SRMD

Fromtransducer

Fromsensor

Connection of converterconnector 02S4147

48 IEC 61162-1 DataSentences

The tables below show the datasentences which can be input to andoutput from the LS-4100 Thetransmission speed for both input andoutput is 4800 bps Data is output attwo-second intervals

Input data sentences

Sentence Meaning

BWC Bearing and distance towaypoint

GGA Global positioning system(GPS) fix data

GLL Geographic position -latitudelongitude

HDG Heading deviation and variationHDT Heading true

MDA Atmospheric pressure

MTW Water temperature

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4248

36

Input data sentences (conrsquot)

Sentence MeaningMWV Wind speed and

angleRMA Recommended

minimum specificLORAN-C dataRMB Recommended

minimum navigationinformation

RMC Recommendedminimum specificGPSTRANSIT data

VHW Water speed andheading

VTG Course over groundand ground speedXTE Cross track error

Output data sentences

Sentence MeaningDBT (Ver 15) Depth below

transducerDPT (Ver 20 Ver30)

Depth

MTW Water temperatureRMB (Ver 20) Recommended

minimumnavigationinformation

VHW Water speed andheading

TLL Target positionoutput by [MARK]key

= Available with connection of optionalsensorsnavaid

49 Installation MenuThe installation menu mainly containsitems which are set at installation

1 Turn on the power while pressing the[MENUESC] key Continue pressing

the [MENUESC] key until theInstallation menu appears

SIMULATION On

TEST LCD PATTERN MEMORY CLEAR

NMEA PORT InOutNMEA MIX OffGPS WAAS Off

SET BOTTOM LEVEL

Installation Menu

= Setting cannot be changed whenNMEA PORT setting is InIn

Installation menu

SIMULATION The simulation modeprovides without connection of thetransducer simulated operation of theequipment using internally generatedechoes All controls are operative Themessage ldquoSIMrdquo appears at the top rightcorner on the screen when thesimulation mode is active

1 At the installation menu press toopen the simulation mode optionswindow

2 Press to choose ldquoOnrdquo to turn onthe simulation mode

3 Press the [POWERBRILL] keyabout three seconds to turn off thepower

4 Press the [POWERBRILL] key toturn on the power ldquoSIMrdquo appears atthe top right corner of the display

5 To turn off the simulation modeselect Off at step 2

NMEA po r t se tup(NMEA PO RT NMEA M IX)

The POWER port can function as aninput port or inputoutput port Changethe setting to ldquoInInrdquo when connectingGP-310B320B and a wind sensor

When connecting the GP-310B320Band a wind sensor first turn on ldquoGPS

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4348

37

WAASrdquo (in the Installation menu) andthen select ldquoInInrdquo as the NMEA portsetting

1 Turn on the power while pressingand holding down the [MENUESC]key Continue pressing the[MENUESC] key until theInstallation menu appears

2 Choose NMEA PORT and thenpress to display the NMEA portoptions window

3 Use or to choose InOut orInIn as appropriate

InOut Input and Output (default

setting)InIn Input only (Available withconnection of the GP-310B320Band a wind sensor)

4 Press choose NMEA MIX andthen press to display the NMEAMIX options window

5 Use or to choose Off or OnChoose On to output input data

Off Outputs the data sentences ofLS-4100 only

On Outputs the data sentences ofLS-4100 and sentences which areinput from other equipment

6 To restore normal operation turn offthe power and then turn it on again

GPS WAAS Chooses how to use theWAAS signal when connecting with a

WAAS receiver for example GP-320B

Note WAAS is currently in thedevelopmental phase During thedevelopmental phase the reliability andavailability of the WAAS signal cannotbe guaranteed Therefore any positiondata should be verified against othersources to confirm reliability

1 Display the Installation menu2 Choose GPS WAAS and then press

to open the GPS WAAS options

window

Off

WAAS options window3 Press or to choose ldquoWAAS-02rdquo

(test signal) When the systembecomes operational (in 2003) setto ldquo00rdquo (regular WAAS signal)

4 Turn off the power

BOTTOM LEVEL If the depthindication is unstable in automaticoperation or the bottom echo cannot bedisplayed in the darkest gray tone byadjusting the gain controls in manualoperation you may adjust the bottomecho level detection circuit for both 50kHz and 200 kHz to stabilize theindication Generally lower the bottomlevel for inner hull installation where thereceive level is too low If the bottomlevel is too low it may be difficult todiscriminate fish from the bottomresulting in unstable depth indication

And if the bottom level is too high thedepth indication may not appear

1 At the installation menu press tochoose SET BOTTOM LEVEL andthen press Several seconds laterthe following display appears

Bottom level +0 (200k -100 - +100 ) +0 ( 50k -100 - +100 )

Bottom level display

2 While observing the picture use or to set 200 kHz or to set50 kHz Set up for optimum picture

3 To restore normal operation turn offthe power and then it on again

Note The mode must be other thanldquoNAV DATArdquo to show the bottom leveldisplay

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4448

SP - 1 E2371S01C

SPECIFICATIONS OF ECHO SOUNDER LS-4100

1 GENERAL11 TX Frequency 50 kHz or 200 kHz 50200 kHz dual transmitting selectable12 Transmit Method Single or dual transmitting

13 Output Power 300 Wrms14 TX Rate Max 500 pulsemin15 Pulse-length 01 to 08 ms

2 DISPLAY UNIT21 Display system 5-inch monochrome LCD 76 mm (W) x 100 mm (H) 240 x 320 dots22 Display Mode Single frequency (highlow freq) Dual-frequency Zoom Nav data-12

Marker zoom Bottom zoom Bottom-lock23 Display Range

Range SettingRange

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

Display

rangeMeter 5 10 20 40 80 150 200 300 2-500

Feet 15 30 60 120 200 400 600 1000 7-1500

Fathoms 3 5 10 20 40 80 100 150 1-250

PassiBraza 3 5 10 30 50 100 150 200 1-300

24 Range Shift 0-500 m 0-1500 ft 0-250 fa 0-300 pb25 Expansion Range Bottom-lock expansion 3 to 10 m

Sectional expansion 2 to 50 m26 Display Advance Speed 8 steps (LinesTX Freeze 1161814121121 41)

3 INTERFACE31 Input data sentences IEC61162-1NMEA0183 Ver 152030

GGA RMA RMB RMC BWC GLL HDT HDG VTG VHW MTWMWV MDA XTE

32 Output data sentences IEC61162-1NMEA0183 Ver 152030 interval 2 sMTW VHW DBT DPT RMB TLL by key operating External data required

4 POWER SUPPLY41 Display Unit 12 VDC 05 A

5 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITION51 Ambient Temperature Display unit -15degC to +55degC52 Relative Humidity 93 or less at 40degC53 Waterproof IPX5

6 COATING COLOR61 Display Unit N30

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4548

M a r

4

0 3

D-1

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4648

Mar 4 03

Mar 4 03

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4748

M a r

3

0 3

S-1

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4848

FURUNO Authorized DistributorDealer FURUNO Authorized DistributorDealer

9-52 Ashihara-cho9-52 Ashihara-choNishinomiya 662-8580 JAPANNishinomiya 662-8580 JAPAN

Telephone Telephone 0798-65-21110798-65-2111FaxFax 0798-65-42000798-65-4200

FIRST EDITION FIRST EDITION MARMAR 20032003Printed in JapanPrinted in Japan All rights reserved All rights reserved

B1B1 SEPSEP 09 200509 2005

Pub NoPub No OME-23710OME-23710 00014698000000146980000001469800000014698000(( DAMIDAMI )) LS-4100LS-4100

0 0 0 1 4 6 9 8 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 4 6 9 8 0 0 0

Page 24: OME23710B_1_LS4100

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 2448

18

2 SYSTEM MENU

The System menu mainly consists ofitems which once set do not requirefrequent adjustment You may displaythis menu by choosing SYSTEM MENUat page 2 of the main menu andpressing

SYSTEM MENULANGUAGE English

DEPTH UNIT ftSPEED UNIT ktWIND UNIT msTEMP UNIT deg F

TEMP GRAPH OffNAV DATA-1 NAV DATA-2

WATER TYPE SaltKEY BEEP OnBATT VOLTAGE Off (13)

[MENU] Exit

SYSTEM MENU

(23)

NAV DISPLAY TempSpeedNMEA0183 Ver 20TLL OUTPUT OffBEARING TrueWIND SPDDIR ApparentTRIP SOURCE Own

TEMP SOURCE OwnSPEED SOURCE OwnTEMP CALIB +00 deg F ( 40)SPEED CALIB +0 ( 50)

Own speed Own temp 100 kt 162 deg F

[MENU] Exit

SYSTEM MENU

(33)

BASIC RANGE1 15 ft

RANGE2 30RANGE3 60RANGE4 120RANGE5 200RANGE6 400RANGE7 600RANGE8 1000 (7-1500)

ZOOM RANGE 15 ft (7-150)BL RANGE 15 ft (10-30)(Bottom Lock)

ZOOM MARKER On

[MENU] Exit

PAGE 3

PAGE 2

PAGE 1

Page no

System menus

21 System MenuPage 1

LANGUAGE The system language isavailable in English several Europeanlanguages and Japanese To changelanguage select language desired andpress the [MENUESC] key

DEPTH UNIT Choose unit of depthmeasurement from meters feet

fathoms passibraza and hiro(Japanese)

SPEED UNIT Choose unit of speedmeasurement from knots miles perhour and kilometers per hour Requiresspeed data

WIND UNIT Choose unit of wind speedmeasurement from ms kt kmh and

mph Requires wind speed data

TEMP UNIT Choose unit oftemperature measurement Celsius orFahrenheit Requires temperature data

TEMP GRAPH Turns the watertemperature display on or off Thetemperature scale range is 16deg (degF) inldquoNarrowrdquo 40deg (degF) in ldquoWiderdquo Requires

water temperature data

m526

0

20

40

60

80

00 050k 11

40

80

70

50

60

TemperatureScale

TemperatureGraph

638 deg F162kt

Water temperature display (wide degF)

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 2548

19

NAV DATA-1 -2 Choose the number ofnavigation data items to display on thenav data displays from two three orfour items Requires appropriate navdata

WATER TYPE Choose the water typewith which to use the LS-4100 fromSalt or Fresh

KEY BEEP Turn key beep on or off

BATT VOLTAGE Turn the batteryvoltage indication (appears at the topright corner on the screen) on or offWhen on it replaces the picture advancespeed indication

Page 2

NAV DISPLAY Choose the nav data todisplay in the nav data window at thetop left-hand corner You may choosefrom temperaturespeedlatitudelongitude range and bearingcourse over ground trip distance or

wind speed Requires appropriate navdata

407 deg F162kt

Nav window

NMEA0183 Choose NMEA version ofnavigator Ver 15 Ver 20 or Ver 30

TLL OUTPUT Enablesdisables outputof TLL (Target Latitude Longitude)position when the [MARK] key isoperated ldquoTLLrdquo outputs latitude andlongitude position ldquoFURUNO-TLLrdquoavailable with connection of navigatorthat can output FURUNO TLL outputslatitude and longitude watertemperature depth etc

BEARING Shiprsquos course and bearingto a waypoint may be displayed in trueor magnetic bearing Magnetic bearingis true bearing plus (or minus) earthrsquosmagnetic deviation Requires bearingdata

WIND SPDDIR Choose the windspeed and direction reference from trueand apparent Requires wind sensorApparen t The direction (in relation toshiprsquos bow) and speed of the wind as itappears to those on board relative tothe speed and direction of the boatcombination of the true wind and thewind caused by the boats movementTrue The speed and direction (inrelation to shiprsquos bow) of the wind felt ormeasured when stationary

TRIP SOURCE Choose speed sourcefor the trip distance indication Own(transducer with speed sensor orseparate speed sensor) or NMEA

TEMP SOURCE Choose source ofwater temperature input Off Own(transducer with water temperaturesensor or separate temperature sensor)or NMEA

SPEED SOURCE Choose source ofspeed input Off Own (transducer withspeed sensor or separate speedsensor) or NMEA Requires speed

data

TEMP CALIB If the water temperaturesensor-generated water temperatureindication is wrong you can correct ithere when ldquoOwnrdquo is selected astemperature source For example if thewater temperature indication is 2deghigher than actual water temperatureenter -2 The setting range is -40degF to

+40degF

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 2648

20

SPEED CALIB If the speedsensor-generated speed indication iswrong you can correct it here whenldquoOwnrdquo is selected as speed source Forexample if the speed indication is 10lower than actual speed enter +10 Thesetting range is ndash50 to +50

Page 3

BASIC RANGE 1 - BASIC RANGE 8 Set range of each of the eight basicranges (Selectable range 7 to 1500 ft)Note 1 All default basic ranges arerestored whenever the depth unit ischanged Therefore change the depth

unit before changing the basic rangesNote 2 A range may not be lower thanthe range preceding it For example ifbasic range 3 is 60 feet basic range 4must be greater than 60 feet

ZOOM RANGE Choose the range tozoom in the marker-zoom andbottom-zoom modes You may choose arange between 7 and 150 feet (2 and 50

meters)

BL RANGE The expansion width forthe bottom-lock display can be chosenfrom 10 to 30 feet (3 and 10 meters)

ZOOM MARKER The zoom markerappears in the normal bottom markerand bottom zoom displays and marksthe area which is expanded in the

bottom marker and bottom zoompictures You can turn the marker on oroff as desired

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 2748

21

3 MAINTENANCETROUBLESHOOTING

W RNING

ELECTRICAL SHOCK HAZARDDo not open the equipment

Only qualified personnel should workinside the equipment

31 Maintenance

Regular maintenance is essential forgood performance Checking the itemslisted in the table below monthly willhelp keep your equipment in goodshape for years to come

Checking

Item Action

Transducercable

Check cable for damage

Power cabletransducercable plug

Check that they are tightlyfastened Refasten ifnecessary

Display unitground

Check for corrosion Cleanif necessary

Power supplyvoltage

Check voltage If out ofrating correct problem

32 Cleaning the DisplayUnit

Dust or dirt on the display unit can beremoved with a soft cloth If desired awater-moistened cloth may be usedUse special care when cleaning theLCD since it scratches easily Do notuse chemical cleaners to clean thedisplay unit - they can remove paint andmarkings

33 TransducerMaintenance

Marine life on the transducer face willresult in a gradual decrease insensitivity Check the transducer facefor cleanliness each time the boat isdry-docked Carefully remove anymarine life with a piece of wood orfine-grade sandpaper

34 Replacing the FuseThe fuse in the power cable protects thesystem from reverse polarity of thepower supply and equipment fault If thefuse blows find the cause beforereplacing it Use only a 1A fuse (FGMB 1A 125V Code No 000-114-805 ) orequivalent Using the wrong fuse will damage the unit and void the warranty

W RNINGUse the proper fuse

Fuse rating is shown on the equipmentUse of a wrong fuse can result in fire anddamage the equipment

35 Battery Voltage Alert A battery icon appears when the batteryvoltage is too high or too low

Battery icon and meaning

Icon Meaning

Voltage is lower than 10 VDC If thevoltage goes below 9 V the equipmentis automatically turned off

Voltage is higher than 165 VDC If thevoltage goes higher than 175 V theequipment is automatically turned off

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 2848

22

36 TroubleshootingThe table below provides basictroubleshooting procedures which theuser may follow to restore normaloperation

Troubleshooting table

Ifhellip Then check hellipneither echo norfixed range scaleappears

bull battery voltagebull fusebull power cable

no echo appearsbut the fixedrange scaleappears

bull if display advancespeed is set to ldquoStoprdquo

bull transducer plugbull

transducer cableecho appears butno zero line

bull if range shifting is setto ldquo0rdquo

sensitivity is low bull gain settingbull if air bubbles or marine

life is clinging to thetransducer face

bull if sediments arepresent in the water

bull if the bottom is too soft

to return an echothere is extremeinterference ornoise

bull if the transducer is tooclose to the engine

bull if the unit is properlygrounded

bull if other echo soundersof the same frequencyas own are beingoperated nearby

the speedwatertemperaturereadout isunrealistic or notpresent

bull sensor plug

the positionreadout isunrealistic or notpresent

bull the connectionbetween sounder andnavigator

bull navigator

37 DiagnosticsIf you feel your unit is not workingproperly conduct the diagnostic test tofind the problem If you cannot restorenormal operation contact your dealerfor advice

1 Turn on the power while pressing the[MENUESC] key Continue pressingthe [MENUESC] key until theInstallation menu appears

SIMULATION On

TEST LCD PATTERN MEMORY CLEAR

NMEA PORT InOutNMEA MIX Off GPS WAAS Off

SET BOTTOM LEVEL

Installation Menu

= Setting cannot be changed whenNMEA PORT setting is InIn

Installation menu2 Press to choose TEST3 Press to start the test

ROM OKRAM OKNMEA

Temp 682 deg F

Speed 100kmh

Power 124 VBody 39 deg C

Program No 0252318-01Push [MENU] 3 times to exit

Level bar

= Program version no

Water

TemperatureSpeedBattery VoltageTemperatureinside displayunit(Unit fixed atdeg C)

GPS (48502180) OK

Only when GP-310B is connected(For GP-320B 4850238)

Test display

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 2948

23

4 The ROM RAM and NMEA port arechecked with the results shown asOK or NG (No Good) For any NGrequest service (A special connectoris required to test the NMEA portNothing appears if no connector isconnected)

5 The squares at the right side of thetest display are for checking thecontrols Press each key and thearrows on the Cursor Pad one byone A controlrsquos correspondingon-screen square ldquolightsrdquo in black ifthe control is normal

6 To return to the Installation menupress the [MENUESC] key threetimes

7 To restore normal operation turn offthe power and turn it on again

38 Test PatternThis feature tests for proper display oftones

1 On the Installation menu press $ tochoose LCD PATTERN

2 Press to start the test The entirescreen is black

3 Press again and the screen turnswhite

4 Press again and the screenshows a four-toned display

5 Press again to return to theInstallation menu

6 To restore normal operation turn offthe power and then it on again

WHITE FOUR-TONE BLACK

Test patterns

39 Memory ClearThe memory can be cleared to startafresh with default menu settings

1 At the installation menu press $ tochoose MEMORY CLEAR

2 Press to open the optionswindow

YES NO

Clear memory display

3 Press to clear the memory Beepsare generated while the memory isbeing cleared

4 To restore normal operation turn offthe power and then turn it on again

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3048

24

4 INSTALLATION

41 Display UnitMounting considerations

The display unit can be installed on adesktop on the bulkhead or flushmounted in a panel When choosing alocation keep the following in mind

bull Keep the display unit out of directsunlight

bull The temperature and humidity should

be moderate and stablebull Locate the unit away from exhaust

pipes and ventsbull The mounting location should be well

ventilatedbull Mount the unit where shock and

vibration are minimalbull For maintenance and checking

purposes leave sufficient space atthe sides and rear of the unit andleave slack in cables

bull A magnetic compass will be affected ifthe display unit is placed too close toit Observe the following compasssafe distances to prevent disturbanceto the magnetic compassStandard compass 04 metersSteering compass 03 meters

Desktop overhead mounting1 Fix the bracket to a desktop or the

overhead with tapping screws(supplied)

2 Loosely screw knobs into the displayunit

3 Set the display unit to the bracketand then tighten the knobs

Mounting on the bulkhead Flush

mounting in a panelSee the instructions on the bulkhead orflush mounting template (supplied)

42 Thru-hull MountTransducer

Transducer mounting location

The thru-hull mount transducer

(520-5PSD 520-5MSD) provides thebest performance of all since thetransducer protrudes from the hull andthe effect of air bubbles and turbulencenear the hull skin is reduced When theboat has a keel the transducer shouldbe at least 30 cm away from it Typicalthru-hull mountings are shown in thefigure on the next page

The performance of this sounder isdirectly related to the mounting locationof the transducer especially forhigh-speed cruising The installationshould be planned in advance keepingthe standard cable length (8 m) and thefollowing factors in mindbull Air bubbles and turbulence caused by

movement of the boat seriouslydegrade the sounding capability of thetransducer The transducer shouldtherefore be located in a positionwhere water flow is the smoothestNoise from the propellers alsoadversely affects performance andthe transducer should not be mountednearby The lifting strakes arenotorious for creating acoustic noiseand these must be avoided bykeeping the transducer inboard ofthem

bull The transducer must always remain

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3148

25

submerged even when the boat isrolling pitching or up on a plane athigh speed

bull A practical choice would besomewhere between 13 and 12 of

the boatrsquos length from the stern Forplaning hulls a practical location isgenerally rather far astern so that thetransducer is always in waterregardless of the planing attitude

28

22

120

68

30

520-5PSD

24

120

68

87520-5MSD

Unit mm

Thru-hull mount transducer dimensions

Acceptable transducer mounting

locations

Position 12 to 13 of the hull from stern

15 to 30 cm off center line (inside first lifting strakes)

Within the wetted bottom area

Deadrise angle within 15 deg

HIGH SPEED-V HULL

Suitable transducer mounting locations

Typical thru-hull mounttransducer installations

FairingBlock

Flat Washer

Rubber Washer

Hull

Deep-V Hull

Hull

Flat Washer

Rubber Washer

Flat Hull

CorkWasher

Typical thru-hull mounttransducer installations

Procedure for installing thethru-hull mount transducer

1 With the boat hauled out of the watermark the location chosen formounting the transducer on thebottom of the hull

2 If the hull is not level within 15deg inany direction fairing blocks madeout of teak should be used betweenthe transducer and hull both insideand outside to keep the transducerface parallel with the water lineFabricate the fairing block as shownbelow and make the entire surfaceas smooth as possible to provide anundisturbed flow of water around thetransducer The fairing block shouldbe smaller than the transducer itselfto provide a channel to divert

turbulent water around the sides ofthe transducer rather than over itsface

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3248

26

BOWHole for stuffing tube

Upper Half

Lower Half

Saw along slopeof hull Construction of fairing block

3 Drill a hole just large enough to passthe threaded stuffing tube of thetransducer through the hull makingsure it is drilled vertically

4 Apply a sufficient amount of highquality caulking compound to the topsurface of the transducer around thethreads of the stuffing tube andinside the mounting hole (and fairingblocks if used) to ensure watertightmounting

5 Mount the transducer and fairingblocks and tighten the locking nutsBe sure that the transducer is

properly oriented and its workingface is parallel to the waterline

Note Do not over-stress the stuffingtube and locking nuts through excessivetightening since the wood block willswell when the boat is placed in thewater It is suggested that the nut betightened lightly at installation andretightened several days after the boat

has been launched

Transducer preparation

Before putting the boat in water wipethe face of the transducer thoroughlywith a detergent liquid soap This willlessen the time necessary for thetransducer to have good contact withthe water Otherwise the time requiredfor complete ldquosaturationrdquo ill belengthened and performance will bereduced

DO NOT paint the transducerPerformance will be affected

43 Transom MountTransducer

The transom mount transducer is verycommonly employed usually onrelatively small IO or outboard boatsDo not use this method on an inboardmotor boat because turbulence iscreated by the propeller ahead of thetransducer

520-5PWD

There are two methods of installationflush with hull (for flat hulls) andprojecting from hull (for deep V-hulls)

Flat Hull

D

Dgt50 cm

Deep-VHull

520-5PWD mounting locations

Installing the 520-5PWD on a flat hull

A suitable mounting location is at least50 cm away from the engine and wherethe water flow is smooth

1 Drill four pilot holes in the mountinglocation

2 Attach the transducer to the bracketwith 5 x 20 tapping screws(supplied)

3 Adjust the transducer position so thetransducer faces right to the bottom

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3348

27

Note If necessary to improve waterflow and minimize air bubblesstaying on the transducer faceincline the transducer about 5deg at therear This may require a certainamount of experimentation for finetuning at high cruising speeds

4 Fill the gap between the wedge frontof the transducer and transom withepoxy material to eliminate any airspaces

No1 M5 x 14

5 x 20

5 x 20

2 to 5

Tape

Hull

Transom mount transducer

mounting flush with hull

Installing the transom mounttransducer on a deep-V hull

This method is employed on deep-Vhulls and provides good performancebecause the effects of air bubbles areminimal Install the transducer parallelwith water surface not flush with hull Ifthe boat is placed on a trailer care mustbe taken not to damage the transducerwhen the boat is hauled out of the waterand put on the trailer

5 x 20

No 2M5 x 14

5 x 20

Transom mount transducermounted projecting from hull

525-5PWD

Choose the installation methoddepending on the rise angle of the hull

Transom

Transom

Stripe over 10

Parallel with hull

Mount at the stripe

less than 10

525-5PWD mounting location

Installing the 525-5PWD

Referring to ldquoInstalling the 520-5PWDrdquoin the left column for mounting of thebracket and the figure shown on the topof next page install the 525-5PWD tothe transom

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3448

28

2 to 5

Transducer

Bracket

Hull

Epoxy material

525-5PWD mounting

44 Inside-hullTransducer

The thru-hull mount transducer(520-5PSD 520-5MSD) may also beinstalled inside the hull following theprocedure below

Necessary tools

You will need the following toolsbull Sandpaper (100)bull Silicone sealantbull Silicone grease

Remarks on installationbull Turn off the engine and anchor the

boat while installing the equipmentbull Install the transducer in the engine

room

Choosing the mounting locationbull The mounting location should be

where the hull is of single-hullthickness and is void of air or flotationmaterials other than solid fiberglassbetween the transducer face and thewater

bull Do not place the transducer over hullstruts or ribs which run under the hull

bull Avoid a location where the risingangle of the hull exceeds 15deg tominimize the effect of the boatrsquosrolling

bull You will finalize the mounting location

through some trial and error Theprocedure for this is shown later

50 cm

50 cm15 cm15 cm

13

12

Transducer mountinglocation

Centerline

Inside-hull transducer mounting location

Attaching the transducer1 Clean the transducer face to remove

any foreign material Lightly roughenthe transducer face with 100sandpaper Also roughen the insideof the hull where the transducer is tobe mounted

2 Clean the transducer face again3 Warm the silicone sealant to 40degC

before usage to soften it Coat thetransducer face and mountinglocation with silicone sealant

Transducer

SiliconeSealant

Coating transducer facewith silicone sealant

4 Press the transducer firmly down onthe hull and gently twist it back andforth to remove any air which may betrapped in the silicone sealant

Checking the installation

1 Connect the battery to the display

unit2 Turn on the display unit

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3548

29

3 Press the [MODE] key to chooseSINGLE FREQ

4 Choose 50 kHz or 200 kHz and thenpress the [MENUESC] key to closethe mode menu

5 Press the [MENU] to show the mainmenu and then press to select

Auto mode6 Press to choose Off7 Press the [MENUESC] key8 Press the [GAIN] key to set the gain

to ldquo5rdquo and then press the[MENUESC] key

9 Press the [RANGE] key to set therange to 10 meters (feet) and thenpress the [MENUESC] key

10 If the bottom is displayed in darkgray and the depth indicationappears the mounting location issuitable Go to ldquoFinal preparationrdquo

11 If the bottom is not displayed in darkgray tone the mounting location maybe unsuitable Do the followinga) Press the [POWERBRILL] key to

turn off the powerb) Gently dismount the transducer

with a piece of woodc) Reattach the transducer

elsewhere as shown in ldquoAttachingthe transducerrdquo

d) Check the installation again

Final preparation

Support the transducer with a piece ofwood to keep it in place while it is drying

Let the transducer dry 24-72 hours

45 Optional Triducer525ST-MSD

The optional triducer 525ST-MSD isdesigned for thru-hull mounting Forhow to install this transducer seeparagraph 42

φ79 mm

33 mm200-12 UNthreads

φ51 mm

27 mm

7 mm

140 mm Triducer 525ST-MSD

525ST-PWD

The Transom Mount Transducer orTRIDUCER reg Multisensor with IntegralRelease Bracket 525ST-PWD ismanufactured by AIRMAR Co Theseinstructions are also included with the

sensor

Pre-test for speed and temperature

Connect the sensor to the instrumentand spin the paddlewheel Check for aspeed reading and the approximate airtemperature If there is no readingreturn the sensor to your place ofpurchase

Tools and materials needed

ScissorsMasking tapeSafety gogglesDust maskElectric drillDrill bit for

Bracket holes 4mm 23 or 964rdquoFiberglass hull chamfer bit(preferred)6mm or 14rdquo

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3648

30

Transom hole 19mm or 34rdquo(optional)

Cable clamp holes 3mm or 18rdquoScrewdriversStraight edgeMarine sealantPencilZip-tiesWater-based antifouling paint(mandatory in salt water )

Mounting location

To ensure the best performance thesensor must be submerged inaeration-free and turbulence-free water

Mount the sensor close to the centerlineof the boat On slower heavierdisplacement hulls positioning it fartherfrom the centerline is acceptable

Allow adequate space above thebracket for it to release and rotate thesensor upward

Height

Height withoutspeed sensor191mm (7-12)Height withspeed sensor213mm (8-12)

Height required at mounting location

Note 1 Do not mount the sensor in anarea of turbulence or bubbles nearwater intake or discharge openingsbehind strakes struts fittings or hull

irregularities behind eroding paint (anindication of turbulence)Note 2 Avoid mounting the sensorwhere the boat may be supportedduring trailering launching hauling andstorageNote 3 For single drive boat mounton the starboard side at least 75 mm(3rdquo) beyond the swing radius of thepropeller

75 mm(3)

minimum beyondswing radius

Mounting location on single drive boat

Note 4 For twin drive boat mountbetween the drives

Installation of bracket

1 Cut out the installation template

shown on the next page2 At the selected location position thetemplate so the arrow at the bottomis aligned with the bottom edge ofthe transom Being sure the templateis parallel to the waterline tape it inplace

Align template vertically

Deadrise angle

Slope of hullparallel towaterline

Align template arrow withbottom edge of transom

Positioning the template

Warning Always wear safetygoggles and a dust mask

3 Using a 4 mm 23 or 964rdquo bit drillthree holes 22 mm (78rdquo) deepat the locations indicated To preventdrilling too deeply wrap maskingtape around the bit 22 mm (78rdquo)from the pointFiberglass hull Minimize surfacecracking by chamfering the gelcoatIf a chamfer bit or countersink bit is

not available start drilling with a6mm or 14rdquo bit to a depth of 1 mm(116rdquo)

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3748

31

4 If you know your transom angle the

bracket is designed for a standard13deg transom angle11deg-18deg angle No shim is requiredSkip to step 3 in ldquoAdjustingrdquoOther angles The shim is requiredSkip to step 2 of ldquoAdjustingrdquoIf you do not know the transom angletemporarily attach the bracket andsensor to the transom to determine ifthe plastic shim is needed

5 Using the two 10 x 1-14rdquo

self-tapping screws temporarilyscrew the bracket to the hull DONOT tighten the screws completelyat this time Follow the step 1-4 inldquoAttaching the Sensor to the Bracketrdquobefore proceeding with ldquoAdjustingrdquo

Installation templatefor starboard side of boat

Drill at locations labeled Bfor the following transom angles

16 deg through 22 deg

Drill at locations labeled Afor the following transom angles

2 deg through 15 deg

Align arrow with bottom of transom

AA A

BB B

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3848

32

Adjusting

1 Using a straight edge sight theunderside of the sensor relative tothe underside of the hull The sternof the sensor should be 1-3 mm

(116-18rdquo) below the bow of thesensor or parallel to the bottom ofthe hull

11 deg transom angleNO SHIM

12-18 deg transom angleNO SHIM

2 deg -10 deg transom

angle

19 deg -22 deg transom

angleshim withtaper up

shim withtaper down

parallelparallel parallel

slightangle

angletoo steep

anglereversed

YES NONO

YES YESYES

Sensor position and transom angle

Note Do not position the bow of thesensor lower than the stern becauseaeration will occur

2 To adjust the sensorrsquos angle relativeto the hull use the tapered plasticshim provided If the bracket hasbeen temporarily fastened to thetransom remove it Key the shim in

place on the back of the bracket2deg-10deg transom angle (steppedtransom and jet boats) Positionthe shim with the tapered end down19deg-22deg transom angle (smallaluminum and fiberglass boats) Position the shim with the taperedend up

3 If the bracket has been temporarilyfastened to the transom remove it

Apply a marine sealant to thethreads of the two 10 x 1-14rdquo self

tapping screws to prevent waterseeping into the transom Screw thebracket to the hull Do not tighten thescrews completely at this time

4 Repeat step 1 to ensure that theangle of the sensor is correctNote Do not position the sensorfarther into the water than necessaryto avoid increasing drag spray andwater noise and reducing boatspeed

5 Using the vertical adjustment spaceon the bracket slots slide the sensorup or down to provide a projection of3 mm (18rdquo) Tighten the screws

Cable cover

Cableclamp

50 mm (2)

Hull projection 3 mm (18)

Vertical adjustment and cable routing

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3948

33

Attaching the sensor to the bracket

1 If the retaining cover near the top ofthe bracket is closed open it bydepressing the latch and rotating thecover downward

Step 1 Step 2

Latch

Retainingcover

Pivotarm (2)

Slot (2)

Step 4

Step 3

Attaching the sensor to the bracket

2 Insert the sensorrsquos pivot arms intothe slots near the top of the bracket

3 Maintain pressure until the pivotarms click into place

4 Rotate the sensor downward until thebottom snaps into the bracket

5 Close the retaining cover to preventthe accidental release of the sensorwhen the boat is underway

Cable routing

Route the sensor cable over thetransom through a drain hole orthorough a new hole drilled in thetransom above the waterline

Never cut the cable or remote the

connector this will void the warranty Always wear safety goggles and a dustmask

1 If a hole must be drilled choose alocation well above the waterlineCheck for obstructions such as trimtabs pumps or wiring inside the hullMark the location with a pencil Drilla hole through the transom using a19 mm or 34rdquo bit (to accommodatethe connector)

2 Route the cable over or through thetransom

3 On the outside of the hull secure thecable against the transom using thecable clamps Position a cable clamp50 mm(2rdquo) above the bracket andmark the mounting hole with apencil

4 Position the second cable clamphalfway between the first clamp andthe cable hole Mark this mountinghole

5 If a hole has been drilled in thetransom open the appropriate slot inthe transom cable cover Position thecover over the cable where it entersthe hull Mark the two mounting

holes6 At each of the marked locations usea 3 mm or 18rdquo bit to drill a hole 10mm (38rdquo) deep The prevent drillingtoo deeply wrap masking tapearound the bit 10 mm (38rdquo) from thepoint

7 Apply marine sealant to the threadsof the 6 x 12rdquo self-tapping screw toprevent water from seeping into the

transom If you have drilled a holethrough the transom apply marinesealant to the space around thecable where it passes through thetransom

8 Position the two cable clamps andfasten them in place If used pushthe cable cover over the cable andscrew it in place

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4048

34

9 Route the cable to the instrumentbeing careful not to tear the cable

jacket when passing it though thebulkhead(s) and other parts of theboat To reduce electricalinterference separate the sensorcable from other electrical wiring andldquonoiserdquo sources Coil any excesscable and secure it in place withzip-ties to prevent damage

46 Optional WaterTemperatureSpeedSensor

Water temperaturespeed sensorST-02MSB and ST-02PSB which aredesigned for thru-hull mounting areoptionally available Install them asshown below

Mounting considerations

Choose a suitable mounting locationconsidering the followingbull Choose a place free from vibrationbull Choose a mid-boat flat position The

sensor does not have to be installedperfectly perpendicular The sensormust not be damaged in dry-dockingoperation

bull Choose a place apart from equipmentgenerating heat

bull Choose a place in the forwarddirection viewing from the drain holeto allow for circulation of coolingwater

1 Dry-dock the boat2 Make a hole of approx 51 mm

diameter in the mounting location3 Unfasten locknut and remove the

sensor section4 Apply high-grade sealant to the

flange of the sensor5 Pass the sensor casing through thehole

6 Face the notch on the sensor towardboatrsquos bow and tighten the flange

7 Set the sensor section to the sensorcasing and tighten the locknut

8 Launch the boat and check for waterleakage around the sensor

Locknut

Face notchtoward bow

Flange Nut

Coat withsilicone sealant Brim

φ 77

51

123

Water temperaturespeed sensor

ST-02MSB ST-02PSB

47 Wiring

Connect the LS-4100 powerdata cableassy MJ-A7SPF0005-020 (2 msupplied) to the POWER and thetransducer cable to the XDR connectorRefer to the interconnection diagram toconnect cables Leave slack in cables tofacilitate checking and maintenance

Note The fuse holder contains a springwhich fixes the fuse To preventdetachment of the spring which wouldcause loss of power tie the line asshown below

+ line (red)

Fuse holder

Cable tie How to fix fuse holder

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4148

35

Establishing the ground

The ground wire (125 sq or more localsupply) should be as short as possible

The signal line ground is isolated from

the chassis ground however the powerline is not insulated Therefore whenconnecting eternal equipment havingpositive ground do not ground thesignal line to the chassis If excessivenoise shows on the screen the groundmay be inadequate In this case attacha steel plate measuring 20 cm by 30 cmon the outside of the hull to provide aground point Connect the ground wire

there Use a ldquoclosedrdquo type lug ( ) tomake the connection at the display unitDo not use an ldquoopenrdquo type lug ( )

Optional equipment

POWER connector

The power supply port is commonlyused for connection of externalequipment such as a GPS receiver orwind indicator Use the powerdatacable MJ-A7SPF0005-020 (supplied) forconnection referring the figure shown inthe right column

Connector Color Remarks

1 TD-A WHT2 TD-B BLU

IEC-61162-1NMEA0183

3 RD-A YEL

4 RD-B GRN

IEC-61162-1

NMEA01835 + RED

6 - BLKPower input12 VDC

7 FG

Water tempspeed sensor

Connect the optional water tempspeedsensor to the XDR connector with theoptional converter connector (Type02S4147) as shown below

Tape connectors withvulcaninzing tapeand then vinyl tapeto waterproof themBind tape ends withcable ties to preventtape from unraveling

Connect to XDR portat rear of display unit

MJ-A10SPF

MJ-A10SRMDMJ-A6SRMD

Fromtransducer

Fromsensor

Connection of converterconnector 02S4147

48 IEC 61162-1 DataSentences

The tables below show the datasentences which can be input to andoutput from the LS-4100 Thetransmission speed for both input andoutput is 4800 bps Data is output attwo-second intervals

Input data sentences

Sentence Meaning

BWC Bearing and distance towaypoint

GGA Global positioning system(GPS) fix data

GLL Geographic position -latitudelongitude

HDG Heading deviation and variationHDT Heading true

MDA Atmospheric pressure

MTW Water temperature

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4248

36

Input data sentences (conrsquot)

Sentence MeaningMWV Wind speed and

angleRMA Recommended

minimum specificLORAN-C dataRMB Recommended

minimum navigationinformation

RMC Recommendedminimum specificGPSTRANSIT data

VHW Water speed andheading

VTG Course over groundand ground speedXTE Cross track error

Output data sentences

Sentence MeaningDBT (Ver 15) Depth below

transducerDPT (Ver 20 Ver30)

Depth

MTW Water temperatureRMB (Ver 20) Recommended

minimumnavigationinformation

VHW Water speed andheading

TLL Target positionoutput by [MARK]key

= Available with connection of optionalsensorsnavaid

49 Installation MenuThe installation menu mainly containsitems which are set at installation

1 Turn on the power while pressing the[MENUESC] key Continue pressing

the [MENUESC] key until theInstallation menu appears

SIMULATION On

TEST LCD PATTERN MEMORY CLEAR

NMEA PORT InOutNMEA MIX OffGPS WAAS Off

SET BOTTOM LEVEL

Installation Menu

= Setting cannot be changed whenNMEA PORT setting is InIn

Installation menu

SIMULATION The simulation modeprovides without connection of thetransducer simulated operation of theequipment using internally generatedechoes All controls are operative Themessage ldquoSIMrdquo appears at the top rightcorner on the screen when thesimulation mode is active

1 At the installation menu press toopen the simulation mode optionswindow

2 Press to choose ldquoOnrdquo to turn onthe simulation mode

3 Press the [POWERBRILL] keyabout three seconds to turn off thepower

4 Press the [POWERBRILL] key toturn on the power ldquoSIMrdquo appears atthe top right corner of the display

5 To turn off the simulation modeselect Off at step 2

NMEA po r t se tup(NMEA PO RT NMEA M IX)

The POWER port can function as aninput port or inputoutput port Changethe setting to ldquoInInrdquo when connectingGP-310B320B and a wind sensor

When connecting the GP-310B320Band a wind sensor first turn on ldquoGPS

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4348

37

WAASrdquo (in the Installation menu) andthen select ldquoInInrdquo as the NMEA portsetting

1 Turn on the power while pressingand holding down the [MENUESC]key Continue pressing the[MENUESC] key until theInstallation menu appears

2 Choose NMEA PORT and thenpress to display the NMEA portoptions window

3 Use or to choose InOut orInIn as appropriate

InOut Input and Output (default

setting)InIn Input only (Available withconnection of the GP-310B320Band a wind sensor)

4 Press choose NMEA MIX andthen press to display the NMEAMIX options window

5 Use or to choose Off or OnChoose On to output input data

Off Outputs the data sentences ofLS-4100 only

On Outputs the data sentences ofLS-4100 and sentences which areinput from other equipment

6 To restore normal operation turn offthe power and then turn it on again

GPS WAAS Chooses how to use theWAAS signal when connecting with a

WAAS receiver for example GP-320B

Note WAAS is currently in thedevelopmental phase During thedevelopmental phase the reliability andavailability of the WAAS signal cannotbe guaranteed Therefore any positiondata should be verified against othersources to confirm reliability

1 Display the Installation menu2 Choose GPS WAAS and then press

to open the GPS WAAS options

window

Off

WAAS options window3 Press or to choose ldquoWAAS-02rdquo

(test signal) When the systembecomes operational (in 2003) setto ldquo00rdquo (regular WAAS signal)

4 Turn off the power

BOTTOM LEVEL If the depthindication is unstable in automaticoperation or the bottom echo cannot bedisplayed in the darkest gray tone byadjusting the gain controls in manualoperation you may adjust the bottomecho level detection circuit for both 50kHz and 200 kHz to stabilize theindication Generally lower the bottomlevel for inner hull installation where thereceive level is too low If the bottomlevel is too low it may be difficult todiscriminate fish from the bottomresulting in unstable depth indication

And if the bottom level is too high thedepth indication may not appear

1 At the installation menu press tochoose SET BOTTOM LEVEL andthen press Several seconds laterthe following display appears

Bottom level +0 (200k -100 - +100 ) +0 ( 50k -100 - +100 )

Bottom level display

2 While observing the picture use or to set 200 kHz or to set50 kHz Set up for optimum picture

3 To restore normal operation turn offthe power and then it on again

Note The mode must be other thanldquoNAV DATArdquo to show the bottom leveldisplay

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4448

SP - 1 E2371S01C

SPECIFICATIONS OF ECHO SOUNDER LS-4100

1 GENERAL11 TX Frequency 50 kHz or 200 kHz 50200 kHz dual transmitting selectable12 Transmit Method Single or dual transmitting

13 Output Power 300 Wrms14 TX Rate Max 500 pulsemin15 Pulse-length 01 to 08 ms

2 DISPLAY UNIT21 Display system 5-inch monochrome LCD 76 mm (W) x 100 mm (H) 240 x 320 dots22 Display Mode Single frequency (highlow freq) Dual-frequency Zoom Nav data-12

Marker zoom Bottom zoom Bottom-lock23 Display Range

Range SettingRange

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

Display

rangeMeter 5 10 20 40 80 150 200 300 2-500

Feet 15 30 60 120 200 400 600 1000 7-1500

Fathoms 3 5 10 20 40 80 100 150 1-250

PassiBraza 3 5 10 30 50 100 150 200 1-300

24 Range Shift 0-500 m 0-1500 ft 0-250 fa 0-300 pb25 Expansion Range Bottom-lock expansion 3 to 10 m

Sectional expansion 2 to 50 m26 Display Advance Speed 8 steps (LinesTX Freeze 1161814121121 41)

3 INTERFACE31 Input data sentences IEC61162-1NMEA0183 Ver 152030

GGA RMA RMB RMC BWC GLL HDT HDG VTG VHW MTWMWV MDA XTE

32 Output data sentences IEC61162-1NMEA0183 Ver 152030 interval 2 sMTW VHW DBT DPT RMB TLL by key operating External data required

4 POWER SUPPLY41 Display Unit 12 VDC 05 A

5 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITION51 Ambient Temperature Display unit -15degC to +55degC52 Relative Humidity 93 or less at 40degC53 Waterproof IPX5

6 COATING COLOR61 Display Unit N30

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4548

M a r

4

0 3

D-1

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4648

Mar 4 03

Mar 4 03

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4748

M a r

3

0 3

S-1

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4848

FURUNO Authorized DistributorDealer FURUNO Authorized DistributorDealer

9-52 Ashihara-cho9-52 Ashihara-choNishinomiya 662-8580 JAPANNishinomiya 662-8580 JAPAN

Telephone Telephone 0798-65-21110798-65-2111FaxFax 0798-65-42000798-65-4200

FIRST EDITION FIRST EDITION MARMAR 20032003Printed in JapanPrinted in Japan All rights reserved All rights reserved

B1B1 SEPSEP 09 200509 2005

Pub NoPub No OME-23710OME-23710 00014698000000146980000001469800000014698000(( DAMIDAMI )) LS-4100LS-4100

0 0 0 1 4 6 9 8 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 4 6 9 8 0 0 0

Page 25: OME23710B_1_LS4100

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 2548

19

NAV DATA-1 -2 Choose the number ofnavigation data items to display on thenav data displays from two three orfour items Requires appropriate navdata

WATER TYPE Choose the water typewith which to use the LS-4100 fromSalt or Fresh

KEY BEEP Turn key beep on or off

BATT VOLTAGE Turn the batteryvoltage indication (appears at the topright corner on the screen) on or offWhen on it replaces the picture advancespeed indication

Page 2

NAV DISPLAY Choose the nav data todisplay in the nav data window at thetop left-hand corner You may choosefrom temperaturespeedlatitudelongitude range and bearingcourse over ground trip distance or

wind speed Requires appropriate navdata

407 deg F162kt

Nav window

NMEA0183 Choose NMEA version ofnavigator Ver 15 Ver 20 or Ver 30

TLL OUTPUT Enablesdisables outputof TLL (Target Latitude Longitude)position when the [MARK] key isoperated ldquoTLLrdquo outputs latitude andlongitude position ldquoFURUNO-TLLrdquoavailable with connection of navigatorthat can output FURUNO TLL outputslatitude and longitude watertemperature depth etc

BEARING Shiprsquos course and bearingto a waypoint may be displayed in trueor magnetic bearing Magnetic bearingis true bearing plus (or minus) earthrsquosmagnetic deviation Requires bearingdata

WIND SPDDIR Choose the windspeed and direction reference from trueand apparent Requires wind sensorApparen t The direction (in relation toshiprsquos bow) and speed of the wind as itappears to those on board relative tothe speed and direction of the boatcombination of the true wind and thewind caused by the boats movementTrue The speed and direction (inrelation to shiprsquos bow) of the wind felt ormeasured when stationary

TRIP SOURCE Choose speed sourcefor the trip distance indication Own(transducer with speed sensor orseparate speed sensor) or NMEA

TEMP SOURCE Choose source ofwater temperature input Off Own(transducer with water temperaturesensor or separate temperature sensor)or NMEA

SPEED SOURCE Choose source ofspeed input Off Own (transducer withspeed sensor or separate speedsensor) or NMEA Requires speed

data

TEMP CALIB If the water temperaturesensor-generated water temperatureindication is wrong you can correct ithere when ldquoOwnrdquo is selected astemperature source For example if thewater temperature indication is 2deghigher than actual water temperatureenter -2 The setting range is -40degF to

+40degF

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 2648

20

SPEED CALIB If the speedsensor-generated speed indication iswrong you can correct it here whenldquoOwnrdquo is selected as speed source Forexample if the speed indication is 10lower than actual speed enter +10 Thesetting range is ndash50 to +50

Page 3

BASIC RANGE 1 - BASIC RANGE 8 Set range of each of the eight basicranges (Selectable range 7 to 1500 ft)Note 1 All default basic ranges arerestored whenever the depth unit ischanged Therefore change the depth

unit before changing the basic rangesNote 2 A range may not be lower thanthe range preceding it For example ifbasic range 3 is 60 feet basic range 4must be greater than 60 feet

ZOOM RANGE Choose the range tozoom in the marker-zoom andbottom-zoom modes You may choose arange between 7 and 150 feet (2 and 50

meters)

BL RANGE The expansion width forthe bottom-lock display can be chosenfrom 10 to 30 feet (3 and 10 meters)

ZOOM MARKER The zoom markerappears in the normal bottom markerand bottom zoom displays and marksthe area which is expanded in the

bottom marker and bottom zoompictures You can turn the marker on oroff as desired

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 2748

21

3 MAINTENANCETROUBLESHOOTING

W RNING

ELECTRICAL SHOCK HAZARDDo not open the equipment

Only qualified personnel should workinside the equipment

31 Maintenance

Regular maintenance is essential forgood performance Checking the itemslisted in the table below monthly willhelp keep your equipment in goodshape for years to come

Checking

Item Action

Transducercable

Check cable for damage

Power cabletransducercable plug

Check that they are tightlyfastened Refasten ifnecessary

Display unitground

Check for corrosion Cleanif necessary

Power supplyvoltage

Check voltage If out ofrating correct problem

32 Cleaning the DisplayUnit

Dust or dirt on the display unit can beremoved with a soft cloth If desired awater-moistened cloth may be usedUse special care when cleaning theLCD since it scratches easily Do notuse chemical cleaners to clean thedisplay unit - they can remove paint andmarkings

33 TransducerMaintenance

Marine life on the transducer face willresult in a gradual decrease insensitivity Check the transducer facefor cleanliness each time the boat isdry-docked Carefully remove anymarine life with a piece of wood orfine-grade sandpaper

34 Replacing the FuseThe fuse in the power cable protects thesystem from reverse polarity of thepower supply and equipment fault If thefuse blows find the cause beforereplacing it Use only a 1A fuse (FGMB 1A 125V Code No 000-114-805 ) orequivalent Using the wrong fuse will damage the unit and void the warranty

W RNINGUse the proper fuse

Fuse rating is shown on the equipmentUse of a wrong fuse can result in fire anddamage the equipment

35 Battery Voltage Alert A battery icon appears when the batteryvoltage is too high or too low

Battery icon and meaning

Icon Meaning

Voltage is lower than 10 VDC If thevoltage goes below 9 V the equipmentis automatically turned off

Voltage is higher than 165 VDC If thevoltage goes higher than 175 V theequipment is automatically turned off

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 2848

22

36 TroubleshootingThe table below provides basictroubleshooting procedures which theuser may follow to restore normaloperation

Troubleshooting table

Ifhellip Then check hellipneither echo norfixed range scaleappears

bull battery voltagebull fusebull power cable

no echo appearsbut the fixedrange scaleappears

bull if display advancespeed is set to ldquoStoprdquo

bull transducer plugbull

transducer cableecho appears butno zero line

bull if range shifting is setto ldquo0rdquo

sensitivity is low bull gain settingbull if air bubbles or marine

life is clinging to thetransducer face

bull if sediments arepresent in the water

bull if the bottom is too soft

to return an echothere is extremeinterference ornoise

bull if the transducer is tooclose to the engine

bull if the unit is properlygrounded

bull if other echo soundersof the same frequencyas own are beingoperated nearby

the speedwatertemperaturereadout isunrealistic or notpresent

bull sensor plug

the positionreadout isunrealistic or notpresent

bull the connectionbetween sounder andnavigator

bull navigator

37 DiagnosticsIf you feel your unit is not workingproperly conduct the diagnostic test tofind the problem If you cannot restorenormal operation contact your dealerfor advice

1 Turn on the power while pressing the[MENUESC] key Continue pressingthe [MENUESC] key until theInstallation menu appears

SIMULATION On

TEST LCD PATTERN MEMORY CLEAR

NMEA PORT InOutNMEA MIX Off GPS WAAS Off

SET BOTTOM LEVEL

Installation Menu

= Setting cannot be changed whenNMEA PORT setting is InIn

Installation menu2 Press to choose TEST3 Press to start the test

ROM OKRAM OKNMEA

Temp 682 deg F

Speed 100kmh

Power 124 VBody 39 deg C

Program No 0252318-01Push [MENU] 3 times to exit

Level bar

= Program version no

Water

TemperatureSpeedBattery VoltageTemperatureinside displayunit(Unit fixed atdeg C)

GPS (48502180) OK

Only when GP-310B is connected(For GP-320B 4850238)

Test display

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 2948

23

4 The ROM RAM and NMEA port arechecked with the results shown asOK or NG (No Good) For any NGrequest service (A special connectoris required to test the NMEA portNothing appears if no connector isconnected)

5 The squares at the right side of thetest display are for checking thecontrols Press each key and thearrows on the Cursor Pad one byone A controlrsquos correspondingon-screen square ldquolightsrdquo in black ifthe control is normal

6 To return to the Installation menupress the [MENUESC] key threetimes

7 To restore normal operation turn offthe power and turn it on again

38 Test PatternThis feature tests for proper display oftones

1 On the Installation menu press $ tochoose LCD PATTERN

2 Press to start the test The entirescreen is black

3 Press again and the screen turnswhite

4 Press again and the screenshows a four-toned display

5 Press again to return to theInstallation menu

6 To restore normal operation turn offthe power and then it on again

WHITE FOUR-TONE BLACK

Test patterns

39 Memory ClearThe memory can be cleared to startafresh with default menu settings

1 At the installation menu press $ tochoose MEMORY CLEAR

2 Press to open the optionswindow

YES NO

Clear memory display

3 Press to clear the memory Beepsare generated while the memory isbeing cleared

4 To restore normal operation turn offthe power and then turn it on again

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3048

24

4 INSTALLATION

41 Display UnitMounting considerations

The display unit can be installed on adesktop on the bulkhead or flushmounted in a panel When choosing alocation keep the following in mind

bull Keep the display unit out of directsunlight

bull The temperature and humidity should

be moderate and stablebull Locate the unit away from exhaust

pipes and ventsbull The mounting location should be well

ventilatedbull Mount the unit where shock and

vibration are minimalbull For maintenance and checking

purposes leave sufficient space atthe sides and rear of the unit andleave slack in cables

bull A magnetic compass will be affected ifthe display unit is placed too close toit Observe the following compasssafe distances to prevent disturbanceto the magnetic compassStandard compass 04 metersSteering compass 03 meters

Desktop overhead mounting1 Fix the bracket to a desktop or the

overhead with tapping screws(supplied)

2 Loosely screw knobs into the displayunit

3 Set the display unit to the bracketand then tighten the knobs

Mounting on the bulkhead Flush

mounting in a panelSee the instructions on the bulkhead orflush mounting template (supplied)

42 Thru-hull MountTransducer

Transducer mounting location

The thru-hull mount transducer

(520-5PSD 520-5MSD) provides thebest performance of all since thetransducer protrudes from the hull andthe effect of air bubbles and turbulencenear the hull skin is reduced When theboat has a keel the transducer shouldbe at least 30 cm away from it Typicalthru-hull mountings are shown in thefigure on the next page

The performance of this sounder isdirectly related to the mounting locationof the transducer especially forhigh-speed cruising The installationshould be planned in advance keepingthe standard cable length (8 m) and thefollowing factors in mindbull Air bubbles and turbulence caused by

movement of the boat seriouslydegrade the sounding capability of thetransducer The transducer shouldtherefore be located in a positionwhere water flow is the smoothestNoise from the propellers alsoadversely affects performance andthe transducer should not be mountednearby The lifting strakes arenotorious for creating acoustic noiseand these must be avoided bykeeping the transducer inboard ofthem

bull The transducer must always remain

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3148

25

submerged even when the boat isrolling pitching or up on a plane athigh speed

bull A practical choice would besomewhere between 13 and 12 of

the boatrsquos length from the stern Forplaning hulls a practical location isgenerally rather far astern so that thetransducer is always in waterregardless of the planing attitude

28

22

120

68

30

520-5PSD

24

120

68

87520-5MSD

Unit mm

Thru-hull mount transducer dimensions

Acceptable transducer mounting

locations

Position 12 to 13 of the hull from stern

15 to 30 cm off center line (inside first lifting strakes)

Within the wetted bottom area

Deadrise angle within 15 deg

HIGH SPEED-V HULL

Suitable transducer mounting locations

Typical thru-hull mounttransducer installations

FairingBlock

Flat Washer

Rubber Washer

Hull

Deep-V Hull

Hull

Flat Washer

Rubber Washer

Flat Hull

CorkWasher

Typical thru-hull mounttransducer installations

Procedure for installing thethru-hull mount transducer

1 With the boat hauled out of the watermark the location chosen formounting the transducer on thebottom of the hull

2 If the hull is not level within 15deg inany direction fairing blocks madeout of teak should be used betweenthe transducer and hull both insideand outside to keep the transducerface parallel with the water lineFabricate the fairing block as shownbelow and make the entire surfaceas smooth as possible to provide anundisturbed flow of water around thetransducer The fairing block shouldbe smaller than the transducer itselfto provide a channel to divert

turbulent water around the sides ofthe transducer rather than over itsface

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3248

26

BOWHole for stuffing tube

Upper Half

Lower Half

Saw along slopeof hull Construction of fairing block

3 Drill a hole just large enough to passthe threaded stuffing tube of thetransducer through the hull makingsure it is drilled vertically

4 Apply a sufficient amount of highquality caulking compound to the topsurface of the transducer around thethreads of the stuffing tube andinside the mounting hole (and fairingblocks if used) to ensure watertightmounting

5 Mount the transducer and fairingblocks and tighten the locking nutsBe sure that the transducer is

properly oriented and its workingface is parallel to the waterline

Note Do not over-stress the stuffingtube and locking nuts through excessivetightening since the wood block willswell when the boat is placed in thewater It is suggested that the nut betightened lightly at installation andretightened several days after the boat

has been launched

Transducer preparation

Before putting the boat in water wipethe face of the transducer thoroughlywith a detergent liquid soap This willlessen the time necessary for thetransducer to have good contact withthe water Otherwise the time requiredfor complete ldquosaturationrdquo ill belengthened and performance will bereduced

DO NOT paint the transducerPerformance will be affected

43 Transom MountTransducer

The transom mount transducer is verycommonly employed usually onrelatively small IO or outboard boatsDo not use this method on an inboardmotor boat because turbulence iscreated by the propeller ahead of thetransducer

520-5PWD

There are two methods of installationflush with hull (for flat hulls) andprojecting from hull (for deep V-hulls)

Flat Hull

D

Dgt50 cm

Deep-VHull

520-5PWD mounting locations

Installing the 520-5PWD on a flat hull

A suitable mounting location is at least50 cm away from the engine and wherethe water flow is smooth

1 Drill four pilot holes in the mountinglocation

2 Attach the transducer to the bracketwith 5 x 20 tapping screws(supplied)

3 Adjust the transducer position so thetransducer faces right to the bottom

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3348

27

Note If necessary to improve waterflow and minimize air bubblesstaying on the transducer faceincline the transducer about 5deg at therear This may require a certainamount of experimentation for finetuning at high cruising speeds

4 Fill the gap between the wedge frontof the transducer and transom withepoxy material to eliminate any airspaces

No1 M5 x 14

5 x 20

5 x 20

2 to 5

Tape

Hull

Transom mount transducer

mounting flush with hull

Installing the transom mounttransducer on a deep-V hull

This method is employed on deep-Vhulls and provides good performancebecause the effects of air bubbles areminimal Install the transducer parallelwith water surface not flush with hull Ifthe boat is placed on a trailer care mustbe taken not to damage the transducerwhen the boat is hauled out of the waterand put on the trailer

5 x 20

No 2M5 x 14

5 x 20

Transom mount transducermounted projecting from hull

525-5PWD

Choose the installation methoddepending on the rise angle of the hull

Transom

Transom

Stripe over 10

Parallel with hull

Mount at the stripe

less than 10

525-5PWD mounting location

Installing the 525-5PWD

Referring to ldquoInstalling the 520-5PWDrdquoin the left column for mounting of thebracket and the figure shown on the topof next page install the 525-5PWD tothe transom

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3448

28

2 to 5

Transducer

Bracket

Hull

Epoxy material

525-5PWD mounting

44 Inside-hullTransducer

The thru-hull mount transducer(520-5PSD 520-5MSD) may also beinstalled inside the hull following theprocedure below

Necessary tools

You will need the following toolsbull Sandpaper (100)bull Silicone sealantbull Silicone grease

Remarks on installationbull Turn off the engine and anchor the

boat while installing the equipmentbull Install the transducer in the engine

room

Choosing the mounting locationbull The mounting location should be

where the hull is of single-hullthickness and is void of air or flotationmaterials other than solid fiberglassbetween the transducer face and thewater

bull Do not place the transducer over hullstruts or ribs which run under the hull

bull Avoid a location where the risingangle of the hull exceeds 15deg tominimize the effect of the boatrsquosrolling

bull You will finalize the mounting location

through some trial and error Theprocedure for this is shown later

50 cm

50 cm15 cm15 cm

13

12

Transducer mountinglocation

Centerline

Inside-hull transducer mounting location

Attaching the transducer1 Clean the transducer face to remove

any foreign material Lightly roughenthe transducer face with 100sandpaper Also roughen the insideof the hull where the transducer is tobe mounted

2 Clean the transducer face again3 Warm the silicone sealant to 40degC

before usage to soften it Coat thetransducer face and mountinglocation with silicone sealant

Transducer

SiliconeSealant

Coating transducer facewith silicone sealant

4 Press the transducer firmly down onthe hull and gently twist it back andforth to remove any air which may betrapped in the silicone sealant

Checking the installation

1 Connect the battery to the display

unit2 Turn on the display unit

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3548

29

3 Press the [MODE] key to chooseSINGLE FREQ

4 Choose 50 kHz or 200 kHz and thenpress the [MENUESC] key to closethe mode menu

5 Press the [MENU] to show the mainmenu and then press to select

Auto mode6 Press to choose Off7 Press the [MENUESC] key8 Press the [GAIN] key to set the gain

to ldquo5rdquo and then press the[MENUESC] key

9 Press the [RANGE] key to set therange to 10 meters (feet) and thenpress the [MENUESC] key

10 If the bottom is displayed in darkgray and the depth indicationappears the mounting location issuitable Go to ldquoFinal preparationrdquo

11 If the bottom is not displayed in darkgray tone the mounting location maybe unsuitable Do the followinga) Press the [POWERBRILL] key to

turn off the powerb) Gently dismount the transducer

with a piece of woodc) Reattach the transducer

elsewhere as shown in ldquoAttachingthe transducerrdquo

d) Check the installation again

Final preparation

Support the transducer with a piece ofwood to keep it in place while it is drying

Let the transducer dry 24-72 hours

45 Optional Triducer525ST-MSD

The optional triducer 525ST-MSD isdesigned for thru-hull mounting Forhow to install this transducer seeparagraph 42

φ79 mm

33 mm200-12 UNthreads

φ51 mm

27 mm

7 mm

140 mm Triducer 525ST-MSD

525ST-PWD

The Transom Mount Transducer orTRIDUCER reg Multisensor with IntegralRelease Bracket 525ST-PWD ismanufactured by AIRMAR Co Theseinstructions are also included with the

sensor

Pre-test for speed and temperature

Connect the sensor to the instrumentand spin the paddlewheel Check for aspeed reading and the approximate airtemperature If there is no readingreturn the sensor to your place ofpurchase

Tools and materials needed

ScissorsMasking tapeSafety gogglesDust maskElectric drillDrill bit for

Bracket holes 4mm 23 or 964rdquoFiberglass hull chamfer bit(preferred)6mm or 14rdquo

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3648

30

Transom hole 19mm or 34rdquo(optional)

Cable clamp holes 3mm or 18rdquoScrewdriversStraight edgeMarine sealantPencilZip-tiesWater-based antifouling paint(mandatory in salt water )

Mounting location

To ensure the best performance thesensor must be submerged inaeration-free and turbulence-free water

Mount the sensor close to the centerlineof the boat On slower heavierdisplacement hulls positioning it fartherfrom the centerline is acceptable

Allow adequate space above thebracket for it to release and rotate thesensor upward

Height

Height withoutspeed sensor191mm (7-12)Height withspeed sensor213mm (8-12)

Height required at mounting location

Note 1 Do not mount the sensor in anarea of turbulence or bubbles nearwater intake or discharge openingsbehind strakes struts fittings or hull

irregularities behind eroding paint (anindication of turbulence)Note 2 Avoid mounting the sensorwhere the boat may be supportedduring trailering launching hauling andstorageNote 3 For single drive boat mounton the starboard side at least 75 mm(3rdquo) beyond the swing radius of thepropeller

75 mm(3)

minimum beyondswing radius

Mounting location on single drive boat

Note 4 For twin drive boat mountbetween the drives

Installation of bracket

1 Cut out the installation template

shown on the next page2 At the selected location position thetemplate so the arrow at the bottomis aligned with the bottom edge ofthe transom Being sure the templateis parallel to the waterline tape it inplace

Align template vertically

Deadrise angle

Slope of hullparallel towaterline

Align template arrow withbottom edge of transom

Positioning the template

Warning Always wear safetygoggles and a dust mask

3 Using a 4 mm 23 or 964rdquo bit drillthree holes 22 mm (78rdquo) deepat the locations indicated To preventdrilling too deeply wrap maskingtape around the bit 22 mm (78rdquo)from the pointFiberglass hull Minimize surfacecracking by chamfering the gelcoatIf a chamfer bit or countersink bit is

not available start drilling with a6mm or 14rdquo bit to a depth of 1 mm(116rdquo)

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3748

31

4 If you know your transom angle the

bracket is designed for a standard13deg transom angle11deg-18deg angle No shim is requiredSkip to step 3 in ldquoAdjustingrdquoOther angles The shim is requiredSkip to step 2 of ldquoAdjustingrdquoIf you do not know the transom angletemporarily attach the bracket andsensor to the transom to determine ifthe plastic shim is needed

5 Using the two 10 x 1-14rdquo

self-tapping screws temporarilyscrew the bracket to the hull DONOT tighten the screws completelyat this time Follow the step 1-4 inldquoAttaching the Sensor to the Bracketrdquobefore proceeding with ldquoAdjustingrdquo

Installation templatefor starboard side of boat

Drill at locations labeled Bfor the following transom angles

16 deg through 22 deg

Drill at locations labeled Afor the following transom angles

2 deg through 15 deg

Align arrow with bottom of transom

AA A

BB B

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3848

32

Adjusting

1 Using a straight edge sight theunderside of the sensor relative tothe underside of the hull The sternof the sensor should be 1-3 mm

(116-18rdquo) below the bow of thesensor or parallel to the bottom ofthe hull

11 deg transom angleNO SHIM

12-18 deg transom angleNO SHIM

2 deg -10 deg transom

angle

19 deg -22 deg transom

angleshim withtaper up

shim withtaper down

parallelparallel parallel

slightangle

angletoo steep

anglereversed

YES NONO

YES YESYES

Sensor position and transom angle

Note Do not position the bow of thesensor lower than the stern becauseaeration will occur

2 To adjust the sensorrsquos angle relativeto the hull use the tapered plasticshim provided If the bracket hasbeen temporarily fastened to thetransom remove it Key the shim in

place on the back of the bracket2deg-10deg transom angle (steppedtransom and jet boats) Positionthe shim with the tapered end down19deg-22deg transom angle (smallaluminum and fiberglass boats) Position the shim with the taperedend up

3 If the bracket has been temporarilyfastened to the transom remove it

Apply a marine sealant to thethreads of the two 10 x 1-14rdquo self

tapping screws to prevent waterseeping into the transom Screw thebracket to the hull Do not tighten thescrews completely at this time

4 Repeat step 1 to ensure that theangle of the sensor is correctNote Do not position the sensorfarther into the water than necessaryto avoid increasing drag spray andwater noise and reducing boatspeed

5 Using the vertical adjustment spaceon the bracket slots slide the sensorup or down to provide a projection of3 mm (18rdquo) Tighten the screws

Cable cover

Cableclamp

50 mm (2)

Hull projection 3 mm (18)

Vertical adjustment and cable routing

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3948

33

Attaching the sensor to the bracket

1 If the retaining cover near the top ofthe bracket is closed open it bydepressing the latch and rotating thecover downward

Step 1 Step 2

Latch

Retainingcover

Pivotarm (2)

Slot (2)

Step 4

Step 3

Attaching the sensor to the bracket

2 Insert the sensorrsquos pivot arms intothe slots near the top of the bracket

3 Maintain pressure until the pivotarms click into place

4 Rotate the sensor downward until thebottom snaps into the bracket

5 Close the retaining cover to preventthe accidental release of the sensorwhen the boat is underway

Cable routing

Route the sensor cable over thetransom through a drain hole orthorough a new hole drilled in thetransom above the waterline

Never cut the cable or remote the

connector this will void the warranty Always wear safety goggles and a dustmask

1 If a hole must be drilled choose alocation well above the waterlineCheck for obstructions such as trimtabs pumps or wiring inside the hullMark the location with a pencil Drilla hole through the transom using a19 mm or 34rdquo bit (to accommodatethe connector)

2 Route the cable over or through thetransom

3 On the outside of the hull secure thecable against the transom using thecable clamps Position a cable clamp50 mm(2rdquo) above the bracket andmark the mounting hole with apencil

4 Position the second cable clamphalfway between the first clamp andthe cable hole Mark this mountinghole

5 If a hole has been drilled in thetransom open the appropriate slot inthe transom cable cover Position thecover over the cable where it entersthe hull Mark the two mounting

holes6 At each of the marked locations usea 3 mm or 18rdquo bit to drill a hole 10mm (38rdquo) deep The prevent drillingtoo deeply wrap masking tapearound the bit 10 mm (38rdquo) from thepoint

7 Apply marine sealant to the threadsof the 6 x 12rdquo self-tapping screw toprevent water from seeping into the

transom If you have drilled a holethrough the transom apply marinesealant to the space around thecable where it passes through thetransom

8 Position the two cable clamps andfasten them in place If used pushthe cable cover over the cable andscrew it in place

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4048

34

9 Route the cable to the instrumentbeing careful not to tear the cable

jacket when passing it though thebulkhead(s) and other parts of theboat To reduce electricalinterference separate the sensorcable from other electrical wiring andldquonoiserdquo sources Coil any excesscable and secure it in place withzip-ties to prevent damage

46 Optional WaterTemperatureSpeedSensor

Water temperaturespeed sensorST-02MSB and ST-02PSB which aredesigned for thru-hull mounting areoptionally available Install them asshown below

Mounting considerations

Choose a suitable mounting locationconsidering the followingbull Choose a place free from vibrationbull Choose a mid-boat flat position The

sensor does not have to be installedperfectly perpendicular The sensormust not be damaged in dry-dockingoperation

bull Choose a place apart from equipmentgenerating heat

bull Choose a place in the forwarddirection viewing from the drain holeto allow for circulation of coolingwater

1 Dry-dock the boat2 Make a hole of approx 51 mm

diameter in the mounting location3 Unfasten locknut and remove the

sensor section4 Apply high-grade sealant to the

flange of the sensor5 Pass the sensor casing through thehole

6 Face the notch on the sensor towardboatrsquos bow and tighten the flange

7 Set the sensor section to the sensorcasing and tighten the locknut

8 Launch the boat and check for waterleakage around the sensor

Locknut

Face notchtoward bow

Flange Nut

Coat withsilicone sealant Brim

φ 77

51

123

Water temperaturespeed sensor

ST-02MSB ST-02PSB

47 Wiring

Connect the LS-4100 powerdata cableassy MJ-A7SPF0005-020 (2 msupplied) to the POWER and thetransducer cable to the XDR connectorRefer to the interconnection diagram toconnect cables Leave slack in cables tofacilitate checking and maintenance

Note The fuse holder contains a springwhich fixes the fuse To preventdetachment of the spring which wouldcause loss of power tie the line asshown below

+ line (red)

Fuse holder

Cable tie How to fix fuse holder

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4148

35

Establishing the ground

The ground wire (125 sq or more localsupply) should be as short as possible

The signal line ground is isolated from

the chassis ground however the powerline is not insulated Therefore whenconnecting eternal equipment havingpositive ground do not ground thesignal line to the chassis If excessivenoise shows on the screen the groundmay be inadequate In this case attacha steel plate measuring 20 cm by 30 cmon the outside of the hull to provide aground point Connect the ground wire

there Use a ldquoclosedrdquo type lug ( ) tomake the connection at the display unitDo not use an ldquoopenrdquo type lug ( )

Optional equipment

POWER connector

The power supply port is commonlyused for connection of externalequipment such as a GPS receiver orwind indicator Use the powerdatacable MJ-A7SPF0005-020 (supplied) forconnection referring the figure shown inthe right column

Connector Color Remarks

1 TD-A WHT2 TD-B BLU

IEC-61162-1NMEA0183

3 RD-A YEL

4 RD-B GRN

IEC-61162-1

NMEA01835 + RED

6 - BLKPower input12 VDC

7 FG

Water tempspeed sensor

Connect the optional water tempspeedsensor to the XDR connector with theoptional converter connector (Type02S4147) as shown below

Tape connectors withvulcaninzing tapeand then vinyl tapeto waterproof themBind tape ends withcable ties to preventtape from unraveling

Connect to XDR portat rear of display unit

MJ-A10SPF

MJ-A10SRMDMJ-A6SRMD

Fromtransducer

Fromsensor

Connection of converterconnector 02S4147

48 IEC 61162-1 DataSentences

The tables below show the datasentences which can be input to andoutput from the LS-4100 Thetransmission speed for both input andoutput is 4800 bps Data is output attwo-second intervals

Input data sentences

Sentence Meaning

BWC Bearing and distance towaypoint

GGA Global positioning system(GPS) fix data

GLL Geographic position -latitudelongitude

HDG Heading deviation and variationHDT Heading true

MDA Atmospheric pressure

MTW Water temperature

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4248

36

Input data sentences (conrsquot)

Sentence MeaningMWV Wind speed and

angleRMA Recommended

minimum specificLORAN-C dataRMB Recommended

minimum navigationinformation

RMC Recommendedminimum specificGPSTRANSIT data

VHW Water speed andheading

VTG Course over groundand ground speedXTE Cross track error

Output data sentences

Sentence MeaningDBT (Ver 15) Depth below

transducerDPT (Ver 20 Ver30)

Depth

MTW Water temperatureRMB (Ver 20) Recommended

minimumnavigationinformation

VHW Water speed andheading

TLL Target positionoutput by [MARK]key

= Available with connection of optionalsensorsnavaid

49 Installation MenuThe installation menu mainly containsitems which are set at installation

1 Turn on the power while pressing the[MENUESC] key Continue pressing

the [MENUESC] key until theInstallation menu appears

SIMULATION On

TEST LCD PATTERN MEMORY CLEAR

NMEA PORT InOutNMEA MIX OffGPS WAAS Off

SET BOTTOM LEVEL

Installation Menu

= Setting cannot be changed whenNMEA PORT setting is InIn

Installation menu

SIMULATION The simulation modeprovides without connection of thetransducer simulated operation of theequipment using internally generatedechoes All controls are operative Themessage ldquoSIMrdquo appears at the top rightcorner on the screen when thesimulation mode is active

1 At the installation menu press toopen the simulation mode optionswindow

2 Press to choose ldquoOnrdquo to turn onthe simulation mode

3 Press the [POWERBRILL] keyabout three seconds to turn off thepower

4 Press the [POWERBRILL] key toturn on the power ldquoSIMrdquo appears atthe top right corner of the display

5 To turn off the simulation modeselect Off at step 2

NMEA po r t se tup(NMEA PO RT NMEA M IX)

The POWER port can function as aninput port or inputoutput port Changethe setting to ldquoInInrdquo when connectingGP-310B320B and a wind sensor

When connecting the GP-310B320Band a wind sensor first turn on ldquoGPS

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4348

37

WAASrdquo (in the Installation menu) andthen select ldquoInInrdquo as the NMEA portsetting

1 Turn on the power while pressingand holding down the [MENUESC]key Continue pressing the[MENUESC] key until theInstallation menu appears

2 Choose NMEA PORT and thenpress to display the NMEA portoptions window

3 Use or to choose InOut orInIn as appropriate

InOut Input and Output (default

setting)InIn Input only (Available withconnection of the GP-310B320Band a wind sensor)

4 Press choose NMEA MIX andthen press to display the NMEAMIX options window

5 Use or to choose Off or OnChoose On to output input data

Off Outputs the data sentences ofLS-4100 only

On Outputs the data sentences ofLS-4100 and sentences which areinput from other equipment

6 To restore normal operation turn offthe power and then turn it on again

GPS WAAS Chooses how to use theWAAS signal when connecting with a

WAAS receiver for example GP-320B

Note WAAS is currently in thedevelopmental phase During thedevelopmental phase the reliability andavailability of the WAAS signal cannotbe guaranteed Therefore any positiondata should be verified against othersources to confirm reliability

1 Display the Installation menu2 Choose GPS WAAS and then press

to open the GPS WAAS options

window

Off

WAAS options window3 Press or to choose ldquoWAAS-02rdquo

(test signal) When the systembecomes operational (in 2003) setto ldquo00rdquo (regular WAAS signal)

4 Turn off the power

BOTTOM LEVEL If the depthindication is unstable in automaticoperation or the bottom echo cannot bedisplayed in the darkest gray tone byadjusting the gain controls in manualoperation you may adjust the bottomecho level detection circuit for both 50kHz and 200 kHz to stabilize theindication Generally lower the bottomlevel for inner hull installation where thereceive level is too low If the bottomlevel is too low it may be difficult todiscriminate fish from the bottomresulting in unstable depth indication

And if the bottom level is too high thedepth indication may not appear

1 At the installation menu press tochoose SET BOTTOM LEVEL andthen press Several seconds laterthe following display appears

Bottom level +0 (200k -100 - +100 ) +0 ( 50k -100 - +100 )

Bottom level display

2 While observing the picture use or to set 200 kHz or to set50 kHz Set up for optimum picture

3 To restore normal operation turn offthe power and then it on again

Note The mode must be other thanldquoNAV DATArdquo to show the bottom leveldisplay

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4448

SP - 1 E2371S01C

SPECIFICATIONS OF ECHO SOUNDER LS-4100

1 GENERAL11 TX Frequency 50 kHz or 200 kHz 50200 kHz dual transmitting selectable12 Transmit Method Single or dual transmitting

13 Output Power 300 Wrms14 TX Rate Max 500 pulsemin15 Pulse-length 01 to 08 ms

2 DISPLAY UNIT21 Display system 5-inch monochrome LCD 76 mm (W) x 100 mm (H) 240 x 320 dots22 Display Mode Single frequency (highlow freq) Dual-frequency Zoom Nav data-12

Marker zoom Bottom zoom Bottom-lock23 Display Range

Range SettingRange

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

Display

rangeMeter 5 10 20 40 80 150 200 300 2-500

Feet 15 30 60 120 200 400 600 1000 7-1500

Fathoms 3 5 10 20 40 80 100 150 1-250

PassiBraza 3 5 10 30 50 100 150 200 1-300

24 Range Shift 0-500 m 0-1500 ft 0-250 fa 0-300 pb25 Expansion Range Bottom-lock expansion 3 to 10 m

Sectional expansion 2 to 50 m26 Display Advance Speed 8 steps (LinesTX Freeze 1161814121121 41)

3 INTERFACE31 Input data sentences IEC61162-1NMEA0183 Ver 152030

GGA RMA RMB RMC BWC GLL HDT HDG VTG VHW MTWMWV MDA XTE

32 Output data sentences IEC61162-1NMEA0183 Ver 152030 interval 2 sMTW VHW DBT DPT RMB TLL by key operating External data required

4 POWER SUPPLY41 Display Unit 12 VDC 05 A

5 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITION51 Ambient Temperature Display unit -15degC to +55degC52 Relative Humidity 93 or less at 40degC53 Waterproof IPX5

6 COATING COLOR61 Display Unit N30

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4548

M a r

4

0 3

D-1

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4648

Mar 4 03

Mar 4 03

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4748

M a r

3

0 3

S-1

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4848

FURUNO Authorized DistributorDealer FURUNO Authorized DistributorDealer

9-52 Ashihara-cho9-52 Ashihara-choNishinomiya 662-8580 JAPANNishinomiya 662-8580 JAPAN

Telephone Telephone 0798-65-21110798-65-2111FaxFax 0798-65-42000798-65-4200

FIRST EDITION FIRST EDITION MARMAR 20032003Printed in JapanPrinted in Japan All rights reserved All rights reserved

B1B1 SEPSEP 09 200509 2005

Pub NoPub No OME-23710OME-23710 00014698000000146980000001469800000014698000(( DAMIDAMI )) LS-4100LS-4100

0 0 0 1 4 6 9 8 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 4 6 9 8 0 0 0

Page 26: OME23710B_1_LS4100

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 2648

20

SPEED CALIB If the speedsensor-generated speed indication iswrong you can correct it here whenldquoOwnrdquo is selected as speed source Forexample if the speed indication is 10lower than actual speed enter +10 Thesetting range is ndash50 to +50

Page 3

BASIC RANGE 1 - BASIC RANGE 8 Set range of each of the eight basicranges (Selectable range 7 to 1500 ft)Note 1 All default basic ranges arerestored whenever the depth unit ischanged Therefore change the depth

unit before changing the basic rangesNote 2 A range may not be lower thanthe range preceding it For example ifbasic range 3 is 60 feet basic range 4must be greater than 60 feet

ZOOM RANGE Choose the range tozoom in the marker-zoom andbottom-zoom modes You may choose arange between 7 and 150 feet (2 and 50

meters)

BL RANGE The expansion width forthe bottom-lock display can be chosenfrom 10 to 30 feet (3 and 10 meters)

ZOOM MARKER The zoom markerappears in the normal bottom markerand bottom zoom displays and marksthe area which is expanded in the

bottom marker and bottom zoompictures You can turn the marker on oroff as desired

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 2748

21

3 MAINTENANCETROUBLESHOOTING

W RNING

ELECTRICAL SHOCK HAZARDDo not open the equipment

Only qualified personnel should workinside the equipment

31 Maintenance

Regular maintenance is essential forgood performance Checking the itemslisted in the table below monthly willhelp keep your equipment in goodshape for years to come

Checking

Item Action

Transducercable

Check cable for damage

Power cabletransducercable plug

Check that they are tightlyfastened Refasten ifnecessary

Display unitground

Check for corrosion Cleanif necessary

Power supplyvoltage

Check voltage If out ofrating correct problem

32 Cleaning the DisplayUnit

Dust or dirt on the display unit can beremoved with a soft cloth If desired awater-moistened cloth may be usedUse special care when cleaning theLCD since it scratches easily Do notuse chemical cleaners to clean thedisplay unit - they can remove paint andmarkings

33 TransducerMaintenance

Marine life on the transducer face willresult in a gradual decrease insensitivity Check the transducer facefor cleanliness each time the boat isdry-docked Carefully remove anymarine life with a piece of wood orfine-grade sandpaper

34 Replacing the FuseThe fuse in the power cable protects thesystem from reverse polarity of thepower supply and equipment fault If thefuse blows find the cause beforereplacing it Use only a 1A fuse (FGMB 1A 125V Code No 000-114-805 ) orequivalent Using the wrong fuse will damage the unit and void the warranty

W RNINGUse the proper fuse

Fuse rating is shown on the equipmentUse of a wrong fuse can result in fire anddamage the equipment

35 Battery Voltage Alert A battery icon appears when the batteryvoltage is too high or too low

Battery icon and meaning

Icon Meaning

Voltage is lower than 10 VDC If thevoltage goes below 9 V the equipmentis automatically turned off

Voltage is higher than 165 VDC If thevoltage goes higher than 175 V theequipment is automatically turned off

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 2848

22

36 TroubleshootingThe table below provides basictroubleshooting procedures which theuser may follow to restore normaloperation

Troubleshooting table

Ifhellip Then check hellipneither echo norfixed range scaleappears

bull battery voltagebull fusebull power cable

no echo appearsbut the fixedrange scaleappears

bull if display advancespeed is set to ldquoStoprdquo

bull transducer plugbull

transducer cableecho appears butno zero line

bull if range shifting is setto ldquo0rdquo

sensitivity is low bull gain settingbull if air bubbles or marine

life is clinging to thetransducer face

bull if sediments arepresent in the water

bull if the bottom is too soft

to return an echothere is extremeinterference ornoise

bull if the transducer is tooclose to the engine

bull if the unit is properlygrounded

bull if other echo soundersof the same frequencyas own are beingoperated nearby

the speedwatertemperaturereadout isunrealistic or notpresent

bull sensor plug

the positionreadout isunrealistic or notpresent

bull the connectionbetween sounder andnavigator

bull navigator

37 DiagnosticsIf you feel your unit is not workingproperly conduct the diagnostic test tofind the problem If you cannot restorenormal operation contact your dealerfor advice

1 Turn on the power while pressing the[MENUESC] key Continue pressingthe [MENUESC] key until theInstallation menu appears

SIMULATION On

TEST LCD PATTERN MEMORY CLEAR

NMEA PORT InOutNMEA MIX Off GPS WAAS Off

SET BOTTOM LEVEL

Installation Menu

= Setting cannot be changed whenNMEA PORT setting is InIn

Installation menu2 Press to choose TEST3 Press to start the test

ROM OKRAM OKNMEA

Temp 682 deg F

Speed 100kmh

Power 124 VBody 39 deg C

Program No 0252318-01Push [MENU] 3 times to exit

Level bar

= Program version no

Water

TemperatureSpeedBattery VoltageTemperatureinside displayunit(Unit fixed atdeg C)

GPS (48502180) OK

Only when GP-310B is connected(For GP-320B 4850238)

Test display

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 2948

23

4 The ROM RAM and NMEA port arechecked with the results shown asOK or NG (No Good) For any NGrequest service (A special connectoris required to test the NMEA portNothing appears if no connector isconnected)

5 The squares at the right side of thetest display are for checking thecontrols Press each key and thearrows on the Cursor Pad one byone A controlrsquos correspondingon-screen square ldquolightsrdquo in black ifthe control is normal

6 To return to the Installation menupress the [MENUESC] key threetimes

7 To restore normal operation turn offthe power and turn it on again

38 Test PatternThis feature tests for proper display oftones

1 On the Installation menu press $ tochoose LCD PATTERN

2 Press to start the test The entirescreen is black

3 Press again and the screen turnswhite

4 Press again and the screenshows a four-toned display

5 Press again to return to theInstallation menu

6 To restore normal operation turn offthe power and then it on again

WHITE FOUR-TONE BLACK

Test patterns

39 Memory ClearThe memory can be cleared to startafresh with default menu settings

1 At the installation menu press $ tochoose MEMORY CLEAR

2 Press to open the optionswindow

YES NO

Clear memory display

3 Press to clear the memory Beepsare generated while the memory isbeing cleared

4 To restore normal operation turn offthe power and then turn it on again

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3048

24

4 INSTALLATION

41 Display UnitMounting considerations

The display unit can be installed on adesktop on the bulkhead or flushmounted in a panel When choosing alocation keep the following in mind

bull Keep the display unit out of directsunlight

bull The temperature and humidity should

be moderate and stablebull Locate the unit away from exhaust

pipes and ventsbull The mounting location should be well

ventilatedbull Mount the unit where shock and

vibration are minimalbull For maintenance and checking

purposes leave sufficient space atthe sides and rear of the unit andleave slack in cables

bull A magnetic compass will be affected ifthe display unit is placed too close toit Observe the following compasssafe distances to prevent disturbanceto the magnetic compassStandard compass 04 metersSteering compass 03 meters

Desktop overhead mounting1 Fix the bracket to a desktop or the

overhead with tapping screws(supplied)

2 Loosely screw knobs into the displayunit

3 Set the display unit to the bracketand then tighten the knobs

Mounting on the bulkhead Flush

mounting in a panelSee the instructions on the bulkhead orflush mounting template (supplied)

42 Thru-hull MountTransducer

Transducer mounting location

The thru-hull mount transducer

(520-5PSD 520-5MSD) provides thebest performance of all since thetransducer protrudes from the hull andthe effect of air bubbles and turbulencenear the hull skin is reduced When theboat has a keel the transducer shouldbe at least 30 cm away from it Typicalthru-hull mountings are shown in thefigure on the next page

The performance of this sounder isdirectly related to the mounting locationof the transducer especially forhigh-speed cruising The installationshould be planned in advance keepingthe standard cable length (8 m) and thefollowing factors in mindbull Air bubbles and turbulence caused by

movement of the boat seriouslydegrade the sounding capability of thetransducer The transducer shouldtherefore be located in a positionwhere water flow is the smoothestNoise from the propellers alsoadversely affects performance andthe transducer should not be mountednearby The lifting strakes arenotorious for creating acoustic noiseand these must be avoided bykeeping the transducer inboard ofthem

bull The transducer must always remain

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3148

25

submerged even when the boat isrolling pitching or up on a plane athigh speed

bull A practical choice would besomewhere between 13 and 12 of

the boatrsquos length from the stern Forplaning hulls a practical location isgenerally rather far astern so that thetransducer is always in waterregardless of the planing attitude

28

22

120

68

30

520-5PSD

24

120

68

87520-5MSD

Unit mm

Thru-hull mount transducer dimensions

Acceptable transducer mounting

locations

Position 12 to 13 of the hull from stern

15 to 30 cm off center line (inside first lifting strakes)

Within the wetted bottom area

Deadrise angle within 15 deg

HIGH SPEED-V HULL

Suitable transducer mounting locations

Typical thru-hull mounttransducer installations

FairingBlock

Flat Washer

Rubber Washer

Hull

Deep-V Hull

Hull

Flat Washer

Rubber Washer

Flat Hull

CorkWasher

Typical thru-hull mounttransducer installations

Procedure for installing thethru-hull mount transducer

1 With the boat hauled out of the watermark the location chosen formounting the transducer on thebottom of the hull

2 If the hull is not level within 15deg inany direction fairing blocks madeout of teak should be used betweenthe transducer and hull both insideand outside to keep the transducerface parallel with the water lineFabricate the fairing block as shownbelow and make the entire surfaceas smooth as possible to provide anundisturbed flow of water around thetransducer The fairing block shouldbe smaller than the transducer itselfto provide a channel to divert

turbulent water around the sides ofthe transducer rather than over itsface

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3248

26

BOWHole for stuffing tube

Upper Half

Lower Half

Saw along slopeof hull Construction of fairing block

3 Drill a hole just large enough to passthe threaded stuffing tube of thetransducer through the hull makingsure it is drilled vertically

4 Apply a sufficient amount of highquality caulking compound to the topsurface of the transducer around thethreads of the stuffing tube andinside the mounting hole (and fairingblocks if used) to ensure watertightmounting

5 Mount the transducer and fairingblocks and tighten the locking nutsBe sure that the transducer is

properly oriented and its workingface is parallel to the waterline

Note Do not over-stress the stuffingtube and locking nuts through excessivetightening since the wood block willswell when the boat is placed in thewater It is suggested that the nut betightened lightly at installation andretightened several days after the boat

has been launched

Transducer preparation

Before putting the boat in water wipethe face of the transducer thoroughlywith a detergent liquid soap This willlessen the time necessary for thetransducer to have good contact withthe water Otherwise the time requiredfor complete ldquosaturationrdquo ill belengthened and performance will bereduced

DO NOT paint the transducerPerformance will be affected

43 Transom MountTransducer

The transom mount transducer is verycommonly employed usually onrelatively small IO or outboard boatsDo not use this method on an inboardmotor boat because turbulence iscreated by the propeller ahead of thetransducer

520-5PWD

There are two methods of installationflush with hull (for flat hulls) andprojecting from hull (for deep V-hulls)

Flat Hull

D

Dgt50 cm

Deep-VHull

520-5PWD mounting locations

Installing the 520-5PWD on a flat hull

A suitable mounting location is at least50 cm away from the engine and wherethe water flow is smooth

1 Drill four pilot holes in the mountinglocation

2 Attach the transducer to the bracketwith 5 x 20 tapping screws(supplied)

3 Adjust the transducer position so thetransducer faces right to the bottom

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3348

27

Note If necessary to improve waterflow and minimize air bubblesstaying on the transducer faceincline the transducer about 5deg at therear This may require a certainamount of experimentation for finetuning at high cruising speeds

4 Fill the gap between the wedge frontof the transducer and transom withepoxy material to eliminate any airspaces

No1 M5 x 14

5 x 20

5 x 20

2 to 5

Tape

Hull

Transom mount transducer

mounting flush with hull

Installing the transom mounttransducer on a deep-V hull

This method is employed on deep-Vhulls and provides good performancebecause the effects of air bubbles areminimal Install the transducer parallelwith water surface not flush with hull Ifthe boat is placed on a trailer care mustbe taken not to damage the transducerwhen the boat is hauled out of the waterand put on the trailer

5 x 20

No 2M5 x 14

5 x 20

Transom mount transducermounted projecting from hull

525-5PWD

Choose the installation methoddepending on the rise angle of the hull

Transom

Transom

Stripe over 10

Parallel with hull

Mount at the stripe

less than 10

525-5PWD mounting location

Installing the 525-5PWD

Referring to ldquoInstalling the 520-5PWDrdquoin the left column for mounting of thebracket and the figure shown on the topof next page install the 525-5PWD tothe transom

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3448

28

2 to 5

Transducer

Bracket

Hull

Epoxy material

525-5PWD mounting

44 Inside-hullTransducer

The thru-hull mount transducer(520-5PSD 520-5MSD) may also beinstalled inside the hull following theprocedure below

Necessary tools

You will need the following toolsbull Sandpaper (100)bull Silicone sealantbull Silicone grease

Remarks on installationbull Turn off the engine and anchor the

boat while installing the equipmentbull Install the transducer in the engine

room

Choosing the mounting locationbull The mounting location should be

where the hull is of single-hullthickness and is void of air or flotationmaterials other than solid fiberglassbetween the transducer face and thewater

bull Do not place the transducer over hullstruts or ribs which run under the hull

bull Avoid a location where the risingangle of the hull exceeds 15deg tominimize the effect of the boatrsquosrolling

bull You will finalize the mounting location

through some trial and error Theprocedure for this is shown later

50 cm

50 cm15 cm15 cm

13

12

Transducer mountinglocation

Centerline

Inside-hull transducer mounting location

Attaching the transducer1 Clean the transducer face to remove

any foreign material Lightly roughenthe transducer face with 100sandpaper Also roughen the insideof the hull where the transducer is tobe mounted

2 Clean the transducer face again3 Warm the silicone sealant to 40degC

before usage to soften it Coat thetransducer face and mountinglocation with silicone sealant

Transducer

SiliconeSealant

Coating transducer facewith silicone sealant

4 Press the transducer firmly down onthe hull and gently twist it back andforth to remove any air which may betrapped in the silicone sealant

Checking the installation

1 Connect the battery to the display

unit2 Turn on the display unit

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3548

29

3 Press the [MODE] key to chooseSINGLE FREQ

4 Choose 50 kHz or 200 kHz and thenpress the [MENUESC] key to closethe mode menu

5 Press the [MENU] to show the mainmenu and then press to select

Auto mode6 Press to choose Off7 Press the [MENUESC] key8 Press the [GAIN] key to set the gain

to ldquo5rdquo and then press the[MENUESC] key

9 Press the [RANGE] key to set therange to 10 meters (feet) and thenpress the [MENUESC] key

10 If the bottom is displayed in darkgray and the depth indicationappears the mounting location issuitable Go to ldquoFinal preparationrdquo

11 If the bottom is not displayed in darkgray tone the mounting location maybe unsuitable Do the followinga) Press the [POWERBRILL] key to

turn off the powerb) Gently dismount the transducer

with a piece of woodc) Reattach the transducer

elsewhere as shown in ldquoAttachingthe transducerrdquo

d) Check the installation again

Final preparation

Support the transducer with a piece ofwood to keep it in place while it is drying

Let the transducer dry 24-72 hours

45 Optional Triducer525ST-MSD

The optional triducer 525ST-MSD isdesigned for thru-hull mounting Forhow to install this transducer seeparagraph 42

φ79 mm

33 mm200-12 UNthreads

φ51 mm

27 mm

7 mm

140 mm Triducer 525ST-MSD

525ST-PWD

The Transom Mount Transducer orTRIDUCER reg Multisensor with IntegralRelease Bracket 525ST-PWD ismanufactured by AIRMAR Co Theseinstructions are also included with the

sensor

Pre-test for speed and temperature

Connect the sensor to the instrumentand spin the paddlewheel Check for aspeed reading and the approximate airtemperature If there is no readingreturn the sensor to your place ofpurchase

Tools and materials needed

ScissorsMasking tapeSafety gogglesDust maskElectric drillDrill bit for

Bracket holes 4mm 23 or 964rdquoFiberglass hull chamfer bit(preferred)6mm or 14rdquo

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3648

30

Transom hole 19mm or 34rdquo(optional)

Cable clamp holes 3mm or 18rdquoScrewdriversStraight edgeMarine sealantPencilZip-tiesWater-based antifouling paint(mandatory in salt water )

Mounting location

To ensure the best performance thesensor must be submerged inaeration-free and turbulence-free water

Mount the sensor close to the centerlineof the boat On slower heavierdisplacement hulls positioning it fartherfrom the centerline is acceptable

Allow adequate space above thebracket for it to release and rotate thesensor upward

Height

Height withoutspeed sensor191mm (7-12)Height withspeed sensor213mm (8-12)

Height required at mounting location

Note 1 Do not mount the sensor in anarea of turbulence or bubbles nearwater intake or discharge openingsbehind strakes struts fittings or hull

irregularities behind eroding paint (anindication of turbulence)Note 2 Avoid mounting the sensorwhere the boat may be supportedduring trailering launching hauling andstorageNote 3 For single drive boat mounton the starboard side at least 75 mm(3rdquo) beyond the swing radius of thepropeller

75 mm(3)

minimum beyondswing radius

Mounting location on single drive boat

Note 4 For twin drive boat mountbetween the drives

Installation of bracket

1 Cut out the installation template

shown on the next page2 At the selected location position thetemplate so the arrow at the bottomis aligned with the bottom edge ofthe transom Being sure the templateis parallel to the waterline tape it inplace

Align template vertically

Deadrise angle

Slope of hullparallel towaterline

Align template arrow withbottom edge of transom

Positioning the template

Warning Always wear safetygoggles and a dust mask

3 Using a 4 mm 23 or 964rdquo bit drillthree holes 22 mm (78rdquo) deepat the locations indicated To preventdrilling too deeply wrap maskingtape around the bit 22 mm (78rdquo)from the pointFiberglass hull Minimize surfacecracking by chamfering the gelcoatIf a chamfer bit or countersink bit is

not available start drilling with a6mm or 14rdquo bit to a depth of 1 mm(116rdquo)

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3748

31

4 If you know your transom angle the

bracket is designed for a standard13deg transom angle11deg-18deg angle No shim is requiredSkip to step 3 in ldquoAdjustingrdquoOther angles The shim is requiredSkip to step 2 of ldquoAdjustingrdquoIf you do not know the transom angletemporarily attach the bracket andsensor to the transom to determine ifthe plastic shim is needed

5 Using the two 10 x 1-14rdquo

self-tapping screws temporarilyscrew the bracket to the hull DONOT tighten the screws completelyat this time Follow the step 1-4 inldquoAttaching the Sensor to the Bracketrdquobefore proceeding with ldquoAdjustingrdquo

Installation templatefor starboard side of boat

Drill at locations labeled Bfor the following transom angles

16 deg through 22 deg

Drill at locations labeled Afor the following transom angles

2 deg through 15 deg

Align arrow with bottom of transom

AA A

BB B

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3848

32

Adjusting

1 Using a straight edge sight theunderside of the sensor relative tothe underside of the hull The sternof the sensor should be 1-3 mm

(116-18rdquo) below the bow of thesensor or parallel to the bottom ofthe hull

11 deg transom angleNO SHIM

12-18 deg transom angleNO SHIM

2 deg -10 deg transom

angle

19 deg -22 deg transom

angleshim withtaper up

shim withtaper down

parallelparallel parallel

slightangle

angletoo steep

anglereversed

YES NONO

YES YESYES

Sensor position and transom angle

Note Do not position the bow of thesensor lower than the stern becauseaeration will occur

2 To adjust the sensorrsquos angle relativeto the hull use the tapered plasticshim provided If the bracket hasbeen temporarily fastened to thetransom remove it Key the shim in

place on the back of the bracket2deg-10deg transom angle (steppedtransom and jet boats) Positionthe shim with the tapered end down19deg-22deg transom angle (smallaluminum and fiberglass boats) Position the shim with the taperedend up

3 If the bracket has been temporarilyfastened to the transom remove it

Apply a marine sealant to thethreads of the two 10 x 1-14rdquo self

tapping screws to prevent waterseeping into the transom Screw thebracket to the hull Do not tighten thescrews completely at this time

4 Repeat step 1 to ensure that theangle of the sensor is correctNote Do not position the sensorfarther into the water than necessaryto avoid increasing drag spray andwater noise and reducing boatspeed

5 Using the vertical adjustment spaceon the bracket slots slide the sensorup or down to provide a projection of3 mm (18rdquo) Tighten the screws

Cable cover

Cableclamp

50 mm (2)

Hull projection 3 mm (18)

Vertical adjustment and cable routing

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3948

33

Attaching the sensor to the bracket

1 If the retaining cover near the top ofthe bracket is closed open it bydepressing the latch and rotating thecover downward

Step 1 Step 2

Latch

Retainingcover

Pivotarm (2)

Slot (2)

Step 4

Step 3

Attaching the sensor to the bracket

2 Insert the sensorrsquos pivot arms intothe slots near the top of the bracket

3 Maintain pressure until the pivotarms click into place

4 Rotate the sensor downward until thebottom snaps into the bracket

5 Close the retaining cover to preventthe accidental release of the sensorwhen the boat is underway

Cable routing

Route the sensor cable over thetransom through a drain hole orthorough a new hole drilled in thetransom above the waterline

Never cut the cable or remote the

connector this will void the warranty Always wear safety goggles and a dustmask

1 If a hole must be drilled choose alocation well above the waterlineCheck for obstructions such as trimtabs pumps or wiring inside the hullMark the location with a pencil Drilla hole through the transom using a19 mm or 34rdquo bit (to accommodatethe connector)

2 Route the cable over or through thetransom

3 On the outside of the hull secure thecable against the transom using thecable clamps Position a cable clamp50 mm(2rdquo) above the bracket andmark the mounting hole with apencil

4 Position the second cable clamphalfway between the first clamp andthe cable hole Mark this mountinghole

5 If a hole has been drilled in thetransom open the appropriate slot inthe transom cable cover Position thecover over the cable where it entersthe hull Mark the two mounting

holes6 At each of the marked locations usea 3 mm or 18rdquo bit to drill a hole 10mm (38rdquo) deep The prevent drillingtoo deeply wrap masking tapearound the bit 10 mm (38rdquo) from thepoint

7 Apply marine sealant to the threadsof the 6 x 12rdquo self-tapping screw toprevent water from seeping into the

transom If you have drilled a holethrough the transom apply marinesealant to the space around thecable where it passes through thetransom

8 Position the two cable clamps andfasten them in place If used pushthe cable cover over the cable andscrew it in place

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4048

34

9 Route the cable to the instrumentbeing careful not to tear the cable

jacket when passing it though thebulkhead(s) and other parts of theboat To reduce electricalinterference separate the sensorcable from other electrical wiring andldquonoiserdquo sources Coil any excesscable and secure it in place withzip-ties to prevent damage

46 Optional WaterTemperatureSpeedSensor

Water temperaturespeed sensorST-02MSB and ST-02PSB which aredesigned for thru-hull mounting areoptionally available Install them asshown below

Mounting considerations

Choose a suitable mounting locationconsidering the followingbull Choose a place free from vibrationbull Choose a mid-boat flat position The

sensor does not have to be installedperfectly perpendicular The sensormust not be damaged in dry-dockingoperation

bull Choose a place apart from equipmentgenerating heat

bull Choose a place in the forwarddirection viewing from the drain holeto allow for circulation of coolingwater

1 Dry-dock the boat2 Make a hole of approx 51 mm

diameter in the mounting location3 Unfasten locknut and remove the

sensor section4 Apply high-grade sealant to the

flange of the sensor5 Pass the sensor casing through thehole

6 Face the notch on the sensor towardboatrsquos bow and tighten the flange

7 Set the sensor section to the sensorcasing and tighten the locknut

8 Launch the boat and check for waterleakage around the sensor

Locknut

Face notchtoward bow

Flange Nut

Coat withsilicone sealant Brim

φ 77

51

123

Water temperaturespeed sensor

ST-02MSB ST-02PSB

47 Wiring

Connect the LS-4100 powerdata cableassy MJ-A7SPF0005-020 (2 msupplied) to the POWER and thetransducer cable to the XDR connectorRefer to the interconnection diagram toconnect cables Leave slack in cables tofacilitate checking and maintenance

Note The fuse holder contains a springwhich fixes the fuse To preventdetachment of the spring which wouldcause loss of power tie the line asshown below

+ line (red)

Fuse holder

Cable tie How to fix fuse holder

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4148

35

Establishing the ground

The ground wire (125 sq or more localsupply) should be as short as possible

The signal line ground is isolated from

the chassis ground however the powerline is not insulated Therefore whenconnecting eternal equipment havingpositive ground do not ground thesignal line to the chassis If excessivenoise shows on the screen the groundmay be inadequate In this case attacha steel plate measuring 20 cm by 30 cmon the outside of the hull to provide aground point Connect the ground wire

there Use a ldquoclosedrdquo type lug ( ) tomake the connection at the display unitDo not use an ldquoopenrdquo type lug ( )

Optional equipment

POWER connector

The power supply port is commonlyused for connection of externalequipment such as a GPS receiver orwind indicator Use the powerdatacable MJ-A7SPF0005-020 (supplied) forconnection referring the figure shown inthe right column

Connector Color Remarks

1 TD-A WHT2 TD-B BLU

IEC-61162-1NMEA0183

3 RD-A YEL

4 RD-B GRN

IEC-61162-1

NMEA01835 + RED

6 - BLKPower input12 VDC

7 FG

Water tempspeed sensor

Connect the optional water tempspeedsensor to the XDR connector with theoptional converter connector (Type02S4147) as shown below

Tape connectors withvulcaninzing tapeand then vinyl tapeto waterproof themBind tape ends withcable ties to preventtape from unraveling

Connect to XDR portat rear of display unit

MJ-A10SPF

MJ-A10SRMDMJ-A6SRMD

Fromtransducer

Fromsensor

Connection of converterconnector 02S4147

48 IEC 61162-1 DataSentences

The tables below show the datasentences which can be input to andoutput from the LS-4100 Thetransmission speed for both input andoutput is 4800 bps Data is output attwo-second intervals

Input data sentences

Sentence Meaning

BWC Bearing and distance towaypoint

GGA Global positioning system(GPS) fix data

GLL Geographic position -latitudelongitude

HDG Heading deviation and variationHDT Heading true

MDA Atmospheric pressure

MTW Water temperature

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4248

36

Input data sentences (conrsquot)

Sentence MeaningMWV Wind speed and

angleRMA Recommended

minimum specificLORAN-C dataRMB Recommended

minimum navigationinformation

RMC Recommendedminimum specificGPSTRANSIT data

VHW Water speed andheading

VTG Course over groundand ground speedXTE Cross track error

Output data sentences

Sentence MeaningDBT (Ver 15) Depth below

transducerDPT (Ver 20 Ver30)

Depth

MTW Water temperatureRMB (Ver 20) Recommended

minimumnavigationinformation

VHW Water speed andheading

TLL Target positionoutput by [MARK]key

= Available with connection of optionalsensorsnavaid

49 Installation MenuThe installation menu mainly containsitems which are set at installation

1 Turn on the power while pressing the[MENUESC] key Continue pressing

the [MENUESC] key until theInstallation menu appears

SIMULATION On

TEST LCD PATTERN MEMORY CLEAR

NMEA PORT InOutNMEA MIX OffGPS WAAS Off

SET BOTTOM LEVEL

Installation Menu

= Setting cannot be changed whenNMEA PORT setting is InIn

Installation menu

SIMULATION The simulation modeprovides without connection of thetransducer simulated operation of theequipment using internally generatedechoes All controls are operative Themessage ldquoSIMrdquo appears at the top rightcorner on the screen when thesimulation mode is active

1 At the installation menu press toopen the simulation mode optionswindow

2 Press to choose ldquoOnrdquo to turn onthe simulation mode

3 Press the [POWERBRILL] keyabout three seconds to turn off thepower

4 Press the [POWERBRILL] key toturn on the power ldquoSIMrdquo appears atthe top right corner of the display

5 To turn off the simulation modeselect Off at step 2

NMEA po r t se tup(NMEA PO RT NMEA M IX)

The POWER port can function as aninput port or inputoutput port Changethe setting to ldquoInInrdquo when connectingGP-310B320B and a wind sensor

When connecting the GP-310B320Band a wind sensor first turn on ldquoGPS

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4348

37

WAASrdquo (in the Installation menu) andthen select ldquoInInrdquo as the NMEA portsetting

1 Turn on the power while pressingand holding down the [MENUESC]key Continue pressing the[MENUESC] key until theInstallation menu appears

2 Choose NMEA PORT and thenpress to display the NMEA portoptions window

3 Use or to choose InOut orInIn as appropriate

InOut Input and Output (default

setting)InIn Input only (Available withconnection of the GP-310B320Band a wind sensor)

4 Press choose NMEA MIX andthen press to display the NMEAMIX options window

5 Use or to choose Off or OnChoose On to output input data

Off Outputs the data sentences ofLS-4100 only

On Outputs the data sentences ofLS-4100 and sentences which areinput from other equipment

6 To restore normal operation turn offthe power and then turn it on again

GPS WAAS Chooses how to use theWAAS signal when connecting with a

WAAS receiver for example GP-320B

Note WAAS is currently in thedevelopmental phase During thedevelopmental phase the reliability andavailability of the WAAS signal cannotbe guaranteed Therefore any positiondata should be verified against othersources to confirm reliability

1 Display the Installation menu2 Choose GPS WAAS and then press

to open the GPS WAAS options

window

Off

WAAS options window3 Press or to choose ldquoWAAS-02rdquo

(test signal) When the systembecomes operational (in 2003) setto ldquo00rdquo (regular WAAS signal)

4 Turn off the power

BOTTOM LEVEL If the depthindication is unstable in automaticoperation or the bottom echo cannot bedisplayed in the darkest gray tone byadjusting the gain controls in manualoperation you may adjust the bottomecho level detection circuit for both 50kHz and 200 kHz to stabilize theindication Generally lower the bottomlevel for inner hull installation where thereceive level is too low If the bottomlevel is too low it may be difficult todiscriminate fish from the bottomresulting in unstable depth indication

And if the bottom level is too high thedepth indication may not appear

1 At the installation menu press tochoose SET BOTTOM LEVEL andthen press Several seconds laterthe following display appears

Bottom level +0 (200k -100 - +100 ) +0 ( 50k -100 - +100 )

Bottom level display

2 While observing the picture use or to set 200 kHz or to set50 kHz Set up for optimum picture

3 To restore normal operation turn offthe power and then it on again

Note The mode must be other thanldquoNAV DATArdquo to show the bottom leveldisplay

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4448

SP - 1 E2371S01C

SPECIFICATIONS OF ECHO SOUNDER LS-4100

1 GENERAL11 TX Frequency 50 kHz or 200 kHz 50200 kHz dual transmitting selectable12 Transmit Method Single or dual transmitting

13 Output Power 300 Wrms14 TX Rate Max 500 pulsemin15 Pulse-length 01 to 08 ms

2 DISPLAY UNIT21 Display system 5-inch monochrome LCD 76 mm (W) x 100 mm (H) 240 x 320 dots22 Display Mode Single frequency (highlow freq) Dual-frequency Zoom Nav data-12

Marker zoom Bottom zoom Bottom-lock23 Display Range

Range SettingRange

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

Display

rangeMeter 5 10 20 40 80 150 200 300 2-500

Feet 15 30 60 120 200 400 600 1000 7-1500

Fathoms 3 5 10 20 40 80 100 150 1-250

PassiBraza 3 5 10 30 50 100 150 200 1-300

24 Range Shift 0-500 m 0-1500 ft 0-250 fa 0-300 pb25 Expansion Range Bottom-lock expansion 3 to 10 m

Sectional expansion 2 to 50 m26 Display Advance Speed 8 steps (LinesTX Freeze 1161814121121 41)

3 INTERFACE31 Input data sentences IEC61162-1NMEA0183 Ver 152030

GGA RMA RMB RMC BWC GLL HDT HDG VTG VHW MTWMWV MDA XTE

32 Output data sentences IEC61162-1NMEA0183 Ver 152030 interval 2 sMTW VHW DBT DPT RMB TLL by key operating External data required

4 POWER SUPPLY41 Display Unit 12 VDC 05 A

5 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITION51 Ambient Temperature Display unit -15degC to +55degC52 Relative Humidity 93 or less at 40degC53 Waterproof IPX5

6 COATING COLOR61 Display Unit N30

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4548

M a r

4

0 3

D-1

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4648

Mar 4 03

Mar 4 03

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4748

M a r

3

0 3

S-1

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4848

FURUNO Authorized DistributorDealer FURUNO Authorized DistributorDealer

9-52 Ashihara-cho9-52 Ashihara-choNishinomiya 662-8580 JAPANNishinomiya 662-8580 JAPAN

Telephone Telephone 0798-65-21110798-65-2111FaxFax 0798-65-42000798-65-4200

FIRST EDITION FIRST EDITION MARMAR 20032003Printed in JapanPrinted in Japan All rights reserved All rights reserved

B1B1 SEPSEP 09 200509 2005

Pub NoPub No OME-23710OME-23710 00014698000000146980000001469800000014698000(( DAMIDAMI )) LS-4100LS-4100

0 0 0 1 4 6 9 8 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 4 6 9 8 0 0 0

Page 27: OME23710B_1_LS4100

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 2748

21

3 MAINTENANCETROUBLESHOOTING

W RNING

ELECTRICAL SHOCK HAZARDDo not open the equipment

Only qualified personnel should workinside the equipment

31 Maintenance

Regular maintenance is essential forgood performance Checking the itemslisted in the table below monthly willhelp keep your equipment in goodshape for years to come

Checking

Item Action

Transducercable

Check cable for damage

Power cabletransducercable plug

Check that they are tightlyfastened Refasten ifnecessary

Display unitground

Check for corrosion Cleanif necessary

Power supplyvoltage

Check voltage If out ofrating correct problem

32 Cleaning the DisplayUnit

Dust or dirt on the display unit can beremoved with a soft cloth If desired awater-moistened cloth may be usedUse special care when cleaning theLCD since it scratches easily Do notuse chemical cleaners to clean thedisplay unit - they can remove paint andmarkings

33 TransducerMaintenance

Marine life on the transducer face willresult in a gradual decrease insensitivity Check the transducer facefor cleanliness each time the boat isdry-docked Carefully remove anymarine life with a piece of wood orfine-grade sandpaper

34 Replacing the FuseThe fuse in the power cable protects thesystem from reverse polarity of thepower supply and equipment fault If thefuse blows find the cause beforereplacing it Use only a 1A fuse (FGMB 1A 125V Code No 000-114-805 ) orequivalent Using the wrong fuse will damage the unit and void the warranty

W RNINGUse the proper fuse

Fuse rating is shown on the equipmentUse of a wrong fuse can result in fire anddamage the equipment

35 Battery Voltage Alert A battery icon appears when the batteryvoltage is too high or too low

Battery icon and meaning

Icon Meaning

Voltage is lower than 10 VDC If thevoltage goes below 9 V the equipmentis automatically turned off

Voltage is higher than 165 VDC If thevoltage goes higher than 175 V theequipment is automatically turned off

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 2848

22

36 TroubleshootingThe table below provides basictroubleshooting procedures which theuser may follow to restore normaloperation

Troubleshooting table

Ifhellip Then check hellipneither echo norfixed range scaleappears

bull battery voltagebull fusebull power cable

no echo appearsbut the fixedrange scaleappears

bull if display advancespeed is set to ldquoStoprdquo

bull transducer plugbull

transducer cableecho appears butno zero line

bull if range shifting is setto ldquo0rdquo

sensitivity is low bull gain settingbull if air bubbles or marine

life is clinging to thetransducer face

bull if sediments arepresent in the water

bull if the bottom is too soft

to return an echothere is extremeinterference ornoise

bull if the transducer is tooclose to the engine

bull if the unit is properlygrounded

bull if other echo soundersof the same frequencyas own are beingoperated nearby

the speedwatertemperaturereadout isunrealistic or notpresent

bull sensor plug

the positionreadout isunrealistic or notpresent

bull the connectionbetween sounder andnavigator

bull navigator

37 DiagnosticsIf you feel your unit is not workingproperly conduct the diagnostic test tofind the problem If you cannot restorenormal operation contact your dealerfor advice

1 Turn on the power while pressing the[MENUESC] key Continue pressingthe [MENUESC] key until theInstallation menu appears

SIMULATION On

TEST LCD PATTERN MEMORY CLEAR

NMEA PORT InOutNMEA MIX Off GPS WAAS Off

SET BOTTOM LEVEL

Installation Menu

= Setting cannot be changed whenNMEA PORT setting is InIn

Installation menu2 Press to choose TEST3 Press to start the test

ROM OKRAM OKNMEA

Temp 682 deg F

Speed 100kmh

Power 124 VBody 39 deg C

Program No 0252318-01Push [MENU] 3 times to exit

Level bar

= Program version no

Water

TemperatureSpeedBattery VoltageTemperatureinside displayunit(Unit fixed atdeg C)

GPS (48502180) OK

Only when GP-310B is connected(For GP-320B 4850238)

Test display

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 2948

23

4 The ROM RAM and NMEA port arechecked with the results shown asOK or NG (No Good) For any NGrequest service (A special connectoris required to test the NMEA portNothing appears if no connector isconnected)

5 The squares at the right side of thetest display are for checking thecontrols Press each key and thearrows on the Cursor Pad one byone A controlrsquos correspondingon-screen square ldquolightsrdquo in black ifthe control is normal

6 To return to the Installation menupress the [MENUESC] key threetimes

7 To restore normal operation turn offthe power and turn it on again

38 Test PatternThis feature tests for proper display oftones

1 On the Installation menu press $ tochoose LCD PATTERN

2 Press to start the test The entirescreen is black

3 Press again and the screen turnswhite

4 Press again and the screenshows a four-toned display

5 Press again to return to theInstallation menu

6 To restore normal operation turn offthe power and then it on again

WHITE FOUR-TONE BLACK

Test patterns

39 Memory ClearThe memory can be cleared to startafresh with default menu settings

1 At the installation menu press $ tochoose MEMORY CLEAR

2 Press to open the optionswindow

YES NO

Clear memory display

3 Press to clear the memory Beepsare generated while the memory isbeing cleared

4 To restore normal operation turn offthe power and then turn it on again

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3048

24

4 INSTALLATION

41 Display UnitMounting considerations

The display unit can be installed on adesktop on the bulkhead or flushmounted in a panel When choosing alocation keep the following in mind

bull Keep the display unit out of directsunlight

bull The temperature and humidity should

be moderate and stablebull Locate the unit away from exhaust

pipes and ventsbull The mounting location should be well

ventilatedbull Mount the unit where shock and

vibration are minimalbull For maintenance and checking

purposes leave sufficient space atthe sides and rear of the unit andleave slack in cables

bull A magnetic compass will be affected ifthe display unit is placed too close toit Observe the following compasssafe distances to prevent disturbanceto the magnetic compassStandard compass 04 metersSteering compass 03 meters

Desktop overhead mounting1 Fix the bracket to a desktop or the

overhead with tapping screws(supplied)

2 Loosely screw knobs into the displayunit

3 Set the display unit to the bracketand then tighten the knobs

Mounting on the bulkhead Flush

mounting in a panelSee the instructions on the bulkhead orflush mounting template (supplied)

42 Thru-hull MountTransducer

Transducer mounting location

The thru-hull mount transducer

(520-5PSD 520-5MSD) provides thebest performance of all since thetransducer protrudes from the hull andthe effect of air bubbles and turbulencenear the hull skin is reduced When theboat has a keel the transducer shouldbe at least 30 cm away from it Typicalthru-hull mountings are shown in thefigure on the next page

The performance of this sounder isdirectly related to the mounting locationof the transducer especially forhigh-speed cruising The installationshould be planned in advance keepingthe standard cable length (8 m) and thefollowing factors in mindbull Air bubbles and turbulence caused by

movement of the boat seriouslydegrade the sounding capability of thetransducer The transducer shouldtherefore be located in a positionwhere water flow is the smoothestNoise from the propellers alsoadversely affects performance andthe transducer should not be mountednearby The lifting strakes arenotorious for creating acoustic noiseand these must be avoided bykeeping the transducer inboard ofthem

bull The transducer must always remain

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3148

25

submerged even when the boat isrolling pitching or up on a plane athigh speed

bull A practical choice would besomewhere between 13 and 12 of

the boatrsquos length from the stern Forplaning hulls a practical location isgenerally rather far astern so that thetransducer is always in waterregardless of the planing attitude

28

22

120

68

30

520-5PSD

24

120

68

87520-5MSD

Unit mm

Thru-hull mount transducer dimensions

Acceptable transducer mounting

locations

Position 12 to 13 of the hull from stern

15 to 30 cm off center line (inside first lifting strakes)

Within the wetted bottom area

Deadrise angle within 15 deg

HIGH SPEED-V HULL

Suitable transducer mounting locations

Typical thru-hull mounttransducer installations

FairingBlock

Flat Washer

Rubber Washer

Hull

Deep-V Hull

Hull

Flat Washer

Rubber Washer

Flat Hull

CorkWasher

Typical thru-hull mounttransducer installations

Procedure for installing thethru-hull mount transducer

1 With the boat hauled out of the watermark the location chosen formounting the transducer on thebottom of the hull

2 If the hull is not level within 15deg inany direction fairing blocks madeout of teak should be used betweenthe transducer and hull both insideand outside to keep the transducerface parallel with the water lineFabricate the fairing block as shownbelow and make the entire surfaceas smooth as possible to provide anundisturbed flow of water around thetransducer The fairing block shouldbe smaller than the transducer itselfto provide a channel to divert

turbulent water around the sides ofthe transducer rather than over itsface

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3248

26

BOWHole for stuffing tube

Upper Half

Lower Half

Saw along slopeof hull Construction of fairing block

3 Drill a hole just large enough to passthe threaded stuffing tube of thetransducer through the hull makingsure it is drilled vertically

4 Apply a sufficient amount of highquality caulking compound to the topsurface of the transducer around thethreads of the stuffing tube andinside the mounting hole (and fairingblocks if used) to ensure watertightmounting

5 Mount the transducer and fairingblocks and tighten the locking nutsBe sure that the transducer is

properly oriented and its workingface is parallel to the waterline

Note Do not over-stress the stuffingtube and locking nuts through excessivetightening since the wood block willswell when the boat is placed in thewater It is suggested that the nut betightened lightly at installation andretightened several days after the boat

has been launched

Transducer preparation

Before putting the boat in water wipethe face of the transducer thoroughlywith a detergent liquid soap This willlessen the time necessary for thetransducer to have good contact withthe water Otherwise the time requiredfor complete ldquosaturationrdquo ill belengthened and performance will bereduced

DO NOT paint the transducerPerformance will be affected

43 Transom MountTransducer

The transom mount transducer is verycommonly employed usually onrelatively small IO or outboard boatsDo not use this method on an inboardmotor boat because turbulence iscreated by the propeller ahead of thetransducer

520-5PWD

There are two methods of installationflush with hull (for flat hulls) andprojecting from hull (for deep V-hulls)

Flat Hull

D

Dgt50 cm

Deep-VHull

520-5PWD mounting locations

Installing the 520-5PWD on a flat hull

A suitable mounting location is at least50 cm away from the engine and wherethe water flow is smooth

1 Drill four pilot holes in the mountinglocation

2 Attach the transducer to the bracketwith 5 x 20 tapping screws(supplied)

3 Adjust the transducer position so thetransducer faces right to the bottom

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3348

27

Note If necessary to improve waterflow and minimize air bubblesstaying on the transducer faceincline the transducer about 5deg at therear This may require a certainamount of experimentation for finetuning at high cruising speeds

4 Fill the gap between the wedge frontof the transducer and transom withepoxy material to eliminate any airspaces

No1 M5 x 14

5 x 20

5 x 20

2 to 5

Tape

Hull

Transom mount transducer

mounting flush with hull

Installing the transom mounttransducer on a deep-V hull

This method is employed on deep-Vhulls and provides good performancebecause the effects of air bubbles areminimal Install the transducer parallelwith water surface not flush with hull Ifthe boat is placed on a trailer care mustbe taken not to damage the transducerwhen the boat is hauled out of the waterand put on the trailer

5 x 20

No 2M5 x 14

5 x 20

Transom mount transducermounted projecting from hull

525-5PWD

Choose the installation methoddepending on the rise angle of the hull

Transom

Transom

Stripe over 10

Parallel with hull

Mount at the stripe

less than 10

525-5PWD mounting location

Installing the 525-5PWD

Referring to ldquoInstalling the 520-5PWDrdquoin the left column for mounting of thebracket and the figure shown on the topof next page install the 525-5PWD tothe transom

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3448

28

2 to 5

Transducer

Bracket

Hull

Epoxy material

525-5PWD mounting

44 Inside-hullTransducer

The thru-hull mount transducer(520-5PSD 520-5MSD) may also beinstalled inside the hull following theprocedure below

Necessary tools

You will need the following toolsbull Sandpaper (100)bull Silicone sealantbull Silicone grease

Remarks on installationbull Turn off the engine and anchor the

boat while installing the equipmentbull Install the transducer in the engine

room

Choosing the mounting locationbull The mounting location should be

where the hull is of single-hullthickness and is void of air or flotationmaterials other than solid fiberglassbetween the transducer face and thewater

bull Do not place the transducer over hullstruts or ribs which run under the hull

bull Avoid a location where the risingangle of the hull exceeds 15deg tominimize the effect of the boatrsquosrolling

bull You will finalize the mounting location

through some trial and error Theprocedure for this is shown later

50 cm

50 cm15 cm15 cm

13

12

Transducer mountinglocation

Centerline

Inside-hull transducer mounting location

Attaching the transducer1 Clean the transducer face to remove

any foreign material Lightly roughenthe transducer face with 100sandpaper Also roughen the insideof the hull where the transducer is tobe mounted

2 Clean the transducer face again3 Warm the silicone sealant to 40degC

before usage to soften it Coat thetransducer face and mountinglocation with silicone sealant

Transducer

SiliconeSealant

Coating transducer facewith silicone sealant

4 Press the transducer firmly down onthe hull and gently twist it back andforth to remove any air which may betrapped in the silicone sealant

Checking the installation

1 Connect the battery to the display

unit2 Turn on the display unit

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3548

29

3 Press the [MODE] key to chooseSINGLE FREQ

4 Choose 50 kHz or 200 kHz and thenpress the [MENUESC] key to closethe mode menu

5 Press the [MENU] to show the mainmenu and then press to select

Auto mode6 Press to choose Off7 Press the [MENUESC] key8 Press the [GAIN] key to set the gain

to ldquo5rdquo and then press the[MENUESC] key

9 Press the [RANGE] key to set therange to 10 meters (feet) and thenpress the [MENUESC] key

10 If the bottom is displayed in darkgray and the depth indicationappears the mounting location issuitable Go to ldquoFinal preparationrdquo

11 If the bottom is not displayed in darkgray tone the mounting location maybe unsuitable Do the followinga) Press the [POWERBRILL] key to

turn off the powerb) Gently dismount the transducer

with a piece of woodc) Reattach the transducer

elsewhere as shown in ldquoAttachingthe transducerrdquo

d) Check the installation again

Final preparation

Support the transducer with a piece ofwood to keep it in place while it is drying

Let the transducer dry 24-72 hours

45 Optional Triducer525ST-MSD

The optional triducer 525ST-MSD isdesigned for thru-hull mounting Forhow to install this transducer seeparagraph 42

φ79 mm

33 mm200-12 UNthreads

φ51 mm

27 mm

7 mm

140 mm Triducer 525ST-MSD

525ST-PWD

The Transom Mount Transducer orTRIDUCER reg Multisensor with IntegralRelease Bracket 525ST-PWD ismanufactured by AIRMAR Co Theseinstructions are also included with the

sensor

Pre-test for speed and temperature

Connect the sensor to the instrumentand spin the paddlewheel Check for aspeed reading and the approximate airtemperature If there is no readingreturn the sensor to your place ofpurchase

Tools and materials needed

ScissorsMasking tapeSafety gogglesDust maskElectric drillDrill bit for

Bracket holes 4mm 23 or 964rdquoFiberglass hull chamfer bit(preferred)6mm or 14rdquo

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3648

30

Transom hole 19mm or 34rdquo(optional)

Cable clamp holes 3mm or 18rdquoScrewdriversStraight edgeMarine sealantPencilZip-tiesWater-based antifouling paint(mandatory in salt water )

Mounting location

To ensure the best performance thesensor must be submerged inaeration-free and turbulence-free water

Mount the sensor close to the centerlineof the boat On slower heavierdisplacement hulls positioning it fartherfrom the centerline is acceptable

Allow adequate space above thebracket for it to release and rotate thesensor upward

Height

Height withoutspeed sensor191mm (7-12)Height withspeed sensor213mm (8-12)

Height required at mounting location

Note 1 Do not mount the sensor in anarea of turbulence or bubbles nearwater intake or discharge openingsbehind strakes struts fittings or hull

irregularities behind eroding paint (anindication of turbulence)Note 2 Avoid mounting the sensorwhere the boat may be supportedduring trailering launching hauling andstorageNote 3 For single drive boat mounton the starboard side at least 75 mm(3rdquo) beyond the swing radius of thepropeller

75 mm(3)

minimum beyondswing radius

Mounting location on single drive boat

Note 4 For twin drive boat mountbetween the drives

Installation of bracket

1 Cut out the installation template

shown on the next page2 At the selected location position thetemplate so the arrow at the bottomis aligned with the bottom edge ofthe transom Being sure the templateis parallel to the waterline tape it inplace

Align template vertically

Deadrise angle

Slope of hullparallel towaterline

Align template arrow withbottom edge of transom

Positioning the template

Warning Always wear safetygoggles and a dust mask

3 Using a 4 mm 23 or 964rdquo bit drillthree holes 22 mm (78rdquo) deepat the locations indicated To preventdrilling too deeply wrap maskingtape around the bit 22 mm (78rdquo)from the pointFiberglass hull Minimize surfacecracking by chamfering the gelcoatIf a chamfer bit or countersink bit is

not available start drilling with a6mm or 14rdquo bit to a depth of 1 mm(116rdquo)

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3748

31

4 If you know your transom angle the

bracket is designed for a standard13deg transom angle11deg-18deg angle No shim is requiredSkip to step 3 in ldquoAdjustingrdquoOther angles The shim is requiredSkip to step 2 of ldquoAdjustingrdquoIf you do not know the transom angletemporarily attach the bracket andsensor to the transom to determine ifthe plastic shim is needed

5 Using the two 10 x 1-14rdquo

self-tapping screws temporarilyscrew the bracket to the hull DONOT tighten the screws completelyat this time Follow the step 1-4 inldquoAttaching the Sensor to the Bracketrdquobefore proceeding with ldquoAdjustingrdquo

Installation templatefor starboard side of boat

Drill at locations labeled Bfor the following transom angles

16 deg through 22 deg

Drill at locations labeled Afor the following transom angles

2 deg through 15 deg

Align arrow with bottom of transom

AA A

BB B

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3848

32

Adjusting

1 Using a straight edge sight theunderside of the sensor relative tothe underside of the hull The sternof the sensor should be 1-3 mm

(116-18rdquo) below the bow of thesensor or parallel to the bottom ofthe hull

11 deg transom angleNO SHIM

12-18 deg transom angleNO SHIM

2 deg -10 deg transom

angle

19 deg -22 deg transom

angleshim withtaper up

shim withtaper down

parallelparallel parallel

slightangle

angletoo steep

anglereversed

YES NONO

YES YESYES

Sensor position and transom angle

Note Do not position the bow of thesensor lower than the stern becauseaeration will occur

2 To adjust the sensorrsquos angle relativeto the hull use the tapered plasticshim provided If the bracket hasbeen temporarily fastened to thetransom remove it Key the shim in

place on the back of the bracket2deg-10deg transom angle (steppedtransom and jet boats) Positionthe shim with the tapered end down19deg-22deg transom angle (smallaluminum and fiberglass boats) Position the shim with the taperedend up

3 If the bracket has been temporarilyfastened to the transom remove it

Apply a marine sealant to thethreads of the two 10 x 1-14rdquo self

tapping screws to prevent waterseeping into the transom Screw thebracket to the hull Do not tighten thescrews completely at this time

4 Repeat step 1 to ensure that theangle of the sensor is correctNote Do not position the sensorfarther into the water than necessaryto avoid increasing drag spray andwater noise and reducing boatspeed

5 Using the vertical adjustment spaceon the bracket slots slide the sensorup or down to provide a projection of3 mm (18rdquo) Tighten the screws

Cable cover

Cableclamp

50 mm (2)

Hull projection 3 mm (18)

Vertical adjustment and cable routing

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3948

33

Attaching the sensor to the bracket

1 If the retaining cover near the top ofthe bracket is closed open it bydepressing the latch and rotating thecover downward

Step 1 Step 2

Latch

Retainingcover

Pivotarm (2)

Slot (2)

Step 4

Step 3

Attaching the sensor to the bracket

2 Insert the sensorrsquos pivot arms intothe slots near the top of the bracket

3 Maintain pressure until the pivotarms click into place

4 Rotate the sensor downward until thebottom snaps into the bracket

5 Close the retaining cover to preventthe accidental release of the sensorwhen the boat is underway

Cable routing

Route the sensor cable over thetransom through a drain hole orthorough a new hole drilled in thetransom above the waterline

Never cut the cable or remote the

connector this will void the warranty Always wear safety goggles and a dustmask

1 If a hole must be drilled choose alocation well above the waterlineCheck for obstructions such as trimtabs pumps or wiring inside the hullMark the location with a pencil Drilla hole through the transom using a19 mm or 34rdquo bit (to accommodatethe connector)

2 Route the cable over or through thetransom

3 On the outside of the hull secure thecable against the transom using thecable clamps Position a cable clamp50 mm(2rdquo) above the bracket andmark the mounting hole with apencil

4 Position the second cable clamphalfway between the first clamp andthe cable hole Mark this mountinghole

5 If a hole has been drilled in thetransom open the appropriate slot inthe transom cable cover Position thecover over the cable where it entersthe hull Mark the two mounting

holes6 At each of the marked locations usea 3 mm or 18rdquo bit to drill a hole 10mm (38rdquo) deep The prevent drillingtoo deeply wrap masking tapearound the bit 10 mm (38rdquo) from thepoint

7 Apply marine sealant to the threadsof the 6 x 12rdquo self-tapping screw toprevent water from seeping into the

transom If you have drilled a holethrough the transom apply marinesealant to the space around thecable where it passes through thetransom

8 Position the two cable clamps andfasten them in place If used pushthe cable cover over the cable andscrew it in place

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4048

34

9 Route the cable to the instrumentbeing careful not to tear the cable

jacket when passing it though thebulkhead(s) and other parts of theboat To reduce electricalinterference separate the sensorcable from other electrical wiring andldquonoiserdquo sources Coil any excesscable and secure it in place withzip-ties to prevent damage

46 Optional WaterTemperatureSpeedSensor

Water temperaturespeed sensorST-02MSB and ST-02PSB which aredesigned for thru-hull mounting areoptionally available Install them asshown below

Mounting considerations

Choose a suitable mounting locationconsidering the followingbull Choose a place free from vibrationbull Choose a mid-boat flat position The

sensor does not have to be installedperfectly perpendicular The sensormust not be damaged in dry-dockingoperation

bull Choose a place apart from equipmentgenerating heat

bull Choose a place in the forwarddirection viewing from the drain holeto allow for circulation of coolingwater

1 Dry-dock the boat2 Make a hole of approx 51 mm

diameter in the mounting location3 Unfasten locknut and remove the

sensor section4 Apply high-grade sealant to the

flange of the sensor5 Pass the sensor casing through thehole

6 Face the notch on the sensor towardboatrsquos bow and tighten the flange

7 Set the sensor section to the sensorcasing and tighten the locknut

8 Launch the boat and check for waterleakage around the sensor

Locknut

Face notchtoward bow

Flange Nut

Coat withsilicone sealant Brim

φ 77

51

123

Water temperaturespeed sensor

ST-02MSB ST-02PSB

47 Wiring

Connect the LS-4100 powerdata cableassy MJ-A7SPF0005-020 (2 msupplied) to the POWER and thetransducer cable to the XDR connectorRefer to the interconnection diagram toconnect cables Leave slack in cables tofacilitate checking and maintenance

Note The fuse holder contains a springwhich fixes the fuse To preventdetachment of the spring which wouldcause loss of power tie the line asshown below

+ line (red)

Fuse holder

Cable tie How to fix fuse holder

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4148

35

Establishing the ground

The ground wire (125 sq or more localsupply) should be as short as possible

The signal line ground is isolated from

the chassis ground however the powerline is not insulated Therefore whenconnecting eternal equipment havingpositive ground do not ground thesignal line to the chassis If excessivenoise shows on the screen the groundmay be inadequate In this case attacha steel plate measuring 20 cm by 30 cmon the outside of the hull to provide aground point Connect the ground wire

there Use a ldquoclosedrdquo type lug ( ) tomake the connection at the display unitDo not use an ldquoopenrdquo type lug ( )

Optional equipment

POWER connector

The power supply port is commonlyused for connection of externalequipment such as a GPS receiver orwind indicator Use the powerdatacable MJ-A7SPF0005-020 (supplied) forconnection referring the figure shown inthe right column

Connector Color Remarks

1 TD-A WHT2 TD-B BLU

IEC-61162-1NMEA0183

3 RD-A YEL

4 RD-B GRN

IEC-61162-1

NMEA01835 + RED

6 - BLKPower input12 VDC

7 FG

Water tempspeed sensor

Connect the optional water tempspeedsensor to the XDR connector with theoptional converter connector (Type02S4147) as shown below

Tape connectors withvulcaninzing tapeand then vinyl tapeto waterproof themBind tape ends withcable ties to preventtape from unraveling

Connect to XDR portat rear of display unit

MJ-A10SPF

MJ-A10SRMDMJ-A6SRMD

Fromtransducer

Fromsensor

Connection of converterconnector 02S4147

48 IEC 61162-1 DataSentences

The tables below show the datasentences which can be input to andoutput from the LS-4100 Thetransmission speed for both input andoutput is 4800 bps Data is output attwo-second intervals

Input data sentences

Sentence Meaning

BWC Bearing and distance towaypoint

GGA Global positioning system(GPS) fix data

GLL Geographic position -latitudelongitude

HDG Heading deviation and variationHDT Heading true

MDA Atmospheric pressure

MTW Water temperature

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4248

36

Input data sentences (conrsquot)

Sentence MeaningMWV Wind speed and

angleRMA Recommended

minimum specificLORAN-C dataRMB Recommended

minimum navigationinformation

RMC Recommendedminimum specificGPSTRANSIT data

VHW Water speed andheading

VTG Course over groundand ground speedXTE Cross track error

Output data sentences

Sentence MeaningDBT (Ver 15) Depth below

transducerDPT (Ver 20 Ver30)

Depth

MTW Water temperatureRMB (Ver 20) Recommended

minimumnavigationinformation

VHW Water speed andheading

TLL Target positionoutput by [MARK]key

= Available with connection of optionalsensorsnavaid

49 Installation MenuThe installation menu mainly containsitems which are set at installation

1 Turn on the power while pressing the[MENUESC] key Continue pressing

the [MENUESC] key until theInstallation menu appears

SIMULATION On

TEST LCD PATTERN MEMORY CLEAR

NMEA PORT InOutNMEA MIX OffGPS WAAS Off

SET BOTTOM LEVEL

Installation Menu

= Setting cannot be changed whenNMEA PORT setting is InIn

Installation menu

SIMULATION The simulation modeprovides without connection of thetransducer simulated operation of theequipment using internally generatedechoes All controls are operative Themessage ldquoSIMrdquo appears at the top rightcorner on the screen when thesimulation mode is active

1 At the installation menu press toopen the simulation mode optionswindow

2 Press to choose ldquoOnrdquo to turn onthe simulation mode

3 Press the [POWERBRILL] keyabout three seconds to turn off thepower

4 Press the [POWERBRILL] key toturn on the power ldquoSIMrdquo appears atthe top right corner of the display

5 To turn off the simulation modeselect Off at step 2

NMEA po r t se tup(NMEA PO RT NMEA M IX)

The POWER port can function as aninput port or inputoutput port Changethe setting to ldquoInInrdquo when connectingGP-310B320B and a wind sensor

When connecting the GP-310B320Band a wind sensor first turn on ldquoGPS

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4348

37

WAASrdquo (in the Installation menu) andthen select ldquoInInrdquo as the NMEA portsetting

1 Turn on the power while pressingand holding down the [MENUESC]key Continue pressing the[MENUESC] key until theInstallation menu appears

2 Choose NMEA PORT and thenpress to display the NMEA portoptions window

3 Use or to choose InOut orInIn as appropriate

InOut Input and Output (default

setting)InIn Input only (Available withconnection of the GP-310B320Band a wind sensor)

4 Press choose NMEA MIX andthen press to display the NMEAMIX options window

5 Use or to choose Off or OnChoose On to output input data

Off Outputs the data sentences ofLS-4100 only

On Outputs the data sentences ofLS-4100 and sentences which areinput from other equipment

6 To restore normal operation turn offthe power and then turn it on again

GPS WAAS Chooses how to use theWAAS signal when connecting with a

WAAS receiver for example GP-320B

Note WAAS is currently in thedevelopmental phase During thedevelopmental phase the reliability andavailability of the WAAS signal cannotbe guaranteed Therefore any positiondata should be verified against othersources to confirm reliability

1 Display the Installation menu2 Choose GPS WAAS and then press

to open the GPS WAAS options

window

Off

WAAS options window3 Press or to choose ldquoWAAS-02rdquo

(test signal) When the systembecomes operational (in 2003) setto ldquo00rdquo (regular WAAS signal)

4 Turn off the power

BOTTOM LEVEL If the depthindication is unstable in automaticoperation or the bottom echo cannot bedisplayed in the darkest gray tone byadjusting the gain controls in manualoperation you may adjust the bottomecho level detection circuit for both 50kHz and 200 kHz to stabilize theindication Generally lower the bottomlevel for inner hull installation where thereceive level is too low If the bottomlevel is too low it may be difficult todiscriminate fish from the bottomresulting in unstable depth indication

And if the bottom level is too high thedepth indication may not appear

1 At the installation menu press tochoose SET BOTTOM LEVEL andthen press Several seconds laterthe following display appears

Bottom level +0 (200k -100 - +100 ) +0 ( 50k -100 - +100 )

Bottom level display

2 While observing the picture use or to set 200 kHz or to set50 kHz Set up for optimum picture

3 To restore normal operation turn offthe power and then it on again

Note The mode must be other thanldquoNAV DATArdquo to show the bottom leveldisplay

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4448

SP - 1 E2371S01C

SPECIFICATIONS OF ECHO SOUNDER LS-4100

1 GENERAL11 TX Frequency 50 kHz or 200 kHz 50200 kHz dual transmitting selectable12 Transmit Method Single or dual transmitting

13 Output Power 300 Wrms14 TX Rate Max 500 pulsemin15 Pulse-length 01 to 08 ms

2 DISPLAY UNIT21 Display system 5-inch monochrome LCD 76 mm (W) x 100 mm (H) 240 x 320 dots22 Display Mode Single frequency (highlow freq) Dual-frequency Zoom Nav data-12

Marker zoom Bottom zoom Bottom-lock23 Display Range

Range SettingRange

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

Display

rangeMeter 5 10 20 40 80 150 200 300 2-500

Feet 15 30 60 120 200 400 600 1000 7-1500

Fathoms 3 5 10 20 40 80 100 150 1-250

PassiBraza 3 5 10 30 50 100 150 200 1-300

24 Range Shift 0-500 m 0-1500 ft 0-250 fa 0-300 pb25 Expansion Range Bottom-lock expansion 3 to 10 m

Sectional expansion 2 to 50 m26 Display Advance Speed 8 steps (LinesTX Freeze 1161814121121 41)

3 INTERFACE31 Input data sentences IEC61162-1NMEA0183 Ver 152030

GGA RMA RMB RMC BWC GLL HDT HDG VTG VHW MTWMWV MDA XTE

32 Output data sentences IEC61162-1NMEA0183 Ver 152030 interval 2 sMTW VHW DBT DPT RMB TLL by key operating External data required

4 POWER SUPPLY41 Display Unit 12 VDC 05 A

5 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITION51 Ambient Temperature Display unit -15degC to +55degC52 Relative Humidity 93 or less at 40degC53 Waterproof IPX5

6 COATING COLOR61 Display Unit N30

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4548

M a r

4

0 3

D-1

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4648

Mar 4 03

Mar 4 03

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4748

M a r

3

0 3

S-1

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4848

FURUNO Authorized DistributorDealer FURUNO Authorized DistributorDealer

9-52 Ashihara-cho9-52 Ashihara-choNishinomiya 662-8580 JAPANNishinomiya 662-8580 JAPAN

Telephone Telephone 0798-65-21110798-65-2111FaxFax 0798-65-42000798-65-4200

FIRST EDITION FIRST EDITION MARMAR 20032003Printed in JapanPrinted in Japan All rights reserved All rights reserved

B1B1 SEPSEP 09 200509 2005

Pub NoPub No OME-23710OME-23710 00014698000000146980000001469800000014698000(( DAMIDAMI )) LS-4100LS-4100

0 0 0 1 4 6 9 8 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 4 6 9 8 0 0 0

Page 28: OME23710B_1_LS4100

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 2848

22

36 TroubleshootingThe table below provides basictroubleshooting procedures which theuser may follow to restore normaloperation

Troubleshooting table

Ifhellip Then check hellipneither echo norfixed range scaleappears

bull battery voltagebull fusebull power cable

no echo appearsbut the fixedrange scaleappears

bull if display advancespeed is set to ldquoStoprdquo

bull transducer plugbull

transducer cableecho appears butno zero line

bull if range shifting is setto ldquo0rdquo

sensitivity is low bull gain settingbull if air bubbles or marine

life is clinging to thetransducer face

bull if sediments arepresent in the water

bull if the bottom is too soft

to return an echothere is extremeinterference ornoise

bull if the transducer is tooclose to the engine

bull if the unit is properlygrounded

bull if other echo soundersof the same frequencyas own are beingoperated nearby

the speedwatertemperaturereadout isunrealistic or notpresent

bull sensor plug

the positionreadout isunrealistic or notpresent

bull the connectionbetween sounder andnavigator

bull navigator

37 DiagnosticsIf you feel your unit is not workingproperly conduct the diagnostic test tofind the problem If you cannot restorenormal operation contact your dealerfor advice

1 Turn on the power while pressing the[MENUESC] key Continue pressingthe [MENUESC] key until theInstallation menu appears

SIMULATION On

TEST LCD PATTERN MEMORY CLEAR

NMEA PORT InOutNMEA MIX Off GPS WAAS Off

SET BOTTOM LEVEL

Installation Menu

= Setting cannot be changed whenNMEA PORT setting is InIn

Installation menu2 Press to choose TEST3 Press to start the test

ROM OKRAM OKNMEA

Temp 682 deg F

Speed 100kmh

Power 124 VBody 39 deg C

Program No 0252318-01Push [MENU] 3 times to exit

Level bar

= Program version no

Water

TemperatureSpeedBattery VoltageTemperatureinside displayunit(Unit fixed atdeg C)

GPS (48502180) OK

Only when GP-310B is connected(For GP-320B 4850238)

Test display

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 2948

23

4 The ROM RAM and NMEA port arechecked with the results shown asOK or NG (No Good) For any NGrequest service (A special connectoris required to test the NMEA portNothing appears if no connector isconnected)

5 The squares at the right side of thetest display are for checking thecontrols Press each key and thearrows on the Cursor Pad one byone A controlrsquos correspondingon-screen square ldquolightsrdquo in black ifthe control is normal

6 To return to the Installation menupress the [MENUESC] key threetimes

7 To restore normal operation turn offthe power and turn it on again

38 Test PatternThis feature tests for proper display oftones

1 On the Installation menu press $ tochoose LCD PATTERN

2 Press to start the test The entirescreen is black

3 Press again and the screen turnswhite

4 Press again and the screenshows a four-toned display

5 Press again to return to theInstallation menu

6 To restore normal operation turn offthe power and then it on again

WHITE FOUR-TONE BLACK

Test patterns

39 Memory ClearThe memory can be cleared to startafresh with default menu settings

1 At the installation menu press $ tochoose MEMORY CLEAR

2 Press to open the optionswindow

YES NO

Clear memory display

3 Press to clear the memory Beepsare generated while the memory isbeing cleared

4 To restore normal operation turn offthe power and then turn it on again

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3048

24

4 INSTALLATION

41 Display UnitMounting considerations

The display unit can be installed on adesktop on the bulkhead or flushmounted in a panel When choosing alocation keep the following in mind

bull Keep the display unit out of directsunlight

bull The temperature and humidity should

be moderate and stablebull Locate the unit away from exhaust

pipes and ventsbull The mounting location should be well

ventilatedbull Mount the unit where shock and

vibration are minimalbull For maintenance and checking

purposes leave sufficient space atthe sides and rear of the unit andleave slack in cables

bull A magnetic compass will be affected ifthe display unit is placed too close toit Observe the following compasssafe distances to prevent disturbanceto the magnetic compassStandard compass 04 metersSteering compass 03 meters

Desktop overhead mounting1 Fix the bracket to a desktop or the

overhead with tapping screws(supplied)

2 Loosely screw knobs into the displayunit

3 Set the display unit to the bracketand then tighten the knobs

Mounting on the bulkhead Flush

mounting in a panelSee the instructions on the bulkhead orflush mounting template (supplied)

42 Thru-hull MountTransducer

Transducer mounting location

The thru-hull mount transducer

(520-5PSD 520-5MSD) provides thebest performance of all since thetransducer protrudes from the hull andthe effect of air bubbles and turbulencenear the hull skin is reduced When theboat has a keel the transducer shouldbe at least 30 cm away from it Typicalthru-hull mountings are shown in thefigure on the next page

The performance of this sounder isdirectly related to the mounting locationof the transducer especially forhigh-speed cruising The installationshould be planned in advance keepingthe standard cable length (8 m) and thefollowing factors in mindbull Air bubbles and turbulence caused by

movement of the boat seriouslydegrade the sounding capability of thetransducer The transducer shouldtherefore be located in a positionwhere water flow is the smoothestNoise from the propellers alsoadversely affects performance andthe transducer should not be mountednearby The lifting strakes arenotorious for creating acoustic noiseand these must be avoided bykeeping the transducer inboard ofthem

bull The transducer must always remain

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3148

25

submerged even when the boat isrolling pitching or up on a plane athigh speed

bull A practical choice would besomewhere between 13 and 12 of

the boatrsquos length from the stern Forplaning hulls a practical location isgenerally rather far astern so that thetransducer is always in waterregardless of the planing attitude

28

22

120

68

30

520-5PSD

24

120

68

87520-5MSD

Unit mm

Thru-hull mount transducer dimensions

Acceptable transducer mounting

locations

Position 12 to 13 of the hull from stern

15 to 30 cm off center line (inside first lifting strakes)

Within the wetted bottom area

Deadrise angle within 15 deg

HIGH SPEED-V HULL

Suitable transducer mounting locations

Typical thru-hull mounttransducer installations

FairingBlock

Flat Washer

Rubber Washer

Hull

Deep-V Hull

Hull

Flat Washer

Rubber Washer

Flat Hull

CorkWasher

Typical thru-hull mounttransducer installations

Procedure for installing thethru-hull mount transducer

1 With the boat hauled out of the watermark the location chosen formounting the transducer on thebottom of the hull

2 If the hull is not level within 15deg inany direction fairing blocks madeout of teak should be used betweenthe transducer and hull both insideand outside to keep the transducerface parallel with the water lineFabricate the fairing block as shownbelow and make the entire surfaceas smooth as possible to provide anundisturbed flow of water around thetransducer The fairing block shouldbe smaller than the transducer itselfto provide a channel to divert

turbulent water around the sides ofthe transducer rather than over itsface

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3248

26

BOWHole for stuffing tube

Upper Half

Lower Half

Saw along slopeof hull Construction of fairing block

3 Drill a hole just large enough to passthe threaded stuffing tube of thetransducer through the hull makingsure it is drilled vertically

4 Apply a sufficient amount of highquality caulking compound to the topsurface of the transducer around thethreads of the stuffing tube andinside the mounting hole (and fairingblocks if used) to ensure watertightmounting

5 Mount the transducer and fairingblocks and tighten the locking nutsBe sure that the transducer is

properly oriented and its workingface is parallel to the waterline

Note Do not over-stress the stuffingtube and locking nuts through excessivetightening since the wood block willswell when the boat is placed in thewater It is suggested that the nut betightened lightly at installation andretightened several days after the boat

has been launched

Transducer preparation

Before putting the boat in water wipethe face of the transducer thoroughlywith a detergent liquid soap This willlessen the time necessary for thetransducer to have good contact withthe water Otherwise the time requiredfor complete ldquosaturationrdquo ill belengthened and performance will bereduced

DO NOT paint the transducerPerformance will be affected

43 Transom MountTransducer

The transom mount transducer is verycommonly employed usually onrelatively small IO or outboard boatsDo not use this method on an inboardmotor boat because turbulence iscreated by the propeller ahead of thetransducer

520-5PWD

There are two methods of installationflush with hull (for flat hulls) andprojecting from hull (for deep V-hulls)

Flat Hull

D

Dgt50 cm

Deep-VHull

520-5PWD mounting locations

Installing the 520-5PWD on a flat hull

A suitable mounting location is at least50 cm away from the engine and wherethe water flow is smooth

1 Drill four pilot holes in the mountinglocation

2 Attach the transducer to the bracketwith 5 x 20 tapping screws(supplied)

3 Adjust the transducer position so thetransducer faces right to the bottom

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3348

27

Note If necessary to improve waterflow and minimize air bubblesstaying on the transducer faceincline the transducer about 5deg at therear This may require a certainamount of experimentation for finetuning at high cruising speeds

4 Fill the gap between the wedge frontof the transducer and transom withepoxy material to eliminate any airspaces

No1 M5 x 14

5 x 20

5 x 20

2 to 5

Tape

Hull

Transom mount transducer

mounting flush with hull

Installing the transom mounttransducer on a deep-V hull

This method is employed on deep-Vhulls and provides good performancebecause the effects of air bubbles areminimal Install the transducer parallelwith water surface not flush with hull Ifthe boat is placed on a trailer care mustbe taken not to damage the transducerwhen the boat is hauled out of the waterand put on the trailer

5 x 20

No 2M5 x 14

5 x 20

Transom mount transducermounted projecting from hull

525-5PWD

Choose the installation methoddepending on the rise angle of the hull

Transom

Transom

Stripe over 10

Parallel with hull

Mount at the stripe

less than 10

525-5PWD mounting location

Installing the 525-5PWD

Referring to ldquoInstalling the 520-5PWDrdquoin the left column for mounting of thebracket and the figure shown on the topof next page install the 525-5PWD tothe transom

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3448

28

2 to 5

Transducer

Bracket

Hull

Epoxy material

525-5PWD mounting

44 Inside-hullTransducer

The thru-hull mount transducer(520-5PSD 520-5MSD) may also beinstalled inside the hull following theprocedure below

Necessary tools

You will need the following toolsbull Sandpaper (100)bull Silicone sealantbull Silicone grease

Remarks on installationbull Turn off the engine and anchor the

boat while installing the equipmentbull Install the transducer in the engine

room

Choosing the mounting locationbull The mounting location should be

where the hull is of single-hullthickness and is void of air or flotationmaterials other than solid fiberglassbetween the transducer face and thewater

bull Do not place the transducer over hullstruts or ribs which run under the hull

bull Avoid a location where the risingangle of the hull exceeds 15deg tominimize the effect of the boatrsquosrolling

bull You will finalize the mounting location

through some trial and error Theprocedure for this is shown later

50 cm

50 cm15 cm15 cm

13

12

Transducer mountinglocation

Centerline

Inside-hull transducer mounting location

Attaching the transducer1 Clean the transducer face to remove

any foreign material Lightly roughenthe transducer face with 100sandpaper Also roughen the insideof the hull where the transducer is tobe mounted

2 Clean the transducer face again3 Warm the silicone sealant to 40degC

before usage to soften it Coat thetransducer face and mountinglocation with silicone sealant

Transducer

SiliconeSealant

Coating transducer facewith silicone sealant

4 Press the transducer firmly down onthe hull and gently twist it back andforth to remove any air which may betrapped in the silicone sealant

Checking the installation

1 Connect the battery to the display

unit2 Turn on the display unit

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3548

29

3 Press the [MODE] key to chooseSINGLE FREQ

4 Choose 50 kHz or 200 kHz and thenpress the [MENUESC] key to closethe mode menu

5 Press the [MENU] to show the mainmenu and then press to select

Auto mode6 Press to choose Off7 Press the [MENUESC] key8 Press the [GAIN] key to set the gain

to ldquo5rdquo and then press the[MENUESC] key

9 Press the [RANGE] key to set therange to 10 meters (feet) and thenpress the [MENUESC] key

10 If the bottom is displayed in darkgray and the depth indicationappears the mounting location issuitable Go to ldquoFinal preparationrdquo

11 If the bottom is not displayed in darkgray tone the mounting location maybe unsuitable Do the followinga) Press the [POWERBRILL] key to

turn off the powerb) Gently dismount the transducer

with a piece of woodc) Reattach the transducer

elsewhere as shown in ldquoAttachingthe transducerrdquo

d) Check the installation again

Final preparation

Support the transducer with a piece ofwood to keep it in place while it is drying

Let the transducer dry 24-72 hours

45 Optional Triducer525ST-MSD

The optional triducer 525ST-MSD isdesigned for thru-hull mounting Forhow to install this transducer seeparagraph 42

φ79 mm

33 mm200-12 UNthreads

φ51 mm

27 mm

7 mm

140 mm Triducer 525ST-MSD

525ST-PWD

The Transom Mount Transducer orTRIDUCER reg Multisensor with IntegralRelease Bracket 525ST-PWD ismanufactured by AIRMAR Co Theseinstructions are also included with the

sensor

Pre-test for speed and temperature

Connect the sensor to the instrumentand spin the paddlewheel Check for aspeed reading and the approximate airtemperature If there is no readingreturn the sensor to your place ofpurchase

Tools and materials needed

ScissorsMasking tapeSafety gogglesDust maskElectric drillDrill bit for

Bracket holes 4mm 23 or 964rdquoFiberglass hull chamfer bit(preferred)6mm or 14rdquo

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3648

30

Transom hole 19mm or 34rdquo(optional)

Cable clamp holes 3mm or 18rdquoScrewdriversStraight edgeMarine sealantPencilZip-tiesWater-based antifouling paint(mandatory in salt water )

Mounting location

To ensure the best performance thesensor must be submerged inaeration-free and turbulence-free water

Mount the sensor close to the centerlineof the boat On slower heavierdisplacement hulls positioning it fartherfrom the centerline is acceptable

Allow adequate space above thebracket for it to release and rotate thesensor upward

Height

Height withoutspeed sensor191mm (7-12)Height withspeed sensor213mm (8-12)

Height required at mounting location

Note 1 Do not mount the sensor in anarea of turbulence or bubbles nearwater intake or discharge openingsbehind strakes struts fittings or hull

irregularities behind eroding paint (anindication of turbulence)Note 2 Avoid mounting the sensorwhere the boat may be supportedduring trailering launching hauling andstorageNote 3 For single drive boat mounton the starboard side at least 75 mm(3rdquo) beyond the swing radius of thepropeller

75 mm(3)

minimum beyondswing radius

Mounting location on single drive boat

Note 4 For twin drive boat mountbetween the drives

Installation of bracket

1 Cut out the installation template

shown on the next page2 At the selected location position thetemplate so the arrow at the bottomis aligned with the bottom edge ofthe transom Being sure the templateis parallel to the waterline tape it inplace

Align template vertically

Deadrise angle

Slope of hullparallel towaterline

Align template arrow withbottom edge of transom

Positioning the template

Warning Always wear safetygoggles and a dust mask

3 Using a 4 mm 23 or 964rdquo bit drillthree holes 22 mm (78rdquo) deepat the locations indicated To preventdrilling too deeply wrap maskingtape around the bit 22 mm (78rdquo)from the pointFiberglass hull Minimize surfacecracking by chamfering the gelcoatIf a chamfer bit or countersink bit is

not available start drilling with a6mm or 14rdquo bit to a depth of 1 mm(116rdquo)

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3748

31

4 If you know your transom angle the

bracket is designed for a standard13deg transom angle11deg-18deg angle No shim is requiredSkip to step 3 in ldquoAdjustingrdquoOther angles The shim is requiredSkip to step 2 of ldquoAdjustingrdquoIf you do not know the transom angletemporarily attach the bracket andsensor to the transom to determine ifthe plastic shim is needed

5 Using the two 10 x 1-14rdquo

self-tapping screws temporarilyscrew the bracket to the hull DONOT tighten the screws completelyat this time Follow the step 1-4 inldquoAttaching the Sensor to the Bracketrdquobefore proceeding with ldquoAdjustingrdquo

Installation templatefor starboard side of boat

Drill at locations labeled Bfor the following transom angles

16 deg through 22 deg

Drill at locations labeled Afor the following transom angles

2 deg through 15 deg

Align arrow with bottom of transom

AA A

BB B

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3848

32

Adjusting

1 Using a straight edge sight theunderside of the sensor relative tothe underside of the hull The sternof the sensor should be 1-3 mm

(116-18rdquo) below the bow of thesensor or parallel to the bottom ofthe hull

11 deg transom angleNO SHIM

12-18 deg transom angleNO SHIM

2 deg -10 deg transom

angle

19 deg -22 deg transom

angleshim withtaper up

shim withtaper down

parallelparallel parallel

slightangle

angletoo steep

anglereversed

YES NONO

YES YESYES

Sensor position and transom angle

Note Do not position the bow of thesensor lower than the stern becauseaeration will occur

2 To adjust the sensorrsquos angle relativeto the hull use the tapered plasticshim provided If the bracket hasbeen temporarily fastened to thetransom remove it Key the shim in

place on the back of the bracket2deg-10deg transom angle (steppedtransom and jet boats) Positionthe shim with the tapered end down19deg-22deg transom angle (smallaluminum and fiberglass boats) Position the shim with the taperedend up

3 If the bracket has been temporarilyfastened to the transom remove it

Apply a marine sealant to thethreads of the two 10 x 1-14rdquo self

tapping screws to prevent waterseeping into the transom Screw thebracket to the hull Do not tighten thescrews completely at this time

4 Repeat step 1 to ensure that theangle of the sensor is correctNote Do not position the sensorfarther into the water than necessaryto avoid increasing drag spray andwater noise and reducing boatspeed

5 Using the vertical adjustment spaceon the bracket slots slide the sensorup or down to provide a projection of3 mm (18rdquo) Tighten the screws

Cable cover

Cableclamp

50 mm (2)

Hull projection 3 mm (18)

Vertical adjustment and cable routing

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3948

33

Attaching the sensor to the bracket

1 If the retaining cover near the top ofthe bracket is closed open it bydepressing the latch and rotating thecover downward

Step 1 Step 2

Latch

Retainingcover

Pivotarm (2)

Slot (2)

Step 4

Step 3

Attaching the sensor to the bracket

2 Insert the sensorrsquos pivot arms intothe slots near the top of the bracket

3 Maintain pressure until the pivotarms click into place

4 Rotate the sensor downward until thebottom snaps into the bracket

5 Close the retaining cover to preventthe accidental release of the sensorwhen the boat is underway

Cable routing

Route the sensor cable over thetransom through a drain hole orthorough a new hole drilled in thetransom above the waterline

Never cut the cable or remote the

connector this will void the warranty Always wear safety goggles and a dustmask

1 If a hole must be drilled choose alocation well above the waterlineCheck for obstructions such as trimtabs pumps or wiring inside the hullMark the location with a pencil Drilla hole through the transom using a19 mm or 34rdquo bit (to accommodatethe connector)

2 Route the cable over or through thetransom

3 On the outside of the hull secure thecable against the transom using thecable clamps Position a cable clamp50 mm(2rdquo) above the bracket andmark the mounting hole with apencil

4 Position the second cable clamphalfway between the first clamp andthe cable hole Mark this mountinghole

5 If a hole has been drilled in thetransom open the appropriate slot inthe transom cable cover Position thecover over the cable where it entersthe hull Mark the two mounting

holes6 At each of the marked locations usea 3 mm or 18rdquo bit to drill a hole 10mm (38rdquo) deep The prevent drillingtoo deeply wrap masking tapearound the bit 10 mm (38rdquo) from thepoint

7 Apply marine sealant to the threadsof the 6 x 12rdquo self-tapping screw toprevent water from seeping into the

transom If you have drilled a holethrough the transom apply marinesealant to the space around thecable where it passes through thetransom

8 Position the two cable clamps andfasten them in place If used pushthe cable cover over the cable andscrew it in place

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4048

34

9 Route the cable to the instrumentbeing careful not to tear the cable

jacket when passing it though thebulkhead(s) and other parts of theboat To reduce electricalinterference separate the sensorcable from other electrical wiring andldquonoiserdquo sources Coil any excesscable and secure it in place withzip-ties to prevent damage

46 Optional WaterTemperatureSpeedSensor

Water temperaturespeed sensorST-02MSB and ST-02PSB which aredesigned for thru-hull mounting areoptionally available Install them asshown below

Mounting considerations

Choose a suitable mounting locationconsidering the followingbull Choose a place free from vibrationbull Choose a mid-boat flat position The

sensor does not have to be installedperfectly perpendicular The sensormust not be damaged in dry-dockingoperation

bull Choose a place apart from equipmentgenerating heat

bull Choose a place in the forwarddirection viewing from the drain holeto allow for circulation of coolingwater

1 Dry-dock the boat2 Make a hole of approx 51 mm

diameter in the mounting location3 Unfasten locknut and remove the

sensor section4 Apply high-grade sealant to the

flange of the sensor5 Pass the sensor casing through thehole

6 Face the notch on the sensor towardboatrsquos bow and tighten the flange

7 Set the sensor section to the sensorcasing and tighten the locknut

8 Launch the boat and check for waterleakage around the sensor

Locknut

Face notchtoward bow

Flange Nut

Coat withsilicone sealant Brim

φ 77

51

123

Water temperaturespeed sensor

ST-02MSB ST-02PSB

47 Wiring

Connect the LS-4100 powerdata cableassy MJ-A7SPF0005-020 (2 msupplied) to the POWER and thetransducer cable to the XDR connectorRefer to the interconnection diagram toconnect cables Leave slack in cables tofacilitate checking and maintenance

Note The fuse holder contains a springwhich fixes the fuse To preventdetachment of the spring which wouldcause loss of power tie the line asshown below

+ line (red)

Fuse holder

Cable tie How to fix fuse holder

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4148

35

Establishing the ground

The ground wire (125 sq or more localsupply) should be as short as possible

The signal line ground is isolated from

the chassis ground however the powerline is not insulated Therefore whenconnecting eternal equipment havingpositive ground do not ground thesignal line to the chassis If excessivenoise shows on the screen the groundmay be inadequate In this case attacha steel plate measuring 20 cm by 30 cmon the outside of the hull to provide aground point Connect the ground wire

there Use a ldquoclosedrdquo type lug ( ) tomake the connection at the display unitDo not use an ldquoopenrdquo type lug ( )

Optional equipment

POWER connector

The power supply port is commonlyused for connection of externalequipment such as a GPS receiver orwind indicator Use the powerdatacable MJ-A7SPF0005-020 (supplied) forconnection referring the figure shown inthe right column

Connector Color Remarks

1 TD-A WHT2 TD-B BLU

IEC-61162-1NMEA0183

3 RD-A YEL

4 RD-B GRN

IEC-61162-1

NMEA01835 + RED

6 - BLKPower input12 VDC

7 FG

Water tempspeed sensor

Connect the optional water tempspeedsensor to the XDR connector with theoptional converter connector (Type02S4147) as shown below

Tape connectors withvulcaninzing tapeand then vinyl tapeto waterproof themBind tape ends withcable ties to preventtape from unraveling

Connect to XDR portat rear of display unit

MJ-A10SPF

MJ-A10SRMDMJ-A6SRMD

Fromtransducer

Fromsensor

Connection of converterconnector 02S4147

48 IEC 61162-1 DataSentences

The tables below show the datasentences which can be input to andoutput from the LS-4100 Thetransmission speed for both input andoutput is 4800 bps Data is output attwo-second intervals

Input data sentences

Sentence Meaning

BWC Bearing and distance towaypoint

GGA Global positioning system(GPS) fix data

GLL Geographic position -latitudelongitude

HDG Heading deviation and variationHDT Heading true

MDA Atmospheric pressure

MTW Water temperature

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4248

36

Input data sentences (conrsquot)

Sentence MeaningMWV Wind speed and

angleRMA Recommended

minimum specificLORAN-C dataRMB Recommended

minimum navigationinformation

RMC Recommendedminimum specificGPSTRANSIT data

VHW Water speed andheading

VTG Course over groundand ground speedXTE Cross track error

Output data sentences

Sentence MeaningDBT (Ver 15) Depth below

transducerDPT (Ver 20 Ver30)

Depth

MTW Water temperatureRMB (Ver 20) Recommended

minimumnavigationinformation

VHW Water speed andheading

TLL Target positionoutput by [MARK]key

= Available with connection of optionalsensorsnavaid

49 Installation MenuThe installation menu mainly containsitems which are set at installation

1 Turn on the power while pressing the[MENUESC] key Continue pressing

the [MENUESC] key until theInstallation menu appears

SIMULATION On

TEST LCD PATTERN MEMORY CLEAR

NMEA PORT InOutNMEA MIX OffGPS WAAS Off

SET BOTTOM LEVEL

Installation Menu

= Setting cannot be changed whenNMEA PORT setting is InIn

Installation menu

SIMULATION The simulation modeprovides without connection of thetransducer simulated operation of theequipment using internally generatedechoes All controls are operative Themessage ldquoSIMrdquo appears at the top rightcorner on the screen when thesimulation mode is active

1 At the installation menu press toopen the simulation mode optionswindow

2 Press to choose ldquoOnrdquo to turn onthe simulation mode

3 Press the [POWERBRILL] keyabout three seconds to turn off thepower

4 Press the [POWERBRILL] key toturn on the power ldquoSIMrdquo appears atthe top right corner of the display

5 To turn off the simulation modeselect Off at step 2

NMEA po r t se tup(NMEA PO RT NMEA M IX)

The POWER port can function as aninput port or inputoutput port Changethe setting to ldquoInInrdquo when connectingGP-310B320B and a wind sensor

When connecting the GP-310B320Band a wind sensor first turn on ldquoGPS

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4348

37

WAASrdquo (in the Installation menu) andthen select ldquoInInrdquo as the NMEA portsetting

1 Turn on the power while pressingand holding down the [MENUESC]key Continue pressing the[MENUESC] key until theInstallation menu appears

2 Choose NMEA PORT and thenpress to display the NMEA portoptions window

3 Use or to choose InOut orInIn as appropriate

InOut Input and Output (default

setting)InIn Input only (Available withconnection of the GP-310B320Band a wind sensor)

4 Press choose NMEA MIX andthen press to display the NMEAMIX options window

5 Use or to choose Off or OnChoose On to output input data

Off Outputs the data sentences ofLS-4100 only

On Outputs the data sentences ofLS-4100 and sentences which areinput from other equipment

6 To restore normal operation turn offthe power and then turn it on again

GPS WAAS Chooses how to use theWAAS signal when connecting with a

WAAS receiver for example GP-320B

Note WAAS is currently in thedevelopmental phase During thedevelopmental phase the reliability andavailability of the WAAS signal cannotbe guaranteed Therefore any positiondata should be verified against othersources to confirm reliability

1 Display the Installation menu2 Choose GPS WAAS and then press

to open the GPS WAAS options

window

Off

WAAS options window3 Press or to choose ldquoWAAS-02rdquo

(test signal) When the systembecomes operational (in 2003) setto ldquo00rdquo (regular WAAS signal)

4 Turn off the power

BOTTOM LEVEL If the depthindication is unstable in automaticoperation or the bottom echo cannot bedisplayed in the darkest gray tone byadjusting the gain controls in manualoperation you may adjust the bottomecho level detection circuit for both 50kHz and 200 kHz to stabilize theindication Generally lower the bottomlevel for inner hull installation where thereceive level is too low If the bottomlevel is too low it may be difficult todiscriminate fish from the bottomresulting in unstable depth indication

And if the bottom level is too high thedepth indication may not appear

1 At the installation menu press tochoose SET BOTTOM LEVEL andthen press Several seconds laterthe following display appears

Bottom level +0 (200k -100 - +100 ) +0 ( 50k -100 - +100 )

Bottom level display

2 While observing the picture use or to set 200 kHz or to set50 kHz Set up for optimum picture

3 To restore normal operation turn offthe power and then it on again

Note The mode must be other thanldquoNAV DATArdquo to show the bottom leveldisplay

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4448

SP - 1 E2371S01C

SPECIFICATIONS OF ECHO SOUNDER LS-4100

1 GENERAL11 TX Frequency 50 kHz or 200 kHz 50200 kHz dual transmitting selectable12 Transmit Method Single or dual transmitting

13 Output Power 300 Wrms14 TX Rate Max 500 pulsemin15 Pulse-length 01 to 08 ms

2 DISPLAY UNIT21 Display system 5-inch monochrome LCD 76 mm (W) x 100 mm (H) 240 x 320 dots22 Display Mode Single frequency (highlow freq) Dual-frequency Zoom Nav data-12

Marker zoom Bottom zoom Bottom-lock23 Display Range

Range SettingRange

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

Display

rangeMeter 5 10 20 40 80 150 200 300 2-500

Feet 15 30 60 120 200 400 600 1000 7-1500

Fathoms 3 5 10 20 40 80 100 150 1-250

PassiBraza 3 5 10 30 50 100 150 200 1-300

24 Range Shift 0-500 m 0-1500 ft 0-250 fa 0-300 pb25 Expansion Range Bottom-lock expansion 3 to 10 m

Sectional expansion 2 to 50 m26 Display Advance Speed 8 steps (LinesTX Freeze 1161814121121 41)

3 INTERFACE31 Input data sentences IEC61162-1NMEA0183 Ver 152030

GGA RMA RMB RMC BWC GLL HDT HDG VTG VHW MTWMWV MDA XTE

32 Output data sentences IEC61162-1NMEA0183 Ver 152030 interval 2 sMTW VHW DBT DPT RMB TLL by key operating External data required

4 POWER SUPPLY41 Display Unit 12 VDC 05 A

5 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITION51 Ambient Temperature Display unit -15degC to +55degC52 Relative Humidity 93 or less at 40degC53 Waterproof IPX5

6 COATING COLOR61 Display Unit N30

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4548

M a r

4

0 3

D-1

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4648

Mar 4 03

Mar 4 03

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4748

M a r

3

0 3

S-1

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4848

FURUNO Authorized DistributorDealer FURUNO Authorized DistributorDealer

9-52 Ashihara-cho9-52 Ashihara-choNishinomiya 662-8580 JAPANNishinomiya 662-8580 JAPAN

Telephone Telephone 0798-65-21110798-65-2111FaxFax 0798-65-42000798-65-4200

FIRST EDITION FIRST EDITION MARMAR 20032003Printed in JapanPrinted in Japan All rights reserved All rights reserved

B1B1 SEPSEP 09 200509 2005

Pub NoPub No OME-23710OME-23710 00014698000000146980000001469800000014698000(( DAMIDAMI )) LS-4100LS-4100

0 0 0 1 4 6 9 8 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 4 6 9 8 0 0 0

Page 29: OME23710B_1_LS4100

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 2948

23

4 The ROM RAM and NMEA port arechecked with the results shown asOK or NG (No Good) For any NGrequest service (A special connectoris required to test the NMEA portNothing appears if no connector isconnected)

5 The squares at the right side of thetest display are for checking thecontrols Press each key and thearrows on the Cursor Pad one byone A controlrsquos correspondingon-screen square ldquolightsrdquo in black ifthe control is normal

6 To return to the Installation menupress the [MENUESC] key threetimes

7 To restore normal operation turn offthe power and turn it on again

38 Test PatternThis feature tests for proper display oftones

1 On the Installation menu press $ tochoose LCD PATTERN

2 Press to start the test The entirescreen is black

3 Press again and the screen turnswhite

4 Press again and the screenshows a four-toned display

5 Press again to return to theInstallation menu

6 To restore normal operation turn offthe power and then it on again

WHITE FOUR-TONE BLACK

Test patterns

39 Memory ClearThe memory can be cleared to startafresh with default menu settings

1 At the installation menu press $ tochoose MEMORY CLEAR

2 Press to open the optionswindow

YES NO

Clear memory display

3 Press to clear the memory Beepsare generated while the memory isbeing cleared

4 To restore normal operation turn offthe power and then turn it on again

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3048

24

4 INSTALLATION

41 Display UnitMounting considerations

The display unit can be installed on adesktop on the bulkhead or flushmounted in a panel When choosing alocation keep the following in mind

bull Keep the display unit out of directsunlight

bull The temperature and humidity should

be moderate and stablebull Locate the unit away from exhaust

pipes and ventsbull The mounting location should be well

ventilatedbull Mount the unit where shock and

vibration are minimalbull For maintenance and checking

purposes leave sufficient space atthe sides and rear of the unit andleave slack in cables

bull A magnetic compass will be affected ifthe display unit is placed too close toit Observe the following compasssafe distances to prevent disturbanceto the magnetic compassStandard compass 04 metersSteering compass 03 meters

Desktop overhead mounting1 Fix the bracket to a desktop or the

overhead with tapping screws(supplied)

2 Loosely screw knobs into the displayunit

3 Set the display unit to the bracketand then tighten the knobs

Mounting on the bulkhead Flush

mounting in a panelSee the instructions on the bulkhead orflush mounting template (supplied)

42 Thru-hull MountTransducer

Transducer mounting location

The thru-hull mount transducer

(520-5PSD 520-5MSD) provides thebest performance of all since thetransducer protrudes from the hull andthe effect of air bubbles and turbulencenear the hull skin is reduced When theboat has a keel the transducer shouldbe at least 30 cm away from it Typicalthru-hull mountings are shown in thefigure on the next page

The performance of this sounder isdirectly related to the mounting locationof the transducer especially forhigh-speed cruising The installationshould be planned in advance keepingthe standard cable length (8 m) and thefollowing factors in mindbull Air bubbles and turbulence caused by

movement of the boat seriouslydegrade the sounding capability of thetransducer The transducer shouldtherefore be located in a positionwhere water flow is the smoothestNoise from the propellers alsoadversely affects performance andthe transducer should not be mountednearby The lifting strakes arenotorious for creating acoustic noiseand these must be avoided bykeeping the transducer inboard ofthem

bull The transducer must always remain

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3148

25

submerged even when the boat isrolling pitching or up on a plane athigh speed

bull A practical choice would besomewhere between 13 and 12 of

the boatrsquos length from the stern Forplaning hulls a practical location isgenerally rather far astern so that thetransducer is always in waterregardless of the planing attitude

28

22

120

68

30

520-5PSD

24

120

68

87520-5MSD

Unit mm

Thru-hull mount transducer dimensions

Acceptable transducer mounting

locations

Position 12 to 13 of the hull from stern

15 to 30 cm off center line (inside first lifting strakes)

Within the wetted bottom area

Deadrise angle within 15 deg

HIGH SPEED-V HULL

Suitable transducer mounting locations

Typical thru-hull mounttransducer installations

FairingBlock

Flat Washer

Rubber Washer

Hull

Deep-V Hull

Hull

Flat Washer

Rubber Washer

Flat Hull

CorkWasher

Typical thru-hull mounttransducer installations

Procedure for installing thethru-hull mount transducer

1 With the boat hauled out of the watermark the location chosen formounting the transducer on thebottom of the hull

2 If the hull is not level within 15deg inany direction fairing blocks madeout of teak should be used betweenthe transducer and hull both insideand outside to keep the transducerface parallel with the water lineFabricate the fairing block as shownbelow and make the entire surfaceas smooth as possible to provide anundisturbed flow of water around thetransducer The fairing block shouldbe smaller than the transducer itselfto provide a channel to divert

turbulent water around the sides ofthe transducer rather than over itsface

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3248

26

BOWHole for stuffing tube

Upper Half

Lower Half

Saw along slopeof hull Construction of fairing block

3 Drill a hole just large enough to passthe threaded stuffing tube of thetransducer through the hull makingsure it is drilled vertically

4 Apply a sufficient amount of highquality caulking compound to the topsurface of the transducer around thethreads of the stuffing tube andinside the mounting hole (and fairingblocks if used) to ensure watertightmounting

5 Mount the transducer and fairingblocks and tighten the locking nutsBe sure that the transducer is

properly oriented and its workingface is parallel to the waterline

Note Do not over-stress the stuffingtube and locking nuts through excessivetightening since the wood block willswell when the boat is placed in thewater It is suggested that the nut betightened lightly at installation andretightened several days after the boat

has been launched

Transducer preparation

Before putting the boat in water wipethe face of the transducer thoroughlywith a detergent liquid soap This willlessen the time necessary for thetransducer to have good contact withthe water Otherwise the time requiredfor complete ldquosaturationrdquo ill belengthened and performance will bereduced

DO NOT paint the transducerPerformance will be affected

43 Transom MountTransducer

The transom mount transducer is verycommonly employed usually onrelatively small IO or outboard boatsDo not use this method on an inboardmotor boat because turbulence iscreated by the propeller ahead of thetransducer

520-5PWD

There are two methods of installationflush with hull (for flat hulls) andprojecting from hull (for deep V-hulls)

Flat Hull

D

Dgt50 cm

Deep-VHull

520-5PWD mounting locations

Installing the 520-5PWD on a flat hull

A suitable mounting location is at least50 cm away from the engine and wherethe water flow is smooth

1 Drill four pilot holes in the mountinglocation

2 Attach the transducer to the bracketwith 5 x 20 tapping screws(supplied)

3 Adjust the transducer position so thetransducer faces right to the bottom

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3348

27

Note If necessary to improve waterflow and minimize air bubblesstaying on the transducer faceincline the transducer about 5deg at therear This may require a certainamount of experimentation for finetuning at high cruising speeds

4 Fill the gap between the wedge frontof the transducer and transom withepoxy material to eliminate any airspaces

No1 M5 x 14

5 x 20

5 x 20

2 to 5

Tape

Hull

Transom mount transducer

mounting flush with hull

Installing the transom mounttransducer on a deep-V hull

This method is employed on deep-Vhulls and provides good performancebecause the effects of air bubbles areminimal Install the transducer parallelwith water surface not flush with hull Ifthe boat is placed on a trailer care mustbe taken not to damage the transducerwhen the boat is hauled out of the waterand put on the trailer

5 x 20

No 2M5 x 14

5 x 20

Transom mount transducermounted projecting from hull

525-5PWD

Choose the installation methoddepending on the rise angle of the hull

Transom

Transom

Stripe over 10

Parallel with hull

Mount at the stripe

less than 10

525-5PWD mounting location

Installing the 525-5PWD

Referring to ldquoInstalling the 520-5PWDrdquoin the left column for mounting of thebracket and the figure shown on the topof next page install the 525-5PWD tothe transom

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3448

28

2 to 5

Transducer

Bracket

Hull

Epoxy material

525-5PWD mounting

44 Inside-hullTransducer

The thru-hull mount transducer(520-5PSD 520-5MSD) may also beinstalled inside the hull following theprocedure below

Necessary tools

You will need the following toolsbull Sandpaper (100)bull Silicone sealantbull Silicone grease

Remarks on installationbull Turn off the engine and anchor the

boat while installing the equipmentbull Install the transducer in the engine

room

Choosing the mounting locationbull The mounting location should be

where the hull is of single-hullthickness and is void of air or flotationmaterials other than solid fiberglassbetween the transducer face and thewater

bull Do not place the transducer over hullstruts or ribs which run under the hull

bull Avoid a location where the risingangle of the hull exceeds 15deg tominimize the effect of the boatrsquosrolling

bull You will finalize the mounting location

through some trial and error Theprocedure for this is shown later

50 cm

50 cm15 cm15 cm

13

12

Transducer mountinglocation

Centerline

Inside-hull transducer mounting location

Attaching the transducer1 Clean the transducer face to remove

any foreign material Lightly roughenthe transducer face with 100sandpaper Also roughen the insideof the hull where the transducer is tobe mounted

2 Clean the transducer face again3 Warm the silicone sealant to 40degC

before usage to soften it Coat thetransducer face and mountinglocation with silicone sealant

Transducer

SiliconeSealant

Coating transducer facewith silicone sealant

4 Press the transducer firmly down onthe hull and gently twist it back andforth to remove any air which may betrapped in the silicone sealant

Checking the installation

1 Connect the battery to the display

unit2 Turn on the display unit

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3548

29

3 Press the [MODE] key to chooseSINGLE FREQ

4 Choose 50 kHz or 200 kHz and thenpress the [MENUESC] key to closethe mode menu

5 Press the [MENU] to show the mainmenu and then press to select

Auto mode6 Press to choose Off7 Press the [MENUESC] key8 Press the [GAIN] key to set the gain

to ldquo5rdquo and then press the[MENUESC] key

9 Press the [RANGE] key to set therange to 10 meters (feet) and thenpress the [MENUESC] key

10 If the bottom is displayed in darkgray and the depth indicationappears the mounting location issuitable Go to ldquoFinal preparationrdquo

11 If the bottom is not displayed in darkgray tone the mounting location maybe unsuitable Do the followinga) Press the [POWERBRILL] key to

turn off the powerb) Gently dismount the transducer

with a piece of woodc) Reattach the transducer

elsewhere as shown in ldquoAttachingthe transducerrdquo

d) Check the installation again

Final preparation

Support the transducer with a piece ofwood to keep it in place while it is drying

Let the transducer dry 24-72 hours

45 Optional Triducer525ST-MSD

The optional triducer 525ST-MSD isdesigned for thru-hull mounting Forhow to install this transducer seeparagraph 42

φ79 mm

33 mm200-12 UNthreads

φ51 mm

27 mm

7 mm

140 mm Triducer 525ST-MSD

525ST-PWD

The Transom Mount Transducer orTRIDUCER reg Multisensor with IntegralRelease Bracket 525ST-PWD ismanufactured by AIRMAR Co Theseinstructions are also included with the

sensor

Pre-test for speed and temperature

Connect the sensor to the instrumentand spin the paddlewheel Check for aspeed reading and the approximate airtemperature If there is no readingreturn the sensor to your place ofpurchase

Tools and materials needed

ScissorsMasking tapeSafety gogglesDust maskElectric drillDrill bit for

Bracket holes 4mm 23 or 964rdquoFiberglass hull chamfer bit(preferred)6mm or 14rdquo

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3648

30

Transom hole 19mm or 34rdquo(optional)

Cable clamp holes 3mm or 18rdquoScrewdriversStraight edgeMarine sealantPencilZip-tiesWater-based antifouling paint(mandatory in salt water )

Mounting location

To ensure the best performance thesensor must be submerged inaeration-free and turbulence-free water

Mount the sensor close to the centerlineof the boat On slower heavierdisplacement hulls positioning it fartherfrom the centerline is acceptable

Allow adequate space above thebracket for it to release and rotate thesensor upward

Height

Height withoutspeed sensor191mm (7-12)Height withspeed sensor213mm (8-12)

Height required at mounting location

Note 1 Do not mount the sensor in anarea of turbulence or bubbles nearwater intake or discharge openingsbehind strakes struts fittings or hull

irregularities behind eroding paint (anindication of turbulence)Note 2 Avoid mounting the sensorwhere the boat may be supportedduring trailering launching hauling andstorageNote 3 For single drive boat mounton the starboard side at least 75 mm(3rdquo) beyond the swing radius of thepropeller

75 mm(3)

minimum beyondswing radius

Mounting location on single drive boat

Note 4 For twin drive boat mountbetween the drives

Installation of bracket

1 Cut out the installation template

shown on the next page2 At the selected location position thetemplate so the arrow at the bottomis aligned with the bottom edge ofthe transom Being sure the templateis parallel to the waterline tape it inplace

Align template vertically

Deadrise angle

Slope of hullparallel towaterline

Align template arrow withbottom edge of transom

Positioning the template

Warning Always wear safetygoggles and a dust mask

3 Using a 4 mm 23 or 964rdquo bit drillthree holes 22 mm (78rdquo) deepat the locations indicated To preventdrilling too deeply wrap maskingtape around the bit 22 mm (78rdquo)from the pointFiberglass hull Minimize surfacecracking by chamfering the gelcoatIf a chamfer bit or countersink bit is

not available start drilling with a6mm or 14rdquo bit to a depth of 1 mm(116rdquo)

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3748

31

4 If you know your transom angle the

bracket is designed for a standard13deg transom angle11deg-18deg angle No shim is requiredSkip to step 3 in ldquoAdjustingrdquoOther angles The shim is requiredSkip to step 2 of ldquoAdjustingrdquoIf you do not know the transom angletemporarily attach the bracket andsensor to the transom to determine ifthe plastic shim is needed

5 Using the two 10 x 1-14rdquo

self-tapping screws temporarilyscrew the bracket to the hull DONOT tighten the screws completelyat this time Follow the step 1-4 inldquoAttaching the Sensor to the Bracketrdquobefore proceeding with ldquoAdjustingrdquo

Installation templatefor starboard side of boat

Drill at locations labeled Bfor the following transom angles

16 deg through 22 deg

Drill at locations labeled Afor the following transom angles

2 deg through 15 deg

Align arrow with bottom of transom

AA A

BB B

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3848

32

Adjusting

1 Using a straight edge sight theunderside of the sensor relative tothe underside of the hull The sternof the sensor should be 1-3 mm

(116-18rdquo) below the bow of thesensor or parallel to the bottom ofthe hull

11 deg transom angleNO SHIM

12-18 deg transom angleNO SHIM

2 deg -10 deg transom

angle

19 deg -22 deg transom

angleshim withtaper up

shim withtaper down

parallelparallel parallel

slightangle

angletoo steep

anglereversed

YES NONO

YES YESYES

Sensor position and transom angle

Note Do not position the bow of thesensor lower than the stern becauseaeration will occur

2 To adjust the sensorrsquos angle relativeto the hull use the tapered plasticshim provided If the bracket hasbeen temporarily fastened to thetransom remove it Key the shim in

place on the back of the bracket2deg-10deg transom angle (steppedtransom and jet boats) Positionthe shim with the tapered end down19deg-22deg transom angle (smallaluminum and fiberglass boats) Position the shim with the taperedend up

3 If the bracket has been temporarilyfastened to the transom remove it

Apply a marine sealant to thethreads of the two 10 x 1-14rdquo self

tapping screws to prevent waterseeping into the transom Screw thebracket to the hull Do not tighten thescrews completely at this time

4 Repeat step 1 to ensure that theangle of the sensor is correctNote Do not position the sensorfarther into the water than necessaryto avoid increasing drag spray andwater noise and reducing boatspeed

5 Using the vertical adjustment spaceon the bracket slots slide the sensorup or down to provide a projection of3 mm (18rdquo) Tighten the screws

Cable cover

Cableclamp

50 mm (2)

Hull projection 3 mm (18)

Vertical adjustment and cable routing

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3948

33

Attaching the sensor to the bracket

1 If the retaining cover near the top ofthe bracket is closed open it bydepressing the latch and rotating thecover downward

Step 1 Step 2

Latch

Retainingcover

Pivotarm (2)

Slot (2)

Step 4

Step 3

Attaching the sensor to the bracket

2 Insert the sensorrsquos pivot arms intothe slots near the top of the bracket

3 Maintain pressure until the pivotarms click into place

4 Rotate the sensor downward until thebottom snaps into the bracket

5 Close the retaining cover to preventthe accidental release of the sensorwhen the boat is underway

Cable routing

Route the sensor cable over thetransom through a drain hole orthorough a new hole drilled in thetransom above the waterline

Never cut the cable or remote the

connector this will void the warranty Always wear safety goggles and a dustmask

1 If a hole must be drilled choose alocation well above the waterlineCheck for obstructions such as trimtabs pumps or wiring inside the hullMark the location with a pencil Drilla hole through the transom using a19 mm or 34rdquo bit (to accommodatethe connector)

2 Route the cable over or through thetransom

3 On the outside of the hull secure thecable against the transom using thecable clamps Position a cable clamp50 mm(2rdquo) above the bracket andmark the mounting hole with apencil

4 Position the second cable clamphalfway between the first clamp andthe cable hole Mark this mountinghole

5 If a hole has been drilled in thetransom open the appropriate slot inthe transom cable cover Position thecover over the cable where it entersthe hull Mark the two mounting

holes6 At each of the marked locations usea 3 mm or 18rdquo bit to drill a hole 10mm (38rdquo) deep The prevent drillingtoo deeply wrap masking tapearound the bit 10 mm (38rdquo) from thepoint

7 Apply marine sealant to the threadsof the 6 x 12rdquo self-tapping screw toprevent water from seeping into the

transom If you have drilled a holethrough the transom apply marinesealant to the space around thecable where it passes through thetransom

8 Position the two cable clamps andfasten them in place If used pushthe cable cover over the cable andscrew it in place

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4048

34

9 Route the cable to the instrumentbeing careful not to tear the cable

jacket when passing it though thebulkhead(s) and other parts of theboat To reduce electricalinterference separate the sensorcable from other electrical wiring andldquonoiserdquo sources Coil any excesscable and secure it in place withzip-ties to prevent damage

46 Optional WaterTemperatureSpeedSensor

Water temperaturespeed sensorST-02MSB and ST-02PSB which aredesigned for thru-hull mounting areoptionally available Install them asshown below

Mounting considerations

Choose a suitable mounting locationconsidering the followingbull Choose a place free from vibrationbull Choose a mid-boat flat position The

sensor does not have to be installedperfectly perpendicular The sensormust not be damaged in dry-dockingoperation

bull Choose a place apart from equipmentgenerating heat

bull Choose a place in the forwarddirection viewing from the drain holeto allow for circulation of coolingwater

1 Dry-dock the boat2 Make a hole of approx 51 mm

diameter in the mounting location3 Unfasten locknut and remove the

sensor section4 Apply high-grade sealant to the

flange of the sensor5 Pass the sensor casing through thehole

6 Face the notch on the sensor towardboatrsquos bow and tighten the flange

7 Set the sensor section to the sensorcasing and tighten the locknut

8 Launch the boat and check for waterleakage around the sensor

Locknut

Face notchtoward bow

Flange Nut

Coat withsilicone sealant Brim

φ 77

51

123

Water temperaturespeed sensor

ST-02MSB ST-02PSB

47 Wiring

Connect the LS-4100 powerdata cableassy MJ-A7SPF0005-020 (2 msupplied) to the POWER and thetransducer cable to the XDR connectorRefer to the interconnection diagram toconnect cables Leave slack in cables tofacilitate checking and maintenance

Note The fuse holder contains a springwhich fixes the fuse To preventdetachment of the spring which wouldcause loss of power tie the line asshown below

+ line (red)

Fuse holder

Cable tie How to fix fuse holder

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4148

35

Establishing the ground

The ground wire (125 sq or more localsupply) should be as short as possible

The signal line ground is isolated from

the chassis ground however the powerline is not insulated Therefore whenconnecting eternal equipment havingpositive ground do not ground thesignal line to the chassis If excessivenoise shows on the screen the groundmay be inadequate In this case attacha steel plate measuring 20 cm by 30 cmon the outside of the hull to provide aground point Connect the ground wire

there Use a ldquoclosedrdquo type lug ( ) tomake the connection at the display unitDo not use an ldquoopenrdquo type lug ( )

Optional equipment

POWER connector

The power supply port is commonlyused for connection of externalequipment such as a GPS receiver orwind indicator Use the powerdatacable MJ-A7SPF0005-020 (supplied) forconnection referring the figure shown inthe right column

Connector Color Remarks

1 TD-A WHT2 TD-B BLU

IEC-61162-1NMEA0183

3 RD-A YEL

4 RD-B GRN

IEC-61162-1

NMEA01835 + RED

6 - BLKPower input12 VDC

7 FG

Water tempspeed sensor

Connect the optional water tempspeedsensor to the XDR connector with theoptional converter connector (Type02S4147) as shown below

Tape connectors withvulcaninzing tapeand then vinyl tapeto waterproof themBind tape ends withcable ties to preventtape from unraveling

Connect to XDR portat rear of display unit

MJ-A10SPF

MJ-A10SRMDMJ-A6SRMD

Fromtransducer

Fromsensor

Connection of converterconnector 02S4147

48 IEC 61162-1 DataSentences

The tables below show the datasentences which can be input to andoutput from the LS-4100 Thetransmission speed for both input andoutput is 4800 bps Data is output attwo-second intervals

Input data sentences

Sentence Meaning

BWC Bearing and distance towaypoint

GGA Global positioning system(GPS) fix data

GLL Geographic position -latitudelongitude

HDG Heading deviation and variationHDT Heading true

MDA Atmospheric pressure

MTW Water temperature

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4248

36

Input data sentences (conrsquot)

Sentence MeaningMWV Wind speed and

angleRMA Recommended

minimum specificLORAN-C dataRMB Recommended

minimum navigationinformation

RMC Recommendedminimum specificGPSTRANSIT data

VHW Water speed andheading

VTG Course over groundand ground speedXTE Cross track error

Output data sentences

Sentence MeaningDBT (Ver 15) Depth below

transducerDPT (Ver 20 Ver30)

Depth

MTW Water temperatureRMB (Ver 20) Recommended

minimumnavigationinformation

VHW Water speed andheading

TLL Target positionoutput by [MARK]key

= Available with connection of optionalsensorsnavaid

49 Installation MenuThe installation menu mainly containsitems which are set at installation

1 Turn on the power while pressing the[MENUESC] key Continue pressing

the [MENUESC] key until theInstallation menu appears

SIMULATION On

TEST LCD PATTERN MEMORY CLEAR

NMEA PORT InOutNMEA MIX OffGPS WAAS Off

SET BOTTOM LEVEL

Installation Menu

= Setting cannot be changed whenNMEA PORT setting is InIn

Installation menu

SIMULATION The simulation modeprovides without connection of thetransducer simulated operation of theequipment using internally generatedechoes All controls are operative Themessage ldquoSIMrdquo appears at the top rightcorner on the screen when thesimulation mode is active

1 At the installation menu press toopen the simulation mode optionswindow

2 Press to choose ldquoOnrdquo to turn onthe simulation mode

3 Press the [POWERBRILL] keyabout three seconds to turn off thepower

4 Press the [POWERBRILL] key toturn on the power ldquoSIMrdquo appears atthe top right corner of the display

5 To turn off the simulation modeselect Off at step 2

NMEA po r t se tup(NMEA PO RT NMEA M IX)

The POWER port can function as aninput port or inputoutput port Changethe setting to ldquoInInrdquo when connectingGP-310B320B and a wind sensor

When connecting the GP-310B320Band a wind sensor first turn on ldquoGPS

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4348

37

WAASrdquo (in the Installation menu) andthen select ldquoInInrdquo as the NMEA portsetting

1 Turn on the power while pressingand holding down the [MENUESC]key Continue pressing the[MENUESC] key until theInstallation menu appears

2 Choose NMEA PORT and thenpress to display the NMEA portoptions window

3 Use or to choose InOut orInIn as appropriate

InOut Input and Output (default

setting)InIn Input only (Available withconnection of the GP-310B320Band a wind sensor)

4 Press choose NMEA MIX andthen press to display the NMEAMIX options window

5 Use or to choose Off or OnChoose On to output input data

Off Outputs the data sentences ofLS-4100 only

On Outputs the data sentences ofLS-4100 and sentences which areinput from other equipment

6 To restore normal operation turn offthe power and then turn it on again

GPS WAAS Chooses how to use theWAAS signal when connecting with a

WAAS receiver for example GP-320B

Note WAAS is currently in thedevelopmental phase During thedevelopmental phase the reliability andavailability of the WAAS signal cannotbe guaranteed Therefore any positiondata should be verified against othersources to confirm reliability

1 Display the Installation menu2 Choose GPS WAAS and then press

to open the GPS WAAS options

window

Off

WAAS options window3 Press or to choose ldquoWAAS-02rdquo

(test signal) When the systembecomes operational (in 2003) setto ldquo00rdquo (regular WAAS signal)

4 Turn off the power

BOTTOM LEVEL If the depthindication is unstable in automaticoperation or the bottom echo cannot bedisplayed in the darkest gray tone byadjusting the gain controls in manualoperation you may adjust the bottomecho level detection circuit for both 50kHz and 200 kHz to stabilize theindication Generally lower the bottomlevel for inner hull installation where thereceive level is too low If the bottomlevel is too low it may be difficult todiscriminate fish from the bottomresulting in unstable depth indication

And if the bottom level is too high thedepth indication may not appear

1 At the installation menu press tochoose SET BOTTOM LEVEL andthen press Several seconds laterthe following display appears

Bottom level +0 (200k -100 - +100 ) +0 ( 50k -100 - +100 )

Bottom level display

2 While observing the picture use or to set 200 kHz or to set50 kHz Set up for optimum picture

3 To restore normal operation turn offthe power and then it on again

Note The mode must be other thanldquoNAV DATArdquo to show the bottom leveldisplay

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4448

SP - 1 E2371S01C

SPECIFICATIONS OF ECHO SOUNDER LS-4100

1 GENERAL11 TX Frequency 50 kHz or 200 kHz 50200 kHz dual transmitting selectable12 Transmit Method Single or dual transmitting

13 Output Power 300 Wrms14 TX Rate Max 500 pulsemin15 Pulse-length 01 to 08 ms

2 DISPLAY UNIT21 Display system 5-inch monochrome LCD 76 mm (W) x 100 mm (H) 240 x 320 dots22 Display Mode Single frequency (highlow freq) Dual-frequency Zoom Nav data-12

Marker zoom Bottom zoom Bottom-lock23 Display Range

Range SettingRange

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

Display

rangeMeter 5 10 20 40 80 150 200 300 2-500

Feet 15 30 60 120 200 400 600 1000 7-1500

Fathoms 3 5 10 20 40 80 100 150 1-250

PassiBraza 3 5 10 30 50 100 150 200 1-300

24 Range Shift 0-500 m 0-1500 ft 0-250 fa 0-300 pb25 Expansion Range Bottom-lock expansion 3 to 10 m

Sectional expansion 2 to 50 m26 Display Advance Speed 8 steps (LinesTX Freeze 1161814121121 41)

3 INTERFACE31 Input data sentences IEC61162-1NMEA0183 Ver 152030

GGA RMA RMB RMC BWC GLL HDT HDG VTG VHW MTWMWV MDA XTE

32 Output data sentences IEC61162-1NMEA0183 Ver 152030 interval 2 sMTW VHW DBT DPT RMB TLL by key operating External data required

4 POWER SUPPLY41 Display Unit 12 VDC 05 A

5 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITION51 Ambient Temperature Display unit -15degC to +55degC52 Relative Humidity 93 or less at 40degC53 Waterproof IPX5

6 COATING COLOR61 Display Unit N30

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4548

M a r

4

0 3

D-1

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4648

Mar 4 03

Mar 4 03

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4748

M a r

3

0 3

S-1

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4848

FURUNO Authorized DistributorDealer FURUNO Authorized DistributorDealer

9-52 Ashihara-cho9-52 Ashihara-choNishinomiya 662-8580 JAPANNishinomiya 662-8580 JAPAN

Telephone Telephone 0798-65-21110798-65-2111FaxFax 0798-65-42000798-65-4200

FIRST EDITION FIRST EDITION MARMAR 20032003Printed in JapanPrinted in Japan All rights reserved All rights reserved

B1B1 SEPSEP 09 200509 2005

Pub NoPub No OME-23710OME-23710 00014698000000146980000001469800000014698000(( DAMIDAMI )) LS-4100LS-4100

0 0 0 1 4 6 9 8 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 4 6 9 8 0 0 0

Page 30: OME23710B_1_LS4100

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3048

24

4 INSTALLATION

41 Display UnitMounting considerations

The display unit can be installed on adesktop on the bulkhead or flushmounted in a panel When choosing alocation keep the following in mind

bull Keep the display unit out of directsunlight

bull The temperature and humidity should

be moderate and stablebull Locate the unit away from exhaust

pipes and ventsbull The mounting location should be well

ventilatedbull Mount the unit where shock and

vibration are minimalbull For maintenance and checking

purposes leave sufficient space atthe sides and rear of the unit andleave slack in cables

bull A magnetic compass will be affected ifthe display unit is placed too close toit Observe the following compasssafe distances to prevent disturbanceto the magnetic compassStandard compass 04 metersSteering compass 03 meters

Desktop overhead mounting1 Fix the bracket to a desktop or the

overhead with tapping screws(supplied)

2 Loosely screw knobs into the displayunit

3 Set the display unit to the bracketand then tighten the knobs

Mounting on the bulkhead Flush

mounting in a panelSee the instructions on the bulkhead orflush mounting template (supplied)

42 Thru-hull MountTransducer

Transducer mounting location

The thru-hull mount transducer

(520-5PSD 520-5MSD) provides thebest performance of all since thetransducer protrudes from the hull andthe effect of air bubbles and turbulencenear the hull skin is reduced When theboat has a keel the transducer shouldbe at least 30 cm away from it Typicalthru-hull mountings are shown in thefigure on the next page

The performance of this sounder isdirectly related to the mounting locationof the transducer especially forhigh-speed cruising The installationshould be planned in advance keepingthe standard cable length (8 m) and thefollowing factors in mindbull Air bubbles and turbulence caused by

movement of the boat seriouslydegrade the sounding capability of thetransducer The transducer shouldtherefore be located in a positionwhere water flow is the smoothestNoise from the propellers alsoadversely affects performance andthe transducer should not be mountednearby The lifting strakes arenotorious for creating acoustic noiseand these must be avoided bykeeping the transducer inboard ofthem

bull The transducer must always remain

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3148

25

submerged even when the boat isrolling pitching or up on a plane athigh speed

bull A practical choice would besomewhere between 13 and 12 of

the boatrsquos length from the stern Forplaning hulls a practical location isgenerally rather far astern so that thetransducer is always in waterregardless of the planing attitude

28

22

120

68

30

520-5PSD

24

120

68

87520-5MSD

Unit mm

Thru-hull mount transducer dimensions

Acceptable transducer mounting

locations

Position 12 to 13 of the hull from stern

15 to 30 cm off center line (inside first lifting strakes)

Within the wetted bottom area

Deadrise angle within 15 deg

HIGH SPEED-V HULL

Suitable transducer mounting locations

Typical thru-hull mounttransducer installations

FairingBlock

Flat Washer

Rubber Washer

Hull

Deep-V Hull

Hull

Flat Washer

Rubber Washer

Flat Hull

CorkWasher

Typical thru-hull mounttransducer installations

Procedure for installing thethru-hull mount transducer

1 With the boat hauled out of the watermark the location chosen formounting the transducer on thebottom of the hull

2 If the hull is not level within 15deg inany direction fairing blocks madeout of teak should be used betweenthe transducer and hull both insideand outside to keep the transducerface parallel with the water lineFabricate the fairing block as shownbelow and make the entire surfaceas smooth as possible to provide anundisturbed flow of water around thetransducer The fairing block shouldbe smaller than the transducer itselfto provide a channel to divert

turbulent water around the sides ofthe transducer rather than over itsface

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3248

26

BOWHole for stuffing tube

Upper Half

Lower Half

Saw along slopeof hull Construction of fairing block

3 Drill a hole just large enough to passthe threaded stuffing tube of thetransducer through the hull makingsure it is drilled vertically

4 Apply a sufficient amount of highquality caulking compound to the topsurface of the transducer around thethreads of the stuffing tube andinside the mounting hole (and fairingblocks if used) to ensure watertightmounting

5 Mount the transducer and fairingblocks and tighten the locking nutsBe sure that the transducer is

properly oriented and its workingface is parallel to the waterline

Note Do not over-stress the stuffingtube and locking nuts through excessivetightening since the wood block willswell when the boat is placed in thewater It is suggested that the nut betightened lightly at installation andretightened several days after the boat

has been launched

Transducer preparation

Before putting the boat in water wipethe face of the transducer thoroughlywith a detergent liquid soap This willlessen the time necessary for thetransducer to have good contact withthe water Otherwise the time requiredfor complete ldquosaturationrdquo ill belengthened and performance will bereduced

DO NOT paint the transducerPerformance will be affected

43 Transom MountTransducer

The transom mount transducer is verycommonly employed usually onrelatively small IO or outboard boatsDo not use this method on an inboardmotor boat because turbulence iscreated by the propeller ahead of thetransducer

520-5PWD

There are two methods of installationflush with hull (for flat hulls) andprojecting from hull (for deep V-hulls)

Flat Hull

D

Dgt50 cm

Deep-VHull

520-5PWD mounting locations

Installing the 520-5PWD on a flat hull

A suitable mounting location is at least50 cm away from the engine and wherethe water flow is smooth

1 Drill four pilot holes in the mountinglocation

2 Attach the transducer to the bracketwith 5 x 20 tapping screws(supplied)

3 Adjust the transducer position so thetransducer faces right to the bottom

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3348

27

Note If necessary to improve waterflow and minimize air bubblesstaying on the transducer faceincline the transducer about 5deg at therear This may require a certainamount of experimentation for finetuning at high cruising speeds

4 Fill the gap between the wedge frontof the transducer and transom withepoxy material to eliminate any airspaces

No1 M5 x 14

5 x 20

5 x 20

2 to 5

Tape

Hull

Transom mount transducer

mounting flush with hull

Installing the transom mounttransducer on a deep-V hull

This method is employed on deep-Vhulls and provides good performancebecause the effects of air bubbles areminimal Install the transducer parallelwith water surface not flush with hull Ifthe boat is placed on a trailer care mustbe taken not to damage the transducerwhen the boat is hauled out of the waterand put on the trailer

5 x 20

No 2M5 x 14

5 x 20

Transom mount transducermounted projecting from hull

525-5PWD

Choose the installation methoddepending on the rise angle of the hull

Transom

Transom

Stripe over 10

Parallel with hull

Mount at the stripe

less than 10

525-5PWD mounting location

Installing the 525-5PWD

Referring to ldquoInstalling the 520-5PWDrdquoin the left column for mounting of thebracket and the figure shown on the topof next page install the 525-5PWD tothe transom

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3448

28

2 to 5

Transducer

Bracket

Hull

Epoxy material

525-5PWD mounting

44 Inside-hullTransducer

The thru-hull mount transducer(520-5PSD 520-5MSD) may also beinstalled inside the hull following theprocedure below

Necessary tools

You will need the following toolsbull Sandpaper (100)bull Silicone sealantbull Silicone grease

Remarks on installationbull Turn off the engine and anchor the

boat while installing the equipmentbull Install the transducer in the engine

room

Choosing the mounting locationbull The mounting location should be

where the hull is of single-hullthickness and is void of air or flotationmaterials other than solid fiberglassbetween the transducer face and thewater

bull Do not place the transducer over hullstruts or ribs which run under the hull

bull Avoid a location where the risingangle of the hull exceeds 15deg tominimize the effect of the boatrsquosrolling

bull You will finalize the mounting location

through some trial and error Theprocedure for this is shown later

50 cm

50 cm15 cm15 cm

13

12

Transducer mountinglocation

Centerline

Inside-hull transducer mounting location

Attaching the transducer1 Clean the transducer face to remove

any foreign material Lightly roughenthe transducer face with 100sandpaper Also roughen the insideof the hull where the transducer is tobe mounted

2 Clean the transducer face again3 Warm the silicone sealant to 40degC

before usage to soften it Coat thetransducer face and mountinglocation with silicone sealant

Transducer

SiliconeSealant

Coating transducer facewith silicone sealant

4 Press the transducer firmly down onthe hull and gently twist it back andforth to remove any air which may betrapped in the silicone sealant

Checking the installation

1 Connect the battery to the display

unit2 Turn on the display unit

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3548

29

3 Press the [MODE] key to chooseSINGLE FREQ

4 Choose 50 kHz or 200 kHz and thenpress the [MENUESC] key to closethe mode menu

5 Press the [MENU] to show the mainmenu and then press to select

Auto mode6 Press to choose Off7 Press the [MENUESC] key8 Press the [GAIN] key to set the gain

to ldquo5rdquo and then press the[MENUESC] key

9 Press the [RANGE] key to set therange to 10 meters (feet) and thenpress the [MENUESC] key

10 If the bottom is displayed in darkgray and the depth indicationappears the mounting location issuitable Go to ldquoFinal preparationrdquo

11 If the bottom is not displayed in darkgray tone the mounting location maybe unsuitable Do the followinga) Press the [POWERBRILL] key to

turn off the powerb) Gently dismount the transducer

with a piece of woodc) Reattach the transducer

elsewhere as shown in ldquoAttachingthe transducerrdquo

d) Check the installation again

Final preparation

Support the transducer with a piece ofwood to keep it in place while it is drying

Let the transducer dry 24-72 hours

45 Optional Triducer525ST-MSD

The optional triducer 525ST-MSD isdesigned for thru-hull mounting Forhow to install this transducer seeparagraph 42

φ79 mm

33 mm200-12 UNthreads

φ51 mm

27 mm

7 mm

140 mm Triducer 525ST-MSD

525ST-PWD

The Transom Mount Transducer orTRIDUCER reg Multisensor with IntegralRelease Bracket 525ST-PWD ismanufactured by AIRMAR Co Theseinstructions are also included with the

sensor

Pre-test for speed and temperature

Connect the sensor to the instrumentand spin the paddlewheel Check for aspeed reading and the approximate airtemperature If there is no readingreturn the sensor to your place ofpurchase

Tools and materials needed

ScissorsMasking tapeSafety gogglesDust maskElectric drillDrill bit for

Bracket holes 4mm 23 or 964rdquoFiberglass hull chamfer bit(preferred)6mm or 14rdquo

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3648

30

Transom hole 19mm or 34rdquo(optional)

Cable clamp holes 3mm or 18rdquoScrewdriversStraight edgeMarine sealantPencilZip-tiesWater-based antifouling paint(mandatory in salt water )

Mounting location

To ensure the best performance thesensor must be submerged inaeration-free and turbulence-free water

Mount the sensor close to the centerlineof the boat On slower heavierdisplacement hulls positioning it fartherfrom the centerline is acceptable

Allow adequate space above thebracket for it to release and rotate thesensor upward

Height

Height withoutspeed sensor191mm (7-12)Height withspeed sensor213mm (8-12)

Height required at mounting location

Note 1 Do not mount the sensor in anarea of turbulence or bubbles nearwater intake or discharge openingsbehind strakes struts fittings or hull

irregularities behind eroding paint (anindication of turbulence)Note 2 Avoid mounting the sensorwhere the boat may be supportedduring trailering launching hauling andstorageNote 3 For single drive boat mounton the starboard side at least 75 mm(3rdquo) beyond the swing radius of thepropeller

75 mm(3)

minimum beyondswing radius

Mounting location on single drive boat

Note 4 For twin drive boat mountbetween the drives

Installation of bracket

1 Cut out the installation template

shown on the next page2 At the selected location position thetemplate so the arrow at the bottomis aligned with the bottom edge ofthe transom Being sure the templateis parallel to the waterline tape it inplace

Align template vertically

Deadrise angle

Slope of hullparallel towaterline

Align template arrow withbottom edge of transom

Positioning the template

Warning Always wear safetygoggles and a dust mask

3 Using a 4 mm 23 or 964rdquo bit drillthree holes 22 mm (78rdquo) deepat the locations indicated To preventdrilling too deeply wrap maskingtape around the bit 22 mm (78rdquo)from the pointFiberglass hull Minimize surfacecracking by chamfering the gelcoatIf a chamfer bit or countersink bit is

not available start drilling with a6mm or 14rdquo bit to a depth of 1 mm(116rdquo)

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3748

31

4 If you know your transom angle the

bracket is designed for a standard13deg transom angle11deg-18deg angle No shim is requiredSkip to step 3 in ldquoAdjustingrdquoOther angles The shim is requiredSkip to step 2 of ldquoAdjustingrdquoIf you do not know the transom angletemporarily attach the bracket andsensor to the transom to determine ifthe plastic shim is needed

5 Using the two 10 x 1-14rdquo

self-tapping screws temporarilyscrew the bracket to the hull DONOT tighten the screws completelyat this time Follow the step 1-4 inldquoAttaching the Sensor to the Bracketrdquobefore proceeding with ldquoAdjustingrdquo

Installation templatefor starboard side of boat

Drill at locations labeled Bfor the following transom angles

16 deg through 22 deg

Drill at locations labeled Afor the following transom angles

2 deg through 15 deg

Align arrow with bottom of transom

AA A

BB B

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3848

32

Adjusting

1 Using a straight edge sight theunderside of the sensor relative tothe underside of the hull The sternof the sensor should be 1-3 mm

(116-18rdquo) below the bow of thesensor or parallel to the bottom ofthe hull

11 deg transom angleNO SHIM

12-18 deg transom angleNO SHIM

2 deg -10 deg transom

angle

19 deg -22 deg transom

angleshim withtaper up

shim withtaper down

parallelparallel parallel

slightangle

angletoo steep

anglereversed

YES NONO

YES YESYES

Sensor position and transom angle

Note Do not position the bow of thesensor lower than the stern becauseaeration will occur

2 To adjust the sensorrsquos angle relativeto the hull use the tapered plasticshim provided If the bracket hasbeen temporarily fastened to thetransom remove it Key the shim in

place on the back of the bracket2deg-10deg transom angle (steppedtransom and jet boats) Positionthe shim with the tapered end down19deg-22deg transom angle (smallaluminum and fiberglass boats) Position the shim with the taperedend up

3 If the bracket has been temporarilyfastened to the transom remove it

Apply a marine sealant to thethreads of the two 10 x 1-14rdquo self

tapping screws to prevent waterseeping into the transom Screw thebracket to the hull Do not tighten thescrews completely at this time

4 Repeat step 1 to ensure that theangle of the sensor is correctNote Do not position the sensorfarther into the water than necessaryto avoid increasing drag spray andwater noise and reducing boatspeed

5 Using the vertical adjustment spaceon the bracket slots slide the sensorup or down to provide a projection of3 mm (18rdquo) Tighten the screws

Cable cover

Cableclamp

50 mm (2)

Hull projection 3 mm (18)

Vertical adjustment and cable routing

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3948

33

Attaching the sensor to the bracket

1 If the retaining cover near the top ofthe bracket is closed open it bydepressing the latch and rotating thecover downward

Step 1 Step 2

Latch

Retainingcover

Pivotarm (2)

Slot (2)

Step 4

Step 3

Attaching the sensor to the bracket

2 Insert the sensorrsquos pivot arms intothe slots near the top of the bracket

3 Maintain pressure until the pivotarms click into place

4 Rotate the sensor downward until thebottom snaps into the bracket

5 Close the retaining cover to preventthe accidental release of the sensorwhen the boat is underway

Cable routing

Route the sensor cable over thetransom through a drain hole orthorough a new hole drilled in thetransom above the waterline

Never cut the cable or remote the

connector this will void the warranty Always wear safety goggles and a dustmask

1 If a hole must be drilled choose alocation well above the waterlineCheck for obstructions such as trimtabs pumps or wiring inside the hullMark the location with a pencil Drilla hole through the transom using a19 mm or 34rdquo bit (to accommodatethe connector)

2 Route the cable over or through thetransom

3 On the outside of the hull secure thecable against the transom using thecable clamps Position a cable clamp50 mm(2rdquo) above the bracket andmark the mounting hole with apencil

4 Position the second cable clamphalfway between the first clamp andthe cable hole Mark this mountinghole

5 If a hole has been drilled in thetransom open the appropriate slot inthe transom cable cover Position thecover over the cable where it entersthe hull Mark the two mounting

holes6 At each of the marked locations usea 3 mm or 18rdquo bit to drill a hole 10mm (38rdquo) deep The prevent drillingtoo deeply wrap masking tapearound the bit 10 mm (38rdquo) from thepoint

7 Apply marine sealant to the threadsof the 6 x 12rdquo self-tapping screw toprevent water from seeping into the

transom If you have drilled a holethrough the transom apply marinesealant to the space around thecable where it passes through thetransom

8 Position the two cable clamps andfasten them in place If used pushthe cable cover over the cable andscrew it in place

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4048

34

9 Route the cable to the instrumentbeing careful not to tear the cable

jacket when passing it though thebulkhead(s) and other parts of theboat To reduce electricalinterference separate the sensorcable from other electrical wiring andldquonoiserdquo sources Coil any excesscable and secure it in place withzip-ties to prevent damage

46 Optional WaterTemperatureSpeedSensor

Water temperaturespeed sensorST-02MSB and ST-02PSB which aredesigned for thru-hull mounting areoptionally available Install them asshown below

Mounting considerations

Choose a suitable mounting locationconsidering the followingbull Choose a place free from vibrationbull Choose a mid-boat flat position The

sensor does not have to be installedperfectly perpendicular The sensormust not be damaged in dry-dockingoperation

bull Choose a place apart from equipmentgenerating heat

bull Choose a place in the forwarddirection viewing from the drain holeto allow for circulation of coolingwater

1 Dry-dock the boat2 Make a hole of approx 51 mm

diameter in the mounting location3 Unfasten locknut and remove the

sensor section4 Apply high-grade sealant to the

flange of the sensor5 Pass the sensor casing through thehole

6 Face the notch on the sensor towardboatrsquos bow and tighten the flange

7 Set the sensor section to the sensorcasing and tighten the locknut

8 Launch the boat and check for waterleakage around the sensor

Locknut

Face notchtoward bow

Flange Nut

Coat withsilicone sealant Brim

φ 77

51

123

Water temperaturespeed sensor

ST-02MSB ST-02PSB

47 Wiring

Connect the LS-4100 powerdata cableassy MJ-A7SPF0005-020 (2 msupplied) to the POWER and thetransducer cable to the XDR connectorRefer to the interconnection diagram toconnect cables Leave slack in cables tofacilitate checking and maintenance

Note The fuse holder contains a springwhich fixes the fuse To preventdetachment of the spring which wouldcause loss of power tie the line asshown below

+ line (red)

Fuse holder

Cable tie How to fix fuse holder

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4148

35

Establishing the ground

The ground wire (125 sq or more localsupply) should be as short as possible

The signal line ground is isolated from

the chassis ground however the powerline is not insulated Therefore whenconnecting eternal equipment havingpositive ground do not ground thesignal line to the chassis If excessivenoise shows on the screen the groundmay be inadequate In this case attacha steel plate measuring 20 cm by 30 cmon the outside of the hull to provide aground point Connect the ground wire

there Use a ldquoclosedrdquo type lug ( ) tomake the connection at the display unitDo not use an ldquoopenrdquo type lug ( )

Optional equipment

POWER connector

The power supply port is commonlyused for connection of externalequipment such as a GPS receiver orwind indicator Use the powerdatacable MJ-A7SPF0005-020 (supplied) forconnection referring the figure shown inthe right column

Connector Color Remarks

1 TD-A WHT2 TD-B BLU

IEC-61162-1NMEA0183

3 RD-A YEL

4 RD-B GRN

IEC-61162-1

NMEA01835 + RED

6 - BLKPower input12 VDC

7 FG

Water tempspeed sensor

Connect the optional water tempspeedsensor to the XDR connector with theoptional converter connector (Type02S4147) as shown below

Tape connectors withvulcaninzing tapeand then vinyl tapeto waterproof themBind tape ends withcable ties to preventtape from unraveling

Connect to XDR portat rear of display unit

MJ-A10SPF

MJ-A10SRMDMJ-A6SRMD

Fromtransducer

Fromsensor

Connection of converterconnector 02S4147

48 IEC 61162-1 DataSentences

The tables below show the datasentences which can be input to andoutput from the LS-4100 Thetransmission speed for both input andoutput is 4800 bps Data is output attwo-second intervals

Input data sentences

Sentence Meaning

BWC Bearing and distance towaypoint

GGA Global positioning system(GPS) fix data

GLL Geographic position -latitudelongitude

HDG Heading deviation and variationHDT Heading true

MDA Atmospheric pressure

MTW Water temperature

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4248

36

Input data sentences (conrsquot)

Sentence MeaningMWV Wind speed and

angleRMA Recommended

minimum specificLORAN-C dataRMB Recommended

minimum navigationinformation

RMC Recommendedminimum specificGPSTRANSIT data

VHW Water speed andheading

VTG Course over groundand ground speedXTE Cross track error

Output data sentences

Sentence MeaningDBT (Ver 15) Depth below

transducerDPT (Ver 20 Ver30)

Depth

MTW Water temperatureRMB (Ver 20) Recommended

minimumnavigationinformation

VHW Water speed andheading

TLL Target positionoutput by [MARK]key

= Available with connection of optionalsensorsnavaid

49 Installation MenuThe installation menu mainly containsitems which are set at installation

1 Turn on the power while pressing the[MENUESC] key Continue pressing

the [MENUESC] key until theInstallation menu appears

SIMULATION On

TEST LCD PATTERN MEMORY CLEAR

NMEA PORT InOutNMEA MIX OffGPS WAAS Off

SET BOTTOM LEVEL

Installation Menu

= Setting cannot be changed whenNMEA PORT setting is InIn

Installation menu

SIMULATION The simulation modeprovides without connection of thetransducer simulated operation of theequipment using internally generatedechoes All controls are operative Themessage ldquoSIMrdquo appears at the top rightcorner on the screen when thesimulation mode is active

1 At the installation menu press toopen the simulation mode optionswindow

2 Press to choose ldquoOnrdquo to turn onthe simulation mode

3 Press the [POWERBRILL] keyabout three seconds to turn off thepower

4 Press the [POWERBRILL] key toturn on the power ldquoSIMrdquo appears atthe top right corner of the display

5 To turn off the simulation modeselect Off at step 2

NMEA po r t se tup(NMEA PO RT NMEA M IX)

The POWER port can function as aninput port or inputoutput port Changethe setting to ldquoInInrdquo when connectingGP-310B320B and a wind sensor

When connecting the GP-310B320Band a wind sensor first turn on ldquoGPS

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4348

37

WAASrdquo (in the Installation menu) andthen select ldquoInInrdquo as the NMEA portsetting

1 Turn on the power while pressingand holding down the [MENUESC]key Continue pressing the[MENUESC] key until theInstallation menu appears

2 Choose NMEA PORT and thenpress to display the NMEA portoptions window

3 Use or to choose InOut orInIn as appropriate

InOut Input and Output (default

setting)InIn Input only (Available withconnection of the GP-310B320Band a wind sensor)

4 Press choose NMEA MIX andthen press to display the NMEAMIX options window

5 Use or to choose Off or OnChoose On to output input data

Off Outputs the data sentences ofLS-4100 only

On Outputs the data sentences ofLS-4100 and sentences which areinput from other equipment

6 To restore normal operation turn offthe power and then turn it on again

GPS WAAS Chooses how to use theWAAS signal when connecting with a

WAAS receiver for example GP-320B

Note WAAS is currently in thedevelopmental phase During thedevelopmental phase the reliability andavailability of the WAAS signal cannotbe guaranteed Therefore any positiondata should be verified against othersources to confirm reliability

1 Display the Installation menu2 Choose GPS WAAS and then press

to open the GPS WAAS options

window

Off

WAAS options window3 Press or to choose ldquoWAAS-02rdquo

(test signal) When the systembecomes operational (in 2003) setto ldquo00rdquo (regular WAAS signal)

4 Turn off the power

BOTTOM LEVEL If the depthindication is unstable in automaticoperation or the bottom echo cannot bedisplayed in the darkest gray tone byadjusting the gain controls in manualoperation you may adjust the bottomecho level detection circuit for both 50kHz and 200 kHz to stabilize theindication Generally lower the bottomlevel for inner hull installation where thereceive level is too low If the bottomlevel is too low it may be difficult todiscriminate fish from the bottomresulting in unstable depth indication

And if the bottom level is too high thedepth indication may not appear

1 At the installation menu press tochoose SET BOTTOM LEVEL andthen press Several seconds laterthe following display appears

Bottom level +0 (200k -100 - +100 ) +0 ( 50k -100 - +100 )

Bottom level display

2 While observing the picture use or to set 200 kHz or to set50 kHz Set up for optimum picture

3 To restore normal operation turn offthe power and then it on again

Note The mode must be other thanldquoNAV DATArdquo to show the bottom leveldisplay

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4448

SP - 1 E2371S01C

SPECIFICATIONS OF ECHO SOUNDER LS-4100

1 GENERAL11 TX Frequency 50 kHz or 200 kHz 50200 kHz dual transmitting selectable12 Transmit Method Single or dual transmitting

13 Output Power 300 Wrms14 TX Rate Max 500 pulsemin15 Pulse-length 01 to 08 ms

2 DISPLAY UNIT21 Display system 5-inch monochrome LCD 76 mm (W) x 100 mm (H) 240 x 320 dots22 Display Mode Single frequency (highlow freq) Dual-frequency Zoom Nav data-12

Marker zoom Bottom zoom Bottom-lock23 Display Range

Range SettingRange

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

Display

rangeMeter 5 10 20 40 80 150 200 300 2-500

Feet 15 30 60 120 200 400 600 1000 7-1500

Fathoms 3 5 10 20 40 80 100 150 1-250

PassiBraza 3 5 10 30 50 100 150 200 1-300

24 Range Shift 0-500 m 0-1500 ft 0-250 fa 0-300 pb25 Expansion Range Bottom-lock expansion 3 to 10 m

Sectional expansion 2 to 50 m26 Display Advance Speed 8 steps (LinesTX Freeze 1161814121121 41)

3 INTERFACE31 Input data sentences IEC61162-1NMEA0183 Ver 152030

GGA RMA RMB RMC BWC GLL HDT HDG VTG VHW MTWMWV MDA XTE

32 Output data sentences IEC61162-1NMEA0183 Ver 152030 interval 2 sMTW VHW DBT DPT RMB TLL by key operating External data required

4 POWER SUPPLY41 Display Unit 12 VDC 05 A

5 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITION51 Ambient Temperature Display unit -15degC to +55degC52 Relative Humidity 93 or less at 40degC53 Waterproof IPX5

6 COATING COLOR61 Display Unit N30

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4548

M a r

4

0 3

D-1

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4648

Mar 4 03

Mar 4 03

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4748

M a r

3

0 3

S-1

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4848

FURUNO Authorized DistributorDealer FURUNO Authorized DistributorDealer

9-52 Ashihara-cho9-52 Ashihara-choNishinomiya 662-8580 JAPANNishinomiya 662-8580 JAPAN

Telephone Telephone 0798-65-21110798-65-2111FaxFax 0798-65-42000798-65-4200

FIRST EDITION FIRST EDITION MARMAR 20032003Printed in JapanPrinted in Japan All rights reserved All rights reserved

B1B1 SEPSEP 09 200509 2005

Pub NoPub No OME-23710OME-23710 00014698000000146980000001469800000014698000(( DAMIDAMI )) LS-4100LS-4100

0 0 0 1 4 6 9 8 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 4 6 9 8 0 0 0

Page 31: OME23710B_1_LS4100

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3148

25

submerged even when the boat isrolling pitching or up on a plane athigh speed

bull A practical choice would besomewhere between 13 and 12 of

the boatrsquos length from the stern Forplaning hulls a practical location isgenerally rather far astern so that thetransducer is always in waterregardless of the planing attitude

28

22

120

68

30

520-5PSD

24

120

68

87520-5MSD

Unit mm

Thru-hull mount transducer dimensions

Acceptable transducer mounting

locations

Position 12 to 13 of the hull from stern

15 to 30 cm off center line (inside first lifting strakes)

Within the wetted bottom area

Deadrise angle within 15 deg

HIGH SPEED-V HULL

Suitable transducer mounting locations

Typical thru-hull mounttransducer installations

FairingBlock

Flat Washer

Rubber Washer

Hull

Deep-V Hull

Hull

Flat Washer

Rubber Washer

Flat Hull

CorkWasher

Typical thru-hull mounttransducer installations

Procedure for installing thethru-hull mount transducer

1 With the boat hauled out of the watermark the location chosen formounting the transducer on thebottom of the hull

2 If the hull is not level within 15deg inany direction fairing blocks madeout of teak should be used betweenthe transducer and hull both insideand outside to keep the transducerface parallel with the water lineFabricate the fairing block as shownbelow and make the entire surfaceas smooth as possible to provide anundisturbed flow of water around thetransducer The fairing block shouldbe smaller than the transducer itselfto provide a channel to divert

turbulent water around the sides ofthe transducer rather than over itsface

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3248

26

BOWHole for stuffing tube

Upper Half

Lower Half

Saw along slopeof hull Construction of fairing block

3 Drill a hole just large enough to passthe threaded stuffing tube of thetransducer through the hull makingsure it is drilled vertically

4 Apply a sufficient amount of highquality caulking compound to the topsurface of the transducer around thethreads of the stuffing tube andinside the mounting hole (and fairingblocks if used) to ensure watertightmounting

5 Mount the transducer and fairingblocks and tighten the locking nutsBe sure that the transducer is

properly oriented and its workingface is parallel to the waterline

Note Do not over-stress the stuffingtube and locking nuts through excessivetightening since the wood block willswell when the boat is placed in thewater It is suggested that the nut betightened lightly at installation andretightened several days after the boat

has been launched

Transducer preparation

Before putting the boat in water wipethe face of the transducer thoroughlywith a detergent liquid soap This willlessen the time necessary for thetransducer to have good contact withthe water Otherwise the time requiredfor complete ldquosaturationrdquo ill belengthened and performance will bereduced

DO NOT paint the transducerPerformance will be affected

43 Transom MountTransducer

The transom mount transducer is verycommonly employed usually onrelatively small IO or outboard boatsDo not use this method on an inboardmotor boat because turbulence iscreated by the propeller ahead of thetransducer

520-5PWD

There are two methods of installationflush with hull (for flat hulls) andprojecting from hull (for deep V-hulls)

Flat Hull

D

Dgt50 cm

Deep-VHull

520-5PWD mounting locations

Installing the 520-5PWD on a flat hull

A suitable mounting location is at least50 cm away from the engine and wherethe water flow is smooth

1 Drill four pilot holes in the mountinglocation

2 Attach the transducer to the bracketwith 5 x 20 tapping screws(supplied)

3 Adjust the transducer position so thetransducer faces right to the bottom

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3348

27

Note If necessary to improve waterflow and minimize air bubblesstaying on the transducer faceincline the transducer about 5deg at therear This may require a certainamount of experimentation for finetuning at high cruising speeds

4 Fill the gap between the wedge frontof the transducer and transom withepoxy material to eliminate any airspaces

No1 M5 x 14

5 x 20

5 x 20

2 to 5

Tape

Hull

Transom mount transducer

mounting flush with hull

Installing the transom mounttransducer on a deep-V hull

This method is employed on deep-Vhulls and provides good performancebecause the effects of air bubbles areminimal Install the transducer parallelwith water surface not flush with hull Ifthe boat is placed on a trailer care mustbe taken not to damage the transducerwhen the boat is hauled out of the waterand put on the trailer

5 x 20

No 2M5 x 14

5 x 20

Transom mount transducermounted projecting from hull

525-5PWD

Choose the installation methoddepending on the rise angle of the hull

Transom

Transom

Stripe over 10

Parallel with hull

Mount at the stripe

less than 10

525-5PWD mounting location

Installing the 525-5PWD

Referring to ldquoInstalling the 520-5PWDrdquoin the left column for mounting of thebracket and the figure shown on the topof next page install the 525-5PWD tothe transom

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3448

28

2 to 5

Transducer

Bracket

Hull

Epoxy material

525-5PWD mounting

44 Inside-hullTransducer

The thru-hull mount transducer(520-5PSD 520-5MSD) may also beinstalled inside the hull following theprocedure below

Necessary tools

You will need the following toolsbull Sandpaper (100)bull Silicone sealantbull Silicone grease

Remarks on installationbull Turn off the engine and anchor the

boat while installing the equipmentbull Install the transducer in the engine

room

Choosing the mounting locationbull The mounting location should be

where the hull is of single-hullthickness and is void of air or flotationmaterials other than solid fiberglassbetween the transducer face and thewater

bull Do not place the transducer over hullstruts or ribs which run under the hull

bull Avoid a location where the risingangle of the hull exceeds 15deg tominimize the effect of the boatrsquosrolling

bull You will finalize the mounting location

through some trial and error Theprocedure for this is shown later

50 cm

50 cm15 cm15 cm

13

12

Transducer mountinglocation

Centerline

Inside-hull transducer mounting location

Attaching the transducer1 Clean the transducer face to remove

any foreign material Lightly roughenthe transducer face with 100sandpaper Also roughen the insideof the hull where the transducer is tobe mounted

2 Clean the transducer face again3 Warm the silicone sealant to 40degC

before usage to soften it Coat thetransducer face and mountinglocation with silicone sealant

Transducer

SiliconeSealant

Coating transducer facewith silicone sealant

4 Press the transducer firmly down onthe hull and gently twist it back andforth to remove any air which may betrapped in the silicone sealant

Checking the installation

1 Connect the battery to the display

unit2 Turn on the display unit

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3548

29

3 Press the [MODE] key to chooseSINGLE FREQ

4 Choose 50 kHz or 200 kHz and thenpress the [MENUESC] key to closethe mode menu

5 Press the [MENU] to show the mainmenu and then press to select

Auto mode6 Press to choose Off7 Press the [MENUESC] key8 Press the [GAIN] key to set the gain

to ldquo5rdquo and then press the[MENUESC] key

9 Press the [RANGE] key to set therange to 10 meters (feet) and thenpress the [MENUESC] key

10 If the bottom is displayed in darkgray and the depth indicationappears the mounting location issuitable Go to ldquoFinal preparationrdquo

11 If the bottom is not displayed in darkgray tone the mounting location maybe unsuitable Do the followinga) Press the [POWERBRILL] key to

turn off the powerb) Gently dismount the transducer

with a piece of woodc) Reattach the transducer

elsewhere as shown in ldquoAttachingthe transducerrdquo

d) Check the installation again

Final preparation

Support the transducer with a piece ofwood to keep it in place while it is drying

Let the transducer dry 24-72 hours

45 Optional Triducer525ST-MSD

The optional triducer 525ST-MSD isdesigned for thru-hull mounting Forhow to install this transducer seeparagraph 42

φ79 mm

33 mm200-12 UNthreads

φ51 mm

27 mm

7 mm

140 mm Triducer 525ST-MSD

525ST-PWD

The Transom Mount Transducer orTRIDUCER reg Multisensor with IntegralRelease Bracket 525ST-PWD ismanufactured by AIRMAR Co Theseinstructions are also included with the

sensor

Pre-test for speed and temperature

Connect the sensor to the instrumentand spin the paddlewheel Check for aspeed reading and the approximate airtemperature If there is no readingreturn the sensor to your place ofpurchase

Tools and materials needed

ScissorsMasking tapeSafety gogglesDust maskElectric drillDrill bit for

Bracket holes 4mm 23 or 964rdquoFiberglass hull chamfer bit(preferred)6mm or 14rdquo

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3648

30

Transom hole 19mm or 34rdquo(optional)

Cable clamp holes 3mm or 18rdquoScrewdriversStraight edgeMarine sealantPencilZip-tiesWater-based antifouling paint(mandatory in salt water )

Mounting location

To ensure the best performance thesensor must be submerged inaeration-free and turbulence-free water

Mount the sensor close to the centerlineof the boat On slower heavierdisplacement hulls positioning it fartherfrom the centerline is acceptable

Allow adequate space above thebracket for it to release and rotate thesensor upward

Height

Height withoutspeed sensor191mm (7-12)Height withspeed sensor213mm (8-12)

Height required at mounting location

Note 1 Do not mount the sensor in anarea of turbulence or bubbles nearwater intake or discharge openingsbehind strakes struts fittings or hull

irregularities behind eroding paint (anindication of turbulence)Note 2 Avoid mounting the sensorwhere the boat may be supportedduring trailering launching hauling andstorageNote 3 For single drive boat mounton the starboard side at least 75 mm(3rdquo) beyond the swing radius of thepropeller

75 mm(3)

minimum beyondswing radius

Mounting location on single drive boat

Note 4 For twin drive boat mountbetween the drives

Installation of bracket

1 Cut out the installation template

shown on the next page2 At the selected location position thetemplate so the arrow at the bottomis aligned with the bottom edge ofthe transom Being sure the templateis parallel to the waterline tape it inplace

Align template vertically

Deadrise angle

Slope of hullparallel towaterline

Align template arrow withbottom edge of transom

Positioning the template

Warning Always wear safetygoggles and a dust mask

3 Using a 4 mm 23 or 964rdquo bit drillthree holes 22 mm (78rdquo) deepat the locations indicated To preventdrilling too deeply wrap maskingtape around the bit 22 mm (78rdquo)from the pointFiberglass hull Minimize surfacecracking by chamfering the gelcoatIf a chamfer bit or countersink bit is

not available start drilling with a6mm or 14rdquo bit to a depth of 1 mm(116rdquo)

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3748

31

4 If you know your transom angle the

bracket is designed for a standard13deg transom angle11deg-18deg angle No shim is requiredSkip to step 3 in ldquoAdjustingrdquoOther angles The shim is requiredSkip to step 2 of ldquoAdjustingrdquoIf you do not know the transom angletemporarily attach the bracket andsensor to the transom to determine ifthe plastic shim is needed

5 Using the two 10 x 1-14rdquo

self-tapping screws temporarilyscrew the bracket to the hull DONOT tighten the screws completelyat this time Follow the step 1-4 inldquoAttaching the Sensor to the Bracketrdquobefore proceeding with ldquoAdjustingrdquo

Installation templatefor starboard side of boat

Drill at locations labeled Bfor the following transom angles

16 deg through 22 deg

Drill at locations labeled Afor the following transom angles

2 deg through 15 deg

Align arrow with bottom of transom

AA A

BB B

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3848

32

Adjusting

1 Using a straight edge sight theunderside of the sensor relative tothe underside of the hull The sternof the sensor should be 1-3 mm

(116-18rdquo) below the bow of thesensor or parallel to the bottom ofthe hull

11 deg transom angleNO SHIM

12-18 deg transom angleNO SHIM

2 deg -10 deg transom

angle

19 deg -22 deg transom

angleshim withtaper up

shim withtaper down

parallelparallel parallel

slightangle

angletoo steep

anglereversed

YES NONO

YES YESYES

Sensor position and transom angle

Note Do not position the bow of thesensor lower than the stern becauseaeration will occur

2 To adjust the sensorrsquos angle relativeto the hull use the tapered plasticshim provided If the bracket hasbeen temporarily fastened to thetransom remove it Key the shim in

place on the back of the bracket2deg-10deg transom angle (steppedtransom and jet boats) Positionthe shim with the tapered end down19deg-22deg transom angle (smallaluminum and fiberglass boats) Position the shim with the taperedend up

3 If the bracket has been temporarilyfastened to the transom remove it

Apply a marine sealant to thethreads of the two 10 x 1-14rdquo self

tapping screws to prevent waterseeping into the transom Screw thebracket to the hull Do not tighten thescrews completely at this time

4 Repeat step 1 to ensure that theangle of the sensor is correctNote Do not position the sensorfarther into the water than necessaryto avoid increasing drag spray andwater noise and reducing boatspeed

5 Using the vertical adjustment spaceon the bracket slots slide the sensorup or down to provide a projection of3 mm (18rdquo) Tighten the screws

Cable cover

Cableclamp

50 mm (2)

Hull projection 3 mm (18)

Vertical adjustment and cable routing

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3948

33

Attaching the sensor to the bracket

1 If the retaining cover near the top ofthe bracket is closed open it bydepressing the latch and rotating thecover downward

Step 1 Step 2

Latch

Retainingcover

Pivotarm (2)

Slot (2)

Step 4

Step 3

Attaching the sensor to the bracket

2 Insert the sensorrsquos pivot arms intothe slots near the top of the bracket

3 Maintain pressure until the pivotarms click into place

4 Rotate the sensor downward until thebottom snaps into the bracket

5 Close the retaining cover to preventthe accidental release of the sensorwhen the boat is underway

Cable routing

Route the sensor cable over thetransom through a drain hole orthorough a new hole drilled in thetransom above the waterline

Never cut the cable or remote the

connector this will void the warranty Always wear safety goggles and a dustmask

1 If a hole must be drilled choose alocation well above the waterlineCheck for obstructions such as trimtabs pumps or wiring inside the hullMark the location with a pencil Drilla hole through the transom using a19 mm or 34rdquo bit (to accommodatethe connector)

2 Route the cable over or through thetransom

3 On the outside of the hull secure thecable against the transom using thecable clamps Position a cable clamp50 mm(2rdquo) above the bracket andmark the mounting hole with apencil

4 Position the second cable clamphalfway between the first clamp andthe cable hole Mark this mountinghole

5 If a hole has been drilled in thetransom open the appropriate slot inthe transom cable cover Position thecover over the cable where it entersthe hull Mark the two mounting

holes6 At each of the marked locations usea 3 mm or 18rdquo bit to drill a hole 10mm (38rdquo) deep The prevent drillingtoo deeply wrap masking tapearound the bit 10 mm (38rdquo) from thepoint

7 Apply marine sealant to the threadsof the 6 x 12rdquo self-tapping screw toprevent water from seeping into the

transom If you have drilled a holethrough the transom apply marinesealant to the space around thecable where it passes through thetransom

8 Position the two cable clamps andfasten them in place If used pushthe cable cover over the cable andscrew it in place

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4048

34

9 Route the cable to the instrumentbeing careful not to tear the cable

jacket when passing it though thebulkhead(s) and other parts of theboat To reduce electricalinterference separate the sensorcable from other electrical wiring andldquonoiserdquo sources Coil any excesscable and secure it in place withzip-ties to prevent damage

46 Optional WaterTemperatureSpeedSensor

Water temperaturespeed sensorST-02MSB and ST-02PSB which aredesigned for thru-hull mounting areoptionally available Install them asshown below

Mounting considerations

Choose a suitable mounting locationconsidering the followingbull Choose a place free from vibrationbull Choose a mid-boat flat position The

sensor does not have to be installedperfectly perpendicular The sensormust not be damaged in dry-dockingoperation

bull Choose a place apart from equipmentgenerating heat

bull Choose a place in the forwarddirection viewing from the drain holeto allow for circulation of coolingwater

1 Dry-dock the boat2 Make a hole of approx 51 mm

diameter in the mounting location3 Unfasten locknut and remove the

sensor section4 Apply high-grade sealant to the

flange of the sensor5 Pass the sensor casing through thehole

6 Face the notch on the sensor towardboatrsquos bow and tighten the flange

7 Set the sensor section to the sensorcasing and tighten the locknut

8 Launch the boat and check for waterleakage around the sensor

Locknut

Face notchtoward bow

Flange Nut

Coat withsilicone sealant Brim

φ 77

51

123

Water temperaturespeed sensor

ST-02MSB ST-02PSB

47 Wiring

Connect the LS-4100 powerdata cableassy MJ-A7SPF0005-020 (2 msupplied) to the POWER and thetransducer cable to the XDR connectorRefer to the interconnection diagram toconnect cables Leave slack in cables tofacilitate checking and maintenance

Note The fuse holder contains a springwhich fixes the fuse To preventdetachment of the spring which wouldcause loss of power tie the line asshown below

+ line (red)

Fuse holder

Cable tie How to fix fuse holder

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4148

35

Establishing the ground

The ground wire (125 sq or more localsupply) should be as short as possible

The signal line ground is isolated from

the chassis ground however the powerline is not insulated Therefore whenconnecting eternal equipment havingpositive ground do not ground thesignal line to the chassis If excessivenoise shows on the screen the groundmay be inadequate In this case attacha steel plate measuring 20 cm by 30 cmon the outside of the hull to provide aground point Connect the ground wire

there Use a ldquoclosedrdquo type lug ( ) tomake the connection at the display unitDo not use an ldquoopenrdquo type lug ( )

Optional equipment

POWER connector

The power supply port is commonlyused for connection of externalequipment such as a GPS receiver orwind indicator Use the powerdatacable MJ-A7SPF0005-020 (supplied) forconnection referring the figure shown inthe right column

Connector Color Remarks

1 TD-A WHT2 TD-B BLU

IEC-61162-1NMEA0183

3 RD-A YEL

4 RD-B GRN

IEC-61162-1

NMEA01835 + RED

6 - BLKPower input12 VDC

7 FG

Water tempspeed sensor

Connect the optional water tempspeedsensor to the XDR connector with theoptional converter connector (Type02S4147) as shown below

Tape connectors withvulcaninzing tapeand then vinyl tapeto waterproof themBind tape ends withcable ties to preventtape from unraveling

Connect to XDR portat rear of display unit

MJ-A10SPF

MJ-A10SRMDMJ-A6SRMD

Fromtransducer

Fromsensor

Connection of converterconnector 02S4147

48 IEC 61162-1 DataSentences

The tables below show the datasentences which can be input to andoutput from the LS-4100 Thetransmission speed for both input andoutput is 4800 bps Data is output attwo-second intervals

Input data sentences

Sentence Meaning

BWC Bearing and distance towaypoint

GGA Global positioning system(GPS) fix data

GLL Geographic position -latitudelongitude

HDG Heading deviation and variationHDT Heading true

MDA Atmospheric pressure

MTW Water temperature

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4248

36

Input data sentences (conrsquot)

Sentence MeaningMWV Wind speed and

angleRMA Recommended

minimum specificLORAN-C dataRMB Recommended

minimum navigationinformation

RMC Recommendedminimum specificGPSTRANSIT data

VHW Water speed andheading

VTG Course over groundand ground speedXTE Cross track error

Output data sentences

Sentence MeaningDBT (Ver 15) Depth below

transducerDPT (Ver 20 Ver30)

Depth

MTW Water temperatureRMB (Ver 20) Recommended

minimumnavigationinformation

VHW Water speed andheading

TLL Target positionoutput by [MARK]key

= Available with connection of optionalsensorsnavaid

49 Installation MenuThe installation menu mainly containsitems which are set at installation

1 Turn on the power while pressing the[MENUESC] key Continue pressing

the [MENUESC] key until theInstallation menu appears

SIMULATION On

TEST LCD PATTERN MEMORY CLEAR

NMEA PORT InOutNMEA MIX OffGPS WAAS Off

SET BOTTOM LEVEL

Installation Menu

= Setting cannot be changed whenNMEA PORT setting is InIn

Installation menu

SIMULATION The simulation modeprovides without connection of thetransducer simulated operation of theequipment using internally generatedechoes All controls are operative Themessage ldquoSIMrdquo appears at the top rightcorner on the screen when thesimulation mode is active

1 At the installation menu press toopen the simulation mode optionswindow

2 Press to choose ldquoOnrdquo to turn onthe simulation mode

3 Press the [POWERBRILL] keyabout three seconds to turn off thepower

4 Press the [POWERBRILL] key toturn on the power ldquoSIMrdquo appears atthe top right corner of the display

5 To turn off the simulation modeselect Off at step 2

NMEA po r t se tup(NMEA PO RT NMEA M IX)

The POWER port can function as aninput port or inputoutput port Changethe setting to ldquoInInrdquo when connectingGP-310B320B and a wind sensor

When connecting the GP-310B320Band a wind sensor first turn on ldquoGPS

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4348

37

WAASrdquo (in the Installation menu) andthen select ldquoInInrdquo as the NMEA portsetting

1 Turn on the power while pressingand holding down the [MENUESC]key Continue pressing the[MENUESC] key until theInstallation menu appears

2 Choose NMEA PORT and thenpress to display the NMEA portoptions window

3 Use or to choose InOut orInIn as appropriate

InOut Input and Output (default

setting)InIn Input only (Available withconnection of the GP-310B320Band a wind sensor)

4 Press choose NMEA MIX andthen press to display the NMEAMIX options window

5 Use or to choose Off or OnChoose On to output input data

Off Outputs the data sentences ofLS-4100 only

On Outputs the data sentences ofLS-4100 and sentences which areinput from other equipment

6 To restore normal operation turn offthe power and then turn it on again

GPS WAAS Chooses how to use theWAAS signal when connecting with a

WAAS receiver for example GP-320B

Note WAAS is currently in thedevelopmental phase During thedevelopmental phase the reliability andavailability of the WAAS signal cannotbe guaranteed Therefore any positiondata should be verified against othersources to confirm reliability

1 Display the Installation menu2 Choose GPS WAAS and then press

to open the GPS WAAS options

window

Off

WAAS options window3 Press or to choose ldquoWAAS-02rdquo

(test signal) When the systembecomes operational (in 2003) setto ldquo00rdquo (regular WAAS signal)

4 Turn off the power

BOTTOM LEVEL If the depthindication is unstable in automaticoperation or the bottom echo cannot bedisplayed in the darkest gray tone byadjusting the gain controls in manualoperation you may adjust the bottomecho level detection circuit for both 50kHz and 200 kHz to stabilize theindication Generally lower the bottomlevel for inner hull installation where thereceive level is too low If the bottomlevel is too low it may be difficult todiscriminate fish from the bottomresulting in unstable depth indication

And if the bottom level is too high thedepth indication may not appear

1 At the installation menu press tochoose SET BOTTOM LEVEL andthen press Several seconds laterthe following display appears

Bottom level +0 (200k -100 - +100 ) +0 ( 50k -100 - +100 )

Bottom level display

2 While observing the picture use or to set 200 kHz or to set50 kHz Set up for optimum picture

3 To restore normal operation turn offthe power and then it on again

Note The mode must be other thanldquoNAV DATArdquo to show the bottom leveldisplay

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4448

SP - 1 E2371S01C

SPECIFICATIONS OF ECHO SOUNDER LS-4100

1 GENERAL11 TX Frequency 50 kHz or 200 kHz 50200 kHz dual transmitting selectable12 Transmit Method Single or dual transmitting

13 Output Power 300 Wrms14 TX Rate Max 500 pulsemin15 Pulse-length 01 to 08 ms

2 DISPLAY UNIT21 Display system 5-inch monochrome LCD 76 mm (W) x 100 mm (H) 240 x 320 dots22 Display Mode Single frequency (highlow freq) Dual-frequency Zoom Nav data-12

Marker zoom Bottom zoom Bottom-lock23 Display Range

Range SettingRange

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

Display

rangeMeter 5 10 20 40 80 150 200 300 2-500

Feet 15 30 60 120 200 400 600 1000 7-1500

Fathoms 3 5 10 20 40 80 100 150 1-250

PassiBraza 3 5 10 30 50 100 150 200 1-300

24 Range Shift 0-500 m 0-1500 ft 0-250 fa 0-300 pb25 Expansion Range Bottom-lock expansion 3 to 10 m

Sectional expansion 2 to 50 m26 Display Advance Speed 8 steps (LinesTX Freeze 1161814121121 41)

3 INTERFACE31 Input data sentences IEC61162-1NMEA0183 Ver 152030

GGA RMA RMB RMC BWC GLL HDT HDG VTG VHW MTWMWV MDA XTE

32 Output data sentences IEC61162-1NMEA0183 Ver 152030 interval 2 sMTW VHW DBT DPT RMB TLL by key operating External data required

4 POWER SUPPLY41 Display Unit 12 VDC 05 A

5 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITION51 Ambient Temperature Display unit -15degC to +55degC52 Relative Humidity 93 or less at 40degC53 Waterproof IPX5

6 COATING COLOR61 Display Unit N30

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4548

M a r

4

0 3

D-1

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4648

Mar 4 03

Mar 4 03

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4748

M a r

3

0 3

S-1

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4848

FURUNO Authorized DistributorDealer FURUNO Authorized DistributorDealer

9-52 Ashihara-cho9-52 Ashihara-choNishinomiya 662-8580 JAPANNishinomiya 662-8580 JAPAN

Telephone Telephone 0798-65-21110798-65-2111FaxFax 0798-65-42000798-65-4200

FIRST EDITION FIRST EDITION MARMAR 20032003Printed in JapanPrinted in Japan All rights reserved All rights reserved

B1B1 SEPSEP 09 200509 2005

Pub NoPub No OME-23710OME-23710 00014698000000146980000001469800000014698000(( DAMIDAMI )) LS-4100LS-4100

0 0 0 1 4 6 9 8 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 4 6 9 8 0 0 0

Page 32: OME23710B_1_LS4100

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3248

26

BOWHole for stuffing tube

Upper Half

Lower Half

Saw along slopeof hull Construction of fairing block

3 Drill a hole just large enough to passthe threaded stuffing tube of thetransducer through the hull makingsure it is drilled vertically

4 Apply a sufficient amount of highquality caulking compound to the topsurface of the transducer around thethreads of the stuffing tube andinside the mounting hole (and fairingblocks if used) to ensure watertightmounting

5 Mount the transducer and fairingblocks and tighten the locking nutsBe sure that the transducer is

properly oriented and its workingface is parallel to the waterline

Note Do not over-stress the stuffingtube and locking nuts through excessivetightening since the wood block willswell when the boat is placed in thewater It is suggested that the nut betightened lightly at installation andretightened several days after the boat

has been launched

Transducer preparation

Before putting the boat in water wipethe face of the transducer thoroughlywith a detergent liquid soap This willlessen the time necessary for thetransducer to have good contact withthe water Otherwise the time requiredfor complete ldquosaturationrdquo ill belengthened and performance will bereduced

DO NOT paint the transducerPerformance will be affected

43 Transom MountTransducer

The transom mount transducer is verycommonly employed usually onrelatively small IO or outboard boatsDo not use this method on an inboardmotor boat because turbulence iscreated by the propeller ahead of thetransducer

520-5PWD

There are two methods of installationflush with hull (for flat hulls) andprojecting from hull (for deep V-hulls)

Flat Hull

D

Dgt50 cm

Deep-VHull

520-5PWD mounting locations

Installing the 520-5PWD on a flat hull

A suitable mounting location is at least50 cm away from the engine and wherethe water flow is smooth

1 Drill four pilot holes in the mountinglocation

2 Attach the transducer to the bracketwith 5 x 20 tapping screws(supplied)

3 Adjust the transducer position so thetransducer faces right to the bottom

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3348

27

Note If necessary to improve waterflow and minimize air bubblesstaying on the transducer faceincline the transducer about 5deg at therear This may require a certainamount of experimentation for finetuning at high cruising speeds

4 Fill the gap between the wedge frontof the transducer and transom withepoxy material to eliminate any airspaces

No1 M5 x 14

5 x 20

5 x 20

2 to 5

Tape

Hull

Transom mount transducer

mounting flush with hull

Installing the transom mounttransducer on a deep-V hull

This method is employed on deep-Vhulls and provides good performancebecause the effects of air bubbles areminimal Install the transducer parallelwith water surface not flush with hull Ifthe boat is placed on a trailer care mustbe taken not to damage the transducerwhen the boat is hauled out of the waterand put on the trailer

5 x 20

No 2M5 x 14

5 x 20

Transom mount transducermounted projecting from hull

525-5PWD

Choose the installation methoddepending on the rise angle of the hull

Transom

Transom

Stripe over 10

Parallel with hull

Mount at the stripe

less than 10

525-5PWD mounting location

Installing the 525-5PWD

Referring to ldquoInstalling the 520-5PWDrdquoin the left column for mounting of thebracket and the figure shown on the topof next page install the 525-5PWD tothe transom

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3448

28

2 to 5

Transducer

Bracket

Hull

Epoxy material

525-5PWD mounting

44 Inside-hullTransducer

The thru-hull mount transducer(520-5PSD 520-5MSD) may also beinstalled inside the hull following theprocedure below

Necessary tools

You will need the following toolsbull Sandpaper (100)bull Silicone sealantbull Silicone grease

Remarks on installationbull Turn off the engine and anchor the

boat while installing the equipmentbull Install the transducer in the engine

room

Choosing the mounting locationbull The mounting location should be

where the hull is of single-hullthickness and is void of air or flotationmaterials other than solid fiberglassbetween the transducer face and thewater

bull Do not place the transducer over hullstruts or ribs which run under the hull

bull Avoid a location where the risingangle of the hull exceeds 15deg tominimize the effect of the boatrsquosrolling

bull You will finalize the mounting location

through some trial and error Theprocedure for this is shown later

50 cm

50 cm15 cm15 cm

13

12

Transducer mountinglocation

Centerline

Inside-hull transducer mounting location

Attaching the transducer1 Clean the transducer face to remove

any foreign material Lightly roughenthe transducer face with 100sandpaper Also roughen the insideof the hull where the transducer is tobe mounted

2 Clean the transducer face again3 Warm the silicone sealant to 40degC

before usage to soften it Coat thetransducer face and mountinglocation with silicone sealant

Transducer

SiliconeSealant

Coating transducer facewith silicone sealant

4 Press the transducer firmly down onthe hull and gently twist it back andforth to remove any air which may betrapped in the silicone sealant

Checking the installation

1 Connect the battery to the display

unit2 Turn on the display unit

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3548

29

3 Press the [MODE] key to chooseSINGLE FREQ

4 Choose 50 kHz or 200 kHz and thenpress the [MENUESC] key to closethe mode menu

5 Press the [MENU] to show the mainmenu and then press to select

Auto mode6 Press to choose Off7 Press the [MENUESC] key8 Press the [GAIN] key to set the gain

to ldquo5rdquo and then press the[MENUESC] key

9 Press the [RANGE] key to set therange to 10 meters (feet) and thenpress the [MENUESC] key

10 If the bottom is displayed in darkgray and the depth indicationappears the mounting location issuitable Go to ldquoFinal preparationrdquo

11 If the bottom is not displayed in darkgray tone the mounting location maybe unsuitable Do the followinga) Press the [POWERBRILL] key to

turn off the powerb) Gently dismount the transducer

with a piece of woodc) Reattach the transducer

elsewhere as shown in ldquoAttachingthe transducerrdquo

d) Check the installation again

Final preparation

Support the transducer with a piece ofwood to keep it in place while it is drying

Let the transducer dry 24-72 hours

45 Optional Triducer525ST-MSD

The optional triducer 525ST-MSD isdesigned for thru-hull mounting Forhow to install this transducer seeparagraph 42

φ79 mm

33 mm200-12 UNthreads

φ51 mm

27 mm

7 mm

140 mm Triducer 525ST-MSD

525ST-PWD

The Transom Mount Transducer orTRIDUCER reg Multisensor with IntegralRelease Bracket 525ST-PWD ismanufactured by AIRMAR Co Theseinstructions are also included with the

sensor

Pre-test for speed and temperature

Connect the sensor to the instrumentand spin the paddlewheel Check for aspeed reading and the approximate airtemperature If there is no readingreturn the sensor to your place ofpurchase

Tools and materials needed

ScissorsMasking tapeSafety gogglesDust maskElectric drillDrill bit for

Bracket holes 4mm 23 or 964rdquoFiberglass hull chamfer bit(preferred)6mm or 14rdquo

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3648

30

Transom hole 19mm or 34rdquo(optional)

Cable clamp holes 3mm or 18rdquoScrewdriversStraight edgeMarine sealantPencilZip-tiesWater-based antifouling paint(mandatory in salt water )

Mounting location

To ensure the best performance thesensor must be submerged inaeration-free and turbulence-free water

Mount the sensor close to the centerlineof the boat On slower heavierdisplacement hulls positioning it fartherfrom the centerline is acceptable

Allow adequate space above thebracket for it to release and rotate thesensor upward

Height

Height withoutspeed sensor191mm (7-12)Height withspeed sensor213mm (8-12)

Height required at mounting location

Note 1 Do not mount the sensor in anarea of turbulence or bubbles nearwater intake or discharge openingsbehind strakes struts fittings or hull

irregularities behind eroding paint (anindication of turbulence)Note 2 Avoid mounting the sensorwhere the boat may be supportedduring trailering launching hauling andstorageNote 3 For single drive boat mounton the starboard side at least 75 mm(3rdquo) beyond the swing radius of thepropeller

75 mm(3)

minimum beyondswing radius

Mounting location on single drive boat

Note 4 For twin drive boat mountbetween the drives

Installation of bracket

1 Cut out the installation template

shown on the next page2 At the selected location position thetemplate so the arrow at the bottomis aligned with the bottom edge ofthe transom Being sure the templateis parallel to the waterline tape it inplace

Align template vertically

Deadrise angle

Slope of hullparallel towaterline

Align template arrow withbottom edge of transom

Positioning the template

Warning Always wear safetygoggles and a dust mask

3 Using a 4 mm 23 or 964rdquo bit drillthree holes 22 mm (78rdquo) deepat the locations indicated To preventdrilling too deeply wrap maskingtape around the bit 22 mm (78rdquo)from the pointFiberglass hull Minimize surfacecracking by chamfering the gelcoatIf a chamfer bit or countersink bit is

not available start drilling with a6mm or 14rdquo bit to a depth of 1 mm(116rdquo)

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3748

31

4 If you know your transom angle the

bracket is designed for a standard13deg transom angle11deg-18deg angle No shim is requiredSkip to step 3 in ldquoAdjustingrdquoOther angles The shim is requiredSkip to step 2 of ldquoAdjustingrdquoIf you do not know the transom angletemporarily attach the bracket andsensor to the transom to determine ifthe plastic shim is needed

5 Using the two 10 x 1-14rdquo

self-tapping screws temporarilyscrew the bracket to the hull DONOT tighten the screws completelyat this time Follow the step 1-4 inldquoAttaching the Sensor to the Bracketrdquobefore proceeding with ldquoAdjustingrdquo

Installation templatefor starboard side of boat

Drill at locations labeled Bfor the following transom angles

16 deg through 22 deg

Drill at locations labeled Afor the following transom angles

2 deg through 15 deg

Align arrow with bottom of transom

AA A

BB B

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3848

32

Adjusting

1 Using a straight edge sight theunderside of the sensor relative tothe underside of the hull The sternof the sensor should be 1-3 mm

(116-18rdquo) below the bow of thesensor or parallel to the bottom ofthe hull

11 deg transom angleNO SHIM

12-18 deg transom angleNO SHIM

2 deg -10 deg transom

angle

19 deg -22 deg transom

angleshim withtaper up

shim withtaper down

parallelparallel parallel

slightangle

angletoo steep

anglereversed

YES NONO

YES YESYES

Sensor position and transom angle

Note Do not position the bow of thesensor lower than the stern becauseaeration will occur

2 To adjust the sensorrsquos angle relativeto the hull use the tapered plasticshim provided If the bracket hasbeen temporarily fastened to thetransom remove it Key the shim in

place on the back of the bracket2deg-10deg transom angle (steppedtransom and jet boats) Positionthe shim with the tapered end down19deg-22deg transom angle (smallaluminum and fiberglass boats) Position the shim with the taperedend up

3 If the bracket has been temporarilyfastened to the transom remove it

Apply a marine sealant to thethreads of the two 10 x 1-14rdquo self

tapping screws to prevent waterseeping into the transom Screw thebracket to the hull Do not tighten thescrews completely at this time

4 Repeat step 1 to ensure that theangle of the sensor is correctNote Do not position the sensorfarther into the water than necessaryto avoid increasing drag spray andwater noise and reducing boatspeed

5 Using the vertical adjustment spaceon the bracket slots slide the sensorup or down to provide a projection of3 mm (18rdquo) Tighten the screws

Cable cover

Cableclamp

50 mm (2)

Hull projection 3 mm (18)

Vertical adjustment and cable routing

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3948

33

Attaching the sensor to the bracket

1 If the retaining cover near the top ofthe bracket is closed open it bydepressing the latch and rotating thecover downward

Step 1 Step 2

Latch

Retainingcover

Pivotarm (2)

Slot (2)

Step 4

Step 3

Attaching the sensor to the bracket

2 Insert the sensorrsquos pivot arms intothe slots near the top of the bracket

3 Maintain pressure until the pivotarms click into place

4 Rotate the sensor downward until thebottom snaps into the bracket

5 Close the retaining cover to preventthe accidental release of the sensorwhen the boat is underway

Cable routing

Route the sensor cable over thetransom through a drain hole orthorough a new hole drilled in thetransom above the waterline

Never cut the cable or remote the

connector this will void the warranty Always wear safety goggles and a dustmask

1 If a hole must be drilled choose alocation well above the waterlineCheck for obstructions such as trimtabs pumps or wiring inside the hullMark the location with a pencil Drilla hole through the transom using a19 mm or 34rdquo bit (to accommodatethe connector)

2 Route the cable over or through thetransom

3 On the outside of the hull secure thecable against the transom using thecable clamps Position a cable clamp50 mm(2rdquo) above the bracket andmark the mounting hole with apencil

4 Position the second cable clamphalfway between the first clamp andthe cable hole Mark this mountinghole

5 If a hole has been drilled in thetransom open the appropriate slot inthe transom cable cover Position thecover over the cable where it entersthe hull Mark the two mounting

holes6 At each of the marked locations usea 3 mm or 18rdquo bit to drill a hole 10mm (38rdquo) deep The prevent drillingtoo deeply wrap masking tapearound the bit 10 mm (38rdquo) from thepoint

7 Apply marine sealant to the threadsof the 6 x 12rdquo self-tapping screw toprevent water from seeping into the

transom If you have drilled a holethrough the transom apply marinesealant to the space around thecable where it passes through thetransom

8 Position the two cable clamps andfasten them in place If used pushthe cable cover over the cable andscrew it in place

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4048

34

9 Route the cable to the instrumentbeing careful not to tear the cable

jacket when passing it though thebulkhead(s) and other parts of theboat To reduce electricalinterference separate the sensorcable from other electrical wiring andldquonoiserdquo sources Coil any excesscable and secure it in place withzip-ties to prevent damage

46 Optional WaterTemperatureSpeedSensor

Water temperaturespeed sensorST-02MSB and ST-02PSB which aredesigned for thru-hull mounting areoptionally available Install them asshown below

Mounting considerations

Choose a suitable mounting locationconsidering the followingbull Choose a place free from vibrationbull Choose a mid-boat flat position The

sensor does not have to be installedperfectly perpendicular The sensormust not be damaged in dry-dockingoperation

bull Choose a place apart from equipmentgenerating heat

bull Choose a place in the forwarddirection viewing from the drain holeto allow for circulation of coolingwater

1 Dry-dock the boat2 Make a hole of approx 51 mm

diameter in the mounting location3 Unfasten locknut and remove the

sensor section4 Apply high-grade sealant to the

flange of the sensor5 Pass the sensor casing through thehole

6 Face the notch on the sensor towardboatrsquos bow and tighten the flange

7 Set the sensor section to the sensorcasing and tighten the locknut

8 Launch the boat and check for waterleakage around the sensor

Locknut

Face notchtoward bow

Flange Nut

Coat withsilicone sealant Brim

φ 77

51

123

Water temperaturespeed sensor

ST-02MSB ST-02PSB

47 Wiring

Connect the LS-4100 powerdata cableassy MJ-A7SPF0005-020 (2 msupplied) to the POWER and thetransducer cable to the XDR connectorRefer to the interconnection diagram toconnect cables Leave slack in cables tofacilitate checking and maintenance

Note The fuse holder contains a springwhich fixes the fuse To preventdetachment of the spring which wouldcause loss of power tie the line asshown below

+ line (red)

Fuse holder

Cable tie How to fix fuse holder

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4148

35

Establishing the ground

The ground wire (125 sq or more localsupply) should be as short as possible

The signal line ground is isolated from

the chassis ground however the powerline is not insulated Therefore whenconnecting eternal equipment havingpositive ground do not ground thesignal line to the chassis If excessivenoise shows on the screen the groundmay be inadequate In this case attacha steel plate measuring 20 cm by 30 cmon the outside of the hull to provide aground point Connect the ground wire

there Use a ldquoclosedrdquo type lug ( ) tomake the connection at the display unitDo not use an ldquoopenrdquo type lug ( )

Optional equipment

POWER connector

The power supply port is commonlyused for connection of externalequipment such as a GPS receiver orwind indicator Use the powerdatacable MJ-A7SPF0005-020 (supplied) forconnection referring the figure shown inthe right column

Connector Color Remarks

1 TD-A WHT2 TD-B BLU

IEC-61162-1NMEA0183

3 RD-A YEL

4 RD-B GRN

IEC-61162-1

NMEA01835 + RED

6 - BLKPower input12 VDC

7 FG

Water tempspeed sensor

Connect the optional water tempspeedsensor to the XDR connector with theoptional converter connector (Type02S4147) as shown below

Tape connectors withvulcaninzing tapeand then vinyl tapeto waterproof themBind tape ends withcable ties to preventtape from unraveling

Connect to XDR portat rear of display unit

MJ-A10SPF

MJ-A10SRMDMJ-A6SRMD

Fromtransducer

Fromsensor

Connection of converterconnector 02S4147

48 IEC 61162-1 DataSentences

The tables below show the datasentences which can be input to andoutput from the LS-4100 Thetransmission speed for both input andoutput is 4800 bps Data is output attwo-second intervals

Input data sentences

Sentence Meaning

BWC Bearing and distance towaypoint

GGA Global positioning system(GPS) fix data

GLL Geographic position -latitudelongitude

HDG Heading deviation and variationHDT Heading true

MDA Atmospheric pressure

MTW Water temperature

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4248

36

Input data sentences (conrsquot)

Sentence MeaningMWV Wind speed and

angleRMA Recommended

minimum specificLORAN-C dataRMB Recommended

minimum navigationinformation

RMC Recommendedminimum specificGPSTRANSIT data

VHW Water speed andheading

VTG Course over groundand ground speedXTE Cross track error

Output data sentences

Sentence MeaningDBT (Ver 15) Depth below

transducerDPT (Ver 20 Ver30)

Depth

MTW Water temperatureRMB (Ver 20) Recommended

minimumnavigationinformation

VHW Water speed andheading

TLL Target positionoutput by [MARK]key

= Available with connection of optionalsensorsnavaid

49 Installation MenuThe installation menu mainly containsitems which are set at installation

1 Turn on the power while pressing the[MENUESC] key Continue pressing

the [MENUESC] key until theInstallation menu appears

SIMULATION On

TEST LCD PATTERN MEMORY CLEAR

NMEA PORT InOutNMEA MIX OffGPS WAAS Off

SET BOTTOM LEVEL

Installation Menu

= Setting cannot be changed whenNMEA PORT setting is InIn

Installation menu

SIMULATION The simulation modeprovides without connection of thetransducer simulated operation of theequipment using internally generatedechoes All controls are operative Themessage ldquoSIMrdquo appears at the top rightcorner on the screen when thesimulation mode is active

1 At the installation menu press toopen the simulation mode optionswindow

2 Press to choose ldquoOnrdquo to turn onthe simulation mode

3 Press the [POWERBRILL] keyabout three seconds to turn off thepower

4 Press the [POWERBRILL] key toturn on the power ldquoSIMrdquo appears atthe top right corner of the display

5 To turn off the simulation modeselect Off at step 2

NMEA po r t se tup(NMEA PO RT NMEA M IX)

The POWER port can function as aninput port or inputoutput port Changethe setting to ldquoInInrdquo when connectingGP-310B320B and a wind sensor

When connecting the GP-310B320Band a wind sensor first turn on ldquoGPS

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4348

37

WAASrdquo (in the Installation menu) andthen select ldquoInInrdquo as the NMEA portsetting

1 Turn on the power while pressingand holding down the [MENUESC]key Continue pressing the[MENUESC] key until theInstallation menu appears

2 Choose NMEA PORT and thenpress to display the NMEA portoptions window

3 Use or to choose InOut orInIn as appropriate

InOut Input and Output (default

setting)InIn Input only (Available withconnection of the GP-310B320Band a wind sensor)

4 Press choose NMEA MIX andthen press to display the NMEAMIX options window

5 Use or to choose Off or OnChoose On to output input data

Off Outputs the data sentences ofLS-4100 only

On Outputs the data sentences ofLS-4100 and sentences which areinput from other equipment

6 To restore normal operation turn offthe power and then turn it on again

GPS WAAS Chooses how to use theWAAS signal when connecting with a

WAAS receiver for example GP-320B

Note WAAS is currently in thedevelopmental phase During thedevelopmental phase the reliability andavailability of the WAAS signal cannotbe guaranteed Therefore any positiondata should be verified against othersources to confirm reliability

1 Display the Installation menu2 Choose GPS WAAS and then press

to open the GPS WAAS options

window

Off

WAAS options window3 Press or to choose ldquoWAAS-02rdquo

(test signal) When the systembecomes operational (in 2003) setto ldquo00rdquo (regular WAAS signal)

4 Turn off the power

BOTTOM LEVEL If the depthindication is unstable in automaticoperation or the bottom echo cannot bedisplayed in the darkest gray tone byadjusting the gain controls in manualoperation you may adjust the bottomecho level detection circuit for both 50kHz and 200 kHz to stabilize theindication Generally lower the bottomlevel for inner hull installation where thereceive level is too low If the bottomlevel is too low it may be difficult todiscriminate fish from the bottomresulting in unstable depth indication

And if the bottom level is too high thedepth indication may not appear

1 At the installation menu press tochoose SET BOTTOM LEVEL andthen press Several seconds laterthe following display appears

Bottom level +0 (200k -100 - +100 ) +0 ( 50k -100 - +100 )

Bottom level display

2 While observing the picture use or to set 200 kHz or to set50 kHz Set up for optimum picture

3 To restore normal operation turn offthe power and then it on again

Note The mode must be other thanldquoNAV DATArdquo to show the bottom leveldisplay

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4448

SP - 1 E2371S01C

SPECIFICATIONS OF ECHO SOUNDER LS-4100

1 GENERAL11 TX Frequency 50 kHz or 200 kHz 50200 kHz dual transmitting selectable12 Transmit Method Single or dual transmitting

13 Output Power 300 Wrms14 TX Rate Max 500 pulsemin15 Pulse-length 01 to 08 ms

2 DISPLAY UNIT21 Display system 5-inch monochrome LCD 76 mm (W) x 100 mm (H) 240 x 320 dots22 Display Mode Single frequency (highlow freq) Dual-frequency Zoom Nav data-12

Marker zoom Bottom zoom Bottom-lock23 Display Range

Range SettingRange

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

Display

rangeMeter 5 10 20 40 80 150 200 300 2-500

Feet 15 30 60 120 200 400 600 1000 7-1500

Fathoms 3 5 10 20 40 80 100 150 1-250

PassiBraza 3 5 10 30 50 100 150 200 1-300

24 Range Shift 0-500 m 0-1500 ft 0-250 fa 0-300 pb25 Expansion Range Bottom-lock expansion 3 to 10 m

Sectional expansion 2 to 50 m26 Display Advance Speed 8 steps (LinesTX Freeze 1161814121121 41)

3 INTERFACE31 Input data sentences IEC61162-1NMEA0183 Ver 152030

GGA RMA RMB RMC BWC GLL HDT HDG VTG VHW MTWMWV MDA XTE

32 Output data sentences IEC61162-1NMEA0183 Ver 152030 interval 2 sMTW VHW DBT DPT RMB TLL by key operating External data required

4 POWER SUPPLY41 Display Unit 12 VDC 05 A

5 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITION51 Ambient Temperature Display unit -15degC to +55degC52 Relative Humidity 93 or less at 40degC53 Waterproof IPX5

6 COATING COLOR61 Display Unit N30

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4548

M a r

4

0 3

D-1

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4648

Mar 4 03

Mar 4 03

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4748

M a r

3

0 3

S-1

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4848

FURUNO Authorized DistributorDealer FURUNO Authorized DistributorDealer

9-52 Ashihara-cho9-52 Ashihara-choNishinomiya 662-8580 JAPANNishinomiya 662-8580 JAPAN

Telephone Telephone 0798-65-21110798-65-2111FaxFax 0798-65-42000798-65-4200

FIRST EDITION FIRST EDITION MARMAR 20032003Printed in JapanPrinted in Japan All rights reserved All rights reserved

B1B1 SEPSEP 09 200509 2005

Pub NoPub No OME-23710OME-23710 00014698000000146980000001469800000014698000(( DAMIDAMI )) LS-4100LS-4100

0 0 0 1 4 6 9 8 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 4 6 9 8 0 0 0

Page 33: OME23710B_1_LS4100

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3348

27

Note If necessary to improve waterflow and minimize air bubblesstaying on the transducer faceincline the transducer about 5deg at therear This may require a certainamount of experimentation for finetuning at high cruising speeds

4 Fill the gap between the wedge frontof the transducer and transom withepoxy material to eliminate any airspaces

No1 M5 x 14

5 x 20

5 x 20

2 to 5

Tape

Hull

Transom mount transducer

mounting flush with hull

Installing the transom mounttransducer on a deep-V hull

This method is employed on deep-Vhulls and provides good performancebecause the effects of air bubbles areminimal Install the transducer parallelwith water surface not flush with hull Ifthe boat is placed on a trailer care mustbe taken not to damage the transducerwhen the boat is hauled out of the waterand put on the trailer

5 x 20

No 2M5 x 14

5 x 20

Transom mount transducermounted projecting from hull

525-5PWD

Choose the installation methoddepending on the rise angle of the hull

Transom

Transom

Stripe over 10

Parallel with hull

Mount at the stripe

less than 10

525-5PWD mounting location

Installing the 525-5PWD

Referring to ldquoInstalling the 520-5PWDrdquoin the left column for mounting of thebracket and the figure shown on the topof next page install the 525-5PWD tothe transom

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3448

28

2 to 5

Transducer

Bracket

Hull

Epoxy material

525-5PWD mounting

44 Inside-hullTransducer

The thru-hull mount transducer(520-5PSD 520-5MSD) may also beinstalled inside the hull following theprocedure below

Necessary tools

You will need the following toolsbull Sandpaper (100)bull Silicone sealantbull Silicone grease

Remarks on installationbull Turn off the engine and anchor the

boat while installing the equipmentbull Install the transducer in the engine

room

Choosing the mounting locationbull The mounting location should be

where the hull is of single-hullthickness and is void of air or flotationmaterials other than solid fiberglassbetween the transducer face and thewater

bull Do not place the transducer over hullstruts or ribs which run under the hull

bull Avoid a location where the risingangle of the hull exceeds 15deg tominimize the effect of the boatrsquosrolling

bull You will finalize the mounting location

through some trial and error Theprocedure for this is shown later

50 cm

50 cm15 cm15 cm

13

12

Transducer mountinglocation

Centerline

Inside-hull transducer mounting location

Attaching the transducer1 Clean the transducer face to remove

any foreign material Lightly roughenthe transducer face with 100sandpaper Also roughen the insideof the hull where the transducer is tobe mounted

2 Clean the transducer face again3 Warm the silicone sealant to 40degC

before usage to soften it Coat thetransducer face and mountinglocation with silicone sealant

Transducer

SiliconeSealant

Coating transducer facewith silicone sealant

4 Press the transducer firmly down onthe hull and gently twist it back andforth to remove any air which may betrapped in the silicone sealant

Checking the installation

1 Connect the battery to the display

unit2 Turn on the display unit

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3548

29

3 Press the [MODE] key to chooseSINGLE FREQ

4 Choose 50 kHz or 200 kHz and thenpress the [MENUESC] key to closethe mode menu

5 Press the [MENU] to show the mainmenu and then press to select

Auto mode6 Press to choose Off7 Press the [MENUESC] key8 Press the [GAIN] key to set the gain

to ldquo5rdquo and then press the[MENUESC] key

9 Press the [RANGE] key to set therange to 10 meters (feet) and thenpress the [MENUESC] key

10 If the bottom is displayed in darkgray and the depth indicationappears the mounting location issuitable Go to ldquoFinal preparationrdquo

11 If the bottom is not displayed in darkgray tone the mounting location maybe unsuitable Do the followinga) Press the [POWERBRILL] key to

turn off the powerb) Gently dismount the transducer

with a piece of woodc) Reattach the transducer

elsewhere as shown in ldquoAttachingthe transducerrdquo

d) Check the installation again

Final preparation

Support the transducer with a piece ofwood to keep it in place while it is drying

Let the transducer dry 24-72 hours

45 Optional Triducer525ST-MSD

The optional triducer 525ST-MSD isdesigned for thru-hull mounting Forhow to install this transducer seeparagraph 42

φ79 mm

33 mm200-12 UNthreads

φ51 mm

27 mm

7 mm

140 mm Triducer 525ST-MSD

525ST-PWD

The Transom Mount Transducer orTRIDUCER reg Multisensor with IntegralRelease Bracket 525ST-PWD ismanufactured by AIRMAR Co Theseinstructions are also included with the

sensor

Pre-test for speed and temperature

Connect the sensor to the instrumentand spin the paddlewheel Check for aspeed reading and the approximate airtemperature If there is no readingreturn the sensor to your place ofpurchase

Tools and materials needed

ScissorsMasking tapeSafety gogglesDust maskElectric drillDrill bit for

Bracket holes 4mm 23 or 964rdquoFiberglass hull chamfer bit(preferred)6mm or 14rdquo

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3648

30

Transom hole 19mm or 34rdquo(optional)

Cable clamp holes 3mm or 18rdquoScrewdriversStraight edgeMarine sealantPencilZip-tiesWater-based antifouling paint(mandatory in salt water )

Mounting location

To ensure the best performance thesensor must be submerged inaeration-free and turbulence-free water

Mount the sensor close to the centerlineof the boat On slower heavierdisplacement hulls positioning it fartherfrom the centerline is acceptable

Allow adequate space above thebracket for it to release and rotate thesensor upward

Height

Height withoutspeed sensor191mm (7-12)Height withspeed sensor213mm (8-12)

Height required at mounting location

Note 1 Do not mount the sensor in anarea of turbulence or bubbles nearwater intake or discharge openingsbehind strakes struts fittings or hull

irregularities behind eroding paint (anindication of turbulence)Note 2 Avoid mounting the sensorwhere the boat may be supportedduring trailering launching hauling andstorageNote 3 For single drive boat mounton the starboard side at least 75 mm(3rdquo) beyond the swing radius of thepropeller

75 mm(3)

minimum beyondswing radius

Mounting location on single drive boat

Note 4 For twin drive boat mountbetween the drives

Installation of bracket

1 Cut out the installation template

shown on the next page2 At the selected location position thetemplate so the arrow at the bottomis aligned with the bottom edge ofthe transom Being sure the templateis parallel to the waterline tape it inplace

Align template vertically

Deadrise angle

Slope of hullparallel towaterline

Align template arrow withbottom edge of transom

Positioning the template

Warning Always wear safetygoggles and a dust mask

3 Using a 4 mm 23 or 964rdquo bit drillthree holes 22 mm (78rdquo) deepat the locations indicated To preventdrilling too deeply wrap maskingtape around the bit 22 mm (78rdquo)from the pointFiberglass hull Minimize surfacecracking by chamfering the gelcoatIf a chamfer bit or countersink bit is

not available start drilling with a6mm or 14rdquo bit to a depth of 1 mm(116rdquo)

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3748

31

4 If you know your transom angle the

bracket is designed for a standard13deg transom angle11deg-18deg angle No shim is requiredSkip to step 3 in ldquoAdjustingrdquoOther angles The shim is requiredSkip to step 2 of ldquoAdjustingrdquoIf you do not know the transom angletemporarily attach the bracket andsensor to the transom to determine ifthe plastic shim is needed

5 Using the two 10 x 1-14rdquo

self-tapping screws temporarilyscrew the bracket to the hull DONOT tighten the screws completelyat this time Follow the step 1-4 inldquoAttaching the Sensor to the Bracketrdquobefore proceeding with ldquoAdjustingrdquo

Installation templatefor starboard side of boat

Drill at locations labeled Bfor the following transom angles

16 deg through 22 deg

Drill at locations labeled Afor the following transom angles

2 deg through 15 deg

Align arrow with bottom of transom

AA A

BB B

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3848

32

Adjusting

1 Using a straight edge sight theunderside of the sensor relative tothe underside of the hull The sternof the sensor should be 1-3 mm

(116-18rdquo) below the bow of thesensor or parallel to the bottom ofthe hull

11 deg transom angleNO SHIM

12-18 deg transom angleNO SHIM

2 deg -10 deg transom

angle

19 deg -22 deg transom

angleshim withtaper up

shim withtaper down

parallelparallel parallel

slightangle

angletoo steep

anglereversed

YES NONO

YES YESYES

Sensor position and transom angle

Note Do not position the bow of thesensor lower than the stern becauseaeration will occur

2 To adjust the sensorrsquos angle relativeto the hull use the tapered plasticshim provided If the bracket hasbeen temporarily fastened to thetransom remove it Key the shim in

place on the back of the bracket2deg-10deg transom angle (steppedtransom and jet boats) Positionthe shim with the tapered end down19deg-22deg transom angle (smallaluminum and fiberglass boats) Position the shim with the taperedend up

3 If the bracket has been temporarilyfastened to the transom remove it

Apply a marine sealant to thethreads of the two 10 x 1-14rdquo self

tapping screws to prevent waterseeping into the transom Screw thebracket to the hull Do not tighten thescrews completely at this time

4 Repeat step 1 to ensure that theangle of the sensor is correctNote Do not position the sensorfarther into the water than necessaryto avoid increasing drag spray andwater noise and reducing boatspeed

5 Using the vertical adjustment spaceon the bracket slots slide the sensorup or down to provide a projection of3 mm (18rdquo) Tighten the screws

Cable cover

Cableclamp

50 mm (2)

Hull projection 3 mm (18)

Vertical adjustment and cable routing

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3948

33

Attaching the sensor to the bracket

1 If the retaining cover near the top ofthe bracket is closed open it bydepressing the latch and rotating thecover downward

Step 1 Step 2

Latch

Retainingcover

Pivotarm (2)

Slot (2)

Step 4

Step 3

Attaching the sensor to the bracket

2 Insert the sensorrsquos pivot arms intothe slots near the top of the bracket

3 Maintain pressure until the pivotarms click into place

4 Rotate the sensor downward until thebottom snaps into the bracket

5 Close the retaining cover to preventthe accidental release of the sensorwhen the boat is underway

Cable routing

Route the sensor cable over thetransom through a drain hole orthorough a new hole drilled in thetransom above the waterline

Never cut the cable or remote the

connector this will void the warranty Always wear safety goggles and a dustmask

1 If a hole must be drilled choose alocation well above the waterlineCheck for obstructions such as trimtabs pumps or wiring inside the hullMark the location with a pencil Drilla hole through the transom using a19 mm or 34rdquo bit (to accommodatethe connector)

2 Route the cable over or through thetransom

3 On the outside of the hull secure thecable against the transom using thecable clamps Position a cable clamp50 mm(2rdquo) above the bracket andmark the mounting hole with apencil

4 Position the second cable clamphalfway between the first clamp andthe cable hole Mark this mountinghole

5 If a hole has been drilled in thetransom open the appropriate slot inthe transom cable cover Position thecover over the cable where it entersthe hull Mark the two mounting

holes6 At each of the marked locations usea 3 mm or 18rdquo bit to drill a hole 10mm (38rdquo) deep The prevent drillingtoo deeply wrap masking tapearound the bit 10 mm (38rdquo) from thepoint

7 Apply marine sealant to the threadsof the 6 x 12rdquo self-tapping screw toprevent water from seeping into the

transom If you have drilled a holethrough the transom apply marinesealant to the space around thecable where it passes through thetransom

8 Position the two cable clamps andfasten them in place If used pushthe cable cover over the cable andscrew it in place

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4048

34

9 Route the cable to the instrumentbeing careful not to tear the cable

jacket when passing it though thebulkhead(s) and other parts of theboat To reduce electricalinterference separate the sensorcable from other electrical wiring andldquonoiserdquo sources Coil any excesscable and secure it in place withzip-ties to prevent damage

46 Optional WaterTemperatureSpeedSensor

Water temperaturespeed sensorST-02MSB and ST-02PSB which aredesigned for thru-hull mounting areoptionally available Install them asshown below

Mounting considerations

Choose a suitable mounting locationconsidering the followingbull Choose a place free from vibrationbull Choose a mid-boat flat position The

sensor does not have to be installedperfectly perpendicular The sensormust not be damaged in dry-dockingoperation

bull Choose a place apart from equipmentgenerating heat

bull Choose a place in the forwarddirection viewing from the drain holeto allow for circulation of coolingwater

1 Dry-dock the boat2 Make a hole of approx 51 mm

diameter in the mounting location3 Unfasten locknut and remove the

sensor section4 Apply high-grade sealant to the

flange of the sensor5 Pass the sensor casing through thehole

6 Face the notch on the sensor towardboatrsquos bow and tighten the flange

7 Set the sensor section to the sensorcasing and tighten the locknut

8 Launch the boat and check for waterleakage around the sensor

Locknut

Face notchtoward bow

Flange Nut

Coat withsilicone sealant Brim

φ 77

51

123

Water temperaturespeed sensor

ST-02MSB ST-02PSB

47 Wiring

Connect the LS-4100 powerdata cableassy MJ-A7SPF0005-020 (2 msupplied) to the POWER and thetransducer cable to the XDR connectorRefer to the interconnection diagram toconnect cables Leave slack in cables tofacilitate checking and maintenance

Note The fuse holder contains a springwhich fixes the fuse To preventdetachment of the spring which wouldcause loss of power tie the line asshown below

+ line (red)

Fuse holder

Cable tie How to fix fuse holder

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4148

35

Establishing the ground

The ground wire (125 sq or more localsupply) should be as short as possible

The signal line ground is isolated from

the chassis ground however the powerline is not insulated Therefore whenconnecting eternal equipment havingpositive ground do not ground thesignal line to the chassis If excessivenoise shows on the screen the groundmay be inadequate In this case attacha steel plate measuring 20 cm by 30 cmon the outside of the hull to provide aground point Connect the ground wire

there Use a ldquoclosedrdquo type lug ( ) tomake the connection at the display unitDo not use an ldquoopenrdquo type lug ( )

Optional equipment

POWER connector

The power supply port is commonlyused for connection of externalequipment such as a GPS receiver orwind indicator Use the powerdatacable MJ-A7SPF0005-020 (supplied) forconnection referring the figure shown inthe right column

Connector Color Remarks

1 TD-A WHT2 TD-B BLU

IEC-61162-1NMEA0183

3 RD-A YEL

4 RD-B GRN

IEC-61162-1

NMEA01835 + RED

6 - BLKPower input12 VDC

7 FG

Water tempspeed sensor

Connect the optional water tempspeedsensor to the XDR connector with theoptional converter connector (Type02S4147) as shown below

Tape connectors withvulcaninzing tapeand then vinyl tapeto waterproof themBind tape ends withcable ties to preventtape from unraveling

Connect to XDR portat rear of display unit

MJ-A10SPF

MJ-A10SRMDMJ-A6SRMD

Fromtransducer

Fromsensor

Connection of converterconnector 02S4147

48 IEC 61162-1 DataSentences

The tables below show the datasentences which can be input to andoutput from the LS-4100 Thetransmission speed for both input andoutput is 4800 bps Data is output attwo-second intervals

Input data sentences

Sentence Meaning

BWC Bearing and distance towaypoint

GGA Global positioning system(GPS) fix data

GLL Geographic position -latitudelongitude

HDG Heading deviation and variationHDT Heading true

MDA Atmospheric pressure

MTW Water temperature

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4248

36

Input data sentences (conrsquot)

Sentence MeaningMWV Wind speed and

angleRMA Recommended

minimum specificLORAN-C dataRMB Recommended

minimum navigationinformation

RMC Recommendedminimum specificGPSTRANSIT data

VHW Water speed andheading

VTG Course over groundand ground speedXTE Cross track error

Output data sentences

Sentence MeaningDBT (Ver 15) Depth below

transducerDPT (Ver 20 Ver30)

Depth

MTW Water temperatureRMB (Ver 20) Recommended

minimumnavigationinformation

VHW Water speed andheading

TLL Target positionoutput by [MARK]key

= Available with connection of optionalsensorsnavaid

49 Installation MenuThe installation menu mainly containsitems which are set at installation

1 Turn on the power while pressing the[MENUESC] key Continue pressing

the [MENUESC] key until theInstallation menu appears

SIMULATION On

TEST LCD PATTERN MEMORY CLEAR

NMEA PORT InOutNMEA MIX OffGPS WAAS Off

SET BOTTOM LEVEL

Installation Menu

= Setting cannot be changed whenNMEA PORT setting is InIn

Installation menu

SIMULATION The simulation modeprovides without connection of thetransducer simulated operation of theequipment using internally generatedechoes All controls are operative Themessage ldquoSIMrdquo appears at the top rightcorner on the screen when thesimulation mode is active

1 At the installation menu press toopen the simulation mode optionswindow

2 Press to choose ldquoOnrdquo to turn onthe simulation mode

3 Press the [POWERBRILL] keyabout three seconds to turn off thepower

4 Press the [POWERBRILL] key toturn on the power ldquoSIMrdquo appears atthe top right corner of the display

5 To turn off the simulation modeselect Off at step 2

NMEA po r t se tup(NMEA PO RT NMEA M IX)

The POWER port can function as aninput port or inputoutput port Changethe setting to ldquoInInrdquo when connectingGP-310B320B and a wind sensor

When connecting the GP-310B320Band a wind sensor first turn on ldquoGPS

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4348

37

WAASrdquo (in the Installation menu) andthen select ldquoInInrdquo as the NMEA portsetting

1 Turn on the power while pressingand holding down the [MENUESC]key Continue pressing the[MENUESC] key until theInstallation menu appears

2 Choose NMEA PORT and thenpress to display the NMEA portoptions window

3 Use or to choose InOut orInIn as appropriate

InOut Input and Output (default

setting)InIn Input only (Available withconnection of the GP-310B320Band a wind sensor)

4 Press choose NMEA MIX andthen press to display the NMEAMIX options window

5 Use or to choose Off or OnChoose On to output input data

Off Outputs the data sentences ofLS-4100 only

On Outputs the data sentences ofLS-4100 and sentences which areinput from other equipment

6 To restore normal operation turn offthe power and then turn it on again

GPS WAAS Chooses how to use theWAAS signal when connecting with a

WAAS receiver for example GP-320B

Note WAAS is currently in thedevelopmental phase During thedevelopmental phase the reliability andavailability of the WAAS signal cannotbe guaranteed Therefore any positiondata should be verified against othersources to confirm reliability

1 Display the Installation menu2 Choose GPS WAAS and then press

to open the GPS WAAS options

window

Off

WAAS options window3 Press or to choose ldquoWAAS-02rdquo

(test signal) When the systembecomes operational (in 2003) setto ldquo00rdquo (regular WAAS signal)

4 Turn off the power

BOTTOM LEVEL If the depthindication is unstable in automaticoperation or the bottom echo cannot bedisplayed in the darkest gray tone byadjusting the gain controls in manualoperation you may adjust the bottomecho level detection circuit for both 50kHz and 200 kHz to stabilize theindication Generally lower the bottomlevel for inner hull installation where thereceive level is too low If the bottomlevel is too low it may be difficult todiscriminate fish from the bottomresulting in unstable depth indication

And if the bottom level is too high thedepth indication may not appear

1 At the installation menu press tochoose SET BOTTOM LEVEL andthen press Several seconds laterthe following display appears

Bottom level +0 (200k -100 - +100 ) +0 ( 50k -100 - +100 )

Bottom level display

2 While observing the picture use or to set 200 kHz or to set50 kHz Set up for optimum picture

3 To restore normal operation turn offthe power and then it on again

Note The mode must be other thanldquoNAV DATArdquo to show the bottom leveldisplay

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4448

SP - 1 E2371S01C

SPECIFICATIONS OF ECHO SOUNDER LS-4100

1 GENERAL11 TX Frequency 50 kHz or 200 kHz 50200 kHz dual transmitting selectable12 Transmit Method Single or dual transmitting

13 Output Power 300 Wrms14 TX Rate Max 500 pulsemin15 Pulse-length 01 to 08 ms

2 DISPLAY UNIT21 Display system 5-inch monochrome LCD 76 mm (W) x 100 mm (H) 240 x 320 dots22 Display Mode Single frequency (highlow freq) Dual-frequency Zoom Nav data-12

Marker zoom Bottom zoom Bottom-lock23 Display Range

Range SettingRange

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

Display

rangeMeter 5 10 20 40 80 150 200 300 2-500

Feet 15 30 60 120 200 400 600 1000 7-1500

Fathoms 3 5 10 20 40 80 100 150 1-250

PassiBraza 3 5 10 30 50 100 150 200 1-300

24 Range Shift 0-500 m 0-1500 ft 0-250 fa 0-300 pb25 Expansion Range Bottom-lock expansion 3 to 10 m

Sectional expansion 2 to 50 m26 Display Advance Speed 8 steps (LinesTX Freeze 1161814121121 41)

3 INTERFACE31 Input data sentences IEC61162-1NMEA0183 Ver 152030

GGA RMA RMB RMC BWC GLL HDT HDG VTG VHW MTWMWV MDA XTE

32 Output data sentences IEC61162-1NMEA0183 Ver 152030 interval 2 sMTW VHW DBT DPT RMB TLL by key operating External data required

4 POWER SUPPLY41 Display Unit 12 VDC 05 A

5 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITION51 Ambient Temperature Display unit -15degC to +55degC52 Relative Humidity 93 or less at 40degC53 Waterproof IPX5

6 COATING COLOR61 Display Unit N30

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4548

M a r

4

0 3

D-1

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4648

Mar 4 03

Mar 4 03

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4748

M a r

3

0 3

S-1

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4848

FURUNO Authorized DistributorDealer FURUNO Authorized DistributorDealer

9-52 Ashihara-cho9-52 Ashihara-choNishinomiya 662-8580 JAPANNishinomiya 662-8580 JAPAN

Telephone Telephone 0798-65-21110798-65-2111FaxFax 0798-65-42000798-65-4200

FIRST EDITION FIRST EDITION MARMAR 20032003Printed in JapanPrinted in Japan All rights reserved All rights reserved

B1B1 SEPSEP 09 200509 2005

Pub NoPub No OME-23710OME-23710 00014698000000146980000001469800000014698000(( DAMIDAMI )) LS-4100LS-4100

0 0 0 1 4 6 9 8 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 4 6 9 8 0 0 0

Page 34: OME23710B_1_LS4100

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3448

28

2 to 5

Transducer

Bracket

Hull

Epoxy material

525-5PWD mounting

44 Inside-hullTransducer

The thru-hull mount transducer(520-5PSD 520-5MSD) may also beinstalled inside the hull following theprocedure below

Necessary tools

You will need the following toolsbull Sandpaper (100)bull Silicone sealantbull Silicone grease

Remarks on installationbull Turn off the engine and anchor the

boat while installing the equipmentbull Install the transducer in the engine

room

Choosing the mounting locationbull The mounting location should be

where the hull is of single-hullthickness and is void of air or flotationmaterials other than solid fiberglassbetween the transducer face and thewater

bull Do not place the transducer over hullstruts or ribs which run under the hull

bull Avoid a location where the risingangle of the hull exceeds 15deg tominimize the effect of the boatrsquosrolling

bull You will finalize the mounting location

through some trial and error Theprocedure for this is shown later

50 cm

50 cm15 cm15 cm

13

12

Transducer mountinglocation

Centerline

Inside-hull transducer mounting location

Attaching the transducer1 Clean the transducer face to remove

any foreign material Lightly roughenthe transducer face with 100sandpaper Also roughen the insideof the hull where the transducer is tobe mounted

2 Clean the transducer face again3 Warm the silicone sealant to 40degC

before usage to soften it Coat thetransducer face and mountinglocation with silicone sealant

Transducer

SiliconeSealant

Coating transducer facewith silicone sealant

4 Press the transducer firmly down onthe hull and gently twist it back andforth to remove any air which may betrapped in the silicone sealant

Checking the installation

1 Connect the battery to the display

unit2 Turn on the display unit

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3548

29

3 Press the [MODE] key to chooseSINGLE FREQ

4 Choose 50 kHz or 200 kHz and thenpress the [MENUESC] key to closethe mode menu

5 Press the [MENU] to show the mainmenu and then press to select

Auto mode6 Press to choose Off7 Press the [MENUESC] key8 Press the [GAIN] key to set the gain

to ldquo5rdquo and then press the[MENUESC] key

9 Press the [RANGE] key to set therange to 10 meters (feet) and thenpress the [MENUESC] key

10 If the bottom is displayed in darkgray and the depth indicationappears the mounting location issuitable Go to ldquoFinal preparationrdquo

11 If the bottom is not displayed in darkgray tone the mounting location maybe unsuitable Do the followinga) Press the [POWERBRILL] key to

turn off the powerb) Gently dismount the transducer

with a piece of woodc) Reattach the transducer

elsewhere as shown in ldquoAttachingthe transducerrdquo

d) Check the installation again

Final preparation

Support the transducer with a piece ofwood to keep it in place while it is drying

Let the transducer dry 24-72 hours

45 Optional Triducer525ST-MSD

The optional triducer 525ST-MSD isdesigned for thru-hull mounting Forhow to install this transducer seeparagraph 42

φ79 mm

33 mm200-12 UNthreads

φ51 mm

27 mm

7 mm

140 mm Triducer 525ST-MSD

525ST-PWD

The Transom Mount Transducer orTRIDUCER reg Multisensor with IntegralRelease Bracket 525ST-PWD ismanufactured by AIRMAR Co Theseinstructions are also included with the

sensor

Pre-test for speed and temperature

Connect the sensor to the instrumentand spin the paddlewheel Check for aspeed reading and the approximate airtemperature If there is no readingreturn the sensor to your place ofpurchase

Tools and materials needed

ScissorsMasking tapeSafety gogglesDust maskElectric drillDrill bit for

Bracket holes 4mm 23 or 964rdquoFiberglass hull chamfer bit(preferred)6mm or 14rdquo

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3648

30

Transom hole 19mm or 34rdquo(optional)

Cable clamp holes 3mm or 18rdquoScrewdriversStraight edgeMarine sealantPencilZip-tiesWater-based antifouling paint(mandatory in salt water )

Mounting location

To ensure the best performance thesensor must be submerged inaeration-free and turbulence-free water

Mount the sensor close to the centerlineof the boat On slower heavierdisplacement hulls positioning it fartherfrom the centerline is acceptable

Allow adequate space above thebracket for it to release and rotate thesensor upward

Height

Height withoutspeed sensor191mm (7-12)Height withspeed sensor213mm (8-12)

Height required at mounting location

Note 1 Do not mount the sensor in anarea of turbulence or bubbles nearwater intake or discharge openingsbehind strakes struts fittings or hull

irregularities behind eroding paint (anindication of turbulence)Note 2 Avoid mounting the sensorwhere the boat may be supportedduring trailering launching hauling andstorageNote 3 For single drive boat mounton the starboard side at least 75 mm(3rdquo) beyond the swing radius of thepropeller

75 mm(3)

minimum beyondswing radius

Mounting location on single drive boat

Note 4 For twin drive boat mountbetween the drives

Installation of bracket

1 Cut out the installation template

shown on the next page2 At the selected location position thetemplate so the arrow at the bottomis aligned with the bottom edge ofthe transom Being sure the templateis parallel to the waterline tape it inplace

Align template vertically

Deadrise angle

Slope of hullparallel towaterline

Align template arrow withbottom edge of transom

Positioning the template

Warning Always wear safetygoggles and a dust mask

3 Using a 4 mm 23 or 964rdquo bit drillthree holes 22 mm (78rdquo) deepat the locations indicated To preventdrilling too deeply wrap maskingtape around the bit 22 mm (78rdquo)from the pointFiberglass hull Minimize surfacecracking by chamfering the gelcoatIf a chamfer bit or countersink bit is

not available start drilling with a6mm or 14rdquo bit to a depth of 1 mm(116rdquo)

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3748

31

4 If you know your transom angle the

bracket is designed for a standard13deg transom angle11deg-18deg angle No shim is requiredSkip to step 3 in ldquoAdjustingrdquoOther angles The shim is requiredSkip to step 2 of ldquoAdjustingrdquoIf you do not know the transom angletemporarily attach the bracket andsensor to the transom to determine ifthe plastic shim is needed

5 Using the two 10 x 1-14rdquo

self-tapping screws temporarilyscrew the bracket to the hull DONOT tighten the screws completelyat this time Follow the step 1-4 inldquoAttaching the Sensor to the Bracketrdquobefore proceeding with ldquoAdjustingrdquo

Installation templatefor starboard side of boat

Drill at locations labeled Bfor the following transom angles

16 deg through 22 deg

Drill at locations labeled Afor the following transom angles

2 deg through 15 deg

Align arrow with bottom of transom

AA A

BB B

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3848

32

Adjusting

1 Using a straight edge sight theunderside of the sensor relative tothe underside of the hull The sternof the sensor should be 1-3 mm

(116-18rdquo) below the bow of thesensor or parallel to the bottom ofthe hull

11 deg transom angleNO SHIM

12-18 deg transom angleNO SHIM

2 deg -10 deg transom

angle

19 deg -22 deg transom

angleshim withtaper up

shim withtaper down

parallelparallel parallel

slightangle

angletoo steep

anglereversed

YES NONO

YES YESYES

Sensor position and transom angle

Note Do not position the bow of thesensor lower than the stern becauseaeration will occur

2 To adjust the sensorrsquos angle relativeto the hull use the tapered plasticshim provided If the bracket hasbeen temporarily fastened to thetransom remove it Key the shim in

place on the back of the bracket2deg-10deg transom angle (steppedtransom and jet boats) Positionthe shim with the tapered end down19deg-22deg transom angle (smallaluminum and fiberglass boats) Position the shim with the taperedend up

3 If the bracket has been temporarilyfastened to the transom remove it

Apply a marine sealant to thethreads of the two 10 x 1-14rdquo self

tapping screws to prevent waterseeping into the transom Screw thebracket to the hull Do not tighten thescrews completely at this time

4 Repeat step 1 to ensure that theangle of the sensor is correctNote Do not position the sensorfarther into the water than necessaryto avoid increasing drag spray andwater noise and reducing boatspeed

5 Using the vertical adjustment spaceon the bracket slots slide the sensorup or down to provide a projection of3 mm (18rdquo) Tighten the screws

Cable cover

Cableclamp

50 mm (2)

Hull projection 3 mm (18)

Vertical adjustment and cable routing

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3948

33

Attaching the sensor to the bracket

1 If the retaining cover near the top ofthe bracket is closed open it bydepressing the latch and rotating thecover downward

Step 1 Step 2

Latch

Retainingcover

Pivotarm (2)

Slot (2)

Step 4

Step 3

Attaching the sensor to the bracket

2 Insert the sensorrsquos pivot arms intothe slots near the top of the bracket

3 Maintain pressure until the pivotarms click into place

4 Rotate the sensor downward until thebottom snaps into the bracket

5 Close the retaining cover to preventthe accidental release of the sensorwhen the boat is underway

Cable routing

Route the sensor cable over thetransom through a drain hole orthorough a new hole drilled in thetransom above the waterline

Never cut the cable or remote the

connector this will void the warranty Always wear safety goggles and a dustmask

1 If a hole must be drilled choose alocation well above the waterlineCheck for obstructions such as trimtabs pumps or wiring inside the hullMark the location with a pencil Drilla hole through the transom using a19 mm or 34rdquo bit (to accommodatethe connector)

2 Route the cable over or through thetransom

3 On the outside of the hull secure thecable against the transom using thecable clamps Position a cable clamp50 mm(2rdquo) above the bracket andmark the mounting hole with apencil

4 Position the second cable clamphalfway between the first clamp andthe cable hole Mark this mountinghole

5 If a hole has been drilled in thetransom open the appropriate slot inthe transom cable cover Position thecover over the cable where it entersthe hull Mark the two mounting

holes6 At each of the marked locations usea 3 mm or 18rdquo bit to drill a hole 10mm (38rdquo) deep The prevent drillingtoo deeply wrap masking tapearound the bit 10 mm (38rdquo) from thepoint

7 Apply marine sealant to the threadsof the 6 x 12rdquo self-tapping screw toprevent water from seeping into the

transom If you have drilled a holethrough the transom apply marinesealant to the space around thecable where it passes through thetransom

8 Position the two cable clamps andfasten them in place If used pushthe cable cover over the cable andscrew it in place

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4048

34

9 Route the cable to the instrumentbeing careful not to tear the cable

jacket when passing it though thebulkhead(s) and other parts of theboat To reduce electricalinterference separate the sensorcable from other electrical wiring andldquonoiserdquo sources Coil any excesscable and secure it in place withzip-ties to prevent damage

46 Optional WaterTemperatureSpeedSensor

Water temperaturespeed sensorST-02MSB and ST-02PSB which aredesigned for thru-hull mounting areoptionally available Install them asshown below

Mounting considerations

Choose a suitable mounting locationconsidering the followingbull Choose a place free from vibrationbull Choose a mid-boat flat position The

sensor does not have to be installedperfectly perpendicular The sensormust not be damaged in dry-dockingoperation

bull Choose a place apart from equipmentgenerating heat

bull Choose a place in the forwarddirection viewing from the drain holeto allow for circulation of coolingwater

1 Dry-dock the boat2 Make a hole of approx 51 mm

diameter in the mounting location3 Unfasten locknut and remove the

sensor section4 Apply high-grade sealant to the

flange of the sensor5 Pass the sensor casing through thehole

6 Face the notch on the sensor towardboatrsquos bow and tighten the flange

7 Set the sensor section to the sensorcasing and tighten the locknut

8 Launch the boat and check for waterleakage around the sensor

Locknut

Face notchtoward bow

Flange Nut

Coat withsilicone sealant Brim

φ 77

51

123

Water temperaturespeed sensor

ST-02MSB ST-02PSB

47 Wiring

Connect the LS-4100 powerdata cableassy MJ-A7SPF0005-020 (2 msupplied) to the POWER and thetransducer cable to the XDR connectorRefer to the interconnection diagram toconnect cables Leave slack in cables tofacilitate checking and maintenance

Note The fuse holder contains a springwhich fixes the fuse To preventdetachment of the spring which wouldcause loss of power tie the line asshown below

+ line (red)

Fuse holder

Cable tie How to fix fuse holder

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4148

35

Establishing the ground

The ground wire (125 sq or more localsupply) should be as short as possible

The signal line ground is isolated from

the chassis ground however the powerline is not insulated Therefore whenconnecting eternal equipment havingpositive ground do not ground thesignal line to the chassis If excessivenoise shows on the screen the groundmay be inadequate In this case attacha steel plate measuring 20 cm by 30 cmon the outside of the hull to provide aground point Connect the ground wire

there Use a ldquoclosedrdquo type lug ( ) tomake the connection at the display unitDo not use an ldquoopenrdquo type lug ( )

Optional equipment

POWER connector

The power supply port is commonlyused for connection of externalequipment such as a GPS receiver orwind indicator Use the powerdatacable MJ-A7SPF0005-020 (supplied) forconnection referring the figure shown inthe right column

Connector Color Remarks

1 TD-A WHT2 TD-B BLU

IEC-61162-1NMEA0183

3 RD-A YEL

4 RD-B GRN

IEC-61162-1

NMEA01835 + RED

6 - BLKPower input12 VDC

7 FG

Water tempspeed sensor

Connect the optional water tempspeedsensor to the XDR connector with theoptional converter connector (Type02S4147) as shown below

Tape connectors withvulcaninzing tapeand then vinyl tapeto waterproof themBind tape ends withcable ties to preventtape from unraveling

Connect to XDR portat rear of display unit

MJ-A10SPF

MJ-A10SRMDMJ-A6SRMD

Fromtransducer

Fromsensor

Connection of converterconnector 02S4147

48 IEC 61162-1 DataSentences

The tables below show the datasentences which can be input to andoutput from the LS-4100 Thetransmission speed for both input andoutput is 4800 bps Data is output attwo-second intervals

Input data sentences

Sentence Meaning

BWC Bearing and distance towaypoint

GGA Global positioning system(GPS) fix data

GLL Geographic position -latitudelongitude

HDG Heading deviation and variationHDT Heading true

MDA Atmospheric pressure

MTW Water temperature

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4248

36

Input data sentences (conrsquot)

Sentence MeaningMWV Wind speed and

angleRMA Recommended

minimum specificLORAN-C dataRMB Recommended

minimum navigationinformation

RMC Recommendedminimum specificGPSTRANSIT data

VHW Water speed andheading

VTG Course over groundand ground speedXTE Cross track error

Output data sentences

Sentence MeaningDBT (Ver 15) Depth below

transducerDPT (Ver 20 Ver30)

Depth

MTW Water temperatureRMB (Ver 20) Recommended

minimumnavigationinformation

VHW Water speed andheading

TLL Target positionoutput by [MARK]key

= Available with connection of optionalsensorsnavaid

49 Installation MenuThe installation menu mainly containsitems which are set at installation

1 Turn on the power while pressing the[MENUESC] key Continue pressing

the [MENUESC] key until theInstallation menu appears

SIMULATION On

TEST LCD PATTERN MEMORY CLEAR

NMEA PORT InOutNMEA MIX OffGPS WAAS Off

SET BOTTOM LEVEL

Installation Menu

= Setting cannot be changed whenNMEA PORT setting is InIn

Installation menu

SIMULATION The simulation modeprovides without connection of thetransducer simulated operation of theequipment using internally generatedechoes All controls are operative Themessage ldquoSIMrdquo appears at the top rightcorner on the screen when thesimulation mode is active

1 At the installation menu press toopen the simulation mode optionswindow

2 Press to choose ldquoOnrdquo to turn onthe simulation mode

3 Press the [POWERBRILL] keyabout three seconds to turn off thepower

4 Press the [POWERBRILL] key toturn on the power ldquoSIMrdquo appears atthe top right corner of the display

5 To turn off the simulation modeselect Off at step 2

NMEA po r t se tup(NMEA PO RT NMEA M IX)

The POWER port can function as aninput port or inputoutput port Changethe setting to ldquoInInrdquo when connectingGP-310B320B and a wind sensor

When connecting the GP-310B320Band a wind sensor first turn on ldquoGPS

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4348

37

WAASrdquo (in the Installation menu) andthen select ldquoInInrdquo as the NMEA portsetting

1 Turn on the power while pressingand holding down the [MENUESC]key Continue pressing the[MENUESC] key until theInstallation menu appears

2 Choose NMEA PORT and thenpress to display the NMEA portoptions window

3 Use or to choose InOut orInIn as appropriate

InOut Input and Output (default

setting)InIn Input only (Available withconnection of the GP-310B320Band a wind sensor)

4 Press choose NMEA MIX andthen press to display the NMEAMIX options window

5 Use or to choose Off or OnChoose On to output input data

Off Outputs the data sentences ofLS-4100 only

On Outputs the data sentences ofLS-4100 and sentences which areinput from other equipment

6 To restore normal operation turn offthe power and then turn it on again

GPS WAAS Chooses how to use theWAAS signal when connecting with a

WAAS receiver for example GP-320B

Note WAAS is currently in thedevelopmental phase During thedevelopmental phase the reliability andavailability of the WAAS signal cannotbe guaranteed Therefore any positiondata should be verified against othersources to confirm reliability

1 Display the Installation menu2 Choose GPS WAAS and then press

to open the GPS WAAS options

window

Off

WAAS options window3 Press or to choose ldquoWAAS-02rdquo

(test signal) When the systembecomes operational (in 2003) setto ldquo00rdquo (regular WAAS signal)

4 Turn off the power

BOTTOM LEVEL If the depthindication is unstable in automaticoperation or the bottom echo cannot bedisplayed in the darkest gray tone byadjusting the gain controls in manualoperation you may adjust the bottomecho level detection circuit for both 50kHz and 200 kHz to stabilize theindication Generally lower the bottomlevel for inner hull installation where thereceive level is too low If the bottomlevel is too low it may be difficult todiscriminate fish from the bottomresulting in unstable depth indication

And if the bottom level is too high thedepth indication may not appear

1 At the installation menu press tochoose SET BOTTOM LEVEL andthen press Several seconds laterthe following display appears

Bottom level +0 (200k -100 - +100 ) +0 ( 50k -100 - +100 )

Bottom level display

2 While observing the picture use or to set 200 kHz or to set50 kHz Set up for optimum picture

3 To restore normal operation turn offthe power and then it on again

Note The mode must be other thanldquoNAV DATArdquo to show the bottom leveldisplay

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4448

SP - 1 E2371S01C

SPECIFICATIONS OF ECHO SOUNDER LS-4100

1 GENERAL11 TX Frequency 50 kHz or 200 kHz 50200 kHz dual transmitting selectable12 Transmit Method Single or dual transmitting

13 Output Power 300 Wrms14 TX Rate Max 500 pulsemin15 Pulse-length 01 to 08 ms

2 DISPLAY UNIT21 Display system 5-inch monochrome LCD 76 mm (W) x 100 mm (H) 240 x 320 dots22 Display Mode Single frequency (highlow freq) Dual-frequency Zoom Nav data-12

Marker zoom Bottom zoom Bottom-lock23 Display Range

Range SettingRange

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

Display

rangeMeter 5 10 20 40 80 150 200 300 2-500

Feet 15 30 60 120 200 400 600 1000 7-1500

Fathoms 3 5 10 20 40 80 100 150 1-250

PassiBraza 3 5 10 30 50 100 150 200 1-300

24 Range Shift 0-500 m 0-1500 ft 0-250 fa 0-300 pb25 Expansion Range Bottom-lock expansion 3 to 10 m

Sectional expansion 2 to 50 m26 Display Advance Speed 8 steps (LinesTX Freeze 1161814121121 41)

3 INTERFACE31 Input data sentences IEC61162-1NMEA0183 Ver 152030

GGA RMA RMB RMC BWC GLL HDT HDG VTG VHW MTWMWV MDA XTE

32 Output data sentences IEC61162-1NMEA0183 Ver 152030 interval 2 sMTW VHW DBT DPT RMB TLL by key operating External data required

4 POWER SUPPLY41 Display Unit 12 VDC 05 A

5 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITION51 Ambient Temperature Display unit -15degC to +55degC52 Relative Humidity 93 or less at 40degC53 Waterproof IPX5

6 COATING COLOR61 Display Unit N30

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4548

M a r

4

0 3

D-1

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4648

Mar 4 03

Mar 4 03

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4748

M a r

3

0 3

S-1

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4848

FURUNO Authorized DistributorDealer FURUNO Authorized DistributorDealer

9-52 Ashihara-cho9-52 Ashihara-choNishinomiya 662-8580 JAPANNishinomiya 662-8580 JAPAN

Telephone Telephone 0798-65-21110798-65-2111FaxFax 0798-65-42000798-65-4200

FIRST EDITION FIRST EDITION MARMAR 20032003Printed in JapanPrinted in Japan All rights reserved All rights reserved

B1B1 SEPSEP 09 200509 2005

Pub NoPub No OME-23710OME-23710 00014698000000146980000001469800000014698000(( DAMIDAMI )) LS-4100LS-4100

0 0 0 1 4 6 9 8 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 4 6 9 8 0 0 0

Page 35: OME23710B_1_LS4100

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3548

29

3 Press the [MODE] key to chooseSINGLE FREQ

4 Choose 50 kHz or 200 kHz and thenpress the [MENUESC] key to closethe mode menu

5 Press the [MENU] to show the mainmenu and then press to select

Auto mode6 Press to choose Off7 Press the [MENUESC] key8 Press the [GAIN] key to set the gain

to ldquo5rdquo and then press the[MENUESC] key

9 Press the [RANGE] key to set therange to 10 meters (feet) and thenpress the [MENUESC] key

10 If the bottom is displayed in darkgray and the depth indicationappears the mounting location issuitable Go to ldquoFinal preparationrdquo

11 If the bottom is not displayed in darkgray tone the mounting location maybe unsuitable Do the followinga) Press the [POWERBRILL] key to

turn off the powerb) Gently dismount the transducer

with a piece of woodc) Reattach the transducer

elsewhere as shown in ldquoAttachingthe transducerrdquo

d) Check the installation again

Final preparation

Support the transducer with a piece ofwood to keep it in place while it is drying

Let the transducer dry 24-72 hours

45 Optional Triducer525ST-MSD

The optional triducer 525ST-MSD isdesigned for thru-hull mounting Forhow to install this transducer seeparagraph 42

φ79 mm

33 mm200-12 UNthreads

φ51 mm

27 mm

7 mm

140 mm Triducer 525ST-MSD

525ST-PWD

The Transom Mount Transducer orTRIDUCER reg Multisensor with IntegralRelease Bracket 525ST-PWD ismanufactured by AIRMAR Co Theseinstructions are also included with the

sensor

Pre-test for speed and temperature

Connect the sensor to the instrumentand spin the paddlewheel Check for aspeed reading and the approximate airtemperature If there is no readingreturn the sensor to your place ofpurchase

Tools and materials needed

ScissorsMasking tapeSafety gogglesDust maskElectric drillDrill bit for

Bracket holes 4mm 23 or 964rdquoFiberglass hull chamfer bit(preferred)6mm or 14rdquo

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3648

30

Transom hole 19mm or 34rdquo(optional)

Cable clamp holes 3mm or 18rdquoScrewdriversStraight edgeMarine sealantPencilZip-tiesWater-based antifouling paint(mandatory in salt water )

Mounting location

To ensure the best performance thesensor must be submerged inaeration-free and turbulence-free water

Mount the sensor close to the centerlineof the boat On slower heavierdisplacement hulls positioning it fartherfrom the centerline is acceptable

Allow adequate space above thebracket for it to release and rotate thesensor upward

Height

Height withoutspeed sensor191mm (7-12)Height withspeed sensor213mm (8-12)

Height required at mounting location

Note 1 Do not mount the sensor in anarea of turbulence or bubbles nearwater intake or discharge openingsbehind strakes struts fittings or hull

irregularities behind eroding paint (anindication of turbulence)Note 2 Avoid mounting the sensorwhere the boat may be supportedduring trailering launching hauling andstorageNote 3 For single drive boat mounton the starboard side at least 75 mm(3rdquo) beyond the swing radius of thepropeller

75 mm(3)

minimum beyondswing radius

Mounting location on single drive boat

Note 4 For twin drive boat mountbetween the drives

Installation of bracket

1 Cut out the installation template

shown on the next page2 At the selected location position thetemplate so the arrow at the bottomis aligned with the bottom edge ofthe transom Being sure the templateis parallel to the waterline tape it inplace

Align template vertically

Deadrise angle

Slope of hullparallel towaterline

Align template arrow withbottom edge of transom

Positioning the template

Warning Always wear safetygoggles and a dust mask

3 Using a 4 mm 23 or 964rdquo bit drillthree holes 22 mm (78rdquo) deepat the locations indicated To preventdrilling too deeply wrap maskingtape around the bit 22 mm (78rdquo)from the pointFiberglass hull Minimize surfacecracking by chamfering the gelcoatIf a chamfer bit or countersink bit is

not available start drilling with a6mm or 14rdquo bit to a depth of 1 mm(116rdquo)

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3748

31

4 If you know your transom angle the

bracket is designed for a standard13deg transom angle11deg-18deg angle No shim is requiredSkip to step 3 in ldquoAdjustingrdquoOther angles The shim is requiredSkip to step 2 of ldquoAdjustingrdquoIf you do not know the transom angletemporarily attach the bracket andsensor to the transom to determine ifthe plastic shim is needed

5 Using the two 10 x 1-14rdquo

self-tapping screws temporarilyscrew the bracket to the hull DONOT tighten the screws completelyat this time Follow the step 1-4 inldquoAttaching the Sensor to the Bracketrdquobefore proceeding with ldquoAdjustingrdquo

Installation templatefor starboard side of boat

Drill at locations labeled Bfor the following transom angles

16 deg through 22 deg

Drill at locations labeled Afor the following transom angles

2 deg through 15 deg

Align arrow with bottom of transom

AA A

BB B

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3848

32

Adjusting

1 Using a straight edge sight theunderside of the sensor relative tothe underside of the hull The sternof the sensor should be 1-3 mm

(116-18rdquo) below the bow of thesensor or parallel to the bottom ofthe hull

11 deg transom angleNO SHIM

12-18 deg transom angleNO SHIM

2 deg -10 deg transom

angle

19 deg -22 deg transom

angleshim withtaper up

shim withtaper down

parallelparallel parallel

slightangle

angletoo steep

anglereversed

YES NONO

YES YESYES

Sensor position and transom angle

Note Do not position the bow of thesensor lower than the stern becauseaeration will occur

2 To adjust the sensorrsquos angle relativeto the hull use the tapered plasticshim provided If the bracket hasbeen temporarily fastened to thetransom remove it Key the shim in

place on the back of the bracket2deg-10deg transom angle (steppedtransom and jet boats) Positionthe shim with the tapered end down19deg-22deg transom angle (smallaluminum and fiberglass boats) Position the shim with the taperedend up

3 If the bracket has been temporarilyfastened to the transom remove it

Apply a marine sealant to thethreads of the two 10 x 1-14rdquo self

tapping screws to prevent waterseeping into the transom Screw thebracket to the hull Do not tighten thescrews completely at this time

4 Repeat step 1 to ensure that theangle of the sensor is correctNote Do not position the sensorfarther into the water than necessaryto avoid increasing drag spray andwater noise and reducing boatspeed

5 Using the vertical adjustment spaceon the bracket slots slide the sensorup or down to provide a projection of3 mm (18rdquo) Tighten the screws

Cable cover

Cableclamp

50 mm (2)

Hull projection 3 mm (18)

Vertical adjustment and cable routing

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3948

33

Attaching the sensor to the bracket

1 If the retaining cover near the top ofthe bracket is closed open it bydepressing the latch and rotating thecover downward

Step 1 Step 2

Latch

Retainingcover

Pivotarm (2)

Slot (2)

Step 4

Step 3

Attaching the sensor to the bracket

2 Insert the sensorrsquos pivot arms intothe slots near the top of the bracket

3 Maintain pressure until the pivotarms click into place

4 Rotate the sensor downward until thebottom snaps into the bracket

5 Close the retaining cover to preventthe accidental release of the sensorwhen the boat is underway

Cable routing

Route the sensor cable over thetransom through a drain hole orthorough a new hole drilled in thetransom above the waterline

Never cut the cable or remote the

connector this will void the warranty Always wear safety goggles and a dustmask

1 If a hole must be drilled choose alocation well above the waterlineCheck for obstructions such as trimtabs pumps or wiring inside the hullMark the location with a pencil Drilla hole through the transom using a19 mm or 34rdquo bit (to accommodatethe connector)

2 Route the cable over or through thetransom

3 On the outside of the hull secure thecable against the transom using thecable clamps Position a cable clamp50 mm(2rdquo) above the bracket andmark the mounting hole with apencil

4 Position the second cable clamphalfway between the first clamp andthe cable hole Mark this mountinghole

5 If a hole has been drilled in thetransom open the appropriate slot inthe transom cable cover Position thecover over the cable where it entersthe hull Mark the two mounting

holes6 At each of the marked locations usea 3 mm or 18rdquo bit to drill a hole 10mm (38rdquo) deep The prevent drillingtoo deeply wrap masking tapearound the bit 10 mm (38rdquo) from thepoint

7 Apply marine sealant to the threadsof the 6 x 12rdquo self-tapping screw toprevent water from seeping into the

transom If you have drilled a holethrough the transom apply marinesealant to the space around thecable where it passes through thetransom

8 Position the two cable clamps andfasten them in place If used pushthe cable cover over the cable andscrew it in place

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4048

34

9 Route the cable to the instrumentbeing careful not to tear the cable

jacket when passing it though thebulkhead(s) and other parts of theboat To reduce electricalinterference separate the sensorcable from other electrical wiring andldquonoiserdquo sources Coil any excesscable and secure it in place withzip-ties to prevent damage

46 Optional WaterTemperatureSpeedSensor

Water temperaturespeed sensorST-02MSB and ST-02PSB which aredesigned for thru-hull mounting areoptionally available Install them asshown below

Mounting considerations

Choose a suitable mounting locationconsidering the followingbull Choose a place free from vibrationbull Choose a mid-boat flat position The

sensor does not have to be installedperfectly perpendicular The sensormust not be damaged in dry-dockingoperation

bull Choose a place apart from equipmentgenerating heat

bull Choose a place in the forwarddirection viewing from the drain holeto allow for circulation of coolingwater

1 Dry-dock the boat2 Make a hole of approx 51 mm

diameter in the mounting location3 Unfasten locknut and remove the

sensor section4 Apply high-grade sealant to the

flange of the sensor5 Pass the sensor casing through thehole

6 Face the notch on the sensor towardboatrsquos bow and tighten the flange

7 Set the sensor section to the sensorcasing and tighten the locknut

8 Launch the boat and check for waterleakage around the sensor

Locknut

Face notchtoward bow

Flange Nut

Coat withsilicone sealant Brim

φ 77

51

123

Water temperaturespeed sensor

ST-02MSB ST-02PSB

47 Wiring

Connect the LS-4100 powerdata cableassy MJ-A7SPF0005-020 (2 msupplied) to the POWER and thetransducer cable to the XDR connectorRefer to the interconnection diagram toconnect cables Leave slack in cables tofacilitate checking and maintenance

Note The fuse holder contains a springwhich fixes the fuse To preventdetachment of the spring which wouldcause loss of power tie the line asshown below

+ line (red)

Fuse holder

Cable tie How to fix fuse holder

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4148

35

Establishing the ground

The ground wire (125 sq or more localsupply) should be as short as possible

The signal line ground is isolated from

the chassis ground however the powerline is not insulated Therefore whenconnecting eternal equipment havingpositive ground do not ground thesignal line to the chassis If excessivenoise shows on the screen the groundmay be inadequate In this case attacha steel plate measuring 20 cm by 30 cmon the outside of the hull to provide aground point Connect the ground wire

there Use a ldquoclosedrdquo type lug ( ) tomake the connection at the display unitDo not use an ldquoopenrdquo type lug ( )

Optional equipment

POWER connector

The power supply port is commonlyused for connection of externalequipment such as a GPS receiver orwind indicator Use the powerdatacable MJ-A7SPF0005-020 (supplied) forconnection referring the figure shown inthe right column

Connector Color Remarks

1 TD-A WHT2 TD-B BLU

IEC-61162-1NMEA0183

3 RD-A YEL

4 RD-B GRN

IEC-61162-1

NMEA01835 + RED

6 - BLKPower input12 VDC

7 FG

Water tempspeed sensor

Connect the optional water tempspeedsensor to the XDR connector with theoptional converter connector (Type02S4147) as shown below

Tape connectors withvulcaninzing tapeand then vinyl tapeto waterproof themBind tape ends withcable ties to preventtape from unraveling

Connect to XDR portat rear of display unit

MJ-A10SPF

MJ-A10SRMDMJ-A6SRMD

Fromtransducer

Fromsensor

Connection of converterconnector 02S4147

48 IEC 61162-1 DataSentences

The tables below show the datasentences which can be input to andoutput from the LS-4100 Thetransmission speed for both input andoutput is 4800 bps Data is output attwo-second intervals

Input data sentences

Sentence Meaning

BWC Bearing and distance towaypoint

GGA Global positioning system(GPS) fix data

GLL Geographic position -latitudelongitude

HDG Heading deviation and variationHDT Heading true

MDA Atmospheric pressure

MTW Water temperature

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4248

36

Input data sentences (conrsquot)

Sentence MeaningMWV Wind speed and

angleRMA Recommended

minimum specificLORAN-C dataRMB Recommended

minimum navigationinformation

RMC Recommendedminimum specificGPSTRANSIT data

VHW Water speed andheading

VTG Course over groundand ground speedXTE Cross track error

Output data sentences

Sentence MeaningDBT (Ver 15) Depth below

transducerDPT (Ver 20 Ver30)

Depth

MTW Water temperatureRMB (Ver 20) Recommended

minimumnavigationinformation

VHW Water speed andheading

TLL Target positionoutput by [MARK]key

= Available with connection of optionalsensorsnavaid

49 Installation MenuThe installation menu mainly containsitems which are set at installation

1 Turn on the power while pressing the[MENUESC] key Continue pressing

the [MENUESC] key until theInstallation menu appears

SIMULATION On

TEST LCD PATTERN MEMORY CLEAR

NMEA PORT InOutNMEA MIX OffGPS WAAS Off

SET BOTTOM LEVEL

Installation Menu

= Setting cannot be changed whenNMEA PORT setting is InIn

Installation menu

SIMULATION The simulation modeprovides without connection of thetransducer simulated operation of theequipment using internally generatedechoes All controls are operative Themessage ldquoSIMrdquo appears at the top rightcorner on the screen when thesimulation mode is active

1 At the installation menu press toopen the simulation mode optionswindow

2 Press to choose ldquoOnrdquo to turn onthe simulation mode

3 Press the [POWERBRILL] keyabout three seconds to turn off thepower

4 Press the [POWERBRILL] key toturn on the power ldquoSIMrdquo appears atthe top right corner of the display

5 To turn off the simulation modeselect Off at step 2

NMEA po r t se tup(NMEA PO RT NMEA M IX)

The POWER port can function as aninput port or inputoutput port Changethe setting to ldquoInInrdquo when connectingGP-310B320B and a wind sensor

When connecting the GP-310B320Band a wind sensor first turn on ldquoGPS

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4348

37

WAASrdquo (in the Installation menu) andthen select ldquoInInrdquo as the NMEA portsetting

1 Turn on the power while pressingand holding down the [MENUESC]key Continue pressing the[MENUESC] key until theInstallation menu appears

2 Choose NMEA PORT and thenpress to display the NMEA portoptions window

3 Use or to choose InOut orInIn as appropriate

InOut Input and Output (default

setting)InIn Input only (Available withconnection of the GP-310B320Band a wind sensor)

4 Press choose NMEA MIX andthen press to display the NMEAMIX options window

5 Use or to choose Off or OnChoose On to output input data

Off Outputs the data sentences ofLS-4100 only

On Outputs the data sentences ofLS-4100 and sentences which areinput from other equipment

6 To restore normal operation turn offthe power and then turn it on again

GPS WAAS Chooses how to use theWAAS signal when connecting with a

WAAS receiver for example GP-320B

Note WAAS is currently in thedevelopmental phase During thedevelopmental phase the reliability andavailability of the WAAS signal cannotbe guaranteed Therefore any positiondata should be verified against othersources to confirm reliability

1 Display the Installation menu2 Choose GPS WAAS and then press

to open the GPS WAAS options

window

Off

WAAS options window3 Press or to choose ldquoWAAS-02rdquo

(test signal) When the systembecomes operational (in 2003) setto ldquo00rdquo (regular WAAS signal)

4 Turn off the power

BOTTOM LEVEL If the depthindication is unstable in automaticoperation or the bottom echo cannot bedisplayed in the darkest gray tone byadjusting the gain controls in manualoperation you may adjust the bottomecho level detection circuit for both 50kHz and 200 kHz to stabilize theindication Generally lower the bottomlevel for inner hull installation where thereceive level is too low If the bottomlevel is too low it may be difficult todiscriminate fish from the bottomresulting in unstable depth indication

And if the bottom level is too high thedepth indication may not appear

1 At the installation menu press tochoose SET BOTTOM LEVEL andthen press Several seconds laterthe following display appears

Bottom level +0 (200k -100 - +100 ) +0 ( 50k -100 - +100 )

Bottom level display

2 While observing the picture use or to set 200 kHz or to set50 kHz Set up for optimum picture

3 To restore normal operation turn offthe power and then it on again

Note The mode must be other thanldquoNAV DATArdquo to show the bottom leveldisplay

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4448

SP - 1 E2371S01C

SPECIFICATIONS OF ECHO SOUNDER LS-4100

1 GENERAL11 TX Frequency 50 kHz or 200 kHz 50200 kHz dual transmitting selectable12 Transmit Method Single or dual transmitting

13 Output Power 300 Wrms14 TX Rate Max 500 pulsemin15 Pulse-length 01 to 08 ms

2 DISPLAY UNIT21 Display system 5-inch monochrome LCD 76 mm (W) x 100 mm (H) 240 x 320 dots22 Display Mode Single frequency (highlow freq) Dual-frequency Zoom Nav data-12

Marker zoom Bottom zoom Bottom-lock23 Display Range

Range SettingRange

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

Display

rangeMeter 5 10 20 40 80 150 200 300 2-500

Feet 15 30 60 120 200 400 600 1000 7-1500

Fathoms 3 5 10 20 40 80 100 150 1-250

PassiBraza 3 5 10 30 50 100 150 200 1-300

24 Range Shift 0-500 m 0-1500 ft 0-250 fa 0-300 pb25 Expansion Range Bottom-lock expansion 3 to 10 m

Sectional expansion 2 to 50 m26 Display Advance Speed 8 steps (LinesTX Freeze 1161814121121 41)

3 INTERFACE31 Input data sentences IEC61162-1NMEA0183 Ver 152030

GGA RMA RMB RMC BWC GLL HDT HDG VTG VHW MTWMWV MDA XTE

32 Output data sentences IEC61162-1NMEA0183 Ver 152030 interval 2 sMTW VHW DBT DPT RMB TLL by key operating External data required

4 POWER SUPPLY41 Display Unit 12 VDC 05 A

5 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITION51 Ambient Temperature Display unit -15degC to +55degC52 Relative Humidity 93 or less at 40degC53 Waterproof IPX5

6 COATING COLOR61 Display Unit N30

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4548

M a r

4

0 3

D-1

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4648

Mar 4 03

Mar 4 03

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4748

M a r

3

0 3

S-1

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4848

FURUNO Authorized DistributorDealer FURUNO Authorized DistributorDealer

9-52 Ashihara-cho9-52 Ashihara-choNishinomiya 662-8580 JAPANNishinomiya 662-8580 JAPAN

Telephone Telephone 0798-65-21110798-65-2111FaxFax 0798-65-42000798-65-4200

FIRST EDITION FIRST EDITION MARMAR 20032003Printed in JapanPrinted in Japan All rights reserved All rights reserved

B1B1 SEPSEP 09 200509 2005

Pub NoPub No OME-23710OME-23710 00014698000000146980000001469800000014698000(( DAMIDAMI )) LS-4100LS-4100

0 0 0 1 4 6 9 8 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 4 6 9 8 0 0 0

Page 36: OME23710B_1_LS4100

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3648

30

Transom hole 19mm or 34rdquo(optional)

Cable clamp holes 3mm or 18rdquoScrewdriversStraight edgeMarine sealantPencilZip-tiesWater-based antifouling paint(mandatory in salt water )

Mounting location

To ensure the best performance thesensor must be submerged inaeration-free and turbulence-free water

Mount the sensor close to the centerlineof the boat On slower heavierdisplacement hulls positioning it fartherfrom the centerline is acceptable

Allow adequate space above thebracket for it to release and rotate thesensor upward

Height

Height withoutspeed sensor191mm (7-12)Height withspeed sensor213mm (8-12)

Height required at mounting location

Note 1 Do not mount the sensor in anarea of turbulence or bubbles nearwater intake or discharge openingsbehind strakes struts fittings or hull

irregularities behind eroding paint (anindication of turbulence)Note 2 Avoid mounting the sensorwhere the boat may be supportedduring trailering launching hauling andstorageNote 3 For single drive boat mounton the starboard side at least 75 mm(3rdquo) beyond the swing radius of thepropeller

75 mm(3)

minimum beyondswing radius

Mounting location on single drive boat

Note 4 For twin drive boat mountbetween the drives

Installation of bracket

1 Cut out the installation template

shown on the next page2 At the selected location position thetemplate so the arrow at the bottomis aligned with the bottom edge ofthe transom Being sure the templateis parallel to the waterline tape it inplace

Align template vertically

Deadrise angle

Slope of hullparallel towaterline

Align template arrow withbottom edge of transom

Positioning the template

Warning Always wear safetygoggles and a dust mask

3 Using a 4 mm 23 or 964rdquo bit drillthree holes 22 mm (78rdquo) deepat the locations indicated To preventdrilling too deeply wrap maskingtape around the bit 22 mm (78rdquo)from the pointFiberglass hull Minimize surfacecracking by chamfering the gelcoatIf a chamfer bit or countersink bit is

not available start drilling with a6mm or 14rdquo bit to a depth of 1 mm(116rdquo)

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3748

31

4 If you know your transom angle the

bracket is designed for a standard13deg transom angle11deg-18deg angle No shim is requiredSkip to step 3 in ldquoAdjustingrdquoOther angles The shim is requiredSkip to step 2 of ldquoAdjustingrdquoIf you do not know the transom angletemporarily attach the bracket andsensor to the transom to determine ifthe plastic shim is needed

5 Using the two 10 x 1-14rdquo

self-tapping screws temporarilyscrew the bracket to the hull DONOT tighten the screws completelyat this time Follow the step 1-4 inldquoAttaching the Sensor to the Bracketrdquobefore proceeding with ldquoAdjustingrdquo

Installation templatefor starboard side of boat

Drill at locations labeled Bfor the following transom angles

16 deg through 22 deg

Drill at locations labeled Afor the following transom angles

2 deg through 15 deg

Align arrow with bottom of transom

AA A

BB B

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3848

32

Adjusting

1 Using a straight edge sight theunderside of the sensor relative tothe underside of the hull The sternof the sensor should be 1-3 mm

(116-18rdquo) below the bow of thesensor or parallel to the bottom ofthe hull

11 deg transom angleNO SHIM

12-18 deg transom angleNO SHIM

2 deg -10 deg transom

angle

19 deg -22 deg transom

angleshim withtaper up

shim withtaper down

parallelparallel parallel

slightangle

angletoo steep

anglereversed

YES NONO

YES YESYES

Sensor position and transom angle

Note Do not position the bow of thesensor lower than the stern becauseaeration will occur

2 To adjust the sensorrsquos angle relativeto the hull use the tapered plasticshim provided If the bracket hasbeen temporarily fastened to thetransom remove it Key the shim in

place on the back of the bracket2deg-10deg transom angle (steppedtransom and jet boats) Positionthe shim with the tapered end down19deg-22deg transom angle (smallaluminum and fiberglass boats) Position the shim with the taperedend up

3 If the bracket has been temporarilyfastened to the transom remove it

Apply a marine sealant to thethreads of the two 10 x 1-14rdquo self

tapping screws to prevent waterseeping into the transom Screw thebracket to the hull Do not tighten thescrews completely at this time

4 Repeat step 1 to ensure that theangle of the sensor is correctNote Do not position the sensorfarther into the water than necessaryto avoid increasing drag spray andwater noise and reducing boatspeed

5 Using the vertical adjustment spaceon the bracket slots slide the sensorup or down to provide a projection of3 mm (18rdquo) Tighten the screws

Cable cover

Cableclamp

50 mm (2)

Hull projection 3 mm (18)

Vertical adjustment and cable routing

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3948

33

Attaching the sensor to the bracket

1 If the retaining cover near the top ofthe bracket is closed open it bydepressing the latch and rotating thecover downward

Step 1 Step 2

Latch

Retainingcover

Pivotarm (2)

Slot (2)

Step 4

Step 3

Attaching the sensor to the bracket

2 Insert the sensorrsquos pivot arms intothe slots near the top of the bracket

3 Maintain pressure until the pivotarms click into place

4 Rotate the sensor downward until thebottom snaps into the bracket

5 Close the retaining cover to preventthe accidental release of the sensorwhen the boat is underway

Cable routing

Route the sensor cable over thetransom through a drain hole orthorough a new hole drilled in thetransom above the waterline

Never cut the cable or remote the

connector this will void the warranty Always wear safety goggles and a dustmask

1 If a hole must be drilled choose alocation well above the waterlineCheck for obstructions such as trimtabs pumps or wiring inside the hullMark the location with a pencil Drilla hole through the transom using a19 mm or 34rdquo bit (to accommodatethe connector)

2 Route the cable over or through thetransom

3 On the outside of the hull secure thecable against the transom using thecable clamps Position a cable clamp50 mm(2rdquo) above the bracket andmark the mounting hole with apencil

4 Position the second cable clamphalfway between the first clamp andthe cable hole Mark this mountinghole

5 If a hole has been drilled in thetransom open the appropriate slot inthe transom cable cover Position thecover over the cable where it entersthe hull Mark the two mounting

holes6 At each of the marked locations usea 3 mm or 18rdquo bit to drill a hole 10mm (38rdquo) deep The prevent drillingtoo deeply wrap masking tapearound the bit 10 mm (38rdquo) from thepoint

7 Apply marine sealant to the threadsof the 6 x 12rdquo self-tapping screw toprevent water from seeping into the

transom If you have drilled a holethrough the transom apply marinesealant to the space around thecable where it passes through thetransom

8 Position the two cable clamps andfasten them in place If used pushthe cable cover over the cable andscrew it in place

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4048

34

9 Route the cable to the instrumentbeing careful not to tear the cable

jacket when passing it though thebulkhead(s) and other parts of theboat To reduce electricalinterference separate the sensorcable from other electrical wiring andldquonoiserdquo sources Coil any excesscable and secure it in place withzip-ties to prevent damage

46 Optional WaterTemperatureSpeedSensor

Water temperaturespeed sensorST-02MSB and ST-02PSB which aredesigned for thru-hull mounting areoptionally available Install them asshown below

Mounting considerations

Choose a suitable mounting locationconsidering the followingbull Choose a place free from vibrationbull Choose a mid-boat flat position The

sensor does not have to be installedperfectly perpendicular The sensormust not be damaged in dry-dockingoperation

bull Choose a place apart from equipmentgenerating heat

bull Choose a place in the forwarddirection viewing from the drain holeto allow for circulation of coolingwater

1 Dry-dock the boat2 Make a hole of approx 51 mm

diameter in the mounting location3 Unfasten locknut and remove the

sensor section4 Apply high-grade sealant to the

flange of the sensor5 Pass the sensor casing through thehole

6 Face the notch on the sensor towardboatrsquos bow and tighten the flange

7 Set the sensor section to the sensorcasing and tighten the locknut

8 Launch the boat and check for waterleakage around the sensor

Locknut

Face notchtoward bow

Flange Nut

Coat withsilicone sealant Brim

φ 77

51

123

Water temperaturespeed sensor

ST-02MSB ST-02PSB

47 Wiring

Connect the LS-4100 powerdata cableassy MJ-A7SPF0005-020 (2 msupplied) to the POWER and thetransducer cable to the XDR connectorRefer to the interconnection diagram toconnect cables Leave slack in cables tofacilitate checking and maintenance

Note The fuse holder contains a springwhich fixes the fuse To preventdetachment of the spring which wouldcause loss of power tie the line asshown below

+ line (red)

Fuse holder

Cable tie How to fix fuse holder

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4148

35

Establishing the ground

The ground wire (125 sq or more localsupply) should be as short as possible

The signal line ground is isolated from

the chassis ground however the powerline is not insulated Therefore whenconnecting eternal equipment havingpositive ground do not ground thesignal line to the chassis If excessivenoise shows on the screen the groundmay be inadequate In this case attacha steel plate measuring 20 cm by 30 cmon the outside of the hull to provide aground point Connect the ground wire

there Use a ldquoclosedrdquo type lug ( ) tomake the connection at the display unitDo not use an ldquoopenrdquo type lug ( )

Optional equipment

POWER connector

The power supply port is commonlyused for connection of externalequipment such as a GPS receiver orwind indicator Use the powerdatacable MJ-A7SPF0005-020 (supplied) forconnection referring the figure shown inthe right column

Connector Color Remarks

1 TD-A WHT2 TD-B BLU

IEC-61162-1NMEA0183

3 RD-A YEL

4 RD-B GRN

IEC-61162-1

NMEA01835 + RED

6 - BLKPower input12 VDC

7 FG

Water tempspeed sensor

Connect the optional water tempspeedsensor to the XDR connector with theoptional converter connector (Type02S4147) as shown below

Tape connectors withvulcaninzing tapeand then vinyl tapeto waterproof themBind tape ends withcable ties to preventtape from unraveling

Connect to XDR portat rear of display unit

MJ-A10SPF

MJ-A10SRMDMJ-A6SRMD

Fromtransducer

Fromsensor

Connection of converterconnector 02S4147

48 IEC 61162-1 DataSentences

The tables below show the datasentences which can be input to andoutput from the LS-4100 Thetransmission speed for both input andoutput is 4800 bps Data is output attwo-second intervals

Input data sentences

Sentence Meaning

BWC Bearing and distance towaypoint

GGA Global positioning system(GPS) fix data

GLL Geographic position -latitudelongitude

HDG Heading deviation and variationHDT Heading true

MDA Atmospheric pressure

MTW Water temperature

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4248

36

Input data sentences (conrsquot)

Sentence MeaningMWV Wind speed and

angleRMA Recommended

minimum specificLORAN-C dataRMB Recommended

minimum navigationinformation

RMC Recommendedminimum specificGPSTRANSIT data

VHW Water speed andheading

VTG Course over groundand ground speedXTE Cross track error

Output data sentences

Sentence MeaningDBT (Ver 15) Depth below

transducerDPT (Ver 20 Ver30)

Depth

MTW Water temperatureRMB (Ver 20) Recommended

minimumnavigationinformation

VHW Water speed andheading

TLL Target positionoutput by [MARK]key

= Available with connection of optionalsensorsnavaid

49 Installation MenuThe installation menu mainly containsitems which are set at installation

1 Turn on the power while pressing the[MENUESC] key Continue pressing

the [MENUESC] key until theInstallation menu appears

SIMULATION On

TEST LCD PATTERN MEMORY CLEAR

NMEA PORT InOutNMEA MIX OffGPS WAAS Off

SET BOTTOM LEVEL

Installation Menu

= Setting cannot be changed whenNMEA PORT setting is InIn

Installation menu

SIMULATION The simulation modeprovides without connection of thetransducer simulated operation of theequipment using internally generatedechoes All controls are operative Themessage ldquoSIMrdquo appears at the top rightcorner on the screen when thesimulation mode is active

1 At the installation menu press toopen the simulation mode optionswindow

2 Press to choose ldquoOnrdquo to turn onthe simulation mode

3 Press the [POWERBRILL] keyabout three seconds to turn off thepower

4 Press the [POWERBRILL] key toturn on the power ldquoSIMrdquo appears atthe top right corner of the display

5 To turn off the simulation modeselect Off at step 2

NMEA po r t se tup(NMEA PO RT NMEA M IX)

The POWER port can function as aninput port or inputoutput port Changethe setting to ldquoInInrdquo when connectingGP-310B320B and a wind sensor

When connecting the GP-310B320Band a wind sensor first turn on ldquoGPS

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4348

37

WAASrdquo (in the Installation menu) andthen select ldquoInInrdquo as the NMEA portsetting

1 Turn on the power while pressingand holding down the [MENUESC]key Continue pressing the[MENUESC] key until theInstallation menu appears

2 Choose NMEA PORT and thenpress to display the NMEA portoptions window

3 Use or to choose InOut orInIn as appropriate

InOut Input and Output (default

setting)InIn Input only (Available withconnection of the GP-310B320Band a wind sensor)

4 Press choose NMEA MIX andthen press to display the NMEAMIX options window

5 Use or to choose Off or OnChoose On to output input data

Off Outputs the data sentences ofLS-4100 only

On Outputs the data sentences ofLS-4100 and sentences which areinput from other equipment

6 To restore normal operation turn offthe power and then turn it on again

GPS WAAS Chooses how to use theWAAS signal when connecting with a

WAAS receiver for example GP-320B

Note WAAS is currently in thedevelopmental phase During thedevelopmental phase the reliability andavailability of the WAAS signal cannotbe guaranteed Therefore any positiondata should be verified against othersources to confirm reliability

1 Display the Installation menu2 Choose GPS WAAS and then press

to open the GPS WAAS options

window

Off

WAAS options window3 Press or to choose ldquoWAAS-02rdquo

(test signal) When the systembecomes operational (in 2003) setto ldquo00rdquo (regular WAAS signal)

4 Turn off the power

BOTTOM LEVEL If the depthindication is unstable in automaticoperation or the bottom echo cannot bedisplayed in the darkest gray tone byadjusting the gain controls in manualoperation you may adjust the bottomecho level detection circuit for both 50kHz and 200 kHz to stabilize theindication Generally lower the bottomlevel for inner hull installation where thereceive level is too low If the bottomlevel is too low it may be difficult todiscriminate fish from the bottomresulting in unstable depth indication

And if the bottom level is too high thedepth indication may not appear

1 At the installation menu press tochoose SET BOTTOM LEVEL andthen press Several seconds laterthe following display appears

Bottom level +0 (200k -100 - +100 ) +0 ( 50k -100 - +100 )

Bottom level display

2 While observing the picture use or to set 200 kHz or to set50 kHz Set up for optimum picture

3 To restore normal operation turn offthe power and then it on again

Note The mode must be other thanldquoNAV DATArdquo to show the bottom leveldisplay

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4448

SP - 1 E2371S01C

SPECIFICATIONS OF ECHO SOUNDER LS-4100

1 GENERAL11 TX Frequency 50 kHz or 200 kHz 50200 kHz dual transmitting selectable12 Transmit Method Single or dual transmitting

13 Output Power 300 Wrms14 TX Rate Max 500 pulsemin15 Pulse-length 01 to 08 ms

2 DISPLAY UNIT21 Display system 5-inch monochrome LCD 76 mm (W) x 100 mm (H) 240 x 320 dots22 Display Mode Single frequency (highlow freq) Dual-frequency Zoom Nav data-12

Marker zoom Bottom zoom Bottom-lock23 Display Range

Range SettingRange

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

Display

rangeMeter 5 10 20 40 80 150 200 300 2-500

Feet 15 30 60 120 200 400 600 1000 7-1500

Fathoms 3 5 10 20 40 80 100 150 1-250

PassiBraza 3 5 10 30 50 100 150 200 1-300

24 Range Shift 0-500 m 0-1500 ft 0-250 fa 0-300 pb25 Expansion Range Bottom-lock expansion 3 to 10 m

Sectional expansion 2 to 50 m26 Display Advance Speed 8 steps (LinesTX Freeze 1161814121121 41)

3 INTERFACE31 Input data sentences IEC61162-1NMEA0183 Ver 152030

GGA RMA RMB RMC BWC GLL HDT HDG VTG VHW MTWMWV MDA XTE

32 Output data sentences IEC61162-1NMEA0183 Ver 152030 interval 2 sMTW VHW DBT DPT RMB TLL by key operating External data required

4 POWER SUPPLY41 Display Unit 12 VDC 05 A

5 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITION51 Ambient Temperature Display unit -15degC to +55degC52 Relative Humidity 93 or less at 40degC53 Waterproof IPX5

6 COATING COLOR61 Display Unit N30

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4548

M a r

4

0 3

D-1

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4648

Mar 4 03

Mar 4 03

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4748

M a r

3

0 3

S-1

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4848

FURUNO Authorized DistributorDealer FURUNO Authorized DistributorDealer

9-52 Ashihara-cho9-52 Ashihara-choNishinomiya 662-8580 JAPANNishinomiya 662-8580 JAPAN

Telephone Telephone 0798-65-21110798-65-2111FaxFax 0798-65-42000798-65-4200

FIRST EDITION FIRST EDITION MARMAR 20032003Printed in JapanPrinted in Japan All rights reserved All rights reserved

B1B1 SEPSEP 09 200509 2005

Pub NoPub No OME-23710OME-23710 00014698000000146980000001469800000014698000(( DAMIDAMI )) LS-4100LS-4100

0 0 0 1 4 6 9 8 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 4 6 9 8 0 0 0

Page 37: OME23710B_1_LS4100

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3748

31

4 If you know your transom angle the

bracket is designed for a standard13deg transom angle11deg-18deg angle No shim is requiredSkip to step 3 in ldquoAdjustingrdquoOther angles The shim is requiredSkip to step 2 of ldquoAdjustingrdquoIf you do not know the transom angletemporarily attach the bracket andsensor to the transom to determine ifthe plastic shim is needed

5 Using the two 10 x 1-14rdquo

self-tapping screws temporarilyscrew the bracket to the hull DONOT tighten the screws completelyat this time Follow the step 1-4 inldquoAttaching the Sensor to the Bracketrdquobefore proceeding with ldquoAdjustingrdquo

Installation templatefor starboard side of boat

Drill at locations labeled Bfor the following transom angles

16 deg through 22 deg

Drill at locations labeled Afor the following transom angles

2 deg through 15 deg

Align arrow with bottom of transom

AA A

BB B

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3848

32

Adjusting

1 Using a straight edge sight theunderside of the sensor relative tothe underside of the hull The sternof the sensor should be 1-3 mm

(116-18rdquo) below the bow of thesensor or parallel to the bottom ofthe hull

11 deg transom angleNO SHIM

12-18 deg transom angleNO SHIM

2 deg -10 deg transom

angle

19 deg -22 deg transom

angleshim withtaper up

shim withtaper down

parallelparallel parallel

slightangle

angletoo steep

anglereversed

YES NONO

YES YESYES

Sensor position and transom angle

Note Do not position the bow of thesensor lower than the stern becauseaeration will occur

2 To adjust the sensorrsquos angle relativeto the hull use the tapered plasticshim provided If the bracket hasbeen temporarily fastened to thetransom remove it Key the shim in

place on the back of the bracket2deg-10deg transom angle (steppedtransom and jet boats) Positionthe shim with the tapered end down19deg-22deg transom angle (smallaluminum and fiberglass boats) Position the shim with the taperedend up

3 If the bracket has been temporarilyfastened to the transom remove it

Apply a marine sealant to thethreads of the two 10 x 1-14rdquo self

tapping screws to prevent waterseeping into the transom Screw thebracket to the hull Do not tighten thescrews completely at this time

4 Repeat step 1 to ensure that theangle of the sensor is correctNote Do not position the sensorfarther into the water than necessaryto avoid increasing drag spray andwater noise and reducing boatspeed

5 Using the vertical adjustment spaceon the bracket slots slide the sensorup or down to provide a projection of3 mm (18rdquo) Tighten the screws

Cable cover

Cableclamp

50 mm (2)

Hull projection 3 mm (18)

Vertical adjustment and cable routing

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3948

33

Attaching the sensor to the bracket

1 If the retaining cover near the top ofthe bracket is closed open it bydepressing the latch and rotating thecover downward

Step 1 Step 2

Latch

Retainingcover

Pivotarm (2)

Slot (2)

Step 4

Step 3

Attaching the sensor to the bracket

2 Insert the sensorrsquos pivot arms intothe slots near the top of the bracket

3 Maintain pressure until the pivotarms click into place

4 Rotate the sensor downward until thebottom snaps into the bracket

5 Close the retaining cover to preventthe accidental release of the sensorwhen the boat is underway

Cable routing

Route the sensor cable over thetransom through a drain hole orthorough a new hole drilled in thetransom above the waterline

Never cut the cable or remote the

connector this will void the warranty Always wear safety goggles and a dustmask

1 If a hole must be drilled choose alocation well above the waterlineCheck for obstructions such as trimtabs pumps or wiring inside the hullMark the location with a pencil Drilla hole through the transom using a19 mm or 34rdquo bit (to accommodatethe connector)

2 Route the cable over or through thetransom

3 On the outside of the hull secure thecable against the transom using thecable clamps Position a cable clamp50 mm(2rdquo) above the bracket andmark the mounting hole with apencil

4 Position the second cable clamphalfway between the first clamp andthe cable hole Mark this mountinghole

5 If a hole has been drilled in thetransom open the appropriate slot inthe transom cable cover Position thecover over the cable where it entersthe hull Mark the two mounting

holes6 At each of the marked locations usea 3 mm or 18rdquo bit to drill a hole 10mm (38rdquo) deep The prevent drillingtoo deeply wrap masking tapearound the bit 10 mm (38rdquo) from thepoint

7 Apply marine sealant to the threadsof the 6 x 12rdquo self-tapping screw toprevent water from seeping into the

transom If you have drilled a holethrough the transom apply marinesealant to the space around thecable where it passes through thetransom

8 Position the two cable clamps andfasten them in place If used pushthe cable cover over the cable andscrew it in place

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4048

34

9 Route the cable to the instrumentbeing careful not to tear the cable

jacket when passing it though thebulkhead(s) and other parts of theboat To reduce electricalinterference separate the sensorcable from other electrical wiring andldquonoiserdquo sources Coil any excesscable and secure it in place withzip-ties to prevent damage

46 Optional WaterTemperatureSpeedSensor

Water temperaturespeed sensorST-02MSB and ST-02PSB which aredesigned for thru-hull mounting areoptionally available Install them asshown below

Mounting considerations

Choose a suitable mounting locationconsidering the followingbull Choose a place free from vibrationbull Choose a mid-boat flat position The

sensor does not have to be installedperfectly perpendicular The sensormust not be damaged in dry-dockingoperation

bull Choose a place apart from equipmentgenerating heat

bull Choose a place in the forwarddirection viewing from the drain holeto allow for circulation of coolingwater

1 Dry-dock the boat2 Make a hole of approx 51 mm

diameter in the mounting location3 Unfasten locknut and remove the

sensor section4 Apply high-grade sealant to the

flange of the sensor5 Pass the sensor casing through thehole

6 Face the notch on the sensor towardboatrsquos bow and tighten the flange

7 Set the sensor section to the sensorcasing and tighten the locknut

8 Launch the boat and check for waterleakage around the sensor

Locknut

Face notchtoward bow

Flange Nut

Coat withsilicone sealant Brim

φ 77

51

123

Water temperaturespeed sensor

ST-02MSB ST-02PSB

47 Wiring

Connect the LS-4100 powerdata cableassy MJ-A7SPF0005-020 (2 msupplied) to the POWER and thetransducer cable to the XDR connectorRefer to the interconnection diagram toconnect cables Leave slack in cables tofacilitate checking and maintenance

Note The fuse holder contains a springwhich fixes the fuse To preventdetachment of the spring which wouldcause loss of power tie the line asshown below

+ line (red)

Fuse holder

Cable tie How to fix fuse holder

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4148

35

Establishing the ground

The ground wire (125 sq or more localsupply) should be as short as possible

The signal line ground is isolated from

the chassis ground however the powerline is not insulated Therefore whenconnecting eternal equipment havingpositive ground do not ground thesignal line to the chassis If excessivenoise shows on the screen the groundmay be inadequate In this case attacha steel plate measuring 20 cm by 30 cmon the outside of the hull to provide aground point Connect the ground wire

there Use a ldquoclosedrdquo type lug ( ) tomake the connection at the display unitDo not use an ldquoopenrdquo type lug ( )

Optional equipment

POWER connector

The power supply port is commonlyused for connection of externalequipment such as a GPS receiver orwind indicator Use the powerdatacable MJ-A7SPF0005-020 (supplied) forconnection referring the figure shown inthe right column

Connector Color Remarks

1 TD-A WHT2 TD-B BLU

IEC-61162-1NMEA0183

3 RD-A YEL

4 RD-B GRN

IEC-61162-1

NMEA01835 + RED

6 - BLKPower input12 VDC

7 FG

Water tempspeed sensor

Connect the optional water tempspeedsensor to the XDR connector with theoptional converter connector (Type02S4147) as shown below

Tape connectors withvulcaninzing tapeand then vinyl tapeto waterproof themBind tape ends withcable ties to preventtape from unraveling

Connect to XDR portat rear of display unit

MJ-A10SPF

MJ-A10SRMDMJ-A6SRMD

Fromtransducer

Fromsensor

Connection of converterconnector 02S4147

48 IEC 61162-1 DataSentences

The tables below show the datasentences which can be input to andoutput from the LS-4100 Thetransmission speed for both input andoutput is 4800 bps Data is output attwo-second intervals

Input data sentences

Sentence Meaning

BWC Bearing and distance towaypoint

GGA Global positioning system(GPS) fix data

GLL Geographic position -latitudelongitude

HDG Heading deviation and variationHDT Heading true

MDA Atmospheric pressure

MTW Water temperature

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4248

36

Input data sentences (conrsquot)

Sentence MeaningMWV Wind speed and

angleRMA Recommended

minimum specificLORAN-C dataRMB Recommended

minimum navigationinformation

RMC Recommendedminimum specificGPSTRANSIT data

VHW Water speed andheading

VTG Course over groundand ground speedXTE Cross track error

Output data sentences

Sentence MeaningDBT (Ver 15) Depth below

transducerDPT (Ver 20 Ver30)

Depth

MTW Water temperatureRMB (Ver 20) Recommended

minimumnavigationinformation

VHW Water speed andheading

TLL Target positionoutput by [MARK]key

= Available with connection of optionalsensorsnavaid

49 Installation MenuThe installation menu mainly containsitems which are set at installation

1 Turn on the power while pressing the[MENUESC] key Continue pressing

the [MENUESC] key until theInstallation menu appears

SIMULATION On

TEST LCD PATTERN MEMORY CLEAR

NMEA PORT InOutNMEA MIX OffGPS WAAS Off

SET BOTTOM LEVEL

Installation Menu

= Setting cannot be changed whenNMEA PORT setting is InIn

Installation menu

SIMULATION The simulation modeprovides without connection of thetransducer simulated operation of theequipment using internally generatedechoes All controls are operative Themessage ldquoSIMrdquo appears at the top rightcorner on the screen when thesimulation mode is active

1 At the installation menu press toopen the simulation mode optionswindow

2 Press to choose ldquoOnrdquo to turn onthe simulation mode

3 Press the [POWERBRILL] keyabout three seconds to turn off thepower

4 Press the [POWERBRILL] key toturn on the power ldquoSIMrdquo appears atthe top right corner of the display

5 To turn off the simulation modeselect Off at step 2

NMEA po r t se tup(NMEA PO RT NMEA M IX)

The POWER port can function as aninput port or inputoutput port Changethe setting to ldquoInInrdquo when connectingGP-310B320B and a wind sensor

When connecting the GP-310B320Band a wind sensor first turn on ldquoGPS

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4348

37

WAASrdquo (in the Installation menu) andthen select ldquoInInrdquo as the NMEA portsetting

1 Turn on the power while pressingand holding down the [MENUESC]key Continue pressing the[MENUESC] key until theInstallation menu appears

2 Choose NMEA PORT and thenpress to display the NMEA portoptions window

3 Use or to choose InOut orInIn as appropriate

InOut Input and Output (default

setting)InIn Input only (Available withconnection of the GP-310B320Band a wind sensor)

4 Press choose NMEA MIX andthen press to display the NMEAMIX options window

5 Use or to choose Off or OnChoose On to output input data

Off Outputs the data sentences ofLS-4100 only

On Outputs the data sentences ofLS-4100 and sentences which areinput from other equipment

6 To restore normal operation turn offthe power and then turn it on again

GPS WAAS Chooses how to use theWAAS signal when connecting with a

WAAS receiver for example GP-320B

Note WAAS is currently in thedevelopmental phase During thedevelopmental phase the reliability andavailability of the WAAS signal cannotbe guaranteed Therefore any positiondata should be verified against othersources to confirm reliability

1 Display the Installation menu2 Choose GPS WAAS and then press

to open the GPS WAAS options

window

Off

WAAS options window3 Press or to choose ldquoWAAS-02rdquo

(test signal) When the systembecomes operational (in 2003) setto ldquo00rdquo (regular WAAS signal)

4 Turn off the power

BOTTOM LEVEL If the depthindication is unstable in automaticoperation or the bottom echo cannot bedisplayed in the darkest gray tone byadjusting the gain controls in manualoperation you may adjust the bottomecho level detection circuit for both 50kHz and 200 kHz to stabilize theindication Generally lower the bottomlevel for inner hull installation where thereceive level is too low If the bottomlevel is too low it may be difficult todiscriminate fish from the bottomresulting in unstable depth indication

And if the bottom level is too high thedepth indication may not appear

1 At the installation menu press tochoose SET BOTTOM LEVEL andthen press Several seconds laterthe following display appears

Bottom level +0 (200k -100 - +100 ) +0 ( 50k -100 - +100 )

Bottom level display

2 While observing the picture use or to set 200 kHz or to set50 kHz Set up for optimum picture

3 To restore normal operation turn offthe power and then it on again

Note The mode must be other thanldquoNAV DATArdquo to show the bottom leveldisplay

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4448

SP - 1 E2371S01C

SPECIFICATIONS OF ECHO SOUNDER LS-4100

1 GENERAL11 TX Frequency 50 kHz or 200 kHz 50200 kHz dual transmitting selectable12 Transmit Method Single or dual transmitting

13 Output Power 300 Wrms14 TX Rate Max 500 pulsemin15 Pulse-length 01 to 08 ms

2 DISPLAY UNIT21 Display system 5-inch monochrome LCD 76 mm (W) x 100 mm (H) 240 x 320 dots22 Display Mode Single frequency (highlow freq) Dual-frequency Zoom Nav data-12

Marker zoom Bottom zoom Bottom-lock23 Display Range

Range SettingRange

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

Display

rangeMeter 5 10 20 40 80 150 200 300 2-500

Feet 15 30 60 120 200 400 600 1000 7-1500

Fathoms 3 5 10 20 40 80 100 150 1-250

PassiBraza 3 5 10 30 50 100 150 200 1-300

24 Range Shift 0-500 m 0-1500 ft 0-250 fa 0-300 pb25 Expansion Range Bottom-lock expansion 3 to 10 m

Sectional expansion 2 to 50 m26 Display Advance Speed 8 steps (LinesTX Freeze 1161814121121 41)

3 INTERFACE31 Input data sentences IEC61162-1NMEA0183 Ver 152030

GGA RMA RMB RMC BWC GLL HDT HDG VTG VHW MTWMWV MDA XTE

32 Output data sentences IEC61162-1NMEA0183 Ver 152030 interval 2 sMTW VHW DBT DPT RMB TLL by key operating External data required

4 POWER SUPPLY41 Display Unit 12 VDC 05 A

5 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITION51 Ambient Temperature Display unit -15degC to +55degC52 Relative Humidity 93 or less at 40degC53 Waterproof IPX5

6 COATING COLOR61 Display Unit N30

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4548

M a r

4

0 3

D-1

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4648

Mar 4 03

Mar 4 03

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4748

M a r

3

0 3

S-1

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4848

FURUNO Authorized DistributorDealer FURUNO Authorized DistributorDealer

9-52 Ashihara-cho9-52 Ashihara-choNishinomiya 662-8580 JAPANNishinomiya 662-8580 JAPAN

Telephone Telephone 0798-65-21110798-65-2111FaxFax 0798-65-42000798-65-4200

FIRST EDITION FIRST EDITION MARMAR 20032003Printed in JapanPrinted in Japan All rights reserved All rights reserved

B1B1 SEPSEP 09 200509 2005

Pub NoPub No OME-23710OME-23710 00014698000000146980000001469800000014698000(( DAMIDAMI )) LS-4100LS-4100

0 0 0 1 4 6 9 8 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 4 6 9 8 0 0 0

Page 38: OME23710B_1_LS4100

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3848

32

Adjusting

1 Using a straight edge sight theunderside of the sensor relative tothe underside of the hull The sternof the sensor should be 1-3 mm

(116-18rdquo) below the bow of thesensor or parallel to the bottom ofthe hull

11 deg transom angleNO SHIM

12-18 deg transom angleNO SHIM

2 deg -10 deg transom

angle

19 deg -22 deg transom

angleshim withtaper up

shim withtaper down

parallelparallel parallel

slightangle

angletoo steep

anglereversed

YES NONO

YES YESYES

Sensor position and transom angle

Note Do not position the bow of thesensor lower than the stern becauseaeration will occur

2 To adjust the sensorrsquos angle relativeto the hull use the tapered plasticshim provided If the bracket hasbeen temporarily fastened to thetransom remove it Key the shim in

place on the back of the bracket2deg-10deg transom angle (steppedtransom and jet boats) Positionthe shim with the tapered end down19deg-22deg transom angle (smallaluminum and fiberglass boats) Position the shim with the taperedend up

3 If the bracket has been temporarilyfastened to the transom remove it

Apply a marine sealant to thethreads of the two 10 x 1-14rdquo self

tapping screws to prevent waterseeping into the transom Screw thebracket to the hull Do not tighten thescrews completely at this time

4 Repeat step 1 to ensure that theangle of the sensor is correctNote Do not position the sensorfarther into the water than necessaryto avoid increasing drag spray andwater noise and reducing boatspeed

5 Using the vertical adjustment spaceon the bracket slots slide the sensorup or down to provide a projection of3 mm (18rdquo) Tighten the screws

Cable cover

Cableclamp

50 mm (2)

Hull projection 3 mm (18)

Vertical adjustment and cable routing

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3948

33

Attaching the sensor to the bracket

1 If the retaining cover near the top ofthe bracket is closed open it bydepressing the latch and rotating thecover downward

Step 1 Step 2

Latch

Retainingcover

Pivotarm (2)

Slot (2)

Step 4

Step 3

Attaching the sensor to the bracket

2 Insert the sensorrsquos pivot arms intothe slots near the top of the bracket

3 Maintain pressure until the pivotarms click into place

4 Rotate the sensor downward until thebottom snaps into the bracket

5 Close the retaining cover to preventthe accidental release of the sensorwhen the boat is underway

Cable routing

Route the sensor cable over thetransom through a drain hole orthorough a new hole drilled in thetransom above the waterline

Never cut the cable or remote the

connector this will void the warranty Always wear safety goggles and a dustmask

1 If a hole must be drilled choose alocation well above the waterlineCheck for obstructions such as trimtabs pumps or wiring inside the hullMark the location with a pencil Drilla hole through the transom using a19 mm or 34rdquo bit (to accommodatethe connector)

2 Route the cable over or through thetransom

3 On the outside of the hull secure thecable against the transom using thecable clamps Position a cable clamp50 mm(2rdquo) above the bracket andmark the mounting hole with apencil

4 Position the second cable clamphalfway between the first clamp andthe cable hole Mark this mountinghole

5 If a hole has been drilled in thetransom open the appropriate slot inthe transom cable cover Position thecover over the cable where it entersthe hull Mark the two mounting

holes6 At each of the marked locations usea 3 mm or 18rdquo bit to drill a hole 10mm (38rdquo) deep The prevent drillingtoo deeply wrap masking tapearound the bit 10 mm (38rdquo) from thepoint

7 Apply marine sealant to the threadsof the 6 x 12rdquo self-tapping screw toprevent water from seeping into the

transom If you have drilled a holethrough the transom apply marinesealant to the space around thecable where it passes through thetransom

8 Position the two cable clamps andfasten them in place If used pushthe cable cover over the cable andscrew it in place

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4048

34

9 Route the cable to the instrumentbeing careful not to tear the cable

jacket when passing it though thebulkhead(s) and other parts of theboat To reduce electricalinterference separate the sensorcable from other electrical wiring andldquonoiserdquo sources Coil any excesscable and secure it in place withzip-ties to prevent damage

46 Optional WaterTemperatureSpeedSensor

Water temperaturespeed sensorST-02MSB and ST-02PSB which aredesigned for thru-hull mounting areoptionally available Install them asshown below

Mounting considerations

Choose a suitable mounting locationconsidering the followingbull Choose a place free from vibrationbull Choose a mid-boat flat position The

sensor does not have to be installedperfectly perpendicular The sensormust not be damaged in dry-dockingoperation

bull Choose a place apart from equipmentgenerating heat

bull Choose a place in the forwarddirection viewing from the drain holeto allow for circulation of coolingwater

1 Dry-dock the boat2 Make a hole of approx 51 mm

diameter in the mounting location3 Unfasten locknut and remove the

sensor section4 Apply high-grade sealant to the

flange of the sensor5 Pass the sensor casing through thehole

6 Face the notch on the sensor towardboatrsquos bow and tighten the flange

7 Set the sensor section to the sensorcasing and tighten the locknut

8 Launch the boat and check for waterleakage around the sensor

Locknut

Face notchtoward bow

Flange Nut

Coat withsilicone sealant Brim

φ 77

51

123

Water temperaturespeed sensor

ST-02MSB ST-02PSB

47 Wiring

Connect the LS-4100 powerdata cableassy MJ-A7SPF0005-020 (2 msupplied) to the POWER and thetransducer cable to the XDR connectorRefer to the interconnection diagram toconnect cables Leave slack in cables tofacilitate checking and maintenance

Note The fuse holder contains a springwhich fixes the fuse To preventdetachment of the spring which wouldcause loss of power tie the line asshown below

+ line (red)

Fuse holder

Cable tie How to fix fuse holder

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4148

35

Establishing the ground

The ground wire (125 sq or more localsupply) should be as short as possible

The signal line ground is isolated from

the chassis ground however the powerline is not insulated Therefore whenconnecting eternal equipment havingpositive ground do not ground thesignal line to the chassis If excessivenoise shows on the screen the groundmay be inadequate In this case attacha steel plate measuring 20 cm by 30 cmon the outside of the hull to provide aground point Connect the ground wire

there Use a ldquoclosedrdquo type lug ( ) tomake the connection at the display unitDo not use an ldquoopenrdquo type lug ( )

Optional equipment

POWER connector

The power supply port is commonlyused for connection of externalequipment such as a GPS receiver orwind indicator Use the powerdatacable MJ-A7SPF0005-020 (supplied) forconnection referring the figure shown inthe right column

Connector Color Remarks

1 TD-A WHT2 TD-B BLU

IEC-61162-1NMEA0183

3 RD-A YEL

4 RD-B GRN

IEC-61162-1

NMEA01835 + RED

6 - BLKPower input12 VDC

7 FG

Water tempspeed sensor

Connect the optional water tempspeedsensor to the XDR connector with theoptional converter connector (Type02S4147) as shown below

Tape connectors withvulcaninzing tapeand then vinyl tapeto waterproof themBind tape ends withcable ties to preventtape from unraveling

Connect to XDR portat rear of display unit

MJ-A10SPF

MJ-A10SRMDMJ-A6SRMD

Fromtransducer

Fromsensor

Connection of converterconnector 02S4147

48 IEC 61162-1 DataSentences

The tables below show the datasentences which can be input to andoutput from the LS-4100 Thetransmission speed for both input andoutput is 4800 bps Data is output attwo-second intervals

Input data sentences

Sentence Meaning

BWC Bearing and distance towaypoint

GGA Global positioning system(GPS) fix data

GLL Geographic position -latitudelongitude

HDG Heading deviation and variationHDT Heading true

MDA Atmospheric pressure

MTW Water temperature

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4248

36

Input data sentences (conrsquot)

Sentence MeaningMWV Wind speed and

angleRMA Recommended

minimum specificLORAN-C dataRMB Recommended

minimum navigationinformation

RMC Recommendedminimum specificGPSTRANSIT data

VHW Water speed andheading

VTG Course over groundand ground speedXTE Cross track error

Output data sentences

Sentence MeaningDBT (Ver 15) Depth below

transducerDPT (Ver 20 Ver30)

Depth

MTW Water temperatureRMB (Ver 20) Recommended

minimumnavigationinformation

VHW Water speed andheading

TLL Target positionoutput by [MARK]key

= Available with connection of optionalsensorsnavaid

49 Installation MenuThe installation menu mainly containsitems which are set at installation

1 Turn on the power while pressing the[MENUESC] key Continue pressing

the [MENUESC] key until theInstallation menu appears

SIMULATION On

TEST LCD PATTERN MEMORY CLEAR

NMEA PORT InOutNMEA MIX OffGPS WAAS Off

SET BOTTOM LEVEL

Installation Menu

= Setting cannot be changed whenNMEA PORT setting is InIn

Installation menu

SIMULATION The simulation modeprovides without connection of thetransducer simulated operation of theequipment using internally generatedechoes All controls are operative Themessage ldquoSIMrdquo appears at the top rightcorner on the screen when thesimulation mode is active

1 At the installation menu press toopen the simulation mode optionswindow

2 Press to choose ldquoOnrdquo to turn onthe simulation mode

3 Press the [POWERBRILL] keyabout three seconds to turn off thepower

4 Press the [POWERBRILL] key toturn on the power ldquoSIMrdquo appears atthe top right corner of the display

5 To turn off the simulation modeselect Off at step 2

NMEA po r t se tup(NMEA PO RT NMEA M IX)

The POWER port can function as aninput port or inputoutput port Changethe setting to ldquoInInrdquo when connectingGP-310B320B and a wind sensor

When connecting the GP-310B320Band a wind sensor first turn on ldquoGPS

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4348

37

WAASrdquo (in the Installation menu) andthen select ldquoInInrdquo as the NMEA portsetting

1 Turn on the power while pressingand holding down the [MENUESC]key Continue pressing the[MENUESC] key until theInstallation menu appears

2 Choose NMEA PORT and thenpress to display the NMEA portoptions window

3 Use or to choose InOut orInIn as appropriate

InOut Input and Output (default

setting)InIn Input only (Available withconnection of the GP-310B320Band a wind sensor)

4 Press choose NMEA MIX andthen press to display the NMEAMIX options window

5 Use or to choose Off or OnChoose On to output input data

Off Outputs the data sentences ofLS-4100 only

On Outputs the data sentences ofLS-4100 and sentences which areinput from other equipment

6 To restore normal operation turn offthe power and then turn it on again

GPS WAAS Chooses how to use theWAAS signal when connecting with a

WAAS receiver for example GP-320B

Note WAAS is currently in thedevelopmental phase During thedevelopmental phase the reliability andavailability of the WAAS signal cannotbe guaranteed Therefore any positiondata should be verified against othersources to confirm reliability

1 Display the Installation menu2 Choose GPS WAAS and then press

to open the GPS WAAS options

window

Off

WAAS options window3 Press or to choose ldquoWAAS-02rdquo

(test signal) When the systembecomes operational (in 2003) setto ldquo00rdquo (regular WAAS signal)

4 Turn off the power

BOTTOM LEVEL If the depthindication is unstable in automaticoperation or the bottom echo cannot bedisplayed in the darkest gray tone byadjusting the gain controls in manualoperation you may adjust the bottomecho level detection circuit for both 50kHz and 200 kHz to stabilize theindication Generally lower the bottomlevel for inner hull installation where thereceive level is too low If the bottomlevel is too low it may be difficult todiscriminate fish from the bottomresulting in unstable depth indication

And if the bottom level is too high thedepth indication may not appear

1 At the installation menu press tochoose SET BOTTOM LEVEL andthen press Several seconds laterthe following display appears

Bottom level +0 (200k -100 - +100 ) +0 ( 50k -100 - +100 )

Bottom level display

2 While observing the picture use or to set 200 kHz or to set50 kHz Set up for optimum picture

3 To restore normal operation turn offthe power and then it on again

Note The mode must be other thanldquoNAV DATArdquo to show the bottom leveldisplay

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4448

SP - 1 E2371S01C

SPECIFICATIONS OF ECHO SOUNDER LS-4100

1 GENERAL11 TX Frequency 50 kHz or 200 kHz 50200 kHz dual transmitting selectable12 Transmit Method Single or dual transmitting

13 Output Power 300 Wrms14 TX Rate Max 500 pulsemin15 Pulse-length 01 to 08 ms

2 DISPLAY UNIT21 Display system 5-inch monochrome LCD 76 mm (W) x 100 mm (H) 240 x 320 dots22 Display Mode Single frequency (highlow freq) Dual-frequency Zoom Nav data-12

Marker zoom Bottom zoom Bottom-lock23 Display Range

Range SettingRange

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

Display

rangeMeter 5 10 20 40 80 150 200 300 2-500

Feet 15 30 60 120 200 400 600 1000 7-1500

Fathoms 3 5 10 20 40 80 100 150 1-250

PassiBraza 3 5 10 30 50 100 150 200 1-300

24 Range Shift 0-500 m 0-1500 ft 0-250 fa 0-300 pb25 Expansion Range Bottom-lock expansion 3 to 10 m

Sectional expansion 2 to 50 m26 Display Advance Speed 8 steps (LinesTX Freeze 1161814121121 41)

3 INTERFACE31 Input data sentences IEC61162-1NMEA0183 Ver 152030

GGA RMA RMB RMC BWC GLL HDT HDG VTG VHW MTWMWV MDA XTE

32 Output data sentences IEC61162-1NMEA0183 Ver 152030 interval 2 sMTW VHW DBT DPT RMB TLL by key operating External data required

4 POWER SUPPLY41 Display Unit 12 VDC 05 A

5 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITION51 Ambient Temperature Display unit -15degC to +55degC52 Relative Humidity 93 or less at 40degC53 Waterproof IPX5

6 COATING COLOR61 Display Unit N30

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4548

M a r

4

0 3

D-1

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4648

Mar 4 03

Mar 4 03

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4748

M a r

3

0 3

S-1

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4848

FURUNO Authorized DistributorDealer FURUNO Authorized DistributorDealer

9-52 Ashihara-cho9-52 Ashihara-choNishinomiya 662-8580 JAPANNishinomiya 662-8580 JAPAN

Telephone Telephone 0798-65-21110798-65-2111FaxFax 0798-65-42000798-65-4200

FIRST EDITION FIRST EDITION MARMAR 20032003Printed in JapanPrinted in Japan All rights reserved All rights reserved

B1B1 SEPSEP 09 200509 2005

Pub NoPub No OME-23710OME-23710 00014698000000146980000001469800000014698000(( DAMIDAMI )) LS-4100LS-4100

0 0 0 1 4 6 9 8 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 4 6 9 8 0 0 0

Page 39: OME23710B_1_LS4100

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 3948

33

Attaching the sensor to the bracket

1 If the retaining cover near the top ofthe bracket is closed open it bydepressing the latch and rotating thecover downward

Step 1 Step 2

Latch

Retainingcover

Pivotarm (2)

Slot (2)

Step 4

Step 3

Attaching the sensor to the bracket

2 Insert the sensorrsquos pivot arms intothe slots near the top of the bracket

3 Maintain pressure until the pivotarms click into place

4 Rotate the sensor downward until thebottom snaps into the bracket

5 Close the retaining cover to preventthe accidental release of the sensorwhen the boat is underway

Cable routing

Route the sensor cable over thetransom through a drain hole orthorough a new hole drilled in thetransom above the waterline

Never cut the cable or remote the

connector this will void the warranty Always wear safety goggles and a dustmask

1 If a hole must be drilled choose alocation well above the waterlineCheck for obstructions such as trimtabs pumps or wiring inside the hullMark the location with a pencil Drilla hole through the transom using a19 mm or 34rdquo bit (to accommodatethe connector)

2 Route the cable over or through thetransom

3 On the outside of the hull secure thecable against the transom using thecable clamps Position a cable clamp50 mm(2rdquo) above the bracket andmark the mounting hole with apencil

4 Position the second cable clamphalfway between the first clamp andthe cable hole Mark this mountinghole

5 If a hole has been drilled in thetransom open the appropriate slot inthe transom cable cover Position thecover over the cable where it entersthe hull Mark the two mounting

holes6 At each of the marked locations usea 3 mm or 18rdquo bit to drill a hole 10mm (38rdquo) deep The prevent drillingtoo deeply wrap masking tapearound the bit 10 mm (38rdquo) from thepoint

7 Apply marine sealant to the threadsof the 6 x 12rdquo self-tapping screw toprevent water from seeping into the

transom If you have drilled a holethrough the transom apply marinesealant to the space around thecable where it passes through thetransom

8 Position the two cable clamps andfasten them in place If used pushthe cable cover over the cable andscrew it in place

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4048

34

9 Route the cable to the instrumentbeing careful not to tear the cable

jacket when passing it though thebulkhead(s) and other parts of theboat To reduce electricalinterference separate the sensorcable from other electrical wiring andldquonoiserdquo sources Coil any excesscable and secure it in place withzip-ties to prevent damage

46 Optional WaterTemperatureSpeedSensor

Water temperaturespeed sensorST-02MSB and ST-02PSB which aredesigned for thru-hull mounting areoptionally available Install them asshown below

Mounting considerations

Choose a suitable mounting locationconsidering the followingbull Choose a place free from vibrationbull Choose a mid-boat flat position The

sensor does not have to be installedperfectly perpendicular The sensormust not be damaged in dry-dockingoperation

bull Choose a place apart from equipmentgenerating heat

bull Choose a place in the forwarddirection viewing from the drain holeto allow for circulation of coolingwater

1 Dry-dock the boat2 Make a hole of approx 51 mm

diameter in the mounting location3 Unfasten locknut and remove the

sensor section4 Apply high-grade sealant to the

flange of the sensor5 Pass the sensor casing through thehole

6 Face the notch on the sensor towardboatrsquos bow and tighten the flange

7 Set the sensor section to the sensorcasing and tighten the locknut

8 Launch the boat and check for waterleakage around the sensor

Locknut

Face notchtoward bow

Flange Nut

Coat withsilicone sealant Brim

φ 77

51

123

Water temperaturespeed sensor

ST-02MSB ST-02PSB

47 Wiring

Connect the LS-4100 powerdata cableassy MJ-A7SPF0005-020 (2 msupplied) to the POWER and thetransducer cable to the XDR connectorRefer to the interconnection diagram toconnect cables Leave slack in cables tofacilitate checking and maintenance

Note The fuse holder contains a springwhich fixes the fuse To preventdetachment of the spring which wouldcause loss of power tie the line asshown below

+ line (red)

Fuse holder

Cable tie How to fix fuse holder

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4148

35

Establishing the ground

The ground wire (125 sq or more localsupply) should be as short as possible

The signal line ground is isolated from

the chassis ground however the powerline is not insulated Therefore whenconnecting eternal equipment havingpositive ground do not ground thesignal line to the chassis If excessivenoise shows on the screen the groundmay be inadequate In this case attacha steel plate measuring 20 cm by 30 cmon the outside of the hull to provide aground point Connect the ground wire

there Use a ldquoclosedrdquo type lug ( ) tomake the connection at the display unitDo not use an ldquoopenrdquo type lug ( )

Optional equipment

POWER connector

The power supply port is commonlyused for connection of externalequipment such as a GPS receiver orwind indicator Use the powerdatacable MJ-A7SPF0005-020 (supplied) forconnection referring the figure shown inthe right column

Connector Color Remarks

1 TD-A WHT2 TD-B BLU

IEC-61162-1NMEA0183

3 RD-A YEL

4 RD-B GRN

IEC-61162-1

NMEA01835 + RED

6 - BLKPower input12 VDC

7 FG

Water tempspeed sensor

Connect the optional water tempspeedsensor to the XDR connector with theoptional converter connector (Type02S4147) as shown below

Tape connectors withvulcaninzing tapeand then vinyl tapeto waterproof themBind tape ends withcable ties to preventtape from unraveling

Connect to XDR portat rear of display unit

MJ-A10SPF

MJ-A10SRMDMJ-A6SRMD

Fromtransducer

Fromsensor

Connection of converterconnector 02S4147

48 IEC 61162-1 DataSentences

The tables below show the datasentences which can be input to andoutput from the LS-4100 Thetransmission speed for both input andoutput is 4800 bps Data is output attwo-second intervals

Input data sentences

Sentence Meaning

BWC Bearing and distance towaypoint

GGA Global positioning system(GPS) fix data

GLL Geographic position -latitudelongitude

HDG Heading deviation and variationHDT Heading true

MDA Atmospheric pressure

MTW Water temperature

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4248

36

Input data sentences (conrsquot)

Sentence MeaningMWV Wind speed and

angleRMA Recommended

minimum specificLORAN-C dataRMB Recommended

minimum navigationinformation

RMC Recommendedminimum specificGPSTRANSIT data

VHW Water speed andheading

VTG Course over groundand ground speedXTE Cross track error

Output data sentences

Sentence MeaningDBT (Ver 15) Depth below

transducerDPT (Ver 20 Ver30)

Depth

MTW Water temperatureRMB (Ver 20) Recommended

minimumnavigationinformation

VHW Water speed andheading

TLL Target positionoutput by [MARK]key

= Available with connection of optionalsensorsnavaid

49 Installation MenuThe installation menu mainly containsitems which are set at installation

1 Turn on the power while pressing the[MENUESC] key Continue pressing

the [MENUESC] key until theInstallation menu appears

SIMULATION On

TEST LCD PATTERN MEMORY CLEAR

NMEA PORT InOutNMEA MIX OffGPS WAAS Off

SET BOTTOM LEVEL

Installation Menu

= Setting cannot be changed whenNMEA PORT setting is InIn

Installation menu

SIMULATION The simulation modeprovides without connection of thetransducer simulated operation of theequipment using internally generatedechoes All controls are operative Themessage ldquoSIMrdquo appears at the top rightcorner on the screen when thesimulation mode is active

1 At the installation menu press toopen the simulation mode optionswindow

2 Press to choose ldquoOnrdquo to turn onthe simulation mode

3 Press the [POWERBRILL] keyabout three seconds to turn off thepower

4 Press the [POWERBRILL] key toturn on the power ldquoSIMrdquo appears atthe top right corner of the display

5 To turn off the simulation modeselect Off at step 2

NMEA po r t se tup(NMEA PO RT NMEA M IX)

The POWER port can function as aninput port or inputoutput port Changethe setting to ldquoInInrdquo when connectingGP-310B320B and a wind sensor

When connecting the GP-310B320Band a wind sensor first turn on ldquoGPS

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4348

37

WAASrdquo (in the Installation menu) andthen select ldquoInInrdquo as the NMEA portsetting

1 Turn on the power while pressingand holding down the [MENUESC]key Continue pressing the[MENUESC] key until theInstallation menu appears

2 Choose NMEA PORT and thenpress to display the NMEA portoptions window

3 Use or to choose InOut orInIn as appropriate

InOut Input and Output (default

setting)InIn Input only (Available withconnection of the GP-310B320Band a wind sensor)

4 Press choose NMEA MIX andthen press to display the NMEAMIX options window

5 Use or to choose Off or OnChoose On to output input data

Off Outputs the data sentences ofLS-4100 only

On Outputs the data sentences ofLS-4100 and sentences which areinput from other equipment

6 To restore normal operation turn offthe power and then turn it on again

GPS WAAS Chooses how to use theWAAS signal when connecting with a

WAAS receiver for example GP-320B

Note WAAS is currently in thedevelopmental phase During thedevelopmental phase the reliability andavailability of the WAAS signal cannotbe guaranteed Therefore any positiondata should be verified against othersources to confirm reliability

1 Display the Installation menu2 Choose GPS WAAS and then press

to open the GPS WAAS options

window

Off

WAAS options window3 Press or to choose ldquoWAAS-02rdquo

(test signal) When the systembecomes operational (in 2003) setto ldquo00rdquo (regular WAAS signal)

4 Turn off the power

BOTTOM LEVEL If the depthindication is unstable in automaticoperation or the bottom echo cannot bedisplayed in the darkest gray tone byadjusting the gain controls in manualoperation you may adjust the bottomecho level detection circuit for both 50kHz and 200 kHz to stabilize theindication Generally lower the bottomlevel for inner hull installation where thereceive level is too low If the bottomlevel is too low it may be difficult todiscriminate fish from the bottomresulting in unstable depth indication

And if the bottom level is too high thedepth indication may not appear

1 At the installation menu press tochoose SET BOTTOM LEVEL andthen press Several seconds laterthe following display appears

Bottom level +0 (200k -100 - +100 ) +0 ( 50k -100 - +100 )

Bottom level display

2 While observing the picture use or to set 200 kHz or to set50 kHz Set up for optimum picture

3 To restore normal operation turn offthe power and then it on again

Note The mode must be other thanldquoNAV DATArdquo to show the bottom leveldisplay

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4448

SP - 1 E2371S01C

SPECIFICATIONS OF ECHO SOUNDER LS-4100

1 GENERAL11 TX Frequency 50 kHz or 200 kHz 50200 kHz dual transmitting selectable12 Transmit Method Single or dual transmitting

13 Output Power 300 Wrms14 TX Rate Max 500 pulsemin15 Pulse-length 01 to 08 ms

2 DISPLAY UNIT21 Display system 5-inch monochrome LCD 76 mm (W) x 100 mm (H) 240 x 320 dots22 Display Mode Single frequency (highlow freq) Dual-frequency Zoom Nav data-12

Marker zoom Bottom zoom Bottom-lock23 Display Range

Range SettingRange

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

Display

rangeMeter 5 10 20 40 80 150 200 300 2-500

Feet 15 30 60 120 200 400 600 1000 7-1500

Fathoms 3 5 10 20 40 80 100 150 1-250

PassiBraza 3 5 10 30 50 100 150 200 1-300

24 Range Shift 0-500 m 0-1500 ft 0-250 fa 0-300 pb25 Expansion Range Bottom-lock expansion 3 to 10 m

Sectional expansion 2 to 50 m26 Display Advance Speed 8 steps (LinesTX Freeze 1161814121121 41)

3 INTERFACE31 Input data sentences IEC61162-1NMEA0183 Ver 152030

GGA RMA RMB RMC BWC GLL HDT HDG VTG VHW MTWMWV MDA XTE

32 Output data sentences IEC61162-1NMEA0183 Ver 152030 interval 2 sMTW VHW DBT DPT RMB TLL by key operating External data required

4 POWER SUPPLY41 Display Unit 12 VDC 05 A

5 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITION51 Ambient Temperature Display unit -15degC to +55degC52 Relative Humidity 93 or less at 40degC53 Waterproof IPX5

6 COATING COLOR61 Display Unit N30

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4548

M a r

4

0 3

D-1

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4648

Mar 4 03

Mar 4 03

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4748

M a r

3

0 3

S-1

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4848

FURUNO Authorized DistributorDealer FURUNO Authorized DistributorDealer

9-52 Ashihara-cho9-52 Ashihara-choNishinomiya 662-8580 JAPANNishinomiya 662-8580 JAPAN

Telephone Telephone 0798-65-21110798-65-2111FaxFax 0798-65-42000798-65-4200

FIRST EDITION FIRST EDITION MARMAR 20032003Printed in JapanPrinted in Japan All rights reserved All rights reserved

B1B1 SEPSEP 09 200509 2005

Pub NoPub No OME-23710OME-23710 00014698000000146980000001469800000014698000(( DAMIDAMI )) LS-4100LS-4100

0 0 0 1 4 6 9 8 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 4 6 9 8 0 0 0

Page 40: OME23710B_1_LS4100

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4048

34

9 Route the cable to the instrumentbeing careful not to tear the cable

jacket when passing it though thebulkhead(s) and other parts of theboat To reduce electricalinterference separate the sensorcable from other electrical wiring andldquonoiserdquo sources Coil any excesscable and secure it in place withzip-ties to prevent damage

46 Optional WaterTemperatureSpeedSensor

Water temperaturespeed sensorST-02MSB and ST-02PSB which aredesigned for thru-hull mounting areoptionally available Install them asshown below

Mounting considerations

Choose a suitable mounting locationconsidering the followingbull Choose a place free from vibrationbull Choose a mid-boat flat position The

sensor does not have to be installedperfectly perpendicular The sensormust not be damaged in dry-dockingoperation

bull Choose a place apart from equipmentgenerating heat

bull Choose a place in the forwarddirection viewing from the drain holeto allow for circulation of coolingwater

1 Dry-dock the boat2 Make a hole of approx 51 mm

diameter in the mounting location3 Unfasten locknut and remove the

sensor section4 Apply high-grade sealant to the

flange of the sensor5 Pass the sensor casing through thehole

6 Face the notch on the sensor towardboatrsquos bow and tighten the flange

7 Set the sensor section to the sensorcasing and tighten the locknut

8 Launch the boat and check for waterleakage around the sensor

Locknut

Face notchtoward bow

Flange Nut

Coat withsilicone sealant Brim

φ 77

51

123

Water temperaturespeed sensor

ST-02MSB ST-02PSB

47 Wiring

Connect the LS-4100 powerdata cableassy MJ-A7SPF0005-020 (2 msupplied) to the POWER and thetransducer cable to the XDR connectorRefer to the interconnection diagram toconnect cables Leave slack in cables tofacilitate checking and maintenance

Note The fuse holder contains a springwhich fixes the fuse To preventdetachment of the spring which wouldcause loss of power tie the line asshown below

+ line (red)

Fuse holder

Cable tie How to fix fuse holder

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4148

35

Establishing the ground

The ground wire (125 sq or more localsupply) should be as short as possible

The signal line ground is isolated from

the chassis ground however the powerline is not insulated Therefore whenconnecting eternal equipment havingpositive ground do not ground thesignal line to the chassis If excessivenoise shows on the screen the groundmay be inadequate In this case attacha steel plate measuring 20 cm by 30 cmon the outside of the hull to provide aground point Connect the ground wire

there Use a ldquoclosedrdquo type lug ( ) tomake the connection at the display unitDo not use an ldquoopenrdquo type lug ( )

Optional equipment

POWER connector

The power supply port is commonlyused for connection of externalequipment such as a GPS receiver orwind indicator Use the powerdatacable MJ-A7SPF0005-020 (supplied) forconnection referring the figure shown inthe right column

Connector Color Remarks

1 TD-A WHT2 TD-B BLU

IEC-61162-1NMEA0183

3 RD-A YEL

4 RD-B GRN

IEC-61162-1

NMEA01835 + RED

6 - BLKPower input12 VDC

7 FG

Water tempspeed sensor

Connect the optional water tempspeedsensor to the XDR connector with theoptional converter connector (Type02S4147) as shown below

Tape connectors withvulcaninzing tapeand then vinyl tapeto waterproof themBind tape ends withcable ties to preventtape from unraveling

Connect to XDR portat rear of display unit

MJ-A10SPF

MJ-A10SRMDMJ-A6SRMD

Fromtransducer

Fromsensor

Connection of converterconnector 02S4147

48 IEC 61162-1 DataSentences

The tables below show the datasentences which can be input to andoutput from the LS-4100 Thetransmission speed for both input andoutput is 4800 bps Data is output attwo-second intervals

Input data sentences

Sentence Meaning

BWC Bearing and distance towaypoint

GGA Global positioning system(GPS) fix data

GLL Geographic position -latitudelongitude

HDG Heading deviation and variationHDT Heading true

MDA Atmospheric pressure

MTW Water temperature

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4248

36

Input data sentences (conrsquot)

Sentence MeaningMWV Wind speed and

angleRMA Recommended

minimum specificLORAN-C dataRMB Recommended

minimum navigationinformation

RMC Recommendedminimum specificGPSTRANSIT data

VHW Water speed andheading

VTG Course over groundand ground speedXTE Cross track error

Output data sentences

Sentence MeaningDBT (Ver 15) Depth below

transducerDPT (Ver 20 Ver30)

Depth

MTW Water temperatureRMB (Ver 20) Recommended

minimumnavigationinformation

VHW Water speed andheading

TLL Target positionoutput by [MARK]key

= Available with connection of optionalsensorsnavaid

49 Installation MenuThe installation menu mainly containsitems which are set at installation

1 Turn on the power while pressing the[MENUESC] key Continue pressing

the [MENUESC] key until theInstallation menu appears

SIMULATION On

TEST LCD PATTERN MEMORY CLEAR

NMEA PORT InOutNMEA MIX OffGPS WAAS Off

SET BOTTOM LEVEL

Installation Menu

= Setting cannot be changed whenNMEA PORT setting is InIn

Installation menu

SIMULATION The simulation modeprovides without connection of thetransducer simulated operation of theequipment using internally generatedechoes All controls are operative Themessage ldquoSIMrdquo appears at the top rightcorner on the screen when thesimulation mode is active

1 At the installation menu press toopen the simulation mode optionswindow

2 Press to choose ldquoOnrdquo to turn onthe simulation mode

3 Press the [POWERBRILL] keyabout three seconds to turn off thepower

4 Press the [POWERBRILL] key toturn on the power ldquoSIMrdquo appears atthe top right corner of the display

5 To turn off the simulation modeselect Off at step 2

NMEA po r t se tup(NMEA PO RT NMEA M IX)

The POWER port can function as aninput port or inputoutput port Changethe setting to ldquoInInrdquo when connectingGP-310B320B and a wind sensor

When connecting the GP-310B320Band a wind sensor first turn on ldquoGPS

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4348

37

WAASrdquo (in the Installation menu) andthen select ldquoInInrdquo as the NMEA portsetting

1 Turn on the power while pressingand holding down the [MENUESC]key Continue pressing the[MENUESC] key until theInstallation menu appears

2 Choose NMEA PORT and thenpress to display the NMEA portoptions window

3 Use or to choose InOut orInIn as appropriate

InOut Input and Output (default

setting)InIn Input only (Available withconnection of the GP-310B320Band a wind sensor)

4 Press choose NMEA MIX andthen press to display the NMEAMIX options window

5 Use or to choose Off or OnChoose On to output input data

Off Outputs the data sentences ofLS-4100 only

On Outputs the data sentences ofLS-4100 and sentences which areinput from other equipment

6 To restore normal operation turn offthe power and then turn it on again

GPS WAAS Chooses how to use theWAAS signal when connecting with a

WAAS receiver for example GP-320B

Note WAAS is currently in thedevelopmental phase During thedevelopmental phase the reliability andavailability of the WAAS signal cannotbe guaranteed Therefore any positiondata should be verified against othersources to confirm reliability

1 Display the Installation menu2 Choose GPS WAAS and then press

to open the GPS WAAS options

window

Off

WAAS options window3 Press or to choose ldquoWAAS-02rdquo

(test signal) When the systembecomes operational (in 2003) setto ldquo00rdquo (regular WAAS signal)

4 Turn off the power

BOTTOM LEVEL If the depthindication is unstable in automaticoperation or the bottom echo cannot bedisplayed in the darkest gray tone byadjusting the gain controls in manualoperation you may adjust the bottomecho level detection circuit for both 50kHz and 200 kHz to stabilize theindication Generally lower the bottomlevel for inner hull installation where thereceive level is too low If the bottomlevel is too low it may be difficult todiscriminate fish from the bottomresulting in unstable depth indication

And if the bottom level is too high thedepth indication may not appear

1 At the installation menu press tochoose SET BOTTOM LEVEL andthen press Several seconds laterthe following display appears

Bottom level +0 (200k -100 - +100 ) +0 ( 50k -100 - +100 )

Bottom level display

2 While observing the picture use or to set 200 kHz or to set50 kHz Set up for optimum picture

3 To restore normal operation turn offthe power and then it on again

Note The mode must be other thanldquoNAV DATArdquo to show the bottom leveldisplay

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4448

SP - 1 E2371S01C

SPECIFICATIONS OF ECHO SOUNDER LS-4100

1 GENERAL11 TX Frequency 50 kHz or 200 kHz 50200 kHz dual transmitting selectable12 Transmit Method Single or dual transmitting

13 Output Power 300 Wrms14 TX Rate Max 500 pulsemin15 Pulse-length 01 to 08 ms

2 DISPLAY UNIT21 Display system 5-inch monochrome LCD 76 mm (W) x 100 mm (H) 240 x 320 dots22 Display Mode Single frequency (highlow freq) Dual-frequency Zoom Nav data-12

Marker zoom Bottom zoom Bottom-lock23 Display Range

Range SettingRange

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

Display

rangeMeter 5 10 20 40 80 150 200 300 2-500

Feet 15 30 60 120 200 400 600 1000 7-1500

Fathoms 3 5 10 20 40 80 100 150 1-250

PassiBraza 3 5 10 30 50 100 150 200 1-300

24 Range Shift 0-500 m 0-1500 ft 0-250 fa 0-300 pb25 Expansion Range Bottom-lock expansion 3 to 10 m

Sectional expansion 2 to 50 m26 Display Advance Speed 8 steps (LinesTX Freeze 1161814121121 41)

3 INTERFACE31 Input data sentences IEC61162-1NMEA0183 Ver 152030

GGA RMA RMB RMC BWC GLL HDT HDG VTG VHW MTWMWV MDA XTE

32 Output data sentences IEC61162-1NMEA0183 Ver 152030 interval 2 sMTW VHW DBT DPT RMB TLL by key operating External data required

4 POWER SUPPLY41 Display Unit 12 VDC 05 A

5 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITION51 Ambient Temperature Display unit -15degC to +55degC52 Relative Humidity 93 or less at 40degC53 Waterproof IPX5

6 COATING COLOR61 Display Unit N30

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4548

M a r

4

0 3

D-1

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4648

Mar 4 03

Mar 4 03

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4748

M a r

3

0 3

S-1

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4848

FURUNO Authorized DistributorDealer FURUNO Authorized DistributorDealer

9-52 Ashihara-cho9-52 Ashihara-choNishinomiya 662-8580 JAPANNishinomiya 662-8580 JAPAN

Telephone Telephone 0798-65-21110798-65-2111FaxFax 0798-65-42000798-65-4200

FIRST EDITION FIRST EDITION MARMAR 20032003Printed in JapanPrinted in Japan All rights reserved All rights reserved

B1B1 SEPSEP 09 200509 2005

Pub NoPub No OME-23710OME-23710 00014698000000146980000001469800000014698000(( DAMIDAMI )) LS-4100LS-4100

0 0 0 1 4 6 9 8 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 4 6 9 8 0 0 0

Page 41: OME23710B_1_LS4100

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4148

35

Establishing the ground

The ground wire (125 sq or more localsupply) should be as short as possible

The signal line ground is isolated from

the chassis ground however the powerline is not insulated Therefore whenconnecting eternal equipment havingpositive ground do not ground thesignal line to the chassis If excessivenoise shows on the screen the groundmay be inadequate In this case attacha steel plate measuring 20 cm by 30 cmon the outside of the hull to provide aground point Connect the ground wire

there Use a ldquoclosedrdquo type lug ( ) tomake the connection at the display unitDo not use an ldquoopenrdquo type lug ( )

Optional equipment

POWER connector

The power supply port is commonlyused for connection of externalequipment such as a GPS receiver orwind indicator Use the powerdatacable MJ-A7SPF0005-020 (supplied) forconnection referring the figure shown inthe right column

Connector Color Remarks

1 TD-A WHT2 TD-B BLU

IEC-61162-1NMEA0183

3 RD-A YEL

4 RD-B GRN

IEC-61162-1

NMEA01835 + RED

6 - BLKPower input12 VDC

7 FG

Water tempspeed sensor

Connect the optional water tempspeedsensor to the XDR connector with theoptional converter connector (Type02S4147) as shown below

Tape connectors withvulcaninzing tapeand then vinyl tapeto waterproof themBind tape ends withcable ties to preventtape from unraveling

Connect to XDR portat rear of display unit

MJ-A10SPF

MJ-A10SRMDMJ-A6SRMD

Fromtransducer

Fromsensor

Connection of converterconnector 02S4147

48 IEC 61162-1 DataSentences

The tables below show the datasentences which can be input to andoutput from the LS-4100 Thetransmission speed for both input andoutput is 4800 bps Data is output attwo-second intervals

Input data sentences

Sentence Meaning

BWC Bearing and distance towaypoint

GGA Global positioning system(GPS) fix data

GLL Geographic position -latitudelongitude

HDG Heading deviation and variationHDT Heading true

MDA Atmospheric pressure

MTW Water temperature

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4248

36

Input data sentences (conrsquot)

Sentence MeaningMWV Wind speed and

angleRMA Recommended

minimum specificLORAN-C dataRMB Recommended

minimum navigationinformation

RMC Recommendedminimum specificGPSTRANSIT data

VHW Water speed andheading

VTG Course over groundand ground speedXTE Cross track error

Output data sentences

Sentence MeaningDBT (Ver 15) Depth below

transducerDPT (Ver 20 Ver30)

Depth

MTW Water temperatureRMB (Ver 20) Recommended

minimumnavigationinformation

VHW Water speed andheading

TLL Target positionoutput by [MARK]key

= Available with connection of optionalsensorsnavaid

49 Installation MenuThe installation menu mainly containsitems which are set at installation

1 Turn on the power while pressing the[MENUESC] key Continue pressing

the [MENUESC] key until theInstallation menu appears

SIMULATION On

TEST LCD PATTERN MEMORY CLEAR

NMEA PORT InOutNMEA MIX OffGPS WAAS Off

SET BOTTOM LEVEL

Installation Menu

= Setting cannot be changed whenNMEA PORT setting is InIn

Installation menu

SIMULATION The simulation modeprovides without connection of thetransducer simulated operation of theequipment using internally generatedechoes All controls are operative Themessage ldquoSIMrdquo appears at the top rightcorner on the screen when thesimulation mode is active

1 At the installation menu press toopen the simulation mode optionswindow

2 Press to choose ldquoOnrdquo to turn onthe simulation mode

3 Press the [POWERBRILL] keyabout three seconds to turn off thepower

4 Press the [POWERBRILL] key toturn on the power ldquoSIMrdquo appears atthe top right corner of the display

5 To turn off the simulation modeselect Off at step 2

NMEA po r t se tup(NMEA PO RT NMEA M IX)

The POWER port can function as aninput port or inputoutput port Changethe setting to ldquoInInrdquo when connectingGP-310B320B and a wind sensor

When connecting the GP-310B320Band a wind sensor first turn on ldquoGPS

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4348

37

WAASrdquo (in the Installation menu) andthen select ldquoInInrdquo as the NMEA portsetting

1 Turn on the power while pressingand holding down the [MENUESC]key Continue pressing the[MENUESC] key until theInstallation menu appears

2 Choose NMEA PORT and thenpress to display the NMEA portoptions window

3 Use or to choose InOut orInIn as appropriate

InOut Input and Output (default

setting)InIn Input only (Available withconnection of the GP-310B320Band a wind sensor)

4 Press choose NMEA MIX andthen press to display the NMEAMIX options window

5 Use or to choose Off or OnChoose On to output input data

Off Outputs the data sentences ofLS-4100 only

On Outputs the data sentences ofLS-4100 and sentences which areinput from other equipment

6 To restore normal operation turn offthe power and then turn it on again

GPS WAAS Chooses how to use theWAAS signal when connecting with a

WAAS receiver for example GP-320B

Note WAAS is currently in thedevelopmental phase During thedevelopmental phase the reliability andavailability of the WAAS signal cannotbe guaranteed Therefore any positiondata should be verified against othersources to confirm reliability

1 Display the Installation menu2 Choose GPS WAAS and then press

to open the GPS WAAS options

window

Off

WAAS options window3 Press or to choose ldquoWAAS-02rdquo

(test signal) When the systembecomes operational (in 2003) setto ldquo00rdquo (regular WAAS signal)

4 Turn off the power

BOTTOM LEVEL If the depthindication is unstable in automaticoperation or the bottom echo cannot bedisplayed in the darkest gray tone byadjusting the gain controls in manualoperation you may adjust the bottomecho level detection circuit for both 50kHz and 200 kHz to stabilize theindication Generally lower the bottomlevel for inner hull installation where thereceive level is too low If the bottomlevel is too low it may be difficult todiscriminate fish from the bottomresulting in unstable depth indication

And if the bottom level is too high thedepth indication may not appear

1 At the installation menu press tochoose SET BOTTOM LEVEL andthen press Several seconds laterthe following display appears

Bottom level +0 (200k -100 - +100 ) +0 ( 50k -100 - +100 )

Bottom level display

2 While observing the picture use or to set 200 kHz or to set50 kHz Set up for optimum picture

3 To restore normal operation turn offthe power and then it on again

Note The mode must be other thanldquoNAV DATArdquo to show the bottom leveldisplay

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4448

SP - 1 E2371S01C

SPECIFICATIONS OF ECHO SOUNDER LS-4100

1 GENERAL11 TX Frequency 50 kHz or 200 kHz 50200 kHz dual transmitting selectable12 Transmit Method Single or dual transmitting

13 Output Power 300 Wrms14 TX Rate Max 500 pulsemin15 Pulse-length 01 to 08 ms

2 DISPLAY UNIT21 Display system 5-inch monochrome LCD 76 mm (W) x 100 mm (H) 240 x 320 dots22 Display Mode Single frequency (highlow freq) Dual-frequency Zoom Nav data-12

Marker zoom Bottom zoom Bottom-lock23 Display Range

Range SettingRange

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

Display

rangeMeter 5 10 20 40 80 150 200 300 2-500

Feet 15 30 60 120 200 400 600 1000 7-1500

Fathoms 3 5 10 20 40 80 100 150 1-250

PassiBraza 3 5 10 30 50 100 150 200 1-300

24 Range Shift 0-500 m 0-1500 ft 0-250 fa 0-300 pb25 Expansion Range Bottom-lock expansion 3 to 10 m

Sectional expansion 2 to 50 m26 Display Advance Speed 8 steps (LinesTX Freeze 1161814121121 41)

3 INTERFACE31 Input data sentences IEC61162-1NMEA0183 Ver 152030

GGA RMA RMB RMC BWC GLL HDT HDG VTG VHW MTWMWV MDA XTE

32 Output data sentences IEC61162-1NMEA0183 Ver 152030 interval 2 sMTW VHW DBT DPT RMB TLL by key operating External data required

4 POWER SUPPLY41 Display Unit 12 VDC 05 A

5 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITION51 Ambient Temperature Display unit -15degC to +55degC52 Relative Humidity 93 or less at 40degC53 Waterproof IPX5

6 COATING COLOR61 Display Unit N30

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4548

M a r

4

0 3

D-1

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4648

Mar 4 03

Mar 4 03

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4748

M a r

3

0 3

S-1

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4848

FURUNO Authorized DistributorDealer FURUNO Authorized DistributorDealer

9-52 Ashihara-cho9-52 Ashihara-choNishinomiya 662-8580 JAPANNishinomiya 662-8580 JAPAN

Telephone Telephone 0798-65-21110798-65-2111FaxFax 0798-65-42000798-65-4200

FIRST EDITION FIRST EDITION MARMAR 20032003Printed in JapanPrinted in Japan All rights reserved All rights reserved

B1B1 SEPSEP 09 200509 2005

Pub NoPub No OME-23710OME-23710 00014698000000146980000001469800000014698000(( DAMIDAMI )) LS-4100LS-4100

0 0 0 1 4 6 9 8 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 4 6 9 8 0 0 0

Page 42: OME23710B_1_LS4100

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4248

36

Input data sentences (conrsquot)

Sentence MeaningMWV Wind speed and

angleRMA Recommended

minimum specificLORAN-C dataRMB Recommended

minimum navigationinformation

RMC Recommendedminimum specificGPSTRANSIT data

VHW Water speed andheading

VTG Course over groundand ground speedXTE Cross track error

Output data sentences

Sentence MeaningDBT (Ver 15) Depth below

transducerDPT (Ver 20 Ver30)

Depth

MTW Water temperatureRMB (Ver 20) Recommended

minimumnavigationinformation

VHW Water speed andheading

TLL Target positionoutput by [MARK]key

= Available with connection of optionalsensorsnavaid

49 Installation MenuThe installation menu mainly containsitems which are set at installation

1 Turn on the power while pressing the[MENUESC] key Continue pressing

the [MENUESC] key until theInstallation menu appears

SIMULATION On

TEST LCD PATTERN MEMORY CLEAR

NMEA PORT InOutNMEA MIX OffGPS WAAS Off

SET BOTTOM LEVEL

Installation Menu

= Setting cannot be changed whenNMEA PORT setting is InIn

Installation menu

SIMULATION The simulation modeprovides without connection of thetransducer simulated operation of theequipment using internally generatedechoes All controls are operative Themessage ldquoSIMrdquo appears at the top rightcorner on the screen when thesimulation mode is active

1 At the installation menu press toopen the simulation mode optionswindow

2 Press to choose ldquoOnrdquo to turn onthe simulation mode

3 Press the [POWERBRILL] keyabout three seconds to turn off thepower

4 Press the [POWERBRILL] key toturn on the power ldquoSIMrdquo appears atthe top right corner of the display

5 To turn off the simulation modeselect Off at step 2

NMEA po r t se tup(NMEA PO RT NMEA M IX)

The POWER port can function as aninput port or inputoutput port Changethe setting to ldquoInInrdquo when connectingGP-310B320B and a wind sensor

When connecting the GP-310B320Band a wind sensor first turn on ldquoGPS

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4348

37

WAASrdquo (in the Installation menu) andthen select ldquoInInrdquo as the NMEA portsetting

1 Turn on the power while pressingand holding down the [MENUESC]key Continue pressing the[MENUESC] key until theInstallation menu appears

2 Choose NMEA PORT and thenpress to display the NMEA portoptions window

3 Use or to choose InOut orInIn as appropriate

InOut Input and Output (default

setting)InIn Input only (Available withconnection of the GP-310B320Band a wind sensor)

4 Press choose NMEA MIX andthen press to display the NMEAMIX options window

5 Use or to choose Off or OnChoose On to output input data

Off Outputs the data sentences ofLS-4100 only

On Outputs the data sentences ofLS-4100 and sentences which areinput from other equipment

6 To restore normal operation turn offthe power and then turn it on again

GPS WAAS Chooses how to use theWAAS signal when connecting with a

WAAS receiver for example GP-320B

Note WAAS is currently in thedevelopmental phase During thedevelopmental phase the reliability andavailability of the WAAS signal cannotbe guaranteed Therefore any positiondata should be verified against othersources to confirm reliability

1 Display the Installation menu2 Choose GPS WAAS and then press

to open the GPS WAAS options

window

Off

WAAS options window3 Press or to choose ldquoWAAS-02rdquo

(test signal) When the systembecomes operational (in 2003) setto ldquo00rdquo (regular WAAS signal)

4 Turn off the power

BOTTOM LEVEL If the depthindication is unstable in automaticoperation or the bottom echo cannot bedisplayed in the darkest gray tone byadjusting the gain controls in manualoperation you may adjust the bottomecho level detection circuit for both 50kHz and 200 kHz to stabilize theindication Generally lower the bottomlevel for inner hull installation where thereceive level is too low If the bottomlevel is too low it may be difficult todiscriminate fish from the bottomresulting in unstable depth indication

And if the bottom level is too high thedepth indication may not appear

1 At the installation menu press tochoose SET BOTTOM LEVEL andthen press Several seconds laterthe following display appears

Bottom level +0 (200k -100 - +100 ) +0 ( 50k -100 - +100 )

Bottom level display

2 While observing the picture use or to set 200 kHz or to set50 kHz Set up for optimum picture

3 To restore normal operation turn offthe power and then it on again

Note The mode must be other thanldquoNAV DATArdquo to show the bottom leveldisplay

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4448

SP - 1 E2371S01C

SPECIFICATIONS OF ECHO SOUNDER LS-4100

1 GENERAL11 TX Frequency 50 kHz or 200 kHz 50200 kHz dual transmitting selectable12 Transmit Method Single or dual transmitting

13 Output Power 300 Wrms14 TX Rate Max 500 pulsemin15 Pulse-length 01 to 08 ms

2 DISPLAY UNIT21 Display system 5-inch monochrome LCD 76 mm (W) x 100 mm (H) 240 x 320 dots22 Display Mode Single frequency (highlow freq) Dual-frequency Zoom Nav data-12

Marker zoom Bottom zoom Bottom-lock23 Display Range

Range SettingRange

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

Display

rangeMeter 5 10 20 40 80 150 200 300 2-500

Feet 15 30 60 120 200 400 600 1000 7-1500

Fathoms 3 5 10 20 40 80 100 150 1-250

PassiBraza 3 5 10 30 50 100 150 200 1-300

24 Range Shift 0-500 m 0-1500 ft 0-250 fa 0-300 pb25 Expansion Range Bottom-lock expansion 3 to 10 m

Sectional expansion 2 to 50 m26 Display Advance Speed 8 steps (LinesTX Freeze 1161814121121 41)

3 INTERFACE31 Input data sentences IEC61162-1NMEA0183 Ver 152030

GGA RMA RMB RMC BWC GLL HDT HDG VTG VHW MTWMWV MDA XTE

32 Output data sentences IEC61162-1NMEA0183 Ver 152030 interval 2 sMTW VHW DBT DPT RMB TLL by key operating External data required

4 POWER SUPPLY41 Display Unit 12 VDC 05 A

5 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITION51 Ambient Temperature Display unit -15degC to +55degC52 Relative Humidity 93 or less at 40degC53 Waterproof IPX5

6 COATING COLOR61 Display Unit N30

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4548

M a r

4

0 3

D-1

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4648

Mar 4 03

Mar 4 03

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4748

M a r

3

0 3

S-1

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4848

FURUNO Authorized DistributorDealer FURUNO Authorized DistributorDealer

9-52 Ashihara-cho9-52 Ashihara-choNishinomiya 662-8580 JAPANNishinomiya 662-8580 JAPAN

Telephone Telephone 0798-65-21110798-65-2111FaxFax 0798-65-42000798-65-4200

FIRST EDITION FIRST EDITION MARMAR 20032003Printed in JapanPrinted in Japan All rights reserved All rights reserved

B1B1 SEPSEP 09 200509 2005

Pub NoPub No OME-23710OME-23710 00014698000000146980000001469800000014698000(( DAMIDAMI )) LS-4100LS-4100

0 0 0 1 4 6 9 8 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 4 6 9 8 0 0 0

Page 43: OME23710B_1_LS4100

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4348

37

WAASrdquo (in the Installation menu) andthen select ldquoInInrdquo as the NMEA portsetting

1 Turn on the power while pressingand holding down the [MENUESC]key Continue pressing the[MENUESC] key until theInstallation menu appears

2 Choose NMEA PORT and thenpress to display the NMEA portoptions window

3 Use or to choose InOut orInIn as appropriate

InOut Input and Output (default

setting)InIn Input only (Available withconnection of the GP-310B320Band a wind sensor)

4 Press choose NMEA MIX andthen press to display the NMEAMIX options window

5 Use or to choose Off or OnChoose On to output input data

Off Outputs the data sentences ofLS-4100 only

On Outputs the data sentences ofLS-4100 and sentences which areinput from other equipment

6 To restore normal operation turn offthe power and then turn it on again

GPS WAAS Chooses how to use theWAAS signal when connecting with a

WAAS receiver for example GP-320B

Note WAAS is currently in thedevelopmental phase During thedevelopmental phase the reliability andavailability of the WAAS signal cannotbe guaranteed Therefore any positiondata should be verified against othersources to confirm reliability

1 Display the Installation menu2 Choose GPS WAAS and then press

to open the GPS WAAS options

window

Off

WAAS options window3 Press or to choose ldquoWAAS-02rdquo

(test signal) When the systembecomes operational (in 2003) setto ldquo00rdquo (regular WAAS signal)

4 Turn off the power

BOTTOM LEVEL If the depthindication is unstable in automaticoperation or the bottom echo cannot bedisplayed in the darkest gray tone byadjusting the gain controls in manualoperation you may adjust the bottomecho level detection circuit for both 50kHz and 200 kHz to stabilize theindication Generally lower the bottomlevel for inner hull installation where thereceive level is too low If the bottomlevel is too low it may be difficult todiscriminate fish from the bottomresulting in unstable depth indication

And if the bottom level is too high thedepth indication may not appear

1 At the installation menu press tochoose SET BOTTOM LEVEL andthen press Several seconds laterthe following display appears

Bottom level +0 (200k -100 - +100 ) +0 ( 50k -100 - +100 )

Bottom level display

2 While observing the picture use or to set 200 kHz or to set50 kHz Set up for optimum picture

3 To restore normal operation turn offthe power and then it on again

Note The mode must be other thanldquoNAV DATArdquo to show the bottom leveldisplay

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4448

SP - 1 E2371S01C

SPECIFICATIONS OF ECHO SOUNDER LS-4100

1 GENERAL11 TX Frequency 50 kHz or 200 kHz 50200 kHz dual transmitting selectable12 Transmit Method Single or dual transmitting

13 Output Power 300 Wrms14 TX Rate Max 500 pulsemin15 Pulse-length 01 to 08 ms

2 DISPLAY UNIT21 Display system 5-inch monochrome LCD 76 mm (W) x 100 mm (H) 240 x 320 dots22 Display Mode Single frequency (highlow freq) Dual-frequency Zoom Nav data-12

Marker zoom Bottom zoom Bottom-lock23 Display Range

Range SettingRange

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

Display

rangeMeter 5 10 20 40 80 150 200 300 2-500

Feet 15 30 60 120 200 400 600 1000 7-1500

Fathoms 3 5 10 20 40 80 100 150 1-250

PassiBraza 3 5 10 30 50 100 150 200 1-300

24 Range Shift 0-500 m 0-1500 ft 0-250 fa 0-300 pb25 Expansion Range Bottom-lock expansion 3 to 10 m

Sectional expansion 2 to 50 m26 Display Advance Speed 8 steps (LinesTX Freeze 1161814121121 41)

3 INTERFACE31 Input data sentences IEC61162-1NMEA0183 Ver 152030

GGA RMA RMB RMC BWC GLL HDT HDG VTG VHW MTWMWV MDA XTE

32 Output data sentences IEC61162-1NMEA0183 Ver 152030 interval 2 sMTW VHW DBT DPT RMB TLL by key operating External data required

4 POWER SUPPLY41 Display Unit 12 VDC 05 A

5 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITION51 Ambient Temperature Display unit -15degC to +55degC52 Relative Humidity 93 or less at 40degC53 Waterproof IPX5

6 COATING COLOR61 Display Unit N30

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4548

M a r

4

0 3

D-1

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4648

Mar 4 03

Mar 4 03

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4748

M a r

3

0 3

S-1

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4848

FURUNO Authorized DistributorDealer FURUNO Authorized DistributorDealer

9-52 Ashihara-cho9-52 Ashihara-choNishinomiya 662-8580 JAPANNishinomiya 662-8580 JAPAN

Telephone Telephone 0798-65-21110798-65-2111FaxFax 0798-65-42000798-65-4200

FIRST EDITION FIRST EDITION MARMAR 20032003Printed in JapanPrinted in Japan All rights reserved All rights reserved

B1B1 SEPSEP 09 200509 2005

Pub NoPub No OME-23710OME-23710 00014698000000146980000001469800000014698000(( DAMIDAMI )) LS-4100LS-4100

0 0 0 1 4 6 9 8 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 4 6 9 8 0 0 0

Page 44: OME23710B_1_LS4100

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4448

SP - 1 E2371S01C

SPECIFICATIONS OF ECHO SOUNDER LS-4100

1 GENERAL11 TX Frequency 50 kHz or 200 kHz 50200 kHz dual transmitting selectable12 Transmit Method Single or dual transmitting

13 Output Power 300 Wrms14 TX Rate Max 500 pulsemin15 Pulse-length 01 to 08 ms

2 DISPLAY UNIT21 Display system 5-inch monochrome LCD 76 mm (W) x 100 mm (H) 240 x 320 dots22 Display Mode Single frequency (highlow freq) Dual-frequency Zoom Nav data-12

Marker zoom Bottom zoom Bottom-lock23 Display Range

Range SettingRange

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

Display

rangeMeter 5 10 20 40 80 150 200 300 2-500

Feet 15 30 60 120 200 400 600 1000 7-1500

Fathoms 3 5 10 20 40 80 100 150 1-250

PassiBraza 3 5 10 30 50 100 150 200 1-300

24 Range Shift 0-500 m 0-1500 ft 0-250 fa 0-300 pb25 Expansion Range Bottom-lock expansion 3 to 10 m

Sectional expansion 2 to 50 m26 Display Advance Speed 8 steps (LinesTX Freeze 1161814121121 41)

3 INTERFACE31 Input data sentences IEC61162-1NMEA0183 Ver 152030

GGA RMA RMB RMC BWC GLL HDT HDG VTG VHW MTWMWV MDA XTE

32 Output data sentences IEC61162-1NMEA0183 Ver 152030 interval 2 sMTW VHW DBT DPT RMB TLL by key operating External data required

4 POWER SUPPLY41 Display Unit 12 VDC 05 A

5 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITION51 Ambient Temperature Display unit -15degC to +55degC52 Relative Humidity 93 or less at 40degC53 Waterproof IPX5

6 COATING COLOR61 Display Unit N30

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4548

M a r

4

0 3

D-1

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4648

Mar 4 03

Mar 4 03

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4748

M a r

3

0 3

S-1

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4848

FURUNO Authorized DistributorDealer FURUNO Authorized DistributorDealer

9-52 Ashihara-cho9-52 Ashihara-choNishinomiya 662-8580 JAPANNishinomiya 662-8580 JAPAN

Telephone Telephone 0798-65-21110798-65-2111FaxFax 0798-65-42000798-65-4200

FIRST EDITION FIRST EDITION MARMAR 20032003Printed in JapanPrinted in Japan All rights reserved All rights reserved

B1B1 SEPSEP 09 200509 2005

Pub NoPub No OME-23710OME-23710 00014698000000146980000001469800000014698000(( DAMIDAMI )) LS-4100LS-4100

0 0 0 1 4 6 9 8 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 4 6 9 8 0 0 0

Page 45: OME23710B_1_LS4100

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4548

M a r

4

0 3

D-1

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4648

Mar 4 03

Mar 4 03

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4748

M a r

3

0 3

S-1

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4848

FURUNO Authorized DistributorDealer FURUNO Authorized DistributorDealer

9-52 Ashihara-cho9-52 Ashihara-choNishinomiya 662-8580 JAPANNishinomiya 662-8580 JAPAN

Telephone Telephone 0798-65-21110798-65-2111FaxFax 0798-65-42000798-65-4200

FIRST EDITION FIRST EDITION MARMAR 20032003Printed in JapanPrinted in Japan All rights reserved All rights reserved

B1B1 SEPSEP 09 200509 2005

Pub NoPub No OME-23710OME-23710 00014698000000146980000001469800000014698000(( DAMIDAMI )) LS-4100LS-4100

0 0 0 1 4 6 9 8 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 4 6 9 8 0 0 0

Page 46: OME23710B_1_LS4100

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4648

Mar 4 03

Mar 4 03

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4748

M a r

3

0 3

S-1

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4848

FURUNO Authorized DistributorDealer FURUNO Authorized DistributorDealer

9-52 Ashihara-cho9-52 Ashihara-choNishinomiya 662-8580 JAPANNishinomiya 662-8580 JAPAN

Telephone Telephone 0798-65-21110798-65-2111FaxFax 0798-65-42000798-65-4200

FIRST EDITION FIRST EDITION MARMAR 20032003Printed in JapanPrinted in Japan All rights reserved All rights reserved

B1B1 SEPSEP 09 200509 2005

Pub NoPub No OME-23710OME-23710 00014698000000146980000001469800000014698000(( DAMIDAMI )) LS-4100LS-4100

0 0 0 1 4 6 9 8 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 4 6 9 8 0 0 0

Page 47: OME23710B_1_LS4100

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4748

M a r

3

0 3

S-1

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4848

FURUNO Authorized DistributorDealer FURUNO Authorized DistributorDealer

9-52 Ashihara-cho9-52 Ashihara-choNishinomiya 662-8580 JAPANNishinomiya 662-8580 JAPAN

Telephone Telephone 0798-65-21110798-65-2111FaxFax 0798-65-42000798-65-4200

FIRST EDITION FIRST EDITION MARMAR 20032003Printed in JapanPrinted in Japan All rights reserved All rights reserved

B1B1 SEPSEP 09 200509 2005

Pub NoPub No OME-23710OME-23710 00014698000000146980000001469800000014698000(( DAMIDAMI )) LS-4100LS-4100

0 0 0 1 4 6 9 8 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 4 6 9 8 0 0 0

Page 48: OME23710B_1_LS4100

892019 OME23710B_1_LS4100

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullome23710b1ls4100 4848

FURUNO Authorized DistributorDealer FURUNO Authorized DistributorDealer

9-52 Ashihara-cho9-52 Ashihara-choNishinomiya 662-8580 JAPANNishinomiya 662-8580 JAPAN

Telephone Telephone 0798-65-21110798-65-2111FaxFax 0798-65-42000798-65-4200

FIRST EDITION FIRST EDITION MARMAR 20032003Printed in JapanPrinted in Japan All rights reserved All rights reserved

B1B1 SEPSEP 09 200509 2005

Pub NoPub No OME-23710OME-23710 00014698000000146980000001469800000014698000(( DAMIDAMI )) LS-4100LS-4100

0 0 0 1 4 6 9 8 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 4 6 9 8 0 0 0